IW OT 3 
NEWFOUNDLAND 


AND . 


THE LABRADOR COAST 


PILER DBD TEDPEON 


L909 


LY PROGRAPHIC: OFEICE *: 


Mahar rss 


UMC a i 


¢ hEhOoOggo TOE 


HOA 0 000 


1OHM/TEIN 


NO. ve ra ee > i 


NEWFOUNDLAND — 


AND 


THE LABRADOR COAST 


THIRD EDITION 


1909 


PUBLISHED BY THE HYDROGRAPHIC OFFICE. 
UNDER THE AUTHORITY OF THE SECRETARY OF THE NAVY 


WASHINGTON 
GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 


1909 


Pat 


Pee 


1d 


F 


= OCR AC) 
« 
see Be ante 
get he eee 
peas Oat . 
one. é oe vee 


ES 


, y “ vt ; 1 1) ae 
sa i“ ma j Pe. , 
ev ey yas Sane] s ayy ' 


j 
Hi 
rf 


hi a ( Ly het ee i fi 4 


CONTENTS. 


ae eS SEE SRE ec he a eR REE 
Information relating to navigational aids and general navigation...........-. 
en See Re Soh ain acy See eae ee ee Aen ae 


MRM I Sct Ps da Se ae ae Ns. wt PES Faces. - 
Chart of variation of the compass for the year 1910 ..........-...222- Faces. . 
Momaeeererorraphic Office publications... -..=.2.-2.....22--.5.-.es2s2225- 
Mmeemiyarozraphic Office agents......<.....5-----.2+-.-2---052-6-5e00se- 


CHAPTER I. 

General description—Physical features—Geology—Mines—A griculture—Fish- 
eries—Exports—Communications—Climate— W inds—Fog—Currents—Tides 
—Tidal streams—Temperature of the sea—Ice—Signals respecting ice— 
Buoys—Signal stations —Coal— Docks — Repairs — Shipwrecks— Standard 
time—Passages and general directions—Magnetic variation—Deviation of 
the compass—Local magnetic disturbances ..............-..--.---2---4--- 

CHAPTER II. 


Banks eastward and southward of Newfoundland, and eastward of the strait 
ER te eset vont at I a AS nna 6G ea 


CHAPTER III. 
Newfoundland, south coast—Cape Race to Crew point ..............-------- 
CHAPTER IV. 
Newfoundland, south coast—St. Pierre and Miquelon islands..........-.---- 
CHAPTER V. 
Newfoundiand, south coast—Crew Point to cape Ray -.-.......--.---------- 
CHAPTER VI. 
Newfoundland, west coast—Cape Ray to cape Bauld..............-.-------- 
CHAPTER VII. 
Newfoundland, east coast—Cape Bauld to cape St. John ........2..2-22----- 
CHAPTER VIII. 
Newfoundland, east coast—Cape St. John to cape Bonavista ..........-.---- 
CHAPTER IX. 
N ewfoundland, east coast—Cape Bonavista to cape Race ..-.........-.------ 
CHAPTER X. 


Southeast and south coasts of Labrador—Cape St. Lewis to Long point—The 
SET OF Sey TS FRB AIRE DR N68 5 ice ELS” Na ge Re tee 


CHAPTER XI. 
Fast coast of Labrador—Cape St. Lewis to cape Chidley ................---- 


27 
76 
84 
171 
184 
267 
367 
423 


561 


620 


657 


NOTE. 


This publication is a revision and extension of the second edition of 
the Sailing Directions of Newfoundland, and includes the latest avail- 
able information from reliable sources. It cancels the previous edi- 
tions, all supplements, and all Hydrographic Office notices to mariners 
which relate to Newfoundland and the Labrador coast up to and 
including number 18 of 1909. 

Mariners are requested to notify the United States Hydrographic 
Office, directly or through one of its branch offices, of any new infor- 
mation obtained or of any errors or omissions discovered in the 
present edition. 

The directions stated in this book are all reckoned from the true 
meridian. Definite directions, such as courses and bearings, are given 
to the nearest degree, from 0° to 360°, commencing at the North 
poirt, in accordance with the new system recently adopted by the 
United States Navy. The cardinal and intercardinal points of the 
compass, when employed, are used only as names to express general 
directions, such as the general trend of the land and the directions 
of winds and currents. Values of the variation of the compass may 
be obtained from the chart of the variation of the compass at the 
beginning of this book. 

The directions of the winds refer to the points from which they 
blow; of the currents, the points toward which they set. 

Distances are expressed in nautical miles, the mile being approxi- 
mately 2,000 yards. 

The soundings are referred to mean low water, unless otherwise 
stated. 

The latest information as to lights should always be sought in the 
List of Lights of the World. 

5 


| Ae ie ; 


i 
ofp 


Yr 
¢. 


— 
1 TH ‘ : i 


1 rm lei ie entcarr h Mae ARTRAE t o 


rh / 


60° 59° 58° 57° 56° 55° 54° ; ° ok TOE EOS 
[Lemons rane T ipaae pi ae Seale T : aa 
© 0, elle Isle 
Sn he 
oF | 
% | 


SEnqmqC. Chidley 
[Leaulwers 1221 

; 2 
oe nee z 
= gs€ 2. 

zoliP 


, 
B60 Ariegt Boy gd ol 
562 


Cove 1860 


St. Margaret BY 
8064S Erato eco 


St. Je Te 
. 2108 Good B.t.st. John Hor) 
1182 SavageT & Old Port au Choi: 


Fe t Vie § Aiguilletter Bhrs19= é 
ne awh Pe, Ving ae [94 2425\Snookedrm.Anch. 
Libr = 4 re Hin 
i Salewater Pond B, 
Nor 


oS 
Fleur de Lis Hbr:24\\ 


See chart Wo. 217 


Z2, A 
¥- 


Ofeite 
2152 Holtthans 


Seldom come by& 
~ ‘Stag HBr Tickle | s79 


kp S7a. 

of Islands Se 
59 7aLitile ie > 

2094 Bear Cove, | 


tipgs Cove 597 


20s, 
‘Reg za 


ee, 


= NEWF OUNDLAND 


C T 
20% Sh ap St.George Hbr- 59% 


or 


ze 


Ch dea tis 
MK 
Vv. i 
v8 


iz (Fab 75 
nlickle \\2 | ; 4 us Ir oan 
Goulter Rock \12 é ‘\ ii 
drepassey Hbr 618 
C.Race 


The limits and numbers of U.8.Hydrographic Office charts are shown in black 
” " ” " ” British A amiralty ” ” u " red 


VARIATION 


OF THE COMPASS 
FOR 
1910 
AVERAGE ANNUAL DECREASE: 
4’ in Newfoundland , and 
5’ along the Labrador Coast 


S apa 
NEWFOUNDLAND C. Bonavista 


td tp WIGS 
= Oe is LP St.Johiis 


—— 
TRS > a _ 
St.Pierre 


SS 
— 


V'C.Race Sa 


i nes 
Virgin Rks 
| feet ota eres erie! Pa 
5 


INFORMATION RELATING TO NAVIGATIONAL AIDS 
AND GENERAL NAVIGATION. 


THE CORRECTION OF CHARTS, LIGHT LISTS, AND SAILING 
DIRECTIONS. 


The following-named publications are issued by the United States 
Hydrographic Office as guides to navigation: Charts, Chart Cata- 
logues, Sailing Directions, Light Lists, Tide Tables, Notices to Mari- 
ners, Pilot Charts, and Hydrographic Bulletins. Of these, the 
Notices to Mariners and the Hydrographic Bulletins are free to 
mariners and others interested in shipping. The Pilot Charts are 
free to contributors of professional information, but sold to the 
general public at 10 cents a copy. The other publications of the 
office are sold under the law at cost price. 

The Charts, the Sailing Directions, and the Light Lists are all 
affected by continual changes and alterations, concerning which 
information is published weekly to all parts of the world in the 
Notices to Mariners. 

The Charts should always be, so far as our knowledge permits, 
absolutely correct to date; and the Light Lists should be noted for 
the recent alterations and additions. The Sailing Directions, how- 
ever, can not, from their nature, be so fully corrected, and in all cases 
where they differ from the charts, the charts must be taken as the 
guide. 

Charts.—When issued from the Hydrographic Office, the charts 
have received all necessary corrections to date. 

All small but important corrections that can be made by hand are 
given in the Notices to Mariners, and should at once be placed on the 
charts to which they refer. 

Extensive corrections that can not be conveniently thus made are 
put upon the plates, and new copies are issued to the ships to replace 
the old, which are directed to be destroyed to prevent the possibility 
of their being used in the navigation of the ship. 

The dates on which extensive corrections are made are noted on the 
chart on the right of the middle of the lower edge; those of the 
smaller corrections at the left lower corner. 


8 GENERAL NAVIGATION. 


In all cases of quotations of charts these dates of corrections should 
be given, as well as the number of the chart (found in the right 
lower corner), in order that the edition of the chart referred to may 
be known. 

The Light Lists are corrected before issue, and all changes are 
published in the weekly Notices to Mariners. 

The navigating officer should make notations in the Light Lists 
and paste in at the appropriate places slips from the Notices to 
Mariners. 

The Light Lists should always be consulted as to the details of a 
light, as the description in the Sailing Directions may be obsolete, in 
consequence of changes since publication. 

The Sailing Directions are corrected before issue, and subse- 
quently should be kept corrected by means of the Notices to Mariners. 

Supplements are published from time to time and contain all the 
information received up to date since the publication of the volume 
to which they refer, canceling all previous Notices to Mariners. 

The existence of Supplements or Notices to Mariners is to be noted 
in the tabular form inside the cover of each volume. 

To enable the books to be more conveniently corrected, Supple- 
ments and Notices to Mariners are printed on one side only, and two 
copies are issued to each ship—one to be cut and the slips pasted 
in at the appropriate places, the other to be retained intact for 
reference. 

To make the notations and paste in the slips, as the Notices to 
Mariners are received, is one of the duties of the navigating officer 
demanding faithful attention. 

It must, however, be understood that Sailing Directions will rarely 
be correct in all details, and that, as already stated, when differences 
exist, the chart, which should be corrected from the most recent in- 
formation, should be taken as the guide, for which purpose, for 
ordinary navigation, it is sufficient. 

The Tide Tables, which are published annually by the United 
States Coast and Geodetic Survey, give the predicted times and 
heights of the high and the low waters for every day in the year at 
70 of the principal ports of the world, and, through the medium of 
these by means of tidal differences and ratios, at a very large number 
of subordinate ports. The Tables for the Atlantic and Pacific coast 
ports of the United States are also published separately. 

It should be remembered that these tables aim to give the times of 
high and low water, and not the times of turning of the current or of 
slack water, which may be quite different. 

Notice to Mariners, containing fresh information pertaining to 
all parts of the world, are published weekly and mailed to all United 
States ships in commission, Hydrographic branch offices and agen- 


GENERAL NAVIGATION. 9 


cies, United States consulates, and foreign hydrographic offices. 
Copies are furnished free a the main office or by any of the branch 
offices on application. 

With each notice is sent also a separate sheet, giving the items re- 
lating to lights contained in the latest Notice, intended especially for 
use in correcting the Light Lists. 

Pilot Charts of the North Atlantic and North Pacific oceans are 
published near the beginning of each month. These charts give the 
average conditions of wind and weather, barometer, percentage of 
fog and gales, and routes for steam and sailing vessels for the 
month of issue; ice and derelicts of the preceding month; ocean 
currents and magnetic variation for the year; storm tracks of pre- 
ceding years; and much other useful information. They are fur- 
nished free only in exchange for marine data or observations.* 

Hydrographic Bulletins, published weekly, are supplemental 
to the North Atlantic Pilot Chart and contain the latest news of 
wrecks and derelicts along the American coast and ocean routes, 
Arctic ice, reports of the use of oil to calm the sea, and other infor- 
mation for mariners. They are to be had free upon application. 


THE USE OF CHARTS. 


_ Accuracy of chart.—The value of a chart must manifestly de- 
pend upon the character and accuracy of the survey on which it is 


based, and the larger the scale of the chart the more important do 
these become. 

To judge of a survey, its source and date, which are generally 
given in the title, are a good guide. Besides the changes that may 
have taken place since the date of the survey in waters where sand or 
mud prevails, the earlier surveys were mostly made under circum- 
stances that precluded great accuracy of detail; until a plan founded 
on such a survey is tested it should be regarded with caution. It may 
indeed be said that, except in well-frequented harbors and their ap- 
proaches, no surveys yet made have been so minute in their exam- 
ination of the bottom as to make it certain that all dangers have been 
found. The fullness or scantiness of the soundings is another method 
of estimating the completeness of the survey, remembering, however, 
that the chart is not expected to show all soundings that were 


* Pilot charts of the South Atlantic Ocean are to be published for each of 
the four seasons of the year, beginning with the quarter which comprises the 
months of June, July, and August, 1909. In their properties and aims and their 
mode of construction and issue they will be similar in all respects to the 
Pilot Charts of the North Atlantic and North Pacific oceans. Pilot Charts 
of the South Pacific and Indian oceans are also marked out for regular pub- 
lication. 


10 GENERAL NAVIGATION. 


obtained. When the soundings are sparse or unevenly distributed 
it may be taken for granted that the survey was not in great detail. 

Large or irregular blank spaces among soundings mean that no 
soundings were obtained in these spots. When the surrounding 
soundings are deep it may fairly be assumed that in the blanks the 
water is also deep; but when they are shallow, or it can be seen from 
the rest of the chart that reefs or banks are present, such blanks 
should be regarded with suspicion. This is especially the case in 
coral regions and off rocky coasts, and it should be remembered that 
in waters where rocks abound it is always possible that a survey, 
however complete and detailed, may have failed to find every small 
patch or pinnacle rock. 

A wide berth should therefore be given to every rocky shore or 
patch, and instead of considering a coast to be clear, the contrary 
should be assumed. 

Fathom curves a caution.—Except in plans of harbors that 
have been surveyed in detail, the 5-fathom curve on most charts may 
be considered as a danger line, or caution against unnecessarily 
approaching the shore or bank within that line on account of the 
possible existence of undiscovered inequalities of the bottom, which 
only an elaborate detailed survey could reveal. In general surveys 
of coasts, or of little-frequented anchorages, the necessities of navi- 
gation do not demand the great expenditure of time required for so 
detailed a survey. It is not contemplated that ships will approach 
the shores in such localities without taking special precautions. 

The 10-fathom curves on rock shores is another warning, espe- 
cially for ships of heavy draft. 

A useful danger line will be obtained by tracing out with a colored 
pencil or ink the line of depth next greater than the draft of the ship 
using the chart. For vessels drawing less than 18 feet the edge of 
the sanding serves as a well-marked danger line. 

Charts on which no fathom curves are marked must especially be 
regarded with caution, as indicating that soundings were too scanty 
and the bottom too uneven to enable the lines to be drawn with 
accuracy. 

Isolated soundings, shoaler than surrounding depths, should 
always be avoided, especially if ringed around, as it is doubtful 
how closely the spot may have been examined and whether the 
least depth has been found. 

The chart on largest scale should always be used on account of 
its greater detail and the greater accuracy with which positions may 
be plotted on it. 

Caution in using small-scale charts.—In approaching the 
land or dangerous banks regard must always be had to the scale of 
the chart used. A small error in laying down a position means only 


GENERAL NAVIGATION. 11 


yards on a large-scale chart, whereas on one of small scale the same 
amount of displacement means a large fraction of a mile. 

Distortion of printed charts.—The paper on which charts are 
printed has to be damped. On drying distortion takes place from the 
inequalities of the paper, which greatly varies with different paper 
and the amount of the original damping, but it does not affect navi- 
gation. It must not, however, be expected that accurate series of 
angles taken to different points will always exactly agree when care- 
fully plotted on the chart, especially if the lines to objects be long. 
The larger the chart the greater the amount of this distortion. 

Mercator’s chart.—Observed bearings are not identical with 
those measured on the Mercator chart (excepting only the bearings 
North and South, and East and West on the equator) because the line 
of sight, except as affected by refraction, is a straight line, and hes 
in the plane of the great circle, while the straight line on the chart 
(except the meridian line) represents, not the arc of a great circle, 
but the loxodromic curve, which on the globe is a spiral terminating 
at the pole, or, if the direction be East and West, a circle of latitude. 

The difference is not appreciable with near objects, and in ordinary 
navigation may be neglected. But in high latitudes, when the 
objects are very distant, and especially when lying near east or west, 
the bearings must be corrected for the convergence of the meridians 
in order to be accurately placed on the Mercator chart, which repre- 
sents the meridians as parallel. 

On the polyconic chart, since a straight line represents ( within the 
limits of 15 or 20 degrees of longitude) the are of a great circle or 
the shortest distance between two points, bearings on the chart are 
identical with observed bearings. 

The Mercator projection is evidently unsuited to surveying, for 
which purpose the polyconic projection is used by the Hydrographic 
Office and the Coast and Geodetic Survey, and the gnomonic projec- 
tion by the British service. 

Notes on charts should always be read with care, as they may 
give important information that can not be graphically represented. 

Buoys.—It is manifestly impossible to rely on buoys always 
maintaining their exact positions. Buoys should therefore be re- 
garded as warnings, and not as infallible navigating marks, especially 
when in exposed places; and a ship’s position should always, when 
possible, be checked by bearings or angles of fixed objects on shore. 

Gas buoys.—The lights shown by gas buoys can not be implicitly 
relied on; the light may be altogether extinguished, or, if intermit- 
tent, the apparatus may get out of order. 

Lights.—All the distances given in the light lists and on the 
charts for the visibility of lights are calculated for a height of 15 


1g GENERAL NAVIGATION. 


feet for the observer’s eye. The effect of a greater or less height of 
eye can be ascertained by means of the table of distances of visibility 
due to the height, published in the light lists. 

The glare of a powerful light is often seen far beyond the limit of 
visibility of the actual rays of the hght, but this must not be con- 
founded with the true range. Refraction, too, may often cause a 
hght to be seen farther than under ordinary circumstances. 

When looking out for a light, the fact may be forgotten that aloft 
the range of vision is much increased. By noting a star immediately 
over the light a very correct bearing may be afterwards obtained 
from the standard compass. . 

On first making a light from the bridge, by at once lowering the 
eye several feet and noting whether the hght is made to dip, it may 
be determined whether the ship is on the circle of visibility corre- 
sponding with the usual height of the eye or unexpectedly nearer 
the light. 

The intrinsic power of a light should always be considered when 
expecting to make it in thick weather. A weak lght is easily 
obscured by haze and no dependence can be placed on its being seen. 

The power of a light can be estimated by its order, as stated in the 
light lists, and in some cases by noting how much its visibility in 
clear weather falls short of the range corresponding to its height. 
Thus, a hght standing 200 feet above the sea and recorded as visible 
only 10 miles in clear weather is manifestly of little brillianey, as its 
height would permit it to be seen over 20 miles if of sufficient power. 

Fog signals.—Sound is conveyed in a very capricious way 
through the atmosphere. Apart from the influence of the wind 
large areas of silence have been found in different directions and 
at different distances from the origin of sound even in clear weather; 
therefore too much confidence should not be felt as to hearing a fog 
signal. The apparatus, moreover, for sounding the signal often 
requires some time before it is in readiness to act. A fog often creeps 
imperceptibly toward the land and is not observed by the hghthouse 
people until upon them; a ship may have been for many hours in it 
and approaching the land in confidence, depending on the signal, 
which is not sounded. When sound travels against the wind it may be 
thrown upward. A man aloft might then hear it, though inaudible 
on deck. 

Taken together, these facts should induce the utmost caution in 
closing the land in fogs. The lead is generally the only safe guide 
and should be faithfully used. 

Tides.—A knowledge of the times of high and low water and of 
the amount of vertical rise and fall of the tide is of great importance 
in the case of vessels entering or leaving port, especially when the 
channel depths are less than or near their draft. Such knowledge is 


GENERAL NAVIGATION. ie 


also useful at times to vessels running close along a coast in enabling 
them to anticipate the effect of the tidal currents in setting them on 
or off shore. This is especially important in fog or thick weather. 

The predicted times and heights of the high and low waters, or 
differences by which they may be readily obtained, are given in the 
tide tables for all the important ports of the world. The height at 
any intermediate time may be obtained by means of 'Table 2 for most 
of the principal tidal stations of the United States given in Table 1, 
and for the subordinate stations of Table 3 by multiplying its values 
by the ratio of mean ranges, provided the duration of rise and fall is 
sensibly the same at the subordinate as at the principal station. The 
intermediate height may also be obtained by plotting the predicted 
times and heights of high and low water and connecting the points 
by a curve. Such knowledge is often useful in crossing a bar or 
shallow flats. 

Planes of reference.*—The plane of reference for soundings on 
Hydrographic Office charts made from United States Government 
surveys and on Coast and Geodetic Survey charts of the Atlantic 
coast of the United States is mean low water; on the Pacific coast 
of the United States as far as the strait of Fuca, it is the mean of 
the lower low waters; and from Puget sound to Alaska the Survey 
has adopted the harmonic or Indian tide plane, which is roughly 
that of the lowest low waters observed. 

On most of the British Admiralty charts the plane of reference is 
the low*water of ordinary springs; on French charts, the low water 
of equinoctial springs. 

In the case of many charts compiled from old or various sources 
the plane of reference may be in doubt. In such cases, or whenever 
not stated on the chart, the assumption that the reference plane is 
mean low water gives the largest margin of safety. 

Whichever plane of reference may be used for a chart, it must be 
remembered that there are times when the tide falls below it. Low 
water is lower than mean low water about half the time, and when a 
new or full moon occurs at perigee the low water is lower than the 
average low water of springs. At the equinoxes the spring range is 
also increased on the coasts of Europe, but in some other parts of the 
world, and especially in the Tropics, such periodic low tides may 
coincide more frequently with the solstices. 

Wind or a high barometer may at times cause the water to fall 
below even a very low plane of reference. 


* The distinction between “rise” and “range” of the tide should be under- 
stood. The former expression refers to the height attained above the datum 
plane for soundings, differing with the different planes of reference; the latter, 
to the difference of level between successive high and low waters. 


14 GENERAL NAVIGATION. 


On coasts where there is much diurnal inequality in the tides the 
amount of rise and fall can not be depended upon, and additional 
caution is necessary. 

Mean sea level.—The important fact should be remembered that 
the depths at half tide are practically the same for all tides, whether 
neaps or springs. Half tide, therefore, corresponds with mean sea 
level. This makes a very exact plane of reference, easily found, to 
which it would be well to refer all high and low waters. 

The tide tables give, in Table 3, for all the ports, the plane of 
reference to which tidal heights are referred and its distance below 
mean sea level. 

If called on to take special soundings for the chart at a place where 
there is no tidal bench mark, mean sea level should be found and the 
plane for reductions established at the proper distance below it, as 
ascertained by the tide tables, or by observations, or in some cases, 
if the time be short, by estimation, the data used being made a part 
of the record. 

Tidal streams.—In navigating coasts where the tidal range is 
considerable especial caution is necessary. It should be remembered ~ 
that there are indrafts to all bays and bights, although the general 
run of the stream may be parallel with the shore. 

The turn of the tidal stream offshore is seldom coincident with the 
time of high and low water on the shore. In some channels the tidal 
stream may overrun the turn of the vertical movement of the tide by 
8 hours, forming what is usually known as tide and half tide, the 
effect of which is that at high and low water by the shore the stream 
is running at its greatest velocity. 

The effect of the tidal wave in causing currents may be illustrated 
by two simple cases: 

(1) Where there is a small tidal basin connected with the sea by 
a large opening. 

(2) Where there is a large tidal basin connected with the sea by a 
small opening. 

In the first case the velocity of the current in the opening will have 
its maximum value when the height of the tide within is changing 
most rapidly, i. e., at a time about midway between high and low 
water. The water in the basin keeps at approximately the same level 
as the water outside. The flood stream corresponds with the rising, 
and the ebb with the falling of the tide. 

In the second case the velocity of the current in the opening will 
have its maximum value when it is high water or low water without, 
for then there is the greatest head of water for producing motion. 
The flood stream begins about three hours after low water, and the 
ebb stream about three hours after high water, slack water thus 
occurring about midway between the tides. 


GENERAL NAVIGATION. 1 


Along most shores not much affected by bays, tidal rivers, etc., the 
current usually turns soon after high water and low water. 

The swiftest current in straight portions of tidal rivers is usually 
in the middle of the stream, but in curved portions the most rapid 
current is toward the outer edge of the curve, and here the water will 
be deepest. The pilot rule for best water is to follow the ebb tide 
reaches. 

Countercurrents and eddies may occur near the shores of straits, 
especially in bights and near points. A knowledge of them is useful 
in order that they may be taken advantage of or avoided. 

A swift current often occurs in a narrow passage connecting two 
large bodies of water, owing to their considerable difference of level 
at the same instant. The several passages between Vineyard sound 
and Buzzards bay are cases in point. In the Woods Hole passage 
the maximum strength of the tidal streams occurs near high and low 
water. 

Tide rips are made by a rapid current setting over an irregular 
bottom, as at the edges of banks where the change of depth is con- 
siderable. 

Current arrows on charts show only the most usual or the mean 
direction of a tidal stream or current; it must not be assumed that 
the direction of a stream will not vary from that indicated by the 
arrow. The rate, also, of a stream constantly varies with circum- 
stances, and the rate given on the chart is merely the mean of those 
found during the survey, possibly from very few observations. 


FIXING POSITION. 


Sextant method.—The most accurate method available to the , 


navigator of fixing a position relative to the shore is by plotting 
with a protractor sextant angles between well-defined objects on the 
chart; this method, based on the “ three-point problem ” of geometry, 
should be in general use. 

For its successful employment it is necessary: First, that the ob- 
jects be well chosen; and, second, that the observer be skillful and 
rapid in his use of the sextant. The latter is only a matter of 
practice. 

Near objects should be used either for bearings or angles for 
position in preference to distant ones, although the latter may be 
more prominent, as a small error in the bearing or angle or in laying 
it on the chart has a greater effect in misplacing the position the 
longer the line to be drawn. 

On the other hand, distant objects should be used for direction 
because less affected by a small error or change of position. 


16 GENERAL NAVIGATION. 


The three-arm protractor (station pointer of the British serv- 
ice) consists of a graduated brass circle with one fixed and two 
movable radial arms, the three beveled edges of the arms, if pro- 
duced, intersecting at the exact center of the instrument. The edge 
of the fixed arm marks the zero of the graduation which enables the 
movable arms to be set at any angles with the fixed arm. 

To plot a position, the two angles observed between the three 
selected objects are set on the instrument, which is then moved over - 
the chart until the three beveled edges pass respectively and simul- 
taneously through the three objects. The center of the instrument 
will then mark the ship’s position, which may be pricked on the chart 
or marked with a pencil point through the center hole. 

The tracing-paper protractor, consisting of a graduated circle 
printed on tracing paper, is an excellent substitute for the brass 
instrument and in some cases preferable to it, as when, for instance, 
the objects angled on are so near the observer that they are more or 
less hidden by the circle of the instrument. The paper protractor 
also permits the laying down for simultaneous trial of a number of 
angles in cases of fixing important positions. Plain tracing paper 
may also be used if there are any suitable means of laying off the 
angles. 

The value of a determination depends greatly on the relative 
positions of the objects observed. If the position sought les on the 
circle passing through the three objects (in which case the sum of 
the observed angles equals the supplement of the angle at the middle 
object made by lines from the other two) it will be indeterminate, as 
it will plot all around the circle. An approach to this condition 
must be avoided. Near objects are better than distant ones, and, in 
general, up to 90° the larger the angles the better, remembering 
‘always that large as well as small angles may plot on or near the 
circle and hence be worthless. If the objects are well situated, even 
very small angles will give for navigating purposes a fair position, 
when that obtained by bearings of the same objects would be of little 
value. 

Accuracy requires that the two angles be simultaneous. If under 
way and there is but one observer, the angle that changes less rapidly 
may be observed both before and after the other angle and the proper 
value obtained by interpolation. 

A single angle and a range give in general an excellent fix, easily 
obtained and plotted. 

Advantages of sextant method.—In war time, when the com- 
pass may be knocked away or rifle fire make it undesirable to expose 
the person more than necessary, a sextant offers great advantages, as 
angles can be obtained at any point where the objects are visible. 
This contingency makes it especially desirable that all navigating 


GENERAL NAVIGATION. ue 


officers of men-of-war should become expert in this method of fixing 
a ship’s position. 

In many narrow waters, also, where the objects may yet be at 
some distance, as in coral harbors or narrow passages among mud 
banks, navigation by sextant and protractor is invaluable, as a true 
position can in general be obtained only by its means. Positions by 
bearings are too rough to depend upon, and a small error in either 
taking or plotting a bearing might under such circumstances put the 
ship ashore. 

In all cases where great accuracy of position is desired, such as ae 
fixing of a rock or shoal or of fresh soundings or new buildings as 
additions to the chart, the sextant should invariably be used. In all 
such cases angles should be taken to several objects, the more the 
better; but five objects is a good number, as the four angles thus 
obtained not only prevent any errors, but they at once furnish a 
means of checking the accuracy of the chart itself. If a round of 
angles can be taken, the observer’s accuracy is also checked. In the 
case of ordinary soundings a third angle need be taken only occasion- 
ally ; first, to check the general accuracy of the chart, as above stated ; 
second, to make certain that the more important soundings, as at the 
end of a line, are correctly placed. 

If communication can be had with the shore, positions may be 
fixed with great accuracy by occupying with theodolite or sextant 
two known points of the chart. The third angle of the triangle, that 
between the two points at the position sought, should be measured as 
a check. 

The compass.—It is not intended that the use of the compass to 
fix the ship should be given up; in ordinary piloting the compass. 
with its companion, the alidade, may be more usefully employed for 
this purpose, although less accurate than the sextant. 

If the accuracy of the chart be doubtful, the compass should be 
used in preference to the sextant. 

Tn fixing by the compass it should always be remembered that the 
position by two bearings only, like that by two angles only, is liable 
to error. An error may be made in taking a bearing, or in applying 
to it the deviation, or in laying it on the chart. A third or check 
bearing should, therefore, be taken of some other object, especially 
when near the shore or dangers. A common intersection for the 
three lines assures accuracy. 

Compass bearing and sextant angle.—When only two objects 
are visible, 2 compass bearing and a sextant angle may be used, and 
a better fix obtained than by two bearings. 

Doubling the angle on the bow.—The method of fixing by 
doubling the angle on the bow is invaluable. The ordinary form of 


18 GENERAL NAVIGATION. 


it, the so-called “ bow and beam bearing,” the distance from the object 
at the latter position being the distance run between the times of tak- 
ing the two bearings, gives the maximum of accuracy, and is an 
excellent fix for a departure, but does not insure safety, as the object 
observed and any dangers off it are abeam before the position is 
obtained. 

By taking the bearings at two points and four points on the bow, a 
fair position is obtained before the object is passed, the distance of 
the latter at the second position being, as before, equal to the distance 
run in the interval, allowing for current. Taking afterwards the 
beam bearing gives, with slight additional trouble, the distance of 
the object when abeam; such beam bearings and distances, with the 
times, should be continuously recorded as fresh departures, the im- 
portance of which will be appreciated in cases of being suddenly shut 
in by fog. 

A table of multipliers of the distance run in the interval between 
any two bearings of an object, the product being its distance at the 
time of the second bearing, is given in the light list and in Bowditch. 

Danger angle.—The utility of the danger angle in passing outly- 
ing rocks or dangers should not be forgotten. In employing the 
horizontal danger angle, however, caution is necessary, as, should 
the chart be inaccurate, i. e., should the objects selected be not quite 
correctly placed, the angle taken off from it may not serve the pur- 
pose. It should not, therefore, be employed when the survey is old 
or manifestly imperfect. 

The vertical danger angle may be conveniently used when passing 
elevated points of known heights, such as lghthouses, cliffs, ete. 
The computation of the distance corresponding to the height of the 
object and its angular elevation requires for small distances merely 
the solution of a plane right triangle; the natural cotangent of the 
angle multiplied by the height in feet gives the distance in feet. The 
convenient use of this method, however, requires tables such as those 
published by Captain Lecky in his little book entitled “ The Danger 

Angle and Offshore Distance Tables.” 
"This book very usefully extends the vertical angle method to find- 
ing a ship’s position at sea by observing the angular altitude of a 
peak of known height and its bearing. The tables give heights up to 
18,000 feet and distances up to 110 miles. When the angles are not 
too large they should be observed “ on and off the limb” and the 
index error of the sextant thus eliminated, in preference to correct- 
ing the single altitude for it. It must be remembered that in high 
latitudes the bearing of a distant object needs correction for the 
convergence of the meridians before being laid down on a mercator 
chart. The correction may be found by the following formula, 


GENERAL NAVIGATION. 19 


using the approximate position: The sine of the correction equals 
the product of the sine of half the difference of longitude by the sine 
of the middle latitude. It is applied on the equatorial side of the 
observed bearing, and its effect is always to increase the latitude of 
the observer. 

Soundings taken at random are of little value in fixing or check- 
ing position, and may at times be misleading. In thick weather, 
when near or closing the land, soundings should be taken continu- 
ously and at regular intervals, and, with the character of the bottom, 
systematically recorded. By laying the soundings on tracing paper, 
according to the scale of the chart, along a line representing the track 
of the ship, and then moving the paper over the chart parallel with 
the course until the observed soundings agree with those of the chart, 
the ship’s position will in general be quite well determined. This 
plan was suggested by Lord Kelvin, whose admirable sounding ma- 
chine renders the operation of sounding possible in quite deep water 
without slowing down the ship and consequent loss of time. 

Dumb compass.—AIl ships should be supplied with the means of 
taking accurate bearings both by day and by night. The standard 
compass is not always conveniently placed for the purpose; in such 
case some species of alidade or dumb compass is of great importance. 
The utility of such an instrument in ascertaining the change of bear- 
ing of an approaching ship’s light should not be forgotten. 

Sumner’s method.—Among astronomical methods of fixing a 
ship’s position the great utility of Sumner’s method should be well 
understood, and this method should be in constant use. The Sumner 
line—that is, the line drawn through the two positions obtained by 
working the chronometer observation for longitude with two assumed 
latitudes, or by drawing through the position obtained with one lati- 
tude a line at right angles to the bearing of the body as obtained from 
the azimuth tables—gives at times invaluable information, as the ship 
must be somewhere on that line provided the chronometer is correct. 
If directed toward the coast, it marks the bearing of a definite point; 
if parallel with the coast the distance of the latter is shown. Thus 
the direction of the line may often be usefully taken as a course. A 
sounding at the same time with the observation may often give an 
approximate position on the line. A very accurate position can be 
obtained by observing two or more stars at morning or evening twi- 
light, at which time the horizon is well defined. The Sumner lines 
thus obtained will, if the bearings of the stars differ three points or 
more, give an excellent result. A star or planet at twilight and the 
sun afterwards or before may be combined; also two observations of 
the sun with sufficient interval to admit of a considerable change of 
bearing. In these cases one of the lines must be moved for the run 


20 GENERAL NAVIGATION. 


of the ship. The moon is often visible during the day and in combi- 
nation with the sun gives an excellent fix. 

The morning and evening twilight observations, besides their great 
accuracy, possess the additional advantage of greatly extending the 
ship’s reliable reckoning beyond the limits of the ordinary day navi- 
gation and correspondingly restricting the dead-reckoning uncertain- 
ties of the night. An early morning fix in particular is often of 
great value. 

Observations of the stars at night require the use of the star tele- 
scope in order to define the horizon. Though the same degree of 
accuracy as at twilight can not be expected, night observations are 
a very valuable dependence and should be assiduously practiced. 

Piloting.—The navigator, in making his plan for entering a 
strange port, should give very careful previous study to the chart 
and should carefully select what appear to be the most suitable 
marks for use, also providing himself with substitutes, to use in 
case those selected as most suitable should prove unreliable in not 
being recognized with absolute certainty. It must be remembered 
that buoys seen at a distance in approaching a channel are often 
difficult to place or identify, because all may appear equally distant, 
though in reality far apart. Ranges should be noted, if possible, 
and the lines drawn, both for leading through the best water in 
channels and also for guarding against particular dangers; for 
the latter purpose safety bearings should in all cases be laid down 
where no suitable ranges appear to offer. The courses to be steered 
in entering should also be laid down and distances marked thereon. 
If intending to use the sextant and danger angle in passing dangers, 
and especially in passing between dangers, the danger circles should 
be plotted and regular courses planned, rather than to run haphazard 
by the indications of the angle alone, with the possible trouble to be 
apprehended from wild steering at critical points. 

The alidade or dumb compass should invariably be mounted in 
entering or leaving port and kept faithfully set to the magnetic 
direction of the ship’s head, changing promptly with every change 
of course, so that the observed bearings may be magnetic, and there- 
fore ready for the chart without the necessity of waiting to apply 
corrections. The chart should be on the bridge in readiness for 
reference or use in plotting positions. 

The ship’s position should not be allowed to be in doubt at any 
time, even in entering ports considered safe and easy of access, and 
should be constantly checked, continuing to use for this purpose 
those marks concerning which there can be no doubt until others 
gradually and unmistakably declare themselves. 

The ship should ordinarily steer exact courses and follow an exact 
line, as planned from the chart, changing course at precise points, 


GENERAL NAVIGATION. 21 


and, where the distances are considerable, her position on the line 
should be checked at frequent intervals, with recordings of time and 
patent log. his is desirable even where it may seem unnecessary 
for safety, because if running by the eye alone and the ship’s exact 
position be suddenly required, as in a sudden fog or squall, fixing at 
that particular moment may be attended with difficulty. 

The habit of running exact courses with precise changes of course 
will be found most useful when it is desired to enter port or pass 
through inclosed waters during fog by means of the buoys; here 
safety demands that the buoys be made successively, to do which 
requires, if the fog be dense, very accurate courses and careful atten- 
tion to the times, the patent log, and the set of the current; failure 
to make a buoy as expected leaves as a rule no safe alternative but to 
anchor at once, with perhaps a consequent serious loss of time. 

It is a useful point to remember that in passing between dangers 
where there are no suitable leading marks, as, for instance, between 
two islands or an island and the main shore, with dangers extending 
from both, a mid-channel course may be steered by the eye alone 
with great accuracy, as the eye is able to estimate very closely the 
direction midway between visible objects. 

In piloting among coral reefs or banks, a time should be chosen 
when the sun will be astern, conning the vessel from aloft or from an 
elevated position forward. The line of demarcation between the 
deep water and the edges of the shoals, which generally show as 
green patches, is indicated with surprising clearness. This method is 
of frequent application in the numerous passages of the Florida keys. 

Changes of course should in general be made by exact amounts, 
naming the new course or the amount of the change desired, rather 
than by ordering the helm to be put over and then steadying when 
on the desired heading, with the possibility of the attention being 
diverted and so of forgetting in the meantime, as may happen, that 
the ship is still swinging. The helmsman, knowing just what is 
desired and the amount of the change to be made, is thus enabled to 
act more intelligently and to avoid wild steering, which in narrow 
channels is a very positive source of danger. 

Coast piloting involves the same principles and requires that the 
ship’s position be continuously determined or checked as the land- 
marks are passed. On well-surveyed coasts there is a great ad- 
vantage in keeping near the land, thus holding on to the marks and 
the soundings, and thereby knowing at all times the position, rather 
than keeping offshore and losing the marks, with the necessity of 
again making the land from vague positions, and perhaps the added 
inconvenience of fog or bad weather, involving a serious loss of 
time and fuel. 


29 GENERAL NAVIGATION. 


The route should be planned for normal conditions of weather, 
with suitable variations where necessary in case of fog or bad 
weather or making points at night, the courses and distances, in case 
of regular runs over the same route, being entered in a notebook for 
ready reference, as well as laid down on the chart. The danger 
circles for either the horizontal or the vertical danger angles should 
be plotted, wherever the method can be usefully employed, and the 
angles marked thereon; many a mile may thus be saved in rounding 
dangerous points, with no sacrifice in safety. Ranges should also be 
marked in, where useful for position or for safety, and also to use in 
checking the deviation of the compass by comparing, in crossing, 
the compass bearing of the range with its magnetic bearing, as given 
by the chart. 

Changes of course will in general be made with mark or object 
abeam, the position (a new “ departure”) being then, as a rule, best 
and most easily obtained. The alidade, kept set to the ship’s mag- 
netic heading, should be at all times in readiness for use, and the 
chart where it may be readily consulted by the officer of the watch. 
The sextant should also be kept conveniently at hand, 

A continuous record of the progress of the ship should be kept by 
the officer of the watch, the time and patent log reading of all 
changes of course and of all bearings, especially the two and four 
point bearings, with distance of object when abeam, being noted in 
a book kept in the pilot house for this especial purpose. The ship’s 
reckoning is thus continuously cared for as a matter of routine and 
without the presence or particular order of the captain or navigating 
officer. The value of thus keeping the reckoning always fresh and 
exact will be especially appreciated in cases of sudden fog or when 
making points at night. 

Where the coastwise trip must be made against a strong head 
wind, it is desirable, with trustworthy charts, to skirt the shore as 
closely as possible in order to avoid the heavier seas and adverse 
current that prevail farther out. In some cases, with small ships, 
a passage can be made only in this way. The important saving of 
coal and of time, which is even more precious, thus effected by skill- 
ful coast piloting makes this subject one of prime importance to the 
navigator. 

Change in the variation of the compass.—The gradual change 
in the variation must not be forgotten in laying down on the chart 
courses and positions by bearings. The magnetic compasses placed 
on the charts for the purpose of facilitating the plotting become in 
time slightly in error, and in some cases, such as with small scales or. 
when the lines are long, the displacement of position from neglect of 
this change may be of importance. The date of the variation and 


GENERAL NAVIGATION. 23 


the annual change, as given on the compass rose, facilitate correc- 
tions when the change has been considerable. The compasses are 
reengraved when the error amounts to a degree. More frequent 
alterations on one spot in a copper plate would not be practicable. 

The geographical change in the variation is in some parts of the 
world so rapid as to need careful consideration, requiring a frequent 
change of the course. For instance, in approaching Halifax from 
Newfoundland the variation changes 10° in less than 500 miles. 

Local magnetic disturbance of the compass on board ship.— 
The term “local magnetic disturbance” has reference only to the 
effects on the compass of magnetic masses external to the ship. Ob- 
servation shows that disturbance of the compass in a ship afloat is 
experienced in only a few places on the globe. 

Magnetic laws do not permit of the supposition that the visible 
land causes such disturbance, because the effect of a magnetic force 
diminishes so rapidly with distance that it would require a local cen- 
ter of magnetic force of an amount absolutely unknown to affect a 
compass half a mile distant. 

Such deflections of the compass are due to magnetic minerals in 
the bed of the sea under the ship, and when the water is shallow and 
the force strong, the compass may be temporarily deflected when 
passing over such a spot; but the area of disturbance will be small 
unless there are many centers near together. 

The law which has hitherto been found to hold good as regards 
local magnetic disturbance is that north of the magnetic equator the 
north end of the compass needle is attracted and south of the mag- 
netic equator repelled by any center of disturbance. 

It is very desirable that whenever a ship passes over an area of 
local magnetic disturbance the position should be fixed, and the facts, 
as far as they can be ascertained, reported. 

Use of oil for modifying the effect of breaking waves.— 
Many experiences of late years have shown that the utility of oil for 
this purpose is undoubted and the application simple. 

The following may serve for the guidance of seamen, whose atten- 
tion is called to the fact that a very small quantity of oil skillfully 
applied may prevent much damage both to ships (especially of the 
smaller classes) and to boats by modifying the action of breaking 
seas. 

The principal facts as to the use of oil are as follows: 

1. On free waves, i. e., waves in deep water, the effect is greatest. 

2. In a surf, or waves breaking on a bar, where a mass of liquid is 
in actual motion in shallow water, the effect of the oil is uncertain, 
as nothing can prevent the larger waves from breaking under such 
circumstances, but even here it is of some service. 


24 GENERAL NAVIGATION. 


3. The heaviest and thickest oils are most effectual. Refined kero- 
sene is of little use; crude petroleum is serviceable when nothing else 
is obtainable; but all animal and vegetable oils, such as waste oil 
from the engines, have great effect. 

4. A small quantity of oil suffices, if apphed in such a manner as 
to spread to windward. 

5. It is useful in a ship or boat, either when running, or lying-to, 
or in wearing. 

6. No experiences are related of its use when hoisting a boat at sea 
or in a seaway, but it is highly probable that much time would be 
saved and injury to the boat avoided by its use on such occasions. 

7. In cold water the oil, being thickened by the lower temperature 

and not being able to spread freely, will have its effect much re- 
duced. This will vary with the description of oil used. 
- 8. For a ship at sea the best method of application appears to be to 
hang over the side, in such a manner as to be in the water, small 
canvas bags, capable of holding from 1 to 2 gallons of oil, the bags 
being pricked with a sail needle to facilitate leakage of the oil. 

The positions of these bags should vary with the circumstances. 
Running before the wind, they should be hung on either bow—e. g., 
from the cathead—and allowed to tow in the water. 

With the wind on the quarter the effect seems to be less than in 
any other position, as the oil goes astern while the waves come up on 
the quarter. 

Lying-to, the weather bow, and another position farther aft, seem 
the best places from which to hang the bags, using sufficient line to 
permit them to draw to windward while the ship drifts. 

9. Crossing a bar with a flood tide, to pour oil overboard and allow 
it to float in ahead of the boat, which would follow with a bag tow- 
ing astern, would appear to be the best plan. As before remarked, 
under these circumstances the effect can not be so much trusted. 

On a bar, with the ebb tide running, it would seem to be useless to 
try oil for the purpose of entering. 

10. For boarding a wreck, it is recommended to pour oil overboard 
to windward of her before going alongside. The effect in this case 
must greatly depend upon the set of the current and the circum- 
stances of the depth of water. 

11. For a boat riding in bad weather from a sea anchor, it 1s recom- 
mended to fasten the bag to an endless line rove through a block on 
the sea anchor, by which means the oil can be diffused well ahead of 
the boat and the bag readily hauled on board for refilling, if necessary. 


GENERAL NAVIGATION. 25 


ILLUSTRATIONS AND BRIEF RULES. 


[In the illustrative figures, the flowing lines represent the spreading oil and 
the arrows denote the direction of the wind and sea.] 


Fig. 2. 


NN 


Scudding before a gale, Figure 1, 
distribute oil from the bow by means 
of oil bags or through waste pipes; 
it will thus spread aft and give pro- 
tection both from quartering and fol- 
lowing seas. 

If distributed only astern, Figure 2, 
there will be no protection from the 
quartering sea. 


Fig. 3. Fig.4. 


Running before a 


gale, yawing 
badly, and threatening to broach-to, 
Figures 8 and 4, oil should be dis- 
tributed from the bow and abaft the 
beam, on both sides. 

In Figure 3, for instance, where it 
is only distributed at the bow, the 
weather quarter is left unprotected 
when the ship yaws. 

In Figure 4, however, with oil bags 
abaft the beam as well as forward, 
the quarter is protected. 


Lying-to, Figure 5, a vessel can be 
brought closer to the wind by using 
one or two oil bags forward, to wind- 
ward. With a high beam sea, use oil 
bags along the weather side at inter- 
vals of 40 or 50 feet. 

In a heavy cross sea, Figure 6, as in 
the center of a hurricane, or after 
the center has passed, oil bags should 
be hung out at regular intervals along 
both sides. 


Fig. 7. 


Drifting in the trough of a heavy 
sea, Figures 7 and 8, use oil from 
waste pipes forward and bags on 
weather side, as in Figure 8. 

These answer the purpose very much 
better than one bag at weather bow 
and one at lee quarter, although this 
has been tried with some success. See 
Figure 7. 


296 GENERAL NAVIGATION. 
Fig.12. 
Pilot Boat 
| Z Ist. Pos. 


Pilot Boat ¢ 
2nd.Pos. ~~-=38 


A vessel hove-to for a pilot, Figure 
12, should distribute oil from the 
weather side and lee quarter. The 
pilot boat runs up to windward and 
lowers a boat, which pulls down to 
leeward and around the vessel’s stern. 
The pilot boat runs down to leeward, 
gets out oil bags to windward and on 
her lee quarter, and the boat pulls 
back around her stern, protected by 
the oil. The vessels drift to leeward 
and leave an oil slick to windward, 


Fig. 13. Fig. 14. between the two. 


Steaming into a heavy head sea, 
Figure 9, use oil through forward 
closet pipes. Oil bags would be 
tossed back on deck. 

Lying-to, to tack or wear, Figure 10, 
use oil from weather bow. 

Cracking on, with high wind abeam 
and heavy sea, Figure 11, use oil from 
waste pipes, weather bow. 


Towing a vessel in a heavy sea, oil is of the 
greatest service and may prevent parting the 
hawser. Distribute from the towing vessel, for- 
ward on both sides, Figure 13. If used only aft, 
the tow alone gets the benefit. 

At anchor in an open roadstead, use oil in 
bags from jib boom, or haul them out ahead of 
| the vessel by means of an endless rope rove 

through a tail block secured to the anchor chain, 
Figure 14. 


_——_———— 
— 


CHAPTER I. 


NEWFOUNDLAND AND LABRADOR; GENERAL DESCRIP- 
TION, PHYSICAL FEATURES, GEOLOGY, MINES, AGRI- 
CULTURE, FISHERIES, EXPORTS — COMMUNICATIONS — 
CLIMATE — WINDS — FOG — CURRENTS — TIDES—TIDAL 
STREAMS— TEMPERATURE OF THE SEA—ICE— SIGNALS 
RESPECTING ICE— BUOYS—SIGNAL STATIONS — COAL— 
DOCKS—REPAIRS—SHIPWRECKS—STANDARD TIME—PAS- 
SAGES AND GENERAL DIRECTIONS—MAGNETIC VARIA- 
TION—DEVIATION OF THE COMPASS—LOCAL MAGNETIC 
DISTURBANCES. 


Newfoundland is an island of the British Empire situated at 
the mouth of the gulf of St. Lawrence, between the parallels of 46° 
35’ and 51° 40’ north latitude, and the meridians of 52° 35’ and 
59° 25’ west longitude. In the colony is included the eastern part of 
the peninsula of Labrador from Blanc Sablon to cape Chidley. 

History.—The island of Newfoundland, said to have been known 
to the Norsemen at a very early date, was inhabited by a numerous 
and powerful Indian race named Beothiks, now extinct; but the 
first authentic account of its discovery was in 1497, when John Cabot, 
who was seeking a northwestern route to China and the Spice islands, 
sighted the land (probably about cape Bonavista). As early as 
1500 it was frequented by Portuguese, Spanish, and French fish- 
ermen; but no serious attempt at colonization appears to have been 
made until the 5th of August, 1588, when Sir Humphrey Gilbert 
took possession of the island in the name of Queen Elizabeth. 

After 1623, when Lord Baltimore, who a few years later left to 
establish Baltimore, founded a colony in the island, the east coast 
was gradually settled by the English; French settlers occupying 
the southern coasts and making Placentia their capital. By the 
treaty of Utrecht in 1713, subsequently ratified by the treaty of Paris, 
Newfoundland was acknowledged to belong to Great Britain, and 
the French retained only the small islands of St. Pierre and 
Miquelon, with the right to cure fish on that portion of the New-: 
foundland coast extending from cape Ray, along the west, north, 
and east coasts, to cape St. John. By the Anglo-French convention 
of 1904, France renounced her exclusive fishing rights, but retained 


27 


on 


28 GENERAL REMARKS. 


the right to fish on the coast from cape Ray, round the northern 
end of the island, to cape St. John for all sorts of fish, including bait 
and crustacea. 

Under the provisions of the treaty of 1818, the inhabitants of the 
United States have, in common with British subjects, the liberty to 
take fish of every kind on that part of the southern coast of New- 
foundland which extends from cape Ray to Ramea islands, on the 
western and northern coast of Newfoundland, from cape Ray to 
Kirpon islands, on the shores of the Magdalen islands, and also on the 
coasts, bays, harbors, and creeks from Mount Joli, on the southern 
coast of Quebec, to and through the strait of Belleisle and thence 
northward indefinitely along the coast, without prejudice, however, 
to any of the exclusive rights of the Hudson Bay Company. United 
States fishermen have also the right to dry and cure fish in any 
of the unsettled bays, harbors, and creeks of the southern part of 
Newfoundland, above described, and of the coast of Labrador. 

Physical features.—Newfoundland is somewhat of a triangular 
form (the apex being at cape Bauld, the base between capes Race 
and Ray), and has an estimated area of 42,200 square miles, with a 
greatest length of 420 miles. Its coasts are indented with deep bays 
and harbors, many of which are very fine and nearly all of which 
afford shelter to vessels during summer. The surface of the island is - 
wild and rugged, and the coast, being steep, sterile, rocky, and often 
denuded of vegetation, or covered only with small trees, has an aspect 
far from prepossessing. The land near the sea is generally hilly, the 
ranges having a northeast and southwest trend; this is also the case 
in the bays, rivers, valleys, and larger lakes, and is probably due to 
glacial action. The interior proper is an elevated. undulating pla- 
teau, traversed by ranges of low hills, the surface being diversified by 
valleys, woods, marshes, and large lakes, locally known as ponds, 
which completely intersect the country from bay of Exploits, Hall 
and White bays, on the northeastern, to St. George bay, on the west- 
ern, and Despair bay on the southern side. Some excellent timber, 
of large size, is found on the west coast and on some few other parts 
of the island; but as a rule it is only at the heads of bays and in shel- 
tered places that trees attain sufficient size to make spars for even 
small vessels, and a mast for a large schooner can generally be ob- 
tained only at a long distance from the sea. 

Inland of the coast ranges of hills the country generally seems to 
consist of as much water as land, so numerous are the ponds. From 
these, streamlets run down every ravine, and through the larger 
valleys run rivulets in which trout can generally be obtained. 

Lakes.—The lakes or ponds form a remarkable physical feature 
of the island, and occupy about one third of its area. The principal 
lakes are Grand pond, the largest, which is 56 miles long, 5 miles 


RIVERS—FAUNA. 29 


broad, about 60 fathoms deep, with an area of some 192 square miles, 
and only 50 feet above sea level; Indian lake, which is 87 miles long, 
with an area of 64 square miles; Gander lake, which is 33 miles long, 
with an area of 33 square miles; and Deer pond, which is 15 miles 
long, with an area of 34 square miles. 

Rivers.—The rivers of Newfoundland are numerous, and though 
the majority are small, yet some attain considerable size. The larg- 
est are Exploits, Humber, Gander, and Terra Nova. Exploits river, 
which rises near the southern end of Long range, is 200 miles in 
length, drains an area of 3,000 to 4,000 square miles, and falls into 
Exploits bay on the east coast. The main branch of the Humber 
river rises 20 miles inland from Bonne bay, is about 130 miles in 
length, drains about 2,000 square miles, and falls into Humber arm 
on the west coast. Gander river, 100 miles in length, flows through 
Gander lake, and with its tributaries drains an area of nearly 4,000 
square miles; it falls into Hamilton sound. 

Geology.—All the great ancient rock systems, between the Lower 
Laurentian and the coal measures inclusively, are more or less repre- 
sented at some part of Newfoundland. The principal mountain 
ranges appear to be Lower Laurentian coming to the surface through 
more recent deposits, most of which are nearly parallel to each other 
in a general north-northeast and south-southwest direction. The 
same formation also prevails on the western part of the south coast. 
The coal measures occupy a large extent of the valley within St. 
George bay, the region of Grand pond. In the peninsula of Avalon, 
the crystalline rocks of the Laurentian period are succeeded by slates 
and conglomerates that stretch also into Bonavista bay. Veins of 
white quartz are everywhere abundant in this system, and are often 
impregnated with ores of copper, lead, or iron, and sometimes with all 
together. 

On the east coast, hummocks of granite protrude and are locally 
known as “ tolts; ” and this coast is marked by large and deep striae, 
radiating apparently from some point in the interior. Erratic bowl- 
ders cover nearly all the principal headlands, and are distributed in 
great numbers about the coast ranges of hills. 

Fauna.—The animals indigenous to Newfoundland are caribou or 
American reindeer, wolves, black bears, foxes, beavers, otters, Arctic 
hares, weasels, etc. Amongst the birds are eagles, hawks, owls, wood- 
peckers, swallows, and ptarmigan, which are abundant. The great 
auk, now extinct, was once found in large numbers around the island. 
The little auk, guillemot, and razor bill are still abundant. 

For willow grouse, locally named partridge, and other varieties of 
grouse and eggs of same, close time begins January 12 and ends 
September 15; birds, however, may be sold up to January 22, pro- 
vided they are shot in season. For curlew, plover, snipe, or other 


30 GENERAL REMARKS. 


wild or migratory birds, or eggs of same, close time is from January 
12 to August 20. Wild geese may be shot or their eggs taken at any 
time. 

The close time for caribou is from February 15 to September 15; 
for otter and beaver from April 1 to October 1; for rabbits and hares 
from March 1 to September 15; for salmon from September 11 to 
April 30. Trout, landlocked salmon, and other fresh-water fish are 
not to be taken in any lake, river, or stream from September 15 to 
December 31. 

License is required by nonresidents to shoot deer (fee $100), and 
only five stags and three does can be killed by each sportsman. 

Licenses are granted by justices of the peace and custom-house 
officers. 

The best time for shooting caribou is from the middle of September 
to the end of October. 

Minerals.—Copper is largely worked at Tilt and Betts coves and 
Little bay, in Notre Dame bay, and lead at la Manche in Placentia 
bay. Deposits of lead ore and asbestos fields, in the peninsula of 
Port au Port are now being worked. Iron pyrites are shipped from 
a mine on Pilley island, Notre Dame bay. Large quantities of 
hematite iron ore are exported from Bell island, Conception bay. 
The carboniferous district of Newfoundland is on the west coast, 
near St. George bay and Grand lake. Gypsum and marbles of 
various shades of color are found in considerable quantities at 
Codroy, St. George bay, and Bay of Islands. At Random and near 
Thorburn lake are two large granite quarries. 

Agriculture is pursued with fair success on the west coast, where 
grass and cereals of the first quality are produced. Potatoes of fine 
quality are also grown. A large tract of fertile soil lies near Gander 
bay, as well as in Exploits valley and Red Indian lake district on 
the east coast, and there is good land in the vicinity of Goose bay 
and Clode sound at the head of Bonavista bay. It is estimated that 
in the whole island about 7,000 square miles, or 4,480,000 acres, are 
available for settlement either as arable or grazing land. 

Population.—The vicinity of the coast of Newfoundland is the 
only portion of the island yet inhabited, and there are but few settlers 
on the western side of the island, two-thirds of the population being 
found on the peninsula of Avalon. The census taken in 1901 showed 
a population of 220,984, including 3,947 who inhabit the dependency 
of Labrador. Of the population in Newfoundland in 1901, 98,000 
were engaged in the fisheries, 2,475 were farmers, 3,111 mechanics, 
and 1,576 miners. The population of the chief towns were: St. 
John’s, 29,594; Harbor Grace, 5,184; Carbonear, 5,703; Twillingate 
(Toulinguet), 3.542; and Bonavista, 3,696. 


FISHERIES. cae 


Orthography.—Many of the place names in Newfoundland were 
originally French, but, owing to the pronunciation of the fishermen, 
they have become so corrupted as to be difficult of recognition as such. 
For instance, anse 4 Loup is known to the fishermen as “ Lancy Loo;” 
anse Kclair as “ Lancy Clair,” and Peignoir as “ Pinware.” 

Fisheries.—The cod fisheries of Newfoundland are more valu- 
able than those of any other country, and the fishing grounds would 
appear capable of yielding an almost inexhaustible supply, but of 
late years, owing to reckless and destructive fishing and the introduc- 
tion of engines of such a character as to destroy gravid and even 
immature fish, there has been a perceptible decline in the yearly 
catch. The comparatively modern implements used are cod traps, 
large seine nets, small mesh nets, bultows, or long lines, and jiggers. 
The fishermen have been informed of the destructive nature of many 
of their applances, and rules have been drawn up for their guidance. 

Cod appear off the coasts of Newfoundland in April, and the fish- 
ing season lasts until October, when these fish take their departure. 
It is not known where they go from October until April, but they 
have reappeared with the utmost regularity for some four hundred 
years and more. Probably their movements have something to do 
with the productiveness or scarcity of food. 

There are three distinet branches of the cod fishery, viz, the Bank 
fishery, the Coast fishery, and the Labrador fishery. The Bank fish- 
ery is carried on by schooners sailing from the southern ports and 
bays of Newfoundland, and by schooners sailing from ports in the 
United States, chiefly from Gloucester, and from France. The Coast 
fishery is carried on by small schooners and boats, plying from vir- 
tually every bay, cove, or creek in Newfoundland, the men using both 
hook and hne and also cod traps. The Labrador fishery is carried on 
by schooners sailing from the bays in the eastern coast of New- 
foundland. 

All schooners, not coasters, do the actual fishing from dories, using 
bultows. 

Nore.—Bultows are locally called trawls, but they have no resem- 
blance to what are known as trawls in the North sea; they are more 
like what is known in England as trots. 

The number of Newfoundland craft and men employed in the 
different branches is roughly as follows: 

In the Bank fishery, 89 schooners or grand bankers, carrying from 
16 to 20 men each. (There are also about 100 French bankers and a 
great many United States and Canadian schooners engaged in this 
branch. ) 

In the Coast fishery, 500 schooners or small bankers, carrying 7 
men each, and about 25,000 boats of various sizes and descriptions, 
carrying from 1 to 5 men each. 


82 GENERAL REMARKS. 


In the Labrador fishery, 2,000 small schooners, carrying from 7 to 
% men each, as well as women and girls for packing. (There are a 
few United States schooners engaged in this branch.) 

Thus there are about 98,000 seafaring people in Newfoundland 
engaged in the cod fishery; and there must also be about 100,000 men 
and women employed in drying, curing, packing, etc., which makes 
a total of some 198,000 people, whose living depends upon the cod, 
out of a population of about 220,000. 

The principal countries to which cod are exported are the United 
Kingdom, Portugal, the United States, Brazil, Canada, Italy, Spain, 
British West Indies, and Holland. 

In 1907 the value of the export of dried codfish from Newfoundland 
amounted to $7,873,172, and that of cod oil to $358,713. 

Bait fishes.—Although the cod fishery is the mainstay of New- 
foundland, the bait fishes—the spring herring, the caplin, the squid, 
and even the whelk—without which it could not be carried on, are of 
primary importance. - 

The spring herring appear on the west coast, near and in bay 
St. George, about the time of the full moon nearest the 10th of May. 
The autumn herring appear in October in the bay of Islands, and ap- 
parently remain in that neighborhood until the following June. 
They reach Fortune bay, on the south coast, in December. Caplin 
arrive toward the middle.of June and stay only a month. Some 
authorities say that they arrive when the moon is at its full. Squid 
arrive late in July or early in August and take the place of caplin as 
bait. The whelk (periwinkle) is the last of the bait fishes. 

Cod are caught also without bait by means of cod traps, and by 
jigging. Cod traps, which were introduced some twenty-five years 
ago, are set along the coasts under certain regulations and are con- 
sidered to be a successful method of taking fish, but jigging is resorted 
to only when there is no bait. 

In 1906 a French steam trawler obtained the first great success that 
has rewarded efforts in this method of fishing off the coast of New- 
foundland by catching 3,000 quintals (cwt.) of fish on the banks. 
Since then several steam trawlers have entered the industry. 

Seal fishery.—The seal fishery, which is next in importance and 
value to the cod fishery, commences on March 12. This is the day 
named by law for leaving St. Johns, but the law is made to apply only 
to the steamers, the sailing fleet being allowed to leave on March 1. 
This fishery is prosecuted in March and April, the sealing fleet seek- 
ing the seal-bearing ice immediately upon leaving port, and the 
young seals, born on the ice between the 15th and 20th of February, 
are, on account of their rapid growth, in the best condition about the 
16th of March, when they have grown to a marketable size, viz, 40 to 


HERRING FISHERY. ae 


50 pounds, and when they are easily killed by a blow on the nose; but 
by the 1st of April they begin to take to the water and are not so 


easily taken. No seals are allowed to be killed before the 14th of 
March or after the 20th of April. When the sealing vessels have 
obtained full cargoes, they return to port, discharge, and start again 
for a second and occasionally even a third trip. 

The seals taken off the coasts of Newfoundland are the harp seal 
and the hood seal, which come down on the Arctic floe at the begin- 
ning of March, riding the floe for the purpose of whelping. 

Sealers reckon that six young seals or “cats” weigh from 2 to 
3 quintals. An old seal weighs 24 to 3 quintals, and an old square 
flipper sometimes as much as 8 quintals. 

In 1907 the value of sealskins exported from Newfoundland 
amounted to $194,300, and that of seal oil to $447,967. In 1906, 22 
steamers, built for encountering Arctic ice, manned by 38,684 men, 
brought in 245,051 seals of a gross weight of 5,870 tons; this was con- 
sidered only an average fishery. A point of marked interest in the 
season of 1906 was the success of a steel sealer, which was able to 
pierce the ice more rapidly and easily than the wooden vessels hith- 
erto employed, and in four days killed 30,193 seals. 

The wise rule of fixing the date of departure of the sealing vessels 
seems to have had a good effect on the catch; but as mother seals bear 
only one whelp a year it is difficult to see how the enormous slaughter 
can be continued without sensibly diminishing the number of seals; 
however, there is very little sign of this at present. In 1906, 25 
steam sealers took 341,836 seals, of the value of $607,544. 

Herring fishery.—Herrings resort to the shallow reaches in the 
ereat bays around the island, and are generally found within 3 miles 
of the shore. The principal herring fisheries are at Fortune, Placen- 
tia, and St. George bays, bay of Islands and Labrador (see page 36), 
the two latter being the most valuable. Fortune bay is a winter her- 
ring fishery, commencing early in December; St. George bay is a 
spring fishery. The value of herrings exported from Newfoundland 
in 1907 amounted to $406,363. 

During the season of 1907-8, 50 United States vessels, 7 of which 
made two trips, engaged in the herring fishery at the bay of Islands. 
{n addition to these, 5 Canadian vessels were chartered by American 
fishermen. The catch of the American fleet, including that of the 
Canadian chartered vessels, was 46,877 barrels of salted herring, 
valued at $176,789, and 31,015 barrels of frozen herring, valued at 
$217,000. 

Six British vessels, not chartered, landed at Boston and Gloucester 
5,834 barrels of salted herring, valued at $21,878, and 1,875 barrels 
of frozen herring, valued at $12,938. 


76846—09— —3 


34 GENERAL REMARKS. 


Salmon fishery.—The amount of preserved salmon exported is 
at present small, owing to the fish having been almost exterminated ; 
but now there are wardens on the principal rivers, the fish are pre- 
served during the spawning season, pollution and the use of illegal 
engines are prohibited, so that the rivers may be restored to their old 
prolific state. 

Lobster fishery.—The lobsters caught are now so small that it 
requires more than double the number to fill a case than it did a few 
years ago; this appears to indicate that there is overfishing on the 
same grounds year after year, especially if the slow growth of the 
lobster is taken into consideration. 

The value of tinned lobsters exported in 1907 was $383,767. 

Whale fishery.—During 1905, 19 whale factories were in opera- 
tion and secured 892 whales. The catches in 1906 and 1907 appear 
to be very small, and several of the companies have found that the 
whale fishery does not pay and have accordingly sold their factories 
and whalers. 

Schooners.—-The fishing schooners, engaged chiefly in the cod 
fishery, have their names painted on the bow and stern, but carry 
only a private house flag, the national flag being seldom displayed. 
Many of the newer schooners hailing from Gloucester are beautiful 
vessels, looking more like private yachts than like fishing vessels. 
The dories are not marked. 

Trade.—In 1907 the value of the total exports from the colnne 
amounted to $12,101,161, and that of the imports to $10,426,040. 
The chief exports are fish, sealskins, oil, iron, and copper ore; and the 
chief imports are flour, textiles, woolens and cottons, coal, hardware, 
cutlery, salt pork, molasses, machinery, and tea; these are obtained 
mainly from Canada, the United Kingdom, and the United States. 

In 1907, 1,834,452 tons of shipping entered and cleared at New- 
foundland ports. At the end of that year 3,241 sailing vessels of 
129,876 tons and 67 steam vessels of 12,352 tons were registered in 
Newfoundland. 

Labrador, or that part of the Labrador peninsula lying between 
Blanc Sablon and cape Chidley and eastward of the Canadian proy- 
inces of Quebec and Ungava is, by letters patent of March 28, 1876, 
included in the colony of Newfoundland. Labrador, discovered by 
the Norsemen, and (in 1497) by Cabot, was early frequented by 
Basque, and subsequently by Breton, fishermen. In 1501, Corte Real 
named it Terra Labrador (cultivable land), to distinguish it from 
Greenland, which he named Terra Verde. It became British terri- 
tory on the conquest of Canada (1759). The area of the dependency 
of Labrador included in the colony of Newfoundland is about 120,000 
square miles, with a coast line of some 650 miles. 


PHYSICAL FEATURES. oD 


The peninsula of Labrador, extending from lat. 50° N. to lat. 63° 
N., and from long. 55° W. to long. 80° W., embraces an area of 
about 511,000 square miles. 

There were 3,947 permanent inhabitants (some 1,700 Eskimo, the 
remainder of British descent) in the dependency in 1901, occupied 
in fishing and in trapping, but the population is greatly increased in 
summer by fishermen and sportsmen, and it may then be considered 
to be in round numbers from 20,000 to 25,000. 

Physical features and geology.—The peninsula of Labrador, 
though when seen from seaward presents a very barren and desolate 
aspect, is really, a little way inland, a well-wooded country, and its 
forests, fisheries, and minerals will be valuable. The peninsula is 
a very ancient plateau, formed largely of crystalline schists and 
gneisses, associated with granite and other igneous rocks, all of 
archean age. It has large areas of nonfossiliferous stratified lime- 
stones, cherts, shales, and iron ores. It is a plateau which ascends 
somewhat abruptly within a few miles of the coast to heights of 500— 
9,000 feet. The interior is undulating, and traversed by ridges of 
low rounded hills seldom rising more than 500 feet above the general 
level. The depressions between these ridges are occupied by numer- 
ous lakes, many of great size. 

The east coast of Labrador is composed of Laurentian gneiss, with 
intrusive granite and many quartz veins, the formation generally 
being: Laurentian, having resting on it at various points lower Silu- 
rian beds while over the country are gneiss ranges of mountains and 
gneiss bowlders. 

It is indented by deep irregular bays and fringed with rocky islets, 
while long and narrow fiords penetrate inland. The coast is bleak, 
but the shores of the bays and rivers are well wooded, and in some 
cases densely so, the timber being high and sound. The northern 
limit of trees near the coast is about latitude 58° north. Copper and 
lead ores exist on the coast; also gold and mica. The hills fall 
steeply to the sea, often in precipitous cliffs, and terminate in rugged 
rocky points, the single remarkable exception being the strand on 
each side of cape Porcupine, which is the only sandy beach of any 
extent on the whole coast northward as far as Nain. 

Rivers.—The Atlantic coast range throws most of the drainage 
northward into Ungava bay, and excepting the Hamilton, Nasquapee, 
and Kenamou rivers, only small streams fall into the Atlantic. 

Ashwanipi or Hamilton river, supposed to be the largest in Labra- 
dor, drains a vast interior plateau; it rises northward of Seven 
islands bay, in the gulf of St. Lawrence, and falls into Hamilton 
inlet, which also receives the waters of Kenamou river, and Nas- 
quapee or Northwest river. Eagle, West, and East rivers, abounding 


36 GENERAL REMARKS. 


with salmon and trout, fall into Sandwich bay, while Koksoak or 
Big river, Whale river, and Kangerthialuksoak or George river have 
their outlets in Ungava bay. 

Lakes.—The whole country is covered with innumerable lakes, 
ponds, and pools, from the deep mountain tarns on the summit of 
watersheds to the broad shallow lakes and pools spread over the 
surface below. The almost universal shallowness of these lakes is a 
singular feature. 

Fisheries.—The fisheries of Labrador are at present its most 
valuable resources, and form practically the only industry of the 
white population scattered along its coast, as well as of a large pro- 
portion of the inhabitants of Newfoundland. 

The cod fishery is carried on extensively from July to October. 
In July about 20,000 people leave their homes on the east coast of 
Newfoundland and proceed with their families in small craft to the 
Labrador coast for the season. On this coast there are huts and fish- 
ing stages at almost every bay, cove, and harbor where some of these 
people live, while others, in their vessels, follow the fish to the north- 
ward. The principal fishing stations are at Battle and St. Charles 
harbors. The fishery is carried on in small brigs and schooners, gen- 
erally of 30 to 100 tons, and in boats. When the vessels return to 
Newfoundland they generally leave behind a few persons, who winter 
up the bays of the mainland to hunt for furs, and to be ready for the 
seal fishery at the breaking up of the ice in spring. The boats are 
hauled up on the rocks, or taken into coves of the mainland, where 
they are covered over with spruce branches and secured for the 
winter. 

Fish caught by boats at the settlements are cured there, and in 
many cases exported in English schooners direct to foreign markets. 
Those taken by the vessels at sea are cleaned and packed in salt, to be 
cured at one of the southern settlements or in Newfoundland. 

Northward to Aillik the fish are caught with baited hooks, while 
farther northward they are jigged with two hooks fastened to a metal 
imitation of a caplin. 

The cod fishery is now carried on along the entire Atlantic coast 
and in the eastern part of Ungava bay, where excellent catches have 
been made since 1893. 

The herring fishery begins in September and is prosecuted princi- 
pally from Assizes harbor, which is crowded with vessels at that time. 
A plentiful catch of herrings sometimes compensates for a bad cod 
fishery. The herrings are packed in barrels and exported direct to 
Canadian markets by steamers owned in Newfoundland. 

The salmon fishery on the Atlantic coast is very small. 

The fisheries of Hudson bay and of the interior of Labrador are 
wholly undeveloped, but both the bay and the large lakes of the inte- 


COMMUNICATIONS. at 


rior are well stocked with excellent fish, including trout, white fish, 
sturgeon, and cod. 

See Newfoundland fisheries above. 

Government.—The government of Newfoundland, which, of 
course, includes the dependency of Labrador, as previously described, 
is administered by a governor, named by the crown, assisted by an 
executive council, usually not exceeding seven members. 

The law-making branch of the government is composed of a legis- 
lative council of 15 members and a house of assembly of 36 repre- 
sentatives. 

The judicial branch consists of a supreme court. 

Communications.—The Allan and Furness lines of steamships 
run direct between St. Johns and Liverpool on alternate weeks. From 
February to April, inclusive, the Allan mail steamship does not call 
at St. Johns, but proceeds to and from Halifax, whence communica- 
tion is maintained by a local steam vessel plying fortnightly to St. 
Johns. The Allan line employ for their fortnightly service to St. 
Johns, except from February to April, three steamers, which make 
the passage from Glasgow in seven to nine days. These vessels run 
from Glasgow to Liverpool, thence to St. Johns, Halifax, and Phila- 
delphia. : 

The Furness line also employs three steamers. These vessels run 
from Liverpool to St. Johns and Halifax throughout the year, sailing 
every fortnight from Liverpool and St. Johns. 

There is weekly communication between St. Johns and Montreal, 
Pictou, Charlottetown, and Sydney (Cape Breton) by steamers of 
the Black Diamond line, and between St. Johns and New York and 
Halifax every week by steamers of the Red Lion line. 

Steamers of the Black Diamond line run direct to Canada once a 
week from about May 1 to December 5; there are two steamers run- 
ning, but they carry no mails, and only one carries passengers. 

Steamers of the Red Lion line run from New York to Halifax and 
St. Johns once a week; they arrive at St. Johns and New York on 
Thursdays and sail on Saturdays; they bring mails from New York 
and Halifax, but do not take them to those places. 

Bay and coastal steamers, 1908—Placentia bay.—The 
steamship Argyle leaves Placentia every Monday afternoon after the 
arrival of the mails from St. Johns, and proceeds to the following 
places on the North Side of the bay: Red island, Ship harbor, Indian 
harbor, Rams island, Rose-au-Rue, Harbor Buffett, Haystack, Brew- 
ley, North harbor, Sound island, Black river, Woody island, Barren 
island, Tacks beach, Burgeo, St. Leonards, Valen island, and Mera- 
sheen. 

Mails close for the above places on Monday morning at 7.30 o’clock. 


88 GENERAL REMARKS. 


Leaving Placentia every Wednesday afternoon after the arrival of 
the mail train from St. Johns, the steamer calls at the following 
places: Presque, Paradise, Petit Fort, St. Josephs, Oderin, Baine 
harbor, Flat islands, Marystown, Beau Bois, Fox cove, Burin, Great 
Burin, Epworth, St. Lawrence, Lawn, Lords cove, and Lamaline. 

Mails close for the above places every Wednesday morning at 7.30 
o'clock. 

Trinity bay.—The steamship Ethie, on Trinity bay, leaves Claren- 
ville every Monoday (except in January, February, March, and 
April), and calls at the following places: Hickmans harbor, Lady 
cove, Hearts Content, Hants harbor, Old Perlican, Trinity, Salmon 
cove, Catalina, Bay-de-Vere, Western bay, and Carbonear. 

Mails for the above places close every Saturday evening at 9.30 
o’clock. 

Leaving Clarenville every Friday (except in four winter months), 
the Ethie calls at the following places: Ladys cove, Hickmans harbor, 
Fox harbor, Deer harbor, Britannia cove, Thoroughfare, Irelands 
Eye, British harbor, Bonaventure, Trinity, Salmon cove, Catalina, 
Bay-de-Verde, Western bay, and Carbonear. 

Mails for the above places are closed every Thursday afternoon at 
4 o'clock. A mail to connect with the steamer at Carbonear is also 
dispatched on Tuesday and Saturday mornings at 7.30 o’clock. 

Bonavista bay.—The steamship Dundee leaves Port Blandford 
every Monday and Friday (except in January, February, March, 
and April) for the following places: Charlottetown, Bunyan cove 
(alternately), Musgrave town, Brooklyn, James town, Sweet bay, 
Southern bay, Indian arm, Plate cove, Open Hall, Keels, Kings cove, 
Bonavista, Salvage, Flat island, St. Brendans, Gooseberry islands, 
Fair islands, Greenspond, Pools island, and Wesleyville. 

Mails close for the above places every Saturday evening at 9.30 
o'clock and every Thursday afternoon at 4.30 o’clock, and for Bona- 
vista (proper) and Kings cove every alternate Tuesday morning at 
7.30 o’clock via train to Carbonear and Trinity bay steamer. 

Fogo district.—The steamship Annie leaves Fogo on Tuesdays, 
after arrival of steamship Clyde, for Barr’d islands, Joe Batts arm, 
Little Fogo, Tilting, Seldom-ceme-by, Indian island, Dog bay, Vic- 
toria cove, Gander bay, Fredericton, Rocky bay, Ladle cove, Mus- 
grave harbor, Wadhams, Cat harbor, Newtown, and Wesleyville. 

Notre Dame bay.—The steamship Clyde leaves Lewisport for the 
south side of the bay every Monday (except in four winter months), 
calling at the following places: Campbelltown, Kite cove, Botwood- 
ville, Exploits, Moretons harbor, Tizzards harbor, Twillingate, Her- 
ring neck, Little Beaver cove and Beaverton (alternately), Dog bay, 
Change islands, and Fogo. 

Mails for the above places are closed Saturday evenings at 9.30 
o’clock. 


COMMUNICATIONS. 89 


Leaving Lewisport every Friday, the Clyde will proceed to the 
following places on the north side of the bay: Exploits, Fortune har- 
bor, New Bay head, Leading Tickles, Triton, Pilleys island, Spring- 
dale, Boot harbor, Wellmans cove (8S. C. I.), Wards harbor, Little 
Bay islands, Little bay, Three Arms, Jacksons cove and South West 
arm alternately, North West arm, Nippers harbor, Snooks arm, Tilt 
‘cove, and Shoe cove. 

Mails for the above places are closed every Thursday afternoon at 
4.30 o’clock. 

Labrador service.—The steamship Virginia Lake performs this 
service fortnightly, making 10 trips, commencing the service about 
June 15, sailing from St. Johns, and calls at the following places 
going and returning: Harbor Grace, Catalina, Kings cove, Twillin- 
gate, Tilt cove, Battle harbor, Spear harbor, Francis harbor, Fishing 
Ships harbor, Ship harbor, Square island, Dead island, Snug harbor, 
Venison island, Hawks harbor, Bolsters rock, Comfort bight (alter- 
nately), Frenchmans island, Punch bowl, Sandy island, Batteau, 
Domino, Black island (coming south only), Indian Tickle, Black 
Tickle, Grady, Long island, Cartwright (calling one way only), 
Packs harbor, Rigolet (calling one way only), Indian harbor, Smoky 
Tickle, White Bears, Horse harbor, Emily harbor, Holton, Cape Har- 
rison, Ragged island, Long Tickle, Maccovick islands, Turnavick 
East, Turnavick West, Winsor harbor, Hopedale, Double island, 
Fannys harbor, Spracklin island, and Nain (alternately). 

Strait of Belleisle and White Bay service.—The steamsiiup 
Home, leaving Riverhead, Humbermouth, Bay of Islands, every 
Wednesday, except four winter months, calls at the following ports 
going and returning: York harbor, Lark harbor, Trout river, Bonne 
bay, Cow head, port Saunders, Bartletts harbor, Brig bay, Currant 
island, Salmon river, Bonne Esperance, Middle bay, Isle-aux-Bois, 
Blane Sablon, Bradore, Flowers cove, Forteau, Lance-au-Loup, West 
St. Modest, Red bay, Henley, and Chateau (alternately), Chimney 
Tickle, cape Charles, and Battle harbor. 

Mails for the above are closed every Tuesday afternoon at 4 o’clock, 
unless it is ascertained that a later train will connect with the steamer. 

Northern coast service.—The steamship Portia performs this 
service, leaving St. Johns every alternate Wednesday, except during 
the four winter months, calling at the following-named places: Bay- 
de-Verde or Old Perlican, Trinity, Catalina, Bonavista, Kings cove, 
Salvage, Greenspond, Pools island, Musgrave harbor, Seldom-come- 
by, Fogo, Herring neck, Twillingate, Moretons harbor, Exploits, 
Fortune harbor, Leading Tickles, Pilleys island, Little Bay islands, 
Litle bay, Nippers harbor, Tilt cove, La Scie, Baie Verte, Coachmans 
cove, Western cove, Jacksons arm, Harbor deep, Englee, Conche, St. 
Julians, St. Anthony, and Griguet. 


40 GENERAL REMARKS. 


Mails for the above-named places are closed at the general post- 
office every alternate Wednesday morning at 9 o'clock. 

South and west coast service.—The Southwest coast service 1s 
performed by the steamship Prospero, leaving St. Johns every alter- 
nate Wednesday and calling at the following-named places: Cape 
Broyle, Ferryland, Renews, and Fermeuse (alternately), Trepassey, 
St. Marys, Salmonier, Placentia, Mortier bay, Burin, St. Lawrence, : 
Lamalin, Fortune, Grand bank, Belleoram, St. Jacques, Harbor 
Breton, Hermitage, Gaultois, Pushthrough, cape la Hune, Ramea, 
Burgeo, La Poile, Rose Blanche, Channel (port-aux-Basques), bay 
St. George (Sandy Point, monthly), Port-au-Port (monshlyay Bay 
of Islands (Curling), Bonne bay (Curzon village). 

South Coast Service.—The steamship Glencoe perforius this serv- 
ice, leaving Placentia every Saturday evening after arrival of mail 
train from St. Johns and calling at the following-named places: 
Burin and St. Lawrence (alternately), Fortune, Grand Bank, Belle- 
oram, St. Jacques, Harbor Breton, Hermitage, Pushthrough, Balena, 
Recontre (each alternate trip), Ramea, Burgeo, Grand Bruit (each 
alternate trip), La Poile, Rose Blanche, and Channel (port-aux- 
Basques). 

Mails for the above places are closed every Saturday morning at 
7.30 o’clock. A supplementary mail is also dispatched to connect 
with this steamer at port-aux-Basques by the Sunday express, and 
is closed at the general post-office every Saturday evening at 9.30 
o’clock, unless it would expedite delivery to hold it back for dispatch 
by the coastal steamer from St. Johns. 

Mail Sailing Packet Service.—Fortune bay.—A mail packet 
will leave St. Jacques weekly after the arrival of the mail from St. 
Johns, calling at the following-named places going and returning: 
Belleoram, Pools cove, bay du Nord, bay d’Est, Lally cove, Ren- 
contre, Fortune bay, Stones cove, Andersons cove, English Harbor 
east, Terenceville, Harbor Mille, Little Bay east, Fox cove, and bay 
L’Argent. 

Harbor Briton, Sagona, and Brunette.—Packet leaves Harbor 
Briton fortnightly, calling at Brunette and Sagona islands. 

Garnish and Belleoram.—A mail packet leaves Garnish fort- 
nightly after the arrival of the mails per courier overland from 
Burin, calling at English Harbor west, Point Enragee, St. Jacques, 
and Belleoram. 

Hermitage bay.—A packet leaves Pushthrough weekly after the 
arrival of mails from St. Johns, calling at the following-named 
places: Great Jervois, bay d’Est, bay du Nord, McCallum bay, Little 
bay, Round harbor, Gaultois, Hermitage, Grole, and Pass island. 

By Wagon.—Mails for Ferryland district, Kilbride, Goulds, and 
Petty harbor are closed every Monday at 7 a. m., and on Tuesday 


COMMUNICATIONS. 41 


and Thursday at 6.30 p.m., during summer. Mails close on Monday 
and Thursday at 6.30 p. m., during winter. 

The steamer Bruce, of the Reid-Newfoundland Company, leaves 
port-aux-Basques every Monday, Wednesday, and Friday after the 
arrival of the mail train from St. Johns, and, after a passage of six 
hours in duration, connects with the Intercontinental Railroad’ at 
Sydney, Cape Breton island. The same steamer leaves Sydney on 
the arrival of the mail by the Intercolonial Railroad every Tuesday, 
Thursday, and Saturday and connects with the train for St. Johns 
at port-aux-Basques. This train connects at Bay of Islands with the 
steamer which leaves there every Wednesday for Bonne bay and 
other ports on the west coast. 

Railroads.—The Newfoundland railroad extends trom St. Johns 
to harbor Grace and Carbonear in Conception bay, a distance of 
91 miles via Whitbourne junction; and from the latter station, which 
is 574 miles from St. Johns, there is a branch, 27 miles in length, to 
Placentia bay. 

The Northern and Western railroad, from Whitbourne, passes up 
the narrow neck of land, separating Trinity and Placentia bays, 
traverses Terra Nova, Gambo, and Gander valleys, and entering Ex- 
ploits valley at Norris arm, crosses Exploits river at 10 miles from its 
mouth. It then passes the northeastern end of Grand pond, and 
skirts the southern side of Deer pond and the southern shore of Hum- 
ber arm, as far as Birchy cove: thence it strikes inland toward and 
along the eastern side of St. George bay, at the back of Anguille 
range and down the valley of Codroy river to port aux Basque, dis- 
tant 5504 statute miles from St. Johns. 

There are also branches to Brigus, Tilton, and Burnt bay. 

In 1905 there were in operation in Newfoundland 638 miles of pub- 
he railroad of 3 feet 6 inches gauge, and 21 miles of private line. 

Telegraph.—In 1905 there were 2,079 miles of telegraph lines 
in the island, and 275 miles for telephone. All the principal ports 
are connected by land lines with St. Johns. 

Cable communication.—There are four submarine cables be- 
tween Ireland and Hearts Content, Newfoundland; one between 
France and St. Pierre island; three between Newfoundland and 
Cape Breton island, one between port aux Basques and Canso, and 
one between Belle isle and Chateau bay. 

The Anglo-American Cable Company has 48 stations in New- 
foundland. The head office is at Hearts Content, where the ends of 
six cables are brought up; four of the cables are from Valencia, Ire- 
land; one from New York, and one from North Sydney, Cape Breton 
island. The cable in communication with the United States touches 
at St. Pierre. This company is in connection with the Western 


Union Telegraph Company of the United States. 


49, GENERAL REMARKS. 


The office of the Great Northwestern Telegraph Company, of 
Canada, and postal system of the United Kingdom at Hearts Con- 
tent is exceedingly well fitted with all the latest instruments, and is 
in a very efficient condition. 

The Newfoundland postal telegraph follows the railroad from St. 
Johns to port aux Basques. It also runs from Bay of Islands to 
Bonne bay, and from Grand lake to Tilt cove, as well as direct to 
Canada. The head office is at Canso, Nova Scotia. One cable at 
Clarenville connects Bonavista bay; one at Come-by-chance connects 
stations in Placentia bay, and one in Gambo connects Notre Dame 
bay. This company is in connection with the Commercial Cable 
Company, Commercial Pacific, German Atlantic, Postal Telegraph 
Cable Company of the United States of America, Canadian Pacific 
Railway telegraphs, Halifax and Bermuda Cable, and Direct West 
India Cable Company. 

Marconi wireless telegraph stations have been established 
by the government of Canada at the following places as aids to navi- 
gation, and are operated for the Department of Marine and Fisheries 
by the Marconi Wireless Telegraph Company (Limited) : 

Cape Race lighthouse, call letter CE; cape Ray lighthouse, call let- 
ter CR; Rich point lighthouse, call letter TC; Amour point light- 
house, call letter PR; and about 50 yards northward of the old light- 
house, at the southern end of Belle isle, call letter BL. 

Vessels fitted with Marconi apparatus passing these stations can 
communicate with them, and messages are forwarded to their destina- 
tions at commercial rates. 

There are also wireless telegraph stations of the government of 
Newfoundland at Battle harbor, Venison tickle, American tickle, and 
Domino harbor. 

Roads.—In 1905 about 750 miles of postal roads and 1,700 mules 
of district roads were maintained in Newfoundland. 

Climate—Newfoundland.—The climate of the east coast of 
Newfoundland is influenced by the cold Arctic current, but the Gulf 
stream, although causing fog, modifies its effect, and the climate gen- 
erally is more temperate than that of the adjacent continent; in win- 
ter the thermometer seldom falls below zero, and in summer it rarely 
rises above 80° Fahrenheit. The arrival of spring is uncertain and 
tardy, and its duration is very short; summer begins almost immedi- 
ately, and vegetation advances rapidly. Summer is always delight- 
ful, and autumn, also fine, frequently reaches to November, while 
winter, setting in about the beginning of December, lasts until the 
middle of April, with snow lying almost continuously during that 
period. The salubrity of the climate is evidenced by the robust and. 
healthy appearance of the inhabitants. Open fireplaces are sufficient 
to warm the houses and free exercise in the open air is attainable at 
all seasons. 


CLIMATE—WINDS. | 43 


There is nothing in the climate to interfere with vegetation or 
agriculture. Flowering plants and ferns grow in great variety, and 
wild grasses and clover luxuriantly. Garden vegetables and berries 
are abundant. 

On the west coast the climate is much more genial than on the south 
and east coasts, and the vegetation is more abundant. In the interior 
the summer temperature is higher than that on the coasts. The aver- 
age rainfall is 58.3 inches. 

Labrador.—The climate ranges from cold temperate on the south- 
ern coasts to Arctic at Hudson strait, and.is generally so rigorous 
that it is very doubtful if the country is fit for agriculture northward 
of latitude 51° north, except on low grounds near the coast. There 
are two seasons in the interior; winter begins early in October, with 
the freezing of the small lakes, and lasts till the middle of June, when 
the ice on rivers and lakes melts and summer comes on suddenly. The 
lower temperature of the interior appears to range from 50° to 60° 
below zero; it is sughtly higher on the coast. The mean summer tem- 
perature in the interior is about 55°, with frosts every month in the 
northern portion. On the Atlantic coast the climate is extremely 
severe, the mean temperature of the year being below freezing point. 
At Chateau bay on the 25th of July, 1836, the earliest plants were 
springing up, and the grass was only just beginning to give a shade 
of green in sheltered spots between the hills. The temperature of the 
sea outside the bay was 32° and the air 43° in the warmest part of 
the day. 

On the outer coast vegetables only are raised with great difficulty, 
and rarely reach maturity, but at the heads of the deep inlets, vege- 
tables, flowers, and even cereals are grown. Snow fell in Indian 
harbor in July, August, and September, 1875. When the wind is 
trom seaward the temperature falls considerably during summer. 
Large patches of snow, about 5 feet deep, were lying in the valleys 
along the whole coast in the middle of July, 1875, and some of them 
had not disappeared when the first large fall of snow occurred in 
September. The mean temperature of the air for the coast between 
cape Poreupine and Nain was about 46° in July, 50° in August, and 
44° in September. 

See meteorological table, page 49. 

Winds—Newfoundland coast.— Westerly winds prevail through- 
out the year, but frequent and rapid changes, both in direction and 
force, are experienced on all parts of the Newfoundland coast. West- 
erly winds generally decrease in force at sunset, but when they con- 
tinue steadily until midnight the wind often changes to north- 
northeast the following morning. Winds between west and north 
are generally accompanied by clear weather. 


44 GENERAL REMARKS. 


Easterly winds are generally succeeded by southeasterly, which are 
accompanied by heavy rain. 

A southeasterly gale in summer usually blows itself out in that 
direction, but in autumn the wind veers suddenly to southwest and 
then to northwest, with undiminished force; these rapid changes 
should be prepared for. 

At the entrances of most of the harbors the wind is generally 
variable in direction, with frequent squalls, which at times are so 
heavy that great caution is necessary when approaching in a vessel 
under sail. 

In Belleisle strait the normal direction of the wind is either east- 
erly or westerly through the strait, notwithstanding the direction of 
the wind outside. From June to September, 1898, the prevailing 
direction of the wind was westerly. In September strong northerly 
and northwesterly winds were frequent with clear weather. From 
December to February winds between north and west prevail; they 
are squally and accompanied by snow; the changes to northeast or 
east, with more snow, or to southwest or south, with rain, are usually 
short. The following remarks will explain these changes. 

Meteorologically considered, the region under discussion occupies 
a unique position. In the first place, it hes immediately to the south- 
west of the area of constant low barometric pressure, which extends 
from Baffin bay on the west to Iceland on the east; in the second 
place, it lies immediately in the path followed by the centers of those 
temporary moving barometric depressions which originate in the 
interior of the North American continent and travel eastward with an 
irregular velocity until they either disappear by filling up or lose 
their identity by coming within the limits of the permanent low. As 
a consequence of the first condition, the barometric gradient or slope 
over the region being to the northeastward, the prevailing direction 
of the wind is to the west of northwest. As a consequence of the 
second condition, these prevailing winds are subject to constant 
interruption by the wind systems proper to the approach and passage 
of each of these temporary areas of low pressure, the wind at any 
station in advance of such an area invariably going to south or south- 
east, shifting to westward as the cyclonic center passes, the shifts 
taking place through the north (backing) if the point of observation 
lies to the north (left hand) of the storm track, through the south 
(veering) if it lies to the south (right hand) of this track. 

Along the coast of Newfoundland, the prevailing winds are thus 
from the westward, subject to interruption with the approach of 
each of these occasional low areas; and as these occur during the 
winter (November to April) with far greater frequency than dur- 
ing the summer (May to October), the winds of the latter season are 
the more uniform, both in force and direction. 


WINDS. 45 


The following table, compiled from the Monthly Weather Review 
of the Dominion Meteorological Service, gives for the months of 
January and July the average percentage of winds coming from 
each point of the compass at several stations throughout the island: 


| z ] 


Waves 
= 5 : 5 re) 
$ % = % a 
hese . | 3 S Gre Bs : 
S| | al on Meee Wied hae] asi |e 
be + BS NEP erat aL ES IN ea? Soo bs es 
LA | ee ee Ie ye ea al | 
| — | 
| | 
(January. . 5 23 18 7 8 14 5 16 10 0 
St.Johns.. ....-.---.+---+++ Waly He) og riGepee ea aleeemlmT sone tcteem teeta ee 0 
(January 3.1.) 10-4)» 16kh easel miten yEnc aryl Mesien ih has 3 
Geena erates Tuy =. CS ame ms ee LN Pile LON ala] er) hogar 
{January a | 4 31 4 7 2 10 5 33 0 
Cape Norman......-......-.. Waly. 31° Sh ie ee aan, Siena iimlids 0 
ae (Jariuarys.| |) 35) )/39:|, aot sdaletcoell easily a tenlaals 0 
Point Rich.......--..-....--- Vite] 1) 9] St) eT aoa ce eae’ bie 0 
(daruary..) (| 5 |: —9)| a4uh on) Bill ae) gael a6 0 
aaa Ce uly... -.| @) 6h) Po ease ita ee ee ort) ean eae 
} | 


The order of the weather changes during the approach of one of 
these barometric depressions is almost invariable. After a period 
of stationary barometer, accompanied by light winds, the mercury 
starts to fall, the wind goes to the eastward with rain or snow, and 
a period of thick, foggy weather sets in. About the time of lowest 
barometer the southeast wind shifts to the southwest and then to the 
northwest, blowing with storm force. The former shift is sometimes 
sudden, the first squall often coming with extra violence, and ship- 
masters lying off the coast should exercise corresponding watchful- 
ness. The rise of the barometer is accompanied by overcast, squally 
weather and storm winds from southwest to northwest. moderat- 
ing and clearing about the time the mercury attains its highest point. 

The following extract from the log of the St. Georgios I, off 
Cape Race, November 30—December 3, 1898, will serve to exemplify 
the character of the weather changes in the southern semicircle of 
one of these eastward-moving depressions. The Beaufort weather 
notation is employed throughout: 


| 
| ES Temper: 
Date (1898). | Hour. | Barents | | ature WwW oe 
Direction. Foree. | fair. | 
| Inches. ° 
4p.m. 29.54 | South-southeast ...-..- 7 50 | ° 
8 p.m. 29.30 | Bont aeuthenst Bit Sir 8 48 ie 
e 12 p.m. 29.10 | South-southeast -. .-.- 7 48 T 
November 30......--...-------. \ 4a.m.| 28.99 | South-southeast ._ |... 7 48 r 
| 8 a.m. 28.87 | South-southeast....--- 5 48 r 
9 a.m. PASM AL Ih Os Se I a Ee ey ae eed mers OV 2. 
'{ Noon. 29.10 | West-southwest ..-.-- 9 48 | Tr 
Wecemiberltrc-se yoacee so. 2 c= 8 p.m. 29.22 | West-southwest-....-- 10 46 o 
4a.m. 29.58 | West-southwest .... -- 10 46 | og 
'{ Noon. ZO OOMIMNVIEST Aart coccinea = one 10 46 | oq 
IDIesj00ll oy see See 8 p.m. 2OnSIN Wests: - noes oe seat cues 10 | 48 oq 
4a.m. 30.24 | West-northwest ..-.-- 8 | 43 | b 
DECEIMDPELS Renate cece Ss = Noon. S0h285 | Northwest. . 2 2202. 5. 46 | b 
| | 


46 GENERAL REMARKS. 


The easterly winds proper to the forward half of these depressions 
are accompanied by rain (or snow), which is liable to continue for 
twelve hours succeeding the time of lowest barometer. The north- 
west winds bring clear weather. 

On the east coast of Labrador westerly winds prevail during 
the navigable season (July to November); consequently the sea is 
then generally smooth, but easterly winds are preceded or followed 
by a heavy swell. Westerly winds generally lull at night, and strong 
breezes from any direction rarely last more than 12 hours before 
September, when easterly gales occasionally continue for two or 
three days. 

Strong northeasterly breezes often come suddenly without warning, 
lowering the temperature 5° to 10°; they generally last a short time, 
but are occasionally the prelude to easterly wind and fog. On dark 
days, with light breezes, ripples on the sea or fog rising to the north- 
eastward sometimes foretell the approach of these squalls, which are 
known to fishermen as northeast flurries. 

Thunderstorms occur at about the end of August or the early part 
of September, but warning is given of their approach by heavy clouds 
to the westward. 

Gales are stated to be frequent and very violent; they generally 
commence at northeast, veer gradually to southeast, and thence rap- 
idly through south, to west or northwest, in which direction they 
moderate. Occasionally they subside in the same direction at which 
they commenced. 

In Eclipse harbor, in July, a violent gale lasted 3 days; commenc- 
ing at southeast, it backed through north, to southwest; the gale 
extended some distance southward. 

Calms are of short duration, seldom lasting more than a day. 

See meteorological table, page 49. 

Fog.—The air which les over the Gulf stream, warm and moist, 
being mixed by varying winds with the cold atmosphere over the 
Arctic current, is chilled, and its moisture sometimes changes into 
rain or snow, but more frequently into the dense fog so constant on 
the Great bank, and on the south and southeast coasts of Newfound- 
land. 

Fog occurs on the coasts of Newfoundland and coast of Labrador 
throughout the year, but is most frequent during June and July; it 
is more prevalent on the south and east coasts than elsewhere, and 
seldom extends far inland. It almost constantly prevails with 
easterly winds; but it is not so frequent and is of short duration 
with westerly winds. 

There is said to be frequently a narrow passage of clear atmosphere 
between the fog bank and the land. 


FOG. 4 


Fog with easterly winds extends high above the sea, and can not be 
seen from the masthead of a vessel; occasionally the land or other 
objects can be distinguished at the distance of 4 mile in daylight. 
Fog in calms, especially after strong winds, is frequently so dense as 
to conceal a vessel within hail, but it is usually not of much height, 
so that objects at a distance of 50 yards, obscured from a person on 
deck, can be seen from some 50 feet up the rigging. Such fog occa- 
sionally lasts ten days. 

On the south coast fog is prevalent, especially between cape Race 
and St. Pierre island; during June and July it is frequently of long 
duration, the weather being clear only during northwesterly to north- 
erly winds. During southwesterly winds fog is generally very dense 
on the eastern side of Placentia bay, especially about the headland of 
cape St. Mary. 

On the east coast between cape Race and St. Johns harbor, fog 
generally clears as soon as the wind draws offshore; it is less frequent 
at St. Johns than farther south. In the vicinity of Trinity bay, fog 
prevails both with easterly and southwesterly winds. Northward of 
cape Bonavista, fog is not so frequent as on other portions of this 
coast. 

The fog on the south and east coasts of Newfoundland is of all 
kinds, from a dry fog to a wet drizzle, and there may be any sort of 
weather during fog. It may vary from calm to a whole gale, or from 
a clear sky overhead, with the sun breaking through at noon, to heavy 
rain, but these changes have no marked effect on the fog. Rain makes 
the most difference, as it partly clears the air and extends the view. 

On the west coast there is not much fog in June and July. 

In the strait of Belleisle dense fog prevails during summer, and 
sometimes lasts for several days at a time. From June to September, 
1898, thick fog was prevalent with either easterly or westerly winds. 
With westerly winds the fog commences to the westward and rolls 
gradually along the coast of Labrador, frequently extending only a 
short distance from it, so that toward the coast of Newfoundland it 
may then be clear. With easterly winds the fog is more general on 
both sides of the strait; it almost invariably clears first on the coast 
of Newfoundland. During a period of forty days in July and Au- 
gust, when simultaneous observations were made on both sides of the 
strait, fog, mist, etc., occurred on 60 per cent of the days on the 
Labrador side and on 40 per cent on the Newfoundland side. In 
September strong northerly and northwesterly winds were frequent 
with clear weather, and fog occurred only on about eight days. The 
fog clings closely to the water and the shore line; the summits of the 
Labrador hills may sometimes, though rarely, be seen over it from 
the masthead. 


48 GENERAL REMARKS. 


On the east coast of Labrador fog is not so frequent as on the coasts 
of Newfoundland. It prevails with winds from northeast, through 
east, to south, but is unusual with the wind from any other direction; 
it presents the same characteristics as those previously described. The 
dry dense fog with a southwesterly wind seldom extends northward 
of cape St. Lewis, where, when the wind is from that direction, the 
weather is clear, though a stream of thick fog may then issue from 
the strait of Belleisle. 

Caution.—When land is visible in foggy weather, estimations of 
distance are usually in excess of the correct distance. No reliance 
should be placed upon a position assumed from the distance at which 
the sound of surf breaking on a rocky shore was heard, but where 
steep cliffs form a characteristic of the coast, the proximity of a 
steamer to them may be detected by the echo of the whistle, although 
this can not be depended on; the only safe guide is the constant use 
of the lead. 

Fog signals.—It has been clearly established— 

(1) That fog signals sounded through the air are heard at greatly 

varying distances. 

(2) That under certain conditions of atmosphere, when a fog sig- 
nal is a combination of high and low tones, one of the notes 
may be inaudible. 

(3) That there are occasionally areas around a fog signal in which 
it is inaudible. Under certain conditions of the atmos- 
phere the sound may be lost at a very short distance from 
the station, and these conditions may vary within very short 
intervals of time. 

(4) That a fog may exist at a short distance from a station and 
not be observable from it, so that the signal is not sounded. 

(5) That some fog signals can not be started at a moment’s notice, 
although every endeavor is made to sound them as quickly 
as possible after signs of fog have been observed. 

Mariners are therefore warned that the lead should never be neg- 
lected. Particular attention should also be given as to placing look- 
out men in positions where the noises of the ship are least likely to 
interfere with the hearing of the sound of a fog signal, as experience 
shows that although such a signal may not be heard from the deck or 
bridge when the engines are moving, it may be heard when the ship 
is stopped, or from a quiet position. It may also be heard from 
aloft, though not from deck. 

It should also be noticed that distances from a fog signal should 
not be judged hy the power of the sound. (See Meterological table. 
p. 49.) 


49 


METEOROLOGICAL TABLE. 


ple eee: eee OU tee | ee UNE ae Se ES OS) -Shes OL 6z oF | ZG oe | csr | ot OF | "SuopPRArsqo ,sIVO. 
GIT | 12—| @6 | s8°8c | #8°08 | 8 | OF | OT | Se | BL | ee | 19 | 9% | cz | ee | OG | 6 z O&"€ | T6T| sees] 2 | 62 | 8°ZE | FGF | 9'°9T | G-OF | SF'Z | 26°6Z |* ~~ STeI0} pue suBOTT 
69 |%—| 99/0908] coe|e |S |t |e |2 |r |e jz |e |e}e¢|s |% jorzloc|e|2 | og! cz | ese | ort | esc | co-z| ogee [ects saqure09 
69 | ¢ 89 | @8°8Z | 69°0€ | F Pee ga (Pec cael lees | PaasleGonla Ge ie CusleGenl|=8 G Qe Sarl ne On| Has! eRe BROS. Os bya Ose leer [oey nee iti | MG GN OG easterly IoqwuaAON 
a9 | OL | 18 | r2"8o | GS0E | F | f |r |e |9 |e |F |e | I BS Oa I D4 | LA OS aa BEA ete eee ASA ese Sr || eldGig — je eeooeeee ce 100190 
62 | 96 | 8) Bec) ore |e |Z | 0 je |4 |e |g |e jejeje |e [Tt |eezler| zoe] 9 | 92 | oop | 2:29 | e-2t | 0-9 | 80°T | 66°62 |-7--- =~ ~woqutendag 
ION plete eo (ee-Ge es 08 | 7) E | T |e |k |e 1s |e |e |e.fe | 9 I OPT | iGlen SS EG5| 29s 9 G25 NGNOGR e160. leis: Site ems OOF|6OHO) (22 6).0Cee | emnenereesnns ysnsny 
BepeCeenieee| O0Gn, Sy 0S F/T 10 |e ise |¢ /2 ir je |e le 1 |e6-rler| to- | 9 | es | ter | c:69 | 0-02 | ec | 6e'T | S66 [tc Aime 
ee eegeeec ee ee ee Se 8 eS eee eS | opt Ph) go-e.| 9 (1'¢2 | ety PF 8*19 | e0z' re 'Tg | Cel 76 6a |teeeeteneeees aun 
Comeoteiele nOl-6c |-e0e) 8 8 1 T |1e | 2 12 bo ie |e |e is |e C6 OCT Fe eTOsea eZ SGV ale Gar Ge lGncce poise Ones me Crle 8 Ob Gye eases teem hey 
Gree ty on 8o 2808) 8 OT |S Oo by |e |e |e.) e 19 | 6 Z@ |orz|or\tge|2 | ee! euz| oer | eet lee | 191 | es'8e ccc tady 
Wena) 09)106°8e eR Ok | P19 | T Pe 19/8 |e 1s |r |e 19 | 8 G ERT AG ESTA ae Wye a Nei psa e@aaL Ib cetera || PASE Piststirg ee eeces oes yore 
8 | Ie | £9 | cese)120e|€ |9 |T |e |9 |e | |e |e |e ir 8 G OSSSN WAT PEOG rs Sah hes Oral zane: Os onlOsezelnGGic pCR GGe lees uaa euae Arensqay 
82 | 61—| 68 | 79°8z | 29°08 | © | 9 | T EW ae WIE | ee Ie PGS G G Pr 2 | SE} 29°9¢ | 4 | 18 | FOL | @:cS | LOL | sez SEO Cie | esas Seen Arenuvy 
o | o | o | Suz | ‘suzy | | “SU “SU O75 eae i 5 x suy | ‘sur 
— ———|— | Ss i- En Se S| ea | eel oe ele: alles a as: 
| | : : 
| Qa a Th!) wm ™ iss} 
SLE) BB S|) 2la8 Slee eek Bled Slee) as) 12/2) Sel 8) e | Ele) 2] # 
Bp le i | ele) Ese eee ise Sele | eH | SS lew To eB) sie) PK lee] Bl gh 8 
: a} 2 : lies Ge a ae (sy fe ele ou Pee fer | eal eter Bale Sx be 
a Bed le 2 BO) ae ule Bo ot ee as Biss Bo & | 
2 a a|a oe | & ele aes ; 5 ay fee 4 
ainposqy aynyposq y 3 iy —ulo1y Skep Jo 1aqmnN a | a te a ¢ sg E ueoW = B Ss “quo 
}" | | S| e =; 
| (eal ‘JOAR] BAS PUR 
‘omjelodulay, | *“Ieyeuroreg “PUTA uonRydperg 5 : -ainjeiedure J, ocf 0} poonpal 
| ® ‘To, aULOIe | 
| 


‘M Tt 69 buoT “N 18 oh MT VY “890 ‘punjpunofmay ‘suyor 19—aon] I 
‘SNOILVAUASHO SUVAX Gh OL Q WOUd GAMAWOD ATAV], TVOINOTONOLA 


~ . 


4 


76846—09 


GENERAL REMARKS. 


50 


} = 
EN a a ae ey pee eee RR ek ied anes Mo 
86 Lo— | TL | 0S'8Z | 69°0E | TT) POT; 0 | OS | 98 PE | GS | GE | io ry | GS | II ie NAG 6986 | 2 Neen On9G|kG6 LTE | 607% | 68 66 
19 | 16@— | OF | G$6"82 | 9°08 | OOM 22 (9 il (GTS fee all CONE ¥ P Oh eg Ieye SSeG: Gia|eSimLG | Ons C'CT | 89°T | 62°66 
HS) | 9)— | Sr | 88 8c | 99708) OL | 241 | 0 Te Wh!) (|| G G yr |? OL y i OL ‘T My, tes |} rats te te} I°LZ | 89°T | S866 
OF LT ZG | LL86 | 8S°0€ | €1 | ST | 0 Ces ¥ if SG WR OE PZ 6 See | ee =| GPE | 8 IF | Oz 6°48 | I8‘T | 16°64 
6& | 66 89 | 82°82 | 99°08 | GL} 11/0 | F% | OL) F G @ NG (Shei?) WU 14 Lat CLG L = Str |S 1S O10L a OR | Sze) eG 
OF 1€ TZ | 8260 | OS OE | ST} 2 |0 | 8 i (Se lei & © AlN) § It | 96 °S L = | L°ly | 8S | LOT | co | GET 
8& | & OL | 2°62 | ZS °0€ | 61 | 8 Oy | Oilers G CG Haare. 6 § ial | 90°L | 8 — | G'Sr | 0°99 | 8 ‘OT | $09 | ET 
LY | 69 | 11 ’6Z | 69°0€ | &T | OT | O [Caer T G G G (Sy A Pe € al OFF Ih — | 168 | 88h | 246 | F&F | 8h T 
LY al 6S |; G6°8Z | GS'0€ | OL | &L | O Pe ied G G ¢ |& ze ¥ | 6 16% L = |e GielG mh nOP lass: 6 "Pe | 249° T 
99 | O[— | 9S | 16°82 | 6908 | 9 Sei) F 9 T I G 1 sol See ee 14 | 9 161 L sR G Gu OrGoul ml Obe | aeecallieod ial 
Soe eS — On OsesonleRouOSe | GF G0 10) iar Li tStall ts € € i v Il Gg | ¢ 9F G L SeaOMSIG RC ao Guile nO, P61 | 86 T 
Gg | 93— | 68 | 09°82 | ZG °0E | 9 eye eC) Here id (oe v6 € £ 17 OP UT v ln TE 105/39 = NeliGh el 0G ORS LEG \eeOr 
De) PE IE OSE LOOSE ea | OE 2 ICTS NS Se rs ce ete I sit! ¢ G 870 | 9 —iled svar we aviLu LOMOL Neuse ee nGi (2: 
4 _ "sur | “sur “Sur Z z = . | sur | str 
2 2 en ewes Wea cen |e is eS eee ee rer 
Paces eee eho a aiiae ees le eae ale |e | Ss eee Oe | Bye 
B| BP lk] B Pace ees Greet ever ies (ba Cea ah eae Pal Bes |e ey lee | OR NE |e ears mae Pie 4 
TR : : ‘ ol/o|P 4G 4/48) Bite Titg Sg |Ee°| 4 ° 2 al > : : o& B 9 B 
@ Ld Si) 1 || 3 7 mlb OP) an | pee ae n aI BB : Bw > 
Bee seed || =| hy afovi, | mesa eas al raemslics Sl oe | Sellen We Serta a 5} Ne R ga = 
| Atal lee Ea eevee eee Bee] en @ ON sie 
‘aynjosqy ‘aynjosqy | @ | & —mo1y sXep Jo 1eqwuN eee eS] sz Sal & =a B 3 
S| 3 el] 5 a8] 5 Be iS 
= = oq | 2 3 = | 
a) 8 | | & | 
; | pelicectial *[BAQ] BOS PUB 
‘amyeieduay, | “leyeurore “pur “UR YY B| ‘aimyRied ua J, Ze 0) poonpoer 
e | B ‘ToL OULOI’ | 
. 


Taq ULede(T 
Iaq(ULaAON 
Eo Sanevesisivies 19qo1O 
preniag Sik Sqsinge JIaqureydeg 
PoveS Siig Sis! eheie russ qsnsny 
eet eee eet eee wee ses Ajnge 


ArenIgeay 
Scare ee Arenuesr 


“QUO 


M 6 09 “bu0T “'N 89 Io WT VY "890 


“aps a]]2] — 900] 


‘SNOILVAUASAO SUVA CGT 0} 4 WOU GUANO!) ATAV], TVOIDOTONOALAW, 


SUBMARINE BELLS—CURRENTS. 51 


Submarine bells.—These may be placed in the following posi- 
tions: (1) Light-vessels, (2) buoys, where they are worked by the 
motion of the sea, and (3) on the sea bottom, where they are con- 
trolled electrically from shore stations. Their effective range far ex- 
ceeds that of aerial sound signals, having been known to exceed 15 
miles; and their bearing can be determined with sufficient accuracy 
for safe navigation in a fog, if a vessel is equipped with telephonic 
receivers. Even should a vessel not be so equipped, the submarine bell 
can be heard from below the water line for distances that are well out- 
side the range of aerial fog signals, though its bearing can not then be 
so well determined. 

Currents—Gulf stream.—The Gulf stream, after running north- 
ward and northeastward off the coast of the United States, turns 
more decidedly to the eastward between the parallels of 35° and 40° 
N. latitude, and passes southward of the Great bank of Newfound- 
land during winter, but extends over the southern end of that bank 
during summer. It thus has an oscillatory motion, and it spreads out 
into streaks, which sway about in their course and are of warm and 
colder water, so that it is impossible to assign any definite limits to 
its margins. 

The rate of the Gulf stream southward of the Great Bank of New- 
-foundland is very variable, but it generally is from 10 to 35 miles 
a day. 

Arctic current.—The cold Arctic or Labrador current sets south- 
ward from the Arctic ocean and Baffin bay and passes through Davis 
strait and along the coast of Labrador and the east coast of New- 
foundland. Itis very much influenced near the land by the winds and 
reaches its greatest rate after those from the northward. 

A cold current also sets southwestward along the east coast of 
Greenland, and abreast Labrador these currents appear to extend east- 
ward to longitude 40° W. ‘The line of meeting of the southgoing 
currents with the northern edge of the Gulf stream is nearly always 
marked by rips. 

Northward of 50° N. latitude detailed information on currents is 
very scanty. The movement of the water appears to be principally 
due to wind and to be very slight, except the currents along the east 
coasts of Greenland and Labrador, which are known to be practically 
permanent and of considerable strength. 

In the offing of the coast of Labrador the average rate of the cur- 
rent. 1s said to be about 6 miles a day, but off some of the headlands 
its rate reaches 2 miles an hour and possibly more. The Arctic cur- 
rent does not attain any great rate within some 25 miles from the 
coast between cape Bonavista and Cape Spear; it appears to skirt the 
northern side of Fogo islands and extends out to Funk island, thence 
turning southward; it often binds the field ice into Notre Dame and 
Bonavista bays and the mouth of Trinity bay. 


52 GENERAL REMARKS. 


A current, setting southeastward, splits about 2 miles off Fogo 
head, the main branch running close along the northern coast of Fogo 
island, and amongst the rocks and islands around it, from $ to 13 
miles an hour. It is much influenced by wind, being accelerated by 
northerly and retarded by southerly winds, while before easterly 
gales it sometimes runs northwestward. This current, after passing 
Round head, takes the direction of the coast and is. influenced by the 
tidal stream, the ebb accelerating and the flood retarding it, and occa- 
sionally, at springs, stopping its southerly course entirely. 

The western branch of this current runs between Change and Fogo 
islands at the rate of about $ mile an hour, but is lost before arriving 
at Stag Harbor tickle. 

For about 30 to 40 miles off the coast between cape Spear and cape 
Race, the current sets very constantly southward, with a greatest 
observed rate of 14, miles an hour. It occupies the gully or deep 
channel over Great bank southeastward of the coast. It is not un- 
usual, however, for this current to be so disturbed as to set southeast- 
ward, or even to be reversed on the surface. When such disturbance 
occurs it is usually for a short time immediately before a gale 
comes on. 

When the current sets strongly southward along the coast between 
cape St. Francis and cape Race a strong eddy runs northward for 
about one mile offshore southward of cape Spear. This should be 
remembered by ships bound to St. Johns. 

On the south coast of Newfoundland.—The Arctic current 
southeastward of cape Race usually turns west-southwestward, occa- 
sionally at a rae of nearly 1 mile an hour; but it may be reversed 
or set in other directions in unsettled weather; near the shore, in 
moderate weather, its direction changes with the wind. 

Westward of cape Race, the current frequently sets northwestward, 
at the rate of about one mile an hour in the offing, but it is variable 
in rate and direction, and affected greatly by the prevailing wind. 
It generally runs in upon the eastern side of the great bays indenting — 
the south coast of Newfoundland, and out on their western side.. In 
the offing it is influenced by the winds, and near the shore by the tidal 
streams. 

It was found, between May and September, 1903, that at a distance 
of over 5 miles from the land no current at any time exceeded 1 mile 
an hour in any direction. Within about 5 miles from the land the 
current was chiefly tidal and set in two opposite directions alter- 
nately, but the farther from the land the greater the tendency for the 
direction of the current to veer through a complete circle. The water 
sets northwestward on the whole along the south coast from cape 
Race toward Placentia bay; that is to say, when a long average is 
taken, the set is more frequently in that direction than in any other. 


CURRENTS. 53 


The water makes inwards at certain times of the tide on the eastern 
side of St. Marys bay, and inwards as a whole on the eastern side of 
Placentia bay; the rate of these indrafts does not exceed 1 mile 
an hour at a distance of 5 miles from the land, but close to the head- 
lands the rate of the streams may be greater. 

On the south coast of Newfoundland, between St. Pierre island 
and cape Ray, the current usually sets northwestward and passes 
round cape Ray into the gulf, but it is not constant. 

Many wrecks have occurred in fog, on the southeast and south 
coasts of Newfoundland, owing to the indraught, or to the current 
temporarily setting northeastward. 

On the eastern edge of the Great bank the currents are very 
variable. 

On the Great bank the ordinary set of the current is southwest- 
ward, but it is by no means unusual for the current to set northeast- 
ward, and sometimes it is very variable. 

During south to southwesterly winds there may be a strong north- 
erly set; this may be still stronger during and after northeasterly 
winds. 

A southerly current has at times been experienced on the above 
banks, but it 1s exceptional. 

Caution.—Mariners approaching Newfoundland in thick weather 
should use the lead and proceed with caution, as it is impossible to 
foretell what current they may have experienced or be experiencing. 

Sailing vessels should keep a good offing on the south coast of New- 
foundland, as the wind often falls light near it, and the drift of the 
sea and current are nearly toward the land, especially near Placentia 
and St. Mary’s bays. 

In Cabot strait.—In ordinary weather the northwest current is 
felt for a width of 10 to 15 miles from cape Ray, or even farther. 
In August at 13 miles westward of that cape its rate varied from 4 
mile to 14 miles an hour; but this current is by no means constant. 

On the western side of Cabot strait to about 12 miles eastward of 
St. Paul island, there is a fairly constant current setting between 
south and southeast; its rate is usually from 4 mile to 14 miles an 
hour, but after a strong northwesterly wind it has reached a rate of 
24 miles. It may, also, be checked or reversed for a few days at a time 
by strong southeasterly winds. Its greatest rate is off cape North, 
where it may be as much as 2 miles an hour in ordinary weather. 
Sometimes it extends nearly across the strait. 

This current continues to be felt along the eastern coast of cape 
Breton island, sometimes as far as Scatari island. It is probably 
affected by the tidal streams, accelerated by the ebb, and retarded by 
the flood. 


54 GENERAL REMARKS. 


In the middle of Cabot strait the current is variable and usually 
weak. 

On the west coast of Newfoundland.—The rate of the current 
in most of the open area of the gulf of St. Lawrence seldom exceeds 
1 mile an hour; its direction, therefore, is very variable, being easily 
affected by strong winds, and on this account it is necessary to exercise 
caution in navigation. 

Generally on the west coast of Newfoundland, the current sets 
northeastward; it is scarcely appreciable from cape St. George to 
bay of Islands, but thence to Rich point it may be considered con- 
stant, with a rate of about 1 mile an hour; it is stroriger near this 
land than farther out, and in the vicinity of bays and inlets the cur- 
rent is deflected by the inset and outset of the tidal streams. It is 
stronger than usual before a southwesterly wind commences, but a 
strong northeasterly wind causes it to slacken and even turn south- 
westward. 

In the area between a line drawn from Rich point northward to 
Eskimo islands and the western end of Belleisle strait, the currents 
are variable and uncertain, being intermediate between the above cur- 
rent and the tidal streams of the strait. In the western part of this 
area the rate is usually less than 1 mile and rarely over 14 miles, but 
towards the entrance of the strait it increases. A current sometimes 
sets southeastward from the vicinity of Greenly island and sets 
strongly on shore about Flower cove. 

In Belleisle strait.—The movement of the water in Belleisle 
strait is tidal (see p. 55), but a strong wind through the strait either 
way makes a drift, which causes the opposing tidal stream to slacken, 
and eventually overcomes it altogether; a continuous current then 
runs in the direction towards which the wind is blowing, but its rate 
increases or decreases according as the tidal stream is with it or 
against 1t. This appears to take place earlier on the Labrador side 
of the strait than on the Newfoundland side, which is more under 
tidal influence. (See also p. 641.) 

The general Arctic current setting southward past the Atlantic 
mouth of the strait is influenced by the tidal inflow and outflow of 
the strait itself; the greater inflow towards the strait takes place on 
the northern side of the entrance and the greater outflow on the 
southern side. 

Tides.—The range of spring tides on the coasts of Newfoundland, 
and also on the coast of Labrador northward to Eclipse harbor, near 
cape Chidley, is from 4 to 7 feet. 

Tidal streams.—On the south coast of Newfoundland the 
tidal streams are very variable, changing with the locality and inffu- 
enced generally, both in direction and rate, by the prevailing winds 
of several preceding days. Between St. Lawrence and Lamalin har- 


TIDAL STREAMS. 55 


bors the flood generally runs southwestward; on the southern side of 
Fortune bay, eastward; and on the northern side of the same bay, 
westward. Between cape la Hune and cape Ray the flood runs west- 
ward irregularly, and continues 2 to 3 hours after high water on the 
shore. At cape Ray this stream is very variable, generally setting 
into the gulf of St. Lawrence, and sometimes attaining a rate of 2 
knots an hour within a short distance of the cape. 

Between St. Pierre and cape Ray the tidal streams are felt from 
10 to 15 miles off the coast, and westward of Penguin islands the flood 
runs west-northwestward, and the ebb east-southeastward. 

While the stream inshore is running in one direction, it sometimes 
happens that it is going in the opposite direction at 5 to 6 miles from 
the land. Vessels beating into the gulf of St. Lawrence would do well 
to try both streams before making a long stretch seaward. 

On the west coast the flood stream runs generally southwestward 
and the ebb northeastward. 

On the east coast the flood stream sets northeastward and retards 
the current usually setting southwestward, the ebb stream setting 
southwestward accelerates it. 

In Belleisle strait.—When uninfluenced by wind the stream in 
the strait runs east and west for nearly equal periods, and turns regu- 
larly in accordance with the rise and fall of the tide. (See p. 641.) 
On the whole the westerly, or inward, flow seems to be slightly greater 
than the outward flow. 

Tt appears, as yet, impossible to predict with accuracy the direc- 
tion of the streams in the strait, but under normal conditions the 
westerly stream begins about 4 hours before high water at Forteau 
bay, and the easterly stream about 24 hours after high water there; 
the streams turn in the direction of the hands of a watch, The ordi- 
nary rate during the strength of the streams is 1 to 2 knots an hour, 
but the greatest rates observed have been, of the westerly stream, 34 
knots, and of the easterly 24 knots. Both their rates and directions 
are greatly affected by any strong winds blowing at the time, or just 
previously. 

On the Labrador side the westerly stream predominates, especially 
towards the eastern end of the strait and near the shore, where it is 
so strong at times as to prevent fishermen hauling their nets. 

On the Newfoundland side towards cape Norman, the reverse ap- 
pears to be the case. Certainly there is more slack water in that 
locality than on the Labrador coast. The easterly stream runs round 
cape Norman with considerable strength, while the westerly stream 
is comparatively weak. The streams do not always run fairly 
through the strait, and with both the easterly and the westerly there 
is an indraft towards Cook and Pistolet bays. 


56 GENERAL REMARKS. 


East coast of Labrador.—Near this coast, as a rule, the flood 
stream runs northward and the ebb southward, following the coast. 
line and rarely attaining a rate of $ knot an hour. 

Temperature of the sea.—The temperature of the water from 
off St. Johns to the mouth of Placentia bay at the depth of 30 fath- 
oms is practically at freezing point. It varied only from 304° to 34° 
Fahrenheit, and there was no change from one month to another 
between May and September, 1903. The water of the Arctic current 
becomes quite as warm on the surface as the surface water elsewhere 
in this region. The general increase in the surface temperature 
along the south coast from Trepassey to St. Pierre was from 364° 
in May to 50° in September; and the surface temperature of the 
Arctic current rose from an average of 343° at the end of May to 50° 
at the middle of August. It has been observed that during strong 
winds, especially when offshore, the surface water is driven out to 
the offing and the cold water comes to the surface from underneath. 

In the navigable season the surface temperature of the southeast- 
erly current in Cabot strait is from 55° to 65°, and the water has a 
distinctly brown color. At that time this outgoing current is much 
warmer than the ingoing current on the opposite side of the strait, © 
although it is not so at all other times of the year. The color of the 
water in the strait, except that of the southeasterly current, is the 
milky green of ordinary sea water. 

In the gulf of St. Lawrence the surface temperature in summer 
usually ranges from about 50° to 65°. This temperature gradually 
falls below the surface until, at a depth of 40 to 50 fathoms, it is 
31° to 34°, or practically at the freezing point. In parts of the gulf 
where there is deeper water the water at greater depths is appre- 
ciably warmer, rising to 38° and 41° in depths of 100 to 200 fathoms. 

In Belleisle strait the surface temperature is relatively lower than 
that in the gulf, and it is very cold. On the Newfoundland side it 
seldom falls below 50° during the navigable season. It is generally 
warmer on this side than on the northern side, and a difference of as 
much as 20° has been observed. When flowing inward the average 
temperature of the water from top to bottom is under 45° in Sep- 
tember. The temperature of the sea in the strait does not afford 
any definite indication either of the direction of the stream or of the 
proximity of ice. 

In August, 1898, at about 4 miles southward of Black bay, a heavy 
tide rip extended across the strait northwestward and southeastward ; 
the temperatures of the surface water on either side of the rip within 
about a cable of each other were 35° on its eastern side and 48° on its 
western side. Eastward of the rip the stream was running weakly 
westward, and westward of it at the rate of 2 knots eastward. One 


ICE. 57 


hour afterwards at 5 miles to the westward the temperature was 58°, 
and it continued between 58° and 60° for 100 miles down the west 
coast of Newfoundland. The water in the strait is very clear. 

Ice.—Vessels crossing the Atlantic from Europe to Newfoundland 
and the Gulf of St. Lawrence, and to New York, are liable to encoun- 
ter icebergs or extensive fields of solid compact ice, which are carried 
southward by the Arctic current, and probably also by the current 
setting southwestward and southward between Iceland and Green- 
land. B. A. Chart No. 2058 shows the usual limits within which 
both field ice and icebergs may be met with, and where it should be 
looked out for at all seasons, but especially from April to August, 
both inclusive. It must, however, be borne in mind that in some 
years ice has been met outside the limits given on this chart. Ice- 
bergs have been seen throughout the year northward of the parallel 
of 43° north latitude, but not often so far south after August. 

The southern and eastern limits of field ice are about latitude 42° 
north and longitude 45° west, but icebergs have been met much far- 
ther from Newfoundland; in April, May, and June they have been 
seen as far south as latitude 39° north, and as far east as longitude 
38° 30’ west, whilst in July and August their limits appear to be 
about latitude 41° north, and longitude 38° west. Heavy floes cover- 
ing extensive areas and three icebergs were seen at 120 miles off St. 
Johns in January, 1905. There are exceptional instances on record 
of icebergs having been seen within 60 miles of Corvo island, and 
an iceberg has been met with in latitude 36° 10’ north, longitude 39° 
west. 

It is impossible to give, within the outer limits named, any idea 
of where ice may be expected, and no rule can be laid down to insure 
safe navigation, as the position and quantity of ice differ greatly in 
different seasons. 

On the Great bank of Newfoundland bergs often move southward 
or southeastward; those that drift westward of cape Race usually 
pass between Green and St. Pierre banks. The Virgin rocks are 
generally surrounded by ice until the middle of April or beginning 
of May. 

The North Atlantic icebergs are sometimes over 200 feet in height 
and of considerable extent. 

The ice formed in the Arctic, borne southward by the current 
from Baffin bay, blocks the harbors along the coast of Labrador, and 
the east coast of Newfoundland, commencing at the northern part of 
Labrador in October, and reaching cape Race about the end of Janu- 
ary. The west and south coasts of Newfoundland are not affected by 
this drift ice, excepting that some small portion passes into and blocks 
the strait of Belleisle; and that a prevalence of easterly wind between 
December and May sometimes carries this ice westward of cape Race 


58 GENERAL REMARKS. 


along the south coast of Newfoundland. It occasionally reaches St. 
Pierre, but no ice was sighted from that island after the middle of 
April during the seven years 1889-1895. With easterly winds the field 
ice and icebergs may block the harbors on the east coast of Newfound- 
land until June or even July, but they are usually open in May; in 
fact, icebergs, not only those derived from Baffin bay, but also those 
from eastward of Greenland, may be met with at all seasons of the 
year. Six icebergs were passed at 15 miles eastward of cape Bauld 
at the beginning of August, 1905. 

The first of the floating ice to make its appearance upon the coast 
is what is known as the “ white” or “northern slob.” This white 
slob is the surface ice which is formed to the north and east of Labra- 
dor during the early winter months, and is crushed up by the wind 
and sea and built upon as it journeys south. It is usually found in 
masses several miles in extent and varying from 3 to 10 feet in 
thickness. 

The main body of the slob is brought down from the north by the 
Labrador current and continues along the coast, filling the harbors 
and bays of Newfoundland as it advances. From the lookout of 
Aillik, on the coast of Labrador, in latitude 55°, the northern slob is 
observed each year about the 10th of December as a narrow stream, 
5 to 8 miles in width, moving southward. This body gradually widens 
until January, and it may then be 12 to 15 miles in width. About the 
first or second week in January the sheet ice begins to take the place 
of the slob and continues to flow southward in the same manner. It is 
more dense and solid than the slob, but not so thick, except in places 
where rafting has taken place, and here it may stand from 5 to 20 
feet above the water. Isolated bergs are also seen about this time. 

The arrival of the slob at St. Johns may be expected from January 
15 to February 1. It is often seen 5 to 15 miles distant, drifting to the 
south, for days before it closes in to the shore or obstructs navigation, 
and vessels ill adapted for contending with ice have frequently 
reached St. Johns by rounding the southern tail and approaching 
cape Race from the southwest. The breadth of the early slob passing 
cape Spear varies in January from 40 to 60 miles, but it rapidly in- 
creases. For February the average is 80 to 130 miles. This, however, 
is far exceeded in seasons of heavy sheds, when a breadth of 250 to 
300 miles is often attained, carrying the ice as far east as 45° west. 
This extreme breadth is, however, by no means uniform, as the ice, 
having little depth, is blown along by the wind, and the eastern edge 
of the main body is deeply indented by bays.and prolonged by capes. 
The main body of the ice itself is intersected by leads and open areas, 
and is compact or loose according to the direction of the wind, easterly 
winds (northeast to south-southeast) serving to unite the ice and to 


ICE. 59 


drive it in a solid mass upon the Newfoundland coast, filling Notre 
Dame, Bonavista, and Trinity bays so that no water can be seen; west- 
erly winds, especially southwesterly, serving to disperse it, a single 
night of the latter wind often emptying the bays and carrying the 
stream out of sight to seaward. Between the end of March and the 
middle of April during ordinary years the ice swings off to the east- 
ward, owing to the failure of accessions from the north and the in- 
creasing prevalence of westerly winds. After this date strings of 
field ice may at times be seen making their way down the coast, occa- 
sionally in May and rarely in June. These, however, are for the most 
part derived from Trinity bay and Bonavista bay, and are not part 
of the regular northern stream. 

The drift of the ice southward from the Arctic has been traced by 
actual experience. On October 14, 1871, Captain Tyson and a party 
of nineteen others were separated from the U.S. S. Polaris in latitude 
77° or 78° north, just south of Littleton island. Unable to regain 
their ship, the whole party remained on the floe and accomplished one 
of the most wonderful journeys on record. After a drift of over 1,500 
miles, fraught with danger and privation, they were finally rescued 
April 30, 1872, by the sealing steamer Tigress, near the strait of 
Belleisle, in latitude 53° 35’ north, and carried safely into port. No 
better example than this could be given of the drift from the Arctic 
basin, illustrating, as it does, not only the journey to the southward, 
but also the many vicissitudes to which the ice is subjected before 
reaching a low latitude. 

The fields of ice encountered to the eastward of the Great bank 
are generally detached masses, due either to a temporary diversion 
of the stream or to the separation of fields of limited area from the 
main body, the primary cause in both cases being the prevalence of 
heavy westerly gales. During February these detached fields are 
reported most frequently north of the 45th parallel, and between the 
meridians of 46° and 49°. The quantity of this early ice depends, 
to a large extent, upon the character of the early winter months 
in the higher latitudes in which the slob is formed. If November 
and December are mild, the quantity will be shght; the quantity of 
bergs, or true Greenland ice, reported during the following spring 
and summer is, on the other hand, quite independent of the severity 
of the winter. 

The destruction or wasting away of the slob and field ice in short 
periods is very remarkable; and it appears to melt away very rapidly 
after April. A vessel may be beset in the evening, and by morning 
all the ice will have disappeared. The ice in strings forms an excel- 
lent shelter for vessels hove to in a gale, and is constantly used for 
this purpose, but these breakwaters may be crushed up and destroyed 
in a single night. 


60 GENERAL REMARKS. 


After the month of May, heavy bodies of northern or Arctic ice 
are seen moving to the southward every year, sometimes as late as 
the end of August. It is variable in quantity and breadth, but forms 
a constant obstruction from Indian tickle, on the coast of Labrador, 
to the Fogo islands. The stream generally breaks in July. 

The bergs which follow the slob and field ice are detached por- 
tions of the true polar ice, which is formed upon the land, and car- 
ried down to the sea by glacial action. The glaciers perform for 
these frigid regions the same function as that performed by the rivers 
of the temperate latitudes by serving to distribute the excess precipi- 
tation. From the frozen interior of the Arctic continent these rivers 
of ice make their way through valley and gorge to the shores of 
the ocean, and even beyond; the face of the glacier being thrust 
forward into the sea by the enormous pressure in the rear until the 
buoyant effect of the water upon the submerged portion is sufficient 
to detach it from the main body, and the huge fragment becomes 
a floating island or mountain of ice, which is borne away by the 
prevailing currents. 

The thawing process alone, occasioned by the increased tempera- 
ture of air and water during the polar summer, would scarcely suf- 
fice to reduce these enormous masses of ice to the size usually ob- 
served. Their disintegration is brought about ordinarily from within. 
Even in its original condition the surface of the glacier ice is wrinkled 
with chasm and crevasse, penetrating more or less deeply into its 
interior. The deepest of these depressions collect the water due to 
the melting of the upper part of the berg until they overflow; a fall 
in temperature occurs, the surface of this water, and later its entire 
volume, is converted into ice, and by the tremendous expansive force 
of this change the mass of the berg is shattered. 

Once beyond the limits of the polar regions, the process of dissolu- 
tion is rapid. The berg, always heated upon its southern side, is in 
unstable equilibrium, and by reason of its frequent topplings, con- 
stantly exposes a new surface to the action of the sun’s rays. Under 
these conditions its ultimate annihilation is a matter of a compara- 
tively short time. 

The icebergs seen off the Great bank are of such extent and occur in 
such numbers as to constitute, with their attendant fogs, the most 
dangerous of all the obstacles with which the navigator of the North 
Atlantic has to contend. Their frequency im different years varies 
in a wholly inexplicable manner, certain seasons being notable for 
their extraordinary abundance, while in others the number observed 
is far below the average. June is the month during which they are 
most numerous along the transatlantic route. 

The phenomena of the drifting of the bergs to the limits mentioned 
above have been attributed to the warm waters of the Gulf stream 


ICE. . 61 


overrunning the cold Arctic current, while the latter, retaining its 
progress and direction as a submarine current, transports the deeply 
immersed ice islands into and across the Gulf stream. 

The season during which vessels are hable to encounter ice on the 
voyage between the Channel and the gulf of St. Lawrence and the 
northern ports of the United States thus extends from February to 
August, the reports reaching a maximum frequency during June and 
July. Isolated bergs, however, may be sighted at any time, and con- 
sequently a good lookout is always necessary. 

Vessels bound to the gulf of St. Lawrence or Halifax either en- 
deavor to make cape Race by passing north of the Virgin rocks, or, in 
order to avoid the ice, cross the Great bank on the parallel of 44° 
north, hauling up on their proper course when past longitude 55° 
west, as heavy ice is seldom seen to the westward of that meridian. 

The vicinity of St. Pierre, Miquelon, is generally free from ice after 
the middle of April, and sometimes during the whole year. 

On the Atlantic coast of Labrador the larger bays freeze solid be- 
tween December 1st and 15th, and these coasts remain icebound until 
late in June. 

Every sheltered harbor in Labrador and Newfoundland is lable to 
be frozen over each winter; the harbors farthest northward being 
blocked earlier and opened later than those to the southward. The 
usual time of freezing is, in Labrador, November, and in the south of 
Newfoundland the middle of January; whilst the time of the ice 
breaking up is, in Labrador, the end of June, and in the south of 
Newfoundland the middle of April. Intermediate ports vary in time 
according to position. The times of freezing and opening vary 
greatly in different years, depending on the severity or comparative 
mildness of the winter. 

Mention is made in this book, in the description of each particular 
place, of the dates observed of the earliest and latest closings and 
openings of each port. St. Johns harbor is, however, not often 
frozen over in winter and is accessible at all seasons, except when the 
prevalence of easterly winds, in early spring, drives heavy field ice 
upon the coast; and at times (even as late as August) when icebergs 
drift into the narrows and render the passage dangerous. 

Cabot strait is never frozen completely over, but vessels, not 
specially built to encounter ice, can not navigate it safely between 
January and April inclusive, on account of the heavy drift ice which 
blocks the strait, more especially when the ice forms the Bridge. 
Sealing steamers attempt it at all times, but are occasionally fast in 
the ice for days together; there is often difficulty in getting through 
the inner part of the strait. 

The Bridge.— Nearly every year, in the spring, or from about the 
middle of April to the middle of May, a great rush of ice out of the 


62 GENERAL REMARKS. 


gulf of St. Lawrence causes a block between St. Paul island and cape 
Ray; this block, which sometimes lasts for three weeks and completely 
prevents the passage of ships, is known as the “ Bridge.” It is re- 
corded that 300 vessels have at one time been detained by this obsta- 
cle, and many wrecks have occurred in consequence, on the coast of 
Newfoundland. 

Ice from the gulf is generally met with in Cabot strait early in 
January; at this time it is thin, but it increases gradually to as much 
as 4 feet in thickness; occasionally small bergs, some 18 feet in height, 
are seen, although a large berg is seldom visible; ice may be said to 
flow through till May, or even till the beginning of June, according 
to the season. 

A prevalence of northwesterly and northerly winds drives the ice 
toward the strait and along the west coast of Cape Breton island, 
when incoming vessels meet no ice except southwestward of St. Paul 
island. A southwesterly gale occasionally takes the ice out between 
the Magdalen islands and Cape Breton island, when it meets the main 
body flowing past Bird rocks, and closes the strait between St. Paul 
island and cape Anguille. Winds between northeast and south open 
the Newfoundland coast; and the strait often clears quickly with 
winds between northwest and northeast, so that in about thirty-six 
hours very little ice may be visible from cape Ray, but quantities of 
ice pass through for many days after navigation is open, particularly 
with northerly winds. 

The ice usually passes out of the strait in the direction of Ban- 
quereau bank, the eastern edge extending halfway between Scatari 
and St. Pierre island. Its path broadens when through the strait, 
and is principally governed by the winds, but under the influence of 
the current alone the ice drifts southwestward, and in latitude 45° 
north may be from 10 to 75 miles in width. Much of this is very 
heavy, and prevents the passage through it of all vessels not specially 
built to encounter ice. The coast between cape North and Scatari 
often holds the ice, during easterly winds, until late in May. 

Gulf of St. Lawrence and west coast of Newfoundland.— 
During spring and autumn the navigation of the gulf is rendered 
difficult by ice, and navigation is entirely closed during the winter. 
In spring, generally until May, and sometimes early in June, parts 
of the gulf are usually covered with drift ice, and vessels are some- 
times beset in it for many days; if unprepared for meeting ice they 
often suffer from it and are occasionally lost, but serious accidents 
from this cause do not frequently occur, as the ice is then generally 
more or less in a melting state from the effect of the sun and warmer 
winds. In autumn, accidents from ice seldom happen, except when 
winter commences unusually early, or when vessels have lingered 
imprudently late. 


ICE—BELLEISLE STRAIT. 63 


The ice forms in the gulf early in December, and being joined by 
that from the river, is carried by the current toward Cabot strait. 
The ice in the gulf forms rapidly during the cold season; it is usually 
in sheets a mile or two in length with passages between them, al- 
though sometimes during a prevalence of southwesterly winds it may 
form, an unbroken sheet for a few days, extending many miles, or 
even from Cow head to Great Mekattina island. In the eastern part 
of the gulf ice may be met with as late as the beginning of June. 

A portion of the ice setting eastward through the gulf appears to 
split on cape St. George; the main part passes into St. George bay 
and toward Cabot strait; the other part generally sets east-northeast- 
ward, especially in March and April. 

The ice, which usually enters the gulf through Belleisle strait early 
in January, can not at present be traced; it may arrive off Bonne bay 
during January or February, or it may be driven on to the northern 
shore of the gulf. Icebergs are rarely found westward of Greenly 
island, although some have been seen off Natashkwan point. One 
iceberg and two pieces of ice were seen, at the end of July, 1905, 
west-southwestward, 27 miles from Rich point. Northwesterly winds 
close the west coast of Newfoundland, while southwesterly winds open 
a lane of water inshore. The gulf ice usually clears off the west 
coast of Newfoundland during the first half of May, but it may 
remain much later. 

Small vessels from the harbors on the northern shore of the gulf 
and the western harbors of Newfoundland, as well as steamers spe- 
cially constructed for ice navigation, prosecute the seal fishery in the 
gulf in March and April. 

Belleisle strait.—Thin sheet ice makes its appearance in the 
strait between the 15th and 25th of December, and at about the begin- 
ning of the year ice, several miles in extent and 3 to 10 feet in thick- 
ness, passes between the coast of Labrador and Belle isle and drifts 
into the strait. 

Icebergs do not arrive in any great number until after the com- 
mencement of April, but from that time until September (or even 
October) they are numerous and sometimes very large. The greater 
number of the bergs enter between Belle isle and Labrador and pass 
slowly through the strait, frequently grounding and breaking up, the 
broken ice drifting toward the northern shore. It is stated that no 
bergs ever come ashore on the Newfoundland side. In 1898 many 
bergs were from 150 to 200 feet in height, and some 500 to 600 feet 
in breadth. Some of the bergs ground, while others change their 
positions; no berg drawing more than 30 fathoms of water can reach 
the western end of the strait without breaking up, and only the 
smaller bergs pass through; these are occasionally seen as far west 
as Greenly island, and as far south as Rich point. The bergs are 


64 GENERAL REMARKS. 


much more numerous in some seasons than in others; 200 bergs and 
large pieces of ice were counted in the strait in August of one year, 
whilst only half a dozen could be seen in the following August. With 
westerly winds the strait is often clear of bergs. The bergs are a 
considerable source of danger to shipping during the prevalent thick 
fogs; in 1898 the bergs kept chiefly on the northern shore of the 
strait and could generally be avoided by keeping on the opposite side. 

After May strings of heavy ice drift in with easterly winds and 
cause great obstruction, but with light winds these strings do not 
enter the strait, which may be clear and remain so after April. Be- 
tween about the 10th and end of June these strings of heavy ice 
usually fail. (See also pp. 641, 642.) 

The first steamers enter the strait between the 7th of June and 
the 25th of July, and the last pass outward between the 1ith and the 
26th of November. 

In 1899 the first steamer passed westward through the strait on 
the 22d of June; later than this a number of steamers attempted to 
pass through, but were compelled, owing to the amount of field ice 
encountered, to bear up for cape Race and pass southward of New- 
foundland. 

The ice met with in the gulf of St. Lawrence and its approaches is 
of three kinds: (1) Berg ice, or the true icebergs, which come into the 
gulf through Belleisle strait. Berg ice is also found on the south- 
ern coast of Newfoundland, nearly as far west as Cabot strait. 
(2) Flat or pan ice, forming fields or in broken pieces, usually not 
more than 6 feet thick, but sometimes reaching 10 feet. This jams 
or shoves along the shore between islands, and may form masses 20 
or more feet in thickness, but it can never be mistaken for berg ice. 
In this flat ice a distinction is sometimes made between northern ice, 
which finds its way through Belleisle strait, and gulf ice, which 
is formed in the gulf itself. (3) River ice from the river St. Law- 
rence and its estuary; this is flat ice, and off the Gaspé coast it can 
readily be distinguished from the gulf ice. 

Caution.—The proximity of ice is indicated by the following 
signs, and if only one of them is observed caution should be used. 
Both by day and at night the ice blink is almost always visible on 
the sky toward the ice. Ice blink is a bright yellowish-white light 
near the horizon, reflected from the snow-covered ice, and seen before 
the ice itself is visible. The absence of a swell or motion in a fresh 
breeze is a sign that there is land or ice on the weather side. 

The temperature may fall as ice is approached, if the ice be to 
windward, but not otherwise, and only at an inconsiderable distance 
from it. The fall of the temperature of the sea is sometimes a sign 
either of a cold current or of the proximity of ice, and although the 
temperature of the sea has been known even to rise close to ice, fre- 


ICE TERMS. 65 


quent observations of the temperature both of the air and sea should 
be taken and considered. 

The appearance of herds of seals, or flocks of birds, far from land 
is a sign of ice. 

The ice cracking, or pieces of it falling into the sea, makes a noise 
like breakers, or a distant discharge of guns, which may often be 
heard from a short distance. 

No rule can be laid down for safe navigation: everything depends 
on the vigilance, skill, and caution of the navigator. Vessels should 
pass to windward of icebergs to avoid the loose ice floating to leeward. 

Ice terms.—Field ice is a large area of unnavigable flat ice, the 
extent of which may not be visible from the masthead. 

Floe ice consists of several pieces of field ice frozen or pressed 
together. 

Land ice is field or floe ice attached to the shore since the winter. 

Hummocky ice is formed by the edges of ice floes meeting in 
strong breezes, when they are pushed up and formed into pyramids, 
which are then named hummocks, and it is of these that the high 
mounds of ice met with in the gulf of St. Lawrence are generally 
composed. 

Pack ice is a large collection of pieces of ice from broken-up floes 
or icebergs which have to a certain extent closed together again. 
The pack is said to be open when it presents leads or lanes of water 
between the pieces of ice, forming more or less navigable channels, 
and close when it is not possible to navigate through the pack. 

Drift ice is unattached pieces of floating ice, easily navigable. 

Brash or Sludge ice is a collection of very small pieces of broken- 
up ice, through which a ship can easily force her way. 

Pancake ice is newly frozen ice of insufficient thickness to prevent 
navigation, and is sometimes separated into pieces of a form sugges- 
tive of the name. 

Bay ice is newly frozen ice sufficiently thick to prevent navigation. 

Iceberg is floating ice formed on shore and detached from its 
parent glacier, 

Floeberg is a thick piece of salt water ice presenting the appear- 
ance of a small iceberg. 

A lead or lane is a navigable channel in pack or other ice. 

Open water is free navigable water adjacent to ice incumbered 
water. 

Ice foot is the ice frozen to the shore, which does not rise and fall 
with the tide. 

Signals respecting ice.—Information as to ice, wind, tempera- 
ture, and weather indications can be obtained by communicating with 
the marine signal stations at cape Race; Galantry head, St. Pierre 


76846—09—_5 


66 GENERAL REMARKS. 


island; cape Ray; St. Paul island; Belle isle; Chateau bay; and 
Amour point. 

Information as to the weather, wind, and the movement and condi- 
tion of the ice in the gulf of St. Lawrence is specially supplied to the 
signal stations at cape Race, Galantry head, and cape Ray, during 
April and May, for the guidance of any vessel asking for it. 

Buoyage.—The buoyage of the waters of Newfoundland is the 
same as that for the waters of the Dominion of Canada. 

Approaching from seaward, all buoys on the starboard side of 
the channel are painted red and, if numbered, marked with even 
numbers, and must be left on the starboard hand. 

Approaching from seaward, all buoys on the port side of the 
channel are painted black and, if numbered, marked with odd num- 
bers, and must be left on the port hand. 

Numbers when used are in consecutive order from seaward. 

Buoys painted red and black in horizontal bands mark middle- 
grounds and are left on either hand. 

Buoys painted white and black in vertical stripes mark mid-chan- 
nel or the fairway and may be passed on either hand. These buoys 
are not ofter used. 

Pillar, light, bell, and whistling buoys mark special positions, a 
detailed description of which is given when the mark is first estab- 
lished. 

Conical buoys, when used, are always on the starboard side of the 
channel; conical top marks on starboard-hand buoys and cylindrical 
top marks on port-hand buoys, otherwise the shapes of buoys have 
no special significance at present. 

The rule for coloring buoys applies also to beacons and other 
day-marks, so far as it is practicable to carry it out. 

Wrecks.— Buoys, and the top sides of vessels used for marking 
wrecks, are painted: green with a white inscription and moored 
when possible near the side of the wreck next to mid-channel. 

Wreck-marking vessels exhibit : 

By day: Three balls from a yard, 20 feet above the sea; two placed 
vertically on the side that shipping may safely pass, and one on the 
other side. 

By night: Three fixed white lights similarly arranged; the ordi- 
nary riding light is not shown. 

Mariners must pass on that side of a wreck-marking vessel on 
which the two balls or the two lights are shown. 

It is sometimes necessary to temporarily withdraw the buoys in the 
harbors of Newfoundland on account of ice. 

Signal stations.—There are signal and telegraph stations at 
cape Race, cape Ray, St. Paul island, southern end of Belle isle, Cha- 
teau bay, and Amour point. The station at cape Race belongs to 


WIRELESS TELEGRAPH. 67 


Lloyd’s, and the other stations are included in Lloyd’s system. Or- 
ders forwarded to Lloyd’s can be notified to vessels by means of these 
stations, and vessels signaling to the stations are reported to Lloyd’s 
for insertion in Lloyd’s list, ete. 

There is also a signal and telegraph station on Galantry head, St. 
Pierre island. 

All inward-bound vessels making their official numbers to any of 
these stations are reported immediately, and all reports are promptly 
posted on the bulletin board of the Great Northwestern Telegraph 
Company’s office, Quebec, and on that of the Board of Trade, Mon- 
treal. These reports are repeated to the pilot station at Father point, 
so that pilots may be aware of the locality of inward-bound vessels. 

The international code of signals is used for communicating with 
these stations. 

Certain hghthouse stations are also supplied with the international 
code of signals. (See body of book.) . 

Marconi wireless telegraph stations.— (See p. 42.) 

Telegraph cables. (See p. 41.) 

Coal.—Cape Breton coal can be obtained in considerable quantities 
at St. Johns and port aux Basques in amounts of about 350 to 500 
tons at St. Pierre and Bonne bay; and usually in amounts of 50 tons 
at Twillingate (Toulinguet) and Fogo. Very lmited quantities 
(some 20 tons, and even this supply uncertain) can easily be obtained 
at Placentia, Burnt islands, Tilt cove, Little bay, Pilley island harbor, 
Harbor Grace and Belle isle in Conception bay, Trinity in Trinity 
bay, and at Greens pond and Bonavista in Bonavista bay; also at 
Salmon river, Blane Sablon, Battle harbor, and Gready, in Labrador. 
The only Welsh coal to be got in Newfoundland is at St. Johns; its 
price is about $10 a ton, and that of Cape Breton coal $6 to $7.50 a ton. 

Coal can be sent to any of the above ports from St. Johns, and is 
sometimes sent to places along the coast between cape Race and St. 
Johns. 

Docks.—There is a dry dock and a floating dock at St. Johns, 
and there are marine railways at Harbor Grace and St. Pierre. 

Repairs to hull and machinery can be executed at St. Johns. (See 
p- 608.) 

Shipwrecks on coasts of Newfoundland.—A wreck chart and 
pamphlet, published in 1904, show that between the years 1811 and 
1900, 524 vessels were wrecked on the coasts of Newfoundland. Of 
these wrecks, 2 occurred from 1811 to 1820; 1 from 1821 to 1830; 6 
from 1831 to 1840; 18 from 1841 to 1850; 40 from 1851 to 1860; 49 
from 1861 to 1870; 76 from 1871 to 1880; 123 from 1881 to 1890; and 
116 from 1891 to 1900. There were in addition 93 wrecks which are 
not classed under any particular years. 


68 GENERAL REMARKS. 


As the total number of ships employed on these coasts in each year 
is unknown, the proper percentage of casualties can not be ascer- 
tained, and any conclusion that can be drawn from the above list is 
necessarily incomplete, but it appears, on the surface, that, notwith- 
standing the introduction of steam, lighthouses, lights, fog signals, 
etc., and the better knowledge which is now possessed of the coasts 
of Newfoundland, with the rocks and shoals off them, from the sur- 
veys which have been in progress for many years, the number of cas- 
ualties has not decreased, but has steadily risen. Why this should be 
is not easy to determine, but it is probable that a considerable propor- 
tion of these wrecks is due to the less careful navigation of the present 
day, especially in fog, owing to the desire of owners and passengers 
to keep time punctually, which can not be done without greatly 
increasing the risk of loss. It is significant that, during the period 
from 1881 to 1901, 83 wrecks took place within the small stretch of 
coast extending from 30 miles westward to 30 miles northward of 
cape Race. 

Standard time.—No time has been adopted as a standard for 
Newfoundland, but the mean time of St. Johns is used for railway 
and telegraphic purposes. This time is 3 h, 30 m. slow of mean time 
at Greenwich. 

Passages and general directions—Steamers—Across At- 
lantic.—With a view to reducing the risks of collision and to the 
avoidance of ice, the steamers of the principal trans-Atlantic steam- 
ship companies now take the following routes between the British Isles 
and the English Channel and New York, Philadelphia, and Boston. 
These routes have the advantages that, in the event of a vessel break- 
ing down, assistance is likely to be at hand; and possibly that sailing 
vessels will either endeavor as much as possible to avoid their tracks, 
or at any rate keep a strict lookout when in their vicinity. 


EASTBOUND. 


At all seasons of the year from New York or Philadelphia steer 
from the lightships to cross the meridian of 70° west, nothing to the 
northward of lat. 40° 10’ north. 

From January 15 to August 23, both inclusive, steer a course from 
lat. 40° 10’ north, long. 70° west, by rhumb line to cross the meridian 
of 47° west, in lat. 41° north, and thence on Great Circle course 
(nothing to the northward) to Fastnet rock or Bishop rock. If 
from Boston steer directly for lat. 41° north, long. 47° west, and 
thence as above directed. 

From August 24 to January 14, both inclusive, steer from lat. 
40° 10’ north, long. 70° west, to cross the meridian 60° west in lat. 
42° north, thence by rhumb line to lat. 46° 30’ north, long. 45° west, 


PASSAGES. 69 


and thence on Great Circle course (nothing to the northward) to 
Fastnet rock or Bishop rock, always keeping southward of the lati- 
tude of Bishop rock when bound to the English channel. 

If from Boston steer directly for lat. 42° north, long. 60° west, 
and thence as above. 

Notre.—Occasionally ice extends over a larger area than usual, and 
owing to its presence on the above routes it is necessary temporarily 
to modify them. Thus in 1903, 1904, and 1905 from about early in 
April to mid-June or early in July, westward-bound vessels crossed 
the meridian of 47° west, in lat. 41° north; and eastward-bound 
vessels crossed the same meridian in lat. 40° 10’ north. 

Notice is given of any change in the routes, which is previously 
agreed to by the various steamship companies concerned. 


JANUARY 15 TO AUGUST 23, BOTH DAYS INCLUSIVE. 


Courses (true) and distances (in nautical miles): Sandy Hook 
light-vessel to 70° west (in 40° 10’ north), 95° 50’, 177 miles; to 
cross the meridian of 47° west in 41° north, 87° 17’, 1,055 miles, from 
this last position nothing north of the Great Circle to Fastnet, when 
bound to the Irish channel, and nothing north of the Great Circle 
to Bishops rock, when bound to the English channel. 


Great Circle to Fastnet. 


Distance on Great Circle, 1,651 miles. Total distance, Sandy Hook light-vessel to 
( Fastnet, 2,883 miles. p 


| | 
40° 00’ W 35° 00’ W | 30° 00’ W 


IL/OYOC TIC PRs er eee le 472,002 We [))) 452000 We | 

LL RL EG (3 2 ae ea 41°00’N | 42° 02’ N 44°16’N | 46°10’ N | 47° 45’ N 
CORSO 5 aed haem 55° 137 | Sey 59° 58’ Pm Bie 67° 10’ 

Uc DUDET( AUG (Se SER ene Se ee ce 25° 00’ W 20° 00’ W | 15° 00’ W 10° 00’ W 9° 36’ W 
Liar ONG ELG CL ee elo et Ds 49° 02’ N | 50°00’ N | 50° 46’ N 51° 18’ N 51° 20’ N 
Gis @s So 258 So en 70° 54’ 74° 43’ | 


78° 34’ 82° 27” 82° 46’ 


Great Circle to Bishops rock. 


Distance on Great Circle, 1,764 miles. Total distance, Sandy Hook light-vessel to Bishops 
rock, 2,996 miles. 


PROMPAINA CS eyes ost live 4 OOl TW le 4B cLOO RVs 40° 00’ W 35° 00’ W | 30° 00’ W 


TUPPLA TENG KS) SS Sk A eae 41° 00’ N | 41° 53’ N 43° 52’ N 45° 31’ N | 46° 50’ N 
ROTTS ERIE a sctete niche inciniote ce one 58° 41’ 60° O1’ 63° 25’ 66° 56’ | 70° 33’ 

HOO PALO Coes fess cfercia haar sie- cine | 25° 00’ W 20° 00’ W 15° 00’ W 10° 00’ W | 6° 27’ W. 
LGC le) a 47° 54’ N 48° 45’ N 49° 28’ N 49° 42’ N | 49° 50’ N 


ILS 4222 i | 7401140 ll) aii BLAS) 8028871) | | SS 


AuGusT 24 TO JANUARY 14, BOTH DAYS INCLUSIVE. 


Courses (true) and distances (in nautical miles): Sandy Hook 
light-vessel to 70° west (in 40° 10’ north), 95° 50’, 177 miles: to 
cross the meridian of 60° west in latitude 42° north, 76° 23’, 467 miles; 


70 GENERAL REMARKS. 


thence by rhumb line to cross the meridian of 45° west in latitude 46° 
30’ north, 67° 19’, 700 miles; from this last position nothing north 
of the Great Circle to Fastnet, when bound to the Irish channel, and 
as near as possible to, but nothing north of, the Great Circle to 
Bishops rock, always keeping south of the latitude of Bishops rock 
when bound to the English channel. 


Great Circle to Fastnet. 


Distance on Great Circle, 1,411 miles. Total distance, Sandy Hook light-vessel to 
Fastnet, 2,755 miles. 


NFON SHUTS. 9 > Sees Meee 45° 00’ W 40° 00’ W 35° 00’ W | = 30° 00’ W 25° 00’ W 
WeatitidGene eres oa. cleats See 46° 30’ N | 47° 57’ N | 49°07’N | 50°01 N 50° 41’ N 
COUTSO Lo he abe eee een gle 65° 06’ 68° 46/ 72° 31’ 76° 19’ 80° 11’ 

| 
MON PITUdEe 2a as tao. ee || 20° 00’ W | 15° 00° W 10° 00’ W | 9° 36’ W 
Watibude nn. see eee secs ee soe el 51° 06’ N 51° 22’ N 51° 20’ N | 51° 20’ N 


WOUTSC ieee noe sie eee ee | 84° 03/ | 87° 57’ 91° 52’ | 92° 10’ 
| 


Great Circle to Bishops rock. 


Distance on the Track, 1,540 miles. Total distance, Sandy Hook light-vessel to Bishops 
rock, 2,884 miles. 


Mmoneiidesess2. bi 2-.3-24,R ees 45° 00’ W | 40° 00’ W 35°00’ W 


| 30° 00’ W 25° 00’ W 

ILAHTTHIC Gis 5 ne See eee ee 46° 30’ N 47° 44’ N 48° 42’ N 49° 24’ N | 49° 50’ N 

(Chybt ket See eee eee eS 68° 17’ (lemeatay 75° 40’ 79° 27’ 90° 

BRON OUMIAG ES essa n ck ee bone 20° 00’ W | 15° 00’ W 10° 00’ W | 6° 27’ W | 

LAS TET ENG Ree a Ate, a a 49° 50’ N 49° 50° N 49° 50’ N 49° 50’ N | 

Cyn SS en a am 90° | 90° 90° | 90° | 
WESTBOUND. 


From January 15 to August 14, both days inclusive, steer from 
Fastnet or Bishops rock, on Great Circle course, but nothing to the 
southward, to cross the meridian of 47° west in latitude 42°, 
thence by either rhumb line or Great Circle, or even north of the 
Great Circle if an easterly current is encountered, to a position south 
of Nantucket light-vessel; thence to Fire Island light-vessel when 
bound for New York, or to Five Fathom Bank south light-vessel 
when bound for Philadelphia, or direct to Boston if bound there. 

From August 15 to January 14, both days inclusive, steer from 
Fastnet or Bishops rock on Great Circle course, but nothing to the 
southward, to cross the meridian of 49° west in latitude 46°; 
thence by rhumb line to cross the meridian of 60° west in latitude 
43°; thence also by rhumb line to a position south of Nantucket 
light-vessel; thence to Fire Island light-vessel when bound for New 
York, or to Five Fathom Bank south light-vessel when bound for 
Philadelphia, or direct to Boston when bound there. 


PASSAGES. hl. 
JANUARY 15 TO AUGUST 14, BOTH DAYS, INCLUSIVE. 


Great Circle from Fastnet. 


Distance on Great Circle, 1,618 miles. 


| 
Won Piuideeesees= === 2-2. -- 9° 36’ W 10° 00’ W | 15° 00’ W 20° 00’ W 25° 00’ W 
IDEARC. oe ge ee 51° 20’ N 51°19’ N | 50° 53’ N 50° 14’ N 49° 20’ N 
(COUIREL 5 jh. ce SoS eee eee 264° 34’ 264° 16’ | 260° 22/ | 256° 31’ 252° 41’ 
| | 
TU OM PUTO Reem So. = cee o's 30° 00’ W | * 00’ W te 00’ W 45° 00’ W 47° 00’ W 
atihider se. yes... k. Wohi = 8 48° 12° N | 46° 46” N | 4 02’ N 42° 56’ N | 42° 00’ N 
COWIE 5 5 5 Se 248° 56’ | 245° 15! | oat? 39 i 238° 11’ 236° 50’ 


Great Circle from Bishops rock. 


Distance on Great Circle, 1,733 miles. 


| | 


Longitude.....-.... Sate SO See 6227 10° 00’ W 15° 00’ W 20° 00’ W | 25° 00’ W 
TLE T08 et) San 49° 50’ N 49° 48’ N 49° 35’ N | 49° 03’ N 48° 20’ N 
COTES). a9 Sega ee 270° 00’ | 267° 18” 263° 29’ | 259° 42’ | 255° 56/ 

WOOTEN Co ooo acim ds 2 gene = 2 30° 00’ W | 35° 00’ W 40° 00’ W 45°00’ W | 47° 00’ W 
[LT A3 NS Oe rr _...{ 47° 227 N | 46° 06’ N 44° 38’ N 42° 49’ N 42° 00’ N 


(COWIIG- 2200 Gee 252° 14’ 248° 35’ | 245° 02’ 241° 34’ 240° 13’ 


Thence 265° 22’, 1,028 miles, to a point south of Nantucket lght- 
vessel; thence 266° 51’, 164 miles, to Fire Island light-vessel; thence 
270°, 30 miles, to Sandy Hoek light-vessel. Total distance, Fastnet 
to Sandy Hook light-vessel, 2,840 miles. Bishops rock to Sandy 
Hook light-vessel, 2,955 Lae 


AUGUST 15 TO JANUARY 14, BOTH DAYS, INCLUSIVE 
Great Circle from Fastnet. 


Distance on Great Circle, 1,574 miles. 


| | 

Li DER CSRS sl ea ee ee ee 9° 36’ W 10° 00’ W | 15° 00’ W 20° 00’ W | 25° 00’ W 
Lut (UOMO LES & eke Bl ON Sa ee S120 Ni | Baie 22aeN Dlie200 ON ID ON] 50° 59’ N 
Course. . 226 SegncezoseeasssoSSeer 273° 56’ |) eaiake oye | 269° 43’ 265° 12/ 2617 507 
LIDGE COL SS. a ae ae ee 30°00! W | °352 00’ Wi | 40° 00’ W 45° 00’ W 49° 00° W 
LEAN THD Ko Le fe eek ee ee 508267 Ne |) SEAGER SSN 48° 35’ N 47° 16’ N 46° 00’ N 
(CI TSE ae 2S Ae 2,5 2 ge a ES ee 258° 02’ 254251124 PAO ase 246° 43’ 243° 48’ 

Great Circle from Bishops rock. 

Distance on Great Circle, 1,703 miles. 

| | 

1 OVE OVO CEs SE ee ee eae 6227" Wel OSaOO WE 15° 00’ W 20° 00’ W | 25° 00’ W 
LTCC G- SAAS eee ae eee eee 49° 50’ N 50° 08’ N 50° 19’ N 50° 21’ N DOP ean 
(OWES D Ses RE ee ee eee 278° 49’ | 276° 06/ 272° 16’ 268° 24’ | 264° 34’ 
POMC IGes nee 2 kos et eh IU rsOe OOF Ws | 35° 00’ W 40° 00’ W 45° 00’ W 49° 00’ W 
LL APUTR AECL 28 a a a ee 49° 46’ N | 49° 08’ N 48° 15’ N 47° 077 N | 46° 00’ N 
(COSO Gee ae Uh iee £6 260° 44’ | 


256° 56’ 253° 10’ 249° 28’ | 246° 34’ 


Thence by rhumb line 249° 08’, 505 miles, to cross the meridian of 
60° west in latitude 43° north; thence also by rhumb line, 251° 41’, 
455 miles, to a point south of Nantucket light-vessel; thence 266° 51, 
164 miles, to Fire Island light-vessel; thence 270°, 30 miles, to Sandy 


712 GENERAL REMARKS. 


Hook light-vessel. Total distance, Fastnet to Sandy Hook light- 
vessel, 2,728 miles; Bishops rock to Sandy Hook light-vessel, 2,857 
miles. 

Auxiliary steamers may follow the routes given for full- 
powered steamers or the directions for sailing vessels which are’ given 
below. ; 

To and from Newfoundland, etc.—Steamers between the Brit- 
ish isles and any part of Newfoundland follow the great circle track; 
and this route is also taken to and from Belleisle strait, which is 
much frequented from about June to November by vessels bound to 
or from the river St. Lawrence. 

Those bound westward of cape Race pass southeastward of that 
cape, making it if the weather is clear, and thence steer for a position 
southward of St. Pierre island. While on the Great bank of New- 
foundland during fog, or when there is uncertainty regarding the 
position, soundings should be frequently obtained, and an indraft 
toward the south coast of Newfoundland guarded against. 

In making the passage between cape Race and Cape Breton island 
attention is called to the set of the currents (see pp. 52, 54) and to 
the necessity of sounding in fog. 

The edges of the deep-water channel running through the banks 
into Cabot strait are especially good guides. In fog cape Pine should 
not be approached to less than 40 fathoms, nor cape St. Mary to less 
than 50 fathoms. There is deep water of 100 to 142 fathoms in the 
approach to Placentia bay. 

Cabot strait.—Steamers proceeding from the eastward through 
Cabot strait, in the spring and with clear weather, should pass the 
signal station on Galantry head, St. Pierre island, within signal dis- 
tance, and obtain information as to the state of the ice; or, failing 
this, obtain the information either from the signal station on cape 
Ray or that on St. Paul island. After the ice has disappeared, gen- 
erally about the end of May, keep farther off Galantry head, to avoid 
the dense fog that prevails in that locality during June and July, and 
beware of the strong current that occasionally sets into the bays on 
the south coast of Newfoundland; in fact, during this period it is 
better to be nearer St. Paul island than cape Ray. 

Belleisle strait.— From the eastward make Belle isle or its lights, 
and then keep in the fairway of the strait. From the westward make 
Greenly island or its light, and then keep in the fairway. For gen- 
eral directions, navigating the strait in thick weather, etc., see p. 643. 

Steamers from the north of Ireland intending to pass through the 
strait of Belleisle cross the meridians of 20° and 30° west in about 
latitude 56° 30’ north; the meridian of 40° in about 55° north; and 
that of 50° in 53° 30’ north. If bound to St. Johns, or south of New- 
foundland, the same meridians are crossed as follows: 20° west in 


PASSAGES—-SAILING ROUTES. to 


about latitude 55° north; 380° west in 53° 40’ north: 40° west in about 
51° 30’ north; and 50° west in 48° north. 

Caution.—From the character of the streams in Belleisle strait, a 
vessel passing through it in either direction may overrun her reckon- 
ing, or the contrary. 

Sailing vessels’ routes—British isles to and from New- 
foundland.—There are two routes, the northern and the southern. 
The northern route should, as a rule, be taken only in autumn, when 
it is free from ice. When clear of the English channel stand north- 
westward and cross the meridian of 30° west longitude in about 
latitude 55° north; then steer, according to destination, for the strait 
of Belleisle, for St. Johns, or to pass a convenient distance southward 
of cape Race. 

In this route, although heavy weather is frequently experienced, 
the winds are generally favorable, and the Arctic current asists in the 
latter part of the voyage. 

In thick weather the thermometer may be useful, as the tempera- 
ture of the water falls on the banks of Newfoundland. 

In spring the best route to follow on leaving the English channel 
is to make a little northing, so as to cross the meridian of 18° west in 
lat. 50° north, and thence direct if bound to the northern ports of New- 
foundland; but if bound to the southern part of the island or to the 
gulf of St. Lawrence, steer so as to strike the Great bank between the 
parallels of 45° and 46° north, keeping a good lookout for ice when 
nearing the ice limits. At this season of the year a lane of water is 
often found between the ice and the east coast of Newfoundland, ex- 
_ tending from cape Race to Bay Bulls, at which latter anchorage a 
vessel may await in safety a clear passage to St. Johns harbor round 
cape Spear. Vessels from ports on the east coast of England or Scot- 
land with a westerly wind go northward and round the Orkney 
islands; those from Liverpool or the Clyde pass northward of Ireland. 

Formerly the New York packet ships, when making their winter 
voyage from Liverpool, kept in high latitudes until nearing New- 
foundland. This they did for the twofold object of avoiding the 
tempestuous weather so generally experienced to the southward, and 
of obtaining fairer winds. The voyage by this route is shortened in 
distance; and, although bad weather must be expected, it is not so 
violent as farther south; besides which the easterly currents are 
avoided. 

The southern route.—After clearing the channel, and if the wind 
permits, steer to pass midway between Madeira and the Azores, or if 
the wind does not favor, pass nearer Madeira, into the northeast 
trade wind. When well in the trade run westward until in about 
45° to 48° west longitude, then haul gradually up for cape Race or 
Cabot strait. 


14 GENERAL REMARKS. 


The routes from Newfoundland to the British isles are direct by 
the great circle, care being taken to avoid ice. 

To the gulf of St. Lawrence through Cabot strait, after passing 
southward of the Virgin rocks and St. Pierre island, endeavor to make 
St. Paul island (see p. 263) which, being of considerable elevation, 
bold all round, and well lighted, may be made both at night and by 
day; with proper caution it may be steered for even in fog, unless it 
is very thick. 

Between cape Race and Cabot strait give the south coast of New- 
foundland a wide berth, attend to the set of the current (see pp. 52, 
54), and take frequent soundings on the banks, the usual state of 
weather being fog. 

Caution.—In approaching St. Paul island from the eastward 
with northerly winds, the prevailing south-southeasterly current 
which at times sets toward Cape Breton island, should be guarded 
against by sounding on the bank extending off the eastern coast of 
Cape Breton island. 

The south coast of Newfoundland, eastward of cape Ray, is broken, 
rocky, and dangerous; there is often a strong indraft toward the 
land, and the tidal streams are influenced by the winds; while south- 
erly and easterly winds, and often also southwesterly winds, bring 
a thick fog, which is most dense near the lee shore. This coast there- 
fore should not be approached, excepting with a decided northerly 
wind and clear weather. 

Nore.—With southwesterly winds, while the weather is foggy east- 
ward of the meridian of Flint island, Cape Breton island, it is fre- 
quently clear for some miles off the land westward of it. 

Magnetic variation.—The magnetic variation changes rapidly 
from place to place on the coasts of Newfoundland and Labrador. 
This change, which is shown by the crowding together of the lines 
of equal magnetic variation on the charts, amounts to 1° in about 45 
miles in the vicinity of cape Race, in about 37 to 32 miles on the west 
coast of Newfoundland, and in about 32 miles near cape Chidley. 
Great attention is therefore necessary to the course steered by compass. 

Observations obtained during recent years show that the secular 
change in the magnetic variation is in some cases very different from 
what was anticipated. The results of these observations have been 
embodied in the chart of the variation of the compass at the beginning 
of this volume and in H. O. chart No. 2406, curves of equal magnetic 
variation for 1910, and these charts should be consulted on all occa- 
sions when deciding on the variation to be allowed in shaping 
course, etc. i 

The deviation of the compass should be ascertained when ap- 
proaching Newfoundland, as the large angle of magnetic dip and the 
small horizontal force in this region may cause the deviation to be 


“MAGNETIC DISTURBANCE. 15 


different from that determined in other places. This applies both to 
corrected and uncorrected compasses, the change in a corrected com- 
pass being largely dependent on the suitability of the correctors, viz, 
magnets or soft 1ron, and in an uncorrected compass on the suitability 
of its position relative to the surrounding iron, especially vertical 
iron. 

Local magnetic disturbance.—In many parts of Newfoundland 
and Labrador local magnetic disturbances affect magnetic compasses 
on shore. Although it is not possible that these disturbing forces can 
extend to vessels navigating off the coasts, yet they may extend to 
vessels at anchor near the shore and areas of disturbance may also 
exist in places at the bottom of the sea capable of producing small 
disturbances in compasses of vessels when in shallow water. Actual 
experiences of this kind have occurred, but they are not common. In 
water exceeding 50 fathoms in depth no effect has been observed. 

In view of these facts, the method of fixing position by sextant and 
station pointer is preferable to the method by bearings. 


CEA PIE i 


BANKS OF NEWFOUNDLAND AND NOVA SCOTIA BANKS. 


Flemish cap, the eastern of the Newfoundland banks, extends, 
within the 100-fathom line, about 50 miles north and south and 25 
miles east and west. The least depth yet found on the bank is 58 
fathoms, near its southern end in latitude 46° 53’ N., longitude 44° 
38’ W., the bottom being sand, mud, pebbles, and large stones. It 
has only been partly examined. There is deep water between the 
Flemish cap and Great bank. 

Great bank of Newfoundland.—This bank extends between 
the parallels of 48° 35’ and 42° 54’ N. latitude on the meridian of 
50° W. longitude, and between the meridians of 47° 35’ and 57° 20’ 
W. longitude on the parallel of the Virgin rocks, 46° 25’ N. latitude; 
this includes St. Pierre and Green banks, which are in reality a por- 
tion of the Great bank. 

The form of the Great bank is irregular, but from its eastern limit 
on the parallel of 46° 25’ N. latitude its edge trends southwestward 
for about 230 miles, and the water on the bank near this edge de- 
creases in depth, so that on the parallel of 44° N. there is a depth of 
only 22 fathoms. On the parallel of 42° 54’ N. and meridian of 
50° W. the bank falls into deep water, and its 60-fathom edge trends 
northwestward. | 

The general depth of water on the Great bank, westward to longi- 
tude 52° W., varies from 30 to 45 fathoms, and the bottom is usually 
sand, gravel, or broken shells. The only known shoals are the Virgin 
rocks and banks and the Eastern shoals. 

Westward of longitude 52° W., the depth on the shoaler parts of 
the bank varies from 20 to 50 fathoms, but these shoal parts are 
separated by channels of deeper water, in one of which, extending 
southward from Placentia bay, there is a depth of 142 fathoms. 

Southeastward of Ballard bank, near cape Race, there is a channel 
about 20 miles wide and 80 to 100 fathoms deep. 

Birds.—Approach to the Great bank of Newfoundland is gener- 
ally indicated by an increasing number of sea fowl around the vessel. 
The Great Shearwater, well known to fishermen by the name of 


76 


NINE FATHOM BANK—SOUTH SHOAL. tt 


Hagdown, is seen all across the Atlantic, but on the banks they, as 
well as divers and other sea fowl, become very numerous. . 

Reported shoal.—A sounding of 8 fathoms was reported in 1874 
to have been obtained in latitude 46° 12’ N., longitude 49° 35’ W., 
approximately. 

Eastern shoals, a group of banks, with depths of 7 to 30 
fathoms over them, situated about east by south 107 miles from 
cape Race, are the eastern shoals on the Great bank. The shoals 
extend about 4 miles north and south, with a breadth of 2 miles; those 
with depths of 13 fathoms or less break in heavy weather, and a 
strong breeze causes a confused sea in this locality. 

Nine fathom bank, 300 yards across within the depth of 20 
fathoms and with a least depth of 9 fathoms, is situated near the 
middle of the Eastern shoals, in latitude 46° 26’ 45’” N. and longi- 
tude pO? "28" 10°" "W. 

Bogy ledge, the shoalest of four banks, occupying a space 1,200 
yards long and 575 yards wide, has a depth of 12 fathoms water on 
its shoalest part, which is situated northeast 1} miles from Nine 
fathom bank. 

Saunders shoal, about 300 yards across, with 11 fathoms least 
water, is situated southeast by east 4 mile from Nine fathom bank. 
Close southwestward of Saunders shoal is a patch of 7 fathoms, 
which is said to be the least depth on the Eastern shoals. 

Emmeline shoal, of 12 fathoms, is 2 miles north of Nine fathom 
bank, and the Gilley shoals, of 13 and 12 fathoms, are about a mile 
south of the bank. 

Virgin rocks is the name given to a rocky bank with 3 to 30 
fathoms water over it, extending about 9 miles north and south and 
2 miles east and west at its broadest part. On this bank is prosecuted 
the most important hook and line fishery of the banks of Newfound- 
land. 

Main ledge, the largest of the shoaler parts of the bank, is 1,400 
yards long and 1,100 yards wide, with depths of less than 20 fathoms. 
The shoalest spot, a small pinnacle rock with 3 fathoms water over 
it, on which the sea breaks in heavy weather, is in latitude 46° 27’ N., 
longitude 50° 47’ 45’ W. From this pinnacle a rock, with 4 fathoms 
water over it, lies 200 yards north-northwestward, and a rock, with 
54 fathoms water, + mile southwestward. These three rocks are small 
shoals rising above the general depth of 8 to 10 fathoms between 
them. 

South shoal is 1,200 yards long north-northeast and south-south- 
west and 700 yards wide, with depths of less than 20 fathoms. The 
least water on the shoal is 4% fathoms, rock, situated south-southeast, 
distant 1,3, miles from Main ledge; two other rocks, with 5 fathoms 
least water, he within 300 yards northwestward from this rock. Two 


78 BANKS OF NEWFOUNDLAND AND NOVA SCOTIA BANKS. 


small rocks, with 9 and 10 fathoms over them respectively, lie near 
the northern and eastern edges of the bank. 

This shoal, though with deeper water, is reported by the fishermen 
to be more dangerous than Main ledge; the larger area of uneven 
ground causes the sea to rise more readily, and break more heavily, 
than on the small pinnacles of Main ledge. 

Main ledge and South shoal are the only dangers of the Virgin 
rocks in ordinary bad weather, but there are several others that break 
in heavy gales, and the uneven ground, with the tidal streams running 
over it, produces a confused sea even in strong breezes. 

Prairie shoal lies north 24 miles from the shoalest part of Main 
ledge, is about 800 yards long and 400 yards broad within the depth 
of 20 fathoms, has 9 fathoms least water over it, and breaks in bad 
weather. Between Prairie shoal and Main ledge, at distances of 
about 1,600 yards and 14 miles from the ledge, le Northwest shoal 
and Maloney ledge, with 11 and 14 fathoms least water on them, re- 
spectively. 

Ice.—The Virgin rocks are usually surrounded by ice until the 
middle of April or beginning of May. 

Tidal streams.—In the immediate neighborhood of the Virgin 
rocks and Eastern shoals, the tidal stream attains a rate of # knot an 
hour, but a few miles away from them there is no sensible stream. 

Woolfall bank.—It was reported in June, 1900, that a sounding 
of 9 fathoms, bottom fine brown sand and small stones, had been 
obtained on Great bank in latitude 46° 59’ 00’’ N., longitude 51° 
30’ 30’ W. This shoal has since been unsuccessfully searched for, 
and its existence is doubtful. 

Green banks.—A part of the Great bank to the southwestward 
of cape Race is known as Green banks; on these banks there is a 
general depth of 40 to 50 fathoms, stony bottom, but there is deeper 
water in the gullies around them, and between the two parts com- 
posing Green banks. 

The deep water gully between Green banks and St. Pierre bank is 
14 miles wide with depths of 70 to 90 fathoms; it may assist in veri- 
fying the position. 

St. Pierre bank is the western part of the Great bank; from its 
southern end in latitude 45° N., longitude 55° 50’ W., the western edge 
of the bank trends about northwest for 120 miles to its northern end 
in latitude 46° 40’ N., longitude 57° 20’ W. 

The soundings on this bank vary from 19 to 45 fathoms; generally 
the bottom is sand and broken shells. 

A shoal with 15 fathoms on it was reported on June 11, 1906, by 
the chief officer of the Danish steamer Nordboen. He obtained the 
sounding of 15 fathoms on St. Pierre bank, in (approximately) lati- 
tude 46° 36’ N., longitude 56° 43’ W. Ten minutes later a second 


BURGEO BANK—BANQUEREAU BANK. 79 


east of the lead gave a sounding of 16 fathoms. The position was 
from dead reckoning, and the vessel was enveloped in dense fog with 
high and irregular sea. 

Burgeo bank, northwestward of St. Pierre bank and separated 
from it by a channel 20 miles wide, is about 14 miles across northwest 
and southeast and 10 miles in greatest breadth, within depths of 50 
fathoms. The least depth of 27 fathoms on the bank is situated in 
latitude 47° 10’ N., longitude 57° 49’ W. 

Reported shoal.—A shoal with 17 fathoms water over it was 
reported in 1885 to exist in latitude 46° 53’ N., longitude 58° 19’ 
W., but it was searched for unsuccessfully in a surveying vessel in 
1891. 

Deep channel.—A channel, about 60 miles in breadth, with 
general depths of over 200 fathoms, mud bottom, lies between St. 
Pierre bank, of the Great bank of Newfoundland, and Banquereau 
and Misaine banks, of the Nova Scotia banks; and this channel con- 
tinues northward through Cabot strait into the gulf of St. Lawrence. 

Nova Scotia banks.—These banks are all fully described in H. O. 
Publication No. 99, Bay of Fundy and southeast coast of Nova Scotia. 
They are described here simply because vessels bound from the south- 
ward to Newfoundland must cross them or pass between some of 
them. Of these banks, the principal in extent and most important in 
position are the Banquereau and Sable Island banks, the former 
being the easternmost of what may be correctly designated the Nov: 
Scotia banks. 

Banquereau bank, with 15 to 50 fathoms, is an extensive plateau 
of sand, gravel, and shell, and is distinguished from contiguous banks 
by numerous flat sea eggs without prickles, which are found on the 
bottom. It extends from about latitude 44° 30’ N., longitude 57° 
15’ W., in a westerly direction 120 miles to the meridian of 60° W. 
This bank is separated from St. Pierre bank by a deep gully nearly 
€0 miles wide, having from 200 to 300 fathoms muddy bottom; and 
from the east edge of Sable Island bank by another gully of deep 
water 9 miles across at its narrowest part, and 75 to 340 fathoms deep. 

On referring to the chart it will be seen that its shoalest part, with 
15 fathoms, in latitude 44° 35’ N. and longitude 57° 54’ W., is the 
apex of a ridge (having less than 30 fathoms) upward of 40 miles 
in length northeast and southwest, and that relatively with the dan- 
gers off Sable island it is not only a safe offing for vessels intending 
to pass to the northward of the last-named danger, but by keeping, 
if possible, in the same parallel, the long and continuous line of com- 
paratively shoal water would enable a vessel, under ordinary cireum- 
stances, to feel her way with some degree of confidence until she has 
passed to the westward of the meridian of Sable island. 


80 BANKS OF NEWFOUNDLAND AND NOVA SCOTIA BANKS. 


Soundings obtained by the French cruiser Vaiade in 1894 indicate 
that Banquereau bank extends more to the eastward than is indicated 
on the charts. This vessel, a half hour after not having found bot- 
tom in 109 fathoms, obtained a sounding of 403 fathoms in latitude 
44° 43’ 00’’ N., longitude 57° 18’ 15’ W. From the above position 
the Natade stood west at a speed of 6 to 64 knots, sounding every 
half hour, and obtained soundings of 32, 284, 29, 244, 15, 20, and 20 
fathoms. 

In 1904 the cable steamer J/achay-Bennett obtained a sounding of 
29 fathoms in appromimately latitude 44° 43’ 45’’ N., longitude 
Die 25" 00T Wi. 

Misaine and Canso banks.—Misaine bank lies to the northward 
of Banquereau bank, between the latter and Scatari island, and be- 
iween its northwestern edge, with 60 fathoms, and a similar depth 
on the outer edge of a bank extending from the shores of Cape 
Breton island, there is a deep gully 25 miles wide, with from 70 to 
162 fathoms. The least water yet found on Misaine bank is 36 
fathoms, on its southeastern side, the general depth being more than 
40 fathoms, with a bottom of stone and broken shell. The outline 
of the bank is very irregular; its eastern limit is in latitude 45° 28’ 
N., longitude 58° 10’ W., and its western extremity is connected with 
Canso bank by the 60-fathom line. 

The northwestern end of Canso bank hes about 16 miles south- 
eastward of cape Canso, and its eastern side is separated from 
Misaine bank by a space about 17 miles across, in which are depths 
of 54 to 79 fathoms, and some patches of 46 to 49 fathoms. 

The least water found on Canso bank is 35 fathoms, sandy bottom ; 
the bank is separated from the north end of Middle ground by a 
space of deep water, with 100 to 180 fathoms, and from the bank ° 
extending from cape Canso by a narrow deep-water channel, with 
84 fathoms. . 

Artimon bank, at the east end of the deep-water gully separating 
Misaine bank from Banquereau, is of small extent, the least water 
found being 37 fathoms. over a bottom of stone with starfish and 
Sea eggs. 

Middle ground, about 30 miles to the northward of the western 
end of Sable island, has as little as 10 fathoms, this depth being found 
at the extreme southeastern end of the bank; there is also a depth of 
14 fathoms toward the northwestern extreme. The bank is about 40 
miles in length northwest and southeast, with depths varying from 
10 to 30 fathoms, and is separated from the western end of Ban- 
quereau bank by a gully 5 miles across, with 100 fathoms. Its north- 
ern end extends to within 35 miles of cape Canso, the distance between 
being occupied principally by a submarine valley, having in one 
locality a depth of 140 fathoms. 


SABLE ISLAND BANK—BROWNS BANK. 81 


If, in foggy weather, soundings should be struck within the 30- 
fathom line they will impart confidence in making the coast of Nova 
Scotia, as the middle of the bank is in about the same parallel as the 
entrance of Halifax harbor. 

Sable Island bank, surrounding Sable island and lying between 
the meridians of 59° W. and 62° W., is about 140 miles long, in an 
east by north and west by south direction, and about 60 miles wide, 
its southern extremity being in latitude 48° 10’ N. 

The depths on the bank vary from 10 to 50 fathoms, sand, the 
shoalest part of the bank lying northwestward of Sable island. 

A rocky ledge about 250 feet long and 50 feet wide, with a least 
depth of 24 fathoms, lies about 21 miles to the northwestward of the 
western light on Sable island. As the position of this shoal is un- 
certain, great caution should be used when in this vicinity. 

Emerald bank, about 9 miles westward of the western extremity 
of Sable island bank, is irregular in form and about 25 miles long 
north-northwest and south-southeast, and 20 miles wide within the 50- 
fathom limit. The bank has a general depth of from 40 to 45 
fathoms, its least depth, 38 fathoms, being at the northeastern end. 

Sambro banks lie with their northeastern end situated about 43 
miles southeast by south from Sambro island lighthouse and about 
14 miles nearly west-northwest from the northwestern end of Emerald 
bank; thence the banks within the 60-fathom line extend about 15 
miles southwestward ; but the western limit is not clearly ascertained. 
The general depth upon the banks is from 53 to 57 fathoms, sand and 
gravel, the least known depth being 49 fathoms. A gully about 5 
miles wide penetrates from the westward between Sambro banks and 
the Sambro ledges, the gully having depths from 100 to 112 fathoms. 

La Have bank.—The northeastern shoal plateau of this bank, 
with from 45 to 50 fathoms, sand and stone, is 30 miles in length, 
north and south, by 18 miles broad, the northern end being about 
east nearly 60 miles from Baccaro point. Another bank, with 45 
to 50 fathoms, exists, 20 miles to the westward of the southern end of 
the above, from which it is separated only by a shallow gully with 
from 50 to 60 fathoms. 

Roseway bank.—The shoalest part of this bank, with from 31 to 
40 fathoms, stone and pebbles, is about 11 miles in length, and its 
center is on the same parallel as Cape Sable lighthouse and the 
northern end of La Have bank. Between the 60-fathom lines of La 
Have and: Roseway banks there is a deep channel, with from 70 to 
100 fathoms, whilst inshore Roseway bank is connected by a narrow 
neck with the 60-fathom line of the bank extending along the coast. 

Browns bank, within the 50-fathom line, is 55 miles in length, 
with an average breadth of 15 miles. It lies to the westward of, but 


76846—09——6 


82 BANKS OF NEWFOUNDLAND AND NOVA SCOTIA BANKS. 


contiguous to, La Have bank, and with it forms an almost continuous 
bank, following the line of coast off cape Sable at the distance of 50 
miles offshore. 

Near the western extremity of Browns bank is a sandy rise about 
10 miles long north and south, with from 14 to 30 fathoms, the for- 
mer depth having been obtained in latitude 42° 47’ N., longitude 
66° 12’ W. This depth lies about 44 miles south-southwest of cape 
Sable. 

Outside the 50-fathom line of Browns bank there is a deep-water 
channel 25 miles wide, separating it from the 60-fathom line at the 
northeastern extremity of Georges shoal, off the Massachusetts coast. 

Inside Browns bank there is a narrow deep-water channel with 
above 60 fathoms, dividing it from the same depth on the edge of 
the shore bank, which follows, about 30 miles off, the line of coast 
from cape Sable to Bryer island, abreast which the deep water ap- 
proaches within 5 miles of the shore. 

There are many inequalities on the main shore bank off the south- 
western coast of Nova Scotia which it would be useless to describe in 
detail in these directions, inasmuch as they are clearly delineated on 
the chart; and by studying this, the navigator will have a compre- 
hensive idea, not only of the positions of, and depths upon, the 
various small patches, but also of the relative positions of the larger 
banks. 

Caution.—The bottom in the approach to Halifax is very uneven, 
and soundings over this area have not yet been obtained in sufficient 
detail to justify much confidence being placed in a position assumed 
from depths alone. 

Fish.—The banks off Newfoundland and Nova Scotia abound in 
cod and other fish, and during the summer large fleets of fishing ves- 
sels anchor upon them. The ordinary track of the mail steamers is 
left open, but northward and southward of this track there are numer- 
ous American, French, and British colonial vessels engaged in the cod 
fishery. 

Although these banks have been frequented by fishermen for over 
300 years, the fish show no diminution in number. 

Bank eastward of Newfoundland and strait of Belleisle.—A 
bank, with generally less than 200 fathoms over it, extends about 100 
to 150 miles eastward of Newfoundland and Labrador between the 
Great bank and about latitude 53° N., although a considerable area 
with depths of 220 to 270 fathoms stretches south-southeastward 
from a position eastward some 70 miles from the northern point of 
Belle isle. 

The bank of soundings, on which the least depth of water yet found 
is 86 fathoms, mud, lying about 28 miles eastward of the northern 


TOOKER BANK. 83 


point of Belle isle, affords a valuable guide when approaching the 
strait of Belleisle from the eastward in foggy weather. 

Westward of this bank, and between it and the bank, on which the 
depths are less than 100 fathoms, stretching eastward some 8 miles 
from Belle isle, the depths are from 101 to 208 fathoms, sand. 

Tooker bank.—A series of small banks lies between latitude 
51° 433’ and 51° 47’ N., and longitude 54° 573’ and 55° 0’ W. The 
largest of these banks within the 50-fathom line is about 1 mile long 
north-northeast and south-southwest, and 4 mile wide, with a least 
depth of 14 fathoms; the position of this depth bears 70°, distant 
175 miles from Cape Bauld lighthouse. Other heads of 82 to 50 fath- 
oms lie northward and northwestward of this bank, being apparently 
the summits of a very uneven ridge. Westward of these banks is a 
large gully, about 90 to 110 fathoms deep, from which the soundings 
gradually decrease to the depth of 60 fathoms, and thence more sud- 
denly toward the land. 


CHAPTER III. 


NEWFOUNDLAND, SOUTH COAST—CAPE RACE TO CREW 
POINT. 


Cape Race, the southeastern end of Newfoundland, has a barren 
appearance, and is faced by cliffs from 100 to 200 feet high, formed 
of slate in nearly vertical strata. The land rises from the cape grad- 
ually, and between 10 and 12 miles to the northeastward are the Red 
hills, a rocky range, 710 feet high. Close southeastward of the cape 
hes a detached wedge-shaped rock, 40 feet high. 

In moderate weather landing is effected in coves eastward and 
westward of the lighthouse, but the usual landing is in Cape cove, 
about 4 mile northward. 

Cape Race is bare of trees and has a brown and desolate appear- 
ance, but in sheltered hollows and along the courses of the rivulets 
there is a stunted growth of spruce, fir, and alder. The rocks are of 
the Silurian system, and are thinly covered with peat and bog. 

Light.—A cylindrical tower, 100 feet high, painted red and white 
in broad vertical stripes, and surmounted by a red circular lantern, 
on cape Race, exhibits, at 165 feet above high water, a flashing white 
light, showing 1 short flash of 0.2 second duration, every 5 seconds, 
and visible in clear weather a distance of 19 miles. 

In front of this ighthouse stands an old hghthouse painted in a 
similar manner. 

The keeper’s house, close to the old lighthouse, is a square, white 
building with a red roof. 

Fog signal.—A diaphone trumpet, situated in a red building 
with a high chimney, southward of the old lighthouse and connected 
with it by a covered way, is operated by compressed air, and sounds, 
during thick or foggy weathér, two blasts of 5 seconds duration 
every minute, thus: Blast, 5 seconds; silent interval, 15 seconds; 
blast, 5 seconds; silent interval, 35 seconds. 

This lighthouse and fog signal are maintained by the government 
of the Dominion of Canada. 

Signal, telegraph, and ice reporting station.—There is a 
Lloyd’s signal station at cape Race, situated between the lighthouse 
and the fog-signal house; it is connected by telegraph with St. Johns, 


84 


BALLARD BANK—GARRETT ROCK. 85 


to which place vessels passing are reported. Information as to ice, 
wind, temperature, and also weather forecasts can be obtained, during 
April and May, by communicating with the signal station. 

A wireless telegraph station has been established by the govern- 
ment of Canada at cape Race lighthouse, which is operated for the 
Marine and Fisheries Department of the Dominion by the Marconi 
Wireless Telegraph Company (Limited). The call letters of the sta- 
tion areC KE. See page 42. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, at cape Race at 7h. Om.; 
springs rise 64 feet, neaps 5 feet. 

Caution—Currents.—As fog is exceedingly prevalent off the 
south coast of Newfoundland, especially during June and July, it 
is necessary to guard against the set of the current and the indraft 
into the deep bays. See pages 52, 54. 

Soundings.—When in the vicinity of capes Race and Pine, obtain 
frequent soundings, which will be regular and of moderate depth. 

From the eastward, after crossing the Great bank, the water 
deepens to about 100 fathoms; it then shoals on Ballard bank, and 
after again deepening to 40 fathoms, shoals gradually to the shore. 

From the westward in thick weather do not close capes Pine and 
Race to depths less than 30 fathoms. 

Ice.—There may be icebergs off this coast at nearly all seasons. 
In March, April, May, June, and sometimes July, field ice is often 
encountered, either on the banks or nearer to Newfoundland. See 
pages 57-61. 

The earliest recorded time of the arrival of northern ice at cape 
Race is January 17, and the latest April 12, the average time being 
about the first week in February. The time of the clearance of the 
ice varies from February 25 to June 7, the average time being about 
the middle of April. 

Ballard bank, situated about 7 miles east-southeastward of cape 
Race, is 184 miles in length, parallel to the coast, with a greatest 
breadth of 44 miles within the 30-fathom line. 

The general depths on the northeastern part of the bank, where 
the sea breaks in heavy gales, are from 13 to 28 fathoms, except on 
Tommy and Garrett rocks; on the southwestern part of the bank 
the depths are from 19 to 29 fathoms. 

Tommy rock is small, with 9 fathoms water over it; it les at 
the northern end of Ballard bank, with Cape Race lighthouse bearing 
245°, distant 11 miles. 

Garrett rock, which is the shoalest part of Ballard bank, is small, 
has 8 fathoms water over it, and lies with Cape Race lighthouse, 
bearing 261°, distant 9 miles. 

A small bank, with 13 fathoms over it, lies with Cape Race light- 
house, bearing 269°, distant 8? miles. 


86 CAPE RACE TO CREW POINT. 


Patch.—A patch of 12 fathoms lies about north, 1} miles from the 
northern end of Ballard bank, with Cape Race lighthouse bearing 
237°. 

Soundings.—A gully, some 20 miles in width, with soundings of 
50 to 110 fathoms, extends southwestward on the eastern side of 
Ballard bank, between that bank and the northern end of the Great 
bank. Inshore of the bank the depths increase to from 42 to 43 
fathoms, and then decreases to the land. 

Cripple rock, bearing 221° distant, 13 miles from cape Race, has 
41 fathoms water on it; it is a small pinnacle upon which the sea 
seldom breaks. 

Clearing marks.—Cape Ballard, open southeastward of cape 
Race, bearing 33°, leads southward; and cape Pine, open southward 
of Mistaken point, bearing 269°, leads southward of Cripple rock. 

Shoals.—A patch, with 7 fathoms water over it, bears 207°, 24% 
miles from cape Race lighthouse; a patch of 8 fathoms lies 34 miles 
and a patch of 7 fathoms at 47, miles, both bearing 223° from the 
lighthouse. 

During heavy weather the sea probably breaks on these shoals. 

Directions.—In approaching cape Race from the eastward, after 
crossing Great bank the water gradually deepens to 90 and 100 
fathoms, after which, on Ballard bank, it rapidly shoals to about 
25 and 15 fathoms. 

After crossing this bank the water again deepens to 40 fathoms 
and then shoals gradually to the shore, which is generally bold, so 
that 7 fathoms water is often found at a distance of 200 yards from 
the cliffs. 

Coming from the westward in thick weather, the soundings are 
so regular that a depth of 30 fathoms may be easily maintained, 
and both cape Pine and cape Race rounded with safety. As the 
soundings after passing cape Race deepen, a cast of 60 to 80 fath- 
oms will show the navigator that he has rounded this cape, and, 
with attention to the lead, a course may be steered to the north- 
eastward with confidence. 

Pig bank, on which the depths are 17 to 20 fathoms, extends 
about 24 miles northeast and southwest, with a width of rather less 
than a mile. The eastern end of the bank bears 185°, distant 43 
miles from cape Race. There are depths of 21 to 26 fathoms around 
the bank. 

Mistaken point, 4 miles west-southwestward of cape Race, is a 
green hummock 100 feet high, rising from slate cliffs; on this point 
is a cairn which is a good mark in foggy weather; but it has not 
been repaired in some years and may be difficult to make out. 

Between Mistaken point and cape Race is Shingle head, with slate 
cliffs 100 feet high. 


HORSESHOE ROCK—-CAPE MUTTON. 87 


In June and July, the caplin season, a large number of boats are 
engaged in fishing off this coast. 

Horseshoe rock, a patch 4 mile long northeast and southwest 
and about 800 yards wide, situated with Mistaken point bearing 67°, 
distant 63%; miles, and with cape Pine lighthouse bearing 283°, distant 
9,6, miles, has 12 to 19 fathoms water over it. 

Nickerson bank is a rocky patch, extending about 1,600 yards 
north-northwest and south-southeast, with a width of 1,400 yards, 
within the 20-fathom contour line. On it are two heads of 104 and 
12 fathoms, 150 yards apart, with 13 fathoms between. The bank 
is fairly steep-to. 

In heavy weather the sea probably breaks on the 104-fathom head, 
which les with cape Race lighthouse bearing 40°, distant 17,%; miles 
and with a long swell from the westward there is a decided lift over 
the shoalest part of the bank. 

It is stated that there are other patches of 11 and 12 fathoms be- 
tween Nickerson bank and Lamb rock (about 28 miles to the west- 
ward). 

Freshwater point, west by north 2 miles from Mistaken point, 
is low, with the land rising in its rear; in the cove northward of the 
point there is a waterfall 100 feet high. 

Current.—In calm weather and after easterly or southeasterly 
winds the current sets westward round Freshwater point, while it 
usually sets eastward during and after southwesterly or westerly 
winds. 

Trepassey bay, 12 miles wide at its entrance between Freshwater 
point and cape Pine, extends 4 miles inland; and within it are Por- 
tugal cove, Biscay and Mutton bays, and Trepassey harbor, the last 
three being at the head of the bay. Between Freshwater point and 
Portugal cove, 44 miles north-northwestward, the cliffs are from 100 
to 200 feet high and the shore rocky and difficult of access. 

Caution.—Many wrecks have occurred upon this shore in foggy 
weather, caused by the indraft, which sometimes runs 2 miles an hour 
on the eastern side of this bay. Sailing vessels should keep a good 
offing, as the wind often falls light near the shore, and the current and 
drift of the sea are nearly always toward the land. 

Portugal cove is rocky and dangerous. On its eastern side a few 
families live, who farm as well as fish, and have a good stock of cows, 
horses, and sheep. 

Cape Mutton, a round hill 330 feet high, divides Biscay and 
Mutton bays, both of which should be avoided by sailing vessels. 
Biscay bay is # mile wide and 2 miles long, and at its head is a stream 
abounding with trout and salmon. With offshore winds, steamers 
anchor in the middle of the bay in 5 fathoms water, sand bottom. 


88 CAPE RACE TO CREW POINT. 


Powles peninsula, 24 miles long north-northeastward and south- 
southwestward and 800 to 1,000 yards wide, forms the western side 
of Mutton bay and the eastern side of Trepassey harbor; it is con- 
nected to the mainland by a narrow shingle beach. Powles head, the 
southern end of the peninsula, rises to the height of 120 feet, while 
the land on the western shore of the harbor rises to heights of 400 and 
500 feet. 

Light.—A square white lghthouse, with sloping sides 30 feet 
high, on the southern end of Powles head, exhibits, at 101 feet above 
high water, an intermittent white lght, thus: light, 1 second; 
eclipse, 1 second, which should be seen, in clear weather, a distance of 
14 miles. 

The keeper’s dwelling is attached to the lighthouse and painted 
white. 

Fog signal.—aA diaphone trumpet, operated by compressed air, 
from a white building situated southeastward of the lighthouse on 
Powles head, sounds, during thick or foggy weather, blasts of 5 sec- 
onds duration, separated by silent intervals of 112 seconds. 

Signals.—The lghthouse is supplied with the International code 
of signals. . 

Shoals.—Shoal ground extends 300 yards southward of Powles 
head and 800 yards southward from the point northeastward of it. 

Trepassey harbor extends about 5 miles in a northeast by north 
direction, with a general width of 600 yards to 4 mile. A bank with 
3 to 5 fathoms water on it stretches off the western shore and leaves a 
narrow channel, with 5 to 6 fathoms water in it, off Powles peninsula. 
The northeastern part of this bank is called Meadow bank and has 
depths of 3 to 12 feet water on it; Meadow spit at the northeastern 
end of Meadow bank dries for nearly 300 yards offshore. 

Savadown rock, with 6 feet water on it, lies about 1,200 yards 
northeastward of the western point of Powles peninsula, and bears 
264° from the first gravel beach, 1 mile northeast from Powles head, 
and 160 yards offshore. 

Emerald shoal, about 700 yards south-southeastward of Daniel 
point (which divides the northern end of the harbor into two parts), 
and 270 yards off the eastern shore, has a depth of 11 feet over it at 
low water springs, mud, sand, and stones bottom, and 2 to 4 fathoms 
around it. 

Anchorage.—The usual anchorage, in 5 fathoms water, mud bot- 
tom, 600 yards north-northeastward of Beach point, is sheltered; but 
the best anchorage is completely landlocked in 7 fathoms water, mud 
bottom, above Meadow point. 

Pilots.—Fishing boats from Trepassey are nearly always to be 
found in the offing, and the fishermen are generally qualified to act 
as pilots. 


TREPASSEY. VILLAGE—-CAPE PINE. 89 


Directions.— Vessels bound into Trepassey harbor in thick weather 
should try to make the land on the western side of Trepassey bay, 
about Baker head, which is bold and hes about 3 miles southwest 
from the entrance to Trepassey harbor. 

From off Baker head, a precipitous bluff 360 feet high, steer toward 
the entrance of the harbor and keep in the fairway. Sims point, at 
the southeastern side of entrance to the northeastern arm of harbor, 
open of Beach point, the northern end of Powles peninsula bearing 
28°, clears Savadown rock, and Baker head, the outer extreme of 
land on the west shore, open of Skinner rocks, also on west shore, 
bearing 218°, clears Meadow bank. 

When about 600 yards above Beach point, anchor in 5 fathoms 
water, with Beach point and Powles head in line, bearing 207°, or 
proceed to the anchorage northward of Meadow point, passing be- 
tween Meadow spit and Emerald shoal, with Daniel point bearing 
about 354°. 

Ice.—During winter, if the ice is heavy on the east coast, blocking 
access to St. Johns and the eastern harbors, Trepassey harbor may 
be safely entered, as it is only occasionally blocked by field ice, which 
arrives about May 1 and leaves about May 10. Winds from north- 
northeast clear the bay of ice; winds southward of east fill the bay 
with ice; and southerly winds pack it. The last vessel generally 
leaves the bay about the end of September. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Trepassey harbor at 
Th. 0m.; springs rise 64 feet, neaps 5 feet. The rate of the tidal 
stream is only $ mile an hour. 

Trepassey village, with its neat Roman Catholic chapel, is on 
northern part of Powles peninsula and extends over to the mainland 
on the eastern side of the harbor, and it may be seen from Mutton 
bay and from seaward over the shingle beach. There is good sea 
trout fishing at Trepassey. 

Communication.—A steamer from St. Johns calls here weekly 
from early in May until December. There is telegraphic communi- 
cation with and a road leading to St. Johns, distant 70 miles. There 
is a weekly mail service to and from St. Johns by road. | 

Water can be obtained from a stream near Meadow spit. 

The shore of Trepassey bay from the entrance of the harbor 
to Baker head, a distance of about 3 miles southwestward, is covered 
with brushwood. Baker head is a precipitous bluff, 360 feet high, 
whence the shore to cape Pine, southwestward, distant 4 miles, is 
barren. 

Cape Pine is composed of slate cliffs 200 feet high; on its south- 
western side the land is not so steep, but the coast in this vicinity is 
all fringed with slate rocks in nearly vertical strata. The cape is 
bare of trees and the land rising at the back is rocky and barren. In 


90 CAPE RACE TO CREW POINT. 


moderate weather boats can land in Arnold cove, about 2 mile west- 
ward of the cape, or in a cove 600 yards northeastward. There is a 
good road from the lighthouse to Meadow bank on the northwestern 
side of Trepassey harbor. 

Light.—A cylindrical lighthouse, 56 feet high and painted red 
and white in horizontal bands, on cape Pine, exhibits, at 314 feet 
above high water, a white fixed light, which should be seen between 
the bearings 230° and 106°, through 0°, a distance in clear weather 
of 24 miles. Cape Freels, situated westward 1 mile from cape 
Pine, being low, the light is seen over it, and is not obscured by the 
intervening land until on a bearing 106°. The keeper’s dwelling is 
connected to the lighthouse by a covered way. 

Signals.—The lighthouse is supphed with the International code 
of signals. 

Henry rock, situated with Cape Pine hghthouse bearing 11°, 
distant 2/5 miles, is a small patch with 8 fathoms water over it. 

Freels rock, lying 235°, distant 8 miles from Cape Pine lght- 
house, is small, with 3 fathoms water on it; there is a clear channel 
between the rock and the cape, with 9 to 12 fathoms water. . 

Clearing marks.—Powles head hghthouse, well open southward 
of Cape Pine lighthouse, bearing 48°, leads southeastward of Freels 
rock, and Gull island point, open of St. Shots Western head, bearing 
346°, leads westward of it. 

St. Shots cove, west northwestward 3 miles from cape Pine, 
formed between Eastern and Western heads, is quite open; a few 
families reside on its eastern shore, and they are always ready to 
assist shipwrecked mariners. | 

Caution.—Many shipwrecks have taken place in the vicinity of 
St. Shots cove, principally on Eastern head, from which a ledge of 
slate rocks extends south-southwestward 200 yards. In most cases 
these wrecks have occurred during foggy weather from neglect to 
use the lead, and want of attention to the currents. (See pages 
52, 54.) : 

St. Marys bay.—The entrance to St. Marys bay is about 20 
miles wide between Western head of St. Shots cove and Lance point, 
the southern end of the headland separating St. Marys and Placentia 
bays; the bay runs in north-northeastward about 25 miles and con- 
tains several good harbors and numerous coves between headlands. 

Both the eastern and western shores of the bay are generally bold 
and backed by hills from 120 to 500 feet high. 

Salmonier river, Colinet, and North harbors are at the head of the 
bay, where fog is much less frequent and the climate is much finer 
than at the entrance. 

The land, when brought under cultivation, is well adapted for 
pasture or for the growth of potatoes and the hardier cereals. 


HOLYROOD BAY—ST. MARYS HARBOR. 91 


Ice.—-Southerly and southwesterly winds fill the bay with ice, 
but northeasterly winds clear it, driving the ice to the westward. 

Holyrood bay.—Gull island point is 4 miles northward of West- 
ern head of St. Shots cove, and between it and cape English, 54 miles 
farther northward, is Holyrood bay, which, being open and exposed 
to the sea, affords no safe anchorage. Behind the long gravel beach 
which forms the shore of this bay is Holyrood pond, a body of fresh 
water 11 miles long and 1 mile wide. <A few fishermen reside at the 
northwestern end of the beach. During spring, when the water rises 
from the melting of snow, the beach is broken through, and during 
summer the channel becomes deep enough to permit.the entrance of 
small fishing boats, but in autumn heavy seas usually close it again, 
so that during winter the pond has no outlet. It is deep, and abounds 
with codfish, trout, and salmon; and at the head of the pond there 
is a good brook for trout. 

Cape English, a precipitous bluff 330 feet high, appears from the 
southwestward like an island. 

Bank rock, bearing 352°, distant 5 miles from cape English, is 
small, with 4 fathoms water over it. 

Greet rock, with 44 fathoms of water over it, lies near the north- 
eastern end of a narrow bank, 1,3; miles in length, and running paral- 
lel to the shore at # mile from it. From the rock Lahaye point 

‘lighthouse bears 30°, distant 1,%, miles. 

Clearing marks.—Shag rock, at the southern end of Holyrood 
bay, well open of cape English, bearing 169°, leads westward of 
Bank rock; and Lizzy Point, in St. Marys harbor, in line with 
Doubleroad point, bearing 55°, leads northward of it and Greet rock. 

If the clearing marks are obscured, do not approach the vicinity of 
Bank and Greet rocks to a depth less than 40 fathoms in a ship of 
heavy draft. 

Woody Cove rock, with 4 fathoms of water over it, lies near the 
northeastern extreme of the narrow bank mentioned above; from it 
Lahaye Point lighthouse bears 29°, distant 13 miles. 

Lahaye point is situated 7 miles north-northeastward of English 
cape; a stony shoal, upon which the sea breaks heavily, extends south- 
westward 800 yards from the point. 

Light.—A circular lhghthouse, 28 feet high and painted with 
three red and three white horizontal bands, on Lahaye point, exhibits, 
at 63 feet above high water, a fixed white light, which should be seen 
in clear weather a distance of 9 miles. 

The red and white bands are continued around a flat-roofed store 
in rear of the lighthouse. 

St. Marys harbor.—The entrance of St. Marys harbor between 
Lahaye point and Frapeau point, 24 miles north by west, is about 14 


92 CAPE RACE TO CREW POINT. 


miles wide, and the harbor extends eastward and northeastward about 
64 miles, gradually narrowing to its head. 

The inhabitants, numbering 518, are mostly employed in the fish- 
eries. The land, where cleared of stones, bears good crops of oats, 
potatoes, and hay; it is cultivated in small patches, and cattle and 
sheep have fair pasture. 

Anchorage.—There is fair anchorage in 6 fathoms of water, 
sandy bottom, abreast the village on the southern side of the harbor, 
with the Roman Catholic church bearing 185°, but occasionally a 
heavy ground swell is experienced here. The best shelter is 2 miles 
farther up in 7 fathoms water, mud bottom. 

Shoals.—Coalpit shoal, with 3 fathoms water over it, rocky bot- 
tom, lies eastward of the lower anchorage and 600 yards from Coalpit 
point. Paddock shoal, with 4 feet water over it, rocky bottom, les 
north-northwestward of Northeast beach, near the head of the harbor. 

Ice.—The ice in St. Marys harbor is generally thin, and it is 
seldom so thick as to interfere with anchorage; the harbor is often 
accessible when an anchorage can not be obtained in Trepassey. 
Winds southward of east fill the harbor with ice, and southerly winds 
pack it; northeasterly. winds clear it. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in St. Marys harbor 
th. 40m.; springs rise 74 feet, neaps 5 feet. . 

Communication.—A steamer from gt. Johns calls at St. Marys 
harbor weekly from early in May until December. 

Supplies.—Good water can be obtained at the head of the harbor, 
and small supplies of milk, eggs, and butter at the village. 

Mal bay, northwestward of St. Marys harbor, extends 3 miles 
north-northeastward, and has no safe anchorage except close to its 
head, in 6 fathoms of water, sand bottom. 

Shoal bay, separated from Mal bay by Frapeau point, is open to 
the prevailing winds, and should not be entered. 

Great Colinet island.—Shoal Bay point separates Shoal bay 
from Colinet passage, and Great Colinet island hes on the western 
side of the passage. This island is 4,4; miles long, 1 mile broad, 
and attains a height of 333 feet. At the northern end of the island 
a limited anchorage, called Mother Hicks cove, affords shelter from 
southerly winds. 

Little Colinet island, 1, miles north-northeastward of Great 
Colinet island, with a deep channel between, is 1 mile long, 4 mile 
broad, and 235 feet high. In both Great and Little Colinet islands 
bare hills rise from rocky cliffs, around which there is deep water. 

Colinet passage is 1 mile wide in its narrowest part and clear 
of dangers except for a rock lying nearly 800 yards north-northwest- 
ward of Shoal Bay point and 200 yards offshore; Mussel Pond point, 
open of Admirals beach, bearing 33°, leads northwestward of this 


SALMONIER RIVER—COLINET HARBOR. 93 


rock. Anchorage sheltered from southwesterly winds has been ob- 
tained under the lee of Admirals Beach spit. 

Salmonier river entrance, about northeast, 6 miles from Little 
Colinet island, is 1,400 yards wide; within the entrance the river nar- 
rows gradually, and at the distance of 6 miles receives the waters of 
a shallow stream. 

A shoal sand spit extends 200 yards from Cox point, above the 
curved gravel beach on the northern side; to clear it keep the southern 
entrance point open until Little harbor valley bears 106°. 

Shoal water extends from the sandy beach in front of Little har- 
bor, and Bluff head just open of Cross point, bearing 39°, clears it. 
Little harbor is the outlet of a fine run of fresh water and affords, 
within the sandy beach, safe winter shelter for fishing craft. 

Anchorage.—A Roman Catholic church stands on the southern 
shore of the river at 12 miles from the entrance; off it there is anchor- 
age in 8 fathoms water, mud bottom; there is also anchorage in 6 
fathoms above the sand spit extending from Cox point. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Salmonier river at 
wh. 40m.; springs rise 74 feet, neaps 5 feet. 

Haricot bay is northwestward of Salmonier river and separated 
from it by Haricot point. The bay has deep water, but no safe 
anchorage. 

Pinchgut tickle is a shallow channel, westward of Haricot bay. 
It lies between Pinchgut island and the mainland. 

Pinchgut island, lying between Colinet harbor and Pinchgut 
tickle, is 8 miles long north and south, with a greatest breadth of 4 
mile. 

Colinet harbor entrance les north-northeast, distant 6 miles 
from Little Colinet island, and it is 1 mile wide between Pinchgut 
island and Johns pond. The harbor extends north-northeastward 
about 5 miles, and gradually narrows to its head. Good water may 
be taken from a river at the head of the harbor. 

A few settlers reside at Johns pond, on the western side of the 
entrance, where there is a fair anchorage for small vessels, which is 
more convenient for the fisheries than is the harbor. 

Shoals.—Johns shoal extends nearly 600 yards eastward from the 
beach of Johns pond. Shoal’ water extends nearly + mile around 
Pinchgut point, which is the southern point of Pinchgut island. 
Back shoal extends nearly 600 yards from Pinchgut island, south- 
westward of Back point, the northwestern point of the island. 

Directions.—Little Colinet island open of Bushy head, bearing 
206°, clears Johns shoal; after passing this shoal keep toward the 
western shore, and in depths of not less than 7 fathoms. Davis point, 
on the western shore toward the head of the harbor, open eastward of 
Half island, bearing about 28°, clears Back shoal. Anchor abreast 


94 CAPE RACE TO CREW POINT. 


Half island in 7 fathoms water, mud bottom; this position is the best 
anchorage in Colinet harbor. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Colinet harbor at 
8h. Om.; springs rose 74 feet, neaps 5 feet. 

North harbor.—The entrance to North harbor is 2 miles north 
of Little Colinet island. The harbor, which extends north-north- 
eastward about 5 miles, is clear of shoals, except near the shore, but 
it is open to the prevailing southwesterly winds, and therefore can 
not be recommended as a secure anchorage for vessels of any size. 

Anchorage.—Small craft anchor in safety in 3 fathoms water, 
mud, about 4 miles within the entrance, under shelter of a beach on 
the northern side. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in North harbor at 
8h. Om.; springs rise 74 feet, neaps 5 feet. 

Cape Dog, rising 330 feet above the sea, with perpendicular cliffs 
of slate, lies on the western side of North Harbor entrance. 

The shore from cape Dog to Lance point, the southwestern en- 
trance point of St. Marys bay, is shghtly indented by several coves. 

Branch cove, the most important of these coves, situated 7 miles 
northeastward of Lance point, is the outlet of a little river; in mod- 
erate weather fishing boats cross over the river bar at high water 
and lie secure. | 

Branch head, the southern point of the cove, is a steep bluff 260 
feet high, and close off it are the Hares ears, two rocks 40 feet high. 

Rocks.—The following rocks lie off the western shore of St. 
Marys bay: 

Daly rock, with Maggotty point bearing 278°, distant 1 mile, has 
a depth of 5 fathoms over it. 

Red Head rock, bearing 143°, distant 2 miles from Red head, has 
4 fathoms water over it. 

Beckford shoal, bearing 70°, distant 24; miles from the Hares 
ears, has 7 fathoms water. 

Mussel rock, bearing 148°, distant 14 miles from the Hares ears, 
has 6 fathoms water over it and is dangerous in a heavy sea. 

Red Cove rock, bearing 168°, nearly 2 miles distant from the 
Hares ears, has 3 fathoms water on it. 

Lance point, the southwestern point of St. Marys bay, is low, but 
the land 1 mile to the northward rises to the height of 200 feet. 
. Shoal water extends southward 400 yards from the point. 

Lance rock, bearing 188°, 14 miles from Lance point, has 12 feet 
water over it. 

Delaney rocks are two rocks of small extent, with depths of 24 
and 3 fathoms, respectively, over them, lying westward of Lance point 
and northeast and southwest from each other, 300 yards apart. From 


BULL AND COW—FALSE CAY. 95 


the northeastern and shoaler rock Lance point bears 84°, distant 145 
miles. 

Bull and Cow, bearing 242°, 1$ miles from Lance point, are black 
slate rocks, 30 feet high. 

The Sunker, a rock nearly awash at low water, bears 185°, distant 
800 yards from Bull islet, which is situated close off Bull Island 
point, and 279°, 2 miles from Lance point. 

The coast from Bull Island point trends west-northwestward for 
33 miles to cape St. Mary, forming between two bays which are ex- 
posed to the sea. 

Cape St. Mary, from a little distance, has the appearance of high 
table land, at the western extremity of which is the lighthouse. 

Light.—A cylindrical red lighthouse, 40 feet high, with dwellings, 
painted white with red roofs, on each side, all connected by a covered 
way, stands near the edge of a cliff, 300 feet high, at cape St. Mary, 
and exhibits, at 390 feet above high water, a revolving light showing 
red and white alternately at intervals of one minute, which should be 
seen in clear weather a distance of 23 miles. 

The nearest landing place to the lighthouse is at Brierly cove, about 
1 mile to the northward. 

Signals.—The lighthouse is supplhed with the International code 
of signals. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, at cape St. uy at 
8h. 30m.; springs rise 7 feet, neaps 5 feet. 

Lamb rock, situated in latitude 46° 28’ 05’” north and longitude 
54° 01’ 30’’ west, and bearing 246°, distant 224 miles from cape Pine, 
is a pinnacle, with a depth of 33 feet over it, on a plateau about 200 
yards in extent within the depth of 10 fathoms, and 400 yards in ex- 
tent within the depth of 30 fathoms. With a heavy swell the sea 
breaks on this rock, and it should always be given a wide berth. 

Caution.—This rock lies in the track of shipping passing along 
the south coast of Newfoundland. 

St. Mary cays are two small rocks, 120 yards apart, west by north 
and east by south and always showing, being nearly awash at high 
water, bearing 189°, distant 64 miles from cape St. Mary lighthouse. 
The sea generally breaks upon the rocks, and the water is shoal 
around them over an area about 800 yards across. <A patch of 6 
fathoms bears 89°, 1 mile from St. Mary cays. 

The 30-fathoms contour line of soundings is less than 1 mile from 
St. Mary cays; it is therefore not safe to approach the cape to a less 
depth than 35 fathoms in foggy weather. 

False cay, a rock bearing 185°, distant 54 miles from cape St. Mary 
lighthouse, and 53°, 14 miles from St. Mary cays, has 12 feet water 
over it. 


96 CAPE RACE TO CREW POINT. 


Placentia bay.—Burin Island lighthouse bears 286°, distant 404 
miles from cape St. Mary lighthouse, and between them is the en- 
trance to Placentia bay, which extends north-northeastward about 
60 miles, and contains numerous bays, harbors, and islands. 

Fog.—During southwesterly winds the fog is generally very dense 
on the southeastern side of Placentia bay, especially about the head- 
land of cape St. Mary. 

Ice.—Placentia bay is sometimes partly filled with ice early in 
February, but it is seldom completely filled before the middle of that 
month; and south to southwesterly winds are necessary to drive the 
ice in. Soon after the ice from the eastward has rounded cape St. 
Mary, the strong tidal stream on the eastern shore carries it as far as 
Ram islands; heavy ice and small icebergs are occasionally carried 
up to Come by Chance point. The bay is sometimes frozen over. 

The southeastern shore of Placentia bay trends north-north- 
eastward from cape St. Mary for 26 miles to the entrance of Pla- 
centia harbor. The land is from 150 to 500 feet in height, and the 
headlands are steep with coves between, affording shelter to a few 
scattered fishing stations. The land when cultivated yields good 
crops of potatoes, oats, and hay. 

Rocks.—Several rocks lie off the southeastern shore of the bay, 
which therefore should not be approached to a less depth than 40 
fathoms, except in clear weather. 

Perch rock bears 320°, distant 5? miles from cape St. Mary light- 
house, and has 15 feet water over it. 

Clearing mark.—Bull and Cow rocks open of cape St. Mary, 
bearing 123°, leads southwestward of the rock. 

Nest rock bears 24°, distant 1 mile from Perch rock, and has 9 
feet of water over it; the sea generally breaks on this rock. 

Curslet rock bears 231°, distant 13 miles from Bremé point, and 
has 12 feet water over it. 

Patrick rock bears 283°, distant 14 miles from the mouth of the 
river at Patrick cove, and has 9 feet water over it. 

Goose shoal bears 315°, distant 2? mile from Goose cove, and has 
4% fathoms water over it. 

Girdle rock bears 195°, distant 1 mile from Virgin rocks, and is 
covered only at very high tides. 

False Girdle bears 146°, distant about 4 mile from Girdle rock, 
and has 6 feet water over it. 

South rock bears 173°. distant nearly # mile from Girdle rock, and 
has 9 feet water over it. 

Virgin rocks, three black rocks above water, one of which is 18 
feet high, lie 14 miles from the shore, and bear 216°, distant 6} miles 
from Verde Point lighthouse. 


+ 


GIBRALTAR ROCK——PLACENTIA HARBOR. 97 


Gibraltar rock, with 5 feet water over it, bears 249°, distant 14 
miles from Verde Point hghthouse. The channel between this rock 
and the shore is clear, but there is a patch of 5 fathoms at 1,300 yards 
east-southeastward of the rock. 

Clearing mark.—Castle hill, in line with Verde point extreme, 
bearing 69°, leads close northward of Gibraltar rock. 

Verde point, north-northeastward 26 miles from cape St. Mary, 
is the southwestern entrance point of Placentia road; a stony shoal 
extends north-northeastward nearly $ mile from the point. 

Light.—A light tower rising above a flat-roofed dwelling, painted 
white and altogether 44 feet high, on Verde point, exhibits at 98 feet 
above high water, an intermittent white light, thus: hght, 2 seconds; 
eclipse, 1 second, which should be seen a distance in clear weather of 
11 miles. 

Placentia road.—Créveceeur poimt lies northeastward 14 miles 
from Verde point, and Placentia road, extending east-southeastward 
about 14 miles from between them, affords indifferent anchorage in 
depth of less than 5 fathoms, sand and gravel bottom. The road- 
stead is open to winds from west-southwest to north-northwest, which 
send in a heavy sea, and no vessel should remain at this anchorage 
when the wind veers from south-southwest to west-southwest, or west. 
especially if the barometer is low. 

Privécceur shoal, a patch of 2? fathoms least water, lies in the 
fairway with Crevecceur point bearing 83°, distant 4 mile. 

Shoal.—A 3-fathom patch lies in the roadstead, with Verde Point 
hghthouse bearing 243°, distant 1 mile. 

Leading mark.—The northern house on Town point, open south-— 
ward of Castle hill, bearing 89°, leads nearly in midchannel between 
Privécceur and Verde Point shoals. See also page 99. 

Telegraph cables.—Six telegraph cables are landed at Fresh- 
water cove, on the northern side of Placentia road. 

In order to avoid fouling these cables, vessels should not anchor 
within + mile of the northern side of the roadstead till eastward of 
the line of the cable hut bearing 359°. 

Ice.—Placentia road is filled with drift ice by southwesterly to 
northwesterly winds, but northeasterly winds clear the road; and 
anchorage can generally be obtained, by vessels drawing 12 feet 
water, in the northeast arm, where the ice is kept open by the current. 
The northeast arm occasionally freezes between January 6 and Febru- 
ary 10, and the ice breaks up between the end of March and April 5. 
although in severe winters it has not broken up before May 1. 

Placentia harbor is entered from the eastern end of Placentia 
road by a channel, 65 yards in width between the low entrance points, 
and only 10 feet deep at low water. At the time of Cook’s Survey 
(1765), there was a depth of 20 feet at low water in the channel. 


76846—09 7 


98 CAPE RACE TO CREW POINT. 


The harbor may be recognized by the hills in the vicinity which are 
rounded and detached and are higher than the table-land of cape 
St. Mary. 

The northeast arm of the harbor extends about 14 miles in an 
east-northeasterly direction, with a general width of 575 yards and 
depths of 3} to 5 fathoms; it then turns eastward for a further dis- 
tance of about 3 miles. 

The southeast arm is entered from the northeast arm by a narrow 
channel passing on the eastern side of the town; it is navigable only 
for boats. ia 

Anchorage.—Within the channel the northeast arm of the harbor 
affords sheltered anchorage in 5 fathoms water, mud bottom. The 
best berths are on the northern side, being more out of the whirl and 
eddy of the tidal streams. 

Directions.—The rate of the tidal streams, which run about 4 
knots, and the absence of good leading marks, render the aid of a 
pilot necessary to enter the harbor. 

Tides and tidal streams.—It is high water, full and change, in 
Placentia harbor at 8h. 30m.; springs rise 7 feet, neaps 5 feet. 

Placentia town, which is small, but was formerly a place of some 
importance, stands partly on the eastern side of an extensive shingle 
beach of southeast arm and partly on the shore of northeast arm; it 
has four hotels and a large Roman Catholic church; the population is 
about 563. 

There is a fair road to St. John’s, and two ferryboats convey 
passengers to and fro between the two parts of the town. During 
July the arms of the sea abound in sea trout, and there are numerous 
streams and small lakes affording excellent trout fishing. Deer can 
generally be obtained in the vicinity during the season. 

Communication.—There is railway communication with St. 
John’s, distant 843 miles, via Placentia junction and Whitbourne, the 
railway wharf being close southward of Castle hill. A steamer runs 
fortnightly to Halifax, via Bras d’Or lake, Cape Breton island; a 
steamer runs weekly to St. Johns; and the Placentia bay steamer 
leaves twice a week during the navigable season. There is telegraphic 
communication over the Anglo-American Telegraph Company’s wires. 
See also pages 37, 38. | 

Supplies.— Mutton can be purchased here in moderate quantities, 
and good water can be procured about 1 mile up the northeast arm. 

The shore of Placentia bay from Crévecceur point trends north- 
northwestward for 1,500 yards to Moll point, forming a bight be- 
tween; then about north for nearly 1 mile to Shalloway point; 
whence, forming a bight, it continues in the same direction for 2 miles 
to Latine point. Signal hill, within Crévecceur point, is 377 feet 


high. 


SHALLOWAY POINT—-ROCHE POINT. 99 


Shalloway point is a low projection faced by a sand cliff 30 
feet high, within which are several houses; it is the southern extreme 
of Marquise, the shingle beach that divides Sandy cove from the sea. 

Moll rock bears 266°, distant 1,500 yards from Shalloway point, 
and has 6 feet water over it. 

Leading mark.—Dixon point, south-southwestward of Placentia 
town, in line with Creévecceur point, bearing 115°, leads $ mile south- 
westward of Moll rock, and nearly 400 yards northeastward of Privé- 
coeur shoal. 

The Deadman, a rock awash at low water, bears 351°, distant 1/45 
miles from Shalloway point. 

Little Placentia peninsula, rising 75 feet above high water, is 
formed of gravel deposit covered with marsh and faced by sand 
cliffs 30 to 40 feet high. These slope to a low point at the north and 
rise again to Latine point, the northwestern point of the peninsula, 
38 feet high, on which is a flagstaff. The peninsula is 2 miles long 
north and south, expanding from the narrow neck of Marquise to 14 
miles in width at the northern end. On this northern end is a beach 
of shingle, 5 feet above high water, surrounding a pond, the entrance 
to which is gradually silting up. There is no passage at low water 
even for a boat. 

Light.—A square tower with sloping sides, 30 feet high, and 
painted red and white in horizontal bands, on Latine point, exhibits 
at 42 feet above high water a fixed red light that should be seen in 
clear weather a distance of 10 miles. 

Two white buildings with black roofs are situated near the light- 
house. 

The exact position of the lighthouse is not given, but it has been 
placed on the chart with the flagstaff on the point bearing 45°, distant 
375 yards. 

Shoals.—Two patches of 2? and 3 fathoms water bear 8°, distant 
600 yards and 4 mile, respectively, from Latine point, and shoal water 
extends from the point to a depth of 3 fathoms for 4 mile, and to a 
depth of 5 fathoms for ? mile. White point, bearing 124° just open 
of Isaac point, leads clear in 54 fathoms. 

The Pond.—Close eastward of Latine point is The Pond, about 
800 yards in length and 400 yards in breadth, with 34 fathoms water 
in places; there is no passage into it. 

Roche point is the extremity of a shingle spit, 9 feet high, forming 
a basin between it and The Pond, sheltered by a bar. This basin 
forms a shelter for the fishing fleet of the neighborhood, and is 
entered on a course of 140°, keeping the western side of Roche 
point close aboard, and looking out for the shoal which continues 
about 200 yards in the direction of Roche point. Houses line the 
shore within the basin, and a Roman Catholic church, with a seaffold 


100 CAPE RACE TO CREW POINT. 


belfry near it, shows conspicuously. The 5-fathom line of soundings 
is 4 mile to the northward of Roche point. 

Virgin point, the northeastern point of Little Placentia penin- 
sula and the turning point into the harbor, has shoal water extend- 
ing 200 yards to the eastward. 

Little Placentia harbor, on the southeastern side of the penin- 
sula, extends about southwest by west 1,8, miles, with a width of 
1,400 yards at its entrance, decreasing to 300 yards at its head. A 
shoal stretches southward 600 yards from the northern side of the 
harbor at 800 yards within the entrance. 

Anchorage.—There is anchorage in Sandy cove, at the head of 
the harbor, in 12 fathoms water, mud bottom; and off Cooper cove, 
which lies westward of the shoal on the northern side of the harbor, 
in the same depth. See preceding paragraph. 

Directions.—To enter Little Placentia harbor, keep White point, 
on the north side of Placentia sound, just open of Isaac point, bear- 
ing 124°, until Black head, the southeastern extreme of Little Placen- 
tia peninsula, is just open of Lowroom point, its eastern extreme, 
bearing 215°, when alter course to 195°, keeping Long harbor head 
open northwestward of Isaac point, bearing 16°, until Shalloway 
point is just shut in with the bluff on Marquise, bearing 232°. This 
range leads up the harbor, and to the anchorage either in Cooper cove, 
with the western house bearing northward of 279°, or in Sandy cove 
on the range. 

Ice.—Little Placentia harbor, from Sandy cove to Cairn head, 
sometimes freezes early in February, but only in severe winters, which 
occur about every six to eight years, and the ice breaks up about 
April 1; northern ice generally arrives in March and remains three to 
four weeks. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Little Placentia har- 
bor, at 7h. 58m.; springs rise 7 feet, neaps 44 feet. 

Placentia sound stretches, with one bend, east-southeastward 
nearly 3 miles. 1 

Isaac heads, two remarkable conical hills, 320 and 427 feet high, 
form the northeastern entrance point of the sound. The shores fall 
steeply from wooded hills, and are bold until within $ mile of the 
head. Southerly to westerly winds always draw down Little Pla- 
centia harbor, and blow with heavy squalls under Isaac heads; even 
when the wind is light outside, boats should always reef with these 
winds when approaching Isaac point. 

Shoals.—Two shoals, which are the only dangers, are situated in 
mid-channel southeastward of Isaac heads; the outer, with 3 fathoms 
water over it, bears 176° distant 1,200 yards from Isaac point; and 
the inner occupies a space 400 yards long northeast and southwest, 
and 250 yards wide, on which the least depth is 6 feet, bearing 143°, 
} mile, from Isaac point. 


FOX HARBOR—MORATTIES. 101 


Leading marks.—F ox island, shut in compietely with Isaac point, 
bearing 316°, leads eastward; Long harbor head, open northwestward 
of Isaac point, bearing 13°, leads 300 yards northwestward; and 
Sugarloaf, over the first gap in the hills eastward of the Neck of Isaac, 
and bearing 41°, leads southward of these shoals. To proceed up Pla- 
centia sound it is necessary only to observe these leading marks and 
then keep in mid-channel. 

Fox harbor, a mile eastward of Isaac heads, by which it is shel- 
tered, is a shallow basin with houses on the surrounding shores; there 
are depths of 2 to 2# fathoms inside, but the entrance between shoals 
stretching from both shores has only 5 feet in it at low water. Sam- 
son point, a low hummock, 45 feet high, under a flat hill 350 feet” 
above high water, is the turning point into the harbor from Placentia 
sound. Off the point hes Shag rock, 5 feet high. 

Ice.—Placentia sound freezes early in February from White point 
to Coxhill point, and the ice breaks up about April 1. 

Ship harbor extends northeastward 44 miles from Isaac point. 
It is clear of shoals except close to the shore and within 500 yards 
of the head. 

Northeast cove, the eastern part of Ship harbor at 3 miles from 
Isaac point, is open to seaward and affords no shelter. It is separated 
from the main part of the harbor by Sugarloaf point. 

Conway cove is on the northwestern side of Ship harbor, and 
from this cove to the head of the harbor there is anchorage as con- 
venient for vessels. 

Two remarkable hills le on the eastern side of Ship harbor— 
Sharp peak, 836 feet high, over the head of the harbor, and Sugar- 
loaf, 803 feet high, and faced by shingle débris, sloping to Northeast 
cove. 

Ice.—Ship harbor freezes early in February from the point of 
Conway cove to Sugarloaf point, and the ice breaks up about 
April 1. 

Fox island lies northward, distant 2,3; miles from Latine point; 
it is 250 feet high, and is partly wooded, the southern part being bare 
from the summit. Shoal water extends 200 yards from its eastern 
point. 

Moratties are shoal banks extending westward, nearly 2 miles from 
Ship Harbor point, but there is a channel, with 21 to 27 feet water 
in it, between Ship Harbor point and the banks. The western patch, 
with 3 feet least water, bears 109°, distant 32, mile from the western 
point of Fox island, and is 400 yards long. The eastern patch, 1,600 
yards long east and west, is separated by a channel 300 yards wide 
from the western patch and by a channel 900 yards wide from the 
shoal water off Ship Harbor point. 


102 CAPE RACE TO CREW POINT. 


Leading marks.—Northeast cove open southward of Sparrow 
point (the western entrance point of Ship harbor), bearing 84°, leads 
150 yards southward of these shoals. 

A landslip under Broad cove head, on the southwestern side of 
_ Placentia sound, in line with Isaac point, bearing 189°; or a round 
hill over Bald Head bay, just open northward of Long Harbor head, 
bearing 15°, leads between Moratties and Ship Harbor point in 44 
fathoms water. 

The only directions necessary for Ship harbor are to observe these 
clearing marks and then keep in mid-channel to Northeast cove or. 
Cooper cove. 

Ship Harbor point is a shingle spit, 6 feet above high water, 
stretching off the slopes of two cliff-faced hills, 310 and 260 feet high, 
that mark the northwestern point of Ship harbor. 

A bay, 1,300 yards deep, lies between Ship Harbor point and Long 
Harbor head, divided into two parts (Big Seal cove and Little Seal 
cove) by a projecting steep point, the slope of a round hill, with 
numerous bowlders at the summit, 500 feet above high water. The 
south cove, Big Seal, is shallow to the line of the points, but the 
north has anchorage with shelter from offshore winds in 10 fathoms, 
taking care to avoid the rocky points off Long Harbor head. 

Long Harbor head is a steep, tree-covered point, sloping from 
two table-topped hills about 300 and 250 feet high. Shoal ground 
extends 300 yards from this point. 

Long harbor runs east-northeastward 7 miles from Long Harbor 
head. The shores of this harbor are bold-to; but Tim Barrett rock, 
which dries 1 foot at low water, les 350 vata off the south shore 
at 22 miles within the entrance. 

Ice.—In severe winters Long harbor freezes early in February and 
the ice breaks up toward the end of April. Northern ice arrives only 
occasionally, about the end of February, leaving toward the end of 
April. 

Crawley island, lying off a projection that divides Long harbor 
into two arms, Long harbor and St. Croix bay, is 191 feet high. The 
southeastern point of the island is a shingle spit that extends under 
water a short distance, and off the western side of the island are 
some low islets. 

Anchorage.—Civil East cove, the channel between Crawley 
island and the mainland, is shallow at its western end, so that only 
boats can pass at low water; but just inside the eastern entrance 
there is good anchorage for small vessels in 4% fathoms water, mud 
bottom, or just outside for large vessels in 10 fathoms. 

St. Croix bay, extending 2 miles northward of Crawley island, is 
clear of shoals except close to the shore, and affords good anchorage 


SHAG ROCKS—BURKE ISLAND. 103 


in 11 fathoms of water, at from ? mile to within 400 yards of the 
head. Tom Power lookout, a remarkable conical hill, 562 feet high, 
is on the northwestern slope. St. Croix point, the northwestern 
entrance point of this bay, slopes gradually from Tom Power lookout, 
terminating in an islet about 40 feet high, and a rock that covers 2 
feet, close off it. 

A shoal with 12 feet of water over it lies 200 yards, and a rocky 
patch with 34 fathoms of water over it, lies 700 yards southward 
from the point. 

Shag rocks are two islets in the entrance to Long harbor. The 
western islet is a flat grass-covered ridge 39 feet high, faced by dark 
cliffs, with a gap through it near the middle. A reef, awash at 
high water, les about 100 yards off the southern end of this islet. 
The eastern islet, 60 feet high, is wooded and has a double top. 

A rock, with 1 foot water on it, lies 140 yards from the western 
end of these islets; a patch of 32 fathoms les north-northeastward 
about 600 yards, and a rock, on which the depth is 6 feet, bears 59° 
distant 400 yards, from the eastern end of these islets. 

Fish rock, 10 feet high, bears 331°, distant 1,5 miles from the 
western point of Fox island, and a rock, with 10 feet of water on it, 
hes east-southeastward 200 yards from Fish rock. 

Ram islands, a group of islands and rocks nearly 3 miles long 
northward and southward, and lying north-northeastward, distant 2 
miles from Fox island, are divided into two parts, the southern 
known as the Upper Rams, and the northern as the Lower Rams. 

The Upper Rams are four in number, namely, Merchant, Burke, 
Hole-in-the-wall, and King islands. 

Merchant island, the southern, is conical, 310 feet above high 
water, and has a large patch of white moss at the summit that makes 
it conspicuous from the southward. Off the southwestern end is an 
islet called Shag rock, low and steep-to. Off the northwestern point 
is a small island 14 feet above high water, joined by shoal water to 
Merchant island; and in the channel between Merchant and Burke 
islands, about 100 yards from the east point of Merchant island, is a 
rock, with 5 feet water on it. 

The channel between Merchant and Burke islands is 400 yards 
wide, and is clear in the middle; but in addition to the rock men- 
tioned above, there is a shoal, with 6 feet of water, 100 yards from the 
southwestern extreme of Burke island. 

Burke island is composed of a group of conical hills, sloping 
steeply to the sea, and to a valley in the center of the island. The 
two highest are over the south shore, 303 and 285 feet above high 
water. Little Burke island les off the northeastern end; it has a 
square top, 42 feet above high water, and a spur rock extending west 


104 CAPE RACE TO CREW POINT. 


from it. There are only 34 fathoms in the narrow channel between 
Burke and Little Burke islands. 

King island is 4 mile long, and is narrow, consisting of several 
hummocks joined by shingle beaches. It is off the north end of 
Merchant island, separated by a channel nearly 200 yards wide, 
with only 3 feet in it at low water. 

Hole-in-the-wall island, so called from a hole in the cliffs on 
the eastern side, consists of two portions, the’northern of bare rock 
almost joined to the southern, which is a double mound 130 feet high, 
with a now neck between. 

The channel between the two latter islands is 150 yards wide, and 
has 44 fathoms water in it. 

Dangers.—West of these islands is a cluster of rocks and shoals 
extending westward 1% miles, through which no vessel should attempt 
to pass. 

Rowland rock, awash at high water and steep-to all around, is 
the outer of the group, and bears 303°, distant 1¢ miles from the 
southwestern point of Hole-in-the-wall island. Shoal ground, with 
uneven bottom, extends south-southeastward from Rowland rock, ter- 
minating at ? mile distance in a rocky patch with 16 feet of water on 
it. This shoal ground is steep-to on its eastern and western sides. 

Clearing marks.—Tom Walsh lookout (the first high hill on the 
southern shore of Long harbor, eastward of Long Harbor head) open 
northeastward of Merchant island, bearing 109°, leads northeastward 
of the shoals, and the southern shore of Long harbor open southward 
of Ram islands, bearing 75°, leads southward of them. 

Red island shoal, an isolated ledge with 4 feet water over it, and 
deep water at 100 yards around, lies in the fairway of Placentia bay, 
with Fish rock, bearing 131°, distant nearly 2 miles, and Rowland 
rock, bearing 68°, distant 14 miles; it breaks only in heavy weather. 

Clearing marks.—Fish rock, well open eastward of Fox island, 
and bearing 127°, leads southwestward; and Tom Power lookout 
shut in with the Lower Rams, bearing 74°, leads northward of this 
shoal. 2 

The Lower Rams are a group of low islets and rocks, which 
should not be approached nearer than a quarter of a mile; the highest 
is about 60 feet high. Harbor island, the largest, near the southern 
end of the group, is so called from an inlet on its northern side, which 
nearly dries at low water, and where fishing craft shelter. 

Between these islands and the mainland are several banks with 
74 and 8 fathoms, but there are no dangers except the following: 

A shoal, with 44 fathoms water, bears 86° distant 1,600 yards from 
Gull island, the eastern of the Lower Rams. 

Communication.—The steamer from Placentia calls at Ram 
islands weekly. 


\ BALD HEAD BAY—CORBIN HEAD. 105 


The coast north of St. Croix point consists of two deep bays. 

Cove nan drioch clochan, or cove of the three stones, extends 
nearly 1 mile north-northeastward from St. Croix point, and it is 
clear to within 200 yards from the shore. 

Bald Head bay lies north-northeastward of Cove nan droich 
clochan, and is clear to within 200 yards of its head. The dividing 
point between these bays is foul at the distance of 200 yards. 

Bald head, a conical mound 120 feet high, is the western end of the 
north shore of the bay, and is steep-to. This head is the termination 
of a long mossy slope, at the inshore end of which is a curious pin- 
nacle. Off the northern extreme of the head is a small island sepa- 
rated by a narrow channel from the mainland. 

Moany cove, northeastward of Bald head, is 400 yards deep, with 
a shingle beach at the head. Small vessels anchor with offshore 
winds in good holding ground near the western shore in 6 fathoms 
water, sand bottom. 

Brine islands, a cluster of a great many islets and rocks, are 
separated from Bald head by a channel + mile wide. Woody island, 
the highest of the cluster, is 115 feet high. The only easy passage 
through these islands is between Woody island and the next island 
northwestward; it should be taken in mid-channel. 

Dick Burns rock lies southwestward, 400 yards from Woody 
island, and has 44 fathoms water over it. 

Hog Rock, bearing 121°, distant 400 vards from the southwestern 
end of Woody island, covers 5 feet, and is the only danger in the 
fairway, the other rocks being above water. 

Blue Shag island, 33 feet high, is the northern Brine island; it 
is named from the peculiar bluish gray color of the rock, and in that 
respect is unlike any other in the locality. 

Isaac rock, bearing 336°, distant 1,200 yards from Blue Shag 
island, with 4 fathoms of water over it, is the only danger northward 
of Brine islands. There are several fishing banks northward and 
westward of Isaac rock, but none are dangerous. 

Hammer rocks, bearing 38°, distant 700 yards from Blue Shag 
island, are a group the outer of which just covers at high water; the 
group is steep-to on its northern and eastern sides. 

The coast from Moany cove to Famishgut consists of a series of 
coves and heads with few prominent features. 

Corbin head, a wedge-shaped humméck 70 feet high, is situated 
north-northeastward 14 miles from Bald head; and Corbin shoal, 
with 16 feet water over it, bears 274°, distant 700 yards from it. 

Trinny Cove head, 1 mile north-northeast from Corbin head, is 
separated from the main ranges by a deep valley, drained by a con- 
siderable stream that empties into Trinny cove, south of the head, 
through a sandy beach with an islet off it. There is enough water 


106 CAPE RACE TO CREW POINT. 


for boats to enter at high tide, and shelter is sometimes sought here 
while obtaining wood or from stress of weather. 

Hiram rock, 4 feet above high water, lies off this head. 

Red Cove head, north-northeastward 34 miles from Bald head, 
forms the southern side of Red cove, and the entrance to Famishgut. 
A rock, with 10 feet water over it, lies 100 yards off the western point 
of the cove. 

Famishgut extends north-northeastward 1? miles from Red Cove 
head. <A rock, with 3 feet of water over it, les 200 yards off the north- 
western shore, and 4 mile from the black islet off the northwestern 
head. : 

Leading mark.—Trinny cove Grassy island open of this black 
islet leads just southward of this rock, the only shoal in the an- 
chorage. 

At the head is a pond into which boats pass at high water for 
shelter from onshore winds.. The northwestern entrance point is 
foul for 150 yards off it. 

‘Famishgut island, about 50 feet high, lies 300 yards off the 
northwestern head. A shoal, with 12 feet of water on it, bears 290°, 
distant 870 yards from the western point of the island. 

Anchorage.—There is anchorage, with shelter from winds _ be- 
tween south by west and west, off a cove on the southeastern shore 
in 8 fathoms water, mud bottom. 

Water may be taken from a stream flowing from a lake into this 
cove. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Famishgut at 8h. 4m.; 
springs rise 7 feet, neaps 44 feet. 

Trinny Cove islands front the shore of Placentia bay between 
Bald head and Famishgut, and he westward from Famishgut; the 
rock and shoals about the islands are very numerous, and there is 
no passage among them. The northern and most conspicuous, 
Grassy island, is flat and covered with grass. Toward the southern. 
end of the group is Stone island, an isolated white rock, 30 feet high, 
200 yards square, lying 14 miles northward of Brine islands. 

A patch of 11 feet lies with the northeastern point of Trinny 
cove bearing about 82°, distant 1,5, miles. 

The bank on which these islands and shoals lie falls suddenly on 
its western side, the depth increasing from 30 to 60 fathoms in 4 mile. 

Directions.—Keep Fox island open westward of Ram islands, 
bearing 182° to pass westward of all these shoals; in foggy weather, 
do not stand in to a depth less than 60 fathoms. It is not advisable to 
take the passage eastward of the group without local knowledge. 

The shore of the bay from Famishgut point trends north-north- 
eastward, with deep coves and wooded hummocks 300 to 395 feet high, 
backed by the conspicuous and serrated ranges, Kite and Doe hills. 


THE TICKLES—GREAT PINCHGUT. 107 


The Tickles, at 14 miles from Famishgut point, are a cluster of 
rocky islets sheltering a space large enough for a few fishing boats, 
which enter between the two northern rocks. 

Burnt head, 2 miles from Famishgut point, is a flat-topped, iso- 
lated range, with a peak at each end 180 feet high. Burnt Head 
‘sunker, 300 yards off Burnt Head point, covers 4 feet at high water, 
and is bold-to on its western side. A shoal with 12 feet of water bears 
8° distant 300 yards from it. 

Shag roost, 1,400 yards from Burnt Head, is a small conical islet, 
66 feet high, and from its white color shows plainly against the land. 

Winging rock, bearing 261°, distant + mile from Shag roost, is 3 
feet high, and steep-to on its western side. 

Rocks and shoals.—A group of rocks, that cover, extend west- 
ward 1# miles and southward from Winging rock. 

There is no passage through the group and vessels must keep west- 
ward of it. 

Tom Sheaves rock, with 3 fathoms water, is the southwestern 
of these dangers, and bears 329°, distant 14 miles from Famishgut 
island. 

Big sunker, which covers 1 foot at high water, is the western, 
bearing 346°, distant 2 miles from Famishgut island. A shoal with 
7 feet of water bears 312°, distant 1 mile from Big sunker, and sunken 
rocks extend southward from the latter 600 yards. 

Northwest rock covers 4 feet at high water, and is the northwest- 
ern extreme of a line of shoals surrounding Big sunker; it bears 8°, 
distant # mile from Big sunker. 

Middle rock, the northeastern of these shoals, bearing 264°, dis- 
tant 550 yards from Northwest rock, covers 2 feet at high water, and 
is steep-to on the north side. 

Little Pinchgut, north-northeastward 1 mile from Shag roost, is 
fronted by barren rocks and shoals, but affords good shelter for small 
coasting craft. 

A narrow passage leads between the shoals to the anchorage in 
4 to 6 fathoms water, but its navigation requires local knowledge. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Little Pinchgut 
harbor at 7h. 51m.; springs rise 7 feet, neaps 5 feet. 

Great Pinchgut, a bay encumbered with shoals and affording no 
shelter, lies northward of Little Pinchgut. Pinchgut point, the west- 
ern point of the bay, is a long, narrow, sloping point, terminating in 
a small islet 37 feet high. A rock, awash at high water, lies close 
northward of the islet; and a shoal extends 600 yards south-southwest. 

The shore northward of Pinchgut point is rugged and shoal, 
with rocks off all the points and should not be approached within 
400 yards distance. 


108 CAPE RACE TO CREW POINT. 


Little Harbor island, situated northwestward, 1 mile from Pinch- 
gut point, is 43 feet high and flat-topped; low rocks extend west- 
southwestward for + mile from the island, the western being awash at 
high water. 

Large vessels should not pass between Little Harbor island and the 
mainland. 

Allen shoal, bearing 226°, distant 1,200 yards from Little Harbor 
island, has 10 feet water over it and is steep-to except on the southern 
side. 

Big sunker, a rocky patch 300 yards across, with three heads, the 
shoalest with 1 foot of water on it, hes 800 yards northwest by west 
from Little Harbor island. Between this shoal and Brennan point 
on the mainland are two shoals of 4 fathoms of water. 

Brennan point, nearly 1: miles from Pinchgut point, is the turn- 
ing point of land under the high range over Great Pinchgut, the 
summit of which, 675 feet high, makes as a square hummock from the 
southward, while the coast range is flat. Off the point there is a 
group of low rocks, the northern of which is 4 feet high. 

Little harbor, suitable only for small craft, is situated north- 
eastward 14 miles from Brennan point. The passage into the har- 
bor is 50 yards wide; but only 12 feet can be carried in at low water, 
and mid-channel must be kept to clear rocks on either hand. <An- 
chorage may be had between the first fishing stages or immediately 
they are passed, for the water shoals suddenly at the inner stages. 

Salls island, 29 feet high, hes northward 1,200 yards from Little 
harbor and close to the mainland. An islet 8 feet high, with a rocky 
spit westward of it, lies close westward of Salls island. 

Sly boots, a rock with 5 feet of water over it, bears 240°, distant 
1,050 vards from Salls island. 

Clearing mark.—The summit of Butler head, open westward of 
Woody island, bearing 355°, leads nearly 400 yards westward of this 
rock. 

Little Harbor head, 750 yards from Salls island, is a point 
sloping from a round wooded hillock 125 feet high, and is bold-to all 
around. 

Island Cove head, 3 miles northward of Little Harbor island, 
is a perpendicular cliff 75 feet high, backed by a wooded hummock 
that is conspicuous from the southward. 

La Manche, a cove ? mile deep and $ mile broad, les north- 
northeastward of Island Cove head. The land in this locality con- 
sists of high barren ranges, the culminating point, over the head of 
La Manche, being surmounted by a cairn 615 feet above the sea. 

On the peninsula forming the western shore, the hills are 230 feet 
high in the background, gradually decreasing in height, in a series 
of hummocks to the point. Intersecting these hills are numerous 


LA MANCHE HEAD—GREAT SOUTHERN HARBOR. 109 


valleys, down many of which streamlets run from ponds situated 
between the hills. 

There are lead mines on the eastern shore of La Manche, and the 
buildings show out prominently from the westward; the ore is of very 
fine quality, producing 82 per cent of metallic lead and a percentage 
of silver. A wharf has been erected in a small cove below the mines 
where small vessels can load, but the cove affords no shelter from 
onshore winds. 

Anchorage may be obtained in 6 to 7 fathoms water, gravel bot- 
tom, and fair holding ground, sheltered from winds from west-north- 
ae through north and east, to south-southeast. 

La Manche head is a wooded head, forming the west point ioe 
entrance. Some low rocks lie off it, steep-to on the western side, and 
about 200 yards from the shore. | 

A rock that covers 5 feet lies 100 vards off the western shore, + mile 
from La Manche head. 

Woody island, 92 feet high, is the southern of a group of islets 
and rocks lying off the peninsula northwestward of La Manche, and 
which divides that cove from Little Southern harbor. 

Grassy island, 65 feet high, is the northern of thé group and is 
faced by block cliffs; a rock, with 3 feet of water over it, bears 15°, 
distant 100 yards from the island. 

Between the group and the land are numerous sunken rocks and 
shoals, leaving no passage. 

Winging rocks, bearing 330°, distant 800 yards from Grassy 
island, are two barren rocks, the southern 30 feet, and the northern 5 
feet, high. Sunken rocks lie between them; and a shoal, with 7 feet 
water over it, 100 yards north-northeastward of the northern rock. 

Little Southern Harbor entrance is between Grassy island and 
Winging rocks and the harbor extends northward 1} miles. Rocks 
that cover extend 200 yards off that part of the peninsula forming the 
southeastern entrance point, and a rock that breaks lies 150 yards off 
the northwestern entrance point, leaving a passage 400 yards wide be- 
tween them. The northwestern poimt slopes frem Butler head, 
round wooded summit faced on the northern side by steep cliffs, and 
201 feet high. Both sides of the harbor have detached rocks off them, 
but they may be approcahed to within 200 yards, and the head of the 
harbor shoals 300 yards from high-water mark. 

Anchorage may be obtained anywhere within the line of the 
points, but the best holding ground is in 7 fathoms water, gravel bot- 
tom, just beyond a deep cove on the northwestern shore. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Little Southern 
harbor at 9h. 30m.; springs rise approximately 8 feet. 

Great Southern harbor is entered northward of Butler head, 
and is separated from the head of Little Southern harbor by an 


110 CAPE RACE TO CREW POINT. 


isthmus 200 yards broad, nearly covered by a pond. The harbor ex- 
tends northward 34 miles from Butler head and contains some islands; 
the shores are steep-to, sloping from wooded ranges; and at the head 
is Big pond faced by a shingle beach, with a narrow channel passable 
by boats into the pond. 

Duck island, 56 feet high, hes nearly # mile northward from 
Butler head, which is on the western side of the peninsula forming 
the northwestern side of Little Southern harbor. A rock, that covers 
6 feet, with another sunken rock close-to, bears 189°, distant nearly 
400 yards from Seal islet (43 feet high), in the passage between 
Duck island and the mainland, and 400 yards from the latter. Duck 
island therefore should be closed when taking this channel. 

Anchorage may be obtained at the head of Great Southern har- 
. bor in 5 to 9 fathoms water, but it is completely open and the holding 
ground is bad. The best berth is in 54 fathoms, southward of 
Tommy Sharp rock, an islet 6 feet high, jomed to the peninsula on 
the northwestern side of the harbor. 

Goose island, 81 feet high, is a square grass-topped rock, faced 
by black cliffs, and separated by a channel, a little more than 200 
yards wide and with 3? fathoms water, from the peninsula dividing 
Great Southern harbor from Arnold cove. 

Arnold cove, which is just westward of Great Southern harbor, 
contains good anchorage, in 34 to 5 fathoms water, for small vessels, 
sheltered from all winds; and for large vessels, in 5 to 7 fathoms, 
with shelter from all except southerly to westerly winds. The east- 
ern shore is rugged, sloping from a wooded cone 130 feet high; the 
western shore is fringed by rocks that extend 200 yards from it. 

Round rock, 6 feet high, and the furthest rock offshore, bears 
94°, distant 400 yards from Adams head. 

Adams head, 104 feet high, is a flat-topped barren mound near 
the southwestern end of the northwestern shore of Arnold cove, with 
Adams house, a two-storied dwelling, at its base; this house is con- 
spicuous from all parts of the head of Placentia bay. 

Bordeaux island, 138 feet high, wooded and bluff, is separated 
from the mainland by Bordeaux gut, a narrow passage with water 
enough for fishing boats at low water. A remarkable quartz vein 
runs down the cliffs near the southwestern point of the island. 

Come by Chance bay, the entrance of which is 2 miles north- 
ward from Bordeaux island, affords anchorage in depths of 16 
fathoms and less, the former depth being 1 mile within the entrance 
to the bay. 

Jonathan lookout, a conspicuous isolated cone, 712 feet high, 
bears 3°, distant 54 miles from Come by Chance point, the western 
entrance point of Come by Chance bay. 


POWDER HORN—GOOSE ISLAND. PEE 


Powder horn, a hill 1,045 feet high, bears 105°, distant 14 miles, 
from Jonathan lookout; and from it the range gradually decreases in 
height to the marsh bordering on North harbor. 

The shore.—Rocks extend a short distance from Come by Chance 
point. The shore then trends north-northwestward, with several 
rocks near it, round Hollett’s cove, which is 600 yards wide, and 400 
yards deep. A reef that dries at low water, with sunken rocks at its 
end, extends 250 yards south-southeastward from the southwestern 
entrance point of this cove. 

Southern head, a wooded promontory 125 feet high, projects a 
short distance from the shore line, at ? mile northwestward of Come 
by Chance point. The shore from this to North harbor is fringed 
by small islets and sunken rocks and must not be approached nearer 
than 300 yards. 

North harbor.—South point of North harbor is situated 1} miles 
northwest from Come by Chance point; the harbor extends 44 miles 
northward, and is nearly 1 mile wide at the entrance. 

Rocks, that almost cover at high water, lie close to the eastern 
shore 800 yards northward of South point. 

Emberley point, 700 vards farther northward, has a white house 
on it. 

A cove to the eastward of Emberley point, surrounded by rocks 
that extend 200 yards from the beach, affords good anchorage in a 
general depth of 5 fathoms, except with winds from south-south- 
west to west-southwest. 

Sall the Maid island, 2 miles within the entrance of the harbor 
and off the northern entrance point of this cove, is 70 feet high and 
composed of gray rocks covered by wood, and sunken rocks extend 
south-southwestward 300 yards from it. Northward of this island 
shoal water extends 200 yards from the shore and several rocks, some 
of which cover, lie within that distance. The highest of these, Charley 
rock, is 9 feet above high water, and hes nearly midway between the 
island and the head of the harbor. 

The west shore of North harbor may be approached to 100 yards, 
except in the coves. 

Jigging cove lies on the western shore, nearly 2 miles from the 
entrance, and is shallow to the mouth. 

Goose island, about 40 feet high, wooded and flat, forms the 
north entrance point of Jigging cove, and separates it from Goose 
cove, also shallow to the line of the outer points. A rock lies a short 
distance from the south extreme of Goose island. 

Anchorage.—Large vessels anchor anywhere within the entrance 
of North harbor, but the water shoals rapidly from 10 to 5 fathoms 
off Molasses point, southeastward of Goose island. 


12 CAPE RACE TO CREW POINT. 


North Harbor point, the west entrance point of North harbor, 
terminates on the eastern side in a small, nearly detached, rocky penin- 
sula, 31 feet high, off the southern extreme of which lies a sunken rock. 

North Harbor rock, with 6 fathoms water on it, bears 236°, dis- 
tant 600 yards, from North Harbor point. 

Baker cove, situated north-northwestward of North Harbor point, 
is nearly ? mile wide, $ mile deep, and affords anchorage with offshore 
winds in 44 to 9 fathoms water, sand bottom. Rocks that cover ex- 


tend a short distance from the eastern entrance point of the cove, and 


shoal water extends a short distance from the shore and 100 yards | 


from Baker point, which is a wooded bluff about 120 feet high, pro- 
jecting 600 yards from the coast northwestward of the cove 

At the head of Baker cove are two beaches of reddish shingle, 
separated by red cliff, facing a small wooded hillock. 

Coast.—The coast from Baker cove trends northwestward for 14 
miles to Placentia Man’s point, with slight indentations, thence ah 
a shght change in direction, more to the northward, for 2 miles, to a 
low wooded promontory faced by shale cliffs; from the foot of which 
the shore dries a short distance. 

A few houses are built on the coast between Baker cove and Placen- 
tia Man’s point. 

Communication.—There is a telegraph station of the Anglo- 
American Telegraph Company on the southern entrance point of 
Black river. The steamer from Placentia calls here weekly. 

Black river, from which the station derives its name, is entered 
at 4 mile northward of the point on which the station stands, and 
may be approached to 200 yards by vessels drawing 12 feet water. 

Ice.—Black river is generally frozen toward the latter end of 
January and clear by the middle of April. 

Vicuna island, 30 feet high, hes 600 yards west-southwestward 
from the station point; it is about 200 yards in diameter, and covered 
with grass over gray rock. Martin Morrissey rocks, a small group 
about 200 yards in diameter, the highest of the group being only 6 
feet high, are nearly joined to the western extreme of Vicuna island. 

A rock 4 feet high is situated 200 yards south of Martin Morris- 
sey rocks, and 100 yards farther in the same direction lies a rock that 
dries 4 feet at low water. 

A rock that dries 6 feet bears 262°, distant + mile from Vicuna 
island, and a rock, with 3 feet water, lies between that island and the 
station point, 200 yards from the latter. 

Mouse island is small, covered with grass, and 26 feet high: it 1s 
} mile northwestward from Vicuna island. 

Pipers hole is entered through a channel 400 yards wide, lying 
400 vards westward from Mouse island, and extends in a northwest- 
erly direction 4 miles to the freshwater brook at the head. 


i 


DESOLATE POINT—CATENS COVE. 113 


At 2 miles within the entrance is a sharp bend, 150 yards wide, 
round cape Pine, through which the tide runs about 3 knots an hour 
at springs. The arm then expands into a shallow basin, 1 mile long 
and 4 mile wide, the greater part of which dries at low water. In it 
are some islands, Birchy island, the highest, being 62 feet high and 
covered with wood. From the upper part of this basin a narrow 
stream extends to the head, the northern bend being nearly filled 
with bowlders. 

Southwest of the entrance to Pipers hole are Rocky cove, a small 
curve in the coast lined with bowlders, and Cock and Hen cove. 
Shoal water extends a considerable distance off this cove. 

Desolate point is the extreme of an isolated hill, 200 feet high, 
covered with moss, that forms the turning point into the Sound from 
Pipers hole. Bittern cove, a shght indentation with a shingle beach, 
~ is south of this hill. From this point the coast trends in a nearly 
straight line south by west for a distance of 6 miles, the northern 
part sloping from high hills, and the coast line of rocks being occa- 
sionally varied by small beaches of shingle. 

Toby lookout is the highest of the hills immediately bordering 
on the coast, and attains an elevation of 1,026 feet. This range recedes 
from the coast in a westerly direction, and becomes barren in the 
interior. 

White hills, another bare range, the highest of which is 1,185 
feet above high water, are situated 2% miles land, and connected 
with the western part of the range from Toby lookout. As this range 
recedes from the coast lower, wooded, and mossy hills fringe the 
shore. 

Anchorage may be obtained at the head of Placentia bay, north- 
westward of Placentia Man’s point, but large vessels should not bring 
Bloody point, the northwestern end of Sound island, to bear south- 
ward of 241°, as the water shoals rapidly from 14 to 32 fathoms. 

Sound island has the shape of an irregular rectangle, 32 miles 
long and 24} miles broad. Its characteristics features are long hills 
460 to 360 feet high, covered with white moss, with patches of small 
wood in the valleys. A sharp peak, 381 feet high, rises near the 
northern extreme, and the summit, when seen from the western part 
of the sound, appears an inclined plane, with a steep fall to the west- 
ern shore of the island. The eastern shore is formed of shale cliffs, 
the débris from which has accumulated at the base, and prevents 
landing, except in fine weather. 

Catens cove, a small bight in the middle of this shore, is nearly 
filled with rocks. Net rock, 3 feet above high water, and bold-to on 
the east side, is north of this cove. To clear the rocks in Catens cove; 
keep Brimstone point open southeastward of Net rock. 


76846—09——8 


114 CAPE RACE TO CREW POINT. 


Some white cliffs are near the southern extreme. Woody Island 
shoal, with 54 fathoms water, extends 1,300 yards southeast by east 
from the southeastern extreme of the island. 

The south shore curves around Muddy hole, a shallow cove, and 
thence with a broad sweep to Upper Sandy point, the southwestern 
extreme of the island, which projects 600 yards from the line of coast, 
and is surmounted by a hill 118 feet high, covered with yellow moss. 
This hill, being lighter in color than the mainland, can generally be 
seen when open of Woody island. The western shore of Sound island 
is almost straight northward and southward and is bordered by a 
beach of shingle in front of the steep slopes from the summit. Bloody 
point, at the northwestern extreme, is steep-to and surmounted by a 
dark wooded hill. 

Jeffrey cove, the northwestern of three on the northeastern side 
of Sound island, is 1,800 yards wide and 600 yards deep, and has a 
few houses at the head. A rock, with 7 feet water over it, lies in the 
middle of the cove, nearly between the line of its outer eae and a 
shoal, with 32 fathoms water, hes 200 yards northeastward of the 
rock. Bitten Cove beach open northeastward of Bloody point, bear- 
ing 299°, leads eastward of this shoal. 

Maggotty cove is separated from Jeffrey cove by Shepherd point, 
from which a sunken rock lies 150 yards southeastward. This cove 
is surrounded by houses and affords good anchorage for a few small 
vessels in 5 to 12 fathoms of water. 

New town, southeastward of Maggotty cove, has a church, which 
is a plain white wooden building, and several two-storied white 
houses. A rock that dries 4 feet lies in the middle of the bight off 
New town, between the line of the outer points, and 150 yards from 
the shore. 

Irish town, southeastward of New town, consists of a few houses 
built near the head of a cove, which is 1,400 yards wide and 600 yards 
deep, with bold shores, on off Brimstone point, southeastward of 
the cove from which rocks extend 150 yards. 

Communication.—The steamer from Placentia calls at Sonnd 
island weekly. 

The sound, between Sound, Woody, and Barren islands on the 
eastern side, and the mainland on the western, is 500 yards wide 
at the narrowest part; it is clear in mid-channel between Sound 
island and the mainland and the eastern shore may be neared to 100 
yards. 

A few rocks le off the mainland, but none so far as 200 yards 
distant. 

The channel between Sound and Woody islands, $ mile wide, is 
clear, and affords excellent anchorage in 7 to 19 fathoms. Anchorage 


WOODY ISLANDS—LA PLANTE. Lh 


may also be had in different parts of the Sound according to the 
length of the vessel. 

Woody islands consist of two large and some small islands. 
Woody island, the largest, is 2 miles long and nearly 1 mile wide, 
and is surmounted by wooded hills, the highest being 327 feet high. 
Hardy rocks are a small cluster situated south-southwestward ? mile 
from the northeastern end of Woody island; the highest is 7 feet 
high, and they are steep-to on the southeastern side. 

A rock, that dries 5 feet, lies a short distance from the south- 
western end of Woody island. 

Creve islets, which are nearly joined to each other and to Woody 
island at low water, lie off the western coast, and shelter a small cove 
almost filled with rocks, known as Woody Island harbor; but there 
is scarcely swinging room for even a very short vessel. A settle- 
ment is situated here, with a church and schoolhouse. 

The largest of Creve islets is partially wooded and grassy, 25 feet 
high, and les 600 yards from the mainland. There is deep water 
200 yards distant from the west side. 

Anchorage.—There is anchorage, for small vessels southwest- 
ward of Creve islets, in 8 fathoms water. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, at Woody island at 
8h. 9m.; springs rise 7 feet, neaps 44 feet. 

Communication.—The steamer from Placentia calls at Woody 
island weekly. 

Little Woody island, 183 feet high, is situated 500 yards south- 
southwestward of Woody island, to which it is joined at its north- 
western end by a bar with 1 to 3 feet over it at low water. It is 
about 4 mile long, + mile wide, and is partly wooded over gray rock, 
the summit 183 feet above high water, falling in a steep bluff to the 
southeastern extreme. Several pinnacle rocks are joined to the 
shores, and a sand pit, that covers at high water, extends 200 yards 
from the northwestern extreme. ‘The other sides are steep-to. 

Shag rock, a small pinnacle 15 feet high, lying in mid-channel, 
between the western end of Woody island and the mainland, has a 
shoal extending from its southwestern side. 

Sugarloaf island, 101 feet high, is situated 4 mile from the south- 
western end of Woody island; it should not be closed to less than 
200 yards. 

La Plante sunker, awash at low water, lies at the end of a bankx 
extending 650 yards south-southwestward from Sugarloaf island. 
Shag rock, open northwestward of that island, bearing 36°, leads 
northwestward; and open southeastward, bearing 15°, leads south- 
eastward of this rock. 

La Plante is a shallow indentation on the mainland, 1 mile south- 
westward of Sugarloaf island. This cove nearly dries at low water, 


116 CAPE RACE TO CREW POINT. 


but after half flood boats can enter and obtain water. An islet 27 
feet high and covered with grass is situated close off the north 
entrance point. 

Barren island, situated 14 miles southwestward of Little Woody 
island, is separated from the mainland by a channel 700 yards wide. 
Tt is in the shape of an jrregular triangle, the apex being at the 
southwestern extreme, and the island being nearly 4 miles long and 
12 miles wide at the northeastern side. 

Two peninsulas extend from its southeastern side; the northeastern 
forms Barren Island harbor and the northeastern part of Western 
cove, being connected to Barren island by a beach of shingle between 
the heads of these coves. Western Cove head, the other peninsula, 
is joined to the island by a low marshy neck. The island contains 
three principal hills, the highest of which, near the middle of the 
island, is 490 feet high. 

The southwestern point of Barren island terminates in a small 
islet, 29 feet high, and surmounted by a conspicuous single tree. 

Barren Island harbor, 900 vards long and 150 yards broad, 
affords shelter to small vessels from all but easterly winds. The 
anchorage is in 6 to 8 fathoms water, and the shores are bold-to; 
but the southeastern entrance point must not be rounded closely. 
A considerable settlement lines the shores, and an old wooden church, 
with a belfry near, stands on a mound northwestward of the head. 

Western cove is situated on the southeastern side of Barren island, 
being formed by the two peninsulas mentioned above, the entrance 
between them being ? mile wide. Western Cove head rises to a sharp 
peak 223 feet high, is covered with an alternation of wood and grass, 
and its outer coast is marked by brown landslips. Several round 
wooded hills le south of the summit. : 

James point, the northeastern entrance point, is bold-to, but from 
West point a bank extends 400 yards. A shoal, with 3 fathoms water 
over it, bears 107° a little more than 200 yards from West point. 
The beach at the southwestern head of the cove, open northward of 
West point, bearing 258°, leads northwestward; and the church in 
Barren Island harbor, shut in with the southeastern shore of Western 
cove, bearing 30°, leads southeastward of this shoal. 

The northern part of the cove is 4 mile deep and 4 mile wide at 
the entrance, but narrows to the beach, which is 250 yards broad at 
the head. From the beach shoal ground extends 250 yards, but south 
of that the depth ranges from 10 to 16 fathoms in the middle of the 
cove. 

The southern part is .750 yards deep, 400 yards wide at the en- 
trance, and terminates at the head in a shingle beach 200 yards wide. 

Glindon cove, a small bight on the shore northwestward of the 
entrance to Western cove, has a few houses round it; there are also a 


DUCK ROCKS—BELL ISLAND. oe ale” 


few houses round Western cove. Glindon rock, a small bare rock 3 
feet above high water, lies close to the shore, south of Glindon cove. 
Anchorage.—There is anchorage in either arm of the cove, ac- 
cording to the direction of the wind, in 12 to 16 fathoms water, in the 
northeastern part, or in 20 fathoms in the southwestern part. 

Duck rocks, a ledge of dark, sharp rocks, extend from the south- 
western end of Western Cove head. The highest is 61 feet high, 
has a hole through it; the outer is a small gray rock 12 feet high, and 
steep-to. 

Back cove, close northwestward of Duck rocks, is nearly filled 
with Back Cove islets, a castellated group, reddish in color, the high- 
est of which is 75 feet above high water. 

Communication.—The steamer from Placentia calls at Barren 
island weekly. 

Green island, 850 yards southwestward of Barren island, is 55 feet 
high and covered with grass over dark gray rock. It is 150 yards in 
diameter, and has no danger beyond 100 yards from it except on the 
western side. 

Green island rock, with 8 feet water over it, is at the end of a 
bank extending northwestward 300 yards from Green island and 
falling suddenly to deep water. 

Gulch, a basin 1,200 yards long, and 300 yards broad, on the coast 
of the mainland westward of Barren island, and nearly 34 miles 
south-southwestward of La Plante, has an entrance only a few yards 
wide, and is filled with large rocks, which leave no passage, even for a 
boat, at low water springs. 

Ship island lies one mile southwestward of the southern end of 
Barren island; its summit, situated near the middle of its north- 
western side, 1s 248 feet high, round, and covered with wood. <A few 
white patches mark the cliffs near its northern end. The shores are 
generally bold, with small cliffs, but a rock, awash at low water, lies 
200 yards from the middle of the eastern side of the island. The 
eastern end of Burgeo island, open of the southeastern part of Ship 
island, and bearing 204°, leads eastward of this rock. 

ae rock, + mile w est-southwestward of the southwestern end of 
Ship island, is 12 feet high, 150 yards in extent, and steep-to. A 
shoal, with 54 fathoms and possibly less water on it, les south- 
southeastward a little more than 200 yards from Shag rock. 

Bell island, 143 feet high, is situated 800 yards south-southwest- 
ward of Ship island; and a remarkable rock, from which the island 
takes its name, about 20 feet high, shaped like an inverted bell, lies 
close to its southwestern end. 

A rock, awash at low water, lies about 100 yards east-southeastward 
of the island; a second rock lies close northward of this one. 


TTS)” CAPE RACE TO CREW POINT. 


Great Sandy Harbor entrance, not quite 200 yards wide, situated 
14 miles northwestward of Bell island, has only 24 fathoms; rocks 
lie close to either shore, and the harbor is generally very shallow. 

The approach to Great Sandy harbor may be readily distinguished 
by the offlying islands and by a wooded hill with a bare top 256 
feet above high water, which les northeast of the entrance. Close 
south of the hill is a wooded islet 53 feet high, and south of the islet 
is a bare rock 6 feet above high water. The west side of the entrance 
is formed by a wooded peninsula nearly a mile long and 180 feet high. 
Near the north extreme is a bluff point with a small bight in it. 

The harbor is entered through a channel not quite 200 yards wide, 
between the base of the hill and the bluff point just described. Imme- 
diately within the entrance an arm extends northeast for 450 yards, 
and is 250 yards broad, with 34 fathoms in the middle, but only 24 
fathoms in the entrance. 

The main harbor trends southwest for 800 yards, with a breadth of 
350 yards, then bends sharply to the northwest, in which direction it 
extends 14 miles, expanding to 1,300 yards wide for nearly ? mile, when 
the basin contracts to the entrance of a stream 100 yards wide. 
Nearly the whole of this basin dries at low water, leaving a narrow 
passage, for boats only, close to the shore; in the first bend not more 
than 6 feet can be carried. The hills surrounding the harbor are 
partly wooded and slope gradually to the southwestern arm. 

Civil East cove is a slight curve in the southeastern coast of the 
peninsula, protected by Civil East island and affording shelter to 
small fishing craft in 24 fathoms. A few houses stand on the shore, 
surrounded by small patches of cultivation. A rock with 6 feet of 
water on it hes midway between the island and the mainland. 

Civil East island is about 40 feet high, flat, and partly wooded. 
It is 400 yards long, and a rock awash at low water lies close to the 
southwestern extreme. _ 

Anchorage may be had, with good holding ground, on a plateau 
of sand lying between Civil East cove and the entrance to Great 
Sandy harbor, in from 43 to 6 fathoms, with shelter from all but 
southerly to southwesterly winds. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Great Sandy harbor 
at 8h. 9m.; springs rise 62 feet; neaps rise 5 feet. 

Great Coat island, 45 feet high and 100 yards in diameter, round 
and wooded, les 250 yards southwestward of the southern entrance 
to Civil East cove. There is a clear passage west of it, but a rock 
that dries lies a short distance from the southwestern end. 

Little Sandy harbor, one mile southwestward of Great Sandy 
harbor, is entered through a channel 200 yards wide, south of Great 
Coat island, between the cliffy southwestern extreme of the peninsula 
dividing it from Great Sandy harbor and Stearin rock, a flat bare 


NAN POINT—-BURGEO ISLAND. 119 


islet 5 feet above high water. Within the entrance the harbor 
expands to a basin 600 yards in diameter, with 54 fathoms in the 
middle, decreasing gradually in depth to the shore, except in the 
southwestern corner. From this side a small arm extends to the 
westward and is shallow to the entrance. A wooded islet about 40 
feet high nearly joins Stearin rock to the south side of the entrance. 

Water may be procured from a brook at the head of the western 
arm, but the approach is made difficult at low water by bowlders 
lying off it. 

Nan point, 1,200 yards southeastward of the entrance to Little 
Sandy harbor, is a small, sharp projection, steep-to. The intervening 
coast consists of two small coves, with shingle beaches, between other- 
wise rocky shores. i 

Anchorage.—There is anchorage for large vessels, in 6 to 7 
fathoms of water, but open to southerly winds, at 400 yards off the 
coast between Little Sandy harbor and Nan point. 

Castle islet, a small square rock 13 feet high, lies close to the 
shore off the north entrance point of Davis cove. 

Little Burgeo island, 250 yards southeastward of Castle islet 
and 14 miles southwestward of Bell island, is 900 yards long, 600 
yards broad, and 227 feet high. It is flat in outline, faced by steep 
cliffs, and has a small cove on the southern side. There is barely 
passage for a boat between this island and the main at low water. 

A shoal, with 12 feet of water, lies 100 yards from the northeast- 
ern end. 

Davis cove is entered south of Calls point, 1,000 yards southwest 
from Castle islet. A rock that dries 4 feet lies 100 yards south of the 
point. The cove is 600 yards wide and 200 yards deep and affords 
good shelter to fishing craft with offshore winds. 

Water may be obtained from a large stream at the head. 

Coast.—The coast, which is wooded over brown cliffs, curves gen- 
erally to the southwestward from Davis cove for a little more than 
a mile to Butts hole, a small cove with a few houses round it, and a 
rock that dries 6 feet at low water in the middle of it. A conspicuous 
waterfall is situated on the south side of this cove. 

Parfrey point is 4 mile from Butts hole, and is a small projection, 
105 feet high, faced by gray cliffs. Parfrey shoal, with 44 fathoms 
water on it, bears 163°, distant 267 yards from this point. 

Burgeo island, 1,200 yards south-southwestward of Little Burgeo 
island, and separated from the mainland by a clear channel 700 yards 
wide, rises to a remarkable sharp peak 416 feet high, and two smaller 
peaks to the southward of it, named Hare’s ears, about 350 feet high. 
The island is 14, miles long and 4 mile broad. The east shore is 
steep-to, but a rock with 5 feet of water on it hes 100 yards from the 
southern extreme. A cove 400 yards deep is situated on the west 


120 CAPE RACE TO CREW POINT. 
shore of the island, just below the summit; off the north entrance 
point of the cove is a small islet with a sunken rock near it. 

Cross rocks, 12 feet high, bear 284°, distant nearly 200 yards from 
the northern entrance point of this cove and they are surrounded by 
stmken rocks. A shoal with 15 feet water on it bears 191°, distant 
100 yards from these rocks, and a bank, with less than 10 fathoms, 
extends 250 yards farther in the same direction. 

The coast of Burgeo island, near its northern end, curves into, a 
small cove, surrounded by a beach of shingle, between low points of 
cliffs, and fronted by Vigors island. The wharf, stores, houses, and 
flagstaff of a small trading establishment stand on the shores of this 
cove, and there is good anchorage for small vessels off the wharf in 
14 fathoms water. . 

Vigors island, with a flat, wooded summit about 120 feet high, falls 
in steep cliffs on all sides but the north, where a grassy point, fringed 
by bowlders and shoal water, extends 100 yards. Vigors island should 
not be approached nearer than 200 yards on the north side. The 
channel between the northeastern end of this island and Burgeo 
island is not quite 200 yards wide; on its eastern side is a square islet, 
off which hes a sunken rock. 

Communication.—The steamer from Placentia calls at Bune 
island weekly. 

White islands are a group occupying a space 1,3; miles long and 
nearly 4 mile broad, lying 2 miles southeastward of Burgeo island, 
the channel between deepening to 151 fathoms. There are three large 
islands, several smaller islands, and many rocks. 

Greens island, near the northern end of the group, is 110 feet 
high, round, and covered with stunted trees, interspersed with grass 
over gray rock. From the south side of the island rocks and shoals 
extend for 400 yards, the highest being a square islet about 40 feet 
high, off which are two rocks. A small rock lies close to the north 
extreme of the island, and a large shoal extends northwest of the 
chain of rocks south of Greens island. 

Gooseberry island, 200 yards northwestward of Greens island, 
is about 40 feet high, flat, and covered with grass over reddish-gray 
rock. Sunken rocks extend 200 yards from the west extreme. 

Deepwater bank, with 7 fathoms water, bears 16°, distant 800 
vards from Gooseberry island, and Rock of the Bank, with the same 
depth, bears 93°, distant 1,400 yards from Greens island. 

Stearin rocks are the cluster next southwest of Greens island; 
they are nearly connected at low water, and occupy a space 200 yards 
in diameter. 

A reef, with two heads that just dry at low water, bears 112°, 
distant 250 vards from the highest of these rocks. 


MIDDLE DOCK ISLANDS—BIG SHOAL. TS 


Middle Dock islands are 200 yards southwest by west of Stearin 
rocks and occupy a space 400 yards in diameter. The two southern- 
most are conical, with grassy summits, the western and highest being 
37 feet above high water. These two have no dangers off their south- 
eastern sides. The rest of the group are low, and the northern one 
covers at high water, but there are no outlying dangers beyond 200 
yards distance from the group. There is a clear passage between 
these and Stearin rocks. 

Anchor rock, bare, flat, and 8 feet above high water, is separated 
from the south side of Middle Dock islands by a clear channel 200 
yards wide, and is steep-to. A sunken rock lies midway between it 
and Northwest island. 

Northwest island, 115 feet high, and 400 yards southwestward 
of Middle Dock islands, is formed of several wooded hillocks covering 
dark rock, the highest falling steeply to the northwestern extreme. 
Some small pinnacle rocks he close-to, but there is no sunken danger 
near, except on the eastern side. 

West island, lying 450 yards southward of Northwest island, 
is wedge shaped, 300 yards long and 200 yards broad. The summit, 
which is wooded, falls steeply to the northern extreme, and is 115 
feet above high water. A green mound, with a conspicuous patch of 
turf near its summit, is joined to the south extreme by a beach of 
shingle. A ledge of rock that dries only at low water springs ex- 
tends 200 yards from the eastern side. 

Western rock, the western of White islands, is a gray islet 24 
feet high, with a little grass near its summit. A reef of rocks ex- 
tends 200 yards northward, and there are rocks between it and West 
island, but no danger beyond 200 yards from them. <A rock awash 
at high water lies close southward, and a shoal, with 7 feet of water 
on it, is a short distance southwestward. A rock that dries is a little 
more than 200 yards, bears 301° from West island. 

Caution.—There is apparently no safe passage for ships among 
White islands. 

Mackerel shoal, with 14 feet of water, bears 292°, distant about 
400 yards from West island. 

Harry rock, with 8 fathoms of water, bears 250°, distant 700 
yards from Northwest island. 

Big shoal, with 4 fathoms of water, bears 205°, distant 950 yards 
from Western rock, and is the highest part of a bank 200 yards in 
diameter within the depth of 10 fathoms. 

Shoal bank, with 14 feet water, bears 236°, distant 1,2; miles 
from Western rock, and is a small pinnacle, with deep water close 
to it. 

The coast from Parfrey point after a slight curve close west of 
that point trends in nearly a straight line to the entrance of Clatise 


199 CAPE RACE TO CREW POINT. 


harbor, falling steeply, in many places perpendicularly, from wooded 
hills near the shore. The hills in the background gray and moss 
covered. 

Red Point shoal, with 54 fathoms water, bears 233°, distant 850 
yards from Parfrey point and 200 yards from the shore. 

Skippers brook, a conspicuous waterfall, enters the sea 14 miles 
southward of Parfrey point. Skippers Brook rock, with 10 fathoms 
water, bears 82°, distant + mile from the point of the cove into which 
the brook runs. 

Ladder cove, a small bight, lies 1 mile southward of Skippers 
brook, and # mile farther southward is Coffins cove, 300 yards deep, 
with a beach of shingle at the head. 

Barren point, 14 miles southwestward of Coffins cove, is covered 
with moss and surmounted by a small peaked hill 216 feet high. Joss 
brook falls into the sea from an elevation of about 30 feet close 
northeastward of this point. 

Clatise harbor, nearly 800 yards wide in its entrance between 
Gunning point on the north and Clatise Harbor head on the south, 
expands to a width of 1,600 yards and extends southwestward 1 
mile, terminating in two arms. Culleton head, north of the entrance, 
is a bare round hill 452 feet high, falling steeply to the eastward. A 
few houses are built on the north shore immediately within the en- 
trance. A large brook runs into.a cove on the north shore 4 mile 
southwest of Gunning point, and a rock that dries is situated close 
to the eastern entrance point of that cove. 

Clatise Harbor head, the sharp extreme of a narrow promontory, 
rises to a wooded hill 253 feet high. A sunken rock les close to it, 
and a bank, with less than 10 fathoms on it, extends 200 yards from 
the end of the head. 

Shag’ rock, 6 feet high, is the highest of a small cluster lying 
400 yards from shore and southwestward nearly 1 mile from Cla- 
tise Harbor head. A shoal, with 44 fathoms water over it, bears 295°, 
distant 200 yards from this rock. 

Northwest arm extends southwestward 1 mile with a breadth 
of 400 yards, and then turns northwestward, forming a cove 400 
yards across. The hills on the north shore, which are 330 to 360 feet 
high, fall sharply to the sea, and are generally wooded. A hill, 150 
feet high, covered only with moss, slopes to the east point of the cove 
at the head. Between Northwest and Southwest arms the coast is 
bold, encircling a cove into which a streamlet runs. Rocks lie close to 
the head of this cove. 

Cross rock, a small pinnacle 5 feet high, lies close to the northern 
side of the entrance to this arm, and is nearly joined at low water to 
the shore of a small cove, round which are a few houses. This rock 
has deep water close to its southern side. 


NORTHWEST HEAD—-MAHANY COVE. 1 


Northwest head, on the southern side of the entrance, is a bold 
cliff rising to a round wooded hill, 256 feet high. A reef, that dries 
at low water, extends 150 yards eastward; and a rock, that dries 
2 feet, lies close northward of this head. 

A rock that covers lies close to the eastern point of the cove, at 
the head, and shoal water fringes the north shore of that point. 
With these exceptions the shores of Northwest arm are steep-to. 

Anchorage.—There is anchorage anywhere in the arm in depths 
of 16 to 18 fathoms, or for small vessels in the cove at the head in 
6 to 8 fathoms. 

Southwest head is a bold bluff 175 feet high, with a small islet 
joined to the eastern side. 

Southwest arm is 1,300 yards long and 600 yards wide between 
Southwest head and the southern shore; but at 700 yards within. the 
entrance it is narrowed to 300 yards by Jigging Cove head. A rock, 
with 13 feet water over it, lies 200 yards from the northwestern shore, 
but the southeastern side is clear. 

Coast.—The coast from Clatise Harbor head trends southward 
for 4 mile to White point, so named from the color of a small islet 
that forms it; from White point the coast trends southward 14 miles 
to Oliver cove. A few white houses stand on the shores of the cove 
between White point and Clatise Harbor head. Collins rock, 2 feet 
high, lies close to the shore } mile south of White point; and Red- 
land, a reddish cliff, south of a beach of shingle through which a 
stream runs, is situated 1,200 yards south of Collins rock. 

Oliver cove, formed by a beach of shingle, lies west-southwestward 
2 miles from Clatise Harbor head. Shoal water extends 100 yards 
from the beach, but beyond that there is anchorage for small vessels 
in 10 fathoms water, sheltered from offshore winds. There is a road 
from this cove to the head of Presque harbor, about 1 mile distant, 
near which, at about midway, is the Roman Catholic church. 

Oliver rock, small and 12 feet high, lies close to the bluff south- 
ward of this cove, down to which Calvary hill slopes from an eleva- 
tion of 423 feet. 

Mahany cove lies southward of the bluff, and some rocks extend 
100 yards from its southern shore. A deep ravine encircles Calvary 
hill, and through it passes the road from this cove to the church. 

The coast from this to Grandy point is free from danger beyond 
100 yards, and is surmounted by a serrated ridge, with several sharp 
peaks ranging from 526 to 550 feet in height. 

Grandmother rocks are two groups of islets, separated by a 
clear channel 334 yards wide. The southern group contains the 
highest islet, which is 30 feet above high water, surrounded by nu- 
merous rocks, and bears 67°, distant 14 miles from the north extreme 
of great isle of Valen. 


124 CAPE RACE TO CREW POINT. 


The islets in the northern group are all above high water. the 
highest being 7 feet. There is deep water at 100 yards from this 
group. 

Whales back, a rock that dries + feet, bears 101°, distant 1,800 
yards from the north extreme of great isle of Valen. It is steep-io 
on all sides but the west, from which a shoal with 15 feet water on it 
extends 200 yards. This rock nearly always shows by a breaker. 

Two rocks, covering a space 100 yards long, with 4 feet least 
water, bear 17°, distant # mile from Grandmother rocks, and a shoal 
with 12 feet lies at the same distance on the bearing of 352°. ‘Two 
shoals, with 44 and 5 fathoms on them, lie a little more than 200 yards 
southward of this shoal. 

Sam Adams shoal, with 54 fathoms, bears 3°, distant 1 mile from 
Grandmother rocks, and a shoal with 44 fathoms water lies nearly 
midway between it and the rock with 4 feet water. 

Big shoal, with 34 fathoms water, bears 157°, distant 850 yards 
from Grandmother rocks. Little isle of Valen open eastward of 
great isle of Valen, bearing 205°, leads east of this shoal. 

Great isle of Valen is separated on its western side from the 
mainland by a deep channel 4 mile wide. The island is much in- 
dented and intersected by many valleys which are thickly wooded; 
the hills, most of which have bare summits, attain an elevation of 520 
feet, and picturesque lakes are situated among them. 

The island is 3 miles long, nearly 14 miles broad, and ternunates 
toward the north in an isolated wooded hillock 180 feet high. <A 
rock that dries is situated close northeast of the square rock which 
terminates this point, and a beach of shingle lies inshore of the 
hillock. 

Pete cove, on the east coast, nearly 14 miles from the northern 
extreme, contains several islets, the eastern and highest being 8 feet 
above high water. A rock lies between the two eastern islets, but 
the water is deep to the eastward. Pete Cove head, a bare isolated 
hill 260 feet high, stands north of this cove. 

Storehouse cove, on the southeastern coast, an indentation 800 
yards deep, terminates in a small bight, 100 yards in diameter, where 
fishing craft find good shelter. Sugarloaf island, a cone 48 feet high, 
lies in the middle of the entrance; and Blow-me-down, a conspicuous 
bluff 425 feet high, falls steeply to the north entrance point. Below 
that hill shoals fringe the shore for 100 yards. 

A rock, with less than 6 feet water on it, bears 149°, distant 70 
yards from Sugarloaf island, and another rock, with 12 feet water 
on it, bears 56°, distant 100 yards from the first named. A rock, with 
7 feet water, bears 236°, distant 60 yards from Sugarloaf island. A 
small islet is joined to the south shore by shoal water, and off the 


> 


ISLE OF VALEN HARBOR. 135 


north shore is situated a smaller rock, from which two rocks that dry 
at low water extend to the southward. 

Directions.—To enter, pass north or south of Sugarloaf island in 
midchannel, and then between the two smaller islets west of it. The 
anchorage is in 7 fathoms, close within the islets. A small rock hes 
close to the shore west of the anchorage. Several houses are built at 
the head of the cove. 

Isle of Valen harbor, on the southern side of the island, is avail- 
able only for small vessels; it is sheltered by Little isle of Valen, 
Dutch cap, and Canary isles. A wharf is situated on the east shore. 
alongside which vessels may he in 5 fathoms, but the approach is 
encumbered with shoals. 

Isle of Valen harbor may be recognized by a flagstaff erected on a 
small hillock 38 feet above-high water, on the northeastern side of the 
entrance, which is about 50 yards wide and clear of danger. Immedi- 
ately within, the harbor expands to 150 yards in diameter, and the 
wharf is situated on the north side of this expansion. Again narrow- 
ing, and with a sharp bend to the northward, the harbor then opens 
into a perfectly sheltered basin 250 yards in diameter. Both outer and 
inner portions have an even depth of 5 fathoms, but a bar joins the 
opposite shore just within the narrows, with only 12 feet on it at low 
water, and a sunken rock lies in the middle of the bend, off two islets. 
The point close north of the wharf is foul for a few yards, otherwise 
the shores are steep-to. Small vessels may lie in perfect safety in the 
outer basin or alongside the wharf. 

Ice.—Isle of Valen harbor occasionally freezes during severe win- 
ters, but, the ice being as a rule thin, anchorage can generally be ob- 
tained. 

Communication.—The steamer from Placentia calls at Isle of 
Valen harbor weekly. . 

Dutch cap is a conical island, 600 yards long, 266 feet high, and 
composed of two parts, joined by a low narrow isthmus. The north- 
western and lower part 1s faced by reddish cliffs. 

A channel 100 yards wide, with 6 fathoms in it, separates Dutch 
Cap island from the south extreme of Great Isle of Valen. 

Three rocks that cover at high water he nearly 200 yards from the 
southeastern side of Dutch Cap island. 

Little isle of Valen, ? mile long, 400 yards broad, and 327 feet 
high, is separated at its northern end from Dutch Cap island by a 
passage 600 yards wide. The western end of Little isle of Valen is 
low, and a short distance from it is an isolated rock, with 8 feet water 
over it. A ledge, 100 yards in extent, with 3 feet water over the 
shoalest part, lies 133 yards southeastward of the southern end, and 
a rock, with 5 feet water on it, hes 200 yards from the northeastern 
end. 


126 CAPE RACE TO CREW POINT. 


Leading mark.—The summit of High lookout, over Presque, in 
line with the northern end of Little isle of Valen, bearing about 
252°, leads northward of this rock and southward of those off Dutch 
Cap island. 

Canary isles are a group of low rocks, the highest covered with 
grass and 23 feet above high water. 

Shoals extend in all directions and almost block the channel north 
of these islets. 

A shoal with 12 feet bears 101° distant 300 yards from the highest, 
and Trinity shoal, with 9 feet water, extends 200 yards in a direction 
56° from the northernmost of Canary isles. 

Net rocks lie off the south shore of Great isle of Valen, and are 4 
feet above high water. A rock, with 1 foot water on it, lies 100 
yards westward of Net rocks. 

Betty island, 84 feet high, round, and covered with brush wood, 
is joined at low water to the southwestern extreme of Great isle of 
Valen. A conical hill 480 feet high hes close within Betty island. 

The west shore of Great isle of Valen is almost straight. Francis 
cove, a small bight with a few houses round it, is $ mile from the 
southern point. A sunken rock lies close to the north point of the 
cove. Net rocks, 1 foot above high water, are joined to the shore $ mile 
north of Francis cove, and a rock with 5 feet of water bears 149° 
distant 14 miles from the northern extreme of the island and about 
80 yards from the shore. 

Grandy point, on the mainland, 1,600 yards southwestward of 
the southern end of Little isle of Valen, is the name of a settlement 
surrounding a cove, nearly 200 yards across, that affords good 
sheltered anchorage for fishing craft, in 4 fathoms water, except with 
northeasterly winds. A small islet, with a house on it, lies north- 
westward of the cove, and the southern entrance point is foul for 
a short distance. 

Grandy Point rock is the turning point westward of the passage 
between Great isle of Valen and the mainland; it just covers at high 
water, and has foul ground extending 200 yards southward of it. 

The land southward of Grandy point comprisies a flat ridge backed 
by a peaked hill, 414 feet high, behind which rises another sharp 
peak, 526 feet high. 

Rocky cove is situated southwestward 4 mile from Grandy Point 
rock, and Rocky Cove sunker, a small rock that dries 4 feet, bears 
206°, distant 250 yards from its northeastern point. Foul ground 
nearly joins the rock to the point, and two shoals, the outer of which 
has 12 feet water over it, extend eastward 400 yards from the rock. 

The coast to the southward of Rocky cove is rugged and cliffy, 
falling from hills covered with moss, and is foul for a short distance. 


BROOK ROCK——GOAT ISLAND. LOG 


Brook rock, with 10 feet of water on it, bears 191°, distant 1,050 
yards from the northern entrance point of Rocky cove. Stony Point 
rock, with 10 feet water on it, lies 150 yards from the shore, at 200 
yards in a direction 56° from Stony point, a rugged projection shel- 
tering the cove of the same name, situated 14 miles south of Rocky 
cove. 

Clearing mark.—The southwestern end of Great isle of Valen, 
open northeastward of Grandy point, bearing 354°, leads eastward of 
Brook rock. 

Long point, a narrow promontory 89 feet high, extends 250 yards 
from the coast at 1? miles south of Rocky cove. Some rugged rocks, 
the lowest of which covers at high water, lie north of the point, and 
shelter a small cove with a beach of shingle. 

Patrick island, 27 feet high and bare, is 1,300 yards southwest- 
ward of Long point; another small islet lies close east of it, and 
sunken rocks that break in ordinary weather extend east and south 
for a distance of 200 yards from Patrick island. This island is the 
dividing point of two coves, and the turning point of the entrance 
to Presque harbor. In the northern of the two coves is a rock that 
dries 1 foot at low water. 

Presque harbor, 5 miles long and 1,200 yards wide, has many 
rocks in its entrance, which is consequently intricate, but within the 
entrance there is generally a great depth of water. The passage 
between the inner rocks at the entrance is only 100 yards wide. 

The harbor extends nearly north-northeast and south-southwest. 
with the entrance about the middle of its length. There is a con- 
spicuous house at the head of the northern arm. 

Western rocks are two bare islets 13 and 12 feet high and 200 
yards apart, situated southward of the entrance to Presque harbor; 
there is no passage between them, but they are bold to on the southern 
side. 

Big island is a flat bare rock 30 feet high, situated 800 yards 
northeast from Western rocks; it is bold-to on the northeastern and 
northwestern sides, but from the southwestern side a bank extends 
south-southwest a lttle more than 400 yards, with 34 fathoms water 
at its extremity. 

Goat island, situated on the northeastern side of the entrance to 
Presque, and separated by a clear channel 200 feet wide from the 
eastern shore, is covered with moss, and has a flat summit, surmounted 
by a small tuft, 108 feet high. 

Little Goat islands are two square islands and a small rock lying 
close south-southwestward of Goat island, with shoal water extending 
a short distance in the same line to the southward. A cluster of rocks 

extends westward of these islands } mile; the western, on which the 


128 CAPE RACE TO CREW POINT. 


depth is 9 feet, being situated close westward of a rock that dries at 
low water. 

Harbor rock, lying southwestward 550 yards from Little Goat 
islands, is the western turning point into Presque; it is 11 feet high, 
small and flat, and has a sunken rock lying a few yards eastward of it. 

Coppaleen rock, 5 feet high, hes 600 yards southeastward of 
Harbor rock, and is connected by a reef to the mainland, from which 
it is distant nearly 200 yards; it may be approached to 100 yards on 
the southern side. 

St. Kyrans, a bight 800 yards long and 250 yards broad, is entered 
from the northwestern side of the head of the northern arm of 
Presque. Shoal ground extends a short distance from the eastern 
entrance point. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in St. Kyrans, at 8h. 
20m.; springs rise 7 feet, neaps 5 feet. 

Worthwest cove, situated on the western shore, opposite the 
entrance, affords anchorage for a few small craft in 5 fathoms water, 
but the holding ground is bad. 

Shoal.—A small shoal, with 3 fathoms water on it, hes in the 
middle of the southern arm of Presque, and is the summit of a rocky 
bank, 200 yards long, within the depth of 10 fathoms. 

Southwest beach, situated at the head of the southern arm of 
Presque, has shoal water extending nearly 200 yards from its head, 
but there is anchorage in 15 to 17 fathoms water. 

Ice.—-During severe winters Presque harbor occasionally freezes, 
but the ice is generally thin and does not interfere with anchorage. 

Communication.—-The steamer from Placentia calls at Presque 
harbor weekly. 

Directions.—Strangers will find Presque harbor difficult of ap- 
proach, and if under sail must be prepared for the squalls that de- 
scend with great violence from the hills and through the valleys when 
high winds prevail. 

There are two entrances; the better is that close eastward of 
Western rocks; the other, eastward of Big island, is not available in 
bad weather. 

Enter with Goat island well open eastward of Western rocks, bear- 
ing about 354°, and pass Western rocks at the distance of 100 yards. 
Then keep the two Western rocks in line until Harbor rock is open 
northeastward of Coppaleen rock, when steer to pass 200 yards north- 
eastward of Coppaleen rock and 100 yards northeastward of Harbor 
rock. 

Anchorage.—Large vessels anchor in 25 fathoms water off the 
conspicuous house at the head of the northern arm of Presque; and 
small vessels in St. Kyrans harbor in 7.to 11 fathoms water, mud 
bottom and good holding ground. 


TASSE L’ARGENT—PARADISE HARBOR. 129 


Tasse argent (Tostello) is a shallow harbor, with its entrance 
southwestward 600 yards from Western rocks; it is available only 
for small craft, and is at all times difficult of access, the winds being 
frequently baffling. 

The shore.—From Tasse l’argent to Eastern head, 24 miles south- 
westward, low rocks he off many of the points, and shoals front the 
shore at the distance of } mile. 

White sail, a conspicuous white patch in the cliffs, is situated 
southwestward 3 mile from Tasse l’argent; and White Sail head, a 
remarkable sharp peak 615 feet high, is $ mile southwestward from it. 

Eastern head, southwestward 14 miles from White Sail head, is 
a narrow cliffy promontory, terminating in a peaked rock, off which 
shoal water extends nearly 200 vards. 

Black rock, bearing 190°, distant 1,650 yards from Eastern head, 
is 23 feet high, small, bare, and bold-to. The Sunker, a rock with 6 
feet of water over it, bears 247°, distant 600 yards, and Heptidge rock, 
with 44 fathoms over it, bears 240°, distant ? mile from Black rock. 

Gull islands, a group of conical rocks, the highest of which is 
156 feet, he southwestward ? mile from Eastern head. 

Great Bonah cove, ? mile northwestward of Eastern head, is 
1,100 yards deep and 400 yards wide; the settlement is situated round 
a small bight on its eastern shore. 

Anchorage.—There is temporary anchorage for small vessels 
off Great Bonah in 11 fathoms, sheltered from all winds except those 
from southeast to west through south; or for large vessels in 11 to 13 
fathoms of water, farther out. 

Little Bonah cove is southwestward nearly 2 miles from Great 
Bonah cove. <A rock, with 11 feet water on it, hes just within the en- 
trance at 100 yards from the eastern shore; and another, with 13 feet 
water on it, 300 yards within the entrance, at 100 yards from the 
same shore. 

There are a few houses round a small shallow inlet in the western 
shore, where fishing boats find good shelter. 

Little Paradise, a harbor 800 yards long, is entered through a 
channel 100 yards wide, at 1 mile southwestward of Little Bonah. 
Shoal water extends a short distance from both sides of the en- 
trance, and only 5 fathoms can be carried through at low water, 
though the depth increases to 17 fathoms immediately the bar is 
crossed. 

Anchorage.—<Anchor in the northern of two coves, in a space 300 
yards across, with 9 fathoms of water and good holding ground. A 
few families reside here. 

Paradise harbor, ! mile southwestward of Little Paradise, and 


fronted by Marticot island, is shallow and obstructed by rocks, but 


7T6846—09——_9 


130 CAPE RACE TO CREW POINT. 


it is a good boat harbor and there is a considerable settlement around 
its shores. 

Anchorage.—Anchor off the harbor in 11 fathoms of water, with 
shelter from all but easterly winds. 

Ice.—Paradise harbor occasionally freezes during severe winters, 
but anchorage can generally be obtained, as the ice is usually thin. 

Communication.—The steamer from Placentia calls at Paradise 
harbor weekly. 

Merasheen island is 19 miles long, north-northeast and south- 
southwest, and 5 miles broad near its southwestern end. Gallivan 
hill, the highest part, situated in the southern part of the island, is 
936 feet high. The southern hills are flat and have long slopes, 
covered with moss, while the northern hills are rugged, with wooden 
summits, 

Virgin cove, situated $ mile north-northeastward of Breakheart 
point (on the southwestern side and the nearest part of Merasheen 
island to Great isle of Valen), has several houses on its eastern side, 
and steep cliffs inshore, over which a conspicuous waterfall runs to 
the sea; the cove affords anchorage, with offshore winds, in 7 fathoms 
of water, sandy bottom. 

Merry harbor, nearly 6 miles northeastward of Virgin cove, is 
600 yards long, 300 yards wide, and contains excellent anchorage in 
4 to 6 fathoms of water. Two flat islets, 8 feet high and nearly joined 
together, le close to the southwestern entrance point, and two small 
islets lie close to the northeastern entrance point. Vessels may enter 
between these two groups of islets and anchor as convenient. 

In southeasterly gales, which are frequent in autumn, heavy squalls 
sweep over the harbor. 

Water may be taken from a waterfall. 

Ragged islands consist of numerous islands, islets, and rocks, 
extending 114 miles on the western side of Merasheen island. There 
is a clear passage between them and Merasheen island, and several 
passages between the different islands of the group, but they are 
known only to the inhabitants, and none are available for large vessels 
without the assistance of a local pilot. 

Only those islands in the outer channel, or near the first anchorage 
from the southward, have been surveyed. 

Numerous rocks lie off these islands, which should be approached 
only with very great caution. 

It is not necessary nor desirable to name all the islands of the 
group. It would be almost impossible for a stranger to recognize 
them, therefore only the limiting and the principal islands or rocks 
will be named. 

Black rock, the southwestern islet, is 18 feet high, dark, bare, and 
flat; it is bold-to except on the eastern side, from which a ledge ex- 
tends a short distance. 


JEAN DE GAUNT ISLAND—GALTON ISLAND. 131 


Jean de Gaunt island is the most remarkable of the southwest- 
ern portion of Ragged islands, being surmounted by a conspicuous 
hill, with a sharp fall near the summit, and 388 feet above high 
water. This island is 13 miles long and 1,200 yards wide, and con- 
tains numerous hills, divided by deep valleys. The most remarkable 
hills besides the summit are a bluff hill, with a triangular rock at 
the top, 292 feet above high water, over the southwestern extremity, 
and a sharp peaked hill, 282 feet high, near the northwestern extreme. 
The shores are bold and cliffy, with a few small coves, to which the 
hills slope less steeply. 

Jean de Gaunt harbor is a small cove, nearly 200 yards deep, 
that affords shelter only for small craft, and is situated on the north- 
west shore of the island, 800 yards from the northwestern extreme. 
Small craft enter by keeping the southwestern shore of the harbor 
on board. 

Jean de Gaunt Harbor sunker, awash at low water, bears 290°, 
distant 850 yards from the entrance, and a shoal, with 54 fathoms 
on it, lies 200 yards beyond. 

Frank head, a projection with two wooded mounds, 106 and 89 
feet high, forms the north entrance point. Three shoals lie off this 
head, with 3 feet least water on them. 

Anchorage.—Jean de Gaunt island anchorage is situated at the 
northeastern end of the island, off a cove where are some white houses. 
The approach from the northward is possible only for vessels 
of 10 feet or less draft, and then only with a local pilot, but there is 
a clear channel from the southward. 

Directions.—Keep in mid-channel between Merasheen island to 
the eastward and Gray Gull island to the westward. Approach 
Jarvis islands (the group next northeastward of Gray Gull island) 
within + mile, and then pass between Creve islands on the north- 
west, and Jarvis and Jean de Gaunt islands on the southeast. Round 
the latter at the distance of 100 yards, and anchor off the cove before 
mentioned. 

Large vessels anchor between Creve islands and the entrance to the 
cove in 14 to 16 fathoms water, mud bottom. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, at Jean de Gaunt island 
at 8h. 6m.; springs rise 7 feet, neaps 5 feet. 

King island, the largest of the Ragged islands, is 5 miles long, 
and nearly divided in several places by deep coves from either side. 
Northward of King island there is a labyrinth of small islands and 
rocks. The eastern coast of King island has not been surveyed. 

Galton island, nearly 600 yards north-northeastward of Jean de 
Gaunt island, has a square summit 76 feet high. A small creek on 
its southern side, surrounded by houses, affords good shelter to fishing 
craft. 


132 CAPE RACE TO CREW POINT. 


Brandies shoal, a patch of three rocks, 300 yards in extent, bears 
265°, distant 14 miles from the northern end of Jean de Gaunt island. 
The two western rocks dry 2 feet, the eastern has 2 feet water over 
it at low water, and all generally break. 

Forked Duck rock, about 3 feet high, and so named from the 
forked appearance presented by its two small pinnacles, bears 309°, 
distant 1,650 yards from the western end of Galton island. Western 
sunker, with 4 feet water on it, bears 253°, distant 800 yards from 
Forked Duck rock. Both these are small, and steep-to. 

Leading mark.—Greens island of White islands (see p. 120) 
shut in with West island of the same group, bearing 27°, leads west- 
ward of these rocks. 

Shag island, 77 feet high, stands out prominently about half- 
way between Ragged and White islands. Roost rocks, 6 feet high, lie 
100 yards northwestward of this island, and are continued a short 
distance by shoal water. 

Shag Roost sunkers, two of which dry at low water, bear 
about 225°, distant about ? mile from Shag island. 

Broad cove, King island, a good harbor for small craft, les 
about 1 mile eastward from Shag island, and may be distinguished 
by Pond head, a round, wooded mound, 125 feet high, on the western 
side of the entrance, and Tacks lookout, a bare-topped hill, 212 feet 
high, that falls almost perpendicularly to the eastern side of the cove. 

The cove is 750 yards deep and 250 yards broad, but a shoal, on 
which the depth is 11 feet, lies close to the eastern shore, and 
the head is filled with rocks that dry at low water. 

Tacks beach, the head of a bay 600 yards across, is only 50 yards 
wide between the bay and a cove on the southeastern side of King 
island. <A settlement, with a schoolhouse, is built round a small bight 
northwestward of the beach, and on the low projection separating the 
two. Boats proceed from Ragged islands to Buffet harbor of Long 
island by hauling over this beach, and over a similar one at Dog har- 
bor in Merasheen island, whence they cross to Mussel harbor, which is 
connected by road with Buffet harbor. 

Anchorage can be obtained here only in moderate weather, and 
the holding ground is bad. 

Communication.—The steamer from Placentia calls at Tacks 
beach weekly. 

Tacks head, northward of the beach, is the most conspicuous 
headland in Ragged islands; it rises in steep bluffs to a sharp peak 
420 feet high. 

Cooper cove, a small boat harbor, lies at the southern base of 
Tacks head, a steep high hill separating it from Tacks beach. 

New Harbor head, 1 mile northward of Tacks head, is a con- 
spicuous square, wooded headland, 130 feet high, and the summit 


° GREEN ISLAND—DUCK ROCKS. 133 


of an island which forms the northern shore of New harbor. This 
harbor is a shallow inclosure available only for boats. 

Green island, # mile northward of New Harbor head, is wooded, 
and 100 feet high. Several small islets lie off both its eastern and 
western ends; and a rock, that dries 4 feet at low water, bears 287°, 
distant 300 yards from its western end. 

Marshall island is flat, wooded, and about 50 feet high; a rock 
that dries 2 feet lies east-southeastward 250 yards from it. 

North Tilt island, situated eastward 1 mile from Marshall 
island, has a tuft of trees, the top of which is 155 feet above high 
water, on it. The other islands of the Ragged Island group are diffi- 
cult to distinguish, the passages between being narrow. 

Hollett’s islands, at the northern end of the Ragged islands, are 
low and covered with small trees. 

Bagg’s island, 6 feet high, and bare, lies north-northeastward 
of the passage between Merasheen and Ragged islands; rocks extend 
north-northeastward and south-southwestward nearly 200 yards 
from it. 

In the large bay northeastward of this island a narrow neck 
divides the bay from Great Brile harbor, on the northeastern side 
of Merasheen island. A conspicuous white house, surrounded by 
cultivated land, stands on the southern side of the bay. A small 
wooded eminence, 66 feet high, on the summit of which there is a 
church, stands on the narrow neck. 

St. Bernard, a small cove northward of the bay, also has some 
houses built round the shore. 

The northern end of Merasheen island is a high rocky peninsula, 
surmounted by bare hills on the west, covered with moss in the middle, 
and terminating at the northeast in a steep slope from a dark wooded 
hill, off which is situated Winging rock, a small bare islet 6 feet high. 

The western side of this peninsula is bordered by Duck islet, 9 feet 
high, dark and barren, situated about 1 mile from the northern end 
of the passage between Merasheen and Ragged islands, and by 
numerous rocks and islets situated about ? mile from shore. 

White island, 108 feet high, lies 750 yards northward from the 
northeastern end of Merasheen island, but the navigable passage, nar- 
rowed to 400 yards in width by the shoals off Stickland point, the 
northwestern point of the peninsula, is available only for small 
vessels. 

Duck rocks are two small bare rocks, situated 1,800 yards north- 
eastward from the northeastern end of White island. The northern 
and higher is 4 feet high; and close westward of it lies a rock awash 
at low water. These rocks are all the summit of a bank, extending 
# mile northwestward and 600 yards northward from them, within 
the depth of 10 fathoms, on which are numerous shoals. 


134 CAPE RACE TO CREW POINT. 


Clearing marks—Caution.—Stickland point, open westward of 
White island, bearing 202°, leads westward; the southern end of the 
Jerseyman in line with Long Island point, bearing 134°, leads north- 
eastward; and Stickland point, open southward of White island, 
bearing 224°, leads southeastward of this bank. 

Passing to the westward of these shoals, one should give them a 
wide berth; and in taking the passage between Barren island and 
Merasheen keep to the Barren island and mainland side. These 
passages have in them some shoals, having on them from 8 to 18 
fathoms water, which in southerly gales cause a heavy sea. For the 
names and situations of these shoals consult the chart. 

Little Brile harbor lies on the eastern side of the peninsula 
at the northern end of Merasheen island, and is formed by that penin- 
sula and some islands to the southward; the largest of these islands, 
Big island, is 140 feet high, and has several rocks and shoals extend- 
ing eastward from it. 

The harbor is 500 yards long, 300 yards wide, and is entered from 
the north-northeastward, avoiding the bank situated midway between 
Big rock and Batts island by keeping along the shore of Merasheen 
island. 

Anchorage.—Anchor in 8 to 10 fathoms water, with good shelter 
except from northeasterly winds. 

Crabbe cove, a boat harbor 200 yards across, lies immediately 
southwestward of Little Brtile harbor, and is joined to it at high 
water. 

Great Brille harbor, situated eastward of the narrow neck at 14 
miles from the northern end of Merasheen island, is 700 yards deep, 
500 yards wide at the entrance, and affords anchorage in 6 to 12 
fathoms water. 

Rising from the southern part of the harbor are two round hills 
called Ledwick hills, 415 feet high, which may be seen from each side 
of Merasheen island. There is a red spot on the northern slope of 
these hills. 

Briile shoal, with a depth of 17 feet over it, is the shallowest 
part of a bank bearing 79°, distant 800 yards from Brile head, north- 
eastward of Great Britle harbor. 

The Castle, a small square rock 14 feet high, is situated 2? miles 
southward from Big island; rocks that dry at low water extend south- 
southeastward about 200 yards, and a shoal, with 12 feet water over 
it, bears 217°, distant 750 yards from it. 

Butler island, 183 feet high, and separated from Merasheen 
island by a channel 200 yards wide, with 6 fathoms of water in it, lies 
south-southwestward 1% miles from the Castle. 

Anchorage.—There is temporary anchorage for small vessels off 
the cove westward of Butler island, in 16 fathoms of water. 


LITTLE BUTLER ISLAND——DARBY HARBOR. 135 


Little Butler island, 80 feet high, is situated south-south- 
‘westward 800 yards from Butler island and 200 yards from Mera- 
sheen island. 

Dog harbor, Merasheen island, the entrance to which is 1,600 
yards south-southwestward of Little Butler island, is 950 yards long, 
400 yards broad, and clear of shoals; it affords anchorage in 6 to 15 
fathoms of water. 

Just inside the eastern point is a narrow neck, 35 yards across, over 
which boats are hauled to the channel between Merasheen and Ragged 
islands. 

Merchant cove, on the southern side of the isthmus joining 
. Dog Harbor head to Merasheen island, is available only for one or 
two small vessels, and is open southward. 

Rosiru point, 2 miles southward of Dog Harbor head, projects 
to the eastward, and forms a bight 600 yards deep, terminating in a 
narrow creek. Small vessels anchor off this bight; but they must 
give the point a berth of 200 yards to avoid the rocks extending 
from it. 

Rosiru island, bearing 196°, distant 14 miles from Rosiru point, 
is 1? miles long, and separated from Merasheen by a clear channel 
nearly 200 yards wide at its narrowest part. 

Bird islands compose a group lying eastward 4 mile from Rosiru 
island. Duck rocks are two small bare islets; the higher, 6 feet high, 
hes northward 600 yards from Bird islands. 

Rosiru sunker dries 2 feet at low water, and bears about south 
800 yards from the southern end of Bird islands. A ledge extends 
northward 250 yards, and a rock, with 16 feet. of water over it, lies 
southwestward, 150 yards from the sunker. 

Indian harbor, Merasheen island, $ mile deep, is entered on 
either side of Southwest island, which is 187 feet high, and lies in the 
middle of the entrance; the better passage is that eastward of the 
island. 

Anchorage.—The head of the harbor, which is shallow, affords 
excellent anchorage for fishing craft; but the anchorage for vessels is 
very limited, as a shoal extends 140 yards from the southwestern 
shore, just within Southwest island, leaving a clear space only 200 
yards across. 

Darby harbor, an open cove, lies close southward of Indian harbor. 

The coast of Merasheen island trends south-southwestward 54 
miles from Indian harbor to Redland, a remarkable slip in the cliffs 
of a more yellowish hue than the color of those in Red island; this 
distinction should prevent mistakes in identification. Hogan cove, 
north-northeastward 14 miles from Redland, affords shelter for 
fishing boats from offshore winds. 


136 CAPE RACE TO CREW POINT. 


Big sunker lies south-southwestward 900 yards from Redland 
and has 2 feet of water over it. 

Dirty rocks, 33 feet high, situated 400 yards off the coast at 
1,400 yards southwestward from the southeastern point of Merasheen 
island, consist of two prominent pinnacles, named, from their colors. 
respectively, “ Blue” and “ Red” rocks, and several smaller rocks 
which are joined at low water. 

Allen, Charley, Hennessy, and Owen rocks, having depths 
of 6 to 10 fathoms, lie south-southwestward 2 to 24 miles from Dirty 
rocks, and are said to break in bad weather. 

Little shoal, with 8 feet of water over it, bears 96°, distant # mile, 
and Barrett rock, with 43 fathoms over it, les 118°, 1,4, miles from 
Dirty rock. 

Big Bald head, a conical wooded mound 211 feet high, lies in 
the middle of the southern side of Merasheen island, and projects a 
short distance from the coast. A waterfall descends over the cliffs in 
the cove eastward of this head. 

Little Bald head, 1 mile west of Big Bald head, has, 400 yards 
southeast of it, a rock with 204 feet of water on it. 

Scrape Cove head, 419 feet high, is darker in color than the 
background, and is continued to the southward by Long point, a flat 
islet 51 feet high, which in turn is terminated by Long Point rock, 
small, conical, and 10 feet high, off which, distant 140 yards, there is 
a shoal, with 6 feet water over it. 

Merasheen harbor, at the southwestern end of Merasheen island. 
is a good anchorage for small vessels; but the entrance is only 200 
yards wide, and during and after a southwesterly gale the heavy 
sea prevents access till it subsides. 

The harbor is divided into two parts by Soldier point, a narrow 
promontory 31 feet high, and it is so encumbered by rocks and shoals 
that local knowledge is required to enter it, and the anchorage space 
is very limited. 

West head forms the western and Cross point the eastern entrance 
point of the harbor, from which sunken rocks extend 300 yards. 

Cross Point shoal, with 16 feet water on it, bears 250°, distant 
700 yards from Long Point rock, and Big shoal, with 43 fathoms on 
it, bears 238°, distant 105 yards from the same rock. The church in 
line with the entrance to the harbor, bearing about 30°, leads west- 
ward of these shoals. 

Shoals.—Several shoals, among which are Isaac rock and Inside 
rock, not dangerous in ordinary weather, lie southward and also 
westward of those just described, but some of them break in bad 
weather and cause a confused sea in the approach to Merasheen 
harbor. 


WEST HEAD—LONG POINT. a Bay 


Communication.—The steamer from Placentia calls at Mera- 
sheen harbor weekly. 

West head is the scuthwestern point of Pond head, the south- 
western peninsula of Merasheen island. 

Pond Head sunkers bears 242°, distant 500 yards from Mar- 
garet point, the northern end of Pond head, and nearly always 
breaks. 

Clearing marks.—Fish island, i2 feet high, open northwest- 
ward of Margaret point, bearing about 67°, leads northward, and 
Long Point rock, open southward of West head, bearing 123°, leads 
southward of these rocks. 

Little Merasheen harbor, situated eastward of Pond head and 
separated by a narrow isthmus from the head of Merasheen harbor, 
is 400 yards deep, but it is narrow and shallow, so that only three 
small craft can lie there, and it is quite open north-northeastward. 
A large settlement surrounds this and Merasheen harbor. 

Two miles northeastward of Little Merasheen harbor is Breakheart 
point. 

Navigation.—In clear weather, for navigating this part of Pla- 
centia bay, the mariner will find useful the eastern ends of the two 
Burgeo islands in line bearing 10°. This range clears all dangers 
off Merasheen island to the eastward, and all those off the mainland 
to the westward. 

Red island is situated eastward about 1? miles from the south- 
eastern part of Merasheen island. On the southwestern slope of the 
summit of the island, which is 880 feet high, is a gray spot that when 
seen from the southward appears like a small cloud or smoke. 
The Tolt, a sharp cone 723 feet high, has a white stripe extending 
from its summit nearly 3 down its northern face. 

Red Island harbor, close southwestward of a point on the north- 
eastern coast of Red island, is fronted by several extensive rocky 
shoals and available for only a few small craft. It is 360 yards deep 
and about 100 yards wide, with 8 feet of water in it. A settlement 
surrounds the harbor. 

Communication.—The steamer from Placentia calls at Red 
Island harbor weekly. 

Cochrane cove, 200 yards deep, with a shingle beach at the head, 
is 4 mile southward of Red Island harbor. 

Southwest cove, on the northwest coast, is fringed by a beach 
of shingle. Small fishing vessels anchor here with offshore winds, in 
6 to 9 fathoms water. 

Southwest Cove head, westward of this cove, is also known as 
Blue point, from the apparent color of the land in ordinary weather. 

Long point, in the middle of the northwest coast, is low and 
sloping, and shoal water extends nearly 200 yards from it. 


138 CAPE RACE TO CREW POINT. 


Plateau.—Red island rests on a plateau of less than 50 fathoms 
water, which leaves only a narrow valley between the plateau of 
Merasheen island on the west and that of the Seal islands on the 
north, and which, extending 4 miles from the southern side of the 
island, does not extend beyond 4 mile on the other sides. Southward 
of the island the depth of 5 fathoms will be found at $ mile south- 
southwest from Hole-in-the-Wall point, the southwestern point of the 
island. To the southeastward of this are Murphy rock with 8 fathoms, 
Neverfail rock with 10 fathoms, and Red Island rocks with 7 to 15 
fathoms, the last-named rocks being 38 miles, in a direction 220°, from 
Rogges point, the southern point of Red island. 

Goat island, surmounted by a remarkable tree, 108 feet above 
high water, has no navigable passage, unless a local pilot be taken, 
between it and the northern end of Red island, from which it is dis- 
tant 250 yards. . 

Goat island sunker bears 270°, distant 800 yards from the south- 
ern end of Goat island, and dries 2 feet at low water. 

Little Seal islands, 2 miles north-northeastward from Goat 
island, consist of a small group, occupying an area 700 yards long and 
950 yards broad; the eastern and highest island is 91 feet high, and 
covered with small trees. 

Great Seal islands, } mile north-northeastward from Little Seal 
islands, is flat in outline, 346 feet high, and falls in steep cliffs to the 
southward, but slopes gradually to the northward. It should not be 
approached nearer than 200 yards. 

Long island, situated 14 miles eastward of Merasheen island, 
13 miles long northward and southward, and 14 miles broad at its 
widest part, contains two good harbors—Buffet harbor on the south- 
eastern side and Mussel harbor on the southwestern side of the island. 

Buffet head, the southern end of the island, is a remarkable per- 
pendicular cliff about 300 feet high, falling from the summit of the 
island, 599 feet high, at about 1 mile to the northward. This summit, 
named Mount Tronskull, is readily recognized from all parts of 
Placentia bay. 

Iron island lies southward 1,200 yards from Buffet head; it is 
bluff, flat-topped, 245 feet high, and bold-to. 

Ironskull rock, southeastward 1,000 yards from Iron island, 
is 14 feet high, and steep-to, except on its southwestern side, from 
which a reef that covers 2 feet at high water extends 200 yards. 

Dog islands, about a mile north-northeastward of Buffet head, 
are three wooded islets, the highest being 135 feet high, separated 
from Long island by a channel 400 yards wide. There is a passage 
in mid-channel between the western and the two eastern islands, but 
none between the two eastern. 


BUFFET HARBOR—DICKS ISLAND. 139 


Tides Cove sunker, bearing 233°, distant 550 yards from the west- 
ern Dog island, covers 4 feet. This is the only known shoal off the 
southern part iE the coast. 

Buffet harbor is on the southeastern side and 3 miles from the 
southern end of Long island. 

Buffet island, a cone 151 feet high, lies eastward 4 mile from the 
harbor entrance, which may thereby be easily recognized. 

A shoal, with 4 fathoms water over it, bears 237°, distant 450 yards 
from Buffet island; and Matthew rock, that covers 5 feet, and does 
not always break, bears 6°, distant 450 yards from Buffet island. 

Clearing marks.—The eastern part of Dog islands open eastward 
of Buffet island, bearing about 200°, leads eastward of Matthew rock, 
and the northeastern fall of Iron island in line with the summit of 
West Dog island, bearing 193°, leads westward. e 

Dicks island, 174 feet high, and Isaac island, 108 feet high, lie 
southward of Buffet Harbor entrance, and are separated from Long 
island by narrow channels, passable only for boats. On the shores of 
these channels is a settlement named the Tickles. 

The harbor, within the entrance, divides into three arms: the 
southern has shallow water stretching 200 yards from the shores, and 
Seal rock, awash at high water, close to its western point; the northern 
arm is 4 mile deep and 300 yards broad, and has no danger except a 
rock with 12 feet of water, 100 yards from the eastern shore and 380 
yards within thearm. The harbor proper, which is the western arm, has 
a church, prominent houses, and wharves around it. The entrance 
is clear, but a shoal extends 100 yards off a low point near the inner 
entrance on the northern side, and the whole of Buffet island a little 
open southward of the northern point, bearing about east, leads south- 
ward of it. 

Anchorage.—In a large vessel anchor immediately within the 
harbor in 17 to 20 fathoms water, but in small vessels in either of the 
arms, aS convenient. 

Ice.—Buffet harbor is partly or completely frozen over, every 
second or third winter, from about the end of February to the begin- 
ning of April. Northern ice only visits the harbor every third or 
fourth year, and the time both of its arrival and departure is uncer- 
tain; it seldom arrives before March 1, and leaves between the end of 
March and early in May. In 1868 and 1882 drift ice remained un- 
usually late; in the winters of 1875 and 1882 the bay was completely 
frozen over, and these were the only occasions that this had happened 
during forty years. 

Current.—The current generally sets south-southwestward past 
Buffet harbor, and in on thé eastern shore of Placentia bay. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Buffet harbor at 
Sh, 12m.; springs rise 7 feet, neaps 5 feet. 


140 CAPE RACE TO CREW POINT. 


Communication.—The steamer from Placentia calls at Buffet 
harbor weekly. 

Little harbor, situated northward 14 miles from Buffet harbor, is 
available only for small fishing craft, for which there is good anchor- 
age in 4 fathoms water, mud bottom. 

Kearney head is a large, steep bluff, 192 feet high. 

Collett cove, northward 2 miles from Little harbor, affords fair 
anchorage in 5 to 10 fathoms water, sand bottom. Collett Cove 
island, at its entrance, is 45 feet high. 

In approaching from the south, one should give the southeastern 
point of the cove a good berth in order to avoid a rock that covers at 
high water, situated 100 yards off. 

Northeast and Southwest coves are situated 2 miles northward 

e°! Collett cove. They are entirely exposed. 

Shagroost is a vertical rock 69 feet high, with several low islets, 
situated in northeast cove. 

Haystack harbor, situated north-northeastward 4 miles from 
Collett cove, is westward of a wedge-shaped peninsula, 256 feet high, 
joined to the mainland by a shingle beach on which are some houses. 
There is good anchorage in the harbor in 5 fathoms water, mud bot- 
tom, sheltered from all winds; and the inhabitants state that even 
in winter gales small vessels he there securely. Both sides of the 
entrance to the harbor are clear at a short distance from the shore. 

The name Haystack comes from a small island resembling a hay- 
stack, situated 400 yards north-northeastward from the northeastern 
point of the peninsula. 

Communication.—The steamer from Placentia calls at Haystack 
harbor weekly. 

Long Island point is a narrow tongue of land which is the north- 
ern end of Long island. 

Cheese island lies north-northwestward about 1,200 yards from 
Long Island point; it is 145 feet high. 

The Jerseyman, a bare rock 14 feet high, lies south-southwest- 
ward + mile from Cheese island, and bears 314°, distant 700 yards 
from Long Island point. 

Bread island, bearing 5°, distant 1,4 miles from Long Island 
point, is wooded, conical, and 229 feet high. A shoal, with 15 feet 
water over it, lies 300 yards from its southwestern end. 

Caution.—The channel between Bread and Cheese islands has a 
rock with 12 feet water on it in mid-channel. The channel between 
the Jerseyman and Long Island point is clear of dangers and deep. 

Spencer cove, on the northwestern side of Long island and south- 
southwestward 2 miles from Long Island point, is nearly } mile deep. 
Rocks, 4 feet high, lie just within the northern entrance point, which 
extends 200 yards east-southeast, forming a reef, a part of which is 


MUSSEL HARBOR—BARREN ISLAND. 141 


awash at low water. To clear these rocks when entering, keep the 
southern shore aboard. 

Green island is a small rock 30 feet high situated 4 mile north- 
west of the northern entrance point of Mussel harbor. <A small reef 
hes north-northwest of it. 

Mussel harbor, a fine basin on the western side of Long island at 
34 miles from Buffet head, is well sheltered throughout, with good 
holding ground. It is 14 miles long north and south, 4 mile broad, 
with a depth of 19 to 21 fathoms water, mud bottom, and is divided 
into two arms at its northern end; small vessels anchor in the north- 
western arm, but a short sea heaves into the other with southwesterly 
winds. 

There are three islands at the mouth of Mussel harbor; the entrance 
is southward of the southern of these islands, keeping in mid-channel 
to avoid a rock situated a few yards from the south shore. An islet 
lies on the western side of the northern arm, and several shoals are 
westward of it; the passage is eastward of the islet. 

North Wild cove, 14 miles southward of Mussel harbor, affords 
no shelter, nor does South Wild cove, 14 miles farther southward. 

Barren island, 315 feet high, is separated from Mussel Harbor 
entrance and the land southward of it by a clear deep channel 400 
yards wide. Several shoals lie near the western coast of the island, 
which should not be approached within } mile. A small islet, 27 feet 
high, is situated close to the southern point of Barren island, and a 
rock, that nearly always breaks, lies 100 yards off the islet. 

Merasheen and White Sail banks are extensive banks lying 
south-southwestward of Merasheen island and separated from the 
shoals off that island by a deep channel 2 miles wide. 

Telegraph rock, with 11 feet water over it and the shoalest rock 
on these banks, les 191°, distant 84 miles from Scrape Cove head, 
and from it shoals, with 5 to 9 fathoms water over them, extend to 
Upper Big shoal, which has 8 fathoms water over it, and is situated 
1 mile within the southern end of Merasheen bank and south-south- 
west 15 miles from Scrape Cove head. Southern ridge, ? mile south- 
southwestward of Upper Big shoal, has 13 fathoms on it and is the 
southern limit of the shoalest part of the bank. 

Rocks.—On the northern portion of White Sail bank are North- 
ward rock, with 7 fathoms; Joe Ground, 53 fathoms; and Jeans rock, 
6 fathoms water, all lying on a general southwesterly bearing from 
Scrape Cove head, and Jeans rock, the western, being distant 6 miles. 
To the southeastward of these 14 miles is Burges ground with 6 
fathoms water. There are also several patches of 6 to 9 fathoms on 
White Sail bank. 

Clearing mark.—Margaret and Breakheart points in line bearing 
47° leads northwestward of all these dangers. 


142 CAPE RACE TO CREW POINT. 


Bennett bank, about 2 miles in length east-northeast and west- 
southwest, and # mile in breadth, with general depths of 10 to 25 
fathoms over it, has a least depth of 5? fathoms on Hollett rock, 
which bears 193°, distant 6 miles from Scrape Cove head. Bennett 
bank is 1 mile southeast of White Sail bank, from which it is 
separated by a deep and narrow gulley. 

Caution.—In navigating the eastern part of Placentia bay, a clear 
passage may be obtained by keeping in line, from as far southward as 
possible, Iron island and Dog islands, bearing 20°. 

Marticot island, 4 miles southwestward of White Sail head on the 
northwestern shore of Placentia bay, is 14 miles long and nearly 1 
mile wide, and consists of two high parts joined by a low, marshy 
isthmus. Marticot Back cove, on the southern side of the isthmus, 
is 850 yards deep, with sides of steep cliff, and is quite open, with 
rocks extending a short distance off both entrance points. 

Close off the northern end of the island are some low rocks, ae 
a shoal having white bottom a short distance off them. Marticot 
cove, northward of the isthmus, has a shingle beach at its head and is 
foul for a short distance around its shores, but it affords anchorage in 
8 fathoms water, sheltered from southwesterly winds. Rocks extend 
a short distance from its eastern point, and a shoal, with 5 fathoms 
water over it, hes 65°, distant 400 yards from them. 

Gull shoal, with 13 feet water over it, bears 176°, distant + mile 
from Gull rocks, a cluster of cliffy islands off the southern end of the 
island. 

Shoals.—Southward of Marticot island are several shoals, some of 
which break in bad weather. They are: The Point, with 53 fathoms, 
1 mile east-southeastward of Gull rocks; Western grounds, with 8 
fathoms; Middle shoal, with 44 to 54 fathoms; Larkin bank, with 44 
fathoms; Bill White rock, with 4 fathoms, the last being just north- 
ward of Long Island bank. 

To pass eastward of all the above shoals, as well as of Spicer rocks 
(see p. 141), keep points of Margaret and Breakheart in line from 
abreast Jude island to abreast Presque harbor. 

Fox island is situated northwestward of Marticot island, leaving 
a channel 250 yards wide between. A rock, with 12 feet water over it, 
lies off the southeastern entrance to this channel bears 124°, distant 
300 yards from the southeastern end of Fox island. This island is 
almost joined to the southwestern point of Paradise at low water. 

Rock.—A rock that breaks in ordinary weather bears 306°, dis- 
tant 4 mile from the southwestern end of Fox island. The summit of 
Marticot island, open southward of Fox island, bearing about 117° 
leads southward, and a remarkable peak up Paradise sound, open of 
Red Cove head, about 16°, leads westward of this rock. 


LONG ISLAND—SHAG ROCKS. 1438 


The coast of the mainland from Paradise peninsula trends north- 
northwestward 4 mile to Red cove, which is 800 yards deep, 400 yards 
wide, and open. Red Cove head, the northwestern point of the cove, 
is skirted by rocks off reddish cliffs, and the coast continues foul to 
Southeast cove. 

Long island, the northeastern end of which is situated west- 
northwestward 14 miles from Marticot island, is nearly 4 miles long 
and # mile wide at the broadest part near the southwestern end, 
gradually narrowing to a sharp point, Long Island point, at the 
northeastern extreme. It is bold-to at a short distance, and rises to a 
series of peaks, the highest, a sharp cone 472 feet high, ascending 
steeply from the western coast at about 14 miles from the south- 
western end. Some low black rocks lie off the southeastern coast. 

Light.—A circular white lighthouse, 30 feet high, on the south- 
western part of Long island, exhibits at 237 feet above high water, a 
fixed white hght, which should be seen seawards from a distance of 
18 miles in clear weather. 

The keeper’s flat-roofed dwelling is connected to the northwestern 
side of the lighthouse by a covered way 44 feet long, all painted 
white. 

A white flat-roofed storehouse is situated on the point of the island 
at 112 feet below the lighthouse, and possibly it may be visible when 
the lighthouse above it is obscured by fog. 

Long Island bank lies nearly a mile southeastward of Long 
island. It is 1? miles long and 14 miles broad within the depth of 30 
fathoms. 

The shoalest parts are two places with 10 fathoms water, eastward 
2 miles and 23 miles, respectively, from the southwestern extreme of 
Long island. 

A shoal, with 8 fathoms water on it, bears 140°, distant 3} miles 
from the southwestern extreme of Long island. 

Paradise sound entrance is northwestward 1? miles from Marticot 
island, and the sound, which extends northeastward 11 miles, is about 
? mile wide, and generally has deep water. There is anchorage for 
small vessels in Southeast cove, the first indentation on the south- 
eastern shore, where are a few houses; in Gilberts cove on the north- 
western shore, opposite the first island; and at the head. The sound 
is clear of dangers, except a rock, which lies a short distance north- 
eastward of the first island, and out of the fairway up the sound. 

Shag rocks, a group of peaked rocks, the highest 4 feet above 
high water, lie just west of the entrance to Paradise sound. The 
easternmost of the group covers at high water and faces a deep cove. 
There is no passage between these rocks and the shore. 

A shoal, with 8 feet water, bears 155°, distant 300 vards from the 
highest rock. 


144 CAPE RACE TO CREW POINT. 


Petit Fort harbor, next westward of Paradise sound, is entered 
through a passage 400 yards wide between Eastern head, a sharp 
point on the eastern side, and White point, low and shelving, with 
small rocks a short distance off on the western side. The harbor ex- 
tends north by east 13 miles, expanding to $ mile wide inside the en- 
trance and thence narrowing gradually to the head. Two wooded 
islets, about 20 feet high, he close to the west shore, and nearly join 
each other and the mainland at low water. Petit Fort harbor is sur- 
rounded by high hills, those on the east shore being a series of sharp 
peaks, 272 to 375 feet high, with deep valleys between, and on the 
west shore a wooded, flat range 450 feet high, faced by cliffs, and 
falling almost perpendicularly to the water line. 

Shoals.—A shoal, with 7 feet water over it, bears 131°, about 800 
yards from Eastern head, and the ground inside this shoal is foul. 

A shoal, nearly in mid-channel, immediately within the harbor 
entrance, has 12 feet water over it, and is steep-to. Long island, open 
eastward of Nonsuch head, bearing about 202°, leads eastward of 
this shoal. 

Petit fort, a small cove on the western shore, is formed by a 
peninsula rising to a round wooded hill about 90 feet high; on the 
neck joining this peninsula to the mainland stands the church, which 
is a white wooden building. Off the neck lies a cliffy island 20 feet 
high, joined to the mainland at low water. <A settlement surrounds 
the cove. 

Harrington cove, next south of Petit fort, has a few houses round 
the shores, and a small islet, 183 feet high, off the south point. 

Anchorage may be had as convenient, after the shoal in the en- 
trance is passed, in 5 to 10 fathoms water, mud bottom. Small vessels 
should proceed northward of the wooded islets on the western shore, 
where they are sheltered from all winds. 

Communication.—The steamer from Placentia calls at Petit Fort 
harbor weekly. 

Wild cove, immediately southwestward of Petit Fort harbor en- 
trance, is quite open. 

Nonsuch head, a steep bluff rising to a round wooded summit 
253 feet high, is the dividing point between Petit Fort harbor and 
Nonsuch. Off the south side of the head is a detached rocky hum- 
mock, 30 feet high; off the southwestern side of the head are some 
low square rocks, and a shoal, with 9 feet water over it, lies south- 
westward about 400 yards from the head. 

Shag islets, 16 feet high, he close off the northwestern part 
of Nonsuch head. <A rock, that covers 6 feet, hes southward 100 
yards, and a ledge extends the same distance north-northwestward 
from them. 


NONSUCH—BURNT ISLANDS. 145 


Nonsuch extends north-northeastward 14 miles from Shag islets 
to the narrow channel, 140 yards wide, between the eastern shore of 
the mainland and the northern Burnt island. A shoal with 54 
fathoms water on it lies nearly in the middle of the entrance, distant 
750 yards, in a direction 293°, from Shag islets, and a rock, with 6 feet 
water over it, lies in mid-channel, bearing 325°, distant 1,100 yards 
from Shag islets; and a shoal, with 15 feet water over it, bears 212°, 
650 yards, from Gooseberry island. 

Gooseberry island is a small cliffy mound, 53 feet high, forming 
a good mark for recognizing Nonsuch narrows. <A cove, 1,400 yards 
deep and 700 yards wide at its entrance, narrowing gradually to the 
head, situated northeastward of Gooseberry island, affords good 
anchorage in 64 to 9 fathoms water, sand and mud bottom, with 
shelter from all but southwesterly winds. 

Burnt islands, on the western side of the entrance to Nonsuch, 
and the eastern side of Southwest Nonsuch, are nearly joined to each 
other and the mainland of cape Roger, and are 14 miles long. The 
southern island is surmounted by a barren cone, cleft in two; the 
higher part, 285 feet above high water, is continued to the south- 
ward by wooded hills. The eastern shore is foul for 200 yards. An 
inlet, 600 yards deep and 100 yards wide, on the shores of which are 
a few houses, is entered on the southern side of this island, and affords 
shelter for fishing boats. 

The northern island is barren, 165 feet high, and has a small, 
nearly detached mound on its southeastern side, off which rocks, that 
cover 5 feet, extend 100 yards into the narrow entrance of Nonsuch, 
leaving a channel only 100 yards wide, through which 84 fathoms 
can be carried by keeping the eastern shore close aboard. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, at Burnt islands at 
Th. 48m.; springs rise 7 feet. 

Northeast Nonsuch extends north-northeastward, 22 miles from 
the northern Burnt island, with an average breadth of 400 yards, 
expanding in a cove on the western shore at about 1 mile within the 
entrance, off which there is anchorage, in 7 fathoms water, for vessels 
of moderate length. Small vessels anchor as convenient in the harbor 
up to 4 mile from the head. 

Water may be taken from several streams in this harbor, and small 
firewood may be obtained from the valleys. 

Southwest Nonsuch extends south-southwestward, 2 miles from 

the northern Burnt island, but is unsuitable for vessels drawing more 
than 12 feet water; it may be entered by keeping in mid-channel be- 
tween Burnt islands and the mainland. Southwestward of the islands 
a fine basin opens out 4 mile long and 4 mile wide, with sheltered 


o 


anchorage in 11 fathoms water, mud bottom. In this basin are two 
76846—09——_10 


146 CAPE RACE TO CREW POINT. 


islands; and the head of the basin narrows to a shallow creek 600 
yards long. 

Mouse island, 17 feet high, is a small, grassy rock, 150 yards 
from the southern extreme of Burnt islands, with a reef extending 
200 yards from the southern end. A rock that covers 4 feet bears 
79°, distant 150 yards, and a shoal with 7 feet of water bears 115° 
the same distance from Mouse island. 

Anchorage for small vessels may be had in 6 fathoms northwest- 
ward of Mouse island, but they must pass over a bar with 34 fathoms 
water between that island and the mainland. 

Woody island, about 700 yards in length and the same in breadth, 
lies 4 mile south of Burnt islands, and is separated from the mainland 
by a deep, clear channel 300 yards wide. It is surmounted by three 
wooded hummocks; the highest, over the southern side, being 228 
feet high, slopes steeply to the water line, and may be approached 
to within 100 yards. 

Hay island, 2 miles westward of Nonsuch head, 800 yards long, 
and narrow. is surmounted by a wooded cone 100 feet high and is 
joined to:the mainland by shoal water; a low black rock lies close 
off its southwestern end, and another just southeastward of its north- 
eastern end, but the southeastern coast is bold-to. 

Hay Island bank, with 9 fathoms water on it, lies southeastward 
$4 mile from Hay island. 

Cape Roger is a steep cliff, 150 feet high, the southern termination 
of a remarkable moss-covered head and 500 feet high, situated 
northwestward of Hay island and falling almost in a perpendicular 
line to the sea. A low black rock les close to the foot of the cliff. 
The east coast of this cape may be approached close-to, but the west 
shore has shoal water a short distance from it. 

Cape Roger island, 220 feet high and wooded, lies westward 
nearly 1 mile from cape Roger. Shingle beaches fringe the north- 
eastern shore and several rocks lie off the northwestern and north- 
eastern coasts at the distance of 200 yards. 

A rock, with 7 feet of water over it, bears 67°, distant 450 yards 
from the rock at the northeastern point, and another, with 12 feet of 
water over it, lies 600 yards in a direction 62° from the same rock; a 
third, with 8 feet of water over it, lies 140°, distant 300 yards from 
the southern point of the island. 

Cape Roger bay extends north by east 4 miles on the western 
side of cape Roger, and is nearly 1 mile wide at its entrance, narrow-: 
ing to 600 yards at 1 mile within, and to 300 yards at a short distance 
farther, keeping that breadth to near its head. A cluster of islets 
lies just within the entrance, 250 yards from the eastern shore; the 
southern, a pinnacle 10 feet high, and the northern flat, 6 feet above 


CAPE ROGER MOUNTAIN—GALLOWS HARBOR HEAD. 147 


high water. Sunken rocks le 200 yards off these islets, and the 
channel between them and the mainland should not be taken. 

A swell rolls across the entrance of this bay even when it is calm 
outside, especially after a prevalence of southerly winds. 

Cape Roger mountain, a conspicuous round hill, 1,220 feet 
high, les 94 miles inland from cape Roger, and shows prominently 
over the intervening land from the banks in Placentia bay. 

Cape Roger harbor, situated on the western shore of the bay 
at 14 miles within its entrance, is sheltered by Harbor island, which 
is wooded, 113 feet high and 400 yards long, separated at the south- 
ern end from the mainland by a narrow channel, through which 4 
feet can be carried at low water. This harbor affords anchorage for 
small craft only, between the island and the mainland, in 2 fathoms, 
sand; but large vessels may find anchorage anywhere in the bay after 
the island is passed in from 4 to 10 fathoms, mud, as convenient. 

Rocks extend off the point next south of Harbor island, in a line 
crossing the bay, and that part of the west shore should not be ap- 
proached nearer than 200 yards, but the island may be closed to within 
100 yards from the east point. Rocks that cover le in the harbor 
close southwest of Harbor island. A conspicuous round hill 470 feet 
high les on the eastern shore, separated by a marsh from the hills of 
cape Roger, and shows out well from the south. 

Cape Roger head, marking the western side of the entrance, is 
498 feet high and falls steeply to the bay, but in wooded slopes to the 
northwestward and in a succession of wooded hills to the southwest 
point of the bay; a rugged, cliffy point under a wooded hillock, off 
which rocks that cover extend 200 yards. 

Water may be procured in many places, and small wood is abun- 
dant in the valleys off this bay. 

Little Gallows harbor extends northward nearly 1 mile on the 
western side of the southwestern point of Cape Roger bay to a shingle 
spit, within which it forms a small shallow basin. 

The harbor, which is 700 yards wide at its entrance, narrows to 200 
yards off a peaked rock on the western shore at 1,200 yards within, 
and thence gradually to the shingle spit. Shoal water extends a 
short distance from both shores, and a bar with 4 feet of water on it 
crosses the head of the harbor just outside the shingle spit. 

The water shoals suddenly from 17 to 8 fathoms off the first low 
neck on the western shore, and thence gradually to the bar. A few 
houses are situated round the head of the harbor. 

Anchorage.—Small vessels anchor in the harbor in 5 to 8 fathoms 
of water, sheltered from all except southerly to southwesterly winds. 

Gallows Harbor head lies between Little Gallows and Gallows 
harbors, and its northern end is separated from the mainland at high 
water by Push through, a passage just wide enough for a boat. The 


148 CAPE RACE TO CREW POINT. 


head, surmounted by mossy hills 320 feet high, falls in sharp cliffs 
to the southward, but in wooded slopes to the northward; the two 
northern hills being connected to each other and to the highest part 
by two low necks of land covered with grass. 

Great Gallows or St. Joseph harbor, on the northwestern 
side of Gallows Harbor headland, is entered between a low point sur- 
rounded by bowlders, close off which is a black rock that covers at 
high water, on the southeastern side, and Sams head, a narrow point 
sloping from a steep bluff, on the northwestern side. The harbor, 500 
yards across, has a few houses round its shores and affords good 
anchorage in 74 fathoms of water, mud bottom. 

A bank with 7 feet least water over it bears 241°, distant 500 yards 
from Sams head, and the summit of Cross island, shut in with the 
rocks of Mouse island, bearing 247°, leads southeastward of it. 

Gallows Harbor island, about 4 mile long, hes $ mile west- 
ward of Gallows Harbor head, and has a wooded summit 257 feet 
high. The water is deep to within a short distance of the shores. 

Jigging cove, entered 600 yards north-northwestward of Sams 
head, extends northward 600 yards; the entrance is 200 yards wide, 
and the cove expands within to 300 yards in breadth. <A rock with 7 
feet water over it lies a short distance from the western entrance 
point. Small craft anchor in 5 fathoms of water, mud bottom, with 
good shelter. 

Mouse island, 35 feet high, and covered with grass over black 
rock, lies between Gallows Harbor island and the mainland north- 
westward of it, leaving a clear passage 400 yards wide between the 
islands, but none between it and the mainland. 

Steering rocks, 14 feet high, lie close to the shore off a slight 
indentation north of Mouse island. A rock with 5 feet of water bears 
93°, distant 300 yards from the highest of the Steering rocks. 

Little harbor, northwestward 11 miles from Great Gallows 
harbor, extends northward 1,200 yards and is about 200 yards in 
width, but narrowed at a short distance within the entrance by a rock 
off a shingle point. Fishing craft anchor with tolerable shelter in 
12 fathoms water off a small settlement. 

Burnt island, $ mile west of Little harbor, lies close off the 
mainland, and shelters a small cove frequented by fishing boats. The 
coast between Little harbor and this cove is rugged and much in- 
dented. A shoal lies just each of the island a short distance from 
the mainland, but the island is bold-to on the south and west sides. 

Holloway passage, between Burnt and Cross islands, is 500 
yards wide, clear of danger, and deep. 

Bay de 1’Eau head, immediately northwestward of Burnt island, 
rises steeply to an isolated hill 227 feet high, covered with moss; it is 
bold-to. 


BAY DE L’EAU—BOAT HARBOR HEAD. 149 


Bay de 1’Eau, extending north-northeast, with a slight bend, 
nearly 4 miles, is about 900 yards in breadth; the water is deep and 
clear for 2 miles from the entrance, when it shoals suddenly from 18 
to 7 fathoms in mid-channel. A depth of 6 to 7 fathoms, mud bot- 
tom, then continues for ? mile, and affords sheltered anchorage. 

Water and wood can be procured readily from many places on 
the shores of this bay. 

Cross island, 24 miles long northeastward and southwestward 
and 14 miles broad, is surmounted by two conspicuous hills, covered 
with moss. The highest and northern has a small, flat summit 593 
feet high, and the southern is a sharp peak 550 feet above high water. 
Lower, rugged, and wooded hills, with deep valleys between, extend 
to the shores, sloping steeply to the water line. Rocks that cover le 
off the southeastern shore that should not be approached nearer than. 
200 yards, and shoal water extends a short distance from the points 
on the northwestern side. A shoal, with 6 fathoms water, bears 194°, 
distant 4 mile from the southwestern point, and a rock, with 5 fathoms 
water, lies 200 yards off the northwestern shore, opposite the channel 
between Petticoat and Gull islands. 

Gooseberry islet, 34 feet high, the northern end of a chain of 
islands lying westward of Cross island, is small and cliffy with shoal 
water extending a short distance northeastward of it; a rock, with 5 
feet water over it and the end of a ledge, bears 205°, distant 150 yards 
from the islet. 

Petticoat island, 182 feet high, is separated from the southern 
end of Gooseberry islet by a passage 400 yards wide, 2 fathoms deep, 
and clear in mid-channel. It is wooded over three round hills, the 
highest 182 feet high. A rock, with 7 feet water over it, lies nearly 
200 yards off a cove at the northeastern end, and shoal water extends 
a short distance off the northwestern coast of the island. 

Gull island is 450 yards south-southwest of Petticoat island, and 
the channel between is clear of danger. The highest part, a wooded 
cone 210 feet above high water, lies near the northeastern extreme; 
the southeastern shore has dark cliffs and is steep-to, and the north- 
western shore consists of shingle beaches at the base of gentle slopes. 

Little Gull island, a grass-covered rock 30 feet high, is nearly 
joined to the southwestern extreme of Gull island. 

Jerseyman island, 257 feet high, is flat in outline and wooded, 
falling steeply to the shore, and terminated to the northward by a 
small islet 7 feet above high water. A rock, on which there is 6 feet 
water, bears 180°, distant 200 yards from the southern extreme. 
The passage between Jerseyman island and the mainland is clear, the 
distance to Broad Cove head being 1 mile. 

Boat Harbor head, dividing bay de Eau from Boat harbor, 
falls in steep bluffs from a moss-covered tableland 490 feet high, and 
is fringed on its western side by shingle beaches. 


150 CAPE RACE TO CREW POINT. 


The Friar, a peaked rock, 11 feet high and steep-to, les close off 
the southern end of this hee 

Boat harbor extends north-northeastward 33 miles on the west- 
ern side of Boat Harbor head with a breadth of about 4 mile; the 
harbor divides at its head into northeast and northw eae arms, the 
former 900 yards deep, and containing anchorage for small vessels, 
but shoaling 600 yards from its head. 

Northwest arm is 1,400 yards deep and 500 yards wide; it 
affords anchorage in 18 fathoms water, but is shoal at 400 yards from 
its head. The only anchorage in Boat harbor for vessels of any size 
is in this arm. 

Parker cove, just inside the entrance on the west shore, is 600 
yards deep. A rock that covers 5 feet lies in the middle of the cove 
250 yards from the shore, and a shoal with 9 feet water lies in the 
line of the points 950 yards from Manny point south of the entrance. 

Anchorage for ships can be had only in Northwest arm, and for 
fishing craft in Northeast arm and Parker cove inside the rocks. 

Water may be obtained from sev saul streamlets on the sides of 
this bay. 

A shoal, with 9 fathoms of water, bears 247°, distant # mile 
from Boat Harbor head. It is the summit of a bank, with less than 
20 fathoms water, nearly 4 mile in extent. 

The coast of the mainland, from Boat harbor trends southwest 
by south 2} miles to Bane harbor; it is backed by wooded ranges 
with several sharp, barren peaks 470 to 616 feet high, and is bold-to. 
Bane Harbor tolt, the southern of these hills, is a sharp peak 585 feet 
high. 

Bane harbor, a landlocked basin 700 yards long and 500 yards 
broad, is entered through a curved channel 100 yards wide, narrowed 
to half that breadth by rocks extending from the northern shore. 
The entrance is well defined by some white houses and the church, 
a white wooden building standing on a small eminence just within 
the entrance on the north shore. The point under the church. is 
rugged and continued under water to the opposite shore, forming 
a bar, over which only 34 fathoms can be carried. The northern 
side of the harbor slopes from wooded hills, and over the west point 
is an isolated hill 130 feet high, covered with small wood. 

Rodway point, east of the entrance, is a low, wooded mound, east 
of which is a rocky islet about 10 feet above high water. A rock 
lies close off the islet, and a reef that covers, with a shoal at the 
extreme, extends nearly 100 yards from Rodway point. 

Smith point, south of the entrance, is steep-to, but a rock, awash 
at low water, lies a few yards from the point next within. 

Inside the entrance the harbor divides into Northeast cove and 
the Bottom, the former extending 300 yards and the latter a con- 
tinuation of the main basin. 


STEERING ROCK—EAST BROAD COVE. 151 


No vessel should go into this harbor for the first time without a 
pilot. 

Steering rock, 7 feet high, hes southward 350 yards from the 
entrance to Bane harbor. A low black rock lies off the southwestern 
extreme, and a rock, with 2 feet water, bears 25°, distant 50 vards 
from the eastern extreme. 

Communication.—The steamer from Placentia calls at Bane 
harbor weekly. 

Miller point, 4 mile south by west of Bane harbor, is a low projec- 
tion from a high range, and is bold-to. } 

Rushoon head is the end of a range of cliffs = mile southwest- 
ward of Miller point, falling from a high, barren tableland sur- 
mounted by a bowlder 330 feet above high water. Low bowlders ex- 
tend a short distance from the head with deep water close-to. 

Rushoon harbor, entered northward of Nipper head, a dark, 
wooded hill 112 feet high, situated $ mile northwestward of Rushoon 
head, is a shallow harbor, affording good sheltered anchorage for 
fishing craft in 23 to 5 fathoms water; it dries 200 yards from the 
fresh-water brook at the head. 

Jigging cove, between Rushoon and Nipper heads, is faced by 
a steep-to shingle beach on which are several houses. 

A rock, that covers 3 feet at high water, with a shoal stretch- 
ing a short distance southwestward, bears 295°, distant 650 yards 
from Rushoon head, and a rock with 6 feet water lies 140 yards from 
Nipper head. 

Anchorage.—Vessels may anchor on a flat outside Rushoon in 
74 fathoms, mud, with the northeastern point of the entrance to the 
brook at the head open of Nipper head, bearing about 5°, to clear the 
rock that covers; or inside that rock, close off the beach at Jigging 
cove, by having the northeastern end of Jerseyman island well shut 
in with Rushoon head, bearing about 144°. 

Rushoon bank, with 9 fathoms water, bears 205°, distant 600 
yards from Rushoon head. 

The coast between Rushoon and East Broad cove 2 miles south- 
ward, slopes steeply from wooded hills, and may be approached to 
within 100 yards. Gull rock, near the entrance of the cove and close 
to the shore, is 10 feet above high water and shows white against the 
dark background. j 

Broad Cove head, a peninsula nearly 1 mile long, } mile wide, 
and 3807 feet high, is separated from the mainland by a narrow, 
marshy isthmus about 60 feet high. 

East Broad cove, on the northern side of the marshy isthmus, 
affords good anchorage in 7 to 12 fathoms, mud and sand, the hold- 
‘ing ground being better nearer the western shore, on which are sev- 
eral houses. There is a shingle beach at the head of the cove. A 


he?) CAPE RACE TO CREW POINT. 


plateau of shoal water extends northward of this cove, falling sud- 
denly to deep water on the southeast; the general depth on this pla- 
teau is 74 fathoms, and the line of 10 fathoms joins Broad Cove head 
and the north point of the entrance to Rushoon. 

A shoal, with 5 fathoms water, bears 123°, distant 3 mile from the 
southeastern extreme of Broad Cove head. 

West Broad cove also affords good anchorage in 10 fathoms 
water, but is entirely open to southerly winds. The holding ground 
is said to be. better than in East Broad cove. 

Green island, 90 feet high, is the northeastern of a group lying 
off Broad Cove head. It is small, covered with grass, and faced by 
dark cliffs. A reef extends 250 yards from the northeastern end 
and 200 yards from the southwestern extreme. A rock, with 6 feet 
water, bears 76°, distant 800 yards from the eastern extreme of Green 
island, being the outer edge of a bank extending from the island. 

Emberlys or Fords island, 14 miles southwestward of Green 
island, is surmounted by a peak, with a small flat top, 330 feet above 
high water, that shows prominently from all directions. The sides 
are steep, in many places formed of dark cliff, except the southwest- 
ern extreme, that is terminated by a grassy mound 70 feet high. 
A white islet, 10 feet high, lies off the northern point, and a sunken 
rock close off the point just south of it. Two small rocks le off the 
eastern shore, and the south side is fringed by rugged rocks that 
cover and extend 200 yards from the shore. 

Puddock bank, with 6 fathoms water at the eastern extreme, 
extends nearly + mile from Mainyard point, the eastern end of Em- 
berlys island. Simonds rock, with 7% fathoms on it, bears 104°, 
distant 4 mile, and Bia abond rock, with 6 fathoms ates over it, 
bears 73°, distant 1,600 yards from the same point. Upper rock, 
with 10 fathoms water, bears 48°, distant 1,150 yards, and Lower 
rock, with 12 fathoms, bears 45°, distant 1 000 yards from Mainyard 
point. 

Fords rock, awash at high water and steep-to, bears 124°, dis- 
tant 270 yards from some black ar ck rocks, off the eastern point 
of Emberlys island. 

The Washball, a rock that covers 4 ‘took at high water and is 
steep-to, bears 278°, distant + mile from the white islet off Emberlys 
island. 

Andrews island, 38 feet high, is the largest of a group of square 
rocks, joined at low water to the southwestern point of Emberlys 
island. Rocks that cover lie a short distance off the northernmost of 
the group. 

Oderin island (Audierne) is separated from the southwestern 
point of Emberlys island and the above group by a channel 200 
yards wide, through which a depth of 9 feet can be carried at low 


CASTLE ISLAND—-THE BREECHES. 1538 


water. A rock that covers lies off the western point of the channel, 
and another nearly 100 yards from a large bowlder at the foot of the 
cliff on the southern side of the passage. No vessel should attempt 
this channel without a pilot. 

Castle island, 36 feet high and covered with grass, lies off the 
western point of this passage, with shoal water between. The beach, 
of shingle, is just south of this point and is backed by a row of 
houses. 

Oderin harbor is entered from the west side of the island and 
nearly divides it. Chimney rocks, of which the shoalest has 1 foot 
on it at low water, lie outside the harbor, nearly in the middle of 
the approach, and there is no passage between them and that part 
of the island to the southward. 

Spurrier point, north of the entrance, is a grassy peninsula 20 feet 
high, from which the harbor extends 1,400 yards eastward, and° 
then, with a sharp bend, 400 yards northeast by north. The Bread- 
box, a small rock that covers, lies close to the west extreme of Spur- 
rier point. The northern shore is cliffy, and the southern slopes 
from wooded hills, the highest of which, 255 feet above high water, 
has a flat summit, with a steep fall to the westward. Two small 
islands are situated 400 yards within Spurrier point, and are nearly 
steep-to on the east and south sides. A rock that covers at high 
water bears 148°, distant 200 yards from the inner of the two islands, 
and is nearly connected to the south shore by rocks above and below 
water. The Episcopal church, with a square tower, stands on the 
north shore, and the Roman Catholic church, with a spire, is situated 
on the dividing point of the bends of the harbor, and a considerable 
settlement is built round the shores. 

The Breeches is a shoal rock, with two heads close together, 
bearing 273°, distant 250 yards from the point on which the Roman 
Catholic church stands, and nearly in the fairway of the approach 
to the inner part of the harbor. The water is shoal between the 
Breeches and the south shore of the harbor, but a safe passage may 
be obtained by keeping the north shore on board. 

Directions.—To enter Oderin harbor, shut in the Episcopal 
church with Spurrier point, bearing about 92°, and pass that point 
at 50 yards, and the same distance southward of the islets. To clear 
Breeches rock and enter the inner part of the harbor, keep the 
northern shore aboard. 

Anchorage.—<Anchor in 7 fathoms water in Ship cove, just east- 
ward of the islets, or inside the rock that covers; or in small craft at 
the head in 3 to 4 fathoms. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Oderin harbor at 
8h. 6m.; neaps rise 5 feet. 


154 CAPE RACE TO CREW POINT. 


Communication.—The steamer from Placentia calls at Oderin 
harbor weekly. 

The southern shore of Oderin island is composed of steep cliffs 
and is foul for 200 yards distant. Lance Cove head, the eastern 
extreme of that shore, is a flat-topped bluff 215 feet high that also © 
overlooks the harbor. Rocks extend 200 yards from both bills of 
this head. 

Lance cove, an open bay north of the head, has shingle beaches 
separated by spurs of red cliff. A rock awash at low water lies 
just off the south point of the cove. 

White rock, with 6 fathoms of water on it, is the shoalest part 
of a bank extending nearly $ mile from Lance Cove head. 

Patrick island, 110 feet high, lies close to the southwestern point 
of Oderin island, and is wedge shaped, with dark cliffs to the south- 
ward and grassy slopes to the northward. 

Crow island, 201 feet high, is wooded and conical, with dark cliffs 
lying close to the western side of Patrick island. Patrick rocks, 13 
feet high, are a ledge of black rocks extending southwestward 350 
yards from Crow island. 

Fox island, with a wooded summit about 100 feet high and red- 
dish cliffs, lies northwestward of Crow island, and is steep-to on the 
northern side. There is no passage for vessels between these islands. 

Jude island, 435 feet high, 24 miles long and 2 miles wide at the 
northern extremity, narrowing irregularly to a point at the southern 
extreme, lies southward of Oderin island and is separated from it by 
a clear channel nearly 4 mile wide, which should be taken when 
passing inshore of the group. 

The northern coast is of bold cliff with some curious red stripes 
near its eastern end, off which is Gull island, a gray rock 48 feet 
high, and bold-to. The eastern shore is also nearly bold-to, consist- 
ing of steep cliffs round Eastern cove, a curve in the coast line filled 
with islets and rocks fronting shingle beaches. 

Cape Jude, a remarkable headland, les about 1,400 yards from the 
southern end of the eastern shore, and is a round-topped hill 417 feet 
high, falling in a nearly perpendicular cliff to the sea. A sharp hill, 
400 feet high, with a bowlder on its top, is situated just southwest- 
ward of it. 

A rock, with 4 feet water over it, bears 167°, distant 750 yards from 
the southern point of the island. 

Hay cove, 1,500 vards wide and 600 yards deep, les northwestward 
of the southern point and affords anchorage, sheltered from easterly 
winds, in 9 to 10 fathoms water, sand bottom. At the bottom of this 
cove is a dark cliffy head with a shingle beach on each side. <A rock 
that covers 2 feet lies off Green point, a low projection north of the 
cove, and a rock with 8 feet water bears 296°, distant 550 yards from 
the same point. 


JUDE HARBOR—PINNACLE ISLAND. hae 


Jude harbor, on the western side of the island, extends north- 
eastward 4 mile, is free from shoals, and is entered northward of 
Round head, a hillock 120 feet high, that makes as an island. 

Rocks that cover extend southwestward 200 yards from Poplars 
head, the northern entrance point, and a rock, with about 7 feet water 
over it, bears 230°, nearly 4 mile from Round head. 

Anchorage, sheltered from winds between south and north, 
through east, may be obtained in 10 to 12 fathoms, sand and mud 
bottom, but a heavy swell rolls in with westerly winds. 

Duck rocks, that cover at high water, are two reefs, bold-to on the 
northwestern side, lying in a line parallel to the shore northward of 
the harbor and distant + mile from it. An islet 8 feet high marks 
the northwestern end of Jude island, and a rock, on which the depth 
is 10 feet, bears 247° from this islet. 

Middle island, the northeastern of a chain of islets lying south- 
eastward of Jude island, is situated in a direction 77°, nearly 2 miles 
from the southern point of that island. It is conical in shape, 80 
feet high, and bold-to on the northeastern and northwestern sides. 

To pass inside this group, the channel between Jude and Oderin 
islands may be used, but no attempt should be made to pass through 
them except by those possessing local knowledge. 

Binghams shoal, with 6 fathoms water, bears 79°, distant ,%; mile 
from Middle island. 

Spicer rock, with 9 fathoms of water over it, bears 87°, distant 
34, miles from Middle island. 

Harbor rocks, about 10 feet high, bear 204°, distant 1,100 yards 
from Middle island; there is deep water a short distance from them, 
_ except on the eastern side, where, distant 200 yards, is a rock that 
covers 2 feet at high water. There is a good channel between Middle 
island and these rocks. 

Badger rock, with 3% fathoms of water over it, bears 128°, distant 
1,700 yards from Harbor rocks, and breaks in bad weather. 

Clearing marks.—Western rocks open southward of Little Pin- 
nacle, bearing 261°, leads eastward; the eastern end of Jude island 
well open northeastward of Middle island, 337°, leads northeastward ; 
and well open southwestward, 341°, westward of Badger rock. 

Old Poe shoal, with 6 fathoms least water, bears 82°, distant 
nearly 14 miles, and Point shoal, with 7 fathoms least water, bears 
‘104°, distant 12 miles from Harbor rocks. Both these are said to 
break in bad weather. 
~ Pinnacle island, about 30 feet high, bears 210°, distant 4 mile 
from Harbor rocks, with a clear passage between them. Little Pin- 
nacle, about 10 feet high, and Long rock, about 50 feet high, lie close 
in a line bearing 206° from Pinnacle island, with no passage between 
for a vessel. 


156 CAPE RACE TO CREW POINT. 


Saddleback islet, castellated, black, and 104 feet high, with grass 
at the summit, is the most conspicuous of the group, and is bold-to. 
The passage betwen it and Long rock is 400 yards wide and clear in 
mid-channel. 

Little Saddleback islet, black and about 20 feet high, bears 
119°, distant 600 yards from Saddleback. There is deep water close 
eastward of it, but a bank, with 44 fathoms least water extends in a 
direction 189° for 600 yards from the islet, and breaks in bad weather. 

Oderin bank is a large shoal with depths on it varying from 54 
to 27 fathoms. The western shoal, with 6 fathoms of water over it, 
bears 137°, distant 43 miles from Saddleback. From this shoal the 
bank trends northeasterly 4745 miles to Eastern rock, a shoal with 54 
fathoms water, the intervening ground being very uneven. 

Big shoal, on which the least water is 7 fathoms, extends south- 
westward 3 miles from Oderin bank, from which it is separated by a 
gully $ mile wide with depths of 20 to 53 fathoms. 

John-on-the-bay bank lies + mile southward of Big shoal, the 
water between deepening to 45 fathoms. It is ? mile in extent be- 
tween the depths of 30 fathoms. Southwest rock, with 8 fathoms 
water, is the shoalest part of this bank. 

Osmond, Dicks, and Joe rocks are three heads of a bank, with 
least water of 12 fathoms, Joe rock, the westernmost, being nearly 
24 miles in a direction 181° from Saddleback. 

Jim Drake ledge, with 7 fathoms of water, bears 201°, distant 
1 mile from Saddleback. 

Western rocks, a group of square dark islets, the highest of which 
is 20 feet high, bear 272°, distant 14 miles from Saddleback. 

Washing-tub islet, 5 feet high, bears 249°, distant 1} miles from 
Western rocks. It is surrounded by reefs, and is nearly connected to 
Western rocks by a line of shoals that break in ordinary weather, 
leaving scarcely room for a boat to pass between. 

South sunker, on which the depth is 2 feet, bears 157°, distant 1 
mile from Western rocks, and there is deep water close southward of 
it. Harry ledge, with 5 fathoms water over it, les in the same 
direction 14 miles from Western rocks. 

Smith shoal, a bank 600 yards long, with depths varying from 
34 to 5 fathoms, bears 190°, distant 1,8, miles from Western rocks. 

Kelpy sunker, with 9 feet water over it, bears 154°, distant 1,6 - 
miles from Washing-tub islet; there is a shoal of 3 fathoms of water » 
eastward nearly 200 yards from it. 

Clearing marks.—Middle island open eastward of Saddleback, 
bearing 24°, leads eastward, and Roche peak of Flat island, open 
eastward of Western rocks, bearing 314°, leads northward of these 
shoals. 


FLOWER SHOAL—-FLAT ISLAND COVE. 157 


Flower shoal, the western of this group, bears 230°, distant 2 
miles from Washing-tub islet, and consists of 2 heads a short distance 
apart; the shoalest, with 9 feet of water over it, breaks only in bad 
weather. 

Green islands are a group lying 24 miles westerly from the 
southern point of Jude island. 

Green island, the largest, is 32 feet high, and sunken rocks extend 
westward, northward, and eastward of it for a distance of nearly 
1,400 yards. 

Flat islands, lying between Jude island and the mainland, and 
separated from the latter by a channel 1 mile wide, are 2 large islands 
and a great number of smaller islands and rocks. 

Yardie island, the eastern of the group, is 130 feet high; a ledge 
extends 250 yards from its northeastern end, and islets and rocks, 
with deep water close southward of them, lie a short distance off its 
southern side. Tinkershare island, small and wooded, lies close west- 
ward of Yardie island. 

Glimshire island, 100 feet high, flat and wooded, is separated 
from the west side of Yardie island by a channel 350 yards wide, 
containing several islets and rocks. A stranger should not take this 
passage. 

Flat island, the largest of the group, is 2 miles long, and nearly 
divided into three parts by coves extending from both shores. The 
eastern part is high and wooded, surmounted by a flat summit 236 
feet high, and terminated to the southward in Roche peak, a remark- 
able sharp-topped hill 203 feet high. Vinegar hill, a sharp cone 150 
feet high, hes between them. The middle part of the island has a 
flat range on the east side, with several wooded tufts, the highest 107 
feet high, and some lower wooded hills to the westward inclosing a 
pond. The western part is composed of a flat hill about 100 feet high, 
a conical mound 82 feet high, and several low wooded hills on the 
northwestern shore terminating in sand cliffs. 

Flat Island cove is on the northeastern side of the island, between 
the east and middle parts. It is 700 yards long and 500 yards wide, 
affording good anchorage in 8 fathoms, mud, with shelter from all 
winds but those from north to east. At the head is a shingle beach, 
about 10 feet above high water, containing a salt-water pond, divid- 
ing Flat Island cove from Flat Island harbor. The water is shoal 
100 yards from the head of the cove, the depth decreasing gradually. 
A ledge extends 300 yards to the eastward from Foots point, north of 
the cove, that should be given a good berth when turning into the 
cove. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Flat Island cove at 
Sh. 27m.; springs rise 64 feet, neaps 5 feet. 


158 CAPE RACE TO CREW POINT. 


Hay cove, near the center of the island between the middle and 
western parts, is filled with sunken rocks nearly to the line of the 
pomts. It is much frequented by fishing craft in the caplin season, 
when that bait is always plentiful. The bottom of the north shore 
of this island is composed of bowlders, that extend fully 200 yards 
from the shingle beaches that fringe it. Frenchman rock lies close off 
the north point, and covers at high tide. 

Rocks.—A rock with 10 feet of water over it, bears 224°, distant 
500 yards from the northwestern end of Flat island. 

Hiscock rocks, a group of low islets and sunken rocks, he close off 
the southern end of Flat island. 

Davis island is 1 mile long and has near its eastern end Osmond 
hill, a sharp peak 114 feet high. 

Duck rock, 5 feet high, is the end of a ledge of rocks and shoals 
stretching off the western point of Davis island; and Duck Rock 
sunker, with 2 feet of water over it, bears 2°, distant 500 yards from 
Dueck rock. 

Flat Island harbor, between Flat and Davis islands, is ap- 
proached from both sides in small craft, but in large vessels from the 
eastern side only. The channels are both very narrow and are ob- 
structed by numerous rocks, and neither of them should be taken 
without local knowledge. The harbor is 4 mile across and affords 
good anchorage in 7 to 9 fathoms, mud bottom; the water shoals 
suddenly close to the beach at the héad. There is a large settlement 
around this harbor. 

Communication.—The steamer from Placentia calls at Flat Is- 
land harbor weekly. 

Copper island, the southern island of this group, is a wooded and 
conspicuous cone, 135 feet high. Low islets extend southward 4 mile 
from it, ending in Copper Island rock, 6 feet high. The northwestern 
side of the island is foul for the distance of 4 mile. 

Paddle rocks are two shoals, with 3 fathoms of water over them, 
lying 800 yards apart on a line bearing 224°, the eastern bearing 233°, 
distant 14 miles from Copper island. 

Pinnacle rock, with 4 feet of water over it, bears 219°, distant 
2 miles from Copper island, in the middle of the apparent fairway 
between the mainland and Flat islands, and Upper Pinnacle, with 
10 feet water over it, bears 219°, distant 750 yards from the Pinnacle. 

Red Harbor head, southwestward 24 miles from Broad Cove 
head, is a steep cliff with a hole through the base and a small ledge of 
rocks just inside. 

Red harbor extends northward on the western side of Red Harbor 
head for 14 miles, and is 800 yards broad. Rocks that cover lie close 
to both shores, but the remainder of the harbor is clear. A small islet 
is nearly joined to the western shore, and northward of this are a few 


STANLEY ROCKS—JOHN THE BAY HEAD. 159 


houses. Two considerable streams flow into this harbor; the deposit 
from the western stream has formed a shoal extending nearly 300 
yards from the mouth. 

Anchorage.—Anchor in 6 to 7 fathoms of water, sand bottom, off 
the houses, sheltered from all but southerly and southeasterly winds, 
which send in a heavy swell. 

Stanley rocks, which cover 1 foot at high water, bear 199°, dis- 
tant 13 miles from Red Harbor head. The sea nearly always breaks 
on them, and they are bold-to within a short distance. 

Big shoal, with 4 fathoms of water over it, bears 231°, distant 
1,850 yards from Stanley rocks. 

Black rock, small, and awash at high water, with a shoal extend- 
ing 200 yards southwestward of it, bears 233°, distant 14 miles from 
Stanley rocks. 

Woody island, bearing 219°, distant 1 mile from Black rock and 

3 mile from Dock point, the southern entrance point of John the bay, 
is wooded, and 25 feet high. 

John the Bay harbor, 5 miles southagestenund of Red Harbor 
head, is 600 yards across and contains several rocks; it is a shallow 
eee where fishing craft anchor, in 3 fathoms of water, sheltered 
from westerly winds. 

John the bay, an open cove, 4 mile southward of the harbor, 
and locally known as the Dock, is 1,100 yards wide. It affords good 
anchorage in 10 fathoms of water, with winds from south-southeast, 
through west, to north. The shores are rugged and foul; at the head 
is a sand cliff faced by a shingle beach, the eastern side of a marshy 
isthmus about 50 feet high, that connects to the mainland the pen- 
insula, forming Mortier bay. 

John the Bay islands, southeastward 2 miles from Dock point, 
lie close off the eastern point of the peninsula, and are two gray islets 
and some low rocks, the highest 44 feet high. Rocks that cover lie 
northward nearly 200 yards from these islands, and a shoal, with 12 
feet of water over it, lies 100 yards southward. 

John the Bay head, just southwestward of the islands, rises to 
a round hill 331 feet high, which shows conspicuously from the line 
of the coast. Deadman cove, southwestward of this head, is open and 
rocky. 

There are many shoals off the coast between John the bay and the 
entrance to Mortier bay. Pig ledge, the northeastern, with 34 fathoms 
of water over it, bears 84°, distant 1,2, miles from John the Bay 
islands. Stickland rock, with 34 fathoms of water over it, bears 110°, 
distant 14 miles from Rock harbor point. Sams ledge, with 15 feet 
of water over it, bears 98°, distant 1 mile, and Point shoal, with 9 
feet of water over it, bears 158°, distant nearly a mile, from the same 
point. 


160 CAPE RACE TO CREW POINT. 


Rock harbor has numerous rocks in it and is only available for 
fishing craft; a considerable settlement surrounds the harbor, and the 
church, a white building, stands near its head. 

The coast from Rock harbor to the entrance of Mortier bay, nearly 
2 miles southwestward, is dark cliff backed by wooded hills and is 
steep-to. The turning point shows as an overhanging cliff, and shoals 
lie nearly 4 mile off it. 

Mortier bay is entered through a channel 14 miles long and 4 
mile wide, at the northern end of which the bay opens to nearly 2 
miles across, with deep water and no anchorage except in the harbors 
and coves off it. 

Saul islands are close off the eastern entrance point. The south- 
ern, 70 feet high, bare and gray, is conspicuous against the dark back- 
ground on northerly bearings; shoal water extends a short distance 
southward from the western island. 

Skiff-sail rock, with 6 feet of water on it, bears 93°, distant 
1,000 yards, and Saul Island rock, also with 6 feet of water over it, 
bears 124°, distant 400 yards from the southern Saul island. 

Thomas rock, on which the depth is 44 fathoms, bears 124°, 
distant 1 mile from the southern Saul island. 

Big head, the inner entrance point into Mortier bay on the 
western side, is 437 feet high, and rises in steep cliffs from the chan- 
nel and eastward, but in a gradual slope northward and westward. 

Goolds cove, a slight indention with a sandy beach, around 
which are a few houses, lies just within the entrance on the eastern 
side. 

Spanish Room harbor, where there is a settlement, is at the 
northeastern corner of the bay. 

Rocks he off the western side of the entrance; they are steep-to, and 
the highest is 5 feet high. The eastern shore is foul for 200 yards 
off the cove immediately within the entrance; and at 800 yards 
within a spit, with 13 feet water on it, extends 400 yards from the 
western shore. 

Anchorage.—Anchor in 5? fathoms of water, mud bottom, before 
reaching the spit, where there is swinging room 800 yards long and 
600 yards broad. 

Water.—<A considerable stream, spanned by a bridge, flows into 
the eastern side of the harbor. 

Cashel cove, just northwestward of the peninsula forming Span- 
ish room, affords anchorage in 6 to 10 fathoms of water, mud bottom, 
sheltered from all but southerly to westerly winds. 

Cashel lookout, a hill 615 feet high, and surmounted by a bowlder, 
lies 14 miles inland northward of Cashel cove; it is conspicuous and 
is visible from Placentia bay. 


LITTLE BAY—DURICLE COVE. 161 


West arm.—The western part of Mortier bay narrows to an arm 
900 yards broad, that decreases in breadth gradually to a bar at 14 
miles from its entrance. 

Jonas rock, which covers 3 feet, les 200 yards from the northern 
entrance point, and is joined to it at low water; rocks extend 100 
yards from the southern shore. From the bar, which is passable by 
boats at high water, a narrow saltwater arm extends southwestward 
54 miles, and nearly joins the head of Burin inlet; there is a settle- 
ment named Marytown on the banks. 

Anchorage.—Anchor in this arm in 6 to 9 fathoms of water, 
over mud bottom. 

Communication.—The steamer from Placentia calls at Mary- 
town weekly. 

The Tolt, a conspicuous conical hill 701 feet high, lies between 
the long arm of Marytown and Little bay. 

Little bay, entered northward of thé slopes of Big head, extends 
southward with a shght bend 1,900 yards, and then divides into two 
arms; the southeastern deep inside, but blocked by islets and shoal 
water, the southwestern shallow from the mouth. 

The bay is barred just within a shingle spit on the eastern shore, 
but vessels drawing 13 feet of water can cross the bar at high water 
springs by keeping the eastern shore close aboard, and may careen in 
safety in the inner basin. 

Seal rock, which covers 3 feet at high water, bears 304° distant 
500 yards from the eastern entrance head of Little bay, to which a 
rock and shoal water nearly connect it. A shoal extends in a direc- 
tion 310° for 100 yards from Seal rock. 

Anchor in 8 fathoms water, mud bottom, immediately within the 
western entrance point, where the bay is 350 yards wide. 

Beaubois cove, southwestward of Mortier bay entrance, is 450 
yards long, 200 yards wide, and affords good sheltered anchorage for 
‘a few fishing craft in 2 fathoms of water. Islets le in the entrance. 
The church, a white wooden building, stands on a small hill just 
northward of the harbor. 'To enter this cove keep the eastern shore 
close aboard. 

Communication.—The steamer from Placentia calls at Beaubois 
cove weekly. 

Blow-me-down sunker, bearing 42°, distant 600 yards from 
Blow-me-down, has 15 feet of water over it and is steep-to. 

Clearing mark.—The extreme of Big head in line with the west- 
ern end of the western Saul island, bearing 344°, leads eastward of 
this rock. 

Duricle cove, lies south-southwestward, distant 1,400 yards, and 
Tides cove southward, distant 1 mile from Blow-me-down. Both 


76846—09——_11 


162 CAPE RACE TO CREW POINT. 


these coves are open, but nevertheless afford anchorage with offshore 
winds in 7 to 18 fathoms water. There are some houses on these 
shores. 

Croney island, south-southeastward, distant 700 yards from 
Tides cove point and close to the mainland, is a remarkable conical 
island 170 feet high, wooded, at the summit, with steep cliffs to the 
eastward, and bold-to. 

Croney rock, with 5 fathoms of water over it, bears 152°, distant 
250 yards from Croney island. The following-named rocks and 
shoals lie within 1,200 yards easterly from Croney island: Croney 
shoal, 6 to 8 fathoms; Laurence rock, 7 fathoms; Little Green point 
shoal, 8 fathoms; and Green point shoal, 9 fathoms. 

Black Head rock bears 158°, distant 1,200 yards from Croney 
island, and has 16 feet of water over it. 

Little Mortier bay, situated southivestward 14 miles from Croney 
island, divides into two arms at its head; Mortier creek, the western, 
is only suitable for fishing craft. 

Fox cove, the eastern arm, affords good anchorage in 10 fathoms, 
though the space is confined; it has a settlement on its eastern shore. 

Breakheart rock, bearing 179°, distant 250 yards from the west- 
ern point of Cubkeald cove, has 14 feet of water over it. 

Western rock, with 3 feet of water over it, bears 349°, distant 
350 yards from Western island, on the western side of the bay, and 
there is a rock, with 3 fathoms of water over it, between Western 
rock and the shore; there are no other shoals. In entering the bay 
keep in mid-channel. 

Mortier rock, with 3 fathoms of water over it, is the shoalest 
part of Mortier bank, which is 8 miles long, northeastward and 
southwestward, and 4 mile broad within the depth of 20 fathoms; 
the rock bears 77°, distant 64 miles from Burin lighthouse, and there 
are depths of 6 to 11 fathoms of water close around it. 

Tron island, situated in a direction 212° at a distance of 1-£; miles 
from Western head of Little Mortier bay, is about 300 yar ds ‘acho 
and 160 feet high. 

Light.—A square white pyramidal tower, 18 feet high, situated 
on Iron island at a height of 118 feet above the sea level, exhibits 
a fixed red hight, which should be visible from a distance of 8 miles 
in clear weather. A flat-roofed, keeper’s dwelling, attached to the 
northern side of the light-tower, is also painted white. 

Brandy rocks, on which the sea always breaks, lie off the land 
north-northeastward of Iron island, leaving a passage 800 yards 
wide between them and the island. 


Leading mark.—The northern end of Simmons island, the south- © 


ern entrance point of Little Burin harbor, just open of Pardy point, 


BURIN ISLAND—GREAT BURIN HARBOR. 1638 


the northern end of Pardy island, and seen between it and Charlie 
island, bearing 260°, leads 200 yards southward of these rocks. 

Rocks.—Galloper rock, with 10 feet of water over it, bears 98°, 
distant 1,100 yards; Whitehorse rock, on which the depth is 44 fath- 
oms, bears 124°, 1,150 yards; Gregory rock, with a depth of 6 feet, 
bears 215°, 800 yards, and Dutch rock, with 3 fathoms of water over 
it, bears 200°, 1,400 yards from Iron island. 

Leading marks.—Pardy point just open northward of Iron 
island, bearing 270°, leads northward of Galloper and Whitehorse 
rocks; and Bras point, just open southwestward of Iron island, bear- 
ing 307°. leads southwestward of the same rocks. 

Burin harbors are several small coves and a long inlet, afford- 
ing excellent shelter for vessels of all sizes. 

Burin island, which, with Pardy island, forms the seaboard and 
protects the small coves, is 274, miles long northward and southward; 
the southeastern end is Dodding head, a remarkable bluff, which rises 
to a conical hill, 400 feet high. Pardy island, separated from Burin 
island by the narrow and shallow Bull gut, continues northward for 
1,300 yards. 

Light.—A cylindrical lighthouse, 25 feet high, surmounting a 
square dwelling, painted white with a red roof, on the summit of Dod- 
ding head, exhibits, at 430 feet above high water, a white revolving 
light, which attains its greatest briliancy every minute, and should 
be seen from a distance of 24 miles in clear weather. Owing to the 
great height of this light, it 1s often obscured by fog when the coast 
is clear. 

Signals.—This hght station is supplied with the International 
code of signals. 

Dodding rock, awash at low water, bears 95° from the light- 
house, distant nearly 600 yards from the shore. 

Cockle rock, with 3 fathoms of water over it, bears 188°, distant 
470 yards from Cat island, a small island nearly joined to the south- 
ern end of Dodding head. The southwestern end of Woody island, 
just open westward of Shalloway head, bearing 324°, leads southwest- 
ward of the rock. 

Great Burin harbor, on the southwestern side of Burin island, 
and between that island and Shalloway island, has several rocks near 
its head, and is only suitable for small vessels. Shoal water extends 
westward more than 200 yards from Shalloway head, the western end 
of Shalloway island, and breaks in bad weather; therefore when 
rounding the head give it a good berth. 

Mine, Oven, and Hooper rocks, lie off the western side of 
Burin island; to clear them, when using Burin passage, between Burin 
island and the mainland, keep the western side of the passage aboard. 


164 CAPE RACE TO CREW POINT. 


Port au bras, a narrow arm affording good shelter for small 
vessels, extends in a northerly direction about 1,300 yards on the 
western side of Bras point, which hes northward nearly 4 mile from 
Pardy point. 

Little Burin harbor entrance is + mile in a westerly direction 
from Charlie island, situated close to the northern part of Pardy 
island. The harbor affords anchorage in 8 to 9 fathoms water, in 
a space 600 yards long and 400 yards broad, but the entrance, between 
Jersey and Simmons island, is only 100 yards wide, narrowed by a 
rock, with 8 feet water over it, lying about 100 yards southward of 
Jersey. To enter, keep Simmons island on the southern side of the 
entrance, close aboard. 

Communication.—Steamers from Placentia and St. Johns call 
at Little Burin harbor weekly during summer and autumn. 

Coal.—A small supply of coal can generally be obtained at Burin. 

Ice.—Burin harbors freeze occasionally during severe winters 
from the middle of February to early in March, but the ice seldom 
interferes with the anchorage; eastern ice is occasionally drifted onto 
the shore. 

Ship cove, southward of Little Burin harbor, is 1,200 yards long, 
with a width of 600 yards at the entrance, diminishing gradually to 
its head. A rock, with 11 feet water over it, les northeasterly 50 
yards from Troak point, and a shoal, on which the depth is 3 feet, the 
same bearing and distance from Jeans point, the next southward of 
Troak point. 

Anchorage.—There is anchorage in 11 to 13 fathoms water, 
sand or mud bottom, with good shelter; in a strong breeze a large 
vessel should moor. 

Poor rock, with 12 feet water over it, is at the end of the ledge 
extending southwestward 350 yards from Poor island, at the entrance 
to Burin inlet, and is steep-to on its western side. 

Woody island, 100 feet high, hes 700 yards northwestward from 
Poor island; there is a clear passage on each side of this island. 

Burin inlet extends in a northerly direction 5 miles from Woody 
island; it is + mile wide for 2 miles, expanding to 14 miles at 3 miles 
irom the entrance. To enter, pass westward of Woody island, keep 
the western shore aboard to avoid some rocks close to the eastern point 
just within the entrance, and round Spoon point, ? mile from the 
entrance on the western shore, at the distance of 200 yards into Spoon 
cove to clear Stag rock, the end of a ledge extending 500 yards off the 
eastern shore. When the entrance points close, bearing 177°, keep in 
mid-channel to the anchorages. 

Anchorages.—Anchor off Back cove, 2 miles within the en- 
trance, in 15 fathoms of water, southward of Sugarloaf island, a 


LITTLE BURIN ISLAND—SCULPIN SHOAL. 165 


cone 145 feet high, close to the eastern shore; or northwestward of 
Sugarloaf island in 7 to 9 fathoms of water, mud bottom. North- 
ward of this the harbor is narrowed by a shallow spit extending from 
the eastern shore, and should not be entered. 

Water.—Big Salmonier, a considerable stream, flows into the 
harbor on the western shore northwestward of Sugarloaf island. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, at Burin harbors, at 
8h. 45m.; springs rise 64 feet, neaps 44 feet. 

Little Burin island, 1,4, miles west-southwestward of Cat island 
and separated from the mainland by a deep passage 450 vards wide, 
is 200 feet high and bold-to on all sides. 

Emberly rock, bears 138°, distant 1,350 yards from the eastern 
end of Little Burin island, and has 4 fathoms of water over it. 

Corbin island, situated southwesterly, nearly 1,400 yards from 
Little Burin island, and separated from the mainland by a deep 
channel } mile wide, is 250 feet high and steep-to. 

Corbin harbor, southwestward a little more than 1 mile from 
Corbin island, is a narrow inlet suitable for small vessels, entered 
between Long point on the north and Miller head on the south. 

Old Harry rock, awash at low water, bears 100°, distant 4+ mile 
from Long point. 

Miller rock, with 2} fathoms water over it, bears 90°, distant 
about 350 yards from Miller head, and is near the end of shoal water 
extending } mile from the head. 

Leading mark.—Goat island, just open southwestward of Long 
point, bearing 302°, leads between Old Harry and Miller rocks to the 
mouth of the harbor. 

Corbin head, southward 1,200 yards from Miller head is a wedge- 
shaped cliff-faced head, 180 feet high and bold-to. 

A rock, with 10 feet of water over it, bears 204°, distant + mile 
from Corbin head, and in the middle of the entrance to Vanse au 
Diable, a small cove southwestward of that head. 

Bass rock, with 34 fathoms of water over it, bears 225°, distant 
700 yards from Bass point, a hummock with low rocks close to the 
base. 

Sauker rock, with 34 fathoms of water over it, bearing 132°, 
distant 400 yards from Sauker head, is the outer of three rocks lying 
off the head. The coast between Bass point and Sauker head is foul, 
and should not be approached within } mile. 

Sculpin shoal, with 33 fathoms of water over it, bears 96°, 
distant 900 yards from Sculpin point, eastward of Little St. Law- 
rence harbor entrance, close off which is a small rock. 

Little St. Lawrence harbor, southwestward 5 miles from Corbin 
head, extends northwestward 2,8, miles, with a breadth of 800 yards. 


166 CAPE RACE TO CREW POINT. 


Harbor shoal les southward 150 yards from the peninsula at 
the inner end of the harbor, 14 miles inside of the entrance. 

Anchorage.—Large vessels anchor temporarily in 11 to 15 
fathoms of water, but a heavy sea rolls in with southerly winds. 

Small vessels lhe in safety northward of the peninsula at the head 
of the harbor in 23 to 4 fathoms of water, mud bottom; in proceeding 
to this anchorage keep the western shore close aboard to avoid Harbor 
shoal. 

Water.—A cascade falls into the eastern side of the harbor, just 
within the peninsula. 

Middle head, separating the entrances of Little and Great St. 
Lawrence harbors, slopes from Blow-me-down, a conspicuous hill, 
420 feet high, on the western shore of Little St. Lawrence harbor at 
1,700 yards to the northward; the shore is bluff, with deep water 
close-to. 

Shoals.—Point rock, with 4 fathoms of water over it, bears 211°, 
distant 450 yards; Butler rock, with 5 fathoms, bears 152°, 450 yards; 
and Garden bank, with 9 fathoms, bears 124°, 1,200 yards from 
Middle head. | 

Great St. Lawrence harbor is 21 miles long, and 4 mile wide, 
for 14 miles, when it narrows to 600 yards between Blue Beach point 
on the western and Herring cove on the eastern shore. <A beach of 
shingle stretches off the western shore at 800 yards from the head. 
There is a large settlement around the harbor. 

Anchorages.—<Anchor in 10 to 20 fathoms of water at the en- 
trance, or in 12 fathoms off Herring cove; small vessels shelter north- 
ward of the shingle beach in 2} fathoms. 

The anchorage off Herring cove is not recommended during south- 
westerly winds, as heavy squalls are then experienced, and southerly 
gales send a heavy sea into the outer parts of the harbor. 

Ice.—Great St. Lawrence harbor seldom freezes so that anchorage 
can not be obtained, but eastern ice is occasionally drifted into it. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Great St. Lawrence 
harbor at 8h. 30m.; springs rise 7 feet, neaps 4 feet. 

Water.—A<A stream flows into the eastern side of the harbor nearly 
opposite the shingle beach. 

Communication.—Steamers from St. Johns and Placentia call 
at Great St. Lawrence harbor weekly during summer and autumn. 

Chapeau rouge, a remarkable conical hill 748 feet high, situated 
westward 900 yards from Cape Chapeau rouge, the western entrance 
point of Great St. Lawrence harbor, is generally sighted by vessels 
bound to the south and east coasts from the westward. 

Rosey rock, with 12 feet of water over it, is situated 150 yards 
offshore, and bears 211°, distant 1,400 yards from Cape Chapeau 
rouge. | 


LITTLE LAUN HARBOR—LAUN ISLANDS. 167 


Little Laun harbor, 14 miles long in a north-northeasterly direc- 
tion and 2 mile wide, is situated northward 2 miles from Laun head; 
a shingle beach at its head nearly separates it from a salt-water pond. 

Anchorage.—There is anchorage with offshore winds in 9 to il 
fathoms of water, rocky bottom. 

Duck and Tiller coves, two open bights, lie between Little and 
and Great Laun harbors. 

Great Laun harbor extends northward for 14 miles with a 
breadth of 800 yards; its shores are bold-to, and the depth of water 
decreases gradually to 5 fathoms at 1 mile from the entrance, and 
thence gradually to the head; there is a settlement, with a church 
on the eastern side. Murphy rock, with 5 feet of water on it, lies 
200 yards off the eastern shore at 600 yards from the head. There 
is good trout fishing in the vicinity of this harbor. 

Anchorage.—There is well-sheltered anchorage in 84 fathoms 
water off the eastern shore. 

Vestal rock, with 6 feet of water over it, bears 191°, distant 
600 yards from East head, the eastern entrance point of Great Laun 
harbor; Black hill, 520 feet high and conspicuous, at the head of the 
harbor, just open westward of Laun point, on the eastern side of the 
harbor, bearing 11°, leads westward of this rock into the harbor. 

Ice.—Great Laun harbor seldom freezes to the extent of inter- 
fering with anchorage. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Great Laun harbor 
at 8h. 15m.; springs rise 7 feet, neaps 4 feet. 

Communication.—The steamer from Placentia calls at Great 
Laun harbor weekly during summer and autumn. 

Ragged head lies southwestward 1 mile from Great Laun harbor 
and is the dividing point between it and Lansey Bank cove. <A point 
of low rocks runs southeastward from it. 

Ragged rock, with 6 feet of water over it, lies east-southeastward 
600 yards from Ragged head. 

Clearing mark.—-Webber point, a low projection on the western 
shore of Great Laun harbor, open eastward of Blow-me-down point, 
the next southward, bearing 11°, leads eastward of Ragged rock. 

Lansey Bank cove is an open bight affording no shelter. 

Columbier island, 217 feet high, with a small islet close south- 
westward of it, lies south southwestward 1,200 yards from Ragged 
head, and there is a clear channel 1,100 yards wide between; shoals 
lie 200 yards southward of the islands. 

Laun islands.—Middle island, 163 feet high, bears 229°, ¢tlistant 
24 miles from Columbier island. Offer island, 102 feet high, bears 
201°, distant + mile from Middle island. 

A rock that uncovers 4 feet at low water bears 284°, distant 4 mile 
from the southern point of Middle island. 


168 CAPE RACE TO CREW POINT. 


Southeast rock, awash at low water, bears 101°, distant 600 
yards from the northeastern point of Offer island, and Southwest 
rock, with 10 feet of water on it, bears 214°, distant 1,200 yards from 
the southwestern point of same island. 

The coast from Sandy Cove head, northward of Laun islands, to 
Lamalin, forms many deep coves, but they are all open. 

Taylor bay, westward 33 miles from Laun islands, is the deepest 
of these; it is an open bight, and affords anchorage in 8 fathoms of 
water, with offshore winds. Taylor Bay rock, with 7 feet of water 
over it, bears 276°, distant 300 yards from Taylor Bay point, its east- 
ern entrance point, and several shoals, with depths of from 54 to 
10 fathoms, le southward and southeastward within 2 miles from 
Taylor Bay point. 

Lamalin bay, which is filled with islets and shoals, is divided 
from Taylor bay by point aux Gauls, a low and narrow prom- 
entory, 200 yards southeastward of which is Point rock,3 feet high. 
Barred island, 19 feet high, lies northwestward about ? mile from 
Point rock; bearing 189°, distant 600 yards from the island, is John 
Thomas rock, 2 feet high, and Rogers rocks extend westward of 
the island for about 400 yards. 

Light.—An octagonal tower, 36 feet high, with the sides painted 
red and white alternately, on Bluff head, the southeastern point of 
Allan island, exhibits, at 64 feet above high water, a fixed white light, 
which should be seen seaward over an arc of 170° from a distance 
of 9 miles in clear weather. 

Rocks.—Shag rock, 18 feet high, bears 203°, distant 4+ mile 
from Point rock; shoal water extends northward 400 yards from it. 
Rocks and shoals lie from Shag rock as follows: East Sunker, awash 
at low water, bears 47°, distant 400 yards; Saint rock, with 53 
fathoms least water over it, bears 214°, 700 yards; Frank rock, 
with 13 feet of water over it, bears 231°, 1,250 yards; John Walsh 
shoal, with 54 fathoms of water over it, bears 253°, 1,900 yards; and 
Northwest sunker, with less than 6 feet of water over it, bears 264°, 
distant 800 yards. 

Clearing mark, the middle elevation of Morgan island, named 
the “ Bread box,” open southwestward of Allan island, bearing 294°, 
leads southwestward of the above rocks. 

Leading marks.—Lamalin Bay entrance is between Rogers rocks, 
on the east, and Whalesback, which dries 5 feet, and the shoals 
extending 400 yards from Big Salmonier rock, 10 feet high, on 
the west; Strand rock, 1 foot high, lies in the middle of Lamalin 
bay. The highest of Berry hills, in line with Strand rock, bearing 
16°, leads from sea through the fairway into the bay. The highest 
of Berry hills open westward of Barred island, bearing 40°, leads 
in midchannel between Frank rock and John Walsh shoal; and Tay- 


BLUFF HEAD SHOAL—LAMALIN SHAG ROCK. 169 


lor Bay point in line with Point rock, bearing 63°, leads northward 
of the shoals lying westward of Shag rock. In entering the bay by 
the channel between Frank rock and John Walsh shoal, when the 
latter mark is on, keep northwestward and bring the highest of 
Berry hills in line with Strand rock, the leading mark for the 
entrance. 

Bluff Head shoal, with 44 fathoms least water over it, hes with 
Bluff Head lighthouse bearing 336°, distant # mile. 

Page rock, with 42 fathoms least water over it, lies with Bluff 
Head lighthouse bearing 24°, distant 1,300 yards. 

Lamalin harbor, situated northward of Allan island, is only 
suitable for fishing craft during summer; there is a considerable 
settlement on the northern part of the island. 

Small vessels anchor in Lamalin harbor, northeastward of Allan 
island, but no attempt should be made to enter or leave the harbor 
without a pilot; vessels must be prepared to leave should the wind 
freshen from the southward. 

Lamalin road, between Allan island on the east and Morgan 
island on the west, affords anchorage in 44 fathoms of water, but it 
should be used for temporary shelter only, as the swell always rolls in. 

Besides a shoal, with 7 feet least water over it, other shoals with 
from 13 to 30 feet of water, lie near the middle of the entrance; to 
clear them keep either shore aboard. 

The western barn, on the northern shore of Lamalin road, open 
eastward of Morgan island, bearing 341°, leads eastward of these 
shoals. 

Lamalin Shag rock, an islet 20 feet high, with a rock close off 
its western side, les off the southern end of Morgan island, and there 
is a rock with 9 feet of water over it southwestward 200 yards from 
the rock. 

Ice.—Lamalin harbor is occasionally closed by field ice to the 
thickness of 6 inches for ten days at a time, but at intervals of from 
five to ten years it is frozen over; vessels arrive about June and leave 
in November. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Lamalin harbor at 
Sh. 25m.; springs rise 74 feet, neaps 54 feet; neaps range 44 feet. 

Communication.—Steamers from St. Johns and Placentia call 
at Lamalin bay weekly during summer and autumn. 

The coast from Lamalin to Crew point, northwestward 8 miles, 
is low and fronted by sandy beaches, rising to a moderate height in 
long sloping hills at some distance inland. 

Piercey hill, wooded, about 100 feet high, near the shore at 2 miles 
westward of Lamalin road, has a double summit, close to which are 
some houses. Flagstaff point is a small conical hillock 26 feet high. 
There are groups of white houses at High beach. 


170 CAPE RACE TO CREW POINT. 


Lamalin ledges extend along the whole of this coast at a dis- 
tance of 3 miles and less from it, and in bad weather the sea breaks 
on all of them. 

No vessel should venture between these shoals without a local pilot, 
and very few of the fishermen are trustworthy, as they have a knowl- 
edge only of the fishing banks frequented by them. 

Offer rock, with 52 fathoms water over it, lies with Bluff head 
lighthouse bearing 355°, distant 24 miles. 

Western ground, a shoal of 4} fathoms, bears 228°, distant 13 
miles from Lamalin Shag rock. 

Clearing marks.—Chapeau rouge, well open southward of 
Lamalin Shag rock, bearing 78°, leads southward of the ledges, and 
the extreme of the land about Dantzic coves well open to the west- 
ward of Crew point, bearing about 3°, leads westward of them. 

These marks clear all the shoals excepting Western ground and 
Offer rock. Offer island open southward of Shag rock (point aux 
Gauls), bearing 75°, leads southward of Western ground, and about 
14 miles northward of Offer rock. 

At night this coast should not be approached to a depth less than 
40 fathoms. 

Bank.—At about 9 miles southward of Lamalin bay is a bank, 
about 5 miles long, eastward and westward, and 38} miles broad, 
within the 40-fathom contour line, which has depths of from 29 
fathoms on its southern edge to 36 fathoms at its northern end, over 
stony bottom. y 


— 


CHAPTER TV: 


NEWFOUNDLAND, SOUTH COAST—ST. PIERRE AND 
MIQUELON ISLANDS. 


The islands of St. Pierre and Miquelon and five islets, lying off 
the coast of Newfoundland, at the entrance of Fortune bay, comprise 
a colony under the dominion of France. They are rugged masses 
of rock, with a thin coating of soil and little vegetation. The colony 
contained 6,482 inhabitants in 1902; since then about 1,000 have emi- 
grated to Canada and the United States. 

St. Pierre island, situated southwesterly 10 miles from Crew 
point, is about 44 miles in length, 3 miles in width, barren in appear- 
ance, irregular in outline, and rises to many peaks, the highest of 
which is 671 feet high; it is thus easily distinguished from Langlade 
or Little Miquelon, the outline of which is nearly horizontal. St. 
Pierre island contains several lakes; Savoyard, the largest, is about 
% mile in length. Galantry head, a conspicuous conical hill at the 
southeastern end of the island, is joined by low land to the main part 
of the island. 

St. Pierre harbor is on the eastern side of the island and between it 
and Chien island. 

Light.—A white semicylindrical lighthouse 38 feet high, with a 
square building adjoining it, on Galantry head, exhibits, at 210 feet 
above high water, an intermittent light showing thus: White flash, 
5 seconds; eclipse, 15 seconds; white flash, 5 seconds; eclipse, 15 sec- 
onds; red flash, 5 seconds; eclipse, 15 seconds; which should be seen 
from a distance of 18 miles in clear weather. The light is obscured 
on southeasterly bearings by the high land of St. Pierre. 

Fog signal.—A steam fog siren, placed, 40 feet above high water, 
in a semicylindrical tower on the coast 250 yards southeasterly from 
the lighthouse, sounds a blast every minute, thus: Blast, 6 seconds; 
interval, 54 seconds, during thick or foggy weather and in snow 
storms. 

If the siren is out of order, a gun at the lighthouse is fired once 
every half hour. 

Signal station—Ice report.—There is a signal and telegraph 
station on Galantry head, and it is specially supplied with informa- 


(ela®) 


172 ST. PIERRE AND MIQUELON ISLANDS. 


tion as to the weather, wind, and the movement and condition of the 
ice in the gulf and river St. Lawrence, during April and May, for 
the guidance of any vessel asking for it. 

Blanche point, nearly 1 mile southwestward of Galantry head, 
is the rocky termination of Little Harbor head, a peninsula which rises 
conically to a height of 69 feet; on the point is a conspicuous square 
rock. 

Tournioure shoal is a patch extending northeastward and 
southwestward 300 yards, with a width of 100 vards; the least water 
on the shoal is 2 fathoms, situated near its middle and bearing 228°, 
1,200 yards from Blanche point. 

Bonniere shoal, with 4 fathoms of water over it, bears 215°, 
distant 14 miles from Blanche point. 

Ravenel bay, about a mile northwestward of Blanche point, is 
the landing place of some telegraph cables. Its eastern shore is foul, 
but near its western shore there is a fine, clear, sandy bottom, with 44 
fathoms of water and good shelter from offshore winds. 

Shoals.—Two shoals, each with 3 fathoms of water over it, lie in 
the entrance of Ravenel bay; the outer, from which Diamant point, 
the western entrance point of the bay, bears 263°, distant 1,500 yards, 
being about + mile from the shore. 

Marne shoal, a patch with 16 feet of water over it, bears 181°, 
distant 1,4; miles from Diamant point. i 

Clearing mark.—Galantry Head lighthouse, open southward of 
Blanche point, bearing 49°, leads southeastward of Marne shoal. 

Savoyard point, the southwestern end of the island, is a pro- 
longation of the fall of the high land. Savoyard shoal, with 3 feet of 
water over it, bears 220°, distant 350 yards from this point, and- 
between it and Diamant point are several shoals, the outer of which, 
Belier shoal, with 6 feet of water over it, bears 282°, distant 1,400 
yards from Diamant point, and is 800 yards offshore. 

Henry point, the northern end of the island, is a low peninsula 
under high land. A shoal, with 12 feet of water over it, lies close to 
the eastern end of the low-water line, and a bank, on which the depth 
is 44 fathoms, bears 63°, distant 350 yards from the point. 

Great Colombier island, 492 feet high, is bold, dark, and 
steep, and lies off Henry point, with Henry channel between. <A shoal, 
on which the depth is 2? fathoms, les close to the western point of 
Great Colombier. Little Colombier islet lies northeastward, nearly 
200 yards from Great Colombier. 

Little shoal lies with the western point of Great Colombier 
island bearing 202°, distant 500 yards; it is about 16 yards across, 
with 44 feet water over it at low water, and is steep-to, there being 
depths of 7 to 8 fathoms close around. 


COLOMBIER SHOAL—-BERTRAND ROCKS. ay 


Colombier shoal, with 12 feet of water over it, bears 45°, dis- 
tant 650 yards from Little Colombier. 

Clearing mark.—Galantry lghthouse, open eastward of cape 
Aigle, bearing 185°, leads eastward of this shoal. 

Cape Blanc, a white cliff, is southeastward 700 yards from Henry 
point, and southward 4 mile farther is cape Rouge, a high red cliff; 
the coast is bold-to from cape Blanc to cape Rouge. 

Cape Rouge shoals are three patches off cape Rouge; from the 
eastern of the shoals, on which the depth is 12 feet, cape Rouge bears 
293°, distant 400 yards. 

Cape Aigile is southward nearly 800 vards from cape Rouge, and 
the coast between is foul. 

Little St. Pierre, a small islet, steep-to on its eastern side, hes 
4+ mile east-northeastward of cape Aigle, and is 17 feet high; there 
is no passage for ships between this islet and the main. 

Beacon.—A stone beacon, 16 feet high, with its upper part 
painted black and its lower part white, stands on this islet. 

St. Pierre harbor.—Zoé bank, on which there is about 1 foot 
water, extends about 600 yards from the shore northward of Canon 
point. 

Buoy.—The eastern edge of Z6é bank is marked by a buoy painted 
black and white in horizontal stripes. 

Canon point, a reef of rocks, extending eastward from the town 
of St. Pierre, covers at high water. 

Lights.—<A square white tower, 33 feet high, on the eastern part 
of Canon point, exhibits, at 36 feet above high water, a fixed light, 
showing green over an are of 74° between the bearings of 216° and 
290°, and white in other directions when not obscured by the land; 
it should be seen from a distance of 6 miles in clear weather. 

A lighthouse, 36 feet high, painted white with its southwestern 
and southeastern sides red, on the plain at the north of the town of 
St. Pierre and 800 yards northwestward of Canon point lighthouse, 
exhibits, at 64 feet above high water, a fixed red light, which should 
be seen from a distance of 3 miles in clear weather. 

These lights in line, bearing 285°, lead in mid-channel through 
South channel; they were very indistinct in 1902. 

La Vache rock is situated 200 yards southward of the lhght- 
house on Canon point. 

Beacon.—A beacon, 8 feet high, stands on la Vache rock. 

Bertrand rocks, situated + mile southeastward of Canon point, 
are low and extend 350 yards from the shore. The inner harbor of 
St. Pierre runs in southwestward 1,200 yards from between Canon 
point and Bertrand rocks; it is shoal and contracted by Moules island 
at about 300 yards southward from Canon point. (See also p. 177.) 


174 ST. PIERRE AND MIQUELON ISLANDS. 


Beacon.—-A tower, 28 feet high and painted black and white in 
horizontal stripes, stands on the eastern Bertrand rock. Vessels must 
pass eastward of this beacon. 

St. Louis bank, with 4 feet of water over it, bears 332°, distant 
250 yards from the beacon on Bertrand rocks. 

Buoy.—The eastern side of St. Louis bank is marked by a black 
buoy. | 

Chien island, separated by South channel, 500 yards wide, from 
Bertrand rocks, is easily distinguished by the church and lighthouse. 

Light.—A red lighthouse, 25 feet high, on Leconte point, the 
southwestern end of Chien island, exhibits at 62 feet above high water, 
a fixed light, which shows white over an are of 40° between the bear- 
ings of 296° and 336° ; red over an arc of 123° from 336°, through 90°, 
to 99°, and should be seen from a distance of 7 miles in clear weather. 

Le Flétan rock is situated near the northern edge of the bank 
extending from the northern side of Chien island. 

Buoy.—A buoy, painted black and white in horizontal stripes, 
marks the northern side of le Flétan rock. 

Massacre islet, 300 yards off the northwestern end of Chien 
island, is low. 

Vainqueur island lies northeastward of Chien island, being 
separated by Flétans channel, which is nearly 600 yards wide, and 
there are two patches, each with a depth of 44 fathoms, in mid- 
channel. Cape Chévre, the northeastern end of Vainqueur island, is 
a mound 102 feet high, and Plat rock, 13 feet high, is nearly 200 yards 
off it. Black rock, 20 feet high, bears 80°, distant 800 yards from the 
same cape; and Pelée island, 51 feet high, is joined to the southern 
end of Vainqueur island at low water. 

Gros-nez, a conspicuous rock, 27 feet high, lies in Flétans channel 
between Chien and Vainqueur islands. 

Pigeon island, northward 300 yards from Vainquer island, is 
wedge-shaped, the highest part, 90 feet high, being at its northern 
end. Some islets, named les Canailles or point aux Lots, extend 300 
yards in a northeasterly direction from this end; they are about 20 | 
feet high and steep-to on their eastern and northern sides. Haché 
rock, 16 feet high, lies 330 yards off the eastern point of Pigeon island. 

Rocks.—Enfant perdu, a small rock, 3 feet high, with shoal 
water extending northeastward nearly 200 ee from it, bears 113°, 
distant 1,200 yards from Pelée island. 

Little shoal, with 10 feet of water over it, thy 119°, 350 yards 
from Enfant perdu. 

Great shoal bears 57°, distant 670 yards from Enfant perdu, 
and has’5 feet of water over it. 

Les Cailloux de terre, with 3? fathoms least water, bears 215°, 
nearly 4 mile from Enfant perdu. 


BATAILLE BANK—GRAPPIN SHOAL. Via 


Bataille bank, having a rock with 2 fathoms of water over it at 
its southern end, bears 115°, distant 1,400 yards from Leconte Point 
lighthouse, and 50 yards northward of the line of the leading light- 
houses through South channel. 

Gélin shoal, with 6 fathoms of water over it, bears 61°, distant 
14, miles, and Les Cailloux au Chat, on which the depth is 8 fathoms, 
bears 66°, 1,700 yards from Chasseurs island. Cat rock, with 5 
fathoms of water over it, whose existence is doubtful, is stated to 
bear 98°, distant 500 yards from Les Cailloux au Chat. 

Indre shoal, with 2 fathoms of water over it, bears 130°, distant 
250 yards from cape Noir. 

Clearing marks.—Henry point, open northeastward of Les Ca- 
nailles, bearing 302°, leads northeastward of all the above rocks, and 
Blanche point, open southward of Chasseurs island, bearing 249°, 
leads southward of them excepting Cat rock; the whole of Little 
Harbor Head peninsula open of Chasseurs island, bearing 257°, leads 
southward of the position assigned to that rock. 

Les Grappinots, over which the depth is 7 fathoms, bears 114°, 
distant nearly 600 yards from Chasseurs island. 

Grappin shoal, with 44 fathoms of water over it, bears 154°, 
distant 2 mile from Chasseurs island. 

Clearing marks.—The lighthouse on Leconte point, open east- 
ward of cape Noir, bearing 14°, leads eastward of Grappin shoal, and 
the eastern point of Ravenel bay, open southward of Blanche point, 
bearing 288°, leads southward of it. 

Anchorage.—Large vessels anchor in St. Pierre roadstead in 
about mid-channel between lines drawn from the battery on the 
northern point of Chien island to cape Aigle and from the eastern 
point of Massacre islet to the mouth of the Courval river, in 7 to 15 
fathoms of water. One of the port officers directs vessels where 
to anchor. The telephone cable between cape Aigle and Tréhouart 
cove must be avoided. Vessels should moor. Northeasterly winds 
blow right into the roadstead and cause the heaviest sea. 

Vessels should not proceed westward of the western limit of the 
anchorage given above without local knowledge or a pilot. 

Mooring buoy.—A white mooring buoy, for the use of vessels 
of war, bears 206°, distant 634 yards from cape Aigle; other vessels 
must not anchor near this buoy or make fast to it without permission 
from the harbor master. 

Pilots.—By the harbor regulations it is compulsory for all ves- 
sels except fishing craft to employ a pilot when entering and leaving 
the port of St. Pierre, and payment will be required if a properly 
distinguished pilot offers his services, whether accepted or not. The 
pilot boats are painted red and blue, and fly a blue flag. 


176 ST. PIERRE AND MIQUELON ISLANDS. 


Directions.—North channel, northwestward of Pigeon island 
and between the northwestern part of Chien island and Little St. 
Pierre islet, is about 1,000 yards wide, easy for sailing vessels working 
to windward, and it is the only one that should be taken by large 
vessels. . 

From the eastward, when in the vicinity of Great shoal, keep Henry 
point open northward of les Canailles; the islets and rocks off Vain- 
queur and Pigeon islands may be approached closely. When north- 
ward of Little St. Pierre, keep that islet open westward of the battery 
on the northwestern point of Chien island, bearing 184°, to clear 
Cape Rouge shoals. 

When working to windward, guard against the squails that come 
from the high land between Great Colombier and cape Diable on the 
northwest and cape Aigle on the southwest side. 

When beating southward between Massacre islet and Rodeiens bay, 
tack before vigie d’Aigremont, a beacon on a hillock 87 feet high, 
southward of the town, comes in line with the eastern side of the 
small fort at the southeastern end of the town of St. Pierre, bearing 
203° to clear Zoé bank. 

When working along the coast of Chien island, the hghthouse 
on Canon poit should be kept open of the west point of Massacre 
island, bearing 224°, in order to clear the shoals off the west shore of 
Chien island. 

At night, the red light, on the plain at the north of the town of 
St. Pierre, open of cape Aigle, bearing 228°, clears cape Rouge shoals. 

South channel, between Bertrand rocks and Chien island, will 
admit vessels drawing less than 14 feet of water. The lghthouse 
northward of the town in line with Canon Point hghthouse, bearing 
285°, leads between St. Louis bank and Rallier shoal, but the channel 
is barely 200 yards in width; when cape Aigle and the eastern end of 
Massacre islet are in line, bearing 11°, steer 320° for the beacon 
standing on a large white stone on the brow of the hill eastward of 
the town, until vigie d’Aigremont is in line with the lighthouse on 
Canon point, bearing 207°, which mark on astern leads to the an- 
chorage. 

At night the sector of white light of Leconte Point lghthouse 
shows over Cailloux au Chat, Gélin shoal, and the reported position 
of Cat rock; the red sector shows over Indre shoal. 

To pass between Indre shoal on the west and Cailloux au Chat on 
the east, keep in the white sector of Leconte light, with the lght- 
house between the bearings of 336° and 319°, until the leading lights 
are in line bearing 285°, which line leads across the bar between St. 
Louis bank and Rallier shoal. The alignment of these lights also 
leads northward of Gélin shoal and close southward of Bataille bank. 
The green sector of Canon Point light clears St. Louis bank. 


FLETANS CHANNEL—BARACHOIS DE ST. PIERRE. 177 


Flétans channel.—Approach with Canon point and St. Pierre 
leading lighthouses in line 285°, which mark leads between Gelin 
shoal and les Cailloux de Terre; when cape Bawdry, the northeastern 
extremity of Chien island, is in line with Gros-nez rock, bearing 358°, 
keep that mark on until within 200 vards of Gros-nez rock; leave 
that rock 100 yards to the westward, then pass 200 yards eastward of 
cape Bawdry, and round that cape into the anchorage. 

In foggy weather.—It is extremely hazardous to approach St. 
Pierre during fog owing to the numerous outlying shoals, and no 
attempt should ever be made to enter the harbor under such cireum-. 
stances in a sailing vessel. If actually necessary to enter the harbor 
in moderate weather in a steamer, from a known position off Little 
Miquelon island, endeavor to sight land on the south coast of that 
island in the vicinity of cape Coupe and then steer for the western 
side of St. Pierre; proceed northeastward along the coast of that 
island and pass through Henry channel, close southward of Great 
Colombier to its eastern end, whence steer 142° for 14 miles and 237° 
for 1 mile to the anchorage. The greatest caution is necessary, and 
even then there is risk. 

Barachois de St. Pierre, or the inner harbor, partly naturally 
and partly artificially protected by a breakwater, carries 14 feet at 
low water on the bar at its entrance, where it has been dredged, and 
is available for vessels drawing 11 feet at high water only. The 
dredged channel into the harbor is marked by buoys. The holding 
ground is indifferent, there is little sea, and vessels that ground are 
rarely damaged. A number of schooners lay up there for the winter. 

Buoys.—Two warping buoys are moored between Moules island 
and Canon point. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change at St. Pierre at 8h. 33m.; 
springs rise 64 feet, neaps, 44 feet. 

Tidal streams and current.—The flood stream runs _north- 
ward through South and Flétans channels, and northeastward through 
North channel, but this regularity is only found near the land. Ata 
short distance seaward the current runs almost constantly northward, 
and is very little influenced by the feeble tidal stream of these lo- 
calities. In the anchorage the tidal stream is sometimes of sufficient 
force to swing ships against a strong breeze. The ebb stream runs in 
the opposite direction to the flood. 

Between St. Pierre and Little Miquelon the flood stream runs north- 
eastward through the channel and turns 1 to 14 hours after high 
water, but the stream often continues to run in the same direction at 
a reduced rate all through the ebb. The currents and tidal streams 
are, however, very irregular, and no dependence can be placed on any 
feaccular direction or rate. 


76846—09——12 


178 ST. PIERRE AND MIQUELON ISLANDS. 


Ice.—St. Pierre harbor was frozen over in 1874, this being the 
only occasion for about 50 years. Field ice appears in February and 
disappears about the end of March; it rarely closes the harbor, which 
is usually open to navigation throughout the year. 

St. Pierre town stands on the northwestern side of the Barachois 
de St. Pierre, or inner harbor; the administrator of the French islands 
resides here and the port is the headquarters of the French squadron 
in Newfoundland. The population was 5,385 in 1902, and during the 
fishing season some thousands are temporarily added to this number. 
The chief buildings are the administrator’s house, the courts of jus- 
tice, a large church and convent, and the treasury and post-office. 

Life saving stations.—A rocket apparatus is maintained at 
the port of St. Pierre and another at Chien island. 

Communication.—The only mail and passenger service that exists 
is maintained by asmall steamer, the “St. Pierre-Miquelon,” under the 
French flag, which makes a round trip to North Sydney and Halifax 
ence a fortnight. 

Telegraph cables.—There are 2 cables between France and, 
St. Pierre; 2 between Newfoundland and Cape Breton, via St. Pierre; 
2 between St. Pierre and Massachusetts, United States, and 1 between 
St. Pierre and Cape Breton; 2 of the cables are landed at St. Pierre 
harbor. 

A telephone cable has been laid between cape Aigle and Tréhouart 
cove. 

Coal and supplies.—Provisions and water can be obtained, and 
there is usually a quantity of 420 tons of coal in stock, but there are no 
facilities for coaling vessels. 

Marine railways.—There are four marine railways: No. 1 is 147 
feet in length, will take a vessel of 200 tons, and has 94 feet forward and 
134 feet aft, on the blocks; No. 2 is 75 face in length, will take a vessel 
ef 100 tons, and has 84 a forward and 114 feet aft, on the blocks; 
No. 3 is 162 feet in length, its lifting power is 600 tons, and it has 10 
feet water forward and 154 feet aft, on the blocks, but this slip is re- 
ported to have been burnt; No. 4 is 75 feet in length, its lifting power 
ts 200 tons, and it has 93 feet water forward and 12) feet aft, on as 
blocks. 

Hospital.—The hospital at St. Pierre has 70 beds, but a permit 
must be obtained from the governor or commandant before a patient 
ean be admitted. The lazaretto is on Chien island. 

Trade.—In 1905, 2,119 vessels of 97,458 tons entered, and the value 
ef the exports for the same year was $1,386,840, and that of the 
imports $1,055,723. 

The legal currency is French, but the bulk af the money in circula- 
tion is American. ‘The rate of exchange is 5 francs 40 centimes to the 
dollar, whether United States, Canadian, or Newfoundland, and al- 


FRENCH COD FISHERY. 179 


though prices are always quoted in francs, payment is made in 
dollars. 

French cod fishery.—This industry is principally prosecuted 
by vessels averaging from 120 to 200 tons each, which are equipped 
at the northern ports of France and leave there each year on the Ist 
of March; some proceed at once to the Newfoundland banks, but the 
greater number go first to St. Pierre for herring, and they all return 
to St. Pierre for a second supply of bait in June. The vessels anchor 
on the banks, while bultows are laid out in large undecked boats, some- 
times as far as 6 miles from the vessel. This system is attended by 
frequent loss of life, the boats being unable at times to return to the 
vessels, and the latter occasionally go down at their anchors. 

On the west coast of Newfoundland the vessels follow the fish from 
south to north till the caplin have disappeared, when they repair to 
the several ports at which the catch is to be cured, and after the vessels 
are moored the crews fish with bultows off their respective anchorages 
till the end of the season. 

On the northeast coast of Newfoundland vessels have a position 
assigned to each for a term of five years, and they proceed direct from 
France to these posts, where they are moored. The crew then fish 
with seine, hook and line, or bultows. As a rule the fishery season 
does not commence before the 18th of April and ends about the mid- 
dle of October. Vessels are fitted out for the Great bank, with a dry- 
ing factory at St. Pierre or Miquelon, or to fish in the vicinity of St. 
Pierre and Miquelon, or for the Great bank, but with no drying fac- 
tory; in the last case the vessels are fitted for preserving cod in salt. 

Vessels carrying salting apparatus are compelled to export the 
whole of their catch during the season to France, but are permitted 
to go to St. Pierre when full and tranship their fish to a trading 
vessel if they wish to continue fishing. 

St. Malo and Granville principally engage in the drying industry; 
vessels with salting apparatus usually belong to Dieppe and Fecamp. 
A vessel fitted out locally is called a “ goélette,’ and is usually less 
than 90 tons in size, working in connection with a drying factory; 
those at St. Pierre are schooners, and carry 6 dories. 

The fishery named “la grande péche” is practiced on Great bank, 
St. Pierre and Banquereau banks, as well as on the east and west coasts 
of Newfoundland; that named “la petite péche ” is carried on along 
the coast in wherries or dories, which go out in the morning and re- 
turn at night. 

In the bank fishery the schooner, on arriving at the fishing ground, 
anchors, having a hemp cable with sufficient iron cable on the anchor 
to prevent chafing on the bottom. Here, besides the danger from bad 
weather, there is the chance of being run down by steamers, and it is 


180 ST. PIERRE AND MIQUELON ISLANDS. 


sometimes necessary to cut the cable, but this is a costly expedient, and 
consequently is frequently undertaken too late. 

Trots or bultows, ready fitted with hooks on snooding, are carried 
in tubs, the hooks being about a fathom apart; each man baits his 
lines, 12 to 15 in number, which takes him about four hours. A 
schooner carrying 6 dories has to bait 12,000 hooks. When coiled 
and baited the lines are stowed in the dories ready for setting. 

Dories are very good sea boats; they are small, light, flat-bottomed, 
and shaped so that they stow within each other on deck. Each 
French dory is marked with the name and port of registry of the 
schooner from which she is detached. 

The lnes are set in the evening after 4 p.m. The master in charge 
of the dories lets go a bultow or trot anchor, and the bultows uncoil 
as the men row away from the schooner in all directions. The depth 
of water at the fishing ground is from about 30 to 45 fathoms, and 
the bait hes on the ground unless the tidal stream is strong. The ends 
of the bultow are marked by 2 buoys (ordinary barrels) each with 
a staff and flag, and when all the lines are set the schooner becomes 
the center of a circle of buoys whose radii are the trots or bultows. 

Next day at about 4 a. m. each dory puts off to fish her lines; start- 
ing from the weather buoy, the bultow anchor is weighed and the line 
hauled in and coiled, the fish as they appear being unhooked. After 
hauling their lines the dories return with the catch to the schooner. 

When a certain number of daily hauls of the lnes has taken 
place—the average number a month is 25, because of the days lost by 
the weather being too bad for dory work—the schooner returns to 
St. Pierre. 

Bait.—From April to June herring is used; from June to July 
caplin, and from July to October squid. During the last few years 
a new bait has been discovered, namely, the periwinkle, also known 
as the cou-cou or bulot. It is found actually on the banks, and is 
obtained by dredging from the bottom in baskets, four or five being 
taken at each haul. 

Fishing grounds.—On the banks, where the bottom is rock, 
broken shells, sea-urchins, and sand, the cod are supreme, for with 
the exception of flounders, rays, toads, and catfish, the cod is the only 
fish caught. 

St. Pierre bank is only fished by schooners which are too small to 
make longer voyages. 

Banquereau bank is visited by both French and American vessels, 
and the fish taken here, although numerous, run small, averaging about 
1 pound. In June the cod temporarily forsake this bank, following 
the caplin. 

Great bank has the finest cod; they average about 8 pounds, but 
have been caught up to 32 pounds. Halibut are also caught on this 


GREEN ISLAND-—LITTLE MIQUELON ISLAND. 181 


bank. Mother Carey’s chickens, which frequent the banks, are often 
caught for food by the fishermen. They are taken on a hook baited 
with a bit of fat; their flesh is very oily. 

On the west coast of Newfoundland the fishery is carried on by 
nomadic schooners or by the livyers. Expeditions commence when 
caplin appear; the caplin are chased northward by the cod, and the’ 
fishermen following the latter gradually progress up the coast, care- 
fully fishing bays, creeks, and harbors as they go, until toward the 
end of July they usually rendezvous in the neighborhood of Old or 
New Férolle. The gulf fishermen then return south and fish in the 
various harbors and bays. 

A very common method is to sail from place to place, stopping 
wherever good signs of fish are found, and leaving for other places 
when the fish disappear. The anchoring ground and duration of stay 
depend entirely on whether the cod are plentiful, and the result of 
the expedition is a matter of chance. 

About 34,411 tons of cod are annually imported into France. 

Hospital steamer.—The French hospital steamer, St. Francois 
d’Assise, usually frequents the banks during the fishing season, and 
although her main object is to attend to French fishermen, sick sea- 
men of any nationality are treated gratuitously. 

Green island, lying northeastward, distant 44 miles from the 
eastern end of Great Colombier, is $ mile long and 156 feet high. 
Southward from it are Little Green islets and rocks, the outer of 
which, Enfant perdu, is distant 14 miles. 

The eastern of these rocks covers at two-thirds flood, and bears 
177°, distant 1,100 yards from the southern end of Green island. 

Intended light.—The government of Newfoundland has pub- 
lished information to the effect that, at the opening of navigation in 
1909, a ight for the guidance of mariners would be exhibited from 
a circular iron tower erected on the summit of Green island, at the 
southern entrance to Fortune bay. The lighthouse is painted red, 
and the keeper’s dwelling and the engine and store houses are painted 
red and white in vertical stripes. 

Fog signal.—A siren near the hghthouse sounds every 90 seconds, 
thus :—blast, 3 seconds; silent interval, 87 seconds, during thick 
weather, fog, or snowstorms. 

Little Miquelon or Langlade island, situated northwest- 
ward 3 miles from St. Pierre island, 1s steep-to; the sides are cliffy 
except on its northern coast. The summit, which is 656 feet high, 1s 
nearly flat, and this is the general appearance of the island, but on 
easterly bearings some hummocks show out at the northern end. 
Little Miquelon is connected with Great Miquelon by a sandy neck 
54 miles long, at the northern end of which is a large pond named 
Great Barachois, to which small craft find access at high water, 
entering from the eastern side of the beach. 


182 ST. PIERRE AND MIQUELON ISLANDS. 


A reef, which breaks, extends about 200 yards from Plate point, 
the western end of Little Miquelon. 

Light.—A lighthouse on Plate point, 127 feet high, and painted 
black and white in horizontal bands, exhibits, at 154 feet above high 
water, a flashing hght having a period of four seconds, the duration 
of the flash being one second. The hght is white except between the 
bearings 155° and 163°, or over Seal rocks, where it is red, and it 
should be seen from a distance 18 miles in clear weather. Within the 
distance of 16 miles, a fixed light is visible between the flashes. 

Fog signal.—A siren, at about 27 yards southward of the light- 
house, sounds twice about every minute, thus:—blast, four seconds; 
silence, four seconds; blast, four seconds; silence, forty-eight seconds, 
during thick weather, fog, or snowstorms. 

The mean distance the siren can be heard is 6 miles, but under cer- 
tain conditions of the atmosphere it can be heard only 2 miles. 

The siren produces a trembling sound, and is shrill. If the siren 
is disabled, a gun is fired at intervals, but it is not fired while the 
siren is sounding. 

La Baie, the passage between St. Pierre and Little Miquelon, is 
deep and its shores are bold. . 

Great Miquelon island is very irregular in outline, and its 
hills reach a height of 813 feet. The northern part of the island is a 
semicircular and hilly tongue of land, forming Miquelon road; cape 
Miquelon, its northeastern end, is a steep cliff, 606 feet high and bold- 
to. On the southern end of the tongue is a large settlement with a 
prominent church; in 1892 the population was 544. 

Light.—A lighthouse, 49 feet high, the lower part of which is 
painted white, and the upper part black, with a white lantern, on 
cape Blanc, the southwestern end of the northern part of Great 
Miquelon, exhibits, at 103 feet above high water, a flashing lght, 
showing thus: Light, ten seconds; eclipse, fifty seconds. The light 
is white, except between the bearings, 34° and 57°, or over Seal rocks, 
where it is red, and it should be seen from a distance of 16 miles in 
clear weather. 

This light is obscured on southwesterly bearings by Calvary hills; 
it is obscured southward of a line passing about 220 yards northward 
of Chatte rocks, so that the light in sight leads northward of Outer 
Miquelon and Chatte rocks, but the southern limit of visibility of the 
light only just clears them; the light is also obscured on northwesterly 
bearings by the hills of Great Miquelon island. 

Rocks.—Seal rocks are two groups about 4 mile from each other; 
the highest, 18 feet high and situated in a direction 228°, distant 645 
miles from cape Blane, is steep-to around. 

Shoal.—A shoal, with 21 fathoms water over it, bears 231°, distant 
4 miles from cape Blane. 


BRIAND SHOAL——-OUTER MIQUELON ROCK. 183 


Briand shoal, with 13 feet of water over it and 11 fathoms 
around, is very small in extent and bears 203°, distant 234; miles from 
cape Blane. 

Caution.—The channel between Seal rocks and Great Miquelon 
island should not be used for navigation, as it has not been properly 
examined. 

Chatte rocks, 5 to 8 feet high, are situated on a shoal which 
stretches northeastward about 1,200 yards from a point on the south- 
ern side of Miquelon road situated a little more than 4 mile north- 
ward of Chapeau de Miquelon, a conical hill, 374 feet high. 

Buoy.—A black buoy is moored in 19 feet near the outer end of 
Chatte Rocks shoal. 

Miquelon rocks comprise a group of rocks on a shoal spit extend- 
ing northeastward 14 miles from the land at } mile southward of Sol- 
dier point, which is southeasterly 5 miles from Miquelon road. The 
eastern and highest rock is nearly 14 miles from the point, about 10 
feet high, and steep-to on its eastern side. 

Patracan shoal, with 74 fathoms of water over it, bears 67°, dis- 
tant 24 miles from Soldier point. 

Landry bank, with 44 fathoms of water over it, bears 97°, dis- 
tant 24 miles from Soldier point. 

Outer Miquelon rock, with 10 feet water over it, is the north- 
eastern shoal off Soldier point, and bears 33°, distant 2? miles from 
the eastern Miquelon rock. A shoal, with 74 fathoms water over it, 
lies about 800 yards southwestward of Outer Miquelon rock. 

Anchorages.—There is anchorage in Miquelon road with winds 
from north, through west, to south, in 6 fathoms of water, off the 
settlement, with fair holding ground. 

There is also open anchorage eastward of the long shingle beach 
which joins Great Miquelon and Little Miquelon islands. ‘The best 
place is off the northern coast of Little Miquelon in 63 fathoms water, 
near a cove just southeastward of the gens d’armes station. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Miquelon roads at 
Sh. 33m.; mean rise about 34 feet. 

Climate.—In St. Pierre and Miquelon islands the winters are long 
and severe, and the summers short and cool; the mean annual tem- 
perature is about 40° Fahrenheit; the annual rainfall is 40 to 48 
inches, and fog prevails on an average for one hundred days in the 
year. 


CHAPTER V. 


NEWFOUNDLAND, SOUTH COAST—CREW POINT TO 
CAPE RAY. 


Fortune bay.—Pass island bears 346°, distant 35 miles from Crew 
point, and the entrance to Fortune bay lies between. This bay, which 
extends eastward about 67 miles, contains numerous smaller bays, 
harbors, and islands. 

Caution.—The currents in Fortune bay, especially near Plate and 
Brunet islands, are irregular. 

At night or in thick weather, when sounding, bear in mind that 
the water is in many places as deep near the shores as in the middle 
of the bay. 

Brunet island, nearly in the middle of the entrance to Fortune 
bay, rises to a ridge, 528 feet high, extending along its northern coast; 
several hills at its eastern end appear from a distance as separate 
islands. 

Light.—A. lighthouse, 30 feet high, a square white building with 
a red roof and the lantern, rising from the middle, on Mercer head, 
the southeastern end of the island, exhibits, at 408 feet above high 
water, a flashing white hght showing a flash every ten seconds, which 
should be seen, excepting over an are of 67° between the bearings of 
85° and 152°, where it is obscured by the land, from a distance of 23 
miles in clear weather. From its great height this light is often ob- 
scured by fog when the land below is visible. 

Signals.—This light station is supplied with the International 
code of signals. 

Fish rock, with 34 fathoms over it, bears 186°, distant 600 yards 
from Mercer head lghthouse. 

Mercer cove, on the southeastern side of the island, affords good 
sheltered anchorage for small vessels in 3 to 6 fathoms water, eastward 
of Harbor rock, situated in the middle of the cove, which is awash at 
high water and may be passed on either side. The entrance, between 
Major point, on the northwestern, and Pancake, 18 feet high, on the 
southeastern side, is 500 yards in width, and the cove extends north- 
eastward 1,400 yards, the water in it shoaling toward the head; there 
are several houses on the shores. 

184 


HARBOR SHOAL—FORTUNE VILLAGE. 185 


Harbor shoal, with 43 fathoms water over it, bears 180°, distant 
700 yards from Major point. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, at Brunet island at 
9h. 8m.; springs rise 64 feet, neaps 44 feet. 

Ice approached Brunet island between March 20 and April 5, 1867; 
this may be considered as the western inshore limit of the eastern ice. 

Water.—Streams flow into Mercer cove. 

Anchorage.—There is fair anchorage in a bay on the eastern side 
of Brunet island in 6 to 13 fathoms water, sheltered from southerly 
and westerly winds, but some rocks off the head of the bay and nearly 
4 mile from the shore, as well as a shoal, with 15 feet water over it, 
bearing 273°, distant 800 yards from Little cape, must be avoided. 

Little Brunet islands lie close southwestward of Brunet island. 

Bird island has a sharp peak 384 feet high, and 4 mile westward of 
of it are Brandies rocks which uncover 2 feet at low water. 

Puffin bank, with 34 fathoms water over it, bears 79°, distant 1,400 
yards from Puflin island. 

Plate islets are three in number and rocky; Big Plate islet, 49 
feet high, bears 222°, distant 44 miles from the western end of Brunet 
island; Little Plate islet, 33 feet high, bears 211°, distant 12 miles 
from Big plate. 

Numerous rocks and shoals surround these islets; those with less 
than 10 fathoms are said to break in heavy weather, and none of them 
should be approached within the distance of 1 mile. 

Sagona island, 256 feet high, bears 23°, distant 6 miles from 
Little cape of Brunet island. On its western side is a small inlet 
suitable only for fishing vessels; a sunken rock in the middle of the 
entrance makes the passage difficult except in very fine weather. 
Numerous banks, some of which break in bad weather, surround 
Sagona island. 

Crew point is the southern entrance point of Fortune bay, and 
Sugarloaf rock, conspicuous, conical, and 26 feet high, lies close 
westward of it; a cluster of houses and a flagstaff stand near the 
point. A ledge of rocks extends 1,200 yards southwestward from the 
point, and Crew Point shoal, with 54 fathoms of water over it, bears 
236°, distant 14 miles from the point. Little Dantzic cove lies 13 
miles in a northerly direction from Crew point; Great Dantzic cove, 
the northern point of which is Dantzic point, is situated 2 miles 
farther northward; the holding ground in this cove is bad. 

Fortune head, situated 7} miles in a northeasterly direction from 
Dantzic point, is composed of steep cliffs, with rocks off-lying for 200 
yards; at the western end of the head is a hillock with a single tree 
on it. 

Fortune village is situated 4 miles east-southeastward of Fortune 
head, and there is fine weather anchorage off it in 6 to 10 fathoms 


186 CREW POINT TO CAPE RAY. 


of water, but the holding ground is very bad, the bottom being 
smooth rock. The best holding ground is well toward Fortune head 
in 7 fathoms of water. At the western end of the village is a shallow 
basin protected by two breakwaters, into which fishing vessels enter 
after a quarter flood. 

Communication.—The steamers from St. Johns and Placentia 
call at Fortune weekly during summer and autumn. 

Ice.—Fortune bay is very seldom frozen over, and the harbor is 
always open. 

Jerseyman bank, the southern end of which is 6 miles westward 
of Dantzic point, extends nearly 10 miles in a north and south direc- 
tion and has on it depths ranging from 20 to 24 fathoms. 

Grand Bank head, 34 miles east-northeasterly from Fortune 
head, is steep, and 187 feet high. Admiral cove, about 800 yards 
southeastward of the head, affords anchorage in 5 to 10 fathoms 
of water. 

Grand Bank village is situated on Bouilli point at 1 mile south- 
eastward of the head; there is anchorage off the village in 10 fathoms 
of water. 

Light.—From a wooden beacon, painted red and white in hori- 
zontal bands, and 23 feet high, bearing 264°, distant 130 yards from 
the end of the breakwater at Grand Bank, there is exhibited at 28 feet 
above high water a fixed red light, which should be seen on southerly 
bearings between 117° and 241°, a distance of 5 miles in clear 
weather. 

Water can be obtained by sending a boat up Grand Bank brook 
at high water. 

Ice.—Field ice appears at the end of February and leaves early in 
April; vessels arrive during the first week in March and leave toward 
the latter end of December; this harbor was only frozen over twice 
in 30 years. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, at Grand Bank at 8h. 
48m.; springs rise 64 feet, neaps 54 feet. 

Communication.—The steamers from St. Johns and Placentia 
call at Grand Bank weekly during summer and autumn. 

Grand Beach point, eastward, 102, miles from Grand Bank head, 
is a low projection covered with trees. Scott rock, with 43 fathoms 
of water over it, bears 309°, distant 1,300 yards from the point. 

Grand beach is situated at the head of a cove about 4 mile south- 
eastward of the point. It is much frequented by vessels of the her- 
ring fishery during the spring season. 

White point, northeastward, 34 miles from Grand Beach point, 
is bare granite; the shore of Fortune bay for 5 miles northeastward 
ef White point is fronted by rocks, known as Garnish rocks, extend- 


FRENCHMAN COVE—EAST BAY. 187 


ing nearly 2 miles offshore, and there is no safe passage between 
en and the land. 

Caution.—The fishermen of this locality are not trustworthy 
pilots except for the pass to Frenchman cove. 

Frenchman cove, 3? miles northeastward of White point, affords 
fair anchorage for small vessels in 4 to 5 fathoms of water. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Frenchman cove at 
Sh. 47m.; springs rise 7 feet, neaps 54 feet. 

Garnish, a small boat harbor, lies 14 miles northeastward of 
Frenchman cove; there is a considerable settlement and a church 
here. 

Light.—A square beacon tower, 33 feet high, carrying an octag- 
onal drum and a lantern, and painted red and white, at Garnish 
entrance, exhibits, at 20 feet above high water, a fixed red light. This 
light is intended for the guidance of the fishing craft, and may be 
seen from a distance of about 3 miles. 

Rosée point, bearing 17°, distant 9% miles from Garnish, ter- 
minates in remarkable conical hillocks; some rocks lie off the inter- 
vening shore, the principal being Charleys rock, with 13 feet over 
it, and Tilt rock with less than 6 feet over it; these rocks are situated 
over 4 mile offshore, and Hay shoals are nearly 1 mile off Scott 
point. The shore eastward of Rosée point is bold rocky cliffs. 

Grand Jervey head lies 7 miles northeasterly from Rosée point, 
and in Grand Jervey cove, 4 mile easterly from the head, there is 
open anchorage in 14 fathoms of water. 

Langue de Cerf cove, 8 miles east-northeasterly from Grand 
Jervey head, affords anchorage in 16 fathoms water, sheltered, ex- 
cept from Heniesly and westerly winds. 

Jack Fountain cove, 2 miles eastward of Langue de Cerf point, 
affords anchorage for small vessels in 7 fathoms water, but Jack 
Fountain rock lies in the middle of the cove. There is a small village 
around the cove. 

Bay VArgent back cove is situated on the southern side of a 
peninsula immediately eastward of Jack Fountain cove, and affords 
no anchorage for ships, but small craft shelter in it close to the shore. 

Bay V Argent, on the eastern side of the peninsula, affords shel- 
ter for small craft close to the shore; there are a few houses around 
the bay. 

East bay entrance is northeastward of the entrance to bay lAr- 
gent; Boat rocks, islets 23 feet high, he immediately outside the 
entrance. 

Two arms branch from the entrance; Lower Little bay, the south- 
eastern, extends eastward 1 mile, and East bay, the northeastern, 
extends northeastward 2 miles. Anchorage may be obtained at the 
heads of both these arms. 


188 CREW POINT TO CAPE RAY. 


Mille harbor, on the northern side of the peninsula forming East 
bay, is surrounded by a settlement. The harbor affords sheltered 
anchorage to small craft in 3 to 4 fathoms water. 

Cape Mille, northward 14 miles from Mille Harbor entrance, is 
a high red cliff under a wooded hill, and Fortune bay runs 7 miles 
east-northeastward from the cape, with a width of 14 miles - 1,600 
yards. The bay immediately westward of the cape opens out to a 
width of 3 miles. 

The shores of this part of the bay are high, with steep cliffs on 
both sides, and at the head of Fortune bay the shore is steep-to and 
free from shoals; anchorage may be obtained here, in 7 to 9 fathoms 
water, off a large settlement, with a conspicuous red house bearing 
140°. 

Grand le Pierre harbor, on the northern side of the bay, at 14 
miles from the head, has good anchorage in 4 to 8 ‘fathoms water, 
and a clear approach. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Grand le Pierre 
harbor at 9h. 10m.; springs rise 7 feet, neaps 5 feet. 

English harbor, with good anchorage in 4 to 10 fathoms water, 
and sheltered except from southerly winds, is situated 44 miles west- 
ward of Grand le Pierre; rocks lie close off the entrance points, other- 
wise the harbor is clear. There are two inner harbors, which can be 
entered by small craft at high water, and there is a small village at 
the head of the outer harbor. 

Little bay de l’Eau is about 14 miles westward of English har- 
bor. There are some islets and rocks off it. The entrance is 200 
yards wide, but the harbor expands near its head, where there is 
anchorage in 21 fathoms water. 

New harbor is situated 2 miles westward of Little bay de ?Eau 
and affords sheltered anchorage to fishing craft in 12 feet water. 

Femme harbor is 3 miles westward of Little bay de Eau. Petti- 
coat island and Smock island, with several small islets, he at its 
entrance. 

Femme shoal, on which the least water is 44 fathoms, extends 
southwestward + mile from the western point of Petticoat island. 

The passage into the harbor is westward and northward of Petti- 
coat island, between it and Smock island, and thence northward 
through the channel into the basin; it is about 150 vards wide. In 
entering, as soon as the harbor channel begins to open, keep near 
Smock island to avoid sunken rocks extending from the northeastern 
part of Petticoat island, and Drew rock, which dries 3 feet, off the 
eastern side of the harbor. When past Drew rock keep in mid- 
channel till near the narrows at the head, where a buoy ought to be 
placed beforehand on the eastern side of Druid rock, and steer 
midway between the buoy and the eastern shore into the fine basin 


BIG CONNE—LONG HARBOR. 189 


which opens out to the northward and affords anchorage in 44 to 18 
fathoms water, sand and mud bottom. 

The passage eastward of Petticoat island is obstructed by rocks, 
and can only be used by very small craft. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Femme harbor at 
Sh. 35m.; springs rise 7 feet, neaps 5 feet; neaps range about 4 feet. 

Big Conne is an open bay 2 miles westward of Femme harbor, 
and there is anchorage in 9 to 17 fathoms water at its head. Little 
Conne is a cove in its western shore, suitable for fishing craft; there 
are a few houses on its southern shore. 

Long harbor entrance is 44 miles westward of Femme harbor; 
Gull island lies in the entrance, and Black rock, 6 feet high, is } mile 
southward of the island; a patch of sunken rocks, part of which is 
awash at low water, lies about 200 yards westward of Black rock. 
The harbor extends about north-northeasterly 14 miles, with a general 
breadth of 4 mile, and it contains several anchorages. Rocks which 
cover at high water are situated in the passage northeastward of 
Gull island, and about 300 yards from the shore. Entering by the 
eastern passage, keep close to Gull island. 

A patch of sunken rocks, with less than 6 feet water over it, lies 
300 yards southwestward of Gull island. Entering by the western 
entrance keep near the western shore. 

At 3 miles within the entrance are the narrows, where there is a 
depth of 64 fathoms. Just above Indian Tea island the channel is 
only 500 yards wide between two sunken rocks with 2 feet and 5 feet 
water over them, respectively. 

Telegraph.—There is a telegraph office at Otter point, nearly 1 
mile from the head of the harbor. 

Anchorages in Long harbor: 

Anderson cove, 14} miles within the entrance on the western shore, 
affords anchorage in 6 to 14 fathoms water, but there is barely room 
for a vessel 200 feet long, anchored in the middle of this cove, to 
swing when lying at single anchor. 

There is anchorage off Tickle Beach point, immediately south- 
westward of the narrows, 3 miles within the entrance, in 7 to 9 
fathoms water, mud bottom; anchor near the point, out of the tidal 
stream, which is rapid. Large vessels should not anchor here in a 
depth of less than 15 fathoms in order to have sufficient space. 

There is fair anchorage in 9 fathoms water, mud bottom, close off 
Woody island, southward of the narrows; the strong tidal stream 
runs through it, but for a large vessel it is preferable to the anchor- 
age off Tickle beach. 

There is a basin inside Woody island for small craft, which can 
go alongside the wharf there. 


190 ; CREW POINT TO CAPE RAY. 


Above Tickle head there is good anchorage, out of the tidal stream, 
with moderate depth of water and good shelter. 

There is good anchorage in 5 fathoms water in Schooner cove, 8 
miles above Gull island, at a point where Billy island, at the head of 
the harbor, opens, bearing about 41°. 

Tides and tidal streams.—It is high water, full and change, in 
Long harbor, at 8li. 50m.; springs rise 7 feet, neaps 5} feet; neaps — 
range 4 feet. 

It is high water, full and change, at Schooner cove at about 9h. 0m. 

The tidal stream past Tickle point probably attains at times a rate 
of 3 knots an hour. 

The greatest rate of the ebb stream off Woody island is 14 knots 
an hour, and that of the flood $ knot. 

The ebb stream has sufficient strength at Schooner cove to keep a 
vessel broadside on to a strong breeze. 

Belle bay.—Long Harbor point bears 224°, 1,4, miles from Gull 
island, and the southern point of Chapel island bears 252°, distant 
10 miles from Long Harbor point; the entrance to Belle bay, which 
- contains numerous islets and islands, lies between Long Harbor point 
and Chapel island. 

Hare harbor lies about 14 miles northwestward of Long Harbor 
point and eastward of some islets; it is only suitable for fishing craft. 

White rock, with 34 fathoms of water over it, lies 700 yards west- 
ward of the southern islet. 

Mal bay entrance is 2 miles northwestward of Hare harbor, and 
the bay extends north-northeastward 5 miles; there is anchorage near 
the head of the bay, which is narrow; use caution when anchoring, 
for the water shoals suddenly from 23 to 5 fathoms. 

Rencontre islands are immediately west-northwestward of Mal 
bay; the largest, 464 feet high, is joined to the mainland at low 
water. 

Southern harbor stretches into the southern side of this island; it 
is narrow and open to southerly winds. 

Anchorage may be obtained eastward of the isthmus joining the 
large island to the mainland and off Salmonier village, sheltered by 
the two smaller islands to the southward; to enter, keep in mid- 
channel between the islands and the mainland. 

A rocky ledge, with a depth of 3 fathoms over it, extends some 
distance off the village; and a small rock, with 4 feet of water over it, 
hes about 200 yards offshore, with Low point, a low shelving point at 
the western end of the harbor, in line with a small solitary house on 
the northeastern end of Rencontre island, bearing 272°, and a small 
rock about 3 feet high, close westward of Stage point, in line with 
the eastern end of Rencontre island. 


BELLE HARBOR—DUCIE ROCK. 191 


Belle harbor, a narrow arm of the sea at 3$ miles west-north- 
westward of Rencontre islands, is entered westward of Doctor island. 
Doctor cove is on the eastern shore, and small craft anchor in it 
sheltered by the island. There is anchorage in Belle harbor in 8 to 
17 fathoms of water; approach the head of the harbor with caution, 
as the water shoals suddenly. 

The land on the northern side of the anchorage at the head of the 
harbor is a peninsula, with two rises on it; the eastern of these is a 
remarkable black cliff, to the northeastward of which vessels should 
not proceed. 

Lally head, west-southwestward 24 miles from the entrance to 
Belle harbor, is the end of a long promontory that with Lally Cove 
island forms Lally cove and Lally Back cove. Both these coves are 
only suitable for boats, but there is open anchorage off the latter in 
14 to 16 fathoms water. 

East bay, wide and open, is entered at 14 miles northward of 
Lally Back cove; East Bay head separates it from North bay, which 
is on the western side of the head. There is good anchorage off the 
mouths of the brooks flowing into both East and North bays, and at 
the head of the latter is a large salmon river, while northward of the 
river there is good ground for deer. 

Cing Isles bay, west-southwestward about 24 miles from Lally 
head, is square in shape, and divided near the middle by a line of five 
small islands, which extends 14 miles northeastward from the north- 
western shore; on its northwestern side is a small inlet, named Sim- 
mons brook, in which small vessels anchor; there is an island in the 
inlet, and at the head is Salmon river. There is anchorage with fair 
shelter for large vessels at the western side of the bay, but a shoal 
lying + mile from the river mouth at the southern corner of the bay 
must be avoided. 

Coal.—About 20 tons of coal may be usually obtained at Salmon 
river. 

Corbin Head promontory, forming the southeastern side of Cing 
Isles bay and the northwestern of Corbin bay, is steep and bold to the 
eastward; Belle bay is 12 miles wide between the promontory and 
Lally head. 

Corbin bay, on the southern side of Corbin Head promontory, 
forms three branches, named Northwest arm, Southwest arm, and 
Hatcher arm, all affording anchorage in 7 fathoms water; Bob head 
is the southern entrance point of Corbin bay. 

White rock, with 19 feet of water over it, bears 5°, distant 500 
yards from Bob head. 

Ducie rock bears 72°, distant 1,300 yards from Bob head, and 
is awash at low water; a shoal, with 2 fathoms of water over it, lies 


192 CREW POINT TO CAPE RAY. 


northward about 100 yards, and a shoal on which the depth is 22 
fathoms, westward 200 yards from the rock. These shoals he on a 
bank about 700 yards long in an easterly and westerly direction, with 
depths of 4 to 9 fathoms on it. 

Lord and Lady island, 75 feet high, les southeastward 4 mile 
from Bob Head promontory, and Thrum cap, a small steep island, 87 
feet high, lies easterly 800 yards from the middle of this island. 

Dog and Belle islands le northeasterly, 14 miles and 2? miles, 
respectively, from Lord and Lady island; Dog island is 202 feet, and 
Belle island 298 feet high. A shoal, one rock of which dries 2 feet, 
extends southward 600 yards from Dog island. Dog Island bank 
comprises three rocks; the shoalest, with 9 feet of water over it, bears 
117°, distant 14} miles from the southern end of Dog island. 

Long island, 11} miles long, 600 yards broad, and 375 feet high, is 
4 mile southward of Bob Head promontory, and Barrow rock, 15 
feet high, lies nearly in the middle of the channel between. Tickle 
island lies on a bank extending from the southeastern part of Long 
island. 

Chapel island, 2} miles long in a northerly and southerly direc- 
tion, about 14 miles broad, and 843 feet high, is bold-to on all sides 
but the northern, and is situated + mile southward of Long island, 
the channel between being foul. Farmers cove, at its northeastern 
end, affords anchorage for small craft in 5 fathoms water. 

Belloram, or Bande de |’Arier harbor, is on the mainland south- 
westward of Chapel island, and Iron head, a high bluff, rises almost 
perpendicularly 1,129 feet from the sea at 1? miles northward of the 
harbor. A semicircular beach forms a snug harbor for small vessels, 
with 5 fathoms water in it, and large vessels anchor northward of the 
harbor in 14 to 18 fathoms; a large settlement surrounds the harbor. 

Light.—A white tower, 37 feet high, on Beach point, exhibits at 
35 feet above high water a fixed white light, which should be seen 
from a distance of 7 miles in clear weather. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Belloram harbor at. 
Sh. 59m.; springs rise 6 feet. 

Communication.—The Newfoundland Railway steamer from 
St. Johns calls at Belloram weekly during summer and autumn. 

St. Jacques island, situated 3 miles southward of Belloram, and 
700 yards offshore, is 163 feet high and consists of two hummocks 
joined by a low neck; it may be approached to a short distance all 
around. 

Light.—A white circular iron tower, 38 feet high, on St. Jacques 
island, exhibits, at 182 feet above the level of the sea, an intermittent 
white light every ten seconds, thus: Light seven seconds, eclipse three 
seconds, which should be seen from a distance of 15 miles in clear 
weather. 


ST. JACQUES HARBOR—BOXEY ROCK. 193 


A white dwelling with a flat roof stands a short distance from the 
. light tower. 

St. Jacques harbor, the entrance of which is $ mile northwest- 
ward of the island, is clear of shoals, except a small spit off the east- 
ern point. 

Anchorage.—There is anchorage in the harbor, with good shelter, 
in 4 to 17 fathoms water, but in its northwestern part anchorage 
should not be taken in a less depth than 9 fathoms, as in shoaler water 
the bottom is rocky with kelp. 

Settlement.—A settlement surrounds the harbor; water and wood 
can be obtained, but no provisions. 

Communication.—The Newfoundland Railway steamer from St. 
Johns calls at St. Jacques weekly during summer and autumn. 

Blue Pinion harbor, 1? miles westward of St. Jacques harbor, 
extends 1 mile in a northerly direction, and is 700 yards broad; a 
shoal stretches 300 yards off its western side, near the head. 

Anchorage may be obtained at the head of the harbor in 5 to 15 
fathoms water, nearer the eastern shore to avoid the shoal, but it is 
open to southerly winds. 

English harbor, 1 mile west-southwestward of Blue Pinion har- 
bor, is suitable for small craft only; it is surrounded by a settlement 
having two churches. 

Great Mon Jambe (Great Mose Ambrose), nearly 1 mile west- 
ward of English harbor, is about 400 yards wide, and extends 
mile northerly; it affords anchorage for small craft in 4 to 5 fathoms 
water. Little Mon Jambe, next westward of it, is open to southerly 
winds. 

Boxey harbor, 34 miles westward of Blue Pinion harbor, is small 
and barred by a shoal with 3 fathoms water over it, but inside there 
is anchorage in 4 to 44 fathoms water, fine sand bottom. The mound 
on Boxey point in line with Friar head, bearing astern about 205°, 
leads in through the deepest channel. A few houses and a lobster fac- 
tory stand on the northern shore. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Boxey harbor at 
Sh. 48m.; springs rise 6% feet. 

Boxey Point promontory is nearly 3 miles long and rises to the 
height of 310 feet. Sunken rocks he off the points of the promon- 
tory, which should not be approached within } mile. 

Boxey rock, with 3 feet water over it, bears 209°, distant 735 yards, 
from Boxey point. 

Clearing marks.—The houses on the northern shore of Boxey 
harbor, open eastward of Friar head, bearing 16°, leads eastward; 
and the southwestern point of St. Johns island, open southward of 
Shepherd rock, bearing 283°, leads southward of Boxey rock. 


whe 


76846—09——13 


194 CREW POINT TO CAPE RAY. 


Vessels should not pass between the rock and the mainland, as a_ 
shoal, which breaks with a moderate sea, extends about 300 yards 
eff the point northwestward of the rock. 

St. Johns island, at the entrance to St. Johns bay, is 380 feet 
high; a shoal with a depth of 24 fathoms over it lies 400 yards south- 
ward of the middle of its southern side, and Kippins shoal, with 64 
fathoms least water over it, bears 158°, distant 800 yards from the 
southeastern point of the island. 

St. Johns head, bearing 302°, distant 3 miles from the south- 
western end of Boxey Point promontory, is the southwestern end of 
a promontory extending southeasterly 23 miles from the main; this 
promontory rises to the height of 542 feet, and its coasts are cliffy. 

St. Johns bay, between these promontories, has anchorage in 
moderate depth with offshore winds, the best being in its northern 
part, where the bay narrows to a boat harbor. 

Gull and Shag rocks are on the northern side of St. Johns head 
promontory; Shag rock is 51 feet high and } mile from the shore; 
westward and southward of these rocks, and also within the 100 
fathoms line which runs parallel to the promontory at about 14 
miles northward of it, are several shoals which are marked on the 
plan. 

Great bay de l’Eau.—FE astern head of Harbor Breton bears 286°, 
distant 4,6, miles from St. Johns head, and Great bay de l’Eau ex- 
tends 10 miles northeastward from between them. Great bay de ’Eau 
terminates in Old bay, and it affords no good anchorage except near 
its head. Devils island les in the bay at nearly 5 miles within St. 
Johns head, and forms two channels, the western of which is barred 
by a bank with 6 feet water over it; the eastern channel is clear. 

Anchorage.—Little Devils island is situated about 200 yards off 
the northern side of Devils island, and there is anchorage northward 
of it in 11 fathoms, or westward of it in 6 fathoms. 

Little bay, situated 34 miles in a northerly direction from St. 
Johns head, has anchorage on its western side in 7 to 10 fathoms 
water. <A rock lies off the western entrance point, and the head 
branches in two arms. 

River Head settlement is in the northwestern part of the bay, 
and wood and water may be obtained there. 

Harbor Breton, situated westward of Eastern head, extends 
north-northeastward for 9 miles, with Jerseyman harbor on the east- 
ern shore and Southwest arm, or Harbor Breton proper, on the west- 
ern shore at 2 miles within the entrance. 

Jerseyman harbor entrance is southward of Jerseyman head, a 
remarkable red-cliffed promontory. This harbor has excellent anchor- 
age for small vessels in 5 to 7 fathoms, but the entrance is barred by a 
shoal with 19 feet on it at low water. 


HARBOR BRETON—DIRECTIONS. 195 


The cliff fall of a hill, westward of the Barasway in Southwest 
arm, just open southward of Jerseyman head, bearing 261°, leads 
through the deepest part of the narrow channel over the bar, until 
the harbor is open, when haul northeastward and anchor as con- 
venient. 

The principal settlement is on the northwestern shore, where there 
isa wharf. It is shoal alongside the wharf, but at a few feet distant 
there is a depth of 5 fathoms. A lobster factory is situated on the 
eastern shore. 

Northeast arm of Harbor Breton is bordered by steep cliffs, 
and it affords no anchorage, except southward of the narrows, in 8 
fathoms water, for small vessels. 

Southwest arm, or Harbor Breton proper, extends southwestward 
160 yards, with a width of about 150 yards, to a bar of 12 feet water, 
when it passes into a basin about 700 yards across, with depths of 4 
to 10 fathoms. From the northern part of this basin, the Barasway, 
a shallow arm where small craft lie in safety, trends northeastward 
for about 1,800 yards. The largest settlement in Fortune bay is at 
Harbor Breton. 

Light.—A cylindrical tower, 29 feet high and painted red and 
white in horizontal bands, on Rocky point, the southeastern point of 
Southwest arm, exhibits at 68 feet above high water a fixed white 
hght, which should be seen from a distance of 9 miles in clear weather. 
The light is obscured when bearing about 141° over Harbor rock. 

Harbor rock, with 2? fathoms water over it, bears 28°, distant 200 
yards from Thompson beach. 

Buoy.—A red warping buoy is moored about 100 yards north- 
easterly from Harbor rock. 

Anchorage.—There is anchorage in any part of the arm north- 
eastward of the bar, but large vessels must anchor in about 17 fathoms 
water, northward of Harbor Rock buoy, with a good scope of cable 
out to prevent dragging with the heavy squalls that prevail with 
strong breezes, even in summer. 

There is not room for many large vessels, as the water deepens 
quickly to the northeastward. 

Mooring buoys.—Two red mooring buoys are placed in Harbor 
Breton at about 30 yards from the wharf on Thompson beach. The 
buoys lie close to the 3-fathom line of soundings and are 200 yards 
apart on a line bearing northeasterly and southwesterly. 

Directions.—Entering Harbor Breton in a small vessel, pass 
northward of the red warping buoy northward of Harbor rock, and 
anchor in 10 fathoms water, mud and gravel bottom, in the middle 
of the harbor between the red buoys off Thompson beach and the 
north shore, with two long wooden whitewashed buildings with 
black roofs on the southern shore bearing about 152°. 


196 CREW POINT TO CAPE RAY. 


Communication.—The Newfoundland Railway steamer from St. 
Johns calls at Harbor Breton weekly during summer and autumn; 
there is a telegraph station at the settlement. 

Ice.—Harbor Breton is sometimes closed by field ice; during a 
period of thirty years it has only been unavailable to the mail steamer 
on three occasions. The field ice appears toward the end of Febru- 
ary and leaves about March 25, the first vessels arriving at the end 
of April and the last leaving about the middle of December. The 
outer anchorage freezes over about the beginning of January, and 
harbor ice disappears about the middle of April. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Harbor Breton at 
8h. 52m.; springs rise 7 feet, neaps 54 feet; neaps range 4 feet. 

Deadman bight.—The shore westward of Harbor Breton is foul 
and rocky, forming a bay named Deadman bight, and there are sev- 
eral patches off Harbor Breton entrance, on some of which the sea 
breaks in gales. 

Offer rock, with 12 feet water on it, and the southern of a group 
of rocks, bears 214°, distant 1,700 yards from Gull island, which is 
situated about 400 yards offshore at a distance of 14 miles westward 
from Western head, the western entrance point of Harbor Breton; 
the beach of Saltwater cove, which is southward of Jerseyman har- 
bor, open southward of Western head, bearing 58°, leads 4 mile 
southward of Offer rock. 

Connaigre head, cliffy, bold, and 310 feet high, is the termination 
of a long promontory forming the western side of Deadman bight 
and the southeastern side of Connaigre bay. 

Connaigre rock, with 13 fathoms of water over it, bears 200°, 
distant 3 miles from Connaigre head. 

Connaigre bay.—Basse-terre point bears 283°, distant 8 miles 
from Connaigre head, and Connaigre bay extends northeastward 14 
miles from between them; it contains several islets and inlets. 

Shag rocks, 24 feet high, lie in the middle of the mouth of the 
bay; in using the channel northward of them observe that a ledge of 
rocks extends 1 mile from the northern shore. Black rock, 1 foot 
high, lies $ mile southwestward of Shag rocks. 

Clearing mark.—Seal island, well open southward of Basse-terre 
point, bearing 283°, leads close southward of Black rock. 

Great Harbor bight, on the southeastern side of the bay at 5 
miles northeastward of Connaigre head, is clear of shoals; there is 
anchorage in 10 fathoms water, at 400 yards from its head, but it is 
entirely open to southwesterly winds. 

Great harbor is within Will island, 310 feet high, which lies on 
the northwestern side of Great Harbor bight entrance, with no pas- 
sage between it and the mainland. To enter, pass southward of this 
island, and near the eastern shore of the harbor. 


DAWSON COVE—HERMITAGE BAY. 197 


Great and Little islands, 482 and 270 feet high, respectively, are 
northwestward of the harbor and in the middle of the bay; some 
rocks lie southward of these islands. 

Anchorage.—Small vessels can anchor, in 4 to 14 fathoms water, 
in Salmonier, at the head of Connaigre bay, but eastward of Great 
island there is no other anchorage except for boats. 

Dawson cove, on the northern side of the bay, about 5 miles in 
a northerly direction from Connaigre head, affords anchorage in 6 
fathoms of water, but it is open to southerly winds. 

Dog Cove head is at the southwestern end of Dawson cove, and 
the shore westward of the head is bordered by bowlders. Rocks and 
shoal water extend 1,700 yards southeastward from the bight, an open 
bay, at 34 miles westward of the head. 

Clearing mark.—Blow-me-down head, 692 feet high, well open 
eastward of Dog Cove head, bearing 58°, leads southeastward of these 
dangers. 

Basse-terre point, the western point of Connaigre bay, is bare, 
and the shore thence northwestward to Beck bay is foul; a confused 
sea is caused by South Red Head shoal, extending ? mile from Red 
point, 14 miles northwesterley from Basse-terre point. 

Pass island, the northern entrance point of Fortune bay and the 
southern of Hermitage bay, is about 1 mile long, and separated from 
the mainland by Pass Island tickle, a channel 265 yards wide, with a 
depth of 4 fathoms of water. A group of islets and shoals extends 
1 mile southwestward of Pass island, and Tom Cod rock, on which 
the sea breaks, lies about 4+ mile off its northwestern side. 

Lights.—A square white lighthouse with a lantern on its flat roof, 
33 feet high, on the summit of Pass island and near its southern end, 
exhibits at 281 feet above high water a fixed white light, which should 
be seen from a distance of 19 miles in clear weather. 

A lantern placed at the corner of the above highthouse exhibits at 
267 feet above high water a fixed red light, which is visible from 
300° to 76°, or over an arc of 136°, included between Basse-terre point 
and the shoal ground off Wolf rock; the two lights appear as one at 
the distance of about 44 miles. 

Signals.—This light station is supplied with the International 
code of signals. 

Settlement—Anchorage.—There is a fairly large settlement on 
Pass island and anchorage for small vessels can be obtained in 64 
fathoms water, sand bottom, in Pass Island tickle, off the houses in 
the middle of the island, but it is quite open to the southward. 

Hermitage bay.—Western head of Long island bears 27°, 83 
miles from Pass island and Hermitage bay extends eastward nearly 
25 miles from between them; the bay contains several anchorages. 
Grole western cove, about 3 miles eastward of Pass island, is the 


198 CREW POINT TO CAPE RAY. 


western of these, and affords anchorage in 9 fathoms water. Grole 
cove is suitable for boats only; there is a settlement around it. 

Fox islands.—F ox island, 210 feet high, and Little Fox island, 89 
feet high, with Fox Island rock, 26 feet high, between them, are situ- 
ated # mile from the southern shore at 10 to 114 miles eastward of 
Pass island. Several rocks lie off the northwestern side of Fox island, 
the western and larger island, and Virgin rock is situated off its 
eastern side. A reef extends 250 yards westward of Little Fox island. 
Eastward of these islands Hermitage bay narrows to a mile in width. 

Hermitage cove, southeastward of the eastern end of Fox island, 
is ? mile deep, nearly 800 yards broad, and affords good anchorage 
in 8 fathoms water, at 800 yards from the head. A settlement, having 
a stone church, surrounds the cove. The squalls are heavy here, and 
great care is necessary in boat sailing. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Hermitage cove at 
Sh. 45m.; springs rise 7 feet; neaps 43 feet. 

Anchorage.—There are many anchorages suitable for small craft 
eastward of Hermitage cove, among which are Furby, Olive, Hardy, 
Salmonier, and Northwest coves. There is good anchorage for large 
vessels at the head of Hermitage bay in 22 fathoms and less water 
as convenient. 

Ice.—The head of Hermitage bay for some 5 to 8 miles is generally 
frozen between the first week in January and the first week in April. 

Little passage is a deep, narrow channel, connecting Hermitage 
and Despair bays, and separating Long island from the mainland. 
Its southern entrance is about 11 miles from the head of Hermitage 
bay, and it is navigable in mid-channel, passing westward of the two 
islands off l’anse &4 Flamme. L’anse & Flamme, branching into sev- 
eral small coves, is situated on its western side at + mile from Mar- 
gery head, the western entrance point and the southeastern end of 
Long island; it affords anchorage for small vessels, near its head, in 
13 fathoms water. 

At 3 miles within the southern entrance is a small islet about 30 
feet high, with a clear passage on either side of it. 

Little islet, 20 feet high and separated from the eastern shore by a 
narrow shallow channel, is $ mile farther northward. The navigable 
channel, which is here only 150 yards wide, is close along the coast of 
Long island. 

Maria cove in Long island and about 600 yards northward of Little 
islet, has some sunken rocks in it. Northward of Maria cove keep 
Day point shut in with the eastern shore, bearing 21° to clear a rock 
off the point southward of Cold harbor, until the waterfall in Deer 
cove bears 96°, when a mid-channel course leads to Despair bay. 

Long island, separating Hermitage bay from Despair bay, is 
barren and rugged, with many valleys, and it reaches in Mullins hill 


GAULTOIS HARBOR—LONG ISLAND ROCK. 199 


a height of 819 feet ; its coasts are much indented, and contain several 
harbors available for small vessels. 

Gaultois harbor, on the southern side of Long island and about 
a mile westward of Margery head, is small, and there are some islets 
in the middle of its entrance. Whale or Lamy islet, on which is a 
boiling house for whale oil, is the northern of these islets, and it, 
open eastward of West head, bearing 13°, leads eastward of a rock 
with 3 feet of water over it, lying 50 yards southward of the head, 
after passing which keep West head aboard. 

Light.—A red iron column, placed on a rock (awash at high 
water) off West head, exhibits at 14 feet above high water a fixed 
white light. 

A tramway, on which the light is run out, extends from a small 
store on West head to the column. The light, kept on a bearing 6°, 
leads eastward of the sunken rock above mentioned. 

Buoy.—A mooring buoy is placed about 200 yards westward of 
Whale islet. 

Anchorage.—Vessels anchor in 24 fathoms of water, avoiding the 
heavy moorings laid from Whale island to the opposite shore, or 
they make fast to the buoy. 

Ice.—Field ice arrives about the middle of February and leaves 
toward the end of March; Gaultois harbor seldom freezes except 
during severe winters with calm weather, and the ice generally 
breaks up in a few days. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Gaultois harbor at 8h. 
45m. (approximately) ; springs rise 7 feet, neaps 42 feet. 

Picarre harbor, 1} miles westward of Gaultois, is 400 yards wide; 
on the eastern side of the entrance is a shoal, with 16 feet of water 
over it, bearing 197°, distant 300 yards from Crow nest, the eastern 
entrance point; also Mad Doll, drying 2 feet, and Crazy Betty, dry- 
ing 14 feet. 

The western side of the harbor must be kept aboard to clear these 
shoals; the Narrows, at the head of the harbor, shut in with Buffett 
point, $ mile inside the entrance on the western side, bearing 13°, 
clears them, and there is anchorage immediately within Crazy Betty 
in 11 to 13 fathoms water, or for small vessels as far in as the 
Narrows. 

Round harbor is 2? miles westward of Picarre, and its entrance 
is 200 feet wide. It is only suitable for small vessels. 

Little Bay and Sam Hitches harbor are two narrow inlets 
entered at about 2 miles westward of Round harbor. They afford 
anchorage to small craft only. 

Long Island rock, bearing 232°, distant $ mile from Western 
head, the southwestern point of Long island, is 10 feet high and 
steep-to. 


200 CREW POINT TO CAPE RAY. 


Despair bay, entered between Western and Great Jervis heads, 
both prominent bluffs, is divided into two principal arms, the eastern 
extending 22 miles and the northern 13 miles. Off the western en- 
trance point are several islands and shoals. The land in this locality 
is hilly and barren, but at the head of the bay it becomes flat, and 
there is an abundance of wood. 

Ice.—-The head of Despair bay generally freezes about the end of 
December, and clears about April 20. 

Big shoal, with 16 feet water over it, hes 735 yards from the north 
coast of Long island at about one mile eastward of Green point, 
which is near the northwestern end of that island. 

Clearing marks.—Saddle island open westward of Long island, 
bearing 228°, leads northwestward, and Harbor le Gallais hill open 
northward of Grip island, bearing 85°, leads northward of Big shoal. 

Grip island, small and 65 feet high, is connected with Long island 
by a reef at 2,5, miles eastward of Green point. 

Patrick harbor, 1,5 miles eastward of Grip island, offers anchor- 
age for small vessels in 6 fathoms water. The western entrance point 
rises to a wooded cone, about 200 feet high, and close off the point is a 
sunken rock. The eastern entrance point is a small promontory 10 
feet high, close off which are a rock that covers at high water and a 
sunken rock; there are no shoals in the harbor. 

Patrick Harbor rock, bearing 32°, distant + mile from the eastern 
entrance point of the harbor, uncovers 2 feet at low water. Two 
sunken rocks lie westward of it, the western being distant 350 yards. 

Clearing mark.—The summit of Great Jervis island, open north- 
ward of Long island, bearing 249°, leads northward of these rocks. 

Harbor le Gallais is situated eastward of Harbor le Gallais hill, 
a wooded cone, 280 feet high, immediately eastward of Patrick harbor. 
It is only suitable for small vessels, being 150 yards wide, with depths 
of 4 to 6 fathoms. 

A rock that covers lies close to the north entrance point, and sunken 
rocks lie eastward 265 yards from it. 

Sloop rock, a small bare islet 15 feet high, bears 68°, distant 1,200 
yards from Harbor le Gallais north entrance point, and Gull rock, 
which uncovers 3 feet at low water, bears 224°, distant 400 yards from 
Sloop rock. The depth between these rocks is from 4} to 9 fathoms, 
uneven bottom. 

Raymond point, the northeastern end of Long island, is a small 
cliff close northeastward of a wooded hillock 99 feet. high; a few 
houses stand between the several mounds within the point. 

Day cove, 1 mile southeastward of Raymond point, affords an- 
chorage to small vessels off its entrance, in 10 fathoms water, but is 
open to easterly winds. 


FOX ISLAND—RICHES ISLAND. 201 


Fox island, northwestward $ mile from Raymond point, is 370 
feet high; a rock 6 feet high lies close to its western end, and in 
several places there are small rocks close off the island. 

Dollond bight, situated 3 miles northeastward of Brimball head, 
which bears 88°, distant 1,%; miles from Raymond point, affords open 
anchorage in 13 to 20 fathoms water. 

Taylor Island rocks extend southward 100 yards from a small islet 
at the northern point of Dollond bight, but there are no other shoals. 

Simmonds barasway, immediately northwestward of Dollond 
bight, shoals gradually from the depth of 15 fathoms in the entrance 
to the narrows at the head, where it dries at low water. 

Anchorage.—There is anchorage in 10 fathoms water just inside 
the entrance, and for small vessels in less depths farther in. 

Cape Mark is the western end of a narrow, wooded promontory 
157 to 197 feet in height, which forms the northern side of Simmonds 
barasway. 

Gull cove, a small indentation at the northeastern end of the north- 
ern side of the promontory, affords anchorage for small craft in 7 
fathoms water. 

Barasway de Cerf, about 1,600 yards eastward of Gull cove, is 
shoal and suitable for boats only. 

Sunken rocks extend + mile northward of Barasway de Cerf en- 
trance; the southern side of Bois island open northwestward of 
Ingram point, between Gull cove and the Barasway, bearing 234°, 
leads northwestward of them. 

Little river, the entrance of which bears 50°, distant 14 miles 
from Ingram point, is a narrow arm of the sea expanding into a large 
basin at its head, and again contracting into an arm that extends 
northward; it is suitable for small vessels only, as a depth of no more 
than 13 feet can be carried in, and the tidal streams attain a rate of 3 
knots an hour. 

A wooded islet, 38 feet high, from which a reef extends northeast- 
ward to about 50 yards from the southern shore, divides the narrow 
arm into two channels; the northern is shallow, and a rock that covers 
hes in the middle, but the southern is practicable by keeping close to 
the shore till past the reef, when a mid-channel course leads to the 
basin. 

Arran back cove, west of the basin, is shallow, and the head of the 
basin is almost dry at low water. 

Riches island, 433 feet high, situated westward 4 mile from Little 
river entrance, is nearly connected to the mainland eastward of it by 
islets and reefs. 

Sunken rocks lie 250 yards off its eastern end, and Seal rocks, that 
are awash at high water, lie 150 yards off its southeastern side. 


202 CREW POINT TO CAPE RAY. 


Anchorage may be obtained off Little river entrance in 14 fathoms, 
or eastward of Riches island in 7 fathoms, mud bottom, good holding 
ground. 

Dawson passage is between Riches and Bois islands. <A shoal ex- 
tends eastward from Dawson point, the northeastern end of Bois 
island, into the passage, and at the eastern end of the shoal, at 250 
yards distant from Riches island, is a rock with 3$ fathoms water 
over it. Vessels should, therefore, be kept close to Riches island in 
proceeding through the passage. 

Arran cove entrance is northeastward of Riches island, and the 
cove extends 14 miles in an east-northeasterly direction. The south- 
ern shore is foul for a short distance off it, but the northern shore is 
bold, with the exception of a rock, quite close to it, in the first small 
bight within the entrance. 

Little Crow head forms the northern entrance point of Arran cove, 
and Crow head is about 800 yards northward of it. These heads are 
conspicuous cliffs rising to heights of 525 and 718 feet. 

Anchorage.—There is anchorage about halfway up Arran cove 
in 12 fathoms water, or farther toward the head in less depths. 

Water can be taken from a stream falling into the cove. 

Conne river entrance is on the eastern side of the northeastern 
arm of Despair bay, at 4 miles above Crow head, and the river, at 
about a mile within the entrance, flows through a channel only 200 
yards wide. Eastward of this narrow channel the water is shallow 
and suitable only for vessels drawing less than 12 feet of water, which 
anchor immediately inside, as the greater portion of the arm to the 
eastward dries at low water. 

There is a small settlement of Indians immediately eastward of the 
narrow channel, and a church stands on a mound on the southern side 
of this channel, but it is hidden from the westward by trees. 

Anchorage, with good holding ground, may be obtained in 6 
fathoms or less water in the river entrance, but proceed slowly, and 
carefully watch the soundings when taking up a berth. 

Ship cove is situated on the western side of the northeastern arm 
of Despair bay, opposite to Conne river. 

Birchy point is the northeastern end of a small projection in the 
cove, which rises to a mound 55 feet high, southwestward of which is 
a small settlement and a church. The cove northwestward of Birchy 
point is dry at low water. 

Anchorage may be obtained in the middle and near the entrance 
of Ship cove in 7 fathoms water. 

Supplies.—Water can always be taken from Big Rattling brook, 
a large stream which flows into the bay at about 14 miles southward 
of Ship cove, and a small quantity of beef and vegetables may gener- 
ally be obtained in summer. 


DESPAIR BAY—BOIS ISLAND. 203 


Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Ship cove at 8h. 36m.; 
springs rise 74 feet, neaps 53 feet; neaps range 34 feet. 

A stream runs through the narrow channels of Despair bay and 
Conne river, but it rarely attains the rate of 1 knot an hour. 

Head of Despair bay.—Northward of Ship cove the northeastern 
arm of Despair bay narrows to the breadth of } mile, and is clear of 
shoals, except off Clarke cove, the first bight eastward of the narrows, 
where a bank, with less than 3 fathoms water over it, extends to the 
line of the points. 

A rock that dries 3 feet les close to the eastern shore, at 4+ mile 
northeastward of the narrows. 

Swagger cove, on the western shore, is immediately northwest- 
ward of the narrows, and dries to its mouth at low water. 

Anchorage.—There is anchorage, in 5 fathoms, on a bank extend- 

ing eastward from the cove. 
. Weasel islet consists of two rocks, the higher 5 feet high, joined 
together and to the southern shore of the bay, from which they are 
100 vards distant, at low water, situated northeastward 13 miles from 
Eads point, the southern entrance point of Swagger cove. 

Several conspicuous white houses stand on a spit immediately 
southwestward of this islet, from which shoal water extends 200 yards 
to the depth of 3 fathoms. Northward of Weasel islet there is a 
good salmon and sea trout river, and deer may be obtained in the 
vicinity. 

Telegraph station.—There is a telegraph station of the Anglo- 
American Company northeastward 13 miles from Weasel islet. 

Landing.—Deepwater point, about 800 yards northwestward of 
the station, and just southward of the southernmost garden visible, is 
the only landing place at low water for the station, as the bay dries 
4 mile from the mouth of Southeast brook, a considerable stream, 
close southeastward of the station. 

Anchorage.—The western limit of the anchorage at the head 
of Despair bay is with the eastern entrance point of Cock and Hen 
cove, bearing 331°, in 54 fathoms of water, with 20 fathoms close 
westward. From this line the depths decrease gradually, the deepest 
water being nearer the northern shore. 

Bois island, dividing the southern part of the northeastern arm 
of Despair bay into two channels, is 8 miles long and 2 miles wide 
at its broadest part; its summit is a barren hill, 664 feet high, about 
800 yards within the middle of its northern coast. 

Flobber Cove islet, 15 feet high, hes close off the southeastern 
coast at about 14 miles from Dawson point, and there are two rocks 
that cover at high water, eastward of that islet, the eastern being 
distant 100 yards. 


204 CREW POINT TO CAPE RAY. 


May cove, northward of May head, the southeastern point of Bois 
island, affords anchorage in 74 fathoms water, and is clear except 
that a shoal extends 150 yards northward from May head, and the 
head of the cove dries at low water. 

A shoal, with 34 fathoms water over it, bears 85°, distant 300 yards 
from May head. 

Snooks Harbor entrance is about 2; miles westward of May 
head, and the harbor, being encumbered with rocks, is suitable for 
boats only. 

Big Copper head, the southwestern end of Bois island, is a red-’ 
dish yellow cliff, 340 feet high. Eastward of it is a cove with a 
shingle beach, and off the cove is a rock that covers at high water, 
distant nearly 200 yards from the shore. 

Roti bay is in the mainland, and its entrance is 4 mile northward 
of Dawson passage. The bay extends northwestward 2 miles, and 
thence an arm continues southwestward for about 4 mile. 

A rock, that uncovers 2 feet at low water, lies nearly in mid- 
channel, 1,400 yards northwestward from the entrance, and is joined 
by a bar, with 54 fathoms water over it, to the eastern shore. 

There is no convenient passage westward of the rock, but the 
western end of Riches island completely open east of the western 
entrance point, bearing 144°, will lead east of the rock. 

Shoal water extends 150 yards from the southern entrance point 
of the arm at the head, and also a short distance from the northern 
shore, leaving a passage only 150 yards wide, with a depth of 4 
fathoms, to that arm. 

Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained in from 14 to 17 fathoms 
water, at + mile within the entrance, or northward of the rock, in 
the same depths. 

Water.—Water may be procured from the streams in the north- 
western arm or from the bight westward of the rock in the bay. 

Lampidoes passage, the channel north of Bois island, has deep 
water throughout. The northern shore rises precipitously in high 
cliffs, and is indented by one large and several small coves. 

During northwesterly and southeasterly winds violent squalls 
sweep through this passage, and vessels should then avoid it. 

Rock.—A rock, with 5 feet of water on it, lies 100 yards from the 
shore, bearing 33°, distant 41 mile from Western head, the south- 
' western point of entrance to Lampidoes passage. 

Margery cove, at 2} miles west-southwestward of Roti bay en- 
trance and eastward of Margery head, a steep clitf 500 feet high, is 
formed by a small projection 38 feet high, and extends about 200 
yards in a westerly direction. 

Northwest cove, on the northern shore near the middle of the 
passage, extends north-northeastward # mile. 


POMLEY COVE—NORTH BAY. 205 


Anchorage.—Anchorage for small vessels may be obtained at 
the head of Northwest cove in 7 fathoms water, over mud. 

Pomley cove, 2 miles west-southwestward of Northwest cove, has 
anchorage for small vessels only, in 64 fathoms water, at 150 yards 
from the shore. The head of the cove dries at low water. 

Goblin head, probably so named from its showing a resemblance 
to the profile of a face on certain bearings, is a steep bluff sur- 
mounted by a round hill 648 feet high. It forms the southern en- 
trance point to Goblin bay, an indentation extending northeasterly 
nearly 2 miles, with deep water throughout, and no anchorage. Two 
small islets, 15 feet high, with rocks between, le close to the south- 
eastern shore of the bay, near the head. 

Middle Goblin bay is a narrow inlet extending northward about 
1,200 yards from the outer part of Goblin bay, from which it is 
separated by a round hill 520 feet high. Two rocks, one round and 
the other square, and each 11 feet high, lie southward and southwest- 
ward of the entrance, and a rock, that covers at high water, lies 50 
yards southeastward of the round rock. 

This bay is not suitable for large vessels, as a rock, with 6 feet water 
over it, lies in the middle, but small craft pass on either side of the 
rock, in 8 fathoms of water, and anchor inside it in 5 to 10 fathoms. 

Little Goblin bay, westward of Middle Goblin bay and separated 
from it by a hill 503 feet high, being encumbered with rocks, is only 
suitable for boats. 

Raymond island, northward 2 miles from the northern point 
of Goblin head and separated from the mainland by Raymond pas- 
sage, a channel 100 yards wide, is 265 feet high. 

East bay, a little more than 6 miles in length, contains depths 
ranging from 30 to 100 fathoms as far in as the eastern entrance 
point of Northwest cove, a distance of about 22 miles. A small islet, 
15 feet high, is joined at low water to the eastern shore of the north- 
eastern arm opposite the eastern entrance point of Northwest cove, 
and a few rocks he close southwestward of that islet. 

Anchorage.—There is anchorage in 74 fathoms water, northward 
of the islet, or in less depths for small vessels farther eastward, the 
water shoaling gradually to the head. 

Northwest cove, the northern arm, is deep and unsuitable for 
anchorage except in small vessels, which anchor in 7 fathoms water 
200 yards from the head. 

Stone point is the southern end of the land dividing East bay 
‘from North bay, and it rises to a small conical hill 102 feet high under 
other round hills northwestward of it. 

North bay extends in a northerly direction for 74 miles, and is 
clear of shoals till near its head. Its shores are bold, in many places 


206 CREW POINT TO CAPE RAY. 


precipitous, and the water is deep. Anchorage can be obtained only 
at the following mentioned places. 

First brook, a small indentation on the eastern short at 14 miles 
within the entrance, affords anchorage for small vessels only, in 7 to 
11 fathoms water. 

Second Brook cove, 2 miles farther in on the same shore, has no 
anchorage. 

Telegraph station.—A telegraph station of the Anglo-American 
Company stands on a low point near the head of the bay at a little 
more than $ mile from Indian point, which is on the eastern shore at 
356, miles within the northern entrance point of Second Brook cove. 

Indian point.—Anchorage can be obtained from 600 yards below 
Indian point and in mid-channel, in 64 fathoms water, to abreast that 
point, in 45 fathoms water. The bank falls rapidly southward from 
a depth of 64 to 46 fathoms. 

Small vessels proceed as far as Dogberry rock, a small islet 4 feet 
high, joined to the eastern shore at 600 yards above Indian point; 
there is a good salmon and sea trout river at the head of the bay, and 
deer frequent the vicinity. 

Water can be taken from several brooks flowing into the bay on 
each side, near the head. A large stream flows into the head, west- 
ward of the telegraph station, but it is completely obstructed by 
bowlders at low water. 

North Bay head, the western entrance point, rises in cliffs to the 
height of 600 feet, and there is a hill 1,045 feet high at ? mile north- 
ward of it. On the southwestern side of the head is a conspicuous 
white stripe. 

Cul-de-sac, a small basin close westward of North Bay head, con- 
tains anchorage for small vessels in 4 to 6 fathoms water, but the 
entrance is only 80 yards wide with a depth of 3 fathoms in it. 

Sugarloaf island.—Cul-de-sac point bears southwestward, distant 
~ mile from North Bay head, and Sugarloaf point 4 mile farther 
southwestward. Sugarloaf island, close off the point, rises to a con- 
ical hill 264 feet high. 

There is a passage for boats between it and the point. A rock, 
with 6 feet water on it, lies close to the western end of the island. 

Great Cuiller bay, the entrance of which is between Sugarloaf 
and Great Cuiller point, bearing 168°, distant 800 yards from the 
eastern end of the island, extends westward 14 miles, narrowing 
gradually to its head. 

A rock, awash at high water, lies in Great Cuiller bay at 1,700! 
yards westward of Great Cuiller point and nearly 200 yards off the 
southern shore, and a sunken rock lies 100 yards eastward of it. The 
passages, both northward and southward of these rocks, are clear; 
the southern is less than 100 yards, while the northern is 250 yards 
in width. 


GREAT CUILLER POINT—-GREAT JERVIS ISLAND. 207 


Leading mark.—Stone point in line with the passage northward 
of Sugarloaf island, bearing 64°, leads northward of these rocks. 

Anchorage.—There is anchorage westward of the rocks, in 7 to 10 
fathoms, good holding ground, but eastward of them the water 
is deep. 

Great Cuiller point.—A remarkable white patch, that from a 
distance looks like a church with a spire, appears on the land at 
300 yards southwestward of this point. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Great Cuiller bay at 
8h. 55m.; springs rise 64 feet, neaps 5 feet; neaps range 3 feet. 

Little Cuiller bay, southward of Great Cuiller point, is clear of 
shoals, except at the head which dries to the narrows. 

Anchorage for small vessels may be obtained in 84 to 10 fathoms 
water, but open to easterly winds. 

Birchy cove is southward of Little Cuiller bay. Its shores are 
foul for a short distance, and shoal water extends 200 yards from the 
southern entrance point. 

Stone islet, about 20 feet high, les in the mouth of this cove bear- 
ing 162°, distant 700 yards from its northern entrance point. 

Anchorage may be obtained in 11 to 14 fathoms water, at the 
distance of 400 yards from a small projection at the middle of the 
head of the cove. 

Stanley cove, } mile southward of Birchy cove, is a small bight, 
with several houses on the shingle beach at its head. It affords 
shelter for boats or small craft in 4 to 9 fathoms. 

Old Harry, a high pinnacle rock, is the southernmost of three 
similar pillars that are close to the headland southward of Stanley 
cove. 

Manuel arm, an open bay southwestward of Old Harry headland, 
extends westward 1 mile from its entrance and has a width of about 
1,400 yards; it contains no anchorage, except for boats or fishing 
vessels quite close to the shore. 

Great Jervis harbor is on the western side of the entrance to 
Despair bay. The northern entrance point is low, and fringed by 
rocks extending 65 yards. On the northern shore of the harbor are 
several small coves. 

Man-of-war cove, the eastern, has anchorage for small vessels as 
far in as the wharf on its eastern shore. 

Man-of-war rocks, on the western side of the entrance to Man-of- 

yar cove, are two pinnacles, 4 feet high, joined at low water. A 
rock, that uncovers at low water, lies 40 yards southward of these 
rocks. 

Great Jervis island divides the entrance to the harbor. The 
summit, 442 feet high, is a sharp peak at about 600 yards from the 


208 CREW POINT TO CAPE RAY. 


eastern end of the island, which is bounded by cliffs, and is bold-to. 
Shoal water extends 50 yards from the northern end. 

The Brothers uncover 3 feet at low water and extend 150 yards 
from the northwestern end of Great Jervis island; shoal water ex- 
tends about 65 yards northward of the Brothers. 

Dory rock, that just uncovers at low water, lies close to the western 
end of Great Jervis island. 

Push through is a passage for boats at high water between the 
promontory and the island forming the southern shore of the harbor, 
under a bridge which connects them. <A considerable settlement is 
situated in this locality, with a schoolhouse and a church. A flagstaff 
stands on a hill, 102 feet high, at the western part of the island. 

A rock, on which the least water is 7 feet, lies 150 yards from the 
southern shore of the harbor, and + mile westward from the north- 
western end of Push through. 

The Barasway is situated about $ mile west-southwestward of 
Great Jervis island; a small rock lies close to the southward of its 
northern entrance point. 

Anchorages.—There is anchorage, in 14 fathoms water, off the 
entrance to the Barasway: in 9 to 16 fathoms, southward of Pearl 
island; and in 8 fathoms, between Great Jervis island and Man-of- 
war cove. 

Directions.—The best entrance to the harbor is southward of 
Great Jervis island; if proceeding to the anchorage off the Barasway, 
avoid the rock, with 7 feet water on it, off the southern shore. 

In a small vessel proceeding from the anchorage northward of 
Great Jervis island into the western part of the harbor, keep the 
northern entrance point of the harbor just open southward of Man- 
of-war rocks, bearing 79°, which leads between the Brothers and the 
rocks southwestward of Shallop cove; the high house of Western har- 
bor open westward of Great Jervis island, bearing 167°, leads west- 
ward of the Brothers. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Great Jervis harbor 
at 8h. 55m.; springs rise 64 feet, neaps 5 feet; neaps range 3 feet. 
The tidal streams in the harbor are scarcely perceptible, and the 
movement of the water is much influenced by the prevailing winds. 

Pigeon island, 19 feet high, lies southward of Western harbor, a 
small cove on the southern side of the promontory southward of Great 
Jervis harbor. Crib Nose shoal, bearing 480°, distant 150 yards from 
the eastern extremity of Pigeon island, has 11 feet water on it. — 

Pigeon Island shoal, bearing 129°, distant 600 yards from Pigeon 
island, has 13 feet water over it. 

Saddle island, nearly 1 mile southwestward of Dawson point, 
rises to two conspicuous hills, the southern conical and 243 feet high. 
The eastern coast of the island is bordered by rocks as far as White 


BUFFET TICKLE—BONNE BAY HARBOR. 209 


rock, an islet 7 feet high. Two sunken rocks lie nearly 200 yards 
from the southern point of the island, and Black rock, an islet 9 feet 
high, bears 186°, distant 265 yards from the same point. 

Buffett tickle, the narrow passage northward of Saddle island, is 
only suitable for small vessels. The passage between Saddle island 
and Middle island is clear in mid-channel. 

Middle or Crooked island, 225 feet high, is clear at a short 
distance from its eastern coast, but its western coast is foul, and the 
bight contains several islets and rocks. 

Mark rocks, 250 yards southeastward of the southeastern point of 
Middle island, uncover 44 feet at low water. 

Mark Rocks shoal, 100 yards eastward of Mark rocks, has 3 fath- 
oms water over it. 

Bonne bay extends northward 24 miles from its entrance between 
Middle and Taylor islands. . 

Drake or Gooseberry island, 31 feet high, lies in the middle of 
the bay, and there is a good passage on either side of it, but it should 
not be approached within the distance of 100 yards. 

Anchorage for small vessels may be obtained at the head of Bonne 
bay, in 7 fathoms water, at 600 yards distance from the mouth of 
the brook at the head. 

Taylor island is 408 feet high, and near its northern end is a 
round wooded hill, 352 feet high, known as Crib Nose. 

The northeastern coast of Taylor island is very foul, small rocks 
and islets extending 150 yards off it; and Hardy rock lies 250 yards 
from the northern point of Hardy cove, a small bight with some 
houses around it. 

Leading mark.—The extreme of the western shore of Bonne bay 
shut in with Drake island, bearing 329°, leads into Bonne bay east- 
ward of Hardy rock. 

Taylor rock, bearing 115°, distant 750 yards from Salmon point, 
the southeastern point of Taylor island, has 4 fathoms of water over it. 

Clearing marks.—The mark given for leading eastward of 
Hardy rock also leads eastward of Taylor rock, and Mosquito island 
open southward of Grip head, bearing 293°, leads southward of this 
rock. 

Whale rock, bearing 149°, distant 550 yards from Grip head, the 
western of the southern points of Taylor island, dries 4 feet at low 
water. 

Rocky passage, the channel westward of Taylor island, contains 
numerous rocks, and is available for small vessels with local 
knowledge only. 

Bonne Bay harbor, situated northwestward of Taylor island, is 
about 700 yards across and completely sheltered from all winds, but 


76846—09——_14 


210 CREW POINT TO CAPE RAY. 


there is anchorage only in its western portion, where there are depths 
of 14 to 17 fathoms. Large vessels should anchor in 17 fathoms, with 
Drake island completely shut in by Poole island, bearing about 28°. 

A rock, which dries 1 foot, les nearly 100 yards off the southern 
entrance point of the harbor on the western shore, and a shoal, with 
33 fathoms water on it, is situated in the middle of the harbor. 

Kelpy rock, bearing 259°, distant 1,100 yards from Grip head, 
has 33 fathoms of water over it, and a shoal, 150 yards northwestward 
of Kelpy rock, has 4 fathoms water over it. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Bonne Bay harbor at 
8h. 54m.; springs rise 64 feet, neaps 5 feet; neaps range 3 feet. 

Mosquito harbor, close westward of Bonne bay, extends north- 
westward nearly 14 miles, and it is clear of shoals, but there is an- 
chorage, only for small vessels, in 8 fathoms of water in a cove on 
the western side of the head. 

Mosquito island, separated from the western entrance point of 
the harbor by a shallow channel. containing several rocks, is flat in 
outline, 295 feet high, and cliffy to seaward. 

Mosquito Back cove extends, westward of the harbor, to the 
shingle beach that joins the western peninsula of Mosquito harbor to 
the mainland, and it is quite open. 

Halibut rocks are two rocks, the higher 5 feet high, bearing 
296°, distant nearly 1,400 yards from the western point of Mosquito 
island, and they are surrounded by sunken rocks that extend south- 
ward } mile. 

Razorback rock, with 34 fathoms water over it, bears 290°, dis- 
tant 1,100 yards from Halibut rocks. 

Clearing mark.—Bear head open southward of Fish head, bear- 
ing 270°, leads southward of all these rocks and those southward of 
Taylor island. 

Facheux Eye, a small cove with a waterfall at its head, is close . 
eastward of Eastern head of Facheux bay. This cove is available for 
boats only, and is entered by keeping close to the eastern shore, as the 
western side is foul. 

Facheux Head shoal, at 300 yards from the shore and 600 yards 
westward of the entrance to Facheux Eye, has 4 fathoms water 
over it. 

Facheux hay extends northward 10 miles in nearly a straight line; 
it is deep and there are no anchorages in it except at the places 
mentioned. 

Allan cove, on the eastern shore at 44 miles from the entrance, 
extends 4 mile eastward, and it affords good anchorage in 8 to 9 
fathoms water at about 400 yards eastward of the line of the entrance 
points. 


BRENT COVE—RICHARDS HARBOR. 2Tt 


The head of Facheux bay, southward of the narrows, affords 
anchorage in 6 to 10 fathoms water, the latter depth being } mile 
distant. Southward of that depth the soundings increase suddenly 
to 40 fathoms. 

Brent cove, on the western shore and opposite to Allan cove, ex- 
tends 1,400 yards westward, but shoal water and ground that uncovers 
at low water extend 600 yards from the head. 

This cove affords good anchorage in 6 to 10 fathoms water, close 
within the entrance points, but the plateau falls suddenly eastward 
to a depth of 34 fathoms. 

_ Black Otter rub, a small projection, 10 feet high, situated on the 
western shore at about # mile southward of the cove, is a good mark. 

Dennis arm, on the western shore at 2? miles within the entrance, 
is 1 mile long and 150 yards broad; it affords good anchorage for 
small vessels in 7 to 9 fathoms water. The northern shore is bold-to, 
but off the southern side there is a fringe of foul ground that dries 
at low water, and the head dries for 200 yards from the tree line. 

Warren cove, on the western shore of Facheux bay at 14 miles 
from the entrance, affords anchorage for small vessels only, in 8 
fathoms water, and close to the shore. A conspicuous white stripe 
shows on the cliff on the northern side of the cove. 

Facheux harbor, separated from Warren cove by a bare prom- 
ontory, 167 feet high, that terminates in low rocky points, is suitable 
for boats only. 

Dragon bay extends west-northwestward for about 3 miles; it is 
deep, and there is only anchorage for small vessels in the narrow 
arm at its head. 

A rock lies 100 yards distant from the shore, immediately eastward 
of a small projection on the northern shore, westward of which is a 
waterfall. 

Muddy hole is a small boat harbor nearly one mile westward of 
Dragon bay. There is a depth of 8 feet at high water in its entrance, 
but there is a rock that uncovers in the middle, and local knowledge 
is necessary to avoid it. Boats anchor at the head of the harbor. 

Richards harbor is situated about 3 miles westward of Dragon 
bay. The entrance passes between precipitous cliffs, on the western 
side, and low points under cliff on the eastern side. 

For 600 yards within the entrance the harbor trends northward, 
it then turns more eastward for a farther distance of 600 yards, with 
a breadth of 400 yards to the head. The turning point on the south- 
ern shore is a small islet, 12 feet high, joined to the mainland at low 
water. Sunken rocks lie a short distance southwestward of this islet. 

Anchorage.—This harbor is available for temporary anchorage 
only, as the depths vary from 20 to 24 fathoms, with indifferent hold- 


212, CREW POINT TO CAPE RAY. 


ing ground, and violent squalls sweep down the valley with strong 
breezes from northwest to southeast, which are sufficient to cause 
vessels to drag, though there is no sea. In emergency vessels can, 
however, be secured to rocks on the shore. 

Shoal Point rock, bearing 174°, distant 200 yards from Lower 
Shoal point, the western entrance point, has 44 fathoms of water 
over it. 

The coast westward of Richards harbor is cliff, colored alternately 
red and gray, the red being very conspicuous in sunshine. A wedge- 
shaped rock, 22 feet high, lies close to Upper Shoal point, at one mile 
westward of Richards harbor, southwestward of which and distant 
200 yards is a bank, with 53 fathoms water over it, that breaks in bad 
weather. 

Bear head is + mile westward of Upper Shoal point. 

Horse brook, a remarkable waterfall, is situated in the cove next 
westward of Bear head, and Mare fall, a wider but less elevated 
stream, falls over the cliffs into a cove at 14 miles farther westward. 

Several banks lie off this coast, but none are dangerous except with 
a very heavy sea. 

Hare bay, about 34 miles westward of Bear head, extends north- 
ward 4 miles, with an average breadth of + mile, when it expands in 
twoarms. Northwest arm affords the best anchorage on the southern 
coast of Newfoundland. 

Bob Lock cove, on the eastern shore of Hare bay at 14 miles from 
the entrance, has anchorage for small vessels in 15 fathoms water 
with good holding ground. The southern entrance point is a remark- 
able round hill, 618 feet high, and cliffy to seaward. 

Water can be taken from a stream at the head of this cove. 

Morgan arm, the eastern of the two branches at the head, is 1 
mile in length, 600 yards in width, and divided near the head into 
two shallow coves by low wooded projection. A large stream flows 
into the eastern, and a waterfall descends into the western, of these 
coves. 

Anchorage may be obtained, southward of the wooded projection, 
in 5 to 8 fathoms water. 

Northwest arm extends northwestward 14 miles to the first nar- 
rows, the northeastern side of which is Sandy point, a shingle spit, 
drying at low water, 100 yards from the trees. 

The passage through the narrows is only 100 yards wide, with a 
depth of 7 fathoms in the middle, but within is a bay nearly 800 
yards wide, with depths less than 3 fathoms at 300 yards, and less 
than 6 feet at 600 yards, distant, respectively, northwestward of the 
narrows. 

Small craft, however, proceed over this bar at high water and 
through a second: narrows, 1,600 yards distant from the first, within 


CUL-DE-SAC—DEVIL BAY. Al bee 


which is a basin 1,600 yards long and 300 yards wide, but it dries at 
low water for 400 yards from the head. 

Vessels drawing 9 feet or less water lie afloat at low water close 
inside the second narrows. 

Anchorage.—There is anchorage for vessels of any size within 
the outer part of Northwest arm over a space 1,600 yards long, and 
nearly 800 yards broad, with depths of 5 to 9 fathoms, mud bottom, 
and good holding ground. 

The eastern limit of the anchorage is a line drawn southward from 
a point on the northern shore of the arm at 4 mile within the northern 
entrance point, eastward of which line the bank falls rapidly to depths 
of 30 and 40 fathoms. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Hare bay, at 8h. 38m.; 
springs rise 7 feet. 

Cul-de-sac, immediately westward of Western head of Hare bay, 
is an open cove nearly 1 mile in length and 300 yards in width. 
The head, which is very narrow for + mile and contains numerous 
bowlders, has a few houses on its shores. 

The western entrance of Cul-de-sac is a sharp-pointed and rocky 
hill, 724 feet high, terminated eastward by a low black rock. <A rock 
that uncovers lies close to it, and a shoal, with 3% fathoms water over 
it, bears 129°, distant 200 yards from the black rock. 

Anchorage.—There is temporary anchorage for small vessels in 
9 fathoms water, southeastward of the entrance to the head of the 
cove, but, as a heavy sea soon rises with southeasterly and southerly 
winds, they must leave on the first appearance of wind from those 
directions. 

The coast from Cul-de-sac westward to Red point is cliffy and 
intersected by deep ravines, and generally steep-to, while ranges that 
attain heights of 1,000 to 1,500 feet extend inland. 

Numerous shoals extend east-southeastward from Red point, but 
Red Point rock, bearing 112°, distant 650 yards from Red point, 
with 4 fathoms of water over it, is the only one that is dangerous in 
ordinary weather. 

In heavy weather this coast should not be approached nearer than 
4 mile, as there is then a confused sea over these shoals. 

Red point, about 3 miles westward from Western head of Hare 
bay, is composed of red cliffs. 

Devil bay, the western entrance point of which lies ? mile west- 
ward of Red point, stretches in a northerly direction 2? miles, and 
has deep water almost to its head, where there is anchorage for small 
craft in 7 fathoms of water, close to the shore. Within the entrance 
on either side is a waterfall; Blow-me-down, a steep bluff 1,280 feet 
high, is on the western side at about 1,600 yards within the western 
entrance point. 


214 CREW POINT TO CAPE RAY. 


Rencontre bay.—New Harbor island lies southwestward, distant 
14 miles from the western entrance point of Devil bay, and from 
between them Rencontre bay extends westward for 3 miles, when it 
turns suddenly northward for 2 miles to its head. 

Anchorage.—There is anchorage at the head of this bay in 11 to 
18 fathoms water. 

Water can be obtained at many places on the shores of the bay, 
and wood at its head. 

Little bay entrance is on the northern shore of Rencontre bay at 
1,8; miles westward of the western entrance point of Devil bay, and 
the bay extends northward 14 miles, but the water in it is too deep 
for anchorage. The western entrance point rises to Ironskull, a 
conspicuous hill 1,077 feet high, with a remarkable white spur visible 
from the southward; Sugarloaf, a remarkable mountain 1,290 feet 
high, is 1,200 yards northward from the head of the bay. 

The Cove lies westward of High Lookout, on the southern shore 
at 2 miles within the entrance of Rencontre bay. There are several 
houses at high-water mark, from which sand dries for the distance of 
100 yards. 

Anchorage.—There is anchorage in the Cove for small vessels 
in 17 fathoms water at 300 yards from the shore, but it is unsafe in 
northerly winds, when violent squalls come down the bay from the 
high hills. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in the Cove at 8h. 55m.; 
springs rise 64 feet, neaps 44 feet. 

Barasway, on the southwestern shore of Rencontre bay, } mile 
westward of the Cove, affords anchorage in 10 fathoms of water at 300 
to 400 yards off the beach. 

New harbor, southward of a peninsula situated westward of New 
Harbor island, is 1,000 yards long, about 400 yards wide, and it 
affords anchorage, open southeastward, in 15 fathoms of water at 200 
yards from the head, but there is shelter for small vessels in 5 fathoms 
off a small cove containing a few houses, situated eastward of the head 
of the harbor. 

Hare’s Ears point.—Pinchgut point les } mile southward of 
New Harbor island, and Hare’s Ears point is ¢ mile farther southwest- 
ward; two peaked rocks with a hole through between them, the inner 
84 feet high, lie off the point. 

Lower rock, bearing 67°, distant 1,100 yards from Hare’s Ears 
point, has 2 feet of water over it, and Hare’s Ears rock, bearing 
101°, distant 400 yards from Hare’s Ears point, has 5 feet of water 
over it and 15 fathoms close to the southward. 

Clearing marks.—The western entrance point of Devil bay open 
eastward of Pinchgut point, bearing 26°, leads eastward of Hare’s 
Ears and Lower rocks; and the bill of Lance cove open southward of 


LANCE COVE—NICK POWER POINT. 2ho 


Hare’s Ears point, bearing 80°, leads southward of Hare’s Ears 
rock. 

Lance cove, northwestward of Hare’s Ears point, is 1,200 yards 
wide and 1,000 yards long. It has anchorage for small vessels, open 
to southeasterly winds, in 3 to 6 fathoms of water at 250 yards from 
the beach. 

Lance cove promontory, on the southern side of Lance cove, is 250 
feet high, and its coasts are steep cliffs ending southeastward in a 
sharp point, named the bill of Lance cove. 

Chaleur bay.—Gull island lies about 1,600 yards westward of the 
bill of Lance cove, and West point bears 219°, distant 1,400 yards from 
the island. The entrance of Chaleur bay is between Gull island and 
West point, and thence the bay extends northwestward, with one 
bend, for 54 miles. At its inner entrance, about 1,200 yards within 
Gull island, the bay is 600 yards wide, but it expands to 1,200 yards 
inside, and then narrows gradually toward the head. 

Gull island is white and 102 feet high. Shooter rock, close to the 
northern shore at 14 miles westward of Gull island, is 2 feet high. 

Cooper cove is on the western shore at 2% miles within Gull island. 
A brook, that drains a deep valley, flowing into Cooper cove, has 
formed a sandy beach, off which, at 300 yards distance, there is 
anchorage for small vessels in 9 to 14 fathoms of water. There is a 
similar cove opposite on the eastern shore, but without anchorage. 

Anchorage can be obtained, at 600 to 1,200 yards distance from 
the head of the bay, in 6 to 15 fathoms of water, mud bottom. 

Water and wood are easily procured. 

Fransway bay, also known at Francois bay, is an inlet extending 
14 miles north-northwestward, 400 yards wide, and surrounded by 
steep bluffs, situated 1,800 yards southwestward of West point of 
Chaleur bay. A brook flows into its head, and the settlement is 
eastward of the brook and under the Friar, a cliffy hill 680 feet high, 
with landslips extending to the sea. 

Anchorage.—There is anchorage, in 14 to 22 fathoms of water, 
within 400 yards of the head of the bay. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Fransway bay at 
8h. 40m.; springs rise 64 feet, neaps 44 feet. 

The coast.—Southwestward of West point of Fransway bay is 
Brandy cove, the western entrance point of which is Brandy head, a 
gray, conical-shaped promontory, 278 feet high. Between Brandy 
head and Nick Power point, at 1,200 yards farther southwestward, is 
a cove faced by steep cliffs. 

Nick Power point is the southern end of an isolated headland, 
216 feet high, terminating in rugged points, with breakers 100 yards 
off its southwestern end. 


216 CREW POINT TO CAPE RAY. 


Nick Power cove, the entrance of which is westward of the point, 
extends northward 1,600 yards, with a general width of 300 yards. 
At the northwestern side of the head of the cove is a brook, off which, 
distant 100 yards, lies a rock that covers at high water. 

Anchorage.—There is anchorage in 15 fathoms water, eastward 
of this rock, but the cove is open.to the southward. 

The bar, with 3 fathoms of water on it, bears 290°, distant 400 
yards from the western end of Nick Power point headland. 

Aviron point, 1} miles west-southwestward of Nick Power point, 
is the southern end of an isolated conical-shaped hill, 290 feet high, 
connected by a low marsh to the mainland. Distress rock, 20 feet 
high, bears 93°, distant 400 yards, from Aviron point. Styles point 
is a mile north-northwestward of Aviron point, and the coast between 
is rugged, with deep gaps in the cliffs. 

Aviron bay.—Long point bears westward, distant 1,6, miles from 
Aviron point, and from between them Aviron bay, also known as Oar 
bay, stretches northward with a shght curve for 3% miles; it has a 
general width of 600 yards, and depths of water ranging from 48 to 
86 fathoms. 

Aviron rock, 20 feet high, lies in the middle of Aviron bay 
entrance. A bank extends southeastward 500 yards from the rock, 
and at its end there is a depth of 2? fathoms. 

Northeast cove, near the head of Aviron bay, has anchorage in 
16 to 20 fathoms water. 

The head of the bay, a basin nearly $ mile deep, is entered by a 
passage 150 yards wide, through which a depth of 15 feet can be 
earried, and there is excellent anchorage in it for small vessels in 4 
fathoms water. On its northern side is a magnificent waterfall over 
the slope of a hill 1,120 feet high. 

Bagg cove lies immediately within the narrows on the northwest- 
ern side of Aviron bay, but it affords no anchorage. 

Water can be obtained at many places in Aviron bay, and small 
wood from near its head. 

Cul-de-sac, northwestward 14 miles from Aviron point, is an 
inlet 1,400 yards in extent, divided at its head into two coves by 
Battery point, a bare promontory 120 feet high. 

There is a settlement on the eastern side of Battery point, but only 
small vessels can anchor off it. For larger vessels there is sheltered 
anchorage in 5 fathoms of water, sand eam at 163°, distant 400 
yards from Battery point. 

Wild cove, on the eastern side of the shingle beach connecting 
cape la Hune with the mainland, is 4 mile deep, and at its north- 
eastern part is a sandy beach 400 yards off which there is anchorage 
in 6 to 7 fathoms water, but open to southerly and easterly winds. 


CAPE LA HUNE—LA HUNE BAY. 217 


Cape la Hune, a peninsula joined to the mainland by a shingle 
beach with.a castellated rock in the middle, has three peaks. The 
northeastern, 424 feet high, terminates southeastward in Long point, 
a rugged, curved neck of land that forms Cape cove, which is 700 
yards deep, with anchorage in 9 to 11 fathoms water, but open to the 
southward. The western peak is a remarkable cone 579 feet high. 

A rock with 15 feet water over it lies 100 yards southward of the 
cape at 100 yards westward of the western entrance point of Cape 
cove. 

Watch rock, bearing 172°, distant 8$ miles from cape la Hune, 
and 89°, distant 52 miles from Harbor island, is awash at low water, 
and the summit of a bank on which there are several shoals of less 
than 15 fathoms. 

Of these shoals, Pinnacle shoal, with 4 fathoms of water over it, 
bears 207°, distant 1,4, miles; and a shoal, with 6 fathoms of water, 
bears 255°, distant 13 miles from Watch rock; the sea breaks on both 
in heavy weather. 

Penguin islands, a group of numerous islands and rocks occu- 
pying a space of more than 1 mile square, are situated about south- 
southwestward, distant 9% miles from cape la Hune. 

Harbor island, the eastern island, is the largest and 78 feet high. 
On its southern side is a small cove where boats shelter, but a heavy 
sea rolls in with southerly winds. The passages between the islands 
are not navigable by ships. 

Mile rock, bearing 68°, distant 1,4; miles from Harbor island, has 
9 feet of water over it and is steep-to. 

La Hune bay.—West point of la Hune bay bears 326°, distant 
700 yards from the northwestern point of cape la Hune, and la 
Hune bay extends thence northward 6} miles with an average width 
of 800 yards to a mile from its head, where it narrows to about 300 
yards. 

There is excellent anchorage at the head of the bay in 10 to 18 
fathoms water, mud bottom. 

_ The eastern shore of the bay is an almost continuous line of cliffs, 
over 1,000 feet high, terminated northward by Northeast cove, an 
indentation 600 yards in extent, with a sand spit 200 yards from its 
southeastern shore, and another the same distance from its head. 
There is good anchorage in this cove in 14 fathoms water at 300 
yards offshore. 
_ Deadman cove, at the southern end of the cliffs, extends eastward 

600 yards. There are two waterfalls on its northern side, where 
water is easily procured. The cove affords anchorage in 12 to 15 
fathoms water, good holding ground. 

A rock, with 15 feet of water over it, bears 301°, distant 200 yards 
from the southern entrance point of Deadman cove. 


218 CREW POINT TO CAPE RAY. 


West point of la Hune bay is the southern end of a peninsula 
rising to a remarkable cone 697 feet high, its coasts being rugged 
cliffs seawards and steep bluffs in la Hune bay; it is joined to the 
mainland by a shingle beach, which is said to have subsided consider- 
ably since 1873. 

Two rocks, the southern with 9 feet water over it and 18 feet 
fathoms close-to, extend 250 yards southward of West point. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in la Hune bay at 
8h. 40m.; springs rise 64 feet, neaps 44 feet. 

Ice.—La Hune bay freezes over about December 1, and the ice 
disappears by April 1; the ice breaks up easily, and is no obstacle to 
vessels, which come and go all the year. In 1885 field ice arrived in 
February and left on April 1. 

Long point juts out south-southwestward from the peninsula 
northwestward of the entrance of la Hune bay, and it bears 277°, 
distant 900 yards from West point. 

Long Point shoal, bearing 276°, distant 600 yards from Long 
point, has a depth of 10 feet over it. The northeastern Gulch Cove 
island, open southward of Cape island, bearing 294°, leads nearly 
200 yards southward of this shoal. 

Cape island, separated from the western point of the peninsula 
northwestward of la Hune bay entrance by a channel 400 yards wide, 
in the middle of which is a shoal with 34 fathoms of water over it, is 
267 feet high, flat and rugged. 

La Hune harbor, an inlet of the main northeastward of Cape 
island, is open and has 8 to 11 fathoms water, but not shelter. The 
fishing craft belonging to the settlement moor under a cliff at the 
head of the harbor, where neither wind nor sea reaches them even in 
winter. 

Cape rocks, bearing 276°, distant 4% miles from cape la Hune, are 
a cluster of bare black islets, the highest at the southern end being 
30 feet high. 

Shoal and uneven ground surrounds Cape rocks for 14 miles, except 
to the southward, where the water deepens suddenly to 50 fathoms at 
the distance of 200 yards. 

Gulch cove, northwestward, distant 54 miles from Cape island, 
extends northward 600 yards and has anchorage for a small vessel 
in 5 to 7 fathoms of water, but with southerly winds a heavy sea rolls 
in. The hills fall almost perpendicularly on each side of the cove to 
a narrow, low neck of land that separates it from Southeast arm of 
Little river. 

Gulch Cove islands, two in number and lying nearly east and 
west, 500 yards from each other, are small and rocky; the western 
and higher, 95 feet high, bears 177°, distant 14 miles from Gulch 
cove entrance. Numerous rocks surround them; the western rock, 


SEAL ROCKS—LITTLE RIVER ROCKS. 219 


that covers 1 foot at high water, bears 248°, distant 950 yards from 
the western island, and there is a depth of 30 fathoms at 100 yards 
westward of it. 

The coast from Gulch cove trends west-southwestward for 44 miles 
to Little river, and is bold and steep. 

Seal rocks, southeasterly, distant 1,200 yards from Little river 
entrance, are 18 feet high, and are not easily made out against the 
dark coast. A rock, awash at low water, lies 100 yards northeast- 
ward from Seal rocks. 

Two rocks, about 5 feet high, lie between Seal rocks and the eastern 
entrance point to Little river and about 200 yards offshore. 

Little river is a long inlet, with an entrance about 130 yards 
wide. It continues of that width northeastward for 1,200 yards to 
Jerts cove, when it expands to 600 yards, with excellent anchorage in 7 
to 10 fathoms water; mud bottom. Again narrowing to about 150 
yards northeastward of Jerts cove the channel extends northeasterly 
for 14 miles to Frenchman cove, a fine basin 1-3, miles long in an 
easterly and westerly direction, and $ mile broad, with good anchor- 
age in 5 to 9 fathoms water; mud bottom. At the eastern end of this 
cove Little river divides ate two branches, Southeast and Northeast 
arms. 

Small vessels should not leave Little river when the wind is against 
the tidal stream, as a confused sea soon gets up. 

Southeast arm extends eastward 3 miles, with a general width 
of 600 yards, and has good anchorage in 7 to 8 fathoms of water for 
the first mile, when the arm widens, and deepens to over 37 fathoms; 
then grows gradually shallower and narrower to the head. <A shoal, 
with 34 fathoms water over it, lies a short distance off the southern 
shore at about 2 miles distant from the head. 

Northeast arm trends northerly for ? mile and then north-north- 
easterly for 4 miles. It has a depth of about + sation for the first 
mile, when it becomes more shallow. 

Northwest arm branches off, in a northerly direction, from North- 
east arm at 14 miles from its western entrance point. The depths in 
Northwest arm are from 4 fathoms to 14 fathoms near its head. 

The shores of Little river are steep and bold, in many places falling 
precipitously from hills 750 to 1,000 feet high. Avoid the débris 
from the hills quite close to the shore. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, at Little river at 8h. 
40m.; springs rise 64 feet, neaps 4 feet. The tidal streams run in the 
direction of the channel and attain a rate of 2 knots an hour at 
springs. 

Little River rocks, southward, distant 6 miles from Little River 
entrance, are 4 feet high and steep-to on the southern side, but a fringe 
of shoal water extends northwestward 200 yards from them. 


220 CREW POINT TO CAPE RAY. 


Little River bank.—FEastern rock, bearing 218°, distant 34 miles 
from Little River rocks, and on the southeastern part of Little River 
bank, has 34 fathoms of water over it. From this rock uneven 
ground extends northwestward 2} miles to Big shoal, a head on which 
the depth is 7 fathoms, near the northwestern end of the bank. The 
bottom is rocky. 

Bay de Vieux, or Old Man bay, the entrance of which is 3} miles 
west-northwestward of Little river, extends northward 6 miles, with a 
general width of 4 mile. The water is deep. 

A rock, awash at high water, lies quite close to the western shore at 
1,3 mules within West point. 

Denny island, in the eastern part of the bay at 1 mile within 
East point, is 335 feet high and steep-to, except off its northwestern 
side, where there is a rock with 1 foot water over it. 

Dog cove, eastward of Denny island, is 150 yards wide, but there 
is good anchorage for small craft in 8 fathoms water near its head. 

The Nook, an inlet on the eastern side of the bay, is 1,450 yards 
long, 300 yards broad, and it affords eee for small craft at its 
head in 9 to 12 fathoms water. 

The head of bay de Vieux, which is about 600 yards wide and shoals 
gradually to the shore, affords anchorage in 7 to 12 fathoms water 
within 4 mile of its northern end. 

Water.—Several streams run into the head of the bay. 

Cobbett or Mosquito harbor, 14 miles westward of West point 
of bay de Vieux, is a basin nearly 1 mile long in an easterly and west- 
erly direction, with an average width of 450 yards, approached 
through a channel 100 yards wide. 

It is perfectly sheltered, but the water is 20 to 35 fathoms deep in 
its greater part, and anchorage even for small craft can only be 
obtained in 12 fathoms water, near its western end, off a cove where 
there are a few houses. A rock lies about 50 yards off the southern 
side of this cove. 

East Black rock, near the eastern entrance point of Cobbett har- 
bor and bearing 118°, distant 500 yards from White point, the west- 
ern entrance point, is 5 feet high; two rocks, awash at low water, lie 
off it, the outer being distant nearly 200 yards to the southeastward. 

West Black rock, bearing 249°, distant ;% mile from East Black 
rock, is awash at high water; several islets and rocks lie northwest- 
ward of it and between it and Fox island, which space should not be 
used for navigation. 

Fox island, 13 miles westward from White point, is 310 feet high, 
rugged and faced by cliffs, and separated from the mainland by a 
channel 135 yards wide, in the western part of which is good anchor- 
age for small craft. 


BEAR HEAD—SEAL ISLAND. Aaa 


Rocks and foul ground lie off Fox island; Fox Island rock, bearing 
187°, distant 950 yards from the southeastern point of the island, is 18 
feet high, and Fish Island shoal, bearing 236°, distant 1,100 yards 
from the southwestern end of Fox island, has 5 fathoms of water over 
1t: vessels should not navigate within this rock and shoal. 

Brimball Storehouse cove, 1,°, miles westward from Fox island, 
is a shoal inlet 500 yards long. 

A rock, bearing 225°, distant 250 yards from the eastern point of 
Brimball Storehouse cove, has 4 feet of water over it. 

Bear head, the western point of Brimball Storehouse ¢ove, is a 
steep bluff, falling abruptly from its summit, 526 feet high, and 
fringed by dark cliffs. There is deep water close to the head, but off 
West point, at about 1,400 yards northwestward, is a pinnacle rock. 

Squier cove, northward of West point of Bear head, extends 
eastward for 1,200 yards; it is deep, and affords no anchorage; a few 
houses are situated near its head. 

Bear island is situated in the entrance to White Bear bay, and 
northwestward ;% mile from West point of Bear head; its summit is a 
dark wooded cone 600 feet high, and the island falls steeply on the 
southern and eastern, but gradually on the other sides. The eastern 
and southern sides have deep water close to them. On the southern 
side the cliffs are white and bare for some distance above the dala while 
the cliffs under Bear head are dark. 

Cul de sac harbor, on the western side of the southern part of 
Bear island, is 1,200 yards long, with 16 to 20 fathoms water in it; an 
islet lies northward of its southern entrance point, and a rock, awash 
at high water with deep water close to, les 100 yards southward of 
that point. : 

Cul de sac rocks are two heads with 4 feet of water over them, 
bearing 296°, distant 800 yards from the southern entrance point of 
Cul de sac harbor. 

Deer island, separated from the northern part of Bear island by 
a narrow shallow channel, on both sides of which are a few houses, is 
132 feet high. 

Anchorage.—There is fair anchorage, with southerly and easterly 
winds, in 14 fathoms of water, at 300 yards westward of the islets off 
Deer island, but a heavy swell rolls in with westerly winds. 

Seal island, bearing 11°, distant 700 yards from the northern 
point of Bear island, is 85 feet high; and Round island, 329°, 1,300 
yards from the same point, is 113 feet high. 

White Bear bay extends 104 miles in a northerly direction from 
the northern point of Bear island to the freshwater brook at its head, 
with an average width of 1,200 yards. The shores are steep, in many 
places precipitous, 700 to 1,000 feet high, with deep water close-to. 


999 CREW POINT TO CAPE RAY. 


Anchorage.—The depth of water in the bay decreases suddenly 
northward of Bald point to 13 fathoms and then shoals gradually. 
Large vessels anchor in 8 fathoms, with Blow-me-down point bear- 
ing 208°, distant 800 yards, perfectly sheltered, with good holding 
ground. 

Northwest brook, northward ? mile from Blow-me-down point, 
is a conspicuous waterfall and an excellent watering place. A shoal, 
with 3 fathoms least water over it, lies 500 yards from it, and the 
water then shoals gradually to the head of the bay. 

Telegraph station.—There is a telegraph station at the head of 
the bay. 

Turks and Woody islands lie off the western entrance point of 
White Bear bay, and are almost connected to it by shoal water. 
Woody island, 213 feet high, is very conspicuous from the dark color 
of its foliage and conical shape. 

White island, 600 yards westward of Woody island, is 138 feet 
high, and from its color shows in contrast to Woody island. 

Black rock, bearing 208°, distant 950 yards from White island, 
is 8 feet high, and clear except on its eastern side. Black Sunker, 
bearing 84°, distant 335 yards from Black rock, has 1 foot water over 
it, and is the western end of a bank of shoal ground stretching east- 
ward 500 yards from it. 

Directions.—To enter White Bear bay from the westward, make 
White island, approach it on an easterly bearing, and keep in mid- 
channel between that island and Black rock, and thence between the 
mainland and the rocks and shoal water, which extend northwest- 
ward about 600 yards from the northwestern side of Deer island. 

Ramea islands, the eastern end of which hes southward, distant 
3 miles from Bear head of White Bear bay, consist of two large 
islands, with numerous smaller islands, islets, rocks, and shoals to 
the southward and westward of them. 

Great island, the eastern and largest of the group, is 1? miles 
long in an easterly and westerly direction and 1,200 yards broad; its 
northern coast is bold and slopes abruptly from rugged hills that 
present an irregular outline. Gull hill, the highest of these hills, is 
497 feet high, flat topped, and has a steep fall on its eastern side that 
makes it conspicuous on northerly bearings. 

Numerous rocks and shoals on the southern side of Great island 
prevent the passage to Eastern harbor being taken without local 
knowledge. 

Eastern harbor is a small cove 950 yards westward from Bonnels 
point (the southeastern point of Great island) ; there is a rock awash 
at low water in mid-channel at its entrance, and 2 fathoms water 
at its head, where fishing craft obtain sheltered anchorage. 


NORTHWEST ISLAND—-HARBOR ISLAND. oe 


Northwest island, 400 yards westward of Great island, is 1, 
miles long in a northeasterly and southwesterly direction, about 900 
yards broad, and has several peaks; Man-of-war hill, the highest, is 
211 feet high, and there is a bowlder on its summit. 

Gull rock, 250 yards off the northwestern point, is 8 feet high, 
round, bare, and joined to the shore by rocks and shoal water. 

A bank, with 6 fathoms least water over it, on which the sea breaks 
in bad weather, bears 253°, distant } mile from Gull rock, and a rock, 
awash at low water, lies 150 yards off the northern part of Northwest 
head. 

Light.—A cylindrical lighthouse, 35 feet high and painted red 
and white in spiral bands, with a white dwelling attached, on North- 
west head, which is the southern point of Northwest island, exhibits 
at 125 feet above high water, an intermittent white hght showing 
thus: Light, one and a half seconds; eclipse, one and a half seconds, 
which should be seen from a distance of 16 miles in clear weather 
excepting on westerly bearings, where it is obscured by the land. 

Ramea Colombier island, distant 1 mile west-northwestward 
from Northwest head lghthouse, is 135 feet high; it is one of the 
western of the islands, makes as a cone from all directions, and is 
surmounted by a flagstaff. 

Turr islets, distant 4 mile west-northwestward from Ramea 
Colombier, are two bare rocks, the eastern 29 feet and the western 
about 10 feet high. 

Northward rocks, distant 400 yards in a northwesterly direction 
from Ramea Colombier, are several black islets 12 feet high. <A rock, 
8 feet high, lies $ mile west-northwestward of Ramea Colombier. 

The passage between these and the main islands is clear of shoals 
in its fairway, but the water is comparatively shallow, and a heavy 
confused sea rises when a strong breeze opposes the tidal stream. 

The channel between Northwest island and the rest of the group 
is 200 yards wide, except off Ship cove and Muddy harbor, two small 
bays on the southern end of Northwest island, where small vessels 
anchor in 6 to 11 fathoms water, with 200 yards swinging room. 

The channel shoals gradually from 11 fathoms at its western end 
to 5 fathoms midway between Muddy harbor and Ship cove, then 
suddenly to 15 feet off the eastern point of that cove. 

Southwest island, southward of the western end of Northwest 
island, is about 80 feet high. Ramea harbor, on its eastern side, is 
a good harbor for fishing craft. Southwest rocks extend westward 
600 yards from the western point of Southwest island. Southward 
of this island and these rocks are several shoals. 

Harbor island is much indented, and forms the northeastern side 
of Ramea harbor. 


294 CREW POINT TO CAPE RAY. 


Copper island, southwestward, 1,3, miles from Bonnels point, is 
a conspicuous bare cone, 102 feet high; and there is a shoal, with 3 
fathoms of water over it, close to its eastern end. Bad rock les 
600 yards westward of it, and there is a third rock midway between 
them. There is no channel among the numerous rocks and shoals 
northwestward of Copper island that is navigable without local 
knowledge. 

Black rock, bearing 86°, distant 1,300 yards from Copper island, 
is a small pinnacle 14 feet high, with 10 fathoms water close around 
and deep water a short distance to the eastward of it. 

Ramea Southeast rocks, bearing 148°, distant 3,8, miles from 
Bonnels point, are two-rocks separated by a boat channel. The 
eastern and higher rock is 20 feet high. A rock with 1 foot of water 
over it bears 99°, distant 400 yards from these rocks. 

Ramea South bank, bearing 221°, distant 3 miles from Ramee 
Southeast rocks, has 22 fathoms of wee over it. 

Ice.—Northern ice has arrived at Ramea only four times during 
twenty years; on these occasions it appeared between the end of 
February and the middle of March and left between the first and the 
middle of April. The harbor is only frozen when northern ice is 
present. 

Northwest head, the northwestern part of the western entrance 
point of White Bear bay, is rugged and faced by cliffs. 

Turks head, westward, distant 14 miles from Northwest head, is 
a steep bluff with a rugged background. Between these heads is 
Emily Storehouse cove, a bight 1,000 yards deep and open to the 
southward. 

Offer Sunker, bearing 273°, distant 1,400 yards from White island, 
and 315°, distant 1,400 yards from Black rock, has 1 foot of water 
over it, with depths of 11 to 22 fathoms close-to. 

Anderson rock, bearing 339°, distant 700 yards from Offer 
Sunker, is awash at high water springs and steep-to. 

Anderson Sunkers, bearing 294°, distant 1,200 yards from Offer 
Sunker, are 2 rocks awash at low water. 

Gull island, bearing 239°, distant 1 mile from Turks head, is 73 
feet high, and the outer of a cluster of cliffy islets. Being of the 
same color as the mainland, it is not easily distinguished. 

Several shoals which lie within a little over a mile westward and 
southward of Gull island, with depths of 4 to 7 fathoms over them, 
break heavily in bad weather. 

Red island, westward 11 miles from Gull island, is about ®; mile 
long in a northerly and southerly direction, with a width varying 
a 1,000 to 300 yards, and it is divided into two parts by a low 
neck of land, the 1 inner a wooded cone 377 feet, and the outer a flat- 
topped hill w ith a white summit 326 feet high. Its outer cliffs are 
red. 


BAY DE LOUP—KINGS HARBOR. 225 


This island divides a deep bay into two parts, Northeast arm, which 
extends 14 miles, and Northwest arm, 14 miles. 

Northeast arm has deep water and affords no shelter for 1 mile 
within its entrance; then a channel 50 yards wide leads to an inner 
basin, named Doctor harbor, 750 yards long and 150 yards wide, with. 
sheltered anchorage for small craft in 4 to 5 fathoms water. 

Red Island harbor, a widening of the channel separating the island 
from the mainland, is 500 yards long and 200 yards broad; it can be 
entered only from the eastward through a channel 30 yards wide, and 
it is suitable for fishing craft. 

Northwest arm.—Cross rocks narrow the channel between them 
and Red island, at 4 mile within the entrance of the arm, to 200 vards, 
with a depth ah 54 fathoms; inside these rocks there is anchorage for 
small craft in 8 to 9 fathoms water, good holding ground. 

Western point of Northwest arm is the southern end of a head- 
land consisting of a series of rocky hummocks faced by cliffs on the 
seaboard. Western Point rock, bearing 205°, distant 265 vards from 
the point, has 13 feet of water over it. 

White Island shoal, bearing 256°, distant 800 yards from West- 
ern point, has 33 fathoms over it, and deep water close-to. 

Bay de Loup point, westward i} miles from Western point, is 
the eastern entrance point of bay de Loup, and the southern end of 
an island 700 vards long in a northerly and southerly direction, and 
223 feet high, connected at low water with a narrow peninsula. 
Between Western point and Bay de Loup point is a deep bay that 
should not be entered within the line of the points. The coast is 
rugged and fringed by cliffy islets and rocks. 

Bay de Loup rock, 350 yards from Bay de Loup oe has 7 feet: 
water over it. 

Bay de Loup, or Wolf bay, eae northeastward 2% miles from 
its entrance between Bay de Loup point and Kings Head point, situ- 
ated northwestward, about 1,700 yards. The shores of the bay are 
precipitous, with deep water close-to, and there is no anchorage until 
Blow-me-down, a steep bluff, 513 feet high, on the northern shore at 
about ? mile sew the head, is passed, when there is good shelter im 
10 ae water, and the oat gradually decreases to 44 fathoms: 
toward the head. The most convenient anchorage is off the houses 
at the mouth of Seal brook, a small stream situated northeastward 
about 800 yards from Blow-me-down. 

Water.— Excellent water is obtainable in bay de Loup. 

Kings harbor, immediately westward of Kings head, the westerm 
entrance point of bay de Loup, is an inlet extending northeastward 
1,050 yards, which affords anchorage in 9 fathoms of water at 150 
yards off its southern shore. Kings Harbor brook flows inte the 


76846—09——15 


226 CREW POINT TO CAPE RAY. 


western part of the harbor, and a bank extends eastward 250 yards 
from its mouth. 

Buffetts island, southward 900 yards from Kings Head point, is 
91 feet high, and a ledge of rock runs parallel to, and 100 yards 
from, the northern side of the island, with a depth of 6 feet between 
them. Aldridge head, the eastern point of Greenhill island, bears 
204°, distant 600 yards from the southwestern point of the island. 

Anchorage.—There is fair anchorage northwestward of Buffetts 
island, in 13 fathoms water, sand bottom, but a swell rolls in with 
strong southerly winds. 

Grip island is westward + mile from Buffetts island, and there is 
a rock, with less than 6 feet of water over it, about 200 yards south- 
eastward of its southern end. 

The Ha ha is an inlet stretching 1 mile in a westerly direction 
to the northward of Aldridge and Richards heads, and it is clear till 
within 100 yards of its head, near which there is anchorage for small 
vessels in 10 to 12 fathoms water, but exposed to easterly winds. 

Greenhill island, on the southern side of the Ha ha, is 280 feet 
high. 

Richards head, on the mainland westward of Greenhill island, is 
a remarkable saddle-topped hill, 340 feet high, with steep cliffs on its 
southwestern side, and dark foliage on the others. It is an ex- 
cellent mark. 

Aldridge rock, bearing 144°, distant 250 yards from Aldridge 
head, is awash at high water. There is a depth of 48 fathoms at 
200 yards eastward of it, but only 64 fathoms of water between it 
and the head. 

Grandy island, west-southwestward about 1,400 yards from 
Greenhill island, is rugged and barren; it is separated from the 
mainland by Long reach, a narrow strait, whose eastern entrance, 
southward of Greenhill island and Richards head, is shallow, and 
whose western entrance is spanned by a bridge. 

Burgeo is a considerable village on the eastern side of Grandy 
island; it has several conspicuous houses, and a wooden church with 
a short spire. 

Communication.—The Newfoundland Railway steamer from St. 
Johns calls here weekly during summer and autumn. 

There is a telegraph station at Burgeo. 

Supplies can generally be obtained at Burgeo in small quantities, 
and water from bay de Loup. : 

Ice.—Burgeo port is never frozen over, but it is occasionally 
blocked for a few days by ice from the outer coves, which moves off 
in February and March; vessels come and go all the year. Northern 
ice appears only at intervals, arriving generally between the middle 


FISH ISLET—-MERCER POINT. 227 


of February and the middle of March, and seldom remaining more 
than a fortnight or three weeks. 

Fish islet, southward, 200 yards from the southwestern point of 
Greenhill island, and the eastern of the islets extending eastward 
from Grandy island, is 40 feet high. 

Fish Islet rock, bearing 108°, distant 200 yards from Fish islet, 
has less than 6 feet of water over it. 

Short reach, extending westward about 4 mile into Grandy island, 
with an average breadth of 300 yards, affords anchorage at its head 
in 84 fathoms of water, mud bottom, with swinging room for small 
vessels. 

Smalls island is the southern of the group of islets and rocks off 
the eastern coast of Grandy island, and between it and the island isa 
good harbor for boats and small vessels, with 11 feet of water in it. 
There is a flagstaff on the island. 

Rock—Beacon.—A rock, bearing 65°, distant 300 yards from 
Furber point, the southern point of Grandy island, covers 1 foot at 
high water. There is a beacon on it. 

Ship dock is a small cove westward of Furber point and between 
that point and Franks island, around which are situated the wharves 
and warehouses of the principal trading firm at Burgeo; the agent’s 
double-storied house shows conspicuously from all directions, and 
there is a flagstaff on Furber point. 

The water is deep close to the wharves, but the anchorage, in 13 
fathoms water, is small; and care must be taken to avoid the small 
rock eastward of Franks island and the shoal water off the channel 
separating that island from the mainland. 

White ground (Pylades rock) bears 220°, distant 865 yards 
from the southeastern point of Fish islet, and has 13 feet of water 
over it, with 20 fathoms at 100 yards to the southeastward. 

Two shoals, with depths of 44 and 3 fathoms, respectively, lie be- 
tween White ground and the rock off Furber point. 

Clearing mark.—The fall of the Sandbanks, open southward of 
Furber point, bearing 252°, leads 100 yards southward of these 
shoals. 

Anchorage.—There is anchorage off Burgeo and southeastward of 
Smalls island in 16 to 24 fathoms of water, mud bottom and good 
holding ground, keeping the fall of the Sandbanks open southward 
of Furber point, and Grip head open northward of Morgan island, 
bearing about 266°, which latter mark leads just northward of the 
rock with 9 feet of water over it, described on page 231. 

Mercer point, the southwestern end of Grandy island, is a bluff 
dark point forming the southern point of Mercer cove, an inlet ex- 
tending northwestward 800 yards into Grandy island. The cove 


228 CREW POINT TO CAPE RAY. 


forms two basins; it is crossed by a bridge, and a low neck of land 
separates it from Long reach to the southwestward. A small islet 
lies in the entrance northeastward of Mercer point, and small vessels 
shelter in the outer basin. 

Water from the streams flowing into Mercer cove is not good. 

The Sandbanks.—Grip head, westward, distant 1,3; miles from 
Mercer point, is 152 feet high, and close southward of it are the Sand- 
banks, 70 feet high; Sandbanks point, about 850 yards farther south- 
ward, was formerly their southern end, but it is now an island and 
there is a passage with a depth of about 14 fathoms between the 
Sandbanks and Sandbanks point. 

Sandbanks Point island lies close southeastward of Sandbanks 
point; some rocks, always above water, lie southward of Sandbanks 
point, with 34 fathoms of water close to them. 

Beacon.—A white rectangular beacon stands on Sandbanks Point 
island, and is conspicuous. 

Cornelius island, northwestward 1,600 Yards from Sandbanks 
point, has a double summit, and is almost divided in two parts by the 
meeting of the two coves; the Harbor, available only for boats, on the 
northern side, and Back cove, open and containing several rocks, on 
the southern side. Rocks and foul ground extend 150 yards from the 
northwestern point of this island, and it should not be closed on its 
western side nearer than the distance of 400 yards. 

There are some houses and a church on the shores of the Harbor. 

The Boar, bearing 234°, distant 400 yards from the southwestern 
point of Cornelius island, is a round rock, 14 feet high; there is deep 
water close to it. 

The Sow, bearing 262°, distant 600 yards from the Boar, is 17 feet 
high; there are some detached rocks close to it, and a depth of 8 
fathoms at the distance of 50 yards. 

A shoal with 34 fathoms of water over it bears 211°, distant 350 
yards from the Sow. . 

Clearing mark.—The summit of Rencontre island, in line with the 
southern end of Sandbanks Point island, bearing 91°, leads 150 yards 
southward of this shoal in 11 fathoms of water. 

The land in the vicinity of Burgeo, from a distance, appears gray 
where denuded of the stunted trees that grow generally on the coast, 
and its outline is almost unbroken, but on approaching it the rugged 
and contorted nature of the country, the innumerable hills, and deep 
ravines become apparent. 

Burgeo islands, a numerous group of islands and rocks, are com- 
posed of Laurentian gneiss, and show white where bare, excepting 
Round and Harbor islands, which are composed of dark micaceous 
gneiss. Only the important islands are described herein. 


BOAR ISLAND—VENILS SHOAL. 229 


Boar island, the northeasternmost of the group, and situated 
southwestward, about 1$ miles from Bay de Loup point, is 201 feet 
high. It is divided by a marsh; the southern or higher portion is 
wedge-shaped, and shoals, with 2 fathoms of water over them, extend 
nearly 200 yards from the southeastern point and about 100 yards 
from the northeastern point. 

Light.—A square lighthouse, 47 feet high, rising from the gable of 
a dwelling, and painted white with red roofs, on the summit of 
Boar island, exhibits, at 207 feet above high water, a fixed red light 
which should be seen seaward over an are of 270° from a distance 
of 11 miles in clear weather. 

Signals.—This lighthouse is supplied with the International code 
of signals. 

Boar Island rock, bearing 122°, distant 1;4, miles from Boar 
Island lighthouse, covers 1 foot at high water. 

Boar Island anon: bearing 133°, distant nearly 4 mile from Boar 
Island lighthouse, has 5 fathoms of water over it, and 10 to 15 
fathoms close around. 

Leading marks.—Round Shag island, open southward of Musket 
islets, bearing 241°, leads southward of all shoals; and Richards 
head, open eastward of Boar island, bearing 317°, leads southwest- 
ward of Boar Island rock and northeastward of Boar Island shoal. 

Little Boar island, 150 yards westward of the northern part of 
Boar island, is 20 feet high; shoal water extends 50 yards from it 
toward Boar island, but its northern and western sides are steep-to. 
- Cuttail island, southwestward of Boar island and separated from 
it by a channel 250 yards wide, that requires local knowledge for its 
navigation, is 140 feet high, and its southeastern coast has bare, steep 
slopes. 

Goose islet and Hug-my-dug, the northern and southern of a group 
of rocky islets eastward of Cuttail island, are white; Goose islet is 
34 feet high, and Hug-my-dug is about 40 feet high, and square- 
shaped. 

Venils island, southward of Cuttail island and separated from it 
by a channel 150 yards wide, with foul ground stretching from both 
sides which requires local iotemied ae fox its navigation, is 165 feet 
high. 

A cove indenting the southeastern side of Venils island for 200 
yards affords good sheltered anchorage for small craft in 34 fathoms 
of water. 

Venils shoal consists of two patches lying with the rock at the 
eastern end of Venils island bearing 301°, the northwestern with 23 
fathoms over it being distant 350 yards, and the southeastern with 3 
fathoms over it 700 yards. 


230 CREW POINT TO CAPE RAY. 


A bank, with 8 fathoms of water over it, lies with the eastern end 
of Venils island bearing 270°, distant 750 yards. 

Baggs island, on the western side of Venils island and separated 
from it by a narrow, shallow channel available for boats at low 
water, is a barren island with a peaked summit, 160 feet high. A 
rock, awash at low water, lies about 50 yards westward of its western 
point. 

Rencontre island, southwestward 300 yards from Baggs island, 
is the highest of the Burgeo group; its western end rises to a con- 
spicuous truncated cone, 269 feet high, covered with dark foliage. 

Gull island, situated + mile eastward of Rencontre island, is a 
bare rock 50 feet high, and steep-to on its eastern side, but foul 
ground extends 150 yards off its western side. 

A rock, about 6 feet high, lies 150 yards northwestward of Gull 
island, and a shoal, with 13 feet of water over it, between the end of 
the foul ground southwestward of Gull island and Rencontre rock. 

Rencontre rock, bearing 102°, distant 350 yards from the south- 
ern point of Rencontre island, has 7 feet of water over it. 

Musket islets are two rocks about 40 yards apart in a northerly 
and southerly direction, the northern and higher, 32 feet high, bear- 
ing 202°, distant 450 yards from the southern point of Rencontre 
island. 

Bearing 301°, 200 yards from Musket islets, and between them and 
Little Rencontre rocks, is a shoal, with 4 fathoms water over it and 
steep-to. 

Little Rencontre island, about 150 yards southwestward of the 
western end of Rencontre island, is dark, conical, and 150 feet high, 
and shows a saddle-shaped summit on easterly bearings; Little Ren- 
contre rocks are about 400 yards southeastward of the island. 

Crocker island, northwestward about 80 yards from Little Ren- 
contre island, is 90 feet high, of a gray color, and steep-to, except off 
its northern end, from which a shoal, with 6 feet of water over it, 
extends 50 yards. 

White island, northward 200 yards from Crocker island and 
northwestward 350 yards from the northwestern end of Rencontre 
island, is 45 feet high, and being white it is conspicuous when seen 
against the larger islands. 

Beacon.—On the summit of White island is a pyramidal wooden 
beacon. 

Morgan island, the northeastern end of which lies westward 
distant nearly 3 mile from Boar Island lighthouse, is about 1,400 yards 
long in a northeasterly and southwesterly direction, 350 yards wide, 
138 feet high, moss-covered and undulating. 

Shoal water fringes its northern and northwestern coast; the south- 
western coast is bold-to; the southern coast is encumbered with rocks 


ECLIPSE ISLAND—-MARCHAND ROOK. 231 


and shoals, and a shoal extends 50 yards off the northeastern point of 
the island. There are two coves on the southern side, with the 
houses of fishermen around them. 

Rock.—A rock, with 9 feet of water over it, bears 91°, distant 
400 yards from the northeastern point of Morgan island. 

Eclipse island, 160 yards northward of the northern side of Mor- 
gan island, is conical in shape, 33 feet high, covered with stunted 
bushes, and has a low projection to the eastward, off which shoal 
water extends 100 yards. A whitewashed cairn stands on the island. 
Captain Cook observed an eclipse of the sun here in 1766. There is 
a passage between Eclipse and Morgan islands. 

Franks island, northwestward of and nearly joined to Eclipse 
island is flat. A small rock, that covers 4 feet at high water, lies 100 
yards off its eastern side. 

There is only 6 feet of water in the passage between this island and 
Grandy island. 

The Douglas is a small round rock bearing 292°, 600 yards, from 
the southwestern end of Morgan island; it covers 1 foot at high water, 
and the sea nearly always breaks on it. 

A rock, with 10 feet of water over it, bears 260°, distant 200 yards, 
from the Douglas; there is a depth of 5 fathoms between and deep 
water around them. 

The Baldwin, bearing 53°, distant 600 yards from Sandbanks 
Point island, consists of two rocks close together, the higher being 
about 15 feet high; it is steep-to on all sides. 

Baldwin shoal bears 92°, distant 600 yards from the Baldwin, 
and has 10 feet of water over it. 

Rock.—A rock, with 4 fathoms of water over it and 11 fathoms 
close-to, bears 99°, distant 1,150 yards from Sandbanks Point island. 

Round Shag island, bearing 237°, distant 1,300 yards from Mus- 
ket islands, is a cone 64 feet high, with 10 fathoms of water at 100 
yards around it. 

Colombier island, bearing 282°, distant 1,500 yards from Round 
Shag island, is conical, with a double summit, the higher 177 feet 
high; it shows prominently from all directions, and is an excellent 
mark, 

Petit Marchand, bearing 200°, distant 500 yards from Sandbanks 
Point island, is an islet about 5 feet high. 

Rock.—A rock, with 15 feet over it and 5 fathoms close to, bears 
90°, distant 600 yards from Petit Marchand. 

Fish rock, bearing 275°, distant 400 yards from Petit Marchand, 
is awash at low water; between them is a shoal with 6 feet least water 
over it. 

Marchand rock, bearing 260°, distant 950 yards from Sandbanks 
Point island, has 9 feet of water over it. 


232 CREW POINT TO CAPE RAY. 


Stern rock, bearing 79°, distant 1,200 yards from the northern 
end of Round island, has 1 foot water over it. 

Miffel island, bearing 234°, distant nearly 2 miles from Round 
Shag island, and the southernmost island of the Burgeo group, is 60 
feet high, composed of gray gneiss, and makes as a cone from all 
directions. 

A rock, with 6 feet of water over it, lies northward 135 yards from 
its northern end; and a rock awash at low water, with 31 fathoms, 100 
yards eastward of it, bears 57°, distant 350 yards from the same point. 

Fortune rock, bearing 91°, distant 500 yards from Miffel island, 
has 44 fathoms over it and deep water close to. 

Whales back, the shoalest spot of some uneven ground lying 
4 mile westward from Miffel island, has 5 fathoms of water over it, 
and the sea breaks on it in winter gales. With a fresh breeze against 
the tidal stream, there is a heavy sea in its locality. 

Green island, bearing 320°, distant ;°, mile from Miffel island, 
is a flat-topped grass-covered island, about 80 feet high, with white 
cliffs and deep water on its seaward face, and a small islet off its 
eastern end. ; 

Neverfail shoal, bearing 227°, distant 600 yards from the south- 
western end of Green island, has 7 fathoms of water over it. 

Green Island shoal, bearing 242°, distant 600 yards from the 
western end of Green island, has 5 fathoms of water over it, and 
depths of 11 to 13 fathoms close to. 

Miffel island, bearing 113°, leads about 200 yards southwestward 
of these shoals; both shoals are said to break in heavy weather. 

Harbor island, situated } mile northward of Green island, has 
numerous islets and rocks of a dark color extending + mile northeast- 
ward from it. The island and islets have steep cliffs on their northern 
and western sides, but. slope to the eastward, where there is a shallow 
cove with good shelter for boats. The western end of Harbor island is 
surmounted by a remarkable hummock named the Louse-box. 

Harbor Island rock, bearing 252°, distant 265 yards from the 
southern point of Harbor island, is 2 feet high, and there is a depth 
of 6 fathoms around it. 

Round island, situated 350 yards northwestward from Harbor 
island, is about 180 yards across, 79 feet high, dark micaceous rock, 
cliffy, and steep-to, except on its northeastern side, from which a 
ledge of 3 fathoms water extends 50 yards. 

The fairway of the passage between Harbor and Round islands is 
clear, but it is better to pass northward of Round island except with 
local knowledge. 

West Flat island, situated 1,400 yards westward of Round island 
and the westernmost of the Burgeo islands, is a bare white rock, about 
25 feet high, with two flat summits; a rock awash at low water lies 


BURGEO PORT—DIRECTIONS. 233 


100 yards off the southern point, and there is a depth of over 10 
fathoms at the distance of 200 yards around the island and rock. 

Beacon.—A pyramidal wooden beacon stands on the western sum- 
mit of this island. 

Graley rock, bearing 157°, distant 1400 yards from West Flat 
Island beacon, has 9 feet of water over it and 10 fathoms at 200 yards 
around. 

Point shoal, bearing 229°, distant 17, miles from West Flat 
Island beacon, has 5 fathoms of water over it and 13 to 19 fathoms 
close around. 

Offer shoal, bearing 227°, distant 14 miles from West Flat Island 
beacon, and the outer and western of these shoals, has 4 fathoms of 
water over it and 15 fathoms close around. 

The sea breaks on the last three shoals; there are other shoals and 
fishing banks with 8 to 10 fathoms of water over them in this locality. 

Burgeo bank.—See page 79. 

Directions for Burgeo port.—From the eastward, pass between 
Boar Island rock and Bay de Loup rock with Richards head bearing 
between 279° and 307°, and steer for a position 400 yards northward 
of Boar island. Then steer for Furber point, keeping the fall of 
Sandbanks open southward of Furber point, bearing 253°, to clear 
White ground and the shoals lying eastward of Smalls island, pass 
about 200 yards southward of the beacon on the rock eastward of 
Furber point and round that point to the anchorage. 

From the westward steer to pass about 400 yards northward of 
West Flat and Round islands, then steer 62° and bring the summit of 
Rencontre island in line with the southern end of Sandbanks Point 
island, bearing 91°, and keep this mark on until Round Shag island 
opens eastward of Ragged island, bearing 126°, then round Sand- 
banks Point island at the distance of 200 yards, and steer 76°, keep- 
ing Round island open southward of Sandbanks Point island until 
the cairn on Eclipse island is in line with the northern point of 
Morgan island, bearing 42°, which mark leads southeastward of 
Baldwin shoal and the Douglas. Proceed along the northern coast 
of Morgan island at the distance of 200 yards until the channel be- 
tween it and Eclipse island is open, when steer through that channel 
to Burgeo anchorage, using the chart as the guide. 

In a vessel drawing over 21 feet, proceed southward of Miffel 
island, avoiding Whales back and Fortune rock. From a position 
4 mile southward of Miffel island, steer about 52°, and when past 
Round Shag island keep it open southward of Musket islands, bearing 

239°, to pass southward of Venils and Boar Island shoals. When 
Richards head opens eastward of Boar island, bearing 317°, being 
clear of Boar Island rock, steer north-northwestward for a position 


234 CREW POINT TO CAPE RAY. 


about 400 yards northward of Boar island, and then as above directed 
in entering from the eastward. 

Small vessels can use the channel between Ragged and Seal islands, 
keeping Richards head and Burgeo church shut in with Morgan 
island, until Crocker island is distant about + mile, when steer to 
pass 200 yards westward of Crocker, White, and Morgan islands, and 
as before directed. 

To enter between Round Shag and Musket islets, keep about 400 
yards from Musket islets, Little Rencontre rocks and island, round- 
ing Crocker island at the distance of 200 yards, and then proceed as 
before directed. 

Tides and tidal streams.—It is high water, full and change, at 
Burgeo at 8h. 32m.; springs rise 6} feet, neaps 4 feet. 

The direction of the tidal streams off Burgeo is greatly influenced 
by the prevailing winds. The west-going stream attains a rate of 
14 knots an hour after a prevalence of easterly winds, but the rate of 
the east-going stream seldom exceeds 1 knot an hour. 

Green island, northward 700 yards from Cornelius island, is 
about 40 feet high, long and narrow, with rocks extending 350 yards 
southwestward from it, and a rock, awash at low water in mid- 
channel between it and Little Barasway head, which is 250 yards to 
the northward. 

No Mans rock, bearing 259°, distant 400 yards from the western 
point of Green island, is 1 foot high; and a rock, distant 900 yards on 
the same bearing from the island, has 12 feet water over it, and 7 
fathoms close to, except on its southern side where there is a depth 
of 48 fathoms for a distance of about 75 yards. 

Galloping Moll rock, bearing 217°, distant 800 yards from No 
Mans rock, covers 5 feet at high water, and the sea nearly always 
breaks on it. 

Little Barasway is a large bay which nearly all dries, with First 
and Aaron arms, two inlets, extending to the eastward. The en- 
trance is nearly dry at low water, and in it is a conical islet. 

The canal, a cutting connecting Little Barasway with Grandy 
brook, is available for the fishermen’s small boats from three-quarters 
flood to a quarter ebb. 

Flannagan island, northwestward, distant 1,400 yards from 
Little Barasway head, has a flat top 33 feet high, and is faced by 
cliffs; a small rock lies close to its eastern side. 

A rock, bearing 163°, distant 400 yards from Flannagan island, 
covers 2 feet at high water, and has a depth of 7 fathoms close around 
it; and 121°, distant 850 yards from the same island, is a patch of — 
rocks, with two heads covering 3 feet. 

Little Gut head, northwestward 1; miles from Little Baras- 
way head, is the southwestern point of a sharp-topped conical hill, 225 


LITTLE GUT—BARASWAY POINT. 235 


feet high. The rocks about this head are white, and close off it is a 
rock, awash at high water, with a depth of 4 fathoms at a short dis- 
tance seaward of it. 

Little Gut, northward 700 yards from Little Gut head, was an 
entrance to Grandy brook, but it is now closed. 

Grandy brook is an arm of the sea extending from Little Gut 24 
miles inland to the fresh-water brook at the head. 

The land eastward of Grandy brook consists of conical hills and 
mounds, partially covered with stunted trees or whitened by former 
fires, while that westward of the brook consists of ranges of hills with 
cliff-faced summits and smooth, mossy slopes. 

Norman head, the northern entrance point of Little Gut, is a 
bare-topped mound 93 feet high, with a spit of shingle extending 
from its base into Little Gut. Westward of this head a long shingle 
beach, 10 feet high, with a grassy mound as its western end and two 
mounds at short distances eastward of that end, forms the shore of 
Barasway bay and separates it from Big Barasway, a large shoal 
inland bay containing several islands. The entrance to Big Barasway 
at the western end of the beach is encumbered by rocks, and it is 
rarely used even by local small craft. 

Barasway bay, between Cornelius island and Barasway point, 
that lies 44 miles to the westward, has general depths of 13 to 17 
fathoms across its mouth, but islets, rocks, and foul ground make the 
bay useless as an anchorage, and in heavy weather it appears a mass 
of breakers. 

Mile rocks, the highest of which bears 84°, distant 1,5, miles from 
Little Gut head and is 14 feet high, with rocks awash and below 
water all around, occupy an area 1,400 yards long in an easterly and 
westerly direction, and about 800 yards broad. 

A rock, bearing 94°, distant 1,650 yards from the highest Mile rock, 
has 6 feet of water over it, and a shoal, bearing 52°, distant 1,400 
yards from the same Mile rock, has 7 feet of water over it. 

The Jumper, bearing 116°, distant 14 miles from Barasway point, 
is awash at low water, and the sea always breaks on it; and a shoal, 
with 18 feet water over it, bears 72°, nearly 800 yards from the 
Jumper. ; 

Doctor harbor, with the small white Doctor island in its entrance, 
is an inlet extending 600 yards in a northwesterly direction into the 
southeastern side of Barasway Point promontory. It is available for 
small vessels only. 

Barasway point is the southwestern end of a low promontory 
extending from the slopes of Father Hughes hill, 398 feet high, which 
is situated 1,2, miles northward from the point and appears as a 
cone from seaward; from it a flat range of hills stretches to the in- 
terior. The moss and stunted growth that cover this hill are darker 


236 CREW POINT TO CAPE RAY. 


than the surrounding country, and tend to make it conspicuous even 
in misty weather. 

A rock, nearly 200 yards distant from the southern side of the 
promontory just westward of Doctor harbor, covers 1 foot at high 
water; and a rock, bearing 158°, distant 300 yards from the point, has 
6 feet of water over it. 

The coast from Barasway point to Connoire head, west-northwest- 
ward, distant 54, miles, is foul, with several small coves. The outer 
rocks are generally marked by breakers, and may be approached from 
seaward to + mile. Connoire Head hill completely open westward of 
Wreck island, the low green island next eastward of it, bearing 309°, 
leads southwestward of all the shoals. 

Middle brook.—Anchorage can be obtained off Middle brook, 
between Green island, at 2 miles west-northwestward of Barasway 
point and off which are Green Island rocks, a small cluster above 
water, and Baring island, reddish, white, rocky, and 53 feet high, 
about 2 mile farther northwestward, in 12 fathoms of water, but it 
is open southwestward. A few houses stand on the western entrance 
point of Middle brook, at the head of the anchorage. 

Connoire head is conspicuous from its isolation and a white rock 
at its base; the dark stunted trees that crown its summit are 175 feet 
above high water. 

Connoire bay, the entrance of which has a width of 2,% miles 
between Connoire head and Muddy Hole point, extends northward 
94 miles with a breadth of 14 miles to Mid head, where it branches 
into Northeast and Northwest arms. Northeast arm extends in a curve 
northeastward 21 miles, and Northwest arm northward 34 miles, but 
in this arm the depth of water is less than 5 fathoms over its whole 
extent, and at half tide only boats can enter the shallow portion 
which begins at 1 mile within Mid head. 

The only shoal in the outer part of Connoire bay is a rock with 3 
fathoms water over it, situated 300 yards from the eastern shore of the 
bay and 1,8, miles within Connoire head. Northeastward of Connoire 
head the land slopes smoothly from hills that attain a height of 514 
feet and are covered with brown moss. Mid head terminates in a 
series of peaked hills, and its highest part, on the northwestern shore 
of Northeast arm, is 689 feet high. 

Anchorage.—The bay is quite open to southerly winds, but 
anchorage can be obtained with offshore winds in depths of 10 fath- 
oms or less, as convenient. | 

Wortheast arm affords good shelter to vessels drawing 18 feet or 
less water, anchorage being taken by the lead and according to the 
size of the vessel. A sand bank extends from the northwestern shore, 
just within the point where the arm narrows, and a rock, with 12 
feet water on it, lies in mid-channel off Billiard cove, a small bight 
on the eastern shore. 


MUDDY HOLE POINT—OTTER POINT SETTLEMENT. 937 


-Water.—A good stream flows into the head of Billiard cove. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Billiard cove, Connoire 
bay, at 8h. 40m.; springs rise 5} feet, neaps 4 feet; neaps range 3 feet. 

Muddy Hole point is the end of a conical hill 97 feet high, and 
the apparent southern termination of a ridge extending from a hill 
with a sharp peak 246 feet high, which bears 34°, distant 1,%, miles 
from the point, and slopes northwestward to Gull pond, a salt-water 
lagoon. Cow-house hill, northward about 2 miles from Gull pond, 
is 855 feet high, and the highest land near the sea in this locality. 
Round hill, northward about 24 miles from Muddy Hole point, is 570 
feet high. Rocks extend southeastward and southward 800 yards 
from Muddy Hole point; the summit of Baring island in line with 
the southern end of Wreck island, bearing 99°, leads southward of 
them. 

Muddy Hole bay is open southward, and has a small boat cove in 
its northeastern corner. 

Anchorage.—The bay affords open anchorage with offshore winds 
in 11 to 12 fathoms water, but the holding ground is not good. 

Otter point, the western entrance point of Muddy hole, rises to 
a round hill 137 feet high; Trimming hill, immediately within the 

point, is a small cone 37 feet high. 

‘Two shoals, with 3 fathoms of water over them, bear 118°, distant 
665 and 950 yards, respectively, from the point. 

The Painter, a rock bearing 149°, distant ? mile from Otter point, 
almost dries at low water, but often it is not marked by a breaker. 
The western house on the shore of the boat cove at the head of Muddy 
Hole bay in line with the passage between-a small islet, 20 feet high, 
and the eastern shore of that bay, bearing 9°, leads eastward; and 
the southern end of Couteau Colombier in line with Winging rock, 
the first black rock northward of Shag island, bearing 279°, leads 
southward of the Painter. 

Shag island, 1 mile southward of Otter point and the southern- 
most of a chain of islands and rocks extending from that point, is a 
conspicuous white rock 42 feet high. Numerous sunken patches lie 
westward of Shag island; Colombier shoal, bearing 246°, distant 155 
miles from the summit of Shag island, is the southern of them, and 
there is a depth of 6 feet of water over it. This shoal was formerly 
known as Comus rock, and the present local corruption of the name 
is Clumpy shoal. 

Clearing marks.—The western entrance point of Connoire bay 
open southward of Shag island, bearing 59°, leads southward, and 
the southeastern end of Captain island in line with Couteau Colom- 
bier, bearing 9°, leads westward of Colombier shoal. 

Otter Point settlement, with a population of about 50, is situated 
on the northern side of Duck island, a small island at the head of a 
rugged bight immediately northwestward of Otter point. 


238 CREW POINT TO CAPE RAY. 


Local knowledge is necessary to approach this settlement, or the 
anchorage between it and the mainland northward of it, and only 
vessels drawing 12 feet or less water can enter it from the eastward. 
The flagstaff of the settlement is all of it that is visible from seaward. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, at Duck island, at 
Sh. 47m.; springs rise 54 feet, neaps 34 feet; neaps range 2% feet. 

Couteau Colombier, situated west-northwestward 14 miles from 
Shag island, is a remarkable square-shaped rock 49 feet high, with a 
low spur extending northeastward. On certain southeasterly bear- 
ings it presents a resemblance to a human profile. 

Captain island, northward, 14 miles from Couteau Colombier, is 
about # mile long in a northerly and southerly direction, $ mile wide, 
and it rises in two hillocks, the northern being 216 feet high. The 
whiteness of the rock of this island where bare, and the darkness of 
the vegetation which covers the remainder, are noticeable. Its fea- 
tures are much diversified, and there is a white stripe on one of the 
hills on its northern side. 

Rock and shoals extend westward 1,200 yards from this island. 
The passage between it and the mainland northward is 200 yards 
wide, with a depth of 43 fathoms water in the fairway. 

Anchorage.—Small vessels will find excellent anchorage in this 
channel northward of the opening between Captain island and Duck 
island, which are almost connected by islands and rocks, taking care 
to avoid Seal rocks, 1 foot above high water, which lie off the main- 
land on the northern side of the channel. 

Couteau bay extends northward 2? miles to Couteau brook 
entrance. The entrance to the bay is almost blocked by islets and 
rocks, but there is one safe, though narrow, passage through them. 

Couteau Flat rocks, 6 and 10 feet high, respectively, and the south- 
ernmost of those above water off Couteau bay, are surrounded by 
submerged rocks and shoals for a short distance. Copped Duck rock, 
197°, distant 1,300 yards from the 6 feet high Flat rock, and the outer 
shoal off Couteau bay, has 5 fathoms water over it. Connoire head, 
open southward of Shag island, bearing 85°, leads southward, and the 
eastern end of the land on the northwestern shore of Couteau bay, 
open westward of the 10 feet high Flat rock, bearing 9°, leads west- 
ward of Copper Duck rock. 

Man rock, situated 2 mile northwestward of Flat rocks, is 3 feet 
high; and Black rock, 800 yards west-southwestward of Man rock, is 
a black wedge-shaped rock 17 feet high. Shoals extend southward 
and south-southeastward from Man rock, and a shoal, with 5 fath- 
oms of water over it, bears 195°, distant 550 yards from Black rock. 

A rock in Couteau bay, bearing 35°, 1,350 yards from Man rock and 
650 yards from the western shore of the bay, has 3 fathoms of water 
over it. 


COUTEAU BROOK—BLACK ROCK. 239 


Directions.—The only available passage, without local knowledge, 
into Couteau bay is between Man rock and Black rock, and even in 
this passage there is a heavy swell during, or after, southerly and 
westerly gales. Approach with Baggs head midway between Cou- 
teau bay western entrance point and Black rock of Cinq Cerf bay, 
bearing 316°, to clear Copper Duck rock, and when Shag roost, a 
conspicuous hillock 126 feet high and faced by cliff, on the western 
shore of Couteau bay, is midway between Man rock and Black rock, 
bearing 18°, steer with this mark on until past Man rock, when keep 
300 yards off the western shore of the bay until Horses head, a cubical 
black rock 13 feet high, off Otter point, is in line with the southwest- 
ern end of Captain island, bearing 125°, which mark leads northward 
of the 3-fathom rock in the bay, and then steer for the head of the bay. 

Anchor in 5 to 9 fathoms of water; a swell rolls in with south- 
westerly and westerly winds. 

Gull islet, 274°, 300 yards from the northwestern point of Captain 
island, is 18 feet high and white, and shoal patches extend west- 
ward 600 yards from it. To enter the passage between Captain 
island and the mainland northward of it, when 300 yards off the 
western shore of the bay, with the Horses head in line with the south- 
western end of Captain island, steer 63° until the houses on Duck 
island are open northward of Captain island, bearing 111°, then 
steer for the passage, and keep in mid-channel. Small vessels may 
anchor in any part of this passage. 

Couteau brook is a considerable stream draining a large valley; 
the valley is noticeable from seaward. 

Blue Hills of Couteau, situated northward about 8 miles from 
Couteau bay, are two remarkable bluffs, 1,903 and 1,845 feet high, 
respectively. Extensive mountainous ranges extend both eastward 
and westward from them, but these are the most remarkable, and are 
excellent marks in clear weather. 

Cing Cerf bay lies next westward of Couteau bay, and is encum- 
bered with islands and rocks. The dividing point between the two 
bays is foul seaward to White ground, the outer shoal, which is 
situated 900 yards south-southwestward of the point, and has 24 
fathoms water over it. 

Culotte, a small cove in the northeastern part of the bay, and the 
only anchorage, is available for small vessels. 

Flat island, the southernmost of the islands off the bay and situ- 
ated 1-2; miles southwestward of the dividing point between Couteau 
bay and Cing Cerf bay, is a bare rock, 23 feet high. It may be ap- 
proached to the distance of 200 yards on its southern and western 
sides, but shoals extend northward 800 yards from it. 

Black rock, situated 39, mile north-northeastward of Flat island, 
is a small rock 11 feet high, and shoals extend 300 yards in all direc- 


240 CREW POINT TO CAPE RAY. 


tions from it; there is no safe passage between it and the mainland 
to the eastward. | 

Directions.—For Culotte, from a position 400 yards northwest- 
ward from Flat island steer 18° until Black rock bears 125°, distant 
1 mile, observing that Pools island (low and wooded, in the north- 
eastern arm of Cing Cerf bay, and under Devil head, a steep bluff 280 
feet high, that forms the northeastern entrance point to Culotte) just 
open northward of the southeastern shore of Cinq Cerf bay, bearing 
41°, leads close northward of the shoals off Black rock. Then steer 
for Pools island, giving the southern shore of the bay a berth of 
about 200 yards, and leaving Seal rocks (a cluster of flat rocks 8 feet 
high, situated southward of a peninsula on which are two hills 115 
and 117 feet high respectively, that forms the western entrance point 
to Culotte) to the northward. Pass in mid-channel between Woody 
island, which is separated by a narrow channel from the eastern end | 
of the peninsula, and Pools island, and anchor in 6 to 8 fathoms 
water, mud bottom, and good holding ground. 

Water can be taken from a brook at the northeastern corner of 
Culotte, and wood is abundant. 

Baggs head, in the northwestern part of the northern shore of 
Cing Cerf bay, is a conspicuous dark wooded cone 188 feet high. 
There is a white patch on the side of the hill at 4 mile eastward of 
Baggs head, which is noticeable from a distance of 3 miles seaward. 

Numerous islands and shoals extend southeastward of the head; 
Woody island, open eastward of Seal rocks, bearing 45°, leads south- 
eastward of them. 

Cinq Cerf brook, a considerable stream, which runs from many 
miles inland, discharges its waters through a deep valley close west- 
ward of Baggs head; it usually contains salmon and trout. 

Cing Cerf islets lie eastward of the western entrance point to 
Sinq Cerf bay. Their seaward coasts consist of steep gray cliffs. 
The highest and southwesternmost islet is 84 feet high, while Shag 
islet, the northeasternmost, is a bare white rock 26 feet high. There 
is a very small settlement round a cove in the mainland, close north- 
westward of these islets. 

Big Sunker, the southwestern of a group of rocks lying off Cing 
Cerf islets, bears 284°, distant 1 mile from Flat island, and has 15 
feet of water over it. Shag island, off Otter point, open southwest- 
ward of Flat island, bearing 100°, leads southward; Baggs head 
well open southeastward of Shag islet, Cinq Cerf, bearing 7°, leads 
eastward; and Baggs head open northwestward of Shag islet, Cing 
Cerf, bearing 26°, leads northwestward of this rock. 

Whittle hill, situated on the mainland at about 1,200 yards west- 
northwestward of the western entrance point of Cinq Cerf bay, is a 
round hill 333 feet high. 


THREE ISLANDS—-GRAND BRUIT HARBOR. 241 


' Three islands, westward about 2 miles from Cing Cerf islets, 
are a cluster of three islands with two lower islets eastward of them, 
and several rocks and shoals around. The southernmost and highest 
is a round gray rock 46 feet high. Pigeon islet, bearing 268°, leads 
southward of the shoals off these islands. 

Bad Neighbor rock, bearing 168°, distant 14 miles from the 
southernmost of the Three islands, is nearly awash at low water. 

Clearing marks.—Roti Colombier in line with Offer islet, bear- 
ing 268°, leads southward; the Highland of Grand Bruit well open 
eastward of the southern of Three islands, bearing 347°, leads close 
eastward; and open westward of that island, bearing 351°, leads close 
Eiward. of this rock. 

Chance rock, bearing 256°, distant 700 yards from Bad Neighbor, 
has 42 fathoms of water over it. 

The Highland of Grand Bruit rises in a steep cliff to the height 
of 1,012 feet, and on it there is a cairn of stones, at about 2;%; miles 
north-northeastward of Grand Bruit harbor. It is very remarkable, 
and an excellent landmark. Rocky and serrated ranges extend inland 
from it for several miles. 

A cascade falls over the hills at nearly 1 mile westward of the high 

land. 
Grand Bruit harbor, 1,4; miles westward from Three islands, is 
only 200 yards wide, but it affords excellent sheltered anchorage for 
small vessels in 7 fathoms water. The houses of the village sur- 
rounding the harbor, a white schoolhouse on the slope of the hill 
above, and the large waterfall at the head of the harbor are visible 
from seaward. A line of rocky patches extends southeastward 450 
yards from the southwestern end of the island forming the eastern 
entrance point of the harbor, and there is a least depth of 13 feet of 
water over them. 

The Smoker, 1,200 yards southeastward from the eastern entrance 
point of the harbor, is an isolated rock 10 feet high. Two patches, 
with 22 and 3 fathoms of water over them, respectively, le in a direc- 
tion 49°, within 600 yards from this’ rock. 

A group of islands hes southward of the entrance to the harbor. 
Southeast island of this group is a gray bare islet 40 feet high, and 
White island at the northern end is a steep round islet 35 feet high. 
Harbor island, the largest of the group, has two boat coves, one on 
either side of a narrow neck of land in the middle of the island. It 
falls in gray cliff from its southern summit 105 feet high. Duck 
island shelters the northern boat cove, and rocks extend 200 yards 
from its northwestern end. Pigeon islet, the northwestern of the 
group, is a rugged rock 24 feet high. 


76846—09——16 


242 CREW POINT TO CAPE RAY. 


Grand Bruit Colombier, 900 yards south-southwestward from 
Jones island, the southernmost of the group off the harbor, is a con- 
spicuous small cone about 35 feet high. A rock that dries about 2 
feet at low water lies east-northeastward 650 yards, and a sunken 
rock southeastward 200 yards from Grand Bruit Colombier. 

Offer islet, southward + mile from Grand Bruit Colombier, and 
the southernmost islet off Grand Bruit harbor, is 22 feet high, and 
shoals do not extend over 200 yards from it. 

Hares ears are two sharp peaks, 120 feet high, immediately over 
the mainland at about 1,200 yards west-southwestward of Grand Bruit 
harbor. 

Directions.—For Grand Bruit harbor from the eastward: After 
passing Big Sunker, steer for White island, keeping Hares Ears shut 
in with Pigeon islet, bearing 268°, to clear the shoals off Three 
islands; when the southernmost of the Three islands bears 7°, edge 
northward and bring and keep the northern ends of White island 
and Salmon-net islet (a white islet under Hares ears) in line bearing 
974°. Pass close northward of White island and steer 285° until 
the western entrance point of the harbor bears 344° to clear the 
shoals off the eastern entrance point; then enter the harbor in mid- 
channel. 

From the westward, keep Flat island open southward of Offer 
islet, bearing 75°, until the Highland of Grand Bruit is over Pigeon 
island, bearing 24°, to clear the rocks off the Barasway; then steer 
for the middle of Harbor island, till the waterfall at Grand Bruit 
harbor is in sight, bearing 7°. Close Harbor island, round its north- 
western end at the distance of about 200 yards, and proceed in mid- 
channel between Pigeon islet and the mainland northward of it to the 
harbor. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Grand Bruit harbor 
at Sh. 43m.; springs rise 5} feet, neaps 4 feet. 

The Barasway, a large bight westward of Hares Ears, is almost 
filled with islands and rocks, and the passage between them requires 
a local pilot. 

Flat island, open southward of Offer islet, bearing 75°, leads south- 
ward of the outlying shoals. 

Old Man hill, situated 1% miles northward of the Barasway, 
is a peaked hill 684 feet high and faced by cliff. For about an hour 
from noon when the sun is shining the shadow of the cliff on the 
face of the hill forms a curious resemblance to the figure of a man. 

Roti Colombier, at the southwestern end of the islands off the 
Barasway, is a conspicuous bare conical rock 62 feet high. There 
are several rocks, both above and below water, between Roti Colom- 
bier and Jacques island. 


IRELAND ISLAND—DOLMAN COVE. 243 


Ireland island les westward, distant 3 miles from Roti Colom- 
bier, and southward, one mile from the eastern entrance point to La 
Poile bay; a ledge extends eastward 600 yards from this island, with 
12 fathoms water at its outer end. 

Light.—A cylindrical lighthouse, 39 feet high, with a dwelling 
uttached, both lighthouse and dwelling being painted red and white 
in horizontal stripes, on Ireland island, exhibits, at 67 feet above high 
water, a revolving white hght, showing flashes which attain their 
greatest brilliancy every twelve seconds, and are separated by total 
eclipses; the hight should be seen from a distance of 9 miles in clear 
weather. 

Rocks.—Naked Man rock, bearing 339°, distant 1,300 yards from 
ireland island, dries 3 feet at low water. 

A rock, situated with Naked Man rock bearing about 318°, distant 
550 yards, has a depth of less than 6 feet over it, and the sea breaks 
on it. 

A rock, situated with Naked Man rock bearing 304°, distant 400 
yards, has a depth of 24 fathoms over it, and 4 to 5 fathoms close 
around. 

Southeast rock, bearing 55°, distant 600 yards from Ireland Island 
lighthouse, is awash at low water; bearing 1°, 400 yards from the 
lighthouse, is a shoal with 24 fathoms of water over it; and bearing 
232°, 650 yards from the ighthouse, is a sunken rock. 

A rock, bearing 49°, distant } mile from Naked Man rock, is about 
12 feet high, and there is a rock, with less than 6 feet of water over it, 
close westward of it; the ground is foul between these rocks and the 
eastern entrance point of la Poile bay, which bears 57°, distant about 
4 mile. 

La Poile bay extends about north-northeastward 6 miles, with a 
general width of 12 miles to Dolman head and North Bay point; 
Northeast arm extends northeastward 24 miles from south of Dolman 
head, and North bay extends northward 3} miles from North Bay 
point. 

Gallyboy harbor, on the eastern shore of la Poile bay, at 24 miles 
within its eastern entrance point, is a narrow boat creek, and there 
is a rock, with 6 feet water over it, in the middle of its entrance. 

Friar rock, bearing 225°, distant 250 yards from the western point 
of Sandy cove, on the eastern shore of the bay at 3} miles within the 
entrance, is awash at low water. 

Northeast arm affords excellent anchorage, 1,600 yards long and 
600 yards broad, in 10 to 13 fathoms water, mud bottom. The arm is 
clear of shoals at a short distance from its shores. Water can be 
taken from Rattling brook, near the head of Northeast arm. 

Dolman cove is an open bight between Dolman head, which is 
a steep bluff, 770 feet high, and North Bay point. 


244 CREW POINT TO CAPE RAY. 


North bay is shallow within its entrance, but anchorage may be 
obtained just outside in 12 fathoms water, gravel bottom. A tele- 
graph wire crosses the head of the bay. 

Bennet rock, with 12 feet of water over it, bears 112°, distant 
400 yards from Vineyard islet, a small islet off the eastern point of 
Broad cove, which is on the western shore of the bay at about 1} miles 
within its entrance. 

Little bay, on the west shore and bearing north-northwestward 
from the eastern entrance point of la Poile bay, extends inland 14 
miles in a westerly direction, and affords anchorage, in a space about 
350 yards across, off the fishing settlement in 10 fathoms water. 
Bouys are placed for warping vessels to the wharves. 

Shoal.—A shoal, with 6$ fathoms of water over it, is said to he 
northeast of the settlement in Little bay; it has been unsuccessfully 
searched for. 

Tooth rock, bearing 176°, distant 250 yards from Tooth head, 
the northern entrance point of Little bay, has a depth of 23 fathoms 
over it, and 5 to 10 fathoms close around. 

Anchorage may be obtained off the mouth of this bay in 15 fath- 
oms of water, open to southerly winds, but Tooth rock limits the 
anchoring space. 

Communication.—The Newfoundland railway steamer from St. 
Johns calls here weekly during summer and autumn, and there is a 
post and telegraph office. 

Ice.—Little bay freezes occasionally in February, but the ice sel- 
dom remains long. 

La Poile harbor, the entrance of which bears northwestward 
from the eastern entrance point of la Poile bay, is 400 yards wide 
and 1,700 yards long, as far as Pig island, which les in mid-chan- 
nel; beyond Pig island it extends southwestward for 4 mile in a 
narrow arm to its head. 

This harbor affords anchorage in 11 fathoms of water at about 
300 yards eastward of Pig island. There are a few houses on its 
southern shore. 

Beacon.—<A beacon stands on Beacon point, the southern entrance 
point. 

Harbor rock, with 10 feet water over it, is on the outer part of 
a shoal extending northward 200 yards from the southern shore, 
just within the entrance; to clear this rock, keep the northern shore 
aboard. 

Ice.—La Poile harbor freezes over about February 10, and the 
ice disappears about March 20; although blocked at intervals, gener- 
ally between March 1 and 20, navigation has not been impeded more 
than six spring seasons during fifty years, and field ice rarely arrives, 
but when forced in by southerly winds it becomes a serious obstruc- 


LA PLANTE HARBOR—GARIA BAY. 245 


tion; the bay is cleared by northwesterly winds. The ice in the river 
is generally about 6 inches thick. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in la Poile bay at 9h. 
0m.; springs rise 6 feet, neaps 4 feet. 

La Plante harbor, situated 1,4, miles southwestward of Beacon 
point, is a narrow boat creek. To clear a rock just inside the mouth, 
keep the eastern entrance point close aboard. 

Cox rock, with 9 feet of water over it, lies 600 yards off the land 
at the western entrance of la Poile bay, and bears 271°, distant 24 
miles from Ireland Island lighthouse. 


Little la Poile is a narrow shallow inlet, extending northeastward, 
1,800 yards into the land at about 34 miles west-northwestward from 
Ireland island. 

The coast between la Poile bay and Garia bay, westward about 
4 miles, is bordered by islands and rocks, which no stranger should 
attempt to pass inside of at any time, nor shoal the water to less than 
50 fathoms at night. 

Crafty head, 140 feet high, and Black George head, 141 feet high, 
are two conspicuous conical headlands, eastward 2 miles and 14 miles, 
respectively, from Garia bay. Behind these headlands the land grad- 
ually rises to the height of 860 feet on the eastern side of Garia bay, 
while at 4 miles northward of the head of that bay are the Blue 
mountains of Garia; Garia peak, the highest, is sharp and 1,814 feet 
high. 

Indian island, southeastward + mile from the eastern entrance 
point of Garia bay, is 58 feet high, and there is a white cliff at its 
southwestern point. 

Deer island, in Garia bay entrance, rises to a conical hill 68 feet 
high, and is covered with dark spruce. The northern coast of Deer 
island is generally foul. Islets and rocks extend southward $ mile 
from Deer island, the most prominent being Shag islet, which is a 
gray rock, 32 feet high, and Black rock, the southernmost, which is 
12 feet high. 

Garia bay extends north-northwestward 3 miles and thence turns 
north-northeastward for 2 miles. The water in the bay is generally 
shallow, and the anchorage for large vessels is only 300 yards wide, 
but that for small vessels is excellent. 

Wood, suitable for building fishing craft, grows in Garia bay. 

Smock island, just inside Garia bay entrance, is 53 feet high, and 
composed of gray rock partially covered with moss; its coasts are 
foul for a short distance. Ship Cove hill, on the eastern shore of the 
bay at 1,4, miles within the entrance, is a remarkable headland, 155 
feet high, and Big island, 114 feet high, hes northwestward 400 
yards from it. Spruce island, joined by rocks to the western shore at 
4 mile within Smock island, is 52 feet high, and Round island, } mile 


246 CREW POINT TO CAPE RAY. 


farther northward, is 72 feet high and separated from the western 
shore by the deepest channel leading to the head of the bay. 

Rocks.—Big rock, Bell rock, and Flat rock (named from their 
shapes) are the highest heads of a reef extending about 900 yards 
in a northerly and southerly direction lying in the entrance to Garia 
bay westward of Deer island. Big rock is 18 feet high and Bell 
rock 5 feet high. 

Brag rock, about 65 yards eastward of Flat rock, has 2 feet of water 
over it. 

The Bull, the Calf, and the Cow, three rocks showing only at low- 
water springs, he about 400 yards westward from the northern part 
of Deer island. 

Garia harbor is a small cove with numerous rocks in it, on the 
western side of Garia bay just inside the entrance. There is a small 
settlement here; the northeasternmost house, standing on a small 
eminence above the other houses, is the school. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Garia harbor at 8h. 
50m. ; springs rise 54 feet, neaps 3% feet; neaps range 2 feet. 

Wreck island, southward about ? mile from the western entrance 
point of Garia bay, is 35 feet high, and covered with grass; there are 
two rocky mounds near its northwestern end. Wreck island sunkers 
are rocks that extend southward nearly $ mile from Wreck island; 
and Offer Gob rock, bearing 208°, distant } mile from Wreck island 
summit, has 15 feet of water over it. 

Hatcher’s cove, a small bight completely open to the southward, 
lies close westward of the entrance to Garia bay. The eastern part 
of the cove is full of rocks, but there is good anchorage for small craft 
in the remainder, in 6 to 11 fathoms water. 

There is a small black rock off the eastern entrance point, and one 
that dries at low water close to the western entrance point. 

Garia bay—Directions—From the eastward.—Give Black rock 
off Little la Poile a berth of $ mile and bring the northeastern end of 
Big Seal island and the southwestern end of Wreck island in line, 
bearing 277°, which mark leads southward of Harpoon shoal. This 
shoal, which has 25 feet water over it, is the southern shoal in this 
locality and bears 133°, distant 15 miles from the southwestern end 
of Indian island. The southern end of Big Seal island, well open 
southward of Wreck island, bearing 268°, leads southward of Tinker 
rocks, a patch lying southeastward about a mile from Indian island. 

Eastern channel.—This channel, being only 100 yards wide in 
its entrance, with a depth of 21 feet water, is suitable for small ves- 
sels. Having the northeastern end of Big Seal island and the south- 
western end of Wreck island in line, when Smock island is open west- 
ward of the eastern entrance point of Garia bay, bearing 316°, keep | 
this mark on until 200 yards off the southwestern end of Indian 


LITTLE GARIA BAY. 247 


island, then steer in mid-channel between the low reef at the north- 
eastern end of Deer island and the eastern entrance point of Garia 
bay, with the western end of Smock island bearing about 308°, until 
the schoolhouse at Garia harbor is shut in with the northern entrance 
point of that harbor, bearing 265°, which mark leads northward of 
the shoals off Deer island. Then pass westward of Smock island and 
anchor in about 7 fathoms of water, midway between the island and 
a cove northwestward of it. 

Small vessels can proceed between Spruce and Big islands, through 
the channel westward of Round island, then for 1 mile in the direc- 
tion of the waterfall, and on to the narrows. 

Western channel.—Having the northeastern end of Big Seal 
island in line with the southwestern end of Wreck island, when Black 
rock, southward of Deer island, bears 333°, steer 299° until the north- 
ern entrance point of Garia harbor, a small bluff, is in line with Bell 
rock, bearing 348°, then steer for the channel between Deer island 
and Bell rock; open the whole of Smock island westward of Deer 
island, bearing 357°, before passing Black rock, in order to clear 
Sculpin rock, the westernmost of the rocks southward of Deer island. 

When abreast Bell rock keep the fall of the hills on the eastern 
side of Garia bay open eastward of the northern entrance point to 
Garia harbor, bearing 344°, to clear Brag rock, and, after passing 
Flat rock, Black rock its own breadth open westward of Deer island, 
bearing 153°, to clear the Bull. Then continue northward, passing 
at about 100 yards off the northern entrance point of Garia harbor, 
and anchor as above directed. 

From the westward—Western channel.—Keep Black George 
head open southward of Black rock, bearing 37°, to clear Wreck Island 
sunkers until the north entrance point of Garia harbor is in line with 
Bell rock, when proceed as above directed. 

Eastern channel.—<After passing Wreck Island sunkers, as above, 
keep the southern end of Big Seal island open southward of Wreck 
island, bearing 268°, until the entrance points of the eastern passage 
are open, bearing 336°, then steer for the entrance, and as above 
directed. 

Little Garia bay is westward, about 1,200 yards from Hatchers 
cove, the eastern entrance point of the bay being Slammer point, 
- which has the appearance of an island. Firmages head, a remark- 
able bluff, 180 feet high, is just within the eastern entrance point. 
There is no shoal in this bay except close to the shore, but the water 
is deep, and it is completely open to the southward. <A bar of flat 
rock, with 12 feet water over it, crosses the bay at } mile from its 
head; within the bar is a basin with 44 fathoms in it, and a good 
anchorage for small craft. Large vessels anchor, sheltered from off- 
shore wihds, in 13 fathoms water off Pigeon island, 40 feet high, 


248 CREW POINT TO CAPE RAY. 


close to the western shore, and just northward of Pillar rock, 35 
feet high. Berry point, the western entrance point, is a low penin- 
sula of red cliff with a small rock above water close to its southern 
side. 

Seal islands are a group off Berry point. 

Big Seal island rises to a sharp pointed hill 130 feet high, and is 
generally covered with grass and moss. Round island, close north- 
westward of it, is a sharp cone about 70 feet high, and Offer Seal 
island, close southwestward of Big Seal island, is 54 feet high, with 
Black rock, 6 feet high, 200 yards off its southern side. 

Rocks extend from Offer Seal island except on its northern side, 
and Edge of Ground shoal, bearing 143°, distant 800 yards from its 
eastern point, has 15 feet water over it. 

Gob rock, northeastward 100 yards from the northeastern end of 
Big Seal island, is awash at low water. Sunken rocks fringe the 
northern coasts of Big Seal and Round islands, and a rock, awash 
at low water, lies northeastward 150 yards from the northeastern end 
of Round island. 

Directions.—Proceeding southward and westward from Garia 
bay, having Bell rock in line with the northern entrance point of 
Garia harbor, when Black George head opens southeastward of Black 
rock, southward of Deer island, bearing 39°, keep it so astern until 
Seal Island head is in line with the northern end of Offer Seal island, 
bearing 291°, to clear Wreck Island sunkers and Offer Gob rock, 
Keep this mark on until the western entrance point of Garia bay is 
between the two hummocks of Wreck island, bearing 26°, which 
mark leads westward of Offer Gob rock. For Little Garia bay or 
Seal islands, the course is then direct, avoiding the rocks off Seal 
islands. 

The coast westward of Seal islands is bordered by rocks and 
shoals, and except with local knowledge, vessels should not close the 
land northward of the line of the summit of Wreck island in line 
with Black rock of Offer Seal island, bearing 71°. 

Seal Island head, southwestward about 600 yards from Round 
island, is a conspicuous red bluff 55 feet high; there is a small cove 
eastward of it in which small vessels anchor in 7 fathoms of water 
in a space about 200 yards in diameter. 

The entrance is from the eastward and northward of Big Seal 
and Round islands, and to clear the rocks off Round island keep close 
to the northern shore, as the passage is only 65 yards wide. There 
is a small settlement here. 

Bennett cove, northwestward 4+ mile from Seal Island head, 
affords refuge for small craft, but it is barred from the southward 
by rocks, and it is approached only from the westward Me keeping 
about 65 yards from the land. 


BAY LE MOINE—SHARK COVE HEAD. 249 


Bay le Moine entrance is west-southwestward about 2} miles from 
Seal Island head, and the bay extends north-northeastward 4 miles; 
there is good anchorage at its head. 

Petites is a considerable settlement situated round the basins 
formed by a group of islands and rocks at the eastern entrance point 
of bay le Moine. 

These basins are suitable for small vessels only, which moor to the 
wharves; local pilotage knowledge is required. 

Black rock, the southernmost of the group, is 4 feet high, and 
lies 800 yards southward of Gull island, which is 33 feet high, and 
covered with grass over red rock. 

Black Rock shoal, bearing 235°, distant nearly 400 yards from 
Black rock, has 3 fathoms of water over it. 

Major rock, bearing 292°, distant 600 yards from the summit of 
Gull island, is a very sharp pinnacle, with 6 feet of water over it, 
and deep water close around; it does not often break. 

Fish head, the western entrance of bay le Moine, is a steep bluff 
at the southwestern end of a hill which is 231 feet high, and faced 
by gray cliff. 

The Friar, close off the land at 600 yards northeastward of the 
head, is an isolated pillar rock. 

Dublin cove, northward of the eastern part of the hill forming 
Fish head, is 300 yards wide at its entrance, and narrows gradually 
to its head. It is clear of shoals except close to its head. 

Dublin Cove rocks, 100 yards northeastward of the eastern entrance 
point of Dublin cove, are 2 feet high and small; they may be ap- 
proached to 100 yards. 

Anchorage.—Small vessels can anchor in Dublin cove, in from 
22 fathoms at the entrance, to 6 fathoms water off a small islet at 
the head. 

Bay le Moine rock, bearing 53°, distant $ mile from the eastern 
entrance point of Dublin cove, and nearly in the middle of the bay, 
has 4 feet least water over it. 

The Red house, close to the northern shore of bay le Moine, at 
nearly ;%, mile within the eastern entrance point of Dublin cove, 
is a conspicuous rock, 20 feet high, and faced by red cliff; at one 
mile farther in on the same shore, is a waterfall just westward of a 
red point; a shoal extends a short distance from this point. 

Water can be taken from the fall or the streams at the head of 
the bay at high water. 

Harbor le Cou lies westward of Fish head, and consists of a cove 
to the southwest, and a basin to the northeast. A settlement of some 
225 people is situated round the southwest cove. 

Shark Cove head, northwestward, 550 yards from Fish head 
and close eastward of the entrance, rises to a conspicuous sharp hill, 


250 CREW POINT TO CAPE RAY. 


160 feet high, and the Sugarloaf, northwestward 1,100 yards from 
Shark Cove head, is a conical hill 220 feet high and covered with 
dark spruce, which surmounts the turning point into the basin. 

Calapoose rocks, 3 feet high, are nearly in the middle of the 
entrance; and a shoal, with 12 feet of water over it, bears 122°, 200 
yards from them; Sugarloaf point open westward of Calapoose rocks, 
bearing 310°, leads southwestward of this shoal; the harbor and 
entrance are otherwise clear of shoals except close to the shore. 

The cove, + mile deep, and 250 yards wide at its entrance, affords 
anchorage for small vessels in 8 to 11 fathoms water. 

Some rocks lie close to a small hillock, on the northern side of the 
cove, and a rock, that dries at low water, hes in the middle of its 
head. 

The basin is } mile in diameter, with a depth of 14 to 20 fathoms 
water almost to the shore, but a spit extends a few yards from the 
small islet on its western side and just within the entrance, and some 
rocks lie a similar distance from the bluff at its northeastern end. 

The Barasway, a shallow inlet, extends northward 350 yards 
from the northwestern end of the basin, and there is a waterfall at 
its head. 

The coast between harbor le Cou and Rose Blanche point (said 
to be a corruption of Roches Blanches), which bears 233°, distant 14 
miles from Fish head, is a whitish gray rock, and generally steep. 
Wash rocks, which dry 4 feet, lie a little more than 100 yards from the 
coast at 1,600 yards northeastward of Rose Blanche point. 

Light.—A granite lighthouse, 40 feet high, surmounting the cor- 
ner of slate-roofed buildings, with one side and one end painted red 
and white in vertical stripes, on the eastern head of Rose Blanche 
point, exhibits, at 95 feet above high water, a fixed white hght, that 
should be seen over an are of 169° between the bearings 62° and 
253°, from a distance of 11 miles in clear weather. 

Black rock, lying westward, distant 250 vards from Rose Blanche 
point, is 11 feet high, and from it a line of rocks extends northeast- 
ward about 800 yards. Black Rock sunker, 200 yards southward of 
Black rock, has 7 feet of water over it. 

Directions.—Proceeding southward and westward from Little 
Garia bay, pass well eastward of Edge of Ground shoal, and when 
Shag islet off Deer island is open southward of Wreck island, bearing 
55°, keep it so astern until Seal Island head opens westward of Black 
rock of Seal islands, bearing 319°, to clear the shoals off Seal island; 
then steer for Rose Blanche point. 

When approaching Petites, keep Seal Island head open southward 
of Winging island, the southeastern of the group of islands off that 
place, bearing 63°, until the Red house is open northwestward of the 
southeastern shore of bay le Moine, bearing 24°; then steer northward 


CAINS ISLAND—ROSE BLANCHE HARBOR. 25L 


to shut in the waterfall on the northwestern shore of the bay with the 
point southwestward of it, bearing 29°, to clear Major rock. 

After passing the northern entrance point of Petites, bring the 
waterfall well open of the point southwestward of it, bearing 26°, 
which mark leads eastward of Bay le Moine rock, and when abreast 
the Red house keep in the middle of the bay and anchor at its head, 
in 14 fathoms or less water, remembering that the water shoals quickly 
from 5 to 3 fathoms. 

To pass westward of Bay le Moine rock, run along the north- 
western shore of the entrance of the bay at the distance of about 200 
yards, giving a sufficient berth to Dublin Cove rocks; then bring the 
summit of Shark Cove head open westward of the eastern shore of 
Dublin cove, bearing 230°, and keep this mark on astern till clear of 
the rock. The highest hill over the head of bay le Moine, shut in with 
the apparent extreme of the western shore of the bay, also leads west- 
ward of the rock. 

To enter harbor le Cou, bring Sugarloaf point open westward of 
Calapoose rocks, bearing 311°, and keep in mid-channel. 

The coast from Rose Blanche point trends north-northeastward 
for 4 mile; then turning westward and southward, it forms, with 
two small bays at its head, Rose Blanche harbor. 

Cains island lies immediately westward of Rose Blanche point, 
and is almost connected with it by rocky islets; westward of the 
island is the entrance to Rose Blanche harbor. This island is steep-to 
off its western point and along its northwestern side; there are a few 
houses and fishing stages on its eastern side, where it is separated 
from the mainland by a narrow bay, almost a strait. 

Fog signal.—A fog horn, placed on the southwestern point of 
Cains island, gives two blasts every two minutes, thus:—blast, six 
seconds; silence, fifteen seconds; blast, six seconds; silence, ninety- 
three seconds, during thick or foggy weather. 

The engine house is square, flat-roofed, and painted in black and 
white horizontal bands; the keeper’s dwelling is square, white, with a 
flat black roof, and there is a similar building close to it. 

Light.—A fixed red lantern light is exhibited from the roof of the 
engine house. 

Rose Blanche harbor is tolerably easy of access and affords 
sheltered anchorage in 8 to 9 fathoms of water, sand bottom; but the 
space is very confined, and a vessel over 200 feet in length should 
moor. 

Rose Blanche village, situated principally on the peninsula which 
forms the western side of the harbor, has a population of about 500, 
all of whom are, directly or indirectly, dependent on the fishing 
industry. There is a church, the spire of which is a good mark from 
the westward; a school, and a resident medical officer. 


952 CREW POINT TO CAPE RAY. 


Supplies.— Ordinary supphes can be obtained, and good water is 
easily taken from the mouth of a river in the next large bay to the 
westward. 

Communication.—Communication is maintained with St. Johns 
and other ports along the coast during summer by a steamer weekly, 
and there is telegraphic communication. Nearly all intercourse be- 
tween the villages is by water, as there are no roads, with the ex- 
ception of one from Rose Blanche to harbor le Cou. 

Ice.—Rose Blanche occasionally freezes with thin ice, but when 
gulf ice is pressed in by southwesterly winds it becomes a serious 
obstruction. 

Rose Blanche shoals are several rocky heads, the outer of which 
bears 221°, distant 1,900 yards from the lighthouse, and has over it a 
least depth of 2 fathoms; north-northwestward 300 yards from this 
shoal is a patch of 24 fathoms, and northeastward 600 yards from it 
are three other patches with less than 3 fathoms of water over them; 
all break heavily. 

Shag rocks, west-southwestward, distant 14 miles from Rose 
Blanche point, are a group of rocky ledges, the highest of which is 17 
feet high. To the southeastward of this ledge are some rocks which 
dry 5 feet, and at 400 yards from the highest ledge there is a rock 
with 24 fathoms over it. Bearing 40°, distant 600 yards from this 
rock, is a ledge on which the depth is from 2 to 3 fathoms. These 
rocks break heavily in any swell, but they are steep-to, and in calm 
weather should be approached with caution. 

Northwestward, a little over 400 yards from the highest Shag rock, 
is a patch having 1 fathom water over it; it is white rock and is 
distinctly visible from a short distance. 

Duck island, between Shag rocks and the mainland, is 60 feet 
high and covered with coarse grass; eastward of it there are several 
rocky heads, making the channel between it and Duckling, the small 
islet inside, very dangerous at high water, when they may not be 
visible. Off the western end of Duckling there is a rocky shoal with 
a least depth of 10 feet, but between the two, very close to the islet, 
there is a deep channel used by the coasting steamers. The north 
side of Duck island is tolerably steep and clear of shoals. 

Butterpot, a conspicuous flat-topped hill near the head of Otter 
bay, open southwestward of Tinker island, bearing 279°, clears Shag 
rock and Rose Blanche shoals. 

Hopkins island, lying inside Duck island and fronting a deep 
bay locally known as West arm, is 89 feet high and of the same rocky 
sterile nature as the neighboring coast, from which its northern 
point is separated by a shallow passage, 150 feet wide. Together 
with the mainland this island forms, on its western side, a bay, the 


WEST ARM——MULL FACE BAY. PARTS 


shores of which are steep-to; the water is deep, but there is no shelter 
from southwesterly winds and swell, which are frequent. 

West arm, extending 1,200 yards in a northeasterly direction, 
_ affords anchorage for small vessels in 5 to 6 fathoms of water, rocky 
bottom. Its entrance is contracted by Bell rock (between which and 
Rose Blanche peninsula there are several ledges) and farther in by 
Goose island, a small rocky islet, having several rocky patches south- 
ward and southwestward of it. 

Rose Blanche brook, a stream of moderate size, flows into the head 
of West arm. 

Rose Blanche harbor—Directions.—From the westward keep 
Butterpot hill open southward of Tinker island, bearing 279°, to 


clear Shag rocks and Rose Blanche shoals, and when Bell rock is 
just open of the western point of Cains island, bearing 6°, steer for 
the harbor, observing that Bell rock must be only just open. Pass 
the western point and along the northwestern side of Cains island, 
which are steep-to, and anchor as convenient northeastward of the 
island. From the eastward give the lighthouse a berth of 4 mile to 
clear Black Rock sunker off Rose Blanche point, and when Goose 
island opens westward of Cains island bearing about 353°, steer to 
pass westward of Cains island and as above directed. 

Rose Blanche church spire, over the summit of the outer part of 
the village peninsula, bearing about 38°, leads between Shag rock 
and Rose Blanche shoals, but neither this passage nor that inside 
Duck island should be attempted without local knowledge. 

Tides and tidal streams.—It is high water, full and change, at 
Rose Blanche at 8h. 40m.; springs rise 44 feet, neaps 34 feet. 

The flood and ebb streams, running westward and eastward, are 
quite perceptible close to the shore, but during the survey of this 
coast in spring and autumn, the stream outside the 20-fathom line 
was nearly always to the westward. 

The coast from inside Hopkins island trends, generally, west- 
southwestward to a bluff point forming the eastern entrance point to 
Mull Face bay. <A rocky ledge extends 800 yards eastward, or toward 
Duckling islet, from this point, and near its eastern end there are 
some small rocks which dry at low water, making a good mark for 
the northern limit of the channel inside Duck island. Between Duck 
island and the bluff point mentioned above there are two rocks with 
3 and 34 fathoms of water over them. 

Yankee rocks, immediately westward of the entrance to Mull 
Face bay, are a cluster of rocks and ledges, the highest of which is 11 
feet high; at 200 yards eastward from the highest rock there is a 
pinnacle rock which dries at low water. 

Mull Face bay, an inlet nearly 4 mile long, is contracted near the 
middle of its length to a width of little more than 100 yards, inside 


254 CREW POINT TO CAPE RAY. 


which it opens out to a basin affording sheltered, but very confined, 
anchorage to small vessels, in 4 fathoms of water. The entrance, be- 
tween the cliffs on the western side (which must be kept close aboard ) 
and the shoals extending from the eastern point, is only about 200 
feet wide, but it is safe with local knowledge. 

The coast from Mull Face bay trends generally westward to 
Barasway bay, which is much encumbered by rocks and shoals. In 
its northwestern corner there is a conspicuous waterfall, formed by a 
stream which flows from several large ponds between the hills. 

Green island, lying off the eastern point of Barasway bay, with 
deep water between, is 21 feet high, and being covered with grass, is 
rather prominent. Southeastward and southwestward of it are Green 
Island sunkers, several rocks and ledges which generally break; of 
these, the southeastern rock, with 10 feet of water over it, bears 131°, 
distant 1,200 yards, and the western rock, with 6 feet over it, bears 
209°, 700 yards from the summit of the island. Also a ledge of 2 to 
3 fathoms of water extends west-southwestward 550 yards from the 
island. 

Butterpot hill, open southward of Tinker island, bearing 279°, 
leads southward of these shoals. 

The coast from Barasway bay, trending still generally westward, 
is cliffy and fairly steep-to for ? mile to White head, which is con- 
spicuous. Half a mile westward of this the coast is fronted by a 
group of small islands, inside of which there is a fishing village named 
Baziel. There is a narrow passage between these islands and the 
mainland with 3 to 4 fathoms of water in it. 

Tinker island, the western of Baziel group, is large blocks of 
shale and granite, 20 feet high, and quite bare of vegetation; on the 
summit there is a single block of shale standing at an angle of about 
45°. There is a rock, bearing 187°, distant 500 yards from the middle 
of this island, with 9 feet of water over it. Rose Blanche hghthouse, 
epen southward of Duck island, bearing 77°, leads 700 yards south- 
ward of this rock. 

Pigeon island, nearly 1,200 yards westward of Tinker island, is 
23 feet high, rocky, and barren like the mainland in this vicinity. A 
small rock off its southern side has 2 fathoms of water over it. 

The mainland coast between Tinker and Pigeon islands recedes 
and forms a bay nearly } mile in extent, but it does not afford anchor- 
age. Westward of Pigeon island is another bay, fronted by a group 
of small rocky islets, and, a little farther westward, a group of 
islands, the highest of which is 48 feet high, fronts the entrance to a 
narrow channel leading into Grandy sound, and known as Milners 
tickle. Half a mile farther westward is Grandy passage. 

Pigeon Island shoals, lying westward of Pigeon island, are a 
cluster of rocky patches, some of which dry at low water; the outer 


BLACK ROCK—GRANDY SOUND. O55 


patch has 4 fathoms of water over it, and is steep-to on its southern 
and western sides. 

Black rock, lying off the entrance to Grandy passage, is a small 
rocky islet, 20 feet high; it is a good mark. There are several rocks 
and ledges southeastward, southward, and southwestward of this 
islet, two of which, at nearly 600 yards southeastward, dry at low 
water. At 265 yards southwestward of Black rock there is a rocky 
head with only + feet of water over it, and 400 yards outside this there 
are two patches of 45 fathoms, both of which break heavily with a 
swell from seaward. 

Grandy passage is close westward of Black rock; between it and 
a group of rocks and ledges lying off the southeastern point of Har- 
bor island. There are two small rocks in the passage, one close off 
Grandy bead and one a little farther out; in the channel there is good 
water, but owing to these rocks and those off the entrance it must not 
be attempted without a pilot. 

Harbor island is the largest of a group of islands and ledges 
which fronts the coast in this locality. Together with Bakers island 
and some others it forms the sheltered anchorage named Grandy 
sound. These islands are of moderate height, and some of them are 
covered with grass, on which a few sheep, belonging to the villages in 
the vicinity, are left to feed. One of these villages, consisting of 
five or six houses, 1s situated on a small island just within Grandy 
passage. 

Westward of Harbor island there is a deep passage into Grandy 
sound, but, like the others between these islands, it 1s narrow, and 
there are some rocks off its entrance. 

Grandy sound has good and sheltered anchorage in its north- 
eastern part in 6 fathoms of water, mud bottom, but the entrances are 
narrow, and intricate, and unsuitable for large vessels. A stream of 
moderate size runs into the northwestern corner of the sound, and 
boats ascend it for about 3 mile to a stony bar. From the large val- 
ley above this the local fishermen procure timber and spars of con- 
siderable size. 

The western portion of Grandy sound is filled with flats of sand 
and mud, which dry at low water, leaving only very shallow channels 
to the mouth of the stream. 

The mainland forming the western and southwestern sides of the 
sound is indented by several small bays, and continues southwestward 
to Stickland point, on which there is a considerable fishing village. 

Anchorage can be obtained inside Harbor island in 5 to 6 fathoms 
of water, but the holding ground is not good, and the space is limited. 

Directions for Grandy sound.—The entrances to Grandy sound 
should not be attempted without local knowledge, but if necessary 


256 CREW POINT TO CAPE RAY. 


for a small vessel to enter the sound by Grandy passage without such 
assistance, proceed thus— 

Make, with certainty, Black rock (see p. 255), bring it to bear 
43°, and approach it on that bearing, or with the southwestern corner 
of Bakers island open northwestward of it, about 49°, to clear the 
rock, on which the depth is 4 feet, lying off it. Pass close to the 
western end of Black rock, and then steer for the eastern end of 
Harbor island, giving a sufficient berth to the two rocks on the east- 
ern side of the channel, that off Grandy head being the more danger- 
ous, though in calm weather the discolored water is generally visible; 
rounding this, pass close along the northern coasts of Grandy and 
Bakers islands, and between the latter and another island lying 
northward of it into the deep basin; then haul to the northward and 
anchor in 6 to 7 fathoms of water. 

Offlying rocks.—Grandy Passage sunkers lie off the western point 
of Harbor island, and immediately outside Burnt island is Black 
rock, a rocky islet, 15 feet high and very similar in appearance to 
Black rock off Grandy passage. The sunkers have depths of 2 to 5 
fathoms over them, the former depth bearing 226°, distant 600 yards 
from Black rock. Westward of Black rock there are numerous rocky 
ledges, shoals, and foul ground, extending to Bad Neighbor patch, 
which is just dry at low water, and steep-to on its southern side, but 
shoal water extends westward 200 yards from it. 

Southwest rock, west-southwestward 1% miles from Bad neighbor 
and nearly # mile from the shore, has 1 fathom of water over it, 
is of small extent, and only breaks in a heavy swell. 

Clearing mark.—Black rock off Grandy passage, open south- 
ward of Burnt island Black rock, bearing 73°, leads southward of 
Southwest rock, and very close southward of Bad neighbor. 

The coast from Stickland point bends sharply northeastward and 
forms God bay, which is nearly 14 miles in length; a small stream 
flows from a valley between the surrounding hills into its head; and 
a stream, from which good water can be taken, runs into its north- 
western corner, and inland of this there is a pond of considerable 
extent. 

From this corner the land trends southwestward and forms a long 
rocky peninsula, divided near its middle by a narrow cut, and termi- 
nating in Coney head or Hiscock point. (See p. 258.) 

At about 800 yards northeastward of the point there is a small 
indentation of the coast and a village. 

Eastward, distant 500 yards from Coney head, are Hiscock islets, 
a small group of rocky islets, and $ mile farther eastward are some 
rocky ledges, named Twin rocks, reaching a height of 2 feet. 

Burnt islands is the name given to the numerous islands and 
rocks that front and partly fill God bay. On the largest island, 


BURNT ISLANDS HARBOR. 957 


which is just within the entrance of the bay, there is a settlement, 
which, together with Stickland village, has a population of about 
300, all connected with the fishing industry. Two or three cargoes of 
dried codfish are annually sent from this place to Europe. 

Of the smaller islands, the most conspicuous, as marking the en- 
trance channels to the bay, are Colombier and Little Colombier, 
rocky islets 27 and 35 feet high, respectively, and East White island 
and West White island, the summits of which are white rock. 
Among the islands there are several rocky patches, and in heavy 
weather nearly the whole space between Colombier and the western 
end of Harbor island is covered with breakers. 

Coal and supplies.—Ordinary supplies can be obtained, and oc- 
- casionally perhaps 15 to 20 tons of coal. 

Communication.—The coasting steamers do not call at Burnt 
islands, but there is telegraphic communication. 

Burnt Islands harbor affords good and sheltered anchorage for 
vessels of moderate size, but even with a small vessel no attempt 
should be made to enter without a pilot, for the channels are not 
easily distinguished from seaward, and the numerous rocks give but 
little room for maneuvering. 

Channels.—There are three channels into this anchorage, one nar- 
row and deep, but straight in its outer portion, close eastward of 
Colombier islets and up to the deep water at the head of the bay. 

A second passing between Bad neighbor and Twin rocks, thence 
closing the western shore of the bay, and, keeping it close aboard to 
avoid the patches northward of Hat rocks, on to the space northward 
ef the largest Burnt island, where there is excellent anchorage in 
10 fathoms of water, mud bottom. 

The third channel, and the one generally used by the small vessels 
frequenting the port, is closed to vessels drawing more than 12 feet of 
water by a bar extending northeastward from Hat rocks, and even 
vessels of this draft must not attempt to pass over it at low water. 

Buoy.—A small spar buoy is moored on the southwestern edge 
of the shoal water extending from the largest Burnt island, to mark 
the channel between it and the Hat rocks. 

Directions.—For the channel over Hat Rocks bar, bring Inner 
White islet, a white-topped rock off the southwestern side of the 
largest Burnt island, just open of Colombier island, bearing about 
94°, which leads between Bad neighbor and the shoal water off the 
Twins. Pass close to Little Colombier and very close westward of 
the spar buoy before mentioned, then keep on toward the northern 
shore of the bay, and when the whole of Colliers island (half way 
up the bay) is open, steer for the anchorage. The channel over the 
bar is very narrow in the deepest parts; the water is generally clear 
and the bottom easily seen. 


76846—O09 A 


258 CREW POINT TO CAPE RAY. 


Coney head is a white cliffy bluff and the end of a tongue of 
land 14 miles in length, separating God bay from Coney bay. 

Coney bay extends east-northeastward 14 miles on the northwest- 
ern side of Coney head peninsula; to enter it, after having passed 
the outer reefs, keep about 300 yards off Coney head to clear a rock 
lying off it, then cross to the northern shore, keeping it aboard till 
the head is reached, and anchor in 4 fathoms of water, but from 800 
yards inside of the entrance to the head there are rocks lying off 
both sides of the bay 

Otter bay, or Baie de La Loutre, is about $ mile westward of Coney 
bay; its entrance is encumbered by rocks. | 

Butterpot hill, about 600 yards southeastward from the head of 
this bay, is 269 feet high and remarkable. 

Caution.—A pilot is necessary to enter either Coney bay or Otter 
bay. 

Dead Islands harbor (also known as * Morte harbor” or “ Seal 
cove”) is westward of Otter bay and northward of Dead or Morte 
islands, a group of islands and rocks with shoals extending more than 
4 mile southward and westward. 

It affords anchorage for small vessels in a space 1,000 yards long 
and 300 yards broad, approached by three passages—Eastern and 
Middle passages, which are too shoal and intricate to be taken with 
out a pilot, and Western passage, which is 100 yards wide at its nar- 
rowest parts, and available for vessels drawing less than 20 feet of 
water. To enter by Western passage keep Butterpot in line with 
the northern end of Dead island, the largest and highest of the group, 
bearing about 66°, which mark leads between the shoals on either 
hand to the western end of Dead island, then pass in mid-channel 
between that and the island next northward, and anchor in 4 to 5 
fathoms of water, northward of the eastern end of Dead island. 

A shoal on the northern side of the harbor has 15 feet of water 
over it. 

Light.—A white wooden frame on the western end of Pitman is- 
land, which is on the eastern side of the Eastern passage at about 900 
yards within its entrance, exhibits a fixed green hght at 26 feet above 
high water. 

The coast, westward of Dead islands, is low, and foul ground ex- 
tends 4 mile off it. Black shoal bearing 223°, distant 600 yards from 
Black rock, and 94°, 2,4, miles from Channel Head lighthouse, has 15 
feet of water over it. 

Little Bay shoal extends southwestward $ mile from Little Bay 
head the southern entrance point of Little bay. 

Southeast shoal, bearing 95°, distant 1.200 yards from Channel 
Head lighthouse, has 3 fathoms of water over it. 


PORT AUX BASQUES—EAST BALDWIN. 259 


Leading mark.—The beacon on Flagstaff hill in ine with the 
southwestern end of Road island, bearing 300°, or the leading lght- 
houses in line, leads between Southeast and Little Bay shoals and 
southwestward of Black shoal. (See p. 261.) 

Little bay, 1 mile northeastward of Channel head, is a narrow 
creek affording shelter for small craft and may be entered by bring- 
ing the southeastern shore to bear 52° and steering for it on that bear- 
ing; when the bay is entered, anchor as convenient. 

Port aux Basques, westward 13 miles from Little Bay head and 
east-southeastward 74 miles from cape Ray, is entered between Shoal 
point to the northward, and Channel head to the southward; the land 
around it is barren and rocky in appearance, but the anchorage, 
nearly $ mile long and 300 yards broad, with 8 to 11 fathoms of 
water, mud bottom, is good for moderate-sized vessels. The fishing 
for salmon and sea trout at port aux Basques is excellent. 

The southwestern shore of port aux Basques is divided by a small 
projection into two coves, both of which are shallow; and a govern- 
ment wharf, alongside which there is a depth of 15 feet at low water, 
extends from the northwestern side of the projection. When going 
alongside this wharf, do not enter that part of the cove immediately 
southwestward of the wharf, as the water shoals rapidly. At the 
head of this cove is a small islet, just above high water, on which is a 
ringbolt, to aid vessels when hauling into the narrow anchorage be- 
tween the foul ground off this islet and Pancake rock. 

Light.—A circular white lighthouse 29 feet high, with an attached 
dwelling, having white sides and a red roof, on Channel head, ex- 
hibits, at 101 feet above high water, a fixed red light, that should be 
seen from a distance of 15 miles in clear weather. 

A red brick building stands 30 feet northward of the lighthouse. 

Fog signal.—A fog signal house having white sides stands about 
65 feet southward of the lighthouse, and is connected with it by a 
covered way. A diaphone horn, projecting from the southern end of 
this house, and worked by compressed air, gives one blast about every 
two minutes, thus: Blast, three and one-half seconds; interval, one 
hundred and fourteen seconds, during thick or foggy weather. 

Signals.—Channel Head hght station is supplied with the Inter- 
national code of signals. 

Channel, a large village with a population of 728, situated on the 
mainland, just northward of the island, whose eastern end forms 
Channel head, contains three churches and a windmill; this village 
is conspicuous from seaward. 

East Baldwin, nearly in the middle of the apparent channel to the 
harbor, is a rock that dries 1% feet at low water. and shoal water 
extends 100 vards southwestward from it. 


260 CREW POINT TO CAPE RAY. 


Buoy.—A red spar buoy is moored in 34 fathoms of water at the 
southwestern end of the shoal extending southwestward from East 
Baldwin rock. 

Rock.—A small rock, bearing 268°, distant 250 yards from East 
Baldwin, has 10 feet of water over it, and a shoal with 33 fathoms 
of water extends southward nearly 65 yards from the rock. 

Buoy.—A white spar buoy, with a white St. Andrew’s cross top- 
mark, is moored in 33 fathoms at the southern end of the shoal ex- 
tending southward from this rock. 

West Baldwin, 150 yards off the southwestern shore of the har- 
bor, 4 mile inside of Channel head, is a rock 50 yards in diameter 
the shoalest part of which has 1 foot on it at low water. The passage 
between it and the shoal extending from the rock westward of East 
Baldwin is 80 yards wide. 

Buoy.—A. black spar buoy, with a black conical topmark, is 
moored in 34 fathoms at the northeastern end of the shoal water off 
West Baldwin rock. 

Road island, the western of two islands extending from the north- 
eastern shore of the harbor, at nearly 3% mile within Channel head, 
is 30 feet high and covered with turf over gray rock. 

Gallyboy island, the eastern island, low, flat, covered with grass, 
and joined to the northeastern shore at low water, hes east-northeast- 
ward of Road island, and is separated from it by a channel 200 yards 
wide, through which is a narrow passage with 34 fathoms of water, 
but only available with local knowledge. 

Pancake rock, the eastern end of foul ground extending from the 
shore of the harbor southwestward of Road island, is about 130 feet 
in diameter and awash at low water. The channel between the shoal 
off this rock and the foul ground off Road island is only 90 yards 
wide, and it is necessary, therefore, to keep on the marks when pass- 
ing through it. 

Buoy.—A black cask buoy is moored at the northeastern end of 
Pancake rock. 

Flagstaff hill, 222 feet high, and the highest land in this locality, 
is surmounted by a large stone cairn, with a wooden triangle at the 
top. 

Leading lights.—A white pyramidal tower, 22 feet high, on the 
southwestern end of Road island, exhibits anantermittent white light, 
thus: Light, one and a half seconds; eclipse, one and a half seconds. 

A fixed red light is shown from the northern and western sides of 
‘the lantern and is visible over the harbor, but not from seaward. 

A white pyramidal tower, 15 feet high, on the land, bearing 300°, 
distant 490 yards from the preceding lighthouse, exhibits at 81 feet 
above high water an intermittent white hght, thus: Light, one sec- 
ond; eclipse, one second. 


PORT AUX BASQUES—DIRECTIONS. 261 


Beacons.—Two beacons with diamond-shaped topmarks stand on 
the shore northwestward of Pancake rock; and two beacons with 
circular topmarks stand, one on the western end of. Woody island, 
and the other on the northeastern shore of the Bottom of port aux 
Basques, the narrow inlet northwestward of Woody island. 

Caution.—When the presence of ice renders it necessary, the buoys 
in port aux Basques are taken up. 

Directions.—From the southeastward, pass northeastward of 
Southeast shoal with Flagstaff Hill beacon just open northeastward 
of Road Island lighthouse, bearing 298°, and when Little Bay head 
bears 52° bring the leading lighthouses in line. 

From the westward, pass between Channel head and Southeast 
shoal, and bring the leading lighthouses in line. Keep the leading 
lighthouses in line, bearing 300°, which mark leads through the 
channel between East Baldwin, with the rock westward of it, and 
West Baldwin, until the beacons with diamond-shaped topmarks 
are in line, bearing 288°. Then keep these beacons in line, which 
leads southwestward of the shoal off the southern point of Road 
island, until the beacons with circular topmarks are in line, bearing 
325°, which mark leads in mid-channel between Pancake rock and 
the shoals off Road island, and when the northeastern point of Gally- 
boy island opens northward of Road island, bearing 64°, steer north- 
ward for the anchorage. 

The holding ground is bad until the clfannel between Road and 
Gallyboy islands is well open. 

The red buoy marking East Baldwin, and the white buoy marking 
the rock westward of it, are left on the starboard hand, and the 
black buoys marking West Baldwin and Pancake rock are left on 
the port hand, entering. 

Ice.—Port aux Basques is rarely frozen over, and navigation 1s, 
as a rule, open all the year; the harbor is sometimes blocked for a 
few days by drift ice which comes with southerly winds in Feb- 
ruary and March. The ice in the stream flowing into the north- 
eastern end of the port generally reaches a thickness of about 4 
inches. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in port aux Basques at 
8h. 55m.; springs rise 54 feet, neaps 34 feet. 

Settlement.—The settlement at port aux Basques consists of a few 
wooden houses, a railway station, and some sheds for the storage of 
goods; it may, however, become a place of importance. 

Coal.—There is usually a stock of Cape Breton coal at port aux 
Basques. 

Communication.—There is a railway to St. Johns. Steamers 
run three times a week between port aux Basques and Sydney, Cape 
Breton island, in connection with the trains; steamers also run 


262 CREW POINT TO CAPE RAY. 


weekly to St. Johns, and fortnightly to Halifax via Bras d’Or lakes, 
Cape Breton island. The steamers go to the railway wharf which 
lies along the mainland, southwestward of Woody island. 

There is telegraphic communication, and both the Anglo-American 
Telegraph Company and the Newfoundland government have tele- 
graph offices here. | 
’ Telegraph cable.—aA telegraph cable was laid between port aux 
Basques and Canso, Nova Scotia, in 1905. 

The coast between Channel head and Enragée point, 44 miles to 
the west-northwestward, has a group of islands and rocks and some 
foul ground lying off it. The islands should not be approached by 
large vessels within the distance of 1 mile. 

West rock, bearing 226°, distant 1,500 yards from Channel Head 
lighthouse, has 4 fathoms of water over it. 

Yankee rock, bearing 260°, distant 2,4, miles from Channel Head 
hghthouse, is low. 

Yankee shoal, bearing 145°, distant 700 yards from Yankee rock, 
has 4 fathoms of water over it. Fail rock, bearing 229°, 600 yards 
from Yankee rock, has 15 feet over it. 

Duck island, 40 feet high, bears 296°, distant 1,100 yards from 
Yankee rock, with Green islet and some foul ground between. Foul 
ground extends southwestward nearly 600 yards from this island. 

Durant island, 800 yards north-northwestward of Duck island, 
rises in two mounds, the higher being 25 feet high, joined by a shingle 
beach. Rocks and foul ground extend southwestward 800 yards from 
this island. 

Anchorage may be obtained in the eastern part of the channel 
between Duck and Durant islands, in 3 to 4 fathoms water, sand 
bottom. To enter it, from the westward keep in mid-channel between 
these islands; from the eastward keep the eastern ends of Durant 
island and Yankee rock in line, bearing 316°, till that rock is neared, 
and then in mid-channel between it and Hobbs rock, steering for 
Granby point, the point of the mainland eastward of Durant island, 

Grand bay is available for vessels drawing less than 9 feet of 
water, and affords perfectly sheltered anchorage in 2 to 4 fathoms of 
water; it is entered through a narrow channel northeastward of the 
preceding anchorage by keeping the eastern shore aboard. 

Enragée point is a low point surrounded by rocks. The coast 
from it to cape Ray, which is distant about 4 miles in a northwesterly 
direction, consists of low sand hills facing salt water lagoons, and 
should not be approached by large vessels within the distance of 1 
mile, 

Halibut rock bears 292°, distant 14 miles from Enragée point, 
and 235°, + mile from Shag island, a narrow rock nearly joining the 


BARACHOIS ROCK—ST. PAUL ISLAND. 263 


mainland. Halibut rock is awash at low water and there is shoal 
water between it and Shag island. 

Barachois rock, bearing 329°, distant 1 mile from Halibut rock, 
and nearly the same distance offshore, has 9 feet of water over it. 

Snook bank, bearing 212°, distant 3 mile from Cape Ray light- 
house, has 6 fathoms of water over it. 

Signal and telegraph station.—A signal and telegraph station 
is situated in a cove a little more than 1 mile eastward of cape Ray. 
(See p. 66.) 

Cape Ray, the southwestern extremity of Newfoundland, is about 
50 to 160 feet high, but at about 3 miles north-northeastward of it 
Table mountain rises abruptly to the height of 1,700 feet. Cook 
stone, 1,570 feet high, is a small peak at the southwestern end of the 
mountain and at about ;®; mile farther southwestward is Sugarloaf 
hill, conspicuous, conical, and 800 feet high. Two smaller conical 
hills lie between Sugarloaf hill and the sea. 

Light.—A white octagonal tower with a red lantern, 75 feet high 
at 217 yards within the western extreme of cape Ray, exhibits at 
127 feet above high water a flashing white hght, which shows one 
group of three flashes every fifteen seconds, and should be seen from 
a distance of 17 miles in clear weather. 

A white dwelling and outbuildings, with red roofs, are situated 
near the lighthouse. 

Fog signal.—A diaphone horn, worked by compressed air, at a 
fog signal house situated on the shore at cape Ray, gives one blast 
of five seconds’ duration every minute during thick weather, fog, 
and snowstorms. The fog signal house is a white building with a 
red roof and a high brick chimney. 

Wireless telegraph station.—A wireless telegraph station has 
‘been established at Cape Ray lighthouse by the government of Canada 
and it is operated for the Marine and Fisheries Department of the 
Dominion by the Marconi Wireless Telegraph Company, Limited. 
(See p. 42.) 

Ice report station.—Information as to the weather, wind, move- 
ment and condition of the ice can be obtained during April and May 
by communicating with the signal station on cape Ray. 

Brandies rock, bearing 277°, distant 1 mile from Cape Ray light- 
house and 1,400 yards offshore, is about 50 yards in diameter and 
nearly awash at low water; the sea breaks on it. 

Shag ledge, northwestward # mile from Cape Ray lighthouse, and 
close to the shore, is a small, rocky islet. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, at cape Ray at 9h. 15m.; 
springs rise 6 feet, neaps 4 feet. 

St. Paul island, in Cabot strait, the main entrance to the gulf of 
St. Lawrence, between the southwestern extremity of Newfoundland 


264 CREW POINT TO CAPE RAY. 


and the northern extremity of Cape Breton island, is nearly 3 miles 
long and 1 mile broad. It is composed of primary rocks, principally 
mica slate, dipping at an agle of about 45° to the southward. Its 
northern point is a small detached rock (although it appears con- 
nected from the sea), separated by a very narrow channel from a 
peninsula, about 400 feet high, which, together with the isthmus 
joining it to the body of the island, is so precipitous as to be nearly in- 
accessible. The remaining greater part of the island is also precipi- 
tous toward the sea, and it rises in two parallel ranges of hills, that 
on the eastern coast being the higher, and attaining an elevation of 
500 feet. 

A valley runs between these hills, and in it are two ponds, at some 
250 feet above the sea. These supply a stream, which is about 6 feet 
wide and flows into the sea in the southern part of Trinity cove. Its 
water is of a yellowish-brown color, but it is wholesome and tastes 
good. There are several other much smaller streams of water, one of 
which runs into Atlantic cove. Trinity cove is on the western, and 
Atlantic cove on the eastern side of the island, both being nearly 1 
mile from its southern point, and they afford the only shelter for 
boats and the only good landing on the island, which is easier of 
ascent from them than at any other part. The island is partially 
wooded with dwarf and scrubby spruce trees, useless, except for fuel. 

The island belongs to the province of Nova Scotia. 

Half a mile off the island the water becomes deep, so that there is 
little or no warning by the lead in approaching it in foggy weather; 
although bold and high, many shipwrecks, attended with loss of life, 
have occurred upon it. 

The varying tidal streams and currents add much to the danger 
arising from fog, which prevails in southerly, easterly, and often 
with southwesterly winds. (See p. 52.) 

Provision depot.—A depot of provisions for the relief of ship- 
wrecked persons, furnished by the government of the Dominion of 
Canada, is on the northern point of Trinity cove, where there is a 
store and a dwelling house for the men in charge. Fish are plentiful 
around the island. 

Anchorage.—Small fishing vessels anchor off Trinity and Atlantic 
coves with offshore winds at 400 yards from the rocks in 10 to 12 
fathoms, sand and gravel bottom. In very fine weather large vessels 
might ride with a stream anchor, at about + mile offshore, in 25 to 30 - 
fathoms, but such vessels must be ready to weigh at any sign of a 
change of weather. (See also Beacons.) 

Atlantic cove—Tide Gauge house.—A white tide-gauge house, 
which is conspicuous from seaward, stands about +0 feet above high- 
water mark on the western shore of Atlantic cove. 


ST. PAUL ISLAND. 265 


Beacons.—Two beacons with white circular tops are on the hill in 
the bight of the cove above the tide-gauge house, and in line, bearing 
299°, lead well clear of Big Dick rock, a detached rock lying off the 
northern point of the cove, on which the sea breaks heavily. There 
are also two diamond-shaped white beacons about 70 yards eastward 
of the superintendent’s house, which in line, bearing 344°, lead clear 
of the foul ground off the southern point of the cove, and indicate 
the best anchorage in 18 fathoms when their alignment intersects 
that of the two above-mentioned circular-topped beacons. 

These beacons are intended for the guidance of vessels calling at 
the cove with supplies and mails as well as for small schooners and 
fishing vessels. 

Lights.—There are two lighthouses on St. Paul island, one on the 
detached rock at its northern point and the other on its southern 
point. 

North Point lighthouse, a white, octagonal, wooden tower 40 feet 
high, exhibits at 140 feet above high water a fixed white hght, which 
should be seen from seaward from a distance of 18 miles in clear 
weather, except on northerly bearings between 351° and 41°, when 
it is obscured by the island throughout an are of 50°. 

South Point lighthouse, also a white, octagonal, wooden tower 40 
feet high, exhibits at 140 feet above high water a revolving white 
light which attains its greatest brilliancy every minute, and should 
be seen from seaward, from a distance of 18 miles in clear weather, 
except on southerly bearings between 132° and 250°. when it is ob- 
scured by the island throughout an are of 118°. 

Both the lheghts are extinguished whenever navigation is closed, 
without reference to any dates. The northern light is exhibited as 
late in the season as there are any vessels crossing to Newfoundland, 
and it is resumed in March if any sealing is being done in the neigh- 
borhood of the island, although there may be no other traffic. 

Fog signal.—During thick weather or in snowstorms a steam fog 
whistle, on the southern point of Atlantic cove, is sounded for five 
seconds in every minute. The fog signal building is of wood painted 
brown, and the whistle is about 137 feet above high water. 

Marine signal and telegraph station.—There is a telegraph 
and signal station at the main establishment on St. Paul island, on 
the northern point of Atlantic cove, about 300 yards eastward of the 
superintendent’s house. 

In communicating with this station the signals should be made 
from positions that are visible from Atlantic cove and well clear of 
the cliffs either northward or southward. There is no signal station 
at either of the lighthouses, and signals made which are not visible 
from the Atlantic Cove station are not forwarded. 

This signal station is included in Lloyds system. See page 66. 


266 CREW POINT TO CAPE RAY. 


The telegraph cable runs from the island to Meat cove, at the north- 
ern end of Cape Breton island. A land wire crosses the island from 
Atlantic cove to Trinity cove. 

Ice report.—This signal station is supplied with information as to 
ice, winds, temperature, and weather indications; and communicates 
this information to vessels requesting it by signal. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, at St. Paul island at 
Sh. 40m.; springs rise 4 feet, neaps 3 feet. Tide tables for St. Paul 
island are published by the department of marine and fisheries of the 
Dominion of Canada. 

Life Saving station.—A lifeboat and a Lyle gun are maintained 
at St. Paul island. 


CHAPTER VI. 


NEWFOUNDLAND, WEST COAST—CAPE RAY TO CAPE 
BAULD. 


Cabot strait, the principal entrance to the gulf of St. Lawrence, 
lying between the southwestern end of Newfoundland and Cape 
Breton island, is 55 miles wide. 

Cape Ray, light; fog signal, signal, telegraph, wireless telegraph, 
and ice report stations; tides, etc. (See pp. 263, 264.) 

Brandies rock and Shag ledge. (See p. 263,) 

The west coast of Newfoundland from cape Ray trends north- 
ward for about 9 miles to Larkin point, ? mile southeastward of 
which is the entrance to Little Codroy river. 

The Tolt, northward 5% miles from cape Ray, is a conical spur 
1,280 feet high, off the middle of the western face of Table mountain. 

Little Codroy river can only be entered by boats, but small vessels 
anchor off the mouth during offshore winds. This is a capital river 
for salmon and sea trout fishing from June to September. 

Great Codroy river, the entrance of which is 3} miles northward 
of Larkin point, can be entered by vessels, drawing 6 feet, at low 
water; it can be ascended 34 miles from the entrance, but a pilot 
should be taken, as there is no leading mark and the tidal streams 
are very strong. There is a conspicuous church steeple on the south- 
ern side of the river entrance. 

The country about Little and Great Codroy rivers near the sea is 
well settled and somewhat under cultivation; great stretches of land 
on either side of these rivers are at present covered by dense forest. 
There is said to be coal in these valleys. 

Stormy point, westward 2 miles from Great Codroy river, is a 
reddish colored, narrow, cliffy projection, terminating in a ledge of 
low rocks, and should not be approached within $ mile. 

Codroy road, between Stormy poimt and Codroy island, at 2 miles 
to the northward, affords indifferent anchorage in 5 to 9 fathoms of 
water, stony bottom, but a swell nearly always rolls in from the west- 
ward. With strong westerly winds there is no shelter, and the anchor- 
age is then insecure. Numerous fishing nets are generally moored 
along the coast of the island, but the small buoys on them are visible 
and should be avoided. E 


267 


268 CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. 


Tides and tidal streams.—lIt is high water, full and change, at 
Codroy road at 9h. 0m.; springs rise 44 feet, neaps 3 feet. The flood 
tidal stream generally sets northward, and the ebb southward; fre- 
quently there are heavy rips between Codroy and cape Anguille, 
and, during stormy weather, there is nearly always a heavy confused 
sea in this locality. 

Codroy island, 1,200 yards long in a northerly and southerly 
direction, and 400 yards wide, is 36 feet high, and covered with grass. 
Tt lies about 400 yards off the mainland, and shoals, with less than 3 
fathoms water over them, extend about + mile from its northern and 
southern ends. A bank of stones extends northward from a point 
on its eastern side, and, with a similar ridge extending southeastward 
from the northeastern end of the island, forms a small harbor. fairly 
well sheltered in westerly winds. Here numerous fishing vessels 
occasionally anchor. 

Codroy village is situated on Beach point, a stony spit, and on the 
rising ground behind it, immediately northeastward of the middle 
of the island; landing can generally be effected on the western side 
of Beach point, sheltered by the island and the shallow bar extending 
between its northern end and the mainland. 

A little southeastward of the village is the church, a large white 
building, without tower or spire, conspicuous from seaward. The 
population of this locality is about 500. 

Supplies.—Small supphes of fresh meat can occasionally be 
obtained. 

Communication.—A steamer from Halifax and Sydney, Cape 
Breton island, calls here monthly during summer; and there is com- 
munication with Great Codroy by road. 

The coast between Codroy island and cape Anguille, about 24 
miles northward, rises steeply to the western termination of the An- 
guille range. The higher portions of these slopes are covered with 
trees, but the lower portions show extensive clearings made by the 
settlers; the contrast between these clearings, with their large patches 
of dead timber, and the dark foliage of the trees above, and in some 
cases below them, is conspicuous from seaward. 

Between the foot of the slope and the sea is a narrow strip of flat 
land, dotted here and there with the settlers’ cottages, and immedi- 
ately southward of cape Anguille is Shoal point, a small village. 

Cape Anguille rises steeply from the sea to a sharp summit, 615 
feet high, then the land within it, forming a small hollow, rises again 
to the range of high hills. The faces of the slopes on the western 
and southwestern sides of the cape have been cleared and are covered 
with grass and dead stumps of trees; but the northeastern side, and 
also the summit, are thickly wooded. 


ST. GEORGE BAY. 269 


Light.—An octagonal tower of reinforced concrete surmounted by 
a red circular metal lantern, 97 feet high, at 100 feet within the coast 
line, northward, of Shoal point, and 1 mile southward of cape 
Anguille, exhibits, at 115 feet above high water, a flashing white 
light, which,shows groups of flashes every 10 seconds, thus: Light, 
0.525 second; eclipse, 1.350 seconds; light, 0.525 second; eclipse, 7.6 
seconds, and should be seen from all points of approach by water for 
a distance of 16 miles in clear weather. 

A rectangular, wooden, double dwelling house, painted white, with 
a red hip roof, is situated at 128°, distant 288 feet from the hghthouse. 

Fog signal.—<A diaphone horn, situated in a rectangular wooden 
building with white sides and a red roof and a high brick chimney, 
at 174°, distant 208 feet from Cape Anguille lighthouse, is operated 
by compressed air, and sounds, every 90 seconds, 2 blasts each of 34 
seconds’ duration, thus: Blast, 34 seconds; silent interval, 5 seconds; 
blast, 34 seconds; silent interval, 78 seconds, during thick and foggy 
weather. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, at cape Anguille at 
9h. Om.; springs rise 44 feet, neaps 3 feet; neaps range 1} feet. 

St. George bay.—The land from cape Anguille trends northeast- 
ward for a distance of,about 50 miles, and then curving to the west- 
ward for about 30 miles forms an extensive bay, the entrance to 
which, between capes Anguille and St. George, is 344 miles across. 
This bay is, with the exception of St. George harbor, situated at its 
head, entirely without sheltered anchorage, and, as westerly winds 
prevail, there is generally a swell rolling in, which, in gales, quickly 
increases to a very heavy sea. 

Landing in the bay anywhere outside St. George harbor, with the 
exception of two small rocky bights on the northern side (see page 
280), is impracticable during heavy westerly weather. This is espe- 
cially the case on the southern shore, owing to the large number of ice- 
deposited stones and bowlders fronting the beaches. Numerous cot- 
tages and a few villages stand on the shores of the bay. The settlers 
are, with few exceptions, fishermen, and large quantities of cod and 
herring, as well as some salmon and lobsters, are annually caught; 
farming, in a primitive fashion, is carried on, but the crops are mostly 
confined to hay and to the small quantity of oats and potatoes re- 
quired for themselves and their cattle, sheep, and horses. 

Ice.—St. George bay fills with river ice, which is always in motion, 
being driven upon cape Anguille by northerly winds and upon cape 
St. George by southerly winds: the head of the bay occasionally 
freezes. According to the severity of the winter the ice may fill the 
bay early in January or not until February, and the clearance may 
be between April 10 and 25; but it has been full during May, and in 
1886, owing to the prevalence of southerly and southeasterly winds, 


270 CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. 


it remained clear altogether. The upper part of the bay is generally 
frozen over between December and April; the average date of 
freezing is January 15, and of clearance of ice, April 8, but some- 
times the bay is clear of ice throughout the winter. 

Fog.—In spring, after the ice has disappeared, fog is not uncom- 
mon, but it is neither so thick nor so lasting as that on the southern 
coast. 

Tidal stream.—During the prevalence of strong southeasterly 
winds the flood stream sets into the bay at the rate of about a knot an 
hour. 

The coast from cape Anguille to Lewis point, northeastward, dis- 
tant about 16 miles, is composed of cliffs, reaching, in places, a height 
of 270 feet, and broken here and there by gullies extending from Cape 
Anguille mountains, which are immediately inland. It is steep-to 
and free from oftlying shoals, the 10-fathom contour line, over its 
whole extent, being about 800 yards from the shore. The tops of the 
cliffs and the slopes of the mountains behind are densely wooded, and 
waterfalls mark the mouths of several streams, especially during 
spring. 

-At the entrance to some of the gullies there are small clusters of 
rude huts in which the fishermen live during summer. A narrow 
bush trail, originally cut for the benefit of persons shipwrecked on 
this inhospitable coast, runs parallel with the cliffs a short distance 
inland and connects cape Anguille with Ship cove. 

Cape John, northeastward, 44 miles from cape Anguille, is a rocky 
point, and immediately westward of it is Snake bight, which affords 
anchorage in 16 to 18 fathoms water, during southerly and southeast- 
erly winds. 

Great Friars cove, northeastward, 2 miles from cape John, is a 
small semicircular indentation at the mouth of Friar’s gulch, a deep 
gully, and northeastward, } mile from the cove, there is Old Bone-em, 
a remarkable needle-pointed rock detached from the cliff, which is 
only distinctly seen from a direction nearly parallel with the shore. 

Johnsons cove lies northeastward, nearly 6 miles from Old 
Bone-em, and between them are three similar little bays named respec- 
tively Mary Anns cove, Hines cove (situated at the mouth of a very 
deep gully), and Wreck cove. 

At Johnsons cove is a fan-shaped waterfall just inside of the 
beach, and conspicuous bare cliffs, 1,260 feet high, form the eastern 
side of Johnsons gulch, the deep gully which here stretches back 
through the range. 

Lewis point lies northeastward, 3 miles from Johnsons cove, and 
midway between them is Little Friars cove. The point on easterly 
bearings shows as the apparent tangent of the cliffy coast. About 400 


SHIP COVE—PLASTER COVE. OF 1. 


yards northeastward from the point are Lewis rocks, two detached 
rocks, the eastern being 20 feet high, and both are steep-to. 

The coast from Lewis point continues cliffy eastward, 24 miles to 
Gulls Nest rock, a large detached rock, 53 feet high. Immediately 
westward of this there is a cluster of low-water rocks which, with 
Gulls Nest rock, form, at the foot of the cliff, a place known as Seal 
cove, where boats easily land during the fresh northerly breezes that 
occasionally blow obliquely across the bay. A small patch of rocks, 
with less than 6 feet of water over it, lies $ mile westward of Seal 
cove at 200 yards from the shore. 

From Gulls Nest rock the cliffy coast trends nearly eastward for 
12 miles, and then turns northeastward for 1,200 yards to the mouth 
of a gully, off which at a distance of 200 yards is Ship rock, 58 feet 
high. 

Ship cove, formed by the slight curve in the coast $ mile southwest- 
ward of Ship rock, extends from the Spout, a conspicuous waterfall 
eastward 3 mile from Gulls Nest rock, to Shoal point northeastward 
1,200 yards from Ship rock. 

Shoal point is the termination of the cliffy coast which extends 
here from cape Anguille, though from Ship rock to this point the 
cliffs are almost entirely clay and sand, while to the westward they 
are more generally rocky. <A stony ridge, with 1 to 3 fathoms of 
water over it, extends southwestward 1,500 yards from the point, and 
terminates 600 yards westward of Ship rock. There is an extensive 
patch of low-water rocks and bowlders directly off Shoal point, but 
close to the shore. 

Cape Anguille mountains extend northeastward from cape 
Anguille and terminate southward 5 to 6 miles from Shoal point; 
their highest point is 1,862 feet above the sea, but the range is gener- 
ally flat-topped and much cut up by large, deep gullies. The slopes 
are densely wooded, but the summits are bare of large trees and gen- 
erally covered with dwarf spruce, which grows so thickly as to be 
almost impassable. 

A noticeable feature on the side of the hill inland from Ship cove 
is the telegraph road leading to Great Codroy, which has been cut 
through the woods and passes over the top of the range. 

The locality under the eastern end of the mountains, and extending 
from Shoal point to Harbor head, is known as the Highlands. 

Plaster cove lies northeastward about a mile from Shoal point: 
its shores are dotted with the cottages of settlers, who are employed 
in fishing, farming, and lobster packing; at ? mile from the point 
there is a striking outcrop of gypsum in the cliff. 

The northeastern part of the cove is shallow, there being only 3} to 
4 fathoms water at 600 yards from the shore, but, westward of this, 


O72 CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. 


good anchorage may be found during offshore winds in 6 to 10 
fathoms water. with, in places, a soft bottom. 

The summit of Robinson head open northward of Harbor head, 
bearing 51°, leads northward to the shoal water in this cove. 

Highlands church, on the northeastern point of Plaster cove, is a 
conspicuous white building with a small square tower, and bearing 
325° from it, distant 4 mile from the shore, there is a small stony 
patch of 32 fathoms, with 6 and 7 fathoms of water around it. 

The coast from Highlands church to Harbor head, northeastward 
1 mile, is composed of clay cliffs, 65 to 100 feet high, fronted by a 
stony beach. Behind the cliffs there is a flat wooded rise, the sum- 
mit being 200 feet high. The country eastward of this consists of low 
wooded ridges alternating with extensive and generally swampy 
flats, through which flow several streams or brooks that rise in the 
mountain ranges 12 to 14 miles inland. Good salmon pools exist in 
all these streams. 

The coast for 14 miles east-northeastward from Harbor head falls 
a little, the cliffs giving place to low slopes, again succeeded by a 
short stretch of cliff, 80 to 90 feet high, fronting which, to a distance 
of 200 yards from the shore, are some detached bowlders and patches 
of rock. 

River or Highland brook, at the eastern end of these cliffs, is 
rather more than 100 yards wide at its entrance, but not deep enough 
to admit boats except at high water. About 2 miles from the entrance 
this stream opens out to a small lake, which has a local reputation 
for large trout. 

The coast from River brook to Crabb brook, northeastward 2 
miles, is composed of low cliffs and steep slopes of sand and clay, 
fronted by a stony beach. Off this are numerous bowlders, probably 
deposited by ice, and $ mile from River brook a prong of shoal 
water, formed by some of the bowlders and detached rocky patches, 
extends 600 yards from the shore, which should here be given a berth 
of ? mile. 

Crabb brook is nearly 400 yards wide between the heads forming 
its mouth, but a stony spit projects 200 yards from the foot of the 
hill on the western side. Banks of stones, that dry at low water, 
extend nearly across the entrance, leaving a narrow, crooked channel, 
in which there is only 1 foot at low water. 

Small vessels enter the river at high water and discharge at a 
rough wharf on the eastern side. Abreast this the water quickly 
shoals, and the space, that at high water appears extensive, is at low 
water largely filled by dry banks of sand and stones. Three-quar- 
ters of a mile within the entrance the bed of the stream is filled by 
marshy flats, which become islands as the tide flows in little chan- 
nels through them. ‘These channels unite about ? mile farther up, 


BARACHOIS BROOK—-ROBINSON HEAD. Oe 


when the stream turns abruptly to the eastward, under a high wooded 
cliff. 

The village is situated on both sides of the stream, just inside the 
entrance, but the larger number of houses is on the western side. 
The population is about 200, all of whom are engaged in fishing and 
farming. 

There is a church, school, and post-office. Crabbs station of the 
Newfoundland railway is on the left bank of the river 24 miles from 
the mouth. There is a rough road to the southern side of St. George 
harbor. . 

Barachois brook, northeastward, 2 miles from Crabb brook, is 
very shallow, and has a stony bar that is nearly dry at low water; 
the coast between is composed of sand cliffs, rising at one point to 
a height of 190 feet; some fishermen live on its shores. 

Robinson brook, the entrance to which lies $ mile northeastward 
from Barachois brook, has also a stony bar, which is nearly dry at 
low water. Inside, between the sloping sides of the river valley, are 
numerous flat, marshy islets, through which the stream runs in nar- 
row channels. The village, with a population of about 200, stands 
on the eastern side of the entrance; there is a church and school, 
and the inhabitants are chiefly engaged in fishing and farming. 

Good coal is said to have been discovered at about 9 miles inland 
from the village. There is a small patch of 5 fathoms, with 6 and 
7 fathoms of water around it, 4 mile offshore, between Barachois and 
Bobinson brooks. The bottom is generally stony off this coast and 
affords only temporary anchorage. 

Communication.—There is a post-office at the village. Robin- 
sons station of the Newfoundland railway is on the left bank of 
Robinson brook 2 miles from the mouth. A road runs to the settle- 
ment at Sandy point, which is 26 miles distant. 

Robinson head.—From the northern side of Robinson brook, the 
coast, of clay and sand cliffs, rises gradually toward Robinson head, 
distant 2 mile northeastward. The western summit of the head 
is a little peak of white sand, with some grass and a few stunted 
trees on its landward side, where it falls steeply*to a hollow in which 
there are two small ponds. Thence the slope rises again, turning a 
little southeastward and culminating in a flat-topped hill, 244 feet 
high. Inside this there is a short saddle, when the land rises to a - 
grassy summit, 276 feet high. The seaward face of the slope is com- 
posed of alternating patches or strips of white sand and dark brush- 
wood, which makes this part of the coast conspicuous from any 
direction. 

Eastward of the hill, 244 feet high, the land falls to Stinking cove, 
an angle in the shore, in which there is a small lobster factory. From 


76846—09——_18 


274. CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. 


this cove to Fishels brook, distant 5 miles to the northeastward, the 
shore consists of sand and clay cliffs, 80 to 113 feet high, and the 
land behind of shght elevation with marshy flats or barrens sepa- 
rating low, densely wooded ridges. 

Three small stream, known respectively as Red brook, Seal brook, 
and Rattling brook, cause breaks in the cliffy shore, which is fronted 
by a stony beach having off it numerous ice-deposited stones and 
bowlders that make landing at low water, even in fine weather, diffi- 
cult for ordinary boats. 

Here and there, behind the cliffs, are cottages and strips of culti- 
vated land. 

Fishels brook rises in the mountain range some 12 miles inland 
and flows into the sea between a steep bank, 130 feet high, on its 
eastern side, and a long, stony spit, on which are some houses, pro- 
jecting from the higher land on the western side. The entrance is 
very narrow and, at low water, nearly dry; inside, there is a small 
deep pool, above which numerous banks of stones and shingle occupy 
the bed of the stream. 

From a little over a mile off this brook a ridge of rocky, uneven 
ground extends toward Bank head. Its western portion, with 7 to 9 
fathoms water over it, is outside the 10-fathom contour line, and 
there are depths of 10 to 12 fathoms around it. Eastward, the bank 
inclines a little toward the shore, the depth over it varying from 6 
to 9 fathoms. 

Bank head lies 2% miles northward from Fishels Brook entrance, 
the coast between being a continuation of the sandy cliffs to the south- 
westward, which, however, are in this locality somewhat higher and 
fronted by a wider beach of stones. Barry brook, Middle brook, and 
Journois brook, the last being 1 mile from Bank head, are three 
brooks which flow through deep valleys in this coast to the sea. Half 
a mile northward from Journois brook the cliff rises to its summit, 
156 feet high. This cliff, which is conspicuous, is, strictly speaking, 
Bank head, but the whole of the neighboring locality is generally so 
named. 

Behind the head there are some small ponds and several detached 
ridges of moderate elevation, separated by barrens, that so frequently 
occur in this country, and reaching to the foot of the range, which 
trends southwestward at a distance of about 12 miles inland. Several 
of the summits of this range are very conspicuous. There is one, 134 
miles southeastward from Robinson head, which reaches a height 
of 1,764 feet, and, from the northward, appears saddle-shaped. 

The coast.—Northeastward, + mile from the summit of Bank 
head, the sandy cliff ceases abruptly, and the coast then rises to a 
low conical sand hill, eastward of which is Bank Head cove, a small 
bight. Here there are a few cottages and fish stores, and landing can 


FLAT BAY BROOK—FLAT ISLAND. aD 


be effected when it is impracticable anywhere else between Robinson 
head and Sandy point. 

The coast is lower northeastward of Bank Head cove than to the 
southwestward. It continues, in cliffs about 75 feet high, here and 
there covered with bushes, for 25 miles to Youngs cove, which is a 
slight curve formed by the western end of Flat island. There are a 
few fishermen’s cottages on the shores of Youngs cove. 

Flat Bay brook is a stream flowing into Flat bay. Immediately 
inside of the entrance, which is + mile wide, is a low projecting point 
with some houses on it. Muddy hole, the portion westward of this 
point, is merely a shallow bay; the eastern portion is the stream, flow- 
ing from the mountain range at about 7 miles inland through a chan- 
nel that is much obstructed by banks and islets. 

South side is the district extending east-northeastward about 5 
miles from Flat Bay brook. The shore is formed of low banks ter- 
minating the long slope from a ridge, about 300 feet high, the summit 
of which is about 1 mile inland. Numerous houses and fish stores 
line the shore, and the land is more or less in cultivation. A fairly 
good road runs westward to Robinson head and eastward to the head 
of St. George harbor. 

Cairn or Steel mountain, a remarkable mass of ironstone, is 
situated 63 miles east-southeastward from the entrance of Flat Bay 
brook. From the low country behind the coast ridge, and in front 
of the mountain range extending from the southwestward, it rises to 
a height of 952 feet, and on it there are two stone cairns said to have 
been erected by Captain Cook. Flat Bay brook runs along the south- 
western foot of this mountain. Deposits of iron and gypsum have 
been found in the locality. 

Rugged broken ranges continue northeastward from Cairn moun- 
tain, and in this direction 3 miles away there is, on the western face 
of the range, a white patch, formed by a landslide, which is con- 
spicuous from far down St. George bay. 

Flat bay, between Flat island and the mainland, is very shallow 
and obstructed by banks which dry at low water. On the southern 
side there is sufficient depth at low water for a boat to go about 3 
miles up the bay; but the bottom is covered with thick weeds, which 
would quickly foul a propeller. 

Moyac or Woody island, situated toward the northeastern part of 
the bay, is the head of a large bank of sand and shingle, 3 feet high, 
and covered with coarse grass. At one time several trees stood 
upon it. 

Flat island is a low bank of stones and shingle extending in a 
curve from Youngs cove to Harbor point, a distance of 64 miles in an 
east-northeasterly direction and forming with the shore of the main- 
land the shallow basin known as Flat bay. The width of this bank 


276 CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. 


of stones is only about 50 yards in places, while toward the eastern 
end it is rather more than } mile. Long stretches of the bank are 
bare, but there are two extensive clumps of spruce trees as well as 
some small patches of scrub. 

Three-quarters of a mile from the junction of this bank with the 
main shore, and northward 200 yards from the beach, there is a patch 
of stones which dries at low water, and shoal ground, which continues 
east-northeastward for some 3 miles, extends for nearly 4 mile from 
the beach; seaward of this the water deepens quickly to upward of 
20 fathoms. Therefore, when navigating along this shore in fog, do 
not decrease the depth to less than 12 fathoms. Toward the eastern 
end of Flat island the deep water closes the shore, and eastward of 
Harbor point the 5-fathom line is only 60 yards from the beach. 

Light.—A circular iron lighthouse, 35 feet high, and painted with 
three red and two white horizontal bands, stands, on a concrete base, 
at 100 yards within Harbor point, and exhibits, at 35 feet above 
high water, a fixed white light, which should be seen from a distance 
of 7 miles in clear weather. 

The keeper’s dwelling is attached to the southern side of the light- 
house and also painted in red and white bands. 

St. George harbor is situated at the head of St. George bay; 
its entrance, between Harbor point on the south and Indian head on 
the north, is 3 miles across, and its extent to the entrance of St. 
George river is about 3 miles. 

Sandy point settlement stands on the wider part of Flat island, 
near its eastern end, and it has a population of about 400 people, 
who are chiefly employed in the fishing industry. 

Communication.—There is communication with Halifax by 
steamer monthly during summer. St. George station of the New- 
foundland railway is situated $ mile southward of Turf point. The 
mail trains, which run three times a week betwen St. Johns and 
port aux Basques, stop at St. George. There is telegraphic communi- 
cation. 

There is hotel accommodation of a kind at St. George for about 
12 people. 

Supplies.—There are some stores at the settlement, and supplies of 
fresh meat and vegetables can generally be obtained, either there or 
at South side. 

Bank.—The flat sandy shore trends southwestward from Harbor 
point and forms a slight curve, in which there are numerous fishing 
stores and landing stages. A bank of sand and mud, dry at low 
water, extends nearly 200 yards off this shore, and 150 yards off 
Messervy point, which is distant about 1,400 yards from Harbor 
point; it is steep-to, there being 5 fathoms water within 75 yards of 


ST. GEORGE RIVER—INDIAN HEAD. a ii 


the edge. A cask buoy is generally moored in 4 fathoms off the end 
of the shoal. 

Wharf.—The government wharf at Messervy point has a depth 
of 2 fathoms alongside it at its southwestern corner, and 3 fathoms 
at its southeastern corner, but, as there is a good deal of wreckage 
‘about this part of the anchorage, keep eastward of the western corner 
when going alongside. 

Westward of the wharf the dry bank extends farther from the 
shore, and the line of 3 fathoms stretches southeastward across the 
entrance of Flat bay. 

The Episcopal church, with a low spire, is situated in a clump of 
trees 4 mile southwestward from the lighthouse, and is conspicuous 
from the westward. 

Turf point, on the southern side of St. George harbor, 1,2; miles 
south-southeast from Harbor point, is a low, flat projection of peat; 
off it are Seal rocks, some detached bowlders, which give the name 
to the adjoining cove and settlement. A cathedral, with a clock 
tower, is situated near the settlement. 

Indian river, or Little Barachois brook, lies 14 miles east-north- 
eastward from Turf point. Indian pond, the space within the en- 
trance, is of considerable size, but it quickly narrows between high 
wooded banks. A government ferry crosses at the mouth. 

St. George river entrance, which is known as the Gut, lies 2+ 
miles northward from Indian river entrance. The intervening shore 
is composed of low sand cliffs. During fine weather boats enter the 
river at low water, but the tidal stream runs strongly through, and 
there is generally more or less swell setting on the shore; during 
strong westerly winds it should not be attempted. There is a large 
lumber mill and some houses on the southern side of the entrance. 
The Newfoundland railway crosses the mouth of this river by an 
iron bridge, and the road to Stephenville is continued by means of 
a ferry across the river. 

Sea Wolf lagoon, on the northern side of St. George harbor, is 
between an indentation in the shore and a long narrow strip of stony 
beach; its entrance is nearly dry at low water, but inside of the spit 
there is a depth of 34 fathoms. 

Indian head is a remarkable cliffy headland on the northern side 
of St. George harbor. The summit of the cliff is 180 feet high, but 
it gradually rises to a conspicuous conical wooded peak, 631 feet 
high, at 14 miles to the northeastward, from which wooded hills 
extend northeastward to a deep valley which separates them from the 
higher ranges inland. Some conical summits of these higher ranges 
are conspicuous from seaward; mount Hubert, which has some re- 
markable bare patches near its summit. is 1,472 feet high, and a peak 
104 miles northeastward from Indian head is 2,290 feet high. 


278 CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. : 


The northwestern sides of Indian Head hills fall steeply to a large 
shallow lagoon, separated from the sea by a narrow strip of stony 
beach 300 yards across, which trends north-northwestward nearly 3 
miles from Indian head. Off this beach, and also off Indian head, 
the 10-fathoms line is less than 4 mile from the shore. 

Anchorage.—The soundings in the middle of St. George harbor 
northward of Harbor point vary from 12 to 18 fathoms, and there 
is anchorage anywhere within a reasonable distance of the shore, but 
during strong westerly winds a heavy sea sets in, and during fresh 
easterly winds there are violent squalls off the high land. The 
anchorage under Flat island should, therefore, be obtained if possible; 
it is easy of access, and affords excellent holding ground, with smooth 
water, in 6 to 10 fathoms water, stiff mud bottom. A good berth is 
in 7 fathoms of water, with the outer end of the government wharf 
bearing 278°, and the lighthouse 356°. Strong easterly winds are 
frequently experienced here, but though the squalls are very heavy, 
the water is smooth, the holding ground very good, and a vessel can 
he in safety. 

Many local schooners anchor on the southern side of the harbor off 
Turf point. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, at Sandy point at 
9h. 45m.; springs rise 54 feet, neaps 34 feet; neaps range 14 feet. 

‘During springs the tidal streams run with some strength at the 
anchorage. 

Directions.—Round the beach at Harbor point at a convenient 
distance, give its southern side a berth of over 300 yards, and anchor 
as above directed. 

Stephenville comprises the district extending northwestward 
about 5 miles from Indian head. There are numerous houses about 
the shores of the lagoon, northwestward of Indian head, and on the 
low slopes northwestward of it, as well as on the beach; and there 
is also a Roman Catholic church standing near the beach. A road 
passes round the lagoon to the ferry at St. George river, and also 
westward to Isthmus bay. At a short distance eastward of the 
church, Blanche river, a small stream, flows through the stony beach 
into the sea; the country inland is of moderate elevation, thickly 
wooded where not cultivated, and has several ponds. 

Romaines brook flows into the sea 34 miles westward from 
Stephenville church, the coast between being high banks of sand, 
broken in places by small streams; the entrance to the brook is dry 
at low water and very narrow; the pools inside are frequented by sea 
trout. About 200 yards within its mouth the brook is crossed by a 
bridge carrying the road to Isthmus bay; above it the stream is ob- 
structed by banks of stone and shingle, and on the eastern side there 
is a remarkable outcrop of gypsum, small quantities of which are 


ISTHMUS BAY. 279 


occasionally exported; this outcrop is conspicuous from the south- 
ward when the sun is shining on it. 

Supplies.—One of the best farms in this locality is situated on the 
right bank of the stream, and such supphes as fresh meat and butter 
can generally be obtained there. 

Table mountain, a thickly wooded hill, rises to the height of 980 
feet, at 14 miles north-northwestward from the entrance to Romaines 
brook; northward of this summit it rises a little, forming the south- 
ern end of the range of high hills extending along the eastern shore 
of Port au Port. Deposits of asbestos have been found in these hills, 
and the mines are worked during summer. 

The country northeastward of Table mountain is broken, but rises 
gradually from the coast; two detached whale-backed summits, about 
4 miles inland, the higher of which is 1,090 feet high, are conspicuous. 

Table mountain slopes gradually westward or toward Isthmus 
bay, and terminates in a steep sand cliff 94 feet high, near the western 
end of which is the conspicuous Roman Catholic church, with a high 
white spire. 

Isthmus bay is the indentation in the coast just southwestward 
of Table mountain. It is about 14 miles across and $ mile deep. The 
soundings in the bay increase gradually from the shore to 6 fathoms, 
stone and gravel bottom, and though frequently used as an anchorage, 
the holding ground is uncertain, and there is a heavy swell during 
westerly to southwesterly winds. The stony beach at the head of 
the bay is about 50 yards across, and behind it is a shallow lagoon 
separated from East bay of Port au Port by another narrow stony 
beach. There are numerous cottages on both these beaches, as well 
as on the sloping ground over the western side of the bay. The 
Episcopal church and the post-office are on the eastern side, ap- 
proached from the shore by a road up the steep sand cliff, which 
terminates the slope of Table mountain. 

This district is locally known as the Gravels, and the population 
is about 100. 

Shoals.—About 1 mile south-southeastward of the western point 
of Isthmus bay there are some patches with 6 te 64 fathoms of water 
over them, and southward, distant 1, miles from the same point, 
there is a stony patch of 5 fathoms; slight tide rips form over these 
patches at spring tides. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, at Isthmus bay at 
9h. 40m.; springs rise 54 feet, neaps 34 feet. 

Communication.—Coasting steamers call at Isthmus bay occa- 
sionally during summer, and there is a short pier on the western 
shore for their convenience, but the postal communication is generally 
by road to Benoit station of the Newfoundland railway, which is sit- 
uated about 14 miles northward of the mouth of St. George river. 


280 CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. 


The coast, westward of Isthmus bay, is composed of low cliffs 
backed by thickly wooded ridges 125 to 270 feet in height, for about 
24 miles, to Felix cove, a shght bend, where a few houses are located 
and a small stream runs over the beach. There is a rocky patch with 
41 fathoms of water over it + mile southward of the cove. 

The coast, westward of Felix cove continues in low cliffs, but the 
bordering land rises in densely wooded ridges 400 to 500 feet high. 

At 14 miles from Felix cove, and below two rather conspicuous 
houses on the green slope, is a rocky cove affording a partially shel- 
tered landing place for boats except in very bad weather. The rocks 
forming this cove make a small angle with the shore for about 70 
yards, the entrance facing eastward. 

This coast is everywhere steep-to. 

Campbells cove is a small bight in the coast at 2? miles westward 
of Felix cove. In the middle of the cove is a rocky projection afford- 
ing a good landing place, and, being more sheltered, it is better than 
that just described. At low water, however, there is hardly depth 
enough for an ordinary ship’s boat, and, if there is any swell run- 
ning, landing can not safely be effected until the tide has risen. 

There are several cottages and a good deal of cultivated land 
around the shores of the cove. A fairly good road runs to Isthmus 
bay. Pierways hill is a remarkable stone and comparatively bare 
hill, with two similar summits; the western summit, north-northwest- 
ward nearly a mile from the cove, is 779 feet high, and it falls in a 
gradual slope to Abrahams cove. 

The western point of Campbells cove is a perpendicular cliff, 99 
feet high, having some rocks and bowlders at its foot. Messervy 
cove is a small indentation westward of the western point of Camp- 
bells cove, and there are some houses and cultivated lands around it. 

Abrahams cove.—The coast continues cliffy to Abrahams cove, 
an indentation with a ravine at its head, westward, 2+ miles from 
Campbells cove; there is a very conspicuous cliff, 145 feet high, on 
its western side. Here the 20 fathom contour line crossing St. 
George bay from the southward closes the coast and continues west- 
ward at a distance of about $ mile. 

The land within Abraham cove consists of flat-topped thickly 
wooded ridges. 

Jerry’s nose, a low rocky point 14 miles westward of Abrahams 
cove, forms the eastern side of Fiods cove, a small bight, where there 
are also some cottages. Numbers of dorys may be seen about all these 
coves, but there is no landing in bad weather except where mentioned. 

Ship island, small, rocky, and 36 feet high, lies off the end of the 
projection on the westerp side of Fiods cove, with which it is con- 
nected at low water. A rocky patch, with 34 fathoms of water over it, 
lies from 200 to 500 yards southwestward from the island; there is a 


SHIP COVE—SEA MOUSE ROCKS. 281 


depth of 64 fathoms between the island and patch, but the passage is 
narrow and should not be used. 

Ship cove lies northwestward of Ship island and of the projection 
on the western side of Fiods cove, and though a deeper bight than 
any of those to the eastward, it does not afford good anchorage except 
during continued periods of offshore winds. At the head of the cove 
is a shingly beach on which are some cottages, and a path through a 
valley between the ridges leads to Head harbor (Pic & Denis harbor) 
in Port au Port. 

The coast, consisting of rugged, irregular cliffs 80 to 90 feet high, 
continues from Ship cove westward for 14 miles to Pigeon head, a 
remarkable perpendicular bluff, 110 feet high, with some bowlders 
and ledges of rock at its foot, but they are steep-to. Inland there are 
thickly wooded ridges, 700 to 800 feet high, intersected here and there 
by deep ravines from which streams flow into the sea. 

Lower cove is northward of Pigeon head, from which the cliff 
falls gradually toward the beach at the head of the cove, where there 
is a small settlement. 

In the mouth of the cove, bearing 270°, distant 1,200 yards 
from Pigeon head, there is a rocky shoal of 4 fathoms with 7 
to 11 fathoms.of water around it. Inside the shoal temporary an- 
chorage may be found in 7 to 10 fathoms of water, but the ground 
is rough, and with westerly winds there is a heavy swell. 

The coast, composed of moderately high cliffs, continues from 
Lower cove westward to a small gravelly beach with sloping ground 
behind it, and a large waterfall near, locally known as Charhe 
Sheaves cove, and where there are two or three houses. Westward 
the cliffs again become higher for a short distance, falling gradu- 
ally toward March point at 44 miles from Lower cove. At 14 miles 
eastward of March point the land rises very steeply from the cliffs 
to a hill, the eastern part of which is bare and stony, and con- 
spicuous from the southward and westward. The western part, sepa- 
rated from the eastern by a deep gully, is thickly wooded and culmi- 
nates in a summit 765 feet high, though farther inland the hills again 
rise to a height of 1,120 feet. 

Sea Mouse rocks are three rocky patches lying off the coast 
between Charlie Sheaves cove and March point. The northeastern 
patch, bearing 262°, distant 2+ miles from Pigeon head and 750 yards 
offshore, has a depth of 15 feet over it; it is about 250 yards long east 
and west, and 150 yards wide within the 3-fathom line. 

Bearing 214°, distant 750 yards from this northeastern patch, is a 
patch with 5% fathoms least water over it, and there is a narrow 
channel between them with 12 fathoms of water. 

The western shoal bears 262°, distant 1; miles from the north- 
eastern patch and 750 yards pee it is about 300 yards long east 


282 CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. 


and west and about 200 yards wide within the 3-fathom line, with 
a least depth of 6 feet over it. Between these shoals and the shore 
the soundings vary from 6 to 10 fathoms. 

The whole of the shingle beach at the head of Ship cove, open 
southward of the chiffy bluff half way between it and Pigeon head, 
bearing 79°, leads southward of the two shoaler patches, but over, or 
close-to, the 53-fathom patch. 

March point is low and flat, and it is noticeable from its generally 
green appearance projecting some little distance from the dark 
wooded hills behind. Eastward of it there are some houses, both on 
the shore and on the flat, and near them the ground is more or less 
cultivated. The point is fronted by a stony beach and some ledges 
of rock, off which the 5-fathom line extends to the distance of 4+ mile. 
March Point bank, south-southwestward 14 miles from March point, 
is a ridge about 14 miles in length, with 22 to 24 fathoms of water 
over it. 

The coast from March point trends west-southwestward, and con- 
sists of low cliffs with a narrow strip of level land behind them, 
thickly wooded except where cleared by settlers, and extending to the 
foot of the hills, which here approach the sea. The stony beach, hav- 
ing off it some flat ledges of rock, is fairly steep-to, but the bottom 
is rough and only fit for temporary anchorage in fine weather. 

Degras is a small] settlement nearly 3 miles from March point; and 
Grand Jardin is a similar settlement 14 miles farther westward. The 
inhabitants of these two places, and also those at Petit Jardin, a few 
huts ? mile westward of Grand Jardin, are principally French, and 
engaged almost entirely in fishing. 

Cape St. George.—F rom the land 960 feet high, at 14 miles north- 
northwestward of the village of Degras, dark wooded ridges, with 
occasional bare stony summits, fall toward cape St. George, a short 
distance from which the woods terminate and bare grassy slopes 
extend to the cliffs, which on the southern side of the cape are about 
50 feet high. A pyramidal rock, connected with the western end of 
these cliffs by a low shelf, shows well from the southward; close to it 
is a low detached rock, and here the coast turns abruptly northward, 
rising in high perpendicular cliffs, which at a distance of + mile from 
the cape are 225 feet high. Cape St. George is steep-to, and may be 
rounded closely, but a swell nearly always sets on to the shore, and 
the tidal streams are strong. 

The coast from cape St. George to cape Cormorant consists of 
high cliffs, and nearly midway is Big cove, where a few fishermen 
occasionally live during summer. Northward of this cove the cliffs 
are fronted by some low rocky islets and rocks, but the coast is gen- 
erally steep-to and free from off-lying shoals. The land rises in bare 


CAPE CORMORANT—RED ISLAND ROAD. 283 


stony hills and wooded gullies to the summit of White hills, a long 
rocky ridge which extends eastward toward the head of Port au- 
Port. 

Cape Cormorant, north-northeastward 54 miles from cape St. 
George, is a perpendicular limestone cliff, about 700 feet high, from 
which the land rises in a steep slope to a somewhat conical summit 
968 feet high, at a distance of 4 mile inland. 

Red island, northwestward, distant 3% mile from cape Cormo- 
rant, is about 1,400 yards long in a northeasterly and southwesterly 
direction and 700 yards wide; its coast consists of red clay cliffs, 
rising, on the northwestern side, 292 feet above the sea. The top of 
the island is covered with coarse grass and dead stumps of trees, and 
at the southeastern end, where there is a stony beach and spit at the 
foot of the cliffs, are some storehouses and dwellings that may be 
occupied by fishermen during summer. A wooden tramway, for con- 
veying stores from the beach to the top, is conspicuous from the 
southward. 

The northern side of the island is fairly steep-to, shoal water of 
less than 3 fathoms fringing it to the distance of about 200 yards; 
but foul ground extends off its northeastern and southwestern ends 
' for about 4 mile, and continues off the southern and eastern sides of 
the island. 

The Ridge crosses from the southeastern end of Red island to the 
mainland and meets the coast at a steep gully, 1,400 yards eastward 
from cape Cormorant. It is narrow and rocky, being midway be- 
tween the island and the mainland, where the depth is 15 to 18 feet, 
about 100 feet across; nearer the island and about 400 yards from the 
end of the stony spit, there is a depth of 9 feet water, but between this 
and the spit there are depths of 12 feet. 

Vessels of suitable draft cross the Ridge in fine weather with Crow 
head (the first cliffy headland northeastward of the island) in line 
with Low point, bearing about 47°. 

Tidal streams.—At springs the streams run strongly over the 
Ridge, the flood setting northeastward and the ebb southwestward, 
and there are considerable overfalls on it, especially with strong 
westerly winds, whilst in heavy weather breakers extend over nearly 
its whole extent. 

Red Island road.—There is fairly good anchorage northeastward 
of the Ridge, with southerly winds, in 11 to 14 fathoms water, sand 
and in places mud bottom; but a heavy sea sets in with southwesterly 
and westerly winds, and although a vessel, with good ground tackle, 
might hold on, it would be imprudent to remain. A good berth, for 
a large vessel, is in 14 fathoms of water, with the northeastern end 
of the island, bearing 279°, and the first cliff northward of cape St. 
George just shut in, 201°. White rock. (See below.) 


284 CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. 


A heavy ground swell usually indicates strong westerly winds in 
this locality. 

The coast is cliffy for about 1 mile eastward of cape Cormorant, 
it then turns to the northeastward, and is low and fronted by a stony 
beach for about 24+ miles, whence to Crow head, a bluff 112 feet high, 
distant 14 miles, it consists of cliffs of moderate height. Low point, 
14 miles southwestward of Crow head, is a slightly rounded projec- 
tion of the shore, and westward of it is les Vaches, a small settle- 
ment where there is a lobster factory and some cottages. The land 
behind this coast rises gradually to thickly wooded ridges of moderate 
height. 

White rock, lying $ mile offshore with the northeastern end of 
Red island bearing 267°, distant 1,3, miles, and nearly midway be- 
tween Low point and the Ridge, is a small rocky patch with a depth 
of 18 feet over it; the land about cape St. George, open westward 
of the cliffs southward of cape Cormorant, bearing about 201°, leads 
westward of the rock. 

Cow rocks, a cluster of rocks and shoals about 1,600 yards long 
in a northeasterly and southwesterly direction, front the coast about 
Low point at a distance of 600 yards. The northeastern rocks are 9 
feet high; 700 yards southwestward from them is a small cluster that 
dries 4 feet, and between are several shoal patches, while southwest- 
ward, 700 yards from the rocks that dry 4 feet, and directly off the 
houses at les Vaches, is a detached rock with 18 feet water over it. 

Cow rocks are fairly steep on the northwestern side, there being 
depths of 10 fathoms at about 700 yards outside of them; in thick 
weather, therefore, when passing along the coast, do not shoal the 
water to less than 20 fathoms to insure passing outside of Red island 
and these rocks. 

The coast for a short distance northeastward of Crow head con- 
sists of cliffs; it then falls quickly and continues low to Three Rocks 
point, a distance of 2 miles. In the shallow bight between the head 
and point there are a few fishermen’s cottages. 

Three Rocks point has three rocky islets off it (the western being 
14 feet high), and a store and huts on the beach inside. Some shelter 
is afforded by the rocks, and landing may be effected here when it 
is impracticable elsewhere in the locality; but a very heavy sea rolls 
along the coast with winds westward of south-southwest. 

Shoals.—There are depths of less than 5 fathoms for 1,300 yards 
westward of Three Rocks point, and there is a patch, with a depth 
of 23 fathoms over it, bearing 275°, distant 800 yards from the high- 
est islet. Northeastward of the point a shelving ledge extends 500 
yards from the shore, and outside of this there is very foul ground 
with depths of less than 3 fathoms for 300 yards farther ; this locality 
should therefore be approached with caution. 


ROUND HEAD—CLAM BANK COVE. 285 


Cow rocks open northwestward of cape Cormorant, bearing about 
216°, leads northwestward nearly } mile from the 23 fathoms patch, 
in 12 to 15 fathoms of water. 

The coast, trending east-northeastward from Three Rocks point, 
gradually rises, in clay cliffs, to a height of 230 feet and then falls 
again to Red point, a slight projection from which low cliffs continue 
to Clam Bank cove, nearly 4 miles from Three Rocks point. The 
coast is fronted by rocky ledges, and shoal water extends about 600 
yards off it, but between Red point and Clam Bank cove there are 
depths of 5 fathoms and less for nearly + mile offshore. 

There is a small lobster factory at Salmon cove, on a stony beach, 
eastward of Three Rocks point, and a few settlers’ cottages stand 
along the shore; the inhabitants live principally by cod fishing. 

Round head, a remarkable hill bordering the coast between Three 
rocks and Red points, has three distinct conical summits, the middle 
and highest being 880 feet high. The seaward face of this hill is a 
perpendicular cliff, and, with the conical summit, is conspicuous. 

The southern slope and summit of Round head are thickly wooded 
with spruce, pine, and birch; the hill falls rather steeply to a ravine 
just behind it, from which Victor brook, a small stream, runs into 
West bay, Port au Port. Southward the country is composed of 
thickly wooded hills and valleys, having a general east-and-west 
direction and culminating in White hills (p. 288). 

Clam Bank cove is a small bight with a broad stony beach, on 
which, as well as on the bank behind it, there are some fishermen’s 
cottages. A ledge of rocks projecting from the western point of the 
bight, gives some little shelter to boats when landing, except at low 
water; but during strong westerly winds, the heavy sea makes land- 
ing impracticable. 

A rough road is cut from the vicinity of the cove, through the 
wooded country, to Port au Port. 

The coast.—The western shore of the remarkable tongue of land 
known as Long point may be considered to begin at Clam Bank 
cove, from which place the extreme of the point is about 124 miles 
distant. Along this shore there are two small villages, known as 
Shoal cove and Black Duck brook, as well as a few detached cot- 
tages of the settlers, who, in this locality, are chiefly of French de- 
scent. Between Clam Bank cove and Black Duck brook the 
point is about 1 mile across, but northeastward of this its aver- 
age width is not more than 400 yards. It is thickly wooded with 
dwarf spruce and other stunted trees and bushes, excepting near its 
northeastern end, and slopes gently from the eastern side toward 
the sea. It is fronted throughout nearly the whole of its length by 
rocky ledges and bowlders extending from the shore for distances of 


286 CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. 


100 to 200 yards, and it is only at rare intervals that a heavy surf 
is not rolling in on these. 

Immediately westward of Clam Bank cove the coast line is eom- 
posed of cliffs 80 to 100 feet in height, which gradually fall to a low 
shore at the village of Shoal cove. 

Black Duck brook.—The village of Black Duck brook, nearly 
a mile northeastward of Shoal cove and 44 miles from Clam Bank 
cove, is principally situated on the shores of a sandy bight, where 
a sharp bend of the coast line in an easterly direction narrows the 
tongue, forming Long point, to about 600 yards. Off the point at 


the western angle of the bend a rocky ledge, dry at low water, 


extends for a distance of nearly 600 yards and gives some shelter 
to the bay, except during northwesterly winds. Shoal water extends 
from the rocky ledge for nearly 3? mile in a northerly direction; ves- 
sels wishing to communicate should therefore approach with cau- 
tion. Near the point previously mentioned a store with a flagstaff 
makes a conspicuous mark from seaward. 

The inhabitants, principally fishermen, are also owners of several 
head of cattle and sheep, for which they find pasture in the neigh- 
borhood. <A lobster factory near the eastern end of the village is 
worked during the summer by a party of fishermen. There is a good 
road to Port au Port. 

Echelles or Portage.—T'wo boat ways connect Black Duck brook 
factory with Port au Port. Boats are hauled up to the top of the hill, 
by a capstan, and lowered on the opposite side, thus saving the fisher- 
men the necessity of going around Long point. 

The coast from Black Duck brook to Long point consists of low 
banks fronted by rocky ledges and bowlders. The land slopes from 
the southeastern side of the tongue and the narrow flats, contiguous 
to the northwestern shoe, are generally mere bogs. At about 14 miles 
from the point the land becomes bare of trees, and covered with 
coarse grass. 

Long point is the eastern end of the tongue, which for $ mile 
within the point is a narrow strip of rocks. A spit of shoal water, 
forming the bar, extends northeastward nearly a mile from the point. 

Position.—The observation spot, at 14 miles southwestward of 
Long point, and on top of the highest bank directly behind the east- 
ern huts, used during summer by migratory fishermen, is in north 
latitude 48° 46’ 28’” and longitude 58° 46’ 87’’ west of Greenwich. 

Banks.—The 20-fathom contour lne passes about 1 mile off 
Three Rocks point, but a long, narrow, irregular bank, with 17 to 20 
fathoms of water over it, extends north-northeastward about 84 miles 
from Round head. Northeastward of this bank the 20-fathom con- 
tour line again approaches the shore to distances of from 14 to 3 miles, 
but at 6 to 7 miles off Long point there are some extensive banks of 17 
and 20 fathoms. 


PORT AU PORT. 287 


A long narrow bank, with depths of 7 to 10 fathoms over it, extends 
parallel to the coast of the tongue at a distance of 1} miles, its 
western end being 3 miles from Black Duck brook. 

Between this bank and the shore there is a long bank with depths of 
8 to 10 fathoms over it, while between the two, as well as between the 
inner bank and the shore, the depths vary from 11 to 14 fathoms. 

Leading mark.—Cape Cormorant cliff, just open northward of 
the western shoulder of Round head, astern, bearing about 227°, 
leads inside the outer of these banks and up to the mark for entering 
Port au Port. | 

Port au Port is the extensive area southward of a line joining 
Long point with Bluff head, the latter being a conspicuous cliffy 
headland of the mainland, bearing 98°, distant 54 miles from the 
point. The southwestern part of this area is divided by a projection 
terminating northward in Shoal point, into East and West bays, 
both of which are extensive. 

The shores of this inlet are very sparsely populated, and the major 
portion of the inhabitants are settled on the southern shore of Kast 
bay and on Shoal point. 

The eastern shore has a few settlers, and Long Point tongue, be- 
sides a few permanent residents, is visited in summer by fishermen. 

Codfish are caught in large numbers about the bar and on the 
banks outside, and lobsters abound near Long point, as well as around 
the rocky coasts of Fox island and its vicinity. There are two fac- 
tories for tinning lobsters at the Gravels, at the head of East bay, 
and one at Fox island, while there are ruins of others at Long point 
and Broad cove. 

Several mineral deposits have been found in the neighborhood of 
Port au Port, and asbestos is being mined in the hills, eastward of 
Bluff head. 

Anchorages.—Excepting in Pic 4 Denis harbor at the head of 
West bay, where the depth is only sufficient for vessels of moderate 
size, Port au Port does not afford secure anchorage, although the 
bottom is generally mud. 

Southeasterly to northeasterly gales blow violently, even during 
summer, and although the eastern shores may at such times afford 
sheltered anchorages, the probability of the wind shifting to the 
southward and westward renders them insecure. 

West bay affords the best anchorage during southwesterly and 
northwesterly gales. (See p. 289.) 

In uncertain weather avoid anchoring on the southeastern side of 
Long Point tongue, eastward of the portage from Black Duck brook, 
for here southerly and easterly winds, which are very prevalent, throw 
up a short choppy sea, and the bottom, although mud, is soft, and is 
not so good holding ground as that farther southwestward. 


288 CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. 


Ice.—Port au Port generally freezes early in January and the ice 
breaks up toward the end of April; during the winters of 1884-1886 
the bay did not freeze, but this had not happened before for fifty 
years. Field ice never enters the port to a great extent, and under no 
conditions inside Fox island. 

The southeastern shore of Long Point tongue is higher than 
the seaward side, and is for the most part composed of cliffs, which in 
places reach a height of 114 feet, and rocky foreshore. 

At Beach point, southwestward 1} miles from Long point, a stony 
beach projects a little to the eastward, and incloses a shallow pond. 
Tn this locality there are a few huts as well as an old lobster factory. 
Farther southwestward are a few scattered cottages, and abreast 
Black Duck Brook village is a wooden tramway, on the face of the 
slope, for conveying goods to the road leading to the villages, as land- 
ing is frequently made here when the weather prevents communica- 
tion with the shore outside. It often happens, however, during 
southerly winds, that landing on the inner side is impracticable, 
owing to the sea on the rocky shore, and the absence of shelter for 
boats. 

Tidal stream.—Near the shore about Beach and Long points the 
ebb stream at springs sets strongly, sometimes at the rate of 2 knots 
an hour, northeastward, and turns westward across the bar, where it 
causes eddies and overfalls. Outside the bar this stream sets west- 
ward. 

French bank lies southeastward about 4+ mile from Long point; 
within the 5-fathom contour line it is nearly circular, and about 7% 
mile in diameter. The depths over it are generally from 4 to 5 fath- 
oms, but there are two small heads on which the least water is 22 feet. 
One of these is near the middle of the bank, and the other near the 
southern end. There is a good passage, carrying 9 fathoms water, 
between this bank and the shore to the westward. 

American bank is situated near the middle of the outer part of 
Port au Port, its northern end being separated from French bank by a 
channel 1,400 yards wide, with depths of 7 to 9 fathoms in it. 

Within the depth of 5 fathoms the bank is 3$ miles long in a north- 
erly and southerly direction and 14 miles wide at its widest part, 
which is nearly 2 miles from the southern end. The general depth on 
the bank is 2 to 5 fathoms, rock, stones, and sand bottom, but there are 
the following patches on it. 

A shallow patch, 1,400 yards long, north-northeast and south-south- 
west, with less than 6 feet water over it, lies 1 mile from the northern 
end of the bank, and on this patch are 3 large bowlders awash at 
low water; there are depths of 14 to 3 fathoms around the patch. 

Near the southern end of the bank there is a rocky head with 7 feet 
water over it and 2 fathoms around, and on the northwestern end of 


WEST BAY. 289 


the bank is a patch with 9 feet water over it. These shallow spots 
only break during heavy weather. 

There is a small rocky head, with 19 feet water over it, southward 
1,200 yards from the southern 5-fathom edge of American bank. 

Leading marks.—Road point, in line with the southwestern end 
of Fox island, bearing 164°, leads 600 yards eastward of French bank 
and about the same distance eastward of American bank; the left 
extreme of the high hills, on the southern side of the valley behind 
Bear head, just open westward of Shag island, bearing about 44°, 
leads between French and American banks and into West bay; the 
summit of Bear head in line with North rock (off Fox island), bearing 
97°, leads from westward of Fox island southeastward of American 
bank and of the detached shoal off its southern end. 

The shore from Black Duck landing trends southwestward in 
cliffs and broken rocky foreground, for 3? miles to Rocky point, a 
low bluff; and the whole of the southeastern side of Long Point 
tongue between Beach and Rocky points is fairly steep-to and may 
be approached to a distance of 200 yards, except a little southwest- 
ward of the landing place, where the bank extends off 600 yards to 
the depth of 5 fathoms, and a little northeastward of Rocky point, 
where a rocky head, with 2 fathoms water over it, lies 400 yards from 
the cliffs, and the bank, with less than 5 fathoms, reaches 900 yards 
offshore. 

West bay.—The shore from Rocky point, low and of sand and 
shingle, turns southward and southeastward for about 5 miles to 
South head of West bay, a rocky spur which divides the head of West 
bay into two parts. 

A few settlers reside on this shore, in which there are several small 
streams, the largest being Victor brook, 14 miles from Rocky point, 
and Harry brook, 24 miles from South head; both afford good fishing. 
Inland to the southwestward thick wooded hills rise in long sloping 
ridges to heights of 700 and 800 feet. 

With the exception of a small patch of 43 fathoms, lying westward 

7 miles from the northern extremity of Shoal point, West bay is 
clear and has a general depth of 7 to 9 fathoms, mud bottom. North- 
erly gales raise a heavy sea, especially during the ebb tidal stream. 

Anchorage.—The middle of West bay, westward of Shoal point, 
affords the best anchorage during southwesterly and northwesterly 
gales, for large vessels, in Port au Port, as the sea, although heavy, is 
not so short as in East bay, and the stiff mud bottom is fairly good 
holding ground. During easterly winds also anchor in the middle of 
the bay. West road, the western part of the bay, affords shelter in 
westerly winds. 


76846—09——_19 


290 CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. 


Head harbor or Pic 4 Denis (locally Picadilly), the bight on 
the eastern side of South head, is about 2 miles in extent to the south- 
ward and 14 miles wide. Its western shores are rocky, the wooded 
hills behind rising steeply to a long ridge extending southwestward 
toward Lower cove in St. George bay. The head of the bight is low, 
and flat land extends a little distance back toward the hills; the 
eastern shore is a low bank of peaty soil. At the head of the bight 
and on the western side there are two small streams. 

Flats of sand and mud extend for some distance off the shores of 
this harbor, and the depth in the middle is 34 to 44 fathoms. The 
harbor affords anchorage to vessels of moderate size, the holding 
ground is good, and the anchorage secure even during strong northerly 
winds. 

A settler’s dwelling house, storehouse, and stage are situated on the 
western shore at 1} miles southward of South head, and limited quan- 
tities of meat, butter, and milk may sometimes be procured. The flat 
land at the head of the bay is cultivated to some extent; a road leads 
to Abrahams cove, and a path to Ship cove, in St. George bay, across 
the neck, between the hills, which are here comparatively low. There 
is also a road to West bay. 

Tides and tidal streams.—lIt is high water, full and change, in 
Pic 4 Denis harbor at 10h. 20m.; springs rise 64 feet, neaps 4} feet; 
neaps range about 24 feet. There is considerable diurnal inequality 
in the height of the tides at Port au Port, consecutive high waters 
differing from 24 feet to 3 inches, and consecutive low waters from 2 
feet to 1 inch. 

The flood stream sets along the western side of Shoal point and 
directly into the harbor; the rates of both flood and ebb are sufficient 
to cause a heavy short sea when the wind is contrary. 

Shoal point is the northern end of a narrow, flat spur extending 
northward 4% miles from the range of hills of which Pierways hill is 
the summit. The height of this spur gradually decreases until at 
about 2 miles within the point it becomes a flat about 15 feet high, 
with straight peaty banks on either shore. The inner part is wooded, 
but the outer part for about 2 miles is covered with moss and coarse 
grass. <A little over + mile within the point the grass-covered bank 
ceases, and the northern portion is a low shelf of sand inclosing 
muddy spaces, into which the tide flows. 

Off the western side of the spur the shoal water shelves away grad- 
ually into 5 and 6 fathoms at about 4 mile distant, but off the eastern 
side it extends 1,400 yards to a mile, and northward of the point a 
large flat of sand, with several bowlders on it that dry, extends, 
within the 5-fathom line, about 24 miles. This flat, the greater part 
of which has less than 15 feet water over it, obstructs navigation 
between East and West bays, particularly in thick weather, as then 


EAST BAY—THE GRAVELS. 291 


the low land terminating in Shoal point is most difficult to make out, 
and the lead is the only guide. 

The summit of Round head in line with the first rise in the trees, 
just northward of Rocky point, bearing about 250°, leads northward 
of the northern end of the flat, but this mark leads close to the tail of 
American bank. <A better mark is a fiat-topped distant mountain in 
line with the low wooded bluff over Fox brook, bearing 89° (see page 
292); this is easily recognized except when the sun is on about the 
same bearing. 

From a depth of 5 fathoms, at the northeastern end of Shoal Point 
flat, bearing 45°, distant 24 miles from the point, a narrow ridge, with 
depths of 54 to 53 fathoms over it, extends north-northeastward, 
toward American bank for 14 miles. 

East bay extends about 64 miles to the southward, and is 54 miles 
wide; a considerable portion of it has depths of over 20 fathoms. 
The western shore of East bay from Shoal point trends southward 
for about 34 miles, in low peaty banks and a narrow sandy beach; 
thence it turns southeastward and after rising in slopes for about 14 
miles, becomes rocky and forms, just westward of the Gravels, three 
small deep coves. Behind the foreshore the land rises in more or less 
wooded slopes to the summit of the ridge extending eastward from 
Pierways hill. 

Boswarlis is a small settlement on the shore of East bay 34 miles 
westward of the Gravels; it has a few cottages and a schoolhouse. 
Limited supplies of such provisions as meat and butter may generally 
be obtained at the settlement during late summer and autumn. 

The Gravels is the locality of the narrow neck separating Port au 
Port from Isthmus bay (page 279); a small steam vessel, belonging 
to one of the lobster factories, almost daily communicates with the 
several fisheries around the shores of Port au Port. 

Anchorage.—The anchorage in East bay, off the Gravels, is by no 
means secure, although the bottom is mud, owing to the deep water 
running close to the shore, and the consequent heavy sea that sets in 
during strong northeasterly to northwesterly winds. 

The eastern shore of East bay trends north-northeastward 23 
miles from the Gravels to Black head, and is tolerably steep-to; the 
Jand behind rises to a conspicuous ridge or plateau, the summit of 
which is 1,210 feet high, terminating at its southern end in Table 
mountain. Northward this plateau rises to the height of 1,360 feet, 
before it gradually falls to Fox Brook valley. Its western face is 
bare, gray rock, which, in contrast with the dark trees on the lower 
slopes, makes it conspicuous. 

Two Guts barachois, situated 2-2, miles northward from Black 
head, is a shallow lagoon separated from East bay on its western side 


292 CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. 


by a narrow strip of sandy beach. At its southwestern end there is 
a small opening, but a bar off it dries at low water. 

There are a few settlers occupied in fishing and farming along the 
shore in the vicinity of the lagoon. 

East road, just southwestward of Two Guts barachois, is prob- 
ably the best anchorage on this side of the bay, during the strong 
northeasterly to southeasterly winds which so frequently blow here. 
The bottom is mud, and a vessel can anchor as convenient, but, should 
the wind haul to the southward, with a falling barometer, as it usually 
does, it would be prudent to shift into West bay. 

Road point is a long, rounded projection of the coast, 2? miles 
northward from the opening into Two Guts barachois. It is steep, 
red clay banks, 20 feet high, to seaward, and the land behind is cov- 
ered with coarse grass and clumps of dead trees. Comparatively 
level country, thickly wooded, reaches inland from Road point to 
the high stony plateau (see above), and is bounded on its northern 
side by Fox brook. 

From Road point the shore bank of less than 3 fathoms gradually 
increases its distance offshore to 1,200 yards, and closes in about 4 
mile northward of Fox brook. 

Anchorage.—There is indifferent anchorage northward of this 
bank, in 10 fathoms water, mud bottom, with the southern end of 
Fox island bearing 287°, distant 12; miles, but it is only safe during 
southerly and southeasterly winds and fine weather. 

Fox brook, the entrance to which les north-northeastward, 14 
miles from Road point, is the largest stream running into Port au 
Port, but although the water inside its mouth is deep enough for a 
ship’s boat, it is fronted by a-bar which dries 1 to 2 feet at low water. 
A small stream from the eastward flows into the sea through the 
same outlet. 

At a short distance inside its mouth the brook is obstructed by 
banks of sand and shingle, as well as by low marshy islets which ex- 
tend up for more than a mile; above these the stream turns eastward, 
flowing along the foot of a thickly wooded ridge. The western end 
of this ridge makes, from the westward, as a steep wooded bluff, and 
it is used as a leading mark. 

The shore from Fox brook trends northward for 3+ miles to Broad 
Cove point, which consists of low, rocky cliffs, fairly steep, and may 
be safely approached to the distance of 600 yards. 

Near the shore there are a few cottages, and the land behind rises, 
in thickly wooded slopes, to the considerable elevation of 1,770 feet, 
91 miles eastward from Broad Cove point. 

Two ladders for ascending from the beach to the top of the cliffs 
are situated at 1,%, miles and a little over 2 miles, respectively, north- 
ward of Fox brook entrance. 


BROAD COVE—WHITE ROOK. 293 


Broad cove, just eastward of Broad Cove point, is a small indenta- 
tion of the shore about 2 mile wide across its mouth. 

The cove is foul and rocky, and a ledge extends northward nearly 
400 yards from Board Cove point. 

At the southern side of this cove, near a small stream, there is a 
cluster of buildings, used at one time as a lobster factory, and now 
forming a mark for crossing the bar off Long point on a compass 
bearing. A path leads from this locality to the asbestos mines, a 
little behind Bluff head, the distance by it being about 14 miles. 

Bluff head, north-northeastward, 14 miles from Broad Cove point, 
is a very conspicuous headland, showing a perpendicular cliff to sea- 
ward, its summit attaining a height of 1,630 feet. From it, and 
from the higher summits eastward of it, the hills slope down, form- 
ing deep gullies and watercourses toward Broad cove. 

Fox island, situated 44 miles south-southeastward from Long 
point, is 1,200 yards long in a northerly and southerly direction, 600 
yards wide, and near the middle of its length, 145 feet high; the 
grassy slopes on its western side are in strong contrast to the dark 
clumps of spruce still standing about its summit. 

The coast at the southern end of the island is cliffy for about 500 
yards, and eastward of this a steep bank is fronted by a small shingle 
beach occupied by the buildings of a lobster factory; the coasts else- 
where are rocky with shelving ledges off the points, while two steep 
bluffs alternate with grassy slopes on the western side. ‘The south- 
eastern side of the island is steep-to at a short distance, and so is the 
southern outside a steep rock off the end, but Fox tail extends north- 
ward and northeastward from the island. 

Fox tail is the rocky shoal bank, which within a depth of 5 fathoms 
extends northward to a distance of 2 miles from Fox island, with a 
breadth near its outer part of 1 mile. 

Northeastward, 400 yards from the northeastern end of the island, 
there is a ledge, 300 yards in length, which covers at high-water 
springs; and north-northwestward 400 to 600 yards from the ledge 
are two small rocks awash at low water; around the northeastern of 
these the depths are 31 to 4 fathoms. 

White rock is the northern end of Fox tail. The least water over 
it is 7 feet at 1,3, to 14 miles from the island. From this shoalest 
part there are depths of less than 3 fathoms for 700 yards both north- 
ward and toward the island, leaving, between White rock and the 
rocks awash at low water, a channel 4 mile wide, and carrying 33 to 
4 fathoms of water. 

The western extreme of Bear head in line with the western end of 
Shag island, bearing 25°, leads eastward of Fox tail in not less than 
9 fathoms of water, and through the channel between Fox island and 
Road point. 


294 CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. 


North rock, near the edge of Fox tail, bearing 342°, distant 900 
yards from the northwestern point of Fox island, is small, detached, 
and 6 feet high. Bearing 272°, distant 800 yards from North rock, is 
a detached rock with 16 feet over it at low water and 8 to 10 fathoms 
around, which is in the fairway between American bank and Fox 
island. 

Anchorage.—There is fairly good anchorage at a little eastward 
of the beach on the southeastern side of Fox island, in 11 to 18 
fathoms of water, mud bottom; but it should not be used during 
strong southeasterly to southwesterly winds, as they cause a heavy 
sea, especially during the flood tidal stream. 

Tides and tidal streams.—It is high water, full and change, at 
Fox island at 10h. 15m.; springs rise 54 feet, neaps 3% feet; neaps 
range 2 feet. 

In the passage between Fox island and the mainland, the flood 
stream sets southward; the ebb northward and across Fox tail. 

Directions.—From the southward, to enter Port au Port in clear 
weather, pass about 14 miles northwestward of Black Duck brook 
village, and bring the tangent of cape Cormorant cliff just northward 
of the western shoulder of Round head, bearing 227°. Keep this 
mark on until Road point is in line with the southwestern end of Fox 
island, bears 164°, when either proceed on that mark, which leads 
into the entrance of port au Port, or steer direct to Broad cove. 

Small vessels may cross the bar, in about 6 fathoms of water, with 
the houses in Broad cove bearing 123°; or with the highest summit, 
immediately southeastward of Bluff head, in line with the low part 
of the southern slope of Bluff Head cliff, about 117°. 

For West bay, keep Road point in line with the southwestern end 
of Fox island until the left extreme of the hills, on the southern side 
of the valley behind Bear head, is just open northward of Shag 
island, bearing 43°, which mark leads between French and American 
banks into West bay. 

For the fishing station inside Long point, cross the bar as above 
directed; when the stony projection of Beach point opens, bearing 
218°, steer about 207°, giving the shore a berth of about 400 yards, 
and anchor as convenient, observing that the high cliff northward of 
Rocky point just open southward of Beach point, bearing 226°, leads 
northwestward of French bank, and that soundings of over 10 fath- 
oms indicate that the bank has been passed. 

For the Gravels, if of deep draft, from about a mile outside the 
bar with Road point in line with the southwestern end of Fox island, 
steer toward Broad cove until the western extreme of Bear head is in 
line with the western end of Shag island, bearing 25°. This mark 
leads eastward of Fox Island shoals and northwestward of the shoal 


BLUFF HEAD—ANCHORAGE. 295 


water off Road point; when the wooded bluff over Fox brook bears 
about 88°, steer (about 182°) direct to the anchorage. 

To pass between Fox island and American bank, a small vessel may 
take the channel eastward of the 16-foot patch off North rock by 
keeping Road point in line with the western end of Fox island, bear- 
ing 164°, until North rock is in line with Broad cove point, 68°; 
then turn to the southward until Fox island is passed, when steer 
direct to the Gravels anchorage. 

This channel is not suitable for a large vessel, as the tidal streams 
are strong at times, and the passage, with a depth of 5 fathoms, is 
only 300 yards wide. There is no good mark available for passing 
between the 16-foot patch and American bank; the chart is therefore 
the guide. | 

The coast from Bluff head (see p. 293) is cliffy and backed by 
high, rocky hills and deep gulhes, northward for about 2 miles to a 
rounded point, off which there 1s a conspicuous pinnacle rock 22 feet 
high. It is steep-to and may be safely approached to a distance of 
400 yards, but, with strong offshore winds, squalls of great violence 
prevail near Bluff head, and sailing vessels should then keep some dis- 
tance from the land. 

Immediately northeastward of Bluff head cliff, and on the face of 
the steep, wooded slope 4 mile inland, are the houses of the workmen 
employed in the asbestos and chrome mines in the vicinity. 

Anchorage—Buoy.—Temporary anchorage has been obtained off 
the northeastern end of Bluff head cliff in 8 fathoms, sand bottom. 
A large red buoy was moored here at about 400 yards offshore in 
1898, and vessels calling for the chrome produced at the mines made 
fast to it. 

The coast from abreast the pinnacle rock, 22 feet high, trends 
about northeastward for 14 miles to Lewis brook, where the cliffs 
cease; from Lewis brook it trends about north-northeastward for 3 
miles to Deadmans brook, and is a steep clay bank, averaging 70 feet 
in height, fronted by a stony beach. Deadmans brook is a small 
stream flowing from a deep gully in the cliffy ranges, which here run 
parallel to the shore at $ mile inland. Behind these the land rises, in 
bare and scrub-covered hills, to a height of 2,700 feet. 

The same coast features continue from Deadmans brook north- 
northeastward for 34 miles to Rope cove. Molly Ann cove is 14 miles 
from Deadmans brook; a small stream flows into the cove, and there 
are one or two huts, occupied by fishermen during summer. The coast 
northward of Lewis brook is fronted by a bank of sand, stones, and 
rocks, and depths of less than 3 fathoms extend to a distance of 400 
yards from the beach. 

Inland from Molly Ann cove the high range of hills turns abruptly 
eastward; near the angle thus formed, and eastward 14 miles from 


296 CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. 


the cove, is mount Barren, a conspicuous summit, 2,300 feet high, 
showing a bare perpendicular cliff to seaward. A detached summit, 
1,530 feet high, 4 mile northward of mount Barren, shows a conical 
peak from the westward, and is a useful mark. : 

Shag island, west-northwestward 14 miles from Deadmans brook, 
is 4 mile long in a northerly and southerly direction, 250 yards wide, 
and it rises, in broken cliffs, to the height of 180 feet. It is steep-to 
on its eastern side, and shoal water extends only a short distance off 
its western side, but its southwestern end should not be approached 
within 200 yards. The summit, covered with coarse grass, slopes 
toward the northern end of the island, on the eastern side of which 
there is a good landing place for boats. The channel between the 
island and the mainland is clear. 

Anchorage.—There is fair anchorage northward of the island in 
12 fathoms of water, during fine weather. 

Round reef.—The shoalest head of this rocky reef, over which 
there is a depth of 4 feet of water, bears 251°, distant 1,°, miles from 
the southwestern end of Shag island, and it breaks in heavy weather. 
From this head the reef, with depths of less than 5 fathoms, extends 
southwestward for 5°, mile, and northeastward for nearly $ mile, and 
it has a general width of 700 yards. 

Leading marks.—The conical peak, northward of mount Barren, 
in line with the northern end of Shag island, bearing 76°, leads north- 
ward of Round reef; and the snout of Bear head in line with the 
inner summit of Little Port head, bearing about 30°, leads eastward 
of the reef. . 

Shoals.—There is a small shoal, with 4% fathoms of water over it, 
and 5 to 6 fathoms around, bearing 216°, distant 14 miles from the 
shoalest head of Round reef. A small patch, with 5 fathoms of 
water over it, bears 5°, distant 1 mile from the shoalest head of Round 
reef; there are depths of 54 to 6 fathoms between it and the reef, and 
from the patch there are depths of 6 to 44 fathoms northwestward 
toward Long ledge, but between this shallow water and the ledge 
there is a channel about + mile wide with depths of 8 to 10 fathoms. 

Long ledge is a narrow ledge of rock, with depths of less than 5 
fathoms, extending northeastward 44 miles from its southwestern end, 
which bears 30°, 32 miles from Long point, the channel between hav- 
ing depths of 6 to 9 fathoms in it. The middle of the ledge hes 42 
miles off the main shore; 3} miles from Shag island; and 2 miles from — 
the shoalest head of Round reef. From its southwestern end the ledge 
is shoal for 241 miles. The middle part of the ledge, 14 miles in 
length, with an average breadth of less than 100 yards, dries at low 
water, and some small detached patches and bowlders on this are 3 
to 6 feet high. Northeastward of the dry part, the ledge is shoal for 
the distance of 4 mile. 


ROPE COVE—COAL RIVER. 297 


Although the breakers on Long ledge can generally be seen from 
some distance, at spring tides with very calm weather they may not 
be visible. 

Leading marks.—Mount Virgin, well open northward of Bear 
head, bearing 45°, leads northwestward of Long ledge in 11 to 13 
fathoms of water; the conical peak, northward of mount Barren, in 
line with the middle of Shag island, bearing 72°, leads southward of 
the southwestern end of the ledge in depths of 6 to 7 fathoms, but 
use caution with this mark as it leads on to the northeastern part of 
Round reef. Lark mountain summit in line with the tangents of 
the white cliffs, southward of Wild cove, bearing 36°, leads midway 
between Long ledge and Round reef. 

Anchorage.—Long ledge is fairly steep on its northeastern and 
southwestern sides, and during northwesterly winds, good anchorage 
may be obtained under its lee, in 8 to 10 fathoms of water. 

Rope cove, into which a stream flows, and where there are a few 
buildings used by fishermen during summer, has indifferent landing, 
although there is sometimes less swell at its head than on the adjoin- 
ing coast. There is a patch of stones and bowlders, on which the 
depth is 20 feet, at 1,3; miles southward of the cove and 800 yards off- 
shore. The snout of Bear head open westward of the land north- 
ward of Coal river, bearing 17°, leads westward of this patch. 

Coal river entrance is at the southern side of a bight and close 
to the Friar, a remarkable detached rock, 77 feet high, at 13 miles 
northward of Rope cove. The coast between is a narrow stony beach, 
backed by low cliffs, behind which there are extensive marshy barrens 
with numerous small ponds and occasional clumps of trees. 

On a sandy spit, projecting from the cliff on the northern side of 
the entrance, there are several houses, occupied by fishermen during 
summer. 

The river entrance has a bar, nearly dry at low water, but the 
stream inside is about 100 yards wide, with a deep channel running 
up to the first bend, 4 mile from the mouth. A quarter of a mile 
farther up, a small stream flows in from the northward, and here the 
bed of the river is obstructed by banks of gravel and stones. Turning 
eastward the stream gets narrower for about 14 miles, then it again 
becomes wider and deeper, and at 8 miles by its course from the en- 
trance it opens into a series of extensive ponds. The fishermen living 
at the entrance carry their small boats to the rapids, about 2 miles up, 
during freshets, and are thence able to reach the ponds at any time 
for hunting and fishing. 

Anchorage.—Shoal water of less than 5 fathoms extends 4 mile 
off the mouth of Coal river, and outside of that depth there is indif- 
ferent anchorage, but only during fine weather, for even with strong 
southeasterly winds there is usually a high ground swell, which 
becomes a heavy sea when the wind hauls to the westward. 


298 CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. 


The coast from Fish head, the northern entrance point of the 
bight of Coal river, northward to Bear head, a distance of 34 miles, 
is composed of cliffs, more or less broken, which become higher and 
steeper as the land rises behind; these cliffs are steep-to and may be 
approached closely in fine weather, but in stormy weather there is a 
very heavy sea in this locality. 

A bank about ? mile in length, with 8 fathoms water over it, les 
about 14 miles northwestward of Fish head; the depths between the 
land and the bank are 12 to 16 fathoms. 

At 14 miles northward of Fish head is the southern summit, 1,255 
feet high, of the range terminating in Bear head. Being fronted by 
a shelf of sloping ground terminating in low cliffs, its appearance is 
not very striking. 

Bear head is very conspicuous from the southward, whence it has 
the shape of a crouching animal; a projecting rock on its summit 
resembles the ears, and a perpendicular cliff partially detached from 
the shore underneath, an upturned snout. 

The summit is 1,210 feet high, falling in a perpendicular cliff. 
The land within the range slopes rapidly down to Coal river valley, 
in which there are several ponds. 

Eastward of this valley, broken, barren-looking hills rise to a con- 
siderable height, two rounded summits, lying southeastward from 
Bear head, being conspicuous from seaward. The northern tangent 
of these hills, bearing 84°, distant 3,8; miles from Bear head summit, 
forms with Shag island, a leading mark for Port au Port. 

Depths offshore.—The 20-fathom contour line passes northwest- 
ward of Long point, at a distance of about 3 miles, and continues 
approximately north-northeastward for about 11 miles, when it turns 
toward the southern summit of Bear head. The long narrow ridge, 
with 8 to 10 fathoms water over it, situated parallel to Long point 
and 13 miles westward of it, extends northeastward to abreast the dry 
portion of Long ledge. Outside, and north-northwestward of Long 
point, there is an extensive flat, with general depths of 21 to 25 
fathoms, and some irregular soundings of 18 to 20 fathoms over it; 
this flat reaches northwestward to a distance of about 13 miles from 
Long point. 

Bear cove is situated northeastward of Bear head; there are two 
yellowish rocky islets in it, which are scarcely seen against the low 
cliff of the same color, at the head of the cove. 

Mount Virgin, northeastward, distant 54 miles from Bear head, 
is 1,600 feet high, and its summit appears as a remarkable isolated 
column. 

Wild cove (Capelan bay), north-northeastward 53 miles from 
Bear head, is at the southern end of a projection a little over a mile 
in length and 816 feet high, the northern end of which is Vide Bou- 
teille cape; the beach of Wild cove is broken white coral. 


LITTLE PORT—BAY OF ISLANDS. 299 


Little port extends southeastward 600 yards on the northeastern 
side of Vide Bouteille cape; its width narrows to 100 yards in the 
entrance, and expands to 200 yards at the head. It is frequented by 
fishing vessels, that moor head and stern, until about June 20, when 
they leave to follow the codfish that disappear about that time from 
these waters. 

Little port affords anchorage for small vessels in 24 fathoms 
water, sand and mud bottom, but winds from southeastward to south- 
westward are accompanied by violent squalls, and northerly winds 
bring a sea into the harbor; the entrance is, therefore, always danger- 
ous for boats, and in spring and autumn for vessels. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, at Little port at 
10h. 42m.; springs rise 54 feet. 

Woody bay, east-northeastward, 1,600 yards from Vide Bouteille 
cape, 1s a circular basin, about 400 yards in diameter, and only suit- 
able for boats, but considerable difficulty is experienced in entering 
with westerly winds. 

Miranda cove, northward 300 yards from Woody bay, is a small 
boat creek with a fishing establishment. 

The coast from Miranda cove trends northward for about 1,200 
yards, and then northeastward for 1,4, miles to South head of the Bay 
of Islands. 

Devil head, north-northeastward, 14 miles from Vide Bouteille 
cape, is 815 feet high and rises in black perpendicular cliffs, but the 
inshore slope of the headland is covered with grass, which shows in 
contrast to the dark cliffs. 

Lark mountain, southeastward, 1,700 yards from Devil head, is 
1,583 feet high, and the summit of the promontory northward of 
Lark harbor. 

South head is bold-to and rises in steep black cliffs; there are 
several pinnacles of light-colored rock at its base; the Monkey, the 
highest of these, is 110 feet high. 

Bay of Islands.—This extensive inlet is very picturesque, on 
account of the high hills surrounding it, the steep high islands within, 
and the deep arms which trend from it. 

Communication.—The Newfoundland railway skirts the south- 
eastern part of the southern shore of Humber arm above Pleasant 
cove and at Birchy cove it connects with the weekly coasting steamer 
(see p. 37). A steamer from Halifax calls monthly at some of the 
ports in the Bay of Islands. 

Ice.—The arms in the Bay of Islands generally freeze between 
December 20 and January 20, and the ice breaks up suddenly between 
April 20 and May 10; field ice clears away early or late in May, ac- 
cording to the season. For tidal streams see page 314. 


300 CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. 


Fishing nets.—During autumn large numbers of herring nets are 
laid in the arms of the Bay of Islands and around Woods island. 
They are always laid parallel to the shore and usually in the depth 
of 18 feet. The fishery continued till the middle of January in 1907. 

Guernsey (or Weebald island), the southwestern island of the 
group lying in the entrance to the Bay of Islands, situated 1,% miles 
northward of South head, is a little over a mile long, in a north- 
northwesterly and south-southeasterly direction, 1,400 yards wide, 
and 1,053 feet high; it is almost barren, but there are a few trees near 
its southern end, where is the best landing place in ordinary weather. 

Tweed island (or French Island), separated from Guernsey island, 
lying to the northeastward, by a passage 3 mile wide, is 1,45 miles 
long east and west, 3% mile in greatest width, with a bare summit, 702 
feet high, falling in black perpendicular cliffs on the northwestern 
and northeastern coasts. 

A round rock, 2 feet high, les close to the southwestern point of 
Tweed island, and a rock that uncovers 4 feet, lies southwestward 
nearly 200 yards from the round rock. 

The passage between Guernsey and Tweed island is otherwise clear 
to within 200 yards from the northern end of Guernsey. 

During summer temporary fishermen’s huts are erected on the east- 
ern coast. 

Temporary anchorage may be obtained off the cove between Grassy 
and Little Grassy islets, on the northeastern side of Tweed island, in 
9 to 12 fathoms water, and also off the cove on the northern side 
in 8 to 11 fathoms, but westerly winds quickly cause a heavy sea. 

Hen island, situated 800 yards northward from the northwestern 
end of Tweed island, is about 400 yards in length, covered with grass, 
and rises in a round hummock to the height of 222 feet. 

A rock, with 4 feet of water over it, bears 105°, distant 900 yards 
from the southern point of Hen island. 

Green island, or Woody island, northeastward 700 yards from 
Hen island, is 1,100 yards long, in an easterly and westerly direc- 
tion, 900 yards in greatest width, and it rises to a round hill 415 feet 
high, with the summit covered with moss; there is a small cove on the 
southwestern side of this island, in which are several rocks. 

Saddle island (formerly Shag rocks), northward } mile from 
Green island, is a narrow island, rather more than 600 yards long, 
in a north-northeasterly and south-southwesterly direction, and di- 
vided into two rocky parts, connected by a narrow ridge; the southern 
part, 170 feet high, is round and covered with grass and a few stunted 
trees, while the northern is 163 feet high, bare and rugged, with a 
square pillar 150 feet high on its northern side, which is prominent 
on easterly or westerly bearings. 


\ 


GREGORY ISLAND—SHAG ROCKS. 301 


Gregory island, north-northeastward, nearly 2 miles from Saddle 
island, is about 600 yards long in a curve and 245 feet high. 

A pinnacle rock, 52 feet high, lies southwestward 150 yards from 
Gregory island, and is nearly joined to it by reefs at low water; 
close southwestward of this pinnacle is a small round islet, and the 
channel between it and the shoal water extending 200 yards north- 
ward from Saddle island is clear. 

Brandies rocks, a shoal 250 yards in diameter, the middle of 
which bears 29°, distant 1,400 yards from the eastern end of Gregory 
island, show by breakers with a slight swell; the eastern rock un- 
covers 2 feet at low water. The northern end of Saddle island, open 
westward of Gregory island, bearing 203°, leads westward; and 
Little Shag rock in line with the middle of Lark harbor entrance, 
bearing 194°, leads eastward of the rocks. 

Pearl island (or Big island), eastward 1 mile from Tweed island, 
is 13 miles long, in an easterly and westerly direction, with a greatest 
breadth of 14 miles, and it is 845 feet high. Four curious pillars (the 
highest of which is 597 feet high) stand on its eastern side, on the 
northern part of a deep valley which separates them from the hill 
in the southeastern part of the island. Shivery point, the northern 
end of the island, has a rock with 5 feet water over it, bearing 83°, 
distant 200 yards from it. 

Big Island cove is on the northeastern side of the island at about 
4 mile from Shivery point, and there are small shingle beaches at its 
head, on which fishermen’s huts are erected in summer. The water 
is deep, except close to the shore, so only small vessels can anchor off 
the cove. 

Cloué patches.—The soundings are irregular for 1,200 yards west- 
ward of that part of the western coast of Pearl island which extends 
about a mile southward from Shivery point, and are in places less 
than 10 fathoms. A rock, with 4 feet of water over it, lies on this 
bank, bearing 234°, 1,600 yards from Shivery point. The southeastern 
end of Guernsey in line with the summit of Little Shag rock, bearing 
220°, leads northwestward; and the summit of Blow-me-down, open 
westward of Pearl island, bearing 177°, leads westward of this rock. 
A rock, with 7 feet of water over it, bears 77°, distant 265 yards from 
the 4-foot rock, and there is a 3-fathom patch between the 7-foot rock 
and the island. 

A bank, with 54 fathoms water over its southern part, bears 251°, 
distant 1,700 yards from Shivery point. 

Shag rocks consist of two groups; the northern group is a round 
islet 20 feet high, bearing 125°, distant $ mile from the southeastern 
end of Pearl island, with low rocks extending westward 100 yards, 
and southeastward 300 yards from it. The southern group is a flat, 


802): CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. 


bare islet, 19 feet high, bearing 156°, distant 800 yards from the high- 
est of the northern group, with low reefs extending northwestward 
200 yards, and eastward 700 yards from it. 

The shore of the Bay of Islands from South head trends about 
southeastward for # mile to White point, and thence southward 
for 1,8; miles to the entrance of Lark harbor. 

ae harbor lies between the peninsula of which Lark iowa 
is the summit and a peninsula 14 miles long, the summit of which, 
mount Tortoise, is a round hill 787 feet high, and thickly wenden 
The harbor stretches southwestward 14 miles with a slight bend to 
the westward and is 700 yards wide; there are several houses and 
piers on the northern shore. Low point is on the northern shore at 
1 mile within the entrance, and a spit of shingle, which dries in 
places, extends southward about 450 yards from it. Low island, 
on this spit, is small and covers at high water springs; shoal water 
extends about 250 vards from the northern shore at 600 yards east- 
ward of Low island. 

A church, with a steeple, stands on Low point, and is noticeable 
among the fishermen’s huts and sheds. 

Rocky point is on the southeastern shore of the harbor at 1,600 
yards within Tortoise point, the southern entrance point. There is 
a whaling establishment at Lark harbor, with a slipway for hauling 
up the whales, and a pier alongside of which the steam whalers go. 

Anchorage can be obtained in 13 fathoms of water, mud bottom, 
northward about 265 yards from Rocky point; or farther southwest- 
ward in 64 fathoms, mud, with excellent holding ground; easterly 
winds bring a little sea into this anchorage; and heavy squalls sweep 
down Lark mountain with south and southwesterly winds, so that 
South head should not be approached closely. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and Nan in Lark harbor at ap- 
proximately 10h.; springs rise 6 feet, neaps 5 feet. 

York harbor lies southward of mount Tortoise, and between it 
and the foot of Blow-me-down, a conspicuous mountain 2,125 feet 
high. A valuable copper mine on the slopes of Blow-me-down 
mountain is being worked, and about 250 men were employed there 
in 1903. 

Governor island is situated nearly in the middle of York harbor, 
and is 14 miles long in an easterly and westerly direction, with a 
general breadth of 4 mile. 

The coasts of the island are wooded; inland there is a large marsh 
with a lake and some ponds, and a few tufts of trees rise above this 
marsh, the highest being 95 feet above high water. 

Sword point is the northwestern end of the island, and a sand spit 
extends northwestward 300 yards from it; shoal water entends } mile 
off the southwestern end of the island. 


SEAL ISLAND—FRENCHMAN COVE. 303 


Seal island, 4+ mile eastward of Governor island, to which it is 
nearly joined by shoal water, is 900 yards long in an easterly and 
westerly direction, about 200 yards wide, and 75 feet high; rocks 
awash at low water extend eastward 200 yards from the island. 

Anchorage.—There is sheltered anchorage, in 6 to 11 fathoms 
of water, between the southwestern end of Governor island and the- 
mainland, but heavy squalls come from Blow-me-down with south- 
erly winds. 

Pier.—A pier, about 90 yards long and 16 feet broad, extends from 
the southern shore of York harbor southward of the eastern end of 
Governor island. There is a depth of 3 to 54 fathoms of water at its 
outer end, which is 175 feet long, and steamers of about 3,000 tons 
and drawing 16 feet of water go alongside it to load with copper ore 
brought from the mine by a tramroad. 

A shoal with 6 feet of water over it extends eastward from the east- 
ern end of the pier. 

~Water.—Fresh water can be obtained from a pipe at the pier end 
at the rate of 2 tons an hour. 

Blow-me-down, 2,125 feet high, falls almost perpendicularly 
from the summit, and then in a steep wooded slope from the base of 
the cliffs to the sea. The rangs trends southeastward in a line of 
cliffs, and long slopes, covered with shingle or scrubby wood, descend 
from them to the deep valley, down which flows Bear Deadfall brook, 
a considerable stream. 

The shore from a point northward of Blow-me-down trends about 
eastward 43 miles to Lower Frenchman head. 

A small yellow rock, 6 feet high, lies 150 yards from the shore at 
800 yards westward of the mouth of Bear Deadfall brook, which is 
situated eastward 2 miles from the point northward of Blow-me- 
down. 

Temporary anchorage can be obtained at + mile northward of 
Bear Deadfall brook in 9 fathoms of water. 

Frenchman cove, situated immediately westward of Lower 
Frenchman head, is bold-to on its western shore, but from the mouth 
of the brook at the head to Lower Frenchman head a sand bank and 
bowlders line the shore, extending nearly 150 yards from the high 
water line; a small settlement with a few gardens is situated here. 
There is anchorage in 11 to 13 fathoms of water, mud bottom, off the 
eastern side of the bank of shingle at the head. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Frenchman cove at 
10h. 0m.; springs rise 6 feet, neaps 5 feet; neaps range 34 feet. 

Lower Frenchman head, or Spurn point, the western entrance 
point to Humber arm, rises to an earth cliff 45 feet high; a reef 
extends 65 yards northward from its high water line, and then falls 
quickly to deep water. 


304 CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. 


Light.—A square pyramidal lighthouse, about 30 feet high and 
painted red and white in horizontal bands, on Lower Frenchman 
head, exhibits at 160 feet above high water a fixed white light, during 
the season of navigation. 

Humber arm, extending southeastward 6 miles, and thence about 
eastward 7 miles, has, with a few exceptions, bold shores and deep 
water; it affords good anchorage in a few places only. Strong winds 
usually blow up or down the arm. 

The shores generally rise steeply to wooded hills, on the sides of 
which are houses and cultivated fields, the soil being rich. 

Bay of Islands village is a scattered hamlet extending along the 
southern shore of Humber arm for several miles. 

It is a progressive place, possessing a branch of the Bank of Mon- 
treal, a fine copper mine a few miles off, slate quarries, and fishing 
establishments for curing cod; it also has churches of all denomina- 
tions. 

Bay of Islands station of the Newfoundland railway is about a 
mile above Corner brook. 

A T-shaped railway wharf is situated at the extremity of the point 
opposite the railway station. Coasting steamers berth alongside the 
end. 

Ice.—Humber arm freezes about December 26, and is usually com- 
pletely closed by ice 14 to 3 feet in thickness from January to April, 
both inclusive. The early freezing which closed these waters to nav- 
igation as early as December 15, 1906, was unusual. Field ice appears 
about January 1 and disappears about April 15. 

The first vessel generally arrives about May 12 and the last leaves 
about January 1. 

Frenchman head, southeastward, 700 yards from Bowes French- 
man head, rises in a steep cliff to the height of 220 feet. 

The shore from Frenchman head trends south-southeastward 34 
miles to Benoit cove. Nearly midway and close to the shore is a 
church with a little tower, and at Johns beach, + mile southward of 
the church, is a small settlement. 

Benoit cove, a bend in the shore fronting a deep valley that is 
drained by a considerable stream, has a moderate sized settlement 
around it, with a large storehouse in its eastern part, and at its head 
is a wooden church with a small spire; shoal water extends for about 
400 yards off the mouth of the stream. Fox point is the southeastern 
point of the cove. 

Anchorage can be obtained at 200 yards distant from the shore be- 
tween the large storehouse and Fox point, in 10 to 17 fathoms water. 

The shore from Fox point trends southeastward for 1 mile to 
Halfway point. 


PLEASANT COVE—BIRCHY COVE. 305 


The best anchorage in Humber arm is off the shore between Fox 
and Halfway points, there being depths of 10 fathoms at 400 yards 
and of 20 fathoms at 600 yards from the shore. 

A reef extends 300 yards from the shore at 1,300 yards southeast- 
ward of Fox point. The house on the western side of Cook cove, 
open eastward of Halfway point, bearing 142°, leads eastward of this 
reef. 

Pleasant cove, east-southeastward 34 miles from Halfway point, 
and separated from Bannatyne cove, westward of it, by a bluff point, 
is 400 yards wide and 200 yards deep; a shoal extends 100 yards off 
its head. The magistrate’s house, a large two-storied building, stands 
on a rise southward of the cove, southwestward of a bare mound 150 
feet high, on the summit of which is a large bowlder. 

A wharf, at which the local mail steamer discharges her cargo, 
projects northward from the eastern entrance point; and a rock and 
shoal water extend 150 yards from the shore eastward of this wharf. 

Anchorage for small vessels can be obtained off Bannatyne and 
Pleasant coves, the depth of 10 fathoms being distant a little more 
than 200 yards from the shore. 

Communication.—The telegraph office in connection with the 
Anglo-American Company is in the courthouse, a white wooden 
building on the summit of the slope southward of the magistrate’s 
house. 

Birchy cove is situated at about 14 miles eastward of Pleasant 
cove; on its shores are an Episcopal church, a white building, with 
a small spire; the parsonage, a large two-storied house with a clock 
in the gable end facing the river; and a Roman Catholic church, 
which is white, with two spires. Shoal water extends but a short 
distance from the shore of this cove. 

Anchor off Birchy cove as convenient, there being depths of 10 
fathoms at about 200 yards from the shore. The best position ap- 
pears to be about midway between the two piers and 200 yards off 
shore, in 10 to 12 fathoms of water, mud bottom, where a vessel of 
moderate size can lie with about 40 fathoms of cable out. For any 
stay, and also late in the year, it is advisable to moor. 

Piers.—The western pier in Birchy cove has a depth of 16 feet 
water at its outer end, which is 60 feet long, and the small coasting 
steamers go alongside it. There are some other piers in the cove. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Birchy cove at 10h. 
96m.; springs rise 5 feet, neaps 3} feet; neaps range 2} feet. The 
water level is influenced by the state of Humber river. 

Coal.—In 1905 there was a small stock of government coal (some 
200 tons) stored in a shed on the western pier. A vessel of 12 feet 
draft could coal alongside the pier; there are no coal lighters. 

76846—09 20 


306 ‘ CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. 


Communication.—The Newfoundland railway passes about 120 
yards from the shore of Birchy cove. 

There are a railway station and a post and telegraph office at 
Birchy cove. The mail trains which run three times a week between 
St. Johns and port Basque stop here. . 

Supplies.—Meat, good except early in spring; vegetables, scarce in 
spring; bread, good; and water, fairly good, can be obtained in 
Birchy cove. The bakery is at Meer point. 

‘Soundings of about 8 to 10 fathoms have been reported at about 
400 yards from the shore between the church at Birchy cove and de 
Grouchy point, a distance of rather more than a mile. 

Corner brook, situated eastward 14 miles from Birchy cove, is 
shoal to the line of de Grouchy point, the western entrance point, and 
the wharf, that projects about 400 yards from the sawmill at the 
mouth of the brook. There is a depth of 15 feet alongside the outer 
end of the wharf, whence the water deepens rapidly to 5 fathoms. A 
considerable settlement stands near the sawmill. 

Humber river bar, a shallow flat, with two rocks, awash at low 
water, situated close together near its northwestern edge, extends ? 
mile from the head of Humber arm and falls suddenly to deep water. 
Caution is therefore required in approaching it. 

Three streams flow into the head of Humber arm; Humber river, 
the southern and the second largest river in Newfoundland, flows, 
from Deer pond, and is navigable for boats when the stream is not 
too strong. Large rafts of timber are floated down this stream from 
the country about Grand pond. 

Wild cove is about 4 mile northward of Humber river entrance, a 
projection separating them. The hills between the river and cove 
are flat-topped, and in terraces, attaining at a distance of 1 mile east- 
ward of the end of the projection, a height of 1,150 feet, the rock on 
the western face showing a deep blue color in ordinary weather. The 
northern point of Wild cove is earth cliffs about 50 feet high, front- 
ing a tableland, of good soil, which extends to the base of the hills. 

Between Wild cove and the mouth of Hughes brook, at about 1,200 
yards northwestward, the land rises to a wedge-shaped wooded hill. 
942 feet high, falling steeply eastward, with a wooded mound 150 
feet high southward of it. 

Anchorage.—Good anchorage has been obtained in 9 fathoms of 
water, stiff mud bottom, with the mouth of Hughes brook bearing 
38°, and the northern shore of Wild cove 105°. At 200 vards east- 
ward of this position the depth is 5 fathoms, while at the same dis- 
tance westward it is 12 fathoms. The streams setting out of Humber 
river and Hughes brook kept a vessel here broadside on to a fresh 
westerly breeze. 


TUCKER HEAD—MACIVER COVE. 307 


' Tucker head, a mound 131 feet high, is situated on the northern 
shore about a mile westward from the mouth of Hughes brook. 

Irishtown is a conspicuous white house, with a few smaller build- 
ings, situated on the shore of a small cove westward about 600 yards 
from Tucker head. Inner Aspen, point, the western point of this 
cove, has a conspicuous single aspen tree on it. Rood point is about 
3; mile westward of Inner Aspen point. 

Petitpas cove, situated between Rood point and Petitpas point, 
distant # mile to the westward, has a considerable settlement and a 
white church with a spire on its shores; there is also a sawmill and 
several wharves. The whole place seemed almost deserted in 1905. 

Anchorage.—Shoal water extends but a short distance from the 
shore, and anchorage can be obtained in Petitpas cove, in 13 to 19 
fathoms water, sand and mud bottom, depths of 20 fathoms being 
distant + mile from the shore; the holding ground is very good. 

Davis cove, immediately westward of Petitpas cove, affords no 
anchorage; there is a waterfall above the mouth of the brook flowing 
into the cove. 

Meer point, westward, 2 miles from Davis cove, is low and fiat, 
rising gently to a hill 200 feet high, close to the shore northwestward 
of it; between Davis cove and the point are a series of small coves. 

A rock, that dries 14 feet at low water, lies about 100 yards from the 
shore midway between Davis cove and Meer point. 

Guilem cove.—The shore from Meer point trends north-north- 
westward 14 miles to Kelp Cove point, and Guilem cove lies between 
Kelp Cove point and a point 1,300 yards farther northward. A deep 
valley extends inland from the cove, and is drained by a stream, off 
the mouth of which a shoal extends 350 yards. 

Anchorage can be obtained in 12 fathoms of water, with the ex- 
treme of the land southward of Kelp Cove point, bearing 158°, and 
the mouth of the brook 38°, distant 300 yards from the shore, the 
depths decreasing gradually eastward and southward of this position. 

The shore from the northern point of Guilem cove trends north- 
westward for 2 miles, and thence northward for ;2, mile to Big head. 

Big head, the northern point of Skeleton cove, is a steep cliff rising 
to a dark wooded conical hill 488 feet high. Rattler brook flows 
into the arm in a conspicuous waterfall, at 600 yards northward of 
Big head. 

Maciver cove is situated north-northwestward 1,400 yards from 
Rattler brook, and Maciver island, a bare rock, 15 feet high, near 
the southern end of the cove, is joined to the mainland by a shoal. 

Maciver point, the eastern entrance point to Humber arm, hes 
about 4 mile west-northwestward of Maciver cove. 


308 CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. 


Anchorage can be obtained between Maciver island and Rattler 
brook, there being depths of 10 fathoms at 400 yards, and of 20 
fathoms at 600 yards from the shore. 

Woods or Harbor island.—Shoal point, the southeastern end of 
Woods island, lies west-northwestward 1,4, miles from Maciver point, 
and about northward 1% miles from Lower Frenchman point, and 
the island extends northwestward, 3 miles from Shoal point, with 
an average width of 1 mile. It is wooded throughout, and attains, 
at about its middle, a height of 195 feet, and there is a small range 
of hills, 245 feet high, near its northwestern end. 

A small settlement, with a considerable space of cultivated ground 
attached to it, is situated near Shoal point, and there are several 
houses on the southeastern and southern coasts. 

A shoal, composed of rock covered in places with sand, with 1 to 
6 feet water over it, extends southeastward 550 yards from Shoal 
point, and then the water deepens to 6 fathoms. This shoal is said 
to be extending and a wide berth should be given to the point. 

Woods harbor, the entrance of which is on the western side of the 
island northwestward, 2;% miles from Shoal point, is an inlet, 400 
vards wide, extending northeastward 600 yards and thence eastward 
4 mile. 

A reef, that uncovers at low water, extends 100 yards from the 
southern entrance point, and narrows the passage, with 12 feet of 
water, to a breadth of 95 yards. 

Enter with a grassy point, in the middle of the northeastern shore 
of the harbor, just open northward of a small round rock lying off 
the first point on the southern shore within the entrance, bearing 
49°, and when within the entrance points, close the northern shore, 
to clear a rock with 6 feet of water over it, situated westward nearly 
100 yards from the small round rock described above. 

When the points on the southwestern shore of the inner bend are 
open, bearing about 122°, turn southeastward, and anchor in 34 fath- 
oms of water, mud bottom. 

Puffin islands are two islands lying within 1,200 yards northwest- 
ward of the northwestern point of Woods island; the southeast- 
ern island has a group of trees on each of its two mounds, which are 
91 feet high; the northwestern island is 70 feet high. 

The passage between the southeastern island and the northwestern 
point of Woods island is a few yards wide, with a rock that uncovers 
lying in the middle; it is only suitable for boats. 

Vesuvius rock, with 14 feet of water over it, is near the north- 
western end of a ledge extending north-northwestward, 900 yards 
from the northwestern Puffin island. The western fall of Blow-me- 
down range, open westward of Seal island, bearing 220°, leads close 


OUTER SHAG ROCK-——GOOSE ARM. 309 


northwestward; and Woman point, the apparent northeastern ex- 
treme of Middle arm, open northward of Black head, the apparent 
southern extreme of that arm, bearing 87°, leads northward. 

Outer Shag rock, eastward, distant } mile from the northern 
Puffin island, is a round dark islet 18 feet high, with foul ground 
extending about west-northwestward, 350 yards from it. 

The passage between Outer Shag rock and Woods island has sev- 
eral rocks in it, and must not be attempted. 

The shore of the bay from Maciver point trends about northward 
3,8, miles to Middle Arm point, and the channel between it and 
Woods island, which is nearly a mile wide, is clear, giving a sufficient 
berth to the shoals extending off the island. 

Middle Arm point slopes from a long wooded ridge, and falls in 
small cliffs; there is deep water close to it; a small bight, in which are 
a pinnacle rock and a waterfall, lies immediately southward of the 
point. Black head bears east-northeastward, distant } mile from 
Middle Arm point. 

Middle arm (formerly South arm) is nearly 1 mile wide at its 
entrance within Black and Northern heads; from the entrance it 
extends with a greatest breadth of 14 miles for 54 miles in an easterly 
direction to Penguin head, and there separates into two branches, 
Goose arm and Penguin arm. 

Jennings cove, east-southeastward 13 miles from Black head, is 
800 yards deep, but its shores are foul generally for 200 yards from 
the high-water line. A few houses are situated on the shore of the 
cove, which is much resorted to for bait by the men fishing off the 
mouth of the bay. 

Anchorage can be obtained, in depths of 10 to 14 fathoms water, 
in the middle of the cove, but at 200 yards from the head the depth 
decreases rapidly from 6 to 3 fathoms. The cove is frequented by 
schooners. 

Cox cove (French cove) is separated from Jennings cove by Cox 
point, and it affords temporary anchorage in 16 fathoms of water, 
but a considerable sea sets in during strong easterly winds; there are 
a few houses on the beach. 

Parkes cove, southeastward 14 miles from Cox point, affords 
anchorage, there being a depth of 20 fathoms of water at 800 yards 
from the shore, which gradually decreases to the shoal water extend- 
ing from the beach. 

Water can be obtained from two streams which flow into the cove. 

Long point, the western entrance point to Goose arm, situated 
northeastward, 2,2, miles from Parkes cove, is the low termination of 
a densely wooded round hill, 960 feet high, and bold-to. 

Goose arm, extending east-southeastward 2? miles, and thence 
northeastward for 44 miles, is a little more than $ mile wide in its 


310 CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. 


western part; the width decreases to 200 yards at the Narrows, but 
expands northeastward of the Narrows to 600 yards; the shallow 
basin at the head is 2? mile wide. 

There are two conspicuous landslips in the red earth cliff on the 
shore of a cove at the bend of the southern side of Goose arm. 

A shoal bank extends from the landslips, increasing gradually to 
4 mile in breadth off the entrance to Big Barasway. 

Several large streams flow into the head of Goose arm, but boats 
can not approach their mouths until half flood. - 
Raglan head is a gray cliff, 1,080 feet high, rising almost perpen- 
dicularly from the water on the western side, and in slopes from Big 

Barasway to the southward. 

The Narrows, between Raglan head on the eastern side and the 
end of the smooth slope of a peaked hill 611 feet high, on the north- 
western side, are rather more than 200 yards wide, but banks extend- 
ing from both shores reduce the navigable breadth to 100 yards; the 
bank from Raglan head falls suddenly to the channel, in which there 
is a least depth of 44 fathoms. 

The summit of the Sugarloaf, 828 feet high (over the head of 
Goose arm), in line with the northern ends of William Wheeler 
point and Raglan head, bearing 50°, leads between the shoals on 
either side until the landslip in the cove southwestward of Big Bara- 
sway entrance is in line with the bowlders on the western side of 
Raglan head, bearing 202°; then steer for the middle of the arm. -A 
house stands on the northern side of the Narrows. 

Penguin cove, on the northern side of Goose arm, eastward of 
Penguin head, its eastern entrance point, is clear of shoals. 

Anchorage can be obtained in 14 fathoms water at 300 yards from 
the head of this cove, but the holding ground is not good. 

Penguin head, dividing Goose and Penguin arms, is the western 
end of a flat-topped, isolated, and bare gray hill 1,020 feet high, on 
which are a few trees; it is bold-to. 

Penguin arm (formerly Penman arm) extends from Penguin 
head northeastward 14 miles, and thence east-northeastward nearly 2 
miles; the water in it is deep, and it is clear of shoals. There is no 
secure anchorage for large vessels in this arm, though schooners 
seeking bait anchor in the bends of the shore. 

The north shore of Middle arm rises generally in gray cliffs 
fronting densely wooded hills, and there is deep water at a few yards 
off it. 

Old Woman head, a mountain 1,020 feet high, in the peninsula 
separating Middle and North arms, and about midway between them, 
falls in a steep cliff to the southward, and sharply to the northward; 
it shows well over the lower ranges. 


SEAL COVE—-NORTH ARM COVE. 311 


Seal cove, on the northern shore of Middle arm, at 14 miles within 
Northern head, is an indentation extending 400 yards to the north- 
ward, but affords no shelter, as shoal water extends 250 yards from 
its head. 

Northern head of Middle arm rises in a steep cliff about 300 feet 
high, and is streaked with curiously thin stripes of quartz following 
the stratification, which is much contorted. The shore from the head 
curves northward round a small cove, into which a streamlet flows, 
and the stripes of quartz show as far as North Arm point, a distance 
of 14 miles. This shore is foul for 350 yards off it. 

Eagle island, westward, 14 miles from Northern head, is 600 
yards long in a northerly and southerly direction, and 112 feet high. 
The western side is composed of steep cliffs, striped vertically with 
red and gray rock, and near its northern end is a conspicuous mass of 
sandstone, projecting from the rock forming the body of the island; 
the eastern coast rises steeply in a grassy sward from a shingle beach. 

Low rocks and shoals extend 200 yards from the northern and 
southern ends of the island. 

Fisherman rock lies in the channel between the mainland and 
Eagle island, with North Arm point bearing 21°, distant nearly 1,400 
yards, and has 2 feet of water over it. 

A shoal, with 17 feet of water over it, les nearly in mid-channel 
between Eagle island and the mainland, with the northern end of 
Eagle island bearing 277°, distant $ mile. 

Seal head, open southward of a cliff southeastward of Northern 
head, bearing 119°, leads southward; and the cliff at Stowbridge 
head, open westward of North Arm point, bearing 32°, leads north- 
westward of Fisherman rock and the shoal. 

Cox point, just open of Northern head, bearing 142°, leads between 
the 17-foot shoal and Fisherman rock. 

North arm entrance is between North Arm point and Stowbridge 
head, which bear north-northeasterly and south-southwesterly, distant 
nearly 2 miles from each other, and the arm extends eastward 34 
miles, and then northeastward 4 miles. 

North Arm cove lies east-southeastward 4 mile from North Arm 
point, and there is a beach of shingle at its head. 

Anchorage in the cove is not good, but small vessels anchor for a 
short stay, in 14 fathoms water, off the middle of the cove, the water 
shoaling quickly thence to the beach. 

An open cove is situated on the southern side of North arm, 44 
miles eastward from North Arm point; a rocky bank, with 6 fathoms 

rater over it, lies at its entrance and distant 400 yards from the north- 
ern shore; and a shoal, with depths of 5 to 7 fathoms water over it, 
extends from the southern shore at + mile from the head. 


312 CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. 


Harbor cove, northward of the preceding cove and separated 
from it by a promontory, 515 feet high, is 3 mile in extent and about 
300 yards wide; a shoal, with 2 fathoms water over it, extends south- 
westward nearly 100 yards from the northeastern entrance point; and 
a small bank, with 5 fathoms of water over it, extends a short distance 
from the southern side of the narrowest part. 

Water can be obtained from a cascade which falls into the eastern 
side, and from a considerable stream flowing into the head of the cove. 

The southeastern shore of North arm, northeastward of Harbor 
cove, rises in wooded hills 300 to 400 feet high. In this part of North 
arm the water is deep at a short distance from the shore; and there 
is no convenient anchorage in it, except for small vessels. 

At the head is the mouth of a shallow stream, flowing through a 
deep valley, that extends many miles inland, between high ranges of 
hills. 

Stowbridge head is a square mound, 87 feet high, situated on the 
western side of a small shingle beach, on which are some houses. 

A black rock, 12 feet high, lies northwestward, 300 yards from 
Stowbridge head; from this rock the shore trends west-northwestward 
and falls in small cliffs, with an outlying small islet 10 feet high. 

Liverpool brook flows into the bay at 1,2; miles from Stowbridge 
head, and Liverpool cove, with a few houses on its shores, is about 4 
mile farther westward. 

Anchorage can be obtained, with offshore winds, southward of 
Liverpool brook, in 18 fathoms water. 

Parkes rock, bearing 192°, distant 1,4, miles from the houses in 
Liverpool cove, has 44 fathoms of water over it, and 6 to 8 fathoms 
for a short distance around. Bearing 184°, distant 4} mile from 
Parkes rock, is a shoal with 64 fathoms of water over it. 

These shoals are on a bank extending in a northerly and southerly 
direction 1,600 yards, with a width of 500 yards, and having depths 
of 11 to 19 fathoms, with 23 to 75 fathoms at a short distance around. 

Buck head is the western point of Liverpool cove, and a shingle 
beach extends from it, in a curve, to Crabb point, which point hes 
westward, distant 2+ miles from the head. 

Upper Crabb brook flows into the bay at 1 mile from Buck head; 
several houses stand close to the mouth of the brook. 

A flat of sand and stones extends southward from the mouth of the 
brook, and there are depths of 3 fathoms at 200 yards, and of 10 
fathoms at 500 yards from the shore. 

Middle Crabb brook is westward 800 yards from Upper Crabb 
brook, and at a shingle point projecting southward. 

A shoal, with 44 fathoms water over it, bears 161°, distant 500 
yards from this point, the water deepening to 12 fathoms close south- 
ward of the shoal. 


CRABB POINT—-NORTH HEAD. 313 


Lower Crabb brook, a large stream flowing into the bay at a dis- 
tance of 800 yards eastward of Crabb point, and at the western end 
of the shingle beach, drains a deep valley which extends inland to the 
foot of the northern slope of mount St. Gregory; several houses 
stand close to its mouth. 

A bank, with less than 3 fathoms of water over it, extends 335 
yards from the shore eastward of the mouth of Lower Crabb brook; 
the depth then increases suddenly from 7 to 30 fathoms at a farther 
distance of 200 yards off the shore. 

Crabb point rises in low dark cliffs to a small wooded hillock, 215 
feet high, the southern end of a long stony ridge that extends north- 
ward and culminates in mount St. Gregory. This is the turning point 
into the Bay of Islands. A rock lies close southward of it. 

The coast from Crabb point trends northwestward 1,4; miles, then 
north-northwestward 2% miles to Beverley cove, whence it continues 
northward 1? miles to North head of the Bay of Islands. 

Davis cove lies north-northwestward 23 miles from Crabb point 
and between Lower Gull rock, 22 feet high, and the Friar, 60 feet 
high, which are nearly 1,200 yards apart; a considerable stream flows 
through the shingle beach at its head. The cove is a resort of fisher- 
men during summer, who erect temporary huts there. 

Beverley cove, a semicircular basin 100 yards in diameter, situ- 
ated north-northwestward nearly 14 miles from Lower Gull rock, is 
shallow and surrounded by black rock, except in a small creek imme- 
diately eastward of the southern entrance point, where boats moor, 
sheltered by a reef extending nearly across the entrance; it is fre- 
quented by fishermen during summer. 

The Green Handkerchief, a remarkable grassy sward on the cliff 
700 yards northward from Beverley cove, is conspicuous from sea- 
ward, being bright green during summer and yellowish during spring 
and autumn; a similar but much smaller sward is situated a short 
distance northward of the Green Handkerchief. 

Waterfall.—A conspicuous waterfall flows over dark black cliffs 
4 mile southward of North head, and from the mouth of this stream 
a rocky ledge, that nearly dries, extends 150 yards, and makes land- 
ing difficult for boats. A small headland, with dark cliff, in which at 
some height is a large cave, lies between the waterfall and the shingle 
beach extending to North head; two small streams flow through the 
shingle beach. 

North head, a low red earth cliff, 54 feet high, fronts a marshy 
plateau, that is generally green in summer, at the foot of the slope 
from mount St. Gregory; it is fringed by bowlders that uncover, ex- 
tending to a distance of 200 yards, shoal water continuing for 300 
yards farther; on this shelf are two rocks, with 2 feet of water over 
them, bearing 274°, distant 400 yards from North head. 


314 - CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. 


The southeastern point of Pearl island, open westward of the rocks 
off Beverley head, bearing 173°, leads close westward of these rocks. 

Mount St. Gregory, situated east-northeastward, distant 2 miles 
from North head, exhibits from the southward one sharp peak, but 
from the westward it shows three small though distinct summits, the 
middle and largest one, which is 2,240 feet high, being covered with 
stones and bowlders. 

The western face of the mountain is bare and stony, with deep 
gullies reaching generally to its base, which lies directly behind the 
beach. The slopes on its nerthern side are wooded and fall more 
gradually toward the valley of Gregory river, distant about 34 miles. 

Tidal streams.-—No law has yet been deduced for the tidal streams 
in the Bay of Islands. On June 13, 1881 (moon’s age, 16 days), from 
Sh. 20m. a. m. till 6h. 45m. p. m., the stream set eastward, with a 
shght curve from Guernsey, while from 9h. 20m. a. m. to 5h. 10m. 
p. m. of the same day it set northward from Pearl island, and at the 
same time set with a rate of about one knot up Middle arm. 

During May, June, and July the surface stream in Humber arm set 
almost continuously seaward, while there was an undercurrent setting 
in the opposite direction. The west-going surface stream is split by 
Woods island, and attains a rate of nearly 14 knots over the shoal off 
Shoal point. The east-going stream converges to Humber arm round 
Woods island, its rate decreasing on the surface as it nears the river. 

The tidal streams through the narrows of Goose arm attain a rate 
of 2 knots at springs, the time of the turning of the streams being 
irregular with respect to high water, varying with the direction of the 
wind, and the amount of water flowing into the head of the arm from 
the streams. 

Close to all shoals and banks, especially Vesuvius rock, a stream 
attains occasionally a rate of 14 knots, though it is scarcely perceptible 
4 mile distant from them. 

Population.—The residents of the Bay of Islands are of mixed 

nationality, comprising descendants of deserters from French vessels 
of war, former inhabitants of the east coast of Newfoundland (prin- 
cipally of Irish descent), and natives of Nova Scotia, the last named 
being employed principally at sawmills. 
' The coast from North head trends northward nearly 4 miles to 
Chimney Cove head and is a stony beach, fringed with rocky ledges, 
backed by a steep clay bank, behind which rise the slopes of mount 
St. Gregory and the hills falling from it. The rocky ledge extends 
generally to a distance of about 200 yards from the beach, but near 
North head it extends 300 yards, and southward } mile from 
Chimney cove it extends 400 yards. At Shoal cove, $ mile from 
North head, there are some buildings used as a lobster factory. 


LS 


CHIMNEY COVE HEAD—BIG COVE HEAD. 315 


Chimney Cove head is a slight projection, 450 feet high, with 


a perpendicular cliff on its southwestern side; eastward, toward the 


river valley, it falls in a conspicuous green slope extending from 
summit to base. 

Immediately southeastward of the head is Chimney cove, into 
which Gregory river falls; this is a small shallow stream, flowing 
from the hilly country inland, and barred by stones and bowlders that 
dry. On the southeastern side of the entrance is a low spit of sand 
and shingle on which are several huts, and there are also a few houses 
on the green slopes behind. 

Fair anchorage can be obtained off Chimney cove, with southerly 
and southeasterly winds, in 12 to 14 fathoms of water. 

The coast from Chimney Cove head trends northward to cape 
St. Gregory, a distance of 1 mile, and is composed of cliffs fronted by 
rocks, some of which are 20 feet high. 

Cape St. Gregory is a shelf of level ground, about 200 yards 
wide, projecting from the higher cliffs, and its cliffs are 75 feet high. 
It is steep-to, but during heavy weather there is a very high confused 
sea, and then small vessels should keep at least 2 miles off shore. 

The coast from cape St. Gregory trends about northeastward for 
5 miles to Big Cove head, and is composed of high cliffs, behind 
which are wooded hills and deep ravines. In the vicinity of Ren- 
contre cove, a small bight at 14 miles from cape St. Gregory, a con- 
spicuous cliff, nearly 1,000 feet high, recedes a little from the fore- 
shore and terminates in a series of white rocky hills. 

There are few places available for landing, the best being at Ren- 
contre cove, where boats may land safely in any weather, except dur- 
ing strong westerly winds. 

Big Cove head is 820 feet high, and rises almost perpendicularly 
from the sea. From the head the coast trends northeastward for 
1? miles to Trout River entrance, and the land behind it is high, 
culminating in a summit, 1,040 feet high, the eastern side of which 
slopes quickly down toward Trout river. 

Soundings.—The coast between cape St. Gregory and Trout river 
is steep-to, the 20-fathom contour line being about # mile distant 
nearly to Big Cove head; it then runs off the land, forming a bank, 
1 to 4 miles wide, which stretches west-northwestward about 44 
miles. 

Bearing 248°, distant 1,600 yards from Big Cove head, and rather 
more than 4 mile from the shore, there is a small patch of 10 
fathoms, with 11 to 15 fathoms around, and bearing 355°, distant 
2.8 miles from the head is Trout River rock, a patch with 13 
fathoms of water over it and 22 to 24 fathoms around. Both these 
rocks are resorts of the local fishermen, and, during fine weather, 
numbers of boats anchor near them. 


316 CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. 


Trout river flows into the southern corner of Trout River bay, a 
deep bight, and its entrance is sheltered from the sea by a projecting 
headland. The river is a small stream discharging from a series of 
extensive ponds, which begins a little over a mile inland. The river 
bar has 2 to 3 feet of water over it, but it is encumbered by bowlders, 
and only small boats can cross it. 

On a sandy beach at the eastern side of the river’s mouth, and on 
the rising bank behind, there are several houses, containing about 170 
inhabitants who are engaged in the cod and lobster fisheries. 

Anchorage can be obtained, with offshore winds, off the middle of 
Trout River bay in 9 to 10 fathoms of water; small vessels may go 
closer in, but there is usually a heavy ground swell during winds 
from seaward. 

Communication.—From Trout River settlement there is a rough 
road to South arm of Bonne bay, and the coasting steamer, to and 
from that place, occasionally calls off the river during fine weather. 

The coast from Trout River bay trends northeastward for 53 miles 
to Western head of Bonne bay, and is cliffy and fronted by low water 
rocks and ledges, extending, in places, 200 yards from the land. 
There are occasional patches of conspicuous red cliff and steep slopes, 
forming low headlands covered with grass, the bright green of which 
is, In summer, in contrast to the dark spruce-covered hills above. 

Immediately within the coast the hills rise to a considerable height, 
and farther inland are the seaward face and upper portion of an ex- 
tensive tableland covered with broken sandstone, bare of vegetation, 
and occasional marshy patches, which begins near the large ponds 
behind Trout river, and reaches across to within 14 miles of South 
arm of Bonne bay. 

At Green garden, 34 miles from Trout River bay, where a green 
slope leaves a narrow strip of flat land behind the shore, there are one 
or two huts, occupied, during summer, by fishermen from Bonne bay. 

The low water ledge extends rather more than 200 yards off Green 
garden, and there are some small detached rocks a little eastward 
of it. At Skinner cove, ? mile farther northeastward, a small stream 
runs into the sea; and between this cove and Western head, north- 
eastward 14 miles, the very steep slopes rise to the height of 1,005 
feet. 

Western head, from the westward, appears as the end of the high 
land to the southward; there are some detached rocks close off it, the 
highest of which is 57 feet high. 

Bonne bay, the entrance to which, from Western head to Lobster 
Cove head, is nearly 4 miles across, extends southeastward for about 6 
miles, then separates into two arms, East arm, the eastern, being 53 
miles long and about # mile wide; and South arm, the western, 4 miles 
long and a little more than $ mile wide. The scenery in these arms 


EASTERN HEAD—-WOODY POINT. SF 


is grand and picturesque, the shores rising steeply to high, timber- 
clad hills. 

The water in Bonne bay is generally too deep for nasty but 
there are places in it where good shelter can be obtained in a moderate 
depth of water. 

For 44 miles westward of the entrance to the bay there are sound- 
ings of 50 to 70 fathoms, outside this deep area there are depths of 25 
to 45 fathoms, while at about 10 miles off the entrance there is a bank 
with 10 to 25 fathoms over it. (See also p. 322.) 

Sailing vessels entering Bonne bay during strong southerly or 
westerly winds must be prepared for the violent squalls that blow off 
the high land on the southern side. 

The principal settlement is at Woody point, on the western shore, 
at 64 miles inside the entrance, and the population of the whole bay 
numbers about 1,200, engaged chiefly in the cod and lobster fisheries. 

Ice.—Bonne bay never freezes until the field ice appears, which is 
generally about the middle of January, but it is then completely 
closed with ice about 2 feet in thickness until about the middle of 
April, when the field ice disappears. There is occasionally ice on 
the coast, sometimes blocking it up to about June 8. 

The first vessel usually arrives early in May, and the last leaves 
about the end of December. 

Eastern head, eastward 14 miles from Western head, is high and 
steep; between the heads there is a long strip of shingly beach at the 
foot of the cliffs, and off the western end of this there is a detached 
rock, situated 250 yards from the shore, which dries 2 feet. 

Vessels should not approach this shore within 400 yards; at East- 
ern head, however, it becomes very steep and may be approached 
closely. 

The shore from Eastern head trends southeastward for 24 miles 
and then turns to the southward for 1,8; miles to Woody point; it is 
steep, and rises, in high wooded cliffs and steep slopes, to a remark- 
able cliffy escarpment which culminates in Crag peak, a summit 1,939 
feet high; northeastward of this and directly over the shore is a 
large, pinnacle-shaped rock, conspicuous on ponpeasterty or westerly 
bearings. There are several houses along the shore for } mile north- 
ward of Woody point. 

This shore may be approached closely until within }{ mile from 
Woody point. 

Woody point is 54 feet high and projects from the higher land 
behind, which here rises in steep slopes, more or less wooded and 
broken by deep ravines. 

Woody Point village contains about 220 inhabitants; the English 
and Roman Catholic churches on the slope southwestward of the 
point are conspicuous; there are post and telegraph offices, schools, 
and churches of various denominations. 


318 CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. 


Anchorage can be obtained at about 800 yards southward of 
Woody point in 12 to 20 fathoms water, but the bank with this depth 
is narrow and steep, and the bay is subject to sudden and violent 
squalls during strong winds, therefore a vessel’s stay should be tem- 
porary only. 
~ Wharves.—Silver’s and Halliburton’s wharves are the best for a 
vessel of any size to lie alongside, as their heads are in line, and to- 
gether afford a length of 113 feet. There is a depth of 16 feet at a 
distance of 18 feet off these wharves; if required, floating stages about 
4 feet wide can be obtained to breast a vessel farther off. Vessels go 
alongside heading southward. ; 

Coal.—There is usually a small quantity of coal in store at Woody 
point. 

Supplies and fresh provisions can be obtained at reasonable rates. 

Communication.—The steamer from Bay of Islands calls at 
Woody point weekly, and the steamer from Halifax calls monthly 
during summer and autumn. 

There is a telegraph office at the village. 

Trade.—The exports are lobsters (tinned), fish, oil, and a few 
furs; in 1894 the imports were valued at $66,300. 

South arm.—The shore, on which are several houses, wharves, and 
fishing stages, extends from Woody point south-southwestward about 
1,1; miles to a low flat stony spit at the mouth of a small stream; off 
this spit the water shoals a little and then deepens toward Hell cove. 
On a point at the southern end of this cove there is a wharf and ware- 
houses, now out of repair, but formerly used by a local trading com- 
pany. 

A good road runs along thts side of South arm, and the track from 
Trout river meets it at the northern side of Hell cove. 

Birchy head, a birch-covered bluff on the western side, is 1; 
miles above Hell cove. The shores on both sides of the arm, except- 
ing only off a small bight southward of Hell cove, are steep-to. Sil- 
verton district is around Birchy head. 

Foul point is on the eastern shore southeastward from Birchy 
head, and at the foot of the slope from a cliffy summit, 1,180 feet 
high, which rises steeply from the sea. A small rock, with 6 feet 
water over it, lies westward rather more than 100 vards from the 
point, and there are depths of 3 fathoms between, but otherwise there 
are 14 to 28 fathoms close to it. To avoid this rock keep toward the 
western shore. The shores around the head of the arm are low and 
flat, and mud banks occupy its middle for fully $ mile. The outer 
edges of the banks are very steep, there being 10 fathoms within 100 
feet of the portion that dries at low water. 

Anchorage.—Vessels anchor near the head of the arm in depths 
of 20 to 25 fathoms, but the anchorage is not recommended on ac- 


ENTRANCE POINT—NORRIS COVE. 319 


4 


count of the deep water, the heavy squalls which blow occasionally, 
and the distance from the settlement. 

Entrance point, on the eastern side of the arm, southward 1/5 
miles from Woody point, is a wooded bluff, 281 feet high, with very 
steep shores. 

Deep Water cove is a small bight, east-northeastward $ mile from 
Entrance point, with water not too deep for anchorage, but it is not 
a desirable berth; there are a few houses on the shores. 

The shore from Gray point, the eastern point of Deep Water cove, 
trends northeastward for 1, miles to Gadds point; the western por- 
tion is rocky, steep-to, and backed by wooded hills rising to heights 
of 338 to 870 feet, but from Rattling brook, a small stream half way 
between Gray and Gadds points, it is shelving and can not be 
approached closely. Water can be procured from Rattling brook. 

Gadds point is the northern end of Gadds head, a rounded head- 
land, 127 feet high, about 200 yards in diameter, and connected to 
the mainland by an isthmus; the point is steep-to, there being from 
14 to 30 fathoms water close to the rocks. 

Gadds harbor, a cove on the southeastern side of Gadds head, has 
anchorage for small vessels close to the shore. 

East arm extends southeastward about 54 miles, and has a general 
width of about -2; mile, with steep shores. It is entered through the 
Tickle, a channel about 400 yards wide, between Gadds and Norris 
points (page 321). 

The central part of East arm is a deep basin in which there are 
depths of 100 to 126 fathoms, mud bottom. The shores are quite 
steep, excepting only at the southern corner, where East Arm bara- 
chois, a narrow inlet, dries at low water, and from which banks of 
sand and mud extend about + mile. The land on both sides is high; 
on the western side the slopes are densely wooded, but on the eastern 
some are bare and stony. 

Shag cliff, eastward 1,300 yards from Gadds point, is a gray lime- 
stone cliff, steep-to, which rises directly to the height of 390 feet. 
Immediately eastward is a small bay, with a white stony beach, ter- 
minating eastward 600 yards from Shag cliff, in Storehouse point, a 
low grass-covered projection, at 200 yards off which is a rock with 
18 feet water over it and 6 fathoms between it and the shore. 

Norris cove.—At Storehouse point the shore turns south-south- 
eastward, and Norris cove, a small bight at 1 mile from the point, 
has a convenient depth for anchorage, but very little room; there are 
a few huts within the beach. 

Tuckers head, bearing 125°, distant 2,8; miles from the southern 
point of Norris cove, is a castellated cliff, 420 feet high. Southeast- 
ward of it is Murphys cove, a small bight, and here begin the banks 
of sand and mud extending from the entrance of East Arm barachois, 


320 CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. 


which is about 1} miles long, and quite dry at low water; a small 
river, in which the salmon fishing is said to be good, flows into its 
head from a series of ponds a short distance inland. 

Basin.—At ? mile northeastward of the entrance of the barachois 
is a narrow, deep, and clear passage leading into the head of East 
arm, which is an oval basin, } mile long, nearly 4 mile wide, and 
affords good sheltered anchorage in 13 to 18 fathoms water; the best 
berth is on the western side at about 600 yards inside the entrance. 

A small river flows into the head of this basin, and from, it stony 
flats extend for nearly + mile, but being steep-to, they do not interfere 
with the anchorage. 

Seal cove is on the northwestern side of the eastern entrance point 
of the basin, and vessels anchor off it, but during strong westerly 
winds the squalls are heavy, and the short, choppy sea set up is 
inconvenient for boats. There are a few huts on the shore. 

The eastern shore of East arm northwestward of Seal cove is 
steep-to, and rises in bare stony slopes to a remarkable conical peak, 
2,135 feet high, over which there is a rough track to the interior. 

Deer arm, the northern part of East arm, extends northward 
nearly 2 miles; inside a low sandy point at its head is a small basin, 
dry at low water, and Deer brook, a stream from a large pond under 
the mountains to the northward, flows into it. 

Gros Morne, the highest of these mountains, is bare rock, 2,540 feet 
high, and conspicuous from seaward. (See also p. 323.) 

Deer arm does not afford convenient anchorage, as the water is too 
deep, and it is subject to violent squalls, which blow from the sur- 
rounding hills. 

Neddy harbor, situated on the northern side of the entrance to 
East arm, is an indentation extending northwestward about 4 mile, 
with a width of 400 yards, and toward the head the harbor is } mile 
long in an easterly and westerly direction, with an average width of 
300 yards, but the area, with a depth of over 3 fathoms, available for 
anchorage is 700 yards long and 400 yards wide. 

The entrance is clear beyond the shoal water reaching about 150 
yards from the shores on either side; but a prong of shoal water 
extends southward 300 yards from Shoal point, the outer eastern 
entrance point. 

Neddy harbor is the most convenient, and probably the best anchor- 
age in Bonne bay, as it is sheltered from all except southeasterly 
winds; with southeasterly winds the squalls are often severe, and a 
heavy sea is quickly raised. Large vessels moor, as the space is 
limited. 

Wharf.—On the southern side of the inner part of Neddy harbor 
is a coal wharf, 130 feet long, with a head 92 feet long, alongside 


SANDY HEAD—WILD COVE HEAD. 321 


which is a depth of 23 feet water. There are ringbolts in the rocks 
for securing hawsers. 

Buoy.—A spar buoy, northwestward about 200 feet from the 
wharf, marks some moorings for small vessels to. use when lying 
alongside. 

Coal.—A small stock of Welsh coal is maintained at Neddy harbor 
for the use of British government ships. The coal shed is at the inner 
end of the wharf. 

Supplies.—Meat is very good except early in the year; vegetables 
are scarce In spring; bread is good. Water is good and plentiful; it 
was to be conveyed to the wharf by pipes. | 

Position.—A large flat bowlder of serpentine rock, marked with a 
broad arrow and situated on the northwestern shore of the harbor, 
100 yards from a small fishing stage with a store on it, is in latitude 
49° 31’ 30’’ north, and longitude 57° 52’ 27’’ west of Greenwich. 

Norris cove is a bight in the shore, just southwestward of Burnt 
point, the southwestern entrance point of Neddy harbor; it has a 
small settlement, which, with Sandy cove, contains about 175 inhabi- 
tants; there is a path from Norris cove to Roche harbor. 

Norris point, the western point of this cove, has a ledge of rocks 
extending 100 yards from it; between the point and Gadds head is the 
Tickle, a deep and clear channel 500 yards wide. 

Sandy head, northwestward 800 yards from Norris point, is a 
conspicuous projection, 74 feet high, appearing steep, bare, and sandy 
from the southwestward. Between it and Norris point there are 
several houses and fishing stages, as also in Deckers cove, northward 
of it, which is separated by a narrow neck from the head of Neddy 
harbor. 

Wild Cove head, northwestward nearly $ mile from Sandy 
head, is a dark, rocky, wooded point, and separates Deckers cove from 
Wild cove. 

Shoal.—An extensive stony flat fronts the shore from Norris point 
to Wild Cove head, the outer edge of the 3-fathom contour line being 
a little over 600 yards off Sandy cove, while at the distance of 300 
yards there is a small patch with 6 feet of water over it. Bearing 
246° distant 350 yards from Norris point, where the edge of the shoal 
turns sharply northwestward, there is a small patch, with 2 feet of 
water over it, and 14 fathoms between it and the point; off Sandy 
head the stones dry for nearly 200 yards. 

Leading mark.—Gadds point in line with Shag cliff, bearing 
84°, leads southward of the shoal off Norris point, and through the 
western part of the Tickle. 

Anchorage.—-A flat, with depths of 6 to 8 fathoms of water over 
it, is situated at the western entrance to the Tickle, and it affords 


79846—09 21 


322 CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. 


good temporary fine weather anchorage, with Gadds point in lne 
with Shag cliff, bearing 84°, and Wild Cove head bearing 347°. It 
is subject to very violent squalls from the high mountains when the 
wind is fresh. 

Wild cove, a deep bight on the northern side of Wild Cove 
head, has a moderate depth of water, but the bottom being stony, 
and the cove open to westerly winds and sea, it is not suitable for 
anchorage. 

Salmon point, north-northwestward, 3,8, miles from Wild Cove 
head, is a narrow bare slate point, the shore between being slate 
eliffs, backed by thickly wooded hills and generally fronted by a 
narrow rocky foreshore. It is fairly steep-to, except close to Salmon 
point, where low-water ledges and foul ground extend for nearly 
200 yards. 

Tides and tidal streams.—It is high water, full and change, 
in Norris cove at 10h. 40m.; springs rise 6 feet, neaps 44 feet. There 
is considerable diurnal inequality in the height of the tides, consecu- 
tive high and low waters differing, about the time of springs, as much 
as 2 feet. 

The tidal streams run generally fair in and out of East arm 
through the Tickle, where, during springs, they are very strong. in 
South arm the direction of the ebb stream is not regular, apparently 
owing to its being met and checked, by the stream through the Tickle. 
- Bank.—The northern side of the entrance to Bonne bay is fronted 
by an extensive rocky bank, with general depths of 11 to 17 fathoms; 
the 20-fathom limit terminating 10 miles northwestward from West- 
ern head, where the bank is about 14 miles wide. The bank extends 
southwestward from Martin point, and some small patches of 8 and 
9 fathoms bear 291°, distant 6 miles from Green point; the 10-fathom 
contour terminating 34 miles westward from Gun point. Fish are 
usually plentiful on this bank, and during fine weather numerous 
boats anchor on it. 

Roche (Rocky) harbor is an indentation northward of Salmon 
point, extending about one mile to the eastward, with a width of 3 
mile; it affords good anchorage, except during strong westerly winds, 
when a heavy sea is thrown in. 

A flat ledge of stones and bowlders, drying 1 to 4 feet, extends 
north-northwestward 650 yards from between Salmon point and the 
next point inside, where there are a few houses and fishing stages. 
The ground is foul for nearly 200 yards on either side of this reef, 
and rocky ledges fringe the shore nearly all around the harbor, with 
foul ground extending about 300 yards from them. 

The best anchorage is in 6 to 7 fathoms of water off the southern 
shore of the harbor, with the end of the northern head bearing 305°, 
and Salmon point in line with the next point inside it bearing 216°. 


ROCHE HARBOR—DIRECTIONS. 323 


At the head of the harbor, known as the Bottom, there is a small 
break in the ledges, with good landing for boats; and in Bear cove, 
on the northeastern side of the harbor, there is a similar break with 
good landing. There are a few houses at both these places. 

The population of this locality numbers about 160 persons, all en- 
gaged in the fisheries. There is some cultivated ground on the south- 
ern side, inside of Salmon point, where potatoes and other vegetables 
are grown. 

Directions.—[nter Roche harbor with the northern summit of 
Gros Morne in line with a saddle-shaped wooded coast hill, bearing 
88°, which leads southward of the shoals on the northern shore. 
When abreast Woody cove, the first bight on the northern shore, with 
the end of the northern head bearing 313°, steer about 116° for the 
anchorage, avoiding a rocky projection from the inner point of 
Woody cove, and the foul ground extending from the ledge of stones 
and bowlders. 

The coast between Bonne bay and Cow head is low, fronted by 
rough stony beaches and bowlders. It contains no harbors, nor even 
anchorages, except at Cow cove, where shelter can be found in 
westerly to northerly winds; and it is only in the finest weather that 
vessels can anchor off any part of this coast. 

The water deepens gradually to seaward, but some extensive banks 
of comparatively shallow water extend a considerable distance, and a 
ridge of shoals (p. 326) lies upward of a mile off, about halfway be- 
tween Lobster cove and Cow head. The bottom is rock and bowlders, 
with, in places, very small patches of sand. 

Strong westerly to northerly winds throw a heavy sea on the shore, 
and landing with safety is then almost impossible, except in a few 
places where there is a little indifferent shelter. There is a large 
quantity of drift wood and wreckage on the coast. 

Mountains.—<A conspicuous range of mountains extends north- 
ward from the northeastern side of East arm of Bonne bay. Gros 
Morne, the summit of the range, situated north-northeasterly, distant 
3 miles from the head of Deer arm, is 2,540 feet high, and is distin- 
guishable from seaward by its elevation; its southern face slopes and 
is bare, and its western side descends in steep cliffs into a deep gorge. 

From Gros Morne the range trends nearly parallel to the coast, its 
western ridge being about 5 miles inland, and low wooded spurs 
branch off seaward from it, terminating, northeastward of Green 
point, in large tracts of bog and barren, with numerous ponds. 

Western Brook mountain is a conspicuous wedge-shaped summit at 
3% miles east-southeastward of Martin point and on the western side 
of a remarkable gorge, both sides of which appear as vertical walls 
of rock. Western Brook pond, a large sheet of water, said to extend 


324 CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. 


10 to 12 miles inland, occupies this gorge, and stretches through the 
flats to within 14 miles of the sea. 

Caution.—Sailing vessels navigating on this coast during strong 
easterly winds must guard against the violent squalls which come 
down from the mountain gorges. 

Winds.—Easterly gales are not frequent; they are generally ac- 
companied by thick rainy weather. In 1896, southerly winds pre- 
vailed in June, July, and August, and northwesterly winds in 
autumn, but there were occasional short intervals of easterly winds. 

Current.—Inshore between Bonne bay and Cow head, a current 
generally sets northward with a greatest rate of about 14 miles an 
hour. 

Lobster Cove head, the northern entrance point of Roche har- 
bor, is composed of low red cliffs, 34 feet high, fronted by flat ledges 
of rock for 150 yards. Near the western end of these ledges there are 
two large rocks, 12 feet high. 

Light.—A circular white tower, 25 feet high, on Lobster Cove head, 
exhibits, at 115 feet above high water, an intermittent white light 
every 24 seconds, thus: Light 14 seconds, eclipse 14 seconds, which 
should be seen from a distance of 16 miles in clear weather. 

The keeper’s dwelling is close eastward of the tower and connected 
to it by a covered way, both being white with black roofs. 

Signals.—The lighthouse is supplied with the International code 
signals. 

Lobster cove is the small bight northward of Lobster Cove head; 
on its shore are a few houses and a canning factory, off which there 
is a long stage or jetty for landing, but this can only be effected in 
fine weather or with offshore winds. 

Rock.—A small rock, with 13 feet of water over it, bears 335°, 
distant nearly 800 yards from Lobster Cove head. Between the rock 
and the northern head of Lobster cove there are depths of 34 to 4 
fathoms. | 

The coast between Lobster cove and Green point, northward, 
distant 44 miles, is low, wooded, and fronted by a stony beach, off 
which the water is shoal for about 200 yards. 

Berry head, northward 1? miles from Lobster cove, is a slight 
projection of the low shore; northward 1 mile from the head is 
Bakers brook, a small stream with a rough bridge across its mouth. 
Between this brook and Pond point, 1 mile farther northward, there 
are two large ponds directly within the beach. 

Berry hill, a small wooded knoll, 115 feet high, situated 3? mile 
inland at about midway between Lobster cove and Berry head, is 
conspicuous on northerly or easterly bearings. 


GREEN COVE—MARTIN POINT. ave 


At some 2 miles westward from Berry head there are frequently 
overfalls and tide rips when the ebb stream is running strongly out 
of Bonne bay. 

Green cove, between Pond and Green points, is shallow for about 
400 yards from the shore, and unfit for anchorage, as a swell gen- 
erally sets in when the wind is from seaward, while, with strong 
winds blowing offshore, the squalls from the mountains are violent. 
There are some houses on the northeastern side of the cove. 

Green point, northward, 1,300 yards from Pond point, is a pro- 
jecting low clay cliff, flat topped and grass covered. 

A ledge of rocks extends southwestward from Green point, and at 
600 yards southwestward from the point there is a detached patch, 
with 3 fathoms water over it and a narrow boat passage, slightly 
deeper, inside. At 1,100 yards southwestward from the point there 
is a detached rock with a depth of 44 fathoms over it and 5 to 8 
fathoms around. These rocks break with an on-shore swell. 

The coast from Green point is a bowlder beach, with a low bank, 
more or less wooded, rising within it, north-northeastward for 22 
miles to Gun point. Inland are low ridges with extensive marshes 
and many ponds. Little brook, a small stream with a canning factory 
on its northern side, flows into the sea at 1 mile from Green point. 

Gun Point shoals are a group of rocky heads on a narrow ridge 
extending westward nearly 14 miles from the shore at a place 1,600 
yards northeastward of Gun point. The shoalest spot, with a depth 
of 3 fathoms, bears 320°, distant 1,400 yards from Gun point, and 
around it are depths of 4 to 5 fathoms. Westward of the ridge there 
are depths of less than 10 fathoms for a distance of 3} miles from the 
land. 

Clearing mark.—Crag peak (p. 317), on the southwestern side 
of the entrance to Bonne bay, just open westward of Green point, 
bearing 180°, leads westward of Gun Point shoals. 

The coast from Gun point, north-northeastward, for 2,8, miles to 
Martin point, is of the same character as that toward Green point, 
but the shoal water fronting the beach extends a little farther off. 
Sally cove is a shallow bight, about 1,200 yards from Gun point, 
where there is a canning factory and some houses; and on either side 
of this bight a tongue of stones and bowlders, dry at low water, 
extends about 300 yards from the beach; the 3-fathom line is here dis- 
tant over 800 yards from the shore. 

Communication.—The steamer from Halifax, monthly, some- 
times stops off Sally cove. 

Martin point is a low cliff, 35 feet high, covered with grass on 
the top, and having a large clump of trees close behind it. From the 
point the coast turns sharply eastward for about 400 yards and 
thence about northeastward, forming a small bight, in which there 


326 CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. 


is a solitary cottage. Rocks, dry at low water, extend 200 yards from 
the point, but are steep-to. 

Indrie rock (locally Dixie rock) lies about halfway between 
Gun and Martin points, 1,2; miles from the beach, with Martin point 
bearing 57°, distant 1,8, miles; it is about 250 yards in extent and 
has 2 fathoms of water over it. 

There are some rocky shoals of 4 to 5 fathoms at rather more 
than 4 mile southeastward from Indrie rock. 

The Whaleback is a narrow ridge of rocks; near its middle, bear- 
ing 288°, distant 1 mile from Martin point, is a small mushroom-shaped 
rock that dries 4 feet, and from it the ridge with depths of less than 
5 fathoms extends southwestward 900 yards and northeastward 
1,300 yards. There are several spots of 14 to 2 fathoms on the ridge, 
both sides of which are steep-to, but especially the northwestern, 
where the 20-fathom contour line is distant but little over 200 yards. 
In thick weather, therefore, the lead is not to be depended on when 
standing toward the shoal. 

There is a clear passage, carrying 4 to 6 fathoms, between the 
Whaleback and Indrie rock, lying south-southwestward, distant one 
mile. 

The Brandies, a cluster of shoals, begins northeastward, distant 
12, miles from the northeastern end of the Whaleback, and its western 
head, with a least depth of 2 fathoms water over it, bears 8°, distant 
1,8, miles from Martin point and 14 miles from the nearest shore. 
A patch with a depth of 15 feet, bears 76°, 600 yards from the west- 
ern head, and bearing 31°, distant 800 yards from this patch there isa 
cluster of rocks, the top of which is awash. These shoals are steep-to 
on their western sides, and break with a swell from that direction. 
There is a good clear passage between these shoals and the shore, but 
its northern end, with depths greater than 5 fathoms, is contracted to 
a width of 650 yards by a bank extending 600 yards off the beach. 
But the shoalest part of the Brandies being generally marked by the 
break, or wash over it, the navigation of this passage is not difficult. 

Leading mark.—Martin and Gun points in line, bearing 205°, 
lead through the passage inshore of the Brandies. 

Clearing marks.—Crag peak, open westward of Green point, 
bearing 179°, leads 1,200 yards westward of Indrie rock, and leads 

zs miles westward of the Whaleback. 

Parsons Pond hill, a conspicuous wooded, double-topped hill near 
Parsons pond, in line with the eastern part of Cow Head peninsula, 
bearing 37°, leads westward of the Whaleback and the Brandies, 
passing the latter at a distance of 1,2; miles. (See view on chart No. 
2415.) 

The coast from the bight eastward of Martin point continues 
about northeastward 14 miles to Gulls marsh, where there is a can- 


ST. PAULS BAY. 327 


ning factory on the stony beach, and from which a trail leads through 
the marshes to Western Brook pond, where the factory people keep a 
small boat for hunting purposes. 

At nearly 24 miles northward from Gulls marsh the beach becomes 
sandy, and Western brook, a small stream flowing from Western 
Brook pond, runs some little way behind it and falls into the sea, 
Northward of this the coast becomes rocky and, with a small bight, 
forms the projection known as Broom point, on which there are a few 
cottages. Two ridges of dry rocks extend about 500 yards westward 
from the point, and in the bight between them there is a landing stage 
and fish store. The outer ends of these ridges are steep-to, but off the 
sandy beach southward of the mouth of Western brook there are 
depths of less than 3 fathoms for upward of 600 yards from the shore; 
to this distance, and often beyond it, the sea is frequently discolored 
by the water from the brook. 

St. Pauls bay, lying between Broom point and St. Pauls point, 
north-northeastward, distant 34 miles, extends about 1 mile east- 
ward of the line joining the headlands, and is open to seaward. The 
shores are low and stony, the bottom is foul, and the anchorage, even 
with the strong breeze that frequently blows seaward, is unsafe. 

A rocky patch, with 5 fathoms of water over it, bears 348°, distant 
1,900 yards from Broom point. Bearing 340°, distant nearly 2 miles 
from Broom point, there is a small patch of 6 fathoms; and a patch 
with 24 fathoms of water over it lies 600 yards offshore, a little south- 
ward of the entrance to St. Pauls inlet. 

Basin.—On the eastern side of the bay, at a break in the low 
shore, 1,200 yards wide, is the entrance into St. Pauls inlet. Inside 
the break the shores open out into an oval basin about 14 miles long 
and 1 mile wide, which is filled with banks of sand and stones that 
dry. It is surrounded by low marshy shores, and two channels lead 
from the sea. The southern side of the break in the shore is a sandy 
spit with some houses on it, a little to the southward of which is a 
wooded hill 220 feet high; a large wooden building, situated near 
the end of the spit, is used as a lobster-canning factory. 

From the end of the spit a ridge of shingle extends northward 
and forms a narrow bar across the entrance of the channel, over which 
there is a depth of 3 feet of water. 

The bar is easily crossed by boats during fine weather by keeping 
close along the northern side of the ridge projecting from the end 
of the spit, but it is dangerous during strong winds with a heavy 
swell. 

The northern of the two channels in the basin is very shallow, and 
terminates near a low, stony islet. The southern channel is about 
200 feet wide, and has a depth of 1 to 3 fathoms; from close north- 
ward of the factory it turns eastward and then southeastward, in 


328 CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. 


which direction at rather over a mile from the factory it passes 
between two slightly elevated points into St. Pauls inlet. 

The edges of the channel are clearly defined except at high water, 
and there is no difficulty for boats beyond that caused by the tidal 
streams which run through it and over the bar with considerable 
strength. 

St. Pauls inlet is about 54 miles long in an easterly and westerly 
direction, with a width varying from 3 miles to 4 mile. Inside the 
entrance the water is shallow, and there are several rocks, some above 
water, and rocky patches; but a channel along the western shore, with 
about 2 fathoms of water, leads into the deeper part of the inlet, 
where the general depths are 7 to 20 fathoms. 

The eastern and the southern parts of the inlet lie at the foot of the 
northwestern side of a portion of the mountain range extending 
northward from Bonne bay, and toward them the water is deep and 
clear of shoals. 

On the western side of the inlet, at about 1 mile southward of the 
entrance, borings for oil have been made, and it was reported in 1897 
that a good supply had been obtained at a depth of 1,000 feet. 

The coast from St. Pauls point trends northeastward for rather 
over 2 miles to the head of Cow cove, and is a rough, stony beach in 
front of a low wooded bank, behind which are ponds and marshy 
ground reaching to the mountains, which here begin to incline farther 
inland, and are broken by steep gorges with cliffs on either side, pre- 
senting a very rugged and barren aspect from seaward. 

Cow cove affords good anchorage in 4 to 10 fathoms of water, dur- 
ing northerly gales, and in moderate breezes from eastward of a 
north-northwestward direction, but with winds westward of this a 
heavy swell rolls in, rendering the anchorage unsafe. Northerly 
gales are prevalent in early spring and autumn. 

Cow head is a peninsula 1 mile long in an easterly and westerly 
direction, 4 mile wide, 206 feet high, and densely wooded on its south- 
ern and western sides. From its eastern end a low isthmus of sand 
and stones runs southeastward to the main land, and separates Cow 
cove, on the southwestern, from Cow Head harbor on the northeastern 
side. The northern side of the head is steep-to, but rocks, which dry 
2 feet, extend about 200 yards southwestward from the southwestern 
point. 

The northern slope of the head has been partially cleared and 
affords grazing to the sheep and cattle of the residents, whose houses 
are situated at the eastern end. Here there is a large canning factory 
and some landing stages, the latter getting some partial protection 
from a ridge of dry rocks extending from the northeastern point. 

Cow Head harbor.—Northeastward of Cow Head isthmus a curve 
of sandy shore continues northward to Downes point, a distance of a 


STEARING ISLAND—SHALLOW BAY. 329 


little over 2 miles. White Rock islets, a chain of small islets and low- 
water rocks, nearly 1} miles long in a northeasterly and southwesterly 
direction, le 600 yards off Downes point, and the bight, within these 
islets, lying between Cow Head isthmus and Downes point, is Cow 
Head harbor. 

White Rock islets are connected with Downes point by a sandy flat 
drying at low water, which, extending southeastward and southward, 
occupies a considerable portion of the harbor. 

Tortoise rock, awash at low water, is in the harbor entrance and 
separated from the rocks extending northeastward from Cow head, by 
a channel about 100 yards wide. In the middle of this channel and 
just inside Tortoise rock, is a rock, with 6 feet of water over it, and 
‘a very narrow pdssage, 12 to 15’ feet deep, on its northeastern side. 
Between Tortoise rock and Thorn rock, which has less than 6 feet of 
water over it and lies close southwestward of White Rock islets, there 
is a depth of 9 to 10 feet of water. 

The harbor is only suitable for vessels of moderate length, and 
drawing less than 10 feet of water, because not only is the passage 
into it narrow and tortuous, but during northerly to northwesterly 
winds such a heavy swell rolls in that there is great risk of touching 
the ground; in any case local knowledge is necessary to enter safely. 
Inside there is anchorage in 24 to 34 fathoms of water but in heavy 
westerly weather there is not much shelter. 

Tides and tidal streams.—lIt is high water, full and change, 
at Cow Head harbor at 10h. 48m.; springs rise 64 feet, neaps 44 feet. 

The tidal streams between Cow Head harbor and Stearing island 
are strong, the flood, setting northeastward, sometimes attaining a 
rate of 2 knots at springs. The duration of this stream is much longer 
than that of the ebb, which sets in the opposite direction. 

Communication.—The steamer from Halifax, monthly, calls off 
Cow Head harbor on her way to and from the northern ports. 

Stearing island, north-northwestward, distant 1,600 yards from 
Cow head, is 500 yards long in a northeasterly and southwesterly 
direction, 100 yards wide, and 22 feet high; it consists of limestone 
rock scantily covered with coarse grass. Broken islets and low-water 
rocks extend westward 600 yards and eastward 350 yards from the 
island, and shoals for upward of 600 yards from it, except from its 
southeastern side, which is fairly steep-to. Caution is necessary when 
in its vicinity at night or in thick weather; then keep in depths of 
over 20 fathoms which will insure being $ mile northward and west- 
ward of the island shoals. 

Shallow bay (White Rock bay).—The coast from Downes point 
is a long sandy curve backed up by wooded flats and marshes, but 
broken by two small streams to Lower head, which lies northward at 
a distance of 1,6; miles from Downes point. This curve, together 


330 CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. 


with the eastern part of White Rock islets, forms Shallow bay, where 
there is fairly good anchorage for vessels of less than 14 feet draft, 
with southerly winds;.and vessels drawing less than 12 feet find shel- 
ter, with the wind from southward of a westerly direction, by going 
as close as possible to White Rock islets; but with westerly winds a 
heavy sea is likely to roll in and, at low water, to break over the 
greater part of the bay. 

Anchorage.—The best anchorage is with the whole of Stearing 
island and rocks, just open northward of the northeasterly grassy 
White Rock islet, bearing about 256°, and the canning factory at Cow 
Head harbor, a conspicuous whitewashed building on the shore just 
open southeastward of White Rock islets in 34 fathoms of water, but 
quite close to the edge of the 3-fathom bank extending from the islets 
and Downes point. <A little northeastward of this position a 3-fathom 
bank extends from the main shore, leaving a bight of 34 to 44 fathoms 
of water between it and Downes point; and it is in this bight that 
anchorage should be obtained. 

Directions.—From the southwestward pass westward of White 
Rock islets, which are fairly steep-to, and haul round their northeast- 
ern end, giving the rocks a berth of about 100 yards. From the 
northward pass the shoal water off Lower head in 8 to 9 fathoms, and 
then steer for the northeastern end of White Rock islets before haul- 
ing into the anchorage. 

Evangeline banks are a series of rocky patches extending from 
700 yards northward of Tortoise rock to the shoals westward of 
Lower head (Stanford point). The general depths of the banks are 
34 to 5 fathoms, but the shoalest patch of 2 fathoms bears 319°, dis- 
tant 900 yards from the northeastern grassy White Rock islet, and is 
on a patch about 500 yards long in a northerly and southerly direc- 
tion, and 200 yards wide. North-northeastward, 300 yards from this 
patch, there is a patch of 2% fathoms, with 33 fathoms between. 

Inside these banks, between White Rock islets and Lower head, 
fronting the shoaler area in Shallow bay, there is a space of water 
with depths of 5 to 7 fathoms in it. 

Lower head (Stanford point) is a rocky projection at the ter- 
mination of the sandy shore extending northeastward from Cow head. 
Tt is 35 feet high, and from it a low cliffy coast with a small sandy 
bight extends north-northeastward 800 yards. Off Lower head, and 
also off this cliffy coast, shoal water extends nearly + mile, and is 
clearly marked by breaks, when there is any swell. 

The coast from the cliffs trends north-northeastward, and is low 
and thickly wooded for 5}$ miles, rising gradually to the slopes of 
Parsons Pond hill, which is 460 feet high, densely wooded to the sum- 
mit, and conspicuous. The rough beach of stones and bowlders is 


SANDY BAY—PARSONS POND. 331 


fronted by flat ledges of rock extending off about 200 yards, and out- 
side them the water deepens gradually to 10 fathoms at the distance 
of $ mile. 

At about 4 miles from Lower head the rocky ledges cease, and the 
stony beach becomes less rough, and finally changes to sand; inside 
these is a steep yellow-clay bank, which shows well from seaward. 
Behind this bank there is a large pond and low, marshy ground. 

Sandy bay, 5 miles from Lower head, is a shallow bend in the 
coast; it is generally foul and rocky, and affords only temporary 
anchorage. The entrance to Parsons pond is near its southeastern 
end. 

Parsons pond extends inland about 7 miles from Sandy bay, with 
an average breadth inside the narrows near the entrance of about 1 
mile. The entrance is obstructed by a bar of coarse shingle, with a 
depth of 4 feet over it, and immediately inside the entrance, on the 
southern bank, is the village, with some buildings on the sandy spit 
opposite. Here the depth in the channel is about 1 fathom, but 
farther in it quickly shoals again to 3 feet, through a stony flat. At 
14 miles within the entrance the channel contracts to little over 200 
yards, with a depth of 1 to 2 fathoms. Above this the pond opens 
out for about 14 miles, where are the inner narrows, beyond which the 
water deepens to 5 and 8 fathoms. This depth continues to the head, 
which lies directly at the foot of the mountains. 

Borings for oil have been made on the southern shore of Parsons 
pond at 54 miles from the entrance. 

The coast from Sandy bay trends about north-northeastward, and 
is a low, stony beach, with a clay bank behind it, for } mile. Thence a 
rough beach of stones and bowlders, fronted in places by rocky 
ledges, extends for about 4 miles to the Arches, a cluster of detached 
masses of sandstone honeycombed by the sea, and standing on a sandy 
beach a little above low water. The coast is fairly steep, the 10-fathom 
contour line being generally about $ mile off, while the contour line 
of 50 fathoms closes in to a distance of 4 miles from the land west- 
northwestward of Sandy bay. 

The country within this coast consists of low ridges, thickly wooded, 
with large tracts of marsh extending toward the mountains, some 6 
miles inland. 

At 2 miles north-northeastward of the Arches the direction of the 
coast bends to the northeastward, and Portland hill, rather more than 
4 mile inland, is 530 feet high, thickly wooded, and, from the south- 
ward, wedge-shaped. Its western end is a perpendicular cliff, which 
extends a little along the southern and northwestern faces, gradually 
changing toa steep alone: which joins with the ridges farther inland. 
This hill is conspicuous from seaward. 


gon CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. 


- Westward of Portland hill, flat ledges appear outside the stony 
beach and continue for a distance of 2 miles to a place where there 
are some cottages and a canning factory. Thence the coast, a sandy 
beach, gradually turns to the northward for about = mile, to the 
entrance of Portland creek, and then, forming a bight, westward for 
800 yards to Eastern head. | 

Portland cove lies between the canning factory and Eastern head; 
the water in it off the creek is shallow for about 500 yards, but out- 
side this there is fairly good anchorage, during easterly winds, in 
about 4 fathoms water, sand and mud bottom, but it appears to be bad 
holding ground. 

There are no shoals outside the depth of 3 fathoms, which, however, 
is nearly 600 yards from the shore. A little more than 200 yards off 
the factory there is a ledge which dries, with shoal water between it 
and the rocks. 

Portland creek runs 1 mile inland from Portland Creek pond; 
there is a depth of 2 to 3 feet in the creek, but owing to its being 
obstructed by bowlders, it is difficult for a boat to get through, though 
the entrance is easy of access in fine weather. 

Portland Creek pond, of an irregular ovate form, is nearly 5 
miles Jong in a northeasterly and southeasterly direction and 24 
miles wide; it reaches to within 1,200 yards from the sea in an easterly 
direction from Cliffy point. At its southeastern end is the mountain 
range. Its outlet is Portland creek. 

At 44 miles within the entrance it passes, by a narrow channel 
accessible to boats, into its inner part, which occupies a mountain 
gorge. 

The depth of water in the outer pond is 3 to 7 fathoms, but a sound- 
ing of 95 fathoms has been obtained in the inner one. 

The residents of Daniels cove keep several boats on the outer pond 
in which they make hunting excursions. 

On the eastern side of the inner pond is Gros paté (Blow-me- 
down), a truncated mountain, 1,650 feet high, with nearly vertical 
sides, and conspicuous. The range continues northeastward for some 
5 miles, and it terminates a little beyond East hill, a summit 2,115 
feet high. 

Eastern head, the northern point of Portland cove, is 47 feet 
high, rocky, and bare on the top. 

The coast trends north-northeastward and is rocky for 1,3; miles 
from the head; here there is a white stony beach, in front of a high 
green bank; it then turns northward to Cliffy point, which is rocky, 
with a bank 60 feet high inside of it. 

Brown shoal, a small rocky patch with 4 fathoms of water over 
it and 10 fathoms inside, bears 352°, one mile from Eastern head and 
4 mile offshore. 


BOWING BROOK—DEER COVE. 333 


The coast from Cliffy point continues to trend north-northeast- 
ward and is stony and backed by a more or less wooded bank for 2 
miles, to a low point fronted by some rocks, two of which are pin- 
nacles 25 feet high. There are several houses on the point, and the 
rocks in front, extending a little northward, form Daniels cove, which 
is sheltered from the southwestward. 

The coast from Daniels cove trends north-northeastward, and, 
for a distance of 34 miles, is a stony beach, with a high clay bank, 
covered on the top with scrub, and broken here and there by small 
streams. 

Caution.—The prominent points of the land between Daniels cove 
and port Saunders are reported to be inaccurately laid down, with 
reference to one another, on the charts. 

Bowing brook, the largest of the streams, is 14 miles from Daniels 
cove, and there is a narrow bridge across it. 

Spudgels cove, 14 miles from Bowing brook, is a shght bend, and 
here the foreshore changes to a jumble of ledges and rocks, fronting 
a bank of broken limestone shale, which falls in low cliffs. Inside 
of this bank, the land rises to wooded ridges 250 to 380 feet high, with 
intervening marshes and numerous ponds. 

Belvans cove, 6 miles from Daniels cove, is a small bight, with 
rocky ledges fronting it, which afford some shelter for boats. There 
are several huts on the narrow foreshore under the low cliff, that here 
recedes a little. A stream, bridged near its mouth, runs into the 
eastern side of the cove. 

Table cove, ? mile northward of Belvans cove, is a shallow bay 
with a stony beach, but it affords no shelter. There are a few huts 
on the beach. 

Table point, northward 14 miles from Belvans cove, is a projec- 
tion of the shale bank and cliffs, fronted by low rocky ledges. The 
land back of the point rises gradually in wooded slopes. The sound- 
ings offshore between Daniels cove and Table point are regular, and 
the land may be approached to a depth of 20 fathoms, which is ap- 
proximately one mile from it. 

The coast from Table point trends north-northeastward, and at 
about # mile from the point there is a small bight into which a small 
stream runs from some ponds at a short distance inland. The bight 
is foul and rocky, but a boat might land there between the ledges, 
when landing is not possible southward of the point. The land 
north-northeastward of Table point is of moderate height, and the 
coast inside of the rocks is covered with grass, but there is nothing 
noticeable. 

Deer cove, 14 miles from Table point, is a small break in the rocks. 
For about 4 miles from the cove, the rocky ledges are backed by low 


334 CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. 


cliffs, within which the land rises gradually to heights of 110 to 170 
feet. This vicinity is known locally as Bateau barrens. 

La Fontaine point is about 7 miles from Table point. South- 
ward, 13 miles from la Fontaine point, the rocky foreshore suddenly 
ends, and between it and the point is a rough beach of bowlders, be- 
hind which is a high-topped bank. The face of this bank, at ? mile 
from the point, is steep, and shows prominently from the southwest- 
ward. 

The soundings between Table and la Fontaine points are fairly 
regular, the 20 fathom contour line being about 400 to 1200 yards 
from the shore, while the line of 100 fathoms here approaches the 
land to within a distance of about 34 miles. Directly off la Fontaine 
point, however, the bottom is foul and uneven, depths of 5 to 8 fath- 
oms reaching off for nearly } mile. This uneven ground is some- 
times marked by tide rips. 

Bad bay (formerly Mall bay).—The shore from la Fontaine point 
trends northeastward for 4} miles, and then turns northward for 24 
miles to Burntwood point. Bad bay, which may be said to lie between 
these points, is completely open, and affords no shelter. There is a 
conspicuous yellow clay cliff, 78 feet high, at the head of the bay, and 
directly southward of the cliff is the entrance to Ponds river. With 
offshore winds there is temporary anchorage, in about 10 fathoms, 
off the entrance to the river. 

Ponds river, the bar of which has about 2 feet of water over it, 
has a tortuous easterly course, between wooded hills, for about 1 
mile from its mouth, where it opens into Steady lake, which is small. 
I’rom the eastern end of Steady lake, a narrow channel, + mile long, 
leads to a large pond that extends southwestward toward la Fon- 
taine point, and southeastward toward a range of high hills, distant 
about 12 miles. The river, inside the bar, is much obstructed by 
bowlders, and a very strong stream usually runs out, but it is prac- 
ticable for boats to reach the pool, just inside the entrance, during 
fine weather. With strong northerly and westerly winds this shore 
is unapproachable, owing to the heavy sea. There is a small settle- 
ment in the bay at # mile southward of the river entrance, and a few 
houses just inside the bar. 

The shore between Ponds river and Burntwood point is a rough, 
stony beach with a grassy bank behind it; inside this bank is Little 
Brook pond, which extends eastward about 3 miles, but its western 
part for 14 miles is divided by a low wooded peninsula. The west- 
ern ends of the pond reach to within 100 yards of the coast, and 
Little brook, a small stream, runs through a narrow cut in the bank 
near its western corner into the sea. 


BURNTWOOD POINT—-KEPPEL ISLAND. 335 


Shoal water of less than 5 fathoms extends about 600 yards off 
this shore, which between Ponds river and Burntwood point should 
not be approached nearer than 800 yards. 

Burntwood point is 20 feet high, with a green bank just behind 
it, from which wooded ridges rise gradually to the height of about 
250 feet. 

Eboulement point (locally Spirity point), the southern entrance 
point of Ingornachoix bay, lies north-northeastward, 2 miles from 
Burntwood point. Between them the land rises a little, and is thickly 
wooded, but a large bare space on the face of the high clay bank 
at + mile from Eboulement point, is conspicuous. 

Rocks.—A rocky patch, with a least depth of 2 fathoms over it, 
is situated with Eboulement point bearing 120°, distant 700 yards. 

A rock, with a depth of 22 feet over it, is sitaated with Eboule- 
ment point bearing 137°, distant 1,100 yards. 

A rock, with a depth of 16 feet over it, is situated with Eboulement 
point bearing 213°, distant 1,300 yards. The shoal on which this 
rock lies extends northeastward about a mile from Eboulement point, 
and there are depths of 3 to 4 fathoms over it. 

Leading mark.—The southern part of Two Hills point open 
northward of Keppel island, bearing 64°, leads northward of these 
rocks in a least depth of 7 fathoms of water. 

Caution.—When rounding Eboulement point in thick or heavy 
weather do not decrease the soundings to less than 25 fathoms. 

Ingornachoix bay, the entrance to which is between Eboulement 
and Rich points, which are distant 6 miles from each other in a 
northerly and southerly direction, extends 34 miles eastward of the 
line joining the entrance points, and is quite open. The entrances 
to Hawke harbor and bay, Keppel harbor, and port Saunders are 
in the southeastern part of the bay. 

Trapper cove, northeastward 1,2; miles from Eboulement point, 
is a shallow bight. Hawke point is its eastern entrance point. 

Keppel island, northeastward, distant 2,2, miles from Eboulement 
point, and at the head of the bay off the entrances to Hawke and 
Keppel harbors and port Saunders, is about 1 mile long in an 
easterly and westerly direction, with a greatest width of 4 mile; its 
coasts are steep-to, but Morue spit, shingle-covered at high water, 
extends eastward + mile from Grass point, the eastern end of the 
island. The northwestern end of the island is a blackish cliff. 

Light.—A square pyramidal lighthouse, 23 feet high, surmounted 
by an octagonal drum and lantern, and painted red and white in 
horizontal bands, on the northwestern point of Keppel island, ex- 
hibits, at 107 feet above high water, a fixed white light that should 
be seen from a distance of 14 miles in clear weather. 


336 CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. 


Rocks.—A rock, with a depth of 22 feet over it, is situated with 
Keppel Island lighthouse bearing 144°, distant 1,200 yards. 

A rock, with a depth of 27 feet over it, is situated with Keppel 
Island lighthouse bearing 169°, distant 1,600 yards. 

Hawke harbor entrance is between Keppel island and a low 
wooded point 1,600 yards eastward of Hawke point. Hawke flat, a 
sand bank that dries, extends nearly 800 yards from the shore within 
the low wooded point, and narrows the passage between it and the 
foul ground westward of the peninsula, of which Keppel point is 
the northwestern end, to 600 yards. Foul ground stretches off nearly 
400 yards from the northern and western part of the peninsula. 
Robinson island lies southward 600 yards from Lossieux point, the 
southern end of the peninsula, and is joined to it by shoal water; 
shoals extend westward about 100 yards, and eastward and north- 
eastward nearly 400 yards from the island. 

The harbor is between Hawke flat and the shore southeastward of 
it, on the southwest, and the peninsula, on the northeast; it is 14 miles 
long in a northwesterly and southeasterly direction, and from 400 to 
700 yards wide, with depths of 7 to 18 fathoms. 

Directions.—Pass rather more than 200 yards southward of 
Keppel island till within the low wooded point, then steer about 102°, 
and when Grass point bears 1°, steer about 133° for the middle of 
Robinson island, not opening Saunders point northeastward of Grass 
point till Keppel point bears 57° to clear the shoal off Keppel point, 
and guarding against Hawke flat; anchor in the harbor # mile 
south-southeastward of Keppel point in 15 fathoms of water, mud 
bottom, or about 600 yards northwestward of Robinson island in 
16 fathoms. 

Hawke bay is inside of and to the eastward of the harbor and 
extends east-northeastward, 44 miles from Robinson island, with an 
average width of 14 miles. The southern shore from southward 
of Robinson island trends somewhat northward. of eastward for 1,300 
yards to Ourson point, off which shoals he nearly 600 vards distant, 
and this side of the bay eastward of Ourson point is foul, but the 
northern side is clear except for Cook bank; there is a salmon fishery | 
in the northeastern part of the bay, from which shallow water extends 
500 yards, and Torrent river flows into the eastern side. 

The shores of the bay, except Cible point, are low, and faced by 
flat rocks.or shingle or sand. 

Cook bank, east-northeastward, distant 14 miles from Robinson 
island, has a least depth of 7 feet water over it; the passage between 
it and the northern shore is 200 yards wide. From the place of least 
depth, the west extreme of Cible point bears 116°, distant 14 miles, 
and the east extreme of Robinson island bears 240°. 


COMMANDER SHOAL—PORT SAUNDERS. oot 


Commander shoal extends northward for 1,500 yards from the 
southern side of the bay at 1,4; miles eastward of Ourson point, and 
has 5 feet least water over it at a place from which the west extreme 
of Cible point bears 111°, distant 1,060 yards, and Gull islet bears 86°. 
Commander shoal is composed of bowlders, and soundings of less than 
5 fathoms extend 350 yards northward of these rocks. Cible point 
lies 1,8; miles eastward of Ourson point, and Cible shoal extends 300 
yards from it; the point is the only cliff in the bay. 

Rock.—A patch with 3 fathoms of water over it is located north- 
eastward of Commander shoal with the west extreme of Cible point 
bearing 158°, distant 840 yards, and Gull islet bearing 102°. 

Gull shoal, nearly 400 yards off Gull point, which lies east-north- 
eastward 800 yards from Cible point, has 5 feet of water over it. 

Anchorage.—There is anchorage in the bay in 7 to 20 fathoms 
of water, mud bottom; in the eastern part of the bay the stream from 
the Torrent may be sufficiently strong to keep a vessel riding athwart 
a good breeze. 

Directions.—Pass in mid-channel southwestward of Robinson 
island and bring a round hummock, 266 feet high, to bear 243°; keep 
it on this bearing astern and when past Ourson point, anchor clear of 
the shoals. 

Tides and tidal streams.—lIt is high water, full and change, at 
Hawke bay at 11h. 0m.; springs rise 6 feet, neaps 4 feet. The tidal 
streams are strong in Hawke harbor. During the flood tide the 
stream from the Torrent sets toward the northern shore. 

Water can be conveniently taken from the stream between Cible 
and Gulf points. At the head of the bay there is good salmon and 
trout fishing in the season, and deer may be shot in the vicinity. 

Ice.—Hawke bay freezes late in November or early in December, 
_and the ice breaks up between April 20 and May 10. 

Keppel harbor, eastward of Keppel island and within Keppel 
point, is 1 mile long and nearly + mile wide, but shoal water extends 
4 mile from the head. 

Directions.—Pass rather more than 200 yards southward of 
Keppel island and Morue spit; when the harbor opens keep in mid- 
channel and anchor in 6 fathoms water, at about 600 yards within the 
entrance. An anchorage much frequented by fishermen is between 
Saunders point and Morue spit in 11 fathoms water, mud or sand 
bottom. 

Port Saunders entrance is northeastward of Keppel island and 
400 yards wide between Saunders point on the south and Two Hills 
point, a wooded hill with a double summit, on the north, and the 
harbor extends eastward 24 miles, with an average width of 4 mile. 
(See Caution at p. 333.) 

76846—09 22 


338 CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. 


Bank.—A little within the entrance a steep dry shingle bank 
extends a short distance off the northern shore. 

Montaignac rock, which uncovers at about low water, is situated 
1 mile within the entrance and 300 yards from the southern shore. — 
Keppel Island lighthouse, open northward of Saunders point, bear- 
ing 252°, leads northwestward of the rock. 

Kent point is on the northern shore, 650 yards northeastward of 
Montaignac rock; Dunlop spit extends southeastward 400 yards from 
this point, and there is a depth of 3 feet water near its end. 

Directions.—There is anchorage inside the entrance and between 
it and Montaignac rock in 7 to 14 fathoms water. To proceed to the 
head of the bay, keep Keppel Island lighthouse open northward of 
Saunders point till within 500 yards of Kent point; then steer 125° 
between Montaignac rock and Dunlop spit, and when Two Hills 
point is in line with the southern shore, bearing about 269°, Dunlop 
spit is cleared; anchor in 6 fathoms water, just southward of that 
mark. Bowlders that dry extend from 40 to 60 yards from the 
beach nearly all around port Saunders, and make landing bad at low 
water. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in port Saunders at 
10h. 30m.; springs rise 6 feet; neaps rise 4% feet. 

Ice.—Port Saunders freezes late in November or early in Decem- 
ber, and the ice breaks up between April 20 and May 10. 

Supplies.—Fresh provisions can be obtained at port Saunders. 

Communication.—During summer and autumn the steamer from 
Bay of Islands calls at port Saunders weekly and the steamer from 
Halifax monthly. 

The land from Hawke bay slopes gradually down until in the 
extreme north it is flat and low, and the formation changes from 
granite and quartzite to a compact cherty limestone with an almost 
horizontal stratification. } 

The shore of Ingornachoix bay from Two Hills point trends 
north-northwestward for 4 miles to Gargamelle cove, and caution is 
required in its approach, as rocky ground, with less than 5 fathoms 
water over it, extends off it in places for distances of 4 to ? mile. 

Anchorage.—Temporary anchorage may be obtained, with land 
winds, off the shore northwestward of Two Hills point in 10 fathoms 
water and clear of the shoals. 

Gargamelle cove is only adapted for boats. At the head of the 
cove the isthmus, 400 yards long and 300 yards broad, that separates 
it from Old Port au Choix, joins Rich Point peninsula to the main- 
land. 

Rich Point peninsula extends westward 2,2, miles from the 
isthmus connecting it with the mainland and it has a width of about 


RICH POINT—-RICH POINT ROCK. 339 


#, miles. It consists of flat, gray rocks, and is terraced, and there 
are several crosses on its summit and slopes. 

The coast of the peninsula from Gargamelle cove bends southward 
and reaches Rich point at a distance of 2,2 miles. 

Rich point is the northern point of Ingornachoix bay and the 
western end of Rich Point peninsula. 

Light.—A white octagonal lighthouse, 64 feet high, with a red 
lantern, on Rich point, exhibits, at 98 feet above high water, a flash- 
ing white light, showing two flashes every five seconds, thus: Light 
0.25 second, eclipse 0.75 second, light 0.25 second, eclipse 3.75 seconds. 
The light should be seen from a distance of 15 miles in clear weather. 
The keeper’s dwelling near the lighthouse is white. 

Wireless telegraph station.—There is a wireless telegraph sta- 
tion at Rich Point lighthouse. (See p. 42.) 

Soundings.—The soundings westward of Rich point are irreg- 
ular, and rocky ground, with less than 20 fathoms water over it, 
extends 12 miles from the lighthouse. There are depths of 7 fathoms 
bearing 248°, distant 1,200 yards and 1,45 miles from the lighthouse. 
There is deep water on the northern side of this rocky ground, in 
which direction the 100-fathom contour line is 1 mile from it, and 
this line passes } mile northwestward of Black cape. 

Rich Point rock, with 6 feet of water over it, bears 302°, 900 
yards from the lighthouse; it is steep-to except on its western side, 
where depths of less than 5 fathoms extend to a distance of 250 yards. 
There is a passage between this rock and the shore, but a rock, with 4 
fathoms of water over it, bears 237°, nearly 600 yards from the hght- 
house. 

In heavy weather the sea is said to break on the 7-fathom patches 
and on Rich Point rock. 

Clearing marks.—The eastern end of Keppel Island cliff, just 
open westward of Rich point, leads about 100 yards southwestward 
of Rich Point rock; Round head, of Round Head island, well open 
northward of Black cape, leads northward of it. 

Caution.—As the ground seaward of Rich point has not been com- 
pletely sounded, give a wide berth to the point. 

Current and tidal streams.—A current usually sets northeast- 
ward off Rich point and along the coast; it is influenced by the tidal 
stream, which sets northeastward during the rising tide and south- 
westward during the falling tide. During the prevalence of strong 
northeasterly winds this current sometimes sets southwestward. (See 
p. 54.) 

The coast of Rich Point peninsula from Rich point trends north- 
eastward for 1,4; miles to Black cape, and thence about eastward for 
1,400 yards to the entrance to port au Choix. 


340 CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. 


Port au Choix extends } mile east-southeastward, and it is accessi- 
ble to vessels drawing less than 11 feet water, the entrance being 120 
yards wide, but le Malouin, a shoal off the southern shore, narrows 
the navigable channel to 50 yards. 

Port au Choix is separated from Old port au Choix by an isthmus 
300 yards broad, over which there is a path. 

Anchorages.—There are anchorages both westward and east- 
ward of Bénie islet, which les 250 yards inside of the entrance, and is 
connected to the northern shore by a sand bank. ; 

Directions.—Entering, keep one-third of the distance across the 
entrance from Laignet point, its northern point, and anchor in 13 
feet of water between it and Bénie islet; or pass southward of Bénie 
islet at high water, and anchor in 9 to 12 feet at low water off the 
northeastern shore, with Bénie islet bearing about 254°; westerly 
winds bring a swell into the outer anchorage. 

English bank (Anglais shoal), bearing 321°, distant } mile 
from the entrance to port au Choix, is nearly 400 yards long in a 
northeasterly and southwesterly direction, 150 yards wide, and has a 
depth of 74 to 10 fathoms over it. 

Port au Choix peninsula lies northeastward of port au Choix 
and the isthmus at its head; it is roughly circular in outhne and 
about a mile in diameter. Jts northern coast from Laignet point 
trends about north-northeast for } mile and then turns eastward for 
600 yards to Barbacé cove. 

Barbacé cove is small and used by boats, but it affords no shelter 
with westerly winds. The coast from the cove trends northeastward 
for 900 yards to Barbacé point, from which shoals extend 300 yards, 
and it then turns south-southeastward for ? mile to the entrance to 
Old port au Choix. 

Old Port au Choix (locally Back arm), on the southeastern side 
of Port au Choix peninsula, is 1 mile long, + mile wide at the entrance 
and 4 mile at the head; shoals, which partly dry, extend off its north- 
western shore, but the southeastern shore is nearly bold-to; it 1s en- 
tered by two channels, one on each side of Querré islet. 

Querré islet, in the middle of the entrance, is 350 yards long in 
a northeasterly and southwesterly direction, 100 yards wide, and bold- 
to on the northwestern side, but the other coasts are foul. 

Savage island, northeastward ? mile from Querré islet, and 
nearly joined to it by a chain of rocks and shoals, is 700 yards long 
in a northeasterly and southwesterly direction, 300 yards wide, and 
49 feet high; there are several fishermen’s huts on it. The island is 
joined to the mainland by a bank, over which the depth is generally 
less than 3 fathoms. 

Sauvageon rock lies 200 yards westward of the island. 


ARDENT ROCK. 341 


Ardent rock lies less than 150 yards westward from Querré islet, 
and is joined to Port au Choix peninsula by shoal water. Ardent tail, 
a shoal, extends 200 yards northeastward from the rock. 

Beacons.—A beacon stands on the southwestern end of Querré 
islet, and a similar beacon on a small cliff on the southeastern shore 
of the port; these beacons in line bear.200°. 

At the head of the harbor are three pyramidal beacons, Lower 
pyramid, the lowest of these, is on the shore; the middle one, sur- 
mounted by a ball, is about 350 yards behind it; and Gargamelle 
pyramid, the third, is on the summit of the land at rather over 100 
yards inside of the northwestern shore of Gargamelle cove; these 
beacons in line bear 223°. 

A beacon stands on the shore, bearing 132°, distant 4+ mile from 
Querré Islet beacon; and two beacons are situated on the shore, bear- 
ing 96°, distant about 950 yards from Querré Islet beacon, which in 
line bear 127°. 

A beacon, with a St. Andrew’s cross top mark, stands on the south- 
ern shore of the port, bearing 80°, distant 665 yards from Lower 
pyramid beacon; it is a good anchoring mark. 

Directions.—From about $ mile northeastward of Barbace point 
steer southwestward and bring the beacon on the southeastern shore 
of the port in ne with the beacon on the southwestern end of Querre 
islet, bearing 200°. Keep these beacons in line until the three bea- 
cons at the head of the harbor are in line, bearing 223°, which mark 
leads in 4% fathoms, the deepest water, into the port. When inside 
of Querre islet keep a little toward the southeastern shore, and anchor 
at the head in 45 fathoms water. Round head, just shut in southeast- 
ward of Savage island, leads southeastward of the shoals on the north- 
western side of the port. 

To pass southeastward of Savage island in a least depth of 16 feet 
bring, while about $ mile northeastward of Savage island, the beacon 
southeastward of Querre islet, just opened southward of the southern 
end of a rocky*islet, situated about 250 yards northeastward of the 
beacon, bearing 219°, which mark leads about 100 yards southeast- 
ward of Savage island. 

The beacons eastward of Querre islet in line lead over the shoal 
northeastward of the islet at about 100 yards from the islet, and in a 
least depth of 15 feet water. 

Caution.—In a steam vessel, avoid the nets that are usually set off 
Barbace point. 

Anchorage may be obtained at 400 yards southward of Savage 
island, in 5$ fathoms water, sheltered except from northeasterly 
winds, and temporary anchorage in the bay between Barbace point 
and Savage island in about 11 fathoms water, gravel bottom. 


342 CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. 


Ice.—Port au Choix freezes about December 15 and is completely 
closed by ice, about 3 feet thick, until about May 20; in 1883 the 
port was blocked till June 9; field ice appears about January 15 and. 
disappears about May 15. The first vessel usually arrives about May 
15, and the last leaves about November 10. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Old Port au Choix at 
10h. 40m.; springs rise 7} feet. 

St. John bay, lying southeastward of a line between Barbace and 
Ferolle points, which are 19} miles apart in a north-northeasterly 
and south-southwesterly direction, contains several islands, of which 
St. John island, situated 5 miles northeastward from Barbace point, 
is the largest; on the southeastern side of the bay are the South and 
North summits of the Highlands of St. John, flat and steep to sea- 
ward. South summit, 14 miles inland, is 1,610 feet, and North sum- 
mit, } mile inland, 1,595 feet high. 

Ice.—St. John bay fills with northern ice and freezes in December 
or January; the ice breaks up in May. During severe winters the ice 
extends from Rich point to Ferolle point. 

Rock.—A small rock, with a depth of 33 feet over it, white bottom, 
on which the sea breaks in heavy westerly gales, is situated with 
Savage island summit bearing 198°, distant 1,8, miles. 

Bustard cove, situated eastward 2 miles from Savage island, is 
open northwestward, and affords temporary anchorage in 11 fathoms 
water, but the holding ground is not good; shoals extend 900 yards 
from Chasseurs point and the eastern side of this cove. 

Green islet, surrounded by rocks and breakers, lies ? mile westward 
from Chasseurs point, leaving a narrow passage between. 

Old Man cove, eastward 2 miles from Chasseurs point, is a shallow 
bight, fronted, at the distance of about 4 mile, by Old Man shoal, a 
shoal bank about 800 yards in diameter, with two heads on it that dry. 

The shore of the bay from Old Man cove trends approximately 
northeastward for 114 miles to Squid cove, and it is fairly steep-to; 
heavy squalls sweep down from the Highlands of St. John. (The 
shore is continued at page 347.) 

St. John island is about 3 miles long in an easterly and westerly 
direction, and 24+ miles wide, moderately high, with a round summit, 
and wooded only at its northwestern end. 

Seal rocks, } mile southwestward of Photograph point, the south- 
western point of St. John island, are narrow and low, and extend 
about + mile in a northeasterly and southwesterly direction; they are 
steep-to on the southern side, but foul ground extends for a little 
more than 200 yards off the northern side. 

St. John harbor, on the western side of the island, extends east- 
ward and northeastward about 14 miles, with a width of 600 to 200 
yards, and is a good anchorage for steamers or small vessels, but 
square-rigged sailing ships require a leading wind to enter. 


HORN ISLAND—ROUND HEAD ISLAND. 343 


Both sides of the entrance are nearly steep-to, but the southern 
shore shoals, within the line of the points immediately inside. 

The Fox, a rock nearly awash, is situated 100 yards off the first 
point on the southern shore within the entrance. 

Shoal water extends a short distance off English point, the first 
point in on the northern shore. 

Clearing mark.—Bare point, just to the southward of a woody 
eminence in the profile of the land at the head of the bay, bearing 60°, 
leads close northward of the Fox and southward of the shoal water 
of English point, but this mark is reported to be of very little use. 

Anchorage.—There is temporary anchorage in Sesostris bay, a 
bight in the southern shore opposite English point, in 9 to 13 fathoms 
ef water, sand and mud bottom; small craft anchor in the Haven, at 
the head, in 5 fathoms, mud; the holding ground is good, but fresh 
westerly winds soon raise a sea. A vessel over 100 feet long should 
anchor in Sesostris bay and haul into, and moor in, the Haven, where 
the holding ground and shelter are good, but in heavy westerly gales 
the swell rolls in. 

The Men-hir, a remarkable rock, stands on the coast at a little 
more than $ mile northwestward of the entrance to St. John harbor. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in St. John harbor at 
10h. 40m.; springs rise 74 feet, neaps 54 feet. The tidal streams in 
the harbor are inappreciable. 

Square rock, southeastward, ? mile from Photograph point and 
300 yards offshore, is about 265 yards long in a northeasterly and 
southwesterly direction, 100 yards wide, 20 feet high, and steep-to 
on its northwestern side, leaving a clear passage between it and 
the island, but shoals extend nearly 200 yards from the other sides. 

Horn island, + mile long in a northeasterly and southwesterly 
direction and 150 yards wide, lies northeastward 4 mile from Square 
rock and is separated from St. John island by a passage 100 yards 
wide, with 13 feet of water in mid-channel. 

Horn spit, with 12 feet least water over it, extends east-northeast- 
ward for 600 yards from the middle of the eastern side of Horn 
island; it is steep-to. 

Beacon.—There is a beacon on Horn island. 

Round Head island, 750 yards southward of the eastern part of 
St. John island, is 14 miles long in an east-northeasterly and west- 
southwesterly direction, 750 yards wide and 180 feet high. Round 
head is a conspicuous hummock, 98 feet high, situated toward the 
western end of the northwestern coast of the island; and immediately 
southeastward of Round Head point, the northwestern end of the 
island, is Round Head cove, a shallow inlet nearly 600 yards in 
extent. 


344 CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. 


Round Head shoal, with 7 feet of water over it,extends southward 
250 yards from the southwestern point of the island. 

Shoal.—A shoal, with 44 fathoms of water over it, lies 295°, distant 
450 yards from Round Head point. 

Falaise shoal, with 13 feet of water over it, lies 150 yards north- 
ward of the northeastern part of Round Head island; there is a depth 
of 5 fathoms close northward of it. Horn island, a little open north- 
ward of the foot of Round head, bearing 239°, leads northwestward 
of the shoal. 

Good bay, a spacious anchorage between St. John and Round 
Head islands, has deep water, but good holding ground, and there is 
never any sea; it is entered either from the eastward or westward. 

Anchorage beacons.—Well point lies northeastward, distant 600 
yards from Horn island, and on the point are two beacons which in 
line bear 255°. 

On the northern shore of Good bay, nearly 4 mile northeastward of 
Well point, are two beacons which in line bear 355°. 

The best anchorage in Good bay is in about 17 fathoms at the inter- 
section of the lines of the two pairs of beacons. 

Well bay, a small bay of St. John island northward of Well point, 
affords good anchorage for small vessels in 7 fathoms of water, sand 
bottom, but shoal water extends 200 yards from the northern shore at 
4 mile eastward of the head of the bight. The well that gives the 
name to the bay is a curious natural excavation in the rock, 65 feet 
below the surface of the ground, near the path from Well bay to St. 
John harbor; the depth of water in the well is about 30 feet. 

Sheep island lies 150 yards off the northwestern shore and near 
the eastern end of Good bay; it is less than 200 yards in diameter; 
an islet and shoal water are between it and the shore to the westward, 
and a reef extends 400 yards southeastward of it. This reef is joined 
to Flat point, 400 yards to the northeastward, by a shoal bank. 

Barred bay, between Sheep island and Flat point, affords anchor- 
age to small craft, but the holding ground is bad. The northwestern 
side of Square rock in line with the southeastern side of Horn island, 
bearing 235°, leads southeastward of the shoals off Barred bay. 

Beacon.—There is a beacon on Flat point, the northeastern 
entrance point of Barred bay. 

Hare island, northeastward 1,200 yards from Round Head 
island, is 1,700 yards long in a northeasterly and southwesterly direc- 
tion, + mile wide, low and rugged; shoals extend nearly 400 yards 
from its southwestern end. 

Passage shoals, lying 350 yards from Round Head island, ahd 
between it and Hare island, are two heads, the western with a depth of 
6 feet of water, and the other, about 200 yards to the eastward, with 


BAYOT SHOAIL—RECULOUX SHOAL. 345 


a depth of 32 fathoms. There is a deep passage both eastward and 
westward of these shoals. 

Bayot shoal is a flat extending about } mile in a general north- 
easterly and southwesterly direction, with a width of 250 yards and 
depths of 7 feet to 44 fathoms over it, situated northward 350 yards 
from the northern end of Hare island. The beacons on Flat point 
and Horn island in line, or Black cape open northwestward of Round 
head, bearing 230°, lead northward of Bayot shoal and between it 
and Reculoux shoal, and North summit of the Highlands of St. John 
in line with the middle of the western Turr island, bearing 91°, leads 
northward of this shoal. 

The east coast of St. John island is foul to the distance of 14 
miles from Flat point to Turret point, which is the northeastern point 
of the island, and is so called from a circular mound near it. 

Wolf rock, at the northeastern end of these shoals, bears 81°, dis- 
tant 1,600 yards from Turret point, to which it is almost joined by 
rocks and a bank; Wolf tail, a reef, extends east-southeastward 600 
yards from it. 

Reculoux shoal bears 114°, distant 2,100 yards from Wolf rock, 
and there is a depth of 24 fathoms over it. The channel between 
Reculoux shoal and Bayot shoal is about 900 yards wide. 

Numerous shoals, with 3 feet to 5 fathoms of water over them, lie 
southward of Wolf rock and westward of Reculoux shoal. 

Round Head island, well open southward of Flat point, bearing 
226°, or the beacons on Flat point and Horn island in line, 230°, leads 
southward; and the ravine near South summit of the Highlands of 
St. John, open eastward of Hare islands, about 144°, leads eastward 
of all these shoals. 

Directions.—For Good bay from the westward, when southward 
of Square rock, bring Flat point beacon just open northward of 
Round Head island, bearing 40°, and approach Round Head point, 
with this mark on, to within 300 yards to clear Horn spit and the 
shoal with 44 fathoms of water over it. Then steer northward and 
anchor, with the beacons on the northern shore of the bay in line, 
bearing 355°, and those on Well point in line, bearing 255°, in about 
17 fathoms of water. Large vessels should moor eastward and west- 
ward. Southerly winds are the most violent, but there is never any 
sea, and the holding ground is good. 

From the eastward: Approach with the southern side of Horn 
island in line with Flat point, or the beacons on the island and point 
in line, bearing 230°, either of which marks leads between Bayot shoal 
and the shoals southeastward of Wolf rock. When the eastern end 
of Hare island bears 125°, steer 215° until the northwestern side of 
Square rock is in line with the southeastern side of Horn island, 


346 CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. 


bearing 235°; keep this mark on into the bay and anchor as above 
directed. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Good bay at 10h. 
40m.; springs rise 74 feet, neaps 54 feet. 

Turret bay.—The northern coast of St. John island from Turret 
point trends southwestward for 1,200 yards to Turret bay, which 
extends south-southeastward about 4+ mile and is shallow, but affords 
good shelter for small fishing craft in 1} to 3 fathoms. Temporary 
anchorage may be obtained off this bay in 12 fathoms of water. 

Fossil shoal, with 6 feet least water over it, stretches westward 
nearly a mile along the coast from about 700 yards northeastward of 
the western point of Turret bay. 

Flat island, about 1 mile westward of St. John island, is 1,35 
miles long, in a northerly and southerly direction, ? mile wide, low, 
smooth, and wooded on its northeastern part; rocks and shoals extend 
about 600 yards off the coasts of the southern half of the island; the 
Watchman (le Guetteur), a rock above water, is on the southeastern 
edge of these shoals. Shoal water extends } mile off the northern end 
of the island. 

Soundings.—The soundings westward of St. John bay are not 
regular; there is a depth of 26 fathoms in a position bearing 285°, 
distant 7% miles from the summit of Flat island, with 66 fathoms not 
far off. 

Shoal.—A shoal, with 44 fathoms of water over it, bears 60°, dis- 
tant about 1,600 yards from the northeastern point of Flat island; its 
position is doubtful. 

Twin islands, north-northeastward, 2? miles from Flat island, are 
two islands separated by a narrow channel, and together extend 1 
mile in a north-northeasterly and south-southwesterly direction, with 
a width of 4+ mile; they are low, flat, and covered with grass. There 
is a solitary house on the southern Twin island. 

Shoal.—A shoal, with 4 fathoms of water over it, bears 110°, dis- 
tant 14 miles from the northern end of the northern Twin island. 

Turr islands (iles aux Godes), bearing 74°, distant 14 miles from 
the northeastern end of Hare island, are two small islands, low and 
grassy, joined by shoal water, and together extending in an easterly 
and westerly direction 1,200 yards, with a width of about 400 yards. 

The Calculus, bearing 105°, distant ? mile from the eastern Turr 
island and about 1,600 yards off the mainland, is a small vock with 
clear passages on each side of it. 

Whale islands, northeastward about 3,3; miles from Turret point, 
St. John island, are two islands, each about 900 yards long and 400 
yards wide, low, flat, and grassy, lying nearly in an easterly and 
westerly direction from each other, the channel between being about 
300 yards wide, and shallow. There are several islets and reefs 


FREYCINET SHOAL—WHITE ISLAND. 347 


within a distance of 1,200 yards southward from them, among which 
boats find shelter. Dolmen, the western island, has a remarkable cliff, 
20°feet high at its eastern end, and shoals extend southward } mile 
from it; the southern and southwestern sides of these islands should 
not be approached nearer than a mile. 

A rocky shoal, with 8 to 9 fathoms over it, extends southwestward 
from the shoals southward of Dolmen island; the western end of this 
shoal bears 230°, distant 1,8; miles from the western end of Dolmen 
island. 

Freycinet shoal, with 7 feet water over it, bears 350°, distant 
1,600 yards from the eastern end of the eastern Whale island. A 
rock, with 27 feet of water over it, bears 96°, distant 900 yards from 
Freycinet shoal. 

James island, bearing 68°, 34 miles from the northern Twin is- 
land, is about 1,200 yards long in a northeasterly and southwesterly 
direction, 400 yards wide, 20 feet high, covered with grass, and clear 
on. all sides. 

Fox islands, situated north-northeastward, 2 miles from Whale 
islands, are two flat islands about 20 feet high and covered with grass, 
together extending about 1 mile northwest and southeast, with a 
width of 800 yards. An islet lies in the southern part of the chan- 
nel between them. Breton reef, southwestward, 1 mile from the 
western island, uncovers. The channels between the islands and 
between them and Breton reef must not be used for navigation, but 
those between Breton reef and Freycinet shoal, and between Breton 
reef and James island are clear. Fishing boats and small schooners 
anchor in the space between the two large islands, but the holding 
ground is bad and the sea heavy with northerly winds. 

Squid cove is shallow and open southwestward. Castor point is 
on the northern side of the cove, and an islet lies off its western side. 

Shoal water extends 248° for 2 miles from a point situated south- 
ward 4 mile from Castor Point islet; this includes Cloué shoal, which 
has 3 feet of water over it, and lies 1,3, miles from the point. Testu 
bank, bearing 248°, 21 miles from Castor Point islet, is about 350 
yards in diameter, and has a least depth of 4 fathoms over it. 

Castors harbor entrance is between Castor and Yellow points, 
Castor point being low, wooded, and bordered by rocks extending 
off nearly a mile. 

The harbor extends eastward 2 miles, and the entrance is ? mile 
wide, but banks and shoals stretch off both shores, making the chan- 
nel narrow and intricate. It is suitable only for small vessels. 

Beacons.—There are two beacons on Yellow point. 

White island, westward, ;°, mile from Yellow point, is 300 yards 
long in a northeasterly and southwesterly direction, and 100 yards 
wide. A small rock lies northward 250 yards, and shoals extend 


348 CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. 


southeastward $ mile from it; both island and rock are fairly steep-to 
except to the southeastward. 

The Bar, a low rock, lies nearly in the middle of the harbor, withm 
the entrance, and is scarcely visible, except at low water, when there 
is no difficulty in rounding its southern end. 

Directions.—The tidal streams are strong both in the entrance 
and at the anchorage, and it is better not to enter nor leave Castors 
harbor except at slack water. From the southward bring St. Mar- 
garet mountain, distant 8 miles from Yellow point, in line with the 
eastern extreme of the bare part of Yellow point, bearing 49°, which 
mark leads less than 200 yards northwestward of Testu bank, 400 
yards northwestward of the shoals off Castor point, and 450 yards 
southeastward of the shoals southeastward of White island. 

When the first hill, to the right of a summit that lies southward 
of a wooded hill at the head, is in line with the northern end of 
the high-water line of the Bar rocks, bearing 87°, keep this mark on 
till the beacons on Yellow point are in line. Keep the beacons in 
line astern, 316°, and round southward of the Bar, to the anchorage 
in 34 fathoms water in a direction at about 91° from the Bar. 

If the beacons on Yellow point are down, keep a remarkable notch 
in the Highlands of St. John, eastward of the bare point of that 
hill, a little eastward of the square bowlder on the southern shore, 
bearing 136°. See views of the leading marks on chart 606a. 

Castor river flows into the southeastern part of the harbor from 
a large pond at a short distance inland, and it affords good salmon 
fishing during the season. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Castors harbor at 
10h. 50m.; springs rise about 5 feet. 

John Meagher cove, on the northern side of Yellow point, is 
open westward, and encumbered with shoals off both points and in 
the cove, while rocks extend southwestward some distance from the 
northern point. 

Black islet, north-northwestward, about 2 miles from White 
island, is low and surrounded by rocks that cover, and shoals that 
extend northward # mile from it; there is a passage for boats between 
it and the shore. 

Maldigues bay.—Ferolle point, the western end of New Ferolle 
peninsula, lies northwestward, 32 miles from Black islet, and Mal- 
digues bay, between them, is filled with shoals, some of which are 
over a mile offshore. 

Old Boy shoal, bearing 205°, distant 1;{; miles from Ferolle point, 
is a patch about 800 yards long in a north-northeasterly and south- 
southwesterly direction, with 44 to 6 fathoms of water over it. 

Ferolle point bearing eastward of 35°, leads northward of Old Boy 
shoal. 


NEW FEROLLE PENINSULA—ST. MARGARET BAY. 349 


New Ferolle peninsula, of moderate height, and partly. wooded, 
is 24 miles long from Ferolle point to New Ferolle point, and is 
joined to the mainland by a low isthmus, 600 to 800 yards wide, over 
which the masts of the fishing vessels can be seen. Detached rocks 
appear to extend nearly 200 yards from Ferolle point. The northern 
coast is steep-to, but New Ferolle point is foul to the distance of 400 
yards northeastward.’ 

Jehenne bank.—A rock with 16 feet of water over it is situated 
on Jehenne bank, with New Ferolle point bearing 178°, distant 2,050 
yards. 

This rock is approximately in the middle of the bank, which 
extends within the 10-fathom line 1,400 yards in a northeasterly and 
southwesterly direction, with a width of 700 yards; there are depths 
of 43 to 6 fathoms in places on the bank. 

A shoal, with 44 fathoms over it, hes north-northeastward of the 
bank with New Ferolle point bearing 193°, distant 14 miles. 

New Ferolle cove extends southward 1 mile from New Ferolle 
point. Black point, which bears 105°, distant 14 miles from New 
Ferolle point, is the other headland. The cove is open northeastward, 
and, although it is a bad anchorage, it is much frequented. 

The middle of this cove is occupied by a shoal, with 2 to 24 fath- 
oms water over it, which extends as far to the northeastward as the 
line between New Ferolle to Black points. Anchorage in 4 fathoms 
of water may be obtained at a distance of 4 mile in a direction 152° 
from New Ferolle point. 

St. Margaret bay is entered between Black point and Dog penin- 
sula; this peninsula bears 46°, distant 1} miles from the point, and 
is of moderate height, covered with brushwood, and faced by cliffs. 

The bay extends 34 miles southeastward, but the eastern portion 
is filled with islets and shoal banks, among which only very small 
craft can find shelter. There are several shoal spots near the center 
of the bay; the two westernmost, with least depths of 44 fathoms, lie 
24°, distant 2,800 yards, and 28°, distant 2,130’ yards, respectively, 
from Bank point. The western side is fairly clear, and anchorage 
may be obtained off South cove. Care must be taken to anchor in the 
small space, in not less than 6 fathoms water, mud bottom, with the 
fall of the Highlands of St. John open westward of a large square 
stone at the head of South cove, bearing about 192°, and St. Margaret 
mountain in line with the western reef inside of Rase island, 80°. The 
depths in the approach to this anchorage were reported in 1885 to be 
1 fathom less than charted. Except in the position given, the bottom 
consists of slippery rocks with long seaweed, over which the anchor 
drags. Shoal water 3} fathoms les 300 yards inside the anchorage. 

Rock.—<A rocky patch about 400 yards in extent with less than 
5 fathoms water over it, and with a small head, on which there is a 


350 CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. 


depth of 15 feet, near its western edge, lies in the fairway to the 
anchorage in St. Margaret bay, with Black point bearing 290°, dis- 
tant 1,900 yards. New Ferolle point in line with Black point leads 
close northward of the patch. 

Ice.—St. Margaret bay freezes late in November or in December, 
and the ice breaks up about the middle of May. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in St. Margaret bay at 
10h. 31m.; springs rise 54 feet. Strong southerly winds raise the 
water about 14 feet. 

The coast from the northern point of Dog peninsula to Grave 
point, situated 3 miles eastward, is low and indented with several 
open coves, on the shores of which are some huts. It is difficult to 
distinguish from a distance. Shoal water extends 700 yards off the 
shore of Dog cove, which lies eastward of the peninsula, and less than 
400 yards off other parts of the coast. 

Woody hill, southeastward, 1,300 yards from Grave point and 4 
mile inland, is 151 feet high, and the highest part of the coast range; 
a bare patch on its seaward face helps to indicate it when seen against 
the high ranges of the background. 

‘Brig bay is immediately southeastward of Grave point. A rock, 
with 15 feet of water over it, bears 18°, distant 450 yards from Grave 
point, and there are depths of less than 5 fathoms between it and the 
point. 

Entrance island bears 29°, distant 4 mile from Grave point, and 
hes on the northeastern side of South pass, the entrance to Brig 
bay and to Old Férolle harbor. It is about 200 yards across, 10 feet 
high, and covered with gray flat stones. Rocks that cover, and shoal 
water extend 465 yards southwestward of the island, and shoal water 
extends 200 yards off the northwestern side, but the southeastern 
side is bold-to. A shingle spit, steep-to, extends 100 yards eastward 
Ot it. 

Beacons.—A _ pile of stones, surmounted by a pole, stands on En- 
trance island, and there is a beacon on West mound, 52 feet high, 300 
yards within the southwestern end of Old Férolle island. Two lead- 
ing beacons, consisting of poles surmounted by white casks, are sit- 
uated on the shore southeastward of Front point. Three beacons 
stand on Grave point. Dependence should not be placed on these 
beacons being in position. 

Directions.—To enter by Southern pass, bring the two leading 
beacons in line, bearing 119°, which leads southward of the shoals 
extending from Entrance island and about 100 yards northward of 
the 15-foot rock off Grave point. When the beacons on Entrance and 
Old Férolle islands are in line, bearing about 18°, or when Grave 
point bears 203°, keep the beacons in line astern, or steer for the 
western shore of Brig bay, keeping it distant:150 yards, until the first 


OLD FEROLLE ISLAND. 351 


cove opens-on the western shore, when anchor in the bay in 64 
fathoms of water, mud bottom, with good holding ground. 

Vessels bound northward and requiring temporary anchorage can 
go into this bay, as it is left easily with westerly winds. 

Old Férolle island.—The southwestern end of this island lies 
northward 200 yards from Entrance island; the channel between is 
shoal, and there is a small rock in the middle, but it is used by boats 
and small schooners. Old Férolle island is 1,44 miles long in a north- 
easterly and southwesterly direction, generally about 400 yards wide, 
69 feet high, bare on its northwestern side, and covered with gray flat 
stones. On the upper parts of the northwestern side of the island 
there are dead trees, except for about 800 yards from the south- 
western end, where there is grass. 

Fish island lies northward 600 yards from Old Férolle island; a 
shallow flat, on which are three islets and some rocks, connects them. 

Old Férolle harbor, between Old Férolle island, with the islands 
northward of it, and the mainland, is about 1 mile long in a direction 
parallel to Old Férolle island, about 300 yards broad between the 
5-fathom lines southeastward of Old Férolle island, with an an- 
chorage about 800 yards long in a northerly and southerly direction, 
and over 200 vards wide, northeastward of that island, is entered 
by Southern pass, southwestward of Entrance island, and Northern 
pass, northeastward of Fish island, the latter being available only 
for small vessels. 

Local magnetic disturbance of the compass has been experi- 
enced in this harbor, and is said to continue off the coast northeast- 
ward to Current island. (See p. 75.) 

Directions.—By Southern pass: Enter with the leading beacons, 
within Front point in line, bearing 119°, and when Debon peninsula 
is open eastward of Entrance island, bearing 57°, round into the 
channel; pass southeastward rather less than 200 yards from En- 
trance island, and keep near the northwestern shore; or the three 
beacons on Grave point in line, astern, bearing 225°, lead southeast- 
ward of Entrance island and up the harbor. Anchor with Debon 
peninsula bearing 125°, in 6 to 9 fathoms water, or farther northeast- 
ward with the fresh-water stream bearing 80°, in 7 fathoms. 

To proceed northeastward from the anchorage, keep the south- 
eastern coast of Old Férolle island close aboard, and just shut En- 
trance island in, bearing 220°, before the stream bears 91°; this mark 
leads northeastward in a least depth of 34 fathoms. When the 
eastern end of Fish island bears 0° keep it so until the northern point 
of Old Férolle island bears 282°, when steer toward the middle of 
Fish island and anchor with the eastern point of Fish island bearing 
12°, distant 400 yards, in 7 fathoms of water, mud bottom. 


By Northern pass: Previous to entering, mark the eastern end of 


Soe CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. 


the bank off Fish island by a buoy or boat; pass this bank at a dis- 
tance of 40 yards, and then steer for nearly } mile toward the sum- 
mit of Old Férolle island, and anchor in 7 fathoms of water, mud 
bottom. 

This entrance is difficult to distinguish, and care should ‘be taken 
not to mistake another passage between the islands for it. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Old Férolle harbor 
at 9h. 46m.; springs rise about 5 feet. The flood tidal stream sets 
southward and the ebb northward, but when the wind is strong the 
water moves in its direction. 

Seal cove, north-northeastward, # mile from Fish island, is open 
westward and does not afford good anchorage. A reef extends south- 
westward, 350 yards from Seal point, the northern point of this cove. 

Cape Ste. Genevieve, northeastward 3 mile from Seal point, is 
low, covered with small trees, fringed by shoals, and must not be 
approached within $ mile. Cape islet is nearly joined to the northern 
point of the cape headland by shoal water. 

Pond cove, eastward of the cape headland, extends 1 mile to the 
southward, is completely open northward, and filled with shoals; the 
eastern side of the cove is a narrow peninsula projecting about north- 
northeastward nearly 32, mile from the mainland; it is low, wooded, 
and terminates in South West point, which les eastward, distant 
1,700 yards from Cape islet. 

Entry island, lying close northward of South West point, with 
shoal water between and passage only for small boats, is shingle, with 
a little verdure at the top, low, and difficult to recognize. Reefs 
stretch westward from this island, leaving a channel 200 yards wide 
between them and the shoals off Gooseberry island. 

Gooseberry island, northward about 4 mile from Entry island, 
is nearly 1 mile long in a northeasterly and southwesterly direction, 
300 yards wide, low, flat, and covered with grass. Reefs extend 
southward or toward Entry island for 700 yards, and on the eastern 
part of these reefs and 600 yards from Entry island is Porpoise 
rock, that uncovers at half tide. 

Current island, northward about 4 mile from Gooseberry island, 
is of irregular shape, about 1,4, miles long, and 600 yards wide, low, 
flat, and covered with verdure; the outer coasts are fringed by bowl- 
ders. Fisherman cove, in which are some huts, is a small indenta- 
tion in the northern side. 

Beacon.—There is a pile of stones surmounted by a pole on a 
mound near the southwestern end of Current island. 

Ste. Genevieve bay lies between the mainland and Entry, Goose- 
berry, and Current islands. The eastern shore of the bay is wooded, 
low, without any distinctive feature, and bordered by shoals, several | 
of which are situated eastward of Entry island, leaving, however, 


STE. GENEVIEVE BAY——DIRECTIONS. 308 


sufficient space for a good anchorage for fishing craft between them 
and Entry island in 3? to 5 fathoms of water. 

Beef island lies eastward from the northern end of Gooseberry 
island. Coot island les northward 265 yards from Beef island, and 
there is safe anchorage eastward of the passage between these islands 
in 5 fathoms of water, mud bottom. 

Mutton island hes close north-northwestward of Coot island, and 
a bank extends east-northeastward of it, leaving a narrow passage 
between it and the mainland, into which small craft enter. 

Directions.—Ste. Genevieve bay should not be entered without a 
pilot; the channels are narrow, intricate, and le between sunken 
rocks. 

By South pass.—Approach with the northern end of Entry island 
bearing 80°, until a small hill, eastward of the bay, is in line with 
an alley between the trees bearing 64°; keep this mark on which 
leads, in not less than 18 feet water, between the shoals off Entry 
island and Porpoise rock; or if Porpoise rock is visible, pass halfway 
between the island and that rock. After passing Entry island haul 
southward, and anchor before its summit bears 237°. To proceed 
farther eastward, either buoy the banks on both sides or send a boat 
ahead, and anchor off a stream on the southeastern side of the bay, 
where there is a salmon fishery. 

To pass between Grand Platier and Green rocks: Proceed on the 
leading mark until the southeastern end of Beef island bears 23°, then 
haul up for it on that bearing and anchor southeastward about 400 
yards from Green rocks. 

By Middle pass, which is between Gooseberry and Current islands, 
and suitable for vessels drawing not more than 13 feet of water: Be- 
fore entering, place a buoy in 13 feet of water on the southeastern side 
of the 6-foot bank in the middle of the pass, which should be 300 
yards from the northern point of Gooseberry island, and a second 
buoy in 13 feet of water at the northeastern end of the bank stretch- 
ing off that island. Pass close southward of the first buoy, and close 
northeastward of the second buoy, and anchor in 5 to 64 fathoms of 
water when inside it. To go farther eastward: When the fishing 
stage at the eastern point of Gooseberry island bears 192°, steer to 
pass 200 vards northward of Lobster island; then alter course to 113°, 
and anchor southward of Beef island. 

North pass, between Current island and the mainland, is suitable 
only for small craft. 

Ice.—Ste. Genevieve bay freezes late in November or during 
December, and the ice breaks up about the middle of May. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Ste. Genevieve bay at 
10h. 43m.; springs rise 64 feet, neaps 4 feet. 

76846—09- 23 


354 CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. 


Black Duck cove, 1 mile northeastward from Current island, is 
an open bight, with several fishermen’s houses on its shores. 

St. Barbe point, } mile northeastward from Black Duck cove, is 
tolerably steep, low, and wooded; it is bordered by a shingle beach 
and broken white stones, and must not be approached nearer than 400 
yards. 

St. Barbe bay lies within St. Barbe and Anchor points, which 
bear north-northwestward and south-southeastward, distant 1,5 miles 
from each other. The northeastern and eastern shores of the bay are 
fringed by shoals. Winter flat, with 10 feet least water over it, is 
nearly 800 yards offshore. Except in the harbor the ground is very 
foul and rocky, and breakers are said to extend right across the bay 
after heavy westerly gales. 

St. Barbe harbor, at the southeastern end of the bay, is entered 
between Harbor point, which is marked by a lobster factory on it, on 
the western side, and Stony point on the eastern side. Shoal water 
extends a short distance off both shores, and the harbor stretches 
south-southeastward and east-northeastward with depths of 34 to 44 
fathoms; from this it gradually shoals eastward to East river. The 
rocks are limestone, in nearly horizontal strata. . 

Directions.—Pass between Winter flat and the shoal water off the 
southern shore in not less than 6 fathoms of water; when the house in 
Traitant cove (the first bend on the western side of the harbor) opens 
off Harbor point, bearing about 181°, keep in mid-channel into the 
harbor and anchor in 4} fathoms of water, mud bottom, good holding 
ground, with the wharf in Traitant cove bearing 226°, and Harbor 
point 316°. 

Ice.—St. Barbe bay freezes late in November or during December, 
and the ice breaks up about the middle of May. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in St. Barbe harbor at 
10h. Om.; springs rise 4 feet, neaps 3 feet. The streams in the fair- 
way continue one hour after high and low water on the shore. 

Communication.—The steamers from Bay of Islands call weekly 
at St. Barbe harbor during summer and autumn, and those from 
Halifax call monthly. 

Winter cove, northward, ? mile from Stony point, is completely 
open westward, and the entrance is partially obstructed by reefs lying 
off the southern point. 

Anchor cove, situated immediately southeastward of Anchor 
point, is open southwestward, but affords shelter to a few small craft 
that moor head and stern, and are safe, as the heavy sea breaks on the 
entrance points and only the swell runs up the cove; the houses at the 
head of this cove are white and generally conspicuous. 

Anchor point is low, and Anchor ledge and shoal water extend 
southwestward for a distance of 1,100 yards from it. 


SEAL ISLANDS—-FLOWER COVE. 3Do 


Tidal streams.—The tidal streams along the coast from Anchor 
point to the entrance of Belle Isle strait sometimes attain a rate of 2 
knots, an hour, the flood setting southwestward and the ebb north- 
eastward, but they are much influenced by the wind. 

The coast from Anchor point trends about north-northeastward 
for 2 miles to Bear Cove point; it is low, and shoal water stretches off 
it for 400 to 1,000 yards. Deadman cove, + mile southward of Bear 
Cove point, contains some houses, and its northeastern point is a con- 
spicuous black cliff; Bear cove, eastward 1,200 yards from Bear Cove 
point, has also some houses on its shores. 

Seal islands, north-northeastward, 14 miles from Bear Cove point, 
are a group of four islands and some rocks, separated from the main- 
land by a narrow channel only suitable for boats. The outer or 
norwestern island is composed of white rock the inner and largest 
is covered with grass and has several houses near the summit. Seal 
ledges extend northward 300 yards from Seal islands and are 
steep-to. 

Pillot bank, northwestward, 1,!, miles from the northwestern Seal 
island, and off the entrance of Flower cove, is about 400 yards in 
extent in a northerly and southerly direction, and has a depth of 54 
fathoms over it. A depth of 19 feet has been reported, but the fisher- 
men state that it does not exist. 

Flower cove, east-northeastward of Seal islands, and southward 
8 mile from Flower Island lighthouse, is much frequented by fishing 
craft, and affords good anchorage to vessels of moderate length, 
drawing less than 16 feet water. The court-house, a large square 
house of darker color than any of the others in the settlement, is on 
the highest part of Capstan point, which is the northern side of the 
cove, and is low and fringed with a stony beach. 

The cove extends northeastward nearly 1 mile, with a width of 
4 mile at the entrance, narrowing to the head. Rocky islet lies in 
the middle of the entrance, and there is shoal water between it and 
the northern shore. 

It is reported that Flower cove has shoaled, and that there are 24 
feet less water than is charted. 

Directions.—Pass at least + mile northward of Seal islands to 
clear Seal ledges, and when the rocky islet in the entrance to the cove 
bears 88°, steer to enter the cove in mid-channel between the islet and 
the point southeastward of it and anchor with the islet bearing 243°, 
distant about 300 yards, in 2? fathoms water, or about 400 yards 
farther northeastward in mid-channel, in the same depth inside of 
the peninsula on the southern shore. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, at Flower cove at 
10h. 6m. 


300 |. CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. 


Communication.—The steamers from Bay of Islands call weekly 
at Flower cove during summer and autumn, and those from Halifax 
call monthly. 

Flower island lies northward about 900 yards from Capstan point, 
and southwestward 150 yards from Nameless point, the end of a 
peninsula about a mile in length on the northern side of Nameless 
cove. The island is 400 yards long, eastward and westward, and 200 
yards wide; and there is a house on it. 

Light.—A square white lighthouse with a red lantern, 50 feet high, 
and a dwelling attached, on the western side of Flower island, exhib- 
its at 51 feet above high water, a revolving white light, that attains 
its greatest brilliancy every thirty seconds, and should be seen from a 
distance of 12 miles in clear weather. ' 

Nameless cove, entered northward of Capstan point, is suitable 
only for small vessels drawing less than 9 feet water, being nearly 
filled by islands and shoals. Herb island les eastward of Flower 
island, and northward of the passage between these two is Slab 
island. 

Directions.—Bring the eastern fishing stage at the head a little 
open northward of Herb island, bearing 63°, and pass between Herb 
and Slab islands at one-third of the distance across from Herb island; 
when the western fishing stage bears 0°, steer for it and anchor in 
34 fathoms water, with the northern end of Slab island bearing 271°, 
avoiding a bank northeastward of Herb island. There is another 
small space for anchorage, reached by passing northward of the bank 
northeastward of Herb island in 13 feet water. 

Small craft enter this cove by passing between Herb island and the 
southern shore. 

The anchorage southward of Flower island, off the entrance of 
Nameless cove, is bad. 

Flower ledges, parts of which uncover at low water, extend 2 
mile west-northwestward of Flower island. The houses in Bear cove 
open westward of Seal islands, bearing 178°, lead westward of the 
ledges. The tidal streams set strongly over the ledges. 

Grenville ledge, northward, 800 yards from Nameless point, has 
2 feet water over it. 

Strait of Belleisle.—Description, soundings, tidal streams, cur- 
rents, icebergs, fogs, general directions, ete., see Chapters VII and X. 

The coast of Newfoundland between Flower island and cape 
Norman, a distance of 374 miles, is low and featureless, backed by a 
wooded ridge about 100 feet high. There are numerous huts and 
fishing sheds near the sea, but no marks of any kind that enable a 
mariner to fix his position. 

The coast from Nameless point trends east-northeastward for 124 
miles to Eddies cove; it contains several small coves and bights. 


MISTAKEN COVE—GREEN ISLAND ROCK. aon 


Mistaken cove, east-northeastward, 1,700 yards from Nameless 
point, is nearly dry at low water; the land around the cove is low 
and covered with vegetation. 

Savage cove, northeastward, 1%; miles from Mistaken cove, 
affords good anchorage to small vessels in 13 feet water, and is easy 
of access. The entrance is northeastward of Cooper island, which is 
nearly joined to the southern shore, and on which are the fishing 
establishments. Strong northwesterly winds produce a heavy swell 
in the cove. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Savage cove at about 
10h. 45m.; springs rise about 44 feet. 

Sandy cove, east-northeastward 1 mile from Savage cove, affords 
anchorage for small vessels in 4% fathoms water, sheltered from 
southerly and easterly winds. 

Double ledge, about 800 yards offshore at 2 miles northeastward 
from Sandy cove, is nearly awash at low water. 

Poynes Cove rock, ? mile off shore at 14 miles west-southwestward 
of Green island, has 6 feet of water over it. 

Green island lies ? mile off shore at 44 miles northeastward of 
Sandy cove; it is about 1,300 yards long in a northeasterly and south- 
westerly direction, narrow, and 10 feet high, with its top covered 
with grass. There are three fishing huts close together near the 
middle of the island, which can be seen from a distance of about 10 
miles in clear weather. 

Green Island rock.—Shoal water extends east-northeastward 1 
mile from the eastern end of Green island, and Green Island rock, 
which has two heads with less than 6 feet water over them, and on 
which the sea breaks heavily with any swell, lies within_the shoal 
water at about 800 yards from the island. 

Shoal water of less than 3 fathoms extends southwestward about 
600 yards, and southward 300 to 500 yards from Green island. 

Anchorage.—There is anchorage in 5 to 6 fathoms between the 
eastern end of the island and the mainland, with fair shelter except 
from northeasterly winds. The holding ground is indifferent, being 
hard and stony. 

Directions.—Enter the anchorage from the eastward. Approach 
with the houses on the western side of Green Island brook, which 
flows into the sea at 1% miles eastward of Green island, bearing a 
little westward of 146°; when the southwestern end of Green island 
bears 259°, steer about 251°, along the mainland at a distance of 600 
to 800 yards, and anchor when the northeastern end of the island 
bears 315°, distant nearly 4 mile. The Newfoundland coast must 
not be closed, as shoal water extends nearly 400 yards from it. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, at Green island at about 
10h. 20m.; springs rise about 3? feet. The streams run at the rate of 


358 CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. 


1 to 2 knots at the anchorage, the flood setting southward, and the 
ebb northeastward. 

Eddies cove, eastward about 45 miles from Green island, affords 
good shelter for small boats, with all winds, inside a ledge of rock 
just eastward of West point, at the western end of the cove. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, at Eddies cove at about 
10h. 3m.; springs rise about 34 feet. 

The coast from Eddies cove trends east-northeastward and is 
straight and rocky, with occasional low cliffs, to Big brook, a distance 
of 13 miles. 

Anchorage.—Watts point is northeastward about 54 miles from 
West point of Eddies cove, and there is anchorage water between 
these points at + to 1 mile offshore, but with no shelter from the pre- 
vailing winds. 

Big brook affords good shelter for small boats. 

The coast from Big brook continues northeastward for 54 miles to 
the western entrance point of Watts bight. 

Watts bight, or Open bay, is ? mile wide between the entrance 
points and about 4+ mile deep, but shoal water extends around it; it 
does not afford any protection to vessels, although boats shelter in its 

shallow northeastern end during easterly weather. 

- Boat head, eastward of Watts bight, is a peninsula projecting 
about $ mile from the mainland; it is about 14 miles long in a north- 
easterly and southwesterly direction, 49 feet high, bare and grassy on 
top, and falls southeastward to a marshy flat separating Watts bight 
from Boat harbor. 

Boat harbor, on the eastern side of Boat head, affords fairly good 
shelter to vessels drawing less than 14 feet of water during westerly 
winds, the anchorage abreast the northeastern point of Boat head 
being protected from the sea by a reef extending nearly 800 yards 
from the point. A reef, with 1 to 2 fathoms over it, extends nearly 
600 yards from the main at nearly 4 mile northeastward of Boat head. 
The passage«dnto the harbor between the two reefs is about 200 yards 
wide, and there is anchorage in the harbor in 34 fathoms. 

During strong northeasterly winds the harbor is unapproachable 
owing to the heavy swell, although boats find fairly good shelter at 
its head, where the swell is somewhat stopped by patches of reef and 
shoal water. 

The coast is low and rocky for nearly a mile northeastward of 
Boat head, and thence to cape Norman, a distance of 3 miles, it is 
composed of cliffs of loose shale 70 to 80 feet high. It is steep-to, the 
20-fathom contour line being little more than $ mile off the land. 

Cape Norman is bare, rocky, and rises to low cliffs. On it are 
several huts used by the seal fishers. The northwestern side of the 
cape is steep, but from close southeastward of it to Whale point, which 


CAPE NORMAN BAY—COOK HARBOR. 359 


lies southeastward } mile from the cape, rocky noo Be extend about 
400 yards offshore. 

Light.—A white cylindrical iron tower, surmounted by a white. 
cylindrical iron lantern with a red roof, 57 feet high, on the summit 
of the cliff at about 400 yards westward of cape Norman, exhibits at 
116 feet above high water a flashing white lght Renae groups of 
3 flashes every 30 seconds, thus: F ane 4 second, eclipse 54 seconds; 
flash $ second, eclipse 54 seconds; flash $ second, eclipse 173 Seon: 
which should be visible from a ie ‘of 16 miles in clear weather. 

Fog signal.—A diaphone, worked by compressed air, gives blasts 
of 5 seconds duration, with intervals of 30 seconds between them, 
during thick or foggy weather. The fog-signal house, a square white 
building with a red roof, is situated about 100 yards eastward of the 
Periioace 

Tides.—It is high water, full and cae at cape Norman at about 
8h. 5m.; springs rise 3 feet, approximately. 

Cape Norman bay, a mile wide between Whale point and the 
northwestern end of Cook Point peninsula, is open to the northeast- 
ward, and affords no safe anchorage. 

The coast from the northwestern end of Cook Point peninsula 
trends eastward nearly 1,200 yards to Cook point; it is low and bor- 
dered by shoals which extend offshore for a distance of 400 yards and 
from an inlet named Bonne bay. 

Cook rocks, over which there is a least depth of 24 fathoms, extend 
northeastward ? mile from the northwestern part of the peninsula. 

Priest rock, the northern of the shoals off the peninsula, bears 
343°, distant 1,300 yards from Cook point, and has a least depth of 
13 feet over it. 

Norman rock, the eastern of these shoals, bears 34°, distant 1,300 , 
yards from Cook point, and has a least depth of 16 feet over it. 

Leading mark.—Le trou de la Baleine, on Burnt island, midway 
between Black island and Black rock, bearing 135°, leads between 
Priest and Norman rocks. 

Cook harbor.—Cook Point peninsula is on the northwestern side 
of this harbor, and Black islet, Green island, and Schooner island, 
with the islands and reefs lying between them, are on its southeastern 
side. Prosper islet lies nearly in the middle of the harbor at 1,200 
yards within Cook point; there is shoal water between the islet and 
the northern shore, and also for 300 yards northeastward of the islet. 
Fauvette islet is 4 eae within Prosper islet. 

Neige bay is a “orhiall indentation northwestward of Fauvette islet, 
with a fishing establishment on its shores. 

Directions.—The entrance of the harbor is not easily made out 
from the northeastward, owing to the uniform height of the land. 
Cape Degrat summit, midway between cape Onion and the Mewstone, 


360 CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. 


bearing 93°, leads to the entrance. In entering, keep on the south- 
eastern shore, passing Green island at a distance of 500 yards, and 
Schooner island at a distance of 300 yards. Turn northwestward 
and pass 200 yards southwestward of Prosper islet; then steer for 
the northeastern point of Neige bay, to clear the shoals northeast- 
ward and northward of Fauvette island, and anchor in 4 to 6 fathoms 
of water, sand and mud bottom. 

The anchorage space of Neige bay is less than 200 yards in width. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change; in Cook harbor at 
7h. 25m.; springs rise 34 feet, neaps 24 feet. . 

Pistolet bay.—The entrance of Pistolet bay is between Black 
islet and Burnt cape, which bear nearly east-southeastward and west- 
northwestward, distant 34 miles from each other, and the bay extends 
southward 6 miles; and widens to 64 miles at its head, exclusive of 
Milan arm. 

Shallow bay, on the western side of Pistolet bay, is formed by 
the mainland, Boisees islands, and Schooner island. There is an- 
chorage, in 4 fathoms of water, just northwestward of Boisees islands, 
but there are bowlders on the bottom, the holding ground is bad, and 
the easterly swell comes in. 

The southern part of Pistolet bay, being open northward and 
northeastward, affords only temporary anchorage. 

Triangle point, low and wooded, stretches northward ? mile from 
the southern shore of the bay. It is surrounded by a bank, which 
extends northeastward, and leaves a channel, nearly 1 mile wide, 
between it and Chien bank. 

Burnt island extends south-southwestward 24 miles from Burnt 
cape and is about 1,200 yards wide; it is barren, whitish in color, and 
223 feet high. The island is joined to the mainland by a low isthmus, 
200 yards wide, which separates Isthmus cove from Ha-ha bay to the 
northward. On the western coast of the island, at about a mile from 
Burnt cape, is a deep hole named Whale cave (le trou de la Baleine), 
which is conspicuous from the westward. 

Chien rock lies southwestward, nearly a mile from Isthmus point, 
the southern end of Burnt island, and it almost covers at high water. 
A bank, on which this rock stands, extends approximately from a 
mile northwestward to a mile southeastward of Isthmus point for 14 
miles off shore, with depths of less than 3 fathoms. 

Milan point lies south-southeastward about 34 miles from Isthmus 
point, and from about 1,200 yards northward of Milan point, Trompe 
Yeeil point, consisting of low rocks and bowlders, extends westward 
3 mile, and a reef continues westward about 1,600 yards from 
Trompe lil point. Micmac islet, in the entrance to Milan arm 
nearly 800 yards west-southwestward from Milan point, is small and 
grassy. 


PARKER RIVER—-HA HA BAY. 361 


Parker river flows into Pistolet bay just westward of the south- 
western entrance point of Milan arm. A salmon fishery is carried on 
here by some Indians, and a group of huts marks the point. 

Milan arm extends southeastward 2 miles from Micmac islet, 
and then turns eastward, with shallower water, for 2 miles farther. 
Jt affords secure anchorage for vessels drawing 16 feet. and less. 

Directions.—In proceeding to the anchorages in the southern 
part of Pistolet bay, steer for a position bearing 254°, 1,3, miles from 
Isthmus point. A saddle in the hills, southward of the huts at 
Parker river entrance, then bears 149°; keep it so until the western 
side of burnt island bears 17°, when alter course to 45°, and anchor 
in 44 to 6 fathoms, stones and gravel bottom, with Chien rock bearing 
318°, distant ;%, mile. The least depth in this route is 4 fathoms. 

If drawing under 16 feet, anchorage southward of Trompe l’eeil 
point, which is the best in the bay, can be reached thus: Keep the 
saddle (as above) bearing 149° until the northern end of Micmac 
islet is in line with a beacon, situated southeastward, 1 mile from 
Milan point, bearing 114°. Continue with this last mark on until the 
huts on the southwestern entrance point of Milan arm bear 140°, 
when alter course to 93°, and anchor in about 6 fathoms of water, 
with Micmac islet bearing about 169°, distant 800 yards. 

To enter Milan arm in a vessel drawing less than 16 feet of water 
pass northeastward of Micmac islet, with Little Rond Mount point in 
line with Rond islet bearing 126° ; when Micmac islet bears 225°, open 
Little Rond Mount point southward of Rond islet to clear the shoals 
with less than 12 feet of water that stretch about + mile off Milan 
point. Anchor as convenient in the middle of the arm, with Micmac 
islet bearing 298°. 

The cove running eastward from Milan point must not be entered 
without a pilot. Vessels also proceed with a pilot to the head of the 
arm, where there is anchorage in 2 to 3 fathoms of water, mud 
bottom. : 

Caution.—It is stated by the pilots that a constant stream sets 
about westward out of Milan arm; caution is therefore necessary not 
to be set toward the shoals extending from Triangle point when pro- 
ceeding to sea. The stream is supposed to be caused by the number of 
fresh-water streams flowing into the arm. 

Ice.—The upper part of the arms of Pistolet and Sacred bays 
freeze in December, and the bays from cape Norman to cape Bauld 
fill with ice. The ice breaks up in May, early or late, according to the 
season. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Pistolet bay at 7h. 
39m.; springs rise 34 feet, neaps 24 feet. 

Ha ha bay.—Ha ha point hes eastward, distant 14 miles from 
Burnt cape, and Ha ha bay extends south-southwestward about 2 


362 CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. 


miles from between them. Piton point, the end of a hummocky 
peninsula extending northwestward nearly 4 mile from the south- 
eastern shore, is fringed by rocks, but steep-to on its northwestern 
side. There is fair anchorage in the bay in 5 fathoms of water, sand 
and mud bottom, but it is open to the northward. 

The coast, from Ha ha point northeastward 34 miles to cape 
Onion is cliffy and steep, with some small coves, that afford shelter to 
boats with offshore winds. 

Cape Onion is 259 feet high. A ledge extends east-northeastward 
600 yards from the cape, and on its outer end is the Mewstone (Gros 
Oignon). On the ledge are two other cliffy rocks which form the 
northern side of Onion cove, and on the southern side of the cove 
are some fishing establishments. The southern shore of the cove is 
foul, and the cove is open eastward. Onion island lies about east- 
southeastward 600 yards from the southern entrance point of the cove, 
and it is surrounded by reefs for nearly 350 yards, except to the 
southward. 

Sacred bay.—Cape Artimon bears eastward, 34 miles from cape 
Onion, and Sacred bay extends southwestward about 3 miles from 
between these capes. There are numerous islets and shoals in the 
bay, and West and South roads are the only safe anchorages. 

Little harbor, on the northwestern side of the bay and between 
Low islets and a peninsula, which at 4 mile farther southwestward 
terminates in Fauvette point, and from which two fishing stages 
project, is but a small bend in the shore, where there is anchorage 
in 5 fathoms of water, sand and mud bottom, with Onion island seen 
between Low islets and the mainland, bearing about 57°. 

Shoal.—The outer shoal in the middle of the western part of the 
bay bears 22°, distant 350 yards from the eastern end of the northern 
Moyacs island; it has 16 feet of water over it, and is steep-to, except 
toward the land between South and West roads, the whole of which 
space is foul. 

West road is a semicircular basin, extending + mile northwestward 
of a line joining Fauvette and Franche points. Shoal water extends 
4 mile around its shores. 

Shoals.—Mauvais Gars rock, lying + mile southeastward of Fau- 
vette point, is small, and covers at high water. 

Bon gars and Petit gars are nearly connected to Fauvette point; 
Bon gars, the southeastern one, situated 163°, 400 yards from the 
point, is above water, and steep-to on its southern side. 

An isolated rock, with 19 feet of water over it, lies nearly in the 
middle of West road, with Fauvette point bearing 62°, distant 700 
yards. 

Directions.— Pass southeastward of Onion island and Low islets; 
bring and keep Onion island just open eastward of Low islets until 


SOUTH ROAD—FOIROU ISLAND. 363 


past Mauvais gars, or till Bon gars bears 275°, then steer to pass 
Bon gars at the distance of 200 yards, and anchor as convenient in 
the road, avoiding the 19-foot rock. 

South road is in the southern part of Sacred bay, and it is ap- 
proached by a channel, about 200 yards in width, which les between 
the shoals off Curlew point and the mainland south-southwestward 
of it, on the eastern side, and Moyacs islands, with the islands and 
shoals southward of them, on the western side. The road at the head 
of the channel has shoal water around it, and the anchorage space is 
about 600 yards in diameter. 

Directions.—Approach with the eastern point of Green island, 
which hes about 1,400 yards southward from the southern Moyacs 
island, open westward of Curlew point, and bearing 217°. Pass Cur- 
lew point at the distance of 400 yards, to clear the shoal extending 
200 yards from it, and the southern Moyacs island, at the distance of 
200 yards. When the square rock on Onion island opens just west- 
ward of the southern Moyacs island, bearing about 14°, keep it so 
astern; this mark leads into South road, passing close westward of a 
rock that covers, lying midway between Gray point and Long island. 
When past this rock, haul to the southeastward and anchor in 5 
fathoms of water, eae and mud bottom. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in South road at 7h. 
23m. 3 springs rise hans 3 feet. 

Sacred islands—Great island, northeastward 1,°, miles from the 
Mewstone, is nearly 1 mile ieee north- niouelenesea tet and south- 
southwestward, 200 to 800 yards wide, 269 feet high, and covered 
with grass. It is almost steep-to. 

Little island, eastward ;®, mile from Great island, is of moderate 
height, and steep-to, except at its southwestern end, from which reefs 
extend over 100 yards. 

Maudit bank, north-northeastward, distant 2, miles from Great 
island, has 7 fathoms of water over it, and the sea breaks on the bank 
nm ase weather. 

Foirou island, or Gull rock, east-northeastward, distant 2,4, miles 
from the aeeeenn point of Little island, is a ine round rock, 100 
yards in diameter, from which a shoal eatnde southeastward 400 
yards. 

Islands.—Cape Artimon, southward 1,300 yards from Little is- 
land, is the northern end of an island, between which and Verte 
island, at 4 mile’ eastward, there is much foul ground and only a 
narrow 19-foot channel; and the passage between it and the main- 
land to the southward has only a narrow boat channel. Shoals ex- 
tend eastward 600 yards from Verte island, and there is a depth of © 
19 to 27 feet between them and Grand Mulou shoal; and there are 
rocks and two 17-foot patches between Verte island and Maria reefs. 


364 CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. 


Grand Mulou shoal, northeastward 1,200 yards from Verte island, 
is a bank about 300 yards in diameter, with a least depth of 6 ‘feet 
of water over it. ‘ 

Leading marks.—The Mewstone, in line with the southern end of 
Little island, bearing 264°, leads northward; Great Island summit, 
in line with the northern end of Little island, bearing 287°, leads 
northward; and the southwestern end of Great island, just open 
southwestward of the southwestern end of Little island, bearing 284°, 
leads southward of Grand Mulou shoal, and between it and Maria 
reefs. 

Maria reefs, eastward 1,400 yards from Verte island, are a group 
of black islets, some of which are 7 feet high. 

Medee bay, lying southward of Verte island, is obstructed by 
shoals and islets; there are some fishing stages at its head. 

Cape Ardoise, $ mile southeastward of Verte island, is the north- 
eastern end of a promontory, which, at 200 yards within the cape, 
rises to a remarkable round gray hill, 184 feet high. 

Maria bay, lying between cape Ardoise and cape Raven, which 
bears 124° 1,900 yards from it, is open to the northeastward and 
affords no shelter. 

Rock.—A rock, with 6 feet of water over it, lies nearly in the middle 
of the entrance to Maria bay, with cape Ardoise bearing 295°, distant 
800 yards. 

Mauve bay (Noddy harbor).—Noddy point bears eastward. 
2 mile from cape Raven, and Mauve bay extends southward 14 miles 
from between them. A peninsula projects from the eastern shore of 
the bay at about ;8, mile inside of Noddy point; deep water runs in 
a narrow channel for about 800 yards inside this peninsula, where a 
few small vessels obtain anchorage in 3} fathoms water, good hold- 
ing ground; westerly winds are violent, but the anchorage is safe, 
and the sea with northerly winds does not fetch home. 

Garden cove, on the western side of the bay opposite the peninsula, 
extends 500 yards to the westward, with shoal water about 150 yards 
off its shores; it affords anchorage for small vessels in 16 feet of 
water, sand bottom and fair holding ground, but an easterly swell 
sometimes fetches in. 

The rest of the bay affords no shelter from the sea. 

Wood bay.—The northern end of Jacques Cartier island bears 
eastward 4 mile from Noddy point, and Wood bay extends southward 
1,600 yards from between them. The bay is open northward, and 
affords no shelter. 

Jacques Cartier island is ? mile long, in a northerly and south- 
erly direction, 300 yards wide at its broadest part, and 138 feet high; 
its southern end is separated from the mainland by a channel 50 
yards wide, which can be used by boats. The northern and north- 


CAPE BAULD—CANIAS ROCK. 365 


western points of the island are steep-to, but a rocky shoal extends 
nearly 100 yards off the shore just eastward of the northern point. 
There are several fishing establishments on the island, with their 
stages on its southern part. 

Kirpon island.—(See also p. 367.) 

Cape Bauld, the southern entrance point of Belleisle strait, and the 
northern point of Kirpon island, bears 188°, distant 144 miles from 
the southernmost point of Belleisle. (For description, light, fog- 
signal, and tidal streams, see p. 367.) 

Tidal streams.—The inshore tidal streams are irregular between 
Kirpon island and cape Onion, but ordinarily the flood sets westward, 
and the ebb eastward, and when the stream goes with the wind it 
attains a rate of about one knot. 

The coast of Kirpon island from cape Bauld trends southwestward 
1,3; miles to Grapnel cove, a small indentation; it then continues 
south-southwestward 1 mile to Dumenil point; from this point it 
turns about south-southeastward 1,4; miles to the southern extremity 
of the island, and forms the eastern side of Kirpon harbor. 

At about + mile southward of Dumenil point is a group of low 
rocks, with a reef extending nearly 400 yards southwestward of them, 
and leaving a clear passage 200 yards wide between the reef and 
Jacques Cartier island. There is a fishing establishment on Kirpon 
island, eastward of these rocks. 

Mékchant island, 600 yards southeastward of the rocks, is low and 
attached to Kirpon island; there is a fishing establishment on it. 

Morne Fontan, $ mile southeastward of Merchant island, is a con- 
_ spicuous hill 105 feet high. 

Kirpon harbor, situated between Jacques Cartier and Kirpon 
islands, affords excellent anchorage. 

Vincent islet, 600 yards eastward of the southern end of Jacques 
Cartier island and 200 yards northeastward of a point of the main- 
land, is 16 feet high and covered with grass. The passage between it 
and the main to the southwestward has a depth of 15 feet in its fair- 
way, which is tortuous. 

Peaked rock, 100 yards northwestward of point Verte, on the 
southeastern side of the harbor, covers at high water. 

Canias rock, 400 yards northward of point Verte, is above water. 
It is reported (1896) that the depth 300 yards west-northwestward of 
this rock is about 3 feet less than shown on the charts. 

Beacons.—There is a beacon on the western part of Merchant 
island, and 400 yards east-southeastward of it and near the summit 
of a hill 118 feet high on Kirpon island is a white staff with a black 
ball on the top. 

Three beacons are placed on the mainland, southwestward of Vin- 
cent islet; the outer or northernmost beacon is a pile of stones sur- 


366 CAPE RAY TO CAPE BAULD. 


mounted by a cask on end; the middle beacon is a pile of stones with a 
pole and cask; the southernmost beacon is a pile of stones surmounted 
by a pole and triangle; these beacons and the rocks below them are 
whitewashed. 

Anchorages.—There is anchorage in 7 fathoms at a point bearing 
3°, distant 600 yards from Vincent islet, and in 8 fathoms at a point 
bearing 292°, distant 300 yards from the northern end of that islet. 

Vessels drawing 16 feet and less can reach good anchorage at a 
point bearing 160°, distant 700 yards from the southern end of Vin- 
cent islet. 

Vessels drawing less than 12 feet water can pass southward of 
Karpon island. 

Directions.—By the northern pass: Approach Kirpon harbor 
with the beacon on Merchant island in line with the beacon on Kirpon 
island, bearing 109°, which leads through the channel northward 
of Jacques Cartier island. When clear of Jacques Cartier island, 
haul to the southward, and anchor in about 7 fathoms water, with the 
three beacons southwestward of Vincent islet in line, bearing about 
202°. If the weather is not clear the beacon on Merchant island may 
not be distinguishable; in this case borrow on the northern end of 
Jacques Cartier island. 

By the southern pass, which is available for vessels drawing less 
than 12 feet: Bring a remarkable cascade on the southwestern shore 
of Little Kirpon harbor in line with the southern point of Kirpon 
island, bearing about 239°, which mark leads in 16 feet water north- 
westward of Green point. When that point is abeam, steer for the 
first fishing stage on the southwestern side, to avoid the Butterpot, 
a rock in mid-channel that shows only at low water; pass 25 yards 
off that stage and the shore to the next point, then turn sharply to 
port and anchor, or proceed to the northward. 

Or keep the mark on and round the southern point of Kirpon close 
to. The tidal streams in this channel are strong and caution is nec- 
essary, especially as these directions are old and not clear. 

Ice.—Kirpon harbor freezes between December 10 and 25, and the 
ice breaks up between May 5 and 25. 

Tides and tidal streams.—It is high water, full and change, 
in Kirpon harbor at 7h. 5m.; springs rise 5 feet, neaps 13 feet. 

The streams often attain a rate of 3 knots an hour in the passage 
between Kirpon and Little Kirpon harbors, but the direction de- 
pends more on the winds prevailing, or that have prevailed, than on 
fiood or ebb. 

Supplies.—Fresh mutton and vegetables can usually be obtained 
at Kirpon. 


CHAPTER VEE 


NEWFOUNDLAND, EAST COAST—CAPE BAULD TO CAPE 
ST. JOHN. 


Strait of Belleisle.—(See chap. X, p. 641.) 

Cape Bauld is the northern point of Kirpon island, which les 
at the northern end of Newfoundland, and it is the southern entrance 
point of Belleisle strait. Kirpon island is 34 miles long from north 
to south, 14 miles wide, and separated from the mainland by a chan- 
nel 100 yards wide. Cape Bauld is a steep, rocky, barren point, 
around which the tidal streams are strong, variable, and eddying. 

Light.—A brown tower, having a height of 63 feet from base to 
vane, standing on a concrete foundation 6 feet high and surmounted 
by a circular metal lantern, painted white, with red roof, on the high 
ground about 230 yards within cape Bauld, exhibits at 187 feet above 
high water, a flashing white ight which shows one group of 2 flashes 
every 15 seconds, and should be seen from a distance of 20 miles in 
clear weather. 

Fog signal.—A diaphone horn, worked by compressed air, gives 
a blast of 7 seconds duration every 45 seconds, thus: blast, 7 seconds; 
silent interval, 88 seconds, during thick or foggy weather. The fog- 
signal house is a rectangular, white building with a red roof, situated 
50 feet eastward of the lighthouse, and the horn points northward. 

Tidal streams.—The inshore tidal streams at cape Bauld turn 
at about three hours after high and low water, the flood setting west- 
ward and the ebb eastward, but they are much influenced by the 
winds. 

Grande cove, between cape Bauld and Spht point, which bears 
southeastward, distant about 1,200 yards from the cape, is open to 
easterly winds; Split point is an islet, 88 feet high, joined by bowl- 
ders to Kirpon island, and with a rugged point southward of it, forms 
Colombier cove, a temporary shelter for fishing boats. 

Pigeon cove, etc.— Between the rugged point southward of Split 
point and cape Dégrat, situated 1, miles southward, is a bay 1,200 
yards deep, divided into numerous coves by islands and points, off 
which are shoals, and vessels should not enter westward of the line 
joining the points of this bay without special reason. 


367 


368 CAPE BAULD TO CAPE ST. JOHN. 


Dégrat harbor, on the northern side of cape Dégrat headland, is a 
small cove where six fishing vessels can moor in 13 feet of water inside 
a flat rock on the eastern side. Sheep channel, between Sheep and 
Dégrat islands, is the best passage to this harbor, and after. passing 
Sheep bank, to clear which keep the northern side of Sheep island 
close aboard, the channel is clear, though narrow. 

Cape Dégrat rises to a hill 505 feet high, the highest in this 
locality, and is faced by a steep cliff 300 feet high, with deep water 
close alongside. The cliffs fall at about 800 yards southward of the 
cape to White point, a landslip in the cliffs, of a lighter color than 
the rest of the coast. 

Grands Galets bay is situated southwestward of Galets head, the 
southern part of cape Dégrat headland, but it affords no shelter. 

Little Kirpon harbor, at the southern point of Kirpon island, is 
500 yards long and 250 yards broad; the holding ground is bad. 

Vessels drawing less than 12 feet of water can pass southward of 
Kirpon island to Kirpon harbor, but as the tidal streams are strong, 
caution is necessary to avoid Butterpot rock, that lies nearly in the 
middle of the channel southward of the southern point of Kirpon 
island and is nearly always covered. (For Kirpon harbor, see 
p- 365.) 

White islands are three principal and some lower rocks, situated 

1 miles eastward of Partridge point, which hes 1,4, miles south- 
southwestward from Galets head; the southwestern and highest 
island is about 4+ mile long, and a shoal lies 150 yards northward 
of its northern end. 

White rocks (les Donzelles), west-southwestward } mile from 
White islands, are a group of low islets with sunken rocks about 200 
yards off their northern end. 

A rock bears 112°, distant 850 yards, from the southeastern end 
of these rocks, and the sea always breaks on it. 

Madeleine shoal is in the first cove southward of Partridge 
point; it has 2 feet least water over it, and there is a depth of 2} 
fathoms at about 200 yards southeastward of it; Galets head opens 
eastward of the islands situated close southeastward of Partridge 
point, bearing 10°, leads eastward of the whole of the shoal. 

Green shoal, with 10 feet water over it, bears 129°, nearly 200 
yards from Breaker point, a low point sheltering 2 small coves, at 
1,2, miles southward from Partridge point. 

Storm cape is a rocky islet close to the land at 1,600 yards south- 
ward of Breaker point, and Broize point is situated about 1,200 
yards southwestward of the cape. 

Griguet harbor (locally Fortune harbor) and several other small 
anchorages, formed by a group of islands lying close to the mainland, 


GOOD COVE—-UPPER GRIGUET HARBOR. 369 


‘are comprised between Broize point and White cape, which cape 
lies southward, distant 2;4, miles from the point. 

Camel island, the northern and largest of the group, is 305 feet 
high; it forms the southern side of the entrance to North and North- 
west bays, and takes its name from a remarkable mound at its north- 
eastern end which forms the summit. Prune islet, northward of the 
northwestern extremity of Camel island, is 16 feet high. Baleine 
rock, lying nearly midway between Broize and Cove points at the 
entrance of North bay, is always uncovered. 

Anchorage.—There is anchorage off the fishery establishment in 
North bay, in 15 to 16 fathoms water, with tolerably good holding 
ground, but easterly winds occasionally send in a swell. 

Ice.—Griguet is generally frozen over about the middle of Decem- 
ber, and is clear of ice about May 20. It is usually the first harbor 
open on the east coast of the northern peninsula of Newfoundland. 

Communication.—Steamers from Tilt cove call here weekly 
during summer and autumn. 

Good cove (Belle anse), between Cove and Bay points, is 400 
yards in extent, and affords good anchorage for small vessels in 11 
fathoms water, sand bottom. 

Bay point divides Good cove from Northwest bay, and a rock lies 
200 feet eastward of it; la Rose, a rock with 2 feet water over it, is 
the end of a shoal extending southward 150 yards from the point. 

Northwest or Ronciére bay extends north-northwestward 1 mile 
from Bay point, with a width of about 600 yards; a spit extends south- 
eastward nearly 600 yards from the head of the bay. 

Anchorage.—Northwest bay affords anchorage anywhere in 10 to 
18 fathoms water; near the head of the bay anchor eastward of the 
line joining Bay point and Crab island to clear the spit. 

Southwest bay lies between Camel island and the mainland; it 
affords temporary anchorage for small vessels westward of the north- 
ern part of Camel island, in 9 fathoms water, and clear of the shoal 
off its northern point. 

Griguet island, close eastward of Camel island, is about 66 feet 
high; Black islet, lying close eastward of the northern extremity of 
Camel island, is 33 feet high, and a small spit extends off its southern 
end, the other sides being steep-to. 

Four Ears island, southward of Griguet island, is faced by a 
peaked black cliff, 120 feet high. 

Griguet harbor proper is situated between Camel, Griguet, and 
Four Ears islands; it is 400 vards long and 200 vards wide, and the 
entrances are narrow and tortuous. 

Upper Griguet or White Cape harbor, southward of Four Ears 
island, is 600 yards long and 200 yards broad. The channel between 

76846—09——24 


370 CAPE BAULD TO.CAPE ST. JOHN. 


. 


the islets off the southern end of Four Ears island and those off the 
northern side of White cape promontory is clear, but the passage 
northwestward of Four Ears island is suitable for boats only. 

Anchor in 7 fathoms water, near the mainland, and clear of the 
bank extending 250 yards from Four Ears island. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in these harbors at 7h. 
10m.; springs rise 5 feet, neaps 2% feet. 

White cape, a rugged white cliff, which rises to a grass-covered 
mound, 262 feet high, at + mile within it. is a good mark. The cape. 
as well as the outer coast to White Dog point, which is situated 14% 
miles south-southwestward and forms the northern entrance point of 
St. Lunaire bay, is Steep-to; and between these points are Great cove 
and Cow cove, only suitable for boats. 

St. Lunaire bay, extending westward about 3 miles to the head of 
Northwest bay, is one of the finest harbors in Newfoundland, being 
always accessible to steamers. The squalls, however, in northwesterly 
gales are very heavy for sailing vessels. The entrance is well indi- 
cated by White cape, and when near, by St. Lunaire peak, 335 feet 
high, southwestward of the bay. 

Westerly gales are stronger at St. Lunaire than at the neighboring 
ports, but usually lull at night. 

Granchain island, on the southern side of the entrance of St. 
Lunaire bay; is 85 feet high; Granchain point, its northeastern end, 
is an islet joined to the island at low water, and is steep-to to the 
northeastward. 

Flat rock, always above water, is the northernmost of a chain of 
islets and rocks stretching northward 800 yards from Granchain 
island, and it is steep-to, excepting on its southern side. 

Salut islet, conspicuous, conical, and 65 feet high, hes southward 
100 yards from Flat rock; and Coal islet, square, black, and cliffy, 
lies between Salut islet and Granchain island. 

Vanguard shoal, bearing 331°, distant 650 yards from Granchain 
point, and the northeasternmost of the shoals off Granchain island, 
has 12 feet water over it; Adelaide islet, open northward of Flat rock, 
bearing 287°, leads northward of Vanguard shoal and the other 
shoals on the southwestern side of the entrance of the bay. 

Amelia cove (locally Garden cove), on the northern shore of the 
bay at about %, mile within White Dog point, is foul for 200 yards 
from its head; it affords temporary anchorage in 15 fathoms water, 
but the holding ground is bad, and easterly winds bring in a sea. A 
good road connects this cove with Griguet harbor. 

Carentonne island, on the western side of Amelia cove, is T2 feet 
high; there are two islets and shoal water between it and the point 
to the northward. 


RED ISLET—ST. LUNAIRE ROAD. atl 


Red islet, in the entrance to Amelia cove, and eastward 200 yards 
from Carentonne island, is 16 feet high, and a 2-fathom shoal ex- 
tends southwestward about 50 yards from it. 

Adelaide islet, bears 295°, distant + mile from Flat rock, and a 
shoal extends about east-southeastward 100 yards from it. Its 
northern and western sides are steep-to. 

Elizabeth islet lies westward about 200 yards from Adelaide 
islet; there is deep water at 100 yards off it. 

Shoals.—Two shoal patches, with 6 and 9 feet water over them, 
respectively, lie northwestward, 450 yards, and west-northwestward, 
the same distance from Carentonne island. 

Strawberry island, west-northwestward, distant 1,100 yards from 
Elizabeth islet, is 59 feet high. A shoal patch, with 135 feet water 
over it, bears 112°, 265 yards from this island, and southward 200 
yards from it there are two patches, one of which is above high water, 
while a line of shoals extends 350 yards toward North reef. 

North reef, on the northern side of Northwest bay and westward 
600 yards from Strawberry island, extends southward about 400 
yards from the land, and dries 14 feet at low water. 

Leading mark.—The conspicuous peak, 246 feet high, and sit- 
uated + mile northward of White Dog point, in line with the north- 
ern end of Elizabeth islet, bearing 85°, leads southward of North reef 
and the reefs off Strawberry island. 

Northwest bay entrance is between Strawberry island and 
Nymph island, and the bay, which extends 14 miles to the westward, 
with a width of 600 to 250 yards, affords excellent anchorage in 6 to 
21 fathoms water everywhere within the entrance. 

Nymph island, 92 feet high, separates Northwest bay from St. 
Lunaire road. There is deep water at 100 yards off the outer points 
on its northern coast. A rocky patch, with 3} fathoms water over 
it, hes southward 200 yards from an islet near Nymph point, the 
eastern point of the island. 

Middle bank, midway in the channel between Nymph island and 
the rocks north of Granchain island, has 10 feet least water over it. 

Clearing marks.—The eastern end of Carentonne island in line 
with the middle of Adelaide islet, bearing 0°, leads eastward; the 
western end of Red islet in line with the eastern end of Adelaide islet, 
bearing 22°, leads westward; White Dog point in lne with the 
southern end of Salut islet, bearing 86°, leads northward; and the 
same point in line with the northern end of Coal islet, bearing 78°, 
leads close southward of the bank. 

St. Lunaire road, southward of Nymph island, and between it 
and Granchain islands and the mainland, affords good anchorage, in 
18 to 21 fathoms water, or off the entrance to Southwest bay in 13 
fathoms; the holding ground is good. 


SH CAPE BAULD TO CAPE ST. JOHN. ; 


Southwest bay, entered from the southern part of St. Lunaire 
road through a passage about 400 feet wide, extends southward about 
1 mile, but is only 200 yards wide, and shoal water extends }+ mile 
from its head. The navigable fairway is in mid-channel. Vessels 
eareen here in safety. ; 

Tides and tidal streams.—It is high water, full and change, in 
St. Lunaire bay at 7h. 6m.; springs rise 5 feet, neaps 2% feet. 

The tidal streams in the bay are very weak, but outside, the flood 
stream sets northward, and the ebb stream southward, along the 
coast without regularity, at times attaining a rate of 2 knots an hour, 
at other times ceasing entirely. 

Ice.—St. Lunaire freezes late in November or early in December, 
and the ice clears some time in May. 

Little Brehat bay, southward 2 miles from Granchain point, is 
a small cove, off which are Little Needles, some peaked rocks. 

Needles rocks, about 300 yards offshore and 700 yards southward 
of Flat point, the southern entrance point of Little Brehat bay, are 
curiously shaped, and show well from a short distance seawards. 

Great Brehat bay (locally Needles cove), situated southwestward 

+ miles from Needles rocks, extends about 1,200 yards westward of 
the line between the entrance points, and at its head is a sheltered an- 
chorage, about 200 yards in extent, for small vessels. Green bay, 
about 4 mile southwestward of Needles rocks and just within the 
northern entrance point of Great Brehat bay, is a small cove faced 
by Green island; shoals extend from Green island and terminate in 
John Baptist shoal, which is situated 500 yards southward of the 
southern end of the island, and has 12 feet of water over it. The 
southwestern entrance point of the cove at the head of Great Brehat 
bay, well open southward of its northeastern entrance point, bearing 
264°, leads southward of these shoals. 

Foundling rock, on which the sea always breaks, is situated north- 
ward 300 yards from Brehat point, the southern entrance point of 
the bay. Crab rock bears 140°, distant 200 yards from Brehat point, 
and has less than 6 feet water over it. By passing between John 
Baptist shoal and Foundling rock and keeping in the fairway the 
cove at the head of the bay may be entered and anchorage obtained 
in 28 fathoms of water with moderately good holding ground. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, at Great Brehat bay at 
Th. 7m.; springs rise 5 feet, neaps 2? feet. 

Brehat shoal, bears 73°, distant 2 miles from Brehat point, and is 
about 800 yards long and 65 yards wide, with a least depth of 13 
feet water over it. A head with 6 fathoms water over it and 20 to 27 
fathoms around lies + mile southward of Brehat shoal; when the 
sea breaks on it in fine weather, the fishermen predict northerly 
winds; it breaks heavily with northerly winds, and is generally 


FRENCH POINT—ST. ANTHONY HARBOR. Sto 


marked by ripples. Another shoal lies northward, distant 300 yards 
from Brehat shoal, and has 64 fathoms water over it. 

Clearing marks.—Camel island summit in line with White cape, 
‘bearing 0°, leads westward; and Goose cape open southward of 
French point, 222°, leads southeastward of these shoals. 

Tidal streams.—The streams are variable in the locality of 
Brehat shoal, but they appear to have an increased rate over its 
plateau, which is indicated by the eddies. 

French point lies southward 3 miles from Brehat point, and in- 
mediately westward of it is French bay, a bight about 800 yards 
across and open southward. 

Cape St. Anthony is situated 1 mile southwestward from French 
point. 

St. Mein bay extends northwestward 3 miles on the western side 
of cape St. Anthony, and is 14 miles wide at its entrance between that 
cape and Fox point, the western entrance point. The water is deep, 
and the bay completely open southward; there is a small fishing 
village on its northeastern side, at 13 miles within cape St. Anthony. 

Ice.—St. Mein bay freezes about the end of November, and the ice 
clears in May. 

Fox point is low, and appears more so from contrast to St. 
Anthony hill, westward 800 yards from it, which is 413 feet high, 
and faced by a black cliff. 

st. Anthony harbor entrance is } mile northwestward of Fox 
point, and it can only be distinguished when close to. The harbor 
extends southwestward 550 yards with a breadth of 335 yards, and 
then turns northwestward 14 miles, gradually widening to about 
500 yards. 

At 900 yards westward from Egg point, the southern entrance 
point, just beyond where the harbor commences to bend to the north- 
westward, and nearly in mid-channel, are Piquennais rocks, joined to 
the southern shore by a bank. Neither these rocks nor the northeast- 
ern shore are quite steep-to, but the harbor may be entered in the fair- 
way between them, and affords good anchorage in 6 to 9 fathoms 
water, mud bottom. 

A small white hut on the northwestern point of the southwestern 
side of the harbor, bearing 296°, leads through the narrow channel 
abreast the rocks. 

It is often difficult to get a long vessel into this harbor on account 
of the boats and fishing vessels anchored off the turning point, par- 
ticularly with winds across the harbor, and the space is narrow for 
turning. The wind blowing in eddies from the high lands round the 
harbor is very baffling for a sailing vessel making the entrance. 

Light.—A fixed white light is exhibited from a lantern hoisted on 
a white open framework on Egg point from June to December. 


374 CAPE BAULD TO CAPE ST. JOHN. 


Mission station.—There is a mission station at St. Anthony, con- 
sisting of a hospital, a clubhouse, an orphanage, and a storehouse 
with a wharf near it. The hospital, which contains six beds for male 
and seven for female patients, is the only ‘one in the island of New- 
foundland outside of St. John’s. 

Marguerite bay, on the northeastern shore of this harbor, near the 
head, extends } mile to the northward. Both points of the entrance 
are shoal, leaving a narrow passage in at one-third of the distance 
across from its southeastern point. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in St. Anthony harbor 
at Th. 10m.; springs rise 5 feet, neaps 2% feet. The tidal streams are 
scarcely appreciable except in the narrows northeastward of Piquen- 
nais rocks. 

Supplies.—Fresh mutton and vegetables, in small quantities, can 
usually be obtained. 

Water is difficult to obtain here, as boats can not get near the 
mouths of the streams. 

Ice.—St. Anthony harbor freezes about the end of November, and 
the ice clears in May. 

Communication.—Steamers from Tilt cove call at St. Anthony 
harbor fortnightly during summer and autumn. 

The coast from Fox point trends southwestward, 1,5, miles to 
Savage point, and is barren and cliffy, while Savage point, the south- 
eastern end of a peninsula, is low with rugged rocks. . . 

Cremaillere harbor.—Cape Haut-et-Bas lies southwestward, dis- 
tant } mile from Savage point and Cremaillere harbor extends north- 
westward, 1;4; miles from between them. Anchor point, the north- 
western point of the peninsula of which Savage point is the south- 
eastern end, has a snug cove northward of it. 

The harbor entrance westward of Anchor point is nearly 400 
yards wide between the shoals on either side, and the harbor within 
affords good anchorage over an area 1 mile long and 4 mile wide, in 
10 fathoms of water, mud and sand bottom. Shoals extend off 
Anchor point and the opposite shore for 150 yards, and Bear bank, 
a shoal with 9 feet of water over it, is situated 200 yards off the 
south-southwestern shore at 465 yards from the head of the harbor. 

Southeasterly winds bring a sea into the harbor, and westerly 
winds produce heavy squalls under cape Haut-et-Bas, making the 
entrance difficult and sometimes impossible for sailing vessels. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, at Cremaillere harbor at 
th. 138m.; springs rise 4} feet, neaps 23 feet. Low water occurs 
about three-quarters of an hour before the time calculated from the 
establishment. 

Cape Haut-et-Bas is faced by high black cliffs, and Whale grotto, 
a deep recess in the cliffs, lies northward 600 yards from the cape. 


NOTRE DAME ISLAND—HARE BAY. one 


Notre Dame island, south-southeastward about $ mile from cape 
Haut-et-Bas, is 85 feet high, and flat in appearance. 

Notre Dame shoal, bearing 344°, distant 600 yards from the 
northern point of Notre Dame island, is a patch with 12 feet of water 
over it. Angel point (see below), shut in with Vierge point, 
bearing 233°, leads northwestward, and the fishing stage in Vierge 
cove open southward of Vierge point, bearing 259°, leads southward 
of this shoal. 

Henry islet, situated westward 600 yards from Notre Dame 
island, is surrounded by shoals except on the northwestern side, but 
there is a deep passage, 150 yards wide, between it and Notre Dame 
island. 

Three mountains. ~Three conspicuous hills, having heights of 
403, 423, and 525 feet, are situated, respectively, 600 yards north- 
westward of cape Haut-et-Bas, 900 yards westward of cape Haut-et- 
Bas, and 1,000 yards west-northwestward of Vierge point. Taken 
together, they form an excellent mark. 

Vierge cove extends westward } mile from close southward of 
Vierge point, which is situated southward 1,200 yards from cape 
Haut-et-Bas. The cove is open seawards. 

Angel point, separating this cove from Three Mountain harbor, 
is low and narrow, but steep-to at the distance of less than 200 yards. 

Three Mountain harbor is very small, but though open, the sea 
does not fetch home; it is suitable only for fishing vessels, which 
moor to the rocks. The tidal streams are scarcely perceptible. 

Lobster point, southward 400 yards from Notre Dame island, is 
the eastern end of a barren peninsula, which attains a height of 335 
feet, and is faced by rugged cliffs. Lobster point is low, and east- 
ward at a little more than 200 yards from it is Lobster shoal, over 
which there is a depth of 6 feet. St. Anthony hill, well open east- 
ward of Notre Dame island, bearing 11°, leads eastward of this shoal. 

Goose cape is the southernmost point of the peninsula, and forms 
the northern entrance point of Hare bay. 

Hare bay is 5 miles wide at its entrance between Goose cape and 
Great Cormorandier island; it extends 18 miles to the westward and 
contains several good but little frequented harbors: the depth of 
water is great, affording no anchorage till about 12 miles inside the 
entrance or westward of a line between How harbor and Brent 
islands, and the sea in the bay is often very heavy. 

The northern shore of Hare bay is high and steep, falling in 
cliffs to the sea, with deep water close-to. 

Ice.—The western portions of Hare bay within Brent islands 
freeze solid during December, and the eastern part fills in with 
northern ice and freezes: the ice generally breaks up in May, early 
or late, according to the season. 


376 CAPE BAULD TO CAPE ST. JOHN. 


Goose cove, northwestward 1} miles from Goose cape, is entered 
between Loup Marin or Seal point, the western end of Goose Cape 
peninsula, and Flat point of the mainland, off which shoals stretch 
for 150 yards. The entrance, through which 44 fathoms water can 
be carried, is intricate. Coq islet, 20 feet high, lies close off Seal 
point, leaving a passage for boats between them, and a shoal extends 
northwestward 33 yards from this islet. 

Beacon.—A beacon with a topmark stands on Coq islet. 

Cigale point, the inner northern entrance point, is a quarter of a 
mile eastward of Flat point, and between them there is a cove ex- 
tending nearly 400 yards to the northward with shallow water in it; 
shoal water extends nearly 200 yards southeastward from Cigale 
point, just south-southwestward of the end of which is la Fourmi 
(Ant) rock that covers at half tide. Eastward of this rock the 
harbor expands to about 550 yards across and affords landlocked 
anchorage in 5 to 9 fathoms water, good holding ground. 

Directions.—Goose cove should not be entered except in a vessel 
under perfect command, and a sailing vessel requires a fresh breeze 
to take the bends. If the shoal off Coq islet is not breaking, buoy it, 
then enter, round the buoy and the island close to, pass southward of 
la Fourmi rock and turn eastward into the anchorage. 

Tides and tidal streams.—lIt is high water, full and change, at 
Goose cove at 7h. 13m.; springs rise 5 feet, neaps 2? feet. 

There is no appreciable stream in the entrance to the cove, and 
the streams, outside the entrance, appear to be independent of the 
tide, and to follow irregularly the direction of the coast, at rates 
rarely exceeding 1 mile an hour, and sometimes not perceptible, 
but they are always strongest off Goose cape. 

Water is abundant, but difficult to obtain, as the boats can not get 
close to the mouths of the streams. 

Bouleaux bay is immediately northwestward of Goose cove and 
open to the southwestward. _ 

Ireland bay, west-northwestward 5 miles from Goose cove, is a 
slight bend in the land, where there is a small settlement and a 
church. Northward of this bay are Capillaire mountains, with a 
remarkable summit that is conspicuous from Belleisle strait. 

How harbor, also known as Bustard bay, Havre Hodidou, and Baie 
de ’Outarde, is westward 11 miles from Goose cove and extends 
northwestward 2 miles; its width is } mile at the entrance and 4 mile 
inside. 

Estaing shoal lies about 200 yards from the shore at 400 yards 
southeastward of Roland point, the eastern entrance point, and has 3 
feet water over it. 

Ledret shoal, bearing 173°, distant 1,350 yards from Fendue 
point, the western entrance point, has 13 feet water over it. 


NORTHERN ARM—LONG ISLAND. Be 


Anchorage may be obtained in 8 to 13 fathoms water in How 
harbor, observing that the water shoals in its northwestern part. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in How harbor at 
Th. 18m.; springs rise 4 feet, neaps 14 feet. 

Northern arm, westward 3 miles from How harbor, extends 2 
miles to the northward with a width of # mile, but it is open 
southward. 

Anchorage.—There is good anchorage in this arm at about + mile 
off a small river on the eastern shore, with Hare island, which forms 
the western entrance point of the arm and is 115 feet high and nearly 
joined to the mainland at low water, just open of the mainland, bear- 
ing about 202°, in 84 fathoms water. 

Northwest arm, separated from Northern arm by Hare island 
and a projecting point northwestward of it, is completely open south- 
ward; anchorage sheltered from offshore winds may be obtained in 5 
to 8 fathoms water; a bank of bowlders fringes the whole of the 
western shore of Northwest arm between Seal bay and Fournier 
point. <A large stream runs into the head of Northwest arm. 

Brent islands, southward 34 miles from How harbor, are two 
islands close together and connected by shoal water; North Brent 
island, the northeastern, being nearly bare, and South Brent island, 
the southwestern, being covered with brushwood; each is about 1 
mile across and the passage between them and the mainland to the 
westward is shallow. <A rocky ledge, awash at high water, extends a 
short distance northward from Brent islands, and shoal water north- 
westward 2 mile, with Vert island near its end. 

Penerise” Wet river flows into the bay southwestward of 
these islands, and off its entrance at about 1 mile southwestward of 
Brent islands, there is fair anchorage in 5 to 6 fathoms water, to 
reach which pass southeastward of Brent islands. 

Shoal.—<A: shoal, with 2} fathoms of water over it, lies in mid- 
channel between South Brent and Direction islands, and in the fair- 
way to the anchorage; from the shoal the northeastern end of Direc- 
tion island, which is 82 feet. high, bears 233°, distant $ mile. 

Long island, 1 mile south-southwestward of South Brent island, 
is 2,2, miles long, in a north-northeasterly and south-southwesterly 
direction, 300 to 1,000 yards in width, and separates Western and 
Southern arms. The island is thickly wooded, except near its west- 
ern point; the southwestern end is joined to the mainland at low 
water. 

A shoal, with 3 to 15 feet. of water over it, extends east-northeast- 
ward, 300 yards from the northeastern end of Long island, and there 
is a depth of 15 feet at about 200 yards off the southeastern coast of 
this island, but near the middle the shoal water extends off more than 
400 yards. 


378 CAPE BAULD TO CAPE ST. JOHN. 


Ariege bay, or Southern arm (locally Belvy bay), extends south- 
southwestward nearly 3 miles from the eastern end of Long island 
and thence south-southeastward 3 miles farther; a group of islands 
and rocks, within which there is no passage, forms the eastern en- 
trance to this arm, which is about $ mile wide for 3 miles, when it 
narrows, and expands again into two basins, with good anchorage 
in 8 to 10 fathoms of water. 

Cailloux islet, lying eastward 1,200 yards from the southwestern 
end of Long island, is low, flat, and covered with grass in summer. 
Shoal water extends about 300 yards from the northeastern side 
of the islet. ; 

Directions.—Pass southeastward of Brent islands and keep in 
mid-channel; Cailloux islet in line with a low wooded point on the 
mainland, bearing about 215°, leads clear of the shoals extending 
along the eastern side of Long island; the low point is, however, 
somewhat difficult to make out. 

Anchorage has been obtained in 8 fathoms of water, mud bottom, 
with the southwestern end of Long island bearing 332°, distant about 
1,200 yards. The inner anchorage in Ariege bay, off the mouth of 
Salmon river, affords good holding ground in about 5 fathoms, mud 
bottom. It is approached between Devarenne island, on the north- 
western side, and Paul and Charles islands, on the southeastern side. 

Isabel island and several small islands extend off the southwest- 
ern shore of Hare bay northeastward of Southern arm. Demétre 
island, the northernmost of these islands, lies 1,2; miles northward of 
Isabel island, and all the area inclosed by them appears to be shallow 
and foul. 

Indre point lies eastward 1% miles from the northeastern end of 
Isabel island, and it is 52 feet high. 

Indre shoal, bearing 55°, distant $ mile from Indre point, has 14 
fathoms of water over it, and 34 to 44 fathoms at the distance of 200 
yards between the directions northeastward and southeastward 
from it. 

Little arm lies between Indre point, and the land southward of it, 
and the northern part of MacGray island, the middle of the western 
side of which is almost connected with the mainland. The arm 
extends southward about 1,300 yards, and it affords anchorage near 
its head in 11 to 13 fathoms, but it is open northward. 

Shoals.—Several islets and much foul ground le around the 
northern end of MacGray island. There is a shoal of 4 fathoms in 
Little arm, bearing 270°, distant 450 yards from the northern ex- 
tremity of MacGray island. Nu or Bare islet bears 83°, distant 300 
yards from the same point of the island, and a reef extends westward 
200 yards from the islet. Foul ground, with 9 feet least water over it, 


SPRING ISLAND—MAIDEN ARM. oto 


extends eastward 400 yards from Johnson point, the eastern point of 
the northern part of the island. 

Spring island, northward 1,100 yards from Nu islet, is 900 yards 
long in an easterly and westerly direction, about 400 yards wide, and 
79 feet high. Two rocks above water lie within a cable of its southern 
side, and a reef extends 300 yards off its eastern end. 

Great arm, the entrance of which is between Johnson point and 
La Source point, at about 1,300 yards to the southeastward, extends 
southwestward about 1,600 yards, and though open to northeasterly 
winds it affords on the southeastern side, at about 800 yards within 
the entrance fair anchorage with offshore winds in 6 to 8 fathoms of 
water. The bottom is uneven, and as there is a shoal, with 3% fath- 
oms of water over it, at 133°, 600 yards from Johnson point and in 
the middle of the entrance, keep rather on the southern side when 
entering. Shoal water and some rocky patches of 4 to 5 fathoms 
extend + mile northward from La Source point. 

La Source or Spring inlets are three small arms, having shallow 
water, at the head of Great arm. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in La Source inlets at 
6h. 57m.; springs rise 44 feet, neaps 14 feet. 

The coast between La Source point and Maiden point, at 2 miles 
to the eastward, is bordered by islets and rocks for nearly 4 mile off 
it; Goelands islet, the westernmost, bears 56°, distant 800 yards from 
La Source point. 

Jehenne shoal, bearing 75°, distant 700 yards from the northern 
end of Goelands islet, has 9 feet water over it. This coast should not 
be approached within 1 mile. 

Duchayla rock, bearing 340°, distant 1,8, miles from Maiden 
point, has 9 feet water over it. Caution is necessary to clear this 
rock when entering Hare bay; Deaths Head island, open eastward of 
Maiden point, bearing 135°, leads about 1,600 yards southwestward 
of the rock. ° 

Maiden arm (havre de la Téte de Mort) is entered between 
Maiden point and Deaths Head island, which island bears about 130°, 
distant 1,300 yards from the point, and is a bare rock 56 feet high, 
steep-to, except on its southwestern side off which a reef extends 300 
yards; Starboard island lies on the western side of the entrance, and 
southeastward about 150 yards from the southern point of Maiden 
point headland. 

Port island, ‘southwestward about 400 yards from Deaths Head 
island, is separated from the mainland by a channel 50 yards wide, 
with 13 feet water in it. 

The harbor extends southwestward 1,400 yards within Port island 
to Elbow point, where it branches into two bays, the northern of 
which is shallow. 


380 CAPE BAULD TO CAPE ST. JOHN. 


There is anchorage in an area rather over 200 vards across, west- 
ward of the point, in 7 fathoms of water. 

The coast between Port island and Cow point, southeastward 275 
miles, forms several coves open northeastward, but aifording good 
shelter to boats from offshore winds. 

An islet ies about 100 yards southeastward of the eastern part of 
Port island, and at 88°, distant 135 yards from the eastern end of 
this islet is Thistle shoal, which has 14 fathoms water over it. 

Cow point, the turning point of the mainland at the southwestern 
entrance to Hare bay, is rocky, covered with grass, and rises to a 
summit 135 feet high close inshore. 

Cow Point shoal, with 24 fathoms water over it, bears 150°, distant 
about 200 yards from this point. 

Tidal streams.—Northward of Cow point the flood stream runs 
generally west-northwestward, and the ebb  east-southeastward. 
Eastward of this point and about the Fichot islands, the flood stream 
runs westward, and the ebb eastward. 

Fichot islands.—Little Cormorandier island, the northern of this 
group, whose summit bears 40°, distant 24% miles from Cow point, is 
about + mile long in a northeasterly and southwesterly direction, 
nearly 200 yards wide, 95 feet high, cliffy and steep-to except at its 
northern end, from which low rocks extend northward nearly 400 
yards. 

Great Cormorandier island, 1,600 yards in an _ east-north- 
easterly and south-southwesterly direction, with a greatest width of 
600 yards, is 174 feet high and separated from the southeastern side 
of Little Cormorandier by a passage 450 yards wide, in the middle of 
which is a rock with 10 feet of water over it. 

Pirogue shoal, bearing 285°, distant 300 yards from the north- 
eastern end of the islet close northeastward of Great Cormorandier 
island, has 4% fathoms over it. 

Legendre shoal, bearing 243°, distant 500 yards from the south- 
western end of Little Cormorandier island, has 6 fathoms of water 
over it. 

Pigeon island, a small cliffy rock, is separated from the southern 
side of Great Cormorandier by a channel 100 yards wide, in which 
there are 5 to 6 fathoms water. 

Great Cormorandier rock, bearing 81°, distant 450 yards from the 
eastern end of Pigeon island, has 5 feet water over it. The summit of 
St. Julien island, open eastward of Fichot islands, bearing 206°, leads 
eastward of the rock. 

Melier islet, bearing 190°, distant 550 yards from the western 
extremity of Great Cormorandier island and in the passage between 
that island and Great Verdon island, is a black rock with a reef 
extending westward nearly 200 yards from it: 


GREAT VERDON ISLAN 381 


Melier rock, bearing 130°, distant 200 yards from Melier islet, has 
41 fathoms water over it; and Melier shoal, bearing 100°, distant 400 
yards from Melier islet, has 53 fathoms water over it. 

Great Verdon island, southward, § mile from the western end 
of Great Cormorandier island, is 121 feet high and nearly steep-to 
around. 

Little Verdon island, southward, 335 yards from Great Verdon 
island, with a clear channel between, is 72 feet high and also nearly 
steep-to. 

Massacre islet, bearing 256°, distant 1,250 yards from Melier 
islet, is a bare rock; there is a patch at about 100 yards eastward of 
the islet with 31 fathoms of water over it. 

Massacre rock, bearing 162°, distant 300 yards from Massacre 
islet, has 5 feet least water over it. 

Monk islet, bearing 222°, distant } mile from Massacre islet, 
is a bare rock lighter in color than Massacre islet. 

Monk rock, bearing 73°, distant 900 yards from Monk islet, is 
awash at low water. 

Little Monk rock, bearing 50°, distant 200 yards from Monk 
rock, has 13 feet water over it. 

Ship shoal, bearing 280°, distant 1,200 yards from Monk islet, has 
41 fathoms water over it. 

Corlet shoal, bearing 4°, distant 600 yards from Monk: islet, has 
64 fathoms water over it. 

Northeast island is in two parts, which together are ? mile long, 
in a northerly and southerly direction, and from 200 to 500 yards 
wide. Le Calas, the northern part, has shoal water extending north- 
ward 150 yards from it, leaving a passage about 100 yards wide, with 
deep water between it and Little Verdon island. The eastern coasts 
of both parts are nearly bold-to, and that of the southern part rises 
abruptly from cape Croix to a remarkable dome-shaped hill 177 
feet high. 

Beacon.—The hill within cape Croix has a beacon on it. 

Fichot island, the largest of the group, is 14 miles long, in a 
northerly and southerly direction, about 3% mile wide, but of irregu- 
lar shape; its western coast, which rises steeply to the height of 194 
feet, 1s steep-to. 

Fichot harbor, lying between Fichot and Northeast islands, is 
entered by two passages; from the nortiwestward between Watering 
Cove point and Frommy island, and from the eastward by Flago 
pass, between Northeast island and the southeastern part of Fichot 
island, in which pass there is a depth of 8 feet. This harbor is only 
available for small vessels as the channel is narrow, the turns sharp, 
and the anchorage shallow and limited; there is a flagstaff on each 


382 CAPE BAULD ,TO CAPE ST. JOHN. 


entrance point. It is necessary to have a pilot or local knowledge to 
enter or leave this harbor. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, at Fichot harbor at 
6h. 58m.; springs rise 4 feet. : 

Madame island is the northeasternmost of a group of islands, 
nearly joined to one another and the mainland, situated on the west- 
ern side of Fichot channel. 

Repisse shoal, bearing 2°, distant 400 yards from Madame island, 
has 3 feet water over it, and is near the end of a ledge, part of which 
uncovers, extending 4+ mile from Madame island. 

Four harbor, southward $ mile from Cow point, is only suitable 
for small vessels that can anchor in a space 300 yards long and 200 
yards broad in 5 to 6 fathoms water, or moor in an arm, 100 yards 
wide, extending southwestward about 700 yards from the anchorage. 
The entrance points are 200 yards apart, but the clear channel be- 
tween the shoals off the points is only 100 yards wide. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, at Four harbor at 7h. 
5m.; springs rise 4 feet. 

Virgin shoal, bearing 133°, distant 300 yards from the northern 
entrance point of Four harbor, has 7 feet water over it, and is steep-to 
on its northern side. The southern hill on Fichot island open north- 
eastward of Madame island, bearing 119°, leads northeastward of 
this shoal. 

Virgin bay is southeastward of Four harbor and separated from 
it by a peninsula. 

Little Islets harbor, southwestward of Madame island, les be- 
tween English island and the peninsula southeastward of Virgin bay, 
off which shoals extend a short distance. 

Little Madame island is in the entrance to the harbor, and the only 
passage in is on the northwestern side of that island; it is clear in 
mid-channel and 50 yards wide. The harbor, suitable for small ves- 
sels, is 800 yards long and 200 yards wide, with anchorage in 13 feet 
water between the two northern fishing stages on its western side. 

There is a flagstaff on the northern entrance point. 

Fichot channel is between Madame and English islands, on the 
western side, and Fichot island, on the eastern side, and its width 
is 1,100 yards. 

Midchannel rock, bearing 286°, distant 650 yards from the south- 
ernmost point of Fichot island, is awash and the sea always breaks 
on it; there is a good passage on either side of the rock, the nearer 
one to Fichot island being the wider. 

Bruyantes rock, eastward 300 yards from English island and 
267°, distant 400 yards from Midchannel rock, is awash and the sea 
nearly always breaks on it. 


LOUIS LEMAIRE SHOAL—GREAT ISLETS HARBOR. 383 


Louis Lemaire shoal lies 200 yards southeastward from the east- 
ern end of English island, and has 6 feet water over it. 

A patch of 44 fathoms bears 135°, distant 465 yards, and a patch 
of 4% fathoms bears 160°, distant 465 yards from the eastern end of 
English island. 

Leading mark.—Massacre islet, its own breadth open westward 
of Fichot island, bearing 9°, leads between Midchannel rock and 
Fichot island. 

Chasseurs island, southward of the western part of English 
island, is separated from it by a channel 200 yards wide, with 6 fath- 
oms of water in its middle. <A rock hes southward of English island, 
with the northern point of Chasseurs island bearing 258°, distant 400 
yards. 

Gros-plomb islet les close southwestward of Chasseurs island. 
Double island, southwestward 700 yards from Chasseurs island, rises 
to two hills nearly joined at the base. 

Sournoise shoal, bearing 133°, distant 665 yards from Chasseurs 
island, has 13 feet water over it. The eastern side of Madame island, 
open eastward of English island, bearing 4°, leads eastward of this 
shoal. 

Great islets harbor (locally White’s arm) may be recognized by 
the peaks of Great Buse, 531 feet high, and Little Buse, 384 feet 
high, situated on the south side of the harbor. The entrance, south- 
ward of Double island, is 800 yards wide to Jehenne point, which is 
bare and steep. The harbor extends westward a little more than 1 
mile to River point, where it turns southwestward in an arm nearly 
200 yards wide, which has depths of 43 to 34 fathoms and is navigable 
for 4 mile. 

Chabert island, 400 yards northwestward of Double island, and 
nearly joined to the northern shore, shelters the usual anchorage, 
which is westward of it in 12 fathoms of water, mud bottom. North- 
eastward of River point is an island joined to the mainland at low 
water, southwestward of a shallow cove. Off the southern shore of 
the harbor are two small islets, about 800 yards apart. 

The shores of the harbor are nearly steep-to, and the harbor is 
clear to the anchorage westward of Chabert island, or to that avail- 
able for small vessels, in 34 fathoms water, within River point. On 
Grelins point, the southern point of a little cove on the western shore 
of this anchorage, a small vessel may be careened and repaired. 

The peak of Little Buse, bearing 248°, distant 1,200 yards from 
Jehenne point, and that of Great Buse, bearing 229°, a little more 
than 1 mile from the same point, are good marks. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, at 7h. 22m.; springs 
rise 5 feet. The streams are very irregular. 


384 CAPE BAULD TO CAPE ST. JOHN. 


The coast.—Enragée point bears 166°, distant 1$ miles from 
Jehenne point, the coast between being high, steep-to, and indented 
by several deep open coves. 

Goose island, bearing 202°, distant 1 mile from Enragée point, 
is 98 feet high, cliffy in parts, and barren and lighter in color than 
the coast in its vicinity. 

Great Goose harbor, immediately southwestward of Goose island, 
is only available for very small vessels, and the holding ground is 
bad. ” 

Baleine rock bears 100°, distant 250 yards from the southern en- 
trance point of the southern entrance into Great Goose harbor; it 
dries 5 feet, and a ledge on which there is only 3 feet water extends 
west-southwestward 200 yards from it. 

Little St. Julien harbor entrance is situated westward of Little 
St. Julien point, and south-southwestward, 400 yards from Baleine 
rock, and the harbor extends 850 yards nearly south-southwestward, 
with a width of 150 yards at the entrance, narrowing gradually to 
the head. Baleine rock and the narrow entrance shelter the fishing 
vessels, which moor head and stern, in 5 fathoms water, good holding 
ground, from the north-northeastward, in which direction the harbor 
is open. 

Great St. Julien harbor, southward of Little St. Julien point, 
is 400 yards wide at the entrance between it and Jeanne point, which 
is a bluff cliff nearly steep-to on its northwestern side, but having 
shoal water extend 100 yards northeastward of it. The harbor ex- 
tends south-southwestward $ mile, narrowing toward the head. 

A shoal lies 100 yards from the western ‘shore, nearly midway 
between Aurora point (pte a l’Aurore) and the fishing stage south- 
ward of it. 

This harbor is only suitable as a temporary anchorage for small 
vessels, which anchor in 5 fathoms water just southeastward of the 
northern stage on the western shore. Fishing vessels moor head and 
stern in security, though north-northeasterly winds bring a little sea 
into the harbor. 

St. Julien island, the northeastern point of which bears south- 
eastward, nearly 1 mile from Enragee point, extends thence south- 
westward about 2, mile, with a greatest width of } mile. The island 
is barren and rises to two hills, the higher, near the northern end, 
being 220 feet high. Northwest shoal extends northwestward 150 
yards off the northwestern shore at 600 yards from the northeastern 
point; the western end of the island is continued by islets and shoals, 
leaving Jeanne channel, which is about 200 vards wide, between them 
and the shoals off the spur southeastward of Jeanne point. 

St. Julien island stands out prominently from the line of the coast, 
and is a good mark. 


MULOU SHOAL——CROC HARBOR. 385 


Mulou shoal, bearing 30°, distant 265 yards from the northeastern 
point of St. Julien island, has 3 fathoms water over it, and breaks in 
bad weather. 

Souris rock, awash at low water, lies southward 100 yards and 
Souriceau rock, with 3 feet water over it, southwestward 100 yards 
from the islet close southwestward of St. Julien island. 

Jeanne channel has a clear navigable width of about 100 yards 
and is passable ordinarily by vessels drawing less than 13 feet water; 
from the southward keep near the mainland, until abreast the islets, 
and then in mid-channel; in vessels of greater draft buoy the passage 
before taking it. This channel is rendered difficult by the strong 
tidal streams in it, the flood stream beginning at low water and set- 
ting northwestward, and the ebb beginning at high water and setting 
southeastward. 

The coast trends southwestward, 34 miles from St. Julien island to 
Groux point and is bold-to; Black or Irish islet, southward 4 mile 
from Jeanne channel, is a rock, barren and steep-to; Flamands cove, 
southwestward 1,200 yards from the islet, is quite open, and at about 
+ mile farther southwestward is St. Julien peak, 279 feet high, which 
rises steeply from the coast and resembles the summit of Windy 
point. Corbeau islet and Petit Rocher lie close to the shore, north- 
eastward 1,800 yards and east-northeastward 600 yards, respectively, 
from Groux point. 

Ice.—In 1903 there were numerous bergs and pancake ice off the 
coast between Fichot islands and Croc harbor up to June 23. 

Croc harbor entrance lies between Groux point and Windy or 
Barren point, which points bear northward and southward, distant 
1,200 yards from each other; the entrance is not easily made out from 
the eastward. 

The harbor within the entrance extends generally westward for 
1,2, miles and then turns about north-northwestward for 1 mile to its 
head, le Fond, and from about 800 yards from the northern end of 
this arm a smaller arm, Epine Cadoret, stretches southwestward to 
Freshwater creek at its head. 

The shore of the harbor from Groux point curves northward to 
Groux bay, which affords shelter to boats only, and within Bon- 
homme point, the western headland of this bay, the shore is steep-to 
except in Fishermans cove at 600 yards westward. This cove, in 
which there is a fishing establishment, is only suitable for boats. 

Observation point, the southern entrance point of Epine Cadoret, is 
bold-to. About + mile up this arm on the western side is Cemetery 
point, on which stands a large white cross, and just inside the first 
elbow is Careening point, where vessels can be hove down. 


76846—09 25 


386 CAPE BAULD TO GAPE ST. JOHN. 


A square-rigged ship can beat into Croc harbor as far as Genille 
point, but it is better with fresh northerly winds to let go an anchor 
under foot off Groux point in 18 fathoms water gravel bottom, and 
wait until the wind moderates or changes direction. 

Irish bay, nearly # mile wide between Blanche and Windy points, 
is foul on the southeastern shore from 4 mile southwestward of Windy 
point to the head; le Muloux, a rock awash, lies 350 yards off the 
southeastern shore, and la Baleine or Folle rock, 3 feet high, lies off 
the western shore. 

This bay is quite open northward, but an islet, off the fishing estab- 
lishment at the head of the bay, affords shelter for small craft. 

Anchorage may be obtained anywhere in the upper part of the 
harbor inside of Genille point: vessels-of-war usually anchor off 
Observation point in 15 fathoms water, and moor. Westerly winds 
prevail, and when strong, violent squalls come alternately from Epine 
Cadoret and le Fond, causing great strain and heavy jerks on the 
cables. Merchant vessels moor, in 16 to 19 fathoms water, between 
Genille and Observation points, where a little sea comes in with east- 
erly winds, but the squalls with westerly winds are less violent. 

The anchorage abreast the watering place in le Fond is insecure 
during southerly winds. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Croc harbor at ‘7h. 
4m.; springs rise 44 feet. The streams are strong enough to keep a 
vessel tide rode in hght breezes. 

Water.—Water and wood can be easily obtained. 

Ice.—Croc harbor freezes solid in December, and breaks up in 
May, early or late according to the season. 

Windy point rises to a barren hill, 404 feet high, with whitish 
rugged slopes; it is not easy to distinguish from the northeastward, 
though prominent from other directions. Observatory islet, low and 
steep-to, lies close southeastward of this point. 

Beacon.—There is a beacon on the summit of the hill bearing 
226°, distant 735 yards from Windy point. 

Gray islands.—Groais island, situated southeastward at a dis- 
tance of 7 miles from Windy point, is cliffy and thickly wooded, 
nearly flat in outline, and high enough to be seen from a distance of 
40 to 50 miles. Islets and rocks extend from its northwestern point, 
which should not be approached within 14 miles. 

The Sisters, two steep rocks, lie off its northeastern point, and the 
rest of the coast is so steep that there is no place of shelter even for 
boats and few where one could be hauled on shore. 

Bell island (Belle ile du petit Nord) lies southward from Groais 
island and is separated from it by a clear channel, 53 miles wide. 
This island is high, flat, and steep-to, except on the shores of a bay 
on its southwestern side. Northeast rock (ile 4 Herpin), 4 mile off 


GREEN ISLAND—ROCKY BAY. 387 


its northeastern point, is a barren islet, with several rocks between it 
and the shore. 

L’Epervier rock is situated northeastward, distant a little more 
than $ mile from Northeast rock, and has 10 feet of water over it. 

Green island les near the coast at 1 mile northward of point 
Billard, the southwestern point of Bell island, and a rock, with 2 feet 
of water over it, bears 276°, distant 900 yards from Green island. 
The southern end of Groais island opens westward of Bell island, 
bearing 26°, leads westward of the rock. 

Boulonnaise rock, part of which uncovers at low water, bears 

153°, distant 4 mile from point Billard, and bearing 237°, distant 
4 He from the same point, is a rock with 7 feet of water over it. 

Rocky bay is in the middle of the southwestern coast, and in it 
small vessels and boats shelter inside a cluster of rocks and islets. 
It is the only place of shelter in Bell island. 

Red islet, or South rock, the southernmost of the cluster, bears 
206°, distant 2;'5 miles from point Lamy, the southern point of Bell 
island. It is about 300 yards in extent and 33 feet high. 

Red rock, with less than 6 feet of water over it, lies southwestward 
about 400 yards from the islet. Two patches of 42 fathoms each bear 
329°, distant 1,200 yards, and 7°, distant 1,800 yards, respectively, 
from the islet. 

Isle aux Canes, southward 800 yards from the eastern entrance 
point of Rocky bay and the largest of the cluster, is low with a round 
hillock covered with grass in summer. It is surrounded by rocks, 
of which the outer ones to the westward are Bara rock, with 10 feet 
of water over it, bearing 229°, distant } mile from the western end of 
the isle, and a rock, with 5 ae of water over it, 282°, 800 yards from 
the middle of the isle. 

A ledge, with 34 fathoms of water over it, extends 220°, nearly a 
mile from isle aux Canes, and should be avoided, as there may be 
shoaler water in the vicinity. 

A patch of 42 fathoms bears 175°, distant 3 mile, and a patch of 
2% fathoms 113°, distant } mile, from the isle. 

Anchorage may be obtained in Rocky bay in 24 fathoms water, 
sand bottom, passing a sufficient distance westward of isle aux Canes 
to avoid the rocks. 

The French vessels, fishing off Bell island, moor in Southwest 
harbor inside a group of rocks that forms the western entrance point 
of Rocky bay; but fine weather and an experienced pilot are required 
to use this anchorage. 

The coast southwestward of Windy point is high and steep for 
2 miles to Million cove, where there is a fishing settlement, but the 
cove is open to the eastward and affords indifferent shelter even for 
boats. 


b 
388 CAPE BAULD TO CAPE ST. JOHN. 


Pilier bay, south-southwestward 3 miles from Million cove, and on 
the northern side of Cape Rouge peninsula, is completely open to the 
eastward, and a bad anchorage. 

The coast of Cape Rouge peninsula is bold-to. 

Pyramid point, the northeastern extreme of Cape Rouge penin- 
sula, is a pyramidal rock, close southeastward of which is a low reef, 
separated by a narrow boat passage. In Piler cove, at about 600 
yards westward of Pyramid point, is a natural excavation supported 
by a pillar, from which the cove derives its name. 

Cape Rouge, the southeastern extremity of Cape Rouge peninsula, 
rises at a short distance westward to a peak 492 feet high. 

Truite point, the southwestern end of the peninsula, is the north- 
ern entrance point of Cape Rouge harbor, and the settlement is im- 
mediately northward of it. The shore of the harbor trends north- 
northwestward and northward nearly 2 miles from Truite point to 
the isthmus, which is about 850 yards across. 

Frauderesse point, the northeastern end of Conche peninsula, 
situated southward, distant 1,400 yards from Truite point, is fringed 
by rugged and curiously shaped rocks. A shoal extends nearly 300 
yards off the point, and shoals lie off the northern coast of Conche 
peninsula, which trends west-southwestward 14 miles from the point 
to the isthmus; the shoals extend nearly + mile northward from a 
white cross on point Dos de Cheval. 

Cape Rouge harbor, situated between Cape Rouge and Conche 
peninsulas, is divided into Biche arm and Southwest bay. The west- 
ern or mainland shore of the harbor is steep-to and nearly straight; 
Priest cove is a small bend in it opposite the harbor entrance. 

Biche arm affords secure anchorage, easy of access with any wind. 
The best position is in 15 fathoms of water, mud bottom, good hold- 
ing ground, off a remarkable cascade on the western shore and north- 
ward of Partridge point, which is low and grassy. Shoal water 
extends about 200 yards off the shore northward of Partridge point. 

Southwest bay (locally Cruce harbor) has Souris or Champ Paga 
shoal, the only isolated shoal in Cape Rouge harbor, in the middle of 
its entrance; this shoal is the summit of a bank of rock about 300 
yards in diameter, over which there is a least depth of 6 feet of water. 
Cod-pile (a little peaked rise on the hills northwestward of Conche 
harbor) in line with the northern fishing stage, bearing about 226°, 
leads northwestward; the northwestern point of Bell island well open 
northeastward of Frauderesse point, bearing 130°, leads northeast- 
ward; and the northern point of Rouge island in line with Frauderesse 
point, bearing 102°, leads southward. 

The northwestern end of Groais island in line with Gonde point, 
which is about 600 yards south-southwestward of cape Rouge, bearing 


ROUGE ISLAND—-MARTINIQUE BAY. 389 


70°, leads between Souris shoal and the shoals off point Dos de 
Cheval. 

Beacons.—-A cross and a pyramidal beacon on Dos de Cheval 
point in line leads over Souris shoal. 

Anchorage may be obtained near the head of the bay in 12 to 
16 fathoms of water, but with only fair holding ground, gravel and 
mud bottom. Vessels with good ground gear hold on well through 
the heavy squalls that prevail with westerly winds and the little sea 
caused by easterly winds. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, at Cape Rouge harbor 
at Th. Om. (approximate) ; springs rise 6 feet, neaps 4 feet. 

Ice.—Cape Rouge harbor fills with northern ice and freezes; the 
ice breaks up in May, early or late according to the season. 

Rouge island, bearing 100°, distant 34 miles from Frauderesse 
point, is 800 yards long, 350 yards wide, steep-to, and is composed of — 
red rock covered with grass at the top. 

The coast of Conche peninsula from Frauderesse point trends 
south-southwestward 34 miles to cape Fox, and it is steep-to, but 
islets and rocks extend 200 yards off cape Fox, its southern end. 

Conche harbor stretches northward 2? miles on the western side 
of Conche peninsula, and it is 13 miles wide at its entrance, diminish- 
ing gradually to its head; the fishing establishments, off which the 
fishing vessels moor head and stern, are situated at Stage and Silver 
coves, about 14 miles northward of cape Fox. 

The shore of the harbor from cape Fox to Silver cove is obstructed 
by nets during the fishery season. 

Silver cove is immediately northward of Stage cove and between 
Silver and Latin points, which bear north-northwestward and south- 
southeastward, distant 700 yards from each other. The water is shal- 
low for about 200 yards off its shores, and a patch about 30 yards in 
diameter, with 5 fathoms water over it, and 7 fathoms around, bears 
350°, distant 350 yards from Silver point. Silver city, the settle- 
ment around the coves, has about 250 inhabitants, and there is a 
church and a priest’s house. 

Anchorage.—There is good anchorage off the southwestern village 
on the northern side of Conche harbor, in 7 to 12 fathoms water (not 
less than the latter depth for large vessels), with Silver city church 
bearing 113°; also for small vessels in Silver cove in about 9 fathoms, 
sand ; large vessels anchor off the cove clear of the 5-fathom shoal. 

Communication.—The steamer from Tilt cove calls at Conche 
harbor weekly during summer and autumn. 

Supplies.—Fresh mutton and vegetables can usually be obtained. 

Martinique bay, on the northwestern side of the head of the 
harbor, is open to the eastward and southward; the holding ground 
is said to be good and vessels manage to hold on there in the fishing 


390 CAPE BAULD TO CAPE ST. JOHN. 


season; the anchorage off this bay is in 10 to 14 fathoms water. 
Southerly winds blow right in with great violence. 

Ice.—Conche harbor fills in with northern ice and freezes; the ice 
breaks up in May, early or late according to the season, but it has 
happened that heavy pans of ice almost entirely blocked up the small 
anchorage in Silver cove at the end of June. 

The coast of the mainland from the shore of Conche harbor west- 
ward of cape Fox trends south-southwestward nearly 6 miles to Bou- 
titou point. 

La Vache gare, a large pale yellow patch on the coast, bears 257°, 
distant 3 miles from cape Fox, and Vache Gare cove, a slight indenta- 
tion in the coast, lies close northward of it. 

Hilliers harbor (havre de Boutitou) extends northwestward 1,200 
yards immediately westward of Boutitou point, with a width of 4 
mile. It is difficult to make out from the northeastward, but there 
are three parallel gaps in the cliffs that resemble a ship under sail 
close to the coast, the southern of which is Boutitou point. The 
harbor is open southeastward, but a cove in its northeastern shore 
affords shelter to three or four vessels in 6 fathoms water, moored 
head and stern, along its southeastern side. Dolo point is the south- 
eastern entrance point of the cove, and there is a flagstaff on the 
northwestern entrance point. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, at Hilliers harbor, at 
th. 2m. 

Boutitou shoal, on the western side of the southern approach to 
Hilliers harbor bearing 195°, distant $ mile from Boutitou point 
and 400 yards off the coast, has 7 feet water over it. 

The coast from Brown Rock point, which bears 202°, distant 
nearly a mile from Boutitou point, trends southwestward, 34 miles 
to cape Daumalen. It is fairly bold, but Rock island and Dog shoal 
he within 400 yards of it at about a mile southwestward of Brown 
Rock point. 

Canada bay (baie des Canaries) entrance is between cape Dauma- 
len and Canada head, which bear south-southwestward and north- 
northeastward, distant 2 miles from each other. Within the entrance 
Bide arm and Chimney bay stretch northward, and Canaries and 
Gouffre harbors are on the southern shore. 

Light.—A fixed white light is exhibited from a lantern hoisted on 
a white open framework near cape Daumalen from June to December. 

Grevigneux or Englee island lies close westward of cape 
Daumalen headland; it is about 150 feet high and partly wooded. 
Aiguillettes island, joined to the southeastern part of Grevigneux 
island by a sand bank, is wooded and steep. 

Aiguillettes harbor, between Aiguillettes island and the main- 
land, is only suitable for small craft. 


AIGUILLETTES ROCK—WHITE ISLET. 391 


Aiguillettes rock, bearing 116°, distant 850 yards from White 
‘point, the southern end of Grevigneux island, is small and has 13 
feet water over it; there is deep water around the rock and the sea 
breaks on it during strong westerly winds. 

The cascade on the western shore of Canada bay open southward 
of White point leads southward of Aiguillettes rock. 

Grevigneux harbor, northeastward of the northern end of 
Grevigneux island, is so small that it is available for only one mod- 
erate sized vessel, when clear of fishing craft. 

Communication.—The steamer from Tilt cove calls at Grevig- 
neux harbor weekly during summer and autumn. 

Supplies.—A small supply of fresh provisions can be obtained 
here. 

Bide arm extends northward 5 miles from Grevigneux island, with 
an average breadth of 600 yards, and affords the best anchorage in 
Canada bay in heavy weather. 

Hermit rock bears 29°, 650 yards from Grévigneux point, the 
northern point of Grévigneux island, and 200 yards off the eastern 
shore of this arm; it has 6 feet water over it. 

Bide shoal, on which the least water is 4 feet, stretches 200 yards 
off the western shore at 4 mile northward of Miot point, which is 
situated 34 miles within Grévigneux point. 

The Watchers, rocks awash, and the Turtles, rocks dry at low 
water, lie between Lard point, the northwestern entrance point of the 
arm, and Milan point, a prominent point on the western side at about 
1,200 yards within the entrance, and the shoal water around these 
rocks extends nearly 300 yards offshore. 

Anchorage.—The water in Bide arm is deep for 2 miles north- 
ward of Lard point; within this distance there is anchorage, but it 
is safer to anchor at 3 miles inside the entrance, in 9 to 13 fathoms 
water in the middle of the arm, or to proceed beyond Bide shoal, and 
there is also sheltered anchorage in the basin at the head in 11 
fathoms water, but vessels must not swing within 200 yards of the 
shore. 

Directions.—Pass about 400 yards westward of Grévigneux 
island, then steer about north-northeastward for Wooded point. 
When abreast Stony point and 300 yards off it, keep in mid-channel 
till near Miot point, after which keep about 200 yards off the eastern 
shore till past Bide shoal, and then again in mid-channel. ' 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change in Bide arm at 6h. 37m. ; 
springs rise 54 feet, neaps 14 feet. 

White islet lies southwestward, distant 800 yards from Lard 
point, and is conspicuous from its color. Northeastward of it, at a 
distance of 200 yards, is Flat islet, and there is a passage between 
these islets and Lard point. 


392 CAPE BAULD TO CAPE ST. ‘JOHN. 


Herring shoal, bearing 198°, distant 400 yards from White islet, 
has 23 fathoms water over it. 

Cod rock, bearing 186°, distant 800 yards from White islet, has 12 
feet water over it. — 

Milan point, open eastward of Lard point, bearing 20°, leads east- 
ward; and the southern summit of the Chimneys or Cloud hills, open 
westward of Green islet, bearing 335°, leads southwestward of Cod 
rock and Herring shoal. 

Clark rock lies in the fairway to Chimney bay, with White islet 
bearing 89°, distant 1 mile, and has 19 feet water over it. Green 
island, shut in by Fly point, bearing 359°, leads westward of this rock. 

Wolf shoal, bearing 161°, distant 4 mile from Marten point, which 
lies northwestward 1,5, miles from the southwestern point of Lard 
point promontory, has 3 feet water over it; some banks with 3% 
and 44 fathoms water over them extend northwestward 500 yards 
from this shoal. White point in line with the western side of White 
islet, bearing 143°, leads southwestward of Wolf shoal and the banks. 

Chimney bay.—The western arm of Canada bay (the name 
Chimney is not used locally) extends northward, 6 miles from abreast 
Marten point, where it is 1,700 yards wide, to Weymouth point, which 
is low and wooded. The arm, which has a least width of 535 yards, 
opens northward of Weymouth point into a bay of some extent, and 
from this bay Northeast and Beaver arms continue northward, and 
Castor cove south-southwestward, while from the head of Castor 
cove Northwest arm runs northwestward about 5 miles. 

Marten rock, bearing 307°, distant 550 yards from Marten point, 
is awash at low water. The eastern point of Grevigneux island in 
line with Lard point, bearing 127°, leads westward of the rock. 

Fly point lies westward, distant 1,700 yards from Marten point, 
and a rock that covers bears 206°, distant } mile from Fly point and 
nearly 200 yards offshore. 

Cabin point, on the eastern shore 24 miles northward of Marten 
point, is low, flat, and fronted by rocky ledges that dry at low water. 
It should not be approached close-to. 

Otter cove lies on the western shore northwestward of Green 
island, which bears northwestward, distant 14 miles from Marten 
point. Anchorage can be obtained in the middle of this cove in 8 
fathoms, sand and mud bottom, but shoal water extends for some dis- 
tance off its shores. 

Bad rock, north-northeastward, ;®, mile from Green island and 4 
mile off the western shore, is a small rocky islet; foul ground extends 
about 200 yards eastward from it. 

Shoal.—A shoal extends northeastward 300 yards from the west- 
ern shore of the arm about 600 yards northward of Bad rock. 


_GROSSE POINT—-TENEDOS ROCK. 393 


Grosse point, opposite Cabin point and nearly a mile northward 
of Bad rock, contracts the channel to a width of 500 yards, but it is 
clear excepting the ledges close to Cabin point. There is good an- 
chorage in 18 fathoms, mud bottom, at a point bearing 160°, distant 
700 yards from Grosse point. 

Between Grosse and Weymouth points the arm is clear and deep 
beyond a distance of 300 yards from its shores, and there is good 
anchorage at ? mile northward of Cabin point in 11 to 13 fathoms, 
bottom mud, howard the western side. 

Sige cain tb point is low, and wooded to the water’s edge. Wey- 
mouth cove, immediately northwestward of it, extends ‘nearly 4 mile 
in a southwesterly direction and is surrounded by foul and rocky 
shores. Between the northern entrance point of this cove and Old 
House point, 1,4 miles farther northward, there are several shoal 
patches which extend more than halfway across the arm abreast 
Chaine point. Therefore keep the eastern side aboard. 

Chaine point, on the eastern shore, 1,700 yards northeastward 
of Weymouth point, is flat and wooded. Foul ground extends south- 
westward over 200 yards, and northeastward 4+ mile from it, and a 
bank, with depths of 6 to 11 fathoms over it, mud bottom, stretches 
across the channel abreast of it. There is good anchorage in 12 
fathoms in the eastern part of Dowers harbor, which is northeastward 
of Chaine point, but the space with depths over 5 fathoms is only 
about 350 yards across. 

Scott point, northward, 1. 200 yards from Chaine point, is low, 
and rocky shoals extend 300 yards oif its southern side. A narrow 
cove runs northeastward about 1,200 yards from immediately south- 
eastward of Scott point, but its greater part is filled with shallows of 
sand and mud. 

Old House point forms with Scott point the termination of the 
channel leading to the open water space at the head of Canada bay. 
A quarter of a mile southeastward of it, on a low sandy point, there 
is a small wharf, behind which are a few buildings occupied by 
settlers, who are engaged in salmon fishing and trapping in the 
neighborhood. 

A shoal of black mud, having a depth of 7 feet over its outer end, 
extends northeastward for + mile, and northward for nearly the 
same distance off this point, forming two prongs with 4 to 6 fathoms 
of water between them. 

Tenedos rock, bearing 49°, distant 1,200 yards from Old House 
point, has a least depth of 6 feet over it. Between it and the shoal 
extending from that point there is a clear channel 600 yards wide. 

Beacons.—A beacon stands on the northern extremity of Drum- 
mond island, and another on the mainland northward of it. These 
beacons in line, bearing 337°, lead in mid-channel from northward of 


394 CAPE BAULD TC CAPE ST. JOHN. 


Chaine point between Tenedos reck and the shoal off Old House 
point. 

A wooden, triangular-shaped beacon stands on the southern ex- 
tremity of Drummond island and a similar beacon on the middle of 
Fane island. These beacons in hne, bearing 303°, lead southwestward 
of Tenedos rock and northeastward of the shoal off Old House point. 

Northeast arm affords good anchorage in 8 to 10 fathoms north- 
eastward of Zephyr rock, or in 12 to 15 fathoms between that rock and 
the western shore, but the latter position is open to southerly winds, 
which occasionally blow up the bay with some strength. A con- 
siderable stream flows into the head of Northeast arm. 

Zephyr rock, bearing 337°, distant 4 mile from Adamson point, 
is awash at low water. Two small patches, with depths of 4 fathoms 
on them, le northeastward from this rock, distant 800 yards and 1,200 
yards respectively from it. 

Adamson point lies northward, 2.100 yards from Scott point, 
and the promontory, of which it is the end, is very foul on its north- 
eastern side; bearing 57°, distant 600 yards from the point, is a 
small detached patch which dries. The southern end of Fane island, 
open northwestward of the trees on the northern end of Drummond 
island, leads northwestward of the patch. 

Drummond island, northward, 900 yards from Old House point, 
is clear on its southern and southeastern sides, but shoal water extends 
300 yards from its eastern and northeastern sides. There is a narrow 
channel with depths of 4 to 6 fathoms between the northern end of 
the island and the mainland. 

Fane island, westward, 700 yards from Drummond island, is 
clear off its southern end, and shoal water.extends but a short dis- 
tance off its eastern and western sides. A stony spit, with depths of 
1 to 2 fathoms over it, reaches nearly to the mainland from its 
northern end. Between Fane and Drummond islands the water is 
too deep for anchorage. 

A small shoal bears 297°, distant 4 mile from the southern end of 
Fane island, and has 4 fathoms water over it. 

Beaver arm entrance is northward of Fane island and the shoals 
extending northward from it, and the arm extends northeastward 
for 1,45 miles with a width varying from 300 to 700 yards. There is 
anchorage in the middle of the arm in 8 to 9 fathoms, but its narrow- 
est part is partly barred by a spit, with a depth of 21 feet over it, 
extending from the southeastern side. Foul ground stretches about 
650 yards from the head of the arm, and there is a rock, 1 foot high, 
at its southwestern end. A stream runs into the head of the arm, 
constant netting of which has considerably reduced the number of 
salmon going in. 


BEAVER COVE—GOUFFRE HARBOR. 395 


Beaver cove, in the mainland westward of Fane island, affords the 
best and clearest anchorage in the northern part of Canada bay in 15 
to 17 fathoms, mud bottom. 

Castor cove, the entrance of which les between Old House point 
and a point bearing west-northwestward, nearly ;®, mile from it, ex- 
tends in a southwesterly direction 1/4; miles to its head, where it con- 
tracts to a very narrow channel leading into Northwest arm, which 
extends northwestward for about 5 miles. Castor cove is quite free 
from danger, but the water is deep, while toward its head strong 
tidal streams flow from Northwest arm. 

Northwest arm is shallow, and much obstructed by islets and 
rocks. There is a large salt water pond, stretching southward from 
just within the entrance to the arm, which boats enter at high water, 
but there is a very strong tidal stream in its narrow mouth. 

Tides and tidal streams.—It is high water, full and change, 
at Old House point, at 6h. 55m.; springs rise 5 feet, neaps 34 feet. 
The tidal streams in the upper part of Canada bay are complicated 
by the large body of water flowing into and out of Northwest arm. 
When the flood stream is setting northward in the main channel and 
the water is rising at Old House point, the ebb is still running out of 
Northwest arm and through Castor cove. 

These streams meet between Old House point and Drummond 
island, forming an eddy, which extends along the western shore to 
Weymouth cove. 

Vessels passing to and from Beaver cove may fhus be set toward 
Tenedos rock. 

At the entrance to Northwest arm the stream is rapid, and at 
springs it 1s very difficult for boats to get through against it. 

The Chimneys or Cloud hills, situated 2 miles inland from 
Grosse point, are a cluster of remarkable hills with bare rugged 
peaks, 909 to 1,150 feet high; they are conspicuous from a distance 
southeastward of Canada bay. 

Torrent cove or Hells mouth, southward 13 miles from Green 
island, derives its first given name from the cascade falling over high 
land at the head. 

Gouffre harbor (Wild cove) entrance, southward 24 miles from 
Torrent cove, is 7385 yards wide between Gouffre islet, small, rocky, 
and difficult to distinguish under the land, situated 100 yards off the 
western shore, and Gouffre point to the eastward, which is long, low, 
and surrounded by rocks and shoals, that should be given a good 
berth. This harbor, which extends south-southwestward, $ mile, is 
much frequented, and affords good shelter southward of Gouffre 
islet, with cape Daumalen just shut in with Gouffre point, bearing 
60°, in 13 fathoms water, hard bottom, but fair holding ground. 


396 CAPE BAULD TO CAPE ST. JOHN. 


Fishing vessels moor head and stern in the harbor, though it is open 
to northerly winds. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, at Goutfre harbor at 
6h. 46m.; springs rise 54 feet, neaps 14 feet. 

Water is easily obtained from a stream on the western side of the 
harbor; a stream flows into the head, but a fringe of bowlders ren- 
ders it inaccessible to boats. 

Canaries harbor (or Canada harbor) entrance is between the 
western point of Canada head and Calvary point, which he south- 
eastward 1,4, miles from Gouffre point. 

Calvary point, faced by white rocky cliffs, rises to a round hill, 
128 feet high, on which is a cross. The western point of Canada head 
bears east-northeastward, 850 yards from Calvary point. In this 
harbor are the principal fishery establishments of the bay, and there 
is a sufficient depth for mooring vessels, but the holding ground is 
bad, and the harbor is completely open to northerly winds, which 
bring in a heavy sea. 

Ice.—Canada bay freezes solid during December and breaks up in 
May, early or late according to the season. In 1905, there was ice 
off the mouth of Canada bay on June 13. 

Canada head is a conspicuous cliffy bluff, rising gradually south- 
ward in rugged hills. 

The coast from Canada head trends southward 3 miles to cape 
Goboso (locally Toulinguet head), and continues in steep and pre- 
cipitous cliffs, exéept in Little Canada harbor, a small cove midway 
between the two headlands, where there are a few huts occupied by 
fishermen in summer, though there is little protection for boats in 
strong easterly winds. The land attains a height of 780 feet, about 
800 yards west-southwestward of Little Canada harbor, and in cape 
Goboso summit about 1,600 yards southward, 950 feet. 

Cape Tasse lies south-southwestward, ? mile from cape Goboso, 
and between them the coast falls back a little, forming a small open 
bay. A detached rock, with a depth of 6 fathoms over it, lies 200 
yards off cape Tasse, and here the coast bends a little to the west- 
ward. 

Cat cove is a small bight 1 mile southwestward from cape Tasse, 
and on its shores there are some fishermen’s houses and landing 
stages. It affords fairly good shelter for boats with northerly and 
northeasterly winds. 

The coast from Cat cove continues in high cliffs for 3 miles to 
Duckbill point. The Sugarloaf, situated about 1 mile southwestward 
of Cat cove, is a conspicuous peaked cliff rismg almost perpendicu- 
larly 680 feet from the sea. 

Duckbill point, situated west-southwestward, 1{ miles from the 
Sugarloaf, is bare and rocky, rising to a steep escarpment terminat- 


HOOPING HARBOR—-FOURCHE HARBOR. 397 


ing the summits of the hills southwestward of cape Goboso. On 
southwesterly bearings it has a resemblance to the shape of a duck’s 
bill. 

Hooping harbor lies immediately westward of Duckbill point, 
its entrance being nearly 4 mile in width. 

Within the entrance the harbor forms two arms—Kastern arm, 
which extends northward and terminates about 14 miles northward 
of Duckbill point, and Northern arm, which extends westward about 
2 miles. 

The shores are very high and cliffy, except at the head of Eastern 
arm, where there is a little flat land and a good stream flowing into 
the bay. Excepting this flat land and that of Duckbill point all the 
hills are densely wooded with spruce, birch, and maple. 

The water in the harbor is deep, and there are no shoals outside the 
5-fathom line, which extends about 100 yards off Duckbill point. 

A small fishing settlement formerly existed at the head of Eastern 
arm, but nothing of it now remains beyond a few graves. During 
summer .some fishing vessels frequent this arm, and temporary huts 
are erected near the stream for dwellings and stores. The place is 
usually vacated about the end of October. 

Anchorages.—Eastern arm affords anchorage in 16 to 20 fathoms, 
with good holding ground, but it is open southward and strong 
breezes outside cause such a swell to roll in that it is not recom- 
mended. The head of Eastern arm and the mouth of the stream in it 
have numerous bowlders in them. There is good anchorage at the 
head of Northern arm off a stony beach in about 22 fathoms, mud bot- 
tom. The northern bight in this arm is too deep for anchorage, but 
small vessels moor to the rocks during summer. 

The coast between Hooping harbor and Fourche point (cape 
d’Argent), which les 5 miles southward, is composed of steep, high 
cliffs. 

Little Hooping harbor, southward 14 miles from Hooping har- 
bor, is merely an open bay. There is no shelter from offshore winds, 
and when these are continuous a heavy ground swell prevails. 

Fourche harbor (locally Greenspond) is entered close southward 
of Fourche point. Its entrance, 1,200 yards wide, lies between East- 
ern head, a high, cliffy point at 600 yards southwestward of Fourche 
point, and Granite point, a dark, sloping, rocky point projecting from 
the high land to the southwestward. It is quite clear of shoals and 
is fronted by a rocky bank with 20 to 30 fathoms water over it. A 
patch of 9 fathoms is situated on this bank, bearing 126°, distant 
300 yards from Eastern head. 

The harbor, surrounded by high, cliffy hills, densely wooded, ex- 
tends westward for 3 miles inside the entrance, and then, turning 


398 CAPE BAULD TO CAPE ST. JOHN. 


northwestward, continues }? mile farther in a narrow arm, at the head 
of which there is a considerable stream. 

At 2 miles within the entrance, on the western side of a wooded 
headland, is Northeast cove, which is small and has around it a few 
fishermen’s houses and landing stages. 

Anchorage.—Fourche harbor is everywhere deep, and the only an- 
chorage for other than small craft is a little outside the entrance to 
the narrow Northern arm and eastward of a grassy flat on the west- 
ern shore. The depths here are 14 to 20 fathoms, over mud and 
stones. This position is sheltered from the eastern sea, which often 
rolls into the outer part of the harbor, but during westerly gales it is 
subject to violent squalls from the surrounding high land. 

Small vessels anchor in Northeast cove in 7 to 8 fathoms. 

Directions.—Sailing vessels must enter the harbor with a fair 
wind, on account of the heavy squalls with westerly winds. 

The coast from Granite point trends southwestward 104 miles to 
the entrance of Orange bay, and consists throughout of high, steep 
cliffs, forming in places open bays or coves. In all these, however, 
the water is deep and no shelter is afforded. 

Between 2 and 6 miles from Granite point the coast is fronted by 
several detached banks with depths of 14 to 20 fathoms over them. 
Outside these the water is deep. 

A heavy northerly swell is frequently experienced on this coast, 
making landing difficult, and, during strong winds from that direc- 
tion, impossible. 

Robineau cove, the second bight southwestward of Fourche and 
about 24 miles from Granite point, has a conspicuous peaked cliff, 
1,075 feet high, on its northern side. 

Pigeon cove, southwestward 34 miles from Robineau cove, has a 
rocky islet, separated by a narrow passage from the land, at its east- 
ern entrance head. 

Duggans cove, southwestward nearly 3 miles from Pigeon cove, 
is a small bight with a stony beach at its head. There is a fishing set- 
tlement in Duggans cove comprising several houses and some patches 
of cultivated land. 

Orange bay (or Great Harbor deep) extends west-northwestward 
2 miles and then divides into two branches, Soufflets arm running 
northward, and Pigeonniere arm running westward; Sault cove is 
the head of the latter arm. 

Cats cove, just inside of the northern entrance point of Orange 
bay, contains a small fishing settlement. 

Temporary anchorage may be obtained here in moderate weather or 
during strong northerly winds, in 20 to 25 fathoms. 


JACQUES COVE—GRANDFATHER ROCK. 399 


Jacques cove, on the southern shore 1 mile inside of the entrance, 
is a fishing station, but in successive years many vessels that moored 
there were lost, and it is no longer used as an anchorage. 

Soufflets arm extends northward if miles, and then, turning 
abruptly around Rade point on the western shore, runs westward and 
northwestward for over a mile to its head. At 1,600 yards westward 
of Rade point the arm narrows to the breadth of 200 yards between 
Observatory point and the opposite point to the southward; the navi- 
gable channel is here barely 100 yards wide, with a depth of 34 
fathoms, and a spit, dry at low water, extends westward 300 yards 
from Observatory point. 

In entering the head of Soufflets arm, hug the southwestern shore 
closely. At 400 yards westward of Observatory point the channel 
opens to the northward into a basin, about 300 yards across, having 
depths of 54 to 7 fathoms, but shoal at its head. 

Sault cove is at the head of Pigeonniere arm, and its entrance 
is between Pigeon point lying to the eastward and Plate point lying 
to the westward. About 300 yards northwestward of Pigeon point, 
Emeraude shoal with 3 feet of water over it, extends southwestward 
200 yards offshore. The channel between this shoal and Plate point is 
about 200 yards in width, and rocks border the shore immediately 
northwestward of Plate point. The anchorage, in 10 fathoms of 
water, is about 600 yards inside of the entrance, where the cove has a 
width of 265 yards. 

The coast from Orange bay trends south-southwestward, and it 
consists of high cliffs, wooded in places. Big cove, 34 miles from 
Orange bay, is a bight with a conspicuous waterfall; and Devil point 
(locally Eastern head) at 24 miles farther south-southwestward, is a 
rounded, projecting headland, 195 feet high, and covered with scrub. 

Union cove (Petites Vaches), running northwestward of Devil 
point, is # mile in extent and, though open southeastward, contains 
at its head excellent shelter and good anchorage for small vessels, 
but im an area so limited that it is necessary to moor. 

The shores of the cove are high, wooded, and steep-to, and there 
are no shoals. There is a small fishing settlement at the head of 
this cove, but it is usually deserted in winter, when the inhabitants 
resort to winter houses in Little Harbor deep. 

The coast of a high wooded headland, which rises in slopes, con- 
tinues south-southwestward about 1 mile from Union cove to Grand- 
father head, the northern entrance point of Little Harbor deep. 

Grandfather rock (Granfers) comprises two rocks, 6 feet high, 
lying 600 yards eastward of Grandfather head. Shoal water extends 
about 100 yards from Grandfather rock, leaving a good passage 
between it and the mainland. 


400 CAPE BAULD TO CAPE ST. JOHN. 


Little Harbor deep (Grandes Vaches) entrance is between Grand- 
father head and Little Harbor Deep head, which bear northward 
and southward, distant 1,600 yards from each other, and the arm 
extends west-northwestward for 14 miles to Net point, where it turns 
west-southwestward and continues for 2 mile to the mouth of a con- 
siderable stream. ‘This last bend of the arm is filled with an extensive 
shallow flat of sand and mud, on which and also at the mouth of the 
stream are many bowlders. 

A few fishermen’s huts and stages stand on the northern shore 
opposite Net point, and farther up, behind a sandy beach, are the 
houses occupied by these fishermen and by those who come from 
Union cove in winter. 

Shoals.—In the entrance to Little Harbor deep there are several 
detached patches with depths of 7 to 10 fathoms. Outside of these 
the water deepens to 30 fathoms, and beyond this depth some patches 
of 14 to 20 fathoms front the coast at a distance of ? mile. 

Middle ground is a small rocky head of 4 fathoms, situated on 
one of the above patches, bearmg 43°, distant 950 yards from Little 
Harbor Deep head. 

Anchorage.—Though open eastward, there is fairly good anchor- 
age in Little Harbor deep in 11 to 14 fathoms, with Net point bear- 
ing between southwestward and west-southwestward and with the 
northeastern shore distant between 250 and 450 yards. During east- 
erly gales, which throw the heaviest sea on to this coast, this position 
is Sheltered and but little swell rolls in. 

Little Harbor Deep head is a bare rocky headland. A rock, 
bearing 109°, at a distance of 200 yards from its end, has 18 feet of 
water over it. 

White bay, the entrance to which is between Little Harbor Deep 
head and Partridge point, which lies 15 miles to the east-southeast- 
ward, extends south-southwestward for 44 miles, gradually diminish- 
ing in width toward its head. 

The shores are generally high, rising in steep slopes from the sea, 
and are densely wooded with spruce, birch, and maple. Several arms 
and inlets in the bay are easy of access and afford good shelter. 
White bay is deep, and, excepting Dossenger rock, there are no off- 
lying shoals affecting navigation. There are small settlements, the 
inhabitants of which make a scanty living by fishing in most of the 
harbors, but, as during the past few years the cod fishery has almost 
failed, these fishermen are, as a rule, in a condition of poverty. A 
sawmill, worked by water power, has been erected in Sops arms, and 
a considerable trade in timber is expected in that locality. 

Ice.—White bay generally freezes over toward the end of Decem- 
ber and remains so, or is obstructed by field ice and bergs, until April 
or May, but frequently there are bergs in it until July. In 1903 the 


LITTLE CAT ARM. 401 


entrance of the bay was completely blocked on June 13; the bay was 
clear of ice on July 6. 

Weather.—FEasterly winds prevail during summer, and south- 
erly and westerly, with fine clear weather, in autumn. Northerly 
gales throw a heavy sea into the bay, reaching as far up as Saltwater 
cove. Fog is common, with light northeasterly and northerly winds, 
but though occasionally continuing for three days in June and July, 
it usually lasts only a few hours. Rain is frequent and often of 
some duration, especially in those arms which are surrounded by 
high, wooded shores. 

Currents.—During moderate weather currents generally run north- 
eastward along the eastern shore of White bay and nearly south- 
ward along the western shore, and the ice drifts almost constantly in 
these directions; but the fishermen state that a prevalence of strong 
southwesterly winds sometimes reverses the currents for a short time. 

Communication.—The only means of communication with other 
places is by boat or by a mail carrier who crosses from Seal arm to 
bay Verte and proceeds thence by boat to meet the weekly mail 
steamer at Coachman harbor. 

The shore of White bay from Little Harbor deep head trends 
southwestward and continues in cliffs for 54 miles to Stump point, but 
the faces of the cliffs are more generally bare and present a whiter 
appearance seaward than those to the northeastward and southwest- 
ward. In the entrance of Pumbly cove, a small bight, at 24+ miles 
from Little Harbor Deep head and about 400 yards from the shore, 
there is a rocky head of 34 fathoms. Elsewhere the shore is fairly 
steep and fronted by detached banks with depths of 18 to 22 fathoms 
over them, while the 100-fathom contour line is 14 miles off. 

Little Cat arm extends west-northwestward about 14 miles from 
its entrance between Stump point and White point, which are 4 mile 
apart in a south-southwesterly and north-northeasterly direction. 
The hills northeastward of the entrance are bare and rocky, while 
those to the south-southwestward are thickly wooded. The arm is 
clear of shoals beyond 100 yards from its shores and affords anchorage 
in 14 to 16 fathoms near its head, sheltered from the sea, but subject to 
violent squalls from the surrounding hills, which rise to about 1,000 
feet and are for the most part wooded with spruce, birch, and maple. 

At 1 mile inside the entrance is a bar with depths of 6 to 10 
fathoms of water, and within the bar a pool 12 to 18 fathoms deep 
extends to the head, where two small streams fall from the cliffy 
hills. On the southern side at a mile inside the entrance the shore 
forms a small cove, in which there are some fishermen’s huts, and off 
which shoal water of less than 3 fathoms extends for nearly 200 yards. 

76846—09——26 


402 CAPE BAULD TO CAPE ST. JOHN. 


Bank.—A bank, with 15 to 20 fathoms of water over it, extending 
+ miles in a northeasterly and southwesterly direction, lies about 1 
mile eastward of the entrance of Little Cat arm. 

The shore.—White point, the southern entrance point of Little 
Cat arm, is a low bare point extending from the foot of wooded hills, 
and the shore of White bay thence to Eastern head of Great Cat arm 
at 1,4, miles south-southwestward is cliffy, steep-to, and backed by 
high wooded hills. 

Great Cat arm is about 1 mile wide at its entrance between East- 
ern head and Western head, two cliffy points, which bear north- 
eastward and southwestward from each other. Eastern head is 
backed by high wooded hills, while the hills directly over Western 
head are bare and rocky. 

At 700 yards west-southwestward of Eastern head is Shoal point, 
a low flat point with a beach of large stones and bowlders; from this 
point shoal water extends 300 yards, and farther off there are some 
detached rocky patches of 2 to 44 fathoms, the latter bearing 165°, 
535 yards from the point. Outside these patches the water quickly 
deepens to 20 fathoms and upward, and on the southwestern side of 
the outer shoal the depth of 20 fathoms is distant less than 100 yards. 

The western side of the entrance is clear of shoals, but at 400 yards 
southward of Western head a rocky patch, with a depth of 335 
fathoms over it, hes 300 yards offshore. The contour line of 10 
fathoms is 400 vards outside this patch, and depths of 6 to 9 fathoms 
reach from here to Western head. Southeastward 1 mile from West- 
ern head a bank, with 12 to 13 fathoms of water over it, extends north- 
eastward and southwestward 14 miles; it is the summit of a long 
ridge which has depths of 25 to 30 fathoms. 

From its entrance Great Cat arm extends west-northwestward 2# 
miles, then after bending southwestward for 1 mile it turns sharply 
northwestward for about 1$ miles. It is surrounded by high hills 
with cliffy faces throughout, those on the northern side being gen- 
erally bare or burnt, while those on the southern side are densely 
wooded. Inside the entrance the shores are everywhere steep-to 
except at the head of the arm, where there is a shallow flat $ mile 
in length. A small stream flows into the arm at its head, and at 
600 yards from the head on the southern side is the mouth of a 
stream divided by two small islets; inside these islets there is a deep 
pool into which the stream falls from a small gorge between the hills. 

Anchorage.—There is good anchorage in 12 to 18 fathoms, sand 
and mud, in Camp cove, on the southern side of the first bend and 
directly opposite a high cliffy point on the northern shore, but this 
position is subject to violent squalls during strong westerly winds. 
A better position, where the squalls are not so violent, is found 1,400 
yards up the arm from the cliffy point and southeastward 400 yards 


DEVIL COVE—GREAT CONEY BAY. 403 


from a small rocky islet, 9 feet high, off the northern shore, in 15 
fathoms, mud bottom. Here the stream always runs out, and vessels 
generally he with their heads to the westward. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Great Cat arm at 
6h. 45m.; springs rise 44 feet, neaps 24 feet. 

The shore of White bay from Western head of Great Cat arm 
trends southwestward and is high, cliffy, and wooded. A small bight 
hes $ mile from Western head, and at 4 miles from the head the fore- 
shore becomes low, forming a point and a beach of rounded, white 
stones, known as Wild beach. Shoal water extends 200 yards off this 
point and the stony bight southwestward of it. 

At 2+ miles south-southwestward from Western head and 2 mile 
offshore, off-lying banks, with depths of 10 to 20 fathoms water over 
them, begin and extend parallel to the shore for upward of 5 miles, 
then joining a similar bank off Cobbler head. 

Devil cove, 7 miles from Western head of Great Cat arm, is a 
small bay into which a stream falls from the hills. There is anchor- 
age here with offshore winds, but when these are strong the squalls 
are often violent. 

The shore from Devil cove turns southward and at a distance of 
13 miles is Cobbler head, a round, wooded headland, noticeable on 
southwesterly bearings, and some remarkable patches of bare rock, 
forming the cliff face, 14 miles southward of the head, are conspicu- 
ous from a distance seaward in White bay. 

Little Coney arm is } mile southward of these patches; it is a 
deep notch in the hills, extending nearly $ mile inland, and then 
opening out into a circular basin nearly + mile in diameter. The 
entrance to this basin is narrew and obstructed by a rocky bar, 
through which there is a crooked passage, with about 6 feet of water. 
In the basin there are depths of 1 to 25 fathoms, and small fishing 
vessels use it. Outside the bar the depth increases to 4 and 7 fathoms 
and vessels occasionally anchor here temporarily, but there is a rock 
with a depth of 23 feet over it, a short distance outside a line joining 
the two entrance heads and nearly midway between them. 

A few houses occupied by fishermen are situated on the northern 
side of the entrance to the basin and on the slope at its head. 

Great Coney arm extends south-southwestward, about 2$ miles 
from its entrance between Little Coney arm and Coney head. A 
small river that runs into the head of the arm has some shoal patches 
of gravel and stones off its mouth. The arm is otherwise deep, and 
vessels anchoring in it do so in 20 to 22 fathoms. There is good 
shelter except from northeasterly winds, and when these are strong a 
swell rolls in, making the position undesirable. 


404 CAPE BAULD TO CAPE ST. JOHN. 


Coney Head banks are some detached patches, with depths of 
22 to 25 fathoms over them, lying 13 to 3 miles north-northeastward 
of Coney head. 

Coney head is cliffy, covered with stunted trees, and conspicuous 
on southerly bearings. Dossenger cove, a small indentation with a 
beach at its head, is $ mile southward of the eastern part of Coney 
head. 

Dossenger rock bears 92°, distant 134, miles from Big Cove head, 
the southern entrance point of Dossenger cove. It is a small patch, 
very steep-to, and there is a depth of 52 fathoms over its shallowest 
part. During calm weather at spring tides its position is usually 
marked by a slight tide-rip, and during bad weather the sea breaks 
on it. 

The shore southward of Dossenger cove is high, wooded, and steep 
for nearly 3 miles to Frenchmans cove. 

Frenchmans cove is an inlet extending westward about ? mile, 
with a width varying from 400 to 800 yards; though open to the 
eastward, the sea never reaches home, and there is consequently good 
anchorage off the flat ground near its head, in 12 to 15 fathoms 
water, mud bottom. 

There are no shoals in the cove, but rocky banks with 7 to 10 
fathoms water over them extend about + mile from the heads on 
either side of the entrance, and these banks are connected by a bar 
over which the depth is 12 fathoms in the fairway. The water 
deepens to 47 fathoms inside this bar, and shoals again toward a 
mud flat extending from the beach at the head of the cove. The flat 
is steep-to, and it must be approached with caution, as the depth 
decreases from 12 to 3 fathoms in a distance of 120 yards. 

Camp cove, on the southern side of Frenchmans cove, is open, and 
affords no shelter. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Frenchmans cove at 
7h. Om.; springs rise 44 feet, neaps 24 feet. 

Frenchmans head, a little southward of Frenchmans cove, is a 
high rock with a bare cliffy face, and is fronted by low rocks and 
ledges, which, however, are quite steep-to. A projecting low point, 
at $? mile southward of the head, is conspicuous, and southwestward 
1,200 yards from this point is Godfather point. 

Godfather cove, the entrance of which lies between Godfather 
point and Eastern head of Jacksons arm, situated about 600 yards to 
the southwestward, is a bight extending about 800 yards northwest- 
ward with a width of 350 yards, and having a stony beach at its head. 
There is a small rock, bearing 216°, distant 150 yards from God-: 
father point, with 4 feet water over it, and 4 fathoms between it and 
the shore. Godfather cove is of moderate depth, but it is not suit- 
able for anchorage. 


JACKSONS ARM—THE NARROWS. 405 


Jacksons arm.—The entrance to this arm is between Eastern 
head and Western head, which are } mile apart, in a northerly and 
southerly direction. Eastern head is a round-topped limestone hill, 
and Western head is less thickly wooded than the land to the south- 
ward. Immediately inside, the arm expands to a width of 4 mile for 
a distance of 1,400 yards, and there are two small coves, named Wicks 
cove and Schooner cove, with several houses and jetties around their 
shores, on its northern side. Westward of this the arm contracts to 
a width of 300 yards, forming the narrows, 4 mile in length, after 
passing which it opens out into a second though a much smaller basin. 
Beyond this it again contracts to 150 yards for a short distance, and 
finally expands into an oval basin, about 400 yards in length and 350 
yards in width, known as the Bottom. 

The shores all around Jacksons arm are thickly wooded, and the 
locality is said to contain some of the finest timber in White bay. 

That portion of the harbor outside the narrows is clear of shoals, 
and it affords anchorage off either of the two coves above mentioned, 
preference being usually given to Schooner cove, the western one; but 
during strong easterly winds a good deal of sea reaches in here, and 
it is therefore better, if intending to remain, to proceed through the 
narrows to the anchorage off Clay cove. 

Light.—A fixed white hght is exhibited from a white framework 
on the southern end of Eastern head of Jacksons arm from June to 
January, and it should be seen from a distance of 6 miles in clear 
weather. 

The narrows.—From the southern shore of the narrows, some 
clusters of rocks, with 1 to 15 feet water over them, extend a little 
more than halfway across, leaving a channel about 250 feet wide, and 
carrying 7 to 8 fathoms, close along the northern shore. 

Beacon.—A white triangular beacon, among the trees on the slope 
at the head of the arm, in line with the southern point of the inner 
narrows, bearing 280°, leads through this channel. 

Inner narrows.—The inner narrows are clear of shoals and deep 
in mid-channel. 

Anchorage.—There is anchorage in the Bottom, at the head of 
the arm, in 11 to 12 fathoms, mud bottom, or in about the same depth 
off Clay cove; at either place the squalls off the surrounding hills 
during strong winds are very violent. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, at Jacksons arm at 
Th. Om.; springs rise 44 feet, neaps 24 feet. 

Settlement.—There are a post-office and school at Wicks cove in 
the outer basin. 

Communication is made by mail carrier from Wicks cove to 
Western cove, situated on the opposite side of White bay, and thence 
to Coachman harbor, by way of Seal arm and bay Verte. 


406 CAPE BAULD TO CAPE ST. JOHN. 


The shore trends south-southeastward, 4 mile from Western head 
to Virgin point, and thence generally southwestward; it is high, 
wooded, and broken into rocky coves. Virgin rocks, a cluster of 
rocks drying 2 feet at low water, le about 200 yards southward of 
Virgin point. Breakheart cove, about mile southward of Virgin 
point, is the largest of the coves, but it does not afford anchorage. 
From Breakheart poimt, the high wooded shore continues to Garden 
cove, directly opposite the northeastern end of Sops island, and here 
the shore becomes steep and cliffy for a short distance, when it is 
broken into the three small coves known as Grassy cove, Schooner 
cove, and Batts cove. These coves, together with # mile of cliffy 
shore, of which Hauling point is the southern end, form the north- 
western side of North channel leading into Sops arm. (See p. 407.) 

Sops island, which is 3$ miles long in a northeasterly and south- 
westerly direction, 14 miles wide near its southwestern end, and 4 
mile wide at its northeastern end, fronts the western shore of White 
bay, eastward of Sops arm. The summit of the island is 700 feet 
high, and its southern and southeastern coasts rise steeply from the 
sea in bare rocky slopes and gullies, while its northern and north- 
western coasts are of less elevation and densely wooded. 

The northwestern coast, which forms the southeastern side of 
North channel, is broken into bays and coves, and at Sops cove, sit- 
uated 4 mile from the northeastern end, there is a small settlement 
where a little fresh meat and some vegetables may occasionally be 
obtained in the autumn. There is also a small settlement at Gills 
cove, on the southeastern coast of the island. 

The eastern coast of Sops island is steep-to, but a rocky shelf, with 
6 to 7 fathoms water over it, extends $ mile off the eastern end of its 
southern coast. The southern coast, with the adjacent mainland, 
forms South channel into Sops arm, and it is quite steep-to for 14 
miles westward of the rocky shelf, having 6 to 7 fathoms over it. 
The coast then turns sharply northward, and at a distance of 800 
yards in this direction and 200 yards offshore is Shellbird islet, a 
small island 15 feet high, covered with trees. Here a rocky bank 
extends from Sops island entirely blocking the passage between it 
and the islet except to boats. The coast of the island north-north- 
eastward of Shellbird islet is fairly steep and clear to its north- 
western point, which bears south-southwestward, distant 320 yards 
from Hauling point. 

Deep cove, at the western part of the northern coast of the island, 
is of moderate depth, but it is not recommended as an anchorage. 

Otter cove, the next cove to the eastward, is deep until close to 
the shore. A rocky head, with 5 fathoms water over it, bears 83°, 
distant 250 yards from Otter point, the western entrance point of 
Otter cove. Eastward of this cove there is a small barachois or shal- 


SOPS ARM—JOCKEYS COVE. 407 


low place, fronted by a rocky bank extending 200 yards from the 
shore, and thence to its northeastern end the coast of Sops island is 
fairly steep. 

Sops cove.—The northern side of Sops cove is a small peninsula 
surmounted by a wooded hill 140 feet high. The neck of the penin- 
sula is low and flat, so that on southwesterly bearings this hill stands 
out conspicuously. 

The northeastern end of Sops island is composed of low cliffs 
fronted by ledges of rock. Open head is a remarkable black cliff 90 
feet high. 

Sops arm is an extensive inlet lying westward of Sops island, and 
South channel is its principal entrance. From White point, the 
southern entrance point of this channel, the arm extends westward 
33 miles, with a general width in the open part of about 1 mile. Its 
shores are densely wooded and are broken into several bays or coves. 
The mouth of Main brook (see p. 409) is in the northwestern corner. 

The northern portion is largely occupied by Georges island, which 
has a narrow channel on either side of it. but Western tickle, which 
is the channel on its western side, is only navigable by small craft. 
The Tickle, which is the channel on its eastern side, though obstructed 
in some degree by Shellbird islet and by a 14-foot rock between it 
and Georges island, affords a safe passage to North channel. 

The open portion of Sops arm is deep, but there is good anchorage 
in several places. There are few settlers in this locality. 

North channel, the more open part of the passage separating 
Sops island from the mainland, lying to the northwestward, affords 
a good deep-water channel on either side of Mile rocks. (For the 
coast of Seps island, see p. 406.) 

Mile rocks, lying nearly in mid-channel off the northwestern side 
of Sops island, are a cluster of rocks 5 feet high, together with a 
small detached patch which dries 2 feet at low water, at 350 yards 
southward of it. The rocks are connected by a shoal with 14 to 3 
fathoms water over it, but otherwise are fairly steep-to and may 
be passed on either side. 

Jockeys cove is a small bight, situated in the mainland north- 
northwestward from Open head, the northeastern end of Sops island. 
At 200 yards off its southwestern entrance point there is a rocky 
head with 9 feet water over it, 7 fathoms inside and the depth of 100 
fathoms at 300 yards southeastward from it. This rock should be 
given a good berth. 

Grassy and Schooner coves are shallow bays fit only for boats to 
enter. Bad islet, small and rocky, hes to the southward of them, 
forming Batts cove, which is a shallow bight. 

Rocks.—Bearing 214°, distant 400 yards from the southern end 
of Bad islet, and 200 yards from the shore, there is a small rocky 


408 CAPE BAULD TO CAPE ST. JOHN. 


patch, with 16 feet water on it; and bearing 197°, distant 700 yards 
from the southern end of Bad islet and 350 yards offshore, there is a 
rocky patch with 44 fathoms water over it. 

The shore westward of Hauling point, the termination of the 
cliffy shore from Batts cove, forms a small bight with shallow water 
extending a little beyond the line of its entrance points. Thence the 
shore is steep-to for 4 mile, where there is a cove with shoal water in 
it. The shoré bends abruptly round the headland on the western 
side of this cove, forming, northward of the western part of Georges 
island, a nearly circular basin 700 yards in diameter, with depths of 
12 to 20 fathoms, which, as it can only be approached through narrow 
and intricate channels, is not available as a general anchorage. 

Georges island is of moderate height and covered with clumps 
of burnt trees and low scrub, through which the bare limestone rock 
is visible. The coasts are low and shelving, but only from the north- 
ern side does shoal water extend more than about 70 yards. 

There is a deep but narrow bight just westward of the northeastern 
end of the island, and off the western entrance point of this bight 
is Steering rock, a small island 3 feet high, connected with the point 
by a shelf of shoal ground. 

Western tickle, the channel westward of Georges island, is barred 
at its northern end by a shelf of gravel and mud, with 7 feet water 
over it, but southward of the bar, in a bay rather more than 200 
yards in width, formed by a bend in the coast of the island, there is 
anchorage for a vessel of moderate size in 8 fathoms. 

Anchorage.—There is good anchorage northwestward of Steering 
rock in 7 to 11 fathoms, mud bottom. This position is easily ap- 
proached and affords for vessels of moderate size the most sheltered 
anchorage in Sops arm. Large vessels anchor northeastward of 
Steering rock in 9 to 14 fathoms, avoiding a small mud patch of 27 
feet, bearing 60°, distant 400 yards from the rock, and rather more 
than 200 yards off the northern shore. 

The Tickle is the channel extending from Hauling point to Shell- 
bird islet and passing between Georges and Sops islands. Abreast 
of Hauling point this channel is about 320 yards wide; it is deep and 
elear of shoals southwestward to the northeastern point of Georges 
island; then the water shoals to 6 and 9 fathoms over spits extending 
from either side. 

A detached rock, with 14 feet of water over it, bears 350°, distant 
300 yards from Shellbird islet, leaving a deep channel, about 500 feet 
in width between the rock and Shellbird islet. 

Leading mark.—Hauling point in line with the westernmost 
point of the northwestern headland of Sops island, bearing 35°, 
leads just northwestward of Shellbird islet, which is steep-to and 


MAIN BROOK—BAILEYS COVE. 409 


may be approached closely because the rocks extending from it are 
visible. 

Tides and tidal streams.—lIt is high water, full and change, 
in Sops arm, at 7h. 0m.; springs rise 4} feet, neaps 23 feet. 

There is considerable diurnal inequality in the height of the tide, 
which, however, principally affects high water. Consecutive high 
waters vary up to 18 inches, and low waters from 3 to 6 inches. 

The tidal streams are weak in South channel, but their rate 
through the Tickle is at times appreciable. Between Hauling point 
and Sops island, and also at the anchorage northeastward of Georges 
island, the stream has been observed to set northeastward for days 
continuously, and on the western side of White bay the north-going 
stream is almost constant. 

Main brook is a considerable stream flowing into the northwest- 
ern corner of Sops arm, Nearly 1 mile from its mouth the stream 
enters a low flat, forming a delta with numerous marshy islets, and 
here it is joined by Doucers brook, a stream coming from the south- 
westward, through a valley at the foot of a range of high, densely 
wooded hills. The outer islets of the delta are fronted by gravel 
flats, and numerous large bowlders, to a distance of + mile; outside 
these, the bank falls steeply to depths of 30 fathoms and more. 

Giles cove is in the western part of Sops arm, $ mile southwest- 
ward of Main brook; shoal water extends from its shores for about 
70 yards, but it affords fair, though close, anchorage for moderate- 
sized vessels. Large vessels occasionally anchor off this cove in about 
15 fathoms. 

Country cove.—A bight southeastward of Giles cove forms Burnt 
Head and Country coves. Corner brook flows northward from some 
ponds into Country cove, and at its mouth is a dam for the purpose 
of the sawmill which stands on the eastern side of the entrance. Near 
this mill are several buildings, and there is a small jetty with a tram- 
way for loading timber, which is cut in quantities in the adjacent 
valleys and floated down Corner and Main brooks. The water in 
these coves is shoal for about 150 yards from the shore, and then 
deepens quickly to 30 and 40 fathoms, consequently there is no con- 
venient anchorage. A vessel might anchor off Burnt Head cove in 20 
fathoms, but she would swing very close in. 

Pigeon islets, lying * mile east-northeastward from the jetty in 
Country cove, are two rocks, close together, 14 feet high and wooded. 
Shoal water extends northward about 100 yards from them, and 
though there is a passage between them and the shore, carrying 14 to 
15 feet water, it is narrow and must not be attempted. 

Baileys cove lies just eastward of Pigeon islets. Its shore from 
the point inside the islets to Mohawk point is foul for 150 yards, and 
there are some ledges which dry at low water. Southward of Mohawk 


410 CAPE BAULD TO CAPE ST. JOHN. 


point the western shore is steep until the head of the cove is ap- 
proached, where a mud flat extends upward of 300 yards. The east- 
ern shore of the cove is fairly steep-to. 

Rock.—A rock, with 21 feet over it, lies in Baileys cove, with Mo- 
hawk point bearing 295°, distant 100 yards. 

Anchorage.—There is good anchorage in Baileys cove in 9 to 
13 fathoms either inside or outside the 21-foot rock. 

Natlins cove.—The southern shore of Sops arm from Baileys 
cove trends northeastward for 4 mile to Spruce point; Natlins cove lies 
southeastward of this point, and its western part is deep, but anchorage 
may be obtained off its southeastern shore in 11 to 13 fathoms. From 
this cove the southern shore of South channel trends eastward for 
1,1, miles to White point. 

Spear cove.—From White point the shore of White bay trends 
southward for 13; miles, where it forms Spear cove. This cove has a 
shallow flat extending 350 yards from its head; outside this, the water 
is fairly deep, but the bottom is rocky and the locality open to the 
northeastward. 

The bight between Spear cove and cape Spear is rocky and shallow 
and the shore thence to cape Spear is foul. 

Cape Spear is composed of dark limestone shale, +0 feet high, pro- 
jecting from the cliffs behind it. Low rocky ledges surround the 
cape, but its eastern side is steep-to. 

Saltwater cove.—The shore from cape Spear trends southward for 
1,45 miles to Lower head, between which and Upper head, bearing 166°, 
distant 1,600 yards, is Saltwater cove. This cove is shoal toward its 
head, but affords anchorage during westerly winds; it is open north- 
eastward and the sea rolls in with strong winds from that direction. 
Connected with the sea by a narrow opening through the beach at 
the head of the cove is a pond which stretches 2 miles south-south- 
westward. 

The shore from Upper head, the southern entrance point of Salt- 
water cove, trends nearly south-southwestward for 84 miles to Chft 
point; it is straight and steep-to, with a rocky, and in some places, 
cliffy foreshore. At about 44 miles from Upper head is Browns cove, 
a small indentation, backed by a grassy flat with two or three small 
houses on it. From Clift point the shore turns westward for 350 
yards, and then gradually to about southwestward, forming Gold 
cove. Within Clift point the bay becomes a little wider, and then 
narrows gradually to its head at 14 miles south-southwestward. 

Gold cove affords anchorage in deep water, but, as it is sheltered 
from wind and sea, it is very secure. The shore bank is steep-to, and» 
the lead is the best guide. Osmond’s house, a two-storied building on 
the southeastern shore, a little open of Clift point, leads to a good 
position. 


MILLER ISLAND—GRANBY ISLAND. 411 


Miller island lies in the middle of the bay between Clift point and 
its head; it is 187 feet high, of limestone formation, covered with 
scrub and bare burnt trunks of stunted trees. Rocks and shoal water 
extend about 300 yards southward from its southern end. 

Riverhead bay, the head of White bay, southward of Miller 
island, carries deep water close up to the flats extending 500 yards 
from the mouth of a small stream flowing into it, but a little north- 
eastward of Oody point, which is projecting and wooded, indifferent 
anchorage may be obtained in 17 to 20 fathoms. Galeville, a small 
settlement, is situated nearly $ mile northeastward of this anchorage, 
and 4 mile farther northeastward, off a slight bend in the shore, from 
which rocky ledges and a stony shelf extend nearly 200 yards, there 
is anchorage in about 15 fathoms, stony bottom. 

The eastern shore of White bay from Osmondville, which lies 
north-northeastward 13 miles from Galeville, trends north-northeast- 
ward, 94 miles to Little Pumbley cove, and it is generally chiffy and 
steep-to, and bordered by dense woods. Between Little Pumbley 
cove, which is a small bight, and Western head of Purbeck cove, 24 
miles northeastward, are two small bays, known as Clay cove and 
Pumbley cove. There are a few houses located on the shores of both 
of them, and anchorage might be obtained off either in 15 to 20 
fathoms. 

Granby island, westward about 1 mile from Clay and Pumbley 
coves, is nearly a mile in length in a northeasterly and southwesterly 
direction. There are some houses, surrounded by grassed land and 
garden plots on its southeastern side. The northern coast is cliffy 
and wooded. The highest part of the island, 298 feet high, is near 
its middle. Toward the southwestern end a gully separates the sum- 
mits, which, from the eastward, gives the appearance of two islands. 

A line of detached rocks extends southward from the middle of 
the island for a distance of 850 yards, where there is a rock, nearly 
awash at low water, which is usually visible by the wash or tide- 
rip over it. This rock is steep-to to the eastward, in which direction 
between it and the mainland there is a deep channel 1,100 yards wide. 
Granby island is otherwise steep-to except between it and Gull rock, 
a detached grass-covered islet 94 feet high, lying northwestward 
400 yards from the northwestern part of the island, where the ground 
is foul and rocky ; the northwestern side of Gull rock is steep-to. 

A bank with 18 to 20 fathoms over it reaches 4 mile off the eastern 
point of Granby island. Temporary anchorage may be obtained 
eastward of the southern part of the island and between it and the 
line of rocks in 15 to 18 fathoms, but the ground is rocky, and the 
tidal streams attain some strength between the island and the main- 


land. 


412 CAPE BAULD TO CAPE ST. JOHN. 


Purbeck cove affords the best anchorage on the eastern side of 
White bay southward of Hauling arm. Shoal water extends about 
900 yards from the head of the cove, and a rocky patch, with 28 feet 
water over it, bears 284°, distant 400 yards from Eastern head, the 
eastern entrance point. Shale point, northeastward about 400 yards 
from Western head, is a detached block of shale 60 feet high, standing 
out from the cliff, and showing white when the sun shines on it. 
Purbeck brook is a small stream running into the head of the cove. 

Anchorage.—There is anchorage anywhere in the cove, but the 
best berth is in 11 to 13 fathoms toward the eastern corner, where 
there are two or three houses. 

Western cove is 2 miles northward of Eastern head of Purbeck 
cove, its northern side being formed by a small peninsula, which 
projects outside of the shore line. Gull rocks are two small rocks, 
the larger being 29 feet high, on the southern side of the cove; both 
are fairly steep-to. Western cove has a small settlement and a few 
landing stages on its shores. There is a post-office and a church 
standing on the rising ground behind the eastern side of the cove. 

There is anchorage off the cove in about 11 fathoms, but it is open 
to the westward and to the sea, which rolls into White bay with 
strong easterly winds. 

Light.—A fixed white light is exhibited from a white framework 
on the northern point of Western cove from June to January, and 
it should be seen from a distance of 6 miles in clear weather. 

Wisemans cove, on the northern side of the small peninsula 
forming the northern side of Western cove, is separated from Pound 
cove, northeastward of it, by a low point. In both these coves there 
are some houses, but Wisemans curve is quite open. Pound cove has 
some dry rocks across its head, and there is some shelter for boats 
behind them. 

The shore from Pound cove trends northeastward 23 miles to 
Wild Cove point, the southwestern entrance point of Hauling arm. 

Western or Hauling arm.—Hauling point lies north-north- 
eastward, distant 1,400 yards from Wild Cove point, and the entrance 
of Western arm is between them. The arm extends eastward 14 miles 
to the narrows, where its width is about 300 yards, and it then runs 
east-southeastward for 1,3, miles farther, with a width of 600 yards. 

Wild cove extends southward for 1,200 yards immediately within 
Wild Cove point; its width is 700 yards at its entrance, decreasing 
to 200 yards at its head. It affords anchorage for small vessels, but 
it is open northward. 

Western arm is clear of shoals at 50 yards off its shores up to the 
shoals at its head, but foul ground, with 4 fathoms and less water 
over it, extends 150 yards off Shoal point, the eastern entrance point 
of Bear cove, situated on the northern shore 1,200 yards westward of 


BEAR COVE—PIGEON ISLANDS. 413 


the narrows. The depth of water’in the arm decreases gradually 
from 30 fathoms in the entrance to 8 fathoms off Old House point, 
near the head. On the southern side of the narrows there are depths 
of 6 fathoms to about 100 yards offshore. Fishermans bank is a 
rocky patch, about 130 yards across, with 20 fathoms water over it, 
lying north-northeastward 500 yards from Wild Cove point. 

Anchorage.—There is good anchorage near the head of the West- 
ern arm off Old House point. 

Bear cove entrance lies between Shoal point and White point, 
which are 435 yards apart in a northeasterly and southwesterly 
direction, and the cove runs north-northeastward for 1,100 yards with 
a width decreasing to 140 yards at its head. Bear Cove islet lies in 
the cove 200 yards eastward from White point, and shoal water 
extends for 100 yards round the islet, except southeastward. ‘The 
anchorage is very good for small craft, the best position being oppo- 
site the large house of the settlement in 9 fathoms, sand bottom. 

From White point the shore trends northwestward for 600 yards 
to Hauling point. 

The shore of White bay from Hauling point trends northeast- 
ward for a mile to a point within which is Back arm, a bay extending 
600 yards southward. There are some houses and fishing stages on 
the shores of this bay, but the water is shoal. Stuckles cove, an inlet, 
lies 1,200 yards to the northeastward; it is entirely blocked by large 
bowlders. 

Pigeon islands are situated northward of Stuckles cove and 
Back arm. Little Pigeon island bears 351°, distant 300 yards from 
the western entrance point of Back arm, and is 20 feet high. Steer- 
ing rock bears 72°, distant 800 yards from Little Pigeon island, and 
is 12 feet high. The western end of Pigeon island bears 45°, distant 
about 400 yards from Steering rock, and the island extends north- 
eastward 1,100 yards. It is of limestone formation, 150 feet high, 
and covered in places with coarse grass. 

There are no shoals seaward of these islets, but between Little 
Pigeon island and Steering rock and the shore are some rocks and 
foul ground. The water in the middle of the channel inside Pigeon 
island is deep, but on the mainland side there are some detached 
rocks. Bearing 35°, distant 400 yards from the northern point of 
Pigeon island there is a rock with 9 feet water over it, and 10 to 4 
fathoms between it and the point; the sea breaks heavily on this rock 
with a northeasterly swell. 

The shore of White bay northeastward of Pigeon island, backed 
by high, wooded hills, trends northeastward for 34 miles to Fish 
point, the western entrance point of Middle arm; Middle Arm rock, 
a small rock 11 feet high, lies 200 yards offshore at 1} miles west- 
southwestward of Fish point; there is a smaller rock inside it, but 


414 CAPE BAULD TO CAPE ST. JOHN. 


otherwise this shore is clear. The 100 fathoms contour line is a 
little more than 1 mile off, but at 24 miles north-northwestward from 
the northern point of Pigeon island there is a small bank with a 
depth of 29 fathoms over it. 

Middle arm is an indentation extending southward nearly 34 
miles on the eastern side of Fish point. A bare, rocky islet, 6 feet 
high, lies } mile within the point. Northward of the islet the arm 
is fairly clear, but rocky shoals extend across the channel to the east- 
ward, forming a bar of rocks and bowlders. A narrow and crooked 
channel, carrying 18 feet of water, passes through the bar, but it is 
only fit for small vessels, and even these require local knowledge or 
must place buoys. 

Inside the bar the middle of the channel has a depth of 33 fathoms 
for about + mile, when it deepens to 9 fathoms in the narrowest part. 

Within the narrow part the arm opens out to a width of 4 mile, 
with depths of 24 to 36 fathoms and clear of shoals. At the head is 
the mouth of a fair-sized stream, and a mud flat, dry at low water, 
extends for ? mile from it. 

A narrow boat channel runs toward the river mouth along the 
eastern shore. 

The shores of Middle arm are high and wooded. A small fishing 
settlement exists near the entrance, some of the houses being on the 
eastern side near the outer point, and some on the western side on the 
inner point of the narrows. 

The shore from Middle arm trends north-northeastward for 24 
miles to Crow head, the western entrance point of Southern arm. It 
is high, rocky, and steep-to except westward of Crow head, where 
two patches of rocks, nearly awash, lie at distances of 50 and 100 
yards from the shore. The depth of 10 fathoms is close outside the 
outer patch. 

Southern arm.—F lat point les eastward + mile from Crow head: 
the southwestern part of Southern arm head lies east-northeastward 
1,100 yards from Flat point, and within this line Southern arm 
extends southeastward 1,400 yards, and then southward 1,800 yards 
to the bar, its width gradually decreasing to 485 yards. It is an 
excellent harbor, free from shoals and affording good sheltered 
anchorage. Its shores are high and thickly wooded, but on the east- 
ern side near its head there is a small area of lower land, and here 
there are a few houses with some little patches of cultivation. 

There are a few houses in Pumbley cove, an open bight on the 
southwestern shore at about 1,200 yards within Flat point. 

Cheese hill, conical, thickly wooded, and 235 feet high, is situated 
on the western side of the arm at 1,8, miles within Flat point, and is 
conspicuous. At its foot the arm contracts to a width of 200 yards, 


SEAL COVE. 415 


and is almost completely blocked by stones and bowlders, forming 
a bar + mile in length and reaching from shore to shore. 

Above this bar the arm again opens out between very steep hills 
and forms an oval basin } mile in length, with a greatest width of 
435 yards, and with depths of 11 to 17 fathoms at 100 yards from the 
shore. 

The shoal water of the bar extends nearly 400 yards northwestward 
from the narrows; here it is very steep-to, the depth quickly in- 
creasing to 16 fathoms off a two-story house, with a small jetty in 
front of it on the eastern side. 

The best anchorage is in this vicinity, borrowing toward the west- 
ern shore as far as possible. 

Light.—A fixed white light is exhibited from a white framework 
on the northern end of the Southern Arm head from June to January, 
and should be seen from a distance of 6 miles in clear weather. 

Seal cove.—The shore from Southern Arm head bends sharply to 
the northeastward and extends in curves for 1,200 yards, and then 
turns westward forming Seal cove, a bight from 800 to 400 yards in 
width. . 

At its head or eastern end there is a sandy beach strewn with bowl- 
ders and behind this a little flat land, extending toward a valley 
running southeastward. A shallow rocky flat extends upward of 
200 yards from the sandy beach, and outside this the cove is clear. 

At the head of the cove there are some houses and a small church 
with a spire. There are also some houses and a landing stage on 
the northern shore. 

Anchorage.—The cove affords good anchorage, with northerly, 
easterly, and southerly winds. The best berth is off the landing 
stage on the northern shore in about 11 fathoms. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, at Seal cove, at Th. 10m. ; 
springs rise 5 feet, neaps 34 feet. 

Supplies.—A limited quantity of mutton and vegetables can gen- 
erally be procured in autumn from the houses on the northern shore 
of Seal cove. 

The shore of White bay from Pound head, which is 600 yards 
northwestward of Lucies point, the northern entrance point of Seal 
cove, trends north-northeastward, and continues cliffy for nearly 14 
miles to Big head. Pound rocks, 10 feet high, lie 100 yards south- 
westward from Pound head; there are no offlying shoals. 

Big Head cove, Beach cove, Lower cove, Downeys cove, and Lob- 
ster harbor he between Big head and Wild cove, which are 24 
miles apart in a northeasterly direction. These four coves are merely 
open bays, affording indifferent shelter to boats, but Lobster harbor 
is a small round basin much frequented by fishermen. There is good 
water inside its entrance, but this is obstructed by two rocky islets 


416 CAPE BAULD TO CAPE ST. JOHN. 


having a channel on either side, the western channel carrying 4 feet 
of water, and the eastern 6 feet. 

Wild cove extends 4 mile to the east-southeastward and contains 
good anchorage in 9 to 13 fathoms, sand bottom, during oifshore 
winds. 

At the head of the cove the land is low, sloping to a sandy beach, 
which is fronted by a shoal flat extending nearly 300 yards off, and 
at its southern corner is a patch of rocks drying 2 feet at low water. 
Elsewhere the bay is clear, the bottom sloping gradually off to deep 
water. A small stream Hors into the northeastern corner. 

There are a few houses around the head of the cove, but most of 
them are unoccupied, the owners having moved to Sops arm, where 
the lumber mill offers regular work. 

The shore from Wild cove trends nearly northward for 24 miles 
to Green point, and thence northeastward for 2% miles to a bight, 
with Little Lobster harbor, a narrow cove, Domediately northeast- 
ward of it. This shore is rocky, and backed by steep wooded hills; 
it is clear and BHBeD but a few sand banks with 10 fathoms of water 
over them lie } to 3 mile off. Little Lobster harbor is used during 
summer as an ancien age for small vessels, the crews of which fish in 
the vicinity. 

The shore from Little Lobster harbor trends northeastward and 
continues of the same character for 5? miles, where there is a small 
bight surrounded by cliffs and known as Hard bay; and from this bay 
to Partridge point, 14 miles northeastward, the hills are nearly bare 
and slope gently to the point. 

Partridge point, forming the eastern entrance point of White 
bay, is the end of a low, rocky projection extending from the sloping 
hills. Westward of the point there are some small bights in the rocks, 
where good landing can be made during easterly winds, and eastward 
of it is an open cove with cliffy shores. 

The point is steep-to, and may be approached closely, but when 
easterly winds prevail there is often a strong indraft toward the 
shore. | 

St. Barbe or Horse islands are two in number. The western 
point of the Western island bears 76°, distant 10} miles from Par- 
tridge point, and the island extends 2? miles in an easterly and west- 
erly direction, with a width of a little more than 1 mile; a tongue 
of land projects about 800 yards from its northern side. This island 
is 500 feet high, and presents a smooth, conical summit on north- 
easterly or northerly bearings. Its coasts are fairly clear, the only 
shoal being on the southern side, where some foul ground extends a 
short distance from the rocks. It has no inhabitants. 

The eastern island lies 1, miles eastward of the western island, 
and the channel between is clear and deep, but a little eastward of the 


CAPE CRAPAUD—FLEUR-DE-LIS HARBOR. 41% 


channel, a shoal, with 4 to 5 fathoms of water over it, extends nearly 
4 mile from the southern coast of the eastern island. 

The eastern island is 4$ miles long in a west-northwesterly and 
east-southeasterly direction, and about 1% miles wide; it attains a 
height of 550 feet, but it appears flatter than the western island and 
has a broken summit. 

The eastern coast of this island is foul for the distance of about 4 
mile and must be approached with caution; 4+ mile off its southern 
coast, bearing 261°, distant 13 miles from the southeastern point, is 2 
rock with a depth of less than 6 feet over it; and bearing 63°, distant 
1,45 miles from the eastern of the northern point, is a small rock above 
water. 

On the southern coast, at about 14 miles and 1,8 miles, respectively, 
from the southeastern point of the island, there are two coves with 
several houses around them, in which some 30 families permanently 
reside. 

Small vessels anchor in the western cove, locally known as St. Barbe 
harbor; but, though there are no shoals, there is very little room, and 
the place is open to the southwestward. 

Cape Crapaud, situated southeastward, distant 3 miles from Par- 
tridge point, is steep-to, and there are patches of white marble on 
its southeastern side. Between this cape and Paradise point, which 
bears south-southeastward, distant 1% miles from it, is the entrance of 
a bay, the shores of which are steep-to, except off a cascade just west- 
ward of Paradise point, where a rock hes 65 yards offshore. 

Paradise point is high and remarkable; Pigeon island lies close 
northeastward of it. 

Fleur-de-lis harbor entrance is situated southwestward 1 mile 
from cape Crapaud, and the harbor, though small, affords good, 
sheltered anchorage. The entrance is difficult to distinguish except 
on westerly bearings. 

Fleur-de-lis hill hes 24 miles westward from the harbor entrance, 
is 820 feet high, has three hummocks, which give it a resemblance to 
the top of a fleur-de-lis, and is remarkable. 

Directions.—Bring Fleur-de-lis hill to bear about westward, and 
steer for it to the entrance; then keep along the eastern shore, steer- 
ing for the fishing establishment next eastward of Welch point, a 
little cliff with some huts on it, to clear The Rock, which has 8 feet 
of water over it and lies in mid-channel; when Bear hill (a mound 
144 feet high, situated westward of the basin) opens northward of 
The Islet, bearing 283°, steer for Welch point to get in the middle of 
the narrows and avoid the bank stretching off The Islet. When the 
summit of Fleur-de-lis hill is open a little northward of Bear hill, 


76846—09 21 


418 CAPE BAULD TO CAPE ST. JOHN. 


bearing about 280°, keep this mark on and anchor in the middle of 
the basin in 4} fathoms of water, stiff mud bottom. 

Westerly and northwesterly winds are the strongest and come down 
in violent squalls. There is never any sea at the anchorage, but 
after strong northerly and easterly winds the sea breaks on the 
outer coast, while the sea in the entrance is so disturbed as to appear 
like breakers, and a heavy swell is felt as far in as The Islet. This 
has also followed a northerly gale at a day’s interval, after the wind 
has completely fallen; then the sea rose in an hour. 

Temporary anchorage in fine weather may be obtained in 12 fath- 
oms of water, coral bottom, at about 500 yards eastward of Starboard 
point, the northern entrance point of the harbor. 

- Tides.—It is high water, full and change, at Fleur-de-ls harbor 
at Th. 15m.; springs rise 2 to 4 feet. 

Water can be obtained conveniently from the cascade just west- 
ward of Paradise point. 

Green point lies 2 miles southward from Pigeon island, and is 
the southern end of a rugged indented coast, close off which, at 1% 
miles southward from Pigeon island, is an islet. It is also the north- 
western entrance point of bay Verte. 

Bay Verte extends southwestward 104 miles from its entrance 
between Green point and a point lying southeastward, distant 34 
miles from it. The shores of the bay are high, wooded, and steep-to 
generally, but the head of the bay dries for a distance of nearly 1 
mile and shoals suddenly from 6 fathoms to 4 feet. 

The Sisters are two rocks nearly in the middle of bay Verte 
entrance; the northwestern bears 126°, distant 1,2, miles from Green 
point, has 5 feet over it at low water and the sea generally breaks on 
it; the southeastern bears 142°, distant 1,300 yards from the north- 
western, and is above water with the sea always breaking on it. The 
water around and between the Sisters is deep and clear. 

Coachman harbor (havre du Pot d’Etain) lies westward of a 
line drawn between Green point and French island, which bears 216°, 
distant 1,8; miles from the point. Tin-pot islands consist of two 
masses, each being a group of islets close together, with deep water 
around; the groups are 400 yards in an easterly and westerly direc- 
tion, and the western island les 800 yards eastward from French 
island. The north shore of the harbor is clear for nearly 1 mile from 
Green point, and then shoals, with 10 feet least water over them, 
stretch off 350 yards. The head of the harbor is divided into North 
and South coves by a point, close off which is Guibert islet. North 
rock is a shoal with 3 feet least water over it, on a ledge extending 
eastward 350 yards from Flat point, the northern entrance point of 
North cove. . 


COACHMAN HARBOR. 419 


The southern side of South cove is a narrow peninsula surmounted 
by a little wooded hill, with a fishing establishment at the isthmus, 
which is only 55 yards across. 

Gentille islet, 100 yards northward of the peninsula, is small, low, 
and rocky; shoal water continues northward 200 yards from it; shoals 
extend 265 yards northwestward of French island and le off the 
channel separating the island from the peninsula. 

Anchorage.—South cove, about 500 yards across, affords anchor- 
age in 5 fathoms water, sand bottom, with good shelter, inside Gen- 
tille islet, in a position from which the eastern end of Guibert islet 
bears 336°, and northern side of Gentille islet bears 72°. Small craft 
ean anchor farther southeastward. 

Northeasterly winds bring a sea into North cove. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, at Coachman harbor 
at 7h. 16m.; springs rise about 4 feet. 

Communication.—The steamer from Tilt cove calls at Coach- 
man harbor weekly during summer and autumn. 

Islets.—A yellow-colored islet with a little grass on its summit 
hes in the middle of bay Verte at 34 miles within French island; it is 
steep-to. Duck islet, wooded, hes 1 mile southwestward from the 
yellow islet, and there isa shoal, with 9 feet of water over it, 350 yards 
off its northeastern point; on this islet small seams of copper have 
been found. Do not pass between the yellow islet and Duck islet, but 
keep on the shore of the bay eastward of them, and when southward 
of Duck islet keep in mid-channel. 

Copper mine.—A large and valuable copper and sulphur mine 
near the head of the bay is being worked by an American company 
named the Terra Nova Mining Company. About 200 men are work- 
ing at the mine. 

Pier.—Near the head of the bay is a pier 400 feet long and 100 
feet broad at its end, extending off the northwestern shore; there is 
a depth of 6 fathoms at its end, and hawsers can be laid out to the 
shore and to a hauling-off buoy. A light railway connects the pier 
with the copper mine, about 2 miles distant. 

Anchorage may be obtained in 13 fathoms of water, mud bottom 
and good holding ground, a little northeastward of the second point 
on the western shore within French island, which is bordered by 
white rocks. There is good anchorage at 200 to, 300 yards southward 
of the pier in 94 to 12 fathoms, mud bottom, where the holding 
ground is good and it is quite landlocked. In northerly gales the sea 
is said to break as far in the bay as Duck islet. 

Communication.—The mail steamer calls here twice a fortnight. 

* Tslet.—A low islet is situated on the southeastern shore at 14 miles 
within the southeastern entrance point, which is bare. 


420 CAPE BAULD TO CAPE ST. JOHN. 


Ice.—Bay Verte freezes solid between about the middle of Decem- 
ber and early in January; the ice generally breaks up in May, but 
there have been instances in which it has not thawed before the 
middle of April, and afterwards remained fast until June 10. 

Mings bight (baie des Pins) extends south-southwestward 4 
miles, with a width of 14 miles, from its entrance between the eastern 
entrance point of bay Verte and Grappling point. Mings islets, east- 
ward about 800 yards from the western entrance point of the bight, 
are two rocks, reddish in color and steep-to. Pines islet, a low rock 
sheltering a creek suitable for boats, lies close to Grappling point. 
On this islet and near the creek are fishing stations. The only shoals 
in the bight le off a low point, which slopes from a barren hill on the 
eastern shore at about 14 miles within Grappling point. This point 
should not be approached within 400 yards. 

There is a copper mine on the western shore of the bight at about 
2 miles within the entrance, and gold has also been found here. 

Anchorage may be obtained near the head; let go the anchor in 
27 fathoms of water, so that the stern of the vessel, when swung, will - 
be abreast a conspicuous square bowlder just southwestward of the 
second stream on the western shore. 

The coast from Grappling point trends eastward for 1 miles to 
cape Corbin, where it turns southeastward for 3%, miles to Pelee 
point. 

Hardy harbor, about 1,4; miles from cape Corbin, is a boat creek; 
its entrance is difficult and dangerous with onshore winds. Bois 
island, + mile northeastward of the mouth of the harbor, which it 
shelters, is barren. 

Paquet harbor entrance is between Pelee point and cape Brule, 
which hes about 600 yards to the south-southeastward. The harbor 
extends westward # mile, and at about 900 yards within its entrance 
Northwest arm turns northwestward for 1,800 yards, while from 
1,600 yards within cape Brule Paris bay extends southwestward for 
1; miles. Pelee point, the north entrance point, is the end of a 
peninsula which rises in Calvary hill, at about 1,200 yards northwest- 
ward of the point, to the height of 269 feet. Four rocky islets, with 
boat passages between, lie close eastward of Pelee point, and a shoal 
with 3} fathoms of water over it bears 137°, distant 150 yards from 
the point. 

Northwest arm has a width of about 4+ mile to its head, where are 
the fishing establishments. Baleine rock, with 9 feet of water over it, 
hes on the western side, nearly half way up the arm. It is connected 
by a shoal ledge to the western shore, and a shoal, with 1% fathoms 
of water over it, extends east-northeastward from it to mid-channel., 


Cape Brule. in line with Soup point, bearing 126°, leads just north- 
eastward of this shoal. 


, 


PARIS BAY—BRENT COVE. 4 BAI 


Anchorage.—There is anchorage at the head of the arm in § to 10 
fathoms of water, with fair holding ground, but vessels remaining 
require heavy anchors and a long scope of cable. 

Paris bay is generally clear of shoals at 100 yards from its shores, 
till 300 yards from its head; at the narrows, 1,200 yards within its 
entrance, it is only 200 yards broad, but inside it opens to a width of 
400 yards, with a small area of deep water. 

Anchorage.—The holding ground in Paris bay is not good till 
Pelee point is shut in with Broussailles point, the southern entrance 
point of the bay, bearing 69°. Small vessels anchor in 5 fathoms 
of water, mud bottom. Westerly winds cause violent squalls in this 
harbor that strain the cables of vessels at anchor, and sometimes 
make beating in impossible. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, at Paquet harbor at 
6h. 49m. 

Water may be obtained from a fine waterfall in Northwest arm, 
and, not so easily, at low water only, from a stream well stocked with 
fish at the head of Paris bay. 

The coast.—Cape Brule rises in Gros Morne, at 600 yards west- 
ward of it, to the height of 577 feet. Cape Cania lies southeastward, 
distant 1,400 yards from cape Brule, the coast between forming a 
bight 4 mile deep. A ledge extends northeastward 400 yards from 
cape Cania. Cape Cagnet, east-scutheastward 2} miles from cape 
Cania, is white and prolonged by low rocks; it is the western entrance 
point of Confusion bay. 

Confusion bay.—Brent Cove head les about east-northeastward, 
distant nearly 3 miles from cape Cagnet, and from between them 
Confusion bay extends southward about 1{ miles. The bay has two 
bights at its head; Grand cove, the western, 2 miles southward of 
cape Cagnet, is open to the northward; its shores are inaccessible, 
and boats must not be caught there with onshore winds. 

Round harbor (le grand coup de Hache), the eastern bight, 
situated south-southwestward 24 miles from Brent Cove head, is small 
but safe. The beacon at the head of the harbor in line with Caro- 
line point, bearing 171°, leads into the harbor between the shoals 
extending from Major and Blanche points. The inner anchorage 
is only 200 yards across and Crocodile shoal lies just within its 
entrance. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Round harbor at 
Th, 15m.; springs rise 54 feet, neaps 3 feet. 

Brent cove (le petit coup de Hache) is a mile northeastward of 
Round harbor and separated from it by coup de Hache point, a high 
steep round hill sloping to a white point. 

Brent Cove head is high, steep, and of a dull color; a reef hes 
about 300 yards off the coast just eastward of the head, and there is ¢ 


422 CAPE BAULD TO CAPE ST. JOHN. 


boat passage between. Cape Canaille, 2 miles eastward from Brent 
Cove head, is high and bold. 

La Scie harbor, the entrance of which is eastward 14 miles from 
cape Canaille, extends southeastward about 1 mile, and is 200 yards 
wide; there is foul ground and shallow water for 800 yards from its 
head. The harbor is easy of access, but, being open to northwesterly 
winds which throw in a heavy sea, it is not recommended. 

Anchorage.—The best holding ground is just within a small cove 
on the southwestern shore in 15 fathoms water, mud bottom. 

The coast.—La Chesnais point, the eastern entrance point of La 
Scie harbor, has a red, rugged appearance, and is known also as 
Rouge point. The coast from La Chesnais point continues east-north- 
eastward for 44 miles to North bill of cape St. John, and is mod- 
erately high, steep, and somewhat red in color. 

Currents are very strong near cape St. John, and generally set 
southward. 


CHAPTER VIII. 


NEWFOUNDLAND, EAST COAST—CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE 
BONAVISTA. 


The coast of the promontory of cape St. John turns south-south- 
eastward at North bill, and at the distance of 14 miles, with a bight 
between, is Middle bill. North bill and Middle bill end in remark- 
able peaked rocks. At a mile southward of Middle bill, and also 
separated from it by a bight, is South bill, which falls steeply from 
cliffs 244 feet high. 

Notre Dame bay is 47 miles wide at its entrance between South 
bill of cape St. John and Fogo island. At the head of the bay are 
many islands and many inlets extending into the mainland; and 
amongst some of these navigation is not safe without a pilot. 

Ice.—Vessels bound to Notre Dame bay in June, should proceed 
first to St. Johns and obtain a pilot familiar with Stag harbor and 
Change island tickles and with the conditions of the movement and 
prevalence of the ice, as the time when the Arctic current, 50 to 100 
miles off Fogo island and its vicinity, is clear of heavy ice can not be 
foretold with any certainty; the ice may be passing in July, so that 
it is advisable to approach the bay from the eastward early in the 
season. By keeping near the land shelter may be obtained, and the 
ice may be avoided. 

Tt is usual to find ice at cape St. John in June; occasionally it is 
clear and remains clear after the middle of May, but these seasons 
are not frequent. The ice is usually in strings or bodies, often several 
days apart; the strings may be avoided, but it is difficult to keep 
clear of ice that can not be seen over from the hills, and closes the 
coast as far as the eye can reach. Shelter must be sought, and there- 
fore local experience is required. The cape has telegraphic communi- 
eation with St. Johns, so that the state of the ice may be known to a 
certain extent; but the ice often travels fast in the southerly current. 
For days no ice may be visible from cape St. John, but in a few hours 
it may come in and close the bay; this occurs between the Ist and 
28th of June, seldom later. It is, therefore, impossible to state a safe 
date, but it may be considered prudent for iron ships not to approach 
cape St. John before June 10, and wooden ships about June 1. 

Within the bay the ice is often kept off the shore by the streams 
out of the deep arms. A northerly wind packs the ice into Fogo and 


425 


424 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


to Twillingate ¢Toulinguet); an easterly wind into cape St. John 
and Green bays. 

Gull island, situated east-northeastward, distant 5, miles from 
South bill of cape St. John, is about $ mile long in an east-north- 
westerly and west-southwesierly direction, 600 yards wide, and 463 
feet high; it is bold-to except on the northern side, a short distance 
from which are two rocks. A small indentation on the southern 
coast, at the bottom of the valley between the two hills, affords the 
best landing. 

Light.—A circular tower, 43 feet high, and painted red and white 
in vertical stripes, on the summit of Gull island, exhibits, at 525 
feet above high water, an intermittent white light showing thus: 
light, eleven seconds; eclipse, nine seconds; which should be seen 
from a distance of 26 miles in clear weather. 

The keeper’s house, which is painted white, is situated 112 feet 
west-southwestward from the hghthouse. 

Signals.—The lighthouse is supphed with the International Code 
signals. 

Breakers have been reported to bear 283°, distant about 4 mile 
from Gull island, by the lightkeeper. 

Shoal.—A patch, extending 600 yards in an easterly and westerly 
direction and 400 yards wide with a general depth of 17 to 20 
fathoms over it and 10} fathoms over its shoalest head, hes with its 
shoal head bearing 32°, distant 4,%; miles from Gull Island lighthouse. 
There are depths of 60 fathoms close off its northern and southern 
sides. The sea breaks on the patch in heavy weather. 

Bishop rock, lying 2%, miles east-southeastward from South bill, 
is 30 feet high, small and bare, with a ledge of rocks extending a 
short distance southwestward of it, but otherwise steep-to. 

Shoal rock, bearing 270°, distant 1400 yards from Bishop rock, 
has 34 fathoms water over it. 

The shore of Notre Dame bay from South bill trends southward 
for about ? mile; it then forms Manful bight ? mile across and 4 
mile deep. A rock with 2 fathoms water over it lies about 200 yards 
off Manful head on the southern side of the bight. Thence the shore 
bends southwestward for 3} miles to Shoe Cove point, the eastern 
entrance point of Shoe cove. Mad rock hes about 300 yards off the 
shore at 3 mile from Manful head. 

Cooper ledge, bearing 90°, distant 14 miles from Shoe Cove point 
and 4 mile offshore, is a patch with 11 fathoms water over it, and 
19 to 32 fathoms around. 

Tilcey ledge, bearing 148°, distant } mile from Shoe Cove point, 
and Wimbledon ledge, bearing 166°, 1 mile from the same point, are 
patches with 20 fathoms of water over them. 


SHOE COVE—TILT COVE. 495 


Shoe cove is an open bight 1 mile wide and 600 yards deep, which 
affords anchorage in 11 to 14 fathoms of water. A moderate north- 
westerly gale has been ridden out comfortably at this anchorage 
when it was impossible to remain at Tilt cove. Monks ground is a 
ledge extending a little more than 200 yards off the western side of 
the cove, with 24 fathoms of water over it. Several landslips mark 
the hills around this cove and show conspicuously on northerly 
bearings. 

There is a small settlement at the cove. 

Water may be obtained from the Brook, a small creek, which 
flows into the northwestern part of Shoe cove. 

Communication.—The steamer on the Notre Dame bay route 
from Burnt bay calls at Shoe cove weekly in summer and autumn. 

Shoe Cove rock, bearing 244°, distant $ mile from Shoe Cove 
point, has 8 feet of water over it. 

Clearing marks.—Bisbop rock, well open southward of the main- 
land, bearing 64°, leads southeastward; and the summit of Round 
Harbor head in line with Caplin Cove head, bearing 227°, leads north- 
westward of this rock. 

Rocks.—Tilly ledge, bearing 308°, distant 533 yards from Shoe 
Cove rock, has 64 fathoms of least water over it; and Caplin Cove 
‘rock, bearing 238°, distant 600 yards from Shoe Cove rock, has 7 
fathoms over it. 

Lather ledge, bearing 200°, distant 1,600 yards from Shoe Cove 
point, is a patch with 18 fathoms of water over it; and Foggy ledge, 
bearing 207°, distant 1,900 yards from the same point, is a patch 
with 14 fathoms of water over it. 

The shore from Shoe cove trends southwestward, forming several 
coves, for 3 miles to Tilt cove; it is fairly steep-to. Beaver cove 
grounds, a patch with 9 fathoms of water over it, lies 400 yards off- 
shore at 2,4; miles southwestward of Shoe Cove point, and at 600 yards 
farther south-southwestward are Middle ground. with 18 fathoms 
water over it, at 600 yards offshore; and Mother Howe bank, with 16 
fathoms of water over it, at 900 yards offshore. 

The bay off Tilt cove is reported to have depths of not less than 
28 fathoms. Its shores are steep-to, and, as the holding ground is 
bad, it is recommended that vessels having to communicate with the 
cove should remain under way. 

Tilt cove extends 265 yards northward with a width of about 400 
feet. A pier extends 186 feet from its western shore, with a depth 
of 28 feet at low water close to the outer end; the sea occasionally 
washes completely over this pier, but in ordinary summer weather 
vessels lie alongside in safety. An anchor should be let go in 9 
fathoms of water, at a convenient distance from the pier, and then the 
vessel may be hauled alongside by hawsers secured to large ring bolts 


426 CAPE 8ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


let into the sides of the cove. A pier also extends from the western 
entrance point of the cove, and a small white buoy is moored off it. 
A white building, standing alone halfway up the hill and about 150 
vards within the western entrance point of the cove, is conspicuous. 
Tilt cove is the shipping place of one of the most valuable copper 
mines in Newfoundland; the mine gives employment to about 500 
miners. The village, a large settlement, with a church, is situated 
around Windsor lake, immediately northwestward of the cove, and 
contains over 1,000 inhabitants. 

Communication.—The steamer on the Notre Dame bay route 
from Burnt bay calls at Tilt cove weekly during summer and au- 
tumn, and connects with the steamer on the northern route. 

There is a telegraph office at Tilt cove. 

Coal.— About 20 tons of coal may be obtained. 

Round Harbor head lies about 1,4, miles southwestward from 
Serape point, the southwestern entrance point of Tilt Cove bay. The 
shore forms a bight between Round Harbor head and Scrape point. 
Round Harbor head is the end of a promontory extending eastward 
1,400 yards from the mainland, with a width of 400 yards and a 
height of 258 feet. 

Round harbor is situated immediately westward of Round Har- 
bor head; it is about 400 feet across, and its entrance is 120 feet wide, 
so it is available for small craft only. A sunken rock les off the 
first fishing stage in on the northeastern side, another near the head, 
and a third just inside the southern entrance point. A heavy sea 
occasionally makes the entrance almost impassible, but the harbor is 
always safe. 

Snooks arm extends west-northwestward 24 miles from between 
Round Harbor head and Pigeon island, which is almost joined to 
the eastern part of Snooks head and is situated 14, miles west- 
southwestward from Round Harbor head. The arm narrows gradu- 
ally to the brook at its head. 

Woody Point rock, bearing 148°, distant 200 yards from Woody 
point, which is situated 1,5, miles westward from Round Harbor head, 
has 4 feet of water on it. 

Mad Moll rock, lying west-northwestward, 400 yards from Pigeon 
island and 100 yards from the southern shore of the arm, uncovers 
3 feet at low water. 

Anchorage.—The anchorage at the head of Snooks arm is lim- 
ited, but the holding ground is good, in 28 fathoms of water. A small 
but conspicuous white hut on the beach at the head of the harbor, 
bearing 318°, indicates the middle of the harbor at the anchorage. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Snooks arm at 
Th. 12m.; springs rise 4 feet, neaps 34 feet. 


WILD BIGHT—-BETTS COVE. 427 


Water.—The watering place is in the northwestern corner of the 
head of the arm. 

Communication.—The steamer on the Notre Dame bay route 
from Burnt bay calls at Snooks arm weekly during summer and 
autumn. 

The shore forms a bight between Pigeon island and Lower bill 
of Snooks head at 700 yards to the south-southwestward; it then 
turns to the west-southwestward for + mile to Upper bill, and at 4 
mile farther is the eastern entrance point of Wild bight, close off 
which lies an islet 38 feet high. A rock with 24 fathoms water over 
it lies 100 yards south-southeastward of Lower bill. 

Wild bight.—Mouse point, the western entrance point, is situated 
1,700 yards west-southwestward from the eastern entrance point of 
the bight, and the bight extends northwestward about 1 mile from 
between them. The bight is open and the water in it is deep. 

The shore from Mouse point, close off which is a rock with 10 feet 
water over it, trends westward for 1,700 yards to the eastern entrance 
point of Indian Burying Ground cove. At 1,300 yards from Mouse 
point The Harrys, ‘a rock with 14 fathoms over it, les 200 yards off- 
shore; and at 265 yards farther westward, and 200 yards offshore, 
is Head rock, with 44 fathoms of water over it. 

Indian Burying Ground cove is an open cove with a settlement 
round the shores; it is shallow, and the shoal water falls suddenly to 
a depth too great for anchorage. A cascade discharges the waters of 
a brook that flows down the valley at the head. 

The shore from Indian Burying Ground cove trends west-south- 
westward for 4 mile to Bobby cove, which is small and shallow; it 
then turns southward for 900 yards to the eastern entrance point of 
Bottonhole cove, 100 yards southeastward of which is a rock with 
91 fathoms of water over it. 

Mayes ground, a patch with 20 fathoms water over it, bears 90°, 
1 mile from the eastern entrance point of Buttonhole cove; West ice 
ledge, a patch with 10 fathoms of water over it, bears 124°, 1,150 
yards, and a patch, with 18 fathoms of water over it, bears 194°, 1,200 
yards from the same point. 

Buttonhole cove is a small indentation with a store and wharf. 

The shore from Buttonhole cove trends westward for 1,600 yards 
to the eastern entrance point of Betts cove. Betts island, 29 feet high, 
lies 100 yards offshore at 900 yards westward of Buttonhole cove. 
Budgells ground, a patch with 16 to 19 fathoms of water over it, bears 
210°, distant 1,300 yards from Betts island. 

Betts cove.—The entrance points of Betts cove bear southwest- 
ward and northeastward, distant 700 yards from each other, and the 
cove extends northwestward, nearly 4 mile, narrowing gradually to 
its head; the water in it is deep till abreast the wharves, after which 


428 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


it shoals suddenly; it is open to the southeastward, but the heaviest 
swell rolls in during and after northerly gales. A valuable copper 
mine, situated to the westward of the cove, is being worked, and there 
is a considerable settlement; wharves line both sides of the inner por- 
tion of the cove; the various buildings, such as smelting houses, are 
conspicuous; and a tramway connects the mine with the harbor. 

Buoy.—A red buoy, to which vessels are temporarily secured, is 
moored in 26 fathoms of water, close southeastward of the wharves, 
and there are ringbolts (the position of each of which is shown by a 
whitewashed mark) in the sides of the cove, to aid vessels in hauling 
to the wharves. 

Water.—A considerable stream flows into a rugged cove, close in- 
side of the northeastern entrance point, from which water can be 
readily obtained. 

Communication.—The steamer of the Notre Dame bay route 
from Burnt bay calls at Betts cove weekly during summer and 
autumn. 

Betts head, situated south-southwestward, 1,200 yards from the 
southwestern entrance point of Betts cove, is 432 feet high; an islet 
10 feet high lies close off it, 65 yards east-northeastward of which is a 
small bare rock nearly joined to the head, with a house standing close 
above it; between the islet and rock is a small bight, where hghters 
could load ore in fine weather. A waterfall runs into this bight. 
The land about Betts head is reddish in color. 

Betts bight.—Green point hes west-southwestward 1,400 yards 
from Betts head, and between them is Betts bight, which is only 
300 yards deep. 

The shore from Green point trends west-southwestward, 1,8; miles 
to Harbor point; it is steep-to at the distance of about 100 yards. 
The land westward of Betts bight is grayish and partially wooded. 

Nippers islands are a group containing six principal islands and 
several rocks. 

Gull island, the eastern, situated southwestward, 1,400 yards from 
Green point, is about 300 yards long in an easterly and westerly direc- 
tion, and 45 feet high. <A ledge, with general depths of 13 to 19 
fathoms over it, extends eastward 1,400 yards from the island, but 
over that part of it which is within } mile from the island the depths 
are 5 to 8 fathoms. Gull Island a is a patch on this ledge with 
10 fathoms water over it. A patch with 18 fathoms water over it 
bears 80°, distant nearly 1 mile from Gull island. 

Gull rock, 12 feet high, lies about 300 yards westward of Gull 
island, and between are some rocks above water which are joined to- 
gether at low water. A shoal extends nearly 100 yards west-south- 
westward of Gull rock. 


NIPPERS HARBOR—-NOBLE HEAD. 429 


Alexander rock bears 228°, 400 yards from Gull rock, and a shoal, 
with a depth of 34 fathoms water, extends northeastward 150 yards 
from it. 

Seal island, 80 feet high, lies southwestward, 600 yards from Alex- 
ander rock, and Riding, Fox, and Duck isiands lie between, all being 
connected by shoal water and rocks. 

Geen island, 90 feet high, lies north-northwestward, a little over 
100 yards from Seal island. 

Light.—A square lighthouse, about 31 feet high and painted white, 
with one red horizontal band, on Seal island, exhibits at 111 feet 
above high water a fixed red light which should be seen from a dis- 
tance of 17 miles in clear weather. 

The light tower rises from the middle of the keeper’s dwelling. 
The light is shown during the season of open navigation. 

Nippers harbor.—The entrance to this harbor, between Harbor 
point and a point west-southwestward of it, is 250 yards wide, and the 
harbor extends thence northwestward for 400 yards, where it is 
crossed by an island, beyond which are two basins. The harbor 
affords anchorage for moderate-sized vessels in 10 to 12 fathoms 
water, mud bottom, and ringbolts have been fixed in the rocks for 
convenience in mooring. The shores are bold, with the exception of 
a rock about 65 yards westward of Harbor point and a rock close to 
the western entrance point. 

The western basin has shoal water extending from a brook in its 
western corner, leaving an anchorage, with good shelter for small 
vessels, 100 yards across, with 5 to 6 fathoms of water in it. The 
eastern basin of Nippers harbor dries across the mouth at low water, 
but is 4 to 5 fathoms deep within the bar. 

There is a small village with a church on the southwestern shores 
of the harbor, and a chapel, painted yellow, stands on a hill above the 
western entrance point. 

Communication.—The steamer of the Notre Dame bay route from 
Burnt bay calls at Nippers harbor weekly during summer and 
autumn. 

There is a telegraph station here. 

Noble head, a promontory of dark gray rock, 200 yards in, width, 
with a flat summit 215 feet high and covered with grass, extends 
eastward 700 yards from the shore line at + mile southward of 
Nippers harbor entrance. A ledge on which there are two remarkable 
pinnacle rocks runs east-southeastward nearly 200 yards from its 
southeastern end, and, bearing 70°, distant 400 yards from the south- 
eastern end, is a bank with 11 feet least water over it, from which 
there are depths of 34 fathoms for 200 yards westward. 

Noble cove, on the northern side of Noble head, is fringed by rocks, 
open to easterly winds, and unfit for anchorage. . 


430 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


The shore.—Green head bears 233°, distant 1,%, miles from Noble 
head, and the shore between is high and steep-to at the distance of 
200 yards. 

Rogues harbor.—The entrance of Northwest arm and Rogues 
harbor lies between Green head and a point lying 600 yards south- 
westward from it. The arms divide inside the entrance. 

A rock with 5 feet of water over it hes in the middle of the 
entrance, and a rock with 15 feet les close northwestward of it. 
There is a depth of 43 fathoms between these rocks and Green head, 
but the best channel, with 17 fathoms of water in it, is southward of 
them. 

Northwest arm extends west-northwestward about 4 mile; it 
affords no anchorage for large vessels, but small craft shelter in 7 
fathoms of water, off the shingle beach at the head. 

Rogues harbor extends southwestward about 1,600 yards and, at 
about halfway in, the channel narrows to a width of 70 yards, with 
a depth of 45 feet in it at low water, but within this bar is a basin 
with 11 fathoms of water in the middle, decreasing gradually in depth 
to the head. Avoid anchoring in the eastern corner of the basin, as 
very heavy squalls sweep over the neck of the peninsula during north- 
easterly winds. There is a copper mine at the head of this harbor. 

Green bay, the entrance of which is between the southwestern 
entrance point of Rogues harbor and Green Bay island, which is 
situated 24, miles to the southward, extends southwestward for 15 
miles. Northwest and Middle arms branch off on the northwestern 
side, and the inner part is known as Southwest arm. 

The shore of the bay trends southwestward from the southwestern 
entrance point of Rogues harbor for 1,5 miles to the northeastern 
entrance point of Stocking harbor. King island, 70 feet high, forms 
the southwestern side of the entrance to the harbor, and close east- 
ward of it is Pigeon islet, 40 feet high. Burnt islet, 56 feet high, 
hes in the entrance at 200 yards eastward of Pigeon islet, and there 
is a 5-fathom patch at 200 yards eastward of it. 

Stocking harbor is a bight, nearly a mile across at its entrance, 
extending northwestward about 1,200 yards, and a narrow and shal- 
low arm runs in to the westward, ? mile within King island. The 
anchorages in it are available for small vessels only. 

Kast Stocking harbor, where there are a few houses, is an inlet on 
the northeastern side of Stocking harbor, 500 yards in extent, and 
135 yards wide, and the best place of refuge for small vessels, which 
anchor in 10 fathoms water at the entrance, or less water inside, the 
depth decreasing gradually to the head. 

John Smith harbor, 500 yards westward of King island and 
northwestward of John Smith island, affords anchorage for small 
craft in 9 to 12 feet water. 


NORTHWEST ARM—MIDDLE ARM ROCK. 431 


Rock.—A rock, with 74 feet water over it, bears 226°, distant 800 
yards from the southeastern point of King island. Seal island, open 
southward of the land southwestward of Rogues harbor, bearing 59°, 
leads close southeastward of this rock. 

The shore from John Smith harbor trends west-southwestward 
for a mile to Young head, the northeastern entrance point of North- 
west arm. 

Northwest arm extends northwestward 1,8 miles from its en- 
trance between Young head and a point 1,200 yards to the southwest- 
ward. It is an excellent harbor. A shoal extends about 300 yards 
off Rix point, on the northeastern side of the arm at 800 yards within 
Young head, and a patch of 44 fathoms bears 245°, distant 400 yards 
from the same point. 

A rock, that uncovers 1 foot, les 100 yards eastward from the 
northern entrance point of Winterhouse cove, a considerable bight on 
the western shore. There are houses in Winterhouse cove and Rix 
cove, which latter is situated on the northeastern shore at 3 mile 
north-northeastward of Young head. 

Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtaimed as convenient in the 
northern part of Northwest arm, with good holding ground in 10 to 
7 fathoms water, giving the shore a berth of over 300 yards. 

Tides.—lIit is high water, full and change, in Northwest arm at 
Th. 9m.; springs rise 4 feet, neaps 3 feet. 

Communication.—The steamer of the Notre Dame bay route 
from Burnt bay calls at Northwest arm weekly during summer and 
autumn. 

The shore from the southwestern entrance point of Northwest arm 
trends southwestward for 1,%, miles to the northern entrance point 
of Middle arm. Small gray cliffs line the shore, and are interspersed 
with beaches of shingle. 

Lower island, 22 feet high, and Upper island, 24 feet high, are two 
bare rocks that are joined to this shore by bowlders covering at high 
water. The former lies } mile and the latter 8, mile from Northwest 
zm, and both show prominently against the dark, wooded shore. 

A rock with 12 feet of water over it is situated 100 yards from the 
shore at a distance of 450 yards southwestward of Upper island. 

Two patches of 44 fathoms lie at 215°, distant 1 mile, and at 220°, 
distant 1,3; miles, respectively, from the southwestern entrance point 
of Northwest arm. 

Middle Arm rock, 1 foot high, and surrounded by shoal water, 
is situated close to the northern entrance point of Middle arm, about 
4 mile from the shore. There isa passage between the shoals and the 
northern shore, but it should not be used except in cases of emergency, 
as the sea rolls from the shoals to the shore in heavy weather. 


432 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


Middle arm is 1,600 yards wide at its entrance, and it extends 
westward for 2 miles to the sandy spit at the end of the first reach, 
beyond which there is barely passage for a boat. 

- Anchorage.—At 14 miles within the entrance the arm narrows 
to 800 yards in breadth, and this is the eastern limit of the anchorage 
in 16 fathoms; for } mile farther westward, there is anchorage in 
14 to 10 fathoms water, good holding ground. 

Southwest arm, the entrance to which is between the southern 
entrance point of Middle arm and Birchy Cove head, at about 1,400 
yards to the southeastward, extends southwestward for 64 miles, and. 
then turns southward for 25 miles. The water in the arm is generally 
deep. 

Naked man, a pillar of rock 14 feet high, stands close to the south- 
eastern shore at 24 miles southwestward of Birchy Cove head. 

There are copper mines on each side of this rock, the localities of 
which are indicated by the houses on the shore; the mine stiuated next 
southwestward of Naked man has a wharf. 

Anchorages.—Corner brook cove is situated on the western shore 
of the arm at 6? miles within the entrance. Stearin rock, a small 
islet 13 feet high, is on the southern side of the cove, and Rattling 
brook, a waterfall, descends into its northern side. Anchorage may 
be obtained here by small vessels in 18 fathoms water, but the holding 
ground is not good. 

At 1,4 miles southward of Stearin rock is a point projecting 
slightly from the line of the coast. A shoal with 11 feet of water 
over it extends in a northeasterly direction nearly + mile from this 
point. 

Manful point is a projection of shingle on the eastern shore oppo- 
site Corner Brook cove. Anchorage for large vessels may be ob- 
tained, on a plateau extending from the shore southward of this 
point, in depths of 20 fathoms at the distance of 650 yards and 10 
fathoms at + mile, respectively, from the shore, with good holding 
ground. 

King point, near the head of Southwest arm, is low and flat, with 
a few houses on it and some land under cultivation. The head dries 
200 yards from the high-water line, and the depth increases sud- 
denly beyond to 15 ano South brook hes a mile east of the 
head and is a fine stream, draining the valley leading to Halls bay. 
The deposit from the brook dries at low water for a distance of 300 
yards from the mouth, and the water deepens suddenly beyond. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Southwest arm at 
7h. 8m. 

Telegraph station.—There is a telegraph station on the western 
shore, near the head of the arm. 


BIRCHY COVE—GREEN BAY ISLAND. 433 


Ice.—Southwest arm of Green bay freezes between December .25 
and January 15, and the ice breaks up between April 15 and May 15. 

The southern shore of Green bay eastward of Birchy Cove head 
rises to wooded headlands, the most conspicuous of which, Nicky 
nose, is a steep bluff 426 feet high. 

Several coves indent the shore and afford anchorage for vessels, 
with shelter from offshore winds. | 

Birchy cove lies in the middle of the bight between Birchy Cove 
head and Western point of Jackson cove, at 1 mile to the east-north- 
eastward. 

Jackson cove.—LEastern point of Jackson cove is situated about 
4 mile east-northeastward of Western point, and Jackson cove ex- 
tends south-southeastward about 800 yards from between them. The 
cove is fringed by beaches of shingle, and some rocks with shoal water 
extend about 200 yards from the eastern side of Western point 
headland. 

Fishing rock, with 34 fathoms of water over it, is the shoalest 
part of a bank lying off the mouth of Jackson cove, bearing 31°, dis- 
tant 4+ mile from Western point. 

Anchorage.—There is anchorage in Jackson cove, sheltered, ex- 
cept from northerly winds, in 13 to 16 fathoms, but the water shoals 
suddenly; the vessel must have room to swing clear of Fishing rock. 

Communication.—The steamer of the Notre Dame bay route 
from Burnt bay calls at Jackson cove weekly during summer and 
autumn. 

Harry head, the western entrance point of Salmon cove, lies east- 
northeastward, 24 miles from Eastern point of Jackson cove. 

Rocks.—A rock awash at high water bears 258°, distant 400 
yards, and a rock, with 8 feet water over it, 52°, 400 yards from 
the extreme of Nicky nose, which is situated eastward, 14 miles from 
Eastern point. 

Salmon cove is 700 yards wide at its entrance and extends south- 
ward about the same distance; it is bordered by a shingle beach. A 
schoolhouse, with a flagstaff near it, stands on the highest part of 
the land between the cove and Western arm. 

A shoal, with 4 fathoms water over it, les just within Salmon 
rock, which is 16 feet high and situated at the eastern entrance point 
of Salmon cove. 

The shore from Salmon rock trends east-northeastward, 1+45 miles 
to a point at the end of the promontory separating Green bay and 
Western arm. 

Green Bay island, a little over 200 yards northeastward of the 
promontory, 1s 202 feet high, wooded and faced by dark gray cliffs; 

76846—09——28 


434 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


rugged rocks he all along its coasts, but there is deep water at 200 
yards from the island, except between it and the promontory. 

Green Bay rock, 9 feet high, bears 120°, distant ? mile from the 
northeastern point of Green Bay island, and is the middle of a reef 
400 yards long in an easterly and westerly direction, over which the 
sea breaks in easterly gales. 

Three arms, the entrances to which le between Green Bay island 
and Little Bay head, are named Western, Middle, and Southern arms, 
respectively. 

Brandies reef is a group of rocks, the highest of which dries 
3 feet at low water, bearing 157°, distant 550 yards from the south- 
eastern point of the promontory separating Green bay and Western 
arm; a shoal, with 14 fathoms water over it and a rock with less 
than 6 feet water over it at its end, extends east-northeastward 300 
yards from these rocks, and for 300 yards farther east-northeastward 
there are depths of 54 to 10 fathoms. The southern entrance point 
of Rogues harbor, open eastward of Green Bay island, bearing 345°, 
leads eastward of these rocks. 

Western arm extends about southwestward 4 miles from Black- 
berry head, its southern entrance point; it is generally about 600 
yards in width, but at 2,5, miles within the entrance it narrows to 
400 yards for a short distance; the arm affords anchorage in several 
of the coves that indent its shores. 

Harry harbor, a shallow indentation on the northern shore with 
its entrance situated westward, 1,3, miles from Blackberry head, is 
suitable for small vessels, having only 9 feet in the entrance at low 
water. 

Harry Harbor rock, with 1 foot water over it, lies in the fairway 
and just southward of the entrance; vessels entering should buoy 
the rock beforehand. 

Shoal.—Windsor cove is situated a mile southwestward from 
Harry Harbor rock, and a rock awash at low water bears 130°, dis- 
tant 400 yards from the southern entrance point of the cove. This 
rock is near the western side of a bank which extends 500 yards in 
an east-northeasterly and west-southwesterly direction, with a width 
of 265 yards, and has depths of 14 to 8 fathoms over it. A patch of 
5% fathoms bears 100°, distant 500 yards, and a patch of 8 fathoms 
bears 124°, distant 350 yards, from the rock. 

Bear Cove point, southwestward ;®, mile from Windsor cove, is 
the end of a promontory 185 to 239 feet high, on the northwestern 
side of which is Bear cove. This cove is about 4 mile in depth and 
rather less than 400 yards in width, with 9 to 21 fathoms of water 
in it. 

Rock.—A rock that dries 3 feet bears 245°, distant 600 yards from 
Bear Cove point, and shoal water extends northeastward and south- 


DOLLOND ARM—BLACKBERRY HEAD. 435 


eastward nearly 200 yards from it. A ledge connects this rock with 
the land to the westward; there are depths of 5 to 9 fathoms of water 
over it, but 200 yards off shore is a rock 1 foot high. 

About 400 yards westward from Bear Cove point is a bank with 
a least depth of 5 fathoms water over it. 

Clearing mark.—The southeastern side of the peninsula forming 
Harry harbor open southeastward of Bear Cove point promontory 
bearing 57°, leads close southeastward of the rock drying 38 feet and 
the shoal water southeastward of it. 

Anchorage.—Windsor point les west-southwestward, distant 
1,400 yards from Bear Cove point, and anchorage may be obtained in 
depths of 20 to 17 fathoms, to the southwestward of Windsor point 
and near the head of the arm. 

Dollond arm, a shallow indentation eastward of Dollond Arm 
head, a round wooded hill, 323 feet high, forming the southeastern 
side of the narrows, affords anchorage to small craft, off the entrance, 
in 15 fathoms of water. 

Welsh cove, the entrance of which lies eastward 800 yards from 
the western entrance point of Dollond arm, is about 700 yards long 
eastward and westward, and 400 yards broad; its entrance is narrow, 
and the channel is contracted to 100 yards by a rock, with 11 feet of 
water over it, extending northward from the southern entrance point, 
and by shoal water extending a short distance from the northern 
entrance point. 

There is a depth of 4 fathoms in the entrance channel, and the cove 
is about 8 to 13 fathoms deep at 135 yards off its shores; good anchor- 
age may be obtained by vessels of moderate length in 12 fathoms 
of water, mud bottom. A buoy should be placed on the rock off the 
southern entrance point previous to entering. 

The shore.—At 300 yards northward of the northern entrance 
point of Welsh cove is a copper mine, the shaft of which is close to 
the shore; the manager’s dwelling-house, a conspicuous wooden buiid- 
ing, is situated northward of the shaft. 

The shore is foul for nearly 200 yards off it, from Welsh cove 
northward to the next prominent point, a distance of about 800 yards, 
but anchorage may be obtained westward of the mine, in 15 fathoms 
of water, mud bottom. 

The shore from the point at 800 yards northward of Welsh cove 
trends northeastward for i} miles, with foul ground extending 
rather more than 200 yards off it for about 1,200 yards northeast- 
ward of the point; the shore then forms a small bight and continues 
eastward for 800 yards to Blackberry head. 

Blackberry head is an islet about 100 yards across and 44 feet 
high, lying close off the northern part of Western head, with which 
it is connected by a reef. 


436 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


Hennessy and Three Arms islands lie in the entrance of Middle 
arm. The eastern end of Hennessy island lies eastward 2,300 yards 
from Blackberry head, and the island thence extends west-south- 
westward 1,800 yards. It is of very irregular shape and much broken 
up; its highest part is 205 feet high. Foul ground extends 200 
yards off its coasts in places. Three Arms island extends from 150 
yards southwestward of Hennessy island, 1,200 yards southwestward, 
and its width varies from 100 yards to 400 yards; its height is 150 
feet. 

Old Billy, a rock with 8 feet water over it, les on a ledge which 
stretches eastward 300 yards from the northeastern end of Three 
Arms island. 

The channel westward of Hennessy and Three Arms islands re- 
quires local knowledge for its navigation, as its narrowest part is 
only 150 yards in width, and a shoal extends over 100 yards from the 
western side of Three Arms island. 

South Arm point, the southern entrance point of Middle arm, 
bears southward 750 yards from the eastern end of Hennessy island. 
At 100 yards off the southeastern shore of the arm, 700 yards west- 
ward of the point, is a shoal with 12 feet water over it, and at 800 
yards farther west-southwestward Long rocks extend 100 yards off the 
shore. The channel between Long rocks and the shoal water south- 
ward of Old Billy is somewhat more than 100 yards wide. 

Middle arm runs 1}; miles in a west-southwesterly direction from 
the southern end of Three Arms island, with a width of about 300 
yards, and it affords excellent anchorage in 10 to 15 fathoms of water, 
mud bottom. On its northwestern side, at 950 yards southwestward 
of Three Arms island, are a conspicuous stage and a few houses. The 
arm is clear of shoals at about 80 yards off its shores. A sunken 
bowlder about 50 yards off the southern shore, at 200 yards distant 
from the head, must be avoided in anchoring. 

Directions.— When northward of South Arm point bring the stage 
on the northwestern shore of the arm just open southwestward of 
Three Arms island, bearing 244°; keep this mark on until the western 
end of Hennessy island is just shut in by the eastern end of Three 
Arms island, bearing about 339°, and then in mid-channel to the 
anchorage. 

Southern arm extends southwestward in nearly a straight line, 
44 miles, from southward of South Arm point to its head, with a 
width of 600 to 200 yards. 

Small island lies in the middle of the arm at 1? miles southwest- 
ward of South Arm point; a shoal with 1 to 4 fathoms water over it, 
having a rock that dries 2 feet near its northern end, extends north- 
ward a little over 200 yards from the island, while at 150 yards 


SHOAL ARM—INDIAN BIGHT. 437 


northwestward of the island is a 13-foot patch. Big island lies in the 
arm immediately southwestward of Small island. 

The northern shore must be kept aboard in taking the passage 
northwestward of these islands, which is only 100 yards wide, and 
has a depth of 4 fathoms in it. 

At 4 mile west-southwestward of Little Bay head, Long rocks 
extend 150 yards off the southeastern shore of the arm; and in the 
narrows southeastward of Big island, and just northward of the 
northern entrance point of Shoal arm, a spit with 2 fathoms of water 
over it extends 100 yards into the channel. 

Leading mark.—A low islet, 100 yards off the southeastern shore 
at 1,200 yards from the head of the bay, in line with the southeastern 
side of Dick head, a hill 137 feet high on the northwestern shore of 
the arm at about a mile southwestward of Big island, bearing 230°, 
leads through the channel between Big island and the spit extending 
from the southeastern shore. 

Shoal arm, situated 3 miles southwestward of Little Bay head, is 
entered through a channel about 55 yards wide, in which is a depth 
of 13 feet of water, and has 7 to 9 fathoms within. A rock with 8 
feet of water over it lies 100 yards distant from the middle of the 
eastern shore of this arm. 

Communication.—The steamer of the Notre Dame Bay route 
from Burnt bay calls at Three arms weekly during summer and 
autumn. 

Little Bay head falls in steep cliffs at the end of the slope from 
a conspicuous conical hill 657 feet high, situated southwestward 1 
mile from its northeastern end. Close off Little Bay head is Little 
Bay Head islet, 31 feet high. 

The shore of Notre Dame bay from Little Bay head trends south- 
eastward for 400 yards to North bill, and thence southward 1,4, miles 
to South bill, the northern entrance point of Wild bight. 

Wild bight, the shores of which are foul for the distance of about 
150 yards, affords anchorage for small vessels, in 10 to 13 fathoms of 
water, with shelter from northerly and westerly winds, but the hold- 
ing ground is not good. With light northeasterly winds a swell sets 
in, and when the wind is strong the whole of the bight appears to be 
breakers. Red island, 120 feet, and Red Island rock, 38 feet high, 
form the southern entrance point of Wild bight. 

Ice.—Icebergs frequently drift into Wild bight during June, July, 
and August after the pack ice has left Notre Dame bay. 

Indian bight.—The shore from Red island trends southwestward 
for 44 miles to the head of Indian bight; sunken rocks extend north- 
ward 200 yards from the southern entrance point of the bight, at 
1,300 yards from the head. 


438 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


There is a settlement at the head of the bight, and at its north- 
western end is a white church with a spire. 

A wharf projects from the middle of the beach, and there is a 
depth of about 16 feet at low water alongside it, but a small rock, 
which dries 3 feet at low water, lies close northeastward of the wharf. 
The local steam vessels pass between the wharf and the rock. 

Dog stones, two rocks awash at high water and surrounded by 
shoals, altogether nearly 400 yards long, east-southeastward and west- 
northwestward, are situated in the middle of Indian bight at 400 
yards from the head; there is a narrow passage between the Dog 
stones and the shoal water extending from the western shore, but the 
best passage, 150 yards wide, is southeastward of them. 

A valuable copper mine is situated in the valley between two hills 
on the southeastern side of the bight. A tramway runs from the 
mine to a wharf in Little bay and a road to the settlement at the 
head of Indian bight. 

Anchorage, sheltered from offshore winds only, may be obtained 
by ene or two small vessels, in 44 fathoms water, off the wharf, but 
a heavy sea rolls in with northeasterly winds. 

Telegraph.—There is a telegraph office here. 

Water can be obtained readily from a stream flowing into Shimmy 
cove, which lies immediately east-northeastward of Indian bight. 

Otter island, 352 feet high, and densely wooded, hes at the en- 
trance to Little bay and forms two passages to it. That westward 
of the island is nearly barred by rocks, but there is a narrow channel, 
with a depth of 13 feet in it at low water; the channel southeastward 
of Otter island, though only 60 yards wide, has 11 fathoms of water 
in mid-channel. 

Little bay is situated southward of Indian bight, the dividing 
point being a small bluff. 

There are large copper works and a wharf situated immediately 
southward of the western entrance, on the northwestern shore of 
Little bay, and vessels drawing 24 feet load alongside, or anchor off 
it in 13 fathoms water, but it is necessary to moor, as the space is 
limited; temporary anchorage may be taken up farther out in 22 
fathoms. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Little Bay wharf at 
Th. 22m.; springs rise 44 feet, neaps 3 feet. 

Communication.—The steamer on the Notre Dame bay route 
from Burnt bay calls at Little bay weekly during summer and 
autumn. 

Coal and supplies.—Cape Breton coal might be obtained from 
the mining company, which usually has some 50 tons in stock; vessels 
‘an coal alongside the wharf; provisions in small quantities can 
generally be obtained. 


LITTLE SHELLBIRD BIGHT—TOM COD ROCK. 439 


Shoal.—A shoal patch, with 15 feet water over it, lies 150 yards 
off the northwestern shore of Little bay, in a position bearing 215°, 
distant 1,550 yards from the southwestern end of Otter island. 

Little Shellbird bight, the first deep bend on the southeastern 
shore of Little bay, is barred in its western approach by a shoal con- 
necting the southwestern entrance point with Grassy islet and Little 
Shellbird island, which lies 1,900 yards southwestward of Otter 
island; and a shoal, with 15 feet water over it, extends southeastward 
150 yards from Little Shellbird island, leaving a passage of that 
breadth between it and the southeastern shore of Little bay. 

Shellbird bight, southward of Shellbird island, which is situated 
$ mile southwestward of Little Shellbird island, affords anchorage 
for small vessels in 7 to 8 fathoms water; it is entered from the west- 
ward, because a bar, with 16 feet water over it, connects the eastern 
side of the island with the mainland. 

Shoal harbor is on the southern shore at 4 mile west-southwest- 
ward of Shellbird island, where there is a mine; two islets, 35 and 70 
feet high, respectively, form the western side of its entrance, in which 
there is a depth of 6 feet water; a rock that uncovers lies in the mid- 
dle, and other rocks lie close northeastward of the entrance. 

Little bay decreases in width to 200 yards at 1,200 yards within 
Shoal harbor and 1 mile from the head, and the available channel 
is still further narrowed to 100 yards by a shoal extending from the 
southeastern shore. 

Anchorage may be obtained by small vessels at the head of the 
bay, in Northeast bottom, in 5 fathoms, or in Southeast bottom, in 9 
fathoms of water. 

Ice.—Little bay usually freezes between January 1 and 20, and is 
completely blocked with ice about 2 feet thick, but it is sometimes 
open in winter; the ice generally clears early in May; navigation has 
been closed as late as June 9. Field ice appears about January 10, 
and leaves early in May. The last vessel generally leaves early in 
January, and the first vessel arrives early in May. 

Bay.—From between the northeastern end of Otter island and 
Beaver Cove head, at 1,2; miles eastward, a bay extends southward 
1,2, miles. 

Rock.—A rock with 13 feet of water over it lies 150 yards off the 
eastern coast of Otter island at 700 yards southward of its north- 
eastern point. i 

Tom Cod rock, a small pinnacle that dries 3 feet at low water, 
bears 123°, distant 1,150 yards from the northeastern point of Otter 
island. A rock with 12 feet of water over it is situated 100 yards 
westward of Tom Cod rock. 

Leading mark.—The apparent northwestern side of Little bay in 
line with its eastern entrance point, bearing 232°, leads northwest- 


440 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


ward of Tom Cod rock and between it and the rock lying off the east 
coast of Otter Island. 

Little Ward harbor extends west-southwestward 800 yards from 
the head of the bay between Otter island and Beaver Cove head and 
is 850 yards wide, but has only 13 feet of water in the entrance, and 
the anchoragre is not available for vessels drawing more than 10 feet 
of water. 

Beaver Cove rock, lying west-southwestward nearly 200 yards 
from Beaver Cove head, has 15 feet of water over it. 

The coast from Beaver Cove head trends eastward for 1; miles 
to Hall Bay head, the northwestern entrance point of Hall bay. Little 
Bay island les northeastward 175 miles from Hall Bay head, and the 
following-described islands and shoals lie in the channel between 
them: 

Grassy island, which bears 345°, distant 600 yards from Hall Bay 
head, is 39 feet high. At 100 yards northward of Grassy island is 
Tub islet. These islands are situated on a bank with 1} to 24 fath- 
oms of water over it, extending 100 yards northward and southward 
from them. <A patch of 2 fathoms bears 138°, distant 400 yards from 
Grassy island, and there is a channel with 7 to 9 fathoms of water in 
it between them. 

Fox islands are two islands 100 yards apart in an easterly and west- 
erly direction, 50 and 65 feet high, respectively. The western island 
lies 1,700 yards northward from Hall Bay head. There is a rock with 
less than 6 feet water over it in the channel between these islands. 

Red island, 58 feet high, is 500 yards south-southeastward of Fox 
islands, and there is a depth of 7 to 8 fathoms in the channel between 
them. A shoal spit extends southward 350 yards from Red island, 
and on the spit, near its southern end, is Compton rock, which is 
awash at low water. Copper island, 159 feet high, les east-south- 
eastward 800 yards from Red island. Merab ledge, with 3 fathoms of 
water over it, bears 349°, distant 200 yards from the northern ex- 
tremity of Copper island, and a patch with 34 fathoms of water over 
it bears 165°, distant 350 yards from Copper island. 

Little Bay island is 2,2, miles long in a northerly and southerly 
direction and about 1,5, miles broad; it contains two good harbors for 
small vessels. 

Suleyann cove is on the southern side of the island between Iron 
and Hynes points, which bear west-northwestward and east-south- 
eastward, distant about 1,600 yards from each other. A beach of 
shingle lines the shore of the cove, inside which is a small settlement 
containing several conspicuous white houses. 

Some yellow rocks, the highest of which is 1 foot high, he off the 
southeastern point of Suleyann cove, and foul ground extends south- 
eastward and westward 200 yards from them. The summit of Little 


NORTH HARBOR—SALTWATER POND BAY. 44] 


Bay head in line with Hynes point, bearing 328°, leads midway be- 
tween these rocks and Copper island. Shoal ground and rocks that 
cover extend 200 yards from the beach in Suleyann cove. 

Communication.—The steamer from Burnt bay calls at Little 
Bay island weekly during summer and autumn. 

North harbor, in the northeastern part of the island, is entered 
between North head and Harbor island through a channel 100 yards 
wide. There is a small cove in the southern shore, with a few houses 
around it, where anchorage may be obtained in 8 fathoms water, mud 
bottom. ; 

The western fishing stage in the cove, half open northwestward of 
the eastern entrance point of the cove, bearing 233°, leads in mid- 
channel between the shoals. When the stage on the northern shore 
bears to the right of 330°, steer for the middle of the harbor and 
anchor as convenient. 

Southern harbor, in the southeastern part of the island, is entered 
through a channel 70 yards wide, with a depth of 4 fathoms water 
in it, between Goat island, which is partially wooded and 86 feet high, 
to the northeastward, and Macks island, 140 feet high and faced by 
gray cliffs, to the southwestward. 

The harbor, surrounded by a settlement, is 600 yards long and 500 
yards broad, having depths under 3 fathoms, except in a space 350 
yards northward and southward and 150 yards wide, situated imme- 
diately within the entrance. 

Black rock, a bare islet 7 feet high, lies east-southeastward, 600 
yards from Goat island. 

Black Rock sunker, bearing 207°, distant 200 yards from Black 
rock, uncovers 2 feet at low water, and is generally shown by a 
breaker; and Black Rock ground bearing 176°, distant 400 yards 
from Black rock, is a patch with 6? fathoms over it. 

Hall bay, a picturesque arm of the sea, extends southwestward 
17 miles, with an almost even breadth of 14 miles; the land on the 
northwestern side is reported to contain large quantities of copper. 

Communication.—<A road will connect Hall bay with the North- 
ern and Western railway, at a point 4 miles westward of Badger 
brook, the distance being about 44 miles. This road had not been 
‘completed at the close of 1908. 

Saltwater Pond bay.—Saltwater Pond point, on the northwestern 
shore at 44 miles within the entrance of Hall bay, is the northeastern 
entrance point of Saltwater Pond bay, a bight extending 1,600 yards 
northwestward, from the head of which, Saltwater pond, a shallow 
arm of the sea, extends to within a short distance from Little Ward 
harbor. 

The anchorage in Saltwater Pond bay is considered the best in 
Hall bay; the anchoring space is about 500 yards in extent, shoal- 


4492 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


ing gradually to the shores from 7 fathoms of water in the middle. 
No supplies can be obtained here. 

Island Rock cove, on the northwestern shore at 114 miles within 
the entrance, has several houses on its shore; the mine wharf projects 
from the eastern part of the cove, and bearing 152°, distant nearly 
200 yards from it, is a rock, awash at low water. The wharf, bear- 
ing 312°, leads northeastward, and the summit of Burnt island, 
shut in with the northwestern end of Green island, bearing 216°, 
leads southeastward of this rock and a bank extending southwest- 
ward from it to a small islet. F 

Lower Wolf cove, immediately southwestward of Island Rock 
cove, affords anchorage for small vessels close to the shore, but there 
is no secure position for a large vessel, since depths of 30 fathoms 
are found at 300 yards distant from the shore. 

A steam sawmill and several houses are on the shores of Lower 
Wolf cove, and a small jetty has been built for shipping purposes. 
The settlement is named Springdale. 

A steam sawmill stands on the northwestern side of Green island, 
southeastward of Lower Wolf cove, and is conspicuous from the 
southwestward, but only the exhaust steam and flagstaff are visible 
from the northeastward. 

A shoal with 2 fathoms of water over it, bears 51°, distant 400 
yards from Green island. 

Burnt Island anchorage.—Small vessels anchor off the first cove 
southwestward of Burnt island, where the bank extends 335 yards 
from the shore to the depth of 10 fathoms, but the water deepens 
suddenly to 60 fathoms, while depths of less than 3 fathoms will be 
found 100 yards from the shore. 

Dock point.—A conspicuous white house stands on Dock point, 
on the northwestern shore at nearly 24 miles from the head of the 
bay. 

Riverhead brook, a considerable stream, flows into the head of 
Hall bay and the deposit from it has formed flats of sand that extend 
across the entrance and for + mile to the southeastward from Eaton 
point, falling quickly to deep water. 

Anchorage may be obtained in the southern part of the head of 
Hall bay in 10 to 23 fathoms water as convenient, the latter depth 
being 4 mile from the shore, or when White point, where there are 
some houses, is in line with the northern end of Wolf head, bearing 
59°. Small vessels shelter about ? mile east-northeastward of Eaton 
point; depths of less than 10 fathoms extend 300 yards from the shore, 
and deepen quickly to 24 fathoms. 

Ice.—Hall bay freezes between the end of January and early in 
February, and the ice breaks up between April 20 and May 3. 


WOLF COVE—SUNDAY COVE. 443 


Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Hall bay at Th. 16m.; 
springs rise 54 feet, neaps rise 35 feet, neaps range 2 feet. 

Wolf cove, eastward of Wolf head, is 800 yards deep, 750 yards 
wide at the entrance, and 400 yards wide at the head; the depths 
range from 33 fathoms in the entrance to 8 fathoms close to the head, 
and the shoal water which fringes the shores falls steeply to depths 
suitable for the largest vessels. 

Communication.—The steamer from Burnt bay calls at. Wolf 
cove weekly during summer and autumn. There is a road from the 
cove to Little bay. 

Boot harbor is situated on the southeastern shore at 74 miles north- 
eastward of Wolf head and immediately eastward of Boot Harbor 
head, a bold bluff surmounted by a wooded hill 250 feet high; here 
is a shingle mill worked by the water of a cascade falling into the 
harbor; also a wharf, having some white houses near it, and a rock, 
with 1 foot water over it, bearing 20°, distant 200 yards from its outer 
end. 

Anchorage may be obtained in Boot harbor, in 12 to 15 fathoms 
water, at 400 yards from the shore; the best position is with the wharf 
bearing 149°, and the northern end of the largest wooded islet on the 
southwestern side of the harbor, 272°. 

Sunday Cove island tickle, the passage between Sunday Cove 
island and the mainland, is not available for vessels drawing more 
than 12 feet, and even these should not attempt it at low water, for 
though the general depth over the bar toward the eastern end is not 
less than 13 feet, and there are one or two spots where bowlders rise 
above that level. The bottom is visible and, for vessels of suitable 
draft, the navigation is easy. 

From the northwestward and having rounded the rock that dries 
off Mooring cove, steer a little northward of the middle of the channel 
so as to bring the end of Burnt head just open of the eastern point 
of Mooring cove. Keep this line until nearly abreast Shoal Arm 
point, and then steer to pass close to the rounded headland facing 
Woodfords arm. 

The mail steamships of the Newfoundland coast service, drawing 
about 12 feet water, use this passage regularly. 

There is good anchorage at the western entrance of Sunday Cove 
Island tickle in 6 to 10 fathoms; the chart is a sufficient guide. 

Sunday cove.—Eastward of the tickle just described is a large 
bight known as Woodfords arm. Its shores are shallow for some dis- 
tance off, but there is anchorage in the middle of the bight in 11 to 12 
fathoms, mud bottom. Strong southwesterly winds blow across this 
bight in violent squalls from off the neighboring hills. 

Eastward of Woodfords arm, Sunday cove narrows to 400 yards, 
and then continues for about 2 miles, when it opens into the extensive 


444 CAPE ST. JOHN-TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


water space separating Sunday Cove island and the mainland from 
Pilley island. 

The navigation of Sunday cove presents no difficulty, and there are 
no shoals outside of those fringing the shores. 

There is a wharf for shipping pulp wood on the southern side of 
the narrows in Sunday cove. On the northeastern side there are a 
few houses. 

The mainland, forming the southern side of Sunday cove, is thick- 
ly wooded and rises to a height of upward of 500 feet. The shore 
is fairly steep, conspicuous, and cliffy, except in Haywards bight, a 
bay immediately westward of Haywards head. The shores of this 
bight are foul and rocky, and about the middle of it, 400 yards from 
the shore, is a small patch of rocks, the top of which is 1 foot high. 
Haywards head is steep-to. 

Wellman cove is situated on the western shore of the northern 
part of Sunday cove island at 14 miles southward of Island point; 
there are some houses on its shores. 

A shoal extends northward 200 yards fea the southern entrance 
point, and the cove is foul generally to that distance offshore. 

There is anchorage, for small vessels only, in 8 to 13 fathoms water 
off the houses, but the holding ground is bad, except in a small spot, 
where the local schooners moor. 

Sunday Cove Island bight, on the eastern coast of the island, 
is completely open eastward; it is indicated by the houses and stages 
on its shingle beach; a heavy sea rolls in after gales, and the fishing 
stages are sometimes washed away. 

A rock lies close eastward of the southern stage. 

There is a mine on the northeastern side of this bight, and a tem- 
porary wharf with a magazine near it. 

Burnt point is the easternmost point of Sunday Cove island; be- 
hind it the land, densely wooded, rises quickly to the height of about 
400 feet, the hills sloping gently toward Sunday cove. In this ridge, 
at about 1 mile from Burnt point and a short distance from the coast, 
some copper deposits are worked. 

Between Burnt point and Miles cove, a small bight southwestward 
4 mile from the point, there are several cottages and landing stages. 

Pilley island, eastward of Sunday Cove island, and separated 
from it by a channel about 1,400 yards wide, is about 5 miles long, 
northward and southward, and 3 miles broad. There is a valuable 
mine of iron pyrites in the southern part of the island. 

Long Tickle point is the northwestern point of Pilley island; 
from it the western coast of the island extends 43 miles southward 
to the entrance to Flat Rock tickle. The coast is densely wooded 
and, except off Short point at 13 miles southward from Long Tickle 
point, it is clear of shoals. 


SHORT POINT SHOAL——ROBERTS ARM. 445 


Short Point shoal is a detached patch of rocks, lying 200 yards 
off Short point, with depths of 24 fathoms between it and the shore. 
The outer part of the rocks dries 2 feet at low water. 

Spencers dock is the name given to a series of small bights in the 
western coast of Pilley island at 1$ miles from Short point. In these 
are several houses, and a good road leads to Pilley Island harbor. 

Off the northern of these bights there is a small islet and some dry 
rocks, but there are no shoals except those fringing the coast. 

Haywards Gull island, small, rocky, partially wooded and 178 
feet high, fronts the entrance to Flat Rock tickle at a distance of 4 
mile from it. At 200 yards off its western end there is a rocky shoal, 
with a depth of only 3 feet over it, and the passage, with about 3 
fathoms of water in it, between it and the island is narrow. The 
northern and eastern sides of the island are clear, but a small shoal 
extends about 50 yards off the southern side. 

Between this island and the entrance to Flat Rock tickle, as well as 
off the adjacent coast of Pilley island, the water is deep and clear of 
shoals. 

The coast from Haywards head trends southwestward forming 
several coves, the two largest of which, Moorey cove and Bear cove, 
have some houses and landing stages, but very little fishing is done 
in this locality, and the people are generally dependent for work on 
the pyrites mine at Pilley island. Most of the houses are surrounded 
by small patches of cultivated land. 

Roberts arm lies in an angle on the coast southward of Bear 
cove. It is small but perfectly sheltered and affords excellent anchor- 
age in 8 to 10 fathoms, mud bottom. It is not difficult of access if 
the directions are carefully followed. The northwestern portion of 
the harbor is occupied by flats of sand and mud, but the remainder 
is fairly clear. 

Harbor islet, small and 35 feet high, lies off the southwestern side 
of the arm. 

There are several houses around the arm and a steam sawmill and 
a building slip for small vessels southward of a small rocky knoll on 
the western side. 

Three-quarters of a mile westward of Roberts arm there are some 
extensive ponds, on the shores of which copper deposits have been 
worked, and a road connects the nearest pond with the harbor. The 
mines have been abandoned for some years. 

Shoals.—A low, wooded point forms the southern side of Moorey 
cove, and fronting the bight just southward of it is a small rock, 1 
foot high. Bearing 180°, distant 400 yards from the same point, is 
a shoal with 2 feet water over it. 

Nearly 600 yards west-southwestward of this shoal and upward of 
200 yards from a low, woody head forming the outer northern en- 


446 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


trance point to Roberts arm, is a rock with 7 feet water over it. These 
shoals can usually be seen when the sun is in a favorable direction. 

Directly outside the entrance to Roberts arm there is a small, 
wooded islet, 15 feet high; its northern side is clear, but between it. 
and the shore there are some rocks which dry 

Bearing 233°, distant 250 yards from this islet and in the fairway 
of the entrance, there is a patch of rocks, the top of which dries 1 
foot, but shoal water extends from this a little toward the northwest- 
ern shore. Immediately inside the inner northern entrance point and 
nearly 100 yards from the shore, is a small rock which dries 1 foot 
at low water. 

Directions.—Pass about + mile westward of Haywards Gull island, 
steer southward and bring the end of Harbor islet just open of the 
northern inner entrance point bearing 245°, which mark leads to the 
islet outside the entrance. When near this islet sheer over toward 
the northern shore; pass very close to the bluff forming that side of 
the entrance; then steer a little toward the sawmill to clear the rock 
inside the inner northwestern entrance point, and anchor as con- 
venient. Large vessels must moor. 

The coast eastward of Roberts arm is bold and forms three small 
coves, of which Tilley cove, the easternmost, is the largest. There is 
a house at the head of Tilley cove. 

Flat Rock tickle is the channel forming the western approach to 
Pilley Island harbor. It is about 1} miles long and nearly 4+ mile 
wide, but the navigable channel between Flat rock and Kelly head 
is less than 100 yards in width. Flat rock hes 800 yards within the 
entrance to the channel; its western part is 2 feet high and is almost 
steep-to, but a patch of rocks and foul ground extends eastward 
from it for a distance of 250 yards. 

The southern shore opposite Kelly head is foul for 200 yards, and 
here there are some patches of rocks which dry; therefore vessels 
should not attempt the passage southwestward of Flat rock. 

Northeastward of Flat rock and across the mouth of Kelly cove 
there is a rock which is awash at low water, but this is usually visible. 
Off the rounded point on the northern side of the channel, which is 
situated east-southeastward, nearly 600 yards from Flat rock, shoals 
extend for 150 yards, and between these and the eastern end of Flat 
Rock shoal is the most difficult part of the passage. With the excep- 
tion of the foul ground fringing the shores and the islets on the 
southern side there are no other shoals. 

Directions.—F rom the westward keep along the coast of Pilley 
island and when Flat rock opens steer to pass midway between 
it and the land, observi ing that during an east-going stream at spring 
tides there is likely to be a set toward Kelly cove. 


FOX ISLAND—PILLEY ISLAND HARBOR. 447 


Haul close round Flat rock, and keep the low green head, forming 
the western point of Tilley cove, just open off Kelly head, bearing 
281°, to pass between Flat Rock shoal and the shoals off the point to 
the east-northeastward. When the islet, 30 feet high, on the southern 
side of the tickle bears 150°, steer to pass on either side of Fox island 
as convenient, using the chart as the guide. 

Fox island lies across the eastern end of Fat Rock tickle; it is 
100 feet high, wooded and steep-to on its northwestern and eastern 
sides. Shoal water extends a short distance from its southwestern 
point, and from its northeastern end a tongue of shoal water extends 
northeastward 350 yards, and near the end of it is a patch of dry 
rocks. Between this shoal and Pilley island there is a clear but 
narrow passage used by local steamers. 

Margesson island is a small, wooded islet, 40 feet high, lying 
between Fox island and Raft tickle. It may be passed on either side 
at a reasonable distance. 

Raft tickle, between the mainland on the west and Pretty island 
on the east, forms the southern and main entrance to Pilley Island 
harbor. Raft island, small, wooded, and 70 feet high, with some 
smaller islets and rocks extending from the southern shore, and also 
shoal water lying 100 yards off the coast of Pretty island, narrows 
this tickle to a little over 200 yards. 

Pretty island rises to the height of 250 feet and is densely wooded. 
Its coasts, especially the southern, which is the highest, are generally 
bold; on its western side there is a shallow bight known as Pretty 
Island harbor. 

Pretty tickle, the southeastern channel to Pilley Island harbor, is 
clear of shoals except close to the shore on its northeastern side, but 
its narrowest part is only 70 yards wide, with a depth of 53 fathoms. 
Its western entrance is obstructed by some dry and sunken rocks, 
owing to which it is generally used only by small vessels. 

Pilley Island harbor, situated on the southern side of Pilley 
island, is available for vessels of large size, and though the approach 
is narrow and confined there is ample water in the channel. 

An iron pyrites mine, situated close to the head of the harbor, was 
worked for some years, during which a large quantity of ore was 
shipped, principally to the United States. The mine was closed in 
1900 and the population of the locality has consequently much de- 
creased. In 1900 it was about 450. When the mine was in opera- 
tion—and it is believed that work may again be resumed—12 to 14 
steamers were annually loaded, taking on the average 38,000 tons of 
ore, valued at about $180,000. Work had not been resumed here at 
the close of 1908. 

Supplies, coal, repairs.—When the mine was worked, 200 to 
300 tons of coal were usually kept in stock. Moderate quantities of 


448 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


provisions and stores may be obtained. Small repairs to steamers 
have been executed, and castings have been made up to 20 tons, but 
as the works have been closed these can not be relied on. 

There is a steam sawmill in the village at the head of the harbor. 

Communication.—Steamers, from and to Burnt bay, call twice 
weekly during summer and autumn. (See p. 476.) There is an 
irregular overland mail service during winter. The nearest telegraph 
office is at Little bay, to go to or come from which a messenger takes 
about four hours in fine weather; the charge for delivery is $3. 

Outer anchorage.—There is anchorage in 18 to 20 fathoms, mud 
bottom, 500 yards eastward of the middle of Fox island, but the hold- 
ing ground is not good. Avoid anchoring on Callaghans ground, 
which, with depths of 6 to 10 fathoms, extends about + mile parallel 
to, and 200 yards distant: from, the western side of Pretty island; on 
this the bottom consists of smooth rocks, and vessels are liable to drag. 

Ice.—The first vessels arrive about the middle of May and the 
last usually leave about Christmas. 

Buzzard shoal, over which the least depth is 2 feet, lies 300 yards 
southward of Bridges island and is separated from the shoal extend- 
ing northeastward from [Fox island by a channel 150 yards wide, 
with a depth of 6 to 8 fathoms in it. 

Reynolds shoal, over which there is a depth of 11 feet, bears 110°, 
distant 325 yards from the southern end of Bridges island, and 61°, 
350 yards from Buzzard shoal, with a deep channel between. 

Ledrew rock is a small pinnacle with a depth of 18 feet over it, 
lying in the fairway of the harbor channel, directly off Penns cove. 

Picnic and Graveyard islands mark the ship channel to the 
inner anchorage, both being nearly steep-to on their northwestern | 
sides. 

Directions.— When abreast Margesson island, bring the Salvation 
Army barracks, a long house with a red roof standing by itself, twice 
its own length inside the extreme of the western point of the Narrows, 
bearing 359°, to pass between Buzzard and Fox shoals. Then keep 
along the western side of Bridges island, at about 100 yards distant, 
until the Methodist chapel (to the right of the Salvation Army bar- 
racks) is Just open eastward of Picnic island, bearing 359°, to clear 
Ledrew rock. Thence a mid-channel course, passing westward of the 
islands, leads to the anchorage. 

Or keep along the coast of Pretty island until the southern point of 
Penns cove is in line with the southwestern end of Bridges island, 
bearing 327°, which mark leads between Buzzard and Reynolds 
shoals; round the southwestern end of Bridges island and proceed as 
above. 

The space in the harbor is limited, and vessels should moor or lie 
at single anchor, with sterns fast to one of the numerous ringbolts 


LITTLE HARBOR—-BUMBLEBEE COVE. 449 


driven into the rocks, the positions of which ringbolts are indicated 
by whitewashed marks. Vessels loading ore lie alongside the pier, 
which is connected with the mine by a tramway. 

The channels eastward of Bridges, Picnic, and Graveyard islands 
are only fit for small vessels. 

Buoy.—<A square, wooden buoy is moored southward of the pier 
for warping purposes. 

Pilots.—A pilot can generally be obtained at Dumer lighthouse. 
(See p. 457.) 

Tides.—it is high water, full and change, at Pilley Island harbor 
entrance at 7h. 0m.; springs rise 5 feet, neaps 34 feet. The rate of 
the streams in the tickles of Pilley Island harbor does not generally 
exceed 1 knot, and the directions vary with the wind as well as with 
the tide; the streams usually set directly through the tickles, follow- 
ing the bends of the channels. 

Little harbor is a narrow inlet, 800 yards in length; the entrance, 
which is northeastward of Bridges island, is narrow and encumbered 
with rocks, making the harbor only available for boats and very small 
craft. 

Shoals.—The coast between Little harbor and Pilley tickle, which 
is situated about $ mile to the east-northeastward, is foul and rocky, 
and must not be approached nearer than 150 yards, while off the east- 
ern head of Little harbor and nearly in the fairway there is an exten- 
sive patch of rocks, the southwestern end of which dries 1 foot. 

Between these rocks and Reynolds shoal there is a small patch 
with a depth of 15 feet on it. 

Leading mark.—The high cliff eastward of Hussey cove in line 
with Raft head, bearing 219°, leads northwestward of Pretty Tickle 
shoals, but close to depths of 18 and 19 feet, and this range also leads 
southeastward of the shoals off Little harbor. 

Pilley tickle, between Troytown and Pilley islands, is the north- 
eastern entrance to Pilley Island harbor. The narrowest part of the 
passage, east-northeastward about 1 nile from Bridges island, is 100 
yards wide, and carries a depth of 12 fathoms in mid-channel. 

Northeastward of the narrow passage of Pilley tickle the space 
between Troytown and Pilley islands opens to a passage northward to 
sea. This channel carries deep water, but there are some shoals in it. 

Just northeastward of the narrow part of Pilley tickle and on the 
northern shore there is a two-story white house with a small jetty 
or stage a few yards northeastward of it, and nearly off these, about 
50 yards from the shore, there is a rock which dries 1 foot at low 
water. 

Bumblebee cove.—Northeastward of the narrow part of Pilley 
tickle the western shore forms a small bay, with a few houses in it, 

76846—09 


29 


450 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


called Muddy hole; it then bends sharply westward into Bumblebee 
cove, a deep bight, the head of which is separated from Pilley Island 
harbor by an isthmus, 150 yards across. There are several rocks at 
the entrance to this cove, with a good passage between them and its 
northeastern point. A rock lies in the middle of the cove, and only 
small vessels should enter it. ; 

Heads harbor.—Eastward of the narrow part of Pilley tickle 
the Troytown island coast forms some small rocky coves, fronted by 
shallow water, and then turns southeastward around a low and 
narrow projecting headland, making Heads harbor, a shallow bight 
with some houses round it. A small rocky islet, 5 feet high, used 
as a leading mark, lies off the headland. 

Beyond Heads harbor the coast continues foul, and off this part of 
it, at a distance of 350 yards, there is a wooded islet, 65 feet high, also 
used as a leading mark. 

Big island, densely wooded, generally cliffy, and 280 feet high, 
is close to the eastern side of the channel. Shoals extend 200 vards 
off its low, northwestern point, and as they lie in an angle of the 
channel, with a distance of only 400 yards between them and the 
shoals of Bumblebee cove, caution is necessary. The small islet off 
Heads harbor in line with the western point of the wooded islet south- 
westward of Big island, bearing 174°, leads in the channel between 
these shoals. 

Northeastward of Big island the channel presents no special 
dangers until nearing Dogfish point. No-good island, small, wooded, 
and 75 feet high, lies off the western shore; its southeastern side is 
steep, but in the fairway between it and Troytown island there is a 
small rock with a depth of 15 feet over it. 

Dogfish point bears northeastward + mile from No-good island. 
It is thickly wooded and bold, but directly off it the channel, which 
here narrows to 500 yards, is obstructed by Dogfish rock, a patch of 
rocks over which the least water is 3 feet. The available passage 
eastward of Dogfish rock is consequently only about 100 yards in 
width, and, though the rocks may usually be seen, it requires caution. 

A conspicuous white patch on the cliffs of Long island twice its own 
breadth open of the western tangent of the passage leads clear of the 
rock off No-good island, and between Dogfish point and rock, but 
‘close to the rock. 

Northward of Dogfish point Pilley tickle is clear of shoals. 

Stuckey cove, on the eastern side of Pilley island at about a mile 
north-northwestward of Dogfish point, is deep beyond 100 yards from 
its shores, and it affords anchorage in 10 to 20 fathoms water. 

A densely wooded hill, 510 feet high, lies southwestward 800 yards 
from Stuckey cove, and on its western slope is a large and conspicuous 
pine tree. 


' 


FOX COVE—OIL ISLANDS. 451 


Fox cove, northward 800 yards from Stuckey cove and separated 
from it by Stuckey point, has no convenient anchorage, as several 
rocks lie near its head. 

Pilley cove.—Fox head is the northern entrance point of Fox 
cove, and at 1,600 yards northwestward of the head is Pilley cove, an 
inlet extending west-southwestward 400 yards, and 350 yards across, 
which affords anchorage to small vessels. Sunken rocks lie close to 
both entrance points and the southern side is foul, but the shingle 
beach at the head is bold-to. To enter, keep one-third of the dis- 
tance between the entrance points from the northwestern entrance 
point, and anchor nearer the northern than the southern shore in 
5 to 7 fathoms water. 

Fresh water can be obtained from a cascade that falls over cliffs on 
the southern side of the cove. 

Long Island tickle, northward of Pilley island and between it 
and Long island, is about + mile wide in its narrowest part, deep, and 
clear of shoals, except a rock with 15 feet water over it at 1 mile 
eastward of Long Tickle point, the northwestern point of Pilley 
island, and close to the shore. 

Long island is 6% miles long along its southern coast, and it ex- 
tends northward 34 miles. The island is wooded at the summit, and 
its highest part is 721 feet high. The southern coast rises steeply 
from the sea and is bold-to. The only houses on this side are in 
Patrick Power cove. 

Grassy islets, three islets and several rocks connected by shoal 
water, are situated 250 yards off the southwestern point of Long 
island, and there is a depth of 12 fathoms in the passage between. 
The western islet is 20 feet high, and the eastern, slightly lower, is 
surmounted by a small bush. 

Lush bight is the deepest cove on the western coast of Long island, 
and several houses have been built around it. The anchorage is 
available for small vessels only, in depths from 24 to 4 fathoms, mud 
bottom. 

Rocks.—A rock with 14 fathoms over it bears 245°, distant 300 
yards from the north entrance point of Lush bight, and a rock with 4} 
fathoms over it, 228°, 450 yards from the southern entrance point of 
the bight. Lewis islet, 22 feet high, hes north-northwestward, 600 
yards from the northern point of Lush bight; a shoal of 2 fathoms 
bears 90°, distant 150 yards; a rock, with less than 6 feet water 
over it, bears 340°, distant 300 yards; a rock, with 9 feet water 
over it, bears 290°, distant 500 yards, and a rock, with 2 fathoms 
water over it, bears 284°, distant 900 yards from the islet. 

Oil islands, about 1,200 yards westward of the northern entrance 
point of Lush bight, are three wooded hills extending ;%; mile in an 


s 10 
easterly and westerly direction. The western island, 221 feet high, is 


452 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


joined to the middle part by a low neck of gravel, and the eastern is 
connected only at low water. Shoals extend in places about 200 
yards off the islands, and a rock with less than 6 feet over it, bears 5°, 
distant 210 yards from the eastern point of the eastern island. 

Suleyann rock, 9 feet high, bears 329°, distant 1,600 yards from 
the western point of Oil islands. A shoal, on which there is a rock 
above water, extends nearly 200 yards eastward and southeastward 
from Suleyann rock. 

The coast of Long island from the peninsula forming Lush bight 
trends north-northwestward for 1 mile to its northwestern point; it 
then turns northeastward for 14 miles to Western head of Ward 
harbor. Flint islands, small and 50 to 75 feet high, with rocks lying 
200 yards off them, are situated about 200 yards off the coast and 
1.200 yards northeastward from the northwestern point. 

Western Head rock, a patch with 6 feet water over it, bears 270°, 
distant 600 yards from Western head. 

Ward harbor, around which there is a small settlement, is entered 
eastward of Western head, and affords good anchorage for vessels 
drawing less than 10 feet water; the passage is midway between 
Cross islet, small, castellated, and 32 feet high, in the middle of the 
entrance, and the eastern shore. A reef extends from the western side 
of the harbor southward of Cross islet, and a sunken rock hes close 
northward of the eastern entrance point. 

Cutwell harbor, which has a small settlement on its northern side, 
lies between Giles and Otter islands. It is } mile across, and the 
depth of water decreases gradually from 14 fathoms in the middle to 
the line of shoal water which les about 50 yards from the shore. 

Cutwell arm, an anchorage available for small vessels, is entered 
southward of Otter island; the passage, narrowed to a breadth of 40 
yards by shoal water extending from either side, should not be at- 
tempted without a pilot. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Cutwell harbor, at 
Th. 6m.; springs rise 44 feet, neaps 3 feet. 

Hardrix or Seal island rises to several conspicuous cones covered 
with wood, the highest being 294 feet high. 

Wild bight, southward of Hardrix island, affords no safe anchor- 
age; there are some patches of 9 to 20 fathoms in it, but the only 
shoals are a few rocks close to the shore. 

Southern head, the eastern end of Long island, rises in almost 
perpendicular cliffs to wooded hills, 487 to 513 feet high, and South- 
ern Head islet, a bare rock 42 feet high, les close to its northern side. 

Light.—A white circular tower, 33 feet high, on Southern head, 
exhibits at 103 feet above high water, a fixed white light, which 
should be seen from a distance of 15 miles in clear weather. The 
keeper’s dwelling, painted white, is connected with the tower by a 


GULL ROCK—STAG ISLAND. 453 


short covered way, and there is a white storehouse 40 feet to the 
southward of the dwelling. 

Gull rock, situated 37; miles northward from Western head of 
Long island, and the northernmost of the group situated northward 
of that island, is round, bare, and 50 feet high; a small islet, about 5 
feet high, lies close southeastward of it, and two rocks, that cover at 
high water, extend southward 100 yards from this islet. 

Middle islands, the next southeastward, are a low group, the 
highest of which, situated at the northern end, is 32 feet high, and 
surrounded by rocks extending 200 yards from it. 

Gunning rocks, next southeastward of Middle islands, are two 
small islets 6 feet high, with shoals extending 200 yards from them 
except on the southeastern side. 

Old Bantam, a rock with 34 fathoms water over it, bears 67°, 
distant nearly $ mile from the highest of the Middle islands. 

Stag island, the largest of these islands, situated near the middle 
of the group, is shaped like a wedge, falling steeply to the south- 
eastern coast from a hill 233 feet high, covered with small wood. 

North harbor is between the northeastern side of Stag island and 
Little Stag island, and affords good sheltered anchorage for small 
vessels in 5 fathoms water, mud bottom. North harbor rock, with 
15 feet water over it, bears 281°, distant 200 yards from the north- 
western end of Little Stag island. 

A chain of islets extends southeastward ;%; mile from Stag island, 
and the southeasternmost, named Gunning islet, is bare and 25 feet 
high. 

Duck islands, the easternmost of the group, are three grassy islets, 
the highest, to the southward, being 62 feet high. 

There are several other islets, rocks, shoals, and fishing banks in 
this group and between the group and Long island. They are shown 
on the chart. 

Directions.—None of the channels through this group should be 
attempted except in fine weather, and the only passages available 
without local knowledge are those between Gull rock and Middle 
islands, between Middle islands and Gunning rocks, and between 
Duck islands and Gunning islet. The southern end of Little Bay 
island open northward of Middle islands, bearing 233°, leads between 
Gull rock and Middle islands. 

The southern end of Little Bay island open southward of Middle 
islands and northward of Gunning rocks, bearing about 241°, leads 
between Middle islands and Gunning rocks. 

The northern end of Middle islands, open northeastward of Crab 
island, bearing about 312°, leads between Duck islands and Gunning 
islet, until Hardrix island is completely open eastward of Gunning 


454 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


islet, bearing 205°, but this mark leads close eastward of Jacobs rock, 
before approaching which steer for the middle of Hardrix island. 

Troytown island.—From the entrance to Pretty tickle the south- 
ern coast of Troytown island extends east-northeastward for 13 
miles to Servier point, and is densely wooded, cliffy, and very bold. 
Northward of Servier point is Butlers bight, behind which the 
wooded hills become lower. At one mile farther east-northeastward 
there is a small island, 70 feet high, separated from the shore by a 
narrow channel, which partially dries at low water, forming Cards 
harbor, where there is a fishing station and good shelter for boats. 

The coast of the mainland, westward of Raft tickle, is high and 
thickly wooded for nearly a mile. It is fairly bold close in, but about 
600 yards westward of Raft head and off a small projecting point, 
locally known as Hogs nose, there are some detached rocks. The in- 
ner rock, with a depth of 15 feet over it, is 550 yards from Raft 
head and 100 yards offshore. 

The two outer rocks, with depths of 3 fathoms over them, bear 
207° and 217°, each distant 400 yards from the same point. 

Local pilots usually pass between these rocks and the shore. 

Sops head, at 14 miles west-southwestward of Raft head, is a 
high, densely wooded, and conspicuous projection. Opposite to it, on 
the northern shore, there is a long, narrow inlet, available only for 
small vessels. 

This inlet reaches to within 400 yards from the head of Tilley cove. 

Tommys arm.—On the northern side of Sops head is the entrance 
to Tommys arm, which extends west-southwestward for nearly 2 miles 
and affords sheltered anchorage in 18 to 20 fathoms. 

At 100 yards off the northern entrance point of the arm there is a 
small patch with a depth of 4 fathoms over it, and a rocky shelf 
extends 150 yards off Sops head, leaving a good passage in mid- 
channel. A small rock, 4 feet high, steep-to on its northern side, but 
with foul ground between it and the southern shore, from which it is 
distant 150 yards, lies $ mile inside the entrance. 

In the middle of the arm is a wooded islet, 80 feet high, which is 
steep-to, except on its southwestern side, whence a patch with 18 feet 
water over it extends for nearly 200 yards. A rock, 5. feet high, lies 
west-northwestward, distant 300 yards from this islet; and a rock, 
4 feet high, lies north-northwestward, distant 250 yards from the 
western end of the islet. 

A quarter of a mile west-southwestward of the rock, 5 feet high, 
the arm narrows toward the entrance of a stream running southward 
from the large ponds behind Roberts arm. A small islet, 12 feet high, 
hes off the northern side of this narrow part, and from a place 200 
yards eastward of the islet the water gradually shoals toward the 
mouth of the stream. 


SOPS ARM—DUCK ISLAND. 455 


Directions.—It is usual to pass northward of the rock, 4 feet high, 
situated 1 mile within the entrance, and southward of the islet in 
the middle of the arm, thence following the southern shore, and 
anchoring 300 yards southward of the 5 feet high rock. 

The channel northward of the islet is straighter and there is more 
anchorage room off a bight in the northern shore, northwestward of 
the rock, 5 feet high, in about 11 fathoms. 

Sops arm is an inlet extending about west-southwestward for up- 
ward of 2 miles on the southern side of Sops head. Along both its 
shores are some scattered houses and at the western end there is a 
steam sawmill, near which is the mouth of a small stream. 

The entrance to the arm is partially occupied by a wooded island, 
90 feet high, having a channel on either side of it, but that to the 

northwestward is obstructed by a patch with a depth of 2 fathoms 
over it. The southern channel is clear and should be used in prefer- 
ence. A rock, with a depth of 4 feet over it, bears 65°, distant 500 
yards; and a rock, with 19 feet water over it, bears 62°, digtant 1,300 
yards, from the summit of the island. 

Sops arm affords good anchorage near its head in depths of 12 to 
15 fathoms, but during northeasterly gales it is rather open and the 
swell comes in. 

Husseys cove, on the southern side of the entrance to Sops arm, 
extends nearly 4 mile to the southwestward, but so narrow that it is 
only available for small vessels. 

The coast from Husseys cove eastward is bold, Sapa nearly 
opposite Raft tickle, where a rock, with depths of 8 to 12 feet over 
it, lies nearly 200 yards from the shore. 

Burton harbor lies southward of Burton head, a cliffy headland 
opposite Pretty tickle; it affords temporary anchorage in 8 to 12 
fathoms, but is open northeastward. A quarter of a mile inside a pro- 
jecting point, on the western side of the entrance, the harbor divides 
into two small arms, both of which are shallow. 

A rock, with 5 fathoms water over it, lies in the harbor approach, 
bearing 93°, distant 1 mile from Burton head. 

Sugarloaf islet, small and 90 feet high, lies northeastward of the 
entrance to Burton harbor and bears 68° from Burton head; it is 
covered with coarse grass and, being steep, may be approached closely. 

Duck island, 145 feet high and wooded, lies just off the eastern 
end of the peninsula separating the channel leading to Sops arm from 
Badger bay; in the narrow channel between the peninsula and Duck 
island there are two small islets and a rock 1 foot high. 

Between the eastern of these islets and Duck island there is a 
4-fathom passage used by local schooners and boats. The northeastern 
end of Duck island is rocky and should not be approached nearer 


456 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


than 400 yards. <A cluster of small islets and rocks les southward 
of the island and between them there is a passage about 200 yards 
wide which is navigable, but it is more prudent to leave the whole 
group to the northward. 

Big island, about 400 yards in length northward and southward, 
and 199 feet high, is the northwestern of a group of islands and rocks 
on the northern side of Troytown island. From its eastern end, Cob- 
bler rocks extend eastward to Cobbler island. 

Cobbler island, about 400 yards eastward of Big island, is 1,400 
yards long, eastward and westward, and 163 feet high. 

Cobbler tickle, between Cobbler island and Dark Tickle island, is 
entered from the westward, and affords good anchorage in 6 to 17 
fathoms water, the soundings decreasing gradually from the latter 
depth to the islets and rocks that fill its eastern end. Hynes rock, 
with 6 feet water over it, bears 207°, distant 600 yards from the west- 
ern end of Cobbler island. 

Dark Tickle island, southeastward of Cobbler island, rises to a 
round hill, 223 feet high; on the northern hill of the island are two 
conspicuous trees, 132 feet above the sea. 

Dark tickle, the passage between Dark Tickle island and Troytown 
island, is clear, with the exception of White Ground shoal extending 
about 200 yards from the southeastern end of the island, nearly joined 
to the eastern end of Dark Tickle island, and a bank with 13 feet 
water on it, situated 150 yards northeastward from the first cove 
southeastward of the western narrows. The narrowest part of Dark 
tickle is 100 yards wide, and the depth of water is not less than 6 
fathoms in midchannel. 

Great Troytown harbor, entered between Dark Tickle point, 
the southern entrance point of Dark tickle, and Big Troytown island, 
extends southwestward for 1? miles, with several bends. 

The head of Troytown harbor is divided into two coves by a 
wooded island 190 feet high and a promontory of Troytown island. 
West arm is available only for boats; Butler cove, the southern arm, 
suitable for small vessels only, is entered through a narrow channel 
between rocks extending from both entrance points. 

Anchorage.—There is anchorage in 7 to 17 fathoms water in 
a cove situated on the eastern side of Great Troytown harbor and 
southward of a low sharp point rising to a wooded hill 185 feet high. 

Water.—There are several houses in this cove, and water may be 
obtained from a brook close to the houses. 

Communication.—The steamer from Burnt bay calls at Great 
Troytown harbor weekly during summer and autumn. 

Little Troytown harbor, the western entrance of which lies east- 
southeastward 1,200 yards from Dark Tickle point, is 850 yards long 


LITTLE DUNIER ISLAND—GREAT DUNIER ISLAND. 457 


and 450 yards wide, and affords good anchorage in 9 fathoms water, 
sand bottom. 

The northeastern entrance is 60 yards wide, and a rock with 15 
feet water over it lies in mid-channel, but there is a depth of 5 fath- 
oms close to the eastern shore. 

There is a small settlement around the harbor. 

Water may be procured from a brook discharging into a small 
cove on the southern shore. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Troytown harbor at 
Th. 5m.; springs rise 44 feet, neaps 3 feet. 

Ragged point is the northern end of the northeastern promon- 
tory of Troytown island. 

Little Dunier island, east-northeastward 4 mile from Ragged 
point promontory, is a wooded island about 600 yards in diameter, 
with a flat summit 220 feet high; the coast line is deeply fissured. 
Islets and shoals extending southwestward from the southern ex- 
tremity of the island, and the islet 27 feet high with the shoal east- 
ward of it off the eastern point of Ragged Point promontory, narrow 
the channel between them, in which there are depths of 11 to 14 
fathoms, to a width of 150 yards. 

League rock, northeastward, distant 1,®; miles from Little Dunier 
island, is in two parts, separated by a narrow cleft; it is about 40 feet 
high ; shoal water extends 300 yards west-southwestward of the rock. 
A patch of rocks, 8 feet high, lies east-northeastward 300 yards from 
League rock, and there is a depth of 44 fathoms in the passage between 
them. The rocks are situated on a bank extending 34 miles in an 
easterly and westerly direction, having general depths of 20 to 50 
fathoms over it, but with several patches of 6% to 19 fathoms, and a 
confused sea is produced in heavy weather. 

Grand Dismal cove, southward of Ragged point promontory. 
must not be entered without a pilot, as rocks surround the shores, and 
the Sisters reef extends northeastward 250 yards from Sisters point, 
the southern entrance point. A small islet, 27 feet high, hes close 
to the northern entrance point, from which rocks extend east-south- 
eastward for the distance of 200 yards. 

Tom Cod rock, with 13 feet water over it, is situated in the middle 
of Grand Dismal cove, and bears 163°, distant 650 yards from the 
islet off its northern entrance point, and a bank, with 24 to 7 fathoms 
water over it, extends 256°, 750 yards from the rock. 

Great Dunier island, 1,400 yards long in an easterly and westerly 
direction and 221 feet high, is situated southward about $ mile from 
Little Dunier island. 

Light.—A fixed red light is exhibited from a wooden frame, 15 
feet high, near the eastern end of Great Dunier island, at 210 feet 


458 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


above high water, and it should be seen from a distance of 16 
miles in clear weather. The light is shown between May 15 and 
December 31. 

The Brothers reef, which uncovers 3 feet at low water, is situated 
on the northern side and near the western end of the channel between 
Dreat Dunier and Troytown islands; it narrows the passage between 
it and Great Dunier island to a breadth of 80 yards. 

Nimrod island, 28 feet high, situated 300 yards westward of 
Great Dunier island and separated from Troytown island by a channel 
95 yards wide, with 7 fathoms water in it, has low rocks extending 
westward 150 yards and shoal water extending eastward nearly 100 
yards from it. ‘ 

Nimrod harbor, a small boat cove in Troytown island, is situated 
to the northward of the eastern end of Nimrod island, and there are 
a few houses on the shore. 

The coast of Troytown island from Nimrod harbor trends west- 
southwestward for 24 miles to the island forming Cards harbor; it 
is fairly steep-to. At ;®, milé west-southwestward of Nimrod island 
and about 100 yards offshore is Harbor Round island, which is 300 
yards long, parallel to the coast; a reef extends 200 yards east-north- 
eastward of it. 

Badger bay extends southward about 6 miles from Duck island. 
Its western part is divided into five small bays and the central part 
is occupied by Gull island, which is 400 feet high, wooded, and con- 
spicuous. 

The northern and southern shores of the bay, as well as the west- 
ern side of Gull island, are fairly clear, but the eastern side of this 
island has several rocks off it, and from its northeastern point some 
detached patches, with deep water between them, extend east-north- 
eastward for ? mile, terminating in the Brandies, a small cluster 
of rocks awash at high water and generally marked by breakers. 

Georgies rock bears 14°, distant about $ mile from the Brandies, 
and is 8; mile from the eastern shore of the bay; its summit has a 
depth of 6 feet over it, and north-northeastward and south-south- 
westward there are depths of 4 and 5 fathoms for about 300 yards. 
This rock breaks with an easterly swell. 

Leading marks.—<A conspicuous conical mountain, far behind 
Shoal arm (to the southwestward), just open northwestward of Gull 
island leads northwestward of Georgies rock, and the Sugarloaf 
summit seen between two islets in the channel between Duck island 
and the mainland, bearing 318°, leads close northeastward of it. 

Julies harbor is a small cove in the western corner of Badger 
bay; its entrance is very narrow and the space inside only affords 
sufficient room for very small vessels. There are several houses and 
patches of cultivated ground around this cove. 


BIRD ISLAND COVE-—LOCK HARBOR. 459 


Bird Island cove.—At 100 yards off the southern entrance point 
of Julies harbor is Goat island, a small, wooded island 40 feet high, 
and between it and a long narrow promontory, terminating north- 
eastward in Woody point and situated about 600 yards southeast- 
ward of the island, is Bird Island cove. It is often too open eastward 
to afford anchorage. 

Bight.—On the southeastern side of Woody point promontory is 
a deep bight, the eastern side of the outer part of which is bounded 
by Gull island. Toward its head this bight contracts to a narrow 
channel, within which it opens out into Shoal arm, an extensive area 
almost filled with flats of sand, mud, and shells. A stream runs into 
the southwestern end of this arm, but in consequence of dams having 
been built across it for driving logs, the outflow is generally small. 

A small islet lies just inside the narrow channel and from either 
end of it a floating boom reaches to the shore northeastward and 
southwestward; the logs driven down the stream are retained within 
the boom for the mill at Pennys brook. 

Bearing 45°, distant 350 yards from the southern entrance point of 
the narrow channel and 150 yards from the shore, there is a rock with 
a depth of 3 feet over it. With this exception the bight is free from _ 
shoals, but it is open to the easterly swell which frequently prevails, 
and therefore it is not suitable for anchorage. 

Anchorage.—The eastern part of the passage between the south- 
ern end of Gull island and the mainland is occupied by some small 
islands and rocks. Westward of these there is sheltered anchorage in 
11 to 13 fathoms, mud bottom, in a space about 400 yards wide; it 
is easy of access from the westward, and is entirely sheltered, even 
during strong easterly gales. 

This anchorage can also be entered from the eastward, but it is 
inadvisable to take that passage without local knowledge. 

Beaver bight, southward of Gull island, is open and unfit for 
anchorage. 

Wild bight is the southern part of Badger bay; the water is deep 
in it, and there are no shoals beyond a distance of 300 yards from 
the shore, though a small 7-fathom bank lies in the fairway of its 
approach. 

Pennys brook, a small stream, flows into the western side of Wild 
bight; here there is a steam sawmill and several houses, off which 
fairly good anchorage may be had in 18 to 20 fathoms. 

The eastern shore of Badger bay from Wild bight to Cannon 
head, a distance of 54 miles, is high, cliffy, and densely wooded, with 
deep water close to the rocks. 

Lock harbor is a small bight lying 14 miles southwestward of 
White point, the eastern entrance head of Badger bay. Some low 
rocks lie off the entrance, and the space inside is very limited and 


460 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


open to the northerly sea. There is a small settlement on the shore 
of this harbor. 

White point, the eastern entrance head of Badger bay, is white 
limestone rock projecting from the cliffy shore and joined to it by 
a narrow neck. The point is 40 feet high and its summit is covered 
with grass, forming a conspicuous contrast to the dark, wooded hills 
behind it. 

Seal bay is the large bight eastward of Badger bay; it extends 
southward for about 8 miles, and terminates in a shallow basin, 
fronted by some islets, into which a small stream flows. 

The middle of the bay is deep and free from shoals, but a heavy 
sea rolls in during strong northerly winds. Indifferent anchorage 
may be found, as hereinafter described. 

There are a few settlers in the bay, principally at Lockport on the 
eastern side. 

Seal Bay head, the western entrance point of Seal bay, is a dark 
cliffy headland, 180 feet high, and broken by the action of the sea 
into several small coves. Immediately southward of the head is a 
small bight, and at 500 yards northeastward of Inner Seal head, its 
southern entrance point, is a patch of rocks, 9 feet high, with a clear 
channel between. 

Wild bight is west-southwestward of Inner Seal head, and the 
water in it is deep and unfit for anchorage. A small rock, awash at 
low water, lies about 70 yards from the cliffs, at about 700 yards 
southwestward of Inner Seal head, and shoal water extends north- 
eastward 150 yards and southward 100 yards from it. The head of 
the bight forms a cove, about 135 yards in width, in which there are 
some fishermen’s houses which were unoccupied in 1901. 

Gull island, south-southwestward 1;4 miles from Inner Seal 
head, is 184 feet high, with a bare grassy summit; its eastern and 
western sides are steep, but a rocky ridge of foul ground extends 
south-southwestward 600 yards from it, and terminates in a rock 12 
feet high. There are two smaller islands, and some rocks which dry 
at low water, between Gull island and the shore of the bay, which is 
made up of wooded hills falling in steep cliffs. There is a fairly 
good passage between these islands and rocks and Gull island, but it 
is not recommended without local knowledge. 

Side harbor is a deep indentation on the western side of Seal 
bay at 3 miles within Gull island. Its entrance is a good deal ob- 
structed by shoals lying off the eastern side, but there is a fairly good 
passage, 300 yards in width, westward of the shoals. Inside the 
shoals there is anchorage in 15 to 21 fathoms, but the ground is rocky 
and northeasterly gales throw in some sea. 

Mill cove, on the western side of Seal bay, at 3? mile from its 
head, is narrow and shoal, but the only houses in this locality are on 


LOCKPORT—-THIMBLE HEAD. 461 


its shores. Small vessels were occasionally built here, but the saw- 
mill was abandoned in 1901 for a more favorable site. 

The group of islets off this cove extends to the flat which occupies 
the head of the bay. Between them there are several rocky patches, 
and bearing 28°, distant 850 and 550 yards from the northern end of 
the largest islet, there are two rocks with 2 feet of water over each 
of them. 

Anchorage can be obtained in 19 to 21 fathoms, good holding 
ground, off the entrance to Mill cove, with some shelter close to the 
western shore, which must be kept close on board when approaching 
the anchorage to clear the two rocks which he north-northeastward of 
the largest island. 

The eastern shore of Seal bay, like the western, rises in thickly 
wooded hills nearly 500 feet. It is broken into several small coves 
and is generally free from shoals, but there is no sheltered anchorage, 
except for small vessels. 

Lockport is a small harbor formed by a bight inside of an island 
on the eastern side of Seal bay. It is easy of access and sheltered, 
but, owing to rocky patches, the space available for anchorage is very 
limited, and the harbor is only fit for small vessels. A small rock, 
with 3 fathoms water over it, lies in the middle of the harbor. 

The entrance is round the southern end of the island, which must 
be kept aboard, and when within the rocky spit extending about 
200 yards northward from the southern shore of the harbor, anchor 
off a small bight in the island in about 7 to 9 fathoms. 

The channel between the eastern side of the island and the main- 
land is shallow and rocky. 

A few families live here, and a copper mine has been worked in 
the hills on the eastern side of the harbor. 

Thimble head, conspicuous and cliffy, is the southeastern en- 
trance point of Seal bay. The summit of the head is densely wooded, 
and the land gradually falls to the eastward and terminates in 
Thimble Tickle head, a rocky point, 62 feet high, which at high water 
is almost an island. The water is deep close to this coast. 

Bays.—From Thimble Tickle head the shore bends sharply to the 
southward for 1,2, miles where a promontory, extending northward 
800 yards, forms two small and shallow bights. From the head of 
the eastern of these bights, a promontory extends northeastward 15 
miles eastward of which the shore trends north-northeastward 12 
miles to Cumlins head. Glover harbor, and the channel leading to it, 
he between. 

Across the entrance to these bays there are three islands and several 
dry rocks surrounded by patches of foul ground, the passages between 
which are known as Thimble tickles. Inside these are sheltered 


462 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


anchorages, but only the main or eastern channel is available without 
local knowledge. 

There is a small settlement in a bight at 400 yards southward of 
Thimble Tickle head, and another in a small cove 800 yards farther 
southward. 

Goat island, small and low, lies about 200 yards southeastward of 
this cove; there is sheltered anchorage southeastward of the island in 
17 fathoms with the end of Thimble Tickle head a little open eastward 
of the island. 

Gull island, about 200 yards across and 62 feet high, lies north- 
ward 900 yards from Thimble Tickle head; shoal water extends 70 
yards westward and southeastward of the island, and a bank with 7 
fathoms water over it stretches northeastward 300 yards from it. 

Glover harbor entrance is 50 yards wide in its narrowest part, 
though a least depth of 54 fathoms can be carried through the chan- 
nel. In the harbor within the narrows there is very good and per- 
fectly sheltered anchorage. 

Directions.—To enter Glover harbor or the bay westward of it, 
pass between Gull and Ward islands and close to the southern point 
of Ward island, which is steep-to; then steer for the cliffs over Cum- 
lins cove. When past the northern end of a thickly-wooded island, 
which end rises to a sharp summit 164 feet high, steer southward 
through the main channel, keeping nearly midway between the island 
and the mainland, avoiding a shoal patch off Cumlins cove, and direct 
for the narrow entrance of Glover harbor, eastward of a wooded 
promontory terminating in a rocky point. 

Keep close along the coast of this peninsula until almost abreast 
the northwestern end of a small wooded islet, 25 feet high, lying in 
the middle of the channel, when haul a little to the eastward to clear 
a rock, with 15 feet water over it, extending from some rocks, 1 foot 
high, on the western side of the channel. 

With a favorable light the 15-foot rock can be seen, and when 
past it continue toward a small wooded islet, 13 feet high, adjoining a 
point extending from the southern side of the harbor, to clear a rock, 
with 15 feet water over it, lying a little eastward of the middle of 
the harbor. When 200 yards from the islet, turn to the eastward and 
anchor as convenient in 10 fathoms, mud bottom. 

A few houses are situated around the shore of the harbor and some 
extensive ponds lie behind the shore ridge. 

To enter the western bay, round the southern end of the island 
lying abreast of Cumlins cove, and, keeping in mid-channel, steer 
toward Goat island, anchoring southward of it in 17 fathoms. 

The western tickle has several rocks in it, and it should not be 
attempted without local knowledge. The leading mark given in the 


MAN-OF-WAR ROCK—BURNT ISLAND. 463 


plan, the shoulder of a hill in line with the eastern end of Goat island, 
bearing 190°, if identified, leads through a clear channel, about 100 
- yards wide, between the outer shoals in not less than 54 fathoms; 
when distant 500 yards from Goat island, haul to the eastward to 
clear the shoals off the northeastern side of that island. 

Man-of-war rock is a small rocky islet, 12 feet high, and steep-to. 
Eastward about 100 yards from it there is an extensive patch which 
dries at low water. 

Ward island, northeastward, 400 yards from Man-of-war rock, 
is 900 wards long, in a northeasterly and southwesterly direction, 
about + mile wide and 233 feet high. It is almost steep-to, except at. 
its northeastern end, where shoal water of 21 feet connects it with 
Blackberry island. 

Blackberry island, small and 38 feet high, is 150 yards north- 
eastward of Ward island; shoal water extends northeastward 300 
yards from it. 

Shoal.—A patch of 2? fathoms bears 48°, distant 550 yards from 
Blackberry island, and nearly 200 yards offshore. 

Leading or Ladle tickles.—The coast from Cumlins head trends 
roughly north-northeastward 1,7, miles to the Ladle, and thence east- 
ward nearly 2 miles to Wild Bight point; northward of it is a group 
of islands, and Leading or Ladle tickles are the passages between the 
several islands and the mainland. ‘The southern passage is suitable 
for small] vessels only. 

Light.—A circular iron tower, 18 feet high, painted red and white 
in horizontal bands, on the southern headland of the eastern entrance 
to Leading or Lading tickles, exhibits, at 83 feet above high water, 
an intermittent white light, showing thus: Light seven seconds, 
eclipse three seconds; which should be seen from a distance of 10 
miles in clear weather. 

A dwelling and a store, painted white, stand a short distance west- 
ward of them. 

Communication.—The steamer from Burnt bay calls at Leading 
tickles during summer and autumn. 

Burnt island, the northwestern of the islands, is 14 miles long in 
an east-northeasterly and west-southwesterly direction, about + mile 
wide, and 250 feet high; a ridge of rocks extends } mile eastward of it. 

Near the middle of the southern coast of the island is a small 
projection, about 100 feet high, on which is a flagstaff, and a bank, 
with two patches of 3 and 43 fathoms over them, extends southeast- 
ward 350 yards from this point. The southern side of Woody island 
in line with the northern end of Bear head, bearing 64°, leads south- 
ward of these shoals and very close northward of those northward of 
the western part of Cull island. 


464 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


There is anchorage in the channel between Burnt and Cull islands 
in 12 to 15 fathoms water, sand bottom, sheltered except from north- 
easterly winds. 

Thomas Rowsell island, about } mile across, and 121 feet high, 
is separated from the western end of Burnt island by a passage 100 
yards wide, with 4 fathoms water in it, which may be taken by 
keeping close to the coast of Burnt island. The passage between 
Thomas Rowsell island and the western end of Cull island is 300 
yards wide and there are an islet and several shoals in it. 

Cull island is 1,5 miles long in an easterly and westerly direction, 
and about 800 yards in width, except at its eastern part, where it is 
1,200 yards; a wooded ridge, 197 feet high, extends along its western 
part; Bear head, its northeastern end, rises in dark perpendicular 
cliffs to the height of 205 feet. 

A conspicuous wooded projection, 85 feet high, surmounted by a 
flagstaff, is situated in the middle of the southern coast of Cull island, 
separating a small boat cove to the westward, from Mooring cove to 
the eastward. 

Small vessels anchor off Mooring cove, in 13 fathoms water, close 
to the shore, and larger vessels in 18 to 20 fathoms; in fine weather 
small vessels occasionally anchor southward of the channel between 
Cull and Thomas Rowsell islands in 12 fathoms water. 

A bar with 11 feet water over it, extends from the southern end of 
Cull island to the mainland, from which it is distant 65 yards. 

The Ladle, a square rock 28 feet high, stands on a beach of shingle 
on the mainland just eastward of the bar. 

Butler cove, 800 yards eastward of the Ladle, affords anchorage 
for small vessels during fine weather, in 12 fathoms water at 200 
vards from the shore, but the anchorage is unsafe with the heavy 
sea that rolls in during northerly gales. A beach of shingle, 350 
yards long, forms the head, and several houses in the midst of green 
fields surround this cove. 

Alcock island, 400 yards eastward of Cull island, is 1,3; miles 
long, in an east-northeasterly and west-southwesterly direction, about 
4 mile in width, and 326 feet high; it is densely wooded, and appar- 
ently flat, but there are in reality several ranges of hills on it. 

In the channel between Cull and Alcock islands, bearing 247°, dis- 
tant 250 yards from the northwestern point of the western end of 
Alcock island, there is a shoal of 3 fathoms; North Tickle bank, a 
patch with 54 fathoms water over it, bears 324°, distant 650 yards 
from the same point. 

A small projection, 44 feet high, is situated near the middle of the 
southern coast of Alcock island, and is only 150 yards distant from 
the mainland to the southward. The channel between has a depth 
of 54 to 9 fathoms water. 


RED ISLAND—SCULPIN ISLAND. 465 


There is anchorage to the westward of these narrows, in 12 to 17 
fathoms water. 

Red island, 37 feet high, is 200 yards off the southeastern point of 
Alcock island, and some rocks above water le in the channel between. 
Harbor rock, a narrow ridge with 34 to 5 fathoms water over it, 
extends 112°, for 350 yards from the southeastern point of Red 
island. 

Tinker island, small and 80 feet high, hes 200 yards northwest- 
ward of the northern part of Alcock island, and the channel between 
is occupied by shoals and Gunning rock, 9 feet high. 

Woody island, northeastward of Tinker island and separated 
from it by a clear channel nearly 200 yards wide, is about 1,400 yards 
long, in an east-northeasterly and west-southwesterly direction, 100 
to 300 yards wide, and 184 feet high. There are several peaked islets 
and sunken rocks close off the northern coast of Woody island, and 
Snaptail rock, with 3 feet water over it, bears 277°, distant 200 yards 
from its western end. 

Green island, eastward 450 yards from Woody island, is in three 
parts, the middle and highest rising on all sides in dark gray cliff to 
a height of 155 feet, with its summit covered with grass. 

Sunken rocks extend a short distance from this island, and an 
isolated rock, with 2 feet water over it bears 190°, distant 150 yards 
from the small islet lying off its eastern end. Seculpin island, open 
eastward of Green island, bearing 334°, leads eastward of this rock. 

Sculpin island, northward 1,600 yards from Green island and 
the northernmost of this group of islands, is about a quarter of a 
mile long, in a northeasterly and southwesterly direction, 300 yards 
wide and 87 feet high; it is covered with grass. 

Several bare rocks he close to its southeastern coast and form a 
small creek in which landing from boats may be effected, except in 
very heavy weather. <A rock, with 3 feet water on it, lies close to the 
southwestern end of the island. 

A bank extends northeastward 500 yards from the southeastern 
part of Sculpin island, on which, bearing 115°, distant 150 yards 
from the northeastern point of the island, is a rock with 5 feet of 
water over it; and, bearing 81°, distant 265 yards from the same 
point, is a shoal with 3 fathoms over it. 

Northeast rock, bearing 351°, distant 750 yards from the north- 
eastern point of Sculpin island, is a patch with 4 fathoms water 
over it. 

Banks.—Numerous banks lie off the islands forming Leading 
tickles, the positions of which are best seen on the chart. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Leading tickles at 
th. 7m.; springs rise 44 feet, neaps 3 feet. 


76846—09 30 


466 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


Directions.—Large vessels pass between Thomas Rowsell, on the 
north, and Gull and Ward islands, on the south. The southern coast 
of Cull island must not be closed to less than 200 yards, and the 
southeastern end of Cull island, open northward of the end of a pro- 
jection of the mainland southward of Mooring cove, bearing 64°, 
clears the shoals eastward of Blackberry island. Vessels drawing 
more than 11 feet water must not proceed eastward of Mooring cove. 

Small vessels pass over the bar between the southeastern end of 
Cull island and the mainland by keeping in mid-channel. 

Eastward of the Ladle the shores are steep-to at the distance of 
100 yards. When near Red island, keep the Ladle open southward 
of Alcock island, bearing 262°, until Nosworthy point is open north- 
eastward of Red island, bearing 318° which marks clear Harbor rock. 

To pass between Thomas Rowsell and Burnt islands, in 4 fathoms 
of water, keep on the northern side of the channel; when going east- 
ward, before the flagstaff on the projection of the southern coast of 
Burnt island bears 329°, bring the southern side of Woody island in 
line with the northern end of Bear head, bearing 65°, to clear the 
shoals lying off Burnt island, and when the flagstaff bears south- 
ward of 284°, keep in mid-channel. 

To pass between Alcock and Cull islands, keep the summit of 
Green island open northward of Alcock island, bearing about 59°, 
till the eastern fishing stage in Butler cove is in line with the south- 
western end of Alcock island, bearing 138°; this latter mark leads 
clear of the shoals off the western end of Alcock island. 

Wild bight extends southwestward about # mile from between 
Wild Bight point and a point off which are Northwest rocks. It is 
divided at its head, by a projection rising to a conical hill 285 feet 
high, into two coves, where small vessels anchor during westerly 
winds. . . 

Northwest rocks are two rocks, 20 feet high, situated within 
300 yards from the eastern entrance point of Wild bight; shoal 
water extends northward 250 yards from the inner rock. 

New bay is an extensive inlet extending southward from its 
entrance between Northwest rocks and New Bay head, which bear 
northeastward and southwestward, distant 23, miles from each other. 
It is divided into several arms with rocky shores and presents few 
obstacles to navigation. The land near the bay is of moderate eleva- 
tion and, except where recently burnt, densely wooded. 

There are a few scattered settlers in the arms, and in Northwest 
arm and Southwest arm there are timber mills. A large quantity of 
sawn timber is annually shipped, especially from Southwest arm. 

Communication.—The steamer from Burnt bay calls at New bay 
weekly during summer and autumn. 

Northwest arm extends southwestward for about 6 miles from 
the eastern end of the promontory within Northwest rocks. Its north- 


TINKER ISLAND—MILL COVE. 467 


western shore is generally steep-to, but on its southeastern side are 
numerous islets and shoal patches. 

Tinker island, small, rocky, and 54 feet high, hes 400 yards off- 
shore at about 700 yards within the northwestern entrance point of 
Northwest arm; its southwestern end is foul and off the shore abreast 
of it there is a patch of rocks, but there is a good passage about mid- 
way between the island and the shore. 

Lannings cove, a small bight northwestward of Tinker island, 
has some settlers’ buildings and patches of cultivated land near it. 

Long island lies near the middle of Northwest arm south-south- 
westward 1; miles from Tinker island; it is 65 feet high and 
wooded. <A patch of rocks, which dries 1 foot at spring tides, bears 
28°, distant 600 yards from its northern end, and is avoided by keep- 
ing the northwestern shore aboard. 

Budgell harbor, rather more than a mile west-southwestward of 
Long island, is a bight fronted by 2 islands, the largest of which 
is separated from the mainland by a very narrow passage. There is 
some foul ground on the northern side of the harbor, to avoid which 
pass the small wooded island in the entrance close to. 

There is good anchorage in the harbor in about 15 fathoms, but 
the space is very limited. 

An extensive pond hes immediately back of the northwestern shore 
of this harbor, and a stream runs from it into the sea; there is also a 
small stream at the head of the harbor. 

Mussel Bed island is small and densely wooded with spruce. It 
hes 100 yards off the northwestern shore of the bay at nearly 2 miles 
southwestward of Budgell harbor; between this island and the shore 
there is a shallow flat, with some rocks that dry, which continues 
400 yards from the island on a bearing 31°. The southeastern side 
of the island is steep-to. 

Mill cove is a small bight forming the head of Northwest arm. 
Its entrance is divided by an islet lying toward the southern shore. 
There is a good passage northward of this islet in mid-channel, but 
that southward of it is foul. There is good anchorage in the cove 
after passing the islet, which must not be approached nearer than 150 
yards on its western side. 

A steam sawmill stands near the head of the cove, into which an 
extensive pond empties. 

West Hare island is on the southeastern side of Northwest arm 
abreast of Mussel Bed island. Between it and the entrance to Mill 
cove the shore is broken into several coves with off-lying islets, and 
from one of these, at 1,100 yards southwestward of West Hare island, 
a ridge of rocks extends northward 400 yards and to about 400 yards 
from the northwestern shore. 


468 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


The shore northeastward of West Hare island is clear for nearly a 
mile and rises in high, precipitous cliffs; beyond that it is fronted by 
numerous islets and rocks which extend more or less to abreast Long 
island. Gull rock, the southwesternmost and outer of this group, is 
a large bowlder, 2 feet high. 

Passage.—There is a passage eastward of Long island but it is 
advisable to keep on the northwestern shore. 

Besom island, small, flat, 42 feet high, and covered with grass, 
is the outer land of the southeastern side of the entrance to North- 
west arm. ‘There are several rocks between the island and the adja- 
cent shore, and the passage should not be attempted without local 
knowledge. 

Besom cove is entered 800 yards southeastward of Besom island 
and extends southwestward about ;®, mile; the water is 16 to 10 
fathoms deep, but the anchorage space is very limited and the bottom 
is rocky. A patch of foul ground 400 yards in diameter hes close 
northeastward of the western headland. 

Little Northwest arm extends southwestward 1? miles on the 
southeastern side of the peninsula which forms Besom cove, and its 
head is separated from Northwest arm by an isthmus a little more 
than 200 yards across. Here the arm is occupied by a group of islets 
and rocks. 

There is indifferent anchorage in about 25 fathoms just inside the 
narrowest part of the arm, for which the chart is a sufficient guide. 

Little Northwest Arm head, the southern entrance point of 
the arm, is steep, but a rock with 3 feet of water over it les nearly 
200 yards from the head, and there is a rock with 6 feet of water 
over it between this 3 feet rock and the head. 

Ward head, a promontory forming the southeastern side of Ward 
cove, and lying southward 4 mile from Little Northwest Arm head, is 
125 feet high, steep, and clear of shoals; from the northward it shows 
as a detached conical summit under the higher land northwestward 
of it. Ward cove is small, narrow, and generally shallow. 

Beaver Brook cove is a small bight southwestward 4,2; miles from 
Ward head. The shore between is clear, except that shoal water ex- 
tends southward 300 yards from a small islet, 10 feet high, lying 
south-southwestward, nearly 1 mile from Ward head. 

A rock, with a depth of 4 feet over it, les in the middle of*the 
entrance of Beaver Brook cove. 

There is a small water-power sawmill, with a few huts, on the 
northern shore of the cove. 

West arm entrance is between Brimstone head, high, conspicuous, 
and cliffy; and the land northwestward 4 mile from it, and the arm 
extends southwestward for about 3 miles. There isa group of islands 
at 24 miles inside of Brimstone head, and westward of them is a 


’ 


SOUTHWEST ARM. 469 


good clear channel to the basin forming the head of the arm. A 
shoal extends southwestward 150 yards from the islet forming the 
eastern side of the entrance to the basin. This basin is clear of 
shoals, except for 300 yards off its head, into which Western brook 
flows, and except for a shoal which extends 200 yards southwest- 
ward from an islet, 25 feet high, situated 350 yards southward from 
the islet forming the eastern side of the entrance to the basin. 

There is good anchorage in the basin in about 20 fathoms, mud 
bottom, with the islet, 25 feet high, bearing 56°, distant 700 yards. 

There is a water-power sawmill in a small bay eastward of Western 
brook, which has an extensive boom across its mouth, confining logs 
which belong to the mill owners in Southwest arm. 

Southwest arm extends southward from eastward of Brimstone 
head for a distance of about 4 miles. The inner and larger portion 
is less than $ mile in width, and contains some shoals, but the outer 
part is clear except near the shores. 

A large water-power sawmill is situated on the eastern side at 4 
mile from the head of the arm, and here there is a wharf where ves- 
sels of considerable tonnage load. Several houses occupy the fore- 
ground on the western side, and most of them are surrounded by 
patches of cultivated land. 

Passage rocks, some of which are above water and others dry, 
occupy a central position in Southwest arm at about 1-45 miles south- 
southeastward from Brimstone head, while abreast of them and 200 
yards from the eastern shore is an extensive shoal with 3 feet water 
_ over its head. A small, wooded islet, 30 feet high, les southward 
1,100 yards from the northernmost of the Passage rocks, which is 1 
foot high, and at 1,700 yards southward of the islet the ship channel 
is contracted to 150 yards by two shoals. One of these shoals extends 
250 yards from the western shore, and the other, with a depth of 
3 feet over it, lies near the middle of the arm. Southward of these 
the western shore is fairly clear, but some shoals extend 350 yards 
from the eastern side. 

The eastern shore of the arm is low, thickly wooded, and generally 
fronted by shoal water to a distance of nearly 200 yards. 

Directions.—From a position 4 mile eastward of Brimstone head, 
steer to pass 300 yards eastward of the northernmost of the Passage 
rocks, and thence about 190° up the arm. In a favorable light the 
shoal in the middle of the arm can be seen, and should be left about 
100 yards to the eastward; if the hght is not good the shoal should 
be buoyed. 

Anchor as convenient within the shoal in the middle of the arm in 
10 to 12 fathoms. 

The shore of New bay from an islet, 60 feet high, situated close 
to the shore nearly eastward of Brimstone head, trends northward 


470 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


14 miles and thence northeastward 14 miles to a headland 250 yards 
off which is Strong island; it is fairly steep-to. 

Strong island is a densely wooded island rising to a height of 375 
feet, forming the point of separation between the approach to West 
and Southwest arms and South arm, which is the eastern arm in New 
bay. 

This island is conspicuous on southerly bearings, on which the 
northern end appears as a bluff and cliffy face. 

Strong Island sound, southward of Strong island, is a consid- 
erable water space, the entrances to which are on either side of the 
southwestern part of the island; both channels are fairly clear, but 
the western is the better. Just within the western entrance, and 
bearing 243°, distant 350 yards from the southern extremity. of 
Strong island, is a rock 2 feet high, with shoal water extending 100 
yards northward from it; while in the eastern passage a ridge, with 
depths of 4 fathoms over it, extends half way across the channel from 
the island. 

A wooded island, 160 feet high, lies in the middle of the sound at 
650 yards south-southwestward of Strong island. Its western side is 
clear, but at 100 yards off its eastern side there is a rocky patch which 
dries 2 feet. Within this island the sound is divided by a peninsula 
with an island 115 feet high close north-northeastward of it, both of 
which are densely wooded. Eastward of the peninsula a very nar- 
row channel, with a least depth of 44 fathoms in it, gives access to a 
small basin forming the head of the sound. 

There is anchorage on either side of the peninsula in 16 to 19 
fathoms, on the eastern side just after passing the island, 115 feet 
high, and on the western side a little farther in. The channel into 
the basin is only used by small schooners which frequent the locality 
to load pulp and timber. 

There are no settlers in this locality. 

The outer part of the promontory on the southeastern side of the 
sound, abreast the southwestern part of Strong island, is almost an 
island, being nearly separated at high water by a shallow bight ex- 
tending to within a few yards of Tea arm, a bay on its eastern side. 

South arm extends 4 miles southward from a point eastward of 
Strong island. It then turns southwestward for $ mile. Here it 
expands considerably, and thence stretches southward for 3 miles 
farther, gradually narrowing and terminating in a long basin, which 
is nearly cut off at low water by projecting rocky points on either 
side of its entrance. 

The western shore of the arm is bold for about 4 miles inside 
Strong island and then falls to comparatively level land. Here there 
are some settlers and a good deal of cultivated land. On the western 
side of the southern portion of the arm there are also a few settlers, 


SAUNDERS COVE—RITTERS ARM. 471 


and from that locality there is a road across to the eastern side of 
Southwest arm. 

The eastern shore of the arm is broken into several deep coves, 
from one of which there is portage to the bay of Exploits. 

There is sheltered anchorage off Paradise cove, which is situated 

on the western shore at 2% miles within the eastern entrance point 
of Tea arm, in about 15 fathoms, and also off the island extending 
from point Pleasant, about 1 mile farther in on the same shore, in 
about the same depth. Anchorage may also be obtained in other 
parts of the inner arm, but the whole locality is subject to violent 
squalls during strong westerly winds. 
' Saunders cove is a small arm in the southeastern part of South 
arm, but there are several rocks about its entrance and it is unsuitable 
for vessels of any size. A deposit of copper has been worked on the 
shores of this cove. 

Charles arm is a remarkable arm, extending south-southeastward, 
14 miles from the southeastern corner of South arm. The arm at its 
entrance and for $ mile inside is only 100 yards wide; but imme- 
diately above it opens out into a small basin, then contracts again to 
less than 100 yards for a distance of 900 yards, and finally expands 
into a larger basin forming the head of the arm. The depth in the 
channel is about 3 fathoms, but the inner part is, at that depth, too 
narrow and winding except for light-draft vessels. The middle of 
the inner basin affords anchorage. 

East Hare island, 4 mile northward of the eastern entrance 
point of Charles arm, is 1 mile long, in a northerly and southerly 
direction, narrow and wooded; there is a passage for boats and small 
craft between it and the shore, about 150 yards wide. 

A cluster of rocks, 3 feet high, having shoals extending 600 yards 
in a direction 165° from it, lies north-northeastward 500 yards from 
the northern end of the island. 

Between these rocks and Indian point, which hes 1,200 yards north- 
ward from them, is the entrance to Ritters arm, and Indian and Little 
Indian coves. 

Ritters arm, eastward of a promontory of the mainland which 
stretches parallel to and just inside of Kast Hare island, extends 1% 
miles in a south-southeasterly direction, and is the only one of these 
that a vessel can safely enter. There is anchorage in its outer part 
in 13 fathoms. Two small islands lie within 4 mile southeastward of 
Indian point, and, bearing 236°, distant 335 yards from the southern 
point of the northern of these islands there is a rock with 1} fathoms 
over it, and depths of 34 to 5 fathoms between the rock and the island. 
A small island, 25 feet high, lies close northward of the promontory 
forming the western side of the arm, and a shoal on which are some 


472 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


rocks above water, extends northwestward 250 yards from its north- 
ern point. 

To enter the arm approach with the island 25 feet high bearing 
about 126°, pass 300 yards from the rocks 3 feet high, and between 
them and the rock with 12 fathoms water over it, then steer for the 
southern end of the islands southeastward of Indian point, and when 
200 yards distant head about 160° into the arm. The arm should not 
be entered without local knowledge. 

Indian and Little Indian coves lhe northward of Ritters cove 
and eastward of Indian point. Indian cove is the more eastern, and 
from it there is a short portage to a pond, and from that another 
short portage to Exploits bay. 

The shore of the bay from Indian point trends northward for 4 
miles to Southeast Arm point, and there is deep water at the distance 
cof 400 yards from it. There are several small coves, but nearly all 
of them are shoal. 

Southeast arm runs in east-southeastward 1,600 yards on the 
northeastern side of Southeast Arm point and then turns northward 
for about 4 mile; although its area is limited, it is the best anchorage 
in the locality for vessels of any size. A rocky shoal, with 43 feet 
over it, lies in the entrance at 400 yards northward from Southeast 
Arm point; to avoid it keep close to the point. A shoal extends 200 
yards southward from Yates point, the low bluff head on the north- 
ern side of the entrance. Vessels may anchor within Yates point as 
convenient. 

There are a few settlers around this arm, and a road connects it 
with Cuttle cove. 

Cuttle island hes northwestward 335 yards from the northern end 
of the promontory which separates Southeast arm and Cuttle cove. 
The island is 550 yards long northwestward and southeastward, 300 
yards wide, and 140 feet high; a reef on which there is a rock 4 feet 
high, extends northwestward 250 yards from the island, but it is 
otherwise nearly steep-to, and the channels between it and the main- 
Jand are deep and clear. 

Cuttle cove lies southeastward of Cuttle island. A rocky shelf, 
near the outer end of which is a rock that dries 3 feet at low water, 
extends 200 yards off the northeastern side of the cove, to clear which 
keep toward the southwestern shore. This cove is open northwest- 
ward and is not recommended as an anchorage. 

There are several settlers here and some patches of cultivated land. 

Yellow Fox island lies close to the shore northeastward of Cuttle 
island. It is about 200 yards in length and 60 feet high. 

Moores cove lies inside of Yellow Fox island. In it are some 
houses and a wharf, but the cove is very shallow and fit only for 
boats. 


ROWSELL COVE—-WOODY ISLAND. 473 


Communication.—The post-office for the district is at Moores 
cove, and the mail steamer from Burnt island calls weekly. 

Rowsell cove, 950 yards northwestward of Yellow Fox island 
extends eastward 335 yards, and affords good anchorage for Small 
vessels in 12 fathoms or less water, sheltered except from southerly 
and southwesterly winds. A conspicuous wooded conical hill rises 
at the head of the cove. 

Josiah Spencer cove, immediately northwestward of Rowsell 
cove and separated from it by a small headland terminating in a 
hillock, 80 feet high, extends northeastward 300 yards and affords 
anchorage, during offshore winds, for fishing craft in 4 to 7 fathoms 
water. 

The shore of New bay from Josiah Spencer cove trends north- 
northwestward for 1,2, miles to New Bay head, and there is deep 
water at 100 yards off it. 

Silver Buckle island is 550 yards offshore at ;®, mile northwest- 
ward of Josiah Spencer cove; it is 600 yards long in an easterly and 
westerly direction, 200 yards wide, and 155 feet high. The Silver 
Buckle, whence its name, is a mass of quartz near the northwestern 
end of the island. 

Brandies rocks is the name given to a patch of rocky and foul 
ground extending 400 yards in a west-northwesterly and east-south- 
easterly direction and having in the middle an island, 14 feet high, 
which bears 280°, distant 1,300 yards from the northwestern end of 
Silver Buckle island. 

New Bay head, the eastern entrance point of New bay, rises in 
steep cliffs to a height of 270 feet. New Bay rocks, 64 feet high, are 
situated close northward of the head, a channel 40 yards wide, with 
34 fathoms water in it, lying between. Foul ground extends a short 
distance from the head. 

Fleury: bight, the entrance of which is 1 mile eastward from 
New Bay head, extends southeastward about = mile, with a general 
width of 450 yards. There is a village at the head of the bight, where 
a hill rises almost vertically to the height of 435 feet. Abbott cove, 
an indentation on the eastern shore of the bight at 700 yards within 
its eastern head, is encumbered with rocks. 

Fleury bight affords anchorage in 14 to 16 fathoms water, but a 
heavy sea rolls in with northwesterly and northerly winds, and it is 
then untenable, as the holding ground is not good. 

Water can generally be obtained from a stream flowing into the 
western side of the head of the bight. 

Woody island, separated by a narrow channel from the eastern 
entrance head of Woody Island bight, an open bay northeastward of 
Fleury bight, rises steeply to a flat wooded summit, 188 feet high; a 
rock with 10 feet water over it lies close westward of this island. 


474 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. ; 


The coast from Woody island trends east-northeastward about 
800 yards to Bagg head, and thence for 1% miles in a general easterly 
direction to Western head of Fortune harbor. Several patches, with 
9 to 20 fathoms water over them and deeper water around, lie within 
14 miles of the land between New Bay head and Western head of 
Fortune harbor. 

Fortune harbor, a land-locked anchorage, is entered both east- 
ward and westward of Sweeny island. The passage to the eastward 
of the island is only 30 yards wide and has a depth of 12 feet at low 
water. The western entrance is suitable for large vessels; if under 
sail, a commanding breeze is necessary, but the turns are sharp, the 
wind is often baffling in the approach, and the squalls are heavy, 
particularly with westerly winds. 

Western head is a steep bluff, with a rocky pinnacle at the end, 
and bold-to. The land behind it rises in a long bare ridge, wooded 
on the slopes, to a sharp summit, 555 feet high, surmounted by a 
cairn, at 800 yards southwestward of the head. 

Western Head rock, bearing 20°, distant 350 yards from Western 
head, has 12 feet water over it and is the summit of a bank extending 
350 yards in a northwesterly and southeasterly direction, with a width 
of nearly 200 yards. The sea breaks heavily on all of the bank in 
gales, and the passage, 250 yards wide, between it and Western head 
must not then be taken, but in ordinary weather it is navigable. The 
southern fall of the cliffs of Upper Caphn Cove point, open north- 
ward of Gull island, bearing 96°, leads northward; and the eastern 
entrance to Fortune harbor, open eastward of Bellens point, bearing 
184°, leads eastward of the bank. 

Light.—<A white circular iron tower, 18 feet high, on the western 
side of the entrance to Fortune harbor, exhibits at 114 feet above 
high water, a fixed white light, which should be seen from a distance 
of 11 miles in clear weather. 

A white dwelling and store stand a short distance in rear of the 
tower. 

Button island lies southward 200 yards from Sweeny island, and 
it is connected with the western shore of the harbor. 

Northwest arm extends west-northwestward, 2 miles within the 
southeastern point of Button island; its channel is only about 100 
yards in width in places, but small vessels enter it with the plan. 

Southeast arm extends south-southeastward 14 miles within But- 
ton island, and it affords anchorage for large vessels. 

A small cove, with a wharf and several stages in it, is situated on 
the eastern shore of this arm southeastward from Button island, and 
on the rising ground, eastward of the cove, is the white church. 

Directions.—To enter Fortune harbor from the westward, observe 
the clearing marks for Western Head rock, and when the eastern 


WEBBER BIGHT—BAY OF EXPLOITS. 475 


entrance to Fortune harbor is open eastward of Bellens point, bear- 
ing 184°, turn into the channel to Fortune harbor; when rounding 
the western end of Sweeny island, shut in the house with a diamond 
en the door at Davis point, with the northeastern end of Button 
island, bearing 118°, to clear a rock near the southwestern end of 
Sweeny island. 

Steer in mid-channel between Sweeny and Button islands, and be- 
tween Button and Jim Day islands; when past the latter, bring and 
keep the summit of Macarthy island over the western end of Jim 
Day island astern, bearing about 340°, and anchor in 10 to 15 fathoms 
water, with the church bearing 93°, or farther up Southeast arm, 
with the western points of that arm well open, to avoid Tiger rock. 

Ice.—Fortune harbor freezes during December and the ice breaks 
up between May 1 and 15. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Fortune harbor, at 
7h. 14 m.; springs rise 4 feet, neaps 3 feet. 

Webber bight extends south-southeastward ? mile from between 
Snuffy point, the southeastern entrance point of Fortune harbor, and 
Indian Cove point, which lies northeastward, distant + mile. The 
bight is open to northerly and northwesterly winds, which send in a 
very heavy sea, but is clear of shoals, except close to the shore; a 
small settlement is situated around a cove on the eastern side of the 
head. 

Anchorage, with offshore winds, may be obtained in the bight in 
10 to 16 fathoms water, but the holding ground is not good. 

Gull island, northward 400 yards from the outer rock off Indian 
Cove point, is a bare rugged rock, 54 feet high, and bold-to on its 
southern side, but rocks and shoals extend northeastward and east- 
ward 200 yards from it. Bed rock, with 9 feet water over it, bears 
82°, distant + mile from the northern end of Gull island; the sea 
breaks on the rock in heavy weather, and rolls to the shore over a 
shoal of 42 fathoms, lying between Gull island and Indian cove. 

The shore of Notre Dame bay from Indian cove trends eastward 
for 21 miles to Northern head of bay of Exploits; it is broken imto 
several small coves. There are some banks with depths of 13 to 20 
fathoms within 2 miles of this shore. 

Shoal ground, bearing 34°, distant 500 yards from Keogh island, 
which is a small bare rock 17 feet high; there is a shoal with 3% 
fathoms least water over it, on which the sea breaks in heavy weather. 
The cairn on the summit of Exploits Burnt island, open northward of 
Northern head, bearing about 126°, leads northeastward: and the 
cairn on the bare summit of Western head, open northward of Upper 
Caplin Cove point, bearing 253°, leads northward of this bank. 

Bay of Exploits.—Western head of New World island bears 73°, 
distant 10% miles from Northern head, and at 14 miles southward of 


476 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


this line are Exploits Burnt islands and Black islands, leaving three 
channels, 14, 14, and 2 miles wide, respectively, to the southward. 

Bay of Exploits comprises several long arms and bays, in which 
there are numerous islands, lying southwestward and southward of 
Exploits Burnt islands and Black islands. The water in the bay is 
generally deep, and, excepting its eastern part, there are but few 
obstructions to navigation beyond those fringing the shores. The 
western arm extends from Exploits Burnt islands south-southwest- 
ward for 30 miles to the mouth of Exploits river, and it is navigable 
without difficulty as far up as Peter arm, 

The mainland around the bay, and also the numerous islands in it, 
are thickly wooded, except in those parts where large fires have cleared 
the land. The forests in the Exploits valley are very extensive, and 
consist of pine, spruce, fir, larch, birch, and poplar; the soil of the 
valley is fertile, and produces, where cleared, good crops of root, 
potatoes, and hay. 

There are several small settlements in the bay, those of Exploits 
Burnt islands, North harbor, Kite cove, Botwoodville (Peter arm), 
Lewisport (Burnt bay), and Campbellton (Indian arm), being the 
principal ones. 

Tidal streams.—The tidal streams set fairly in and out of the 
deep channels of the bay of Exploits with a rate of about 2 knots at 
springs. 

Fog is frequent but seldom lasts more than a few hours. 

Communication.—The Newfoundland railway passes along the 
shore at the head of the western arm of the bay of Exploits, and 
Lewisport is connected by a branch line, 9 miles in length, from Notre 
Dame junction. Exploits station is close to Norris arm. Westward 
of Norris arm the line leaves the sea and crosses Exploits river by a 
steel bridge, 630 feet long, at Bishop’s falls, 10 miles from the mouth 
of the river and 268! miles from St. John’s. 

A steamer leaves Lewisport twice a week with mails, passengers, 
and cargo. One trip is made westward to Tilt cove, calling at Ex- 
ploits Burnt island, New bay, Leading tickles, Pilley island, Hall bay, 
Little Bay island, Little bay, Green bay, and Nippers harbor; and 
the other trip to Fogo, calling at Botwoodville, Exploits Burnt island, 
Morton harbor, Tizard harbor, and Twillingate (Toulinguet). 

There are telegraph stations at Norris arm, Lewisport, and Twil- 
lingate. 

Ice generally forms in the bay of Exploits early in January; at 
Peter arm and its vicinity it is sometimes a little earher. The first 
vessels from sea arrive in the bay about June 1, and the last leave 
early in December. 

Waldron cove.—The shore of the bay from Northern head trends 
south-southwestward for 1,;%; miles to the head of Waldron cove, and 


SHIP RUN ROCK—-MAD MOLL HEAD. ATT 


thence east-northeastward ? mile to Waldron Cove point. Waldron 
cove affords shelter, to small vessels only, off a small bight on the 
southern side, which has several houses at its head. 

Ship Run rock lies in Ship run, the western entrance to the bay 
of Exploits, and bears 136°, distant 1,600 yards from Northern head; 
the rock is about 200 feet across and there is a depth of 9 feet 
over it and 7 to 14 fathoms close around. In heavy weather the sea 
often breaks on the rock in such a manner that the breakers are 
scarcely distinguishable from the ordinary waves in its vicinity. 

Western ground, a patch with 9 fathoms water over it, hes 200 
yards southward of Ship Run rock, and there are several patches with 
depths of 14 to 20 fathoms over them within 4 mile of the rock. 

The shore of the bay from Waldron Cove point trends south- 
southeastward for nearly 2 miles to Little North harbor. North Har- 
bor Gull island, which is about 350 yards long north-northwestward 
and south-southeastward and 91 feet high, is situated about a mile 
south-southeastward of Waldron Cove point, and is separated from 
the mainland by a narrow channel with a depth of 4 fathoms in it. 

Little North harbor is a bight extending westward 900 yards 
with a width of 350 yards; it atfords anchorage for small vessels near 
its head in 4 to 8 fathoms water. In entering keep the southern shore 
on board to clear the rocks stretching from the northern side nearly 
to mid-channel. 

Exploits Burnt islands are two in number, lying about 14 miles 
eastward of the shore between Waldron Cove point and North Harbor 
head, and together extend about 3? miles northeastward and south- 
westward, with a greatest width of 2 miles; there are two small har- 
bors in the channel between them. Man-of-War-hill, the summit of 
the western island, is 553 feet high and bare, with a large stone cairn 
on it. The western coast of the western island is steep-to at a short 
distance from it, and is indented by two small coves; Surgeon cove, 
the southern, is shallow and has numerous rocks in it; Burton cove, 
about 400 yards to the northward, affords sheltered anchorage for a 
few small craft during easterly winds. There is a road between this 
cove and Upper harbor. 

Mad Moll head is the northeastern point of the western island, 
and Mad Moll rocks, a ledge with 1} to 24 fathoms over its outer 
part, extends north-northwestward, 400 yards from the head. 

Lower harbor, the northwestern part of the channel between the 
islands, affords shelter for small vessels only, in 12 fathoms or less 
water. The entrance is encumbered with rocks and should not be 
attempted without -a pilot. 

Upper harbor, the southeastern part of the channel between ‘the 
islands, affords secure anchorage for small vessels, but a bar on which 
are rocks with 6 to 7 feet water over them, extends from the eastern 


478 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


shore at 300 yards within the entrance, leaving a narrow passage, with 
a depth of 19 feet water, between it and the shoal water in Butt cove, 
the southern bight in the western shore. 

This channel should not be attempted without local knowledge, but 
there is temporary anchorage in the entrance in 9 to 16 fathoms 
water. 

Lower and Upper harbors are connected by a passage 20 yards 
wide, with a depth of 6 feet in it at low water. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Exploits Burnt Island 
harbors at 7h. 17m.; springs rise 44 feet, neaps 24 feet; neaps range 
14 feet. 

Settlement.—There is a large settlement around Exploits Burnt 
Island harbors, and small supplies may be obtained. Water can gen- 
erally be procured from Butt cove. 

Ice.—Exploits Burnt Island harbors generally freeze about Janu- 
ary 1 and are completely blocked with ice between February 1 and 
April 1, but between April 1 and May 20 they are open at intervals. 
Field ice appears between the middle and end of January and dis- 
appears between May 1 and 20, between which dates the first vessel 
generally arrives. The last sailing vessel leaves about December 15. 

Nanny Hole rock, with 9 feet water over it, bears 313°, distant 
200 yards from Nanny Hole head, the northwestern point of the 
eastern island, which is situated eastward 1,400 yards from the en- 
trance of Lower harbor, and is a precipitous bluff rising to a bare 
round hill 340 feet high. 

High Gull island rises in light gray cliffs to a flat summit 122 
feet high, and is situated 4 mile nOreeeeeand of Nanny Hole head 
and iechaectivard of Gull Island bight, a rugged bay with a few 
houses around a cove in its southern part. 

Two rocks are situated northwestward of High Gull island, the 
northern, with 3 feet water over it, being distant 200 yards. 

Sloop run, the passage eastward of the eastern Exploits Burnt 
island and between it and Black island, is 14 miles wide. The follow- 
ing islands lie in the run: 

Fish island, bearing 134°, distant 1,4, miles from Long point, the 
northeastern end of Exploits Burnt islands, is 250 yards long, north- 
ward and southward, 100 yards wide and 44 feet high. Tarpaulin 
island, bearing 102°, distant 900 yards from Fish island, is 300 yards 
long, northeastward and southwestward, nearly 200 yards wide and 
58 feet high. Double islet, consisting of two rocks close together, 
the higher being 51 feet high, bears 162°, distant 400 yards from 
Fish island; bearing 130°, distant 600 yards from this islet is Black 

rock, small ie 12 feet high, and bearing 250°, distant 100 yards 
from Black rock is a shoal, rather over 200 yar a long, north-north- 
eastward and spathisonthnyostertnil the highest part of which covers 


HARE ISLAND—SWAN ISLANDS. 479 


at high water. A patch, with 6 to 8 fathoms water over it, bears 224°, 
distant 4+ mile from this shoal, with depths of 16 to 18 fathoms 
between. 

Sculpin rock, bearing 266°, distant 600 yards from the southern 
end of Fish island, dries 2 feet at low water; and at a distance of 135 
yards southwestward of this rock is Sculpin islet, small and 43 feet 
high. 

Pig island lies southward 200 yards from Sculpin islet and is 350 
yards long, about 100 yards wide, and 71 feet high; a shoal, on which 
is a rock 3 feet high, extends 100 yards southwestward of it. 

Hare island, 200 yards southeastward of Pig island and the 
largest of the group, is nearly + mile across and 197 feet high; there 
are some rocks above water and surrounded by shoals within 200 
yards off its southwestern side, and at 200 yards farther south-south- 
westward is Gillott islet, a rock 38 feet high, with shoal water a short 
distance northward and southward of it. 

Hare rock, bearing 140°, distant 300 yards from the northeastern 
point of Hare island, is about 100 yards across and has a depth of 7 
feet of water over it. 

Matthew Lane island, 1,300 yards south-southeastward of Hare 
island is 1,200 yards long, northeastward and southwestward, with a 
greatest breadth of + mile and a height of 130 feet. There is a small 
boat harbor containing several rocks and sheltered by a rock 50 feet 
high on its southern side. 

At 300 yards southeastward of the entrance of this boat harbor is 
an islet 50 feet high, with a rock 20 feet high, 250 yards west-south- 
westward of it; from this rock shoal water extends southward 100 
yards, and both the islet and rock are surrounded for a short dis- 
tance by a bank with 44 to 9 fathoms water over it, while bearing 
140°, distant 400 yards from the western end of the islet is a rocky 
patch with 5 fathoms least water over it, and 10 to 20 fathoms around. 

There is a rock 7 feet high in the channel between Matthew Lane 
island and the islet 50 feet high, from the eastern end of which it 
bears 358°, distant 200 yards; this channel appears to be otherwise 
clear. 

Duck islands are a group of wooded islets separated by a deep 
channel, 400 yards wide, from the southeastern side of the western 
of the Exploits Burnt islands. Upper Duck island, the westernmost 
of the group, rises in a hillock, 160 feet. These islands inclose a 
bay at their southwestern end, wherein temporary anchorage may be 
obtained in 19 fathoms water, but the holding ground is not good. 

Swan islands are a group of five islands and some rocks lying 
nearly a mile southeastward of Duck islands. Swan island, the 
largest and main island of the group, has an area of about 2 square 
miles; it is 340 feet high, and is densely wooded except at its north- 


480 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


western part, where the land is low, and where, lying south-south- 
westward of the northern Swan island, there is a shallow boat harbor 
having a few houses on its shores. 

Big bay islet, an islet southwestward of Swan island, and some 
rocks connected by shoal water, lie within 800 yards southwestward of 
the southwestern point of Swan island. 

Twisty Ann’s cove, eastward of the southwestern peninsula of 
Swan island, has a few houses on its shores. 

Swan Island harbor is on the southern side of Swan island and 
between it and Little Berry island, which is 60 feet high and wooded. 
The eastern entrance is clear, but a reef extends west-northwestward 
about 200 yards from Little Berry island and narrows the western 
entrance to less than 100 yards. The harbor affords sheltered anchor- 
age in a space about 400 yards in diameter and 15 to 17 fathoms deep. 

Rocks.—A patch of rocks, the highest head of which is 8 feet high, 
lies 265 yards off the southeastern side of Swan island. 

Framptons cove, on the eastern side of the island, has some houses 
on its shores; and on the shore of a small bight, southward of it, are 
the remains of an Indian burial ground. 

Shoals.—An 18-foot patch bears 351°, distant 300 yards from the 
northern end of the northern Swan island. A small rock, 6 feet high, 
with shoal water extending a short distance northward and south- 
ward of it, bears 314°. distant 4 mile from the southwestern point of 
Swan island. 

Hornet island, 600 yards eastward of Swan island, is a mile long 
in an easterly and westerly direction, and 4 mile wide; its surface 
is very uneven, and its highest point attains a height of about 200 
feet. The northern and northwestern sides are generally cliffy. 

A rock, with 12 feet over it, bears 272°, about 400 feet from the 
southwestern point of Hornet island. 

A grassy islet, 20 feet high, lies west-northwestward, 400 yards from 
the northern extremity of Hornet island; at rather over 200 yards in 
a direction 209° from this islet and 200 yards off the northwestern 
side of Hornet island, is a rock which dries 2 feet, with shoal water 
extending southwestward nearly 200 yards from it; and at 200 yards 
in a direction 346° from the northern extremity of Hornet island is a 
patch of rocks, the head of which dries 2 feet. A rock, 5 feet high, 
lies northward, 700 yards from the northern extremity of Hornet 
island; the channel between this rock and the patch of rocks north- 
ward of the island is clear. Bearing 22°, distant 200 yards from the 
rock, 5 feet high, is a rock with 18 feet over it. 

Long rock, bearing 11°, distant 1,800 yards from the northern 
extremity of Hornet island, is 10 feet high, and 600 yards westward 
from Long rock, is a shoal, with heads dry at low water, while from 
this shoal a series of rocky patches extends 1,400 yards to the north- 


LONG ISLAND—-RUDDER ISLAND. 481 


ward. A rocky patch with 4} fathoms over it lies nearly 400 yards 
north-northeastward of Long rock. 

All these shoals are steep-to on their western sides, and are avoided 
by keeping near Swan island. 

Leading mark.—The summit of Upper Duck island in line with 
the summit of North Harbor head, bearing 267°, leads northward of 
these shoals. 

Long island, lying southward of Swan island and Hornet island, 
is 2,5, miles long, northward and southward, about 1 mile broad, 465 
feet high, and densely wooded. It is fairly steep-to, except off its 
northeastern end where shoal water extends eastward 300 yards, and 
there are some rocks and shoals for + mile off its southern end. Two 
rocky islets he 800 yards northwestward of the southern end of the 
island; their western sides are steep-to, but the space southeastward 
of them is foul. An islet, 35 feet high, lies a little over 200 vards 
off a small bight near the middle of the western side of Long island. 

Long island is visited by the inhabitants of the bay for firewood. 

Hornet gut, the channel between Hornet and Long islands, is 
300 yards wide at its western end, but it narrows to 50 yards at its 
eastern end, and it has a least depth of 4 fathoms in its fairway. The 
tidal streams at times set strongly through this passage, which is only 
suitable for very small vessels. 

Shag Cliff islands are a group of small islands lying about a mile 
southeastward from the northeastern end of Long island. 

Indian islands are a group of small islands lying southward of 
Shag Cliff islands. Both Shag Cliff islands and Indian islands have 
remarkable summits and steep cliffs facing eastward. There is no 
anchorage around either of these groups. Between them there is a 
small patch of rocks, awash at high water, and between these rocks 
and the largest of the Shag Cliff islands, but near the island, there is 
a good clear passage. There is also a passage between these rocks and 
Indian islands, but a rocky reef with 12 feet water over it extends 
from one of the smaller islands to near the middle of the channel, 
and therefore the passage northward of the rocks is the better. 

Jock islands lie 1,200 yards eastward from the northern end of 
the largest of the Shag Cliff islands; they are small and covered with 
grass, the larger one being 35 feet high. A small rock, 3 feet high, 
hes 200 yards west-southwestward of the islands. Both rock and 
islands are steep-to, but bearing 276°, distant 350 yards from the 
largest island there is a rock with 2 feet over it at low water, which 
breaks when there is any swell. 

Rudder island, lying 14 miles eastward from the southern end of 
Long island and about 4+ mile southwestward of Indian islands, is 
about 600 yards across and 210 feet high. 


76846—09——31 


482 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


Spruce islands are two islands lying 4 mile south-southeastward 
of Long island. The eastern island is 1,700 yards long, northward and 
southward, 900 vards wide, and 160 feet high; the western island, 
situated 200 yards southwestward of the western part of the eastern 
island, with a depth of 2 fathoms in the channel between, is 600 
yards long, 400 yards wide, and 110 feet high. Foul ground extends 
westward 250 yards from the northern part of the eastern island. 
A rocky patch with 6 fathoms least water over it bears 268°, distant 
600 yards from the northern point of the western island, and bearing 
243°, distant 600 yards from the southeastern point of the western 
island, there is a rocky head with 25 feet over it. 

Ochre Pit island, lying about $ mile westward from the southern 
end of Long island, is 800 yards long, eastward and westward, 500 
yards wide, and 210 feet high. At 600 yards southeastward of Ochre 
Pit island is an islet, 100 feet high; and a shoal, with 15 fathoms 
water over it, bears 110°, distant 300 yards from its northern ex- 
tremity. 

There is a deposit of yellow ochre on Ochre Pit island, which was 
dug by the Indians formerly inhabiting this part of Newfoundland. 

Tinker island, southwestward 600 yards from the rocks off the 
southwestern extremity of Swan island, is 500 yards long, northeast- 
ward and southwestward, nearly 200 yards wide, and 135 feet high. 
There is an islet close to its southeastern side, eastward of which at 
the distance of 100 yards is a rock with 5 feet of water over it. 

Pond island, lying 4 mile southeastward from the islet on the 
southeastern side of Tinker island, is 900 yards long, in a northwest- 
erly and southeasterly direction, 400 yards wide, and 195 feet high; 
it is fairly steep-to. 

Hummock island, southwestward 4 mile from Tinker island, is 
nearly a mile long, in a northeasterly and southwesterly direction, 
about 600 yards wide, and 310 feet high. There is a remarkable 
sugar-loaf hill near its southern end, and on its southeastern side is a 
detached island, 70 feet high. Northwestward 300 yards from the 
southern extremity of the island is a rock, 30 feet high, with a rock, 
69 feet high, close southward of it; these are connected with the 
southern part of the island by a shoal water and foul ground. From 
200 yards southeastward of the rock, 69 feet high, three rocky islets, 
20, 40, and 60 feet high, respectively, and close together, extend 
southeastward 4 mile, and bearing 140°, distant 135 yards from the 
southern extremity of the southeastern one of these islets, there is a 
small rock with 19 feet water over it. 

Upper Black island, south-southwestward 1,2, miles from the 
islets southward of Hummock island, is 2;2; miles long, in a northerly 
and southerly direction, about 1,600 yards wide, and 500 feet high. 


NORTH HARBOR—LITTLE GREGO ISLAND. 4838 


It is densely wooded and is visited in autumn by people from Twill- 
ingate (Toulinguet) and Fogo for firewood. 

Between Upper Black island and Hummock island there is a shelf 
on which the depths are somewhat irregular, and which has on it a 
shoal head of 8 fathoms bearing 228°, distant 600 yards from the 
southeastern of the islets southward of Hummock island; a rock with 
26 feet of water over it bearing 11°, distant 4 mile from the north- 
eastern point of Upper Black island; and a rock with 16 feet of water 
over it bearing 22°, distant 265 yards from the same point. 

A rock with 4 fathoms water over it bears 205°, distant 300 yards 
from the western of the southern extremities of Upper Black island, 
and there is a patch of 5 fathoms lying 450 yards off its southeastern 
coast at mile east-northeastward from the eastern of the southern 
extremities of that coast. 

Tidal streams.—Between Upper Black and Hummock island the 
streams follow the coast of Hummock island and frequently cause 
eddies and rips over the shelf between them. 

The western shore of the bay of Exploits from Little North 
harbor trends southeastward 4 mile to North Harbor head, which is 
steep-to and rises to the height of 430 feet, with a conspicuous stone 
cairn on its summit, and thence south-southwestward, 1,400 yards to 
Dock point, the northern entrance point of North harbor. 

North harbor is a bight extending about 1,400 yards westward 
from its entrance between Dock point and Birchy head, which are 400 
yards apart in a northerly and southerly direction. The water in 
the harbor decreases in depth from 22 fathoms in the entrance to 8 
fathoms near its head. A heavy swell occasionally rolls into the 
outer portion of the harbor, while the space in the inner part is very 
limited; small vessels, however, anchor here in 10 to 11 fathoms. 
There is a small settlement and some cultivated land around the 
harbor. 

Muddy Hole point lies 1,100 vards south-southeastward of Birchy 
head, and there are two small coves between them. The point is low 
and prominent. 

Great Muddy hole, lying 4 mile west-southwestward of Muddy 
hole point, is a narrow bight, extending ? mile to the westward; it 
is well sheltered from the heavy ground swell that rolls up the bay 
during strong northerly winds, but owing to the small depth of 
water, it only affords anchorage to very small craft. 

Little Grego island, lying southward 800 yards from the south- 
ern entrance point of Great Muddy hole and close to the shore, 
is about 300 yards in diameter and 145 feet high. A small rocky 
patch, with 19 feet water over it, bears 198°, distant 400 yards from 


484 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


the southwestern point of the island, and less than 400 yards east- 
ward of this patch the depth is upward of 50 fathoms. 

Baptist cove, southwestward, rather over a mile from Little Grego 
island, is a small inlet only suitable for the small craft which occa- 
sionally visit it for firewood. 

Lawrence harbor.—Lawrence head bears 166°, distant 1,600 
yards from the southern entrance point of Baptist cove, and from 
between them Lawrence harbor extends southwestward 14 miles. A 
projection from the northern sidé of the harbor narrows it to 400 
yards, and within this projection the harbor forms two bights, the 
southwestern of which is obstructed by a patch of rocks, which dries 
2 feet. The northern bight is shallow at its head, but it affords in- 
different anchorage in 18 to 20 fathoms, rock bottom covered with 
mud and sand. There are no settlers here. 

Lawrence head, 210 feet high, is densely wooded and not very 
conspicuous as it 1s backed by higher land. 

High Grego island lies southward 1,700 yards from the southern 
point of Lawrence head, and nearly 4 mile offshore. It is about 4 
mile long northward and southward, 600 yards wide, 309 feet high, 
and the eastern side rises almost vertically, rendering it conspicuous. 
Two small rocks, 6 and 7 feet high, lie 265 yards northeastward of the 
island and 265 yards apart in an easterly and westerly direction. 
There is fair anchorage between the island and the mainland in 12 
fathoms, sand bottom. 

The shore southwestward of High Grego island is fronted by two 
islands connected at low water, and separated from the mainland by 
a narrow and shallow passage. Southwestward $ mile from these 
islands, and lying nearly 200 yards off the south-southwestern end of 
the peninsula of which Lawrence head is the northeastern end, is 
Granfer islet, about 400 yards long, eastward and westward, 100 
vards wide, 75 feet high, and wooded. 

Winter tickle.—At about + mile westward of Granfer islet is an 
islet 90 feet high, situated close off the end of a peninsula of the 
mainland. The entrance to Winter tickle is between these islets, 
and the tickle extends thence northward 1,8; miles. There are sey- 
eral small islets in the tickle, and its shores are fronted by shoal 
water; toward its head the bottom is covered with thick weed. From 
the head of the tickle, a narrow channel, through which the tidal 
streams run with considerable strength, leads into a large salt water 
pond.. There is a winter portage from the northern part of the 
tickle across the land to Indian cove of New bay. 

There is good anchorage in the tickle in 10 to 11 fathoms 600 
yards inside Granfer islet. In entering give the western end of the 
island a berth of 200 vards. 


CHARLES BROOK—GOVERS HARBOR. 485 


The shore between Winter tickle and Charles brook, at 2%; miles 
to the southward, is broken into numerous bights and coves, and 
fronted by small islands and rocks above water, amongst which are 
several shoals. Mouse islet, southward, 900 yards from Granfer 
islet, is 40 feet high; there is a rock of the same height 200 yards 
southwestward of it, and bearing 252° distant 350 yards from this 
rock there is a rocky patch, the highest head of which dries 2 feet. 
Southwestward 1,700 yards from Mouse islet is a rock 12 feet high, 
with a rock 18 feet high rather more than 200 yards westward of it. 

Burnt island, southward 600 yards from the rock, 18 feet high, is 
400 yards long, east-northeastward and west-southwestward 200 yards 
wide, and 130 feet high. It is cliffy and wooded. There is a rock, 
with 7 feet water over it, bearing 7°, distant 200 yards from the 
northeastern point of the island, and bearing 10°, distant 235 yards 
from the western point of the island is a rocky patch with 27 feet 
water over it. A patch of 5 fathoms bears 183°, distant 250 yards 
trom the western point of the island. 

Sunday island, + mile southwestward of Burnt island, is 700 yards 
long, northward and southward, about 200 yards wide, and 70 feet 
high; it is less than 200 yards off the mainland, the channel between 
being shallow and rocky; at 135 yards off the middle of its eastern 
side is a patch with 6 feet water over it. 

It is advisable to keep eastward of Mouse, Burnt, and Sunday 
islands. 

Charles brook is a small stream running into the bay westward 
of the southern end of Sunday island. Anchorage may be obtained 
off it in about 20 fathoms of water, but it is very indifferent and is 
not recommended. 

Govers harbor.—South-southeastward, 1,200 yards from Charles 
brook and close offshore is an islet 30 feet high; Govers harbor is a 
bight of the mainland extending southward, 700 yards from this islet. 
Its entrance is clear, but the space available for anchorage inside is 
very small. Bearing 22°, distant 200 yards from its eastern entrance 
point, is a shoal with 2 fathoms water over it, and within 550 yards 
northward of the northeastern end of the promontory on the eastern 
side of Govers harbor are two rocks, 7 and 6 feet high, surrounded for 
a short distance by shallow water. 

The shore from the northeastern point of the promontory east- 
ward of Govers harbor trends south-southwestward for 14 miles and 
then south-southeastward for 1,300 yards, where an island connected 
with the shore projects northeastward 350 yards. At 300 yards north- 
eastward of this islet is Indian Cove island, small, 50 feet high, and 
wooded. <A shoal, on which are two rocks, 5 feet high, lies within 
300 yards northward of the island. 


486 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


Indian cove is situated northwestward of Indian Cove island; 
shoal water extends a short distance off its shores. Bearing 276°, 
distant + mile from the northern extremity of Indian Cove island is a 
detached patch of rocks, the highest head of which dries 1 foot. The 
cove is quite open northward and the water is rather deep for anchor- 
age, but sometimes large timber-laden sailing vessels outward bound 
use it temporarily. 

The shore from Indian cove trends southward for 24 miles, and 
then turns southwestward for 3 miles to Philip head, a small stony 
projection. This shore is moderately high and shoal water extends 
only a short distance off it. Bay point extends a little from the 
shore line at 1} miles from Indian cove, and 600 yards southward of 
this point is Woody islet, a rock 55 feet high; Grassy islet, a rock 40 
feet high, lies 400 yards farther southward. A rock awash at low 
water bears 220°, distant 265 yards from Woody islet. 

Thwart island.—The northern extremity of Thwart island bears 
120°, distant 1% miles from Granfer islet, and the island extends 
southward 54 miles with a general width of 2 miles, being the largest 
in the bay of Exploits. It is densely wooded, and has no permanent 
inhabitants, but during autumn it is resorted to for firewood, and 
small vessels are occasionally built on its eastern side during winter. 
The channel westward of the island is 14 miles wide, clear and deep, 
but eastward of it there are many small islands with passages between 
them, and a shallow bar connects the southern point of the island to 
the mainland. 

The northwestern coast of the island has four coves. 

Rendells cove, at $ mile from the northern end of the island, is very 
confined, and does not afford any shelter; Hoskins harbor, about 
1,600 yards farther southward, is so occupied with sand, mud, and 
bowlders as to leave little space even for boats. Wild bight, the 
entrance of which is off Hoskins harbor, extends south-southeastward 
about a mile, with a width of 4 mile; it affords anchorage in 9 to 11 
fathoms at 4 mile from its head, but it is open northward, and with 
strong northerly winds it is not a desirable place to be in. The outer 
part of the western side of Wild bight is formed by a narrow penin- 
sula, 1,200 yards in length, westward of which is Cabbage harbor, a 
bight affording anchorage for small vessels only. The coast of the 
island from the southwestern entrance point of Cabbage harbor trends 
southward to its southern end, and there is deep water off it at the 
distance of 200 yards. 

The northeastern coast of Thwart island is broken up into sey- 
eral bays and coves. A rock 8 feet high lies 600 yards eastward from 
its northern point, and bearing 187°, distant 265 yards from this rock 
is a rock that dries 1 foot, while there are two patches with 7 and 4% 
fathoms over them between these rocks and the island. 


a 


LOBSTER ISLAND—ST. JOHNS HARBOR. A487 


Lobster island, bearing 76°, distant 3%, mile from the northern 
extremity of Thwart island, is small and has a height of 20 feet. It 
is covered with grass and is steep-to on its northern and eastern sides, 
but shoal water extends 100 yards southwestward of it. 

Rock.—Bearing 149°, distant 1,665 yards from Lobster island 
and 114°, distant 14 miles from Thwart island, there is a rock with 22 
feet water over it. 

St. Johns harbor.—At 1,5, miles southeastward of the northern 
point of Thwart island is an islet from the southern point of which 
shoal water extends southeastward for 265 yards; and 750 yards 
south-southeastward from this islet is an island 200 feet high, with a 
reef awash at low water, extending 300 yards northward of it. Two 
hundred yards south-southeastward of the island, 200 feet high, is a 
peninsula extending northward from an isthmus situated 1,45 miles 
to the southward. The southeastern end of this peninsula is a re- 
markable wooded conical hill 400 feet high. St. Johns harbor lies 
westward of the island 200 feet high and the peninsula. The northern 
part of the harbor, entered northward of the island 200 feet high, is 
clear of shoals and affords anchorage in about 13 fathoms, mud 
bottom. The southern part of the harbor is separated from the north- 
ern by a bay, over which there is a depth of 4 fathoms. Southward 
of the bar the depth increases to 8 and 9 fathoms, but the space is 
limited. 

The entrance between the island 200 feet high and the peninsula 
has a depth of 4 to 5 fathoms in the middle, but it is narrow and suit- 
able only for small craft. 

Thwart Island harbor is a bight immediately westward of the 
wooded conical hill 400 feet high at the southeastern end of the 
peninsula forming St. Johns harbor. The middle of the harbor has 
a depth of 6 fathoms in it, but its shores are foul and there is little 
clear space. 

The southeastern coast of Thwart island from Thwart Island 
harbor trends southeastward 3 miles to its southern point; depths of 
less than 5 fathoms extend nearly 600 yards off it in places, and a 
rock with 11 feet water over it lies 600 yards off this coast bearing 
224°, distant 1,5 miles from the summit of the island, 210 feet high, 
forming the southwestern entrance head of Thwart harbor. 

The western shore of the bay of Exploits within Philip head 
trends southwestward and rises to the Monkeys Lookout, a conspicu- 
ous hummock, southwestward of which the shore rises to some hills a 
short distance inland. A rocky ledge with general depths of 11 to 
20 fathoms over it extends southeastward for 1,200 yards from Philip 
head, and on this ledge at + mile from the head is a patch with 54 
fathoms least water over it. 


488 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


Northern arm is a bight about 14 miles deep and one mile wide, 
situated nearly 5 miles southwestward of Philip head. Muddy Hole 
brook falls into its western part. Shoal water extends from 300 to 
600 vards off the shores of the arm, and a rocky spit, with 3 feet least 
water over it, runs northeastward into the arm from Evans point, the 
northern entrance point of Muddy Hole brook. The depth of water 
in the arm is otherwise from 10 to 6 fathoms, but its head is shoal. 

The shore from Northern Arm point, the southern entrance point 
of the arm, trends southeastward for 1 mile to Mill point and is 
occupied by cottages and patches of cultivation. 

Killick island lies 300 yards offshore on the edge of a shallow 
flat extending off the land between Northern arm and Mill points. 
It is small and 35 feet high, but it shows well, as the dark spruce 
trees with which it is covered contrast strongly with the cleared and 
burnt land southwestward of it. 

Shoal.—aA shoal patch, with 54 fathoms water over it, lies in the 
middle of the channel, bearing 84°, distant 1 200 yards from Killick 
island. 

Mill point is low and sloping and there are some houses on it. 

Peter arm, a bight lying southwestward of Mill point, is about 
13 miles deep with a breadth of 1,400 yards; the depth of water in 
it is from 15 to 5 fathoms, but within 1,600 yards of its head there is 
a flat, the inner part of which dries at low water. A small stream 
which runs into the head of the arm is dammed a few miles above 
its mouth for the purpose of driving logs cut during winter in the 
surrounding forests, and a large boom for confining them occupies 
the southern part of the head of the arm. There are numerous 
houses around the shores of the arm, and:a road, following the shore, 
connects Northern and Peter arms. 

At 600 yards southwestward of Mill point is a sawmill, the build- 
ings and chimney of which are conspicuous. 

Wharves.—Near the mill there are two wharves, the southwestern 
one being used by large vessels, while the other is small and used 
chiefly by schooners and craft engaged in the local trade. The depth 
alongside the southwestern wharf is 15 to 22 feet, but the ground 
slopes off steeply and at a few yards from the wharf the water is 
much deeper. 

Anchorage.—The best ane age is a little south-southeastward 
of the southwestern wharf in about 15 fathoms, mud bottom. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Peter arm at 7 h. 
25 m.; springs rise 44 feet, neaps 2? feet; neaps range 14 feet. 

Botwoodville, the settlement around Peter arm, has a population 
of 400 to 500 persons, the male members of which are employed in 
the sawmill worked by the Exploits Lumber Company. 


WIGWAM POINT. 489 


The lumber company obtains its timber from extensive forests 
in the valley of Exploits river, and the logs are driven down the 
larger streams into the bay, whence they are towed to the sawmill. 
The principal wood exported to Europe is pine deals, but a large 
trade is done with St. Johns and other local ports in such building 
lumber as boards, palings, and scantlings. About three large sail- 
ing vessels and the same number of steam vessels load here annually 
for London. 

Supplies.—There are two stores where general supplies may be 
obtained in small quantities, but the supply of fresh provisions can 
not be relied on. 

Communication.—Frequent communication is kept up with Nor- 
ris arm, 4 miles up the bay, where there is a station on the Newfound- 
land railway, by a small steamer belonging to the lumber company. 
The mail steamer from Lewisport calls at Botwoodville wharf twice 
a week, once when bound westward and again when returning. The 
nearest telegraph station is at Norris arm. 

All-in-the-way islet, lying 1,600 yards eastward from Mill point, 
is small, 50 feet high, lightly wooded, and somewhat conspicuous. 
Shoal water extends northward 300 yards from the islet, and a long 
chain of detached shoals reaches 14 miles southward from it to Right- 
in-the-road, a similar islet, 35 feet high, from which shoal water 
extends to the eastern shore. 

The western shore of the bay of Exploits from Little Peter point, 
the southern entrance point of Peter arm, trends south-southeastward 
for 2 miles to Wigwam point. At 1,400, yards south-southeastward 
from Little Peter point there is an old wharf and the site of a sawmill, 
which has been destroyed by fire, with some patches of grassy land 
around it. 

Wigwam point, the northern entrance point of Exploits river, 
1S conspicuous. 

The eastern shore of the channel from the entrance of Burnt 
arm trends southward 2 miles to Gills point, a small projection; it 
then curves south-southeastward for nearly 2 miles to High point. 

The channel above Peter arm is obstructed by large shallow 
banks of mud and sand with occasional patches of rock. Vessels of 
any size, therefore, can not go much beyond the anchorage at 
Peter arm. 

From Wigwam point a long tongue of sand and mud extends 
northward 14 miles and occupies the middle of the water area; on it 
at 1,200 yards from its northern end is a patch of rocks that dries 
6 feet. 

A channel along the eastern shore leads to High point from the 
deeper water of Peter arm and carries a least depth of 2+ fathoms 


490 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


to within } mile of the point, whence a bar, with 14 to 2 fathoms 
over it, extends to the point. This channel passes close westward of 
Right-in-the-way islet, and along the eastern shore to the bar. 

Exploits river entrance, 1 mile in width, is southward of Wig- 
wam point, whence a flat with less than 1 fathom of water over it, 
and with several patches dry at low water, extends to the southern 
shore. Southwestward of the flat the river channel has depths up 
to 15 feet for upward of 2 miles. 

The river is navigable, at high water, for vessels drawing 6 feet, 
to the first rapids, at 6 miles above the entrance, and, for boats, to the 
falls, about 2 miles farther. Small boats are sometimes hauled over 
the falls to reach the stream above, where a good deal of lumbering is 
carried on. 

Norris arm.—The entrance to this arm is between High point and 
the shore southward of it. and the arm extends northeastward for 
about 4 miles with an average width of 4 mile. It is approached 
over the bar northwestward of High point, and carries depths of 14 
to 2 fathoms to within 14 miles of its head, which is encumbered by 
shallow flats and patches of stones. A small stream runs in here, 
and there are some others on both shores, the largest being Eel brook, 
on the southern shore, at 1 mile from the head. On a shght projec- 
tion of the southern shore, southeastward of High point, is a sawmill 
and plant of the lumber company, with a small wharf off it which 
has a depth of 9 feet at its head at low water. 

Burnt arm extends northeastward 1,8, miles with a width of 600 to 
1,200 yards; its entrance lies northeastward 1,3; miles from All-in- 
the-way islet. There is a depth of 3 to 4 fathoms in the inner part 
of the arm, which is approached by a channel with 4 to 6 fathoms 
in its fairway, but the entrance is almost blocked with shoals having 
2 to 24 fathoms over them, and a detached shoal with 2 fathoms of 
water over it hes 600 yards outside the entrance. 

The coast of the promontory, which has Burnt arm on its south- 
‘astern side, trends westward for 1,400 yards from the entrance 
point of the arm, and then turns northward for 24 miles to Lower 
Sandy point. Except near the arm, this coast is steep-to at the dis- 
tance of 200 yards up to within 4 mile from Lower Sandy point, off 
which part the depth of 5 fathoms is distant 400 yards in places. 

Kite cove, a bight about 1,600 yards eastward of Lower Sandy 
point, is 1,200 yards wide and extends southward for 1,400 yards, 
with a depth of water decreasing from 10 fathoms in its entrance to 
5 fathoms at 350 yards from its head. 

The settlement of Lawrencetown is on its shores. 

The southern shore of the western arm from Kite cove trends 
northeastward for 4 miles to the point which forms the southern 
entrance of Southern passage, and which has Gillet islet, 90 feet 


ST. JOHNS BAY—JAMES ISLAND. 491 


high, lying 300 yards to the westward. Shoal water extends about 
300 yards off this shore in places, and there is a patch with 5 fathoms 
of water over it at 600 yards offshore and bearing 77°, distant 14 
miles from Lower Sandy point. 

Southern passage, between the southern end of Thwart island 
and the mainland to the southward, is 1,200 yards wide, but it is 
obstructed by shoals extending from both sides, and by a patch, with 
2 to 3 fathoms water over it, lying in the fairway, and leaving only 
two narrow channels having depths of 44 and 54 fathoms. 

Tidal streams.—Usually in Southern passage the flood stream 
sets west-southwestward and the ebb east-northeastward, but their 
directions and rates depend much on the wind. With strong north- 
erly to easterly winds the rate of the west-going stream increases, and 
at springs reaches 2 knots; also, at many times, it overcomes the east- 
going stream and continues westward for many hours. With strong 
westerly winds the reverse is the case. 

_ The southern shore eastward of the Southern passage trends 
east-southeastward for 3 miles to the western entrance point of Mi- 
lord arm; included in this stretch is Browns arm, a shallow bight. 
Bearing 312°, distant 700 yards from the western entrance point of 
Browns arm, is a patch with 27 feet of water over it, and bearing 50°, 
1,% miles from the same point and 400 yards offshore, is an islet 100 
feet high. Shoal water extends from 200 to 700 yards off this shore. 

St. Johns bay lies eastward of Thwart island; it contains several 
small islands with passages between them, the navigation of which 
requires local knowledge. 

Islets.—An islet 20 feet high bears 233°, distant 550 yards from 
the southeastern point of the islet, 210 feet high on western side of 
the approach to Thwart Island harbor, and an islet 55 feet high 
bears 203°, + mile from the same point. From a point 4 mile east- 
southeastward from the southern poimt of the western approach to 
Thwart Island harbor, three islets extend south-southeastward 1,200 
yards; these islets are 75, 80, and 100 feet high, respectively; there 
is foul ground between them, and a rock with 7 feet water over 
it lies 100 yards north-northwestward of the northern islet, while 
there are depths of 27 to 30 feet at 600 yards westward of the southern 
islet. 

Frying Pan island, southeastward of the conical hill 400 feet 
high, situated eastward of St. Johns harbor, with a clear passage 300 
yards wide between, is 700 yards long, northward and southward, 100 
yards to 400 yards wide, and 240 feet high; its coasts are steep-to. 
A small islet, 83 feet high, lies 200 yards east-southeastward of its 
summit. 

James island, 400 yards northeastward of Frying Pan island, 
is 400 yards long, northward and southward, less than 200 yards 


492 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


wide, and 80 feet high. Foul ground extends westward 250 yards 
from it and 100 yards southeastward. A rocky ledge with 34 to 44 
fathoms of water over it extends northeastward from the northern 
end of the island, and it terminates, at 400 yards from the island, in 
a rock with 13 feet water over it. Bearing 126°, distant 400 yards 
from the southeastern end of the island, is a narrow shoal, extending 
200 yards northward and southward, and having 2 fathoms of water 
over it. 

These islands and islets are for the most part wooded. 

Rock.—Bearing 34°, distant 1,400 yards from the northern end of 
James island and nearly in the middle of St. Johns bay, is a rock 
with 3 feet of water over it; this rock is almost steep-to, and ap- 
proach to it is not indicated by the lead. 

Leading mark.—The summit of the wooded ridge 430 feet high, 
westward of High Grego island, open northeastward of Lobster 
island, bearing 318°, leads northeastward of this rock. 

Milord arm, in the southern part of the bay, is about } mile wide 
and extends 1,600 yards to the southward; the depths in it gradually 
decrease from 10 fathoms at its entrance to its head, which is shoal. 
Two islets, each 25 feet high, lie about 200 vards off its eastern en- 
trance point and bearing 22°, distant 500 yards from the northeastern 
of these islets, there is a patch of 4 fathoms. 

Scissors cove, eastward of Milord arm, is the southeastern part of 
the bay. An inlet, in the mouth of which is a rock 20 feet high, ex- 
tends south-southwestward and south-southeastward 1 mile from the 
cove, and it might afford shelter to boats. 

The eastern shore from Scissors cove trends northward for 4$ 
miles to a bluff, which is the eastern entrance point of St. Johns bay. 
At 2 miles northward from Scissors cove is Foulke cove, which ex- 
tends 800 yards to the northeastward and is shallow. Bearing 311°, 
distant ;°; mile from the northwestern entrance point of Foulke cove 
and nearly 600 yards offshore, there is a patch of rocks, the summit 
of which is 5 feet high. 

Sailor island lies 300 yards offshore and bears 325°, distant 1,3, 
miles from the northern entrance point of Foulke cove. This island 
is 450 yards long northward and southward, 65 yards wide, 80 feet 
high, and partly wooded. It is steep-to at the distance of 50 yards. 

Southern head.—The bluff forming the eastern entrance point of 
St. Johns bay is cliffy and rises almost vertically from the sea to the 
height of 360 feet; it is densely wooded. The land from the bluff 
trends northeastward and slopes gradually for } mile to Southern, 
head. There are some banks with 14 to 20 fathoms water over them 
within about 14 miles eastward of the head, which cause occasional 
tide rips during spring tides. 


BIRCHY ISLAND—SIVIER ISLAND. 493 


Little Burnt bay lies between Southern Head peninsula on the 
west and a long narrow peninsula, off which is Birchy island, on the 
east. On the western side of the bay are some coves with a few cot- 
tages, inhabited by settlers, and there is a little cultivated laud around 
them. 

The southwestern part of the bay, and also its head, are shoal and 
encumbered by rocks. 

There is anchorage in the bay in 16 to 18 fathoms water at about 
800 yards southeastward of Big island, which is 70 feet high and 
conspicuous, but with strong northerly winds it is not safe. 

Birchy island is separated from the mainland by Shoal tickle, a 
passage about 200 yards wide, and only deep enough for boats. The 
island is about 2 miles in length on its western side, and it has a 
greatest width of ;% mile; it is 410 feet high, densely wooded, and 
inhabited only on its southeastern side, where Birchy Island tickle 
separates 1t from Sivier island. 

A ledge with 3 fathoms water over it extends northward 200 yards 
from the northern end of Birchy island. 

The passage between Spruce and Birchy islands is # mile wide and 
deep, excepting this ledge and the rock southwestward of Spruce 
islands (p. 482), and it is used by the local steamers proceeding 
to and from Lewisport. 

Tidal streams.—The tidal streams between Southern head and 
Spruce islands follow the directions of the channels, the main flood 
stream between Spruce and Birchy islands setting westward. 

Passage island lies 300 yards off the northeastern coast of Birchy 
island; it is nearly 400 yards long east-northeastward and .west-south- 
westward, 200 yards wide, 90 feet high, and steep-to, except on its 
southeastern side where there is a rock with 18 feet of water over it 
at the distance of 150 yards. 

Birchy Island tickle is 300 yards in width at its narrowest part, 
which is abreast a shingle spit extending from its northwestern side, 
and there is a depth of 15 feet in the fairway of a tortuous channel 
through it. It is, however, used only by small coasting vessels. 

Sivier island is of remarkable shape, is densely wooded, and rises 
to a conical summit 410 feet high. It is nearly divided into two parts 
by Eastern and Western harbors, which on their respective sides cut 
deeply into the island, leaving a neck 500 feet across. 

Eastern harbor is shoal and it can only be used by small craft; 
there are a few houses on its shores. Western harbor is also shoal 
and its entrance obstructed by a ridge of rocks across it. 

The northern side of Sivier island is fronted by three small islands 
and two rocks which dry. At 200 yards northward of the eastern 
rock there is a shoal with 9 feet water over it. 


494 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


Camel island, 1,500 yards northward of Sivier island, is thickly 
wooded, cliffy, and rises to a hill, the hump, 350 feet high, near its 
middle. Close off its southern end there is a small rock 10 feet high, 
with another 5 feet high at 500 yards westward of it. This rock of 
5 feet in height is steep, and there is a safe passage between it and 
Camel island. 

Camel Island passage, between the rock 5 feet high and the 
shoals off Sivier island, is used by the local steamers proceeding to 
and from Lewisport. Between the islet off Camel island and the 
shoal with 9 feet water over it off Sivier island, the passage is 
nearly 800 yards wide, but in the middle there is some foul ground 
with a least depth of 5 fathoms of water over it. 

Leading mark.—The whole of Steering island open eastward of 
the eastern end of Sivier island leads through this channel in deep 
water. 

Tinker island, 1,600 yards westward of Camel island, -is small 
and round; it is quite steep-to and forms a good guide when using 
Camel Island passage. 

The shore of the bay of Exploits from Shoal tickle trends south- 
ward for 4$ miles to the western entrance point of Burnt bay; it 
is low, densely wooded, and there are several shallow coves in it, 
at each of which there are a few houses. This shore is generally 
foul to the distance of 300 yards, beyond which the water quickly 
deepens to over 20 fathoms; but a small bank, with 27 feet least 
water over it, hes off its northern part, bearing 244°, distant 1 mile 
from the southwestern point of Sivier island. 

Anchorages.—There is anchorage off the western entrance to 
Birchy Island tickle in 15 fathoms water, well sheltered from west- 
erly winds, which are strong in autumn. | 

Bearing 244°, distant + mile from the southwestern point of Sivier 
island, is a bank of gravel and mud on which there is good anchor- 
age in 12 to 15 fathoms. The points of Birchy Island tickle just 
closed lead over the bank, which is surrounded by much deeper 
water. 

St. Michaels island, on the eastern side of the entrance to Burnt 
bay, lying eastward, distant 1,300 yards from the western entrance 
point of the bay, is 1,200 yards long northeastward and southwest- 
ward, with a greatest width of 500 yards; it is wooded, and rises to 
the height of 220 feet near its southwestern end. This island is the 
southwesternmost and largest of a group. 

Light.—A white open framework, on the summit of St. Michaels 
island, exhibits a fixed white lantern light during the season of 
navigation, or from about May 20 to January 1. 

Burnt bay, more generally known as Lewisport harbor, extends 
southwestward nearly 5 miles within St. Michaels island. 


SEAL ROCKS—SHOAL POINT. 495 


Cat, Freak, Rice, and Mussel islands are a group of small 
wooded islands extending northeastward and southwestward 1 mile 
and lying off the western side of the bay. Cat island, the north- 
easternmost of the group, bears 211°, distant 1,650 yards from 
St. Michaels island. Cat and Freak islands are steep-to on their 
eastern sides, but at 200 yards southward of Rice island the south- 
westernmost island of the group, is a rock with 18 feet water over it. 

Clearing mark.—The bluff forming the southeastern side of the 
entrance to St. Michaels harbor just open eastward of Freak island, 
bearing 37°, leads southeastward of this rock. 

Flat.—The space between Freak and Rice islands and extending 
to the shore within Mussel island is occupied by a shoal fiat, part of 
which dries at low water. 

Seal rocks, a patch of rocks 250 yards long, east-northeastward 
and west-southwestward, and 150 yards wide, he in the fairway of 
Burnt bay, bearing 104°, distant 450 yards from Cat island. The 
western rock is 1 foot high and bold-to on its western side. The 
passage westward of these rocks is generally used, as it is well marked 
by Cat island, but there is a good passage eastward of them. 

Rocks.—A patch of rocks, the highest of which is awash at high 
water, lies 400 yards off the southeastern shore of the bay, bearing 
140°, distant $ mile from the eastern point of Freak island. 

Shoal point, on the eastern side of the bay at 14 miles within Rice 
island, is a low projection, and a ridge of stones extends 200 yards 
northward from it. Foul ground also extends 200 yards westward 
from the point, and around the point at distances of 400 to 500 
yards there are some heads with 34 to 5 fathoms of water over them. 

Shallow water extends about 400 yards from both sides of the bay 
above Shoal point, and meets the flats which reach 1.400 yards from 
its head. 

Anchorage.—The depth of water in the bay is moderate and 
anchorage can be obtained anywhere above Rice island. Off the 
wharves at Lewisport and a little southeastward of them there is 
good anchorage in 9 to 11 fathoms, mud bottom. 

Settlements.—The village of Lewisport is on the western shore 
of the bay westward and southwestward of Shoal point; it has a 
post-office, custom-house, hotel, and two stores. The population in 
1904 was about 500, and the value of the timber exported in 1903 
was $242,500. On the eastern side of the bay, near its head, there 
is a small settlement called South Side. It is connected with Lewis- 
port by a fairly good road which crosses the stream at the head of 
the arm by a wooden bridge. 

Communication.—See page 476. 

Wharves.—The railway wharf at Lewisport has 534 to + fathoms 
alongside it and across its head; it is situated in front of the station. 


496 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


A little northward of it is a large wharf belonging to the Timber 
Company, which is engaged in working the Jand around Red Indian 
pond. <A branch line runs from near Winter station, on the New- 
foundland Northern and Western Railway, to Millertown, about 20 
miles to the westward, where are their headquarters. At the Timber 
Company’s wharf several large vessels are loaded annually with 
sawed timber for European and other ports. 

Supplies can be obtained, and Cape Breton coal can generally be 
purchased from the railway authorities. 

Ice.—The bay usually freezes about January 15 and it opens about 
the end of April. The coastal steamer runs from about May 1 to 
January 10. 

Tides and tidal streams.—It is high water full and change, at 
Lewisport at 7h. 30m.; springs rise 4 feet, neaps 3 feet. The tidal 
streams run fairly in and out of the bay, with an appreciable rate at 
spring tides in the narrow places, but they are scarcely noticeable at 
other times. 

St. Michaels harbor, southeastward of St. Michaels island, is a 
little bight, suitable only for small craft. On its shores are a few 
houses and some cultivated land. 

The shore from St. Michaels harbor trends northeastward for 2 
miles and then turns eastward for 14 miles to the western entrance 
point of Indian arm. 

Jobs island is a small wooded island, 20 feet high, lying half a 
mile offshore at about 1,700 yards north-northwestward of St. 
Michaels island. A reef with 1 to 2 fathoms of water over it extends 
southward 600 yards from it, and two reefs, each with 4 feet of 
water over it, bear, respectively, 12°, distant $ mile, and 62°, distant 
400 yards from the island. 

Mussel Bed rocks lie 14 miles east-northeastward of Jobs island. 
The largest of them is 5 feet high. These rocks are steep-to at a dis- 
tance of 100 yards. Between Mussel Bed rocks and Berry island 
there is a similar cluster, 6 feet high, lying 500 yards from the shore, 
which is here fronted by a number of rocky patches which dry. 

Duck and Berry islands lie off the western entrance point of 
Indian arm. Duck island is 26 feet high and covered with grass, and 
Berry island is wooded. The northern side of Duck island must not 
be closed nearer than 200 yards, and the shore southward of Berry 
island, being very foul, must be given a berth of 600 yards. 

Indian arm.—Indian head, the eastern entrance point of this arm, 
lies about 2,4, miles east-northeastward of its western entrance point, 
and the arm extends about 2 miles to the southward. In it the water 
is of moderate depth, and, excepting a rocky patch, with 3 fathoms 
of water over it, bearing 110°, distant 700 yards from the southern 


STEERING ISLAND—CHAPEL HEAD. 497 


end of a wooded island near Campbellton mill, there are no shoals 
beyond 400 yards from its shores. 

Indian head in line with the eastern end of Steering island leads 
clear of the 3 fathoms patch. . 

The eastern and southeastern shores of the arm are low and backed 
by wooded ridges. 

Steering island is a small round islet, 40 feet high, lying + mile 
off the shore southward of Indian head; it is steep-to, covered with 
grass, and conspicuous. 

Anchorage.—Avoiding the rocky patch, there is anchorage in 7 
to 13 fathoms, sand and mud bottom. ; 

Campbellton settlement, on the western shore of Indian arm, is . 
supported by the timber industry. It has a large steam sawmill, and 
near it there is a wharf where vessels, up to 100 tons, can load. 

The river at the head of the arm runs out of an extensive series of 

ponds commencing about 4 mile from the sea; here there is a dam to 
hold the water required for driving out the logs cut in the densely 
wooded country around the ponds, and at the mouth of the river 
there is an extensive timber boom. 
_ Indian head is foul for a distance of 400 vards. Between it and 
Long point, at about 1% miles to the north-northwestward, is a bay 
extending nearly a mile to the eastward, in which there is anchorage 
during easterly winds. The head of this bay is only + mile from 
Loon bay. 

Long point, a projection separated from the shore at high water, 
is 5 feet high, and prominent only from the large bowlders at its end. 

Chapel cove, between Long point and Chapel head, is about a 
mile across at its entrance; the cove is foul and off it there are several 
rocks which dry. The shores of the cove are low and wooded. 

Chapel head is a conspicuous bluff headland: at 400 yards west- 
ward of it there is a shoal patch with 4 fathoms water. The chan- 
nel between the head and Camel island is 1,%; miles wide. 

The shore of the bay of Exploits northward of Chapel head is 
chffy and irregular for 3 miles to Net Cove head, a wooded projec- 
tion, which, with a similar but higher bluff immediately northward 
of it, is conspicuous. 

Duck island, $ mile off this shore, is small and grassy, and 200 
yards south-southeastward of it is a rock which dries 3 feet, while 
between the island and the land there are some rocks, which dry, sur- 
rounded by shoals. The western side of the island must not be closed 
to less than 200 yards. 

Two very conspicuous hills rise steeply from the comparatively 
level and thickly wooded country eastward of Duck island. 


76846—09——32 


498 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


Rock.— At 400 yards west-southwestward of Net Cove head there 
is a small rock with 13 feet water over it, and deep water around. 
Chapel head open westward of Duck island leads westward of this 
rock. 

Comfort head.—The higher of the bluffs northward of Net Cove 
head forms the western side of a small bay, the eastern side of which 
is Comfort head, a steep wooded bluff. Off the head is Comfort 
island, steep and densely wooded, and there is a clear passage between 
them, the deepest water being near.the head. 

Knight island is 1,600 yards northward of Camel island, and 
between them there are two small wooded islets and some rocks which 
dry. There is a good passage between the southern of these islets and 
Camel island; a shoal with 3 feet water over it off the northern end 
of Camel island must be avoided by keeping toward the islet. 

Knight island is thickly wooded and rises, near its northern end, 
to the height of 280 feet. Its western side is steep-to, but near the 
middle of its eastern side and 400 yards off, there is a shoal with 10 
feet water over it. 

A small shallow harbor is situated on the western side of the 
island, and there is another at its northern end; both are frequented 
by lobster fishermen during summer. 

Yellow Fox island lies 1} miles northeastward from Knight 
island, and between them there are several small islets and rocks. 
Squire islet, nearly midway and the largest of these islets, is wooded 
except at its northern end, which is bare. There are clear passages 
on either side of Yellow Fox island, but the passage between Knight 
island and the islet southward of Squire is foul. Reefs extend south- 
southeastward and west-southwestward of Yellow Fox island; the 
southern side of the island must not be approached within a small 
wooded islet about 600 yards off it, or the western side within the 
same distance. 

Sansom islands, lying about 1 mile north-northwestward of 
Yellow Fox island, consist of two large islands separated by a channel 
with an average width of 400 yards, and several small ones. The 
islands are of moderate height and densely wooded. Sugarloaf islet, 
the southernmost of the group, is 214 feet high, and its western side 
is steep and cliffy; there is a deep clear passage between it and the 
large island to the northward. 

The eastern and southwestern sides of this large island are steep- 
to, but there are some shoal patches off its northeastern and western 
sides. There many rocks northward of the group and this locality 
should not be used for navigation. 

Sansom tickle, the channel between the larger islands, has an 
average width of 400 yards: a patch of rocks, the highest of which is 
10 feet high. occupies the western end, but there is a clear passage 


BLACK ISLAND—COMFORT COVE. 499 


_ on either side of it, the southern being the better. Vessels sometimes 
anchor in this vicinity, generally off the southern village, but it is not 
a desirable place except in very fine weather; a shallow ledge of rocks 
extending from a small islet off the southern shore must be avoided. 
On the shores of the tickle there are many fishermen’s houses, and at 
the northern village is a post-office, from which weekly communica- 
tion is made with Exploits harbor. 

Tides and tidal streams.—It is high water, full and change, at 
Sansom tickle at 12h. 20m.; springs rise 43 feet, neaps 3 feet. The 
flood is the west-going stream, and the ebb the east-going, through the 
tickle; the stream going with the wind has some strength at springs 
during strong easterly or westerly winds. 

Little Black island, about 11 miles north-northwestward of the 
northern large Sansom island, is 1 mile long in a northeasterly 
and southwesterly direction, and about 800 yards wide; near its 
northeastern end is a flat wooded hill 248 feet high. On the south- 
eastern side of the island is Southern harbor, a shallow and open 
cove, in the entrance to which is a small black islet 20 feet high, and 
200 yards northeastward of this islet is a rock with 15 feet water 
over it. 

Black island, close northwestward of Little Black island and 
separated from it by Black Island tickle, is 14 miles long north- 
northeastward and south-southwestward, 1 mile wide, and 412 feet 
high. It presents a generally flat appearance, and on its western 
side, separated by a point close off which is Hamilton islet, a rock 
27 feet high, there are two coves. 

- Sealing cove, the northern, is clear of shoals and affords anchorage 
for small vessels during easterly winds in 44 to 12 fathoms water; 
Parsons cove, the southern, is only suitable for boats. 

Kiar cove, at the northern end of the island, is narrow and nearly 
filled with rocks. 

Beacon.—A large wooden beacon stands on the summit of Black 
island, and indicates the locality of a pilot station. 

Black Island tickle, the passage between Little Black and Black 
islands, is narrow and there are numerous rocks in it. It is used 
only by small fishing vessels, which enter its eastern entrance, passing 
cn either side of a group of rocks that cover at high water. 

Comfort cove, southward of Comfort head, affords anchorage in 
15 to 20 fathoms, but the position is not safe with easterly winds 
which prevail in spring and autumn. There are some houses around 
this cove, and also a post-office, from which communication with 
Campbellton is made weekly by boat. 

Cranberry island, fronting the western side of the entrance, is low 
and steep-to on its eastern side. 


500 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


Loon bay extends southward for 7 miles within Cranberry island, 
and a large opening on its eastern side leads into Birchy bay and also 
to several channels, between rocks and islets, running north-north- 
eastward for upward of 10 miles. 

The loon, after which the bay is named, is a sea bird, which fre- 
quents this locality in large numbers. 

The western side of Loon bay is generally of moderate depth, de- 
creasing from 45 fathoms at the entrance to 12 fathoms outside Loon 
harbor, at its southern end. There are but few shoals and there is 
usually anchorage anywhere around it. 

The western shore, inside the entrance, rises steeply to a prominent 
wooded hill, 211 feet high, which descends northward to Comfort 
cove and southward to New harbor. 

New harbor is an indentation 4+ mile deep and 300 yards wide, 
with depths of 5 to 9 fathoms, but flats of sand and mud extend off 
its western side and to a distance of 400 yards from its head. A 
shoal, with 15 feet water over it, extends 400 yards off its eastern 
entrance point. The harbor is only suitable for small vessels. 

There is a small village at New harbor, and a road leads from it 
across the intervening neck of land, to Comfort cove. 

Southward of New harbor the land becomes lower, and, at the 
distance of 3 miles falls back in a small bay, the head of which is only 
4+ mile from Chapel cove, 

Long point is the southeastern point of this small bay, and within 
the point the head of Loon bay forms a bight in which there is excel- 
lent anchorage in about 15 fathoms, stiff mud bottom. 

Loon harbor, a basin at the southern end of Loon bay, is about $ 
mile across, with depths of 5 to 6 fathoms. Its entrance is narrow 
and obstructed by a patch with 3 fathoms of water over it, but ves- 
sels drawing 18 feet enter by keeping the eastern side on board. 
Between the heads the water is fairly deep and there is anchorage 
in the middle of the basin in 5 fathoms, mud bottom. The harbor is 
frequented only by small craft carrying timber. 

A small village is situated around this basin, and a sawmill with a 
wharf off it lies on the eastern side. A road runs from the western 
side of the harbor to Campbellton, a distance of about 4 miles. Two 
streams fall into the harbor, one close to the sawmill, and the other 
on the southern side. The latter is the outlet of a series of lakes 
extending several miles. 

The eastern side of Loon bay is rocky and does not afford good 
anchorage; at 13 miles from Loon harbor entrance there is reef with 
some rocks awash at low water, and in this locality there are some 
shoal patches. 

South harbor, formed by two islands close to the shore, is only 
suitable for boats; there is a lobster-fishing station on the outer 
island. 


BIRCHY BAY——-CHANCE HARBOR. 501 


Birchy bay, the bight eastward of Loon bay, extends southward 
for about 2 miles and there are several islands in it. The approach 
from Loon bay is contracted on the southern side by shoals extend- 
ing from the northern end of the peninsula separating the bays, and 
from Green island, on the northern side. A steam sawmill is situated 
on the eastern shore of Birchy bay near its entrance. The bay is 
only visited by small craft carrying timber. 

Green island, lying off the northeastern side of Loon bay, is small 
grassy, 30 feet high, and of turtle-back shape. An extensive flat of 
large stones and sand reaches from it to the southern point of Coal-all 
island, the eastern entrance point of Loon bay; this flat is very 
steep-to, and vessels drawing 12 feet or more water must keep on the 
western side until past the entrance to Birchy bay. 

Islands.—Eastward of Cranberry island a small archipelago of 
islands and rocks extends between Coal-all and Farmer islands. The 
southwestern of these islands is 35 feet high, bare and grassy, except 
at its southern end, which is wooded, and steep-to on its western side; 
a small rock, 3 feet high, lies + mile northwestward of this island; it 
is also steep-to, and there is a deep clear passage between it and Com- 
fort island. 

Dildo run.—The above-mentioned archipelago extends northeast- 
ward, the islets and rocks increasing in number, for a distance of 10 
miles. Among the islets and rocks there is a narrow and very intri- 
cate channel leading to Change Island tickle, known as Dildo run. 
There is a depth of at least 12 feet water in this run, but the turns 
are so sharp that only small vessels can navigate it with safety. 
Schooners and other small craft proceeding to the bay of Exploits 
for firewood, or to avoid the ice on the outer coast during spring, use 
this passage. Fishermen acquainted with the channel are to be found 
at Tilton, Change island, or almost any of the harbors in the locality. 

The shore of the bay of Exploits from Farmer island to Puzzle 
harbor,.a distance of about 4 miles northward, has not been surveyed. 

New World island.—Puzzle Harbor head, a round wooded hill 
150 feet high, the northern entrance point to Puzzle harbor, is sepa- 
rated by a conspicuous marsh from the higher ranges inland. 

Chance harbor, situated 1 mile north-northwestward of Puzzle 
Harbor head and entered through a passage 200 yards broad, extends 
eastward 2 miles, but a bar at 1 mile within the entrance obstructs 
the passage to all but small craft; the harbor dries for } mile from the 
head. 

Anchorage.—Large vessels anchor immediately within the en- 
trance, in 21 fathoms water, but small craft proceed farther in and 
anchor in 5 to 9 fathoms. 

Little Chance harbor, a bight in the northern shore immediately 
eastward of Chance Harbor head, is suitable for small vessels only. A 


502 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


rock, with 5 feet water on it, les 135 yards northwestward of the 
eastern entrance point; and a rock, with 8 feet water over it, 55 yards 
from the bluff point on the northwestern shore, leaving a passage 
150 yards wide between the rocks. A deep valley to the northwest- 
ward of the apparently highest hill on Cottle island, in line with the 
summit of the Eastern Puzzle Harbor rock, bearing about 171°, leads 
through this passage to the anchorage in 44 fathoms water. 

The head of this harbor is shallow as far south as the small islet 
on the western shore. 

Water can be obtained from a small stream on the eastern shore. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Little Chance harbor 
at 7 h. 13 m.; springs rise 43 feet. 

Chance Harbor head, on the western side of Little Chance harbor, 
is 263 feet high. West rock, with 24 fathoms water over it, bears 
192°, distant 1,200 yards from the southwestern point of Chance 
Harbor head. A group of rocks partly above water lies } mile 
south-southeastward of the same point, and there is a group of 
rocks } mile southward of Little Chance Harbor entrance. 

Green island, + mile northwestward of the northwestern point of 
Chance Harbor head, is about + mile long, eastward and westward, 
200 yards wide and 87 feet high. Kullick Stone islet les 400 yards 
northward of it, and at 400 yards east-southeastward of this islet 
there is a patch of 44 fathoms. 

The passage between Green island and the islets off Black and 
Little Black islands is 1,8; miles wide and clear. 

The western coast of New World island forms a bight between 
Chance Harbor head and Dicky head, at 1,3; miles northward; it 
then curves northward for 1} miles to Western head. 

Big Gull island, about + mile westward of the coast of New World 
island, 14 miles northward of Dicky head, is + mile long northeast- 
ward and southwestward; narrow, and 100 feet high near its south- 
western end. It is covered with grass, and its northwestern coast 
consists of black cliffs. There is a rock with 15 feet water over it 
in the channel between Big Gull island and New World island. 

Little Gull island, close southwestward of Big Gull island, is a 
dark rock about 60 feet high, with deep clefts extending from its 
summit. | 

Hussey rock, 300 yards northeastward of Big Gull island, is 10 feet 
high. 

Western head of New World island rises steeply to a bare mound 
100 feet high, and Baldney rock, 11 feet high, lies close northeastward 
of the head. 

Pearce harbor, about 600 yards eastward of Western head, is an 
inlet 600 yards in extent. Fishing vessels anchor in it in 34 fathoms 
water, sheltered except from northerly winds. 


MORTON HARBOR—WEBBER BIGHT. 503 


Morton Harbor head is 1} miles east-southeastward of the eastern 
entrance point of Pearce harbor, and Morton Harbor rocks extend a 
short distance off it. 

Clearing marks.—Cuckold rock well open northward of Wild 
Bight head, bearing 62°, leads northward, and the Wesleyan church 
well open eastward of Morton Harbor head, bearing 186°, leads east- 
ward of Morton Harbor rocks. 

Mad Moll rock lies about 400 yards off the eastern side of the 
approach to Morton harbor and bears 98°, distant about 700 yards 
from Morton Harbor head; it has less than six feet water over it. 

Clearing marks.—The northern stage in the western cove of 
Morton harbor, well open southeastward of Little Harbor head, bear- 
ing 205°, clears a rock off Wild Bight head and Mad Moll rock. 

Morton Harbor entrance is southward of Morton Harbor head, 
between Neal islet, a small rock, 7 feet high, on the western side, and a 
peninsula, 175 feet high, surmounted by a tuft of trees, on the eastern 
side; the western side of the entrance is bordered by sunken rocks. 
Within the entrance the harbor extends northwestward and south- 
eastward about } mile, with a general width of + mile. Some parts 
of it are shoal. 

Little harbor, a small boat cove, is situated southward of the penin- 
sula which bounds the eastern side of the entrance. 

Directions.—When clear of Morton Harbor rocks and Mad Moll 
rock, steer for the entrance, keeping the eastern shore on board, and 
observing that West Shag rock (Twillingate island), well open east- 
ward of Neal islet, bearing about 15°, leads close eastward of the 
rocks on the western side of the entrance. Inside the entrance turn 
southeastward, keeping in mid-channel, and anchor in the middle in 
7 fathoms water; in a small vessel proceed nearer the head of the 
southeastern cove, and anchor in 5 fathoms water, mud bottom. 

_ Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Morton harbor at 
7h. 18 m.; springs 42 feet. 

Settlement.—A considerable settlement surrounds this harbor, 
whence small supplies can be obtained, and water may be had from 
the head of the northwestern cove. 

Communication.—A steamer from Lewisport calls at Morton 
harbor weekly during summer and autumn. 

Wild Bight head, *# mile northeastward of Morton Harbor head, 
is the northern end of the peninsula on the eastern side of Morton 
Yarbor approach. 

Wild bight, eastward of Wild Bight head, is clear of shoals, and 
affords anchorage in 11 to 15 fathoms water near its head, but it has 
no shelter from northerly winds, which send in a heavy sea. 

Webber bight lies between the promontory forming the eastern 
side of Wild bight and an isolated wooded headland 180 feet high, at 


504 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


about 1,600 vards to the northeastward, which is connected by a low 
neck of land, with several houses on it, to Tizard Harbor head, a 
similar headland, 194 feet high, southeastward of it. 

Berry island lies about 400 yards west-northwestward of the head- 
land, 180 feet high, with which it is connected by rocks and shoals; it 
forms the northeastern side of Webber bight. 

Cuckold rock, rugged and 14 feet high, is the outer of the rocks 
extending 400 yards northward from Berry island. 

Toad Asses are three rocks, the highest 63 feet high, extending 
about 200 yards northeastward from the headland 180 feet high. 

Tizard harbor, southward of Tizard Harbor head, extends 200 
vards to the westward, and a large settlement surrounds it; it is 
entered southward of an island 35 feet high, with several houses on 
it, which is joined to the northern shore by reefs. The shore is foul 
for a few yards, and a rock, that uncovers 2 feet, lies close to the 
southern side of the channel, but small craft anchor in 6 fathoms 
water. 

Communication.—<A steamer from Lewisport calls at Tizard har- 
bor weekly during summer and autumn. 

Muddy Hole point is the southeastern end of the promontory on 
the southern side of Tizard harbor. 

Chance Harbor island, lying 1,2, miles southward from Muddy 
Hole point and 135 yards off the northern entrance point of East 
Chance harbor, with which it is connected by shoal water, is a round 
wooded hillock 150 feet high; there is no passage for vessels west of 
this island. 

East Chance harbor, an inlet extending westward about 1,200 
yards, affords anchorage for small vessels in 10 to 19 fathoms water, 
but it is open to easterly winds. 

Shoal rock, bearing 95°, distant 1 mile from the southern entrance 
point of East Chance harbor, has 14 fathoms water over it and deep 
water around. 

Carter cove is 1 mile south-southeastward of East Chance harbor: 
there are some islets in the cove and shoals in its approach. 

Virgin arm, the western entrance point of which hes eastward 
1,8; miles from the southern entrance point of East Chance harbor 
and has a small islet 10 feet high off it, close northeastward of a 
beach of shingle, is a narrow inlet 14 miles long affording anchorage. 

A rock that uncovers 3 feet at low water les 100 yards from the 
western shore at 4 mile within the entrance; and a rock, with 1 
foot water on it, 100 yards from the eastern shore at 1,600 yards 
within the entrance. 

To enter, keep near the eastern shore till the first of these rocks is 
passed, and anchor in the widest part of the arm in 17 fathoms water ; 
small craft proceed to the head by keeping nearer the western than 


TILT COVE—FOOLS HARBOR. 505 


the eastern shore till the second rock is passed and anchor in the 
middle of the arm in 11 to 7 fathoms. 

Tilt cove is situated about 1 mile northeastward of the entrance 
of Virgin arm and southeastward of Tilt Cove island, and is entered 
through a channel, 70 yards wide, between a small islet on the west- 
ern and rocks off the eastern shore. A rock 5 feet high hes in the 
middle of the cove. 

The cove affords anchorage for small vessels in 6 fathoms water. 

Squid cove, 4 mile eastward of Tilt cove and sheltered by Crow 
Head island, affords excellent anchorage in 6 to 12 fathoms water. 
A round grassy islet 20 feet high, with a rock close to its northeastern 
end, lies in the middle of the western approach of the cove; a similar 
islet is situated 550 vards eastward of it; and a bare islet, 17 feet high, 
lies close to the western entrance point of the cove. 

A rock, that covers at high water, lies a short distance northward 
of the eastern grassy islet; and a shoal, with 15 feet water over it, 
is situated 100 yards northeastward of the western entrance point of 
Squid cove. 

The best entrance is between Sugarloaf and the islets eastward of 
Crow Head island, which in mid-channel is clear of shoals and leads 
to the anchorage. 

Small vessels also enter from the westward, passing on either side 
of the western grassy islet, and then close southward of the eastern 
islet, so as to clear the shoal, with 15 feet water over it, at 100 yards 
southeastward of it. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Squid cove at 7h. 
15m.; springs rise 5 feet, neaps 24 feet; neaps range 1} feet. 

Trump islands, a group of two large and several small islets on 
the western side of Friday bay, are separated by Trump Island tickle, 
a channel filled with islets and rocks. 

Captain Pearce rock, square and 17 feet high, lies about 400 yards 
off the southwestern side of the northern island; sunken rocks extend 
southward 600 yards from it. In a large vessel pass westward of 
these rocks by keeping Tizard Harbor head shut in with Muddy Hole 
point, bearing north. 

Fools harbor, at the eastern end of South Trump island, is 
sheltered on the northern side by Fools Harbor islands, a chain of 
three islands extending about 800 yards northeastward from the north- 
ern point of the eastern end of South Trump island. These islands 
are connected together and with the point at low water, and from the 
northeastern island a spit extends south-southeastward about 300 
yards. 

Tilt Cove island, open eastward of Trump islands, bearing 196°, 
leads eastward; and the western end of South Berry island in line 
with the northern end of the southwestern Fools Harbor isiands, 


506 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


bearing, 307°, leads close southwestward of the spit. Small vessels 
enter Fools harbor and anchor in the middle in 8 fathoms water. ~ 

Mouse rock, north-northeastward 700 yards from North Trump 
island, is dark, peaked, and 17 feet high; two rocks awash at low 
water lie between the rock and the island. Christopher island, open 
northward of Mouse rock, bearing 62°, leads northwestward of these 
rocks. 

Mouse island, northward 800 yards from Mouse rock, is small 
flat-topped, 85 feet high, and covered with scrub; it is steep-to. A 
rock, with 7 feet of water over it, lies in the channel between Mouse 
island and Mouse rock, bearing 160°, distant 300 yards from the 
island. 

Matthews island, northward about 1,200 yards from Mouse 
island, with a clear channel between, consists of three rocky hillocks 
connected by low necks of land; the highest, at the southeastern end, 
is 78 feet high. Low rocks extend about 200 yards southward from 
the island, but the water deepens rapidly around it. 

Twillingate (Toulinguet) islands, a group consisting of North 
Twillngate island and South Twillingate island, together with 
several smaller islands off them, are separated from New World 
island by Main tickle. 

North Twillingate island is about 3 miles long, north-northwest- 
ward and south-southeastward, narrow at its southern end, but rather 
more than a mile wide at its northern end, and attains a height of 
309 feet. Rocks and shoals extend to about 400 yards off its coasts 
in places. It is separated from South Twillingate island by Shoal 
tickle. 

Back harbor, on the southwestern side of North island, is entered 
through a passage 300 vards wide, between Batrix island to the 
southeastward and Back Harbor head to the northwestward. The 
harbor is a basin about 700 yards in diameter, but the anchorage space 
is limited by shoals around it. 

Back Harbor Gull island is a rock 96 feet high lying + mile south- 
westward of Back Harbor head. 

To enter the harbor pass southward of Back Harbor Gull island 
and then keep in mid-channel. The anchorage has from 43 to 7 
fathoms water and is sheltered except from westerly winds. Gales 
from the westward send in a heavy sea. 

A large settlement surrounds the harbor. 

Lower head lies a mile northwestward of Back Harbor head, and 
thence the northwestern coast of the island trends about northeast- 
ward 1} miles to Long point. 

Sleepy Cove Gull island, 149 feet high, lies 400 yards off this 
eoast; a shoal extends northward 150 yards from it, and 100 yards 


LONG POINT—WILD COVE. 507 


northeastward from the end of this shoal is Northeast rock, with 4 
fathoms of water over it. Gunning rock, 33 feet high, lies close west- 
ward of the southern end of the island and is connected to it by shoal 
water. Friary ledge, bearing 230°, distant 300 yards from Gunning 
rock, has 2 fathoms of water over it, with 54 fathoms at 150 yards to 
the southeastward. 

High Shag rock, 86 feet high, is 200 yards northwestward of 
Gunning rock; west-northwestward, about 200 yards from High 
shag, is West Shag rock, 33 feet high, 100 yards southeastward of 
which and connected by shoal water is Low Shag rock. There is 
deep water around the Shag rocks, but not between them; and there is 
a deep channel between Friary ledge and Sleepy Cove Gull island on 
the one side and North island on the other side. 

Long point is the outer termination of a line of low bare rocks 
extending northeastward 600 yards from the northern end of North 
island; the Pinnacle, a conspicuous conical cliff 153 feet high, is at 
the inner end of the rocks. 

Devils Cove head, close southeastward of Long point, is inacces- 
sible from the sea, falling in steep cliffs to the water’s edge except 
immediately under the lighthouse, where there is a landslip. Near 
the base of the landslip is a reddish rock, the only slab of that color 
on the outer coasts in this locality. The approach to the head is 
bold, and there is no appreciable change in the depth of water till 
within a short distance from it. 

Light.—A red octagonal lighthouse, 49 feet high, with a square 
base and a circular lantern, on Devils Cove head, exhibits, at 531 feet 
above high water, a revolving white light that attains its greatest 
brilliancy every thirty seconds, and should be seen from a distance 
of 21 miles in clear weather. The keeper’s dwelling, close to the light- 
house, is painted white, with a red roof. 

Signals.— Devils Cove head lighthouse is supphed with the Inter- 
national code signals. 

Cuckold point lies 1 mile southeastward from Long point, and 
the coast between is rocky and broken. 

Twillingate harbor, entered through a passage 900 yards wide 
between Cuckold point and Burnt island, is a little more than 2 miles 
in length from the entrance, diminishing in width gradually to the 
head, where a canal through Shoal tickle, having a depth of about 
10 feet in it at high water, is crossed by a drawbridge. 

Wild cove is on the western side of the harbor at } mile southward 
of Cuckold point and is bordered by shoal water to the distance of 
200 yards. Wild Cove rocks, some of which are above water, are 
southeastward of the cove, the outer patch of 3 fathoms being nearly 
400 yards offshore. 


508 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


The western shore of the harbor within Wild Cove rocks is fairly 
steep as far as the government wharf, a distance of about 1,200 
yards. 

Wharf.—The government wharf is 175 feet long and has a depth 
of 22 feet water at its head. On its southwestern side the depth 
decreases gradually from the head to the landing steps, where it is 
6 feet, and at 80 feet inside the head the depth is 12 feet. The north- 
eastern side of the wharf is shoaler and not fit for berthing. 

In 1907, this wharf and the hghthouse thereon, from which a fixed 
red light was formerly exhibited, were destroyed by storm. 

The eastern shore.—Higgins islet lies on the eastern side of the 
harbor close northwestward of the northwestern point of South 
Twillingate island and bears 173°, distant 600 yards from the south- 
western point of Burnt island; it is 21 feet high and grassy. 

White ground, bearing 263°, distant 350 yards from Higgins islet, 
has 5 feet of water over it. Slade room, well open westward of Car- 
ters head, bearing 173°, leads westward of this shoal and of the rocks 
southward of the islet. 

Jenkins cove lies south-southeastward of Higgins islet and Car- 
ters head is its southern entrance point. 

Shoal water and several rocks above and below water extend off 
the western shore of Twillingate harbor within the government wharf, 
and off the eastern shore within Carters head, and join the shoal 
extending 800 yards from the head of the harbor. 

Anchorage in Twillingate harbor is not good, as it is open to 
northerly winds that bring in a heavy sea, and the holding ground is 
indifferent. The best position is off the western shore, abreast of the 
point just northeastward of the church, in 6 fathoms of water, but 
to avoid the shoal water at the head of the harbor do not bring the 
church on North Twillingate island to bear northward of 261°. 

Ice.—Twillingate harbor freezes over about January 22 and the 
ice, which reaches 2 to 3 feet in thickness, clears about May 6; it is, 
however, open at intervals between these dates. Field ice generally 
appears between February 10 and 20 and disappears about April 24. 
The first vessel usually arrives about May 25, and the last leaves 
about December 7. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Twillingate harbor 
at Th. 8m.; springs rise 4 feet, neaps 34 feet. 

Twillingate (Toulinguet) town, the principal part of which 
is around the harbor southward of the government wharf, had a 
population of 3,542 at the time of the last census in 1901. 

Supplies.—Water can be procured from a government well, near 
the road eastward of the church. A small quantity of coal, usually 
about 50 tons, and other supplies may be obtained from the trading 
firms here. 


BURNT ISLAND—SOUTH ISLAND. 509 


Communication.—A steamer from Lewisport calls here weekly 
during summer and autumn; there is telegraphic communication. 

Burnt Island tickle, separating the northwestern end of South 
island from Burnt island, is a passage 500 yards wide, but there are 
so many rocks in it that it requires local knowledge for its navigation. 

Burnt island is about ;% mile long, in an easterly and westerly 
direction, 4 mile wide, and 230 feet high. Its western and northern 
sides are steep-to, but a group of islets and rocks, connected by shoal 
water, extends ;%, mile east-northeastward from it. 

The Rags, 23 feet high, is the northeasternmost islet of this group. 
Rags rock, with 11 feet of water over it, lies 100 yards northward of 
the Rags, and there are other shoals within the distance of 400 yards 
from the northern sides of the group. When approaching Twillingate 
harbor from the eastward, do not bring the northwestern end of 
Burnt island northward of 236° until French head is in line with the 
northeastern end of Burnt island, bearing 126°, then steer for the 
entrance. 

Gull island, lying north-northeastward 1 mile from the north- 
western end of Burnt island, is 161 feet high, with a flat summit, 
covered with grass, and its coasts are steep cliffs nearly all around. 
A peaked islet, 96 feet high, is separated by a narrow channel from 
its western side; sunken rocks extend a short distance from its 
southeastern point, and Gull Island rock, with 13 feet water over it, 
hes northward nearly 100 yards from its northern point. 

Old Harry shoals are two rocky patches 200 yards apart, lying 
north-northwestward and south-southeastward of each other; the 
southern, with 16 feet water over it, bears 323°, distant 14 miles from 
the northeastern end of Gull island; the northern has 34 fathoms 
water on it. ' 

Clearing marks.—Western head of New World island, well open 
northward of West Shag rock, bearing 207°, leads northwestward ; 
Sleepy Cove Gull island, open northward of Lower head, bearing 
210°, leads southeastward; the northeastern point of Burnt island, 
open westward of Gull island, bearing 146°, leads southwestward ; 
and Carters head, just open west of Burnt island, 175°, leads east- 
ward of these shoals. 

Several banks, with 11 to 20 fathoms of water over them, are 
situated northward of North Twillingate island, but they only break 
in heavy weather. 

South island is about 5 miles long, north-northeastward and 
south-southwestward, with an average width of 2 miles, and it 
attains a height of 311 feet. The features of the island are diversi- 
fied, its northern part alternates in hill and dale, while to the south- 
ward the hills fall steeply to the east coast, and a low flat with 
numerous lakes extends from the hills to the west coast. 


510 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


Durrels arm and Farmers arm are two coves, separated by a nar- 
row peninsula, situated at the head of a bight eastward of Twillin- 
gate harbor. Rocks and shoals extend a considerable distance from 
the shores and there is no safe anchorage for a large vessel. Small 
craft, navigated by local fishermen, obtain shelter at the heads of the 
arms, but a heavy sea rolls in with northerly and easterly gales. 

Ragged point is situated on the west coast, about 1,200 yards 
southward of Shoal tickle, and on its southern side is Rodney cove, 
which is small and has Rodney rock, with less than 6 feet of water 
over it, in its entrance. 

Bluff Head cove lies southward of Rodney cove, and affords an- 
chorage for small craft in 4 to 6 fathoms water, eastward of a small 
islet, 12 feet high, lying in the entrance. The best passage is north of 
the island, as foul ground extends westward from Bluff head, the 
southern entrance point to the cove. 

The coast southward of Bluff head has several coves in it, where 
small craft obtain anchorage, with shelter from offshore winds; small 
islets lie off the entrance points. Local knowledge is necessary to 
enter them. 

Moses point, off which foul ground extends about 400 vards, les 
13 miles southeastward from Bluff head, and at 1,200 yards eastward 
of the point is Kiddle cove, a shallow boat harbor, marked by a con- 
spicuous white house; an islet about 30 feet high lies in the entrance. 

Duck island is situated about 400 yards off Kiddle cove and it is 
connected by rocks and shoal water with the northern part of Black 
island, lying at a distance of $ mile to the southeastward. 

Black island is about a mile long northeastward and southwest- 
ward, 600 yards wide, and its southwestern end is 243 feet high; a 
bare hill 135 feet high rises at the northeastern end, and falls to a low 
isthmus at the head of Black Island harbor. This harbor, situated 
westward of the northeastern end of Black island, is available for 
large fishing boats. 

A rock, with 4 feet water over it, hes northward about 300 yards 
from the northeastern end of Black island. 

Middle ground, bearing 311°, distant 1,200 yards from the western 
end of Black island, is a rock with 4 feet water over it. Back Harbor 
head, open westward of Bluff head, bearing 332°, leads westward of 
the rock. 

Main tickle, the passage between South Twillingate island and 
New World island, is much frequented by fishing vessels to avoid the 
heavy sea northward of Twillingate islands when the wind is foul. 
Tt is + mile wide at its southern entrance, between Vincent point and 
Indian Cove head, which is its narrowest part. 

The western shore of Main tickle is bordered by rocks, some cover- 
ing and others below water. Purcell harbor is situated on this shore, 


LITTLE HARBOR—LOBSTER HARBOR. 5M: 


and there is a large village around it, the northeastern house on the 
northwestern shore being under the slope of a hill on which is a 
flagstaff. 

Main Tickle island, 92 feet high, lies in the middle of the northern 
entrance to the tickle, with a clear passage on both sides. 

Little harbor, at the head of Little Harbor bight, northwestward 
of Big Head, the western entrance point of Main tickle, is available 
only for small vessels. Two rocks lie in the middle of the entrance, 
and the best passage is between them, but there is also a channel close 
to the western entrance point into the harbor. Local knowledge and 
fine weather are required to enter it. 

Byrne and Little Byrne coves, around which there are a few 
houses, are situated in New World island at ? mile eastward of the 
northeastern end of Black island. Byrne Cove rocks he off the en- 
trance, and the southern of them, which uncovers 5 feet at low water, 
is situated 400 yards westward of the western entrance point to 
Byrne cove. 

The entrance to the coves is southward of the islet, 7 feet high, 
or close to the western entrance point to Byrne cove. The heads of 
both the coves are foul, but there is anchorage in the entrance in 8 to 
10 fathoms water. 

Indian cove, divided from Little Byrne cove by a promontory, on 
which are two conical hills, 250 and 260 feet high, is clear, but shoal 
water extends 300 yards from its head. 

The cove affords anchorage in depths decreasing from 19 fathoms 
at the entrance to3 fathoms at 4 mile within. 

A shoal with 4 fathoms water over it bears about 227°, distant 4 
mile from the northern entrance point of Indian cove. 

Lobster harbor, suitable for boats only, is a shallow inlet at the 
southern part of a small bight, on the eastern side of Main tickle. 
The bight affords anchorage in 8 to 12 fathoms water, and fresh 
water can be procured from a small stream on the southern side of 
the harbor. 

Directions.—From the eastward steer for and pass Main Tickle 
island on either side in mid-channel; then continue in mid-channel; 
there are no shoals more than 300 yards distant from either shore. 

Small vessels when past Vincent point can proceed westward in 
the channel between Black, Pigeon, and Duck islands to the south- 
ward, and South Twillingate island to the northward, avoiding the 
rock, with 4 feet water on it, northward of Black island, by keeping 
the northern end of Duck island open northward of Black rock, bear- 
ing 266°. 

Large vessels pass southward of Black island, keeping Main Tickle 
island well open westward of Gull island, which is situated off the 
northern entrance point of Lobster Harbor bight, bearing 16°, to 


Hl? CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


avoid the shoal, with 4 fathoms water over it, westward of Indian 
cove. When approaching the southern end of Black island, keep the 
square rock point on that island well open southward of the red point 
bearing 38°, until the southwestern end of Duck island opens west- 
ward of Black island, bearing 345°; then steer about 294°, and when 
Back Harbor head opens westward of Bluff head, bearing 332°, which 
mark leads westward of Middle ground, steer northward through 
Friday bay. 

From the westward, keep Back Harbor head open westward of 
Bluff head, bearing 332°, and when the southwestern end of Black 
island bears 103°, steer about 114°, keeping the western end of Duck 
island, open westward of Black island, bearing 345°, until the square 
rock point on Black island opens well southward of the red point, 
bearing 38°. Then steer along the southeastern coast of Black island, 
and when approaching Indian cove keep Main Tickle island well open 
westward of Gull island, which is situated off the northern entrance 
point of Lobster Harbor bight, bearing 16°, to avoid the shoal west- 
ward of Indian cove. Enter Main tickle and keep this mark open 
to clear Lobster Harbor rock, and when northward of Lobster harbor, 
the peninsula northward of that harbor open westward of Gull island 
(Lobster harbor), bearing 159°, until the northern end of Gull island 
(Merit harbor) opens northward of Tobacco islands, bearing 41°, 
clears the rock with 9 feet water over it. The southern entrance point 
of Main Tickle cove open eastward of Powderhorn rock, bearing 
359°, clears Lowland rock. The passages on either side of Main Tickle 
island are clear in mid-channel, but there is a rock close northward of 
Tobacco islands. 

Bacalhao island, situated 6} miles eastward from the Rags, is 
about 2 miles long, northeastward and southwestward, 800 yards wide, 
and its summit, near its southwestern end, is 324 feet high; the island 
is barren. 

Light.—A cylindrical iron tower, 35 feet high, painted red and 
white in spiral bands, on Bacalhao island at about } mile from its 
southwestern end, exhibits at 351 feet above high water an intermit- 
tent white lght, thus: Light, three seconds: eclipse, three seconds, 
which should be seen from a distance of 18 miles in clear weather. 
The light being unwatched should not be implicitly relied on. The 
keeper’s dwelling, situated 25 yards northward of the lighthouse, and 
the covered way connecting it, are painted white, but they are only 
partly visible from seaward. 

Signals.—The lighthouse is supphed with the International code 
signals. 

Bacalhao rock, lying eastward, distant about 1 mile from the 
northeastern end of Bacalhao island, is 4 feet high, foul all around, 
and should not be. approached nearer than } mile. 


— 


BERRY ISLAND——-HERRING HEAD. 513 


Joe rock, bearing 58°, distant 900 yards from the northeastern end 
of Bacalhao island, has 3 fathoms water over it. 

Berry island, 1,400 yards southwestward of Bacalhao island, is 
about 1,600 yards long, northeastward and southwestward, narrow, 
186 feet high, rocky, and barren; a rock, with 15 feet water over it, 
lies 200 yards northward of its northeastern end. 

Starve head, a steep cliff, 239 feet high, bears southwestward from 
Berry island, and is separated from it by a channel: 1,200 yards wide, 
in the middle of which is Clarke rock, small, covered at high water, 
and generally showing by a breaker; the passage between the rock 
and Berry island is clear, but that between it and Starve head is foul. 

Starve harbor lies immediately southeastward of Starve head; 
its entrance is about 30 yards wide and 200 yards long, with 4 
fathoms water; it opens out to a deep basin 400 yards wide and 4+ 
mile long; there is a reef on the northwestern shore just within the 
entrance, so that the island forming the southeastern head must be 
passed closely. 

Goldson arm.—Herring neck, lying between the land of Starve 
and the promontory of Herring head, is the inhabited portion of 
the entrance to Goldson arm, a narrow inlet extending southwestward 
for 3? miles. 

When proceeding up the arm, keep on the northwestern shore, 
which is steep-to for 1$ miles. A small vessel can anchor in Ship 
cove, just within the northern head; and on the same shore at + mile 
farther up, is Starve cove, which has rocks a few vards off its 
entrance points, but affords anchorage for a small vessel. Both these 
coves are so small that a vessel seeking anchorage might not find 
room in them; in this case, as the depth in the main part of the arm 
off them is 30 fathoms, it would be necessary to run up about 12 
miles within the entrance; in doing so, when the entrance to Burnt 
arm opens, keep on the northern shore, with the cliff northward of 
Herring neck open of the southeastern shore, to avoid a patch, with 
3 fathoms water over it, that lies nearly in mid-channel, and when 
above the entrance to Burnt arm, anchor in 10 to 13 fathoms water. 
mud bottom. 

Communication.—The steamer from Lewisport calls at Herring 
neck weekly during summer and autumn. 

Goose islands, a small group lying midway between Berry island 
and Herring Head promontory, are steep all around. 

Herring head, situated southeastward, distant 11 miles from the 
southwestern end of Bacalhao island, is steep and 264 feet high; it is 
the termination of a narrow promontory of New World island ex- 
tending northeastward for 24 miles. 


76846—09 33 


ili CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


Herring islands, 400 yards off the head, are small, about 20 feet 
high, and steep all around. 

Kiar reef, bearing 65°, distant ? mile from Herring islands, is 
awash at low water, and the sea generally breaks on it. 

Blowhard rock hes westward 400 yards from Kiar reef, with deep 
water between, and even a moderate sea breaks heavily, but not con- 
tinuously, over it. 

For a distance of 3 miles northeastward of Kiar reef, in continua- 
tion of the line of Herring Head promontory, are some small patches 
of 7 to 14 fathoms water, which break at times during a heavy sea. 

Red islet, situated southeastward, distant + mile from Herring 
head, is small and low, and a reef extends 200 yards from its north- 
eastern end; Haypook rock, bearing 190°, distant 400 yards from Red 
islet, has less than 6 feet water over it. 

Duck island, situated southeastward, distant 14 miles from Her- 
ring head, is about 1,400 yards long, northeastward and southwest- 
ward, narrow, and 181 feet high. Two rocks lie 200 yards off its 
northwestern side, and the southwestern end is foul for 300 yards, 
but the southeastern coast is bold-to. 

Moorham reef, bearing 38°, distant 1 mile from Duck island, is 
awash at low water, and the sea generally breaks over it. 

Grassy islets, a low group, are separated from the southern part 
of Duck island by a narrow but deep channel. Grassy rock, north- 
eastward 550 yards from the eastern end of Grassy islets, has 3 
fathoms water over it; the northeastern deep saddle in Bacalhao 
island, open northeastward of Duck island, bearing about 331°, leads 
northeastward; and the northern point of Jacks island, open south- 
eastward of Grassy islets, about 244°, leads southeastward of it. 

Jacks island lies south-southwestward ? mile from Duck island, 
and its northeastern and highest peak, 235 feet high, is remarkable. 
Between Jacks island and New World island, to the westward, are 
three tickles leading into Cobbs arm; of these Long and Treenail 
tickles are only available for boats. 

Southward of Herring head are Pikes and Little Cobbs arms; both 
are encumbered with rocks, and a heavy sea rolls in, rendering them 
of no value except for fishing boats. 

Cobbs arm, southward 2? miles from Herring head, extends 3 
miles with a breadth of 800 yards; there is indifferent summer 
anchorage in 13 fathoms water, off the narrow entrance of a shoal 
continuation of the arm; a swell rolls in after gales from seaward. 
Limestone can be obtained on the southern side of the anchorage, and 
in the continuation of the arm. 

To enter Cobbs arm pass midway between Duck island and Red 
islet, and keep the northeastern end of Bacalhao island open east- 
ward of Red islet, bearing about 2°, until close to Tinker island, 


LOBSTER ISLET—-BEAVER HEAD. 515, 


which is a small cone 60 feet high; from this to the anchorage, there 
are no shoals on the northwestern shore. 

A rock, with 14 feet water over it, lies nearly in the middle of the 
arm at + mile from the narrow entrance of the shoal arm. 

Small vessels drawing 11 feet water enter the shoal arm, by keep- 
ing close to the northwestern entrance point, to avoid the rocky 
ground extending across the channel toward this point from the islet 
that les in the middle of the entrance; when inside the point, ap- 
proach the northwestern shore and anchor in smooth water; above 
the islet the deep water is on the southeastern shore, the northwestern 
being shoal and rocky. 

Lobster islet, south-southwestward 1 mile from Jacks island, and 
4 mile off the nearest land, is small, 10 feet high, and foul all around 
for nearly 200 yards; Brandies rock, northeastward 600 yards from 
Lobster islet, is awash at low water. 

Milliners arm, southwestward } mile from Lobster islet, is rocky, 
open northeastward, and does not afford anchorage. 

Dram island, southward, 14 miles from Lobster islet, is small and 
30 feet high. 

Nine-pin arm, west-southwestward a httle more than 2 miles from 
Dram island, is full of rocks, and its eastern point is foul for the dis- 
tance of 200 yards. 

Currans Green Field island, immediately southwestward of Nine- 
pin arm, is small, low, and grassy; a shoal extends southward nearly 
200 yards from it. There is fair anchorage in 8 fathoms water south- 
westward of the island. 

Dildo run.—See page 501. 

Beaver cove, situated in the mainland 2 miles southward from 
Currans Green Field island, is divided into two arms by a low rocky 
islet; the northeastern arm is full of stones; the southwestern is 400 
yards wide and 800 yards in extent, with good anchorage in 3 to 6 
fathoms water, mud bottom; a rock, that covers at a quarter flood, 
lies eastward 100 yards from the western point of this arm. 

Beaver head, northeastward 1 mile from Beaver cove, is a steep 
bluff 180 feet high. 

Little Beaver cove, northeastward 14 miles from Beaver head, 
extends southwestward $ mile with a breadth of 400 yards, and the 
water in it is 4 to 8 fathoms in depth, but it does not afford anchor- 
uge as there is no holding ground and a heavy swell sets into it from 
the northward. 

Farewell Duck islands, northeastward 2% miles from the en- 
trance point of Little Beaver cove, form a long rugged promontory, 
terminating in a small islet just awash at high water. Farewell reef, 
close off this islet, is 600 yards long, northeastward and southwest- 


516 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


ward, and a moderate sea breaks on it. East Garden island in line 
with Indian Garden island, bearing 240°, leads northwestward; the 
southwestern end of Shag islets in line with the western end of 
Smoker island, bearing 348°, leads northeastward; and the entrance 
to the shoal arm of Farewell harbor, open of the northwestern shore 
of the harbor, bearing 218°, leads southeastward of this reef. 

Indian Garden island, situated 1% miles westward from the 
northeastern Farewell Duck island, is small, rocky, and 49 feet high; 
a reef extends 400 yards northward from it, and off its southwestern 
end is a low rocky islet. 

A rock, with 3 feet water over it, bears 204°, distant 1,300 yards, 
and another with the same depth bears 126°, distant 1,100 yards from 
Indian Garden island. 

East Garden island, northward 800 yards from Farewell Duck 
islands, is flat and about 40 feet high. 

Caution.—The coast between Beaver head and Farewell Duck 
islands should not be approached inside the line of East Garden and 
Indian Garden islands without local knowledge. 

Garden rock, bearing 24°, distant $ mile from East Garden island, 
has 6 feet water over it. 

Farewell Gull island, lying 1? miles southward from the north- 
eastern Farewell Duck island and about 600 yards off Farewell head, 
is 100 feet high and conspicuous on northerly or southerly bearings. 
(Farewell head, see p. 531.) 

Farewell harbor, immediately westward of Farewell Gull island, 
is 800 yards wide and 1,600 yards in extent, and affords anchorage 
in 4 to 8 fathoms water, mud bottom; northeasterly winds blow into 
the harbor with a fetch of 24 miles from the southern part of Change 
island; a shoal arm encumbered by bowlders extends inland about 
1$ miles from the harbor. ; 

Dog reef, bearing 69°, distant 1 mile from Farewell Gull island, 
and northward 1,200 yards from Dog Bay islands, is $ mile long, 
eastward and westward. 

Change island extends northward and southward for 7 miles with 
a general width of 1 mile. South end point of the island bears 117°, 
distant 2 miles from the eastern Farewell Duck island. 

Light.—A white square pyramidal tower, about 30 feet high, on 
South End point of Change island, exhibits, at 43 feet above high 
water, a fixed red light, which is visible except where obscured by the 
land. The light is exhibited during the season of navigation. 

The west coast of Change island affords shelter only for the 
small craft of the fishermen, except in Deep cove, 24 miles north- 
ward of South End point, which is 200 yards wide and 800 yards 
deep, with 3 to 6 fathoms water, sand bottom; the entrance is mid- 


SMOKER HEAD—CHANGE ISLAND TICKLE. 5d 


way between Wood islands on the north and Water Bears rocks on 
the south; these rocks, though they cover at high water, are generally 
visible. 

Smoker island, bearing 326°, distant 3 miles from South End 
point and 2 mile westward from the nearest rocks off Wood islands, 
is 20 feet high and flat; a rock over which there is a depth of 9 feet. 
bears 179°, distant 450 yards from the southern end of Smoker island. 

Ragged islets, bearing 14°, distant 1 mile from Smoker island 
and the same distance offshore, are low, with many sunken rocks 
around them. Pipe rock, the outer, bears 258°, distant $ mile from 
the southern Ragged islet, has 2 feet water over it, and breaks in a 
moderate sea; South End point, in line with Smoker island, bearing 
148°, leads southwestward of it. 

Shag islets, north-northwestward 14 miles from Ragged islets, 
extend 14 miles, northeastward and southwestward, with a width of 
4 mile and a general height of 20 feet; Mile islet, the northeastern of 
the group, is distant about 1,200 yards from the west coast of Change 
island. 

Shag rock, bearing 216°, distant 700 yards from the southwestern 
Shag islet, has 4 feet water over it and often breaks. South End 
point touching the eastern side of Smoker island, bearing 148°, 
leads 600 yards southwestward of it, but this mark leads only about 
200 yards northeastward of Grassy rock (p. 514). 

Change Island tickle, at the northern part of Change island, has 
a depth of 12 feet of water in its shoalest part, and is a safe and 
convenient harbor for a small vessel; the eastern entrance is avail- 
able in any weather, but it is difficult to make out, unless the houses 
on its shores are seen. 

On the northern side of this entrance are Tobacco island and sev- 
eral other islands inside of it, generally dome-shaped and 50 to 70 
feet high, while on the southern side of the entrance is Ruth island, 
generally flat and about 20 feet high, with two islands southward of 
it, also generally flat. 

A rock about 200 yards in extent, with 12 feet water over it, that 
breaks heavily, bears 64°, distant 200 yards from Ruth island; in 
light winds with a heavy sea pass southward of Ruth island, to give 
a good berth to this rock. 

The passage between Tobacco and Ruth islands is clear in its fair- 
way, and after passing between the two rocky islets to the north- 
westward and Ruth island to the southeastward, just close in the 
points of the tickle, bearing 241°, to clear White ground on the north 
and Skinner rock on the south; and when the western tickle on the 
north is open, bearing 345°, or Skinner cove bears 148°, open the 
points of the tickle, and anchor in 6 to 8 fathoms water, mud bottom. 


518 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


Ice.—Change Island tickle and the sea from Herring head to the 
northern end of Change island, and from Tobacco island to Brim- 
stone head fill in with northern ice and freeze; the ice usually breaks 
up between April 20 and May 10, but an easterly sea breaks it up 
earlier. 

In May and June, when the ice is compact from Funk island to 
cape Fogo, partly owing to the ebb or east-going tidal stream setting 
out of Dildo run and the stream of Gander river, Change island and 
Stag Harbor tickles are often sufficiently clear to allow vessels to pass 
through them into Notre Dame bay. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Change Island tickle 
at Th. 20m.; springs rise 44 feet, neaps 3 feet. 

Communication.—The steamer from Lewisport calls at Change 
island weekly during summer and autumn. 

North tickle, close within north end of Change island, has 3 
fathoms water in the entrance and 6 feet in the shoalest part; it is 
open northward and affords no efficient shelter. 

Sleepy ledge, bearing 325°, distant 1,2; miles from Tobacco island, 
is the northern end on the shoals Eeendinie northward from De 
islands westward of Tobacco island, and has a depth of 2 fathoms 
water over it. Island Harbor head in line with the eastern end of 
Shave island, which is a rock northwestward of Tobacco island, 
bearing 152°, leads northeastward of it. 

Bacalhao island to Sir Charles Hamilton sound.—Direc- 
tions.—Do not take the channel between Bacalhao island and Bacal- 
hao rock, but pass + mile eastward of the rock, and then between 
Kiar and Moorham reefs, steering toward the northeastern end of 
Duck island. When South End point is in line with Smoker island, 
bearing 148°, keep this mark on, round Smoker island on its eastern 
side at a distance of about 400 yards, and when southward of the 
rock lying southward of that island, bring the western end of Shag 
islets in line with the western end of Smoker island, bearing 348°. 
This mark on astern leads northeastward of Farewell reef, which is 
cleared when the entrance to the shoal arm of Farewell harbor opens 
southward of the northern shore of the harbor, bearing 218°. Then 
steer to pass about 3 mile eastward of Farewell Gull island, keeping 
the southwestern point of Dog Bay islands open westward of the 
northwestern islet off them, bearing 168°, to clear Dog reef. From 
eastward of Farewell Gull island steer to pass a little eastward of 
Steering island to clear Vesuvius rock, see page 530. 

Either of the channels between Bacalhao island and Starve head 
is navigable, Clarke rock in the channel between the head and Berry 
island being avoided. 

Having passed between Herring head and Herring islands, keep 
the northeastern end of Berry island open northward of Herring 


FOGO ISLAND—-HARE BAY. 519 


head, bearing 275°, until Tinker island is well open eastward of Red 
islet, bearing 204°, to clear the rock off Red islet, then steer to pass 
northward of Duck island, and as above directed. 

Fogo island, about 2 miles eastward of Change island, is 14 miles 
in greatest length in an easterly and westerly direction, and 8} miles 
in breadth. Its coasts are rocky and deeply indented, affording, 
however, but indifferent harbors, except for small vessels and boats, 
and it is surrounded by numerous rocks, islets, and shoals. 

Rogers point is the southwestern end of the western coast of Fogo 
island, and bearing 255°, distant 1,8; miles from the point, is Woody 
island, 1382 feet high, with some rocks } mile southwestward from it. 
Woody island is separated by a narrow channel from the southeast- 
ern end of Change island. 

Hare island lies in the channel between Change and Fogo islands 
at 14 miles northward of Woody island; a patch of rocks les nearly 
midway between it and Change island, and rocks and foul ground 
extend nearly 1,200 yards southward from the island. 

Watch island, 1,200 yards southeastward of the southern part of 
Hare island, is small, with shoals extending about 800 yards north- 
ward and southward of it. There is only a very narrow channel 
between Hare and Watch islands. 

Watch rock, which breaks in a moderate sea, bears 322°, distant 
14 miles from Rogers point, and in mid-channel between Watch and 
Fogo islands. Noggin hill, on the mainland, open eastward of 
Indian lookout, bearing 175°, leads eastward; and open westward, 
bearing 171°, leads westward of it. 

Island Harbor head, on the west coast of Fogo island at 23 miles 
northward of Rogers point, is a small but remarkable bluff, 101 feet 
high; there is an excellent boat harbor on its eastern side. 

Hare bay.—Hare Bay head, northward, 33 miles from Island Har- 
bor head and south-southwestward, 2 miles from Brimstone head. 
is 283 feet high; between Hare Bay head and Brimstone head is Hare 
bay, with Leveret islands, one of which is dome-shaped, on the 
southwestern side of its entrance; a rock, with 9 feet water over it, 
hes northward, distant 400 yards from these islands, leaving a channel 
500 yards wide into the harbor. 

Change lookout on Change island, open northwestward of Hare 
Bay head, bearing 224°, leads northwestward, and Burnt bluff, on 
the southwestern side of the bay, well open eastward of the islands, 
bearing about 159°, leads northeastward of the rock. 

The bay extends 2 miles to the southeastward and affords good 
anchorage in 4 to 12 fathoms water, mud bottom; the southwestern 
shore is rocky, but the northeastern is clear and steep-to. 


520 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


There is a snug anchorage for small vessels in 2 fathoms of water, 
in a basin between the southernmost Leveret island and the coast of 
Fogo island. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Hare bay at 7h. 35m.; 
springs rise 44 feet, neaps 3 feet. 

Brimstone head is 272 feet high. Seal cove on its southern side 
is entered by a narrow passage between shoals. Brimstone rock 
bears 283°, distant 700 yards from the head and is awash at low 
water, and bearing 317°, distant 600 yards from this rock is Stone 
island from which shoal water extends eastward. 

Black islet, bearing 249°, distant 13 miles from Brimstone head, is 
small and 12 feet high; a sunken rock bears 36°, distant 250 yards, 
Old Roger reef bears 24°, distant 1,200 yards, and a patch with 4 
fathoms water over it bears 187°, distant 4 mile, from the islet, while 
between it and Shoal Bay rock there are two rocks awash at low 
water. Shoal Bay rock, bearing 255°, distant 3? mile from Black islet, 
has 3 fathoms of water over it. 

Clearing marks.—Indian Lookout island, just open of Hare Bay 
head, bearing 179°, leads eastward of Old Roger reef; Watch island 
open, and Hare island just shut in, with the eastern end of Change 
island bearing 171°, leads westward of Shoal Bay rock. 

Shoals.—Fogo rock, with less than 6 feet water over it, bears 332°, 
distant nearly 1,600 yards; Monkey rock, with less than 6 feet water 
over it, 845°, 1,400 yards; Prince’s Horney rock, with 3 fathoms least 
water, 294°, 1,300 yards; and Old Horny rock, with 4 fathoms water, 
315°, 14; miles, from the northwestern point of Fogo Head peninsula. 

Leading mark.—The northern point of Simms island shut in by 
Barnes island, bearing 78°, leads southward of Prince’s Horney and 
Old Horney rocks. 

Fogo harbor lies eastward of Fogo Head peninsula, the bold and 
rocky peninsula at the northwestern end of Fogo island, and a line 
of islands, including Boatswain, Barnes, Simms or Lighthouse, and 
Rags islands, extend from Fogo head eastward across the mouth of 
the harbor to the coast northward of Lanes lookout. 

These islands are 50 to 100 feet high, forming narrow entrances 
difficult of access at all times to a sailing vessel, and unapproachable 
with the heavy sea which rolls in during and after gales from sea- 
ward. 

There are two principal channels into the harbor, with a least 
depth of 9 feet in the fairway of the eastern, and of 19 feet in that of 
the western, at low water; the harbor affords secure anchorage in 3 
to 7 fathoms water, mud bottom. 

The eastern entrance is between Rags and Simms islands; Rags 
rock lies northward 200 yards from Rags island, and Simms rock is 


FOGO HARBOR—DIRECTIONS. 521 


nearly 200 yards northward of the northern point of Simms island; 
both rocks are under water, but a moderate sea breaks on them. 

Nanny rock, northward 400 yards from Barnes island, has 4 
fathoms of water over it; a heavy sea breaks on the rock. 

Light.—A white open framework tower on the western side of 
Rags island exhibits during the period of open navigation, from 
May to about the end of December, from a lens lantern at 82 feet 
above high water, a fixed white hight, which should be seen from a 
distance of 8 miles in clear weather. 

A small, white, flat-roofed building stands near the hght tower. 

Directions.—From the eastward, pass outside Dean rock, see page 
522, and continue westward at about 4 mile off the coast, until Slades 
West house (the house is conspicuous, and has a flagstaff near it) 
is over Pilly point and Simms island locked, bearing 230°, which 
leads 100 yards northwestward of Rags rock, and when the western 
end of Rags island bears 193°, steer for the entrance between Rags 
and Simms islands, passing close to Rags island. Within the en- 
trance the channel turns sharply to the westward and is only 150 
yards wide; do not hug Simms island closely, as a rock with 6 feet 
of water over it extends 65 yards southeastward of its eastern end. 
The southern end of Barnes island, just shut in with Fogo head, bear- 
ing 263°, leads through the channel southward of Simms island, and 
when Gappy island opens westward of Simms island, bearing about 
356°, turn southward, keeping Gappy island in the middle of Middle 
tickle, bearing 356°, to clear Pilly rock on the east, and Harbor rock 
on the west. When the western end of Barnes island shuts in with 
Garrison point, bearing about 306°, anchor where convenient. 

The western entrance between Boatswain island and the cliffs of 
Fogo head is 100 yards wide and narrowed by a rock, with 6 feet of 
water over it, which extends halfway across from Boatswain island. 
When entering, Fogo head must be kept close aboard, and with a 
heavy sea running there is a considerable rebound from the cliffs. 

Within Boatswain island keep Barnes island aboard, as it is steep- 
to, and a bank, with 7 feet over it, extends half way across the chan- 
nel northward of Garrison point; in turning toward the anchorage, 
keep Western island well open of Garrison point, bearing 297°, until 
the summit of Gappy island is in line with the northeastern end of 
Centre island, bearing 355°, which mark leads eastward of Harbor 
rock. 

Ice.—F ogo harbor usually freezes over between January 9 and 19 
and the harbor is completely blocked with ice about 2 feet in thick- 
ness until about April 23; field ice appears about January 14 and 
disappears between May 1 and June 1. The first steamer arrives 
about April 30 and the last leaves on January 19. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change. in Fogo harbor at 7h. 
15m.; springs rise 45 feet, neaps 3 feet. 


22 CAPE ST: JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


Fogo town," situated around the harbor, is of considerable im- 
portance, being the depot for the surrounding fishing districts, and 
its population was 815 in 1891. 

Communication.—The steamer from Lewisport calls at Fogo har- 
bor weekly during summer and autumn. 

Lions Den point lies 900 yards eastward from the northern point 
of Rags island, and Lanes lookout, a rocky hill, 385 feet high (the 
highest in the island), which falls steeply to the northward, is 
situated 1,200 yards south-southwestward from Lions Den point. 

A rock awash at low water, bears 92°, distant nearly 4 mile from 
Lions Den point. 

Shoal bay, in the middle of the northern side of Fogo island, 
extends 3 miles southward, is ? mile wide, and open northward; it 
affords safe anchorage in summer in 8 to 10 fathoms water on the 
western side, near the head. Avoid approaching, in the line of their 
direction, the islands which run out from the middle of the head of 
the bay, and terminate in Steering island. | 

Bard island, on the eastern side of Shoal bay entrance, has a -con- 
siderable village on it, but Bard cove, on the eastern side of the island, 
is only a boat harbor. 

Dean rock, bearing 2°, distant ? mile from the northwestern point 
of Bard island, has a depth of 1 foot water over it; the sea generally 
breaks on the rock. Brimstone head seen through Fogo harbor en- 
trance, bearing 239°, leads northward, and the western side of Bard 
island, bearing eastward of 176°, leads westward of this rock. 

Joe Batts arm, the entrance of which is eastward about 1 mile 
from Bard island, is so full of rocks as to be unsuitable for navigation, 
though a vessel of 100 tons can be moored in it. There is a flourish- 
ing fishing village on its shores. 

Ice.—Northern ice usually arrives at Joe Batts arm about Jan- 
uary 3. 

Brookes point is about 1 mile northward of the rocks at the 
eastern side of the entrance of Joe Batts arm, and Joe Batts point, 
about + mile eastward of it, is low and shelving. 

Light.—A white square pyramidal lighthouse, 27 feet high, on 
Brookes point, exhibits at 97 feet above high water an intermittent 
white light, thus: Light, seven seconds; eclipse, three seconds, which 
should be seen from a distance of 15 miles in clear weather. The 
light is obscured by Round head when bearing northward of 280°. 
On the southern side of the lighthouse are a flat-roofed one-storied 
dwelling and a store, both white. 


@ Missionary reports give the following mean monthly temperatures at 
Fogo: January, 18°.6; February, 16°.8; March, 23°.5; April, 33°; May, 41°.8; 
June, 53°.4; July, 59°.7; August, 61°.3: September, 54°.6; October, 44°.4; 
November, 33°.2; December, 25°.3 F. 


ROUND HEAD—IRELAND ROCKS. as 


Round head, eastward 1? miles from Joe Batts point and the 
northeastern point of Fogo island, is 199 feet high and conspicuous. 

Rocks and islands northward and northeastward of Fogo 
island.— A. belt of islands and rocks, with an average width of 2 
miles, extends northeastward about 14 miles from Stone islet, which 
is situated 24 miles northward of Fogo head on a bearing 348°. 

The channel between this belt and Fogo island is navigable, but 
there are numerous shoals in it, which are shown on the chart, and 
it is advisable to obtain the assistance of a local pilot to proceed 
through it. There are also deep water channels amongst the islands 
and rocks, for the navigation of most of which local knowledge is 
required. 

Stone islet is small and 12 feet high. Penny rock, bearing 223°, 
distant about 800 yards from Stone islet, has less than 6 feet of water 
over it. 

Gappy island, bearing 50°, distant 1} miles from Stone islet, is 
small, 83 feet high, and conspicuous. Harvey rock, with less than 6 
feet of water over it, bears 165°, distant ? mile from the western end 
of Gappy island. 

West Countryman, Fast Countryman, and Long islands are 
groups of islets, 10 to 30 feet high, which, with some patches of rocks 
that break, lie between Seals Nest islands and Gappy island. 

Seals Nest islands, about 3 miles east-northeastward of Gappy 
island, are a group of islets, 10 to 30 feet high, which, with some 
rocks, extend northward and southward, nearly 13 miles. 

Storehouse islands are about 1,200 yards north-northeastward of 
Seals Nest islands; the largest of the group is 140 feet high, and the 
islets eastward of it are steep-to. 

Turr islands are a group east-northeastward 1 mile from Store- 
house islands, with a clear channel 4 mile wide between. These two 
groups of islands are the highest and most conspicuous of the belt. 
In passing through the channel between them, Round head of 
Fogo island open westward of Mile islet, he nnn 154°, leads west- 
ward of Lots rock, which lies west-northwestward, nearly $ mile 
from the highest Turr island and is awash at low water. Mile islet, 
situated southward, 14 miles from the highest Turr island, is 12 
feet high; shoals extend westward 600 yards and thence northward 
G00 yards from it; this islet requires a berth of $ mile. 

Little Fogo islands, southeastward of Turr islands, are a group 
the eastern and highest island of which is 136 feet high. 

Bishops islet, * mile northeastward of Little age islands aid the 
easternmost islet of the belt, is small and 10 feet high; shoal ground 
extends northwestward 1 mile and eastward 4 mile from it. 

Ireland rocks, the eastern of which bears 47°, distant 2-2. miles 
from Bishops islet, are three separate sunken heads, on which the 


524 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


sea generally breaks, with 30 to 70 fathoms of water close around 
them. This patch of rocks extends 1 mile westward of the eastern 
one. 

Jacobs ledge, east-northeastward 14 miles from Ireland rocks, and 
bearing 30°, distant 85 miles from Round head, is a patch of small 
extent, with 53 fathoms of water over it, on which the sea breaks in 
heavy weather. This ledge is the northeastern shoal of the belt. The 
bottom around it is foul and irregular, and there may be other rocks 
in its vicinity. 

Hard hat, bearing 297°, distant 14 miles from Jacobs ledge, is a 
patch of foul ground on which a depth of 11 fathoms has been found. 
This shoal breaks in bad weather, and the local fishermen report that 
there is a depth of 6 fathoms on it. 

Green Bay bank, bearing 292°, distant 24 miles from Hard hat, 
and 355°, distant 3? miles from Bishop island, is a patch of rocks on 
which a depth of 10 fathoms has been found. It breaks in bad 
weather. 

Drovers rock, bearing 350°, distant about 2 miles from Round 
head, is small and awash at high water. 

Current.—The southerly current setting toward Fogo island, at 
about 2 miles off Fogo head, turns and sets eastward along the north 
coast of the island, and among the rocks and islands off it, at a rate 
of $ to 14 miles, but is much influenced by the winds, being accel- 
erated by northerly and retarded by southerly winds, while before 
easterly gales it sometimes sets northward. The current is said to 
set either eastward or westward off Storehouse and Little Fogo 
islands. 

A branch of the southerly current sets southward between Change 
and Fogo islands at a rate of about $ mile an hour, but it is lost before 
arriving at Stag Harbor tickle. 

‘The east coast of Fogo island from Round head trends southeast- 
ward for 7 miles to cape Fogo. 

Hennings islet, bearing 125°, distant 1,600 yards from Round 
head, and 900 yards offshore, is 6 feet high and steep-to. 

Tilton harbor, southeastward 2,8; miles from Round head and 
34 miles northwestward of cape Fogo, is an inlet about 700 yards 
across, open northward; Pigeon island lies close northward of it. 
There is a depth of 3 feet water, rocky bottom, in its entrance, so it 
can only be entered by boats. On the shores of the harbor is a con- 
siderable fishing village, which, with its church, is visible from a 
short distance seaward. 

Light.—A square white tower, 17 feet high, on Sloans hill, on the 
western side of Tilton harbor entrance, exhibits between June | and 
December 15, at 91 feet above high water, a fixed red light, which is 
visible seaward except where obscured by Pigeon island. This light 


CAPE FOGO—CLERYS LEDGE. 525 


is for the guidance of the small craft which visit Tilton harbor during 
the fishing season. | 

Cape Fogo, the eastern point of Fogo island, is a bold headland, 
214 feet high. 

Ice.—Northern ice usually arrives on the east coast of Fogo island 
between January 12 and 20, closing the coast with easterly winds. 
Sometimes the coast is clear in April, at others, with a prevalence 

of northerly winds, navigation is stopped during May, and even until 
July. 

Current.—The current which has been described as turning east- 
ward along the northern coast of Fogo island after passing Round 
head, takes a southerly direction, following the eastern coast; it is 
affected by the tidal streams, the ebb or southgoing stream accelerat- 
ing and the flood or northgoing stream retarding it, so that occa- 
sionally at spring tides it is masked entirely. 

Rocks eastward of Fogo island.—Lanes rocks are two rocks 
lying at distances of 24 and 34 miles from Round head along a line 
bearing 67°; the western rock has 3 fathoms of water over it and the 
eastern rock has 2 fathoms. 

Clearing marks.—Copper island, open eastward of cape Fogo, 
bearing 175°, leads eastward, and Fogo head, open northward of Joe 
Batts point, bearing 253°, leads northward of Lanes rocks. 

Barracks islets are situated on a bank of foul ground, about 14 
miles in extent, lying northeastward 14 miles from the eastern Lanes 
rock; the highest islet is 25 feet high. Pigeon ledge, eastward 14 
miles from this bank, has 5 fathoms of water over it; and Inspector 
rock, with 3 fathoms of water over it, lies southeastward 1,600 yards 
from the bank. 

Cromwells ledge, bearing 62°, distant 114 miles from Round 
head, is about $ mile in extent, with irregular rocky bottom. There 
are two patches, $ mile apart, northward and southward, with 6 
fathoms water over them, and + mile southward of the southern one 
is a sounding of 44 fathoms, which is the least-known depth on the 
ledge. The sea breaks on the ledge in heavy weather. 

Snap rock, bearing 62°, distant 174 miles from Round head and 
290°, distant 22 miles from Funk island, is a shoal having an extent 
of about + mile, northeastward and southwestward, with a least depth 
of 5 feet over it. In calm weather there is little indication of its 
existence, but it breaks when there is any sea on. A current setting 
eastward is usually experienced in this locality. 

Clerys ledge, on which there is a least depth of 5 fathoms, and 
which breaks in bad weather, bears 62°, distant 10 miles from Round 
head, and lies 1 mile west-southwestward of the 44-fathom depth on 
Cromwells ledge. 


526 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


Blakeys ground, bearing 5°, distant 34 miles from Snap rock, is 
a patch of foul ground, on which the sea breaks in heavy weather. 
Depths of from 9 to 10 fathoms have been obtained over this shoal. 

Pigeon rock, bearing 64°, distant 5 miles from Pigeon island, has 
2 fathoms water over it. 

Clam rock, bearing 61°, distant 64 miles from cape Fogo, has 9 
fathoms water over it. 

The coast from cape Fogo trends west-northwestward for 7 miles 
to Burnt point, the eastern entrance point of Seldom-come-by harbor; 
it_is bold, rocky, and indented by Cape, Kippin, and Wild coves, 
which afford no shelter. 

Western Head rock, bearing 151°, distant ? mile from Western 
head, the headland 2% miles west-southwestward of cape Fogo, has 3 
fathoms water over it; Burnt point, well open of Wild point, bearing 
261°, leads southward of the rock. 

Light.—An open framework structure on Burnt point exhibits at 
25 feet above high water a fixed red lantern light, which should be 
seen from a distance of 2 miles in clear weather. 

Fog signal.—A diaphone fog trumpet, placed in a building on 
Burnt point close northward of the light structure, sounds thus: 
Blast, five seconds; silence, one hundred and thirteen seconds; in thick 
or foggy weather. 

The lght and fog signal are discontinued from January 1 to 
April 1. 

The fog-signal building, keeper’s dwelling, and storehouse are one- 
storied flat-roofed structures, painted white with a black horizontal 
band around the middle of each building. 

Seldom-come-by harbor, northwestward nearly a mile from 
Burnt point, is a cove about 800 yards across, which affords anchor- 
age in 6 fathoms, mud bottom, and an inner harbor, which runs in 
westward 600 yards from the cove, with a width of 200 yards and 
a depth of 12 feet. Shoal water extends nearly 400 yards off Burnt 
point, and Black reef, which is 400 yards long, northward and south- 
ward, and partly dry, bears 250°, distant 1,700 yards from Burnt 
point. 

The entrance to the harbor is between Burnt point and Black reef. 
There is a considerable village around the shore of the harbor, but 
no supplies except water can be obtained. 

Seldom-come-by harbor is the first anchorage northward of Greens 
pond, from which it is distant 50 miles; it is consequently a much 
frequented stopping place for the Labrador fishing fleet on the way 
north, when detained by foul winds or ice; in June, under these cir- 
cumstances, it is often crowded with vessels of 150 tons and less, 
with their closely packed freight of fishermen, women, and children; 
and again in the fall it is much frequented, though not by such large 


CANN ISLAND—STAG ROCK. 527 


numbers, the prevailing winds being more favorable for the return 
voyage. 

Ice.—Seldom-come-by harbor freezes between January 1 and 10, 
and sometimes remains frozen till as late as June, but at other times 
the ice clears as early as the middle of February. Field ice usually 
arrives in the early part of February and sometimes remains till June. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Seldom-come-by har- 
bor at 7h. 18m.; spring rise 44 feet, neaps 3 feet. 

Cann island lies 600 yards southward of a point of Fogo island 
at 14 miles westward of Burnt point, and is about 1,200 yards long, 
east and west, and 800 yards wide. A rock above water les 300 yards 
eastward of the island, with which it is connected by shoal water, and 
a shoal flat with Mouse island and several rocks on it extends west- 
ward 4 mile from the island. There is a rock, with 24 fathoms of 
water over it, in the channel northward of Cann island where the 
general depth is 4 fathoms. 

Light.—A light tower rising from the gable of a house, together 
39 feet high and painted white with red roofs, on Cann island, ex- 
hibits at 85 feet above high water a fixed white hight that is visible 
through an are of 270° and should be seen from a distance of 10 
miles in clear weather. 

Little Seldom-come-by harbor, a bay lying northwestward of 
Cann island, affords good summer anchorage in 6 to 10 fathoms 
water, mud bottom; the approach is clear, except the flat and islets 
westward of Cann island. 

Stag Harbor tickle is the channel between Fogo island on the 
north, and the Indian islands and their adjacent islets on the south; 
it is narrow and intricate, but is preferred by coasting vessels to the 
passage through Sir Charles Hamilton sound. 

Ice.—Stag Harbor tickle freezes solid in January, and the ice 
breaks up between May 1 and 10. 

Stag harbor, an inlet on the south coast of Fogo island, whose 
entrance bears 258°, distant 3 miles from Cann island, being open 
to the eastward, is not available for anchorage. 

The coast of Fogo island from the southern entrance point of Stag 
harbor trends southwestward for nearly a mile to South point; it 
then turns northwestward for 14 miles to Rogers point. 

Stag rock, bearing 156°, distant 200 yards from South point, has 
less than 6 feet water over it. 

Buoys.—Three nun bouys are moored in about 34 fathoms of water 
in the narrow part of Stag Harbor run, one on the southern side, 
painted red, and two on the northern side, painted black. The east- 
ern black buoy is surmounted by a white flag. The channel between 
the red buoy and the black buoys carries the greatest available depth 
of water. Mariners are cautioned against the possibility that these 


528 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


buoys may shift during heavy weather. They are removed annually 
at the close of navigation, but not later than January 1. 

Grandfather island, situated 2% miles south-southeastward of 
Cann island, is nearly $ mile long, eastward and westward, low and 
flat, and 600 yards northward as it is Little Grandfather islet, from 
which a reef extends east-northeastward, nearly 4 mile; between this 
islet and Cann island is the entrance to Stag Harbor tickle, about 2 
miles wide. 

East Indian island, | mile westward of Grandfather island and 
separated from it by a rocky channel, is about 2+ miles long, eastward 
and westward, and ? mile wide. 

West Indian ids the eastern end of which lies + mile north- 
ward of the western part of East Indian island, is abate 33 miles 
long, eastward and westward, # mile wide, low and covered with 
moss and stunted trees; the northern coast of the island is rocky and 
foul for 700 yards off it in places; foul ground extends ¢ mile south- 
ward of the island, and also westward from it to Dog Bay islands. 

Indian Island tickle, between East and West Indian islands, 
affords summer anchorage for small craft in 2 fathoms water, mud 
bottom. 

Indian Lookout island, situated 11 miles westward of South 
point, is about 300 yards in diameter, and is surmounted by a remark- 
able cone, 127 feet high. Rocks and foul ground extend northward 
800 yards and northwestward 1,300 yards from the islands, and 
Malcolm island hes 800 yards east-northeastward of its southern 
extremity. 

Directions for Stag Harbor tickle.— Avoid the shoals extending 
northeastward from West Indian island, and bring the northern end 
of Mouse island in line with the first steep rise in the hills within 
Burnt point, bearing 62°, which mark leads through the fairway of 
the tickle. When Rogers point is well open westward of South point,. 
bearing 309°, Stag ee is cleared; then steer through the channel 
between Indian Lookout island and Rogers point, giving a sufficient 
berth to a rock awash at low water, bearing 317°, distant nearly 400 
yards from the middle of the northeastern islet of Indian Lookout 
group, which might not be seen in a very smooth sea. 

Sir Charles Hamilton sound.—Ladle point, the Dore en- 
trance point of Sir Charles Hamilton sound, lies southeastward dis- 
tant 54 miles from Grandfather island, and the sound extends west- 
ward 14 miles from between them. Indian islands with Yellow Fox 
and Goose islands to the southward of them, and also groups which 
extend from them toward the Dog Bay islands, on the northwestern 
side of Sir Charles Hamilton sound, should not be approached within 
4 mile, or to less water than 10 fathoms. 


ROCKY BAY—GANDER BAY. 529 


Ice.—Sir Charles Hamilton sound freezes over in January, east- 
ward to a curved line from Seldom-come-by-harbor to East Indian, 
Goose, Grass, and Noggin islands; easterly winds fill the sound, winds 
between east-southeasterly and west-southwesterly clear it. Owing to 
the southerly current from cape Fogo, this locality and that of Copper 
island are often clear of ice. 

Rocky bay.—Rocky point is situated west-southwestward 41 miles 
from Ladle point, and westward, 6 miles from Rocky point, is a head- 
Jand off which are Grass islands. The entrance to Rocky bay is be- 
tween Rocky point and Grass islands. In the middle of the entrance 
are Green and Noggin islands, connected by shoal water. White 
island les a mile southeastward from Green island. The channels 
between Noggin and Grass islands, and also between Green and White 
islands, are clear. 

The inner part of the bay is divided into four arms, of which 
Southwest and Middle arms are shallow and encumbered with islets 
and bowlders. 

Northwest arm has in its middle part two rocks, with less than 6 
feet of water over them, and there is a patch of 34 fathoms water, 
nearly midway between Noggin island and Noggin hill; in this arm 
keep near the western shore, having the upper points of the eastern 
shore open, to clear the rocks in the middle; when White island is 
shut in with the outer eastern point of the arm, bearing about 52°, 
the inner rock is past, and vessels may anchor in 4 to 6 fathoms, mud 
bottom. 

Noggin hill, on the western side of Northwest arm, is wooded, 251 
feet high, and conspicuous from being surrounded by low land. 

Noggin cove, the westernmost cove of Rocky bay. is generally 
shallow. 

Tickle island lies close off the mainland at 24 miles west-south- 
westward of Grass islands; it is separated on its northwestern side 
from Gander island by a channel about 600 yards wide. 

Gander island, in the entrance of Gander bay, is 14 miles long, 
north-northeastward and west-southwestward, and about 600 yards 
wide; shoal water extends + mile from its northern end, and a shoal, 
terminating in Duck islet, stretches southwestward 800 vards from its 
southern end. 

Gander bay, the principal entrance of which is between Gander 
island and Dog point, which hes 2-4; miles west-northwestward, 
extends southward for 124 miles, and Gander river flows into its 
head. 

Storehouse island, 4 mile off the eastern shore of the bay at 2} 
miles within Duck islet, is flat, and 29 feet high; shoal water extends 
southwestward # mile from it, and Robinson rock, the shoalest part 

76846—09 34 


530 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


of this foul ground, bears 255°, distant 900 yards from the northwest- 
ern point of the island. The western side of Gander island, open 
westward of Duck islet, bearing 27°, leads westward of Robinson 
rock. 

Shoal bay, on the western side of Gander bay at about 13 miles 
within Dog point, has numerous islets and rocks in it. Farewell 
head, open eastward of Dog point, bearing 353°, leads eastward of 
them. 

Fox island is + mile off the western side of the bay, to which it is 
connected by shoal water, at 4% miles within Dog point, and Bussey 
point is a low promontory on the same shore at 34 miles farther in; 
shoals, having 12 to 15 feet of water over them, lie directly between 
Fox island and Bussey point; the point next above Bussey point, 
open eastward of it, bearing 196°, leads eastward of these shoals. 

In the reach from Bussey point to Clark point, at 34 miles to the 
southward, keep Storehouse island open westward of Beaver point, 
bearing about 21°, until past the point next above Bussey point, to 
clear a long shoal, which stretches # mile off a low point of the east- 
ern shore of the bay. A shoal, with 34 fathoms of water over it, lies 
in mid-channel, bearing 168°, distant 1 mile from Bussey point. 

Anchorage.—There is safe anchorage, bottom generally mud, in 
the bay above Fox island. 

Ice.—Gander bay freezes about January 1 and the ice clears about 
May 1. 

Tides and tidal streams.—It is high water, full and change, in 
Gander bay at 7h. 55m.; springs rise 4 feet, neaps 3 feet. 

At Clark point at springs the rate of the ebb stream reaches 2 
knots, and there is a very weak flood for about three hours; at neaps 
there is no flood stream. 

Gander river, a considerable fresh-water stream, flowing out of 
the lake of the same name, which is 33 miles from the head of the 
bay, is crossed, at 5 miles below the point where it issues from the 
lake, by the Northern and Western Railway. 

Dog bay extends southwestward 7 miles from its entrance between 
Dog point and Farewell head, at about 3 miles to the northward. 
Dog islands, a group of islets and rocks, extend north-northwestward 
about 1-4; miles from Dog point. 

Steering island, in the middle of the fairway into Dog bay, is 
small, 27 feet high, and steep-to. Charley island bears 249°, distant 
~,; mile from Steering island, and a reef extends southwestward 3 
mile from it. 

Vesuvius rock, bearing 70°, distant } mile from Steering island, 
is awash at low water. Half of Goose island open southward of the 
southern Dog Bay island, bearing about 106°, leads southward, and 
Charley island, well open northwestward of Steering island, bearing 
244°, leads close northward of the rock. 


GULNARE ROCK—-PECKFORD ISLAND. 531 


Gulnare rock, bearing 142°, distant 1,400 yards from Steering 
island, has less than 6 feet of water over it; Noggin hill open north- 
eastward of Gander island, bearing 131° leads northeastward, and 
the southeastern shore of Dog bay open northwestward of the north- 
western Dog island, bearing 221° leads northwestward of this rock. 

Directions.—In entering Dog bay pass on either side of Steering 
island, observing the marks to clear Vesuvius and Gulnare rocks, and 
thence in mid-channel between the northwestern Dog island and 
Charley island. Within Dog islands the bay is clear of shoals at a 
moderate distance from its shores. 

Anchorage.—There is anchorage above Double islet at 3% miles 
within Steering island, in 4 to 8 fathoms of water, mud bottom, be- 
tween some islands and the northwestern shore; between the islands 
and the southeastern shore the bottom is foul. 

Farewell head, the northern entrance point of Dog bay, is 243 
feet high. 

Dog Bay islands, the northern end of which bears 69° from Fare- 
well head, is a group of islands and rocks extending north-northwest- 
ward and south-southeastward 2? miles, and having a general height 
of 20 to 40 feet, except the northern end of the northern island, which 
is a hill 183 feet high. 

The channel between Farewell head and Dog Bay islands is about a 
mile wide and clear southward to Vesuvius rock. 

Wadham islands, distributed through the quadrant between 
about 90° and 180° from cape Fogo, are seven in number, and, in- 
cluding East-southeast ground and Frampton rock, extend in an 
easterly and westerly direction for 13 miles, while between them and 
the mainland westward of Penguin islands, are numerous islets and 
reefs. 

Ice.—The northern ice generally arrives between January 10 and 
20. 

Copper island, the western of these islands, is 192 feet high and 
the highest of the group. 

Frampton rock, bearing 280°, distant 24 miles from Copper island 
summit, has 3 fathoms of water over it. 

Duck island, east-southeastward 14 miles from Copper island, is 
generally low and rocky, with a small peak in its middle 69 feet high. 

White island, northeastward, nearly 1 mile from Duck island, is 
remarkably barren, nearly flat-topped, 99 feet high, and of a white 
color. At # mile eastward of White island is Shag islet, from which 
shoals extend eastward and westward. 

Peckford island, southeastward 1 mile from White island, is the 
largest island in the group; at its northern end is a sharp peak 86 
feet high. 


532 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


Offer Wadham island, the easternmost island of the group, hes 
northeastward 3} miles from Peckford island, and is 62 feet high. 
Coleman and Small islands are situated between Peckford and Offer 
Wadham islands. 

Light.—A circular red lighthouse, with its dome striped red and 
white vertically, 44 feet high, on Offer Wadham island, exhibits, at 
100 feet above high water a revolving white light, showing a flash 
every thirty seconds, which should be seen from a distance of 12 niles 
in clear weather. 

The keeper’s dwelling close to the lighthouse is painted white, with 
a red roof. 

Signals.—Tlus lighthouse is supplied with the International code 
signals. 

East-southeast ground, bearing 104°, distant 14 miles from Offer 
Wadham island hghthouse, is a shoal with 9 feet of water over it. 

Tom Cod rock, with 12 feet over it, bears 149°, nearly 1 mile from 
Otfer Wadham lighthouse, and with the peak of Peckford island in 
line with the northern cliff of Coleman island, bearing 244°. 

South-southwest rock, bearing 156°, distant nearly 2 miles from 
Small island, is awash at high water. 

Topsail rock, bearing 148°, distant 5} miles from Offer Wadham 
hghthouse, has 9 fathoms of water over it and is doubtful in position. 

Bottle rock, bearing 103°, distant 54 miles from Offer Wadham 
lighthouse, has 9 fathoms of water over it. 

Shark ledge and Scraggy rock are dangers of doubtful position, 
bearing 80°, distant about 64 miles from Offer Wadham lighthouse. 
The sea is reported to break here in heavy weather. 

Channels.—There are several deep-water channels between Peck- 
ford island and the mainland; the widest is that immediately north- 
ward of North Penguin island and Edwards reef, but for this there 
is no leading mark; the southern points of Copper and Duck islands 
in line, bearing 298°, lead through the channel between Scrub rock 
and Schoolroom rock. 

Funk island, the summit of which is in latitude 49° 45’ 99”7 N., 
longitude 53° 10’ 49’” W., lies east-southeastward, distant 244 miles 
from Offer Wadham island; it is $ mile long in an easterly and 
westerly direction, about 300 yards wide, 46 feet high and nearly flat, 
with scanty vegetation and peaty soil on its highest part. 

Landing can be effected in calm weather at Gannet head on the 
southern coast, and on the northern side of Indian gulch, which is 
southward of Escape (the northeastern) point, but not at the head 
of this gulch, as at all times the scend of the sea would make it un- 
safe for a boat in such a narrow place. On the northern coast, 200 
vards westward of Escape point, is a steep cliff, up and down which 
the sea rises and falls without breaking, so that even in a high sea 


RAGGED HARBOR—PENGUIN ISLANDS. Sao 


landing may be made on the Bench, which is a shelf 4 feet wide, 
sloping up the cliff and quickly narrowing to a few inches broad, but 
keeping that breadth for some 10 feet, after which the ascent is steep 
with good holding. 

Besides Brenton rock, which bears 240°, distant 54 miles from the 
island and has 5 fathoms water over it, the island is surrounded by 
shoals within distances varying from 2 miles to $ mile; these shoals 
are marked on the chart. Although on some of the patches there is 
a depth of as much as 15 to 16 fathoms, yet, through the sudden 
change in the depth of water, 60 fathoms being the general depth in 
the vicinity of the island, the sea breaks over them in heavy weather. 

Current.—<A strong southerly set is said to be sometimes expert- 
enced near ifunk island. 

Caution is necessary when in the vicinity of Funk island, especial! Ly 
at might or during foggy weather. 

Tides.--it is high water, full and change, at Funk island at 7h. 
0m.; springs rise 2 to 3 feet approximately. 

Ice was encountered near Funk island and westward.of it on June 
Ngo 2a.) L899. 

The coast of Newfoundland from Ladle poimt, the southern en- 
trance point of Sir Charles Hamilton sound, trends east-southeast- 
ward for 10 miles to abreast Penguin islands; it is low and almost 
straight, and there are many shoals off it. 

Ladle island, northeastward, 1,200 yards from Ladle point, is 
small and 34 feet high; a rock, with less than 6 feet of water over it, 
bears 277°, 4 mile from the northern point of the island. 

Ragged harbor is 2} miles southeastward of Ladle island; in its 
entrance is an islet 6 feet high, and bearing about 297° from the islet 
are two rocks with less than 6 feet water over them; the northwestern 
rock is distant about $ mile, and there is also a rock bearing 210° 
distant about 200 yards from the islet. The harbor affords good 
temporary anchorage for small vessels bound southward and detained 
by a southerly gale, instead of bearing up for Seldom-come-by harbor. 

Bring the fall of a ridge of high land in line with White point, the 
first point inside on the northwestern shore, bearing 218°, and anchor 
off White point in 4 fathoms water, mud bottom. 

Penguin islands are two fiat islets about 20 feet high, bearing 
northwestward and southeastward ? mile from each other; the north- 
western lies 5 miles south-southeastward from Peckford island. 

Edwards reef, consisting of extensive patches on which are some 
small rocks about 10 feet high, lies west-northwestward of the islets. 

Light.—A circular iron tower, 47 feet high, painted red and white 
in vertical stripes, on the northeastern end of North Penguin island, 
exhibits at 62 feet above high water, a fixed white light, which should 
be seen from a distance of 9 miles in clear weather. 


534 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


The keeper's dwelling is attached to the eastern side of the light- 
house and painted in red and white vertical stripes. 

Signals.—The light-house is supplied with the International code 
signals. 

The coast from abreast Penguin islands trends east-southeastward 
for 163 miles to Cape Freels; it is generally low and flat, and without 
any distinguishing marks. 

Deadman point bears 139°, distant 64 miles from South Penguin 
island, and Deadman rock, 350°, distant 14 miles from the point, has 
15 feet of water over it. 

Deadman bay, lying between Deadman point and a point at 34 
miles southeastward, off which is Outer Cat island, 70 feet high, 
affords fair anchorage in 9 fathoms of water during summer, sheltered 
from westerly to southerly winds, in its western corner. The holding 
ground is good, but a shoal with 3 fathoms of water over it, bears 
171°, distant 4 mile from Deadman point. Several patches with 
depths of 5 to 9 fathoms water over them lie off Deadman bay, and 
break in heavy weather. 

Cat harbor.—Inner Cat island hes south-southwestward 1 mile 
from Outer Cat island, and Cat harbor lies in the bight formed 
between them. It is small and dangerous, and only available for 
small vessels in fine weather. A 6-fathom rocky bank lies north- 
eastward, about a mile from Inner Cat island. 

Ice.—Cat harbor freezes between January 1 and February 1 and 
clears as soon as the ice leaves the coast. 

Cape Freels, at the northern end of the great Bonavista bay, is 
low and rocky; it forms three points: North bill; Middle bill, east- 
southeastward, about 1 mile from North bill; and South bill, south- 
southeastward, 14 miles from Middle bill. Cape ridge, about a mile 
inland from them, is 1838 feet high. 

Ice.—The sea about cape Freels freezes between January 1 and 
February 1, and ice often remains near the cape in May and some- 
times as late as June. 

Gull island, eastward, distant 14 miles from South bill, has deep 
water around it. Gull rock, with 9 feet of water over it, bears 303°, 
distant 4 mile from the island. 

Bonavista bay.—South bill of cape Freels and cape Bonavista, 
the outer points of this bay, bear north-northwestward and south- 
southeastward, distant 364 miles from each other. 

The bay is divided into two main branches by a group of islands 
extending northeastward, and terminating in Gooseberry islands. 
The northwestern portion is again divided into two main arms, sep- 
urated by,.groups of islands and a portion of the mainland; they both 
trend southwestward for 28 miles, the northern arm terminating in 
Freshwater bay, the southern in Bloody bay. 


BONAVISTA BAY. 53D 


The southeastern main portion of Bonavista bay, between Goose- 
berry islands and cape Bonavista, has one principal arm, Clode sound, 
which trends southwestward 45 miles. Besides this sound there are 
numerous smaller sounds, bays, and intricate channels among the 
islands of the archipelago inside of Gooseberry islands. 

The entrance of the northwestern portion of Bonavista bay is 6 
miles wide, between Shoe point and Gooseberry islands; it then 
divides into Locker and Cottel reaches. 

Locker reach commences bétween Fair islands and Brandies rock; 
it is 12 miles wide, and its direction is southwestward for a distance 
of 11 miles on the north side of Deer and Locker Flat islands, when 
it receives the name of Content reach and continues in the same direc- 
tion for 5 miles to the entrance of Freshwater bay. The Brandies 
and rocks off Deer islands are the only shoals in these reaches. 

Pitt Sound reach is between Deer, Locker Flat, and Pitt Sound 
islands, and connects Cottel reach with Content reach. 

Approaching Bonavista bay.—The outer points, cape Freels 
and cape Bonavista, are so low that they can not be seen beyond a 
distance of about 14 miles in clear weather, and it is necessary to give. 
the rocks off Gooseberry islands a berth of 3 miles; it is also well to 
make the northwestern shore of Bonavista bay, about Greens Pond 
and Shoe point, which is comparatively free from shoals, or at night, 
to make Puffin Island light. 

Tee.—The harbors in Bonavista bay freeze over at intervals he- 
tween January 20 and March 20, and are closed at intervals by ice 
about a foot in thickness from January 20 to May 15. Field ice 
appears about February 15 and disappears toward the end of May. 
Coasters frequent the harbors throughout the year, but foreign vessels 
only between about May 1 and December 20. 

The shore of Bonavista bay from South bill trends sonth-south- 
westward for 14 miles to Shoe point. The area off this shore, within 
lines drawn 110°, 84 miles from Middle bill, thence 183°, 5 miles, and 
thence to Shoe point, is encumbered with shoals, interspersed with low 
rocky islets, which make approach to it dangerous, especially during 
foggy weather, though in a moderate sea fishermen with local experi- 
ence feel safe, as almost all the shoals show; but in a heavy swell, 
when the sea breaks in 7 to 10 fathoms of water, and it is all con- 
fused, only perfect knowledge and great experience would justify ap- 
proach to it. 

The chart and plan with the following directions afford sufficient 
information for the ordinary purposes of navigation, including the 
navigation of the outer channels between Flowers and Cabot (Stink- 
ing) islands, and northward, inside Middle and Charge rocks, during 
moderate weather, such as often prevails in summer when the fishing 
vessels are proceeding to Labrador. 


536 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


Pincher island, southwestward 4 miles from Gull island, is about 
1,600 yards long, northeastward and southwestward, and 800 yards 
wide; a square church on the highest part of the island is conspicuous. 
Pinchers bight, northwestward of the island, affords safe anchorage 
in summer for small vessels in 24 fathoms of water. 

Pouch island, southward about 1% miles from Pincher island, is 
80 feet high, and about $ mile long, north-northeastward and south- 
southwestward, with several islets and reefs around it; eastward # 
mile from it are East reefs, the outer or eastern rock of which dries, 
and is generally visible. 

Margery rock, bearing 66°, distant 1 mile from East reefs, has 
less than 6 feet water over it, and generally breaks. 

Directions for Pinchers bight.—From the southeastward ap- 
proach with Pincher Island church, well open northeastward of 
Hincks islet, which is 12 feet high and lies $ mile north-northeast- 
ward of Pouch island, bearing about 321°, and having passed the 
outer rock of East reef, bring and keep it astern in line with the 
northeastern end of Flowers island, a large island southward of 
Pouch island, bearing 180°, until Bundells Gaze, a remarkable granite 
lump on the mainland, is in line with Pound rocks, the outer rocks 
northward of Pincher island, bearing 311°. Keep on this line until 
Pincher Island church bears 239°, when sheer eastward to pass Pound 
rocks, the channel between which and the shoals to the northeast- 
ward is 800 yards wide; anchor in the bight within Pound rocks. 

Ice.—The bays between Pincher island and Pools arm, 7 miles 
southwestward, all freeze between January 1 and February 1, and 
clear as soon as the ice leaves the coast. 

Flowers islands, southward 1,4, miles from Pouch island, are two 
islands, with some small islets close northwestward of them; the 
southwestern island, 103 feet high, is the larger and higher; together 
they are about 1,200 yards in extent; a narrow channel, in which a 
few resident fishermen secure their boats, runs northwestward and 
southeastward between the islands. 

Swains islands lie off the mainland at about 4 miles west-south- 
westward of Pincher island; there is a fishing village with a conspicu- 
ous square church, painted white with a dark roof, on the southern 
of these islands. Some sealing vessels lay up during summer in 
Swains tickle, the channel nearest the mainland; the entrance to this 
tickle is from the southward, but no directions can be given for it. 

Catamaran reef, the easternmost of the shoals off Swains islands, 
bears 76°, distant 700 yards from Swains Shag rock, an islet 40 feet 
high. 

Butterfly islets are a group of rocks about 30 feet high, with foul 
ground extending 300 yards northward of them, bearing 233°, distant 
1, miles from Flowers island summit. 


BLACK REEF—STINKING ISLANDS. iS HF 


Black reef, bearing 352°, distant 800 vards from Butterfly islets, 
is a small rock about 10 feet high. 

East Twin, a rock with 13 feet of water over it, bears 274°, distant 
1,200 yards from Butterfly islets, and West Twin, a rock with 12 feet 
water over it, is situated 1 mile in the same direction from the islets. 

Half rock, bearing 243°, distant 1,6, miles from Butterfly islets, 
has 9 feet of water over it. 

Three rocks and Jacobs ground, south-southeastward 14 miles 
from Flowers island, cover an area 1 mile long in an easterly and 
westerly direction, and 1,400 yards wide, in which there are several 
shoal heads, with depths of 7 feet to 5 fathoms over them, and deep 
water among them. 

Shoe point, in line with the northern side of Copper island, bearing 
243°, leads southeastward; Shoe point, in line with the southern side 
of Newell island, an island lying northwestward of Copper island, 
bearing 248°, leads northwestward; Pouch Island summit. in line 
with the northeastern side of Flowers islands, bearing 326°, leads 
northeastward ; and the main portion of Pouch island, open westward 
of Flowers islands, bearing 354°, leads westward of these shoals. 

Stinking or Cabot islands, known as Stinking islands by the 
fishermen, are the outer of the low rocky islets lving off the shore 
between cape Freels and Shoe point; these two islands are about 400 
yards apart northwestward and southeastward, 19 and 22 feet high, 
respectively, and bear 153°, distant 543 miles from Gull island. 

Light.—A lighthouse. rising from the middle of a square build- 
ing with flat roofs, 47 feet high, and painted red and white in hori- 
zontal bands, on the northwestern Cabot island, exhibits at 74 feet 
above high water, an intermittent white light, showing thus: Light, 
eleven seconds; eclipse, nine seconds, which should be seen from a 
distance of 10 miles in clear weather. 

Signals.—The lighthouse is supphed with the International code 
signals. 

Rocks.—Bleak islets, which are rocks 8 feet high, and Stevensons 
islets. which are rocks 14 feet high, lie between Cabot and Flowers 
islands; and halfway between Bleak islets and Cabot islands is a 
rock with 6 feet of water over it. 

Stinking banks lie from 14 to 3 miles northeastward of Cabot 
islands, with depths of 12 to 16 fathoms between; the banks extend 
14 miles east-northeast and west-southwest, with a width of } mile, 
in patches having 7 to 9 fathoms of water over them: from the outer 
patch of 7 fathoms Cabot Island lighthouse bears 245°, distant 8 miles. 

Middle rock, bearing 354°, distant 2 miles from Cabot Island light- 
house, is awash at low water. and the sea generally breaks over it. 

A rock, with 4 fathoms over it, bears 28°, distant 600 vards from 


Middle rock. 


538 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


Charge rock, lying with Gull island bearing 292°, distant 24 
miles, and Middle rock in line with the western end of Cabot island 
has 4 feet of water over it, and generally breaks. 

Norris rock, lying with Gull island bearing 292°, distant 14 miles, 
has 5 fathoms of water over it. 

Greens Pond island, lying north-northeastward about 2 miles 
from Shoe point, is 1} miles long northwestward and southeastward, 
7% mile wide, and 171 feet high, presenting a nearly flat summit; a 
chain of islets extends southeastward 14 miles from it, without navi- 
gable channels between them; the southeastern group of these islets 
are Copper, Pigeon, and Horse islands, which are almost connected. 
Copper island, the southwestern of this group, rises to a peak 115 
feet high, and Black rocks and Black reef lie southeastward 400 yards 
from it; the rocks and reef are steep-to on the seaward side, in which 
direction the water deepens quickly to 100 fathoms. Bearing 48°, 
distant 300 yards from Horse island, is Horse rock, with less than 
6 feet of water over it; and bearing 239°, distant 300 yards from Cop- 
per island, is Herring rock, with 12 feet of water over it. 

Cookroom rock, bearing 93°, distant 400 yards from the south- 
eastern point of Greens Pond island, has 12 feet of water over it. 

Sealskin rock, with 15 feet water over it, bears 14°, and a rock, 
also with 15 feet over it, bears 31°, each distant 1,100 yards from 
Puffin Island light-house. 

Puffin and Newell islands le northwestward of Copper island. 
Puffin island, about 1,200 yards southeastward of Greens Pond island, 
is flat, and 55 feet high; bearing 48°, 200 yards from it, is Puffin 
rock, with 12 feet water over it; and bearing 53°, 800 yards from the 
island, is Puffin ledge, with 5 fathoms over it. Newell island, 38 
feet high, is divided from Puffin island by a narrow rocky channel. 

Light.—A light-house, rising from one corner of a granite build- 
ing roofed with slate, 40 feet high, on Puffin island, exhibits at 85 
feet. above high water a fixed red light, visible over an are of 270°, 
between the bearings 158° and 68°, which should be seen from a dis- 
tance of 10 miles in clear weather. 

Greens Pond harbor is the narrow gully on the southern side of 
Greens Pond island, between the island and the offlying rocks. Its 
entrance is between Cookroom and Puffin rocks. The harbor is used 
by sealing steamers and vessels, but on no account should approach 
be made to it without local knowledge. 

The fishing town of Greens Pond is on the shores of the harbor, 
and it contains a church and mercantile establishments; during sum- 
mer it is often without fresh water; the population in 1891 was 1,317. 

Communication.—__A steamer from port Blandford calls here 
weekly during summer and autumn. 

Coal.—Generally about 20 tons of coal can be obtained. 


? 


MIDSUMMER ROCK——MAIN POOLS ISLAND. 5389 


Ice.—Greens Pond harbor freezes about January 18: it then is 
closed at intervals until February 8, after which it is generally com- 
pletely closed by ice about 2 feet in thickness until March 9; field 
.ice appears about March 11 and disappears about May 11. The first 
vessel usually arrives about April 28, and the last leaves about 
January 7. 

Midsummer rock bears 228°, distant a little more than 4 mile 
from the southwestern point of Copper island, has 2 feet water over 
it and a depth of 11 fathoms close-to. The western end of Greens 
Pond island open westward of Maiden island, bearing 340°, leads 
westward of the rock. 

Anchorage.—There is anchorage in fine weather between Maiden 
and Greens Pond islands in 7 to 10 fathoms water. In proceeding 
to it pass westward of Midsummer rock. 

The anchorage southward of Greens Pond island is indifferent, and 
as the bottom is chiefly rock with some patches of sand, care is neces- 
sary in selecting suitable ground; vessels should ride with a long 
scope of cable. 

Pools harbor.—The entrance to this harbor, northward of Greens 
Pond island, is between Partridge, Grassy, and Odd islands, on the 
southwest, and Pools islands on the northeast. 

South Pound islet, 47 feet high, lies north-northeastward nearly 
a mile from Greens Pond island. A rock, with 2 fathoms of water 
over it, lies southwestward nearly 200 yards from its western end. 

Worth Pound islet, northeastward $ mile from South Pound islet, 
is 30 feet high, and a reef, on which the sea generally breaks, extends 
southwestward 400 yards from it. 

A rock, with 5 fathoms of water over it, bears 51°, nearly 800 yards 
from North Pound islet. 

North rocks, bearing 50°, distant from 3% mile to 14 miles from 
the northeastern point of Newell island, are two rocky patches with 
2 and 3 fathoms least water over them. 

Liver ledge, bearing 59°, distant nearly 2 miles from Puffin Island 
lighthouse, has 7 fathoms water over it. 

Leading mark.—The summit of Big Pools island, in line with 
the northeastern side of South Pound islet, bearing 305°, leads 600 
yards northeastward of North rocks, and 550 yards southwestward of 
Liver ledge. 

Big Pools island, northwestward nearly | mile from South Pound 
islet, is 114 feet high, with a round summit, and rather higher than 
the adjacent land. There are two flagstaffs on the island. 

Main Pools island lies about 200 yards northwestward of Big 
Pools island; its church, which has a spire and is painted white, is 


visible from a distance except when hidden hehind Big Pools Island 
hill. 


540 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


Midway rock, with less than 6 feet water over it, les directly in 
the fairway of Pools harbor approach, bearing 236°, distant 800 yards 
from the western point of South Pound islet and_ between that islet 
and the shoals off Greens Pond island. 

Rocks.—A rock, with 12 feet water over it, bears 42°, distant 400- 
vards from Grassy island; there is also a rock awash at low water, 
lying 100 yards northward of Odd island; the harbor is otherwise 
clear of ‘sunken shoals, except close to the shore. 

Benburry rock, bearing 217°, distant 65 yards from Benburry 
islet, and in the fairway of Pools harbor, has 9 feet of water over it. 

Directions.—There are no leading marks for the channels between 
Pound islets nor for those northeastward and southwestward of 
them. The best channels are immediately southeastward and north- 
westward of South Pound islet, where in a moderate sea the shoals 
are generally visible; after passing South Pound islet, steer for Big 
Pools island, not opening Main Pools church westward of it, until the 
jargest islet westward of Grassy island is open westward of that 
island, bearing about 225°, pass Odd island and anchor in 7 to 10 
fathoms water, mud bottom, with the western side of Grassy island 
just touching the eastern side of Odd island, bearing 150°, and 
Main Pools church bearing 59°. 

A slight swell sets in here during easterly gales, but it is not dan- 
gerous to shipping. There is anchorage with smooth water in 5 
fathoms at 4 mile farther up the harbor; and small vessels moor in 
the channel northwestward of Main Pools island, or in Puddingbag 
cove. Sealing vessels when lying up prefer the channel between Main 
Pools and Big Pools islands. 

Ice.—Pools harbor freezes early in January and the ice breaks up 
toward the end of April. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Pools harbor at Th. 
Om.; springs rise + feet, neaps 3 feet. 

Communication.—The steamer from port Blandford calls at 
Pools harbor weekly during summer and autumn. 

Loo cove, in the mainland west-northwestward about 1 mile from 
Greens Pond island, affords good anchorage; in running for it, when 
westward of Greens pond, keep Horse island just open southward 
of Greens Pond island, bearing 110°, until Pools church is well open 
westward of Partridge island, bearing 5°, to clear the ledge which 
stretches out nearly 300 yards from Greens Pond island. After pass- 
ing Ford island, on the western side of the narrowest part of the 
channel, and where it is 400 yards wide, there is good anchorage in 
11 fathoms water for $ mile to the northward. 

The northwestern side of South Pound islet in line with the south- 
eastern point of Partridge island, bearing 69°, leads between two 


SHOE POINT—NEW HARBOR. 541 


sunken rocks 200 yards apart, into Loo cove, where there is good 
anchorage in 5 to 7 fathoms of water. 

General directions.—Irom the southeastward and bound to 
Greens Pond harbor, pass about 4 miles eastward of Shark rock 
(p. 545) and then steer for Shoe point; although this is not the 
most prominent point of the coast, there is a chance, should it be 
foggy, of the fog hfting as it is approached, but 1f the weather con- 
tinues very Ghiele beware of Midsummer rock. . 

Usually in navigating along this coast it is advisable to pass Batata 
of Charge rock and Stinking banks. 

To proceed through the channel between Stevensons and Bleak 
islets, which is 1 mile wide, pass eastward of Jacobs ground (p. 537), 
and give a sufficient berth to the shoal ground extending southwest- 
ward nearly 400 yards from Bleak islets; then steer 14° to pass be- 
tween Middle rock (p. 537) and Cobblers Fishing rock; the western 
summit of Butterfly islets in line with the northwestern end of 
Flowers islands, bearing 218°, leads between these rocks; when this 
mark comes on keep it so until Middle bill of cape Freels opens north- 
eastward of Lapstone rocks, which lie about 1 mile southward of Gull 
island, bearing about 318°, then steer for Gull island, passing south- 
westward of Charge and Norris rocks, and northeastward not less 
than 200 vards from Gull island. 

By the passage inside Flowers islands, from } mile southeastward 
of Big Pools island, steer 51°, and bring South Pound islet open 
westward of North Pound islet, bearing 215°; keep this mark on to 
clear Half rock and the Twins, until Black reef is in line with the 
southern point of Flowers islands, bearing 90°. Then steer to pass 
$ mile northwestward of Flowers islands, and after passing these 
islands, bring Black reef just open northwestward of the islets off 
Flowers islands, bearing 234°, which mark leads between Stevensons 
islets and Margery rock; when northward of Stevensons islets, steer 
about 81°, to pass between Middle rock and Cobblers Fishing rock; 
then proceed as above directed. 

These two runs, inside and outside Flowers islands, are the only 
channels that can be used without local knowledge; there are others 
nearer the shore used by fisherman who do not hesitate to take through 
them sealing vessels of 200 to 300 tons, which are so strongly built for 
contact with ice, that a bump on a rock in moderate weather neither 
hurts the vessel nor disturbs the pilot. 

Shoe point, southwestward 2," miles from Puffin Island light- 
house, is flat and low, but the hills immediately behind it rise steeply 
to a height of 214 feet; the shore of the bay from the point trends 
westward for 1} miles to New harbor. 

New harbor has a remarkable chffy hill 200 feet high on its 
western side and two low islets close off its eastern entrance point: the 


542 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


entrance is 100 yards wide; the harbor, which extends northward 
1,200 yards, increases in width to 200 yards; there are a few small 
rocks close off its western shore, but with the exception of these it is 
clear, with good anchorage in 4 to 5 fathoms of water, mud bottom. 

Indian bay, formed by the continuation of the shore from New 
harbor on the north and by Silver Fox island, 271 feet high, Brown 
Fox island, and the shore in continuation of them, on the south, 
trends westward for 8 miles, and then branches northwestward in 
Northwest arm for 13 miles and west-southwestward in Southwest 
arm for 1 mile. 

Cat island, on the north shore of Indian bay, rises in a conical 
hill, 214 feet high, at its eastern end; immediately eastward of the 
island is a small islet 6 feet high, with a rock close eastward of it and 
rocks between it and Cat island. 

Cat cove, northeastward of Cat island, is a favorite place of shelter 
for wind-bound sealing vessels; the anchorage is in 7 to 13 fathoms 
water, and its approach is clear, except the islet and rock eastward of 
Cat island; these are left on the port hand when entering, as there is 
no safe channel between them and Cat island. 

Cutmans island, 4 mile long, eastward and westward about 4 
mile wide and 77 feet high, is separated by a rocky channel 4 mile 
wide from the western end of Brown Fox island and by a channel 
600 yards wide from the mainland southwestward of it. The main 
channel of Indian bay, northward of Cutmans island and between it 
and Camel island, is + mile wide. 

Ship island, 1 mile westward of Camel island, is the largest of 
a group which extends $ mile across Indian bay from its northern 
shore. 

North arm, northeastward of Ship island, affords good anchorage 
in 4 to 13 fathoms water, mud bottom. 

The channel between the Ship island group and the southern shore 
of Indian bay is 600 yards wide, with a depth of 44 fathoms in mid- 
channel, 6 fathoms near the shore, and 7 fathoms near the southern 
island of the group. 

Fair islands, southward of Brown Fox island, comprise a barren 
group of many dome-shaped isolated granite islands, varying in 
height from the low eastern islets to 300 feet. There is moderately 
good anchorage for small vesseis on the northwestern side of the 
eastern island; the southern entrance is the best; it is 100 yards wide, 
with a rock awash at low water spring tides off the eastern point, 
therefore keep on the western shore when going in; the anchorage is 
in 6 fathoms water, off the houses on the island. 

Pork island, the western of the Fair islands, is on the northern side 
of the entrance to Trinity bay. 


TRINITY BAY 


LOCKER BAY. 5438 


Ice.—Fair islands anchorage freezes about January 11 and clears 
about April 13. 

Communication.—The steamer from port Blandford calls at Fair 
islands anchorage weekly during summer and autumn. 

Lewis island is about 1 mile west-southwestward of Pork island, 
and near the middle of its southern side there is a remarkably steep 
hill, 456 feet high, having several conspicuous bowlders on its summit, 
Frying-pan island, immediately under this hill, is dome-shaped, 149 
feet high, with a clear channel 200 yards wide between it and Lewis 
island. 

Trinity bay extends westward 7 miles from its entrance between 
Pork and Lewis islands. 

Southwest island, in the eastern entrance to Trinity bay at 600 
yards southward of Pork island, is 52 feet high, and steep-to on its 
southeastern side, but rocks and shoal water extend 400 yards off its 
northeastern and western ends. 

Saint island, midway between Pork and Lewis islands, and bearing 
262°, distant 1,600 yards from Southwest island, is 119 feet high; 
close off its eastern point is a rock, and its western end is foul to the 
distance of 300 yards. A rock, with less than 6 feet water over it, 
bears 331°, distant 4 mile from the eastern end of Saint island; the 
southern point of the eastern Fair island open southward of the east- 
ern of the southern points of Pork island, bearing 79°, leads south- 
ward of it. 

Ice.—Northern ice arrives about March 6 and remains until about 
April 25, and Trinity bay is usually covered with locally formed ice 
during February and March; the Northwest arm is generally frozen 
about the end of January or the beginning of February, and is clear 
about the middle of March; the Southwest arm freezes regularly from 
the middle of January to the middle of May. 

Drake cove, southwestward of Drake island, which les about S00 
yards westward of Lewis island, affords fair anchorage in 7 to 10 
fathoms of water; the northwestern shore is rugged, and rocks ex- 
tend from the northern entrance point nearly to mid-channel between 
it and Drake island. 

Trinity gut, the southern entrance to Trinity bay, is + mile long 
and 400 yards wide; some rocks lie off its western shore, but there is a 
clear passage 7 to 12 fathoms deep in mid-channel. 

The shore southwestward from Trinity gut, forming the northern 
side of Locker reach, is steep and straight for 24 miles to Chalky 
cove, which affords a convenient temporary anchorage for small 
vessels windbound, in 4 to 10 fathoms water, rocky bottom; a rock, 
with 1 foot water over it, lies 450 yards eastward of its western point. 

Locker bay extends westward about 4% miles from Chalky cove; 
the outer part has an average breadth of $ mile, with depths of 20 to 


544 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


30 fathoms: there is anchorage above Birchy head in 6 to 12 fathoms, 
mud bottom. 

Locker rock, in the middle of the entrance of Locker bay, is awash 
at low water: Frying-pan island entirely open of Chalky head, bear- 
ing 59°, leads southeastward, and ae shut in, bearing 63°, leads 
northwestward of the rock. 

Hare bay is southwestward of Shoal bay on the northwestern side 
of Content reach, and Hare island, 198 feet high, lies in the entrance; 
the channels on either side of the island are clear, but the shores of 
the bay are low and rocky, and must not be approached nearer than 
400 yards; there is good anchorage in 4 to 18 fathoms water, mud 
bottom, with Hare island bearing 93°. 

Freshwater bay.—The entrance to this bay is 4 mile wide, and 
Hen islands, near the middle, separate it into two channels; the 
northern is shoal, and only used by small vessels; the southern 
channel is clear, except a small shoal, with 4 fathoms of water over 
it, extending southward 200 yards from the eastern Hen island. 

Within Hen islands, keep them bearing northward of 98° until 
Doctors island opens northward of Benmans island, bearing 236°, to 
clear a bank which stretches off the northern shore. 

Benmans island lies westward 13 miles from Hen islands and 
300 yards from the southern shore; the shore between it and the 
entrance is rocky and shoal; the middle of Traverse island in line 
with the northern end of Benmans island, bearing 273°, leads north- 
ward of this foul ground till about 600 yards from Benmans island. 

Mussel bank, northward 150 yards from Benmans island, covers 
3 feet at high water. 

Butchers cove, on the northern shore immediatetly within the 
entrance of Freshwater bay, extends north-northeastward for 1 mile, 
with a width of 600 yards, and a depth in the middle of from 4 to 
13 fathoms. mud bottom. To enter the cove, avoid the bank off the 
northern shore of the entrance of the bay as above directed, and steer 
up its fairway. 

Doctors island, west-southwestward 1% miles from Benmans 
island and 800 yards from the southern shore, is small, and 25 feet 
high; the shore between the islands is rocky, and must not be ap- 
proached within the line joing them. 

Traverse island, situated at the southern edge of a rocky bank 
which stretches from the northern shore of the bay, is small and 15 
feet high: shoal water extends eastward 4+ mile from the island, but 
only 200 yards into the channel of the bay: when 4 mile from the 
island, keep Dale point (the land west of the island), just open 
southward of Traverse island, bearing 270°, pass the island at 600 
yards distance, and then shut the northern side of the entrance in 


AIR ISLAND—SHARK ROCK. 545 


with Benmans island, bearing 80°, which leads southward of the 
shoal up to Dale point. 

Air island, west-southwestward 24 miles from Traverse island and 
near the middle of Freshwater bay, is 75 feet high; the main channel 
passes southward of it, and its southern coast is steep-to, but rocky 
islets, with shoal water, extend 600 yards off its northern and eastern 
coasts. 

North of Air island there is a depth of 3 fathoms of water, but the 
shores are rocky, and that passage must not be attempted without 
local knowledge. : 

Gambo brook, at the head of Freshwater bay, has 6 feet water 
over the bar and 2 fathoms inside. 

On the right bank of Gambo brook there is a steam sawmill, and 
on the left bank of a stream which falls into the brook at 3 miles 
above this mill, there is a water mill, the two being connected by a 
tramway. 

Tides and tidal streams.—It is high water, full and change, in 
Freshwater bay at 7h. 30m.; springs rise 4 feet, neaps 3 feet. 

In the entrance to Freshwater bay the ebb stream runs nearly 1 
knot an hour, but the flood is weak. 

Communication.—There is a railway station at Gambo, ? mile 
from the mouth of Gambo brook, and distant 1924 miles from St. 
Johns; the railway crosses Gambo brook by a steel bridge, 80 yards 
long, with masonry piers. 

Cat bay is reached through Cat gut, which extends southward 
from the head of Content reach; the entrance narrows to 100 yards 
at the inner end, where the depth is 34 fathoms; the bay then turns to 
the northeastward round Ballast cliff. 

A rock, bearing 110°, distant 800 yards from Ballast Cliff point, 
has 3 feet of water over it. 

Tidal stream.—In the narrows, at the entrance, the ebb stream 
runs 14 knots an hour, and the flood nearly 1 knot. 

Offer Gooseberry island, southward, distant 6} miles from Cop- 
per island, is 118 feet high, and appears as a treble-peaked island; it 
is the outer and most conspicuous of a group of rocks and islands 
southeastward of Bloody bay and reach. 

North Brown islets, 15 feet high, he eastward, distant # mile 
from Offer Gooseberry island, and South Brown rocks, 4 feet high, 
he east-southeastward 1 mile from the same island. 

Offer rock, bearing 79°, distant about 1? miles from the south- 
eastern end of Offer Gooseberry island, is awash, and generally 
visible. 

Shark rock, bearing 76°, distant 24 miles from the southeastern 
end of Offer Gooseberry island, breaks in a moderate sea. 

76846—09—85 


546 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


Middle rocks bear 148°, distant about 12 miles from Offer Goose- 
berry island; the southwestern rock is awash; the other, northeast- 
ward 400 yards from it, has 9 feet water over it. 

The above are the outer rocks off Offer Gooseberry island, and they 
can only be safely avoided by giving that island a berth of over 3 
miles. 

Rock.—A rock, with 19 feet water over, has been reported to lie 
with the northern end of Offer Gooseberry island, bearing 100°, dis- 
tant 14 miles. 

Inner, Gooseberry islands, southwestward + miles from Ofter 
Gooseberry island, are flat, and 120 feet high; the space between 
Offer and Inner Gooseberry islands is so encumbered with rocks and 
shoals that it can not be safely navigated, except by the local fisher- 
men. There is a fishing village on Inner Gooseberry islands, but no 
good harbor for a stranger. 

Communication.—-The steamer from port Blandford calls at 
Gooseberry island weekly during summer and autumn. 

Malone rock, bearing 164°, distant 44 miles from Offer Gooseberry 
island, is 2 feet high, and situated at the northern end of a ledge, a 
mile long, north-northeastward and south-southwestward, on the 
southern part of which are depths of 2 to 3 fathoms. 

Mole cove, in the western part of the northern coast of Cottel 
island, affords fair anchorage; in approaching from the northeast- 
ward keep Hare Cut point, the northern point of the cove, well open 
northward of a remarkable conical rock on the northwestern point of 
the largest Inner Gooseberry island, bearing 225°, which leads north- 
westward of the shoals between Inner and Offer Gooseberry islands, 
except the 19 feet rock, bearing 280°, distant about 14 miles from 
Offer Gooseberry island; give Inner Gooseberry islands a fair berth, 
and keep Offer Gooseberry island open northwestward of them, bear- 
ing about 59°, until Hunch island is between the northeastern end of 
Cottel island and the treble-peaked island close off it, bearing 127°, 
when steer into the cove, passing a moderate distance from Hare 
Cut point and the island off it, and anchor in 5 to 9 fathoms water, 
rock bottom. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Mole cove at Th. 37m. ; 
springs rise 34 feet, neaps 14 feet. 

Deer islands, which separate Pitt sound on the south from 
Locker reach on the north, are flat, about 100 feet high, and mostly 
covered with stunted brushwood; the southeastern and southwest- 
ern coasts are bold and clear, but northeastward of them are numer- 
ous rocks. 

Angel head is the northeastern point of Deer islands, and on the 
coast 4 mile northwestward of it is the Popple stone, a conspicuous 
white bowlder. 


\ 


THE BRANDIES ROCKS—COTTEL REACH. 547 


The Brandies rocks, bearing 56°, distant 24+ miles from Burnt 
island, the nearest of the Deer islands, break in a moderate sea. 

The southern point of Locker bay, open northward of Deer end, 
the western point of Deer islands, bearing 245°, leads northward ; 
and the summit of Brown Fox island, well open eastward of the 
eastern Fair island, bearing about 312°, leads northeastward of them. 

Burnt Island rock, bearing 65°, distant ? mile from Burnt island, 
generally breaks. 

Brag rock, bearing 42°, distant } mile from the Popple stone, 
generally breaks. A patch with 12 feet water over it lies + mile 
northeastward from Brag rock. 

Shag islands, southwestward, distant 1 mile from Angel head and 
4 mile from the Deer islands, are small, and steep-to on the southern 
side; Deer Shag, the southwestern, is 35 feet high. 

Pitt Sound island, southward, 2 miles from Deer island, is 4 miles 
long and about 1 mile wide; its wooded hills rise steeply from the 
coast to the height of 474 feet. 

Man-of-war rock, 300 yards off the northern coast of Pitt Sound 
island and 14 miles from its northeastern point, is 5 feet high. Half 
a mile westward of it, on the island, are Pitt Sound gates, so named 
from the weathering out of white quartz on the black rock having 
the appearance of enormous gates. 

Locker Flat island, 2} miles southward of Chalky head, is 3 miles 
long, about $ mile wide, and 40 feet high; its coasts are of shelving 
rock, and ‘ould not be approached nearer than 4 mile. 

Isis cove, Great Content, and Little Content are bights at the 
head of Pitt sound and in the mainland southward of Locker Flat 
island, which are open northward and afford no shelter. 

Content islet, off Great Content, is 22 feet high, and steep-to on 
the east, but connected by a reef with the eastern point of Isis cove. 

Lakeman islands are southwestward of Pitt Sound island and 
separated from it by Lakeman reach, which joins Bloody reach, on 
the southeast to Pitt sound on the northwest. 

A rock, bearing 204°, distant 1,400 yards from the western point 
of Pitt Sound island and nearly midway between that island and 
Lakeman islands, has 6 feet water over it. 

Dog cove, in the mainland southwestward of Lakeman islands, 
affords good anchorage for a small vessel. In entering it, approach 
the northern shore closely to clear a reef which stretches more than 
half way across from the islands on the southern side. The cove 
should be approached from the northwestward unless with local 
knowledge. 

Cottel reach commences between Gooseberry and Deer islands, 
and it continues southwestward between Pitt Sound and Lakeman 
islands on the northwest and Cottel island on the southeast. Farther 


548 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


southwestward it is named Bloody reach or the Cowpath, and it ends 
in Bloody bay. 

Bloody reach or the Cowpath, at its entrance between Lakeman 
and Cottel islands, is 700 yards wide, but narrowed to 400 yards by 
shoal water which stretches off Cottel beach. The reach is clear of 
shoals for 14 miles, where on the northwestern side are White islets, 
off which shoal water extends northeastward 400 yards. Beaches 
head, open of the islets, bearing about 245°, leads clear of this shoal. 
There is a 3-fathom patch off the tickle southwestward of Cottel 
island. Wolf island open westward of Mouse island, bearing 225°, 
leads southeastward of White islets and northwestward of the 
3-fathom patch. 

Martin Shepherd islands are two islands on the southeastern 
side of the Cowpath southwestward of Cottel island; shoal water 
extends 300 yards off the northeastern island into the Cowpath. Be- 
tween the eastern island and Cottel island is a clear channel, but the 
before-mentioned 3-fathom patch lies directly off it. 

Between Martin Shepherd islands is a channel having 3 fathoms 
water on the northeastern and 8 fathoms on the southwestern side. 
The northeastern part of the western island is connected with Indian- 
look-out island, lying 600 yards to the eastward, by a bar of 9 feet 
water. 

Broad island is on the southeastern side of the Cowpath in con- 
tinuation of the line of Martin Shepherd islands; there is a clear 
channel between it and the southwestern Martin Shepherd island. 

Mouse island, in the middle of the Cowpath, bearing 211°, dis- 
tant 2% miles from the southern point of Lakeman island, is 63 feet 
high. 

Bloody point, on the southeastern side of the Cowpath, southwest- 
ward of Broad island, is a steep bluff 346 feet high. 

Beaches head, on the northwestern side of the Cowpath at ? mile 
southwestward of Lakeman island, is 271 feet high; beaches con- 
nect the three steep hills of which it is composed; northward of the 
highest hill is Beaches cove, small, and clear of shoals, which affords 
anchorage, in 3 fathoms water, within Woody islets on the southern 
side of the entrance; there is a clear channel on either side of these 
islets. 

Rocky bay, westward of Beaches head, extends westward 4 miles; 
at 24 miles within Beaches head its entrance is } mile wide, with 
Rocky islands on the southern side; this entrance is narrowed to 400 
yards by Shag islet, a small dry rock with a reef 300 yards eastward 
of it, on the north, and a reef 400 yards long, eastward and westward, 
on the south. The northwestern side of the hillock forming the 
southwestern point of Cottel island, in line with the southern point 


BLOODY BAY—SAINT ROCK. 549 


of Beaches head, bearing about 65°, leads between Shag islet and the 
reef. 

Black Duck island, $ mile within Shag islet, has a small dry rock 
off its western point; Black Duck cove hes northward of the island; 
there is a depth of 11 fathoms in it, mud bottom, but it is rocky and 
should not be used without local knowledge. 

For Northwest arm, after passing Shag islet, keep the channel 
between Martin Shepherd islands open southward of Black Duck 
island, bearing about 82°, until past the point westward of that 
island, then bring the southern end of Black Duck island in lne 
with the point westward of it, bearing 84°, which leads between the 
reef off Ackworth island and a 2-fathom patch, and anchor in 9 to 
12 fathoms of water northward of Ackworth island. 

Bard islands, on the southeastern side of the bay, are low and 
rocky, and a reef stretches northward 400 yards from the eastern end 
of the eastern island; Beaches head in line with Shag islet, bearing 
67°, leads northwestward of this reef; and when the eastern Bard 
island bears 149°, steer along the northern side of Bard islands and 
anchor southwestward of them in 9 to 13 fathoms water. 

Bloody bay.—Wolf island, 153 feet high, is the southwestern point 
of the northwestern shore of the Cowpath, and from it Northwest 
arm of Bloody bay extends westward 3 miles; the outer part of this 
bay is clear of shoals, but shoal water extends off the shores to 200 
yards beyond the outer points, and there is a depth of 3 to 5 fathoms 
off the mouth of Norton cove, which is at the inner end of the south- 
ern shore. The western continuation of the arm for a farther dis- 
tance of 2 miles has 24 fathoms water in the entrance; within, it 
deepens to 8 fathoms in places. 

Linton rock, in the middle of Northwest arm, westward 14 miles 
from Wolf island, is 3 feet high. 

Middle arm.—The entrance to this arm extends southward for 1 
mile with a width of 400 yards; the arm then opens out to a bay 3 
miles long and 14 miles wide; the depth gradually decreases from 
20 fathoms at the inner part of the entrance to the head. 

A rock, just covered at high water, lies 600 yards from the north- 
ern shore and 1# miles within the bay. 

Northeast arm is a continuation of the Cowpath eastward of 
Middle arm; it is shoal for 300 yards from either shore; there is 
anchorage in less than 10 fathoms water, at } mile within the en- 
trance, and the depth decreases rather quickly to the shoal entrance 
of an extensive arm, which is only navigable for boats at high water. 

Saint rock, the outer shoal off the entrance to Willis reach, lies 
with the summit of Great Black island, which is 234 feet high, 
bearing 256°, distant 2,8, miles, and has 12 feet water over it. 


550 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


Saturday ledge, lying westward, distant ? mile from Saint rock, 
has 4 fathoms of water over its shoalest part. 

Flat islands, between Great Black island and Willis island, extend 
over an area 24 miles long, northwestward and southeastward, and 4 
mile wide; they are 80 to 140 feet high, and have a generally flat ap- 
pearance. A few fishermen live on them, and their huts are on the 
middle islands of the group. 

Bessy island, 254 feet high, appearing as a large rounded woody 
hill, is the largest of a group of islands lying eastward of the south- 
eastern part of Willis island. There are no convenient anchorages 
among the Flat islands or in this group, and the channels among 
them should not be attempted without a pilot. 

Shoals extend southeastward 2 miles from Great Black island and 
southeastward 1 mile from Flat islands; Ship rock, bearing 45°, 
distant ? mile from the northeastern end of Ship island, has 4 feet 
of water over it. Bakers Loaf island, open southward of Ship island, 
bearing 231°, leads southeastward of the shoals and rock. 

Morris island, southward 1 mile from the western part of Willis 
island, is 279 feet high, and the western and largest of a group 
which extends eastward 3 miles from it and terminates seaward in 
Ship island, a conspicuous conical hill 257 feet high. 

Cow head, southward 2? miles from Ship island, is a steep bold 
cliff 479 feet high; Gerrards hill, nearly a mile southward of it, is 
629 feet high and the summit of the head separating the entrances 
to the northern and southern arms of Bonavista bay. 

Sailors harbor, southwestward of Cow head, is formed by several 
islands which extend westward from Cow head on the north and by 
the land about Gerrards hill on the south. It is 1 mile long north- 
eastward and southwestward, + mile wide, and affords anchorage in 
7 to 10 fathoms of water, rocky bottom. 

The entrance is about 200 yards wide and barely 200 yards north- 
ward of the mainland; in the middle of the passage between the 
mainland and Seal rock is a 10-foot patch, from which Seal rock 
is in line with the western end of Sailors island, bearing 8°. The 
northern fall of West Shag island, in line with a conspicuous 
house, bearing 60°, leads through the entrance and southward of the 
10-foot patch, in 34 fathoms of water; it also leads northward of a 
shoal with 6 feet of water over it, which hes off the first point on the 
southern side within the entrance. 

Salvage bay extends southwestward 4+ miles from its entrance 
between Sailors island and Bakers Loaf island, situated 14 miles to 
the westward; there is a depth of 22 fathoms in the entrance, whence 
it gradually shoals to the head, where there is fair summer anchorage 
in 5 fathoms of water, sand bottom. 


DAMNABLE BAY—PRETTY ISLAND. 551 


Bakers Loaf island is 234 feet high and cliffy. Bakers Loaf 
rocks extend south-southeastward 900 yards from the island; the 
outer patch has 9 feet of water over it. West Shag island, open 
northeastward of Cow head, bearing 97°, leads northward; and the 
break in the sand cliff at the bottom of Salvage bay, open south- 
eastward of Baldric head, bearing 228°, leads southeastward of 
them. 

Damnable bay extends westward about 2 miles from westward 
of Bakers Loaf island; the outer part is deep, but among the islets 
at the head the depth is moderate; there is no convenient harbor. 

Morris channel stretches northwestward 55 miles to the Cowpath 
from between Bakers Loaf and Morris islands. Brown Store island, 
68 feet high, bears 311°, distant 1,600 yards, and Athwart island, 83 
feet high, bearing 340°, distant 1,4; miles from the northern point of 
Bakers Loaf island. 

A rock, with 7 feet of water over it, bears 183°, distant 400 yards 
from the Coffee Pot, an islet southward of the western point of Morris 
island, and a rock with 9 feet of water over it, bears 194°, distant 800 
yards from the same islet. Shag islands, open southward of Athwart 
island, bearing 101°, leads southward of these rocks. 

Bruce Cove rock, with 5 feet of water over it, bears 70°, distant 4 
mile from Bruce Cove Gull island; it has deep water around it, but 
the channel northeastward of it is the wider; so approach Tinker 
island closely in passing. 

Fair and False bay is on the southwestern side of Morris channel, 
and, with the arms northwestward of it, extends 4 miles from the line 
of the shore. Squid island, 14 miles southwestward of Morris island, 
forms the eastern entrance point; from it the shore, like the island, 
low, broken, and rocky, trends southwestward 2 miles into the bay; 
the depth of water in the bay is 10 to 22 fathoms. The northwestern 
side is formed by several islands extending as far as Bloody point; 
the channels among them are narrow and generally clear of shoals. 
Middle reach, the southeastern, stretches southwestward 1 mile, with 
a breadth of 200 yards, and then opens out to a basin 4 mile across, 
with a depth of 13 fathoms, mud bottom; three shoal arms branch 
southward and westward from it. 

Middle reach is separated by a rocky channel from Long reach, 
which latter extends northwestward to the eastward of Bloody point; 
Long reach is 200 yards wide, and in mid-channel is clear of shoals. 

Pretty island, west-northwestward 14 miles from Squid island, 
shelters Bloomer harbor, the outer part of which is 600 yards wide, 
with a depth of 13 fathoms of water, mud bottom; the inner part has 
an entrance 300 yards wide, and it widens within to over 400 yards, 
with a depth of 8 fathoms, mud bottom. 


554 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


Varket channel, between Willis and Flat islands on the north 
and Morris and the islands extending to Ship island on the south, 
runs westward for 5 miles to where it joins Willis reach on the north 
and Morris channel on the south. 

Varket island is small and rises in two conical hills to the height 
of 70 feet; a sunken rock lies 50 yards off its southwestern point. A 
rock which dries 1 foot, les 400 yards off the northeastern point of 
Morris island; and a rock, awash at high water, bears 262°, distant 
1,600 yards from Varket island. Northward of this rock is a shoal 
with 3 fathoms of water over it. 

Willis reach, northwestward of Willis island, extends west-south- 
westward 6 miles from its entrance between Great Black and Gulch 
islands; there are no shoals in the fairway through the reach, and the 
depth is 100 fathoms at the eastern end, shoaling to 8 and 10 fathoms 
at the western, where it branches into several channels leading into 
Cowpath, Morris, and Varket channels; these branching channels are 
shoal, and should not be attempted without a pilot. 

Shag islands extend northeastward, nearly a mile from their 
southwestern end, which lies eastward, distant 1,700 yards from North 
point of Cow head; they are four in number and are 145 to 196 feet 
high. 

Bishops harbor, immediately southeastward of Cow head and 
southwestward of Shag islands, is 400 yards across, with a depth of 
5 fathoms, rocky bottom. The entrance is between rocks which ex- 
tend from both sides of the mouth of the harbor, through a passage 
50 yards wide and 18 feet deep. This passage is safe in ordinary 
weather, but only with local knowledge; with a heavy sea it must not 
be attempted. There is a fishing population around the harbor. 

Broomclose harbor is an inlet extending west-southwestward 14 
miles, with a width of 400 yards; its entrance lies between Southern 
and Broomclose heads, and a reef with 12 feet of water over it, on 
which the sea breaks heavily, extends eastward for 600 yards from 
the northern inner entrance head, and narrows the channel to 250 
vards. 

Little Denier island, the western end of which lies eastward, 
distant 1,400 yards from Broomclose head, is + mile long, east-north- 
eastward and west-southwestward, 300 yards wide, and 278 feet high; 
a line of rocks and shoal water extends off both ends of the island. 

Light.—A circular lighthouse, painted red and white in vertical 
stripes, and 24 feet high, on the summit of Little Denier island, ex- 
hibits at 298 feet above high water a revolving white light every 
thirty seconds, which should be seen from a distance of 19 miles in 
clear weather. The light is obscured by a chimney when bearing 
283°, from a distance of 14 miles. 


OFFER ROCK—-NEWMAN SOUND. 553 


Offer rock, bearing 51°, distant 1,600 yards from the northeastern 
point of Little Denier island, is awash, and always breaks. Tilleys 
hill, open southward of Little Denier island, bearing 244°, leads 
southward; Hammer head, ‘open northwestward of Little Denier 
island, bearing 222°, leads northwestward; and the cliff at North 
point of Cow head over the southwestern end of West Shag island, 
bearing 273°, leads northward of it. 

Middle rock, with 9 feet of water over it, and Inner rock, with 5 
feet of water over it, he between Offer rock and Little Denier island. 

Barrow harbor is southwestward of Little Denier island. Rich- 
ards island, a large flat mound, 289 feet high, steep to the eastward, 
lies on the southern side of the entrance. Keats island, the eastern 
end of which, known as Hammer head, is 259 feet high, forms the 
southern side of the harbor. 

From Pulpit head, the northeastern point of Richards island, a 
reef extends northeastward ? mile; Outer Brandy rock, at its outer 
end, has 5 feet of water over it. The eastern end of Shag islands in 
line with the western end of Litle Denier island, bearing 343°, leads 
eastward of it. As no mark can be given to lead between Outer 
Brandy rock and the shoal water off Little Denier island, this channel 
into Barrow harbor should not be taken without local knowledge. 

The depth of water is great and the shelter indifferent in Barrow 
harbor, so it can not be recommended. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Barrow harbor at 
6h. 13m.; springs rise 44 feet, neaps 24 feet. 

Ice.—Bishops, Barrow, and Sailors harbors freeze over in the 
middle of January, and the ice generally breaks up in April. 

Newman sound lies between the highland stretching west-south- 
westward from Hammer head, on the north, and Long islands and the 
land stretching westward to mount Stamford, on the south; near the 
middle is Swale island, 44 miles long, east-northeastward and west- 
southwestward, and about a mile wide at its broadest part. 

Halfway islet, 300 yards from the northern shore of Newman sound 
and 4 miles west-southwestward of Richards island, is 18 feet high; 
the shore between them is cliffy and steep-to. 

Sandy cove, westward, 1 mile from Halfway islet, is an open bay 
4 mile wide, with a depth of 5 to 10 fathoms, sand bottom. 

Holbrook head, west-northwestward, 2? miles from Halfway islet, 
is a salient point. 

Happy Adventure bays, between Sandy cove and Holbrook head, 
are small and so narrow as to be available for boats only. 

North Broad cove lies westward 14 miles from Holbrook head; 
there is a rock, that dries 1 foot at low water spring tides, at nearly 
200 yards from its northeastern head, and also a rock, with 9 feet of 


554 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


water over it, in the middle of the cove; the depth of water in the 
cove is from 29 to 13 fathoms, the latter being close to its head; on 
account of its great depth the cove is not recommended as an 
anchorage. 

The northern shore of Newman sound from North Broad cove 
trends south-southwestward 1 mile to Shag islet, which is 10 feet 
high; Hall rock, southwestward 1 mile from Shag islet and nearly 
400 yards offshore, covers at half tide. 

Cold East rock, bearing 329°, distant 4+ mile from the western 
point of Swale island, dries 1 foot; the northeastern end of Swale 
island open northward of its northern part, bearing 70°, leads north- 
westward of it. | 

There are several islands westward of Swale island and at the 
western end of Swale tickle; the channel between Swale island and 
the islet westward of it is 100 yards wide, with a depth of 43 fathoms 
of water in it. White islets lie south-southeastward 4 mile from the 
western end of Swale island. 

South Broad cove, on the southern side of Newman sound and 
westward of Swale tickle, extends southward 1 mile, with a width of 
400 yards; the depth in it decreases gradually from 20 to 3 fathoms, 
mud bottom; it is a good anchorage. : 

A rock, that covers 2 feet, lies 100 yards offshore at + mile within 
the eastern head. 

Minchin head, westward # mile from South Broad cove, is a 
conical hill, 148 feet high; mount Stamford, at 14 miles farther in 
the same direction, rises steeply to a height of 658 feet; and Park 
Harbor hill and Ochre Pit hill lie between Newman and Clode 
sounds; these hills are conspicuous from seaward. The channel 
northward of mount Stamford and between it and Buckley point is 
400 yards wide; westward of it the sound continues southwestward, 
with a breadth of ? mile, for 24 miles, where it receives the water of 
a considerable stream; the depth in this inner part of the sound is 
20 to 29 fathoms for 2 miles, when it quickly shoals. 

Buckley cove, westward of Buckley point, extends northward 
nearly 3 mile and affords anchorage in 4 fathoms of water. 

Caution is necessary in the southern part of Newman sound, as the 
water shoals rapidly within a depth of 15 fathoms. 

Long islands, consisting of four islands, extend west-southwest- 
ward and east-northeastward for 5 miles. 

Puttick rock, bearing 359°, distant 700 yards from the northern 
point of the easternmost of the Long islands, has 4 fathoms of water 
over it. 

Chappel tickle, the channel between the two eastern Long islands, 
is rocky and only available for small vessels. 


HURLOC HEAD—-WESTERN ROCK. 555 


Middle tickle, between the two middle islands of the group, is short 
and narrow, but clear of shoals, except close to the shore on the east- 
ern side; a patch, with 9 feet of water over it, lies southeastward, 
distant 400 yards on the same side. 

Long tickle, the channel between the two western Long islands, is 
narrow and rocky. 

Hurloc head, westward of Long islands and separated from them 
by a short, clear, and deep channel 4 mile wide, is a steep bluff 230 
feet high. 

Copper island, north-northeastward 1,200 yards from Hurloc 
head, is 120 feet high and steep all around. 

Western head, east-northeastward 5% miles from the eastern 
point of the easternmost of the Long islands, is the northern end of a 
bold barren promontory, about } mile in width, steep-to on both sides 
and 443 feet high. 

Rocks, having depths of 7 to 10 fathoms of water over them, lie 
around Western head at the distance of about 2 miles and cause a 
confused sea in heavy weather; at times the sea breaks on them. 

Bacon Bone rock, bearing 245°, distant 1} miles from Western 
head and 3 mile offshore, has 4 feet of water over it; and there is a 
patch, with 3 fathoms of water over it, at 300 yards north-northwest. 
ward of the rock. 

Southern head, open northward of Western head, bearing 101°, 
leads northward; Deer island shut in with Long islands, bearing 
239°, leads northwestward; and Arrow point, open westward of Red 
Cliff island, bearing 176°, leads westward of Bacon Bone rock and 
patch.) 

The shore of Bonavista bay from Western head trends south- 
southwestward for 31 miles to Arch Cliff point; it is steep and bold 
until off Tickle cove, eastward of Arch Cliff pomt, when it becomes 
low and rugged, with rocks extending 400 yards. Tickle cove is a 
fishing village without any harbor, and rocks extend 400 yards off 
Arch Cliff point. 

Western rock, bearing 228°, distant nearly $00 yards from Arch 
Cliff point, is small, pointed, and 2 feet high. 

The shore from Arch Cliff point trends southward for 33 miles to 
Plate cove; between is Open hole, a shallow bay with a considerable 
fishing village on its shores, but affording no anchorage. 

Red Cliff island, southward 1 mile from Arch Cliff point and 300 
yards offshore, is 50 feet high, and conspicuous from its red and 
yellow rocks. 

Ice.—The sea about Open hole and Red Cliff island freezes about 
the middle of February and the ice clears during April, early or late 
in the month according to the season; northern ice generally arrives 
about the middle of February and leaves about the middle of April. 


556 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


Plate cove extends southward nearly a mile with a width of $ 
mile. It affords good anchorage in 5 to 10 fathoms of water in the 
northeastern corner and fair anchorage in the southern corner. There 
is a considerable fishing village on its shores, and supplies can be 
obtained in small quantities. The watering place, situated in the 
northeastern corner, is good, and easily approached by boats. 

Cutler head, west-northwestward, 34 miles from Plate Cove head, 
is a conical hill 397 feet high. The entrance to Southward bay, which 
stretches southward 94 miles, les between these heads. 

Indian arm, on the eastern side of Southward bay at 3 miles 
southward of Plate cove, has a small fishing village around its shores, 
but no convenient anchorage. 

Seal cove, on the southeastern side of Southward bay at 34 miles 
south-southwestward of Indian head, is small and affords anchorage 
in 4 fathoms of water. The western side of the cove is rocky. There 
are few fishermen’s houses on its shores. 

Southward Bay head, on the western side of Southward bay at 
24 miles southwestward from Plate Cove head, is a steep bluff 328 feet 
high. Kate harbor, westward of the head, has a rock in its entrance 
and no anchorage. 

Cutler harbor is southward of Cutler head; its entrance is rocky 
and narrow, and should not be attempted without a pilot; Chance 
islet, open northeastward of Cutler head, bearing 307°, leads north- 
eastward of the rocks off this harbor. 

Chance islet, bearing 306°, distant 14 miles from Gudes head, is 
35 feet high. Chance Harbor ledge, bearing 67°, distant ? mile from 
Chance islet, has 5 feet water over it. 

Sweet bay extends southwestward 8 miles from Cutler head, and 
at 34 miles within the entrance it divides into northwest and south- 
west arms. There is anchorage at the heads of these arms in 10 to 16 
fathoms of water. The land between the arms is rugged, Nut hill, the 
highest point, being 600 feet high, and conspicuous from seaward. 
Hunt, Gooseberry, and Hay islands, the latter small and 46 feet high, 
and all of them steep-to, continue this dividing land to the north- 
eastward. Rocks extend 200 yards off the eastern shore of the bay 
abreast Hay island, and a rock, which covers 3 feet, lies 300 yards off 
the northwestern shore of the bay abreast the same island. 

Gull island, 1 mile within Cutler head and 800 yards from the 
shore, is 46 feet high; Turfpook island, close southeastward of it, is 
conical and 165 feet high; sunken rocks extend southward about 4 
mile from Turfpook island. 

Great Chance harbor, on the western side of Sweet bay, west- 
southwestward from Cutler head, stretches southwestward for 3 miles, 
and is 300 yards wide, with depths of 10 to 16 fathoms, mud bottom; 
the northwestern shore is steep. The southern side of the entrance 


CLODE SOUND—-MINCHIN ISLAND. 55% 


is formed by Woody and Mustard Gull islands, the latter being the 
eastern. 

Brines rock, bearing 56°, distant about 600 yards from Mustard 
Gull island, has 2 feet over it at high water; Woody island open 
northward of Mustard Gull island, bearing 233°, leads northwest- 
ward; Chance islet well open, bearing 11°, or well shut in with 
Chance head, bearing 28°, leads eastward or northwestward of the 
rock, after passing which there are no shoals in Great Chance harbor. 

Little Chance harbor, on the western side of Sweet bay, southward 
of Great Chance harbor, extends southwestward 1 mile with a breadth 
of 200 yards to the head which widens to nearly 400 yards with 
depths of 10 to 12 fathoms. 

Clode sound.—Chandler reach, the entrance to Clode sound, com- 
mences between Long islands and Chance islet, and extends south- 
westward 10 miles to Connecting point, which divides it into Clode 
sound, extending west-southwestward, and Goose bay, extending 
south-southwestward. 

The Narrows are situated west-southwestward nearly 11 miles from 
Connecting point; here shoal water and two islets, 12 and 8 feet high, 
stretch out from the southern shore, leaving a clear passage + mile 
wide, with 8 fathoms water, along the northern shore. 

After passing the Narrows the depth in the middle of the sound is 
too great for anchorage; the southeastern shore is steep-to; the north- 
western shore is broken and rocky, with shoals extending fully } mile 
off it. 

Port Blandford.—There is good anchorage near the head of the 
sound in 8 to 15 fathoms of water, a convenient position being near 
the western shore, off the southern point of Northwest arm, which is 
at the western end of the sound and is very shoal. There is a settle- 
ment at port Blandford, and the land surrounding it is being rapidly 
brought under cultivation; the sea bathing is particularly good. The 
streams in the vicinity are well stocked with salmon and trout, and 
there are some fine mussel and clam beds. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Clode sound at 
th. 37m.; springs rise 43 feet, neaps 24 feet. 

Ice.—The deep arms and bays between Salvage bay and Clode 
sound generally freeze in the middle of December and the ice breaks 
up about April 15. 

vommunication.—There is communication by rail from Clode 
Sound station with St. Johns, distant 1544 miles. See also page 41. 

Lions den, on the northwestern side of Chandler reach, stretching 
westward 4 miles from Hurloc head, is very rocky and entirely unfit 
for anchorage. 

Minchin island, } mile off the northern shore of Chandler reach 
bearing 28°, distant 1% miles from Connecting point, is rocky all 


558 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


around, flat topped, 83 feet high, and conspicuous. Ashley Baker 
island les westward ? mile from Minchin island; the shore between 
them is broken and rocky; there is temporary anchorage, in 8 fath- 
oms water, between these islands in fine weather, but the bottom is 
rocky and uneven. 

Dumpling and Bread coves, at about 3 and 4 miles westward of 
Ashley Baker island, are both rocky, and afford anchorage, in 4 
fathoms water, between the lines of their outer points, on a bottom 
strewn with bowlders. 

Bryans Hole point is on the northwestern shore of Clode sound at 
4 miles southwestward of Bread cove, and there is anchorage on 
either side of it. 

Love cove, on the southern side of the sound at 14 miles eastward 
of the Narrows, affords anchorage in 8 fathoms water, and Bunyan 
cove, eastward 1 mile, has anchorage in 34 fathoms. 

The southeastern shores of Clode sound and Chandler reach from 
Bunyan cove to Pudding cove, a distance of 15 miles, are steep-to 
and afford no anchorage. 

Pudding cove is 200 yards wide, with a depth of 4 fathoms of 
water, mud bottom, and is a good watering place. There is an islet 
off its eastern entrance point. 

Deer island, on the southern side of Chandler reach, at 1 mile 
westward of Chance islet, is 310 feet high; between it and the shore is 
a narrow channel with 6 fathoms water. 

Goose bay is free from shoals, except close to the shore and within 
the line of the points of its bays, which are all shallow and rocky. 
There is good anchorage in 14 fathoms water at } mile from Goose 
head, a bluff on the eastern side of the bay, and in less water from 
this to the head, a distance of 2 miles. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Goose bay at 7h. 22m. ; 
springs rise 44 feet, neaps 24 feet. 

The shore of Bonavista bay from Western head to Southern head, 
lying 34 miles eastward, is much indented; rocky ground extends 
mile off it, and the eastern hill of Swale island should be kept open 
northward of Western head, bearing 266°. 

Deep cove, eastward of Western head, is open and stretches south- 
ward for 1 mile; the eastern shore is foul. 

Castle and Keels coves, about a mile eastward of Deep cove, are 
encumbered with rocks, and afford only a summer resort for fishing 
vessels. Keels is a considerable fishing village. 

Communication.—The steamer from port Blandford calls at 
Keels cove weekly during summer and autumn. 

Cary rock, bearing 26°, distant } mile from Keels eastern head, 
and the outer shoal in the vicinity, has 12 feet water over it. 


BACKSIDE COVE—KINGS COVE. 559 


Backside cove, on the eastern side of Keels eastern headland, 
affords no shelter. 

Ice.—Keels cove fills in with northern ice and freezes while the 
ice remains on the coast. 

Southern head is a steep cliff rising to a hill 532 feet high. 

Black Head bay.—Black head lies 7} miles eastward of Southern 
head, and Black Head bay extends southward 54 miles from between 
them; it is clear of shoals; some open coves in it have a few scattered 
inhabitants, but afford no shelter for ships. 

Ice.—Black Head bay fills in with northern ice and clears when the 
ice leaves the coast. 

Broad cove is immediately southward of Southern head; there is a 
village on its shores. 

Broad head is a bluff, 317 feet high, with a front } mile long, 
northwestward and southeastward, separating Broad cove from 
Kings cove. 

Kings cove is small, 700 yards long, northeastward and southwest- 
ward, shoaling gradually from a depth of 20 fathoms at the entrance, 
which is 300 yards wide, to the beach, 150 yards wide, at the head. It 
is open to the northeastward, but is said to be a safe anchorage for 
small vessels, which, as the water shoals suddenly, do not drag in- 
shore, but at times drift to sea. 

Light.—A white cylindrical lighthouse, 37 feet high, on Kings 
cove northern head, exhibits at 176 feet above high water, a white 
group-flashing white light showing two flashes every five seconds, 
which should be seen from a distance of 14 miles in clear weather. 
The light being unwatched must be considered unreliable. 

There is a store and keeper’s dwelling, painted white with a black 
roof, close to the lighthouse. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Kings cove at 7h. 
15m.; springs rise 34+ feet, neaps 24 feet. 

Communication.—The steamer from port Blandford calls at 
Kings cove weekly during summer and autumn. 

The shore trends north-northeastward for 5 miles from Black 
head to Green island, and between are Bonavista, Bailey cove, and 
Red cove, three small bays. 

Bonavista is the southern of these coves, and the only one afford- 
ing anchorage, the others being encumbered by rocks and more open. 
In approaching Bonavista from the eastward do not close the shore 
nearer than to have the western end of Gull island just open west- 
ward of Green island, bearing 37°, until Squarey islet bears 149° ; 
then pass close to that islet, to clear a shoal with 33 fathoms water 
over it, which les nearly 200 yards southwestward of the islet, and 
anchor in 6 fathoms water; this cove is only available for vessels dur- 
ing summer. Squarey islet, the western of a ridge of rocks forming 
the northern side of the bay, is 43 feet high. 


560 CAPE ST. JOHN TO CAPE BONAVISTA. 


Light.—A square pyramidal white tower, 22 feet high, surmounted 
by an octagonal drum and lantern, on Squarey islet, exhibits from 
April 1 to December 31, at 57 feet above high water, a fixed red light, 
which should be seen from a distance of 9 miles in clear weather. 
The light being unwatched must be considered unreliable. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Bonavista cove at 
Th. 25m.; springs rise 3} feet, neaps 24 feet. 

Bonavista town is the largest in Bonavista bay, having in 1901 
a population of 3,696; there is excellent land, a large quantity of 
which is under cultivation, around the cove. 

Communication.—The steamer from port Blandford calls at 
Bonavista weekly during summer and autumn; there is also tele- 
graphic communication. 

Green island, 69 feet high, les westward of cape Bonavista, and 
is separated from the land of the cape by a channel 300 yards wide, 
with 2 fathoms least water in its fairway, which passes eastward of a 
rock nearly in mid-channel. 

Stone island, 40 feet high, lies about a mile westward from Green 
island. The channel between is 1 mile wide and clear. 

Shoals northward of cape Bonavista.—See page 561. 


CHAP THER) 1X. 


NEWFOUNDLAND, EAST COAST—CAPE BONAVISTA TO 
CAPE RACE. 


Cape Bonavista is so low that it can not be seen beyond a distance 
of about 14 miles in clear weather. 

Light.—A square lighthouse, 36 feet high and painted red and 
white in vertical stripes, with the lantern in the middle of the roof, 
on cape Bonavista, exhibits, at 150 feet above high water, a revolving 
light, showing two white phases and one red phase, the phases attain- 
ing their greatest brilliancy every thirty seconds, which should be 
seen from a distance of 15 miles in clear weather. 

The light is reported to have been seen at a much greater distance, 
and the white light is reported to be visible further than the red light. 

Signals.—Cape Bonavista lighthouse is supplhed with the {nter- 
national code signals. 

Harrys ground, northward of cape Bonavista, is 27% miles in 
length south-southwestward and north-northeastward, and 14 miles 
in breadth. It consists of several rocky patches with 7 feet to 16 
fathoms of water over them, and 20 to 30 fathoms between them; 
within 4 mile of the northern, eastern, and western sides of the bank 
the depth is 50 to 60 fathoms. 

Old Harry, the southern rock of Harrys ground, bearing 357°, 
distant 4 miles from Cape Bonavista lighthouse, has 7 feet of water 
over it. Young Harry, the northern rock, bearing 6°, 64 miles from 
the lighthouse, has a depth of 4 fathoms over it. Kelp rock, with 15 
feet of water over it, and Middle rock, with 3 fathoms over it, he 
between them. Eastern rock, a patch with 7 fathoms of water over 
it, lies 1,400 yards eastward of Middle rock. The sea breaks on Old 
and Young Harry and also on Kelp rock. 

Cape Bonavista lighthouse bearing 205° leads eastward of these 
shoals; and the lighthouse bearing 169° leads westward. When pro- 
ceeding northward of Young Harry keep the angle between Largent 
hill and the western end of Green ridge less than 7 degrees. In foggy 
weather, with the position known, close Gull island, as there are no 

76846—09-—36 | 561 


562 CAPE BONAVISTA TO CAPE RACE. 


shoals in the immediate vicinity of cape Bonavista to affect a ship 
in a moderate sea. 

Note.—Rocks, with less than 5 fathoms of water over them, break 
with a moderate sea, those with 5 to 10 fathoms break with a heavy 
sea, and those with 10 to 15 fathoms break after heavy gales from 
seaward. 

Gull island, northward 1,200 yards from cape Bonavista, is 117 
feet high. A rock with 12 feet of water over it, les southward 200 
yards from the island, and a rock with less than 6 feet over it lies 
southwestward 400 yards from the cape, but close to the shore. 

Aspect of coast.—From the eastward, Burnt ridge, a table-land 
500 feet high, situated 4 miles southward of cape Bonavista, is re- 
markable; it is nearly 100 feet higher than the land in its immediate 
vicinity, and 300 feet higher than the general height of the land 
northward and southward of it. As the cape is approached Largent 
hill, Norther head, and lastly the cape and Gull island become visible. 
From the northward, Green ridge, which is the northern part of 
Burnt ridge, will be made in clear weather, but otherwise cape Bona- 
vista lighthouse will probably be first sighted. 

Caution.—In heavy weather, or at night, do not approach cape 
Bonavista from the northward nor the land between that cape and 
Catalina harbor, nearer than 7 miles. 

The coast from cape Bonavista to Spillers point, a distance of 24 
miles to the southward, is of cliff, indented with several small bays, 
affording no anchorage. 

Cape Largent, 1 mile farther southeastward, is a shelving point, 
with its end cut off from the mainland by a deep rent, and at a short 
distance off it is a small rock just above water. Largent hill within 
the cape is 433 feet high and remarkable, being separated from Burnt 
ridge by a deep valley, and rising over 200 feet above the flat cliffs of 
the coast. 

Bird Island cove, 1 mile southward of cape Largent, affords no 
shelter, but it is a good base for boats engaged in cod fishing. Tem- 
porary anchorage may be obtained in about 7 fathoms of water, sand 
bottom, at the head of the cove, but within 400 yards of the shore; 
it is stated that, on account of the backwash, a vessel may ride at this 
anchorage securely, even in easterly winds. 

North Bird island, 124 feet high, and South Bird island, 130 feet 
high, le off Bird Island cove. 

Dollarman bank.—The coast from cape Bonavista southward 
is bordered by Dollarman bank, an irregular rocky bank, considered 
a good fishing ground, and from a depth of 20 fathoms at its north- 
ern end, situated 54 miles eastward of Cape Bonavista lighthouse, 
to the Haypooks, situated 6 miles eastward of North head, are 
numerous rocks with depths of 6 to 10 fathoms, and deep water close 


CATALINA HARBOR—POOR SHOAL. 563 


around them, on which the sea breaks after an easterly gale; in 
heavy weather pass eastward of the Haypooks, the outer shoal. 

This coast between South Bird island and Catalina North head is 
fringed by rocks. The outer one of these, Flowers rock, has less than 
6 feet of water over it, and les nearly 3? mile from the shore. Cape 
Bonavista lighthouse, well open northeastward of cape Largent, bear- 
ing 318°, leads northeastward, and Green Island lhghthouse open 
southeastward of Catalina North head, bearing 217°, leads south- 
eastward of these shoals. . 

Little Catalina, westward of Cuckold head, is a boat harbor. 

Catalina harbor entrance, situated southwestward 24 miles from 
North head, and between Shepherd point on the north, and Burnt 
point on the south, is barely 700 yards wide, with Charlton rock, 
having 6 feet of water over it, lying nearly in midchannel; further 
in, the entrance is narrowed to about 200 yards by shoals, with 24 and 
2 fathoms of water over them, lying southward and eastward respec- 
tively, nearly 300 yards from Goodland point; and by White rock, 
with a depth of 4 feet, and Lowe rock, with 2 fathoms of water over 
it, lying eneciward and northwestward, respectively, about 200 
yards from the turning point into Southeast cove. 

Green island, southeastward of Burnt point, is rugged and rocky. 
Shoal water extends 400 yards from the northern, nearly 800 yards 
frony the southern, and 200 yards from the other sides of the island. 

Light.—A white lighthouse, from the middle of which rises the 
lantern with its dome painted red and white in vertical stripes, 41 
feet high, on Green island, exhibits at 92 feet above high water, a 
fixed white light which should be seen over an are of 157° to sea- 
ward, between the bearings of 246° and 44°, from a distance of 11 
miles in clear weather. 

Fog signal.—A fog horn gives one blast every fifty-nine sec- 
onds, thus: blast, fourteen seconds; silent interval, forty-five seconds, 
Aue thick or ue weather. The service of the fog-alarm is sus- 
pended from January 15 until the opening of navigation about the 
end of April. 

Signals.—Green [sland lighthouse is supplied with the Inter- 
national code signals. 

Rocks.—From Green Island lighthouse, Murphy rock, with 8 
fathoms of water over it, bears 55°, distant 275 miles; Soldiers rock, 
with 9 fathoms, bears 72°, distant 34 miles; Joes rock, with 8 fathoms, 
bears 82°, distant 334; miles; and Feather shoal, with 6 fathoms, bani 
103°, distant 4 ie The sea breaks on fees rocks in heavy 
weather. 

Poor shoal, 1 mile long, northeastward and southwestward, within 
the contour line of 5 fathoms, and on which the sea breaks heavily in 


564 CAPE BONAVISTA TO CAPE RACE. 


easterly gales, is situated northeastward, between 1 and 2 miles from 
Green Island lighthouse, and has 22 feet least water over it. 

Brandies shoal, which generally breaks, has three heads with 4 
feet least water ; it is 1,300 yards long, northward and southward, and 
about + mile wide. The channel between the southern end of the 
shoal and Green island is 350 yards wide. 

Anchorages.—Northeast arm of Catalina harbor affords anchor- 
age for vessels drawing up to 9 feet of water, in a basin 400 yards 
across with a depth of 2 fathoms of water, mud bottom. 

Southwest arm is ? mile long and + mile wide at the entrance, nar- 
rowing gradually to the head, from which shoal water extends 600 
yards; it affords anchorage in 4 fathoms of water, mud bottom. 

Large vessels anchor off the mouth of this arm in 5 fathoms of 
water, mud bottom, with the eastern entrance point of Northeast arm 
open northward of Manuel islet, and bearing 3° to clear Lowe rock. 
A swell sets into the harbor and up Southwest arm after heavy gales, 
but it is not sufficient to endanger vessels. 

Pilots.—The fishermen are trustworthy pilots, and are nearly 
always to be found near the harbor in daytime. 

Directions.—<As shoals extend eastward 8} miles from Catalina 
harbor, and most of them break after heavy easterly gales, approach 
to the harbor is then difficult. To enter Catalina harbor between the 
southern end of Brandies shoal and Green island, after clearing the 
outer shoals, steer in with Burnt point in line with the Episcopal 
church on the western shore of Northeast arm, bearing 290°, until 
Green Island lighthouse bears 239° ; then steer about 307°, until Burnt 
point bears about 262°; then round the point at the distance of about 
200 yards to pass southward of Charlton rock, and bring the Wes- 
leyan chapel (situated on the slope of the hill which rises over Cour- 
age point) a little more than its own breadth open southward of the 
house on the rising ground behind it, bearing 264°, which mark leads 
in mid-channel between Lowe rock and the rock lying southward of 
Goodland point. 

To enter the harbor northward of Brandies shoal, bring a square 
white house situated about 300 yards southwestward of the Roman 
Catholic church, a low white building with a red roof on the north- 
western shore of Southwest arm (which, however, is not readily 
distinguished, as it is almost hidden by houses), in line with Good- 
land point, bearing about 238°. Keep this mark on until South 
head is shut in with Green Island lighthouse, bearing 186°, then steer 
toward Burnt point, and when about 200 yards from it, proceed as 
directed in entering southward of the Brandies. 

Ice.—Northeast arm of Catalina harbor freezes over about Jan- 
uary 1, and thence to the middle of April it is generally completely 
closed; southerly to southwesterly winds often break the ice up. 


RAGGED HARBOR—TRINITY BAY. 569 . 


Northern ice is irregular in its arrival, seldom appearing until Jan- 
uary 15, and often not before February 10; it generally leaves between 
April 10 and 20, but it has remained up to June 10. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Catalina harbor at 
th. Om.; springs rise 6 feet, neaps 4 feet. 

Communication.—The steamer from Clarenville calls at Cata- 
lina weekly, and the Labrador steamer calls fortnightly during sum- 
mer and autumn. There is telegraphic communication. 

Coal.—About 20 tons of coal might be obtained. 

Ragged harbor, a boat cove situated nearly 2 miles southward 
of Green island, is sheltered by Ragged islands, a group of rugged 
rocks 40 feet high, from which sunken rocks extend in all directions. 
Morris rock, the northeasternmost of these and situated south-south- 
eastward, distant nearly 1 mile from Green Island lighthouse, has 
29 feet least water over it. Burnt point, open northeastward of 
Green island, bearing 315°, leads northeastward; and Dough-fig 
point, well open southeastward of South head, bearing 217°, leads 
southeastward of this shoal. 

South head, a wedge-shaped point 130 feet high, is steep-to on 
its eastern side. 

Low point, southwestward 4 miles from South head, is rugged 
and shelving; there are detached rocks and a rock with 6 feet of 
water over it at 200 yards off the point. 

The coast between South head and Low point is a series of low 
bluffs, facing table-lands, backed by a long range of hills about 600 
feet high, the southwestern termination of which, named Norther 
point, is a steep conspicuous bluff 580 feet high. 

Horse Chops, southwestward, distant 54 miles from Low point, 
is an overhanging cliff, sloping from a saddle-shaped hill 265 feet 
high; Flat rock, a detached islet, 6 feet high, les close off it. 

The coast between South head and Horse Chops is foul, and should 
not be approached nearer than $ mile. Green Island hghthouse open 
eastward of South head, bearing 8°, leads eastward, and Bonaventure 
head open southwestward of Horse Chops, bearing 240°, leads south- 
eastward of all the shoals. 

Trinity bay trends south-southwestward for 50 miles from its 
entrance, which is 15 miles wide between Horse Chops on the north 
and Grates point on the south. It contains many good anchorages 
on both sides. 

Caution.—After easterly winds a strong current runs up Trinity 
bay along the northwestern shore, and the fog hangs more over this 
than the opposite side of the bay. 

Ice.—Trinity bay never freezes over, but field ice has been met 
with in December and has continued off the mouth of the bay until 
May. Icebergs come up the bay as early as the last week in May, and 


566 CAPE BONAVISTA TO CAPE RACE. 


some remain until the last week in August, but these latter icebergs 
are generally grounded; otherwise, with favorable winds, the bay 
would be clear by the end of June. 

The shore of Trinity bay from Horse Chops trends west-north- 
westward for 3 miles to English head, northward of which is English 
bay. 

Salmon cove, northwestward of English head, is separated from 
Robinhood bay by a peninsula terminating southward in Fox head 
and which is connected to the mainland to the northward by a narrow 
sandy neck. The cove is considered a good fishing place, and its 
shores are bold. There is a church on the eastern side of the cove. 

Fox rock, southward 300 yards from Fox head, has 15 feet of 
water over it. 

Robinhood bay.—Skerwink head lies west-southwestward, 1 
mile from Fox head, and Robinhood bay extends northward 13 
miles from between them, narrowing toward its head. Vessels fre- 
quently anchor in the bay in 7 to 17 fathoms of water for fishing 
purposes. 

Skerwink rocks, about 200 yards southeastward of the eastern point 
of Skerwink head, are 40 feet high. 

Trinity harbor, the entrance of which is between Skerwink head 
and a narrow peninsula extending northward 4 mile from Salvage 
head and terminating in Fort point, is considered one of the best and 
largest in Newfoundland; it is surrounded by hills 200 to 380 feet 
in height. A rocky, irregular peninsula, rising in Rider hill to the 
height of 380 feet, extends from the western side of the harbor, 
dividing it into Northwest and Southwest arms, in each of which 
are several small bays and coves. 

Light.—A white lighthouse, 48 feet high, situated southward 150 
yards from Fort point, exhibits at 75 feet above high water an 
intermittent white light every 74 seconds, showing thus: Light 64 
seconds, eclipse 14 seconds, which should be seen from a distance 
of 10 miles in clear weather. 

Shoals.—At a quarter of a mile within Skerwink head, Herring 
rocks extend 100 yards offshore. Admiral island, northward 100 
yards from Fort point, is 20 feet high, and Mussel rock, bearing 318°, 
200 yards from this island, has 8 feet water over it; a shoal extends 
northwestward about 300 yards from the shore westward of the 
lighthouse. } 

Directions.—When entering the harbor keep in mid-channel, the 
least width of the channel being about 400 yards. Give Mussel rock, 
the discolored water over which may be seen, a good berth, and 
anchor where convenient. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Trinity harbor, at 
Th. 10m.; springs rise 4 feet, neaps 2 feet. 


BONAVENTURE HEAD—MAIDEN POINT. 567 


Ice.—Trinity harbor freezes over about January 31, and is closed 
at intervals by ice, about 14 feet in thickness, from that date to 
about April 29; field ice appears about April 19 and leaves about 
April 29. The earliest date of a vessel arriving is March 5, and latest 
of leaving January 21. A southerly wind clears the harbor sufh- 
ciently for vessels to enter in twenty-four hours. Between Horse 
Chops and Skerwink head there is often a straight edge of ice, and, 
if easterly winds prevail, the ice in the bight outside of Trinity har- 
bor is held in for some time, but northwesterly or westerly winds 
clear it out. | 

The town of Trinity is on the lower part of the peninsula sep- 
arating Northwest and Southwest arms, facing eastward; it has about 
2,000 inhabitants, and there are several wharves along the shore. 

Supplies can be procured here. 

Communication.—The steamer from Clarenville calls at Trinity 
harbor weekly during the summer and autumn. 

Bonaventure head, the northern entrance point to Smith sound, 
is a bold bluff 537 feet high; its southern side is bordered by several 
cliffy rocks. Ragged islands, on the southern side of the main en- 
trance to Smith sound, are 115 feet high, and of a barren appearance; 
their eastern end bears 225°, distant 24 miles from the southern side of 
Bonaventure head. 

Ragged rock lies with the eastern end of Ragged islands bearing 
17°, distant 4 mile, and dries 2 feet at low water. New Bonaventure 
church in line with the eastern end of Ragged islands, bearing 352°, 
leads eastward; and Wolf head in line with the western end of the 
islands, bearing 330°, leads westward of the rock. 

Smith sound is 26 miles long from Bonaventure head to the bar at 
its head, which separates it from Northwest arm of Random sound, 
and it is from 4 to 14 miles wide. In the lower reaches the depth of 
water is 50 to 80 fathoms, and the shores are so steep that no anchorage 
in it can be recommended except the small harbors near the entrance. 

Ice.—Smith sound freezes in severe winters about February 10, 
and the ice breaks up from April 10 to 20. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Smith sound at 
7h. 8m.; springs rise 34 feet, neaps 24 feet. 

Maiden point lies westward about 1 mile from the southern part 
of Bonaventure head; Maiden islet, about 200 yards eastward of the 
point, is small, flat-topped and.inaccessible, with detached rocks ex- 
tending southward 100 yards from it. 

Old Bonaventure harbor extends north-northwestward about 
1 mile from between Bonaventure head and Maiden islet to an 
anchorage for small vessels within two islets, the western of which is 
20 feet high, and the eastern 10 feet, with a channel 100 yards wide on 
either side of them; the western channel has a depth of 4 fathoms, the 


568 CAPE BONAVISTA TO CAPE RACE. * 


middle 9 fathoms, and the eastern 6 fathoms. The anchorage is about 
400 yards in extent, with 6 to 7 fathoms of water, mud bottom. Cat 
cove, northward of Maiden islet, is small, and affords no anchorage. 

New Bonaventure harbor.—Between Maiden point and Wolf 
head, situated 1% miles to the westward, are New Bonaventure harbor, 
Broad cove, and Kerley harbor, all bights open southward. At the 
head of New Bonaventure and 300 yards from the shore, there is a 
shoal patch with 3 fathoms of water over it. The harbor is not at 
all times safe for shipping. New Bonaventure village is at the head 
of the bay on the eastern shore, and its church is in a commanding 
position and conspicuous. 

Ice does not form so soon as, and breaks up earlier than, at Old 
Bonaventure. 

Broad Cove rocks, on the western side of New Bonaventure, and 
in the entrance to Broad cove, dry 2 feet. New Bonaventure church 
bearing northward 25°, and well open of the point opposite the vil- 
lage, leads eastward of them. 

Kerley harbor, an inlet extending northward } mile, and 200 
yards wide, with a depth of 23 fathoms at the entrance gradually 
shoaling to its head, affords good anchorage, but the space is confined. 

The shore of Smith sound from Wolf head trends southwestward 
for 14 miles to British harbor point, a remarkable flat-topped cliff; 
midway along this stretch of coast there is a point which, from its 
artificial appearance, is named Battery point; inland from it are steep 
barren hills 600 to 700 feet high. 

British harbor, between British Harbor point and West point,. 
a small rocky promontory, steep-to, at $ mile to the southwestward, 
extends northward about 1 mile, and narrows to 200 yards with 
a depth of 7 fathoms at ? mile within the entrance; there is anchorage 
in a space about 300 yards across above these narrows in 10 to 12 
fathoms of water, mud bottom. The head of the harbor forms into 
3 little bays, on the shores of which are the houses of fishermen. 

A rock, with 4 feet of water over it, hes outside the narrows and 
100 yards from the eastern shore; to avoid it, keep the western shore 
aboard. 

Communication.—The steamer from Clarenville calls at British 
harbor weekly during summer and autumn. 

The coast from West point to Pope harbor, west-southwestward 
1,8, miles, is broken and rocky; midway is Darby cove, where there 
are a few houses and fishing stages behind a small peninsula; and a 
rock, with 3 feet of water over it, lies 100 yards off a small cove at - 
600 yards eastward of Pope harbor. 

Pope harbor.—At the entrance to Pope harbor there are two rocks 
above water, the western being 18 feet high; and there are other rocks 
uncovered, northeastward of them. The two western channels formed 


HICKMANS ISLANDS—-WARWICK HARBOR. 569 


by these rocks are about 200 yards in width, with deep water, but 
there is a rocky patch with 4 fathoms of water over it bearing 211°, 
distant nearly 400 yards from the rock 18 feet high. Inside, the har- 
bor is $ mile long, eastward and westward, and + mile wide, with 4 
to 5 fathoms of water, mud bottom. 

A sunken rock, with shoal water around it, lies 150 yards off the 
middle of the northern shore, and another sunken rock lies about the 
same distance off the northeastern shore. <A large stream runs into 
the northern part of the harbor, draining a considerable tract of 
country, and good-sized spars are brought down by it. 

Round harbor, on the western side of Pope harbor, is a snug basin 
400 yards long, eastward and westward, 150 yards wide, and 3 
fathoms deep; its entrance is narrow, with 2 fathoms water. 

Indian lookout is a remarkable hill immediately over the south- 
western shore of Pope harbor; its summit is a steep cliff 505 feet high. 

Hickman islands, southward nearly } mile from Pope harbor, 
comprise a group of islets and rocks extending about 1,400 yards 
parallel to the shore, the northeastern and highest being 98 feet high. 
The islets are separated from the northwestern shore by a channel 
400 yards wide, carrying 20 to 29 fathoms of water, in which, at 100 
yards from the mainland, are two rocks; one of these uncovers, the 
other has less than 6 feet water over it. Hickman harbor, a narrow 
inlet, fronted by islets, is 100 yards wide at the entrance, and 4 
fathoms deep at 200 yards within, when it quickly narrows to 20 
yards, and is choked with rocks. 

Warwick harbor, southwestward ? mile from Hickman islands 
and on the western side of a small peninsula 45 feet high, has a 
narrow entrance, but within it is 500 yards long, eastward and .west- 
ward, and 200 yards wide; much of this space is occupied by an 
islet with rocks in the channel on either side of it. A vessel drawing 
6 feet water could be warped in. 

Burn point lies southwestward 24 miles from Warwick harbor; the 
shore between, forming a slight bend, is steep-to and in some places 
is composed of cliffs. At 14 miles farther westward is a small bay 
with a stream running into it, and a rock, 8 feet high, lying close off 
its eastern point. 

Irelands Eye island, the northeastern end of which bears 150°, 
distant 1 mile from British Harbor point, rises in several remarkable 
peaks; the highest, near the middle, is 440 feet high; the island 1s 
steep and rocky on all sides, and separated from the northeastern end 
of Random island by the Thoroughfare, a narrow channel. 

Irelands Eye point, the northeastern end of the island, is a steep 
cliff, and at 14 miles southward of it is the entrance to Irelands Kye 
harbor; about midway is Jacobs cove, in which are several small 


570 CAPE BONAVISTA TO CAPE RACE. 


islets and rocks. Irelands Eye harbor is available for large boats, 
which lie alongside the fishing stages. 

Ice.—Irelands Eye harbor freezes between January 1 and February 
1, and the ice clears between March 10 and Te in April. 

Tray Town harbor is southwestward 4 mile from Irelands Eye 
harbor, the coast between being rocky. This harbor trends north- 
northwestward for about 800 yards and then turns southward for an 
equal distance, with an average breadth of 150 yards; in the first 
reach the depth is 5 to 14 fathoms, in the second it shoals to 9 feet, 
eastward of an islet near the end of the reach, where it becomes nar- 
row; southward of the islet the depth is 12 feet. 

Gunner rock, southward about 400 yards from the entrance to Tray 
Town harbor, and 150 yards from the shore, is awash at low water. 
The harbor open, bearing about 323°, leads northeastward of the 
rock. 

Round harbor, southwestward 4 mile from Tray Town harbor, is 
a small basin with 9 feet of water, but, as its entrance is nearly dry 
at low water, it is of little value even to boats. 

Black ledge bears 112°, distant 1,200 yards from the entrance to 
Round harbor; at 300 yards westward of it is a rock which dries 3 
feet. 

Communication.—The steamer from Clarenville calls at Irelands 
Eye weekly during summer and autumn. 

Anthony Island les about + mile eastward of the entrance to 
Irelands Eye harbor, with a deep channel between. It is about 1,200 
yards long, northward and southward, 900 yards wide, and 208 feet 
high. 

Green island, south-southwestward, distant 54+ miles from Bona- 
venture head, is 121 feet high, with a flat summit. 

Duck island, southwestward 2,4, miles from Green island, is 189 
feet high, slopes eastward, and is divided into two peaks by a valley 
running in the direction of its length. 

Shag islets, extending north-northeastward 600 yards from the 
northern end of Duck island, are 30 feet high, and steep around. 

The Thoroughfare, separating Irelands Eye island from Random 
island, is 14 miles in length, and at its southern entrance are several 
rocky islets; Thoroughfare rock, the eastern islet, is 11 feet high, and 
there is a channel, 100 yards wide, with 8 fathoms water, between. 
it and the southwestern point of Irelands Eye island. 

Indian islets lie within about + mile westward from the north- 
western part of Irelands Eye island; de outer and largest islet is 
145 feet high. 

Indian rock, lying with the northern end of the largest Indian islet 
bearing about 51°, distant 400 yards, dries 3 feet, and is the only rock 
in the Thoroughfare not always above water. 


RANDOM ISLAND—-BURGOYNE COVE. Suit 


Directions.—From the southward, after passing Thoroughfare 
rock, bring it in line with the northern point of Duck island, bearing 
about 143°, which leads westward of Indian rock at the northern end 
of the channel. When Bonaventure head opens northward of Ire- 
lands Eye point, bearing 59°, which mark leads northward of the 
rock, proceed as convenient in Smith sound. 

Random island separates Smith sound from Random sound: 
Ginpicker hill, its summit, situated 4 miles from the east and 13 
miles from the north coast, is 848 feet high. 

Haydon point, the northeastern end of the island, is bordered by 
rocks above water. Haydon island lies eastward 1,200 yards: from 
the point; rocks extend southwestward 4 mile, and there is a 43 
fathoms patch bearing 53°, distant 250 yards from the island. 

Long harbor, 1 mile southwestward of Haydon point, is a narrow 
inlet extending southward about ? mile, with depths decreasing from 
8 to 2 fathoms of water at its head. An islet hes at the entrance, 
with deep water on either side: but a reef, which covers at high 
water, extends 100 yards from its southeastern point, narrowing the 
passage on that side. 

Lower Lance cove, at 54 miles west-southwestward of Long har- 
bor, is 600 yards wide, but it is open northeastward and the depth of 
water being 42 fathoms, there is no anchorage. _ 

The coast between Lower Lance cove and Bluff point, about 2? 
miles northwestward, forms a bend to the southwestward, with 
several little coves separated by rocky points, where fishing stations 
have been established near small streams, the whole under the name 
of Britannia cove. As this locality is favorable for agriculture, a less 
migratory people than Newfoundland fishermen generally are have 
settled here. 

Lance Cove rock, 400 yards off Upper Lance cove, bearing 281°, 
distant 1,8, miles from Lance Cove head, is small, with 6 feet of water 
over it, and 5 to 10 fathoms of water around. 

Burgoyne cove, on the northern shore, northwestward of Tilton 
head, affords fair temporary anchorage in 12 fathoms of water at 
300 yards from the shore; it is sheltered from the strong winds which 
generally blow up and down the reach. 

Upper Rocky bight, where there is a depth of 6 fathoms, rock 
bottom, at 600 yards from the beach, suddenly deepening to 30 
fathoms, is situated west-northwestward, 4 miles from Burgoyne cove. 

The coast of Random island from Bluff point to Snooks harbor, 
about 44 miles westward, is steep, in places cliffy, with a few rocks 
100 yards off. Snooks harbor is } mile square within the line of the 
coast, and there is a depth of 12 fathoms of water, mud bottom, at 


+ mile from its head. 


572 CAPE BONAVISTA TO CAPE RACE. 


Smith point is on the northern shore of the sound, directly oppo- 
site Snooks harbor; there are a few houses at 1 mile eastward of the 
point, and 200 yards off them there are 4 fathoms of water, but it 
suddenly deepens to 10 and 20 fathoms. 

The bar is the shallow channel connecting the head of Smith sound 
with the head of Northwest arm of Random sound, and toward 
which they both gradually shoal. At high water it is 4 mile wide; 
at low water spits of sand and stone stretch off both shores, leaving a 
narrow channel 2 feet deep and 4 mile long. 

Bakers loaf, at the northeastern end of Random island, is a re- 
markable peak 546 feet high. 

Northwest arm.—Westward of Connor islet, and separated about 
100 yards from it, is Sullivan islet, 35 feet high, and between the 
latter and Siildown point, 4 mile westward of it, is the entrance to 
Northwest arm. The western half of the entrance is obstructed by a 
bed of rocks, some of which are uncovered; the channel is between 
these rocks and Sullivan islet, and at the foot.of Bakers loaf; and the 
anchorage, about + mile square, is in 9 fathoms of water, mud bottom. 
Rider harbor is a small nook northward of Sullivan islet, with 2 
fathoms of water. 

A rock, with 6 feet of water over it, lies just off the southeastern 
end of Sullivan islet. 

Little harbor.—The entrance to this small inlet is 400 yards wide, 
between the rocky islet southward of Silldown point and the opposite 
shore, which is bold, with a small rock above water off it. The inlet 
extends westward about 4 mile and then turns southward for 400 
yards, where it is narrow, with a depth of 4 fathoms. 

The coast between Little harbor and East head, 14 miles south- 
southeastward, is composed of low cliffs; the hills over it are flat- 
topped, and the highest is 492 feet high. East head, which is a cliff 
88 feet high, is the northeastern entrance point to Long’ cove and 
Deer harbor. 

North Bird islet, 112 feet high, hes northward, 1 mile from East 
head and + mile offshore; in the cove westward of the islet is a 
remarkable flat cliff, named Cold East Flake, from its supposed re- 
semblance to a fish flake. South Bird islet, 121 feet high, hes north- 
ward, $ mile from East head and 300 yards offshore. 

Long cove, westward 1 mile from East head, extends northward ? 
mile, with a width of about 200 yards, and shoals from 20 fathoms at 
the entrance to 2 fathoms at the head. At 400 yards eastward of Long 
cove a reef of rocks extends over 200 yards from the coast, and a little 
within the northwestern entrance point of the cove, and 100 yards 
from the western shore is a rock with 6 feet of water over it. 

Deer harbor, 600 yards long, about 200 yards wide, with a depth of 
5 to 9 fathoms of water, is about $ mile westward of Long cove; the 


VERGE ISLAND—-EAST RANDOM HEAD. bite 


entrance is 100 yards wide, with a depth of 5 fathoms in it, between 
a small, low islet on the north and the rocks close off a point on the 
south. 

Ice.—Deer harbor is frozen in February and the ice breaks up at 
the latter part of April. 

Verge island, about 600 yards from the coast and nearly midway 
between East head and East Random head, is 204 feet high: rocky 
islets extend northward 4 mile from its northwestern end and termi- 
nate in Black rock, small and 30 feet high; rocky islets also extend 
southward 600 yards from its southwestern end, Rat island, the 
largest, being 65 feet high.. Copper islet, 130 feet high, hes 600 
yards off the southeastern end of the island, with rocks between; and 
Verge rock, which dries, is situated 300 yards off the northeastern 
end of the island. 

Deer rock, bearing 84°, distant nearly a mile from the northeastern 
end of Verge island, is small, has 4 feet of water over it, and is 
generally marked by a breaker, except at high water with a smooth 
sea. 

Gun ledge, north-northeastward about } mile from Deer rock, has 
6 fathoms of water over it, with 21 fathoms between. Bonaventure 
head, midway between Duck and Green islands, bearing 26°, leads 
eastward; Bakers loaf in line with the western points of Bird islets, 
bearing 349°, leads westward of Deer rock and Gun ledge; and Gin- 
picker hill, in line with the northern entrance point to Deer harbor, 
276°, leads northward of Gun ledge. 

Random Head harbor, on the northern side of East Random 
head, is about 4 mile square, with depths of 10 to 18 fathoms of water ; 
the southern and western shores are much indented, and rocks extend 
600 yards off them. The northern shore is bold, and here small ves- 
sels anchor in a bight, but with this exception the harbor is not 
recommended. Pigeon islet, on the northern side of the entrance, is 
flat and about 40 feet high; a reef extends southeastward 300 yards 
from it and terminates in Mouse rock, which is awash. The passage 
between Mouse rock and the southern shore is 600 yards wide. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Random Head harbor 
at Th. 8m.; springs rise 34 feet, neaps 24 feet. 

East Random head, the southeastern point of Random island, is 
512 feet high, and the termination of a range of hills which rises to 
the height of 808 feet; the eastern end of the head is composed of 
several quoin-shaped masses. 

Light.—A circular lighthouse, 36 feet high and checkered red and 
white, on Motion island, close eastward of East Random head, exhibits, 
at 126 feet above high water, an intermittent white light every four 
seconds showing thus: Light, two seconds; eclipse, two seconds, which 
should be seen from a distance of 13 miles in clear weather. The 


574 CAPE BONAVISTA TO CAPE RACE. 


keeper’s dwelling and a store, painted white with red roofs, stand 
close northward of the lighthouse. 

Random sound.—The entrance to this sound is between East 
Random head and West Random head, which bear southwestward 
and northeastward, distant 34 miles from each’ other; at 54 miles 
within East Random head is Middle cliff, 357 feet high, where the 
sound divides into two branches. 

Ice.—Random sound freezes, in severe winters, about February 10, 
and the ice breaks up between April 10 and 20. 

Northwest arm.—At 3 miles westward of East Random head is 
a small islet 40 feet high, and 800 yards farther on another islet 
at the entrance to Salmon cove; these islets are separated from the 
shore by deep water. ; 

Salmon Cove extends northward 800 yards, and at its head is a 
salmon fishing station. 

Strong islands, on the northern shore of the arm at 2? miles 
within Salmon cove, are two principal islands, 123 feet and 146 feet 
high, respectively, with a few rocks above water. Running north- 
ward of these islands is Strong tickle, which is nearly 3 mile long and 
100 yards wide, with a depth of 4 to 10 fathoms of water, except near 
its head, where there is 14 fathoms. 

Quarry rock, bearing 217°, distant 400 yards from the southern 
point of the western Strong island, has 12 feet of water over it; the 
point just westward of Tolt point, open southward of Gooseberry 
islet, bearing 260°, leads southward of the rock. 

Gooseberry islet, 66 feet high, lies nearly in mid-channel at 14 
miles westward of the Strong islands, and from it the first reach of 
Northwest arm continues westward for 7$ miles. The depth in mid- 
channel decreases from 90 to 60 fathoms, and the shore is steep-to and 
without anchoring ground. 

The coast from Middle cliff, the eastern end of the promontory 
separating the two arms of Random sound, is steep cliff, and trends 
_ northwestward 14 miles to Passenger point, at 800 yards, beyond 
which is Holloway rock, close off a steep point. This point separates 
two coves, and $ mile westward of it is Pudding point, the rocky 
termination of a ridge of hills, which attains a height of 548 feet. At 
+ mile farther westward is Black Duck cove, + mile deep, with 5 to 20 
fathoms of water. 

Hickman harbor, opposite Black Duck cove, is 600 yards wide at 
the entrance, and extends northward 2 mile; on its northeastern shore 
is a bed of rocks with 14 to 6 feet of water over them, and elsewhere 
the depth is 8 to 18 fathoms, gravel and mud bottom. This harbor is 
1 mile from the western Strong island, and on the coast between, 
at about 1,400 vards from the western Strong island, there are slate 
quarries. 


MAGGOTTY COVE—SHOAL HARBOR. 575 


Communication.—The steamer from Clarenville calls at Hickman 
harbor weekly during summer and autumn. 

Maggotty cove.—At nearly 1? miles westward of Black Duck 
cove, on the southern shore, is the Tolt, a remarkable conical hill, 550 
feet high. Maggotty cove, 34 miles westward of the Tolt, has 25 
fathoms of water at 400 yards from the shore, and a large stream runs 
into it, at the mouth of which is a sawmill; the valley of this stream 
runs southeastward toward Hatchers cove in Southwest arm with low 
land right across. 

Bald Nap and Forster rocks.—From South bight, at the western 
end of the arm, the sound is 24 miles across to Bald Nap and Forster 
points on the northeastern shore; these points are shelving and rocky, 
with patches of rock and shoal water for about 600 yards off them. 

Gooseberry islet, just open southward of Lady point, bearing 89°, 
leads southward of these shoals; and Red Point hill in line with Bluff 
point or Red man, bearing 330°, leads westward of them. 

Lower Shoal harbor, on the western shore, 44 miles northward of 
South bight, is a small inlet, the head of which dries. 

Red point, on the western shore at 1,2, miles northward of Lower 
Shoal harbor, is a low cliff rising to Red Point hill, which is remark- 
able and 517 feet high; the arm here is only 4 mile across to Brown 
Mead, a spit of sand a few feet high, covered with grass and brush- 
wood. 

Shoal harbor, on the western shore above Red point, is ? mile wide 
at the entrance, and at high water extends 1 mile within the line of 
coast, but the deposit from a large stream, which runs into it, dries 
outward 4 mile; the depth gradually increases to 5 fathoms at ? mile 
from the dry bank. 

There is a village and a sawmill at Shoal harbor, the logs for which 
are brought down Shoal Harbor river; supplies are scarce. 

Communication.—There is railway communication. The stations 
are at Shoal harbor and Clarenville, which is a settlement a little 
below Lower Shoal harbor. There is a post-office at Shoal harbor, 
but the telegraph office is at Lower Shoal harbor. A small steamer, 
conveying mails and passengers, plies to and from the neighboring 
settlements. (See p. 37.) 

Anchorage.—There is good anchorage from a line between Red 
point and Brown Mead northward to the bar, a space 13 miles long 
and 4 mile wide. The depth decreases gradually from 24 fdthoms 
toward the bar, but rather suddenly on either shore. 

The most convenient berth for a man-of-war is with the white 
houses at the head of Shoal harbor open of the wooded point on the 
southern side of the harbor in 4 to 5 fathoms of water. 


576 CAPE BONAVISTA TO CAPE RACE. 


Southwest arm of Random sound extends west-southwestward, 
then westward for 14 miles from West Random head; it has an aver- 
age breadth of 1 mile, and from a depth of 175 fathoms at the en- 
trance the soundings decrease to 50 fathoms at 1 mile from the head 
of the arm. ' 

West Random head is level and 291 feet high, and its eastern end 
is a high cliff, separated by a chasm from the main part of the head; 
rocks, mostly above water, extend eastward 200 yards from the head. 

Fox islet, on the southern shore of the arm at 14 miles within West 
Random head, is steep, cliffy on its northwestern side, and 93 feet: 
high; the entrance, about 200 yards wide, to Fox harbor, is on the 
eastern side of the islet; within, the space is 400 yards in extent, but 
encumbered with rocks, and only suitable for large boats, which le 
under the eastern head close to the shore. 

Little Heartsease harbor, southwestward 2 miles from Fox islet, 
is clear of shoals, and has an average breadth of 150 yards; the depth 
decreases from 5 fathoms at the entrance to 2 fathoms at the head. A 
rock with 3 feet of water on it nearly closes the entrance of the first 
arm on the eastern shore. 

Hodge hole, west-southwestward 2 miles from Little Heartsease, 
has an islet in the middle of it, on the southern side of which is a 
space about 200 yards square, where small vessels anchor. 

Rocky harbor.—Southwest rock, 100 yards off the northern shore 
at * mile southwestward of Middle cliff, is 8 feet high; and im- 
mediately westward of it is Rocky harbor, which extends north-north- 
westward 4 mile, with a width of 300 yards. A rock, awash at low 
water, lies near the middle of the harbor, leaving a channel along 
the eastern shore, but the western shore is foul. 

Long cove, west-southwestward 1 mile from Rocky harbor, is 
small, with 5 fathoms of water. 

St. Jones Within harbor, westward ? mile from Long cove, is 
800 yards wide at the entrance, off the eastern point of which is a 
small rock above water; the harbor trends northward for $ mile, with 
20 fathoms of water, and then turns westward for 4 mile to its head. 
This inner portion is 400 yards wide, and affords good anchorage in 
5 to 7 fathoms of water. 

Hatchers Cove, west-southwestward 24 miles from St. Jones 
Within harbor, affords anchorage for small vessels, in 5 fathoms 
of wdter, near its head. 

North bight, on the northern shore at 1} miles eastward of the 
head of Southwest arm, is about 800 yards square, with 4 to 8 fathoms 
of water; the bottom is strewn with bowlders, particularly on the 
eastern shore, and a shoal, with 12 feet of water over it, extends east- 
southeastward 300 yards from the western entrance point. 


BLACK BROOK—-BEAVER ROCK. 577 


Black brook runs into the head of Southwest arm, and there is 
anchorage in 3 to 10 fathoms of water, mud bottom, at 4 mile from 
its mouth. 

Long island, southward 1,200 yards from West Random head, is 
# mile long, north-northeastward and west-southwestward, 350 yards 
wide, and 132 feet high. 

Green islets, a little more than 4} mile northeastward of Long 
island, with 34 fathoms of water between, and about the same distance 
southeastward from West Random head, comprise a group of flat- 
topped islets, 63 feet high. 

Heartsease ledge extends east-southeastward 3? mile from Green 
islets, and has 24 to 10 fathoms of water over it. The northern 
extreme of West Random head open northeastward of its north- 
eastern end, bearing 277°, leads northward; and Duck island, open 
eastward of East Random head, bearing 30°, leads eastward of the 
ledge. 

White rocks, southeastward 1,4; miles from the southern point of 

-Long island, are 9 feet high, and a few yards in extent. At 200 yards 
westward of them is a rock on which the sea generally breaks, and at 
4 mile in the same direction the depth is less than 10 fathoms; on the 
northern and eastern sides the rocks are steep-to. Heartsease church, 
open southwestward of Long island, bearing about 315°, leads south- 
westward of the rocks. 

Heartsease is an inlet extending southwestward about 2 miles, 
with depths decreasing from 24 fathoms at the entrance to shallow 
water at its head. Heartsease point, the northeastern entrance point, 
is a small peninsula connected to the mainland by a neck of shingle, 
9 feet high, and a hundred feet up the hill northwestward of it is the 
church, in appearance an ordinary large house, isolated and con- 
spicuous. 

The breadth of the inlet, for nearly one mile within the entrance, 
is 400 yards, with depths of 10 to 18 fathoms, mud bottom; then about. 
200 yards, for another mile, with 7 to 10 fathoms, mud bottom. <At 
the head of the inlet is a pond. The only shoals in the inlet are two 
rocks, each with 2 feet of water over it, on the northwestern shore 
opposite the southwestern entrance point. A swell sets into the 
entrance with northeasterly gales, but not with sufticient force to 
attect a vessel anchored off Ganny cove, on the northwestern shore at 
4+ mile within the entrance. 

Beaver rock, bearing 215°, distant nearly 14 miles from White 
rocks, has 3 fathoms of water over it. West Random head, open of 
the northeastern point of Long island, bearing 357°, leads eastward 
of the rock. 

76846—O9 37 


578 CAPE BONAVISTA TO CAPE RACE. 


Bald head, southward 2 miles from the entrance to Heartsease, is 
a bold cliffy bluff, 489 feet high; a valley runs at its back parallel to 
the coast, giving it a remarkable semi-isolated appearance. 

St. Jones head, south-southwestward about 2 miles from the 
southern part of Bald head, is 612 feet high, bold and cliffy, and 
about halfway between them is Round harbor. 

Round harbor.—The entrance to this little harbor, about 100 
yards wide, in the straight cliffy coast which extends on either side 
of it, is not easily recognized until close to the land, when the south 
head, a small peninsula 210 feet high, projecting northward, can be 
seen against the higher land behind it. The harbor is less than 400 
yards long and 200 yards wide, with a depth of 3 to 5 fathoms of 
water, mud bottom. 

The shore of Trinity bay from St. Jones head trends about west- 
southwestward for $ mile, and then southward for 1,6 miles to North 
head of St. Jones harbor. 

Seal island, south-southwestward, about 4 mile from St. Jones 
head and 100 yards from the shore, is in two parts, the northern 60 
feet high and the southern 148 feet, joined by a low neck, on which 
are several rocky hummocks. <A ridge, with 3 fathoms water over it, 
connects this island to the mainland. 

St. Jones islet, bearing 125°, distant 1,300 yards from North head 
of St. Jones harbor, is 67 feet high and inaccessible; it is steep-to 
on the eastern side, but rocks extend 265 yards westward, and shoal 
water about 100 yards northward and southward from it. 

St. Jones harbor is a narrow inlet which extends westward nearly 
3 miles, and when on this bearing its steep shores appear as cliff 
behind cliff to the head. Crown hill, steep and rugged, rises to 
the height of 820 feet at the head of the harbor, and conical hills 
rise abruptly from the land northward of the harbor. 

At 14 miles within the entrance the harbor narrows to 135 yards, 
and has a depth of 44 fathoms for about $ mile, when it opens out 
to the head, which forms two bays. There are some small islets and 
rocks for 135 yards off the eastern shore of the southern bay, leaving 
an anchorage, about 300 yards across, westward of them, with 4 to 7 
fathoms water, mud bottom. 

The western bay is about 600 yards long, northward and south- 
ward, and 400 yards wide, with 4 to 9 fathoms water, mud bottom. 

Deer harbor, an extensive narrow inlet about 2 miles southward of 
St. Jones harbor, stretches westward about 43 miles, and has small 
arms and bays indenting its shores. 

Deer Harbor head, the northeastern entrance point, is 432 feet high, 
and steep-to on its southeastern side; there are several rocky islets off 
the southern side of the headland between Deer Harbor head and 


POOR BOY LEDGE—BIG ISLAND. 579 


Robinson point, at 1 mile to the westward; Green islet, the eastern- 
most, is 24 feet high, and Poor Boy islet, the westernmost, 20 feet 
high; shoals with 3 fathoms of water over them extend a little south- 
ward from Poor Boy islet, and broken ground, with 1} fathoms over 
it, skirts Robinson point to the distance of 300 yards. 

Poor Boy ledge, bearing 157°, distant 400 yards from Poor Boy 
islet, is 200 yards in extent, with 15 feet water over it, and steep-to 
around. 

Big rock, bearing 170°, distant $ mile from Poor Boy islet and 
nearly in the middle of the entrance between Green islet and Big 
island, is small, with 3} fathoms water over it, and steep-to around. 
The western end of the rocks westward of St. Jones island open 
eastward of Deer Harbor head, bearing 33°, leads eastward of Big 
rock, 

Big island, on the southern side of the entrance, southwestward 
1 mile from Green islet, is 218 feet high, and being separated by a 
narrow channel from the mainland, which is higher, it is not easily 
distinguished from seaward. Tea Cove point, $ mile northward of 
Big island, is shelving and steep-to; the distance between this point, 
on the southwest, and Poor Boy islet and the land of Robinson point 
on the northeast, is nearly $ mile and is the narrowest part of the 
entrance. 

Southeast arm extends eastward 1,200 yards on the northern side 
of Robinson point from its entrance, which is between that point and 
Sophia head; it is generally about 200 yards wide, with depths of 
4 to 12 fathoms. 

Northeast arm.—Sophia head, which separates Southeast arm 
from Northeast arm, is 257 feet high. Northeast arm extends north- 
northwestward 800 yards, with a breadth of 300 yards, and a depth 
of 4 to 7 fathoms water. 

Anchorage.—Grub island lies close off the southern shore of the 
harbor at $ mile within Tea Cove point, and there is fair anchorage 
for small vessels in the bay westward of the island, in 7 to 20 fathoms 
of water, over a space 600 yards long, northward and southward, and 
400 yards wide. 

Directions.—With a fair wind, bring Crown hill in line with the 
northern point of Grub island, bearing 311°, which mark leads be- 
tween Poor Boy ledge and Big rock (Crown hill will soon be shut in — 
behind the near range) until the northeastern end of Big island is in 
line with Tea Cove point, bearing 160°; keep this mark on astern, and 
rounding Grub island, anchor as convenient. 

When working in, pass westward of Big rock, with Sophia head 
open westward of Robinson point, bearing 336°, until the southern 
end of Poor Boy islet is seen between Green islet and Deer Harbor 
head, about 83°; then steer in mid-channel about 313°, avoiding the 


580 CAPE BONAVISTA TO CAPE RACE. 


shoal extending from Robinson point, and when the eastern end of 
Big island is in line with Tea Cove point, bearing 160°, proceed as 
before. 

When entering the inner portion of the inlet, avoid a rock with 5 
feet of water over it, bearing 290°, distant 300 yards from the north- 
ern end of the islet, 128 feet high, on the southern side of its entrance, 
by keeping close northward of the islet; the channel then passes 
between Gooseberry islet and a patch ‘: rocks 5 feet high, lying 
300 yards to the northward; when within this islet and these rocks 
anchor as convenient in 4 to 10 fathoms of water. ‘Two considerable 
streams run into the inlet, the banks of which dry outward 4 mile. 

Ice.—St. Jones and Deer harbors freeze during January and the ice 
breaks up at the latter part of April. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Deer harbor at 
Th. 49m.; springs rise 34 feet, HPA feet. 

Shoal bay, southwestward } mile from Big island, extends about 
14 miles west-southwestwar a, is narrow, encumber ed with small 
islets and rocks, and is open to the northeastward; it has nothing to 
recommend it to the seaman. 

Harbor rocks, southward 4 mile from the southern end of Big 
island, are 37 feet high; a reef extends north-northeastward 300 yards 
from them. 

Thames Harbor point is separated from Harbor rocks by a chan- 
nel 200 yards wide, with 2 fathoms of water; the point is the north- 
eastern end of a flat island 40 feet high, ehich has a channel between 
it and the mainland 100 yards wide, where large fishing boats lie in 
2 fathoms of water, but the southern entrance dries at low water. 

Goose cove, on the southern side of Shoal bay at 800 yards within 
Thames Harbor point, extends about 800 yards to the southward and 
is 200 yards wide, with 9 to 14 fathoms of water, rock bottom. Riff- 
raffs rocks extend northward 250 yards from the western point of 
Goose cove. 

The shore of Trinity bay from Thames Harbor point trends south- 
southwestward for 64 miles to the northern entrance point of Bull 
arm. Copper island, south-southeastward about 1,200 yards from 
Thames Harbor point, is 82 feet high, and rocks extend southwest- 
ward 800 yards from it, the most distant of which is 15 feet high. A 
patch of slate rocks éxtends 300 yards from the land at 1 mile south- 
westward of the island, and ee south-southwestward nearly to 
Squib point, a distance of 3 miles, the shore is bold and rocky. 
Niagara point, south-southwestward, 3 miles from Copper island, is 
the northern termination of a steep cliff. 

Centre hill, the highest land in this locality, separates the head of 
Deer harbor from that of Bull arm; it is isolated, conical, and 1,081 


BULL ISLAND—BULL ARM. 581 


feet high, rising 540 feet above an elevated broken plateau. It over- 
looks the isthmus of Avalon, and Placentia and Trinity bays, but 
although it is the highest land, the rocky hills in the foreground of 
less elevation, particularly Crown hill, and two cones, 786 and 878 
feet high, northward of the head of St. Jones harbor, are more re- 
markable from Trinity bay. 

Bull island, the northeastern end of which les southeastward, 
distant 1,200 yards from Squib point, is 1,5, miles long northeastward 
and southwestward or parallel to the maiilaete 400 to 900 yards wide, 
281 feet high, and partially wooded. On the northwestern side of this 
island and near its northeastern end, is an excellent little harbor for 
fishing craft, quite landlocked, with a sufficient supply of fresh water, 
and in stormy weather some 50 to 60 small schooners and boats can 
take shelter in it. A rock, awash at low water, lies near the south- 
western side of its entrance, but it is avoided by keeping the gravelly 
point on the opposite shore close aboard. 

Bull island is separated from the mainland by Bull Island HELE a 
channel $ mile wide. Near the middle of the tickle, but rather to- 
ward the northeastern entrance, are Flat rocks, composing a ledge 
6 feet high. Bearing 71°, distant nearly 200 yards, and bearing 184°, 
the same distance from the southern end of the ledge, are two rocks 
with 8 and 2 feet of water, respectively, over them; the northern side 
of the ledge is steep-to. The shores of the tickle are otherwise bold, 
but the best passage 1s westward of Flat rocks. 

Anchorage.—There is temporary anchorage at 700 yards west- 
ward of Flat rocks, in 10 to 12 fathoms of water, coarse mixed bottom. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, at Bull island at Th. 22m. ; 
springs rise 34 feet, neaps 2 feet. 

Current.—A current, principally depending on the wind, sets 
through the tickle and sometimes attains a rate of $ mile an hour. 

Rix harbor, in the mainland northwestward of the southern end of 
Bull island, has a depth of 7 fathoms, and affords good anchorage for 
small vessels. Chalk rocks, at the entrance to the harbor, are sev- 
eral heads, all of which are a few feet high, and about 100 yards in 
extent, northward and southward. Small vessels pass on either side 
of the rocks, as the shores are bold and steep-to. 

Water is easily procured from the streams that run into the head of 
Rix harbor. 

Bull arm.—The entrance to Bull arm is 3 miles wide between Bull 
island and Masters head which lies to the southwestward; the arm 
trends about north-northeastward for 7} miles, and thence west- 
northwestward for 24 miles,its width decreasing to 800 yards; there 
are no shoals in the arm at a moderate distance from either shore, 
nor is there good anchorage except at its head. 


582 CAPE BONAVISTA TO CAPE RACE. 


On the western side of Bull arm at 54 miles within Masters head 
is Great Mosquito cove, at 200 yards from the head of which there is 
a depth of 7 fathoms; several other smaller coves on this side of the 
arm are suitable for fishing boats; the largest of these is Little 
Mosquito cove, but a rock, with 5 feet of water over it, hes near the 
middle of the entrance. 

Ice.—Bull arm freezes about the middle of January, and the ice 
breaks up about May 10. 

Communication.-—Whiteway station of the Northern and Western 
railway is situated about # mile from the head of the arm. 

Rantem cove, on the southwestern side of Masters head, has very 
deep water, but it affords anchorage and good shelter well in its 
northern and northwestern arms. Boulton islet, near the middle of 
this cove, and rather on the northern side, is 20 feet high. The shores 
of the cove are steep-to, but there is a rock, with 2 feet of water over 
it, bearing 116°, distant 300 yards, and a rock, with 5 feet of water 
over it, bearing 192°, distant 300 yards from Boulton islet. 

The southern arm of the cove is too open northward for an anchor- 
age. <A fresh water stream running into it is considered excellent 
for trout fishing. 

The shores of Rantem cove are well covered with wood of a sufhi- 
cient size for making boats’ masts and small studding-sail booms. 

Communication.—La Manche and Rantem stations of the North- 
ern and Western railway are situated about 14 miles inland from 
Rantem cove; there is also telegraphic communication. 

Big and Littie Chance coves, south-southeastward 1? miles from 
Rantem cove, are only available for small vessels during summer; 
the best shelter is in a small bay on the northern side of Little Chance 
cove; when entering either cove, the northwestern points must be 
kept aboard. A rock, with 6 feet of water on it, bears 341°, distant 
nearly 600 yards from Green head, the eastern point of Big Chance 
cove, and between it and Green head is a rock that dries. A few 
families reside around these coves. 

Tickle bay.—Tickle Harbor point bears 75°, distant 43 miles from 
Green head, and Tickle bay extends southward nearly 3 miles from 
between them. The bay is an excellent place for fish; but though 
the water is comparatively shallow and the bottom good near its 
head it is not a safe anchorage, as a swell nearly always sets in, and 
with northerly to northeasterly gales it is very dangerous. 

Colliers arm, where a few fishermen reside, is in the southeastern 
part of Tickle bay, at the entrance of a salt water lake; it is protected 
by a small islet and a reef of rocks, but the entrance is only 200 yards 
wide with 4 feet in it at low water. As the ebb stream is strong and 
sets over a sandy spit, local knowledge is required to enter this arm. 

At mile from the eastern shore of Tickle bay a rocky bank runs 
parallel with the land for 1 mile; at the northern end of the bank, 


COTTIER BAY—DILDO ARM. 583 


and bearing 234°, distant 2 miles from Tickle Harbor point, is Hud- 
son rock, with 15 feet of water over it. 

Communication.—Tickle harbor station of the Northern and 
Western railway is situated southwestward 4 miles from the entrance 
of Colliers arm. 

Tickle Harbor point is the end of a promontory extending north- 
ward 5 miles from the head of Trinity bay with a general width 
of 13 miles. The land near the point rises to the height of 482 feet, 
and the promontory with some undulations continues at about that 
height. 

Cottier bay is on the eastern side of Tickle Harbor Point penin- 
sula, at about 54 miles from the point; it is open, but affords anchor- 
age in 10 fathoms of water, sand bottom, at $ mile from its head 
during offshore winds. 

Long cove is separated from Cottier bay by Cottier point, the end 
of a promontory, 250 feet high, and it is open and clear of shoals. 

Chapple bay.—Chapple head is the southeastern entrance point of 
Long cove and the northwestern entrance point of Chapple bay; 
McLeod point bears southeastward, distant 14; miles from it, and 
Chapple bay extends southward 3! miles from between them; its 
shores are steep-to at a short distance, and the bay affords no anchor- 
age for large vessels. 

A group of narrow islands and rocks extends northward 800 yards 
from a little promontory on the eastern shore at 13 miles within 
McLeod point, and shelters a small boat harbor. An islet, with rocks 
off its eastern and western sides, lies nearly a mile southward of the 
group, and near the head of the bay is Mooring island, small and 
steep-to. Small vessels anchor off the southern cove of the head in 33 
to 12 fathoms water, according to their length, but the western cove 
is shoal. 

Communication.—There is railway communication from Long 
Harbor station, which is situated south-southwestward, about 4 miles 
from the head of Chapple bay. 

Spreadeagle bay, eastward of Chapple bay, is nearly 2 miles wide 
at its entrance, and divided into two bights by a point, from which a 
ledge, with 5 fathoms of water on the outer edge, extends nearly 4 
mile to the northward. 

There is anchorage, sheltered from offshore winds, in the eastern 
cove to 12 fathoms water, sand bottom, and for small vessels in the 
western cove in 6 fathoms. 

Dildo arm, the southeasternmost harbor in Trinity bay, les east- 
ward of Spreadeagle bay. The eastern entrance point rises to a 
round hill, 150 feet high, that shelters Dildo cove, just within the 
arm, where the settlement is situated. The arm, about 2 miles long 


584 CAPE BONAVISTA TO CAPE RACE. 


and 1 mile wide, with generally deep water, is divided at the head 
into two coves by a point from which shoal water extends for 300 
yards; the western shore should not be approached within 300 yards. 

Anchorage may be obtained off Dildo cove in 8 fathoms water, 
with shelter from northeasterly winds; or off the southeastern of the 
two coves at the head in 12 fathoms, with shelter except from north- 
erly winds. The western of the two coves is shoal. 

Dildo islands, a group 60 feet high, extend northward nearly a 
mile from a position about 1,400 yards northward of the northern — 
end of the promontory forming the western side of the arm, and 
about the same distance west-southwestward of the eastern entrance 
point of the arm. Not more than 7 fathoms of water can be carried 
in mid-channel over the bar joining the islands to the northern end 
of the western point of the arm. 

There is a cod hatchery on one of the Dildo islands, and the propa- 
gation of lobsters is carried on. 

Ice.—Dildo arm freezes occasionally about the middle or end of 
February, and the ice clears about the middle or end of March. In 
1884 the whole of Trinity bay southward of a line joining Tickle 
Harbor point and Hopeall head was frezen for about a week; and in 
1887 an iceberg remained in this part of the bay till August 9, which 
is the latest known date. Northern ice arrives about every five years, 
and generally in April, but seldom remains a week. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Dildo arm at 6h. 40m. ; 
springs rise 44 feet. 

Communication.—There is railway communication; the station is 
at Broad cove, southward 3 miles from Dildo. 

New harbor.—The shore from the eastern entrance point of Dildo 
arm trends northward for 14 miles to the southern point of New 
harbor, which has a line of rocks stretching from the southern shore 
within which fishing craft find good shelter; a large village is situated 
at its head. 

The shore from the head of New harbor trends northwestward and 
northward for 3 miles to Hopeall head, the western entrance point 
of Hopeall bay. 

Hopeall bay extends 21 miles southeastward and is nearly 15 miles 
wide at the entrance, narrowing to the head, which is 1,300 yards 
broad and has a few houses around it. The water within the entrance 
deepens to 22 fathoms, and then shoals gradually to the head, where 
there is anchorage in 9 fathoms of water, sheltered from all except 
westerly and northerly winds. 

Hopeall island, westward 700 yards from the northeastern point 
of Hopeall bay, is 75 feet high; the passage between the island and 
point should not be taken, but the island is bold-to on the northern 
and western sides. 


GREENS HARBOR—GANNET ROCK. 585 


Greens harbor, northeastward of Hopeall bay, extends southeast- 
ward 14 miles, with a width of 1,200 yards, and the water shoals 
gradually from 9 fathoms in the entrance to 5 fathoms at its head; 
it is open to northwesterly winds. Shoal water runs 400 yards off 
the northern end of the southern entrance point of the harbor. 

There is a large village at the head of the harbor. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Greens harbor at 
6h. 44m.; springs rise 34 feet. 

Black point is the end of a promontory, 50 feet high, that separates 
the entrance of Greens harbor from Witless bay; rocks extend north- 
westward some distance from it. 

Black rock, bearing 268°, distant 1,400 yards from Black point, 
has 6 fathoms of water over it. 

Witless bay, the northeastern point of which lies north-northeast- 
ward distant 2 miles from Black point, extends nearly 14 miles to 
the eastward. 

Red rocks, bearing 234°, distant 1,400 yards from the northeastern 
entrance point of the bay, comprise a small cluster 110 feet high. 
Witless rock, bearing 153°, distant } mile from Red rocks, has 4 feet 
of water over it, and is the highest part of a bank, which with less 
than 10 fathoms of water, extends eastward nearly $ mile from it. 

Witless bay affords anchorage sheltered from offshore winds. The 
water shoals gradually from 17 fathoms in the entrance to 8 fathoms 
near the head, but the bank around Witless rock must be avoided. 

The coast from the northern point of Witless bay trends northward 
for 24 miles to Long point. Shoal bay, at about # mile from Witless 
bay, is an open bight, the southern entrance point of which is foul 
for some distance off it; there are a few houses around the bay. 

Shoal rock, bearing 308°, distant 600 yards from the southern 
point of Shoal bay, has 9 feet water over it. 

The coast from Long point trends northeastward for 1% miles to 
Heart’s Delight; there are some rocks off Island cove, a shingle beach 
situated about 14 miles from Long point. 

South rock, bearing 285°, distant nearly 4 mile from the southern 
entrance point of Heart’s Delight, has 3} fathoms water over it. 

Heart’s Delight is a snug harbor, $ mile across, which affords 
excellent anchorage, in 7 fathoms of water, just within the entrance. 
A shoal spit, with 24 fathoms of water on it, extends a lttle more 
than 400 yards from the northern shore near the head, leaving a 
passage only 300 yards wide between the end of the spit and a low 
point on the southern shore; shoal water also extends 300 yards from 
the southern entrance point. 

There is a settlement with a church and schoolhouse here. 

Gannet rock, bearing 257°, distant 14 miles from Gannet point, 
which is situated north-northeastward 24 miles from Heart’s Delight, 


586 CAPE BONAVISTA TO CAPE RACE. 


is small and has 5 fathoms water over it. Sugarloaf, in line with 
Shuffleboard, bearing 32°, leads eastward of the rock. 

Heart’s Desire is an open cove affording anchorage, with offshore 
winds only, in 6 to 13 fathoms water. Gannet point is the south- 
western entrance point, and a reef extends 200 yards from a low 
point in the middle of the southern side of the cove. 

There is a settlement here. 

Hanging hill, eastward 24 miles from Heart’s Desire, is 650 feet 
high and remarkable from Trinity bay. 

Ice.—Heart’s Desire freezes in February or early in March, and the 
ice clears in March; field ice arrives about April 15 and leaves about 
May 8, arriving later and leaving earlier according to the season. 

The ceast from Shuffleboard, a conspicuous hill 422 feet high on 
the coast, close within the northeastern entrance point of Heart’s De- 
sire, trends north-northeastward 1? miles to Seal Cove head, which 
is 286 feet high, with a remarkable landslip to seaward. 

Seal cove, northeastward 1,200 yards from Seal Cove head, is a 
small, open, rocky bight, and from it the coast continues northeast- 
ward 1,600 yards to Souther point, the western entrance point of 
Heart’s Content. : 

Heart’s Content.—The entrance to this harbor is 800 yards wide 
between Souther point on the western side and Norther point on 
the eastern side; thence the harbor extends southeastward 14 miles, 
and in the middle it is 1 mile wide, with soundings of 7 to 20 fathoms; 
it is open northward. The town hes along the eastern shore, and be- 
hind it is a lake, and Mizen hill, 670 feet high. 

Light.—A circular light-house, 30 feet high and painted red and 
white spirally, on Norther point, exhibits at 83 feet above high 
water a fixed red light, which should be seen from a distance of 12 
miles in clear weather. The light is visible seaward over an are of 
894°, between the bearings 83° and 1724°, being shut in by the land 
from other directions. A small dwelling is connected to the southern 
side of the light-house by a covered way; the dwelling and covered 
way are painted white with black roofs. 

Telegraph cables.—Six telegraph cables are landed at Heart’s 
Content, and every spring, as soon as the harbor is clear of ice, three 
buoys, painted red and white, are laid down; two marking the north 
and south and the third the east and west lines of the cables. 

Anchorage.—To aveid fouling the cables, vessels should anchor in 
one of the two clear spaces in the harbor, viz: To the northeastward 
of the line to the point, situated 1,100 yards southwestward of the 
church, bearing 155°, and northward of the line of the church bear- 
ing 104°, or to the southeastward of the line of the church bearing 
48°. 


WHITE ROCK—-SCILLY COVE. 587 


Ice.—Heart’s Content generally freezes over between the end of 
January and the middle of February, and the ice clears about the 
end of March. The northern ice usually arrives about the middle of 
April and leaves about the middle of May. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Hearts Content, at 
Th. 30m.; springs rise 4 feet, neaps 24 feet. 

Communication.—The steamer from Clarenville calls at Hearts 
Content weekly during summer and autumn. 

The coast from Norther point to Garlep point, 2 miles northward, 
consists of low cliffs, and should not be approached within 200 yards 
from the points. Bacon Cove head, a conical wooded hill, 132 feet 
high, is 1,100 yards from Norther point. 

White rock, bearing 319°, distant + mile from Norther point, has 
6 fathoms of water over it. Sugarloaf, well open northwestward of 
Garlep point, bearing 32°, leads northwestward; and Hearts Con- 
tent church, open southward of Norther point, bearing 122°, leads 
southwestward of White rock. 

New Perlican, entered between Garlep point, which is steep-to, 
and Jeans head, a bold bluff sloping from a hill 280 feet high, sep- 
arating it from Turks cove, has two coves in its southern side. 
Fitters cove, the western, extends $ mile to the southward, and is 
open, with shoal water skirting its shores. The eastern cove or har- 
bor proper, situated eastward of Fitters cove, extends 700 yards 
to the southward and has a width of 400 yards, the entrance narrow- 
mg gradually to the head, from which shoal water extends 350 yards. 

This harbor is only suitable for fishing craft, which anchor in 
3 fathoms of water near the western shore, to avoid a rock with 4 
feet of water over it, which lies a short distance off the first fishing 
stages on the eastern shore; larger vessels anchor off the entrances of 
these coves, in a depth of 8 fathoms, with Bloody point, that divides 
the coves, bearing 150°. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in New Perlican at 
vh. 30m.; springs rise 4 feet, neaps 23 feet. 

Turks cove is an open bight containing a few houses. The Sugar- 
loaf, 4 mile northward of Turks cove, is a conspicuous conical hill 
415 feet high. 

Scilly cove, one mile north-northeastward of Turks cove, and on 
the northeastern side of the Sugarloaf, extends southeastward 500 
yards and is 400 yards wide at the entrance, narrowing gradually to 
the head ; some rocks lie close off the northeastern point. 

It is a fine boat harbor, though open northwestward, and a con- 
siderable settlement is situated around it. 

The coast.—Kings head lies north-northeastward, distant 2 miles 
from Scilly cove, and the coast between Kings head and Salvage 
point, situated 8 miles to the northeastward, is so encumbered by 


588 CAPE BONAVISTA TO CAPE RACE. 


rocks, with deep water between them, that it should not be ap- 
proached nearer than to have Grates point bearing 71°, until the 
Sugarloaf is well open westward of Kings head, bearing 198°. 

Rocks.—The following rocks, the positions of which are shown on 
the chart, le off this coast: Riff Raffs, Knife rock, Hants harbor 
rock, White rock, Arthur rock, and Block rock. 

The Tail of the bank has 6 fathoms of water over it, and there are 
several other rocks with 9 feet to 7 fathoms of water over them. All 
of them are dangerous with a moderate sea. 

Hants harbor, northeastward 4% miles from Scilly cove, is 300 
yards wide and extends 600 yards to the southward. It is open to the 
northward, and a heavy sea sets into it during and after gales, causing 
an undertow on the eastern side; but nevertheless a few vessels man- 
age to le here in safety during winter. The western point is low and 
rocky, with shallow patches extending north-northeastward # mile 
from it. 

Light.—A white octagonal tower, 30 feet high, on the eastern head 
of Hants harbor, exhibits, at 65 feet above high water, a fixed white 
light, which should be seen from a distance of 9 miles in clear weather. 

Directions.—Approach with the hghthouse bearing 184°, which 
leads between the Tail of the bank and Riff Raffs rocks; these rocks 
usually break. When Seal rock, off Seal Cove point, is in line with 
Seal Cove point, bearing 113°, steer about 156° for the highest coast 
hill between the harbor and Seal cove, to clear the shoal which ex- 
tends from the western entrance point; when Seal rock is in line with 
Salvage point, bearing 57°, bring Hants Harbor church to bear 223° 
(appearing one-third across the entrance), and enter the harbor in 
mid-channel, anchoring near the western shore in 4 fathoms of water. 

Ice.—Hants harbor is rarely frozen over; field ice appears about 
April 1, but the date of its disappearance is uncertain. The first 
vessel arrives about the middle of April, and the last leaves about De- 
cember 25, 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Hants harbor at 
Th. 13m.; springs rise 4 feet, neaps 24 feet. 

Communication.—The steamer from Clarenville calls at Hants 
harbor weekly during summer and autumn. 

Seal cove, northeastward 1 miles from Hants harbor, is about $ 
mile deep, but affords no shelter. 

Salvage point, northeastward, 34 miles from Seal cove, is a rugged 
beach of stones around what appears to be a steep gravel cliff, behind 
which the hills rise to the height of 400 to 500 feet. Salvage rocks 
bear 7°, distant 13 miles from the point. 

The coast from Salvage point trends southeastward 2} miles to 
Lance cove, a small rocky bight, whence it turns northeastward for 5 
miles to Old Perlican. 


OLD PERLICAN—-WALL ROCK. 589 


Old Perlican is a summer anchorage for small vessels in 3 to 5 
fathoms of water, to the southward of Perlican island, which is sepa- 
rated from the mainland by a channel 800 yards in width, but only fit 
for boats; a swell sets in with northerly gales. In entering give Perli- 
can island a berth of 400 yards, to avoid the shallow ground extending 
from it, and anchor with its extremes bearing 296° and 15°. 

Ice.—Old Perlican harbor usually freezes about January 15. The 
time of clearing varies, as during some years the ice only remains 
a week. Northern ice does not arrive every year, and when it does 
its date of appearance is variable, but is generally between March 1 
and the middle of April; it seldom remains for any time after the 
latter date. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, at Old Perlican anchor- 
age at 6h. 46m.; springs rise 3} feet, neaps 21 feet. 

Communication.—The steamer from Clarenville calls at Old 
Perlican weekly during summer and autumn. 

The coast.—Grates point lies north-northeastward, 54 miles from 
Old Perlican, and thence the coast of the promontory separating 
Trinity and Conception bays trends about south-southeastward for 
6 miles to Split point. 

Baccalieu island, the southern point of which, 15% miles eastward 
of Split point, is 3 miles long, about ? mile broad, and almost inac- 
cessible. 

Light.—A circular red lighthouse, 34 feet high, on Baccalieu island 
at $ mile from its northern end, exhibits, at 443 feet above high water, 
a revolving white light which attains its greatest brilliancy every 20 
seconds, which should be seen from a distance of 24 miles in clear 
weather. 

The light is obscured by high land when the southern end of the 
island bears 358°, and is distant less than 8 miles. 

The keeper’s dwelling is a white square building with a red roof, 
connected to the hghthouse by a covered way. 

There are also some buildings on the northern part of the island. 

Note.—The light is often obscured by fog when the lower part of 
the island is clear. 

Signals.—The lighthouse is supplied with the International code 
signals. 

Fog signal.—A diaphone horn, in a building on the southern point 
of Baccalieu island, sounds thus: Blast, five seconds; silent interval, 
fifty-five seconds, in thick or foggy weather. The station comprises 
the fog-signal house, the keeper’s dwelling, and a storehouse, all 
painted black and white in vertical stripes. The signal is not in 
use from January 15 till the opening of navigation in April. 

Wall rock, bearing 289°, distant 1,4, miles from the southwestern 
point of Baccalieu island, has 5 fathoms of water over it. 


590 CAPE BONAVISTA TO CAPE RACE. 


The coast from Split point to Broad Cove head trends south-south- 
westward for 18} miles, and is clear with the exception of Job rock, 
bearing 87°, distant 1;4 miles from Gull island (westward of 
Job cove), and Puddy rock, bearing 23°, distant $ mile from Western 
Bay head, both of which have 5 fathoms of water over them. 

Light.—A lantern hoisted on an open framework on Western Bay 
head, which is situated north-northeastward about 3 miles from Broad 
Cove head, exhibits a fixed green light which should be seen from a 
distance 3 miles in clear weather. 

Fog signal.—An explosive fog signal, giving one report, is fired 
every fifteen minutes from a small white cabin at about 15 yards 
westward of the light support, in thick or foggy weather, between 
May 1 and December 31. 

A vessel’s alarm at sea is answered by two reports in quick suc- 
cession. 

At this station there are also a charging house with a slate roof; 
a keeper’s dwelling, painted white, with a black roof, and a red 
building. 

Conception bay, the entrance of which is between Broad Cove 
head and cape St. Francis, lying 114 miles to the eastward, extends 
southward for 28 miles to the head of Holy Rood bay; the western 
shore of the bay is indented by numerous smaller bays. 

Ice.—Conception bay fills with ice between January 16 and March 
1, and clears between the middle of March and April 20, but ice has 
remained till May 25; occasionally very little ice enters the bay. 

Salmon Cove head lies south-southwestward, distant 44 miles 
from Broad Cove head, and from it the shore trends southwestward 
for 3 miles to Crockers point, being steep, in places cliffy, and the hills 
rising to the height of 490 feet. There are several small fishing 
villages on this shore; the principal are Clements, Freshwater, and 
Crockers, at the entrances of three ravines, respectively. 

Several small islets and rocks lie off this shore. Harton rocks, a 
small chain of rocks or islets, form the southern side of Clements cove, 
and terminate in a rock awash at low water; they separate Clements 
cove from Freshwater cove. Bradley rock, nearly midway between 
the outer end of Harton rocks and Maiden island, and a little seaward 
of the line joining them, is small and ebove water. 

Maiden island is 49 feet high, but being small and of the same 
appearance as the cliffs of the shore, it is not easily distinguished. 
Halfway between it and Crockers point, at 185 yards from the shore, 
are some rocks above water. 

Carbonear island, south-southwestward, 24 miles from Salmon 
Cove head, is 4 mile long, northeastward and southwestward, 300 
yards broad, 169 feet high, and slopes to the southwestward; its coast 
is mostly cliff. 


CARBONEAR BAY—MOSQUITO COVE. 591 


Mosquito point bears southwestward, distant 4 mile from Carbonear 
island, but the channel is narrowed to the width of 200 yards by rocky 
reefs extending from the island and point. 

Light.—A light tower rising from the gable of a house, 45 feet 
high, with the vertical parts painted white and the roof red, on the 
summit of Carbonear island, exhibits, at 195 feet above high water, 
a fixed white light, that should be seen from a distance of 16 miles in 
clear weather. 

Carbonear bay, westward of Carbonear island, with its entrance 
between Crockers and Mosquito points, extends westward 12 miles, 
and is # mile wide, with bold shores, except at the head, where it shoals 
gradually to a shingle beach. Saddle hill, 503 feet high and remark- 
able, is on the southern side of the bay. 

Anchorage.—The anchorage in Carbonear bay is off the northern 
shore, in 7 to 10 fathoms of water, sand bottom; although open to the 
sea, which rolls in heavily with easterly gales, many vessels of about 
100 tons winter safely at the wharves of the town. The middle and 
southern side of the bay should be avoided, as the sea there is heavy 
with northerly winds. 

Directions.—From the northward, when entering Carbonear bay 
in ordinary weather, keep Broad Cove head open eastward of Folly 
rocks, bearing about 33°; this mark leads southeastward of the rocks, 
which are all above water, lying offshore between Folly rocks ‘and 
Crockers point. During heavy seas with easterly winds, Kane rock, 
bearing 1°, distant # mile from Carbonear Island lighthouse, and 
which has 9 fathoms of water over it, and Saucy Joe rock, bearing 
344°, distant 700 yards from the lighthouse, with 11 fathoms over it, 
break occasionally. 

To proced through the channel between Carbonear island and 
Mosquito point, in 4 fathoms of water, keep the Haypuk off Feather 
point just shut in with the cliff of Old Sow point, bearing 167°. — - 

Ice.—Carbonear bay freezes only in severe winters, as the swell 
breaks the ice up. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Carbonear bay at 
Th. 20m.; springs rise 44 feet, neaps 3 feet. 

Carbonear town, situated principally on the northern shore of the 
bay, had a population of 3,703 inhabitants in 1901. 

Communication.—Carbonear has railway and telegraphic com- 
munication; there are roads to Heart’s Content and Harbor Grace. 

Mosquito cove, the entrance to which is between Mosquito point 
and Old Sow point, lying 4 mile to the south-southeastward, extends 
about 1,600 yards to the southwestward; the water shoals gradually 
to its head, but it affords neither shelter nor safe anchorage. 


592 CAPE BONAVISTA TO CAPE RACE. 


Feather point, southward, distant 14 miles from Old Sow point 
and on the southern side of Harbor Grace entrance, is the termina- 
tion of a ridge of hills; the Haypuk is a slate rock 20 feet high 
northeastward of and just disconnected from the point. 

Harbor Grace islands, northeastward ? mile from Feather point, 
comprise a cluster of small islets and rocks extending north-northeast- 
ward about $ mile, with a width of 400 yards; the northeastern and 
principal islet is 105 feet high, and there is a summer fishing village 
on the southwestern islet. Between 200 and 400 yards northeastward 
of Harbor Grace islands are some islets or rocks, the outer of which 
is Eastern rock, 79 feet high; and at 400 yards northward of Eastern 
rock is White rock, consisting of rocky ground with 4 fathoms of 
water over it, on which the sea breaks. 

Ragged rocks, at 400 yards westward of the southwestern Harbor 
Grace island, are 35 feet high, and between them and the shallow 
ground off Feather point is a channel 400 yards wide, with 3 to 4 
fathoms of water, but this passage requires local knowledge, as there 
is no good leading mark for it. 

Light.—A square white house, with a red roof, from the middle of 
which rises the lantern, 35 feet high, on the northeastern Harbor 
Grace island, exhibits, at 151 feet above high water, an intermittent 
white hght, every four and one-quarter seconds thus: Light, two and 
one-eighth seconds; eclipse, two and one-eighth seconds, which is 
visible seaward over an are of 180° between the bearings 352° and 
172°, and should be seen from a distance of 15 miles in clear weather; 
the light being unwatched must be considered unreliable. 

Harbor Grace extends southwestward 41 miles from between Old 
Sow and Feather points, with a breadth decreasing from 1,3; miles 
at the entrance to 600 yards near its head. The hills on either side 
rise to the height of 500 feet. 

. The town, situated on the northwestern shore of the harbor, is clean 
and well laid out, and has an abundant water supply from a lake a 
little inland from it. There are large stores for dried codfish, ma- 
chinery for the manufacture of seal oil, and refining cod liver oil, 
also for preparing boneless codfish, tinning caplin, and making glue 
from skins and guano from bones of the fish. In 1901 the population 
was 5,184. 

The Roman Catholic church, the northeastern of three churches, 
has two spires, which in line bear 60° and 240°. 

Long Harry rock, close off the northwestern shore of Harbor 
Grace, at ? mile southwestward of Old Sow point, is 72 feet high. 

Salvage rock, bearing 172°, distant 700 yards from Long Harry, is 
small and 53 feet high, with deep water around, but a heavy sea 
breaks 65 yards inside it. 


HARBOR GRACE—DIRECTIONS. 593 


Bar.—At about 14 miles southwestward of Feather point a bar 
stretches across the harbor; the greatest depth over it is 24 feet in 
the main channel, and the least depth 9 feet over a bowlder bank 
forming the southeastern side of the main channel; there is a depth 
of 13 feet between this bank and the southeastern shore of the har- 
bor. In heavy weather the sea breaks on the shoal part of the bar, 
but seldom in the 24-foot channel. 

Light.—A white hexagonal lighthouse, 38 feet high, on point of 
Beach, a shingle point on the northwestern side of the harbor at 4 
mile inside of the bar, exhibits, at 40 feet above high water, a fixed 
red light, which should be seen from a distance of 6 miles in clear 
weather, but it is obscured by Salvage rock on the bearing 233°. 

Buoys.—A white buoy is moored on the western edge of the 
Bowlder bank. 

A red buoy is moored on the southeastern edge of the shoal ground, 
extending off the northwestern shore, in 11 feet of water, with Point 
of Beach lighthouse bearing 240°, distant 400 yards. 

As these buoys are moored with small anchors, their positions can 
not be relied upon; during winter they are replaced by spar buoys. 

Anchorage.—The harbor is safe, and the best anchorage is on the 
northwestern shore, as at times the sea is rough on the southeastern 
side. Westerly winds are the strongest, and occasionally have much 
force, 

Directions.—To enter Harbor Grace, bring the spires of the 
Roman Catholic church open northward of Salvage rock, bearing 
242°, which mark leads about 400 yards northwestward of White 
rock, and, when Eastern rock bears 150°, steer in mid-channel, pass- 
ing southward of Salvage rock. Then bring the lighthouse on point 
of Beach in line with Ship head, a hill 98 feet high on the same shore 
14 miles within it, bearing 242°, which mark leads across the bar in 
24 feet of water. When the western shoulder of Greens hill (443 feet 
high) is in line with the western spire of the Roman Catholic church, 
bearing 304°, the vessel is southwestward of the Bowlder bank, and 
should then steer with Long Harry in line with the extreme of the 
land northeastward of it, bearing 41°, to clear the shoal water off 
the northwestern shore; point of Beach is steep-to on its southern 
side. 

The channel northward of Salvage rock can be taken if desired. 

When working in, Brennans hill, southward of Greens hill and 392 
feet high, in line with the eastern spire of the Roman Catholic church, 
bearing 282°, leads northward, and the western shoulder of Greens 
hill, in line with the western spire of the same church, bearmg 304°, 
leads southwestward of the Bowlder bank. In crossing the bar, do 
not shut in the point northeastward of Long Harry with that rock, 

76846—09——38 


594 CAPE BONAVISTA TO CAPE RACE. 


and make short tacks between this line and the line of the leading 
marks, until Greens hill opens southward of the church, when the 
board to the southeastward may be prolonged. There is no tidal 
stream in Harbor Grace. 

Ice.—Harbor Grace freezes over between January 10 and February 
20, and is closed, at intervals, by ice 6 to 15 inches in thickness, be- 
tween January 20 and the end of March, but the port has never been 
closed for more than six weeks at a time; the harbor ice sometimes 
disappears as early as March 1, and at other times remains as late as 
April 1. Vessels arrive and leave all the year, but are occasionally 
detained by field ice, which appears from January 20 to February 20, 
and disappears between May 1 and 20; in some seasons there is none. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Harbor Grace at 
Th. 25m.; springs rise 44 feet, neaps 3 feet. 

Marine railway.—There is a marine railway at Harbor Grace, 90 
feet long and 16 feet broad, which takes a vessel of about 200-ton 
burden and 110 feet long; the depth on the blocks at high water 
ordinary springs is 9 feet forward and 12 feet aft. 

Communication.—Harbor Grace has railway and telegraphic com- 
munication. There is a good road to Carbonear. 

Bryants cove.—The coast on the southeastern side of Feather 
point trends southwestward for 1,8; miles, where it forms Bryants 
cove, a bight 700 yards wide and extending about 800 yards to 
the southwestward, with several patches of rocks near the middle 
that dry 2 feet. A conspicuous hill, up the valley, open southeast- 
ward of a steep fall of the inner part of the northwestern shore of 
the cove, bearing 244°, leads southeastward of the rocks, but the cove 
is open northeastward and affords no shelter. 

Spare point, the southern entrance point of Bryants cove, has 
several detached rocks above water near it; from the point the coast 
trends southwestward for 2 miles to Island cove, a rocky bight, 
fronted by an islet, and thence the coast continues southwestward 
for 1 mile to the northern entrance point of Spaniards bay. 

Spaniards bay is 1 mile wide and extends west-southwestward 34 
miles; its northern shore is generally clear of shoals at a short dis- 
tance from it. 

The only safe anchorage in the bay is on the northern shore north- 
ward of Green point, which is situated near its head and is 112 feet 
high, in 4 to 8 fathoms of water, with Green point bearing westward 
195° to avoid a shoal patch with a depth of 9 feet over it. The 
southern side of the bay is exposed to a heavy sea, which sets in with 
northeasterly gales, and the eastern part has several rocks extending 
200 yards from it; farther in the water is shoal for 200 yards off- 
shore and at the head of the bay for nearly 400 yards. 


MAD POINT—-GREEN POINT. 595 


Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Spaniards bay at 
Th. 45m.; springs rise 44 feet, neaps rise 3 feet. 

Communication.—There is a railway station at Spaniards Bay 
road, at the head of the bay. 

Mad point is the northeastern termination of the peninsula, 3% 
miles long, separating Spaniards bay from bay Roberts. Mad rocks, 
12 feet high, extend northeastward about + mile from the north- 
eastern side of the point, and the broken ground, with less than 10 
fathoms of water over it, extends 1,200 yards farther southeastward, 
over which, during an easterly swell, the sea rolls up to the dry rocks, 
and breaks over them. In heavy weather the point should not be 
approached on southwesterly bearings nearer than 1 mile. 

Bay Roberts, southward of the peninsula terminating in Mad 
point, and between it and the narrow peninsula, 4 miles long, termi- 
nating in Green point, is about 3} miles long and nearly 1 mile 
broad. Fergus islet, 134 feet high, with a round summit, lies 400 
yards from the northern shore at about 1 mile within Mad point. 

Roberts harbor, northward of Coldeast point, at the head of the 
bay, is a safe anchorage and easy of access; it extends west-southwest- 
ward 1 mile, with an average breadth of 400 yards, and the water 
shoals gradually from 10 fathoms at the entrance, mud bottom, and 
good holding ground. The town, with two churches and some fish- 
ing establishments, is on the northern shore of the harbor, and has 
a population of 2,226. Vessels drawing 12 feet of water he at the 
wharves at any time of tide. 

The southeastern shore of bay Roberts is foul for the distance of 
200 yards off, and there-is no safe anchorage on this side of the bay. 

Ice.—Bay Roberts freezes occasionally, and then the bay fills 
with ice. 

Communication.—Bay Roberts railway station is about 600 yards 
southwestward of the head of Roberts harbor. There is telegraphic 
communication. 

Green point is the northeastern end of the peninsula, separating 
bay Roberts on the north from bay de Grave on the south. Southern 
rocks, close northward of the point, are 14 feet high, and broken 
ground extends 400 yards from the point. 

Lights.—A circular lighthouse, 32 feet high and painted with two 
red and three white horizontal bands, on Green point, exhibits, at 
56 feet above high water, a fixed white light, which should be seen 
from a distance of 8 miles in clear weather. 

Beneath the principal light is a projecting lantern, which exhibits 
three lights. The two outer lights show white, and the middle hght, 
in line with Southern rocks, bearing 197°, shows red. 

A storehouse in rear of the lighthouse is painted white. 


596 CAPE BONAVISTA TO CAPE RACE. 


The coast of the peninsula from Green point trends southward 700 
yards, and then turns southwestward for 1 mile to Blow-me-down 
head, which projects 200 yards beyond the line of coast, and is the 
northern entrance point of bay de Grave. 

Bay de Grave extends southwestward 4,%, miles from its entrance 
between Blow-me-down head and Burnt point, which bears south- 
ward 175 miles from it, with an average breadth of ? mile. Ship 
cove lies westward 800 yards from the head, which affords it a little 
shelter; off the cove, small vessels anchor during summer in 10 
fathoms of water, with Port de Grave church, which is midway be- 
tween Ship cove and port de Grave, bearing 296°. 

Port de Grave, westward # mile from Blow-me-down head, has a 
depth of 6 to 9 feet. Off the village is a summer anchorage for small 
vessels, in 10 fathoms of water, at 135 yards from the shore, with 
the church bearing between 330° and 358°. 

From the village of Bareneed, west-southwestward 14 miles from 
port de Grave, round the head of the bay to Cupids cove, on the 
southern shore, there are no offlying shoals, nor is there sheltered 
anchorage. North gut and South gut, two streams, flow into the 
head of the bay, one at the northwestern, the other at the southeastern 
corner of the beach; both can be entered by boats at high water, and 
are navigable for a considerable distance. 

Cupids cove, on the southeastern side of Spectacle head, a remark- 
able bluff, 330 feet high, extends southwestward about } mile and is 
about 400 yards wide; a shoal bar crosses the harbor from the eastern 
side of a shingle spit on the southeastern shore. There is anchorage 
here for small vessels, in 3 to 8 fathoms of water, mud and sand bot- 
tom; though open to seaward, but little sea sets in. 

Burnt point, the southern entrance point of bay de Grave, is 181 
feet high, with small coves to the westward and southward of it; 
Sopers rock, northward, distant 200 yards from the northern part of 
the point, has 2 feet water over it. On the southern side of the point, 
distant about 200 yards, are some rocks with 6 feet water over them, 
and some uncovered, and the point should not be approached 
within the distance of 4 mile. 

North head, the northern entrance point to Brigus bay, is 1/5 
miles southward from Burnt point. 

Light.—A circular tower, 24 feet high, painted with three red and 
three white vertical stripes, on North head, exhibits at 113 feet above 
high water, a fixed red light, which should be seen from a distance 
of 12 miles in clear weather. 

The keeper’s dwelling, which is attached to the lighthouse, is also 
painted red and white in vertical stripes. 

Brigus bay stretches westward 1 mile, with an average breadth of 
800 yards. The sealing vessels, belonging to Brigus, moor head and 


COLLIERS BAY—GASTRIES BAY. 597 


stern in the western corner of the bay, and under Admirals island 
in the southern corner, but these anchorages should not be attempted 
without local knowledge. 

The town of Brigus, with a population of 1,541, is picturesquely 
situated around the shores of a lake in a valley between steep barren 
hills, and is important on account of the early release of sealing 
vessels in the spring on account of the breaking up of the ice by the 
sea setting into the bay. 

Ice.—Brigus bay freezes occasionally, and then the bay fills with ice. 

Communication.—Brigus railway station is situated rather over 
1 mile southwestward of Brigus town. There is telegraphic com- 
munication. 

The coast from South point of Brigus trends southward nearly a 
mile to Seal head, a steep bluff at the end of the slope from the Twins, 
a peak 342 feet high situated } mile inland. 

Colliers bay entrance is between Seal head and Colliers point, the 
end of a peninsula separating Colliers and Gastries bays, and bearing 
southeastward, distant 1 mile from the head. The bay extends south- 
southwestward 3} miles, with a width of 800 to 1,200 yards. Turks 
head, on the western shore at 14 miles southward of Seal head, is a 
steep bluff 337 feet high, forming the eastern side of Turks gut, a 
narrow inlet bordered by a few houses. Harbor rock, awash at low 
water, bears 153°, distant 750 yards, and Bull rock, with 6 fathoms 
water over it, 54°, 1,100 yards from northern end of Turks head. 
Blue hills, seen over Dock head, bearing about 203°, leads eastward 
of these rocks. 

The eastern shore is shghtly indented, James cove, on that shore at 
14 miles within Colhers point, is sheltered by a small projection 82 
feet high; the next cove to the southwestward, at the head of which is 
a shingle beach bordered by houses, is filled with bowlders under 
water to the line of the points. Curtain rock, with 10 fathoms of 
water over it, lies 300 yards off the southeastern shore, under the first 
hill within the entrance, and a shoal, on which the depth is 7 fathoms, 
hes nearly in mid-channel, 14 miles southward from Turks head. 

Dock head, a small peninsula 134 feet high, situated 24 miles 
within Colliers point, forms the southwestern side of a shallow cove, 
is bold-to on the northwestern side, and shelters the Dock, a small 
cove southwestward of the head. 

Anchorage may be obtained southwestward of Dock head in 4 to 
10 fathoms of water, gravel bottom, open only to northeasterly winds. 

The coast from Colliers point trends southward for 2 miles to 
Bacon head, on the southern side of Bacon cove, an open bight con- 
taining several rocks. 

Gastries bay extends southwestward 2} miles to a projection, end- 
ing in Cat rock, that divides the head into two coves. 


598 CAPE BONAVISTA TO CAPE RACE. 


Cat cove, the northwestern cove, is 1,600 yards in extent and 600 
vards wide; Mouse rock, with 2 feet of water over it, hes at its 
entrance and nearly 200 yards from the northern shore. It affords 
anchorage for small vessels in 8 fathoms of water, sand bottom, off 
the church, but open to northeasterly winds. 

Salmon cove, the southern cove, is 1§ miles in extent and 1,200 
yards wide at the entrance; the outer portion of the cove is clear of 
shoals at 200 yards from the shore. 

Communication.—Salmon Cove railway station 1s situated south- 
southwestward, 24 miles from the head of Salmon cove. 

Blue hills, ,west-southwestward, distant 2 miles from the head of 
Salmon cove, form a conspicuous range surrounded by a double top 
839 feet high. Witch Hazel peak, northward 3 mile from Blue hills, 
and the first conspicuous peak in that direction, is 598 feet high. 

Gastries point, the northern end of the peninsula separating Gas- 
tries bay from harbor Main, should not be approached within 200 
yards. 

Light.—A white, square, wooden tower, 2+ feet high, with sloping 
sides, situated on Gastries point, locally called Salmon Cove point, 
exhibits, at an elevation of 104 feet above high water, an intermittent 
white hight every 10 seconds, thus: Light 7 seconds, eclipse 3 seconds, 
which should be visible in clear weather 10 miles from all directions 
seaward. 

A flat-roofed keeper’s dwelling, painted white, stands 40 feet 
southwestward of the tower. 

Harbor Main extends southward 2 miles from Gastries point and 
is clear of shoals, except a rock, with 12 feet of water over it, bear- 
ing 43°, distant 350 yards from the point just southward of the 
church. There is a considerable settlement on the western shore, 
and anchorage, in 12 fathoms of water, with the church bearing 330°, 
having swinging room of 250 yards, but open to northerly winds. 

Holy Rood bay, situated southeastward of harbor Main, is 4 miles 
long and # mile broad; the western shore is foul for 1 mile from the 
entrance, and should not be approached within 200 yards. A shoal, 
with 12 feet of water over it, hes off the mouth of Chapel cove, the 
first indentation on the western shore, within which the bay is clear, 
and the water is deep up to the entrances of the two coves at the head. 

The western of these coves affords anchorage in 10 fathoms of 
water, sand bottom, and the eastern cove with the church bearing 
285°, in 13 fathoms; both are open to northerly winds. There is 
a settlement on the western side of the eastern cove. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Holy Rood anchorage 
at Th. 28m.; springs rise 44 feet, neaps 3} feet. 

Communication.—Woodford Railway station is situated west- 
southwestward about ? mile from the head of the western cove. and 


PORTUGAL COVE—KELLY ISLAND. 599 


Holy Rood station south-southeastward 1 mile from the head of the 
eastern cove of Holy Rood bay. 

The shore of Conception bay from Holy Rood bay trends with a 
deep bend north-northeastward for 25 miles to cape St. Francis, and 
its southwestern part is a series of beaches backed by salt water ponds 
and skirted by shoal water nearly } mile from the shore. There are 
several villages with churches on the shore, and this portion of the 
bay is one of the most picturesque in Newfoundland. 

Communication.—The railway runs at a short distance within the 
shore from Holy Rood to Topsail, a distance of 15 miles, and there 
are stations at Duffs, Seal cove, Kelligrews, Manuels, »nd Topsail. 

Portugal cove, 15 miles from the entrance of Holy Rood bay, is 
the deepest indentation on the shore, extending 800 yards, with a rock 
in the middle, and the depth of water decreasing from 20 fathoms in 
the entrance to 5 fathoms near the head. Princes Lookout, a conspicu- 
ous hill, 543 feet high, surmounted by a flagstaff, lies just eastward 
of the head of this cove. There is a fishing village at Portugal cove, 
and a good road connects it with St. Johns, which is distant 9 miles. 

The character of the shore changes northward of this cove from 
gentle, partially cultivated slopes to steep, barren cliffs that attain 
the height of 880 feet in Ore head, situated about midway between 
Portugal cove and cape St. Francis. 

Bell island, 5,°, miles long northeastward and southwestward, 
1,8; miles wide, 495 feet high, and lying nearly parallel to the shore 
at the distance of 2 miles from Portugal cove, is so named from a re- 
markable conical rock, 220 feet high, situated near its western end, 
and named the Bell. The Clapper, a prominent rock, hes at the 
southern point of the island, and a considerable village with a church 
is situated about 14 miles eastward of it. Shoal water extends nearly 
4 mile from the northeastern end of the island, within which distance 
the island should not be approached. ; 

There is an iron mine on the northwestern side of Bell island which 
lias a large annual output. Two short piers extend to deep water 
from the southeastern side of the island; from the northeastern pier 
Portugal cove church bears 83°, and the western pier is 800 yards 
further southwestward ; tramways connect them with the mine. 

Bell rock, bearing 223°, distant 1 mile from the Clapper, has 15 feet 
of water over it; and from the rock a ledge, with a depth of 4 
fathoms over it, extends north-northwestward 4 mile. 

Little Bell island, southeastward 2 miles from the Clapper, is 92 
feet high, and skirted by foul ground for the distance of nearly 400 
yards off it. 

Kelly island, southward 24 miles from the Clapper, is 183 feet 
high; a shingle spit extends from its southeastern side, and the 


4 


island should not be approached within + mile. 


600 CAPE BONAVISTA TO CAPE RACE. 


Cape St. Francis, the southeastern entrance point of Conception 
bay, forms two low bills, off the western of which are two small islets. 

Light.—A building with a flat roof, on which is a square block with 
the lantern above it, painted white and 45 feet high, on the eastern 
bill of cape St. Francis, exhibits, at 123 feet above high water, a 
fixed red light which should be seen from a distance of 12 miles in 
clear weather. 

Fog signal.—A fog siren trumpet, placed in a white building with 
a flat roof attached to the lighthouse, is sounded every minute, thus: 
blast, five seconds; silence, five seconds; blast, five seconds; silence, 
forty-five seconds, during thick or foggy weather. 

Signals.—Cape St. Francis lighthouse is supplied with the inter- 
national code signals. 

The Brandies are three rocks with 4 to 12 feet of water over them, 
which constitute the extreme of rocky ground extending from some 
islets and rocks southeastward of the cape, from which the outer rock 
bears 72°, distant 1,600 yards. Torbay point open of Black head, 
bearing 164°, leads eastward about 14 miles from the Brandies. 

The coast from cape St. Francis trends southeastward for 44 miles 
to Black head, and thence southward 25 miles to Red head; it is 
generally steep cliff. Pouch cove, nearly 3 miles from cape St. 
Francis, is small and open; Black head, the southeastern point of this 
cove, 1s about 400 feet high. 

Cliff rock, bearing 345°, distant nearly 14 miles from Black head, 
is a small patch with 8 fathoms of water over it. 

Red head is 274 feet high and very conspicuous, being of a deep 
red color. 

Flat Rock cove entrance is between Red head and Flat Rock point, 
which bear north-northwestward and south-southeastward, distant 
1,400 yards from each other, and the cove extends south-southwest- 
ward 3 mile, with a width of about 800 yards. <A red house and three 
white houses, situated at an elevation of 455 feet on the hills about 1 
mile westward from Flat Rock cove, also a red church, the steeple 
of which is 284 feet above the sea, on the western shore of the cove, 
show out prominently; but the church is obscured from the south- 
eastward by the land sloping down to Flat Rock point. 

Flat Rock point is low and barren. A ledge extends north-north- 
eastward, nearly 400 yards from the point, at which distance there is 
a depth of 43 fathoms; there are rocky ledges on the eastern side of 
the point. 

Tor bay.—Torbay point les 2? miles south-southeastward from 
Flat Rock point, and Tor bay extends southwestward 24 miles from 
between them. 

From Flat Rock point the cliffs rise gradually as Tor bay is entered, 
but, at about 14 miles southward from the point, they rise more 


TORBAY BIGHT—LOGY COVE. 601 


abruptly to the height of 446 and 444 feet, with two smaller cliffs, 
282 and 72 feet high, respectively, about 4 mile farther southwest- 
ward, and thence to Torbay bight, at the southwestern end of the bay, 
the shore line is broken by deep gulches. 

Torbay bight, where there is a large settlement, is greatly used by 
fishermen, and landing can generally be effected. A quarter of a mile 
inland, southeastward from the head of the bight, there is a Roman 
Catholic church, which is a square stone building without a spire; 
and close to it are a convent and a temperance hall. These con- 
spicuous buildings are nearly obscured when in line with a clump of 
trees over Snagge point. 

There is anchorage in the bight, open eastward, in 12 fathoms, 
southward of a small beach on the northern shore. 

The shore from Torbay bight to Torbay point is generally rugged, 
with broken cliffs between Middle and Outer coves; landing may be 
effected here except with northerly winds, which send in a heavy 
swell. The hills, at the back of Tor bay, are covered with houses, 
generally white. 

Torbay point has a small summit, 287 feet high, just southward of 
it, and 800 yards farther southward the land rises to a hill 537 feet 
high. 

Tantam shoals.—A rocky ledge, with depths of 5 to 30 fathoms 
of water over it, extends northward 1,700 yards from Torbay point. 
The outer patch, with 7 fathoms of water over it, bears 1°, distant 32 
mile from Torbay point, and Tantam rock, with 5 fathoms of water 
over it, bears 12°, distant 800 yards from the point. Tantam rock 
breaks with a moderate sea, and the 7-fathom patches break in heavy 
weather. 

The coast from Torbay point trends south-southeastward for 145 
miles to Redcliff head, which is bold with steep cliffs of a reddish 
color; there is a deep gulch on its northern side and another on its 
southern side, and one of these, depending on the light, is generally 
seen as a black band down the face of the cliff. 

Redhead rock, bearing 20°, distant $ mile from Redcliff head, is 
small and has a depth of 5 fathoms of water over it. 

The coast from Redcliff head trends southward for 14 miles to 
Logy cove. 

Torbay hill, situated 1,400 yards southward from Redcliff head. 
and locally known as Flagstaff hill, on account of the old signal 
station connecting cape St. Francis and St. Johns having been 
situated on it, is 653 feet high, has bold cliffs in front of it, and a 
conspicuous yellow patch, nearly at the top of the cliff, just north- 
ward of the summit of the hill. 

Logy cove, used by fishermen during summer, is a small cove with 
deep water. Boats land here ina small niche in the rocks, where 


602 CAPE BONAVISTA TO CAPE RACE. 


there are always fishermen to help if necessary. Roads connect this 
cove with St. Johns and Torbay. 

On the eastern side of the cove is Devils point, on the small summit 
of which, 260 feet high, is a beacon of stones; from this the land 
trends southeastward about 1,200 yards to Sugarloaf head and gradu- 
ally rises along a very rugged coast with several caves in it. 

Sugarloaf head, 550 feet high, is most conspicuous. Its face is a 
sheer cliff, and from the northward it has the appearance of a gun- 
ner’s quoin, while from the southeastward and eastward it makes as 
a cone-shaped hill. About a mile inland from Sugarloaf head there 
is a conspicuous conical hill, 577 feet high, but only visible from the 
northward. 

Robin Hood bay, between Sugarloaf head and Small point, about 
1 mile southward, is surrounded with high cliffs, has deep water, 
and no landing place. 

Small point is rounded and rises to the height of 518 feet. Just 
southward of it is Skerrys bight, where landing may be occasionally 
effected. Between Skerrys bight and Quiddy Viddy harbor, which 
is distant 1 mile to the south-southwestward, is a very conspicuous 
cliff, at the foot of which is Bawdens hole, a large cave. The height 
of the summit at the back of the cliff is 472 feet. 

Quiddy Viddy harbor has a rocky bar on which the depth is 3 feet 
and is only suitable for boats. 

Cuckold head, on the southern side of Quiddy Viddy harbor, is 
390 feet high and appears conical in all directions from seaward. 
Cuckold cove, on its southern side, has deep water. The coast from 
the cove trends southward for 1,300 yards to North head of St. Johns 
harbor, which is a steep headland 275 feet high. 

Washballs rocks are awash and skirt the coast about 150 yards 
northward of North head; shoal water extends eastward about 100 
yards from them. 

St. Johns harbor.—The entrance to St. Johns harbor is between 
North head and South head, which bear north-northeastward and 
south-southwestward, distant 330 yards from each other, and thence 
a narrow channel trends westward for $ mile into the northeastern 
part of the harbor. The harbor is triangular in shape, its north- 
eastern side being nearly 800 yards in length, and it extends south- 
westward for about a mile; the depth in the northeastern portion of 
the harbor is 16 fathoms and it decreases gradually to 2 to 3 fathoms 
at its head; the holding ground is excellent. Although small, the 
harbor is convenient and secure; and it has smooth water, being shut 
in by high land except at the narrow entrance. 

Entrance channel.—Signal hill, northwestward 600 yards 
from North head, is 508 feet high, and on it there are a flagstaff, a 
blockhouse, and barracks. 


WHITE ROCK—PROSSER ROCK. 603 


White rock, 400 yards westward of North head and 40 yards off 
the cliff under Signal hill, has 7 feet of water over it. 

Chain rock.—Chain Rock battery bears 276°, distant 850 yards 
from North head, and Chain rock, which almost covers at high water 
springs, bears 174°, distant 40 yards from the battery. Ruby rock, 
bearing 217°, distant 40 yards from Chain rock, has 3 fathoms of 
water over it. 

Buoy.—A red spar buoy, moored in 34 fathoms, marks Ruby rock. 

Seal rock, bearing 297°, distant about 120 yards from Chain Rock 
battery, covers at three-quarters flood. South head, well open of 
Chain Rock battery, bearing 117°, leads southward of it. 

Light.—South head.—A white square lighthouse with a red roof, 
surmounted by a lantern, 39 feet high, at fort Amherst, about 125 
yards west-southwestward of South he2d, exhibits at 134 feet above 
high water a fixed white hight that should be seen over an are of 
135° to seaward, between the bearings 217° and 352°, from a distance 
of 12 miles in clear weather. 

Fog signal.—A diaphone fog signal, operated by compressed air, 
sounds blasts of three and one-half seconds’ duration, separated by 
silent intervals of sixty-six seconds, during thick and foggy weather. 

The horn projects through the southeastern side of a white building 
with a flat roof, erected on the seaward side of the hghtkeeper’s 
dwelling. 

Vestal rock, bearing 111°, distant nearly 100 yards from South 
head, has 12 feet of water over it. The Roman Catholic cathedral 
open northward of the land on the southern side of the entrance or 
Frederick battery well open northward of South head, bearing 278°, 
leads northward of the rock. 

Pancake rock, bearing 285°, distant 700 yards from South head 
and about 40 yards off the southern shore of the channel, is awash at 
high water, and a spur, with 12 feet of water over it, extends north- 
eastward about 40 yards from the rock. 

Buoy.—A black spar buoy is moored in 3 fathoms close northward 
of Pancake rock. ! 

Little Pancake rock, bearing 282°, distant about 90 yards from 
Pancake rock, has 6 feet of water over it, and there is a depth of 6 
feet at 50 yards northwestward of this rock. 

Prosser rock, or Cahil rock, bearing 282°, distant about 275 yards 
from Pancake rock and 4°, distant 40 yards from the fishing stage at 
Cahil point, has 5 feet of water over it. South head, open northeast- 
ward of Frederick battery point, bearing 106°, leads northward of 
the rock. 

Buoy.—A white spar buoy is moored in 3 fathoms close northward 
of Prosser rock. 

Notre.—The buoys may be removed without notice when ice is on the coast, 


604 CAPE BONAVISTA TO CAPE RACE. 


Merlin rock bears 249°, distant 150 yards from Chain rock, and 
has a least depth of 29 feet of water over it. The rock is 15 feet by 
24 feet in size, with steep sides, excepting northward, where the slope 
is more gradual. 

Leading marks and lights.—A lantern on a white mast with a 
white daymark, in rear of a brick building on King’s wharf, on the 
northwestern side of St. John harbor, exhibits, at 54 feet above high 
water, a fixed red light. 

A fixed red light is also exhibited, at 203 feet above high water, 
from the tower of the Congregational church, the spire of which rises 
to the height of 255 feet above high water, and is situated 342 yards 
from.the preceding light mast on a line bearing 276°. 

The Congregational church spire and the white mast, or the lights 
exhibited from the church tower and the mast, in line bearing 276°, 
lead through the fairway of the narrow entrance channel, but directly 
over Merlin rock. 

Anchorage.— Vessels moor anywhere in the harbor as convenient. 

Light dues.—Payable once in every calendar year, but not oftener 
than once in three months, viz: 

Twenty-four cents per ton, up to and including 500 tons. 

Twelve cents per ton additional on every ton over 500 tons up to 
and including 1,000 tons. 

Five cents per ton additional on every ton over 1,000 tons up to and 
including 2,000 tons. 

Not more than $240 in any one calendar year or oftener than once 
in three months. 

Vessels arriving for repairs, coal, or supplies, pay one-half of above 
rates. 

The foregoing applies to merchant vessels. 

Labrador, bank and coast fishing vessels and coasters pay no dues 
while engaged in those fisheries or trade. Should any such vessel 
proceed on any other than a fishing voyage, to any place outside the 
colony, such vessel shal] be liable to pay once in each calendar year 
(but not oftener than once in three months) the rate of 6 cents per 
ton. 

Water dues.—Five cents per register ton, not to exceed $20; pay- 
able once a year. 

Harbor master’s dues.—With the exception of ships of war, 
coasters, and Newfoundland fishing craft, all vessels entering the port 
of St. Johns pay to the customs department harbor dues at the follow- 
ing rates, viz: 


Wessels’ (60'to 100 tons wecister ==. eee oe eee $2. 00 
Vessels 100) to. 200 tons resister2 2 . 5a ee ee 3. 00 
Vesselsi200:t0) 300 tons resisters === eee ee eee 4. 00 
Vessels:300 sto 400"tOns LESiSte ha a ee ee eee 5. 00 


Vessels 400 to 500 tons register and upward=——-~-=---_______--_________= 6. 00 


TOWAGE-—PILOTAGE. - 605 


Payable once between January 1 and June 30, and once between 
July 1 and December 31. 

Buoys.—A red buoy is moored in 125 fathoms of water in a posi- 
tion bearing 88°, distant 350 yards from the light mast, and a black 
buoy in a position bearing 147°, distant 300 yards from the mast. 
Both buoys are for assisting steamers in hauling off the wharves and 
vessels should moor well clear of them. 

Wharves.—Large vessels can moor securely at the wharves which 
line both sides of the harbor. Some of the wharves are from 220 to 
360 feet in length and have depths of 18 to 32 feet alongside them. 

Tugs.—Vessels off the harbor can obtain a steam tug by making 
the signal to the signal station on Signal hill or to Cape Spear light- 
house. 

Towage rates, St. Johns. 


[Gross tonnage. ] 


Vessels 60 tons and under______ $4. 00 | Vessels frem 301 to 350 tons___ $24. 00 
Vessels from 60 to 100 tons (10 | Vessels from 351 to 400 tons___ 26. 00 

cents per ton additional). | Vessels from 401 to 450 tons___ 28. 00 
Vessels from 101 to 125 tons____ 10.00 | Vessels from 451 to 500 tons___ 30.00 
Vessels from 126 to 150 tons____ 12.00) Vessels from 501 to 550 tons___ 32.00 
Vessels from 151 to 175 tons____ 14.00 | Vessels from 551 to 600 tons___ 34. 00 
Vessels from 176 to 200 tons____ 16.00 | Vessels from 601 to 700 tons___ 38.00 
Vessels from 201 to 225 tons____ 18.00 | Vessels from 701 to 800 tons___ 42.00 
Vessels from 226 to 250 tons____ 20.00) Vessels from 801 to 900 tons___ 46.00 
Vessels from 251 to 300 tons____ 22.00 | Vessels from 901 to 1,000 tons 50. 00 


Vessels requiring the steamer to go beyond limits as far as cape 
Spear to pay one-third additional, and any vessel requiring towage 
beyond the cape to the south or an equal distance to the northward 
will be charged by special agreement. 

The above rates apply only to ordinary circumstances. Vessels in 
distress or otherwise disabled will have to make special contract for 
assistance. Vessels employing the steamer inwards will be taken 
outwards on their next voyage at two-thirds of the above rates. Ves- 
sels using the steamer’s hawser to pay 10 per cent on towage rates for 
the same. 

In addition to the above rates, one-third additional will be charged 
during winter months, commencing on December 10 and ending on 
April 10 each year. 

Special rates will be charged during the ice season. 

The owners are not responsible for any damage done by the vessel 
towed to themselves or others. 

Pilotage.—All vessels are obliged to take or pay a pilot, excepting 
British government ships, vessels belonging to a royal yacht club, 
coasting vessels, and vessels that have not been boarded or spoken by a 
pilot until after they have entered the narrows; but the commis- 
sloners may award pilotage to any pilot who may offer his services 


606 CAPE BONAVISTA TO CAPE RACE. 


within the narrows when in consequence of heavy weather there 
would be danger to any boat going to sea. 

Pilots.—The established number of pilots for the port of St. Johns 
is twelve. The pilot boats are painted black, with a yellow band 
under the upper streak. The number of the boat is shown in white 
on each bow, and the same number in black in the upper part of the 
foresail. Pilot boats also carry a burgee. 

Pilots can be obtained by making the pilot signal to the signal 
station on Signal hill, or to cape Spear hghthouse. 


Table of rates of pilotage of vessels in and out of St. Johns. 


[New measurement. ] 


Rates Cy. Rates Cy 
On vessels under 80 tons____-~ $5.35 | On vessels from 350 to 400 tons_ $16. 00 
On vessels from 80to100tons_ 6.70 | On vessels from 400 to 500 tons. 18. 75 
On vessels from 100 to120 tons_ 7.35 | On vessels from 500 to 600 tons_ 21.35 
On vessels from 120 to160 tons. 8.00 | On vessels from 600 to 700 tons_ 24. 00 
On vessels from 160 to 200 tons_ 8.70 |} On vessels from 700 to 800 tons_ 26. 76 
On vessels from 200 to 240 tons. 9.35} Over that size—for every 100 


On vessels from 240 to 280 tons_ 10. 00 TOnSaa GUblOona | eee ils ai) 
On vessels from 280 to 300 tons. 10.70 | And on no sailing vessel is the 
On vessels from 300 to 350 tons. 13.35 pilotage to exceed________-- 32. 00 


Steamers shall pay pilotage on their net tonnage, as in the case of 
sailing vessels. 

Steamers employed in the fisheries of the colony shall be exempt, 
except when on foreign voyage. 

Coastal steamers shall also be exempt. 

Subsidized mail steamers, in connection with the colony, shall pay 
on the horsepower, at the rate of 8 cents for each horsepower. 

All coasting vessels which may take pilots, to pay one-half of the 
above rates of pilotage in proportion to their tonnage. 

The above scale of pilotage shall be payable on the register ton- 
nage of all such vessels, as ascertained before going out of the harbor. 

Soundings.—The soundings in the approach to St. Johns harbor 
are generally regular until within the 30-fathom line, when the bot- 
tom becomes uneven. 

Cordelia deeps, with depths of 90 to 97 fathoms, extend north- 
ward from abreast North head of Motion bay, and may be useful in 
making St. Johns harbor during thick or foggy weather. They 
are about 13 miles wide off North head of Motion bay, and gradually 
widen to 34 miles abreast Sugarloaf head, and to 5 miles off Torbay 
point, where soundings of 100 fathoms are obtained on the inshore 
side of the deeps. Northward of this the Cordeha deeps widen out 
to the deep water off Conception bay. 

The Riband, a narrow bank about 1,3; miles in length, northward 
and southward, and with depths of 26 to 30 fathoms, lies about a 
mile off Robin Hood bay. 


ST. JOHNS HARBOR—DIRECTIONS. 607 


> 


St. Georges leads, lying about } mile east-southeastward of the 
entrance to St. Johus harbor, is a patch about + mile long, northward 
and southward, 200 yards broad, with 24 to 27 fathoms of water over 
its southern part, but there are depths of 15 and 16 fathoms over its 
northern part, with 25 fathoms close around. 

Directions.—The entrance to St. Johns harbor is so narrow that 
in foggy or hazy weather, when the hills are indistinct, care is neces- 
sary not to mistake the opening into Quiddy Viddy harbor for it. 

From a distance the land both northward and southward of the 
harbor appears hilly, bleak, and desolate, and it rises abruptly to 
heights of between 275 and 779 feet. 

The entrance, having high land on either side, is not seen from a 
distance; but as the land is approached its position is well indicated 
by cape Spear, fort Amherst, and the buildings and flagstaff on Sig- 
nal hill. 

Approach the harbor on a westerly bearing, avoiding Vestal! rock 
(page 603), and bringing the white mast and daymark carrying the 
lower leading light in hne with the spire of the Congregational 
church (which will be seen just clear northward of the square towers 
of the Catholic cathedral), bearing 276°. This mark leads into the 
harbor, but over Merlin rock. When past Prosser rock, steer and 
anchor as convenient. 

If the leading marks are not visible in daylight, pass 100 yards 
southward of North head and steer 276° into the harbor, leaving 
Pancake and Prosser rock buoys about 50 yards to the southward, 
and Ruby Rock buoy to the northward. 

For a vessel of very deep draft it is customary to buoy Merlin rock 
with a boat. 

Small vessels, with boats to tow, often beat in, but the unsteadiness 
of the wind renders this tedious and difficult. 

At night bring and keep the two leading red lights in line, bearing 
276°, and when in the harbor anchor as convenient; remembering. in 
a vessel of very deep draft, that the lights in line lead over Merlin 
rock, in 29 feet of water. 

In fog or thick weather, the soundings in Cordelia deeps might 
be useful in assisting to determine a vessel’s position. 

Anchorage.—There is temporary anchorage, with foul or baffling 
winds, in 15 fathoms, rock bottom, just within the heads, where a 
vessel can be taken in tow. 

Ice.—St. Johns harbor is rarely frozen over in winter and 1s 
seldom closed for as long as a week during ordinary seasons, but in 
1875 and 1882 access was very difficult for several weeks. The har- 
bor ice disappears about the end of March. The prevalence of east- 
erly winds in early spring drives heavy field ice upon the coast, and 
at times, even as late as August, icebergs drift into the narrows and 


608 CAPE BONAVISTA TO CAPE RACE. 


more or less block the channel. Field ice arrives from January to 
the middle of February, and is generally 6 to 18 inches thick; it 
leaves about April or May. Vessels come and go throughout the year. 

Wintering.—The northern side, 200 feet long, of the north wharf, 
belonging to the Dock Company, where there is a depth of 22 feet at 
low water springs, is convenient for wintering, as it is out of the way 
of traffic and of vessels using the dock, and it is sheltered, with 
scarcely any swell, even during strong easterly winds. 

Fog is less frequent at St. Johns than farther southward. It is 
stated that although there may be fog in the offing, it is frequently 
clear inside of cape Spear. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in St. Johns harbor at 
7h. 30m.: springs rise 33 feet, neaps 34 feet. There is very little tidal 
stream in the entrance channel. 

“St. Johns.—The city of St. Johns, the capital of Newfoundland 
and the seat of government, covers the steep, hilly ground on the 
northwestern side of the harbor, and continues along the banks of 
. the river, which flows into its head, and also lines the southeastern 
side of the harbor; it has several handsome public buildings, of which 
the most conspicuous is the Roman Catholic cathedral. Population, 
see page 30. 

Consuls.—There is a consul-general for Belgium, and there are 
consuls or vice-consuls for the United States, Brazil, Germany, Italy, 
Portugal, Spain, Sweden, and Norway, at St. Johns. 

Supplies of every kind can be readily obtained. Water is brought 
from Windsor lake, distant 4 miles, by the General Water Company; 
the supply is almost unlimited, and the water is soft, clear, and pure. 
Pipes are placed on the wharves for the supply of shipping. 

Coal.— About 64,000 tons of coal are imported annually, and there 
are usually about 13,600 tons in stock at St. Johns. See also page 67. 

Vessels can haul alongside the coal hulk, or coal from lighters, or 
go alongside wharves. 

Docks.-—The dry dock at St. Johns is 558 feet long on the blocks, 
630 feet long over all, and 85% feet wide at its entrance, and the depth 
of water over the sill at high water ordinary spring tides is 25 feet. 

The dock can be pumped out in 24 hours; it has bilge blocks, which 
are worked by a chain from the top of the dock, thereby giving extra 
support to a vessel before the dock is dry. 

The floating dock is 135 feet long over all and 49 feet wide; it is 
capable of taking vessels of 300 tons, and has 114 feet over the blocks 
when sunk. This dock is reported to be out of repair. 

Repairs.—Messrs. Angel & Co. are prepared to carry out repairs 
to hull and machinery with dispatch, their plant being extensive and 
fit for heavy work. 


ST. JOHNS—-FRESH WATER BAY. 609 » 


The Terra Nova Company can also execute large repairs. They 
have a crane which lifts 40 tons. 

Hospitals.—There is a large hospital at St. Johns available for 
seamen, a hospital for infectious diseases, situated on Signal hill, and 
a sailors’ home. 

Signals.—The International code of signals is used at Signal hill 
blockhouse. 

Time signal.—A gun, near the blockhouse on Signal hill, 517 feet 
above high water, is fired every day at noon, St. Johns mean time, 
or 3h. 30m. 43.9s Greenwich mean time, but it is reported to be use- 
less for the purpose of rating chronometers. 

Position.—Chain rock battery, on the northern shore of the nar- 
rows of St. Johns harbor, is in lat. 47° 34’ 02’’ N., long. 52° 40’ 59’’ W. 

Trade.—The chief business of St. Johns is the exportation of cod- 
fish and refining seal oil, but there is a large ropewalk of the Colonial 
Cordage Company, employing about 500 persons, where the bulk of 
the twines, lines, nets, and cables used in the fishing industry are 
made; there are also three iron foundries, a nail foundry, a machine 
shop, railway workshops, two biscuit bakeries, breweries, tanneries, 
furniture, tobacco, soap, and butterine factories, affording employ- 
ment to a large number of people. 

On the wharves there are numerous oil vats, from which the stench 
is very unpleasant in summer, and stages for drying fish are placed 
in every available spot. 

Communication.—See page 37. 

The coast from South head of St. Johns harbor tends southward 
for 1%; miles, and is very steep and inaccessible. 

Fresh Water bay, which is open northward, extends # mile farther 
southward, with a width of about a quarter of a mile; at its head 
there are a few houses and a shingly beach; close within the beach is 
a large pond, about 10 feet above high-water level, and reported to 
have a depth of 10 fathoms. 

There is anchorage in the middle of the bay, in 8 to 12 fathoms of 
water, over a bottom of mud covered with sand, and very good hold- 
ing ground; small craft, which have missed St. Johns harbor have 
ridden out a northerly gale here. 

Spriggs point, the eastern entrance point of Freshwater bay, is 
very sharp, with the land gradually rising and having cliffs on both 
sides. On the eastern side there are some small islets, 2 to 9 feet 
high. 

Peggys bag, southward 4 mile from Spriggs point, has a large 
noticeable pinnacle, separated from the cliff. 

Deadmans bay, south-southeastward of Peggys bag, is small and 
of no use; there is a shingle beach at its head. Cliff point, eastward 

76846—09——39 


610 CAPE BONAVISTA TO CAPE RACE. 


of Deadmans bay, shows a square face of cliff to seaward, at the base 
of which a flat ledge extends a few yards into the sea. 

Black Head bay, about } mile eastward of Cliff point, is small and 
open, but used by fishermen; it shoals gradually and has a small pier 

where boats land; there is a church at its head. 

Black head is a bold headland sloping down gradually to Black 
Head bay, on the western, and to Spear bay, on the eastern side; it 
has six caves in it, the ies: one being in the middle. 

Beacon.—There is a cairn on the head at 417 feet above high water. 

Spear bay.—Cape Spear bears 117°, distant nearly a mile from 
Black head, and Spear bay, situated between them, affords temporary 
anchorage in 10 to 11 fathoms of water. 

Cape Spear, bearing 136°, distant 374, miles from South head of 
St. Johns harbor, rises ‘steeply to the height of 200 feet. 

Light.—<A lantern, rising from the middle of a white house with 
the roof painted red and white in horizontal bands, 38 feet high, 
situated southward 700 yards from cape Spear, exhibits, at 264 feet 
above high water, a revolving white light, that attains its greatest 
brilhancy every minute, and should be seen from a distance of 22 
miles in clear weather. 

Fog signal.—A fog trumpet at cape Spear, operated by com- 
pressed air, sounds thus: Blast, seven seconds; silent interval, twenty- 
three seconds, during thick or foggy weather. 

The engine house, with a chimney 30 feet high, and two small 
buildings, one of which contains the trumpet, are all painted white, 
and stand at the extreme of the cape. 

Signals.—Cape Spear lighthouse is supphed with the Interna- 
tional code signals. 

Old Haman rock, bearing 1°, distant 800 yards from cape Spear, 
has 44 fathoms of water over it. 

Old Harry rock, bearing 57°, distant 800 yards from cape Spear, 
has 3 fathoms of water over it. 

A rock, small in extent, with 4 fathoms of water over it, les nearly 
midway between cape Spear and Old Harry rock 

Tinker rock, bearing 136°, distant 800 yards from Cape Spear 
lighthouse, has a depth of 5 fathoms over it, but a less depth has been 
reported. ; 

Clearing marks.—Cliff point in line with Black head, bearing 
262°, leads northward, and Tinker hill in hne with North head, bear- 
ing 204°, leads eastward of the rocks off cape Spear. 

The coast from cape Spear trends southward for 2,8 miles to 
North head of Motion bay, and is of moderate height, the highest 
hill, 323 feet high, on which is a small stone cairn, being situated 
nearly midway between them. 


NORTH HEAD—MOTION ROCKS. 611 


Cow and Calf ledge, on which the depth is 9 fathoms, extends 
about 600 yards from the shore at about 1 mile southward of cape 
Spear. 

North head is a rugged headland, 210 feet high and of a jagged 
appearance; at its base there is a rock about 15 feet high and nearly 
isolated from the land, which, standing out from the head, is con- 
spicuous from seaward. 

North ledge, southeastward 1,400 yards from North head, has 11 
fathoms least water over it; and White rock, southward 450 yards 
from North head, has 7 fathoms of water over it. 

Motion bay.—Motion head bears 198°, distant 3,5, miles from 
North head, and Motion bay extends westward 2,4, miles from be- 
tween them. 

The shore of the bay from North head to Maddox cove, west-south- 
westward 2;; miles, is generally low and faced by jagged rocks, 
which extend into the sea and prevent landing, except at Stoppers 
side, on the western side of North head, where there is a small beach; 
but boats landing here must be hauled up immediately. Three peak 
hill, 540 feet high, is on the northern side of Maddox cove. 

Maddox cove, a bight extending northwestward about § mile and 
of the same width, affords good anchorage off the entrance to Petty 
harbor. There are several white houses and a small pier, where 
boats land, at the head of the cove. 

Petty harbor, on the southwestern side of Maddox cove, is a nar- 
row gully between rocks, 400 yards long, 100 yards wide, and having 
a depth of 3 fathoms; it is an excellent fishing station, and there is 
a large settlement around it. Mad rock, on the northern side of the 
entrance, is nearly awash, and Anchor rock, at the head of the harbor, 
is above water. There are good roads to St. Johns and bay Bulls. 

The shore from Petty harbor trends southeastward, rising, and 
continuing high for 1,200 yards, where there is a cove or gulch in the 
shape of a horseshoe, beyond which it is low, with a little cliff, to 
Seal cove, a distance of 1,700 yards. 

Notion head, southeastward, distant 1 mile from Seal cove, is 71 
feet high, with a hill, 150 feet high, close behind it; several large 
bowlders are scattered about the land in the vicinity, and at a few 
yards southward of the head there is a conspicuous reck on the coast. 

The general appearance of the coast in the vicinity of Motion 
head is rugged and barren, with the chief hills standing out well; 
Watch hill, westward about 14 miles from Motion head, is 705 feet 
high, and conical, and there are a beacon and a large bowlder on its 
summit. 

Motion rocks, 4 feet high, and over which the sea always breaks, 
he east northeastward 150 yards from Motion head. 


612 CAPE BONAVISTA TO CAPE RACE, 


Bow and Arrow shoal, consisting of several pinnacle rocks, with 
depths of 3 to 5 fathoms over them, and deeper water between, 
extends northeastward about $ mile from Motion head, while there 
are depths of less than 20 fathoms for 1 mile northeastward of the 
head. In heavy weather the sea breaks over these ledges in 10 
fathoms of water. Fishing boats are generally anchored on the 
edge of the shoals and along the 20-fathom contour line. 

The irregular and broken ground off Motion head causes a heavy 
cross sea, which makes it advisable to give it a good berth. 

Cape Spear lighthouse, well open eastward of North head, bearing 
9°, leads eastward of the shoals off Motion head. 

Buli head, 178 feet high, lies south-southwestward, distant 84 
miles from Motion head. The coast between is made up of slate 
cliffs, and the land behind rises to the height of 899 feet; it is bold-to 
and clear of offlving shoals. At 4 miles northward of Bull head is 
the Spout, a natural phenomenon, most remarkable at high water and 
when there is much swell, caused by the rush of waves into a cavern 
under the surface of the water, from which a fissure in the rock 
allows its escape in jets of foam; it makes a roaring noise, and may 
be seen distinctly from a distance of 3 miles from the land. 

Bay Bulls.—The coast from Bull head trends southwestward for 
600 yards to Columbine point, and the entrance of bay Bulls is be- 
tween this pomt and South head, which hes south-southwestward, 
distant 1,3, miles from it. The bay extends westward 24 miles, with 
a width of 4 to ? mile, decreasing to 350 yards at its head; it is open 
eastward, but a slight change to the northwestward in the direction 
of its inner part adds to the protection of the anchorage, and the 
holding ground, sand and mud, is good. After heavy gales from the 
eastward a ground swell enters the harbor, but it is not sufficient to 
endanger shipping. When St. Johns harbor is beset with ice this 
bay is often clear. 

Light.—A white cylindrical iron tower, 38 feet high, situated on 
the northern headland at the entrance to bay Bulls, exhibits, at an 
elevation of 205 feet above high water, an intermittent white hght 
every ten seconds, thus: Light seven seconds, eclipse three seconds, 
which should be seen from a distance of 17 miles in clear weather. 

A flat-roofed keeper’s dwelling, painted white, stands about 60 feet 
westward of the hght tower. 

Bread and Cheese rock lies southward, 40 yards from Bread and 
Cheese point, on the northern side of the bay at about 14 miles within 

Jolumbine point, and has a depth of 7 feet of water over it. 

Magotty rocks lie close off the western shore of the bay, bearing 
276° from Bread and Cheese point; a shoal with 3 fathoms of water 
over it, extends northeastward about 150 yards from the rocks. 


WITLESS BAY—GREAT ISLAND. 613 


Directions.—Keep the northeastern shore aboard after passing 
the Bread and Cheese rock, and anchor where convenient; the north- 
eastern side of the harbor is always the better sheltered from the 
ground swell. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, at bay Bulls at 7h. 30m.; 
springs rise 5 feet, neaps 3 feet. 

The inhabitants are principally engaged in the fisheries, and the 
ground is cultivated to some extent. Good ptarmigan shooting may 
be had in the vicinity during the season. 

Water can be procured in abundance from the river at the head of 
the bay. 

Communication.—There is communication with St. Johns, which 
is distant 18 miles, by an excellent road. 

Witless bay, where there is a village and a large church, is south- 
ward 2 miles from bay Bulls, and too open to be recommended as an 
anchorage; for temporary purposes the best berth is in 8 fathoms of 
water, sand bottom, at 4 mile above Bearcove point, from which a 
ledge of rocks, partly dry, extends southward 4 mile. 

Gull island, off the mouth of Witless bay, is 240 feet high, rocky, 
wooded, and steep-to, but too small to afford any shelter. Both this 
island and South head of bay Bulls have red cliffs. 

Green island, lying southeastward 4 mile from Witless point, the 
southern point of Witless bay, is flat and faced with cliffs 140 feet 
high; there are some dry slate ledges on its northwestern side, and 
Man-of-war rock, southeastward 100 yards from the island, has 6 
feet of water over it. 

Shoal water extends + mile from Witless point, but there is a fair 
channel, with 5 fathoms of water, between it and Green island. 
When running through this passage keep in mid-channel, with South 
head of bay Bulls just shut in with Gull island, bearing 19°. 

Mobile bay, in which there is a settlement, lies southwestward of 
Witless point; it extends northwestward 14 miles, but does not afford 
good anchorage. 

Toad cove, a fishing station southward about 13 miles from Mobile 
bay, is protected by Fox, Spear, and Pebble islands; fishing craft 
anchor in the cove, but it is too open to be safe, except in fine summer 
weather. 

Fox rock, bearing 15°, distant + mile from the southern point of 
Fox island, has 4 fathoms of water over it; the other islands are 
steep-to. 

Great island, an uninhabited island situated south-southwestward, 
distant 3 miles from Green island, is 300 feet high. It may be dis- 
tinguished from the neighboring islands by having three hills. 
Great, Spear, and Pebble islands may be passed on either side. 


614 CAPE BONAVISTA TO CAPE RACE. 


Cape Neddick, south-southwestward, distant 24 miles from Great 
island, is a bluff headland, 260 feet high. 

Offer rock, bearing 163°, distant 14 miles from Cape Neddick, has 
6 fathoms of water over it, and should be avoided in heavy gales. 

Brigus-by-South, southward, 2? miles from Cape Neddick and 
northwestward 1 mile from Brigus head, is a boat harbor with a 
ehurch on its northwestern side, visible from seaward. 

Broyle harbor extends westward 3% miles from its entrance be- 
tween Brigus head and North point of cape Broyle, which bear north- 
northwestward and south-southeastward, distant 1,5, miles from each 
other. The harbor is open eastward and affords safe anchorage only 
in fine weather, the usual position then being in Admirals cove, in 
11 fathoms of water, mud bottom; but there is more sheltered 
anchorage above Carrier point in a depth of 7 fathoms, mud bottom. 

Saturday ledge, bearing 262°, distant $ mile from Admirals head, 
has 6 feet of water over it. Brigus head, well open southward of 
Admirals head, bearing 78°, leads southward of it. 

Harbor rock, bearing 271°, distant 1,200 yards from Carrier point, 
and in a place above where vessels usually anchor, has 12 feet of water 
over it. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Broyle harbor, at 
wh. 20m.; springs rise 54 feet, neaps 34 feet. 

The land is fertile, and cows, sheep, and goats are kept by the 
inhabitants; good ptarmigan shooting may be had in the vicinity 
during the season. A church stands on the northern side near the 
head of the harbor. 

Water can be obtained at the waterfall in Spout cove, northwest- 
ward of Carrier point. 

Cape Broyle.—From North point the land trends south-southwest- 
ward for 14 miles, and forms the eastern front of Cape Broyle, a re- 
markable wooded headland rising abruptly to the height of 553 feet. 

Horse rock, bearing 63°, distant 900 yards from North point of 
Cape Broyle, has 5 fathoms of water over it. 

Old Harry rock, bearing 111°, distant $ mile from North point of 
Cape Broyle, has 12 feet of water over it. Ferryland Episcopal 
church open southward of Stone islands, which are situated close off 
the southern point of Cape Broyle, bearing 225°, leads southeastward 
of the rock. 

Caplin bay, on the southern side of Cape Broyle, and stretching 
west-northwestward about 2 miles, is clear of shoals, and has good 
holding ground, but it is open eastward; the entrances on either side 
of Goose island are each about 800 yards wide. Goose island, 70 
feet high, is steep-to except on the northern side, where, at the dis- 
tance of 50 yards, are two rocks that cover and uncover. 


FERRYLAND HARBOR. 615 


Hares Ears open eastward of Bois island, bearing 157°, leads east- 
ward of the shoal ground extending from Coldeast point and west- 
ward of Goose island. 

Ferryland harbor, southward of Coldeast point, is small but easy 
of access, and has secure anchorage, with good holding ground, ex- 
cept in strong easterly gales, when a considerable swell enters the 
harbor at high water, between the rocky islets extending from Bois 
island to Coldeast point, on its northern side. 

The entrance to the harbor between Bois island and Ferryland 
head is only 200 yards broad, but inside the harbor widens to 400 
yards. The best anchorage, in 10 fathoms of water, sand and mud 
bottom, is on the line joining Coldeast point and Pool beach, and 
between two churches at the head of the harbor. 

Ferryland head, 125 feet high, is joined to the mainland by a 
narrow isthmus, on the southern side of the harbor. 

Light.—A circular red iron lighthouse, 46 feet high, on Ferryland 
head, exhibits, at 200 feet above high water, a fixed white hght, that 
should be seen from a distance of 16 miles in clear weather. The 
keeper’s dwelling, painted white with a red roof, is close to the hght- 
house. 

Signals.—The lighthouse on Ferryland head is supplied with the 
International code signals. ‘ 

Directions.—Bring the Roman Catholhe chureh, which is. the 
southern one of the two churches, at the head of the harbor in the 
middle of the passage between Ferryland head and Bois island, bear- 
ing 273°, and run in upon this bearing; when through the entrance 
steer a little northward to avoid the shoal water off Pool beach. 

Tides.—it is high water, full and change, in Ferryland harbor at 
th. 20m.; springs rise 54 feet, neaps 35 feet. 

Ice.—Ferryland harbor freezes, at intervals, generally during the 
first ten days of February; sometimes it freezes for one day only; but 
the ice never forms during strong westerly winds. Southwesterly 
to southerly winds break up the ice and clear the harbor; drift ice 
sometimes remains as late as June 20. Northerly winds fill the har- 
bor with drift ice, which clears out as soon as the wind shifts south- 
westward. Northern ice arrives about February 23 and leaves about 
April 6. The harbors of bay Bulls, Broyle, Aquafort, Fermeuse, and 
Renewse fill with ice and clear at about the same times as Ferryland. 

Communication.—Steamers from St. Jobns call at Ferryland 
harbor weekly during summer and autumn. 

There is a mail twice a week to St. Johns by road; and there is 
telegraphic communication. 

Water is scarce in Ferryland, but can be obtained from Caplin 
bay. 


616 CAPE BONAVISTA TO CAPE RACE. 


Hares Ears, separated from the southeastern part of Ferryland 
head by a narrow boat channel, are two peculiarly shaped slate rocks, 
50 feet high and steep-to. 

Burns Head rock, bearing 168°, distant 300 yards from Burns 
head, the southwestern point of Ferryland head, has 15 feet water 
over it. 

Crow island, between Ferryland head and the entrance to Aqua- 
fort harbor, is 70 feet high, and bearing 120°, distant 200 yards 
from its eastern end is Crow rock, nearly dry at low water. 

Aquafort harbor.—North head of Aquafort harbor bears 253°, 
distant 1; miles from Burns head, and some rocks, which are 
steep-to, extend southward 100 yards from it. The entrance to Aqua- 
fort harbor is between these rocks and Spurwink island, 40 feet high, 
which hes + mile to the southward and 100 yards off South head, 
and is bold-to; thence the harbor extends about westward for 24 
miles between high steep hills. The anchorage is good, and vessels 
lie in safety in 9 fathoms of water, mud bottom, abreast of the small 
and outer chapel on the northern side, with generally smooth water; 
but little sea or swell finds its way up the harbor, except during 
heavy easterly gales. 

A small rock hes 120 yards from the northern shore abreast of the 
Roman Catholic chapel, but no other shoals are known to exist in the 
harbor. The land is fertile and well wooded; salmon and trout 
abound in the two rivers which run into it, and water can be obtained 
easily ; above the beach at the harbor head there is a small deep pool, 
where fishing craft winter. 

The coast from South head of Aquafort harbor trends southeast- 
ward for 1,400 yards to Black head. Lawler bay lies between, and 
150 yards off the shore of this bay, at 700 yards from South head, 
is a rock awash at low water. 

Bald head, southward 1,600 yards from Black head, is a prominent 
headland 90 feet high. 

Aquafort rocks, bearing 6°, distant 400 yards from the north- 
ern point of Bald head, are awash at high water springs; and Clear- 
cove rock, bearing 209°, distant 400 yards from the southeastern 
point of the same head, is also awash at high water. 

Fermeuse harbor.—Situated # mile southwestward of Bald head 
is Northern head of Fermeuse harbor. This harbor is 400 yards 
wide at the entrance, and extends west-northwestward 24 miles; it is 
a favorite fishing station, and more frequented than Aquafort, being 
less embayed, and has a more convenient anchorage. 

The principal settlement is at Admirals cove on the northern side 
at 1,200 yards within Northern head; fishing vessels generally anchor 
in this cove on account of its being close to the sea, but there is more 


RENEWSE HARBOR. 617 


roomy anchorage in Kingman cove, 1 mile farther in on the south- 
ern shore; the safest anchorage is above Sheep head, near the head 
of the harbor, in 6 fathoms of water, mud bottom. 

Mad rock, 100 yards from the southwestern side of the entrance 
and bearing 198° from Northern head, has 4 feet water over it. 
Blow-me-down head, on the southern shore of the harbor, open 
northward of Traces point, bearing 287°, leads northward of Mad 
rock. 

Bar shoal, bearing 102°, distant 450 yards from Sheep head, has 9 
feet of water over it, rock bottom. 

Water can be obtained at places on either shore. 

The coast from Southern head of Fermeuse harbor trends south- 
southwestward for 2 miles to Sculpin point, but at about midway a 
headland, 40 feet high, projects 400 yards from the coast line. Bear- 
cove point is the northern point of this projection, and bearing 144°, 
distant nearly 400 yards from the point and 200 yards from the 
shore, is a rock with 3 fathoms of water over it; Sunker rock, bear- 
ing 192°, distant 400 yards from the southern point of the projection, 
has 4 feet of water over it. 

Renewse harbor.—Northern head of Renewse harbor lies west- 
southwestward 4 mile from Sculpin point, and Renewse head, the 
southern head of the harbor, lies southward, distant 1400 vards from 
Northern head. Renewse harbor extends northwestward 2 miles 
from Renewse head; it is open eastward, and offers very indifferent 
anchorage even to small vessels; nevertheless, its convenient position 
with regard to the fishing ground renders it a resort during summer. 
There are many rocks in it, and in heavy weather the whole harbor is 
a mass of breakers. 

Kettlebottom rock, bearing 0°, distant 900 yards from Renewse 
head, has 6 feet of water over it; Whale Back rock, bearing 313°, 
distant 350 yards from Kettlebottom rock, has less than 6 feet water 
over it; and a shoal, bearing 107°, distant 400 yards from Northern 
head, has 3 fathoms of water over it. Shag rock, in mid-channel at 
1,400 yards within Renewse head, is 9 feet high, and west-northwest- 
ward of it are White Horse rock, with 6 feet of water over it; Black 
Horse rock, with 12 feet of water over it; and a patch with 12 feet 
of water over it. 

Anchor rock, 15 feet high, bears 279°, distant 4 mile from Northern 
head, and is close off a point on which there is a flagstaff. 

The village, with its churches, is on the northeastern side of the 
harbor within Anchor rock, but it is not visible from seaward; the 
best anchorage in the harbor is off the village, bearing 299°, distant 
300 yards from Anchor rock, in 4 fathoms of water. 


618 CAPE BONAVISTA TO CAPE RACE. 


Directions.—Enter the harbor, passing about 200 yards north- 
ward of Renewse head, on a west-northwesterly course to clear Kettle- 
bottom rock; keep along the southwestern shore, passing southwest- 
ward of Shag rock, White Horse rock, and the 12-foot patch, and 
anchor in 4 fathoms water, sand bottom. 

Water can be obtained from a brook in the village. 

Communication.—Steamers from St. Johns call-at Renewse har- 
bor weekly during summer and autumn; and there is a mail by road 
twice a week. 

Bantam banks.—Bantam fishing banks lie from 24 to 5 miles off 
the coast between Bearcove point and Burnt point, which lies 24 
miles south-southwestward of Renewse head; the banks extend north- 
ward and southward for a distance of 5 miles, with a width of about 
4 mile, and the soundings over them are irregular, the depths vary- 
ing from 9 to 30 fathoms, rock bottom. Fermeuse Bantam, the north- 
ern bank, over which the least water is 11 fathoms, hes east-southeast- 
ward, distant 24 miles from Bearcove point, and about 14 miles from 
the southern banks. 

Caution.—With these exceptions, all along the coast from St. 
Johns to cape Ballard, the soundings are deep, so that a depth of 90 
fathoms is found at 6 miles from the land, and often 30 fathoms 
within 4 mile of the rocks. On this account the lead is not a sure 
guide; nevertheless in approaching the land in fog, soundings should 
be frequently taken, compared with the chart, and considered. 

Often when near the coast, especially under the lee of a point, 
during southerly and light easterly winds, a vessel will suddenly 
emerge from the fog, and the land will be distinctly visible. 

The coast from Renewse head trends southward for 74 miles to 
cape Ballard. 

Renewse islet, southward about ? mile from Renewse head, and 
separated from the land by a narrow boat channel, is a low rock. 

Renewse rocks, bearing 165°, distant about 2 miles from Renewse 
head and 14 miles from the shore, are 6 to 10 feet high; a rock, with 
6 feet of water over it, hes 100 yards east-southeastward of them; 
in heavy weather the sea breaks on the rocks. The passage between 
Renewse rocks and the land is navigable in fine weather, but it is not 
safe in a heavy sea. Cape Race lighthouse, open eastward of cape 
Ballard, bearing 213°, leads about 1 mile eastward of Renewse rocks. 

Cape Ballard rises abruptly to the height of 290 feet, and has a 
bare round summit. The land falls on each side of the cape, and 
even in fog the fishermen recognize it by the fog hanging black and 
dense around its sides. The water is deep close to it. 

The coast from cape Ballard trends southwestward for 94 miles 
to cape Race. 


CHANCE COVE—CLAM COVE. 619 


Chance Cove head, situated about 2 miles southwestward of cape 
Ballard, is composed of dark slate cliffs, 150 feet high. 

Black rock, west-southwestward 1 mile from the head, and in front 
of Chance cove, is 15 feet high. 

Chance cove is a small open bight extending northward for $ mile. 
It has a gravel beach at its head, and affords anchorage to coasting 
vessels in 4 fathoms of water, sand bottom, during northerly winds. 
There is a small fishing settlement on the western side of the cove; the 
boats and fishing stages are protected by a shoal of sand and stones, 
upon which the sea breaks. 

Frenchman cove, southwestward about ? mile from Chance cove, 
is rocky. 

Clam cove, 2 miles southward of Frenchman cove, and nearly 4 
miles northward of cape Race, is the outlet of a shallow stream. In 
ordinary weather boats land in this cove safely. 

The coast between Clam cove and Cape Race is cliffy and broken, 
with here and there a small cove where a boat might land in favorable 
weather. 

Cape Race light, fog signal, etc., see page S84. 


CHAPTER. 


SOUTHEAST COAST OF LABRADOR—CAPE ST. LEWIS TO 
LONG POINT—THE STRAIT OF BELLEISLE. 


The coast of Labrador from cape St. Lewis to York point, nearly 
50 miles southwestward, is composed of bare granite hills, which, ex- 
cepting in the vicinity of Chateau bay, do not exceed the height of 700 
feet, but appear much higher from their steepness. Several of the 
bays and inlets are large, with bold shores and very deep water. 
Navigation on this coast is not difficult on account of the islands or 
rocks off it, but the frequent fog, the heavy easterly swell rolling in 
from the Atlantic, and the icebergs, which almost always drift south- 
ward with the current, render caution and constant vigilance necessary. 

Fisheries.—See page 36. 

Climate.—See page 43. 

Cape St. Lewis is a promontory rising in dark-red precipitous 
granite hills to the height of about 500 feet. Its southeastern point 
is a small rocky peninsula, and St. Lewis rock, small, low, black, and 
close to the shore, with deep water at 400 yards seaward of it, les 
nearly 1 mile northeastward of this point. 

The highest land over cape St. Lewis has a double summit, which 
falls abruptly to Fox harbor, and is partly wooded. 

Position.—St. Lewis rock is approximately in latitude 52° 21” 50” 
north, longitude 55° 37’ 15’” west. 

St. Lewis sound, the entrance of which is between cape St. Lewis 
and Great island, situated 4 miles south-southeastward, is open to the 
eastward. <A high and long rolling sea occasionally enters St. Lewis 
sound from this direction, and it is felt as far up as the entrance of 
St. Lewis inlet, around the islands, and up the bays of the mainland 
westward of them; it often comes in without wind, and breaks heavily 
over islets 30 feet high, with a roaring surf on the shore. This sea 
is far less dangerous to boats, and impedes them less, than the short 
breaking sea of the gulf of St. Lawrence. It prevents landing, but 
during its continuance every shoal with less than 4 fathoms has a 
breaker upon it. Boats must, however, be on their guard on such 
occasions, for on some of the shoals the sea only breaks occasionally, 

620 


FOX HARBOR—PORT MARNHAM. 621 


and then in a sheet of foam, which would swamp any boat that might 
encounter it. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in St. Lewis sound at 
6h. 40m.; springs rise 34 feet, neaps 1 foot. 

Fox harbor, westward 1? miles from the southeastern point of 
cape St. Lewis, extends north-northeastward nearly 1 mile, and 
lias secure anchorage in 5 to 8 fathoms, mud bottom. The entrance 
is only about 200 yards wide, with a depth of 3 fathoms, but the 
harbor is nearly + mile wide within. Fishermen point, on the south- 
ern side of the entrance, is low, and there are several fishermen’s 
houses upon it; a small rock above water lies close northwestward of 
the point and is joined to it by shoal water. 

In entering, leave the rock not over 100 yards to the southward, 
for a reef, partly above water, extends southward nearly 200 yards 
from the point, that separates the harbor from the unsheltered bay 
westward of it, and forms the northern side of the entrance. _ The 
best anchorage is about 600 yards within the entrance. 

Water can be taken from the streamlets and ponds, but wood is 
very scarce. 

Shoals.—A bank, about 400 yards long, northward and southward, 
and 200 yards wide, with a least depth of 54 fathoms of water, lies 
with its southern end about 665 yards southwestward of Fishermen 
point. 

A shoal, with 13 feet of water on it, lies 250 yards off the main- 
land at 158, miles westward of Fisherman point and nearly 1,200 
yards southeastward of the boat channel into port Marnham. 

Port Marnham.—Marnham island, which is narrow and of con- 
siderable height, extends westward, 14 miles from a point of the 
inainland at 3,2, miles west-northwestward of the southeastern point 
of cape St. Lewis. Port Marnham, northward of the island, is about 
24 miles long, 800 yards wide, and quite landlocked. The eastern 
entrance, between the eastern end of the island and the mainland, 
is narrow, and only fit for boats. The entrance between the western 
end of the island and Deer point is 800 yards wide, with depths of 
19 to 31 fathoms in the middle, and clear to the rocks on either side. 

A shoal extends 300 yards from Danger point, at the middle of 
the northern side of the port. 

Anchorage.—There is anchorage anywhere in the port in 8 to 18 
fathoms, mud bottom; the best position is off a small creek on the 
northern shore in 9 fathoms, mud bottom. 

There is also secure anchorage in a more convenient depth of water, 
but with less room for large vessels, in the western part of the port. 

Water may be taken from the small streams, or ponds of rain water, 
near the shores of the harbor. There are a few small trees up the 
western cove, but firewood is scarce. 


622 SOUTHEAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


Long harbor is immediately southward of the promontory ter- 
minating in Deer point, which divides it from port Marnham. The 
harbor extends westward 43 miles, and is about $ mile wide, with deep 
water. There is anchorage near its head; but it is completely open 
to the eastward, and is not safe. 

Bay point, the southern entrance point of Long harbor, situated 

4 miles south-southeastward from Deer point, is composed of green 
feldspar. 

Shag rocks, 6 feet high, lie from 600 to 1,100 yards eastward of 
Bay point. 

St. Lewis inlet is about 1 mile wide at its entrance between Shag 
rocks and Anthony islands; about 1,200 yards between Captain Jack 
island and Bay Point promontory, where there are two islets and 
some rocks; and it becomes wider within. There are bays with sey- 
eral small islands in them on the southern side of the inlet, but be- 
cause they are open to easterly winds, and on account of the great 
depth of water, there is no good anchorage until within Black Fly 
island, which is 9 miles from the entrance and the first island in the 
middle of the inlet above those at the entrance. The depth of water 
often exceeds 30 fathoms in the middle and 20 fathoms close to the 
shores on either side; and the bottom is everywhere mud. A small 
rocky shoal, always above water, lies 2 miles below Black Fly island, 
and must be left to the southward in running up the inlet. The inlet 
is otherwise clear of shoals in the fairway. 

Black Fly island is about 700 yards long, partially wooded, and 
surrounded with bowlders which extend 600 yards from it down the 
inlet and also from the northern point of the island to the mainland, 
so that the channel southward of the island is the only one navigable. 
There is good anchorage on the southwestern side of this island, in 5 
to 9 fathoms, over a bottom of mud and stones, and wood and water 
are abundant. 

Navigation becomes intricate immediately above Black Fly island, 
but vessels not drawing over 18 feet can ascend for 54 miles farther, 
where a sand flat with bowlders, nearly dry at low water, extends 
across the head of the inlet and the mouth of St. Lewis river. Wood 
island, 13 miles above Black Fly island, is nearly 1 mile long, 600 
yards broad, and it is surrounded with bowlders, leaving a very nar- 
row channel with 2 fathoms of water southward of it, but the channel 
northward of the island is rather wider and has depths of 3 to 14 
fathoms. The island and the shores on either side are thickly wooded 
with spruce and birch, supplying timber suitable for building schoon- 
ers and boats. 

The trees increase in number and size from the entrance to the 
head of the inlet, owing to the change of climate. On the coast the 
temperature of the sea is often at the freezing point, and the tem- 


ST. LEWIS RIVER—-MARLEY ROCKS. 623 


perature of the air not much higher at times, even in the warmest 
months. At the head of the inlet the weather is frequently incon- 
veniently warm, and mosquitoes and black flies are innumerable. 

The Newfoundland fishermen obtain the wood they require for 
fishing stages from this inlet, and they sometimes build boats there. 
The scenery is beautiful, the granite hills rising occasionally, on either 
side of the inlet, to heights of 700 to 800 feet. There are high clay 
cliffs at the mouth of St. Lewis river, at the head of the inlet. 

St. Lewis river.—<As there is not water enough for boats over the 
flats of sand and bowlders at the entrance of St. Lewis river, it has 
not been examined. The water, however, is quite salt off its mouth, 
so that it is probably, as fishermen report, but a small stream. 

River islands, or Anthony, Duck, and Captain Jack islands, le 
at the entrance to St. Lewis inlet. 

Anthony islands are two small rocks, the northeastern wedge- 
shaped and bare, the southwestern pyramidal and covered with turf. 

Shoal eround, with a least depth of 44 fathoms of water over it, is 
situated 600 yards northwestward, and a rock with 7 feet of water 
over it bears 61°, distant 600 yards from the northeastern Anthony 
island. 

Duck and Captain Jack islands are each bare granite, 150 feet in 
height, with a perimeter of about 3 miles. Around and off the north- 
eastern end of Duck island there are several small and bare islets. 

A chain of rocks, the shoalest of which has a depth of 2 feet of 
water over it, extends east-southeastward 600 yards from the north- 
eastern part of Duck island, and a shoal with 34 fathoms of water 
over it hes 800 yards farther in the same direction. 

The channel between Duck island and Captain Jack island is filled 
with rocks and is not navigable; the passage between these islands 
and the mainland to the westward is from 12 to 53 fathoms deep, and, 
as a considerable swell rolls in, it is an insecure anchorage. 

Club cape, a high point on the mainland, les southwestward 4,55 
miles from cape St. Lewis, and a reef extends 140 yards northeast- 
ward of it. 

Kyer cove, 14 miles southwestward of Club cape, is open to the 
northeasterly swell and should not be entered. 

Marley rocks, off the entrance to Kyer cove, and bearing 269°, 
distant 1, miles from Kyer Cove point, which is situated 4 mile 
westward of Club cape, are about 600 yards long, eastward and 
westward, 200 yards wide, and have a least depth of 6 feet of water 
over them. Green island, open northward of Kyer Cove point, bear- 
ing 94°, leads northward of these rocks. 

A small rock, with 10 feet of water over it, is situated 800 yards 
southward of Marley rocks, and 550 yards from the eastern shore of 
Kyer cove. 


624 SOUTHEAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


A small rock lies close to Lion’s head, a projection on the eastern 
shore of Kyer cove at 1 mile southwestward of Kyer Cove point. 

Shoal harbor, a bay of the mainland northwestward of Kyer cove, 
and about one mile southwestward of the southwestern end of Duck 
island, extends 14 miles southwestward and has two small islets and 
several rocks in it. There is a depth of 12 feet between these islets 
and the southeastern side of the bay, which is therefore only available 
for small vessels. 

Mary harbor, at the head of a bay of the mainland, which is 
situated 11 miles northwestward of Shoal harbor, and on the south- 
ern side of Mary Harbor head, is small, with depths of 3 fathoms 
over a part of it, and is only suitable for small vessels. In the outer 
part of the bay there is more room and greater depths, but anchorage 
is rendered unsafe by the occasional easterly swell. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Mary harbor at 
6h. 40m.; springs rise 34 feet. . 

Gull rocks, in the middle of St. Lewis sound, lying aBout 2 miles 
east-northeastward from Club cape, are two islets close together 
and 25 feet high. 

A bank of 5 fathoms lies $ mile to the northwestward, and a bank 
of 7 fathoms in the same direction distant 1,250 yards from the 
western part of Gull rocks. 

Green island, eastward 1} miles from Club cape, is 51 feet high 
and covered with grass. A reef extends northward 400 yards from 
it, and a shoal, with 44 fathoms over it, hes westward 200 yards from 
the northern part of the island. Green Island bank, a large bank 
with a depth of 7 fathoms over it, is situated east-northeastward 800 
yards from Green island. 

Middle rocks extend southeastward about $ mile from Green island ; 
there are spaces between the rocks and between the island and the 
rocks, but the group is almost connected, and should not be ap- 
proached nearer than 4 mile. 

Banks.—Eskimo bank, Northern bank, Monday bank, Seventeen 
Fathoms bank, and Blake ground he in the entrance to St. Lewis 
sound, and have depths of 10 to 17 fathoms of water over them. The 
sea is reported to break in 14 fathoms and less of water in winter 
gales. 

Battle islands lie on the southern side of the entrance to St. Lewis 
sound. Great island, nearly round, about 4 mile across, and 158 feet 
high, is the northernmost of these islands; it is unlike any of the 
others, being a black and precipitous rock, with horizontal white 
streaks seaward and a large white patch on its southwestern side. 

Double islands, about 1 mile southeastward of the rest of Battle 
islands, are two in number and separated by a narrow channel. The 


BATTLE HARBOR. 625 


eastern island is # mile long, north-northeastward and west-south- 
westward, about + mile wide, and 130 feet high. The western island 
is the smaller, and is 125 feet high. 

Light.—A cylindrical iron tower, 34 feet high, painted black and 
white in horizontal bands, with a white lantern, on the hill at about 
200 yards southward of the northern end of the eastern Double island, 
exhibits at 126 feet above high water a fixed red light, which should 
be seen from a distance of 12 miles in clear weather. 

The keeper’s dwelling, a single-storied, flat-roofed building, is con- 
nected to the lighthouse by a covered way, and the storehouse is 100 
feet southward of the dwelling; the covered way, dwelling, and store 
are white. . 

The light is exhibited from the opening till the close of navigation. 

Shoals.—Several shoals lie eastward of Great island and north- 
ward of Battle island; the northeastern end of the eastern Double 
island opens southeastward of Gull island, bearing 148°, leads north- 
eastward; and Caribou point open northward of Great island, bear- 
ing 249°, leads northward of them, but this line leads over North 
Ribb. 

North and South Ribb are two ridges of rocks, on which the sea 
always breaks, about 4 mile apart, north-northwestward and south- 
southeastward; each is about 400 yards across. South Ribb bears 18°, 
distant # mile from Gull island. 

Middle Ribb, a shoal with 14 feet of water over it, lies midway 
between North and South Ribbs. 

Martin bank, with a least depth of 10 fathoms over it, bears 69°, 
distant 800 yards from the southern end of North Ribb; and Southern 
bank, with a least depth of 7 fathoms, bears 97°, nearly 4 mile from 
South Ribb. 

Mariners should pass eastward of these reefs, except perhaps with 
local knowledge. 

Battle harbor, between Battle islands and the eastern part of 
Great Caribou island, is only suitable for small vessels, being about 
60 yards wide in the entrance, 150 yards wide within, and 4 mile 
long, with depths of 4 to 6 fathoms, mud bottom. Two round islets, 
each about 100 yards in diameter, lie, respectively, 4 mile and ? mile 
southeastward from the western end of Great island; the southern 
islet is in the entrance of the harbor. There are depths of 12 to 15 
feet close eastward and westward of these islets. The southern 
entrance is only available for boats. 

In approaching the harbor pass westward of Great island and the 
other islands lying between it and Battle island and close on either 
side of the round islets southeastward of Great island. 

76846—09——40 


626 SOUTHEAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


Caution must be used by steamers in the herring season to avoid 
fouling their screws in the nets. 

Battle harbor is reported to be sectre during summer, but in 
autumn an undertow, or a heavy ground swell, is said to roll in 
between the islands, damaging vessels and fishing stages, and render- 
ing the harbor unsafe. The harbor is generally crowded with fishing 
vessels and boats, which moor to the rocks on either side, and the 
shores are bordered with fishing stages and the houses of fishermen. 
A good house and store stand on Battle island, and also a high flag- 
staff, which is noticeable from seaward. There are some 200 people 
about this station during the fishing season, but the number of resi- 
dents during winter is very much less. It has an Episcopal church 
with a small spire. The harbor is not visited by Eskimos, but some 
half-breeds come there occasionally. 

Communication.—A steamer runs between Bay of Islands and 
Battle harbor weekly during summer and autumn, and the steamer 
from St. Johns to the northern Labrador ports calls fortnightly dur- 
ing July, August, and September. 

A wireless telegraph station has been established by the govern- 
ment of Newfoundland at Battle harbor. 

Coal.—Usually about 20 tons of coal may be obtained. 

Hospital.—The Royal National Mission to Deepsea Fishermen has 
a hospital at Battle harbor with 8 beds for males and the same num- 
ber for females. 

Ice.— Battle harbor generally freezes about December 13 and opens 
May 16. The average time of the arrival of northern ice is December 
31. Drift ice appears during February or March, and the coast in the 
vicinity is clear about the middle of April, except in an abnormal 
season, when ice sometimes remains as late as June 6. 

Great Caribou island is the largest of the islands on the southern 
side of St. Lewis sound. There are two coves, with huts and fishing 
stages, in Great Caribou island, just westward of Battle harbor. 

Caribou channel, leading to Assizes harbor, runs between Great 
Caribou island on the east, and Little Caribou, Hare, Copper, and 
Assizes islands on the west. Black head, the southwestern end of 
Great Caribou island, is 200 feet high; it falls steeply to the sea, but 
its northern side slopes gradually to a marsh a few feet above high 
water, which extends from Sand cove, on the western, to Cartridge 
bight, on the eastern side. 

A shoal with depths of less than 3 fathoms over it, extends from 
the northern part of Black head across Sand cove, and there is a rock, 
with 2 feet of water over it, on its southern part, at 200 yards off- 
shore. 


Ly 4 


INDIAN ISLAND—-COPPER ISLAND. 627 


A narrow channel, with a depth of 34 fathoms in it, runs between 
this shoal and the ledge of Little Caribou island (see p. 629), but 
there is no leading mark. 

A rock, with 15 feet of water over it, hes northwestward of this 
shoal, and bears 166°, distant 450 yards from the southern point of 
Indian island; a small shoal, with a depth of 45 fathoms of water, 
bears 190°, distant 300 yards from the same point. 

Indian island, 75 feet high, covered with turf over reddish gray 
rock, and generally flat, is joined at low water to the middle of the 
western side of Great Caribou island by a bank of gravel on which 
are several low rocks. 

Indian cove, the shallow channel between Indian island and Great 
Caribou island, affords good shelter for fishing craft, as far south- 
ward as the first narrows, beyond which only small boats can proceed. 
Numerous houses and fishing stages border this cove. 

Mouse island, a small white rock, 14 feet high, $ mile northward of 
Indian island, is separated from Great Caribou island by a narrow 
channel, with a depth of 9 feet of water in it. A rock, with 6 feet of 
water over it, lies close to the northwestern end of Mouse island. 

Caribou point, the northwestern point of Great Caribou island, 
rises to a circular hill, 130 feet high. The point has a striped appear- 
ance, caused by alternating black and white terraces of rock in verti- 
cal stratification. 

Assizes island, one of the large islands on the southern side of 
St. Lewis sound and situated on the western side of the northern en- 
trance to Caribou channel, is partly covered with turf and small 
wood; and the underlying rock, where visible, is white. <A hill near 
the middle of the island, 280 feet high, generally flat at the summit, 
with a few small rises, falls steeply to Nimrod tickle on the north- 
western and Assizes harbor on the southeastern side. 

The Rags, a cluster of rocks, the highest of which is 8 feet high, le © 
close to the northern side of Assizes island; there is a depth of 5 
fathoms at about 200 yards off them. 

The eastern coast of Assizes island is indented by deep fissures, and 
fringed by Parsons ground, a bank, the northern portion of which 
has 74 fathoms over it. 

A bank, with 9 fathoms of water, bears 78°, distant 1,300 yards 
from the Rags. 

Copper island, on the eastern side of Assizes harbor, is wedge- 
shaped, and has its summit, 137 feet high, near the northern end. 
The northern side of the island falls steeply, and is cliffy in places. 
Near the southern part of its southwestern coast, there is a small 
green sward. 


628 SOUTHEAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


An islet, some 60 feet across and 15 feet high, lies close to the south- 
eastern end of Copper island; and a rock, about 5 feet high, is at- 
tached to the southern end of this islet. 

Hare island rises to a flat-topped hill, 192 feet high, near its north- 
western end, and a peaked hill, 155 feet high, near its eastern end; 
it is separated from Assizes island by a channel 65 yards wide, which 
has numerous rocks in it, and should not be used. 

Shoals, with depths of 10 to 18 feet, extend 300 yards eastward 
from the northeastern side of Hare island, and others fringe its 
southeastern coast for 150 yards. The eastern point of Tilcey island 
just open northeastward of the eastern point of Little Caribou island, 
bearing 143°, leads close northeastward, and the sharp peak at the 
western end of the range in the middle of Great Caribou island open 
northward of Indian island, bearing 78°, leads northward of these 
shoals. 

On the western side of Hare island a rock, with less than 6 feet over 
it, lies with the western point of Dumpling island bearing 217°, dis- 
tant 4 mile. The space between Hare and Assizes islands, being foul 
ground and shoal water of 2 to 3 fathoms, should not be entered. 

It is stated by local fishermen that the water between Dumpling 
island and the mainland to the southwestward is shoal. 

Assizes rock, with 4+ feet water over it, is the shoalest part of a 
bank 335 yards long north and south, and nearly 200 yards wide, 
situated 200 yards westward of the western part of Indian island. 
The eastern summit of Tilcey island (near its eastern end) in line 
with the eastern point of Little Caribou island, bearing 145°, leads 
southwestward; and cape St. Lewis, open westward of Caribou point, 
bearing about 13°, leads westward of this rock, and nearly over Mid 
rock. 

A shoal with 4% fathoms water over it, bears 252°, distant 150 yards 
from the northern point of Indian island. 

Mid rock, bearing 340°, distant 800 yards from the northern point 
of Indian island, has 8 feet of water over it. ‘The eastern point of 
Little Caribou island, open westward of the southwestern side of 
Indian island, bearing 155°, leads westward; and the eastern summit 
of Hare island in line with the southern end of the islet southward 
of Copper island, bearing 209°, leads northwestward of this rock. 

Assizes harbor trends westward 700 yards between Copper and 
Hare islands, with a breadth of 450 yards, and then turns sharply 
southwestward for 650 yards between Assizes and Hare islands, where 
it is 400 yards wide. It is entered from the northward by a channel, 
less than 100 yards in width, between Assizes and Copper islands, and 
from the southward, between Copper and Hare islands. There are 
a few houses on a promontory about 20 feet high, near the head of the 
harbor. 


LITTLE CARIBOU ISLAND. 629 


The harbor has several shoals in it, lying nearly 200 yards off the 
northern coast of Hare island, and having depths of 10 to 15 feet 
over them. The northern part of Indian island in line with the 
southern end of the islet southeastward of Copper island, bearing 97°, 
leads northward, and the northwestern end of Copper island shut in 
with the eastern highwater line of Assizes island, bearing 21°, leads 
westward of these shoals. 

The shores of the harbor are otherwise steep-to at the distance of 
65 yards, with the exception of a small spit of rock extending from 
the eastern point of Assizes island. This spit extends into the 
channel between Assizes and Copper islands, but falls quickly to 
moderately deep water. 

Water may be generally taken from a small stream running into 
the western part of the harbor. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Assizes harbor at 
Th. 5m.; springs rise 4% feet, neaps 33 feet. 

Little Caribou island, 300 yards southeastward of Hare island, 
is 129 feet high, pyramidal in shape, and partially covered with turf 
over whitish rock and with stunted wood in the hollows. It is sur- 
rounded by a fringe reef, which with the shoal water off Hare island, 
narrows the channel between these islands to about 400 feet. 

A ledge, situated northeastward 150 yards from the eastern end 
of Little Caribou island, is 335 yards long, 150 yards wide, and has 
a depth of 2 feet over it. The navigable channel between this ledge 
and Little Caribou island is only 200 feet wide, with a depth of 44 
fathoms. In ordinary weather the shoal surrounding the ledge is 
visible, showing a white bottom, while the shoalest parts are covered 
with kelp, and the channel westward appears of a dark color. 

A small shoal, with 32 fathoms water over it, bears 342°, distant 
550 vards from the eastern point of Little Caribou island. 

Directions.—For Assizes harbor from the northward, round Cari- 
bou point and steer for Copper island; then, observing the clearing 
marks for Mid rock (see page 628), round the islet off the southern 
end of Copper island at the distance of 200 yards, and anchor in 
the harbor in 6 to 9 fathoms water. For the western part of the 
harbor keep clear of the shoals off the northern coast of Hare island 
(see p. 628). 

Proceeding southward through Caribou channel, after passing 
Copper island, keep cape St. Lewis open westward of Caribou point, 
about 13°, until the eastern point of Little Caribou island is midway 
between the eastern summit of Tilcey island and the eastern point 
of that island, bearing 143°, which mark leads midway between 
Assizes rock and the shoal water off Hare island. As there is no 
leading mark through the channel between Little Caribou island 
and the ledge northeastward of it, round the eastern point of Little 


630 SOUTHEAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


Caribou island at a distance of about 60 yards, and when the north- 
ern end of St. Charles Gull island opens southwestward of Black 
head the vessel is southward of the shoals. 

From the southward, steer for Little Caribou island; round the 
eastern point of Little Caribou island at a distance of 60 yards, steer- 
ing for the green sward on Copper island. Then keep the eastern 
point of Little Caribou island midway between the eastern summit 
and the eastern point of Tilcey island, bearing 143°, which leads 
between Assizes rock and the shoal water off Hare island, and when 
the sharp peak, at the western end of the range in the middle of 
Great Caribou island, opens northward of Indian island, bearing 
78°, enter the harbor as above directed. 

Proceeding northward through Caribou channel, when cape St. 
Lewis opens westward of Caribou point, bearing about 13°, steer to 
pass the islet off the southeastern end of Copper island at a distance 
of 200 yards, then haul to the northward and keep the eastern point 
of Little Caribou island open westward of the southwestern side of 
Indian island, bearing 155°, until the eastern summit of Hare island 
is shut in with the southeastern end of Copper island, bearing 209°, 
when Mid rock is cleared. 

To pass between Little Caribou and Hare islands, keep about 100 
yards from Little Caribou. 

Water may be taken from ponds at the head of Sand cove, and 
firewood can be obtained by boats from the shores of St. Charles 
river. 

Nimrod tickle, which lies between Assizes island and the main- 
land westward, and which leads into St. Charles river, is 485 yards 
wide in the narrowest part; rocks, partly above water, extend nearly 
200 yards from all the points on the northern side of Assizes island. 
Therefore, keep the mainland side aboard, and keep a good leokout, 
for the channel has not been carefully examined. 

St. Charles river.—There is roomy and landlocked anchorage in 
the mouth of this river, which is named the Lodge, and extends south- 
westward some 24 miles from Assizes island. 

About 2 miles above the Lodge the river becomes narrow and intri- 
cate, though navigable for 14 miles farther; still farther up there is 
a depth of 6 feet in a narrow channel, in which there are many rocks. 
Wood and water are abundant. 

Cape St. Charles is the eastern point of a promontory of the main- 
land, which extends eastward to the southwestward of Battle islands. 
St. Charles hill, round and 654 feet high, les westward, nearly 1 mile 
from the cape, and is the highest land in this locality. 

St. Charles Gull island is 160 feet high, $ mile long, about 600 
yards broad, and lies eastward about 1 mile from the cape. 


FISH ROCK—TILCEY ISLAND. 631 


Fish rock lies eastward, 1,200 yards from St. Charles Gull island; 
there is deep water around it, but a rock awash at low water les 
southwestward, 150 yards from its southwestern point. 

Western bank, bearing 220°, distant 450 vards from the southern 
point of St. Charles Gull island, is a small rock with 17 feet of water 
over it, and steep-to. 

St. Charles harbor lies inside of Wall, Tilcey, and Fox islands, 
which are situated along the northeastern side of cape St. Charles 
promontory, and are also known as the Seal islands. The anchorage, 
which is easy of access, 1s about 1,200 yards long, + mile wide, and the 
depth ranges from 5 to 12 fathoms, mud bottom. Some swell rolls 
in with easterly winds, and therefore it is not considered a secure 
harbor for large vessels, except in the finest summer months. 

Small vessels secure safely by making fast to the rock between 
Wall island and the mainland in 9 feet of water. There are houses 
and fishing stages both on the islands and the mainland. 

Wall island, 200 feet high, is the southeastern island. There is 
an entrance to the harbor between Wall island and the mainland, 
but it is shallow and narrow, and only suitable for boats. 

Three small rocks above water lie close off the western point of 
Wall island; they are steep-to. 

Shoals.---Inner shoal, with a depth of 17 feet, bears 85°, distant 
650 yards from the eastern point of Wall island; in the same direction 
at the distance of 1,250 yards is Middle shoal, with a depth of 4 
fathoms; and at 1,850 yards, Wall shoal with a depth of 9 fathoms. 

The western side of Gull island (Battle islands), shut in with the 
eastern end of Black islet, bearing 20°, leads between Wall island 
and Inner shoal. 

Tilcey island, northwestward of Wall island, is 222 feet high, 
black, precipitous, and unlike the others near. The entrance to St. 
Charles harbor between Tilcey and Wall islands is 200 yards wide, 
with deep water close to the shores on either side. 

The channel between Tilcey island and Fox island, which is 400 
yards westward, is only 2 to 3 fathoms deep, and is rendered intricate 
by rocks. The channel between Fox island and the mainland is nar- 
row and shallow, and only available for boats. 

Directions.—From 300 yards northward of the eastern point of 
Wall island steer about 270°, and pass midway between Wall and 
Tilcey islands into the harbor. Leave the three small rocks above 
water off the inner point of Wall island to the southward. 

Anchorage.——The best anchorage is off the mouth of a small bay 
of the mainland, in which there are a wharf and a flagstaff at the 
principal fishing establishment. 

Settlement.—There are permanent residents in St. Charles harbor, 
and water can be obtained on the mainland. 


632 SOUTHEAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


Antill cove, situated in the mainland southwestward of Fox 
island, is 600 yards in extent, and clear of shoals at a short distance 
from the shore. 

It is a whaling station, and there is anchorage near the head of the 
cove, in 11 to 14 fathoms of water, sheltered except from northerly 
winds. 

St. Charles channel, between the mainland on the southern side 
and Great and Little Caribou, Hare, and Assizes islands on the north- 
ern side, is from 4 to } mile wide, and it extends from its entrance 
westward 34 miles to White Bear point. White Bear bay extends 
westward 14 miles, but it is full of rocks, and is open eastward. 
White Bear point, a narrow promontory jutting out about 1,200 
yards, forms the northern side of the bay. On the northern side of 
the promontory, and connected with it by rocks and shoal water, lies 
Dumpling island, a small islet, from which rocks and shoal water 
extend eastward 250 yards. The channel between Dumpling and 
Hare islands, known as the Narrows, is + mile wide, and has 14 to 18 
fathoms of water in it. : 

From close southwestward of the southern end of Hare island a 
course of 295° for about 800 yards leads through the Narrows into 
the channel between Assizes island and the mainland, which is 1,200 
yards wide, and over 20 fathoms in depth. See also pages 627, 628. 
From this channel a vessel may either proceed up the Lodge, or 
through Nimrod tickle into St. Lewis sound. There is anchorage 
throughout all this extensive and landlocked space, but usually in 
depths exceeding 20 fathoms. 

Niger sound, on the southern side of St. Charles promontory, 
extends nearly 6 miles westward, and the water in it is generally 
deep. The entrance, between the southern point of St. Charles prom- 
ontory and Camp islands, is 1,2; miles wide. Big Duck island, at 24 
miles within, is 340 feet high. Little Duck island, much smaller 
and 50 feet high, lies 600 yards southeastward of Big Duck island. 

Duck Island bank, with 54 fathoms of water on it, les 200 yards 
northeastward of Little Duck island. Shoal water extends from both 
the eastern and western end of that island, and a shoal, with a least 
depth of 4 fathoms, connects its western end with Big Duck island. 

Two shoals, with 44 and 44 fathoms of water over them, respec- 
tively, he in the channel northwestward of Big Duck island, leaving 
a narrow passage on each side in the southwestern entrance to Islet 
bay, which is northward of Big Duck island. 

Morgan shoal extends nearly 200 yards off the northern part of the 
eastern point of the mainland on the southern side of Niger sound. 

There is good anchorage in Horn bay, at the head of the sound, and 
also in Islet bay. Wood and water are abundant. 


~ 


DEER ISLAND—ST. PETER ISLANDS. 633 


Deer island, about 300 feet high, nearly round, and $ mile in 
diameter, lies close off the eastern point of the mainland on the south- 
ern side of Niger sound, and Chimney tickle, a narrow boat channel, 
with fishing huts and stages on its shores, passes between them. 

Carrol cove, a small indentation of the mainland at $ mile west- 
ward of the tickle, has good anchorage, and is frequented by many 
vessels during the fishing season; there are fishing huts and stages on 
its shores, 

Main tickle, the channel between Camp and Deer islands, is 400 
vards wide and clear, but a bank, with 6 fathoms of water over it, 
lies in the middle of its northern part. 

Camp islands comprise three bare granitic islands and two islets 
or rocks, lying close together northeastward of Deer island; there is 
a small cove on their southern side, with very indifferent shelter from 
southerly winds, where fishing vessels moor to the rocks, but the 
shelter for the boats of the fishermen is excellent, and their huts and 
stages border the shores. 

Romsey rock, bearing 258°, distant 350 yards from the south- 
western point of the middle Camp island, has a depth of 9 feet over 
it. The western point of Big Duck island open southwestward of the 
western Camp island, bearing 311°, leads southwestward of this rock. 

The Horns, a bank with 5 fathoms of water over it, bears 94°, 
distant 950 yards from the southern point of Deer island, and Red 
Island bank, with 7 fathoms of water over it, bears 114°, distant 
1,500 yards from the same point. 

Goat islet, from which a rocky shoal extends northward 300 yards, 
lies + mile southwestward of Deer island. An islet bears 198°, distant 
1,400 yards from Goat islet; and Red islet, with a rock awash at 335 
yards eastward of it, lies southward about 1,200 yards from Deer 
island. 

Torrent point lies southward about 13 miles from Deer island, 
and the bay between them is open. 

White Mica cove, southward 1,3, miles from Torrent point, is 
only suitable for boats. 

Table head, southward about 1 mile from White Mica cove, is an 
isolated headland of basaltic columns upon sandstone, flat at the top, 
precipitous all round, 200 feet high, and very remarkable. Truck 
island lies northeastward of the head, but affords no shelter. 

Peterel islands, so named because these birds breed upon them, are 
a group of low islets and rocks above and below water, the outer of 
which is situated southward, 14 miles from Table head. 

St. Peter islands comprise a scattered cluster of small and low 
islets, with many rocks above and under water, the outer of which 
is situated south-southwestward, 3 miles from Table head. These 
islets and the Peterel group are cliffy and black, being for the most 


634 SOUTHEAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


part basalt and amygdaloid; there are three or four flat-topped iron- 
stone deposits. 

Shoal water extends about 400 yards seaward from some of these 
islands. 

Allen shoal, lying with the outer Peterel island, bearing 269°, dis- 
tant 1% miles, has a depth of 8 fathoms over rocky bottom; the sea 
breaks on the shoal in heavy weather. 

St. Peter bay, westward of St. Peter and Peterel islands and on the 
southwestern side of Table head, extends about 2 miles inland. It is 
completely open to the eastward, but the islets and reefs form a 
breakwater. The hills at the head of the bay are nearly 900 feet high, 
and extend, within St. Peter point, southwestward to Chateau bay. 
St. Peter point, the southwestern point of the bay, bears northwest- 
ward, distant 2 miles from the southern St. Peter island. 

The depth in the entrance between St. Peter point and the inner 
islet is about 6 fathoms. This entrance is ? mile wide, but a shoal, 
with 13 feet of water over it, lies nearly 400 yards southwestward 
of the islet; and a reef extends eastward 335 yards from St. Peter 
point. 

The channel between these shoals is about 800 yards wide; it is 
approached from the southward, passing westward of all St. Peter 
islands and giving them a berth of over + mile. 

Anchorage.—There is anchorage at } mile from the head of ‘the 
bay, in 13 to 20 fathoms, sand; it is, however, very indifferent, al- 
though it might be useful in necessity. Both wood and water can be 
obtained. 

Sandwich point and cove lie about 2 miles southward of St. Peter 
point; the cove is only available for boats. 

Bad bay, lying between Sandwich point and Seal point, the north-_ 
eastern entrance point of Chateau bay, situated about 2 miles south- 
westward, is rocky and dangerous, and affords no shelter. 

Seal islands are four islets, from 9 to 33 feet high, lying close 
around Seal point. 

Henney shoal, southeastward 750 yards from the western part of 
ihe western of the Seal islands, is about 350 yards in length, west- 
ward and eastward, 300 yards in greatest width, within the depth of 
10 fathoms, and has a least depth of 7 fathoms over it. 

The coast from Seal point trends irregularly westward for 1%5 
miles to Grenville point, and close off it, at about ;% mile from Seal 
point, is an islet 23 feet high. 

Henley island, close southward of this islet, is triangular in shape, 
and each side has a length of about 1,200 yards; its southern point 
rises steeply to the summit of the island, which is a remarkable 
basaltic cap with vertical sides and a flat top, 196 feet high. Two 
islets are joined by reefs to the middle of its southwestern side. 


CASTLE ISLAND—STAGE ISLAND. 635 


Castle island, the northwestern point of which is separated from 
the southern point of Henley island by American tickle, a narrow 
passage, is about 1,3; miles long, northward and southward, and from 
600 yards to 100 ‘pale in width. Its northern part rises to the 
summit of the island, which is a remarkable basaltic cap with verti- 
cal sides and a flat top, 198 feet high. 

Chateau point, the southern point of Castle island, is steep-to on its 
western side, but a shoal extends southward 150 yards from it. 

Beacon.—A black cask on a pole stands on the middle of the island ; 
from northwestward and southeastward it shows against the sky. 

Castle ledge, bearing 168°, distant 300 yards from the northeastern 
point of Castle island, is a small rocky patch with 2? fathoms over it. 

Chateau bay lies westward of Castle and Henley islands, its main 
entrance being between Chateau point and York point, which bear 
west-southwestward and east-northeastward, distant 1,4, miles from 
each other. The bay is indicated from seaward by its position with 
reference to Table head and St. Peter islands, by the high land in 
rear of it, by the straight and unbroken coast, free from islands, 
southwestward of it, and especially by the summits of Castle and 
Henley islands. 

The bay has within it Henley, Antelope, and Pitts harbors, the two 
latter of which are quite secure and suitable for large vessels. The 
scenery in Chateau bay is bold. Pitts hill, on the western side of 
Pitts harbor, is 593 feet high, and Beacon hill, about 1 mile north- 
westward of it, is 752 feet high; from the latter the land falls rapidly 
to the northeastern shore of Temple bay. There is a remarkable hill, 
832 feet high, on the southwestern side of Temple bay, which falls 
very steeply to the shore, and 2 miles to the southward of it is High 
Beacon hill, a ridge, which rises to the height of 978 feet. 

There is hardly any grass on this part of the country, but there is 
plenty of the kind of moss that caribou and reindeer eat. The cran- 
berry, called here the “ Partridge berry,” is also plentiful. There 
are some caribou in the hills not far from Chateau bay, and part- 
ridges are common at certain seasons. 

York point.—There are some rocks off York point, and a rocky 
patch, with 44 fathoms of water over it, bears 44°, distant 600 yards 
from it, within which the point should not be approached. For in- 
draft westward of, see page 642. 

Ice.—Chateau bay is generally frozen up about December 25 and 
open again about the first week in July. 

Stage island lies westward of the southern part of Henley island; 
it is about 700 yards long, northwestward and southeastward, 35 feet 
high, and a reef extends 200 yards southward of it, and 300 yards 
westward of its southern end. On this reef at 200 yards westward of 
the southern end of the island is a rock, 2 feet high. 


636 SOUTHEAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


Whale island lies westward about 800 yards from Stage and Hen- 
ley islands; it is 1,600 yards in length, eastward and westward, 1,100 
yards in greatest breadth, and 336 feet high. Flat island, close south- 
ward of its eastern end, is 300 yards long, northward and southward, 
and 18 feet high. 

Rocks.— Halfway rock, with 23 fathoms over it, bears 4°, distant 
1,250 yards from York point, and is 600 yards offshore. 

Twelve-feet rock, with 9 feet of water over it, bears 134°, distant 
nearly 4 mile from the southern point of Flat island. A rocky patch 
of 34 fathoms hes northward 265 yards from Twelve-feet rock. 

A patch, with a least depth of 19 feet over it, bears 72°, distant 4 
mile from Twelve-feet rock. 

Flat Island rock, with 34 fathoms over it, lies 400 yards eastward 
of the summit of Flat island. 

Freezers rock, with 9 feet over it, bears 243°, distant nearly 400 
yards from Black point, the western point of Henley island. There 
are depths of 44 fathoms between this rock and the point. 

Black rock, 2 feet high, off Black point, is steep-to and a good 
mark, ‘ 

Henley harbor, between Stage and Henley islands, is about + mile 
Jong and 200 yards wide, with depths of 4 to 12 fathoms; there is a 
swell in the harbor with strong southerly winds. It is only suitable 
for small vessels, and is frequented by fishermen, the majority of 
whom arrive from Newfoundland in June or July and remain until 
October; there are numerous stages along the shore on both sides of 
the harbor. 

American shoal is a rocky patch, with 1 foot of water over it, 
lying in the fairway to Henley harbor, bearing 162°, distant 200 
yards from the southeastern point of Stage island. It is, however, 
quite visible. 

American tickle is the narrow channel passing between Castle and 
Henley islands and leading into Henley harbor; it is used by vessels 
drawing up to 15 feet. 

Antelope harbor is on the eastern side of Chateau bay, between 
Henley island and Barrier point; this point, with the reef extending 
about 800 yards southwestward from it, separates Antelope harbor 
from Pitts harbor to the northwestward. 

On Henley island, at the head of Antelope harbor, there are two 
or three houses occupied by fishermen who reside in this locality all 
the year round, except during the depth of winter, when they go to 
the head of Pitts harbor, where it is warmer and more sheltered from 
the wind. 

The narrow channels between Henley island and the mainland, 
leading into Antelope harbor, are only available for very small craft. 


PITTS HARBOR—MILNER’S TICKLE. 637 


Beacon.—Immediately eastward of Barrier point there is a bay, 
and on Grenville point, its southeastern entrance point, there is a 
cask beacon and a large whitewashed mark, either of which serves as 
a leading mark for clearing the rocks westward of Castle island. 

Pitts harbor is far the best in Chateau bay, being roomy and well 
sheltered; it is about 1 mile long north-northwestward and south- 
southeastward, and from $ to # mile wide, and in its central part 
there is a depth of 14 to 17 fathoms, mud bottom. A good anchoring 
berth is in 14 fathoms, with the northern end of Pitts point bearing 
182°, distant 900 yards. 

Water may be taken from a stream at the head of this harbor, and 
wood is plentiful. 

Temple bay, northwestward from Whale island, extends north- 
westward for 3} miles from Temple pass, with a width of about # 
mile; in the middle the depth is 20 to 45 fathoms, and as the shores 
are steep-to there is no good anchorage. At the head of the bay 
there is a flat of sand and bowlders fronting the entrance to a river. 
At times large numbers of salmon are found in this river. Close 
southwestward of Temple pass, in the southeastern corner of the bay, 
is the fishing village of Chateau, off which small vessels anchor. 

Considerable quantities of mica are found on the southwestern side 
of Temple bay, but the leaves are too small for commercial purposes. 
On the eastern side is a small outcrop of graphite. 

Temple pass, the southern entrance to Temple bay, is 180 yards 
wide; the bottom is rocky, with large bowlders, and there is a least 
depth in the fairway of 3 fathoms. The ebb tidal stream runs 
through this pass at a considerable rate. 

Milner’s tickle, the northern entrance to Temple bay, is about 350 
yards wide, but the shores on either side are foul for some distance 
off, and without a buoy the clear passage is not easily distinguished. 
The least depth in the fairway is 4 fathoms. 

Directions.—From the southward, give York point a berth of 
rather more than 4 mile and bring the cask beacon on Grenville 
point just open of Black point, the black, rocky western point of 
Henley island. Should the beacon be down, Grenville point is dis- 
tinguished by the whitewashed mark on it, and by the black rock of 
the point showing out against the lighter background of the land be- 
hind. This mark leads 235 yards westward of Twelve-feet rock and 
nearly the same distance eastward of Flat Island rock, which latter 
_ is cleared when the northern end of Castle Island cap is well in on the 
southern point of Stage island. 

For Antelope harbor, if not of very heavy draft, being on the 
leading mark and clear of Flat Island rock, steer to pass 100 yards 
off Black rock; this leaves Freezers rock less than 100 yards to the 


638 SOUTHEAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


westward; then turn into the harbor and anchor between Grenville 
point and the northwestern side of Henley island, where the harbor 
is 600 yards wide and the depth 15 to 18 fathoms, over mud bottom. 
Between this position and Grenville point there is a small mud bank 
having a least depth of 7 fathoms over it. 

In a vessel of heavy draft follow the directions given below for 
Pitts harbor till past Freezers rock, or when Black point bears 83°, 
and the depth of water increases to over 10 fathoms; then turn north- 
eastward into the harbor. 

For Pitts harbor, being on the leading mark and clear of Flat 
Island rock, haul gradually to the westward and bring the rock 2 
feet high, on the reef at 200 yards westward of the southern end of 
Stage island, in line with the cask beacon on Castle island, bearing 
136°, astern, which mark leads westward of Freezers rock. Keep this 
mark on until the eastern extreme of Whale island is in line with the 
southwestern extreme of Castle island, bearing 155°, astern, which 
mark leads, between the shoal off Pitts point and the long stony spit 
extending from Barrier point, direct to the anchorage. 

The southern end of Henley island basaltic cap open southward of 
Black point, bearing 111°, leads southward of the spit extending 
from Barrier point. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Chateau bay at 
Th. 16m.; springs rise + feet, neaps 24 feet; neaps range 1} feet; in 
the autumn, with strong southerly winds, the spring range sometimes 
reaches 6 feet. 

Tidal streams and current.—Inside of the bay, through the 
narrow channels, and off York and Chateau points, the tidal streams 
are perceptible, but outside of the bay the current sets almost always 
southward. During the survey in August and September, while the 
temperature of the water in Pitts harbor and Temple bay averaged 
45° F., that of the sea outside the bay was never above 37° F. 

Communication.—The coasting steamer from Bay of Islands calls 
at Chateau bay weekly during summer, anchoring alternately at 
Henley harbor and off Chateau village in Temple bay. The Labrador 
steamer from St. Johns proceeds nasil by way of Chateau bay 
to Battle harbor in summer. 

Marine signal station.—A signal and telegraph station is estab- 
lished at Chateau bay, and it is included in Lloyd’s system of report- 
ing stations. The telegraph office is at Chateau village, and it is con- 
nected with Belle isle by cable, and by wireless telegraph. See 
page 41. | 

Wireless telegraph station.—Vessels can communicate with the 
marine signal station at Chateau bay by wireless telegraph. See 
page 42. 


BELLE ISLE. 639 


Belle isle, lying 17 miles eastward of Castle island and directly 
off the Atlantic entrance of the strait of Belleisle, is about 9} miles 
long north-northeastward and south-southwestward, and 3 miles 
wide, and is made up of a range of hills, bare of trees, which rises to 
the height of 680 feet. These hills are principally granite, alternat- 
ing with clay and slate, and their sides form everywhere a steep coast, 
except at the northern end of the island, where two low points diverge 
to form Black Joke cove, a narrow creek which shelters very small 
fishing vessels during the finest summer months. Shelter may be ob- 
tained in Lark harbor, and in Valley cove at 2} miles southward of 
Lark island; but none of these coves are considered safe early in 
spring, or late in autumn, because of the heavy swell which rolls into 
them from the northeastward. 

Black Joke cove, about 150 feet wide, with 12 feet of water, is in- 
side of an islet joined to Belle isle at low water, and only affords se- 
cure shelter to two small vessels moored head and stern; but in heavy 
northeasterly gales, especially at high water of spring tides, the seas 
break heavily over the ledge of rocks, and render the cove unsafe. 

Lark island, which is narrow and about 1,200 yards long, and 200 
feet high, lies off the middle of the western side of Belle isle. Lark 
harbor, between Lark island and Belle isle, is only 400 yards wide, 
with deep water and indifferent holding ground; it is much exposed 
to northeasterly winds, but, as it has two entrances, vessels easily get 
to sea. 

Valley cove affords fair anchorage and shelter during northeasterly 
winds; the bottom is sand, and between the line of the points the 
soundings are 17 fathoms, decreasing gradually to the shore. 

The eastern side of Belle isle affords no anchorage and there is 
hardly a creek where a boat could find shelter. 

Belle isle is frequented by English and French fishermen. 

Rock.—A rock, with an estimated depth of 9 feet over it, and upon 
which the sea has been seen to break heavily, hes with the south- 
western end of Belle isle bearing 140°, distant $ mile; this rock is 
probably that reported by the Ontario, in 1881, to exist at about 1 
mile northwest of the southwestern point of Belle isle. 

Light—Northeastern point.—A cylindrical red lighthouse, 55 
feet high, on the northeastern point of Belle isle, exhibits, at 137 feet 
above high water, a flashing white light every eleven seconds, thus: 
Flash, half a second; eclipse, ten and a half seconds, which should be 
seen from a distance of 17 miles in clear weather. 

Fog signal.—A diaphone fog horn, situated in a building near the 
edge of the cliff at about 67 yards northward of the light-house on the 
northeastern point of Belle isle and worked by compressed air, gives 
one blast of three and a half seconds duration every minute, during 
thick or foggy weather. 


640 SOUTHEAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


The fog signal building is rectangular in shape and painted red; 
and the fog horn projects from its northern side, pointing northeast- 
ward, and is about 90 feet above high water. 

Lights—Southern point.—A circular white tower, 59 feet high, 
on the summit of the southern point of Belle isle, exhibits, at 470 feet 
above high water, an intermittent white hght every ten seconds, thus: 
Light five seconds, eclipse five seconds, which is visible over an are 
of 228° between the bearings 242° and 110°, and should be seen from 
a distance of 28 miles in clear weather. 

The keepers’ dwelling, painted white, is attached to the light-house. 

A circular white iron lantern with a red roof, 23 feet high, situated 
on a masonry foundation below the high light-house, exhibts, at 124 
feet above high water, an intermittent white light every ten seconds, 
thus: Light five seconds, eclipse five seconds, which should be seen 
from a distance of 17 miles in clear weather, except where obscured 
by the high land of Belle isle. ; 

In fog the high ight may be obscured when the low light is visible, 
or the reverse may be the case. 

Fog signal.—A siren, situated in a small white building midway 
between the high and low lights at the southern point of Belle isle and 
250 feet above high water, gives two blasts im succession, of a high 
note and a low note, respectively, every two minutes, thus: Low blast, 
two and a half seconds: silence, two and a half seconds; high blast, 
two and a half seconds; silence, one hundred and twelve and a half 
seconds, during thick or foggy weather. The siren is worked by 
compressed air. 

Reserve fog signal.—The necessary apparatus for firing explo- 
sive bombs has been installed as a reserve fog signal. Should the fog 
siren at this station become disabled, cotton powder bombs will be 
exploded at intervals of ten minutes. Ifa vessel’s fog signal is heard 
in dangerous proximity an additional shot will be immediately fired, 
and the firing will be continued at intervals of five minutes until the 
vessel has passed the station. 

Marine signal station.—A signal and telegraph station is estab- 
lished at the southern point of Belle isle and it is included in Lloyd’s 
system of reporting stations. Belle isle 1s connected by cable with 
Chateau bay and thus with the Canadian telegraph system. See 
page 41. 

A blue light burnt at this station indicates to a vessel firing distin- 
guishing rockets that her signals are recognized and will be reported. 

Wireless telegraph.—Vessels can communicate with Belle isle 
signal station by wireless telegraph, and this system can be used for 
communicating between Belle isle and Chateau bay. See page 42. 

Provision depot.—There is a depot of provisions for shipwrecked 
mariners at the low light-house on the southern point. 


STRAIT OF BELLEISLE—CENTRE BANK. 641 


Northeast ledge, bearing 13°, distant 14 miles from the north- 
eastern point of Belle isle, dries at low water springs; there is deep 
water in the channel between. 

Strait of Belleisle.—The entrance of the strait of Belleisle, 
between St. Peter islands and Belle isle, is 13 miles wide, and that 
between Belle isle and cape Bauld is 14 miles wide; but the narrowest 
part of the strait is southeastward of Armour point, where it is 94 
miles wide. The length of the strait from the southern end of Belle 
isle to a position 7 miles southeastward of Greenly island is about 
73 miles. 

From York point southwestward to cape Diable the northwestern 
shore is steep, and is composed of granite hills rising to flat-topped 
ridges and summits 1,000 to 1,300 feet high; and thence to Long 
point, at the western entrance of the strait, it 1s composed of sand- 
stone lying on granite. 

Outer soundings and Tooker bank.—See page 83. 

Soundings.—The deepest water in the strait of Belleisle is on the 
Labrador side, but the line of deep water is not direct, nor continuous 
through the strait, and there is deep water beyond a distance of 2 
miles off the Flower ledges on the Newfoundland side. The depth 
of water varies between 80 and 16 fathoms, and the bottom in some 
places is rock, and in others sand, broken shells, coral, or gravel. 

With the exception of Maudit bank, near the eastern end, and some 
shoals off the Newfoundland coast near its western end, the strait is 
free from shoal obstructions to navigation in its fairway. 

Maudit bank.—See page 363. 

Fairway bank, lying southwestward akout 14 miles from the 
southwestern point of Belle isle, is 2 miles in extent north-northwest- 
ward and south-southeastward and 14 miles northeastward and south- 
westward; the least water on the bank is 16 fathoms, but the general 
depth is 20 fathoms, with rock bottom. 

Centre bank extends southwestward nearly 20 miles from a posi- 
tion 8 miles southward of the southern point of Black bay; the 
depths on the bank vary from 24 to 30 fathoms. 

Tidal streams and currents.—See pages 54, 55. 

The movement of icebergs is strong evidence of a preponderance, 
at times, of a southwesterly flow of the body of water on the Labra- 
dor side ‘of the strait of Belleisle. During the summer of 1898 the 
number of icebergs in the strait was unusually small, due prob- 
ably to the general persistence of westerly winds; but whenever ice- 
bergs were in the strait, they slowly and persistently pursued their 
course to the westward, keeping on the Labrador side. A gale from 
the westward might cause a slight drift back to the eastward, but as 
soon as it 1s over the westerly course would again be resumed, unless, 

76846—09——41 


642 SOUTHEAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


by grounding, they remain stationary, until by breaking up they are 
lightened sufficiently to drift again with the current. 

All broken ice drifts ashore on the Labrador coast. It is stated 
that none ever reaches the Newfoundland coast, and no ice was seen 
in 1898 on that side. One small berg was observed a few miles north- 
ward of cape Norman, but apparently this berg drifted to the east- 
ward and did not enter the strait. 

As far as could be seen, the icebergs entering the strait passed 
between Belle isle and Labrador. The movements of the icebergs, 
since much of their volume is immersed, are necessarily due to the 
resultant flow of the whole body of water from the surface to the 
bottom. Many bergs were deep enough to ground in 55 fathoms. 

Although persistent strong westerly winds frequently caused the 
surface current to flow continuously eastward, the few observations 
made on under currents showed that they were less affected by the 
prevailing winds than by the surface current; it is therefore possible, 
looking to the movement of the ice, that the body of the water on the 
Labrador side, taken as a whole, has a resultant flow to the westward. 

The ice, as it broke up, always eventually drifted ashore on the 
Labrador coast; no noticeable indraft affecting navigation was, how- 
ever, experienced anywhere, except southwestward of York point, 
where an indraft was frequently felt toward the land. 

Toward cape Norman it was observed that there was a prepon- 
derance of easterly set; and, although farther southwestward this was 
not noticeable, it is probable that on the southern side of the strait 
there is a slight general preponderance of easterly set, and this seems 
to be borne out by the fact that this shore is everywhere thickly 
strewn with driftwood, while none is ever seen on the northern shore. 
It may be presumed that this driftwood comes from the St. Lawrence 
river. 

The fishermen state that on several occasions bamboos have been 
washed up, in nearly every instance with a hole cut at the thick end, 
as if they had been used for fishing stakes, as in China. It is difficult 
to account for them. 

About the end of July, 1898, a lumber vessel was reported to have 
been wrecked westward of Blane Sablon, and shortly afterwards 
large quantities of floating timber were observed along the Newfound- 
land coast, and a quantity also came ashore at Green Island brook. 
None was seen on the Labrador side. 

Temperature of the sea.—See page 56. 

Icebergs.—See page 57. 

Occasionally large pieces of icebergs drift into the anchorages on 
the northern shore of the strait, causing danger to the fishermen’s nets, 
and sometimes making it necessary for vessels at anchor to get under 
way. No warning is given of the proximity of ice, as a rule, by 


BELLE ISLE—DIRECTIONS. 643 


change of temperature of the sea. On one occasion, within 100 yards 
of a large berg, the temperature of the sea was 50° and its density 
22, to windward; and temperature 49° and density 15, to leeward; 
while the normal temperature of the sea was 51° and density 23. 

Fog.—During a period of 40 days in July and August, when 
simultaneous observations were made on both sides of the strait, fog, 
mist, ete., occurred on 60 per cent of the days on the Labrador side, 
and on 40 per cent on the Newfoundland side. See also page 46. 

Landing.—After strong easterly winds, a heavy swell, lasting 
several days, sets through the strait and makes landing at most 
places on the coast of Newfoundland impossible. 

Navigation.—Steam vessels navigate the strait from July to 
October, inclusive. See also page 64. 

General directions.—From the eastward with clear weather, 
make Belle isle or its lights, and then keep in the fairway of the 
strait. When passing northward of the island avoid Northeast ledge. 

In making the eastern entrance of the strait in thick weather, great 
caution is necessary and soundings should be frequently obtained. 
The position may possibly be ascertained by the fog signals on Belle 
isle, cape Bauld, and cape Norman. Midway between Belle isle and 
cape Norman the depths assist in estimating the position, since there 
is a gradual decrease in depth from the entrance until the bank, with 
depths of under 30 fathoms, which extends northward 15 miles from 
Pistolet bay, is passed, when the water deepens to from 30 to 50 
fathoms. 

In proceeding westward through the strait, if the vessel is in the 
middle, depths of 24 to 30 fathoms will be struck on Centre bank. 
Failure to strike this extensive bank indicates that the vessel has 
passed to one side of it, but as the soundings are much alike on both 
sides, it will be difficult to determine which. Some assistance may 
then be derived from the temperature of the surface water, which is 
generally, but not invariably warmer on the Newfoundland side than 
on the Labrador side, there being sometimes a difference of as much 
as 20° F. On the Newfoundland side it seldom falls below 50° during 
the season of navigation. When passing Amour point its fog horn 
may be heard. 

From the westward in clear weather, make Greenly island, or its 
light, pass through the fairway of the strait and on either side of 
Belle isle. In thick weather observe that the soundings in the western 
approach are deeper on its northwestern than on its southeastern 
side. The position may possibly be ascertained by the fog signals at 
Greenly island and Amour point, after which there should not be 
much difficulty in getting to sea, assisted by the soundings and the fog 
signals at cape Norman, cape Bauld, and Belle isle. A sailing vessel 


644 SOUTHEAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


bound eastward through the strait, with a southerly wind and ap- 
pearance of fog toward night, should perhaps, stand off and on 
under easy sail, tacking by the deep-sea lead, till daylight, if not to 
the eastward of Férolle point. If further advanced, it may be well to 
seek an anchorage. In a sailing vessel with light winds or calms, 
during foggy weather, it is better to bring up with a stream anchor 
anywhere in the strait rather than to drift about with the currents, 
but a lookout must be kept for drifting icebergs. See caution, page 73. 

Anchorages.—In thick weather it may be advisable to anchor in 
one of the bays on the northwestern side of the strait rather than con- 
tinue under way. Black bay might afford a temporary anchorage in 
summer for a steamer. Red bay is a good small harbor, but it can 
not be entered by a large sailing vessel with northeasterly winds. 
Pinware bay is the first anchorage available when proceeding west- 
ward with these winds, but then there is a heavy swell in the bay. 
Anse a Loup is the first good anchorage for a sailing vessel with these 
winds, but it is not worth while stopping there when bound west- 
ward, as then the strait is nearly cleared. Forteau bay is a fairly good 
roadstead, although a heavy swell sometimes comes in, and Blanc 
Sablon is considered a safe anchorage in summer. See pages 645, 656. 

The coast from York point trends southwestward for 10 miles to 
Wreck point, and it is straight and bold. 

Man-of-War rock, about 200 yards offshore at 43 miles southwest- 
ward of York point, is awash at low water. 

Rock.—A rock, 200 yards off Wreck point, is awash at low water. 

Wreck bay, which extends southwestward 2 miles from Wreck 
point, affords no shelter except for boats; a small river flows into its 
head and there are a couple of fishermen’s huts on the northeastern 
side of the bay. 

Bay shoal, a small patch of rocky ground with 11 fathoms least 
water, bears 180°, distant 3 miles from Wreck point. The fishermen 
in this vicinity say that occasionally, when the water is very clear, the 
bottom can be seen at the shoalest part of the patch. There is a heavy 
swell upon it in northeasterly gales, and frequently a great rippling. 

‘Barge bay.—The eastern entrance point of this bay is situated 
southwestward about 24 miles from the southwestern point of Wreck 
bay. The bay, which is about 14 miles across its entrance and } mile 
in extent, affords temporary shelter to small vessels in southwesterly 
and westerly winds. here is a waterfall and a small village at its 
head. A 3-fathom patch les 500 yards offshore near the southern 
entrance point of the bay. 

Barge point, on the southwestern side of this bay, is low. 

Seal rocks.—Foul ground and rocks nearly awash extend to about 
400 yards offshore from about 2 miles west-southwestward of Barge 
point nearly to Frys cove. 


FRYS COVE—RED BAY. 645 


Frys cove, lying west-southwestward 3 miles from Barge point, is 
a little narrow inlet which affords shelter for small craft. There are 
two or three fishing huts near the head of the cove which show from 
the southward. 

Black bay, 1 mile westward of Frys cove, is about 1 mile wide at 
the entrance, narrows to the head, which is 1 mile westward of the 
entrance. Small vessels occasionally anchor in the bay, but the bottom 
is sand and not very good holding ground, and the bay is open to the 
eastward. It affords a temporary summer anchorage for a steamer in 
case of a sudden fog. Anchorage should be taken in not less than 12 
fathoms, as the water shoals suddenly at the head of the bay and rocks 
extend a considerable distance off its southwestern side. There are no 
inhabitants hereabouts. 

The coast of Labrador from Wiseman head, the southern point of 
a small bay immediately southward of Black bay, southwestward to 
Pinware bay, is barren and made up of reddish granite rock and has 
a few indentations and some offlying rocks. 

Gull island, southwestward about 14 miles from Wiseman head 
and + mile offshore, is small, 20 feet high, moss covered, and rocky. 

Thistle rock, with 3 feet of water over it, lies southwestward 
nearly 14 miles from Gull island, and bears 98°, distant 1,200 yards 
from the summit of the southern part of Twin island. When the sea 
is smooth the rock does not show. 

Clearing marks.—Wiseman head, open southeastward of Gull 
island, bearing 50°, leads southeastward, and Cox hill, in line with the 
southern end of Twin island, bearing 289°, leads southward of Thistle 
rock. 

Capstan Cove point is the end of a bare gray mound, 52 feet high, 
lying westward about ;°; mile from Gull island, and it shelters Cap- 
stan cove in easterly winds. Capstan cove is much used for anchorage 
by fishermen in the herring season. 

Twin island consists of two hummocks, the northern being 40 feet 
high and the southern 32 feet, joined together except at high water 
springs. Several rocks extend westward from this island. 

There is no passage for any vessel drawing more than 6 feet of water 
between Twin island and the mainland, nor between the eastern end of 
Saddle island and the mainland. A bar, with 15 feet of water over 
it, connects Twin and Saddle Island rocks. 

Red bay is a good, though small, harbor formed by Saddle island 
and a bay in the mainland; and is divided into two parts, the north- 
ern being the basin and the southern the harbor. The passage from 
the harbor to the basin is 200 yards wide, with a depth of 7 fathoms 
of water in the middle, between Penney island and the eastern shore. 

The eastern side of the harbor rises to a series of hillocks, 205 to 
62 feet high, connected by marshes with ponds in them. The hills at 


646 SOUTHEAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


the head are densely wooded, and at 14 miles north-northeastward 
is a hill, 545 feet high, with several conspicuous bowlders at the 
summit. Southwestward of Moore point, the western entrance point 
to the basin, the hills fall steeply to the sea, occasionally in red 
granitic cliffs, over which a small cascade falls in ordinary weather. 
Tracey hill, immediately westward of the entrance to the harbor, is 
505 feet high, and is surmounted by a cairn with a pole in it. 

The settlement, containing a population of about 150 people, is 
situated principally on the northeastern shore of the harbor; at 
its northern end there is a hillock on which stands a flagstaff and a 
conspicuous red church with a white spire. The storehouse is on 
Penney island, and there are a few huts on Saddle island and Moore 
point. At the head of the basin are the winter houses, and a school 
with a flagstaff near it. 

Shoal water extends 135 yards from the eastern shore and head 
of the basin, and a large shoal extends off the deep bight to the 
northwestward of Penney island. A bank of bowlders extends south- 
eastward from Moore point, and the passage between that point and 
Penney island is only suitable for boats. 

Saddle island is bare and rises to Cox hill, 97 feet high, at its 
eastern end, and to a hill, 101 feet high, at its western end. The 
western end has deep water within a few yards, but off the northern 
side shoal water extends 150 yards, and bowlders that dry at low 
water 100 yards from the middle of that coast. 

Light.—A fixed white lantern hght is exhibited from June to 
December on a white framework at about 100 yards within the west- 
ern end of Saddle island. 

Scab rock, with 16 feet of water over it, bears 166° from Cox hill, 

and is distant 350 yards from the coast of Saddle island. 

Clearing marks.—Capstan Cove point, open southeastward of 
Twin island, bearing 53°, leads southeastward, and Tracey hill, well 
open westward of Saddle island, bearing 300°, leads southwestward 
of Scab rock. 

Western arm is the open bay extending west-southwestward from 
the entrance to Red bay. Its shores are fairly steep-to except in 
the coves at the head, and it affords good anchorage with westerly 
winds in 14 fathoms of water or less, as convenient. The depth de- 
creases gradually to the head, into which a small stream flows. 

West point is the eastern end of the peninsula, about 62 feet high, 
that forms the southern shore of Western arm. Mad Moll, a rock 
that dries at low-water springs, bears 174°, distant 135 yards from 
West point. 

The Louse, with 21 feet of water over it, bears 150°, distant 800 
yards from West point, and Belles Amours shoal, with 5 fathoms of 
water over it, bears 173°, distant 14 miles from that point. 


RED BAY—DIRECTIONS. 647 


Directions.—Red bay is easy of access with a leading wind, but 
there is only room for small vessels to beat in or out, as the entrance 
between the shoal water off Saddle island and the bowlders and shoal 
water off Moore point is only 400 yards wide for them and 200 yards 
wide for large vessels. 

From the eastward steer for the entrance, passing southward of 
Thistle and Scab rocks; see clearing marks, pages 645, 646. 

From the westward bring a black-roofed house on the middle of 
Penney island in line with the western end of Saddle island, bearing 
12°, which leads westward of Belles Amours shoal and midway be- 
tween Mad Moll and the Louse. To pass eastward of these three 
shoals, keep Moore point in line with the western end of Saddle 
island, bearing 359°. 

Round the western end of Saddle island at a distance of 200 to 300 
yards, and bring and keep the church, bearing 46°, midway between 
the two summits marked on the plan 377 feet and 361 feet high, and 
situated about 14 miles to the northeastward. The church in line 
with the left-hand summit (377 feet), bearing 41°, clears the shoal 
ground northward of Saddle island; in line with the right-hand 
summit (361 feet), bearing 51°, clears the shoal ground off Moore 
point and Penney island. Then, when it comes on, steer for a promi- 
nent white house in line with the summit marked on the plan 195 
feet in height, bearing 67°, and anchor in the harbor in 7 to 9 
fathoms. 

The harbor is almost invariably crowded with fishing schooners, 
and unless in a very small vessel it will probably be necessary to 
proceed into the basin, where there is plenty of room and there is less 
likelihood of being fouled by icebergs, which occasionally drift in. 

To proceed into the Basin keep in mid-channel between Penney 
island and the eastern shore of the harbor. Anchor in 15 to 17 
fathoms, but in order to clear the shoal on the southwestern side of 
the Basin do not shut in the stage in the middle of the northern side 
of Saddle island, with the wharf on the eastern side of Penney 
island bearing 164°. 

The holding ground is good in the Harbor, and also in the Basin, 
for vessels with proper ground tackle, but in the heavy northerly 
gales of autumn which blow through it, small craft with inferior 
ground tackle frequently drag. With strong southwesterly winds it 
blows with great violence down Western arm and into the Harbor, 
and occasionally small steamers at anchor in the Harbor are com- 
pelled to seek shelter in the Basin. 

Caution—Local magnetic disturbance.—The compass is con- 
siderably affected in the vicinity of Saddle island; the variation on the 
western summit of this island was observed to be 18° 52’ W., and on 


648 SOUTHEAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


the summit of Penney island 33° 55’ W., by the officers of H. MES: 
Rambler in 1897. 

Tides and tidal streams.—It is high water, full and change, in 
Red bay at 8h. 38m.; springs rise 4 feet, neaps 2% feet; neaps range 
14 feet. The flood stream sets ed ficach the northeastern 
channel, and through the Harbor into the Basin; the ebb sets in the 
contrary directions, but the streams are generally weak unless in- 
fluenced by strong winds. 

Supplies—Small quantities of salt beef and flour might be ob- 
tained at Red bay. 

Water can be taken, at high water, from the streams at the head of 
the Basin or of Western arm. Small quantities may be procured 1 in 
smooth water from the stream under the cascade. 

Ice.—The Basin freezes over about the end of November and the 
Harbor about the middle of December, and both remain frozen till 
the middle or end of May. Field ice remains till the middle or end 
of June, and icebergs may always be met with. Small bergs fre- 
quently drift into Western arm and occasionally into the Harbor. 

Communication.—The weekly coasting steamer from Bay of 
Islands calls at Red bay during summer and autumn. 

Red bay is connected with the Canadian system of telegraph lines. 
The telegraph office is near the western shore of the Basin. 

The coast southwestward of West point is foul and should not be 
approached within + mile. Teapot rock, with 4} fathoms of water 
over it, lies 400 yards from the shore at 1} miles southwestward of 
West point. 

Carrol cove, southwestward about 2% miles from West point, is 
about 300 yards wide at its entrance and extends } mile to the south- 
westward. One or two fishing vessels occasionally moor to the rocks 
in it, and there are huts and fishing stages on the shore. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, at Carrol cove, at 
8h. 20m.; springs rise 44 feet, neaps 2 feet; neaps range 1 foot. 

Little St. Modeste islands, two in number, are small, low, and 
bare. Nelly island, the eastern of these islands, lies 43 miles south- 
westward of Carrol cove, and Lily island is 1 mile farther westward ; 
both are close to the mainland northeastward of Pinware bay, but 
they afford no shelter to shipping. Lily island has some houses and 
a flagstaff on it. 

Soldier rock, bearing 127°, distant } mile from the eastern end of 
Lily island, is awash at low water; this rock is in the approach to 
Pinware bay from the eastward. 

The Bank is some rocky ground, 600 yards in length northeastward + 
and southwestward, lying with its outer extreme bearing 195°, distant 
11 miles from Lily island. The least water found was 6 fathoms 


PINWARE BAY—ANSE A LOUP. 649 


on the extremes. Several other shoals with 6 to 9 fathoms over them 
lie between the Bank and the northern side of Pinware bay. 

Pinware bay is 34 miles wide across the mouth from Lily island to 
St. Modeste island, and extends about 2 miles to the northwestward. 
The bay affords anchorage in 16 fathoms of water, sandy bottom, 
and although it is open to southeasterly winds it may be considered 
tolerably safe during summer. 

Pinware river is at the head of the bay, and a sandy beach west- 
ward of it forms a spit on which there is a conspicuous house and 
flagstaff. 

There is a shifting bar at the entrance to Pinware river, and vessels 
should not anchor very near it, as the water shoals suddenly. 
The best anchorage is in 16 fathoms, with the eastern point of Ship 
head, a conspicuous rocky peninsula in the northwestern part of the 
bay, bearing 243°, distant 800 yards, and a noticeable house on the 
sandpit bearing 6°. 

In 1904 the pinnace of H. B. M.S. * Charybdis ” entered Pinware 
river and found a depth of 8 feet for the first mile or so; then the 
water shoaled and became rapid. The telegraph wire crosses the 
entrance to the river, and the vessel’s mast had to be lowered to pass 
it. The river abounds in salmon and is netted. A pilot, capable of 
piloting a vessel of 8 feet draft into the river, lives at Ship head. 

Rock.—A rocky patch, with a least depth of 2 fathoms over it, 
bears 178°, distant 800 yards from the eastern point of Ship head. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, at Pinware bay at about 
9h. 10m.; springs rise 4 feet, neaps 2? feet. 

St. Modeste island is a small We islet, 15 feet high, close to the 
western entrance point to Pinware bay; on it are several houses, and 
in the channel between it and the mainland fishing vessels moor to 
the rocks. This is known as the Tickle, and there is a large settle- 
ment on its shores. 

Cape Diable, southward about ? mile from St. Modeste island, is a 
black, bold, cliffy promontory rising to a flat-topped hill, 740 feet 
high. 

The coast northward of cape Diable ts granite and southwestward 
of the cape, sandstone. The granite, however, shows occasionally at 
the water’s edge under the sandstone at various points farther south- 
westward. 

Diable bay, a small open bay southwestward about 24 miles from 
cape Diable, affords no anchorage; there is a small village at its head. 

The coast between Diable bay and anse a Loup, about 3 miles to 
the southwestward, consists of cliffs of red sandstone about 350 feet 
high. 

Anse a Loup.—This bay is about 1,3; miles wide and extends 14 
miles northwestward between high table-lands of sandstone, covered 


650 SOUTHEAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


with green moss and grass, highest on the northeastern side, which 
is a continuation of the sandstone cliffs. There is a fine sandy beach, 
with the village on its western part, and a river, which small boats 
enter at high water, at the head of the bay. 

Although this bay is quite open to the southeastward, yet vessels 
anchor here at all times during summer and find the holding ground 
very good. ~ The best anchorage is in the northern part of the bay, 
in 10 fathoms, over sand bottom, about + mile offshore, and with the 
entrance of the river bearing a little eastward of north. Shoal water 
extends in places about 200 yards from both sides of the bay. Ves- 
sels should not anchor in less than 10 fathoms of water. 

Schooner cove, at the southern end of anse a Loup, is open to 
the northeastward, but fishing vessels anchor in it in 7 fathoms of 
water during summer. There is a fishing establishment and several 
houses at the cove, and on top of the entrance point, which is high, 
is a flagstaff. 

Communication.—The weekly coasting steamer from Bay of 
Islands calls at anse & Loup in summer and autumn. There is a 
good road between Schooner cove and Amour point. 

Supplies.— Milk, eggs, and a few vegetables can be procured at 
anse a Loup. 

Amour point (corrupted from pointe aux Morts and _ locally 
known as cape Shallop), lies 2,8, miles southwestward of the southern 
point of anse a Loup. The point is low, but rises in a series of ter- 
races, faced by cliffs, to a hill 190 feet high, at ? mile northward. 
There are several rocks within 200 yards off the point. . 

Light.—A circular white tower, 104 feet high, on Amour point, 
exhibits at 153 feet above high water an intermittent white light 
every twenty seconds, showing thus:—light sixteen seconds; eclipse 
four seconds, which should be seen from a distance of 18 miles in 
clear weather. 

A white dwelling with a red roof is attached to the lighthouse. 

Fog signal.—A horn, situated in a rectangular white building on 
Amour point, 55 yards southeastward from the lighthouse and oper- 
ated by compressed air, gives blasts of seven seconds duration, with 
intervals of fifty-three seconds between them, during foggy weather, 
or in snowstorms. 

The horn or diaphone, which is placed 40 feet above high water, 
projects from the southern side of the building, and points southeast- 
ward. | 

The engine house is on the western side of and adjoins the fog- 
signal buildings; it is rectangular, and painted white with a red roof. 

Caution.—Reliance should not be placed on hearing this fog signal, 
as sometimes, from unexplained causes, the sound can not be heard, 
even from short distances. 


FORTEAU BAY. 651 


Marine signal station.—There is a signal, telegraph, and wire- 
less telegraph station at Amour Point lighthouse, and it is included 
in Lloyd’s system of reporting stations. This is also an ice-report 
station. See pages 42, 66. 

A blue light burning at this station indicates to a vessel firing dis- 
tinguishing rockets that her signals are recognized and will be re- 
ported. 

Forteau bay is 4 miles wide between Amour point, on the eastern 
side, and Forteau point, on the western side of the bay; it is said to 
be the best roadstead in the strait of Belleisle. The holding ground 
is good, and fishing vessels moor in it through the summer; but a 
heavy swell rolls in with southerly winds. 

Anse aux Morts, immediately northwestward of Amour point, is 
an open bight with deep water close to the southeastern shore, but 
the northern side is foul for a short distance, and the water shoals 
rapidly to the head. The bight affords anchorage, sheltered from 
easterly winds only, in 10 to 6 fathoms, but in large vessels do not 
bring the large house on the eastern shore to bear southward of 102°, 
and anchor about 400 yards from the wharf. 

On both sides of Forteau bay the land rises in terraces to hills about 
590 feet high. Forteau point slopes upward to a hill 212 feet high at 
800 yards inland, and thence the land rises gradually in long slopes, 
but faced by cliffs on the seaward side with an occasional deep gorge. 
Crow head, 240 feet high, on the northwestern side of anse aux Morts, 
and Chimney head, 144 feet high, on the western side of Forteau bay, 
are conspicuous lines of cliff. Overfall brook flows into the sea, just 
southward of Chimney head, from a height of 118 feet, with volume 
of water varying with the season and at times very small. A church 
with a spire, and several houses near it, stands close northeastward of 
English point, a small hillock 25 feet high in the northern part of 
the bay. From this point northwestward the water is shoal, and an 
inlet that nearly dries extends to the mouth of Forteau brook, by 
which the water from several lakes flows into the sea. Boats can 
reach the mouth of the brook at half tide, but care must be taken to 
avoid the numerous bowlders. Between the first and second lake is a 
waterfall that is occasionally visible from seaward. 

The head of Forteau bay is a sandy beach, behind which are sey- 
eral houses.and the school, a plain building painted white. The prin- 
cipal settlement is farther to the southward. Jobs Room, the south- 
ernmost cluster of conspicuous buildings, is situated immediately 
westward of the Flats, a flat ledge of rock that just covers at high 
water, and affords shelter to the boats. The post-office in summer is 
the northern house of this settlement. 


652 SOUTHEAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


The shores of Forteau bay are generally bold, and the water is deep 
beyond 200 yards from the shore, except at the head, where a shoal 
extends from the schoolhouse + mile into the bay. 

The best anchorage is in 14 to 10 fathoms in the northwestern part 
of the bay, with the northern stage at Admiral point, at the junction 
of the rock and sand, bearing about 270°. 

Tides and tidal streams.—It is high water, full and change, in 
Forteau bay at 10h. 25m.; springs rise 54 feet, neaps 3 feet; neaps 
range 13 feet. The flood stream in calm weather sets northwestward 
on the northeastern shore and southward on the western shore and 
the ebb in the contrary directions, but the streams are so weak in the 
bay that a fresh breeze, unless blowing with or against them, changes 
their direction. Off Amour and Forteau points the streams are’ 
strong and very irregular, occasionally running in one direction with 
a rate of 4 to 5 knots close to the shore, and in an opposite direction a 
short distance off. In sounding off these points during the survey 
three distinct streams were met within a distance of 2 miles; the tide- 
rips were of considerable strength, and these irregularities contin- 
ually changed from unknown causes. 

Caution.—In approaching Forteau bay in foggy weather, great 
caution is therefore necessary. 

Soundings.—Deep water extends so close to the shore that little 
warning is given by the hand lead in approaching Forteau bay, but 
the gully with 50 to 60 fathoms of water in it that stretches nearly 
across its entrance and extends to within $ mile of Amour point may 
indicate that the bay is near if deep soundings are taken. 

Ice.—The bay freezes over about the middle of December, and the 
ice breaks up about the middle of May. 

Settlements.—The resident population numbers about 150, who 
live inland from November to May and then return to prosecute the 
seal fishery till the end of June. About 300 Newfoundland fishermen 
arrive in June as soon as navigation is open. 

Supplies.—Water may be taken from streams flowing down the 
hillside at the settlement on the western side of the bay, and at Jobs 
Room there is a pipe to which a hose can be attached for filling 
boats. 

There is no large wood within 10 miles of the settlements. 

Telegraph station.—There is a telegraph office at Forteau bay. 

St. Clair bay (anse Kelair), 4 miles westward of F orteau point, 1s 
about # mile wide across its entrance, nearly a mile deep, open to 
the southward, and affords no anchorage. An islet 8 feet high and a 
reef extend together about + mile westward from the eastern entrance 
point. There is a fishing establishment close within this point, and 
also at the head of the cove. 


BLANC SABLON—GULCH COVE. 653 


The coast westward of St. Clair bay is composed of cliffs faced by 
large slabs of rock. Within the cliffs the surface features are gen- 
erally flat-topped hills rising gradually to higher ranges inland. 

Blane Sablon (formerly anse Sablon), westward about 14 miles 
from St. Clair bay, is partly sheltered by Woody and Greenly islands, 
but southerly winds send in a heavy sea. Generally it is a safe 
anchorage during summer, when fishing vessels moor there. 

The hills fall in cliffs on the northeastern side of the bay from 
heights of 402 to 253 feet, and on the northwestern side from a flat- 
topped hill 342 feet high that extends southwestward in a spur and 
terminates in a sharp bluff 167 feet high over Long point. There 
is a curious saddle-shaped hill 440 feet high at 14 miles northward 
of the head of the bay. The shores generally are of rock faced by 
bowlders, but at the head there is a sandy beach on the western 
side of a projecting point 21 feet high on which are the conspicuous 
white houses and wharves of the establishment of Job Brothers & 
Co. (locally known as Jobs Room). Blane Sablon river separates 
the point from the sandy beach and drains a long valley and some 
large ponds. The hills on the northeastern side fall in cliffs to the 
marshes in the valley, but the rise is gradual on the west. 

Blandford shoals, on which the depths vary from 15 feet to 5 
fathoms, are about 800 yards in extent and in the middle of Blanc 
Sablon. A rock, with 1 foot of water over it, hes 235 yards from the 
shore at 4 mile northwestward of point St. Charles, the eastern 
entrance point, and a cluster of rocks extends + mile southward 
from the Barachois, a small cove northeastward of Jobs Room. The 
entire northern part of the bay is shallow, with a rock awash at low 
water, 300 yards off shore. 

The coast from Lazy point, the western entrance point of the bay 
to Long point for 14 miles westward, is bordered by rocks and shoals, 
and must not be approached within a distance of 800 yards. 

Bank.—A bank with a least depth of 4+ fathoms over it and about 
300 yards in extent within depths of 5 fathoms, bears 198°, distant 4 
mile from Lazy point. 

Gulch cove, a creek between two granitic spurs, is situated west- 
ward ? mile from Lazy point, and is frequented by fishermen during 
summer. It is a dangerous place to approach, being surrounded by 
rocks and so narrow that vessels are hauled in stern first, and moored 
by chains to the rocks on each side. Losses, however, are not of fre- 
quent occurrence. 

Long point, the northwestern entrance point of the strait of Belle- 
isle, has reefs and shoals extending nearly 800 yards southward 
from it. 

Perroquet bank, with 44 fathoms over it, bears 248°, distant 14 
miles from Long point. 


654 SOUTHEAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


Woody island (ile au Bois) is 167 feet high, flat at the top, and 
generally covered with moss and coarse grass. Penneys Room is a 
large fishing establishment at the northwestern end of the island, and 
there are several other houses on its northeastern side. 

Shoal water extends 300 yards from the northeastern coast of 
Woody island and the Breakers, ledges of rocks that dry at low water, 
extend 4 mile off the southern end of the western coast, but there is 
deep water at 200 yards distant from the southeastern coast and from 
the northwestern point. When the boats can not land on the north- 
eastern side of the island, they do so at the Cow House, a small square 
rock by the side of a small but deep creek on the western coast, close 
southward of the northwestern end of the island. 

Greenly island (ile Verte), westward 1,4, miles from Woody 
island, consists of two hillocks joined by a plateau between two coves; 
the northwestern hillock is 84 feet high and the southern 63 feet. 
The northwestern coast is bold, but off the southeastern coast are a 
rock, drying at low water, and shoals, which together extend south- 
eastward } mile. A’ large fishing establishment, owned by Job 
Brothers & Co., is situated in the northeastern cove. Greenly island 
is the resort of puffins, which appear in great numbers suddenly in 
June, and disappear as suddenly in October. 

Light.—A white octagonal tower with a red lantern, 86 feet high, 
on the southern slope of the southern hillock of Greenly island, 
exhibits, at 116 feet above high water, a flashing white light, showing 
thus: Flash, one-quarter of a second; eclipse, two and a quarter sec- 
onds, that should be seen from a distance of 16 miles in clear weather. 

The keeper’s dwelling is attached to the lighthouse and is painted 
white, with a red roof. 

Fog signal.—A diaphone horn, situated in a rectangular white 
building with a red roof located 232 yards southeastward of Greenly 
Island lighthouse and 20 yards from the sea, sounds blasts of five 
seconds’ duration, with intervals of fifty-five seconds between them, 
during thick or foggy weather. The horn is operated by compressed 
air. 

Directions.—Approaching Blane Sablon from the eastward, keep 
at least 4 mile off the land till near point St. Charles. Pass south- 
ward and westward of Blandford shoals with the fall of the cliff 
over Anse Eclair point open southward of the southern extreme of 
point St. Charles until the northern fall of the cliffs on the eastern 
side of Blane Sablon river is just open westward of the western 
wharf of Jobs Room, bearing 344°. Keep the last mark on until 
about 200 yards northward of the following mark, the southeastern 
fall of the northwestern hillock of Greenly island in line with the 


GREENLY ISLAND—REMARKS. 655 


northwestern end of Woody island, bearing 230°, and anchor in 7 
to 10 fathoms of water, sand bottom. ‘This position is the best in the 
bay for large vessels, but small craft can go in to any convenient 
depth. Greenly Island lighthouse in line with the northwestern end 
of Woody island, bearing 219°, leads just southeastward of the shoal 
water at the head of the bay and the rocks extending from the 
Barachois. 

Proceeding westward, round the northern end of Woody island 
at the distance of about + mile till the fall of the hill over point 
St. Charles is in line with the northern end of Woody island, bearing 
67°, and keep that mark on till northward of the northern point of 
Greenly island, to clear the bank between that island and the main- 
land, or proceed to the southward in mid-channel between Woody 
and Greenly islands. 

Tides and tidal streams.—It is high water, full and change, in 
Blanc Sablon at 10h. 32m.; springs rise 5 feet, neaps 2? feet, and neaps 
range 14 feet. The flood stream usually sets westward through the 
anchorage and the channel between the islands and the mainland at 
an average rate of 14 knots, and the ebb stream sets in the opposite 
direction, but with wind prevailing from one direction the stream 
going with the wind sometimes attains a rate of 24 knots. With 
opposing wind and stream a very heavy sea is raised in the channel 
between the islands and the mainland, and occasionally boats are 
swamped there. It is particularly bad at the northwestern end of 
Woody island, where the tidal stream that passes between the islands 
meets the one that passes northward of them. 

Fisheries.—There are about 200 residents in Blanc Sablon and 
the neighborhood. They hunt for seals in May and June and other 
fur-bearing animals during the winter. About 500 fishermen from 
the east coast of Newfoundland arrive in the spring and engage with 
the residents in the cod fishery. The catch in 1890 was about 20,000 
quintals, and at that time 500 seals were killed annually. 

Ice.—Blanc Sablon freezes over about the middle of December and 
the ice breaks up about the middle of May. The first steamers arrive 
about the end of May and the last vessel leaves about October 20. 
Northern ice usually arrives from December 26 to January 20. Field 
ice makes during the winter, but finally leaves about the middle of 
June. Icebergs may be met with at any time, but only a few reach as 
far westward as Greenly island. 

Supplies.—A small stock of coal is kept by Messrs. Job Brothers 
& Co., of which it is possible that about 50 tons could be supplied to 
a vessel requiring it; the same firm can also usually supply ship’s 
stores, such as flour, salt, and beef. Water can be taken, at high water, 
from Blanc Sablon river. 


656 SOUTHEAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


Communication.—The weekly coasting steamer from Bay of 
Islands calls at Blanc Sablon during summer and autumn. <A steamer 
makes one trip a season to Blanc Sablon from Quebec. Blanc Sablon 
is connected with the Canadian telegraph system. The telegraph 
office is on the sandy beach westward of the river entrance. 

Boundary.—The boundary line between Canada and Labrador 
runs northwestward from Lazy point to cape Chidley at the entrance 
of Hudson strait. 


CHAPTER XI. 


EAST COAST OF LABRADOR—CAPE ST. LEWIS TO CAPE 
CHIDLEY. 


The east coast of Labrador is extremely barren and ‘rugged, and 
is composed of Laurentian gneiss, with intrusive granite and many 
quartz veins. The hills rise steeply from the sea, often in cliffs, with 
rugged rocky points. The only sandy beach of any extent on the 
whole coast northward to Nain is the strand on each side of cape 
Porcupine. 

From Davis inlet to Nachvak, the outer islands and coast appear 
to be fairly free from sunken rocks; but from Nachvak to cape 
Chidley the coast is fringed with small islets and sunken rocks to an 

average distance of some 5 miles. 

From about port Manvers to cape Chidley the land is generally 
high; it attains its greatest elevation midway between Nachvak and 
cape Chidley, where the hills near the coast are estimated to be 5,000 
or 6,000 feet high. 

The nominal jurisdiction of the Newfoundland government ex- 
tends from Blane Sablon bay to cape Chidley, at the entrance of 
Hudson strait, but the actual control ceases at Holton harbor, the 
most northern settled Newfoundland fishing post. Yet the local mail 
steamer proceeds as far as Nain. 

Northward of Holton harbor the cod fishery is prosecuted from 
schooners that “ follow the fish,” as it is termed, sometimes beyond 
cape Chidley, oes the vicinity of Nain is ae usual northern 
limit. 

Eskimo half-breeds have established themselves at various places 
along the coast northward of Battle harbor, but thete is no large 
settlement of them till as far north as Cartwright harbor in latitude 
53° 42”, where some are congregated about a post of the Hudson Bay 
Company. 

There is also a settlement in connection with the Hudson Bay 
Company at Rigoulette in Hamilton inlet. 

The next native villages to the northward are at Makovik (see 
p- 731) and Hopedale, which are stations of the Moravian mission. 
Thence to cape Chidley, the natives, with a few exceptions, live at 

76846—09——42, 657 


658 EAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


the mission stations or at the posts of the Hudson Bay Company 
during winter, and fish along the coast in summer. 

Intercourse is kept up occasionally, during winter, by dog sledges 
(locally komatiks) between Rigoulette, Hopedale, Davis inlet, Zoar, 
Nain, Okkak, Hebron, Ramah, and Nachvak; and Eskimos from 
Ungava occasionally go to Nachvak during winter. In summer 
traveling can only be done by sea. 

The Moravian mission stations are Makovik, Hopedale, Zoar, Nain, 
Okkak, Hebron, and Ramah. The headquarters are at Nain, where 
the superintendents, both of trade and mission work, reside. 

The natives are spread over the coast from Makovik to cape 
Chidley. 

The Indians from the interior come to the posts of the Hudson 
Bay Company in severe winters, but only when pressed by hunger, as 
a deadly feud exists between them and the Eskimos. 

Refraction and mirage have caused great difficulty in attaining 
sextant altitudes at sea off the northern part of the coast of Labrador. 
This state of the atmosphere is said to be characteristic of the few 
fine days of summer. 

Trade.—The exports from Labrador in 1905, consisting chiefly of 
dry codfish, salmon, cod and whale oils, furs, and lumber, were of the 
estimated value of $3,082,503. This includes the exports of the Mo- 
ravian missions, which were valued at $48,442. 


Table of the mean monthly temperature, Fahrenheit, at sir Moravian mission 
stations. 


[Observations taken at 8 a. m. during the number of years given.] 


Hopedale | — Zoar Nein}s| , OXEAK | Menon ee 
Month. (six years).'(six years).|(six years) pave (seven | (five 
BES GE SA Ae es) Ute vy ‘| years). years). | years) 
| | 
— =| = | 
| ° | ° fo) ° ° ° 
JAMUATY os eee ees Hoi) | —12.8 | aby —9.9 7) 79 
MEDNURCYy sae eens | —5.8 — 8.5 — 7.8 —8.1 —9.4 —7.8 
Manchige.< a= c--bapascicne cee 6.4 2.6 3.4 2.3 2.5 2.5 
Apyilias ost e eesactcasleeess 21°52 19.0 18.3 18.5 17.0 20.1 
IM Viste aisle lores cise eieraiz inlaw wairinjers's 33. 2 32.3 | 32.0 32.5 32.3 34.5 
GUNES oe ecccceesete ees ees ae 42.9 42.4 41.5 42.1 40.1 42.1 
Oise CHOARE CCD T SaACOaa Ie emee 50.9 49.8 | 47.1 47.3 46.6 49.3 
BNUIGUSG fo. eacectteaers de sac ss 50.7 50. 5 | 48.7 47.6 46.4 46.9 
September) .25 53) 6 aero se | 42.1 41.7 40.8 40.1 38.6 38.6 
October resi ence see w 32.9 32.3 | 31.1 31.8 29.5 30.7 
INOwember: 2225 sc 5. ceeceee.- 19.6 17.6 | 18.1 17.9 18.3 19.7 
Decemberists sscccen estes: 3.0 — 0.6 0.7 0.8 2.1 | 2.5 
Monin teil) 5 ais. ae 24.1 22.8 | 21.9 21.9 tg 22.6 


The highest temperatures recorded by the maximum thermometer 
are, at Hopedale, 83°.6 on July 14, 1890; Nain, 77° on July 30, 1887; 
Hebron, 86°.2 on August 3, 1890; and the lowest temperatures 
recorded by the minimum thermometer are, at Hopedale, —36°.4 on 
February 11, 1888; Zoar, —38° on January 21, 1884; Nain, —36°.5 on 
January 21, 1884; and Hebron, —40° on January 17, 1891. 


DEEPWATER CREEK—PETTY HARBOR. 659 


Landfalls.—If bound to the southern part of the Labrador coast, 
cape St. Michael, in latitude 52° 41’, is a good point to steer for, as 
the land is high and bold. There are several harbors in its locality. 

South Wolf island is a good landmark, and the islands near it have 
each distinctive features. 

Cape Harrison, in latitude 54° 56’, longitude 57° 55’ west, is the 
best landfall northward of South Wolf island, and should be sighted 
if bound northward, to prevent being entangled in the islands and 
shoals northward of it. It is a bold headland, and Webeck harbor 
lies close to it. Further northward the masters of the Moravian mis- 
sion ships endeavor to make cape Aillik, but there are the Turnavik 
islands, and many off-lying rocks in its vicinity. 

Cape St. Lewis.—See page 620. 

Deepwater creek.—The coast within St. Lewis rock trends north- 
northeastward for + mile, and then turns northwestward for 900 
yards to the southeastern entrance point of Deepwater creek, a nar- 
row inlet extending nearly 4 mile to the southwestward, with steep 
rocky sides, and a few houses at its head. Landing from boats may 
be effected, even in a heavy sea, at the fishing stages, alongside which 
there is deep water. 

Southern head of Petty harbor lies north-northeastward, distant 
1,400 yards from the southeastern entrance point of Deepwater creek. 
It is 391 feet high and steep-to. 

Petty harbor entrance is situated between Southern and Northern 
heads, which bear nearly northward and southward, distant 14 miles 
from each other. Northern head is the cliffy termination of a round 
hill, 348 feet high, and its northern part is marked by conspicuous 
white stripes. 

The inner entrance to the harbor is on the northern side of a penin- 
sula, 93 feet high, having some houses and a flagstaff on it, and pro- 
jecting from the southern shore at 1,8; miles inside of Southern head. 
The passage into the harbor turns sharply around this peninsula, 
and should only be taken by a sailing vessel with a commanding 
breeze. The navigable channel has a depth of 4 fathoms, but is 
contracted to a width of 100 feet by a rock, with 9 feet of water over 
it, lying 150 feet off the southern shore just within the narrows. 
The harbor then expands to an average width of 4 mile, and is 1 
mile in length; the depth of water varies from 10 to 19 fathoms in 
the middle and the shores are bold-to, except in the northeastern part. 

A rock, with 15 feet of water over it, and 13 fathoms close-to, is 
situated 100 yards off the western point of Hogan cove, an indenta- 
tion in the northern shore. 

Petty harbor affords good anchorage, and is available as a refuge. 
To enter, keep in mid-channed till the harbor opens, and then haul up 
close to the northern shore till the rock off the southern shore is 
passed. It is, however, desirable to have local knowledge. 


660 EAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Spear harbor at 7h. 
12m.; springs rise 44 feet, neaps 34 feet. 

Barren bay, or Salmon bight, an open bay with a little shoal water 
at its head, extends northwestward 14 miles from between Northern 
head and Salmon Bight point, which les 1,600 yards to the northward. 

Between Salmon Bight point and the southern entrance point to 
Spear Harbor bay, distant 1,200 yards to the northward, are Paul 
Peters cove and Little Spear harbor, both open and wild. 

Spear harbor, at the head of Spear Harbor bay, is entered between 
two islands, but local knowledge is necessary for the pilotage. North 
island, the larger of the islands, is 50 feet high, steep-to on the south- 
ern side, shoal on the northern, and having a ledge projecting 50 feet 
from its western end. West island is 52 feet high, and a reef 
stretches 50 yards from the northwestern end. 

Ice.—The indraft occasionally carries icebergs into the entrance 
of this harbor, so as to block it completely until a westerly wind 
drives them out. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Petty harbor at 7h. 
29m.; springs rise 44 feet, neaps 3 feet. 

Spear point, north-northeastward, distant 700 yards from the 
southwestern point of Spear Harbor bay, rises to the height of 190 
feet; close off the point is a rock that covers. 

Tinker bank, bearing 330°, distant $ mile from Spear point, has 
4 fathoms of water over it. The summit of Jack Fling island, open 
northward of American island, bearing 287°, leads northward 200 
_yards from this shoal. 

American island, northwestward ? mile from Spear point, is 67 
feet high; it is separated from the coast by a channel a little more 
than 200 yards wide, in which is a rock with 10 feet of water over it, 
situated rather nearer the island than the mainland. 

Jack Fling island, northwestward 600 yards from American 
island, is a conical, gray island, 99 feet high, and is in two portions 
that are nearly joined; a low, black rock hes off the southwestern end. 

Fish island lies 800 yards northwestward of Jack Fling island, 
and between it and the land to the southwestward are Herringnet and 
High islands. 

Sealing bight is a bay open northward, the entrance of which lies 
between Fish and Jack Fling islands. There are some white houses 
in the southeastern cove at its head; the water is deep, and in north- 
erly gales a heavy sea prevents it being used as an anchorage. 

Mad Moll, a rock with 6 feet of water over it, lies in the middle of 
the entrance, bearing 285°, distant 400 yards from the western point 
of Jack Fling island. Fling bank, bearing 21°, distant about 300 
yards from the same point of Jack Fling island, has a depth of 6 
fathoms over it. 


MURRAY HARBOR—LITTLE HARBOR. 661 


The Scab, a rock with 9 feet of water over it, is at the end of the 
foul ground extending in a direction 285° for 300 yards from the 
western point of Fish island. 

Murray harbor, westward 700 yards from High island, is an inlet 
extending 900 yards to the southward and having a width of 300 
yards, with good anchorage in 4 to 5 fathoms water, gradually shoal- 
ing to the shores. Near the head, at 600 yards within the entrance, is 
an islet, southward of which the water is shoal. 

The entrance is divided into two channels by Harbor island, which 
is about 100 feet high. The western passage is shoal. 

A rock, with 1 foot of water over it, lies southward 100 yards from 
Harbor island, and is steep-to on the northeastern side. To enter the 
harbor, keep the eastern entrance point close aboard, and anchor in 
mid-channel, off the houses. 

Salt Pond head, westward 335 yards from the northwestern point 
of Harbor island, is the northern point of the promontory dividing 
Murray harbor from Sophia harbor; it is bold and steep-to. 

Soldier shoal, bearing 354°, distant 700 yards from Salt Pond 
head, has 15 feet of water over it and is the shoalest part of a bank 
extending northward and southward 600 yards, with general depths 
of 43 to 9 fathoms of water over it; its northern end falls suddenly 
to 19 fathoms. 

Sophia harbor entrance is southwestward about 800 yards from 
Salt Pond head, and the harbor extends thence southward 14 miles; 
it then turns suddenly eastward and expands into Salt pond, a shal- 
low basin nearly 1 mile long and $ mile wide. There are no shoals 
in mid-channel, and small vessels obtain good sheltered anchorage at 
the head, but it is not suitable for large vessels. 

Mosquito cove, a deep open cove, westward of Sophia harbor, is 
divided into two parts by Aaron island, 59 feet high. 

Chapel island, west-northwestward 4} mile from Salt Pond head, 
is in two portions; the northeastern is a cliff-faced islet, 60 feet high, 
and the southwestern, green and sloping, 112 feet high. Fishing 
boats shelter in the channel between these portions. 

Chapel Island rock, situated between the eastern points of the 
two portions of Chapel island, generally breaks. 

Little harbor, northwestward about 700 yards from Mosquito 
cove, affords snug shelter for small vessels, but the entrance is only 
100 yards wide, and the channel is further narrowed by shoal water 
off the southern shore. The harbor is a basin, 600 yards long and 
200 yards wide, with a depth of 24 fathoms, mud bottom. There is 
good holding ground as far in as an islet 5 feet high. A depth of 24 
fathoms can be carried in by keeping the northern shore close aboard. 

The Wall, a shoal with 34 fathoms of water over it and 7 fathoms 
close-to, bears 84°, distant nearly 800 yards from the northern en- 
trance point to Little harbor. 


662 EAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


Salmon point, the northeastern end of the peninsula dividing 
Little harbor from port Charlotte, is steep and rises to a conical hill 
157 feet high. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Little harbor at 7h. 
4m.; springs rise 44 feet. 

Port Charlotte extends southwestward nearly 2 miles, and is en- 
tered by a narrow, foul channel, which should not be attempted with- 
out a pilot. It expands into a deep bay with good anchorage in 11 
to 15 fathoms water. Road island, 17 feet high, lies in the entrance, 
and is nearly joined to the western entrance point by rocks and shoal 
water; a rock that covers lies off its southeastern side, and a reef 
extends southwestward, 450 yards from its southern end, with Gull 
rock lying midway between Road island and the end of the reef. 
Shoals with depths of 3 fathoms over them he southward 300 yards 
from the southwestern end of the reef, and a rock, with 10 feet of 
water over it, lies 100 yards off Level point, the first point within the 
entrance on the southeastern shore. 

Bottom arm, at the head of port Charlotte, is } mile in length and 
affords anchorage in 63 fathoms of water, mud bottom, as far in as 
the narrows, about 800 yards from the mouth of the arm. Shoal 
water extends from either shore of the narrows, but 4 fathoms can 
be carried in mid-channel to the inner basin, where there is completely 
sheltered anchorage for small craft, with good holding ground, in 
7 fathoms. 

Mecklenburg harbor, westward of Chapel island, has an outer 
and inner anchorage, and is entered either northwestward or south- 
ward of Chapel island; the eastern side of the promontory northwest- 
ward of Chapel island, is indented by fissures 400: yards deep north- 
ward to Crowby head, a distance of 750 yards. The outer harbor, 
westward to Green island, is easy of access, clear of shoals, and 
affords well-sheltered anchorage in 13 to 18 fathoms. 

The inner anchorage is southwestward of Green island, and a shoal 
bank, with 3 feet least water over it, extends from the northern shore, 
immediately within the island, half way across the entrance, and 
rocks which cover he off the northern shore at about 1,200 yards west- 
southwestward of Green island. A bank, with 3 fathoms of water 
over it, is situated 150 yards off the southern shore just within the 
entrance. No natural marks clear these dangers, and the inner 
anchorage should not be entered without a pilot. 

Water can be procured from a brook at the head of Man-of-war 
cove, the arm northward of Green island. 

Double islands, northward distant about 1 mile from Fish island, 
are two bare, gray rocks, divided by a shallow channel 50 yards wide; 
the higher of these islands is 65 feet high. 


FLAT ISLAND—ST. FRANCIS HARBOR. 663 


Shoal water, on which is a rock that generally breaks, extends 
eastward 250 yards from the northern island, but otherwise these 
islands are bold-to. 

Double Island bank, with 8 fathoms of water over it, bears 307°, 
distant 900 yards from the northern Double island; it is said to 
break in heavy gales. 

Flat island, west-northwestward 14 miles from Double islands, is 
a black rock about 20 feet high. 

The Skerries, a shoal with 8 fathoms of water over it, bears 43°, 
distant 2 mile from Flat island; it is said to break in heavy gales. 

Denbigh and Granby islands divide the large inlet between 
Mecklenburg and Fishing-ship harbors into three passages, that again 
converge to two inlets, Alexis river, the southern, extending inland 
25 miles, and Gilbert river, the northern, 18 miles. These inlets con- 
tain numerous islands and rocks with channels between them, but 
they have been only partially surveyed, and should not be navigated 
without a pilot. 

The southern side of Denbigh island is foul for } mile off. 

Granby island rises at 1,3; miles west-northwestward of its south- 
eastern point to a conspicuous flat-topped hill, 461 feet high, and its 
southern coast is steep-to. 

Fish rock, bearing 340°, distant 34 miles from Double islands, is 
11 feet high, and separated by a narrow channel from the southeast- 
ern point of Granby island. 

Copper island, about 600 yards southwestward of Fish rock and 
separated from the southern side of Granby island by a channel 4 
mile wide, is 186 feet high, grass-covered and flat-topped, with steep 
and bold-to coasts. Breaking rock, in the middle of the channel 
between Copper and Granby islands, covers 3 feet at high water. 

Little Copper island, a small white islet, 35 feet high, hes just 
southwestward of the western end of Copper island. 

Merchantman harbor, on the northeastern coast and near the 
eastern end of Denbigh island, is fronted by Shinny island. It is 
entered on either side of this island, and it affords anchorage in 7 
fathoms of water, but the head must not be approached nearer than 
400 yards. 

Williams harbor, on the southern side of Granby island and north- 
ward of Merchantman harbor, affords good anchorage for small ves- 
sels; several Eskimo families live on its shores. 

St. Francis harbor, on the eastern coast of Granby island at 14 
miles northward of Fish rock, is divided into two parts by a round 
hill 82 feet high, northeastward of which are Chain rocks, low and 
flat; southeastward of the hill there is a low islet, and Pigeon island, 
43 feet high, with a watch-house and flagstaff on it, lies in the 
entrance at 300 yards farther southeastward. 


664 EAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


The northern arm is small, the anchorage space being 400 yards 
long and 250 yards wide; there are stores and a house on its northern 
shore. To enter pass on either side of Pigeon island in mid-channel 
and northeastward of Chain rocks, then haul to the westward and 
anchor. 

A rock, with 5 feet of water over it, lies nearly 100 yards off the 
shore eastward of the storehouses. 

Round harbor, the southern arm, extends 600 yards to the west- 
ward with a width of a little less than 200 yards; it affords good — 
anchorage for small vessels in 43 fathoms water, sand and gravel 
bottom. 

Cape St. Francis, north-northwestward nearly 74 miles from 
Spear point and northeastward 4 mile from Pigeon island, is the 
southeastern point of a flat-topped rocky island, 600 yards long, west- 
northwestward and east-southeastward, about 200 yards wide, 115 
feet high, bold-to on all sides, and separated from the mainland by 
a narrow deep passage suitable for boats, except in a heavy swell. 

Local magnetic disturbance.—Considerable disturbance of the 
compass, from local magnetic causes, has been observed on board 
vessels when near cape St. Francis. The principal area of disturb- 
ance lies within 1 mile seaward of a line drawn between cape St. 
Francis and the eastern end of Hare island. 

Indian point, northwestward about 1,400 yards from Cape St. 
Francis island, is a steep bluff, 195 feet high; Fish cove, on its 
western side, is a deep inlet ending in a ravine. 

Burke island (Jasper island), northwestward 250 yards from 
Indian point, is flat, 85 feet high, and is separated from Granby 
island by Shoal tickle, a narrow boat channel; there are several 
houses on the island. Westward of Shoal tickle are two flat rocks 
just above high water. 

St. Francis Harbor bight, southwestward of Burke island, is 600 
yards in extent and 400 yards wide. It affords anchorage southeast- 
ward of Flat islands, which lie northward within 250 yards from 
the western entrance point of the bight, in 10 fathoms of water, mud 
bottom, and sheltered from all winds. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in St. Francis Harbor 
bight at 6h. 40m.; springs rise 5 feet, neaps 34 feet. 

Hare island, northward nearly 400 yards from Burke island, is 
about # mile long, northwestward and southeastward, 800 yards wide, 
356 feet high, dark and flat-topped, with a cliffy coast, and steep-to. 

Red island, eastward, + mile from the southern point of Hare 
island, is about 200 yards across, and 67 feet high. Shoal water, on 
which are rocks that generally break, extends south-southwestward 
300 yards from it. 


EAST ISLAND—-HAGAN ARM. 665 


Red Island shoal, southeastward 400 yards from Red island, has 
51 fathoms least water over it, and breaks in heavy gales. 

East island.—Black Bes the southeastern point of this island, 
bears northward, distant ;®, mile from the northern point of Hare 
island. East island is a mile long eastward and westward, 700 yards 
wide, 329 feet high, and separated from the mainland by a channel, 
the deep water in which is narrowed to less than 100 yards by a rock 
3 feet high, with a sunken rock southwestward of it pene nearly in 
mid-channel. 

Middle island lies southwestward of East island, from which it is 
separated by Boyeans tickle, 65 yards wide, and nearly blocked by 
shoal water at each end. There is a passage through this tickle by 
keeping Middle island close aboard, but it is rarely attempted even 
with local knowledge. 

West island, west-southwestward of Middle island, has foul 
ground off all the points, and should not be approached nearer than 
200 yards. West tickle, separating this island from the mainland, is 
shallow. 

Fishing Ship harbor is within these three Fishing Ship islands; 
the entrance, between West and Middle islands, is about 300 yards 
wide. 

Northwest arm isa io anchorage 1,400 yards long and 600 yards 
broad, with depths of 7 to 14 fathoms of water between West island 
and the mainland; it is clear of shoals excepting a rock, with 6 feet 
of water over it, lying off the entrance to West tickle at nearly 200 
yards from the shore; and a rock that covers 1 foot at high water, 
with shoal ground off it, at 200 yards from the western shore near the 
head. The northwestern point of West island should not be aa 
to bear less than 99° to clear the first of these rocks. 

Hagan arm, a continuation westward of Northwest arm, is ap- 
proached through a channel 100 yards wide, with 10 feet of water in 
it in mid-channel, and after passing the narrows the water deepens; 
local knowledge is required to enter it. 

Directions.—To enter the anchorage within East and Middle 
islands from the southward, pass between Middle and West islands, 
and then between the Flat islets northwestward of Middle island, 
which are 8 feet high, and the round rock, 4 feet high, off the main- 
land; round the Flat islets at the distance of 200 yards, and anchor in 
7 to 12 fathoms. 

By the northern channel, round the northwestern point of East 
island at the distance of 200 yards, and then keep the mainland close 
aboard until past the sunken rock in the channel. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Fishing Ship harbor 
at 6h. 54m.; springs rise 54 feet, neaps 4 feet. 


666 EAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


Lance cove is an open bight, extending 700 yards to the westward, 
at 800 yards northward of Fishing Ship harbor; it should not be 
entered. 

Sloop cove is a small cove lying northward, distant 700 yards from 
the northwestern point of East island; to enter it from the southeast- 
ward, round Black rock, an islet close to the shore, and keep the 
eastern shore aboard; on the western side of the entrance are three 
low rocks. The cove is suitable for small craft, which obtain good 
shelter off the houses at the head. Sloop Cove head lies eastward 
300 yards from the entrance to the cove. 

Caplin bay, northwestward of Sloop Cove head, extends 800 yards 
in a westerly direction; Pigeon island, 82 feet high, lies 100 yards off 
the northern entrance point. There is a basin with a narrow entrance 
in the southwestern part of the bay; it is 350 yards long, 200 yards 
broad, and boats find shelter at its head, and small craft in 9 feet 
of water. In the entrance to the basin is a rock, which is avoided by 
keeping the northwestern shore aboard. 

Ship harbor.—Southern point of Ship harbor lies north-north- 
westward 1,8, miles from northern head of East island, and from 
the northern side of the point Ship harbor extends westward 14 
miles; at 1,300 yards within the point the harbor narrows to less than 
200 yards in width; it then opens to the width of + mile for 1,200 
yards, when it closes in again toward its head, which is shoal for 
200 yards. 

Russell cove, the second bight on the northern shore, is shallow and 
filled by bowlders to the distance of 200 yards from the beach; a rock, 
which covers, lies 150 feet off its eastern point. 

Anchorage may be obtained off this cove in 16 fathoms of water, 
mud bottom, with good holding ground. 

Ship Harbor head bears north-northeastward, distant ;®, mile 
from southern point of Ship harbor, and is a rugged promontory 
rising to the height of 721 feet, faced by steep bluffs with red patches, 
and steep-to on all sides. 

The coast from Ship Harbor head trends northwestward 14 miles: 
to White point, and is intersected by ravines extending 200 yards 
inshore. Good cove, the third of these ravines northwestward of 
Ship Harbor head, extends southeastward rather over 100 yards 
within a low point, and is the only place where landing can be 
effected in ordinary weather, or with even a light northeasterly 
swell. 

Rock.—A rock, with 4 fathoms of water over it, bears 10°, distant 
4 mile from Ship Harbor head; cape St. Michael, open westward of 
Twin islands, bearing 332°, leads southwestward ; and open eastward, 
bearing 316°, leads northeastward of the rock. 


TWIN ISLANDS—CAPE ST. MICHAEL. 667 


Twin islands, north-northwestward about 1 mile from Ship Har- 
bor head, are two islands separated by a narrow channel; the eastern 
island rises in two conical grass-covered mounds to the height of 
about 60 feet; the western is a narrow black rock, about 400 yards 
long and 32 feet high. 

A shoal, with 54 fathoms of water over it, bears 292°, distant 550 
yards from the northern point of the western Twin island, and lies in 
mid-channel of the northern entrance to Occasional harbor. 

Occasional harbor, the entrance to which is between White point 
on the southern side and Northern head, lying northwestward, distant 
4 mile from the western Twin island, on the northern side, extends 
southwestward 54 miles from Twin islands, and is clear of shoals. 
For 8 miles within the entrance the average width of the harbor is 
700 yards, and the water is too deep for anchorage; it then opens into 
Delaney cove on the southern side and French and Trout coves on 
the northern side. Delaney cove, extending } mile to the eastward, is 
separated from the head of Ship harbor by a neck of land 700 yards 
across; rocks lie some 80 yards off the northern point of this cove. 
French and Trout coves each extend 500 yards to the northward, and 
vessels requiring to dry fish haul close to the shore in either cove, but 
the water is shoal for 100 yards off the point separating them. 

Southwestward of Trout cove a projecting point from the northern 
shore, with rocks extending 150 yards from it, narrows the harbor 
to 300 yards. Arch cove, westward of this projection, is a secure 
anchorage 800 yards across, with 5 to 12 fathoms of water. Mercer 
island, 3 feet high, is 100 yards off the southern shore southwestward 
of the anchorage and marks the eastern mit of the shoal water, 
which bars, except to small craft, the entrance to a basin about ? mile 
in length, with depths of 6 to 14 fathoms. 

Anchorage can be obtained in the harbor off the entrance to French 
cove; in Delaney cove in 10 fathoms; or southward of the point sep- 
arating French and Trout coves, in 11 to 14 fathoms water. 

Water can be taken from many places along the shores, but the 
most convenient place is on the shore southward of Arch cove. Fire- 
wood is abundant. 

Tides.—IJt is high water, full and change, in Occasional harbor at 
6h. 48m.; springs rise 5 feet, neaps 34 feet. 

Cape St. Michael is the eastern end of the promontory separating 
Occasional harbor from St. Michael bay, and it extends from North- 
ern head northwestward 24 miles to First point. The coast is steep 
and bold-to; Hole-in-the-wall, a remarkable ridge with a hole 
through, hes north-northwestward 800 yards from Northern head, 
and Main cape, which terminates in a low peninsula, is 600 yards 
farther northwestward. 


668 EAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


False cape, northwestward 4 mile from Main cape, is the outer end 
of the western side of Cape cove, which extends S00 yards to the 
southward; is open and wild, and has a deep valley at its head. A 
small rock lies off False cape, and it is bold-to. 

First point is west-northwestward 14 miles from False cape, and 
between these points are deep coves; Island cove, the nearest one to 
False cape, has a white islet, 65 feet high, in the entrance; it is 350 
yards in extent and shoal within the island, and affords indifferent 
shelter for boats. 

St. Michael bay—Scrammy bay, the first bight westward of 
First point, is partially sheltered, except from the northward and° 
northeastward, by Pinsent island, 67 feet high, which lies off it; this 
bay is much resorted to for drying fish. Vessels generally anchor 
southwestward of and between Pinsent island and the mainland, 
and southeastward of Scrammy island. 

Lazy bank, with 5$ fathoms of water over it, lies north-northeast- 
ward, 350 yards from Pinsent island. 

Pinsent rock, situated northwestward 300 yards from Pinsent 
island, is 2 feet high and bold-to on the northwestern side. Hussy 
rock, with 10 feet of water over it, lies eastward 200 yards from it. 

Lump rock, southwestward 800 yards from Pinsent rock and 200 
yards offshore, is awash at low water. George cove, southwestward 
of this rock, is clear and affords good shelter for boats. 

Pinsent arm, west-southwestward 2 miles from Pinsent rock, is 
clear outside the narrows. The southern shore rises to mossy hills, 
backed by the highest range on the southern part of the eastern coast 
of Labrador, the summit of which is 895 feet high. The northern 
shore is a peninsula 56 feet high, with an islet 35 feet high at its 
northeastern end. 

The narrows lie between two hillocks, the northern 58 feet and 
the southern 46 feet high. At the summit of the northern hillock is 
a flagstaff, at the base a white house, and off it are two low islets. 
Off the southern hillock is a rock that covers 3 feet, narrowing the 
entrance to 100 yards. The channel is foul, and it must not be at- 
tempted without a pilot, but good anchorage for small craft may 
be obtained in 54 to 74 fathoms of water, sand bottom, near the 
northern shore just within the house. 

Long island, westward 14 miles from First point, is 192 feet high 
and appears as a cone from the southeastward, but as two hummocks 
from the southwestward, the southeastern being 106 feet high. An 
islet is joined at low water to the northern part of its northwestern 
end, northwestward 250 yards from which is a rock that covers at 
half tide, northwestward 500 yards a bank with 5} fathoms, and east- 
southeastward distant nearly 200 yards a shoal with 12 feet of water 
over it. 


PIGEON ISLAND—SQUARE ISLAND. 669 


There is anchorage in 8} to 12 fathoms of water, coral and rock 
bottom, on a bank that extends 500 yards off the eastern cove on the 
eastern coast of this island. 

Pigeon island, northward 4} mile from the middle of Long island, 
is 22 feet high. 

A bank, having two shoal patches with 12 and 16 feet of water over 
them, lies westward 600 yards from Pigeon island; there are depths 
of 10 fathoms close-to on all sides. False cape, open northeastward 
of Pigeon island, bearing 122°, leads northeastward of these shoals. 

Pigeon Island rock, bearing 122°, distant 400 yards from Pigeon 
island, has 7 feet of water over it, and is steep-to. 

Burnt island, joined at low water to the southwestern point of 
Square island, and separated from Pigeon island by a clear channel 
750 yards broad, is 173 feet high. Between it and Square island is a 
bay with a small islet in it, off which shoal water extends southeast- 
ward 150 yards. 

White Bear arm extends northwestward 15 miles from Burnt- 
island, and the fishermen state that the arm is so encumbered by rocks 
and shoals that there is only one narrow channel navigable to the 
head. It must not be entered without an experienced pilot, who 
may be obtained during summer from Square Island harbor, Pinsent 
arm, or Scrammy bay. 

Square island, which divides St. Michael bay into two parts, is 
bare and rises to a double hill 497 feet high. The coasts are bold and 
intersected by numerous ravines; the northeastern point ends in 
Sugarloaf hill, a truncated cone 221 feet high, about 200. yards north- 
ward of which is Gull island 49 feet high. An islet 7 feet high is 
nearly joined to the northeastern side of Gull island, and from it a 
reef extends northeastward 100 yards. Snapper cove is a deep in- 
dentation southward of Sugarloaf, having in it Upper rock, on which 
the depth is 44 fathoms, and Northward rock, with 5 fathoms of 
water over it, small, steep-to, and close to the shore. 

Square Island harbor, a cove 400 yards in extent at the south- 
castern end of Square island, is sheltered by East and West islands 
and approached by three channels. The southwestern channel is 
marked by Motion island, 30 feet high, round and faced by cliffs, and 
nearly joined to Square island by a low rock. The middle channel is 
between East and West islands and the eastern channel between East 
and Square islands. Both these channels are clear. 

Harbor point, southward of the harbor, has a rock close off it, and 
a rock that covers lies in the cove on the northern side. Harbor rock, 
11 feet high, is situated off the northeastern point. 

There is not room in the harbor for vessels to swing, and though 
one or two might anchor in 12 fathoms of water and moor to the 


670 EAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


shore, they would have to leave before an easterly gale came on. It 
is convenient, however, for fishing craft and boats, as the water is 
deep to the shore. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Square Island tickle — 
at 7h. 14m.; springs rise 44 feet, neaps 34 feet. 

Communication.—The Labrador steamer to and from St. Johns 
via Battle harbor calls at Square Island harbor fortnightly during 
summer. | 

West island, northward 14 miles from First point, is round, and 
the summit, a steep bluff 272 feet high, is immediately within the 
southern end. A little shoal water lies close to the northwestern coast 
of this island. 

The Sisters, two small islets, lie southward 250 yards from West 
island, with a clear channel between. The western or eastern end of 
the feet should not be approached nearer than 200 yards. 

Mad Moll, a rock situated east-southeastward, distant 4 mile from 
the Sisters, has 7 feet of water over it, is about 100 yards across, and 
steep-to on all sides. Twin islands, open eastward of cape St. 
Michael, bearing 152°, leads northeastward of Mad Moll, and shut in, 
bearing 141°, leads southwestward of it. 

East island, separated from West island by a clear channel 300 
yards wide, is 200 yards from Square island. Icebergs frequently 
drift through the north channel in summer, as the water is very deep. 

Anchorage, with good shelter, may be obtained near the north- 
western end of the channel, between East and West islands in 15 
fathoms of water. This is the only place in the locality available for 
a large ship. 

The Ribs, bearing 85°, distant a little more than 1 mile from the 
northern end of East island, are two rocky patches with 12 feet of 
water over them. 

Several fishing banks lie northward of the Ribs, but none are dan- 
gerous. 

Ship Harbor head, open eastward of Twin islands, bearing 178°, 
leads well eastward of all these shoals. 

White point lies westward about 4+ mile from Rae hill, and 
there is a rock, with 9 feet of water over it, at 150 yards northeast- 
ward of the point. 

Nowlan harbor, westward about $ mile from White point, is suit- 
able for small craft; at high water a depth of 8 feet can be carried 
in, but local knowledge is necessary, as the channel near the south- 
eastern shore is intricate. There are several houses on the shores of 
this harbor, and a deep valley extends inland to a chain of ponds. 

Bar and Cashman coves, westward of Nowlan head, do not afford 
shelter. 


DEAD ISLANDS. fs 3 


Red Island cove is situated southwestward 450 yards from Red 
island, which bears west-northwestward, 1} miles from Sugarloaf 
hill; the cove affords indifferent shelter for boats, as a considerable 
swell sets-in after easterly winds. 

Schooner cove, southwestward 700 yards from Red island, is clear 
of shoals and affords anchorage for two or three small craft, off a 
cove with a shingle beach on the southeastern shore. 

Woody cove, westward 1 mile from Red island, is about 250 yards 
square, and open to northeasterly winds, but affords good anchorage 
in 64 fathoms of water during westerly winds. 

Dead islands, separated by a clear channel 1 mile wide from the 
northern side of Square island, are a group covering an area about 
2 miles square; there are two large and several smaller islands, inclos- 
ing between them a good anchorage. 

West island, the largest, is 1} miles long, eastward and westward, 
% mile broad, and 247 feet high. The southern coast is cliffy and 
steep-to, and the northwestern coast is separated by a narrow channel 
from a group of islands. An islet, 16 feet high, hes in this channel, 
northwestward 100 yards from which is a shoal with 13 feet of water 
over it. 

In taking this passage keep in mid-channel when entering, and pass 
close northwestward of the islet, steering for the northwestern end of 
Dead islands. 

A cove, having an extent of 600 yards, with a breadth of 300 yards, 
is situated on the eastern side of West island, and affords good 
anchorage for small vessels in 34 fathoms of water, sand bottom, 
though the shores are fringed by rocks that cover at high water. 

Bull island, the southeastern of the Dead islands, is 127 feet high 
and has a conspicuous quartz vein on its seaward side; it well marks 
the entrance to Dead Islands harbor. 

Butler island, connected by rocks and shoal water to the western 
side of Bull island, is 98 feet high. 

Harbor island, northwestward 250 yards from Bull island, is 100 
feet high. 

Dead Islands harbor may be entered by the channels on either 
side of Harbor island; the latter one is between it and Bull island. 

Harbor rock, awash at high water and always showing, les just 

inside the entrance. It is skirted by shoal water, and a rock, over 
which is a depth of 7 feet of water, les southwestward 65 yards 
from it. 
. Anchorage may be obtained in 10 to 12 fathoms of water as con- 
venient, but icebergs drift in continuously during the early part of 
summer. Large vessels, by not proceeding so far as to bring Stowe 
Tickle point, which is northeastward of the cove, to bear 234°, will 
clear a shoal lying off some rocks that cover 2 feet at high water and 
extend 300 yards from that point. 


672 EAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Dead Islands harbor, 
at 6h. 51m.; springs rise 54 feet, neaps 34 feet. 

Communication.—The Labrador steamer to and from St. Johns, 
via Battle harbor, calls at Dead Islands harbor fortnightly during 
summer. 

North island, 1} miles long, northwestward and southeastward, 
and 220 feet high, is separated by a narrow channel from the northern 
side of West island. In the northwestern side of the island there is a 
cove 500 yards in extent, which is clear of dangers. 

Stowe tickle, between West and North islands, is available for 
small vessels, with a commanding breeze, but not without a local 
pilot. A rock, awash at high water, les in mid-channel at the nar- 
rows, where the passage is only 100 yards wide from shore to shore, 
and is connected by shoal water to West island. Shoal water also 
extends northeastward 150 yards from the rock. 

Anchorage may be obtained off the northwestern entrance to Stowe 
tickle in 7 to 14 fathoms of water, mud bottom, in a space 750 yards 
long and 400 yards broad, which is sheltered from all winds. 

Gull island, northward of North island, is 281 feet high, conical, 
dark, and conspicuous. An islet, with shoal water of 4 fathoms run- 
ning southward, about 400 yards from it, les eastward about 400 
yards from the southern point of the island. A shoal, with 43 
fathoms water over it, bears 110°, + mile from the eastern point of 
the island. A rock, with 12 feet water over it, lies 135 yards from 
the northern point, and a reef nearly 200 yards long, with 14 feet of 
water over the shoalest part, hes 100 yards from the southwestern 
coast of Gull island. When passing through the channel between 
North and Gull islands, keep about one-third of the breadth from 
North island. 

Triangle harbor is entered northward of Triangle island, which 
bears northwestward 4} mile from the northern end of Gull island, 
through a passage 45 yards wide, which opens into two coves } mile 
deep and 200 yards broad, affording good anchorage for small craft 
in 64 fathoms of water, mud bottom. The shores, on which are 
several houses, are bold-to, except at the southern turning point into 
the eastern cove, close off which is a rock. The entrance is sometimes 
completely blocked by an iceberg. 

Cape Bluff harbor is entered northeastward of Pigeon island, 
which lies northward, distant 800 yards from the northern end of Gull 
island and westward 1 mile from the southern end of cape Bluff; the 
harbor extends inland 14 miles nearly, with a breadth of about 700 
yards, and then divides into two arms. The southwestern arm is 250 
yards across and a long shallow inlet runs southeastward from it; 
it affords good anchorage for small vessels in 9 to 12 fathoms of 
water, mud bottom. The northern arm is narrow and 4 mile long. 


CAPE BLUFF—SNUG HARBOR. 673 


Harbor islets, a small group, the highest of which is 56 feet high, 
lie in the middle of the harbor at 1,350 yards from the entrance; foul 
ground extends northwestward a short distance from them, falling 
suddenly to deep water. A rock, with 10 feet of water over it, lies 
eastward 65 yards from the islets, and a shoal, on which the depth is 
15 feet, lies in mid-channel between these islets and the southwestern 
shore of the harbor. 

There is anchorage for large vessels in 16 to 20 fathoms of water, 
northwestward of Harbor islets, which is reached by the eastern chan- 
nel, keeping nearer the mainland than the islets. 

Cape Bluff, a prominent headland situated northward, distant 9 
miles from Main cape of cape St. Michael, rises steeply to a double- 
peaked hill 719 and 695 feet high, ending in steep cliffs. The south- 
ern end of the cape is a small rocky peninsula 110 feet high, that 
shelters an open cove 300 yards in extent. 

The coast from cape Bluff trends northward 34 miles to Southern 
head. 

Gull island, northward 1% miles from cape Bluff, is 70 feet high, 
white in color, and shows well against the dark cliffs of the mainland. 
A rock, that covers 3 feet at high water, hes 100 yards southeastward 
of Gull island, and there is shoal water for a short distance southeast- 
ward of it. 

Shoals.—Gull rock, with 7 feet water over it, bears 99°, distant 
1,250 yards, and Matthews bank, with 3 fathoms of water over it, 
bears 127°, distant 1 mile from Gull island; these are small pinnacles 
with deep water around. 

Long Point bank, with 10 fathoms of water over it, bears 48°, dis- 
tant # mile; Small Skelligs, with 8 fathoms of water over it, bears 
40°, distant 144 miles; and Large Skelligs, with 7 fathoms of water 
over it, bears 34°, distant 14 miles, respectively, from the summit of 
Gull island; all these banks break in heavy weather. 

Snug harbor, entered westward of Murray point, the end of a 
small conical hill 78 feet high and situated northwestward 1 mile 
from Southern head, affords only indifferent anchorage, the water 
being 24 fathoms deep in the wide part of the harbor and shoaling 
only near the rocks. The entrance is 250 yards wide, inside which the 
harbor expands into a basin 600 yards across, from the southeastern 
end of which an arm, 250 yards broad, extends 900 yards. The south- 
western side of the basin is encumbered with islets and shoals, the 
latter extending in a bar from the first point on the western shore 
within the entrance to the southwestern islet, and rendering that por- 
tion of the harbor unfit for anchorage. Icebergs frequently drift in. 

A rock, with 12 feet of water over it, lies southwestward nearly 100 

76846—09——_43 


674 EAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


yards from Murray point, and a rock, with 6 feet of water over it, lies 
100 yards off a small indentation on the western shore abreast it. 

There are several houses on the shores of the harbor, and large sea 
trout can be caught. - 

Cooper island, situated 3} miles northward of cape Bluff, is 14 
miles long, northward and southward, about ? mile broad, and 474 
feet high. The southern end is the Coopers block, a square rock, 
which, with the eastern side of the island, is steep-to. 

Delaney cove extends south-southwestward 4 mile into the eastern 
side of the island and is 4 mile wide at the entrance; it narrows 
gradually to the head, and affords shelter for a few boats only, under 
the lee of the fishing stages erected at the head, but a heavy swell rolls 
into it with northeasterly gales. There are some houses at the head 
of this cove, and also at Green cove on the western coast; the latter 
being an open beach with a few low rocks lying close to the shore. 

Gray rocks, awash at high water, le 300 yards off the northern 
coast of Cooper island, and are nearly joined to it by a ledge, with 9 
feet of water over it, at the southern end. 

Gray Rock shoal, with 11 feet of water over it, bears 17°, distant 
350 yards from Gray rocks, and in the fairway between Snug harbor 
and Venison tickle. 

Banger island, separated from the western side of Cooper island 
by a channel 4+ mile wide, is 97 feet high; rocks extend a short dis- 
tance both from the eastern side and the southeastern point. 

Pot rock, with 44 fathoms of water over it, lies nearly 200 yards 
from Cooper island and between it and the southeastern point of 
Banger island. 

Dark Tickle island is separated from the northern side of Banger 
island by a shallow channel 100 yards wide. A small black rock 
lies off the eastern point, and a small rock, that covers 3 feet, lies 
150 yards off the island, bearing south-southeastward, distant 450 
yards from its northern point. 

Lord arm, entered southwestward of Dark Tickle island and be- 
tween it and the mainland, is an open bay, 700 yards across, with 
depths of 19 to 25 fathoms of water, from which a shallow cove ex- 
tends northward and an arm southwestward. The arm is nearly 1 
mile long and 150 yards wide at the entrance, expanding to 500 yards 
within. There are two small rocks that cover 4 feet, close off the 
northwestern shore at 3 mile within the entrance, and a fringe of 
bowlders, that covers at high water, on the southeastern shore at 
4 mile from the entrance, 

Macy tickle, northward of Dark Tickle island and between it and 
the mainland, is 150 yards wide, and clear in mid-channel. Two 
small spits of rock which cover extend a short distance from the 
mainland. 


STONY ISLAND—VENISON TICKLE. 675 


An island, 55 feet high, lies north-northeastward, 600 yards from 
the northern entrance to Macy tickle, and several rocks lie between 
this island and the mainland to the westward. 

Macy island, 53 feet high, hes northeastward 400 yards from the 
northern point of Dark Tickle island. 

Car-na-bhus (the crooked mouth) island, about 100 feet high, les 
northeastward 300 yards from Macy island. Shoals extend north- 
westward 400 yards from this island; the points of Macy tickle open, 
bearing 223°, leads northwestward of them. 

The Knob, a small rock with 54 fathoms of water over it, bears 
138°, distant 200 yards from the eastern end of Car-na-bhus island. 

Deepwater island, northwestward, $ mile from Car-na-bhus, is 87 
feet high and small, and there is a low islet off its southwestern side. 

Stony island, northward about 1 mile from Cooper island, is 44 
miles long, northward and southward, with a greatest width of about 
‘94 miles. The summit, 670 feet high, is at the northern end of the 
island and northward of the entrance to Wild bight; there is a hill 
656 feet high southward of Wild bight and northwestward of the 
entrance to Cox cove. Cooper head, the southern end of the island, 
rises to a cone 403 feet high; a reef extends nearly 200 yards from 
the head. 

Black rock, 250 yards off the southeastern side of Cooper head, is 
2 feet high, and a rock that covers hes close to its southern end. 
Shark rock, with 7 feet of water over it, lies northward 300 yards 
from Black rock and south-southwestward nearly 600 yards from 
White island. 

Tub harbor, on the southwestern side of Stony island and north- 
westward 1 mile from Cooper head, is small, but affords snug anchor- 
age to vessels of less than 200 tons; it has two entrances, but both are 
intricate and should not be attempted without a pilot. There are 
several fishing stages to which vessels moor. 

A rock awash lies off the southern entrance; a rock, which always 
shows, at the northern side of the southern entrance; and a short 
distance northwestward of the latter is a rock which only breaks in 
heavy weather. ; 

Venison tickle.—Venison island, on the eastern side of Stony 
island, is 1,400 yards long, northward and southward, about + mile 
wide, and 224 feet high. On the summit is a flagstaff, about which 
is a conspicuous white boarding. 

Venison tickle, the narrow passage between Venison and Stony 
islands. is sheltered from all winds and is much used by fishing craft, 
both as a channel and anchorage. The southern entrance is 50 yards 
wide, and 24 fathoms water can be carried through it, but it should 
not be attempted in a vessel drawing more than 12 feet. The depth 
at the northern entrance is 8 fathoms, whence the water gradually 
shoals to 24 fathoms at the southern end. 


676 EAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


There is a large fishing establishment in the tickle, with a wharf, 
alongside which there is a depth of nearly 3 fathoms. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Venison tickle at 
6h. 47m.; springs rise 53 feet, neaps 4 feet. 

Communication.—The Labrador steamer to and from St. Johns, 
via Battle harbor, calls at Venison tickle fortnightly during summer. 
There is a wireless telegraph station at Venison tickle, which can 
receive from a distance of about 100 miles. 

Cod rock, with 7 feet of water over it, bears 285°, distant 400 yards 
from the southern point of Venison island. The western points of 
the tickle, just open off the eastern points, so that the tickle is seen 
through, bearing 15°, leads westward 135 yards from Cod rock. 

King rock bears 79°, distant 900 yards from the southern point of 
Venison island, and breaks in moderate weather. 

Queen rock, bears 168°, distant nearly 200 yards from King rock, 
and has 15 feet of water over it. 

The southern end of White Shot island open eastward of Sculpin 
island, bearing 22°, leads eastward of the King and Queen. 

Fox and Pigeon islands, which are almost connected, le east- 
ward of the northern end of Venison island. 

Gun rocks, just southward of Fox island, are low, black, and 
bold-to. 

Sculpin island, eastward of Fox island, and separated from it by 
a clear channel 350 yards wide, is 69 feet high, and steep-to on the 
western and eastern sides. A rock hes off the southern point, and 
rocks and reefs extend northward, 300 yards from the island. 

White Shot island, north-northeastward { mile from Sculpin 
island and midway between that island and Eddystone island, is 18 
feet high. 

Shoals extend northwestward nearly 200 yards from the island. 

Eddystone island, northeastward + mile from White Shot island, 
and the northeasternmost of the group extending from Venison 
island, is 20 feet high and appears as a round black lump. A rock, 
awash at high water, hes close southwestward of Eddystone island, 
and a shoal, with 43 fathoms of water over it, bears 158°, distant 
150 yards from its eastern end. 

The passages between Sculpin and Eddystone islands should not be 
used for navigation. 

Hen island, 20 feet high, from which Chickens rocks extend north- 
northeastward nearly 200 yards, hes west-northwestward, 600 yards 
from Eddystone island. 

The Skerries, a rocky bank with 4 fathoms least water over it, 
bears 17°, distant 1 mile from the eastern point of Eddystone island. 

Venison island flagstaff in line with the southern end of Hen 
island, bearing 228°, leads 200. yards southeastward of the Skerries; 


WILD BIGHT—TRANSPORT ISLAND. 677 


and Fox and Hen islands, touching and bearing 203°, lead between 
the Skerries and White point. 

Wild bight, situated on the northern side of White point, affords 
shelter for a few boats, but a heavy sea rolls in there with easterly 
winds, destroying the fishing stages, and even sweeping away the 
houses on its shores. 

Red island, north-northeastward, distant 1 mile from White point, 
is 83 feet high, and has a double summit. 

Hawke island, separated from the northern side of Stony island 
by a channel 1,200 yards wide, rises in several craggy hills of dark 
rock, the highest of which are 532 to 477 feet high, with numerous 
bowlders over both summits and slopes. 

Hawke harbor, on the southern coast, affords good anchorage in 
10 fathoms of water, mud bottom, within some rocks that le across 
the passage about + mile from the head. The western channel is 
clear, but the eastern is shallow. 

Styles harbor, at the southeastern end of the island, is within a 
small peninsula 80 feet high, joined by a narrow neck to the main- 
land. The harbor extends northwestward 200 yards, and then turns 
sharply southwestward for 500 yards, with a breadth of 100 yards, 
and it affords excellent sheltered anchorage for fishing craft in 2 
fathoms of water. 

The Pig, a rock 1 foot high, bears 220°, distant } mile from the 
entrance to Styles harbor; and Harbor island, 14 feet high, hes 
southeastward 300 yards from the same entrance. 

Mad Moll, with 6 feet of water over it and deep water around, 
bears 197°, distant 450 yards from Harbor island. The white islet 
at the western entrance point to Hawke harbor in line with Pig rock, 
bearing 287°, leads southward; the western end of Transport island, 
open westward of Harbor island, bearing 19°, leads westward; and 
open eastward of Harbor island, bearing 359°, leads eastward of this 
rock. 

Black rock, bearing 87°, distant 400 yards from Harbor island, is 
8 feet high, and steep-to. 

In entering or leaving Styles harbor pass on either side of Harbor 
island or Black rock. 

Styles rock, with 3 fathoms of water over it, bears 160°, distant 
700 yards from Black rock, and the water deepens quickly southeast- 
ward and northwestward of it. White point, well open eastward of 
Red island, bearing 202°, leads eastward; and the tolt on White point, 
open westward of Red island, bearing 205°, leads westward of this 
rock. 

_ Transport island, separated from the southeastern end of Hawke 
island by a channel 50 yards wide, through which a depth of 12 feet 
can be carried, is 116 feet high. 


678 EAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


Musket islet, a white bare rock, 25 feet high, lies northeastward 
400 yards from Transport island. Low rocks extend southwestward, 
and a reef southeastward a little more than 200 yards from it. 

Outer Musket rock, with 9 feet of water over it, bears 76°, distant 
450 yards from Musket islet. 

Holloway bight, northwestward $ mile from Transport island, is 
1,650 yards deep, $ mile wide at the mouth, and open to easterly winds 
that in early summer nearly fill it with icebergs, as the water is deep. 
There is no anchorage except with westerly winds, and these sweep 
down in heavy squalls. 

A group of islets extends northward from off this bight to the east- 
ern end of Hawke island, and no attempt should be made to pass 
between them and that island, except with local knowledge. 

Upper Bird island, 29 feet high, flat and bare, is situated close off 
the northern point of Holloway bight. Low rocks extend northwest- 
ward and northeastward, and a sunken rock, bearing 31°, distant 350 
yards from Upper Bird island, ends the group. 

Deepwater island, north-northeastward 1? miles from Transport 
island, is two bare rocky hillocks joined by a low neck across which 
the sea breaks; the western and higher hillock is 47 feet high. South- 
eastward of this island is a low black rock with a rock awash close to 
its northeastern end; two small islets lie close southwestward. 

Bird island, northwestward of Deepwater island and separated 
from Hawke island by a narrow channel through which only boats 
can pass, is a bare dark round hill, 66 feet high. A small cove on the 
southeastern side of the island affords good shelter for boats, and 
small vessels find fair summer anchorage southwestward of this island 
in 34 fathoms of water, but a heavy sea rolls in with easterly gales. 
An islet, 8 feet high, lies southeastward 200 yards from Bird island, 
and a rock that covers at high water lies close northwestward of the 
island. 

Black rock, northwestward 200 yards from Deepwater island, is 
1 foot high, and shoal water extends northeastward and southwest- 
ward 100 yards from it. 

Beckett rock is 4 feet high, with deep water southeastward and 
northeastward of it. 

In proceeding to Bird island anchorage pass close northwestward 
of Deepwater island, and then in mid-channel between Bird island 
and the islet close southeastward of it. | 

Kennedy island, the highest of a group nearly joined to one 
another, and separated by a narrow shoal channel from Penguin 
head, the northeastern point of Hawke island, is 77 feet high. 

Turr rocks comprise a brown bare islet in two parts, 16 feet high, 
lying northeastward 700 yards from Penguin head, and a black islet 
7 feet high, bearing 92°, distant 335 yards from the brown islet. 


SCRAPE COVE—STAG ISLAND. 679 


AL rock, with 4 feet of water over it, bears 219°, distant 550 
yards from the eastern Turr rock. Bear island, open on one side of 
the western Turr rock, leads westward, and open on the other side, 
leads eastward of it. A shoal, with 6 fathoms of water over it, bears 
121°, distant 250 yards from the eastern Turr rock, and a rock with 
12 feet of water over it bears 28°, distant 200 yards from the western 
Turr rock. 

Scrape cove, northwestward 700 yards from Penguin head, is 1,100 
yards deep and 700 yards wide at the entrance. The shores are bold 
crags and the water is too deep for anchorage; rocks that cover le 
in the cove at 200 yards from the northwestern entrance point. 

Penguin harbor, northwestward about $ mile from Scrape cove, 
is divided into two arms by Greens island, a rugged dark cliffy conical 
hill 124 feet high. The southeastern arm is open, but the northwest- 
ern arm is $ mile deep, 150 yards wide and affords anchorage for fish- 
ing craft in 3 to 5 fathoms of water; there is also excellent shelter 
for boats. 

Harper island, northwestward 1,100 yards from Greens island, 
and separated from Hawke island at high water by a narrow channel 
filled with bowlders, is 216 feet high. 

There is anchorage, in 8 fathoms, off a small islet northwestward of 
the channel between Hawke and Harper islands. 

Bear island, the southeastern island of a group lying parallel to 
the northeastern coast of Hawke island, is 88 feet high. A bare flat 
rock just above high water lies close off the southeastern end. 

A rock, with 7 feet of water over it, bears 137°, distant about 600 
yards, and a rock, with 4 feet of water over it, bears 182°, distant 400 
yards, from the rock at the southern end of Bear island. Harper 
island, well open southward of Stag island, bearing about 284°, leads 
southwestward; the eastern point of Holloway bight seen between 
Turr rocks, bearing 196°, leads eastward; and Fish point, well open 
northeastward of Bear island, bearing 309°, leads northeastward of 
these rocks. 

Stag island les westward 150 yards from Bear island, with a 
clear channel between; its summits are two hills, separated by a 
deep ravine, the eastern 294 feet and the western 291 feet high. Duck 
cove, near the northwestern end, is shallow and suitable for boats 
only. 

Old Jeff island, westward 100 yards from Stag island, rises 
steeply to its summit, which is flat and 135 feet high. A white house 
stands a short distance up the hill on the northeastern side. Bowlders 
extend a short distance off the eastern side, and a bank, with less than 
3 fathoms of water over it, extends 135 yards from the southeastern 
point. 


680 EAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


Boulter Rock anchorage.—Boulter rock, small, flat, and bare, 
with a red house at the top, lies just eastward of the northern part 
of, and is joined at low water to, Old Jeff island. The anchorage 
northwestward of this rock and between Stag and Big islands affords 
shelter from all winds, during summer, in 4 to 9 fathoms of water, 
but during the heavy gales of autumn it is not safe with winds be- 
tween northwesterly and northeasterly directions. 

A rock lies close to the shore under the cliff northeastward of the 
anchorage. 

Big island, close northwestward of Old Jeff island, rises in three 
ranges divided by deep valleys, the summit, 254 feet high, being 
at the southwestern end of the middle range. 

Northeast rock, with 12 feet of water over it, lies 185 yards north- 
eastward of the eastern point of Big island and 150 yards from the 
northwestern coast of Flat island. The white house on Old Jeff . 
island, well open southeastward of Big island, bearing about 227°, 
leads southeastward; and Red island, open northward of Flat island, 
bearing 104°, leads northward of this rock. 

Locks rock, with 3 fathoms of water over it, hes 135 yards off the 
northern point of Big island. 

A rock, with 1 foot of water over it, bears 182°, distant 550 vards, 
from the western point of Big island, leaving a clear passage, 250 
yards wide, between it and the island. 

Caplin bay, entered between Stag and Harper islands, is con- 
nected with Hawke bay by Deer pass (locally Squasho run, a channel 
between Hawke island and the mainland. 

Off the northwestern point of Hawke island or the northeastern 
entrance point of Deer pass there is a small island, and bearing 300°, 
distant 200 yards from the northwestern end of this island, is a rocky 
shoal 15 yards across, with 2 feet of water over it and steep-to. 

Deer pass.—There is fair anchorage in a small cove on the western 
shore of this pass, just within the entrance from Caplin bay, in 15 
fathoms of water, mud bottom. 

Hill harbor, a bight in the mainland northwestward of Big 
island, is 800 yards deep, 250 yards broad, and clear except near the 
head; it affords good anchorage in 4 to 10 fathoms of water, mud 
bottom. 

The Hump, a shoal with 42 fathoms of water over it, bears 47°, 
distant 800 yards from the northern point of Big island, and is dis- 
tant 550 yards from the mainland. 

The Feather bed, a rocky patch with two heads and 7 feet least 
water over it, bears 47°, distant 1,400 yards from the northern point 
of Big island and 700 yards off shore. 

Bear island, open eastward of Red island, bearing about 168°, 
leads eastward of the Hump and Feather Bed. 


COX HEAD—PENNY HARBOR. = GS 


Salt pond, northeastward 1% miles from Hill harbor, is a creek 
extending northward 500 yards from the narrow entrance, with a 
breadth of 65 yards. It is suitable for small vessels. The entrance 
is clear, but the violent squalls and eddying winds that sweep down 
from the surrounding hills should be prepared for. 

Cox head, northeastward 1,100 yards from Salt Pond entrance, is 
the southern slope of a conspicuous dark wedge-shaped hill, the sum- 
mit of which, 282 feet high, falls steeply eastward to the sea. 

Comfort head, the northern slope of the wedge-shaped hill, has 
numerous rocks and shoals lying within a distance of 14 miles off it, 
and this area after northeasterly gales appears a mass of breakers. 
Black rock, the northeasternmost of this group of rocks, is 16 feet 
high, and surrounded by banks, all of which break in heavy weather. 
The positions of these rocks and shoals are marked on the chart. In 
fine weather there is a good channel for moderate-sized vessels in- 
side all. 

Rocks—Clearing mark.—The summit of Hawke island over the 
channel between Bear and Stag islands, bearing 205°, leads eastward 
of the rocks and shoals lying off Cox and Comfort heads. 

Comfort bight is the deep inlet between Comfort head and 
Partridge head, which bears 355°, distant 14 miles from it. The 
bight contains a large bay, and two good harbors for small craft 
sheltered by small islands, and much frequented by fishing vessels. 

Sprackling island, close northwestward of Comfort head, is 83 
feet high, dark and conical, with two small islets westward of it, all 
connected together and to the mainland by shoals and rocks. 

George harbor, southwestward of the two small islets, is 600 yards 
in extent and nearly 200 yards wide at the entrance, narrowing grad- 
ually to the head. A rock with 6 feet of water over it les just 
within the western head in the line of the western points; otherwise 
the harbor is clear except close to the shore. 

The harbor affords anchorage in 4 fathoms of water, mud bottom, 
but a heavy sea rolls in with the autumnal northerly gales. 

Owl Head island is 194 feet high; its coasts are steep cliffs, except 
the southwestern, from which it rises gradually. There is a flag- 
staff on the island. 

Burke island, southwestward of Owl Head island, and separated 
from the mainland on the southern side by a narrow channel suitable 
for small craft only, is 112 feet high, and dark. 

Penny Harbor entrance, between Owl Head and Burke islands, 
is 150 yards wide, and from it the harbor trends southward between 
Burke island and the mainland westward of it, but, as there are 
several rocks in this part, do not anchor southwestward of a small 
black rock, just above high water, lying close under a conical hill 
150 feet high on the northwestern shore. Harbor rock, that covers 


682 EAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


about 2 feet at high water, is situated about 50 yards off Burke 
island, and Black rock shut in northward of Owl Head island, 
bearing about 88°, leads northward of it. This mark leads to the 
anchorage in 54 fathoms of water, over mud bottom and good 
holding ground. 

Saunders island lies north-northwestward, distant 300 yards from 
the western end of Owl Head island, and a point of the mainland 
projects partly between them. 

Rocky bay extends west-southwestward about 1 mile from 
Saunders island, and is 600 yards wide at the entrance, and some- 
what wider inside. The bay is clear except at a short distance off 
the islands at the head and near the shores. At the head are two 
coves, the southern of which is shoal. 

The bay affords anchorage, sheltered except from easterly winds, 
in 14 fathoms, mud bottom, in the middle, and for small vessels in 
the western cove, at the head, in 9 fathoms. 

Three islands are three islands extending north-northeastward 
600 yards along the northern entrance head of Comfort bight, north- 
ward of Owl Head island; a shoal, with 14 fathoms of water over it, 
lies southward about 300 yards from the southwestern of these island. 

The Sugarloaf, a dark conical island, 163 feet high, hes 400 yards 
southeastward of the southern point of Partridge head, and is sur- 
rounded by shoals, except at the southern point, which is bold-to. 

Tommy rocks are three shoals on a bank extending south-south- 
westward nearly 800 yards from a position 200 yards off the western 
end of the Sugarloaf. The channel between this bank and Three 
islands is narrowed to 300 yards. The western point of Hiscock 
island, touching Partridge head, bearing pene 23°, leads between 
Tommy rocks and the mainland. 

Bobby rocks, bearing 104°, distant 900 Buick from the southern 
end of the Sugarloaf, are two round islets and some small and flat 
rocks, the highest being 15 feet high. 

Directions.—Approach Comfort bight in heavy weather with the 
summit of Hawke island open eastward of Bear island, until Bobby 
rocks are in line with the summit of the Sugarloaf, bearing 293°. 
Pass northward of Bobby rocks and southward 200 yards from the 
Sugarloaf, to clear Jersey bank, which bears 149°, distant about 
400 yards from the Sugarloaf, has 8 fathoms of water over it, and 
breaks in heavy weather. Thence steer for Owl head and enter 
George harbor, Penny harbor, or Rocky bay. In moderate weather, 
with local knowledge, vessels pass southeastward 200 yards from 
Black rock, steering for Owl head, but Planter shoal, with 3 fathoms 
of water over it, on the northern side of the track, and a shoal with 
14 fathoms over it, bearing 25°, distant 4 mile from Comfort head, 
on the southern side, must be avoided. 


PARTRIDGE HEAD-—DUCK ISLANDS. 683 


Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Comfort bight at 
7h. 38m.; springs rise 54 feet, neaps 23 feet. 

Partridge head rises steeply to a remarkable tabe-topped hill, 551 
feet high. The northern part of the head is a sharp conical hill, 
406 feet high, separated from the main hill by a deep valley which 
shows well from the southeastward. 

American cove, north-northwestward about 1 mile from the 
southern end of Partridge head, is a narrow boat creek, with some 
houses around its shores. 

Partridge bay, the entrance to which is northward about 600 
yards from American cove, extends southwestward about 14 miles, 
and an arm runs northwestward 24 miles from it. The survey of the 
bay is old and incomplete. 

The northern entrance point of the bay is a low grassy hummock, 24 
feet high, rising gradually to a high wooded:summit. A rock, with 
7 feet of water over it, lies southwestward 100 yards from this point. 

Red island, north-northeastward 4 mile from the northern end of 
Partridge head, and the westernmost of a group of islands covered 
with grass over reddish rock, is small, 55 feet high, and bold-to on the 
northwestern and southwestern sides. 

A low black islet lies close to its eastern end, and at 100 yards 
farther northeastward is a similar islet, from which is a rock, with S 
feet of water over it, bearing 5°, distant 100 yards. 

The channel between ee islets is deep, and ordinarily used by 
the local fishing craft. Bobby rocks seen between the two black islets, 
bearing about 166°, clears the 8-foot rock. 

Flat island, eastward + mile from Red island, is 65 feet high, and 
a small round islet lies eastward a short distance from its southeastern 
point. 

A shoal, with 43 fathoms of water over it, bears 180°, distant nearly 
200 yards from the southern point of Flat island; and Flat Island 
bank, with 6 feet of water over its shoalest part, northeastward 150 
yards from the northern point. 

Flat Island rock, with 5 feet of water over it, bears 112°, distant 4 
mile from the southern point of Flat island and nearly in midchannel 
between that island and Duck islands. 

Duck islands, eastward 600 yards from Flat island, consist of 
three principal and several smaller islands and rocks, with no naviga- 
ble passage between them, except with local knowledge. 

Duck island, the largest, has a round hill, 99 feet high, at its north- 
eastern end; the island rises in steep cliffs to the southeastward, and 
form rugged points on the northwestern side. ; 

Little Duck island, the northeasternmost and darkest of the group, 
is 51 feet high. A rock, awash at low water, lies southeastward nearly 
200 yards from Little Duck island, and a shoal, with 7 feet of water 
over it, southward 100 yards from the rock. 


684 EAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


Hiscock islands comprise a group situated northward of Duck 
islands, with a good channel between. 

Eastern islands, the eastern part of this group, are three bare 
rocks, the northernmost and highest of which is 24 feet high. 

A rock, with 9 feet of water over it, bears 74°, distant 150 yards 
from the highest island. 

Fling islands are situated 200 yards from Eastern islands, the 
highest being 141 feet high. 

Webber rock, with 13 feet of water over it, lies eastward 250 yards 
from the southern point of these islands. 

Big Pig island, 86 feet high and bare, les northward 300 yards 
from Fling islands; and Crocker island, small and low, is close east- 
ward of it. 

Mad Moll lies in mid-channel between Fling and Big Pig islands, 
and covers 1 foot at high water. Small vessels pass in the middle of 
the passages on either side of this rock. 

Hiscock island lies westward about 200 yards from the Fling 
islands, and its eastern coast rises in a dark serrated cone, to the 
height of 147 feet; there is a small cove on the northern coast, where 
a few fishermen are established; the channel between Hiscock and 
Fling islands is clear. 

Walker island, the northwesternmost of the group, separated 
from Hiscock island by a narrow shallow channel, is 107 feet high, 
dark, and pyramidal in shape; the northern coast is steep-to. 

Nancy island, lying westward 350 yards from Hiscock island, 
with a clear passage between, is 12 feet high and flat. 

Hare island, west-northwestward, 350 yards from Walker island, 
is 209 feet high. A rock, that covers, les a short distance off a cove 
on the southern side, and a small narrow islet, 22 feet high, lies close 
off the northeastern side. Inside of this island some rocks extend off 
Hare island. 

Little Hare island lies close northwestward of Hare island; and 
Green islands, northward, nearly 400 yards from Little Hare island, 
comprise a long rock and a conical mound 22 feet high, joined by 
rocks, and covered with grass, with foul ground extending 100 yards 
from all sides except the northeastern. The passage between these 
and Little Hare island should not be taken. 

An islet, 12 feet high, lies westward, 600 yards from the western 
side of Hare island; it is bold-to, except that a reef extends north- 
northeastward nearly 100 yards from it. 

Gulnare islands are two islands separated from the mainland 
westward of Hare island by a clear channel 150 yards wide. The 
southern island is 107 feet high, and a small white islet lies close off 
its southwestern point. 


TICKLE ISLAND——COPPER ISLAND. 685 


The northern island is barren in patches and rises in two dark 
conical hills, the northwestern of which is 157 feet high. 

A bay, situated westward of the northern of these islands, extends 
4 mile to the westward, narrowing gradually to the head from a 
width of 900 yards at the entrance, and affords good anchorage in 
10 fathoms of water, mud bottom. 

A bank, about 200 yards across, with 6 feet of water over it, lies in 
the middle of the bay, bearing 300°, distant + mile from the northern 
point of the northern Gulnare island, and there is no passage for a 
large vessel southwestward of it. A shoal, with 44 fathoms of water 
over it, bears 194°, distant 150 yards from the northeastern entrance 
point. 

Tickle island, northward about 400 yards from the northern 
Gulnare island and with its northern end joined to the mainland at 
low water, rises to a dark hill, 66 feet high, near the northern end, 
and steeply to a lower hill near the southeastern end. Between these 
hills is a low marsh, joining the heads of two shallow coves that 
enter each side. A rock, that covers, lies 100 yards off the western 
side, and a shoal lies a short distance off the southern point, but the 
eastern side is steep-to. 

Frenchman run is the passage between Gulnare islands and the 
mainland, on the northern and western sides, and Hare, Copper, and 
the islands northward to Corbet island, on the southern and eastern 
sides. This channel, much used in the early part of summer when 
ice blocks the outer tracks, is well sheltered and contains several 
anchorages. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Frenchman run at 
Th. 13m.; springs rise 54 feet, neaps 3 feet. 

Frenchman harbor, the entrance to which is immediately north- 
eastward of the northern end of Tickle island, extends 800 yards 
northward, and is 400 yards wide at the entrance. It narrows grad- 
ually to the head, and is clear of shoals except close to the shore. It 
affords anchorage for small vessels in 6 to 12 fathoms of water. 

The coast of the mainland eastward of the harbor is fringed by 
bowlders, and rises at 600 to 800 yards inland to a barren round hill 
282 feet high. At about 1,200 yards from the harbor is a steep bluff, 
rising to a peaked hill 188 feet high, and here the coast turns north- 
ward. 

A rocky bank about 100 yards across, with 2 feet of water over it, 
lies southeastward 300 yards from the bluff. 

Anchorage can be obtained, in 14 fathoms of. water, between 
Copper island and the mainland. 

Copper island.—The western end of Copper island lies about 200 
yards eastward of Tickle island, and Copper island extends thence 
east-southeastward for 14 miles, with an average width of 4 mile; 


686 EAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


it rises in a range of hills, the summit of which, near the northeastern 
end, is a small cone above the general flat outline and 193 feet high. 
The eastern end rises abruptly in a reddish cliff. Rocks lie a short 
distance off the points. 

Fish island, eastward about 200 yards from the eastern point of 
Copper island, is 91 feet high, and rocks, 1 to 12 feet high, lie at the 
distance of about 150 yards around its northwestern end. 

Sugarloaf islet, 92 feet high, is nearly joined to the northeastern 
side of Copper island, leaving a passage between only suitable for 
boats. 

Seine island, north-northeastward 300 yards from Sugarloaf, is 
conical, 47 feet high, covered with grass, and nearly divided by two 
coves, around the southern of which are a few houses. 

Frenchman island, northwestward 200 yards from Seine island, 
and separated by a passage through which 4? fathoms of water can 
be carried, is 80 feet high at the southern end, and there is a gray 
round hill about 50 feet high at the northern end. 

Sullivan island, separated by a shallow channel, 100 yards wide, 
from the northern part of the eastern side of Frenchman island, is 
82 feet high. The passage between this and the islands to the east- 
ward is clear. 

Seal islands, a group 24 miles long in a north-northwesterly and 
south-southeasterly direction, lying eastward of Fish, Seine, and 
Sullivan islands, comprise three principal and numerous smaller 
islands and rocks. 

The Ravens, the southeastern islands of the group, are several low 
rocks; the highest being 18 feet high. No-man-land shoal, with 16 
feet of water over it, bears 154°, distant 250 yards from the south- 
western Raven, and shoals extend from the other rocks. 

There is a clear passage northwestward of the Ravens and close 
to Long island. 

The Pippies are three shoals situated } mile southward of the 
Ravens. The middle shoal, with 64 fathoms of water over it, bears 
196°, distant 1,300 yards from the southeastern Raven; and from the 
middle shoal the northwestern shoal, with 8 fathoms of water over 
it, bears 284°, distant 300 yards, and the southeastern shoal, with 9 
fathoms of water over it, bears 135°, distant 500 yards. 

Long island lies northwestward of the Ravens, and its flat summit, 
104 feet high, is near the southern end; there are several smaller 
elevations toward the northern end; its coasts generally are steep-to. 

Crow island, 50 yards off the northeastern end of Long island, is 
78 feet high, and appears as a sharp cone on northerly and southerly 
bearings; there are some sunken rocks close off its southern end. 


POLLO ROCK—-THE BRANDIES. 687 


Crow island rocks are two shoals, with 11 feet of water over them, 
lying eastward 300 yards from Crow island, and 135 yards apart, 
northward and southward. 

Pollo rock, lying 700 yards eastward of the middle of Long 
island, is round, black, and 9 feet high. 

Pollo sunkers, south-southwestward 100 yards from Pollo rock, 
are always marked by breakers. 

American island, westward of Long island, has some flagstaffs 
and several white houses on the shores of a cove on its eastern side; 
this cove affords anchorage for small vessels in 3 fathoms of water, 
sand bottom; a shoal lies close off the northern point of the cove. A 
rock lies a short distance westward of the southern point of the island, 
and a rock, awash at low water, off the northwestern point. 

American tickle, the passage between Long and American 
islands, is about 100 yards wide at its narrowest part and may be 
taken by vessels drawing less than 18 feet of water by keeping close 
to Long island. 

Seal island, north-northwestward of American island, is covered 
with ranges of dark hills, the highest near the southern end being 
135 feet high. On the northern hill is a flagstaff, 98 feet above high 
water. 

Wireless telegraph.—There is a wireless telegraph station at 
Seal island. 

Seal Island harbor, a bight in the southern coast of the island, 
is only suitable for small vessels, which le within a peninsula, con- 
nected to the western side of the bight by a narrow isthmus. Rocks, 
with 2 feet of water over them, lie off the northern point of the 
peninsula, leaving a narrow passage on each side of the rocks, with a 
depth of 15 feet in the southern, and 9 feet in the northern. A shallow 
lagoon close within the head of the harbor enters the sea on the 
western coast of the island. Several white houses, occupied by per- 
manent settlers, surround this harbor. 

Hills harbor, on the eastern coast of Seal island at $ mile from its 
northern end and within one large and several smaller islands, is only 
adapted for a few small vessels. The southern entrance is barred by 
rocks, but the northern is clear. 

Gull island, 27 feet high, lies southeastward about 400 yards from 
the southern entrance to the harbor. There is a small rock close to 
its southeastern side. 

The Brandies, eastward, nearly 200 yards from Gull island, is a 
rocky bank, 300 yards long, in a north-northwesterly and south- 
southeasterly direction, with two heads, each with 7 feet of water 
over it. A small rock bears 92°, distant 500 yards from Gull island, 
and has 12 feet of water over it. 


688 EAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


Matthews tickle, with 3 fathoms of water, and a snug place for a 
few small craft, is formed by two islands at the northern end of Seal 
island; a rock lies close off the western side of the larger island. 

A bank, with 44 fathoms of water over it, lies northward, distant 
250 yards from the northern end of Seal island. 

Pike island, 40 feet high and dark in color, is nearly joined to the 
western point of Seal island, and forms a sheltered place for fishing 
boats. 

Parsons island, 250 yards off Seal island, and northward 450 
yards from Little Pig island, is 26 feet high, and covered with grass 
over gray rock. Anchorage may be obtained southeastward of this 
island, in 11 fathoms, sheltered from northerly winds, and between 
the reef off Seine island and Frenchman island, in 11 to 16 fathoms 
of water, sheltered from all other winds. 

Davis rock, with 7 feet of water on it, bears 11°, distant 350 yards 
from the northwestern Seal islet (westward of Seal island). Seine 
island, open westward of these islets, bearing 177°, leads westward; 
and Black rock, touching the southern point of Dog island, bearing 
45°, leads northwestward of this rock. 

Flat island.—Several islands lie eastward of the northern end of 
Seal island, the two western islands being 45 and 59 feet high. Flat 
island, the third from Seal island, is 46 feet high. Sculpin rocks, 
which cover 3 feet at high water, and nearly always show by break- 
ers, represent the termination of a chain of rocks extending south- 
southeastward 600 yards from Flat island. Sleepy island, about 200 
yards northeastward of Flat island, is 40 feet high. 

Local craft, proceeding to the anchorage, westward of Seal island, 
pass between Sculpin rocks and the Brandies, and thence, keeping 
near Seal island, in mid-channel between Pig and Seal islands. 

Fox islands, the two eastern islands of the group eastward of the 
northern end of Seal island, and about 265 yards eastward of Flat 
and Sleepy islands, are both faced by whitish cliffs, and are flat in 
outline. The southwestern island, 85 feet high, is skirted by rocks 
100 yards from the points on the southwestern side. There is no 
passage between it and Sleepy island, as a rock, awash at high water, 
lies nearly in mid-channel. The northeastern island is about 70 feet 
high, and separated by a clear channel 100 yards wide from the south- 
western island. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, at the Seal islands at 
6h. 39m.; springs rise 54 feet, neaps 4 feet. 

Sloop harbor, an inlet of the mainland, the entrance of which 
bears 261°, distant $ mile from the northern end of Seal island, ex- 
tends westward for 1,450 yards; the entrance is 350 yards wide and 
the head opens to 800 yards. A low islet lies near the southern shore 
with a black rock close off it, and a rock, with 5 feet of water over it, 


PUNCHBOWL—ROGERS ISLAND. 689 


lies northward 100 yards from the southern entrance point. A low 
point juts out from the northern shore at 600 yards from the mouth ; 
vessels must not proceed within this point, but should anchor in 6 
fathoms of water, eastward of it, except with local knowledge. 

A round island, about 30 feet high and covered with grass, lies in 
the middle of the harbor, and there are depths of 3 fathoms on the 
southern side of the harbor up to it. Anchorage for small craft may 
be obtained off the cove southward of the island in 3 fathoms of 
water, mud bottom. 

Punchbowl, an inlet, whose entrance hes north-northwestward, | 
mile from Sloop harbor, and has a channel about 50 yards wide, with 
rocks a short distance off its northwestern shore, extends south-south- 
westward and southward for 1,400 yards. Rocks stretch off the 
southern entrance point immediately within the narrows, and the 
inlet affords excellent anchorage for small vessels drawing 7 feet or 
less, in any part of the harbor, the bottom being soft mud from the 
middle to the western shore, but rocky near the eastern side. 

Anchorage for larger vessels, in 35 to 5 fathoms, may be obtained 
from the entrance till the point, on which the houses are situated, 
bears 323°. Inside of this limit the water shoals suddenly. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Punchbowl at 
6h. 59m.; springs rise 54 feet, neaps 44 feet. 

Communication.—The Labrador steamer to and from St. Johns, 
via Battle harbor, calls at Punchbowl! fortnightly during summer. 

Dog island, with a flat summit 188 feet high, hes + mile off the 
mainland between Sloop harbor and Punchbowl. <A narrow islet, 7 
feet high, lies 200 yards off the western side of Dog island; the water 
between is shallow, and a shoal extends from Dog island, the outer 
part, with 10 feet of water over it, being southwestward 150 yards 
from the islet. The fishing stage in the cove between the two parts 
of Corbet island, open westward of the islet, bearing about 5°, leads 
westward of this shoal. The northern point of Dog island is a low 
hillock with a flagstaff on it. 

Big Pig island, northeastward of Dog island, is 130 feet high, 
conical in shape, cliff-faced on the northwestern side, and bold-to 
within a short distance from the eastern and southern sides. 

Harbor rock, bearing 289°, distant 600 yards from the northern 
point of Big Pig island, is 1 foot high, and midway between this rock 
and the northwestern point of Big Pig island is a rock, with 10 feet 
of water over it. The bay formed by the northwestern point of Big 
Pig island and the islands off the northen part of Dog island is foul. 

Rogers island, the northern of two islands lying off the northern 
point of Dog island and distant 400 yards from that point, is 34 feet 
high; the islands are connected together and to Dog island by shallow 

76846—09——44 


690 EAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


water and rocks, and shoal water extends a short distance westward 
of the two islands. 

Corbet island, northward about 1,400 yards from Dog and Big 
Pig islands, is 174; miles long, eastward and westward, with an 
average width of about 1,400 yards, and is in two parts joined by a 
low neck about 40 yards wide. The summit of the eastern part is flat 
and 232 feet high. The western part is 152 feet high, and nearly 
subdivided by a deep cove that extends to within 65 yards of Orleans 
arm. 

Solomon rock, with 2 feet of water over it, is at the end of a 
ledge extending 150 yards from the western coast of Corbet island. 
The summit of Green island in line with the southeastern end of the 
eastern Deepwater island, bearing about 16°, leads westward of this 
rock, 

Keefe island, about 40 feet high, les 200 yards southward of the 
middle of Corbet island, and is nearly joined to it by rocks; it is 
on the western side of Corbet harbor. <A rock, with 7 feet of water 
aver it, hes southwestward 100 yards from the southern point of 
Keefe island. 

Bryan island, 82 feet high, is on the eastern side of Corbet harbor, 
and nearly joined to Corbet island, but there is a narrow channel, 
with 3 fathoms of water in it, between them. 

The Sisters, small islets 8 feet high, le close off the northeastern 
point of Corbet island, and are bold-to on the northeastern side. 

Tom Cod rock, bearing 120°, distant 200 yards from the Sisters, 
wovers 1 foot, and is skirted by shoal water; Bantam rock, bearing 
823°, distant 350 yards from the Sisters, has 11 feet of water over it. 

Herring cove, 300 yards wide, 450 yards deep, and open, is on the 
aoxthern side of Corbet island. 

Orleans arm, westward of Herring cove, almost separates Corbet 
island into two parts; it runs 1,200 yards to the southward, is 200 
yards wide at the entrance, and narrows gradually to the head. It 
is rarely used, even by fishing craft, as a heavy sea sets in with north- 
easterly winds. 

Webber harbor lies westward of Orleans arm and is separated 
from it by a peninsula and Lea island; this island is situated close 
northward of the peninsula, and is 105 feet high, dark, cliffy, and 
bold-to. The harbor extends south-southeastward 900 yards, with a 
width of 135 yards, and it affords indifferent anchorage for fishing 
eraft, in 5 fathoms of water, opposite the opening between Lea island 
and the peninsula, or farther up in 14 fathoms. 

North Crow island, 106 feet high, lies 150 yards from the eastern 
paint of Corbet island. An islet, 5 feet high, lies close off its south- 
western point, and a sunken rock hes in the fairway of the channel 
between Corbet and North Crow islands, leaving a narrow passage 
close to North Crow island. 


BRADBURY ISLAND—-NORTH THREE ISLANDS. 691 


Bradbury island lies eastward 135 yards from Bryan island, and 
is 152 feet high; the channel between these islands is clear and 5 
fathoms can be carried through it. 

East Bradbury island, eastward from Bradbury island, with a 
clear channel 100 yards wide between, is 92 feet high, and generally 
of dark rock curiously striped with white bands on the seaward face. 
An islet 4 feet high, with a sunken rock, bearing 166°, distant 100 
yards from it, lies southeastward 200 yards from East Bradbury 
island, and there is a patch of rocks at about 200 yards northward 
of the island. 

Little Black rock, southeastward + mile from East Bradbury 
island, is about 20 feet high, and there is a sunken rock at about 100 
yards southward of it. 

Black rock, north-northeastward, 250 yards from Little Black 
rock, is 66 feet high, dark, conical, and bold-to on the northeastern 
and northwestern sides, but a rock, with 12 feet of water over it, lies 
between. Black and Little Black rocks. 

Herring island, eastward } mile from North Crow island, is small, 
about 30 feet high, round, black, and bold-to. A bank, with 16 feet of 
water over it, lies between it and East Bradbury island. Herring 
Island rock, bearing 76°, distant 350 yards from Herring island, has 
10 feet of water over it. 

Pigeon island, northeastward, 400 yards from North Crow island, 
is 56 feet high, round and dark, with rocks close to its southern end. 
A rock, with 9 feet of water over it, lies southeastward 200 yards from 
Pigeon island, and a rocky bank 400 yards long, northward and 
southward, with 3 feet to 3 fathoms of water over it, and steep-to 
on its eastern side, lies with its southern end bearing 70°, distant 200 
yards from Pigeon island. 

A rock 2 feet high, with shoal water a short distance northwest- 
ward and southward of it, lies eastward, distant 700 yards from 
Pigeon island. 

Red island, eastward, distant 1,400 yards from the Sisters, is 49 
feet high, and a small islet lies close northwestward of it. 

White rock, eastward, distant 1,300 yards from Red island, is 30 
feet high, and shoal water runs a short distance off the northern and 
southern ends. 

South Black rock, northward, distant 700 yards from the Sisters, 
is 7 feet high. It has shoal water off the western side, and a shoal, 
with 12 feet of water over it, lies southeastward 200 yards from it. 

Flat island, northeastward 465 yards from Lea island, is 19 feet 
high, bare, rugged, and skirted by shoal water. The Pancake, a flat 
rock that covers 2 feet, lies southwestward 100 yards from it. 

North Three islands, northward 400 yards from Lea island, form 
a small harbor where boats shelter. The largest island is 110 feet 
high toward its southwestern end. 


692 EAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


There are some shoals to the northeastward of these islands. Caleb 
shoal, the northeasternmost, has 3 fathoms of water over it, and bears 
59°, distant 1 mile from the northeastern of the North Three islands. 

Deepwater islands, two small islands, 200 yards apart, situated 
northwestward of North Three islands and separated from them by 
a deep channel 350 yards wide, are round and bluff; the eastern is 
55 feet high and the western 102 feet high. 

Gurney island, southward, 300 yards from the western Deepwater 
island, is 21 feet, high. 

American rock, north-northeastward, 800 yards from the eastern 
Deepwater island, is 3 feet high, and bold-to on the southeastern 
side. 

Green island, north-northeastward ;°; mile from the eastern Deep- 
water island, is 54 feet high, and a dark seam runs down its northern 
side; a group of rocks, 10 feet high and nearly steep-to, lies close to 
the southwestern end. A bank with 5 fathoms least water over it 
bears 356°, distant 400 yards from the northeastern: point of Green ~ 
island. 

Walker island, northwestward, 400 yards from Green island, is 
40 feet high; a rock lies nearly in mid-channel between the islands; 
Walker rock, northwestward, 200 yards from Walker island, is 2 feet 
high and skirted by shoal water. 

A bank, with 54 fathoms of water over it, bears 334°, distant 700 
yards, and a shoal, with 44 fathoms of water over it, bears 306°, 
distant 865 yards from Walker rock. 

North Black rock, bearing 75°, distant 1,650 yards from Green 
island, is 4 feet high and steep-to. 

Middle ground, with 15 feet of water over it, bears 292°, distant 
850 yards, and Eastern rock, with 3 fathoms of water over it, bears 
359°, distant 450 yards from North Black rock. 

Shoal bay, the southern entrance point of which lies 14 miles north- 
westward of Punchbowl entrance, extends southwestward about 1,85 
miles, with a width of some 1,200 yards, and from its inner part arms 
run northwestward and southward. It affords anchorage, but it has 
several shoals and it has been but cursorily examined. 

Shoal Bay island, northward about 200 yards from the northern 
entrance point of Shoal bay, is 79 feet high, and two islands, 30 feet 
high, lie close off its northeastern side, and shelter a small cove. A 
shoal nearly 200 yards long, northward and southward, with 10 feet 
of water over it, lies southeastward 4+ mile from these islands. 

Goss island, 30 feet high, is the eastern of some low rocks extend- 
ing northeastward from the northern of the two islands off Shoal 
Bay island, and the ground westward of Goss island is foul. 

A shoal, with 3 fathoms of water over it, bears 6°, distant 265 
yards, from the western end of Goss island. 


PIGEON ISLAND—SANDY ISLANDS. 693 


Pigeon island, bearing 303°, distant 1,200 yards from Goss island, 
is 29 feet high and flat; some low islets lie southward of it, and shoal 
water surrounds it for a distance of 200 yards. 

A shoal, with 43 fathoms of water over it, bears 67°, distant nearly 
300 yards, and Taylor bank, with 5 fathoms water over it, bears 10°, 
distant 750 yards from Pigeon island. 

Black Bear bay.—The entrance to this bay lies between Pigeon 
island and Salter island, which is distant nearly a mile to the north- 
ward, and the bay extends westward about 3 miles, narrowing toward 
its head. It affords good anchorage in a depth of 14 fathoms, with a 
small waterfall on the northern shore bearing 356°. There is deep 
water to the head of the bay, where there is a small settlement off 
which vessels can anchor. The bay has been only cursorily examined. 

A rapid river falls into the head of the bay, and water can be ob- 
tained from the waterfall. 

Bed head divides Black Bear and Open bays. Salter island, close 
off this head, is 55 feet high, and nearly joined at its western side to 
the mainland by rocks and shoal water, but fishing craft find good 
sheltered anchorage, in 2 fathoms of water, between the island and 
Bed head. 

Run island, 55 feet high, lies 600 yards north-northeastward from 
the northern point of Salter island, and the channel between carries 5 
to 7 fathoms of water and affords anchorage sheltered from westerly 
winds. Run island is connected by shoal water to Sandy islands, 
which lie + mile to the northeastward. 

Sandy islands comprise one large island, 88 feet high, and several 
smaller islands, on the eastern side of which is Sandy Islands harbor, 
a rocky bight completely open to easterly winds. In entering the 
harbor, keep the southern island close aboard, and, when inside, 
anchor in 5 fathoms water, coral bottom. 

A cove, extending 350 yards to the southward, with a white sand 
beach at its head, on the northern side of the large island, gives good 
shelter for fishing boats. A considerable settlement is formed here 
during summer. 

The southeastern island is 65 feet high, and separated on its west- 
ern side from the largest island by a channel just wide enough for 
boats to go through at half tide. 

A rock, with 6 feet of water over it, bears 111°, distant 250 yards 
from the southeastern end of the islands. 

A large fishing bank, with numerous shoals that break in heavy 
weather, extends northwestward and northeastward of Sandy islands. 
Gushue rock, the eastern shoal, with 3 fathoms of water over it, bears 
87°, distant 14 miles from the northeastern point of Sandy islands. 

Open and Porcupine bays, northwestward of Sandy islands, have 
been but cursorily examined. 


694 EAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


American point, the northern entrance point of Open bay, lies | 
northward, distant 3 miles from the northwestern point of Sandy 
islands, and is bold-to. 

Sandy bay extends northwestward 1? miles from American point, 
and is shoal for 4 mile from the head, but affords anchorage off a 
cove on the southwestern shore in 10 fathoms of water, open to south- 
easterly winds. 

Herring bank, with 44 fathoms least water, lies eastward, distant 
650 yards from American point. 

Roundhill island, whose eastern point bears 15°, distant 9 miles 
from White rock, is 174 feet high. It is a series of hummocks with 
deep indentations between, and there is a low islet close to the eastern 
side. 

Saddle or Double islands, west-southwestward, 13 miles from 
Roundhill island, consist of two groups. The three islands of the 
eastern group are connected by shoal water; the highest island, 148 
feet high, makes as a saddle on northwesterly bearings. The western 
group consists of three black islets, the northern and highest being 48 
feet high. The channel between the groups is 800 yards wide. 

A rock, with 1 foot of water over it, bears 64°, distant 900 yards 
from the northern end of the eastern group, and a rock, with 5 feet 
of water over it, bears 109°, 1,100 yards from the same point. 

O’Neale rock, with 12 feet of water over it, bears 109°, distant 
nearly 1,400 yards from the southeastern end of the eastern group. 

A rock, with 3 feet of water over it, bears 171°, distant 200 yards 
from the southern end of the western group; and bearing 149°, dis- 
tant 700 yards from the same point, is a shoal with 3 fathoms of 
water over it. 

Mark islands le southwestward, 13 miles from the western group 
of the Saddle islands, and there is a clear passage between them, 
which is frequently used. 

The southwestern and highest of the Mark islands is flat, and 121 
feet high; and, Cosgrave rocks, 8 feet high, le eastward 400 yards 
from it. 

‘A shoal, with 4 fathoms over it, and deep water close-to, bears 
22°, distant 14 miles from Hat island, the northernmost Mark island. 

Queer island, lying 1 mile westward from Mark islands, at the 
entrance to Sandy bay, is surmounted by a remarkable round hum- 
mock 132 feet high; the passage between it and the mainland is only 
suitable for boats. 

Toole rock, with 6 feet of water over it, bears 129°, distant 500 
yards from the northeastern point of Queer island. Fish island sum- 
mit, in line with the eastern end of Bombproof island, bearing 16°, 
leads between the rock and the island. 


PAINE ISLAND—DOMINO RUN. 695 


Paine island, eastward 1,100 yards from Queer island, is sur- 
rounded by shoal water, which extends 350 yards southward of it. 

Green island, east-northeastward 800 yards from Queer island, 
is surrounded by shoal water to the distance of rather over 200 yards, 
except on its eastern side, which is bolder. 

A black rock les southward 200 yards from the island. 

High Rat rock, with 2 fathoms of water over it, bears 84°, distant 
650 yards from the southern point of Green island. 

Shag rocks, bearing 39°, distant 400 yards from the northern 
point of Green island, extend 4 mile in an easterly and westerly 
direction. 

An island lies westward + mile from Green island; shoals extend 
about 200 yards northward and southeastward from it. The passage 
between this island and the eastern entrance point of Bateau harbor 
is less than 200 yards in width and has a depth of 4 fathoms in it. 

Bateau harbor, northwestward of Queer island, affords excellent 
anchorage for small vessels in 4 fathoms of water, and there are 
wharves at its head, alongside which large schooners load. The 
only safe passage into the harbor is eastward of Queer island, and 
westward of Toole rock with the leading mark (see above) on; and 
when the black rock off Green island is in line with Hat island, the 
northernmost of the Mark islands, bearing 98°, steer for the harbor. 

Communication.—The Labrador steamer to and from St. Johns 
via Battle harbor, calls at Bateau fortnightly during summer. 

Bombproof island, north-northwestward, 650 yards from Green 
island, is conical, 69 feet high, and conspicuous. 

A large group of islands, with rocks and shoals among them, lies 
north-northeastward of it, and should not be approached without a 
pilot. Fish island, 41 feet high, the easternmost and outer island 
of the group, lies nearly northward, 24 miles from Mark islands. 

Carrol island, northwestward 800 yards from Fish island, is 
dark, round, and 157 feet high. 

Black tickle, a narrow sheltered passage between the northern end 
of the island northward of Carrol island and the Island of Ponds, 
is much frequented by fishermen; to enter it, pass close southward of 
Carrol island, and then keep the western coasts of that island and 
the island northward of it aboard. Vessels drawing 12 feet of water 
load here. 

Domino run is the passage between Spotted and the adjacent 
islands and the northeastern coast of the Island of Ponds. It has a 
width of 900 to 1,100 yards, and a depth of 44 fathoms can be carried 
through it. The entrance is between Southeast point of Spotted 
island and Domino point, which latter bears 292°, distant 5 miles 
from Roundhill island, and les about 1,200 yards eastward of Black 
tickle, 


696 EAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


The coast from Domino point trends northwestward for 1;%; miles 
to Mistaken point. 

Domino harbor extends southward on the western side of Mistaken 
point; it is 800 yards in extent and 150 yards wide. The western 
side of the harbor is steep-to, and fishing vessels moor alongside in 
13 feet of water, but an isolated rock, with 7 feet of water over it, 
hes close off the eastern shore at half way up the harbor. A shoal, 
with 9 feet least water over it, bears 25°, distant 200 yards from 
Tatters point, the western entrance point of the harbor. There are 
some houses on the shores of the harbor, the most conspicuous being 
on the western side of the entrance. 

Communication.—The Labrador steamer to and from St. Johns 
via Battle harbor calls at Domino harbor fortnightly during summer. 

Wireless telegraph.—There is a wireless telegraph station at 
Domino harbor. 

Penny Hook cove is a shallow bight, situated westward about 
1,200 yards from Domino harbor. 

Wild bight.—Gunning point hes west-northwestward, distant 
2, miles from Mistaken point, and Wild bight, southwestward of 
Gunning point, is $ mile deep southeastward. It is foul and shoal, 
and the sea breaks across it in northeasterly gales. 

Entry island, northwestward 1 mile from Gunning point, is 900 
yards long in an east-northeasterly and west-southwesterly direction, 
300 yards broad, and 205 feet high. The passage between the point 
and the island is generally shoal, but there is a channel, 300 yards 
wide, with depths of 3 to 4 fathoms in it. 

Red point, westward, distant 2,45 miles from Gunning point, is 
a red cliff 50 feet high. From this point the coast continues west- 
ward for about 1,400 yards, and then turns southwestward, forming 
the southeastern shore of Rocky bay. 

Green island lies in the eastern entrance to Domino run, bearing 
eastward, distant ;®,; mile from Mistaken point, and is a cone 64 
feet high. A group of dark rocks, the highest of which is 15 feet 
high, is situated 265 yards southeastward of it. 

Black rocks are two low rocks 200 yards apart in an easterly 
and westerly direction, situated northeastward, distant 950 yards 
from Green island; the eastern one is 4 feet high, and the western is 
2 feet high. ; 

The passage between Green island, with the group southeastward 
of it, and Black rocks is not safe, since there is a shoal, with 15 feet 
of water over it, bearing 39°, distant 300 yards from Green island. 

sut the channels northward,of Black rocks and westward of Green 
island are clear. 

Spotted island, on the northern side of Domino run, is 4,3; miles 
long, west-northwestward and east-southeastward, with an average 


SHOAL POINT—DUCK ISLAND. 697 


width of 14 miles, and its summit is 310 feet high. There is an alter- 
nation of black and white cliffs on its eastern coast. 

Castle Dermot is a cliffy islet close off the eastern coast at 700 
yards from Southeast point, and Ready rocks, the highest of which is 
48 feet high, lie 800 yards off the same coast at { mile farther to the 
northward. 

Southeast point of Spotted island, bearing 11°, distant 1,% miles 
from Domino point, rises to a conical hill 205 feet high. 

Shoal point lies west-southwestward, distant 1,600. yards from 
Southeast point, and the bay between Shoal point and South Black 
head, situated 1 mile westward from it, is 4 mile deep and affords 
open anchorage in 7 fathoms of water during offshore winds. Spot- 
ted Island harbor is a good boat harbor close under the conspicuous 
white houses at its head. 

The coast of Spotted island, from South Black head, trends west- 
northwestward for 24 miles to North Black head, and is foul for 600 
yards offshore. Green island, open southward of South Black head, 
bearing 112°, leads close southward of the shoal water. 

At North Black head the coast gradually turns north-northeast- 
ward for about 13 miles to Back Cove point, whence it trends east- 
southeastward, # mile to the northwestern entrance point of Griffin 
harbor. This coast is steep-to. 

Earbor rock, with 3} fathoms over it, bears 45°, distant 300 yards 
from the northwestern entrance point of Griffin harbor. 

Griffin harbor extends 800 yards southwestward with a width of 
300 yards, and affords excellent anchorage at its head, in 4 fathoms of 
water, except in northeasterly winds. 

Farmer cove, east-southeastward, about a mile from Griffin har- 
bor, extends nearly 14 miles southward; it is open northward and 
rarely used as an anchorage. Harbor island lies in the entrance. 

Farmer ledge, with 3 fathoms of water over it, bears 7°, distant 
+ mile from the eastern headland of Farmer cove. 

Wedge or Shag island, north-northwestward, 1,°, miles from the 
eastern headland of Farmer cove, is 89 feet high at its northwestern 
end. <A shoal, with 4 fathoms of water over it, bears 20°, distant 
300 yards from Wedge island summit. 

‘Dooley ledge, with 6 fathoms of water over it, bears 22°, distant 
1,400 yards from Gull Battery rock, and is said to break in heavy 
weather. Gull Battery rock, 11 feet high is 200 yards north-north- 
eastward from the northeastern point of Spotted island. 

Duck island, westward, ? mile from the western point of Spotted 
island, is ¢ mile long, northwestward and southeastward, and 122 
feet high. Grappling islet, 18 feet high, lies eastward 300 yards 
from Duck island, and a rock, awash at low water, lies southward 
200 yards from the islet. 


698 EAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


Trusty rock, with 16 feet of water over it, is the shoalest part of a 
bank extending southwestward nearly 400 yards from Duck island. 
Mustering point, the extreme of the land northwestward of Domino 
harbor, shut in with the rocks off the eastern end of Entry island, 
bearing 123°, leads southwestward of this rock. 

Grog island, southwestward 850 yards from Duck island, is about 
400 yards long northwestward and southeastward, and 100 feet high. 
It is surrounded, except on the northern part of its eastern side, by 
a bank of shoal water, the depth of 5 fathoms being distant 4+ mile 
from the southwestern side of the island. 

Little Duck island, west-northwestward, 600 yards from Duck 
island, is about 300 yards across, and 94 feet high. 

Fawn rock, with 7 feet of water over it, bears 315°, distant 800 
yards from Grog island, and there is a shoal, with 34 fathoms of 
water over it, situated 200 yards southward of this rock. The south- 
western end of Entry island, open southwestward of Grog island, 
bearing about 132° leads southwestward of these shoals. 

Centipede rock, with 2 feet of water over it, bears 246°, distant 
600 yards from the southern end of Little Duck island, and shoals, 
with 44 fathoms least water over them, extend in a direction 310°, 
about 400 yards from the rock. 

White island, northward 300 yards from Little Duck island, is 
8 mile long, west-northwestward and east-southeastward, and is 
nearly separated into two parts, of which the eastern is 196 feet high, - 
and dark and steep. 

A cove extends south-southeastward, 600 yards between these parts, 
and there is a settlement at its head. Pigeon island is southwestward 
i mile from White island. Shoal water stretching southward from 
White island and outlying banks almost fill the channel between 
White and Pigeon islands, and there is no passage between White, 
Little Duck, and Pigeon islands. 

A shoal, with 54 fathoms of water over it, bears 302°, distant 800 
yards from the northwestern end of White island, and is said to 
break in heavy weather; two other banks on the same bearing, and 
distant 335 and 1,000 yards from the island, have depths of 7 and 9 
fathoms of water over them, respectively. 

Directions.—Having entered Domino run by the channel north- 
ward of Black rocks, or that westward of Green island, steer for a 
position in mid-channel between South Black head and Mistaken 
point; thence keep the northern extremity of Pigeon island in line 
with the southwestern side of Duck island, bearing 300°, which leads 
in the deepest water between the Island of Ponds and Spotted island. 

The passage between Grappling islet and Spotted island is clear, 
- except the rock southward of the islet. 


SALMON POINT—INDIAN TICKLE. . 699 


In proceeding southwestward of Grog island, pass between it and 
Entry island, keeping-at a distance of over 400 yards from Grog 
island; bring and keep the southwestern fall of the hills over Dom- 
ino harbor in line with the southwestern end of Entry island, bearing 
120° astern, until Back Cove point opens northward of Duck island, 
bearing 75°, then steer about 330°, and bring the northeastern end of 
Entry island open northeastward of Grog island, bearing 120°, to 
clear the ledge of rocks off Salmon point. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Domino harbor at 
Th. 4m.; springs rise 54 feet, neaps 34 feet. 

Tt is high water, full and change, at Grog island, in Domino run 
at Th. 23m.; springs rise 54 feet, neaps 34 feet; neaps range 14 feet. 

Salmon point bears 283°, distant 14 miles from the southern end 
of Pigeon island; shoals extend east-southeastward + mile from the 
point, and a bank, with 7 fathoms of water over it, bears 108°, dis- 
tant 4 mile from the point. 

Baillie or Lynch island, north-northeastward 1,700 yards from 
Salmon point, is about + mile across and 130 feet high. Rocky 
ground, which breaks in places, extends southwestward + mile from 
the island. 

Deer island, northwestward 1,1, miles from Lynch island, is 1,300 
yards long northwestward and southeastward, and 146 feet high. 
A shoal, with about 3 fathoms of water over it, bears approximately 
215°, distant 400 yards from the northwestern end of Deer island. 

Fish rock, awash at low water, lies in mid-channel between Lynch 
and Deer islands. 

Indian island, northwestward 1 mile from Lynch island, is about 
2 miles long northwestward and southeastward, 1 mile wide, 360 feet 
high, and conspicuous. Indian head, the northern point, is a steep 
bluff, 260 feet high, and bold-to. 

Crab rock, with 9 feet of water over it, bears 41°, distant nearly 
600 yards from American cove, on the eastern side of Indian island. 

Indian tickle, between Indian island to the northeastward and 
Musgrave land to the southwestward, affords anchorage, in a bay on 
the western side of Indian island, in 4 fathoms of water, sand bot- 
tom. The anchorage is safe in ordinary summer weather and con- 
venient for fishing vessels, but the holding ground is bad, and a 
heavy swell rolls in after northeasterly winds. 

Rocky ground extends some distance from Terra Nova, the south- 
eastern point of the bay, and at about 1,200 yards farther south- 
eastward are St. Mary island and rock, connected with Indian island 
by shoal water. Rover island, 40 feet high, lies on a bank extending 
off Musgrave land, and the southern channel, with 3 fathoms of 
water in it, between St. Mary island and Terra Nova, on the north- 
eastern side, and the bank off Rover island, on the southwestern side, 


700 EAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


is narrow and requires local knowledge for its pilotage. Breakers 
extend nearly 400 yards from the northwestern point of Indian island 
on the northwestern side of the bay. 

Warren cove, in the northwestern side of Indian island, is a well- 
sheltered poehinn ioe for fishing boats, and the small clade in the 
tickle afford excellent places for fishing stages and curing fish, being 
sheltered from winds and sea. 

Water is abundant and the watering place is convenient for boats, 
but the wood on the mainland is scanty. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Indian tickle at 6h. 
37m.; springs rise 6 feet, neaps 4 feet. 

Communication.—The Labrador steamer to and from St. Johns 
via Battle harbor calls at Indian tickle fortnightly during summer. 

White point is the point of Musgrave land at the northwestern 
end of the tickle. It lies westward, distant 1,2, miles from Indian 
head, and shoals lie about 350 yards off the coast northeastward and 
eastward of it. 

Light.—A white square tower with sloping sides 29 feet high, on 
White point, exhibits at 72 feet above high water an intermittent 
white light every ten seconds, thus: light, seven seconds; eclipse, 
three seconds, which should be seen from a distance of 12 miles 
in clear weather. The light is exhibited during the season of 
navigation. 

A flat-roofed, one-story dwelling and a store stand on the north- 
ern side of the lighthouse. The dwelling and store are painted 
white. 

Ferret islands, east-northeastward 2 miles from Indian island, 
are three small islands about 180 feet high, connected by shoal 
water, and having three islets + mile eastward of them. 

A small rock, which covers 3 feet, bears 184°, distant 700 yards 
from the western point of these islands. 

The coast from White point trends west-northwestward for 2 miles 
to Red island, which is separated from the mainland by a channel 
nearly 100 yards wide, and passable by boats except within an hour 
of low water. 

A rock, with 5 feet of water over it, bears 120°, distant 1,400 yards 
from the eastern end of Red island. 

Cape Greep, west-northwestward, 34 miles from Red island, rises 
in a conical mound, 177 feet high. The bay between Red island and 
cape Greep is foul and shoal. 

Black rocks are three in number; two, the highest of which is 37 
feet high, lie close together, and the third, about 20 feet high, bears 
165°, distant 1,600 yards from them; the northern rocks bear 350°, 
distant 24 miles from White point. 


OLD KING—DEVILS LOOKOUT. 701 


Old King, a shoal with 7 feet of water over it, bears 248°, distant 
600 yards from the southern Black rock. 

Sand Hill cove, westward, 2 miles from cape Greep, affords good 
summer anchorage for fishing vessels, and is much frequented; but 
shoals extend from its shores and render it unsuitable for large 
vessels, 

South Wolf island is one large island with some smaller islands 
close northward and southward of it, the group being 2? miles in 
length northward and southward; the highest and main island, 
in the middle, rises in a flat range, and on its summit, which is 
311 feet high and hes north-northeastward 6 miles from Indian head, 
is a conical bowlder. On its southern side is a cove in which there 
is very good shelter for fishing vessels. The best entrance is south- 
ward of an islet 27 feet high, lying between the main and southern 
islands; after passing it keep the eastern side of the cove aboard to 
the head. Rocks, with 9 feet of water over them, lie on the western 
side of the cove, but there is a clear passage 200 yards wide to the 
head. 

The two northern islets, which are joined except at high water 
springs, are separated from the main island by a channel 150 yards 
wide, with a depth of 33 fathoms close along the northern shore. 
Shoal water extends northward nearly 4 mile from these islets. 

North Wolf rock, lying northward, 14 miles from South Wolf 
islets, is 88 feet high, bare, dark, and steep-to around. 

Little Wolf island, bearing 214°, distant 2 miles from North 
Wolf rock, is small and 157 feet high. 

North Wolf island, westward 1 mile from South Wolf island, is 
flat-topped and 135 feet high; a group of islets close to its southeast- 
ern and southwestern sides forms a good boat harbor on the eastern 
side. The eastern islet is dome-shaped, and the harbor is entered on 
either side of it, but in the middle of the eastern entrance is a rock 
with 3 feet of water over it, and 9 fathoms close-to. The most 
sheltered anchorage is at the western end in 2 to 3 fathoms of water, 
off a deep cleft in the main island. 

Round Wolf island, southwestward about 1 mile from the North 
Wolf group, is 245 feet high. 

Offer Red island, westward 14 miles from Round Wolf island, is 
flat-topped and 200 feet high, with red cliffs on the northwestern side. 

Halfway island, west-northwestward 44 miles from Offer Red 
island, is 278 feet high, and makes as a flat-topped cone. 

The coast from Sand Hill cove trends northwestward for 44 miles 
to South head of Table bay. 

Devils Lookout, east-northeastward 1 mile from South head of 
Table bay, is 884 feet high, and rocky patches, with 12 feet of water 
over them, he 200 yards off its eastern side. 


702 EAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


The channel between South head and Devils Lookout has not been 
examined, and it should not be used for navigation. 

Quakers Hat island lies in the channel at about 4+ mile off South 
head. 

Lookout rocks, situated northwestward, about 1 mile from South 
head of Table bay, are two flat islets which should not be approached 
within + mile. 

Collingham island, northward 1 mile from Devils Lookout, 
rises in a conical hill, 333 feet high, and its eastern coast is steep 
bluffs. Some low islets he about $ mile northward from the island, 
and the channel between must not be taken. 

Bird islands, lying northwestward about 25 miles from Halfway 
island, are two in number; the western island is 170 feet high and 
conical; the eastern island is 77 feet high and flat-topped. There is 
a low black rock off the western point of the eastern island, and a 
rock, that breaks, hes westward 300 yards from it. 

South Flat island, lying west-northwestward, distant 1} miles 
from the western Bird island, is about 50 feet high, and in two parts, 
which are nearly joined together; the ground for 300 yards north- 
westward and southwestward of the island is foul. 

North Flat island, lying northwestward rather more than 1 mile 
from South Flat island, is about 70 feet high. 

Table bay.—North head of Table bay bears north-northwestward, 
distant 4 miles from South head, and from between them Table bay 
extends westward for 11 miles, narrowing gradually to the head. 

Entry or South Duck island lies south-southeastward, distant 
about 14 miles from Table Bay point, the eastern point of North 
head; a reef extends westward about 600 yards from the island. 

Ledge island lies in the middle of the bay at 34 miles within Entry 
island, and a reef extends westward 1? miles from its western side. 
The passages, both northward and southward of the island, are 
narrow. ‘There is only a depth of 4 fathoms in the southern passage. 
A shoal, with 3 fathoms of water over it, bears 319°, distant rather 
more than $ mile from the northeastern point of Ledge island, and 
a sunken rock lies in mid-channel bearing 257°, distant 1,4 miles 
from the western point of Ledge island in the northern passage. 

South road.—Anchorage in 15 fathoms of water can be obtained 
in South road, southward from the middle of Ledge island. 

Table harbor, at the head of the bay, affords good anchorage in 
7 to 11 fathoms of water; it is approached from either side of Ledge 
island. 

A shoal extends southward about 200 yards from the northern 
entrance point of this harbor, and all the points in the harbor are 
foul for a short distance. Between the second point inward on the 
northern shore (off which there is a small islet) and the opposite 


NORTH HARBOR—-HARE ISLAND. 708 


point on the southern shore the water shoals to 3 fathoms; it then 
deepens to 7 fathoms for about 200 yards, when it shoals again to 43 
fathoms. 

Within the narrows the water shoals suddenly to a depth of 3 feet. 

North harbor, situated northwestward of the western end of 
Ledge island, affords good anchorage in 5 to 7 fathoms of water, mud 
bottom. The eastern side of this harbor is formed by two islands 
joined to each other and the mainland by shoal water. 

Mullins cove, on the northern side of North head, extends 1} 
miles to the westward; it affords anchorage at the head in 3 fathoms 
of water, well sheltered from northwesterly winds, and is much fre- 
quented by fishing vessels. 

Black island, northwestward 1,600 yards from North Flat island, 
is nearly white, and makes as a flat ridge with a sharp peak at either 
end, the eastern 217 feet and the western 190 feet high. 

Black Island harbor, a narrow cove at the northern point of the 
island, with excellent shelter for fishing craft, is entered by keeping 
the southern shore aboard. 

Offer Wolf island, lying east-northeastward 14 miles from the 
northern end of Black island, is 222 feet high, and wedge-shaped; the 
northeastern side rises in steep cliffs to the summit. 

Halfway rock, between Offer Wolf and Black islands, is 15 feet 
high, and shoal water extends 200 yards around it; a rock, awash at 
low water, lies in mid-channel between Offer Wolf island and Half- 
way rock. 

The Wolves islets lic east-southeastward $ mile from Offer Wolf 
island; the highest is 81 feet high. 

A shoal, with 4 fathoms of water over it, bears 266°, distant 1,050 
yards from the southern Wolf islet, and a rock, with 6 fathoms of 
water over it, bears 238°, distant 1,500 yards from the same islet. 

Johnny Paul rock, with 3 fathoms of water over it, bears 111°, 
distant 13 miles from the southern Wolf islet. 

Offer Wolf island, open northward of the southern Wolf islet, 
bearing 283°, leads close northward; or open southwestward, bearing 
300°, leads southwestward of the rock. 

Gready island, northwestward 1,200 yards from Black island, is 
2? miles long, north-northeastward and south-southwestward, about $ 
mile wide, and 362 feet high. There isa large cairn of stones on its sum- 
mit. On the western side is a ridge facing Gready anchorage, within 
which is a large pond that debouches at Watering cove, a small bight 
on the southwestern side, where water can always be taken. 

Hare island, separated from the northeastern part of Gready 
island by a channel 200 yards wide, through which there is a passage 
for small craft only, is 224 feet high, cliffy and steep-to. 


704 EAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


Cross island, 129 feet high, lies 300 yards off the southwestern 
point of Gready island, with 10 to 12 fathoms of water in mid- 
channel between; an islet, 13 feet high, lies about 150 yards from the 
eastern point of Cross island. 

Little Gready island is separated from the western side of 
Gready island by a channel 200 yards wide, through which a depth of 
3 fathoms can be carried by keeping close along the coast of Gready 
island, and thus avoiding a rock that covers at high water near the 
northeastern entrance. On this island there is a large fishing estab- 
lishment. werk: 

A rock, with 4 fathoms of water over it, bears 38°, distant 400 
yards, from the southwestern end of Little Gready island. 

Stunk island, westward 800 yards from Little Gready island, is 
round-topped, 277 feet high, and steep on all sides. 

Mad Moll rock, bearing 165°, distant 400 yards from the southern 
point of Stunk island, to which it is nearly joined by shoal water, 
covers 5 feet. . 

Anchorage can be obtained off Watering cove in 10 to 14 fathoms 
of water, with the northeastern end of Stunk island shut in with the 
southwestern end of Little Gready island bearing about 339°. 

Communication.—The Labrador steamer to and from St. Johns, 
via Battle harbor, calls at Stunk island fortnightly during summer. 

Coal.— About 20 tons of coal may be obtained here. 

Current.— Between Gready and White Bear islands, and at the 
entrance to Hamilton inlet, a strong outset has been experienced in 
spring. 

Ice.—Field ice remains in the proximity of Gready anchorage until 
about the middle of July, soon after which the fishing fleet is enabled 
to sail northward. 

Gannet islands lie northwestward, 74 miles from the northeastern 
point of Gready island. The western island, 226 feet high, is steep 
on the northeastern side and slopes gently to the southwestward, and 
there is a little foul ground off it. The eastern group consists of two 
islands and several rocky islets, the southern and largest of which is 
184 feet high; vessels must not pass between the islets of this group. 

A rock, with 3 feet of water over it, bears 308°, distant about 600 
yards from the western point of the southern island, and a shoal, 
with 12 feet of water over it, bears 52°, distant 250 yards from the 
southeastern end of the same island. 

West Gannet rock, bearing 221°, distant 14 miles from the south- 
eastern end of the western Gannet island, is 12 feet high, and a rock, 
that breaks in moderate weather, bears 288°, distant 400 yards 
from it. 


CAPE NORTH—CURLEW HARBOR. 705 


East Gannet rock, bearing 105°, distant 24 miles from the south- 
eastern end of the southern Gannet island, is 55 feet high, and a rock, 
that breaks in a moderate sea, hes northward 350 yards from it. 

Outer Gannet island, bearing 17°, distant 34 miles from the 
northern point of the western Gannet island, is about 800 yards long, 
eastward and westward, 104 feet high. The island is flat; its sides 
have been smoothed by the action of ice. 

Boulton rock, bearing 283°, distant 4,5, miles from Outer Gannet 
island, breaks in moderate weather, and there is a depth of 21 fathoms 
at the distance of 200 yards around it. 

The coast from the northern entrance point of Mullins cove trends 
northwestward for 34 miles to cape North, and it rises gently to a 
flat-topped range of hills. 

Cape North, an isolated lll with a double summit, 323 feet high, 
is connected to the mainland by a flat marsh between two shallow 
coves. 

An islet, 69 feet high, and steep-to, hes close northward of the 
cape, but it is seldom distinguishable as an islet. 

Cape North cove is the shallow bight southward of the western 
part of cape North, and it extends 800 yards eastward. An islet with 
a house on it, situated 500 yards within the entrance nearly fills the 
cove. A rock, 2 feet high, hes south-southeastward 500 yards from 
the northern entrance point, and a shoal, with 9 feet of water over 
it, hes southwestward 200 yards from the rock. Small vessels enter 
the cove with the northern shore aboard, and anchor in 5 fathoms. 

The Sisters are two islands, the southern of which lies northwest- 
ward, distant 1,300 yards from the northwestern point of Cape North 
promontory. The islands are separated by a shallow channel 300 
yards wide, and each is about 750 yards long, eastward and west- 
ward. The southern island is 55 feet high. A bank, with 64 fathoms 
of water over it, bears 311°, distant 650 yards from the northwestern 
point of the southern island, and Pudding bank, with 8 to 9 fathoms 
of water over it, bears 294°, distant about 200 yards from the 64 
fathom bank. 

The coast between Cape North cove and Curlew head, at 24 miles 
west-southwestward, is barren and foul, and must not be approached 
nearer than + mile. 

Curlew island, close westward of Curlew head, is 21 feet high; 
it is the northern entrance point of Curlew harbor. 

Curlew harbor extends east-southeastward for 2 miles from a 
position southward of Curlew island, with depths decreasing gradually 
from 15 fathoms to the head. The bottom is mud and makes good 
holding ground, and the shores are barren. <A shoal, with 44 fathoms 
least water over it, bears 238°, distant 550 yards from Curlew island. 

76846—09——45 


706 EAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


Large vessels anchor in 12 fathoms of water, with the northeastern 
end of Long island in line with the southwestern end of Curlew 
island, bearing about 330°. Smaller vessels anchor, in 6 to 9 fathoms, 
at about 200 yards off a steep bluff, 175 feet high, on the southern 
shore, on either side of which is a long deep valley. 

Water can be obtained. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Curlew harbor at 
6h. 40m.; springs rise 5? feet, neaps 44 feet. 

Green island, west-northwestward, ? mile from Curlew island, is 
1,300 yards long, eastward and westward, 700 yards wide, and 145 
feet high. Pigeon island and a long ridge of rocks, awash at high 
water, lie between Green and Round islands (p. 707), and close the 
passage except to those with local knowledge. 

The southern shore of Curlew harbor continues west-northwest- 
ward to Toomie point, which is distant 2 miles from Curlew island. 
This is known as the Goat shore. 

Isthmus bay extends south-southwestward for 13 miles from 
Toomie point, and it then turns southeastward for 2+ miles; the 
shores are barren except at the head, where, northward of a hill 424 
feet high, are swamps and lakes with small timber around them. 

Cartwright island.—Cartwright point, the northeastern point of 
this island, hes northward, 4 mile from Toomie point, and the island 
extends south-southwestward 14 miles, with a’ width of 700 yards. 
Its summit is a square hummock 199 feet high. The island is on the 
western side of the outer part of Isthmus bay and is separated by a 
channel 700 yards wide, but narrowed to 400 yards by rocks, from 
Toomie point, through which 44 fathoms is the deepest water that 
can be carried. Three rocks lie within 400 yards south-southwest- 
ward of the island. ‘. 

Anchorage.—There is anchorage off the southeastern coast of 
Cartwright island with good holding ground. A large vessel can 
anchor anywhere inside Toomie point. 

Southeast cove, the entrance to which is between Toomie and 
Hanrahan points, which lie nearly northward and southward from 
each other and are 1,200 yards apart, extends 1 mile to the eastward. 
The deepest water between the points is 7} fathoms, and the water 
shoals gradually to the shore, but rapidly to 2 fathoms toward the 
head. Vessels can anchor in the cove during summer, although the 
holding ground is not very good. 

Indian head, southward, 265 yards from the rocks south-south- 
westward of Cartwright island, rises in a grassy conical hill 127 feet 
high, and is connected at low water with the peninsula southward 
of it. 

A rock, with 12 feet water over it, bears 24°, distant 100 yards 
from the northern end of Indian head, and a shingly spit, with 3 


BULL GUT—BUDGET ROCK. 707 


fathoms of water over its end, extends in a direction 60° for 400 yards 
from the eastern point of the head. 

Bull gut, the channel between Indian head and the rocks off Cart- 
wright island, is narrowed by the shoals to 100 yards, with a depth 
of 44 fathoms water. 

Blackguard bay, extending southwestward 14 miles from Indian 
head, is foul and shoal, and should not be entered within Bull gut. 

Pinch-Gut island, northwestward 14 miles from the western 
entrance point of Blackguard bay and 300 yards offshore, is 13 feet 
high. 

Pinch-gut bank, with 15 feet of water over it, bears 72°, distant 
1,650 yards from Pinch-gut island. 

Round island, situated westward ? mile from Green island, is 
1,700 yards long, eastward and westward, about 800 yards wide, and 
229 feet high. There is a fishing settlement on its southern side, in 
which the principal house has a belfry. Cobbler shoal, with 2 fath- 
oms of water over it, lies westward 600 yards from Salmon point of 
Round island. 

Clearing mark.—Duck island, a little open northward of Round 
island, bearing 77°, leads northward of Pinch-Gut bank and Cobbler 
shoal. 

Long island, the southwestern end of which hes northeastward, 
distant 800 yards from the eastern end of Round island, is 14 miles 
long, north-northeastward and south-southwestward about 200 yards 
wide, and 231 feet high. 

Duck island, about 200 yards off the western side of Long island, at 
600 yards from its southwestern end, is about + mile across and 101 
feet high. 

Black rock, westward 600 yards from the western end of Duck 
island, is 6 feet high, and a shoal extends southeastward nearly 200 
yards from it. 

There is no passage, except with local knowledge, between Long 
and Round islands. 

Tinker island, north-northeastward, 14 miles from the north- 
eastern point of Long island, is flat and 56 feet high, with numerous 
bowlders on its summit. There is deep water at the distance of 200 
vards from the island, except on its southern side, where shoal water 
extends for 300 yards. 

Tinker rock, bearing 204°, distant 650 yards from the southern 
end of Tinker island, has 3 fathoms of water over it and is steep-to. 

Budget rock, north-northeastward, distant 1,100 yards from 
Tinker island, is 4 feet high. 

Budget bank, bearing 7°, distant 700 yards from Budget rock, has 
3 fathoms of water over it and is steep-to. 


708 EAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


Directions.—For Isthmus bay, after passing Curlew island, steer 
in mid-channel between Green island and the Goat shore until the 
summit of Stunk island is shut in with the southern end of Green 
island, bearing 69°. Keep this mark on until the western side of 
Tinker island just overlaps the northeastern point of Long island, 
bearing 24°, which mark on astern leads between the shoal water off 
Toomie point and that off Cartwright island. Anchor in the mouth 
of Southeast cove, or farther up Isthmus bay in mid-channel, not 
bringing the islet near the head of the bay to bear less than 142°. 

Sandwich bay.—Horse Chops island lies west-northwestward, 
distant 12 miles from Pinch-Gut island, and the entrance to Sandwich 
bay, in which there are several islands, hes between them. Sandwich 
bay extends southwestward and 10 miles from the entrance to two 
narrow channels, and thence southward 15 miles, with an average 
breadth of 6 miles, to several streams at the head. 

Hare islands, westward 14 miles from Pinch-Gut island, are two 
in number, and both are high, conical, and steep-to, except off the 
southwestern point of the western island. 

Anchorage can be obtained southward of these islands in 10 fathoms 
of water. 

Hare rock, bearing 326°, distant 4 mile from the northeastern end 
of the western Hare island, has 7 feet of water over it; sometimes the 
sea breaks on this rock, but at other times its position is not shown in 
any way. 

Pompey island, northwestward, distant 2 miles from Pinch-Gut 
island, is 145 feet high, round and barren, and an islet, 20 feet high, 
hes off its northeastern end. 

Pompey rock, bearing 0°, distant nearly 2 miles from the middle 
of Pompey island, breaks at low water, and there are depths of 11 to 
17 fathoms close around it. The summit of cape North in line with 
the northeastern point of Long island, bearing 105°, leads 400 yards 
southward; and the northern end of Independent island, open north- 
ward of Seal islet, bearing 293°, leads 500 yards northward of the 
rock. 

Seal islet, northwestward 44 miles from Pompey island, is 35 feet 
high and surrounded by shoals and rocks to the distance of ? mile. 

Red island lies westward about 1,600 yards from Pompey island. 

Passages.—The passage between Seal islet and Independent island 
should not be attempted until it has been further examined. The 
passage between Pompey and Red islands also requires caution, as 
depths of 5 to 6 fathoms have been obtained in it, besides a depth of 4 
fathoms at about a mile southwestward of Pompey island and south- 
ward of Red island. H. B. M. 8. “Scylla” passed between Pompey 
and Red islands in 1905 and obtained a least depth of 5 fathoms. 


HUNTINGDON ISLAND—CARTWRIGHT HARBOR. 709 


Huntingdon island, westward 1% miles from Pompey island and | 
in the middle of the entrance to Sandwich bay, is 64 miles long, east- 
ward and westward, and about 13 miles wide; Huntingdon flats, a 
chain of islands and shoals, among which there is no passage, extend 
southwestward between Huntingdon and Diver islands. 

A rock, awash at low water, les about 300 yards off the north- 
eastern end of Huntingdon island, and northwestward 1,600 yards 
from this rock is an islet, with shoal water a short distance off it. 

Dog islands, northwestward about a mile from the above-men- 
tioned islet, are two islands separated by a narrow shallow passage; 
the northeastern island is 176 feet high. 

Egg island, a small rock, lies off the mouth of Egg harbor, an 
anchorage for small vessels on the southern side of Huntingdon 
island. 

Diver island, southwestward 2? miles from Huntingdon island, is 
separated from the northwestern shore of Sandwich bay by Sand- 
wich or Main tickle, ? mile wide from shore to shore, but narrowed 
to 400 yards by shoals. It is reported that this tickle is practically 
closed, even to small craft. / 

Earl island lies southward about 4 mile from Diver island, and 
Diver tickle, which runs between them, is shallow. 

Cartwright harbor lies at the bottom end of the channel, be- 
tween Earl island and the mainland to the eastward, and southward 
of a small peninsula named Curlew point. Merlin point, the south- 
western end of the peninsula, is foul for + mile. The harbor is sur- 
rounded by hills, the sides of which are covered with small spruce 
trees, and it is well sheltered. There is an establishment of the Hud- 
son Bay Company at Cartwright, on the southern side of the penin- 
sula; the settlement has large buildings and a wharf. 

The anchorage is in 7 fathoms of water, mud bottom, with the 
wharf bearing 42°. 

Tidal streams.—The tidal streams in the channel between Earl 
island and the mainland, at the entrance to Cartwright harbor, are 
strong, and attention is necessary at the helm. 

Communication.—The steamer to and from St. Johns, via Battle 
harbor, calls at Cartwright harbor fortnightly in summer. 

Favorites tickle is the narrow passage between Earl island and 
the mainland at 2? miles within Merlin point. There is an islet in 
the tickle, with some rocks above water northeastward of it. The 
passages eastward of this islet are reported to be unsafe by the local 
fishermen, but a depth of 4 fathoms of water can be carried through 
the passage on the southwestern side of the islet by keeping in mid- 
channel at the northern end and two-thirds of the width of the 
channel away from Earl! island at the southern end. H. B. M. S. 
“ Scylla” passed both into and out from Sandwich bay by this 
passage. 


710 EAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


The passage must not be taken except at slack water, as the tidal 
streams are very strong. 

Muddy bay, close southeastward of Favorites tickle, affords an- 
chorage in 10 to 17 fathoms. 

A shoal extends off the entrance to East or Dykes river, which flows 
into the channel between Earl island and the mainiand, southward 
of the southern point of Muddy bay. 

East arm, southward about 5 miles from Longstretch point, the 
southern entrance point of the channel between Ear] island and the 
mainland, affords anchorage, in 6 to 15 fathoms of water, at 2 miles 
from the head of the arm, which is shoal. 

Hinchinbrook bay, at the head of Sandwich bay, is entered 
through a narrow channel, southward of which anchorage can be 
obtained in 8 to 16 fathoms of water. East (locally Paradise) river, 
running eastward from this bay, and afterwards turning westward, 
is shoal, but a steam launch may ascend it nearly to the lake at its 
head, a distance of some 5 miles. 

Several islands and rocks, that should not be approached within 4 
mile, are situated off the western side of Sandwich bay. Lumpy island 
is the northernmost of them. 

H. B. M.S.“ Seylla” anchored 1 mile northwestward from Lumpy 
island. 

Eagle river, the entrance to which is westward about 2 miles from 
a peninsula westward 4 mile from Lumpy island, flows into the bay 
from the southwestward. The river is tidal, and navigable for small 
boats for about 3 miles above Separation point, the western entrance 
point. There are then 1} miles of rapids and pools up to the falls, 
some 40 feet high. The entrance to the river is very shallow, and a 
steam launch could not get within $ mile of Separation point. 

Swallow bank, off the entrance of Eagle river, bearing 320°, 
distant 1 miles from Lumpy island, is a detached shoal about 400 
yards in extent, with 6 feet of water over it. There is deep water 
northeastward of this bank, but shoal water begins at less than $ 
mile southwestward of it. Mariners are recommended not to pro- 
ceed southwestward of the line joining Lumpy island and Swallow 
bank. 

White Bear or West river flows into the bay on the northwestern . 
side of Separation point, and a narrow channel, with 3 fathoms of 
water, leads into it. The river is tidal and navigable for small 
boats for some 4 miles above Dove point, the western entrance point. 
There is then about + mile of nontidal water, with falls 80 feet high 
at its head. 

Mealy mountains, a range attaining the height of 1,482 feet, 
extend from Sandwich bay to Hamilton inlet, and are conspicuous. 


NEWFOUNDLAND ISLAND—BLACK ROCKS. 711 


Newfoundland island (Henrietta island), northward nearly 14 
miles from Huntingdon island, is undulating in outline, with a bold 
bluff 316 feet high at the northeastern end. <A shoal, with 13 feet of 
water over it, is situated 135 yards from the base of this bluff. The 
southwestern side has not been examined. 

Two islets lie off its eastern point. Flat island the southern, is 
flat, 32 feet high, and separated by a channel 350 yards wide, in the 
middle of which is a rock with 4 feet of water over it. Farrels island, 
the northern, is joined to Newfoundland island at low water; there 
are some houses on it. 

Independent island, nearly 400 yards eastward of Newfoundland 
island, is rugged and cliffy on the east coast, but rises gently from the 
west coast; it has several peaks, the highest, about 250 feet, being on 
the northeastern side. 

A grass-covered islet, 70 feet high, lies between the western end of 
Independent island and the northeastern part of Newfoundland 
island. The passage on the western side of this islet is shoal. In 
the passage on its eastern side a rock with 7 feet of water over it hes 
close to the islet, but by keeping Independent island close aboard 14 
feet of water can be carried through; it is, however, only 100 yards 
wide. 

Independent harbor, between Independent and Newfoundland 
islands, affords:good anchorage in 44 to 8 fathoms of water, north- 
ward of Farrels island. To enter keep midway between Independent 
and Flat islands, but only 44 fathoms of water can be carried in. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Independent harbor at 
6h. 51m., springs rise 52 feet, neaps 44 feet. 

Packs Harbor islands.—Situated 800 yards northward from the 
northwestern point of Newfoundland island are two narrow islets 
with conical hills, the southern and higher being 215 feet high; be- 
tween them is a harbor, which is entered at its southwestern end, the 
northeastern end being blocked by rocks. There is good shelter for 
fishing vessels in 3 to 4 fathoms of water. 

A rock, with 3 feet of water over it, les a short distance off the 
western point of the southern island, and a rock with 3 feet of water 
over it hes in the middle of the southwestern entrance and may be 
avoided by keeping the northern island close aboard. 

Communication.—The Labrador steamer to and from St. Johns, 
via Battle harbor, calls at Packs harbor fortnightly during summer. 

Grappling island, small and 133 feet high, les northeastward of 
the southeastern Packs Harbor island. 

Tinker island is small and les about + mile northward of the 
eastern end of the northwestern Packs Harbor island. 

Black rocks, lying west-northwestward, distant 1 mile from the 
northern point of Independent island, are three small rocks, the high- 
est being 3 feet high. 


712 EAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


Yellow rock, lying northeastward, distant 24 miles from the 
northern point of Independent island, is 45 feet high, isolated and 
bare. A rock that breaks les off its southern side. 

Double islands, northwestward about 1} miles from Independent 
island, are two islands, the highest of which is 158 feet high. 

Long island, northwestward, ? mile from the western Double 
island, is 157 feet high. 

Flemming rock, bearing 80°, distant } mile from Long island, is 
awash at low water. The western point of Independent island, open 
eastward of Double islands, bearing 176°, leads + mile eastward; and 
the eastern side of Independent island, just shutting in with Double 
islands, bearing 145°, leads the same distance southwestward of the 
rock. 

Ragged rocks, the highest of which is 28 feet high, he northward 
® mile from Tinker island. There is no passage between them and 
Long island. 

Handy Harbor islands, westward about 600 yards from Ragged 
rocks, make up a group inclosing an excellent boat harbor with 
numerous passages to it, but none available for larger craft. 

Shag island, northwestward, about ? mile from Long island, ‘is 

220 feet high. <A rock above water bears 328°, distant 600 yards from 
its northeastern end, and close northwestward of this rock is a sunken 
rock. ; 
Haypook island, lying north-northwestward, 14 miles from Shag 
island, and at the northwestern edge of the group, rises to a conical 
hill, 254 feet high. A rock that breaks lies 300 yards westward of the 
island, and between it and Green island is a shoal with 9 feet of 
water over it. Green island lies + mile northeastward of Haypook 
island, and is 130 feet high. 

Farmer ledge, a rocky bank with 3 feet of water over it, bears 
180°, distant 2 miles from the southwestern end of Green island. The 
summit of Packs Harbor islands open westward of Handy Harbor 
islands, bearing 150°, leads 600 yards southwestward of the ledge. 

Black rocks, bearing 4°, distant 38, miles from the northern point 
of Independent island, comprise a group of rocks the highest of 
which is 20 feet high. 

Bird rocks, bearing 15°, distant 14 miles from Black rocks, are 
two islets about + mile apart northward and southward, and 49 and 
43 feet high, respectively. 

Horse Chops island, which is situated } mile westward of Packs 
Harbor islands, has numerous cliff-faced hills on it. The summit is 
398 feet high, and there is a remarkable, high bluff, northeastward 
of it, 889 feet high. Black Duck cove, a shallow bight, with an islet 
in the entrance, is in the middle of the northern coast. 


CAPE PORCUPINE—NORTH STAG ISLANDS. Whe 


Munden island, low and flat, is nearly joined at low water to the 
northwestern point of Horse Chops island. 

Partridge Harbor islands lie northwestward of Munden island, 
and between them is Partridge harbor, where fishing vessels anchor 
in 4 fathoms of water, sheltered except from northeasterly winds. 
A rock, with 6 feet of water over it, lies 200 yards off the northeastern 
point of the northwestern island. West of Partridge Harbor islands 
are three islets, between which the water is shoal. 

Pigeon island, northwestward 1 mile from Partridge Harbor 
islands, is 146 feet high. 

Cape Porcupine, north-northwestward, distant 2% miles from 
Pigeon island, is a promontory 4 4 mile wide, jutting out 24 miles 
from the mainland and rising to a double-peaked summit 343 feet 
high. The beaches on both sides of cape Porcupine are sandy. 

Gull island, 63 feet high, is joined to the northeastern end of the 
cape at low water. 

Black rock, bearing 35°, distant 5% miles from cape Porcupine, is 
isolated and 22 feet high. 

Mid-channel rock, with 5 feet of water over it, bears 120°, distant 
24 miles from Black rock. 

Grappling island, open eastward of Green island, bearing 177°, 
leads eastward of Mid-channel rock. ‘ 

South Stag island, northward 4} miles from cape Porcupine, 
rises in two flat hummocks, 90 feet high, and covered with grass, with 
a saddle between; reefs extend 600 yards from its southeastern side. 

North Stag islands, northwestward 3$ miles from South Stag 
island, are two islands, with some islets and rocks in the channel 
between them, through which a depth of 6 feet of water can be car- 
ried. The southern island is a dark conical hill, 125 feet high; the 
northern is flat and 120 feet high and has a deep ravine on its 
northern side. 

Anchorage can be obtained westward of the channel between the 
islands in 7 to 14 fathoms of water, sand bottom. 

Soundings of 9 fathoms have been obtained with North Stag island 
summit, bearing 271°, distant about 2 miles. 

Tumble-down Dick island, north-northeastward, distant 3% miles 
from North Stag islands, is 355 feet high, and conspicuous, with a 
round hillock at its summit. Small rocks fringe the island, and a reef 
hes 200 yards off the middle of the northwestern side, but they are 
all bold-to. 

Little Tumble-down Dick island, situated 800 yards southwestward 
from Tumble-down Dick island, is 70 feet high; the channel between 
is clear in its fairway. 

Track.—H. B. M. S. “ Scylla,” in August, 1905, when proceeding 
from Cartwright harbor to Indian harbor, having passed between 


Lt EAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


Red and Pompey islands, left Dog islands, 600 yards to the north- 
ward, and continued in mid-channel between Huntingdon and New 
Foundland islands, between Horse Chops and Packs Harbor islands, 
and between North and South Stag islands; the track then passed 
westward of Tumble-down Dick and Herring islands. 

Fish Cove point or West Bay head, at the end of the sandy 
coast extending northwestward from cape Porcupine, from which it 
is distant 144 miles, is faced by dark cliffs, and rises to the height of 
133 feet. 

West bay extends southwestward 2 miles on the northwestern side 
of Fish Cove point, but it dries for 1 mile from the head, and is shal- 
low for 1,200 yards farther out. Pottles Cove head, on the northern 
side of West bay, is the eastern end of a narrow neck of land. 

Pottles cove, on the northern side of West bay at 800 yards from 
Pottles Cove head, has an extent of 400 yards, and there is anchor- 
age off its mouth in 54 fathoms water. A reef extends 200 yards from 
the middle of the cove, and the western side is rugged and foul for 
a short distance off, but otherwise there is a depth of 2 fathoms of 
water close to the shore. 

The cove is used by fishing vessels, being sheltered by Old Man 
island. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Pottles cove at 
6h. 57m.; springs rise 6 feet. 

Fish cove, southwestward of Pottles cove, affords sheltered 
anchorage to small vessels in 24 fathoms of water. 

Old Man island, situated eastward of Pottles cove, is 89 feet 
high; the channel between Pottles Cove head and the island is 300 
yards wide, but narrowed by rocks extending off both sides; to pass 
through it keep one-third of the distance -across from Pottles Cove 
head. | 

Shoal.—A shoal, with 34 fathoms of water over it, bears 75°, dis- 
tant 1,400 yards from Old Man island. 

New harbor, on the northwestern side of the neck of land ending 
in Pottles Cove head, is shallow, but affords fairly sheltered anchor- 
age for fishing craft in 24 to 3 fathoms of water, under an island 30 
feet high, that forms two passages into the harbor; the anchorage is 
about 400 yards across. The western passage is filled by rocks and 
shoals, and should not be used. The eastern passage is clear on the 
eastern side, but a rock that covers lies off the island, and there is 
also a rock 50 yards off the southeastern side of the island. 

Tub island, northwestward 1% miles from Pottles Cove head, is 
179 feet high. and conspicuous; it rises in two mounds, the eastern 
being in the shape of an inverted tub, and it is the southern entrance 
point to Hamilton inlet. 


GEORGE ISLAND—HAMILTON INLET. (5 


Tub harbor, westward of Tub island and between it and some 
islets and the mainland, affords good anchorage in 5 to 8 fathoms of 
water, sand bottom, and is much frequented by fishermen. 

Drakes island, eastward 1,200 yards from Tub island, is 27 feet 
high; Bakers ledge extends northeastward 600 yards from it; the 
highest rock of the ledge is 8 feet high. 

Mad Moll, a shoal of two rocks, 100 yards apart, that cover 5 feet 
at high water, bears 89°, distant 1,600 yards from Drakes island; a 
shoal, with 4 fathoms of water over it, bears 91°, distant 2, miles, 
and a rock, with 15 feet of water over it, bears 96°, distant 3/4, miles 
from Drakes island. 

George island, the southern end of which bears northeastward, 
distant 4,3, miles from Tub island, is in two parts; the southern part, 
750 feet high, trends northwestward 24+ miles to a low neck, whence 
the northern part, 720 feet high, trends northeastward for the same 
distance; the width of the southern part is nearly a mile, and that 
of the northern 1,200 yards. The coasts of the island are steep-to 
at the distance of 600 yards. The cove on the eastern side is 1,800 
yards wide at the entrance and 1 mile deep, open eastward, narrows 
gradually, and affords anchorage in 6 to 8 fathoms of water, sand 
bottom, sheltered except from easterly winds between the directions 
northeastward and south-southeastward. 'The southwestern shore of 
the cove is clear, but shoals extend 600 yards from the northwestern 
shore. Gull island, close southward of the northern entrance point, 
is 49 feet high, and an islet, 23 feet high, lies 200 yards southward 
of it; a rock, with 7 feet of water over it, les close eastward of this 
islet. 

Round Head island is a small truncated cone, 180 feet high, nearly 
joined to the southwestern point of the entrance to the cove, and fish- 
ing boats shelter westward of it. 

Rock.— Bearing 139°, distant 1,4; miles from the northeastern point 
of George island, is a rock with less than 6 feet of water over it. 

Norman reef, bearing 86°, distant 3,4, miles from the southeastern 
point of George island, has 1 foot of water over it, and is the summit 
of a rocky bank extending eastward nearly 5 miles from the southern 
part of George island. Bearing 136°, distant 14 miles from Norman 
reef, there is a shoal with 64 fathoms of water over it. 

Black rocks le southwestward about 14 miles from George island, 
and the channel between is said to be clear, but the channels between 
these rocks and the Duck islands and the mainland must not be at- 
tempted without a pilot. 

Hamilton inlet (Ivucktoke or Grosse Water bay) is entered be- 
tween Tub island and Pompey island, which are 15 miles apart in a 
northerly and southerly direction. It extends west-southwestward 35 
miles to the Narrows, the intervening space containing several islands. 


716 EAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


Within the Narrows, which are 700 yards wide, the inlet extends 
southwestward for 90 miles, opening to the width of 18 miles in lake 
Melville, and narrowing again at its head, into which flows Hamilton 
river, a large stream. 

Cuff harbor, west-northwestward about 24 miles from Tub harbor 
and between Cuff islands and the mainland, is much frequented by 
fishermen. 

Two islets, lying about } mile apart, northeastward and south- 
westward, are situated west-southwestward 4 miles from Pompey 
island (page 719) and 14 miles from the northern shore of the inlet. 

Saddle island, lying westward 14 miles from George island, rises 
steeply to a double summit about 400 feet in height. 

Shag rocks, a group of low islets, lie southwestward at a distance 
of 2% miles from Saddle island. A sunken rock and some islets lie 
between these rocks and the shore to the southward. 

Catos island, west-northwestward, 5 miles from Saddle island, 
with Little Black island lying between, 1s about 80 feet high, and 
rises gradually; a reef of rocks extends } mile from its southern and 
southwestern sides, a portion of which covers at high water. A 
rock above water lies about a mile southwestward of Little Black 
island. 

Big island, southwestward, 3 miles from Catos island, rises 
abruptly to the height of about 200 feet from its southeastern side, 
but gradually from its northwestern side, and it appears wedge- 
shaped on westerly bearings. 

Pompey island lies northward $ mile from Big island; the water 
between them is said to be shoal. 

East Sister, lying southwestward, distant } mile from Big island, 
is about 140 feet high, with a rounded summit; West Sister, lying 
southwestward, 4 mile from East Sister, rises'in three hummocks, 
the middle and highest being about 100 feet high. 

Nats Discovery point, about 14 miles south-southeastward of 
West Sister island, is a small projection of the mainland. Anchorage, 
sheltered from offshore winds, can be obtained in 12 fathoms of water, 
off a sandy beach just southwestward of the point. 

Ticoralak head, westward, 44 miles from West Sister, is 450 feet 
high, dark colored, steep on its southeastern side, and conspicuous. 

Cullinghams cove, on the southern shore of the inlet southward 
of Ticoralak head, is considered a good anchorage, with black mud 
bottom. There is a depth of 13 fathoms in the entrance, gradually 
decreasing to the head of the cove, the deepest water being on the 
northeastern side. 

Smith island, a mile off the southern shore at about 9 miles west- 
southwestward of West Sister island, is small and very low. 


RIGOULETTE. vn OF 


Man-of-war rock, with a depth of about 4 feet of water over it, 
is reported to be situated nearly in mid-channel at the eastern entrance 
of the Narrows, midway between Smith island and the eastern en- 
trance point to ia Double Mare, which is an inlet 50 miles in extent. 

The southeastern end of Saddle island, open northward of Turner 
head, bearing about 80°, leads northward of the rock, and the appar- 
ent northwestern side of the Narrows, open northwestward of Leices- 
ter point, the apparent southeastern side, leads northwestward. 

Rigoulette, on the shore of a small cove situated southwestward 
34 miles from the southwestern entrance point to la Double Mare and 
on the western side of the Narrows, is the headquarters of the Hud- 
son Bay Company’s trading stations on the coast of Labrador north- 
ward to cape Chidley. Owing to the strong tidal streams the Nar- 
rows seldom freeze over. 

The eastern shore of the Narrows opposite Rigoulette is a long 
sandy beach, off which at the distance of about 200 yards there is a 
reef which uncovers at low water. 

The western side of Rigoulette cove is a mud and sand flat extend- 
ing nearly 400 yards offshore; it is covered with bowlders, the high- 
est of which is awash at high water. 

Dart rock, with 5 feet of water over it, lies with the southeastern 
side of the officer’s dwelling house in line with the outer end of the 
wharf, bearing 229°, distant 100 yards. 

Shoal water extends northeastward,» ‘-stance.of..200 vards from 
the wharf; to the depth of 3 fathoms. 

Buoy.—A white: buay: ts wedret*about».L00 vards northward of 
Dart rock. 

Anchorage can be obtained in Rigoulette cove off the houses, in 
4 to 7 fathoms of water, mud bottom, but a vessel of moderate size 
should moor with the anchors north-northeastward and south-south- 
westward, and the inner anchor near Dart Rock buoy. This berth is 
out of the stream, which runs strongly over the hard bottom, and 
makes the anchorage insecure. 

Directions.—The precautions usual in unsurveyed waters should 
be taken when navigating Hamilton inlet, as it has been only cur- 
sorily examined. In entering the inlet 1t is recommended to pass 
northward 2 miles from George island, and then steer 266°. This 
course should lead about # mile southward of Saddle island; about 4 
mile northward of Shag rocks; and between West Sister island and 
Nats Discovery point. From between West Sister island and Nats 
Discovery point steer to pass southeastward of Ticoralak head, keep- 
ing the northern shore abroad and avoiding Man-of-war rock, until 
southwestward of the entrance to la Double Mare, when proceed in 
mid-channel to Rigoulette. 


# 


718 EAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


The following track, which is locally known as the Ship track, is 
followed by the mail steamers from Indian harbor: Pass between 
Double island (page 719) and Tinker island (the island west-north- 
westward of it); nearly mid-way between Puffin and Green islands; 
between Little Black and Catos islands; between East Sister and Big 
islands, then southeastward of Ticoralak head, and as above directed. 

Vessels should not proceed beyond Rigoulette without a pilot. 

Tides and tidal streams.—It is high water, full and change, at 
Rigoulette at (Th. 37m., approximately; springs rise 4 feet, neaps 34 
feet. The tidal streams run in mid-channel for 34 hours after high 
and low water on the shore, and at springs attain a rate of 6 to 7 
knots an hour, with very little slack water. 

Communication.—The Labrador steamer to and from St. John’s, 
via Battle harbor, calls at Rigoulette fortnightly during summer. 

Water can be taken at high water from a brook at the head of the 
bight, and there is wood in abundance. 

Rock.—<A sunken rock is reported to lie in mid-channel at the 
eastern entrance to the channel between Caravalla head and Henrietta 
island, about 3 miles above Rigoulette. 

Herring islands, east-northeastward 64 miles from the northeast- 
ern point of George island, comprise a group of three islands and 
some rocks. The highest and southeastern island is 184 feet high; 
the channel betw een it and the, northeastern island should not be 
taken. ic Oi 
Leeming ree ‘bearing’ 152°, distant 44 miles from the highest 
Herring island, has,about 1. foot qt avater ovel it, ang Is shee -to. 

. ak rock, 4 feet high, has been reported to pear ‘about 297° , distant 
1,400 yards from Leeming rock; its existence is doubtful, as it is 
possible that it was ice which was seen. 

Southeast rocks, bearing 88°, distant 17 miles from the south- 
eastern point of George island, and 328°, distant 174 miles from 
Outer Gannet island, comprise a group of 3 bare rocks, the highest 
being 30 feet high. A bare rock, 32 feet high, bears 345°, distant 24 
miles from the southern group. These rocks are steep-to. 

Breakers are reported to have been seen at a distance of 45 miles 
from the southeastern Southeast rock, on a bearing of 35°. 

Tom Cod rock, bearing 226°, distant 3;%; miles from the southeast- 
ern Southeast rock, is awash at low water, and a shoal, with 3 fathoms 
of water over it, les eastward 300 yards from it. 

An islet, 7 feet high, with a sunken rock off its northwestern side, 
bears 307°, distant 4% miles from the bare rock which hes at 345°, 
distant 2+ miles from southeast rocks. 

Tommy rocks.—The middle and principal of these rocks is 64 
feet high, and lies northward, distant 44 miles from the northeastern 
of the Herring islands; the two eastern rocks, close together and 29 


DUCK ISLANDS—ALLIUK BIGHT. 719 


feet high, lie eastward $ mile from the middle rock, and Bulldog 
rock, the western, 8 feet high, lies westward $ mile from the middle 
rock. 

Duck islands are two grass-covered islets faced by gray rock, the 
eastern being 100 feet high, and the other at 4 mile to the westward, 
80 feet high. The eastern Duck island bears 288°, distant 1,2, miles 
from Bulldog rock. 

Shoal water extends about 300 yards from the western end of the 
eastern Duck island, and a shoal, with 3 fathoms of water over it, 
bears 193°, distant a httle more than 1 mile from the summit of the 
western Duck island. 

Double islands, westward, 14 miles from the western Duck island. 
are two islands about 60 feet high and nearly joined by rocks and 
shoal water; a reef extends southeastward about 400 yards from the 
western island. 

Tinker island, west-northwestward ;®, mile from the western 
Double island, is a bare reddish rock, 55 feet high, and steep-to. 

Pompey island, east-southeastward # mile from the northern point 
of the entrance to Hamilton inlet, is conspicuous, flat-topped, and 
335 feet high. The channel between has not been examined, but is 
reported to be clear in the fairway. There are some trees on this 
island, but none on those to the northeastward. 

A small islet, about 30 feet high, les 800 yards eastward of the 
island, and a rock, with 4 feet of water over it, is situated nearly 
in mid-channel between them. 

Puffin island, southward 14 miles from Pompey island, is about 
150 feet high. 

Green island, east-southeastward 1,9, miles from Puffin island, 
is flat and 70 feet high. 

Little harbor, north-northeastward 14 miles from the north- 
western end of Pompey island, is within some islets and only suitable 
for a few small craft that moor to the rocks. 

An islet, 42 feet high, lying northwestward $ mile from Little 
Harbor islands, is surrounded by shoals for the distance of 200 yards, 
but. the channel between it and Little Harbor islands is otherwise 
clear. 

Pottles bay, extending westward about 15 miles from this island, 
has not been examined. 

Alliuk bight extends northward about 3$ miles from its entrance, 
which is situated northeastward 2 miles from the islet 42 feet high; 
it is shallow, and its head is separated by a narrow neck of low land 
from Little Holton harbor. The bight has not been examined. 

Run by Guess island, the summit of which is a peak, 378 feet 
high, is separated from Little Harbor islands by a channel 400 yards 
wide, through which a depth of 6 feet can be carried. A small cove, 


720 EAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


situated southward of its northeastern point, is filled with bowlders 
to the line of the points, but temporary anchorage can be obtained off 
the entrance in 10 fathoms of water, mud bottom. The southeastern 
coast of the island is foul and should not be approached within 4 
mile. 

Run by Guess, the channel separating Run by Guess and Ice 
Tickle islands, is the best passage through this group of islands, being 
4 mile wide at its narrowest part and almost clear, so that sailing 
vessels have no difficulty in beating through. ‘There is excellent an- 
chorage between Run by Guess island and the mainland in depths of 
14 to 17 fathoms. 

A small islet, 17 feet high, with a black rock off its eastern end, 
bears 37°, distant 1,400 yards from the northwestern end of Run by 
Guess island, and a shoal, with 10 feet of water over it, bears 287°, 
distant 600 yards from the islet. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Run by Guess, at 
Th. 5m.; springs rise 5? feet. 

Ice Tickle island, rises to the height of 320 feet on the southern 
side, and to two peaked hills with cliff fronts, 307 and 303 feet high, 
on the western side. Pinch-Gut islet, 101 feet high, is sek joined 
to the northwestern point. 

Ice tickle, between Ice Tickle island and Rodney Muni island, 
is so named on account of the ice remaining there longer than in any 
other place in the locality. The anchorage in the tickle, in 5 to 7 
fathoms of water, eastward of Boxer island, is secure and convenient 
for vessels proceeding northward. A cove on the eastern side forms 
a convenient harbor for fishing vessels and for curing fish. 

The southern entrance is clear at 200 yards off Ice Tickle island, but 
the northern entrance, between the northeastern end of Ice Tickle 
island and Marks island, has several rocks, sunken and awash, in it. 
In July, 300 vessels, on their way northward to fish, have been at 
anchor in Ice tickle at one time. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Ice tickle at 6h. 20m. ; 
springs rise 7 feet, neaps 4 feet. 

Black rocks, southward 1,300 yards from the southern point of 
Ice Tickle island, are steep-to. The best fishing ground is off these 
rocks in 14 fathoms of water. 

Rodney Mundy island, on the eastern side of Ice tickle, is of 
very irregular shape, about 2 miles long, northward and southward, 
and 300 feet high. 

Edwards harbor, on the western side of Rodney Mundy island, 
and southeastward of Ice tickle, is only suitable for small vessels, 
and a sunken rock lies in the entrance. There is good salmon fish- 
ing with nets in Salmon bight, to the southeastward of Edwards 
harbor, during May and June. 


4 


| 


INDIAN HARBOR—CUT THROAT ISLAND. 721 


Indian harbor, between the southern side of Rodney Mundy 
island and Indian island, is sheltered from the eastward by Pigeon 
island, and although small, affords accommodation for eight or ten 
vessels under 15 feet draft of water, if moored. The water in the 
harbor is’ smooth, the bottom sand and weed, and at high water 16 
feet can be carried into it by the northeastern and eastern chan- 
nels, and small vessels enter also by the southwestern channel. It is 
a most convenient harbor for fishermen and for curing fish, and 
fishing stages are erected along its shores. This was the northern 
fishing station on the coast of Labrador in 1826. 

Temporary anchorage, in’ 10 fathoms of water, open to the east- 
ward, can be obtained southward of Pigeon island, off a cove lying 
between the northeastern part of Indian island and the western part 
of Ponsonby island, but the cove is shoal for 400 yards. from the 
channel at its head. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Indian harbor at 
6h. 20m.; springs rise 7 feet, neaps 4 feet. 

Water can be procured with a little trouble, but there is no wood. 

Communication.—The Labrador steamer to and from St. John’s, 
via Battle harbor, calls at Indian harbor fortnightly during summer. 

Wireless telegraph.—There is a wireless telegraph station at 
Indian harbor. 

Hospital.—There is a hospital of the Royal National Mission to 
deep-sea fishermen at Indian harbor; it is a wooden building of 
two stories, and has a dozen beds for patients. It is open for the 
sick in June and is closed in October when the fishing is over. 

Marks island, northeastward of Ice Tickle island, and northward 
about 400 yards from Rodney Mundy island, has a deep narrow cove 
on its northwestern side and two coves on the southeastern side; it is 
flat, partially wooded, and 170 feet high. 

Green islet is a small grass-covered rock, 25 feet high, lying close 
off the northern end of Marks island, and a rock, with 7 feet of water 
over it, lies northwestward 200 yards from the islet. 

Smoky tickle, between Marks island and Cut Throat island, 
which lies about 1,200 yards to the eastward, is available for vessels 
of 12 feet draft, but a pilot is necessary. 

Cut Throat island has a flat summit 447 feet high, situated near 
the northwestern end of its northeastern side. Splitting Knife bight, 
an inlet extending 800 yards to the southward on the northern coast, 
affords fairly sheltered anchorage for small craft near the head. A 
bay on the southern side of the island has no shelter; Cut Throat, 
harbor, on the southeastern side of the island and separated from 
the bay by a narrow neck, is a creek extending northeastward and 
giving fair shelter to the schooners that frequent it. 

76846—09——_46 


122 EAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


Foxy islands.—The northeastern Foxy island lies southeastward 
600 yards from the southeastern point of Cut Throat island, and is a 
conical mound 96 feet high; the southwestern island lies south-south- 
westward 900 yards from the northeastern, and is a similar mound 65 
feet high. ; 

A sunken rock lies southwestward 300 yards, and a rock, 7 feet 
high, lies east-southeastward 800 yards from the northeastern island. 

Bacalhao island, eastward, distant 1,400 yards from East point 
of Ponsonby island, is a curved ridge of basalt, 140 feet high, and 
steep-to. An islet, 35 feet high, lies close westward of its western 
end, with a sunken rock close westward of it. 

Big island, north-northeastward, nearly 2 miles from Bacalhao 
island, is a dark pyramid 240 feet high. 

A shoal, with 13 feet of water over it, bears 74°, distant 1,500 yards 
from Bacalhao island, and a shoal, with 3 fathoms of water over it, 
bears 242°, distant 900 yards from the western end of Big island, 
both shoals being in the channel between the two islands. 

Lewis rock, bearing 82°, distant 1 mile from the eastern end of 
Big island, covers 5 feet, and there is a shoal, with 6 feet of water 
over it, southwestward 250 yards from the rock. 

Entry island, eastward about 1,200 yards from Cut Throat island, 
with Cut Throat tickle lying between, rises in several hummocks, the 
highest, on the eastern side, being a sharp peak 207 feet high. 

Little Entry island is separated by a narrow and shoal channel 
from the southwestern end of Entry island, and there is a flagstaff 
on it; Jigger island, close eastward of the southeastern end of Entry 
island, is 66 feet high, and there is a rock bearing 197°, distant 400 
yards from it. Reefs and rocks border the southern side of Entry 
island, which should not be approached nearer than 800 yards. 

Five islands comprise a group lying eastward 1,200 yards from 
Entry island; the northwestern and highest island is 135 feet high. 
A small harbor between the islands is entered from the westward 
by keeping close to the southern coast of the northwestern island, 
or from the eastward between the northwestern and eastern islands. 
The summit of the eastern island is 105 feet high, and has the 
appearance of a knob. Shoal water extends northeastward from the 
southwestern island, and in passing between the southwestern and 
eastern islands, the eastern island must be kept aboard to the anchor- 
age, in 9 fathoms water, off the fishing stages. 

A reef, awash at low water, which generally breaks, bears 273°, 
distant 900 yards from the southern end of the southwestern island, 
and rocks border the outer coasts of the group to the distance of 300 
yards. 


JIGGER ISLAND—EAST ROCK. (23 


Jigger island, east-southeastward 1 mile from the eastern end of 
Five islands, is flat, 53 feet high, and reefs extend 300 yards off its 
western side. 

The Cubs, eastward, } mile from Jigger island, are two bare islets, 
42 and 46 feet high, and steep-to, with a small rock between them. 

White Bear islands constitute the group of islands at the easterm 
end of the chain of islands extending eastward from the mainland 
at the northern entrance to Hamilton inlet. 

North island, northeastward $ mile from the Cubs, has a sharp 
peaked summit 263 feet high; it 1s bold-to except at the northeastern 
end, 250 yards off which is an islet 27 feet high; bearing 96°, distant 
200 yards from the islet is a sunken rock, and bearing 79°, distant 
850 yards from the islet, is a shoal with 13 feet of water over it; 
both these shoals break in a heavy swell. 

Middle island, southeastward, 1,200 yards from North island, is 
barren and rugged, rising in two flat hills, 190 feet and 180 feet high, 
respectively ; it is steep-to, except on the southwestern side, off which 
a rocky spit extends into the western entrance of the harbor. 

South islands are two islands, 125 feet and 93 feet high, respec- 
tively, lying close together in an easterly and westerly direction at 
about 400 yards southward of Middle island. Gull islet, a rock 54 
feet high, lies southwestward 250 yards from the western South 
island. 

White Bear harbor, between Middle island and South islands, is 
small, and affords partially sheltered anchorage in 14 fathoms of 
water, sand and gravel bottom, off the stages where vessels moor for 
the fishery. An islet 28 feet high lies in the eastern entrance to 
the harbor, and there is a shoal, with 6 feet of water over it, bearing 
158°, distant 350 yards from the islet, and nearly in the fairway of 
the entrance; to avoid it keep the southern shore aboard. 

Pigeon island lies east-southeastward $ mile from Middle island; 
it is small and 120 feet high. Immediately southward of Pigeon 
island is an island 110 feet high, close south-southwestward of which 
is Chapel island, 72 feet high. A group of three rocks, about 30 
feet high, lies eastward 200 yards from Chapel island. 

Grappling island, east-southeastward 4} mile from Pigeon island, 
is 108 feet high; a rock les 200 yards northwestward of the island, 
and there is a rock close off the southeastern side of the island. 

East rock, east-southeastward, ;, mile from Grappling island, 
and the outer of the group, is 42 feet high, and bold to seaward. 

A rock, with 7 feet of water over it, bears 338°, distant } mile; 
and a shoal, with 9 feet of water over it, bears 248°, distant 1,8; miles 
from East rock. 


724 EAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


Bulldog island, bearing 355°, distant 17 miles from East rock, is 
an isolated barren rock about 40 feet high, with reefs extending a 
short distance northward and southward from it. 

Shoal.—Bearing about 223°, distant 4 miles from Bulldog island is 
the northwestern end of a chain of rocks and shoal water, which may 
be considered to extend thence in a direction 147° for 6 miles; it is 
supposed that there is a depth of 11 feet of water over it, and breakers 
are reported to have been seen on the bank; its position and extent 
are approximate only. This locality requires caution, as it has not 
been examined. 

Double island:-—Man-of-war point lies north-northwestward, dis- 
tant 1,4, miles from Marks island (p. 721), and Double island, 137 
feet high, is situated about eastward 1 mile from the point. The 
channel to the northward between the point and island is almost 
blocked by rocks and shoals, so that even fishing boats are rarely able 
to use it. 

Thomey island, eastward 600 yards from Double island, is 110 
feet high, and a rock, that dries at low water, lies northwestward 200 
yards from its southwestern end. 

Fairy island, southeastward 1,300 yards from Thomey island, is 
139 feet high. 

Pigeon island, northeastward 700 yards from Fairy island, is 120 
feet high; a rocky ledge extends southeastward 350 yards from it, the 
outer rock being 2 feet high. A rock, that covers 4 feet, bears 242°, 
distant + mile from the southern end of the ledge: Green islet, open 
southward of fairy island, bearing 259°, leads southward of the rock. 

Isolated rock, with 34 fathoms of water over it, bears 88°, distant 
21 miles from the southeastern end of Pigeon island. Big island, 
well open westward of Entry island, bearing 178°, leads westward; 
and the southern end of Double island, open southward of Pigeon 
island, bearing 276°, leads southward of this rock. 

Little Brig island, northward 4 mile from Pigeon island, is 115 
feet high. At its southwestern end is a red house and a flagstaff, 
and there are several houses on its northwestern side. Rocks extend 
300 yards off the southwestern point, and a rock with 3 feet of water 
over it bears 102°, distant 900 yards from the southwestern point and 
nearly 4+ mile offshore. The northeastern summit of Double island, 
in line with the northeastern end of Thomey island, bearing 268°, 
leads southward of this rock. 

Brig Harbor rock, with 6 feet of water over it, bears 121°, distant 
1,400 yards from the eastern end of Little Brig island. White Cock- 
ade island, open eastward of Sloop island, bearing 339°, leads east- 
ward, and the southwestern side of the passage inside Sloop island 
in line with the northeastern end of Little Brig island, bearing 318°, 
leads southwestward of the rock. 


BRIG HARBOR—-HARBOR ROCK. 725 


Brig harbor, between Brig Harbor island and Little Brig island, 
is shallow and unsafe. Several vessels anchored there have been 
wrecked at various times. At the best and deepest place for anchor- 
age there is only 9 feet of water; the harbor is encumbered by rocks, 
and the swell rolls in with any breeze from the northeastward. 

Brig Harbor island, northwestward, 400 yards from Little Brig 
island, is 335 feet high. 

Tea cove, an open bight in the northern side of Brig Harbor island, 
does not afford any shelter. Tea Cove head, its northwestern point, 
is a steep bluff. 

Sloop island, separated from the northeastern end of the southeast- 
ern coast of Brig Harbor island by a channel 350 yards wide, passable 
for boats only, is 173 feet high. 

Sloop harbor extends southwestward 14 miles between Sloop and. 
Brig Harbor islands, with a width of 600 yards, and affords good 
summer anchorage in 38 to 8 fathoms of water, sand bottom. ‘The 
harbor is clear of shoals except at a short distance from each shore, 
and dries about 200 yards from the head, toward which the water 
shoals gradually. 

White Cockade island, north-northeastward 1,400 yards from 
Brig Harbor island, with a clear passage between, is 265 feet high, 
and conical, with a bluff at the southeastern end. 

A reef bears 102°, distant 1,200 yards from the southeastern point 
of White Cockade island; it covers at high water and is steep-to. 

Coffee island, west-northwestward 14 miles from the western end 
of White Cockade island, is a yellow rock, with a conical mound, 35 
feet high at its northern end. 

A reef 400 yards in extent, that covers 2 feet at high water, les 
northwestward 400 yards from Coffee island. 

Teapot island, northwestward 4 mile from the northwestern side 
of Brig Harbor island, is 85 feet high. 

Taylor rock, with 3 feet of water over it, lies nortliwestward 300 
yards from Teapot island and is steep to seaward. 

A reef, that covers 1 foot, bears 282°, distant 800 yards from the 
western point of the island. Chance island, open northward of Flat 
island, bearing 291°, leads northward of Taylor rock. 

Duck islands, southwestward 700 yards from Teapot island, are a 
cluster of bare rocks, the highest being 51 feet high, which should not 
be approached nearer than 400 yards. 

Harbor rock, awash at low water, bears 135°, distant 1,100 yards 
from the western Duck island. The southeastern end of Coffee island, 
open eastward of Teapot island, bearing 19°, leads eastward of the 
rock. 


726 EAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


Fox island, southwestward 1 mile from Teapot island, is a barren 
island, 125 feet high, with a flat summit falling steeply at the south- 
western end. The passages between Fox island and the mainland, 
Teapot island and Duck islands, are encumbered by rocks and must 
not be attempted. 

Emily harbor is on the western side of Brig Harbor island and be- 
tween it and Camel island, a bare mound 130 feet high. The harbor 
entrance is between Brig Harbor island and Deadman island, a round 
barren rock 100 feet high, within which keep Brig Harbor island 
aboard to the wharf, where vessels moor alongside in 4 fathoms of 
water; the harbor will accommodate three or four vessels. The only 
shoals in the approach are Harbor rock and the two rocks off the 
northwestern side of Brig Harbor island. There is no passage from 
_ the westward. 

Communication.—The Labrador steamer to and from St. Johns, 
via Battle harbor, calls at Emily harbor fortnightly during summer. 

Dark Tickle harbor, southwestward of Emily harbor, and on the 
western side of the southern end of Brig Harbor island, and between 
it and Butt and Camel islands, is entered between Thomey, Double, 
and Brig Harbor islands, and affords good shelter for small vessels 
in 6 to 8 fathoms of water, mud bottom. 

Horse harbor, located along the northwestern side of the island 
northwestward of Dark Tickle harbor, is shallow, and only suitable 
for small craft which moor to the shore. This is one of the principal 
fishing centers on the coast. In 1905 about 2,000 tons of fish were 
dried here. There is a store for supplying the people during the 
fishing season. 

Black rock, bearing 320°, distant 1,400 yards from the north- 
eastern end of Fox island, is 29 feet high, round and barren, with a 
reef a short distance off the southern side. 

Flat island, northeastward 600 yards from Black rock, is 21 feet 
high, and shoal water extends 200 yards southward of it. 

A shoal, with 13 feet of water over it and steep-to on its north- 
eastern side, bears 304°, distant 400 yards from Flat island. 

Green island, bearing 282°, distant 24 miles from Coffee island, is 
49 feet high, flat and surrounded by rocks to the distance of 400 yards, 
but shoals extend between the island and the land south-southwest- 
ward. 

Holton harbor, lying south-southwestward of Green island, ex- 
tends 1 mile to the southward, and is # mile wide at the entrance, 
400 yards at 800 yards within, and thence of that width to the head. 

The entrance to this harbor is very foul, and must not be taken 
without a pilot, except in an emergency, when proceed thus: 

Bring the northern fall of the cliffs on White Cockade island in 
line with the summit of Coffee island, bearing 89°, and keep this 


HOLTON ISLAND—LITTLE HOLTON. (2 


mark on to pass between the reefs off the eastern entrance point of 
the harbor and the shoal off the mid-channel rocks, and when the inner 
points of the harbor open, bearing 211°, round in and steer up the 
middle of the harbor, anchoring in 5 to 64 fathoms of water, sand 
bottom. 

A rock, that covers, hes close to the eastern shore northeastward of 
the first fishing stage, and a bank, with 14 feet of water over it, extends 
150 yards from the western shore, just beyond the first white house 
within the entrance; the water shoals to 3 fathoms at 800 yards from 
the head. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Holton harbor at 
6h. 44m.; springs rise 5% feet, neaps 4 feet. 

Holton island, northwestward 14 miles from Green island, is 
generally flat, with a truncated cone, 316 feet high, toward the western 
end. The coasts are rocky, and should not be approached nearer 
than 4 mile, nor should the passage between it and Chance island be 
attempted without local knowledge. There is a St. Johns fishing 
station at Holton island. 

Chance island, south-southwestward 1,200 yards from Holton 
island, is 229 feet high. A reef, awash at high water, lies + mile west- 
southwestward of the island, and there is a rock, that covers 6 feet at 
high water, lying nearly midway between Chance island and the 
western point of Holton harbor. 

Little Holton, westward about 14 miles from Holton harbor, is a 
shallow anchorage separated by a narrow neck of land from Alhuk 
bight. 

Ice—Northward to cape Chidley.—As a general rule the 
sheltered waters between Holton harbor and cape Harrigan, which 
hes 185 miles to the northwestward, freeze in November, but not 
sufficiently to prevent navigation before the 15th of that month, except 
during early seasons. The navigation of the inside channels closes 
between the 1st and 20th of December, and soon afterwards the ice 
usually reaches out beyond the islands, and all navigation ceases. 
Navigation opens toward the end of June or in July. 

In the summer of 1880, at cape Harrigan, Paul island, and Hebron, 
the northern ice finally left the shore on the 31st of July, up to which 
day it was reported that Hebron was interruptedly blocked. In 
the latitude of Nain the harbors occasionally freeze over in October 
and are frozen hard in November. It is also stated, on reliable 
authority, that the coast from Nain northward to cape Chidley is 
seldom clear of field ice before the last week in July, though the 
local ice may break up in the early part of June. 

Icebergs may be encountered at any time, but are most numerous 
from June till August, when they are occasionally found in great 
numbers, consisting often of huge cubes, and not as a rule presenting 


728 EAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


the picturesque shapes they assume when seen farther southward at 
a later date. 

Some navigators have considered that the great number of ice- 
bergs, instead of being an annoyance, are of much assistance. 
Usually it can be seen if the bergs are aground, and shoal water 
is often indicated by several small bergs being close together with 
detached pieces of ice floating away to leeward. 

The coast from Little Holton trends northwestward to the eastern 
point of Byron bay, a distance of about 10 miles; it is fringed with 
rocks, and should not be approached within 2 miles. 

Tinker island, northwestward, 6 miles from Holton island, is 
rugged, cliffy, and 201 feet high. Numerous islets and rocks extend 
southwestward from it to the mainland. 

Quaker hat, situated northeastward 3; miles from Tinker island, 
is 125 feet high, and Quaker reef, situated east-northeastward, dis- 
tant 24 miles from Tinker island, is 20 feet high. The channels on 
either side of the reef are clear, but that southwestward of it is 
generally used. 

Ship Harbor head, on the northwestern side of Byron bay, situ- 
ated 13 miles westward from Tinker island, rises in a conical hill to 
the height of about 500 feet, and shelters Ship harbor from the 
southward. 

False cape, northward about 6 miles from Ship Harbor head, is 
the end of a saddle-shaped hill 900 feet high; a deep bay extends 
southward between False cape and cape Harrison, which is situated 
north-northwestward distant 6 miles. There is a low islet, that is 
steep-to to seaward, off False cape. 

Bear island, southeastward, distant 24 miles from cape Harrison, 
is about 150 feet high, reddish and steep-to on the northeastern side. 

Cape Harrison (Uivaluk of the Eskimo) is a bluff rising to the 
height of 1,065 feet, fringed by steep reddish cliffs, and conspicuous. | 

Webeck harbor, whose name is a corruption of Uivuk, a cape, les 
between Webeck island, on the northwestern side, and the mainland 
of cape Harrison, on the southeastern side, and has been for some 
years a great rendezvous for fishermen. Morison island hes in the 
northeastern entrance and shelters the harbor from the northeast- 
ward. The harbor is 14 miles in length, 1,200 to 450 yards in width, 
and affords safe anchorage for vessels of large size, but is too exposed 
for fishing vessels. There are no fishing stages, though the fishing 
grounds around the island, and under the cliffs of the mainland in 14 
fathoms of water, are good. 

Webeck island, about 280 feet high, with a few hills on its north- 
western part, is flat and interspersed with lakes in the middle. The 
formation of the island is chiefly of gneiss, though veins of quartz 


DOUBLE ISLAND—CONICAL ISLAND. 729 


exist, as well as masses of bowlder. There are also rocks of trap 
formation standing in columns. 

The main channel to the harbor is between Webeck and Morison 
islands. Clinker channel, between Morison island and the land 
terminating in cape Harrison, is reported to have a rock in it, but its 
existence has not been verified. Western channel is not recommended. 

The anchorage is in 5 to 6 fathoms of water, sand and mud bottom, 
southwestward of Harbor rocks, two flat rocks 7 feet high. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Webeck harbor at 
6h. 21m.; springs rise 7 feet, neaps about 4 feet. 

Communication.—The Labrador steamer to and from St. Johns, 
via Battle harbor, calls at Webeck harbor fortnightly during summer. 

Water can be procured from Webeck island, but the watering 
place is inconvenient for boats. Wood is scare on the island and con- 
sists only of stunted gnarled roots from the sheltered valleys, but it 
is more abundant on the mainland. 

The coast.—Cape Strawberry les west-northwestward, distant 
41 miles from cape Harrison. There is a deep bay between these 
capes, the shores of which rise in conical hills to the height of 1,500 
to 2,400 feet. The bay contains several groups of islands. 

The inshore track, close to the mainland points of this bay, is clear 
of shoals. 

Jigger island, west-southwestward 34 miles from Webeck island, 
is about 200 feet high; Jigger tickle is southward of the island. 

Double island, westward, 74 miles from Jigger island, is about 
450 feet high, and terminates northeastward in a low rocky point. 
Its northwestern side is steep-to. A rock, 60 feet high, lies northeast- 
ward about 1.400 yards from the island. 

Southward of Double island is a deep bay, and southwestward of 
Double island there is a wedge-shaped island, about 150 feet high, 
and also several islets joined to the mainland at low water. The 
mainland west-northwestward from this is indented with some deep 
bays, and rises steeply in high conical hills from the sea. 

Westward 4 miles from Double island is an island 100 feet high. 

Dog islands, westward 9 miles from Double islands, are about 300 
feet high; the eastern consists of 2 hills joined by a low beach, and 
the western, which hes west-northwestward 1,600 yards from the 
eastern, is flat-topped, with steep sides. A rocky islet, 20 feet high, 
lies off its western end. 

Conical island, northwestward 4 miles from Doge islands, is the 
western Adlavik island (see p. 729). An island les south-south- 
westward one mile from Conical island, and bearing 174°, distant 1,3, 
miles from Conical island is a rock. 


730 EAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


Manak island (Mannox), situated 44 miles northwestward from 
Conical island, rises to a sharp-peaked hill on its southern side. Some 
islets lie close northward of it. There are several islets and rocks 
northeastward of the line between Manak and Conical islands. 

Pomiadluk point, northward 7 miles from Manak island, is low 
and sharp. Between the islands off Manak island and Pomiadluk 
point are several islets that should be left to the eastward; and near 
the shore at south-southeastward 1 miles from Pomiadluk point is 
a group of low rocks, with a sunken rock off the southeastern end. 
The passage is close to the shore inside these rocks. 

Cape Strawberry (Umiakkoviktanuk) rises to the height of 1,235 
feet, and is the end of a high range extending southwestward to Alta- 
gaiyaivik (Monkey hill), a conical mountain, 2,170 feet high. The 
cape is faced by terrace-like cliffs, with deep ravines between them. 

Cape Mokkovik bears northwestward, distant 6 miles from cape 
Strawberry, and between them is Mokkovik bay, an inlet reported to 
extend 20 miles. At the entrance to the bay is a group of low black 
islets and sunken rocks almost blocking the channel northwestward 
of them. Southeastward of these rocks, under cape Strawberry, is 
Strawberry harbor, formed by a small island. 

Cape Mokkovik is a steep bluff rising to the inland ranges. The 
northern points of the cape are foul for the distance of 400 yards. 
Two islets lie eastward of the cape; there is no passage between them 
and the land, but vessels pass between the islets, or eastward not less 
than 200 yards from them. 

Ragged islands (Kingnitaksoak) comprise a group of four prin- 
cipal and numerous small basaltic islets and rocks. The south- 
eastern islet is situated west-northwestward, 8 miles from cape Har- 


rison. The third islet from the southeastward rises in perpendicular ~ 


cliffs to the height of 640 feet, and is conspicuous. The western 
island is also high, with two round mounds, and is the largest of the 
group. Two rocks, about 10 feet high, lie southward, distant ? mile 
from the western island. Fishing craft anchor in the passages be- 
tween these islands, but the anchorages are not good. 

Communication.—The Labrador steamer to and from St. Johns, 
via Battle harbor, calls at Ragged islands fortnightly during sum- 
mer. 

Adlavik islands, a large group extending northwestward about 
13 miles from about 24 miles northward of Dog islands, are nearly 
all high and much indented; the channels between them, in which 
there are small islets and rocks, are narrow and intricate, but they 
have not been examined, and the greatest caution is necessary in 
navigating in them. 

Tikaoralik (Wheel), situated 187, miles westward from Webeck 
island, is a sharp peaked islet about 400 feet high. An islet lies 


KIKKERTAVAK—UIGOKLIALUIT. 731 


southward, about 1 mile from Tikaoralik, and there is a rock above 
water between them. A small islet, 20 feet high, lies close north- 
ward of Tikaoralik, and there is a narrow channel between, through 
which 3 fathoms of water can be carried. 

Rock.—A rock is reported to bear 90°, distant 44 miles from 
Tikaoralik, but this position is doubtful. 

Kikkertavak is the southernmost and largest of the group. 
Rogers harbors lie at its northeastern end and west-northwestward, 
2 miles from Tikaoralik. These harbors lie southwestward of an 
islet, and the entrance is deep and narrow between low rocks on 
either hand; the anchorage is in 12 fathoms of water. There is a 
passage between the islet and Kikkertavak from harbor to harbor. 

Two ledges, that cover at high water, lie off the northeastern har- 
bor; to clear them, keep the shore aboard till the channel northwest- 
ward of Rogers harbor opens. This description is old and not quite 
clear. 

The northwestern Adlavik island rises to a round hill which 
has a cairn on it, and between this island and Kikkertavak is an islet, 
with three hills. 

Anauiat, lying north-northeastward 34 miles from Kikkertavak, 
and west-northwestward 11 miles from Ragged islands, is a flat island 
about 200 feet high. Between it and Adlavik islands are several 
small islets and rocks. 

Mortimer shoal, awash at low water, bears approximately 286°, 
distant 44 miles from Anauiat; its extent has not been ascertained. 

Kidlialuit, northwestward, 64 miles from Anauiat, is a narrow 
island, 44 miles long, northward and southward, about 250 feet high, 
almost divided by a fall in the hills and having a steep cliff at the 
northern end. An island and some small islets lie southwestward 
and southward of Kidlaluit; the inner of these are named Iron- 
bound islands by the fishermen. 

Vigoklialuit, lying northward 44 miles from Pomiadluk point, is 
the northern island of a group and is about 200 feet high. Nearly a 
mile southward of it is an island of somewhat the same height and 
shape, but the northern island is distinguished by having a portion 
at the extreme almost detached. 

Mission station.—The southern station of the Moravian mission 
is at Makovik, the position of which is not given, but it appears to be 
in the vicinity of cape Mokkovik. It is on the shore of a spacious 
bay, with sloping hills on three sides, fairly well covered over consid- 
erable areas by small spruce trees. There is a large building, con- 
taining under one roof a dwelling house, church, and workshops. A 
pier was in course of construction in 1905. Fuel is plentiful. A 
small craft has been built here. The station was founded in 1899, 
and 150 natives are attached to it. 


732 EAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


Aillik bay. 
Mokkovik, and Aillik bay runs southward 5 miles from between them. 
The bay is fringed by bowlders on the eastern side, where there is a 


lagoon which is dry at low water, but the western shore is steep-to | 
for about 24 miles inward, where is the trading post of the Hudson 


Bay Company. A bank with 3 fathoms of water over it, which 


breaks in bad weather, extends southward 1 mile from a position — 


about 300 yards off the trading post. 


There is good anchorage in Summer cove, the first indentation on — 


the western shore, in 10 fathoms of water, mud bottom, but westerly 
winds are accompanied by heavy squalls. Anchorage may also be 
obtained off the houses of the trading post, in 6 fathoms of water, 


sand and rock bottom, with the two points on the western side of the — 


harbor touching, bearing 22°. 
Tides.—The tidal rise is 7 feet at springs. 


Fishery.—Net seal fishery has been prosecuted at Aillik for many | 


years, the principal varieties taken being the harp, crested, and 
bearded seals. They generally precede the body of ice passing 
southward. 


Water can be procured abundantly from a lake behind the houses, — 
and the boats lie on a smooth gravel beach, where a hose may be led ~ 


into them. Wood can also be obtained. 


Ice.—The harbors begin to freeze out to the deep water after the | 
middle of November and the northern ice arrives about December 10. © 


At the end of that month a straight edge, known as the “ fast ice,” is 
formed from island to island several miles offshore, outside of which 
ice flows continuously southward from December to June or July, and 
the residents along the shore drive with komatiks and dogs to the 
eastern edge to hunt for seals in the pools of the body as it passes 
along. Toward the middle of January sheet ice appears, flowing 
southward in the same manner, occasionally rafting 5 to 20 feet above 
the sea. Small bergs are sometimes seen about this time. Westerly 
winds prevail in winter, but there are occasional changes, usually of 
short duration, to northerly and easterly winds, and sometimes south- 
easterly; and a gale from the latter direction will cast the ice off- 
shore for a few hours, but it will return as soon as the wind slackens 
or changes its direction. 

Cape Aillik is a small islet 80 feet high, steep-to on its northern 
side. 

Ice was reported here on August 24, 1875. 

Turnavik islands comprise a group situated northwestward 14 
miles from cape Aillik. The largest and northern island is about 300 
feet high toward its northeastern side, off which is a low islet. A 
cluster of islets and rocks is situated southeastward of the largest 
island and eastward of the southern; there is no passage between 


Cape Aillik lies westward, distant 2 miles from cape 


KAIPOKOK—KAYAKSUATILIK. 733 


them. The track to be followed is southward of this cluster and close 
to the eastern end of the southern island. Gull rock (Nauyaktikiluk), 
the eastern of the group, is about 40 feet high, and may be approached 
on the eastern side to within 400 yards. Reefs, which generally 
break, lie between Gull rock and the low islet northeastward of the 
northern Turnavik island. 

There is a harbor on the southwestern side of the northern island, 
formed by an islet point, within which about fifty vessels moor side 
by side. 

A_ rock, that breaks in heavy weather, bears 25°, distant 23 miles 
from the northwestern point of the northern Turnavik island. 

Communication.—The Labrador steamer to and from St. Johns, 
via Battle harbor, calls at Turnavik islands fortnightly during 
summer. 

Kaipokok, a remarkable hill 895 feet high, is situated west-south- 
westward, 10 miles from cape Ailhk. Southeastward of this hill an 
inlet extends southwestward about 30 miles, and at its head is a post 
- of the Hudson Bay Company. Several small harbors are situated in 
the vicinity of Kaipokok, but they have not been examined; the 
approaches to them pass among numerous rocks and islets, and 
should not be navigated without local knowledge. 

Ukalluktok (Hares islands) comprise a group of islands lying 
84 miles west-northwestward from Turnavik islands. There are sev- 
eral sunken rocks between these groups, but there is a passage be- 
tween the rocks and another just southward of them. Striped island, 
the southernmost island of the Ukalluktok group, is 288 feet high, 
curiously striped in nearly horizontal black and white bands, and an 
excellent mark. 

Tikkerasuk (Tickle Arichat of the fishermen), westward, 14 miles 
from Ukalluktok, and off a promontory on the mainland, is an 
island 91 feet high. The channel between the island and the main- 
land is shallow, but it affords excellent anchorage for fishing vessels. 
Some low islets lie off the southeastern side of Tikkerasuk, and tem- 
porary anchorage can be taken up within them; the northeastern 
point of the island is steep-to, and there are some islets, that shelter 
the anchorage, northwestward of the tickle. 

The islands and rocks between Tikkerasuk and Hopedale are 
numerous, and so many are alike that it is impossible to identify them 
from description; only those bordering on the track are described 
herein. 

Canairiktok, a bay, the entrance of which is west-southwestward, 
distant 9 miles from Tikkerasuk, is reported to extend south-south- 
westward about 15 miles. 

Kayaksuatilik, westward about 8 miles from Tikkerasuk, is an 
island with a sharp peak; at its northern end are long points, each 


7134 EAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


rising to a conical hill from 300 to 400 feet in height, on the western 
and eastern of which are cairns. From off the northern of these to 
Hopedale is a straight run. 

Nanuaktok (White Bear island), bearing 328°, distant 84 miles 
from the northern Turnavik island, is flat and about 50 feet high, 
and is fringed by low rocks. 

Uyarazuksulik (Two stones), west-northwestward, distant 63 
miles from Nanuaktok, is so called from two remarkable blocks of 
stone on the southeastern side; it is separated from Gull island to the 
west-northwestward by a channel ;%; mile wide, in which is a rock that 
breaks. Rocks extend eastward 8, mile from this island. 

Gull island (Nauyaksigaluk) is 210 feet high, and faced by 
cliffs. The outer islets are two low islets lying northeastward 34 
miles from it, with sunken rocks northeastward, northwestward, and 
southwestward of them. Rocks lie southwestward $ mile from Gull 
island. 

Two low islets are separated by a channel 1,600 yards wide from 
the northwestern end of Gull island, and a rock lies halfway between 
them and the outer islets off Gull island. 

Some difficulty has been experienced in distinguishing the islands 
shown on the chart between Gull island and Kingitok. 

Kingitok are two remarkable islands lying southwestward, 7 miles 
from Gull island; both are dark and basaltic; the eastern island, 370 
feet high, appears conical from all directions; the western, 330 feet 
high, shows conical only from northeastward and southwestward; 
they are excellent marks. 

Hopedale harbor, westward about 9 miles from the western 
Kingitok island, is a small bay in the mainland protected from the 
eastward by the islands of Anniowaktook (Big Snow hill), 468 feet 
high, and Anniowaktorusek (Little Snow hill), 122 feet high. 

The bay is about 4 mile in extent, with rather uneven bottom of 
sand, gravel, and, here and there, rock. The approach from the 
southeastward is clear; but a rock awash lies about 200 yards east- 
ward of Seneraluk, a white rock 2 feet high, which is situated east- 
ward, 200 yards from the northern entrance point of the harbor. 

Anchorage in 6 to 10 fathoms of water, with good holding ground, 
can be obtained off the Moravian missionary settlement; it is a con- 
venient temporary anchorage for fishing vessels. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, at Hopedale, at 5h. 38m. ; 
springs rise 7 feet, neaps 4 feet. 

Mission station.—The Moravian mission settlement at Hopedale, 
which was founded in 1782, is on the northern shore of the harbor. 
Three missionaries were stationed here in 1905. The church can 
accommodate 300 people. About 100 Innuit natives occupy 25 houses, 


LL 


HOPEDALE HARBOR—DEEP INLET. T30 


and about 150 others live in the district. A few stunted trees grow 
at the settlement. The natives state that caribou, formerly plentiful, 
are now rare within 40 miles of Hopedale. Timber is also less abun- 
dant than it was, in consequence of destructive forest fires. 

Ice.—The harbor freezes over occasionally in the first week of 
September. 

Water is abundant, but the watering place is inconvenient for boats. 
Wood is scarce and must be brought from a distance of 8 to 10 miles. 

Communication.—The Labrador steamer to and from St. Johns, 
via Battle harbor, calls at Hopedale fortnightly during summer. 

Winds.—The prevailing winds on the coast in the vicinity of Hope- 
dale are off the land or from the southwesterly quadrant. Strong 
northwesterly to westerly squalls, which last an hour or two, occur 
during August, and occasionally there is a thunder storm with much 
rain. 

The barometer is generally low, and may not indicate the approach 
of bad weather. The weather has been fine with the barometer at 
29.45 inches, and on wind and rain setting in the barometer has risen. 

Current.—The current on the coast almost invariably sets south- 
eastward, unless counteracted by southeasterly and easterly gales. 

Deep inlet.—The northwestern arm of this inlet, which lies south- 
eastward of Hopedale, is reported to be about 20 miles long, with 
deep water throughout, to the mouth of a fine river flowing into its 
head. 

- There is a small hut at the mouth of the river, used by a fisherman 
who nets the salmon there. Salmon of 40 to 50 pounds in weight 
go up the river. 

Tracks—Caution.—Mariners are warned that this coast, with the 
islands off it, is only partially surveyed, and that every precaution 
should be taken when navigating in the vicinity. 

Holton to Aillik, by the inner track.—From eastward about 
4 mile from Holton island, steer to pass between Tinker island and 
Quaker reef, and thence direct to cape Harrison, passing close north- 
eastward of Bear island. 

From cape Harrison steer to leave both Smoky islet and Webeck 
island about $ mile to the southward, and then to pass close north- 
westward of the small islet, 60 feet high, off Double island. From 
this islet a course of 248°, for 7, miles, ‘leads northwestward 
of Double island and southeastward of the next islet, when steer to 
pass between Dog islands and the mainland. Round the islet, just 
westward of the western of the Dog islands, and steer to pass north- 
eastward of the island with two summits and the grassy islet off it, 
and southwestward of Conical island. From Conical island steer 
349°, which course leads, at the distance of 7 miles, to the northeast- 
ward of the islets off Manak island; at 9 miles, westward of a double 


736 EAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


islet; and at 11 miles, to the narrow passage between the mainland 
and some low rocks. Then keep a reasonable distance off the coast to 
Pomiadluk point, whence, to the islands off cape Mokkovik, the 
course is 320° for 84 miles. 

By the outer track.—Pass northeastward of Ragged islands, and 
thence northward of Kidhaluit and Uigoklialuit, and then north- 
ward of the islets off cape Mokkovik. 

The track from southwestward of Ragged islands to the northward 
of Kidhaluit has been taken. 

By the middle track.—F rom northwestward 4 mile from Webeck 
island, pass northward about $ mile from Jigger island and then steer 
to pass northward of Tikaoralik,. bearing in mind the rock reported 
to lie between this island and Ragged islands (p. 730); then steer 
about 295° and keep close to the northwestern part of the northeast- 


ern end of Kikkertavak till the first channel northwestward of that 


island is open; then stand offshore until Pomiadluk point is well open 
northeastward of the Adlavik group, bearing about 303°, when steer 
to pass between Pomiadluk point and some iow islets, avoiding Morti- 
mer shoal, and thence direct to Cape Mokkovik. This route must be 
used with great care, as the soundings are very irregular. 

Cape Aillik to Hopedale—By the inner tracks.—From Aihk 
a 281° course, for 34 miles, leads southward of the southeastern islets 
of the Turnavik group to the southern island, which round, on its 
northeastern side, at the distance of 200 yards. Then steer 286° for 
11 miles, to Striped island, passing southward of the numerous rocks 
and breakers, and northward of the archipelago of islands in this 
reach. Pass between Striped island and an islet, 5 feet high, % mile 
southwestward of it; then southward of the Ukallukok group, 
and northeastward of Tikkerasuk. From this steer 283° for 53 
miles, and pass southward of a brown islet, 15 feet high, then 314°, 
for 24 miles, to an islet about 50 feet high; passing, after running 1,5 
miles, southwestward of an island 70 feet high. Thence steer for the 
point under Niachungoat, the southeastern conical hill at the north- 
eastern end of Kayaksuatilik, passing between an islet and a rock, 3 
feet high, just southeastward of the islet. 

Keep the northern points of Kayaksuatilik close aboard, to pass 
southward of a rock, with 3 feet of water over it, at 800 yards west- 
northwestward of Niachungoat, and avoid a rock, with 7 feet of 
water over it, bearing approximately 70°, distant 1 mile from the 
northwestern point of the island. From off Nuvuksoakuluk, the 
northwestern conical hill, a 292° course for 55 miles leads to Hopedale. 

Or from Tikkerasuk pass about 1 mile southward of the brown 
islet, 15 feet high; then steer 247° for six miles to a narrow passage 
southeastward of a conical islet about 300 feet high, eastward of the 
southern end of Kayaksuatilik, and northwestward of some remark- 


KIKKERTAKSOAK ISLANDS. T3t 


able cliffy hummocks; a sharp bend southwestward and another 
northwestward, each about 1 mile long, lead into an open channel, 
whence steer 359°, to an islet 120 feet high in Hopedale approach. 

By the outer track.—From cape Aillik pass northeastward of 
Gull rock, then northeastward 800 yards from the reefs situated 
between Gull rock and the islet off the northern Turnavik island; 
thence steer 320° to 3 mile northeastward of Nanuaktok, passing, after 
running 5 miles, southwestward # mile from a rock that breaks. 
From Nanuaktok, steer to pass northward of the reef off Uyara- 
zuksulik and Gull island. From close northward of Gull island 
steer 219° for 24 miles, thence 258°, for 11 miles, through the passage 
northward of Kingitok between two large groups of islands, and to 
Hopedale approach. 

The track from Nanuaktok northeastward of the first group of 
islets northeastward of Kingitok, and thence as above, has been taken. 

Hopedale to Nain.—F rom Hopedale northward to Windy tickle, 
and thence to cape Harrigan, either keep quite outside, or inside the 
islands. The islets and rocks are so closely studded together, and so 
many breakers show with even a moderate sea, that, until surveyed, 
navigation among them is dangerous. 

From Hopedale pass through the narrow channel northward of the 
anchorage, and westward of Achvitoaksoak, a dark-cliffed island; 
then steer 337° for 34 miles and pass westward of Napakataktalik, 
a dark cliffy island, and between it and a small black rock 3 feet high. 
From Napakataktalik steer about 859° for 102 miles and pass 
between a round islet, 120 feet high, on the east, and Multa, a high 
sharp-peaked island on the west. The above course passes at 3 miles 
from Napakataktalik close eastward of an islet 10 feet high and at 
4 miles eastward of a cliff-faced island. From the islet, 120 feet 
high, a 377° course for 24 miles leads to the entrance of Windy 
tickle. 

If, after passing the cliff-faced island at 4 miles from Napakatak- 
talik, the ice be close in, a 305° course for 3 miles leads southwest- 
ward of Napatalik, which has a peak 500 feet high, and thence a 
mid-channel course between the mainland and the group of islands, 
of which Napatalik is the southern, leads to Windy tickle. 

Kikkertaksoak islands, northeastward about 64 miles from 
Napatalik, are two in number and are the only prominent islands 
seaward of the above-described tracks; they have two sharp peaks, 
each about 250 feet high, and reefs stretch from and lie off them in 
all directions. 

Two rocks, the southern of which is 10 feet high and the other 
awash at high water, bear 8°, distant 1 mile and 2 miles, respectively, 
from the northern end of the northeastern Kikkertaksoak. Between 

76846—09——_47 


738 EAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


the northern of these two rocks and the southwestern of those off 
Farmyard islands there is a good passage. 

Nanuktok (Bears), or Farmyard islands of the fishermen, are 
two principal and several smaller islets, situated eastward 13 miles 
from cape Harrigan. Many shoals, that break after a strong breeze, 
lie between these islands, cape Harrigan, and Kikkertaksoak, and 
navigation there is dangerous. 

Nunakséluk (Big piece of land) is the outer point of Windy 
Tickle group. The islands forming it are about 620 feet high, falling 
in a series of conical hummocks to the northern point. No examina- 
tion has been made of the outer harbors. 

Windy tickle (Ikirasaluk) is the channel between Windy Tickle 
islands and the mainland, which trends west-northwestward for 2 
miles and then westward for 2 miles farther. In the southeastern 
reach a shoal extends off the first bight on the northeastern shore, 
and there is a clear track along the southwestern shore. On the 
northwestern side of the southwestern bend is a deep bay with an 
islet in the middle, making two anchorages. The water is shoal 
nearly out to this island from the shore, deepening suddenly from 
uearly dry to 10 fathoms. Vessels should not anchor in less than 12 
fathoms of water, nor attempt to go inside the island. The western 
bend of Windy tickle is shallow from an islet lying southwestward 
of the islet in the middle, and the passage is in mid-channel, but not 
more than 14 fathoms can with certainty be carried through at low 
water. With winds from westward to northwestward violent squalls 
blow down the southeastern reach. 

Cape Harrigan (Tagaulik), an island $ mile across, with a sharp 
black summit, about 300 feet high, forms the northern part of Nunak- 
siluk; it has a steep face with deep water close-to. Cape Harrigan 
is in latitude 55° 512’, longitude 60° 20’ west of Greenwich. 

An island, 60 feet high, lies southeast, distant 34 miles from cape 
Harrigan, and there appears to be deep water between this island 
and Nunaksaluk. 

Bearing 137°, distant 1? miles from cape Harrigan, is the north- 
western point of a cove, in which there is anchorage. 

Cape Harrigan harbor, in which several schooners can anchor, 
is situated on the northern side of Nunaksaluk, and southward of cape 
Harrigan. The head of the harbor is a sandy beach. 

The main entrance is southeastward of cape Harrigan, but there are 
also two passages for small craft to the southwestward of the cape, on 
either side of an island 50 feet high. 

Two rocks, one of which dries and the other of which has less than 
6 feet of water over it, bear 241°, distant 4 mile and 1 mile, re- 
spectively, from the northwestern point of cape Harrigan. 


a eS ee lle eee 


ENTRY ISLAND—RED ISLAND ROCK. 739 


Umi a vik (Wrecked boat island), bearing 286°, distant 4 miles 
from cape Harrigan, has a conspicuous conical summit, 250 feet high. 

Kutallik (Kettle island), or Massacre island of the fishermen, lies 
westward, distant 83 miles from cape Harrigan, and is about 200 feet 
high. 

Bowlders which dry at low water, and a shoal, extend south-south- 
westward of Kutallik. Mountaineer rock in line with the hollow 
southwestward of Post hill, Davis inlet, bearing 286°, leads southward 
of this shoal, and 600 yards northward of North Tikiratchuk (Narrow 
point). 

Mountaineer rock (Adlauyavik), bearing 129°, distant 2 miles 
from Entry island, and 264°, 14 miles from the southwestern end of 
Kutallik, is 5 feet high. Its northern side may be approached to a 
distance of 400 yards. 

Entry island, situated in the eastern entrance to Davis inlet at 44 
miles from the Hudson Bay Company’s post, is small, round, 120 feet 
high, and bold-to on all sides. 

Flat island, north-northwestward, distant 1,400 yards from Entry 
island, is about 30 feet high and flat. There is a good passage in mid- 
channel between Flat island and Entry island; the water is shoal 
between Flat island and Ukasiksalik, to the northwestward. 

Davis inlet was the name originally given to Jack Lane bay, the 
entrance to which is southeastward of Kutallik, but it is now applied 
to the water between Ukasiksalik (Freestone) island and the main- 
land. This inlet, which was cursorily examined westward as far as 
the Hudson Bay Company’s post, situated on the southern side of 
Ukasiksalik, has an average width of 1,200 yards. The Rattle passage, 
to northwestward of Ukasiksalik, at about 2 miles westward of the 
post, is narrow and tortuous, and the streams are rapid. Newfound- 
land fishing schooners, however, occasionally use it, when taking the 
inside runs, to avoid the ice. 

Pigeon islet, 1,400 yards southwestward from Entry island, is in 
two parts, each 30 feet high. There is a passage for large vessels 
between Pigeon islet and Entry island by keeping nearer the latter. 

Smooth Land point, bears 283°, distant 14 miles from Pigeon islet. 

Red island, westward, distant 1,400 yards from Smooth Land 
point, is 20 feet high, and joined to the shore by stones, which only 
cover at high water springs. The summer residence of one of the 
families who trade with the Hudson Bay Company is on this island. 

Red Island rock, with 6 feet of water over it, bears 57°, distant 
800 yards from Red island. 

Vessels should pass between this rock and Ukasiksalik; for leading 
mark see page 741. 

Twelve o’clock mark, westward 1,°, miles from Red island, is a 
conspicuous vein of dark rock extending up to the summit of the 


740 EAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


cliffs of lighter colored rock. It derives its name from bearing nearly 
south (true) from the Hudson Bay Company’s post, and thus serves to 
indicate noon. 

A bank is reported with its northwestern edge, bearing 58°, distant 
2 mile from Twelve o’clock mark. 

The Post of the Hudson Bay Company consists of several white 
houses, off which is a wharf. A small staff is maintained here, who 
are visited by the steamer Labrador on her way to Ungava bay, and 
again on her return to Rigoulette. Furs, seal oil, and salted trout are 
the chief exports. Wood and water can be obtained here. 

Post hill, 855 feet high, slopes to the southwestern end of Ukasik- 
salik, and is situated north-northwestward 1,200 yards from the Post. 

Tidal streams.—The flood stream in the inlet sets westward, and 
the ebb in the contrary direction, with a rate of 2 to 3 knots an hour at 
springs. 

It is reported that a strong tide rip and overfall prevails at the 
entrance to this inlet, and that sailing vessels should not take the 
passage except at slack water and with a commanding breeze. 

Newfoundland harbor, a small bay on the eastern side of Ukasik- 
salik, is reported to contain good anchorage, and is occasionally much 
resorted to by fishing craft. 

Solomon islands are two large islands, separated by a channel 
4 mile wide. A small island, 50 feet high, lies off the southwestern 
end of the western and larger island and bears east-northeastward, 
distant 1 mile from Entry island. 

Akpalik (Tinker island), the northeastern of two small islands, 
lying northeastward, distant 1,000 and 800 yards, respectively, from 
the northern end of the eastern Solomon island, is small, tub-shaped, 
white, and 50 feet high. 

A rock, awash at high-water springs, bears 2°, distant 14 miles 
from this island. 

Katauyak, an island with a double summit, lies eastward, distant 
13 miles from Akpalik. 

A small dark sharp-topped rock, 10 feet high, bears 39°, distant 
4 mile from the middle of this island. 

Between Katauyak and Kutallik are three other islands, the middle 
one of which has a sharp, dark summit, about 150 feet high. 

Clinker rock, with less than 6 feet of water over it, is reported 
by the master of the Moravian mission ship Harmony to lie in lati- 
tude 55° 574’, longitude 60° 53’ west of Greenwich. This position 
was determined by observations and independently of the land. 

Nunaksuk (Little land), bearing 348°, distant 114 miles from cape 
Harrigan, is 100 feet high, and bold-to on the southeastern and north- 
eastern sides; there are three lumps on its summit. 


DAVIS INLET. 741 


Directions—Cape Harrigan to Davis inlet.—Irom cape Har- 
rigan a course of 261°, followed for 83 miles, leads to the southern 
end of Kutallik, to clear the shoal of which see page 739. When 
within 4 mile of Mountaineer rock, steer to pass northward at a dis- 
tance of 400 yards from it. Then steer for Entry island, and pass 
it at the distance of 400 yards on either side. When near Red Island 
rock, bring the northern fall of Kutallik open northward of the sum- 
mit of Entry island, bearing 98°, which mark leads between Red 
Island rock and Ukasiksalik, and when Red island bears 180°, pro- 
ceed up the inlet, keeping nearer Ukasiksalik than the mainland to 
avoid the reported bank. 

After passing Bar rock, there is good anchorage off the Post. 

The least water found by the Labrador on this track was 5% 
fathoms. 

From the northeastward pass southeastward 400 yards from 
Nunaksuk, and steer for Entry island, passing between the rock, 
awash at high water, and an island 100 feet high, situated east-north- 
eastward, distant 4 mile from the eastern end of Ukasiksalik. A 
sharp dark rock, 20 feet high, lies a short distance eastward from the 
island 100 feet high, and 50 yards farther in the same direction is 
a small rock awash. Pass between Entry and Flat islands, and pro- 
ceed as above directed. 

From the western entrance of Windy tickle a course of 292°, 
followed for 10% miles, crosses the mouths of Jack Lane and Jem 
Lane bays and leads to Entry island; in passing southward of 
Kutallik, and the shoal extending from it, observe the clearing mark 
at page 739; Mountaineer rock is passed 400 yards on its northern 
side, after which proceed into the inlet as above directed. 

Davis inlet to Zoar.—To proceed northward, round the small 
island lying southwestward of Solomon island, and keep about 400 
yards off the coast of Ukasiksalik till its northeastern end is reached, 
whence there are two tracks. The southern is convenient as being 
free from field ice at an early period of the season, and the fog rarely 
fetches in, but the northeastern is more direct and is on the seaboard. 

Keep along the northern coast of Ukasiksalik, which has deep 
bays with cliffy sugarloaf hills forming the points, and then pass 
southward of some smooth-sloped, greenish islands, the southern 
point of which is foul for a short distance off. Merrifield mountain, 
a square hill, about 1,700 feet high, les some 5 miles inland from 
these islands. From the foul point a course of 295°, followed for 5 
miles, leads between a dark, cliffy island on the southwestern side, 
with rugged points, ending in islets, and some low islands on the 
northeastern side, through the channels between which the outer 
islands can be seen. Then pass southwestward of an island about 
200 feet high, and a low, black islet lying northwestward of it; some 
sunken rocks lie northwestward of this islet. 


742 EAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


From westward of this low islet a course of 313°, followed for 5 
miles, leads southwestward of Tunungayualuk, a large island with 
steep tree-covered sides, to a narrow tickle, passing northeastward of 
a group of conical and mound-shaped islets. Round the western 
point of Tunungayualuk at a distance of at least 400 yards, to clear 
a shoal stretching off it, and leave some low islets to the southwest- 
ward. Two channels then open; the western is narrow, with only 2 
fathoms of water in it, and at its northern end is the bay, on the 
western shore of which Zoar, a Moravian missionary station, 1s situ- 
ated. From the northern end of this channel steer to leave Tuk- 
tuinak (the island between the two channels) 4 mile off, to avoid a 
_rock that breaks, and then 30°, for 3 miles nearly, to pass eastward 
of a low island promontory, on the northeastern end of which is an 
Eskimo hut. 

By the deeper channel, keep midway between Tunungayualuk and 
Tuktuinak, until the second channel running northwestward is open. 

Tuktuinak has a steep cliff at its eastern end, that rises to a hill 600 
feet high, and in the northwestern part of the island, separated by a 
deep gully, is a sloping greenish hill. 

Tunungayaksoak, northeastward of Tuktuinak, is wedge-shaped, 
the summit being near its southwestern end, off which, close-to, is a 
shoal. Proceed between Tuktuinak and Tunungayaksoak, passing 
northeastward 200 yards from an islet 5 feet high. From the north- 
western end of this channel steer 320° to the low island promontory, 
on which is the Eskimo hut. From Zoar bay the land trends north- 
northwestward and is made up of high green hills with raised ter- 
raced beaches on the slopes, surrounding deep indentations. From 
northeastward of the island promontory pass close westward of Ach- 
pitok (an island with a deep cove, that affords anchorage in 12 
fathoms of water), and between it and the mainland. Continuing 
northward, pass eastward of an islet about 30 feet high, then turn 
northwestward and pass close southwestward of Nuasornak (Dog), 
a conical island 400 feet high, and northeastward of a dark islet, 40 
feet high, to the coast of Kikkertavak, a large island 600 feet high. 

Keep about 400 yards distant from Kikkertavak till the narrow 
channel between it and Taktuk is reached; passing southwestward of 
Nochalik, a high island with a deep ravine through the northwestern 
part, which it nearly disconnects; westward of Nukasusutok, a dark 
island about 800 feet high, falling in cliffs on the northwestward ; 
and southwestward of Niatak, an island with two prominent hills 
about 300 feet high, smooth slopes on the southern side, and deep bays 
with cliffs on the northern. 

Taktuk (Fog) isa small island, about 150 feet high, with its south- 
western coast fringed by bowlders; there is an Eskimo hut at the 


FORD HARBOR—NAIN. 743 


southwestern end; the coast of Kikkertavak immediately opposite has 
some low rocks a short distance off it. 

From the western end of the narrow channel between Taktuk and 
Kikkertavak, steer about 336° for 3 miles, passing eastward of Palun- 
gatak, an island about 600 feet high, with a nearly detached mound 
at the southeastern end. Bowlders extend nearly half-way from the 
northeastern side of the island to the opposite shore, and the channel 
between must be navigated with great caution; 4 fathoms of water can 
be carried through by keeping nearer the northeastern than the south- 
western shore. 

Tunnulusoak (Pownal or Paul island), situated northward and 
eastward of Palungatak, is 16} miles long, and nearly divided by two 
deep inlets running from the northeastern and western ends. Off 
the southern side abreast Palungatak is a small promontory ending 
in a rocky mound, with deep bays on each side filled with bowlders. 

Ford harbor, at the eastern end of Tunnulusoak, is an inlet, open 
eastward, on the northern side of a flat promontory forming a series 
of terraces, and the harbor is visible from the southwestward over 
the marsh which joins this promontory to the mainland. Bowlders 
fringe the shores of the harbor, but the water deepens quickly outside 
of them. 

The harbor affords anchorage in the bay at its head in 138 to 16 
fathoms of water, mud bottom, with good holding ground. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Ford harbor at 6h. 
46m.; springs rise 64 feet, neaps 4 feet. 

Palungatak to Nain.—From the western end of the channel be- 
tween Palungatak and Tunnulusoak, keep the coast of the latter 
distant about 4 mile, steering a general northerly course for 44 miles, 
when the eaheun entrance point of Nain will bear about 225°, dis- 
tant 400 yards. Round this point and anchor off the Moravian mis- 
sion station at Nain in 13 fathoms of water, mud bottom. 

As a general rule the water on this coast deepens suddenly from the 
line of the bowlders. 

Beacons.—Two pairs of small white beacons stand on the shores 
of Nain; one pair in line leads just clear of the bowlders off the 
southern shore, and the other pair in line just clear of those on the 
northern shore. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Nain harbor at 7h. 
9m.; springs rise 64 feet. 

Nain is the headquarters of the Moravian mission on this coast, 
and the station was founded in 1771. The buildings are substantial 
and commodious. There is a very good jetty and landing stage. A 
wood of spruce and larch extends from behind the station for a mile 
or 2 up the valley, and the trees are some 30 feet high. The mis- 
sion gardens grow turnips, carrots, lettuce, cabbage, and beetroot, 
besides potatoes, which require to be screened from the frost. 


744 * BAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


The most common fur is that of the fox, the skin of which is of no 
value between April and October; the marten is rather scarce, and 
the polar bear, lynx, and mink are not common. 

Communication.—The Labrador steamer to and from St. Johns, 
via Battle harbor, calls at Nain fortnightly during summer. 

Nain to Ford harbor.—Proceed southward between the mainland 
and Tunnulusoak and through the shallow channel between that 
island and Palungatak. Then keep in mid-channel between Tunnulu- 
soak and Taktuk, Niatak, and Kugjautak (Wedge), a general easterly 
direction for 134 miles, to Amushavik, an islet which lies 800 yards off 
the southeastern point of Tunnulusoak. Pass between Tunnulusoak 
and Amushavik and thence along the coast of Tunnulusoak to Ford 
harbor. 

From Ford harbor, by the inner route, a good passage leads north- 
ward of Kugjautak and northwestward of Nukasusutok. Rounding 
this latter island, steer for Nochalik, taking care to avoid the rock 
in this channel off the low islets southwestward of Nukasusutok. 

Windy tickle to Ford harbor by the outer track.—Proceed to 
the eastern end of Ukasiksalik as already directed, and from this 
steer 348°, for 4 miles nearly, to the western point of Ayagatot, which 
is a barren island with a round summit about 230 feet high, having a 
rock lying southward about 400 yards from it. A small island, which 
has a sunken rock near its southwestern end, lies southeastward of 
Ayagatot. From the western point of Ayagatot steer 357° for 9 
miles, which leads to Kikkertaksoak, but pass a little farther off the 
islets, nearly in the track, than the direct course leads, to avoid any 
spurs stretching off them. 

Kikkertaksoak (Spracklings island) has two sharp peaks, 465 
feet high, at the southern end, and a high mound at the northern end. 
There is a small harbor on the eastern side sheltered by some islets. 

Uvingiayuk (Lopsided island), west-southwestward, distant 23 
miles from the southwestern end of Kikkertaksoak, is a dome-shaped 
rock about 400 feet high. 

Ukallik (Hare island), east-northeastward, distant 5 miles from 
the northeastern end of Kikkertaksoak, is an island with a double 
summit about 200 feet high; it is usually made by the Moravian 
mission ship when going to Zoar, or to Nain. 

Kidlits (Outside islands) lie east-northeastward, distant 10 miles 
from the southeastern end of Kikkertaksoak and northward, 93 miles 
from Nunaksuk; the western and higher of these islands is about 100 
feet high; the eastern island is 40 feet high, divided into two parts, 
and may be approached to 4 mile. 

Two rocks, 30 feet and 50 feet high bear, respectively, 330°, distant 
1,5, miles, and 344°, distant 3 miles, from the western Kidlit. 


PYRAMID ISLAND—-THREE BROTHERS. 745 


Kikkertaksoak to Zoar.—F rom off the middle of the western side 
of Kikkertaksoak, a course of 294°, for 5 miles leads northward of 
a group of small islets, the western of which, named Pakertuk, is 
140 feet high. Thence steer 277° for 5? miles to the northern point 
of Tunungayualak, a little hillock joined to the main island. Keep 
about $ mile off the coast of Tunungayualak, steering southwestward 
for 5 miles in mid-channel between that island and Aklatalik and 
Tunungayaksoak, to the northwestward, the former island being 
about 500 feet high with numerous conical mounds, and passing close 
to an islet about 60 feet high. Proceed through the channel between 
Tuktuinak and Tunungayaksoak as already directed. 

Kikkertaksoak to Ford harbor.—The natives report that there is 
a clear passage between these places, to navigate which steer 327° for 
15 miles from the southwestern end of Kikkertaksoak (Spracklings 
island) to another island named Kikkertaksoak (Big island), about 
300 feet high and flat in outline, thence 2°, 4 miles to Sioralik (Sandy 
island), so named from the color. Keep the western point of Sioralik 
close aboard to avoid a shoal, whence a course of 316° for 6 miles 
leads to Ford harbor. 

Flat rock, bearing 356°, distant 95 miles from the eastern Kidlit, ° 
is 40 feet high, in two parts, lying northeastward and southwestward 
of each other, and the northeastern side is bold-to. 

Negro island, the northern end of which lies south-southwest- 
ward, distant 2 miles from Flat rock, has three hillocks, the middle 
one of which, 150 feet high, is round and very black, contrasting 
strongly with the remainder of the island, which is light in color. 

Pyramid island, north-northwestward, distant 44 miles from 
Negro island, is about 200 feet high and appears as one pyramid on 
southwesterly bearings and as two pyramids on northwesterly bear- 
ings. 

A breaker lies north-northeastward, distant 4+ mile from the 
northern end, and the outer of three rocks bears east-southeastward, 
distant 1 mile from the southern end of Pyramid island. This outer 
rock is 40 feet high and has a large bowlder on its summit. 

Hen and Chickens, the eastern rock of which lies northward, dis- 
tant 84+ miles from Pyramid island, make up a chain of seven rocks 
which are above high water and lie in a line bearing nearly eastward 
and westward. The middle rock, which is the highest, is about 40 
feet high and is situated in latitude 56° 29’, longitude 60° 36’ west 
of Greenwich. 

Three Brothers, bearing 327°, distant 9 miles from Hen and 
Chickens, are three islets, the southern and highest of which is about 
60 feet high. 


746 EAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


A small round island, 100 feet high, les northward, distant 24 
miles from Three Brothers, and a rock, 20 feet high, bears 139°, 
distant + mile from it. 

Sentinel rock, bearing 10°, distant 10 miles from Three Brothers, 
is an isolated dark gray rock, about 80 feet high, steep on its north- 
eastern side, sloping gradually to its southwestern side, and appar- 
ently bold-to. 

A long and narrow island with a broad summit, 400 feet high, near 
the southwestern end, is situated southwestward, distant 3 miles from 
Sentinel rock. 

Southwestward, distant 9 miles from Sentinel rock, is the north- 
eastern end of an island, about 14 miles across, with three summits, 
each about 400 feet high. 

Two small white islets, about 70 feet high, are situated southwest- 
ward, 2 miles from this island. 

Notch rock, bearing 281°, distant 34 miles from Sentinel rock, is 
about 60 feet high, and a remarkable gap in its southeastern part 
shows on southwesterly bearings. 

Bearing 310°, distant 9 miles from Sentinel rock, are three islands 
situated close to what is apparently the northeastern end of a large, 
high island. 

Neither islands nor appearances of shoal water have been seen to 
the eastward of any of the rocks and islands above described. 

Caution.—The coast northward of Nain has only been very 
roughly examined and the charts are unreliable, and several un- 
marked shoals are said to exist. Every precaution should therefore 
be taken when navigating in its vicinity. 

Mount Thoresby, situated westward about 7 miles from the 
northern end of a large island west-northwestward of Notch rock, is 
2.733 feet high; its northwestern side rises steeply in three steps, and 
there is a long smooth slope to the southeastward, terminating in a 
steep fall to low land. 

It is said that iron ore occurs largely in mount Thoresby, as well as 
the adjacent land. 

Port Manvers, northwestward of mount Thoresby, is a safe and 
commodious harbor; the entrance is about a mile wide between 
Medusa bluff on the eastern side and Thalia point on the western side. 
Numerous islands lie northeastward of the entrance, of which the 
nearest are Manby, Bouverie, Saddle, and Trio islands. 

Nearly midway between the entrance points and about 4 mile sea- 
ward of a line joining them are Willis rocks, which are above water. 
The other rocks in the entrance, being of white appearance, show at 
some distance. The water is so clear that the bottom with 8 fathoms 
of water over it can be seen. A patch of rocks, which seldom breaks, 


SADDLE ISLAND—OKKAK. 147 


hes westward about 1 mile from Saddle island, and there is a ridge of 
rocks between Bouverie and Manby islands. 

‘In the fairway into the port there is a depth of not less than 14 
fathoms, and in the middle of the port a depth of 44 fathoms. Me- 
dusa bay, on the southeastern side of the port, is convenient for ob- 
taining wood and water, and it affords anchorage at 600 to 800 yards | 
offshore ; Caplin bay, on the western side, is not so convenient, but 
the bottom is soft and good for anchorage. 

Directions.—Pass southeastward at about 200 yards from Willis 
rocks, then steer about 239° into the port, keeping Bouverie island 
open northwestward of Medusa bluff, bearing about 71° to clear the 
sunken rocks off Fletcher point, at # mile southwestward of Medusa 
bluff. When the bluff point of Mount Thoresby opens westward of 
Fletcher point, bearing about 189°, steer for the anchorage on either 
side of the port. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in port Manvers at 
6 hours; springs rise 5 feet. 

Kig la pait is the high land to the northwestward of port Manvers, 
the hilltops on the northwestern portion of which have a jagged 
appearance. ‘The highest part is a broad round summit, not less 
than 2,000 feet high; both southeastern and northwestern ends of 
this coast range fall sharply to low land. 

Saddle island, situated in latitude 57° 35’ north, longitude 61° 19’ 
west of Greenwich, is about 500 feet high. 

The Stirrups, bearing 126°, distant 3 miles from Saddle island, 
are two rocks, 100 and 50 feet high, respectively. 

Okkak is situated on the shore of a landlocked bay in the north- 
western end of an island which bears about 278°, distant some 25 
miles from Saddle island, and which is separated from the mainland 
to the northwestward by a channel. The bay is surrounded by high 
bare hills. 

There is a shoal, with but little water over it, in the northwestern 
part of the bay and off the mission station. It is marked by a moor- 
ing-shaped red buoy, which is left to the northwestward. 

A white cross on the side of the hill in line with the church, bear- 
ing 258°, leads clear of the shoal. 

There is anchorage off the mission station in 13 fathoms, over 
mud bottom, and here the width of the bay is about 800 yards. 

Tide.—The rise of the tide is about: 7 feet. 

Mission station.—The buildings of the Moravian mission consist 
of a church and dwelling house, under one roof, large and substantial 
stores, and a hospital. There are also some native houses. The 
population amounts to 350, and it is the largest Innuit center. In 
1904, the natives got some 1,200 seals, and shot 500 to 600 caribou. 


748 EAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


Hospital.—The hospital has seven beds for adults and two cots 
for children. It is provided with an operating room, dispensary, 
out-patients’ room, and the usual requisites. 

Ice.—A boat got into Okkak through the ice on the 21st of June, 
1905. 

Mosquitoes are numerous and very troublesome at Okkak. 

Ogua lik (Cod island) lies with its southern extremity, distant 12 
miles from Saddle island in a direction 300°. Table hill at its south- 
eastern end rises abruptly from the sea to the height of 2,000 feet, and 
there are two dome-shaped hills near its northeastern side. This 
side is indented by several deep narrow bays, and the southern of 
these, immediately northward of Table hill, is reported to afford 
good shelter. 

A rock, some 7 feet high, lies about 1 mile southward of Ogua lik. 

Nanuktut (White Bear island), improperly named cape Mugford 
by some of the Newfoundland fishermen, lies northeastward about 3 
miles from the northern end of Ogua lik, and is remarkable and un- 
mistakable; it rises to a number of apparently inaccessible peaks, the 
three highest of which are situated at the northern, western, and east- 
ern ends, respectively, and are probably not less than 1,500 feet high; 
that at the eastern end is isolated, rising perpendicularly from the 
sea, and sloping steeply on the northwestern side to a low neck 30 
feet high, by which it is connected to the remainder of the island. 

A bight, about 400 yards across, is situated between this hill and 
the outer peak at the northern end. The eastern side appears bold-to, 
but the northwestern coast is more shelving, with bowlder beaches 
at intervals. This island is lighter in color than the land westward 
of it. 

Na nu ya tuk is a small island, about 100 feet high, lying south- 
westward a little more than 1 mile from the southeastern end of — 
Nanuktut. 

Bishop’s Mitre, situated west-southwestward, about 7 miles from 
Nanuktut, is a remarkable mountain, about 3,000 feet high; the gap 
in its summit is open except on southwesterly bearings. 

Mugford tickle runs westward of Ogua lik and between it and 
Bishop’s Mitre; the length of this channel is about 4 miles, and its 
least width is 1,800 yards in the middle. H. B. M. 8S. “ Scylla ” 
passed through this tickle in 1905, and the least depth obtained with 
two machines constantly going was 55 fathoms. 

The cliffs on each side are almost perpendicular and attain heights 
of 1,000 to 1,500 feet. Their lower half is hard gray rock, and the 
upper a dark friable formation which is disintegrating into fine grit. 

Trees.—The northern limit of trees on the coast is between Okkak 
and Hebron and approximately in latitude 58°. 


WATCHMAN ISLAND—HEBRON BAY. 749 


Cape Mugford slopes northward from Bishop’s Mitre, and is the 
southeastern head of a deep narrow inlet, extending some miles south- 
southwestward. A small conical island les at the mouth of this inlet. 

Finger hill, situated at about 8 miles northwestward of cape Mug- 
_ ford and at the end of the high projecting land, is about 2,500 feet 

high, and similar in shape to Table hill at the southeastern end; some 
peculiar finger-shaped rocks show when bearing between south-south- 
westward and southwestward. 

An inlet extends southward some distance from Finger hill, and at 
its entrance is a small conical island. 

Ice.—The remarks on the ice at Aillik (p. 732) are applicable to 
cape Mugford, excepting that the arrival of northern and sheet ice is 
‘probably a week or ten days earlier. In 1887, between August 1 and 
15, from a hill about 1,000 feet high on the shore of Saglek bay, the 
sea was seen to be entirely covered with ice, which did not leave until 
August 20. 

Watchman island, lying northwestward, distant 22 miles from 
the northeastern part of Nanuktut, is about 700 feet high. 

The dark round summit of the island is at its northeastern end, 
which is remarkably white on northwesterly bearings, and is a good 
mark in making Hebron. The island is apparently bold-to on its 
northeastern and northwestern sides. Near Watchman island is a 
smaller island, about 200 feet high, and also four islets, ranging from 
30 to 50 feet in height, of which the eastern is the lowest. Fishing 
vessels are said to anchor under the western side of this island. 

Current.—In the summer of 1880, the current set southeastward at 
the rate of 4 mile an hour off Watchman island. 

Hebron bay is situated on the mainland just within the eastern 
entrance point of .a deep inlet, the entrance to which is within a few 
islands lying westward some 12 miles from Watchman island. The 

entrance to the bay is 1,200 yards wide and is clear; the bay extends 
northward about 2 miles, with a general width of a mile, and it 
affords excellent anchorage in 19 fathoms, mud bottom; it is reported 
to be well sheltered except in southerly gales. The Moravian mission 
station of Hebron lies on the western side of the bay. It was founded 
in 1834, and has a population of 183 persons. ‘The mission premises 
are commodious and substantial, but the natives live in houses built 
of timber, stone, and earth. Traders do not frequent the district; 
the nearest trading station is that of the Hudson Bay Company at 
Nachvak. 

Ice.—See pp. 727, 732. 

Mosquitoes are numerous and exceedingly troublesome at Hebron. 

Kikkertaksoak, bearing 309°, distant 14 miles from Watchman 
island, is 300 feet high, and has a smooth round summit sloping like 

a whale’s back, with small, deep gulches on the northeastern side. 


750 EAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


An island, bearing 281°, distant 5 miles from Kikkertaksoak, is 
about the same size and 150 feet high. 

Uivuk, lying northwestward, distant 21 miles from Watchman 
island, is a cape which forms the southern entrance point of Saglek 
bay; it rises steeply from the sea, and then gradually to its broad . 
conical summit, from which it slopes to the southwestward. The 
summit southwestward about + mile from the cape is about 1,000 feet 
high. 

The Domes are two conspicuous round hills about 2,000 feet high, 
situated west-southwestward 5 miles from Uivuk. 

I guk shuak (Galley island), a small island situated close north- 
ward of Uivuk, is 300 feet high. 

Saglek (Low island) bay, so named from the principal anchor- 
age being southwestward of an island of that description, lies north- 
westward of Uivuk, and has two entrances, one on either side of 
Kikkertaksoak (Big) island, the northwestern being the broader. 

The Hudson Bay Company formerly carried on business at Lamsin, 
the principal anchorage in the upper part of the bay. 

The northern point of Kikkertaksoak is a remarkable conical head, 
700 feet high, rising perpendicularly from the sea. 

Anchorage cove, on the southeastern side of Kikkertaksoak 
island, is reported to afford good shelter from most winds. The 
northeastern head of this cove is a conspicuous bluff having a broad 
band extending from the sea to beyond the top of the cliff on its 
northeastern face. 

Kangalasiérvik, an island 300 feet high, is situated south-south- 
westward about a mile from the northwestern entrance point of Sag- 
lek bay. 

Iti gai ya vik (Cold Feet cape), on the northern side of the north- 
western entrance point of Saglek bay and in latitude 58° 43’ north, 
and longitude 62° 54’ west of Greenwich, is marked by broad bands 
of dark rock. 

The coast outside Saglek bay is characterized by numerous trap 
dikes which extend vertically through the lighter colored rock. This 
feature ceases at 3 miles northward of Iti gai ya vik. 

Mount Blow-me-down, northwestward 8 miles from Iti gai ya 
vik, and 2 miles inland, is remarkable, square topped, and not less 
than 3,000 feet high. 

Shug vi luk, a bay situated northward 3 miles from mount Blow- 
me-down, has a conspicuous island in the middle 100 feet high. 

Nullataktok bay (Blowhole for seals), sometimes named Slate 
bay, is situated to the northwestward of Shug vi luk, and expands 
into several narrow long arms. The Moravian mission station of 
Ramah is situated on the shore of the southern arm. 


NACHVAK BAY. 751 


A jagged group of mountains, 3,000 to 4,000 feet high, is situated 
southwestward of Ramah and Shug vi luk. 

Communication.—The Labrador steamer makes two trips to 
Ramah in summer. 

Naksarektok (Gulch cape), situated north-northeastward, dis- 
tant 37 miles from Uivuk, rises steeply on all sides to a dome-shaped 
summit about 1,000 feet high, and a low neck connects it to the ad- 
joining high land, over which the komatiks (dog sledges) pass in 
winter. 

Current.—A southeasterly current, with a rate of 2 miles an hour, 
has been experienced close off this cape. 

The coast trends west-northwestward from Naksarektok to Kama- 
suk (Hut point), the southern entrance point of Nachvak bay. 

Nachvak bay has an average width of 1 mile as far as the Hudson 
Bay Company’s post, situated about 15 miles from the entrance, but 
the bay is reported to extend about 10 miles farther up. The land 
on either side is high, and the cliffs in some places rise almost per- 
pendicularly to the height of about 1,000 feet. 

Passage reef, a rock with little water over it, and on which the sea 
sometimes breaks, bears 89°, distant 2 miles from Kamasuk, and 
4 mile offshore, abreast a conspicuous round beach and gap in the 
coast cliffs. The passage into Nachvak bay is southwestward of this 
reef and between it and the shore, which should be kept aboard. 
There is no leading mark through the passage. 

The eastern end of Razorback point in line with the eastern end of 
Nanutok, bearing 350°, leads over the reef. 

Southeast rock, a shoal with less than 3 fathoms of water over it, 
bears 67°, distant 44 miles, and Big reef, a rock which dries at low 
water, with breakers extending southeastward 4 mile from it, bears 
44°, distant 24 miles, respectively, from Kamasuk. 

The Hudson Bay Company’s post, in latitude 59° 4’ north, and 
longitude 63° 514’ west of Greenwich, is visited once a year by the 
steamer Labrador, which lands a year’s supplies (including firewood, 
as there is none in this vicinity), and takes away the furs, seal oil, 
and trout obtained during the past year. 

Eskimo occasionally come here from Ungava bay in winter with 
their komatiks (dog sledges), performing the journey sometimes in 
less than two days. 

Trout are numerous in the bay, and they attain a weight of 177 
pounds, and a length of 34 inches. 

Anchorage.—There is excellent anchorage, in 7 to 8 fathoms of 
water, in Tin ya vik (Shoal Water bight), the second cove on the 
southern side, westward of Kamasuk; also off Ak la vik (Black Bear 
cove) in the same depth. 


752 EAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


Water can be obtained in Tin ya vik. 

Directions.—No vessel should pass between Big reef, Southeast 
rock, and Passage reef. The passage between the land and Passage 
reef is safe for a steamer or sailing vessel with a commanding breeze, 
but no breakers have been seen, even during a heavy swell, off the 
northwestern shore between the entrance and Razorback point. 

Pass close to Kamasuk, and after rounding it keep in the middle 
of the bay till the Hudson Bay Company’s post is reached. There is 
fair anchorage off the post, but the water is deep, and the squalls are 
heavy at times. 

Silver waterfall, eastward, 24 miles from the Hudson Bay Com- 
pany’s post, 1s very conspicuous. 

Tides.—It is high water, full and change, in Nachvak bay at 7h. 
8m.; springs rise 5 feet, neaps 3% feet. The tidal streams are weak 
in this bay, the rate probably seldom exceeding 1 knot. 

North head of Nachvak bay is a bluff, bold-looking, and compara- 
tively low point oposite Kamasuk. 

Between North head and Razorback point is a small sandy cove. 

Waked Man point, southwestward 14 miles from North head, is so 
named from a statue-like stone, some 20 feet high, standing on it 
near the sea, and visible on northeasterly bearings. 

Razorback point, situated northward, distant 7 miles from Kama- 
suk, rises to a sharp ridge, culminating in Mount Razorback, a peak 
about 3,000 feet high, the southeastern side of which slopes smoothly, 
and the northwestern is a succession of steps. 

A rock, 15 feet high, with a reef extending southward 4 mile from 
it, bears 27°, distant 2 miles from Razorback point. 

The White Handkerchief, covering about 2 acres, and extending 
from the sea to some 500 feet above it, is a very conspicuous square 
of light-colored rock situated at the northern end of the deep circular 
bight northwestward of Razorback point. The White Handkerchief 
and mount Razorback are good marks. 

Nanuktok (White Bear cape), bearing 350°, distant about 6 miles 
from Razorback point, is a projecting light-colored cliffy headland, 
rising perpendicularly to a sharp apex, about 1,000 feet high. 

Davidson rock bears about: 61°, distant 54 miles from Nanuktok, 
and has less than 3 fathoms of water over it. North head of Nachvak 
bay, open southeastward of Razorback point, bearing 204°, leads 
southeastward; and mount Blow-me-down, open eastward of Nak- 
sarektok, bearing 176°, leads eastward of this rock and Alexander 
shoal. 

Alexander shoal, with about 3 fathoms of water over it, bears 
350°, distant 10 miles from Davidson rock, and 71°, about the same 
distance from the northern entrance point of Kamaktorvik bay. | 


\ 


ECLIPSE HARBOR—M°LELAN STRAIT. 7538 


Kamaktorvik (Louse bay) is said to be a good harbor, and New- 
foundland fishing craft anchor in it, but the approaches do not look 
inviting. 

Southwestward of this bay at some little distance inland is a high, 
broad mountain, about 4,000 feet high. 

Four peaks are four very high mountains situated between 
Kamaktorvik and Eclipse harbor, the northern peak being separated 
from the others by a deep valley. This is the highest land on the 
coast of Labrador, being from 5,000 to 6,000 feet high, and it is very 
noticeable. 

Eclipse harbor is situated at about 4 to 5 miles within the northern 
inlet at Aulezavik island, in latitude 59° 48’ north, and longitude 64° 
T}’ west of Greenwich. The inlet has a width of from 3 mile to 2 
miles, and it is said to afford excellent anchorage in 4 to 12 fathoms, — 
with good holding ground. 

It was named by the United States expedition which visited the 
harbor for the purpose of observing the total eclipse of the sun on 
July 18, 1860. 

Ice formed in Eclipse harbor on July 14. Part of the western 
shore had an ice pool 3 to 4 feet thick, which remained during the 
stay of the expedition; and there were immense fields of ice on the 
sides of the mountains, with stréams of water running constantly 
from them. 

Tides.—The rise of the tide is 5 feet at springs. 

Headland.—At about halfway between Eclipse harbor and cape 
Chidley is a square headland that falls steeply on its northeastern 
side and is noticeable on northwesterly bearings. 

Bank.—A line of soundings, with depths of 54 to 97 fathoms, ex- 
tends eastward nearly 70 miles from Razorback point, and a curved 
line of soundings, with depths of 70 to 87 fathoms, extends between 
10 miles eastward of Razorback point and cape Chidley, attaining 
northeastward of Eclipse harbor a distance of nearly 30 miles from 
the shore; these soundings indicate the existence of a large bank, but 
its limits have not been ascertained. 

McLelan strait is a passage that enters the land at some 12 miles 
southward of cape Chidley and leads through the Chidley peninsula 
into a bay about 24 miles southward of port Burwell, a distance of 
about 10 miles. The western part of this passage was examined by 
the navigating officer of H. B. M. S. “ Scylla ” in 1905, who found a 
shoal with 3 fathoms least water over it, at about 2 to 3 miles from its 
eastern entrance, but otherwise it was clear. The Atlantic or eastern 
part and entrance were not examined. The width of the passage at 
its western end is about 200 yards, and its sides are steep dark hills of 
bare rock. | 

76846—09——_48 


754 EAST COAST OF LABRADOR. 


The rate of the tidal streams in the passage is estimated to be about 
7 knots, and the eddies and whirlpools are bad except at slack water. 
Small icebergs with more draft than any ship would have are said 
to pass through. 

Rocks.—Three rocks bear 160°, distant 54 miles from cape Chidley. 
The middle and highest one is about 50 feet high, and the others are 
about 30 feet high. 

An isolated rock, 30 feet high, bears 170°, distant 3 miles from the 
southeastern part of Kikkertaksoak ; it is the northern of the outlying 
rocks which skirt the coast southeastward to Nanuktok. 

Cape Chidley (Kidlinek).—Kikkertaksoak island, 1,500 feet 
high, is the southeastern of two high islands, apparently bold-to; on 
northwesterly bearings, it makes, as an island with two lumps, the 
_ western being the higher; cape Chidley, the northeastern end of the 


island, is in latitude 60° 33’ north, and longitude 64° 14’ west of 
Greenwich. 
The northwestern of these two islands is about 1,000 feet high. 


‘The whole Chidley peninsula seems to consist of a number of islands 
separated by narrow channels or tickles of deep water. 

Tidal streams.—The tidal streams off cape Chidley are rapid.. 

Ice.—It is recorded that a vessel was beset by ice off cape Chidley on 
August 11, 1905, but that there was very little ice off the a on the 
19th of fie same month. 

Fog was experienced off cape Chidley on August 11. Sometimes 
it lifted a little and allowed the land, + mile distant, to be seen; and 
at other times everything was obscured. On this coast, dense fog 
often covers only a small, sharply defined area. 


IN. .DEX 


cAN Page. | 
AMEIXOIY 2080 ERNE Gan 234 | 
=== hile eae ee 661 
AI Ok COME ESE ae eee 473 | 
PMoramaiMs |COVElsa.-Wenie sce be. 280 | 
MERON 2. 6 S88 reall... 742 | 
Molivitoaksoak:..2222.2022.1.2-.- 737 
Jel @raday ae] EnaXe ee 549 
PMMA AG e454) 4 26 ete nhcen ell. 110 
GamMsMnpOMml--222s524552.---.)- 394 
Aelanderisletecs: £526 Joo Je. 371 
Paiva ss asset. -=-. 739 
Ndlavilkerslands: 2.0.06 2000.... 730 
NCMIP ANIC OVes! css sse ke 186 
Tel BuaG|S Sake ye ee 566 
=== 571010 i 652 
Admirals beach, spit, anchorage... 92, 93 
—— cove, Broyle harbor ......... 614 
— —— Fermeuseharbor........ 616 
ASA Cheep a sa se NS wih) 597 
J SIO) co 173 
Aiguillettes harbor, island, and 
ne Keeani a a ee 390) 3911 
maineweape, Day :.2.2.2...2..-..- 732 
ae hovaopedales 2206. 2.) 736 
J\tnP TLE NOG | 4 VR 545 
JATRIBRVII, 2 he is ate ea 751 
prninene res sk eek... TAO 
Meocksislamdsse sees. Oe i 464 
Aldridge head and rock........... 226 
Milexam@enmock ase to ok ooo tee AD 
SS INORIIEL Sy eee 752 
PAllexcieeiVeR essa eee Do. 663 | 
All-in-the-way islet......-........ 489 | 
ia eae ST 
= isiamd Wieiibe ey sob ee 168 
PUIETIENO Clem ter tee mrmmenentet A fi | 136 
—— shoal, Labrador,SE.coast 634 
—— —— —— Placentiabay.....: 108 
J SUTTON eaten Oc YE Le 79%) 
PAU aS arlene 2 Soe a) a Pea No! 730 
Ate HI AKC Oy. Es tue) en ae eisee, eed 370 | 


American bank, Port au Port... .- 


cove, Partridge head......... 
island, Labrador, E. coast... - 
tickle, Seal islands... ... 
poms; Open, bay...22-22 52244 
rock, Deepwater islands. ..... 
shoal and tickle, Chateau bay - 


_ Amherst fort, light, fog signal... . - 
| Amour paar lights sce. Stee] oe 
|) #AvemsiveaU Res ra =<!) os sree 
ATR Sutpe ate AS eh tht he 
Anchor cove, point, and_ shoals, 
Cremaillere harbor....-........- 


| Anguille, cape; light 


St. Barbe bay.-.-... 
point to Belleisle strait, tidal 

BUCAMS ie 3 lector aia Sets eee 
rock, Petty harbor.2/.. 0.2222 
— Placentia bay........--- 
—— Renewse harbor....-.---- 


Anchorage cove, Kikkertaksoak. - . 
INC CRSOMECO VIE Ns (0/0! Phar ae 


rock and sunkers......- ohh a 


Amdrewesrislandies: 222225205. .52- 
TUTE EN | cE (6 Ifa he eae ad eg 


| QOWII Be ee lee epee ba 


ss dvod TIS; HAVO Os Me eg ee cee ee eld 


——— mountains. -....-:2-..-2. 


Ammiowaletookeloaills eo) 2) 5o 2 a 


POSE CHILO). ee eae Sees 


ET: <, 104s 10) el) 5 Seer ee oe 
Eelair point 


Ampelopesbarbor. 224.5552. 52452" 
Anthony island, Irelands Eye is- 


IEWVONG LUM ergs ihe Uk aica ab gel nt 
—— St. Lewis sound 


ANTAL CONE A TIA Oe Saar Mn pee ee 
Aquafort harbor and rocks....-...: 
Anche Glitipomits 2-2 y200 ses see 


Page. 
288 
683 
660 
687 
694 
692 
636 
603 
650 
744 
731 


O74 
304 


359 
611 
121 
617 
750 
189 
224 
152 
546 
375 
340 
268 
271 
734 
734 
649 
651 
654 
636 


570 
623 
632 
616 


5D) 
667 


756 INDEX, 
Page. Page. 
IUPENSR TOURS: etree tet cee nei esl |) Badaslet.;.:....-2: 2-22.23 eeeee 407 
TG UCICUNEGII Meee ero =o acee a eeiee 51 | —— Neighbor patch.............- 256 
ved enh ror kstees s 20k Sos sacn oe wos A a rock... ...:..5 223. 241 
RA GIBeCHMOMs 8 27 o's. Se jale se 364 | —— rock, Canada bay....-. ee 392 
Arent. bay, > Back cove.-.-- =<. US Ramea islands........... 224 
PATICROMIAYE ote. 250 42 2 Sot Sae ene 378 | Badgerbay.........--. cp. 458 
PiRHAGIIn POI. 2 2-/ cose See ets 641 FOGK oo. 2. 155 
FAMTIOL GUCOVCL ees eee eee na eee cee 110") "Bagoicovie®:..... .. -....2 25a 216 
Arran cove, anchorage; Back ———— head.2.........1.-) 3 474 
COW Ow sas eee eae ey ee 201, 202. | Baggsthead 32.........'. 22-25 240 
PPRGW POUNG. 2k wee Sess eae cs ei 555 island, Burgeo islands........ 230 
AUF FOCK 22.260 sash 2 ee sss Sisto Merasheen island.-..... 133 
era mon Dank. J. 2520'ans) Shek. oe 80°| Baie dea Loutre. --..... 7 2eeaee 258 
Capeures SP AaePee eR Le Sot 363 | =—laeeree ee... l ...-2 182 
Ashley Baker island.........----- 558, | Batley cove:..-....-.--....-=eee 559 
Ashwanipi river...) sekest 5 a5. 35 | Baileysicove...:......-.. 2. sees 409 
Assizes harbor and rock.....-.---- 628.| (Baillieisland..........4-35seeeee 699 
Tel ints BR? 2 a A en Pe 627 | Bakereove....-.....-. 22a 112 
Mthwart tslandele 20 S39-4 .2ti5. be 551 | =———head.......-.--.....2eeeeeee 89 
Atlantic, sailing vessels’ passage Bakers rook ......... =... .322 2 eee 324 
ACRUBA eset eto Cente tear sae 73 island. ........--. 2. 255 
steam vessels’ passage across.. 68-72 | —— ledge..............--..2.---- 715 
—-—— cove, St. Paulisland -...--.- 264 | —— Loaf island and rocks....-..-. 551 
Wudierne jalan. 2... <oi<% whose: 152 | ———— Random island.......-.. 572 
Wilezavak islands 2... .s2t sco 2208 753 | Bald head, Bald Head bay.....-- 105 
AGIOPAOM Mees . ts oe we as POE 384 | ———— Newfoundland, E. coast. 616 
AGalonvisthmilss--ceeessss see sce: 581 | —— rinity, bay:---4eeeeeee 578 
Aviron point, bay, and rock...... PAS bay22s 62d) eae 2) oa) 102,105 
RuparatOb. =... ~ tose Nae Red 744) = Nep tock ..-. 22-222 eee 575 
B Baldmey rock...-.<-.< =: 2st eee 502 
; Baldrie head. :......:..-.225saeee 551 
Bacalhao island, light, rock....... 512) Baldwanishoal ....-..c2..4ooaeeee 231 
— — — to Sir Charles Hamilton Eee: ee 931 
sound, directions ..... 518 | Baldwins, east and west........ 259, 260 
= —— Labrador, E. coast.....- (22 | Baleme: le trou de la... 7 3eeeer 360 
Baccalieu island, light............ 589 | —— rock, Goose island.....-.---- 384 
BacerrONpOMNbs. <2... s~ = eens 81}. Gricuet harbors... Sees 369 
Back arm, White bay......-...-.+ 413) =e irish bay...) so-so 386 
— cove, Barren island.......... 117 | ———— Paquet harbor.........- 420 
—— —— Burin inlet.-.-........... 1640) (Ballardjbank ......... 28.02 85 
— — Cornelius island ........ 228)\ tenes... : 2... 618 
aS SSS LUMA ABS eeSn sano se 697 | Ballast) Cliff point... . 2.2.2 eaee 545 
—— harbor, Toulinguet islands... 506 | Bande de |’ Arier harbor.........-. 192 
—— — Gull island............. 906) | Bametharbor: =: -..-ccecc Leese 150 
SSRI eae Se gnc SS) Lo ee 93 P= tolt.:..:)).an 150 
= BROAN Fa-ve ec ceeeemen ae Sn 93'| (Bangenisland . .... 0.252 eee 674 
backside coves.) 7.550 sees oa 559 | Bank, The; Pinware bay...-....-- 648 
Bacon: Bone rock. 4.3). =seaee eee. 555) bankehead.,COVe. a. 425 eee 274 
— cove and head, Conception POM... <.-.\ns-e ee ease 349 
bay sielee essence athe 597 | = fOck. .. teed oe eee 91 
—— —— head, Heart’s Content... 587 | Banguereau bank......... aaa 79 
Bad bay, Labrador, SE. coast..... 634) |WBannaltivme cove... 22555565 epee 305 
— —— Newfoundland,W. coast. 334 | Bantam banks..................- 618 


INDEX. 757 
Page. | Page. 
J D0i0 (20th 200 oe rn 690 || Bay derGraves 2.2.0... 2 00: 596 
RAV 0 a 484 | —— de Loup point and rock ..... 225 
ii oe ieic tie neee 670 | —— le Moine rock..............-- 249 
shoal, Fermeuse harbor.....-.- 617 | —— of Islands, village. ........ 299, 304 
—— The; Nick Power cove....... 216 | —— point, bay of Exploits....... 486 
Bara rock..................--.-... 387 | ——-—— Griguet harbor. ........ 369 
PamrenorTOOk.. 00.02 ..5-.------ 273 | ———— St. Lewis sound........ 622 
Eden sierierre.. 2-26.65. 5 6+ e . 177 | Reber cs ore te 595 
mao EOE ee ee ee 263 | shoal, Belleisle strait......... 644 
=== [NS coh ee 653) === Wertesee eet aa nint = o-fls sone 418 
Jil ve a 214.-|" Bayotisnoalyete 22a) Wo. sein oer 345 
—— bay and point.............. 235, 254: | Baziclivallage 3222 6 fr. ots cee 254 
== tla Conigesee esp eee eee 2011 \\ Beachwcovers-p anno. si sar? 415 
Beeepoimt 6.) .2-....2...-...--. 235 | —— pomt, light; Belloram:.-....- 192 
—— The; Grand Bruit........... 242 | —— —— Codroy.....-..-.....-.-- 268 
Great Jervis harbor... -. 208 | ———— light, Harbor Grace.... 593 
Barbace cove and point........... 340 | ——-—— Long point, tidal stream. 288 
mordisiand and COve._....-...... - 522 | ———— Trepassey harbor. ...... 88 
"2 G0 a eee ee ee 549 | Beaches head and cove.........-.- 548 
ceo LE (S/S e Rae teste 68 ae 378: |) Beacon bias xe 2 o's Sais 635 
Ipareneed village. 4.21. 0225-2..5 596 | point beacon). .25 222-2 25/.22 244 
arse bay aid point.-...........-. 644 | Bear bank..... Pee Reon ary A Sih at een 374 
Pema: ce ee 237 | —— cove, Notre Dame bay...-..- 445 
[SSUES GLU 10 a ee a 520 | ——_——-NW. coast Newfound- 
WeanrACkBiSletdess.22 5s... 2 2222. - 525 | JEN OVC |e Sa eae ee 395 
Ie Dici@Ol OG ae eee oe ee ea 344 | ——-—— and islet, Western arm.. 413 
NSLS ID Clos Bd eee aa 168 | ———— point................-. 355 
COUNTRELS, 12) a a 660 | ———— rock and ledge...-. 434 
PAR On 2 52-420. .5 116 | —— Deadiall brook <..-...7-'-52-- 303 
= Mussel harbor. ....--.-- 141 ——head and cove, Newfound- 
=== THROW I hs ee BO ag 296 | iemavel, AWE GORE te ae aeeecn acs 298 
ssecse {DTU I einen ee 122 | =—— heads Cullvisland 5252-2225) 464: 
amnetuoCkeme lee oe ce ee ew 136 | —— —— Newfoundland, S. coast. 212, 
PemeMIOINTS 222s... ee = 636 | 221 
actowenarbor..)2..2...-...... Beer Rese) aa ee 2 ae dene ate ceeae 417 
CAEL 0 5 MOE SS es Se 192 island, cape Harrigon........ 728 
PARE rower iA. ks... SME 274 | ——-—— Hawke island.......-.-.-. 679 
Berio thes hed bay. .6o.2..:.. 645-647 | ——-—— White bear bay......-. 221 
IBasgiiey pottes--4-45.—- i pce 259-262 | Bearcove Poites e 2 PRD EM 613 
—— —— lights..............-.- 959, 260))| Beaubetsveayesssse0 08/0002. 161 
aes point and rocks 2514.0)... .. 165 | Beaver arm and cove......---- 394, 395 
asse-terre points: 2252.62 52... 197 (| a ne 459 
LEMOS) 65 1 10 ea ah gel 175 | ———Bropk cove. . 224 sj l.0. 222 468 
PAL eae DAEneOMS 20) fase >. 334 | —— cove grounds.............-- 425 
livid OO) ee eae Gee Reet 695 | —— cove and head...........---- 515 
Batrix island. ...-. ath ete a 506 | —— UG 25 La 440 
baiery pombs2. F620 Pe 216) 568) == spolmmteme nec. fs. tse 530 
ant leshanbons se seen ere oer G25, erciree ee 577 
IBIAS: Se 5 eee elas G24 Siac albino 3 ok sole 197 
BAU GSICOW Coen are Steelers ree AOSteeketrele Mo et 678 
TELE US SMS EP Se Beene T24ebeckioraesmogle - 06. 2. !/-),2\-e0tee 94 
Banldiseanes hionb.).).. 2522523: 365, 367 | Bed head...... Bess) hei eee 693 
Bawdens Noles 5/05 2.6 hs se 602 | POC. 2 Ee eens A) 475 


758 INDEX 
Page. | Page. 
Bee asian seer er.-/ 2a er 353 | Bie Conne ....-...-22-+ <-S=eeee 189 
pehlerishodl Benes. oj. ie Aone « 172 | —— Copper head....--..----=-=2= 204 
Bell island, Conception bay. - .--- 599 | —— cove, cape St. George........ 282 
——— Gray islands: ...-...2--- 386 | ———— Newfoundland, E. coast. 399 
—— ——— Placentia bay. .-.-----5 HUN) eee héad.: .... 2-5-2" 315, 404 
—— rock, Conception bay.....-. 599 | —— Dick LOCK. .-. 2.2.2.2. 265 
eee Garis bayee ao)" =e - = 948 | —— Duck island. ...------2es pee 632 
ee — West ATMs. sea = netee = 953 | == Gull qsland ..... 222-2 502 
ellleranse...,2). se ees eee ees cer 369 | —— head, umber arm sseeseeee 307 
2s | ee pe ae aoe 190 | —==> = Mortier bay: -=2-=2e=am 160 
eee ATDOR 2. 1s foe de oe et ae ee 191 | —— cove, White bay......-- 415 
eI ATIG Se Ae se ne ee ae 192 | === island cove... 2-2 >= >see 301 
SiS EI ey Ed Te De ea og 639, 640 | —— Bacalhao island.......-- 722 
—— isle, meteorological table - --- 50) | = “Garia bay. - 2-22 2eeeee 245 
Northeast ledte see s..,- 641 | == Hamilton inletaasceeeer 716 
Belleisle: strait of.2- :2-)---2c8 - 356, 641 | ——-— Little Burnt bay.......- 493 
ao reneral directions... -- G48.) Soe Merasheen island.......- 134 
ee SOUNGIIeS eee cee aes 641 | —— —— Old Jeff island.----3233= 680 
ippitens pot. 7: .256< bes - ast 474 | = Pilley tickle. 222 7am 450 
Belles Amours shoal... ---------- 646 | — = Presque harbor: 2222 =ee= 127 
pplloram. lioht2. 60... hase ee 192 | == = Naglek bay--2: =) =-reeee 750 
IbelvansicOvelsee sass: ere eee 339 | — —__ Three arms. --.---------= 437 
BBL Vin DAY-2- sucl-ick eine ore ee er 378 | —— === Troytown island=----ee=s 456 
Benburty rocks. 222s... .° -2e--> 540 | —— Pig island, Fling islands. .--- 684 
omen sthen es 223o7 One ee: she's 533 | ——_—— —— Labrador, E. coast. 689 
enie wletic: 2250.6 Heo ety: fc) aie 340 | —— Plate islet.........-.-.------ 185 
Reaminns island's: 2222-22-22: 5652: 544 | = pond....-...-- 2+. ssanaeeee 110 
mennet TOCK shee sobs See ae meee 949 |, === Pools island... ose aeons 539 
Bennett bank pose tne sasee ee oo: 142) | = sRatiling brook: 23.2 eoeeee 202 
COVedG eit esse: = Bae yee 248 feet... ::.. 2s, ee 751 
ee CK se 2 ieee eee cele ee 244 rock and island, Deer harbor. 4579 
BenOliCOVGse.- 26s ease obee sane 304, Garia bay) = 452 52-oeeee 245 
Berry head and hill........-..--- 324) Merasheen island.......- 134 
Pallisse ets he eer eee 168. | === Salmonier stream): 22 eeeee 165 
—— island, Bacalhao island. ...-. Py || => Sell COMeAReaeee sos aaebe +2 =< 102 
= = JInGinin Pintiigs SSS descss 496 | island .:... 2. 22850 e eee 248 
ee = Webber ieht-. 1.22582 =- 504 | —— shoal, Despair bay.---------- 200 — 
——- POMIE . 2 5 ase ee ie ee 948 | ———~— Grandmother rocks...--- 124 
Iperirandcrockseeis es) - ae: fein 173 | = Little river bank ye see- 220 
Besom island and cove....-..------ 468 | ——-—— Merasheen island.....--.- 136 
Bessy gsland < feces esses See isi 550) | ——==—- Placentia bay... a5 156 
etis COVe.. os ee nee en One Mean | —— —— Stanley rocks i 159 
—— island, head, and bight....... 498 |) === White islands)22- 2s. aan 121 
Betiy island 22 --c se eae <= = WAR | — = (Srovayyy MUIR eee oS 734 
Beverley cove.....--------- eae 313 | sunker, Cing Cerf bay. ..---- 240 
IBiechevannmyss ee oer eerie 388 | —— Little Harbor island. -. 107, 108 
Bide arm and shoal..........-.---- 391 | —— Redland 2oseeneeeeees 136 
Br Bald ‘Head. 22 220. Sane. os 136 ‘Froytown island-- 2. 2-25eecn 456 
—— Barasway, Goose arm.....-.-- 310 | Bight, The; shoals, clearing mark. 197 
S| ey eeoebsbebacbane 25 Se Oop aE Wite LOCK - 2 Home se sem ete 142 
see SRV MIBIGL Sess aie 7s Helier AZO) illitardCOVe= == 5 sse=ee ee ek ae 236 
eee TOOKH EEE Ee eee eC eine 358 | ——— point............. 22252 -see5 387 
ieee NANCE ICOVERe nee ee see ner eae 582 | Bally island... .... 22 eee aie 190 


ibimghameshoal...../:.0.:.--+:.. 
PAROM YOR Via ss 2 5-j/5 4-5 e----- 
— cove, bay of Islands.......... 
—— —— Despair bay....-..-.-.... 
—— —— Green bay.......--....-.- 
—— —— head................,-.. 


= and, tickle. 22.5.2. 25s. - 
— —— .— 10) pac eee eae ae 
—— point.. 


—— — [Little Brunet islands.... 
—— islands, Merasheen island.... 


PEAY 2 22-3 hoy... 
OS ie i 
Bishops harbor..... Beep L cits 3's 3 


— Duck brook village........... 
—— —— cove, Horse chops island. 
and island, Rocky 

oie oe 


—— — —— Random sound... .. 
a=== TAT SIE hr 
=—\George head.-..............- 
—— head, Great Caribou island. - . 
Seine AConua DAY... -.. =. 
= Pouch Cove: ......--..-. 


bay, Bonavista bay... .. 
St. Johns bay..... 


—— island, harbor; cape North... 
SSS a ooh oe 
tickle; bay of 7 ea 

islands. . Soh aici che Be 
—— islet; Grae fener eRe 
om eT eee 
Griguet island- 2.2.0.2... 
EP ST ASST OTS) (cy AE a a TU 


INDEX. 759 
Page. Page. 
155 | Black islet, Pistolet bay .......... 360 
501 | —— —— St. John bay.......- CL ee 
305 | —— —— Yellow point........... 348 
207 |, aI ORCICOVEE ods < Sein 28 sn the 639 
AGO). |) eet UR eRe cic ars 2h Astle al ay sere 570 
438. |, = 1@ terms 2c hoe st as 20 
318 | —— point and rock; Greens har- 
493 BOBS ot es es 585 
113. | = = Bast island .. 2 chon us 665 
202. | ——-——— Temple bay -2- 2.21.0... . 637 
459 | —— reef, Butterfly islets.......... 537. 
562 526 
678 einer, elacentia bay... ...58 0 112 
185 | —— rock, shoal; bay le Moine.... 249 
135) |\ aoe Ue sland .72.).-8 4 6) one 
702 | ——— —— cape Chevre............. 174 
(AP ——— == GFN IMO Re OTIS ER ee oes 713 
87% | == Chance. coves.4. 1285 -. 5 619 
424 | ——- —— Chateau bay............: 636 
552) |) = mgu@ert bay. 3.2. .2s.- 239 
523 | ———— Comfort head ............ 681 
748 | == Gooper head '.-.4. 125252 675 
His} |) === === Comiernul Ob aaeto bene bs: 238 
645 | —— —— Deepwater island........ 678 
693, |. —— —— Duek island.............--- 707 
577 | ———— East Bradbury island... 691 
345 | ——— —— Eastern head............ 129 
Pel Oe] <= == POxe Ween poepheoe saose 726 
(12! saat eee EEA OAS op. 4k ees 248 
aii =a Cady. passace.. |. 0) 5 255 
549 | —— —— Little Garia bay..:....- 249 
Fae ee Waa eT Ofer eee ene 189 
354 | ———— Ragged islands........... 130 
574 | —— —— Ramea islands......:...- 224 
622 | —— —— Rose Blanche point..... 250 
245 | ———— Saddle island........... 209 
626 | —— —— Shag rocks............... 196 
100 | ————|Sloop cove..........-..- 666 
600 | —— —— Sloop run............... 478 
616 | ———— Southern harbor........ 441 
599 | ——-—— Stanley rocks......_.... 159 
610 | —— —— Bear island............. 222 
162 | —_-___ sunker, ground; Little 
167 iBay island)... sa 44} 
617 | —— —— Styles harbor........... 677 
703 | ———— Verge island............ 573 
510 | —— rocks, cape Porcupine......... rales 
499 | ———— Domino run............. 696 
476 | ———— George island........... 715 
359 | ———— Ice Tickle island......... 720 
520 | ———— Independent island... 711, 712 
369 | ——-—— Indian tickle approach... 700 
385 | —— —— reef;Greens Pondisland. 53: 


760 INDEX. 

. Page. Page. 
Black rocks, White point .......-. 700: || Bloti point... .: ...o22s2 eae 571 
—— shoal, port Basque approach... 258 | —— shoal, Lamalin bay... .. 169 
pare SIMONE SS etfs eee ate = ote 222 | Boar Island light, rock and shoal.. 229 
tickle, Island of Ponds.....-. 695) | == thet. i... 228 
blackbenwyashead =. 23s. 222 ote 435 | Boat harbor, Newfoundland,N.coast 358 
LeU Mes 28 2a a ser b OeM Le ee 463 | —— —— head, Placentia bay.. 149, 150 
Inlaekotward bay. .)aos0.6< 2 ee ee 707 | —— head, Watts bight.......-..22 358 
Piake Cround: 2232 0.c1tee eee en 624 TOCKS: ).:......020 ee 187 
iakevavcround.=--2-eeeee se oe: 526 | Boatswain island: . 204-2 heseeeee 520 
.Blanc, cape, light, shoal; Great Bob: head <.:::...22.. 63a 191 
Miquelon. 2.022.422: 182 | ——— Lock*eove. 2.2... . 222 eee 212 
—— —— §t. Pierre island.-......-. 173: Bobbyxcoves:2.: =. 24. aSss eee 427 
a eI e neh e es Soca wie oe ete 653 NOCKS2 4: )././. 02 682 
—— —— directions.............. 654 | Bory dedees 2220-2.) ee vith 
——_— —— fisheries, supplies....... 655 | Bois island, Despair bay... -.-...- 203 
ee TIVO besten eno eek 653 | ——-—— Ferryland head........ 6165 
Blanche point 256 235.0222. 020... 172 | === Hardy harbors.2-aee 420 
—-- Roundshanborsss--2 52 - 421 | Bombproofisland= 2222 54seseeee 695 
PIVEG pa h eo e Seine 278 | Bonaventure head............---- 567 
bandtords,;porben.-.--22 2-2 5-5 507. | Bonawastaibay :----2s2525s see eee 534 
= SEL OIE yee ee at ia ae eer 653. | —— cape; light......../.5.2e5eee8 561 
erenicinlotsaes ses yee oe eee es 537 | —— cove and town..........-- 559, 560 
EMO KenOG Kees Ate nee neve 588 | —— population.........--...--.. 30 
EOLITSE'G 1) D8 ee ie ie Rg A ag 549 | Bon Garsirock: .. ...... 24245 ase 362 
— point, Cowpath.............-. 548 | Bonhomme point..........-....-- 385 
---= Soundaslandees see. = 113 | Bonne bay, Cook point peninsula. 359 
TEEN GIN ete te adie aS ley a nS 548 | ——-—— harbor, Hermitage bay.. 209 
SoomMor harbor. he. es. estes 551 | ——-—— Newfoundland,W. coast. 316 
Blow-me-down bluff, bay de Loup. 225 | Bonnels point..........-.....-.-.-- 224 
Devilbay-... 213.) Bonniereshoal:. 1... 228. Seeeeen 172 
Storehouse Bootharbor: ...-..242--8s2 oe 443 
COVEl es. 124 | Bordeaux island, gut... 2.225.222 110 
—— —— —— head, bay deGrave. 596 | Boswarlis settlement, supplies...-. 291 
—— —— —— hill, Little St. Law- Bottlemockecc =). a 532 
rence harbor....-- 166 | Bottom arm, port Charlotte.....-.- 662 
-o mountain, bay of MBotwoodvallest 2505555550. e eee 476, 488 
Islands. -.. 301,303, | Bousllagpomt:....-2.222.2e34 see 186 
Labrador, E. Bouleatx bay.) oe se eaee eee 376 
Coast aeeese 750; | Boulonnaise rock... 2 (22-2222 eee 387 
— —— —— sunker............ 161 | Boultertrock.. :. 237.22 eee 680 
lownard rockss2 ssp cee ee 514. | Boulton‘islet-..... 1-202. S 82am 582 
lue Beach point :23272 2232 = =< 166 TOCKG  .2 324.2 ee 705 
—— hills of Couteau.......-....- 239 | Boutitou, havre de, shoal, point.. 390 
— —— Salmon cove.......-.-..- 508)! Boutwereusland.... 00 309-seseeee 747 
=== Mommy 252.2. ae tease...) ~ 137) "BomwandtArrow shoaleizsea sce 612 
— Pinion harbor..........-...-- 193° Bowang brook. ..\.. 2: 422 eee 333 
ae Ae Gl aiathe oe se rete 105, | ‘Bewlder bank: :. i. 47S 20. eos 593 

Byuticapes.:) sss ese 673 | Boxey harbor, point, promontory, 
— head and light.............. 168 Pees so set See 2h 193 
—— —— Port au Port.....-..--... 2935\Mboyeansitickle)/-22 sees eee eee 665 
——— —— cove, Toulinguet island. 510 | Bradbury island..............-.... 691 
— —— Salmonier river........ 93 | Bradley rock...... eee ee 590 
DOMME N eee ear arene ee eae 571 | Brag rock, Deer islands......-...-- 547 


INDEX. 761 
: Page. Page. 
bmp rock, Garia bay....-...-.2.- 246 | Brimstone point... ../.,2'70 2) eke isis! 
Branch cove, head.......-.......- 94 | Brine islands...........-. wets, SERS 105 
Brandies bank, Seal island......... 687 | Wpimerpeaetios. eu eeu 5S ae 557 
—— reef, Three arms............. 434 | Batanninicove-... 0.2.22. 20 22 571 
— rock, cape Ray.....-..-.-.... 263 | British harbor, point. . 568 
— —— New World island....... 515 | Broad cove and head, Black Head 
— rocks, Badger bay........... 458 | ay sat te eee 2 559 
—— —— hay of Islandsapproach. 301 | —— —— King island............ 132 
— -— Bonavista bay.......... DAT | ee nnty. Day 2ostee 568 
——  —— cape St. Francis........ 600 | —— —— head, Placentia sound.. 102 
—— —— Little Brunet islands.... 185 | ——-—— —— Rushoon harbor... 151 
—— —— New bay............... 473 | ——-—— point, Newfoundland, W. 
— shoal, Catalina harbor. ...... 564 | COS8b S65 4553.2 eee 293 
— —JeandeGauntisland... 132 TEL BUT Liss Ss See RRR 548 
—shoals, Newfoundland, W. Beoi7eqpomts os.sc25. 5 2 lee ee 369 
SOS oe 326: | (Brooksponwdl.. 3s. 3 c:.,...2e ee eee 327 
Brandy cove and head DUBS eee DOG RR Eris vA a ae eee 127 
sacs SOC Se 162 | Brookes'point,. light..........2225: 522 
1202. (00 20 G4) | Sepa POM see) 327 
Bread and Cheese point and rock.. 612 | Broomclose harbor................. 552 
=== GOW ces sotboe ee 558 Brothers, The; Great Jervisharbor. 208 
=== THM eee eee So ee a 140 | —— reef, The; Troytown island.. 458 
ipreadibox Ihe... ..--2s...--- 153° | Browndloxisland . 2. 2.225. 90522 547 
teaen MOM... 2.22 lse ee 368" | Soaps Mead Spite <n 252s once 575 
iereakers ledges. =.-..:........--- G54) | Se EUOCKN DOMES Ss n a2 ane eee 390 
PaO TOCK. 220). co0k es... 663) | aaa eee ass sn le 332 
BreakNeart cove: .--...02.....--.-- A06},| = ISeOrenisland ..)2 4425. Jost ee 551 
== 0 137; 141), | BrovmineraMe Se os, Dn ee 491 
=== Tel Oe aR VM fe] 0 10S ee eg eer 81 
Pmerchen wT OCK. 0.4... -..5sceees.. 2's 153 CEN K2 2) eA ee a em ReneS SSL 410 
Bréhat shoal and point.......... 372, 373 | Broyle, cape and harbor........... 614 
HPMEEPOMMONAG 2/22. cnet e is ed 2 96 | Bruce cove, Gull island........... 551 
Enpiiman Moimt. 2.22. ..3).20 6.4.3 108 STRUTT OG vane See 2 oreo 551 
Bremmomsr nil) 2 ..2266..- 2.2. 5O3'| Prullencepeny cou ngelao scene 421 
Brenteove, Facheux bay........ 211 | == Paris bay.....02...2.0.4..5: 420 
== head, Confusion bay..... 421 | SINCE 5 5 ee a eee ee nee 134 
Hererbaplangs. 20860... ol. 377 | preanetusland! leht. 2 ....-.052 24 184 
rentonerocky 4252225 -/as25- 0.2. 533) oariyambes tockses 75-1252. aoe 382 
Breton, harbor; light, mooring | -nyanetalmde sold ok Na bee 690 
buoys, directions, ice, tides, | Bryans Hole point.............-.: 558 
communication. ........ 194-196 | Bryamisecove....255.042.6 c022 24. 594 
Bee RCO es ween tN 347 | (Bemorisiandie tn (od uisa0. oe eres 82 
PeMiamatchoabpeme eer. 188. Buckiheadeawts, 208 Lie eee 312 
iprigeesdnland) eee) eh, 448) (Buacklevscovet sek ee ee oak 554 
IER D dh CON ee eae a 95: | spoiatiee 2 igre rst tui hoe 554 
1571 Of 7 et 350: sudgellPharbors: 22860 wee. 467 
—— Harborrockand island. 724,725 | Budgells ground................... 427 
Brigus bay’and town............. 596 | Budget rock and bank............ 707 
= =DY-SOUbMY ss. hea el 614 | Buffet harbor, head............. 138, 139 
iBbrimballthead oss. 522 28s. 201 | —— island, shoal................ 139 
Storehouse cove.............. OTs Muntteeiarennt: ls... 252s. ap ane 199 
Brimstone head, rock, Fogo island 4 Oe LCE aa aurea ey eae 209 
——— New bays...) i280: 468.) aliotta tsand .'..,. 055 -2te< 6 eke 226 


762 INDEX. 
Page. Page. 
iBulltand' Gow wocks=2-- 4-4-6 95 | Burnt islet, Stocking harbor. .... - 430 
a? 20 1 Wee Bh hea me oe 581 | —— point, bay de Grave......... 596 
—— gut, Burin island..........-- 163 | ——- —— Catalina harbor......... 563 
—_—— Tsthmius' bays s-aesesee: 707 | —— —— Fogo island; light....... 526 
a= 0120'S Lat ey ae Lae eee ees 612 | —— —— Sunday cove island...... 444 
—— island, Dead islands........- 671 , —— ridge, cape Bonavista......... 562 
—— —— Trinity bay......-...-. 581 | Burntwood point........-. RS 335 
—— —— tickle...............--- ool) -Burtonicove... -=.: 2.52.56 A477 
a DOMME: ss aeal eels yo 95) | =~ harbor.........1 «222 ae 455 
eee SLOG Lis ie a ee i ee 95. | Barrwell, port. ......2:2.:: 523g 753 
rock, Colliers shay s-22..-<--4<- o07..|) Buse peakes.:<\2. /..272. eee 383 
a Garkihay esis tesco: 246 | Bushy head......... , tad 93 
Bildor island =... .5...atdoca-o8 724, |, Bussey point... ....22.2e3e eee 530 
ee OCK A. io rye ske.atia sic ne otis eee 79. | Bustard bay. .!..:. 06) 32a 376 
Balls bay,liehtss*s22ecse- ee ee Gi | —— coves. ..2.25... 2:2 hee 342 
imi ble bee cove: ...4-0-.-— ase 449) | Butchers cove: ..:..--:--4-sseseeee 544 
jenmidells Gaze... 2.22.22: 225 25..0e 536 | Butler cove, Great Troytown har- 
IEMUIMIV AN COVCs sea s ee eia eee 598 | bor. 22 ..2./s5¢ ee eee 456 
IOV BEG oi w= ee oun ie ee eee 66 | —— —— Leading tickles......... 464 
DVS oie 2 Poa sia madmen a on BLA SERS ik) |) head tt... - 2. 75-2 108 
berg eopbamlles ose. Pe eee ae 79 | —— island, Dead islands.....-..- 671 
island, Placentia bay.......- 119 | —— —— Placentia bay..:......- 134 
SIE 00 | Bee Ree Ree is bee Ri exe 228 -| ——-rock).............5.8e2 ee 166 
POL a2. ioe oe eee Ree 226. | Butlers bight. .............g558a 454 
eee VIN ACE's oom Sictic ase ones 226. |) Buttiicove......o.....----. eee 478 
PANO ES CROWN 22.cc Fee yocicl noses 141 | Butterfly islets............2aeee 536 
IEUT AO WME COVES cle pei tore eee ov | Butterpot hill). -..2.... eee 252, 258 
Burin harbors.2. ; <2 220-252 163, 164 rock... 0.2221.) 368 
MCLE wien essere hor mantra l64 | Button island ............. 52.8 474 
island, light, signals.........- 163 || Buttonhole cove............224-22nee 427 
Burke island, Comfort bight... .- - 681 | Butts hole............:.:5 See 119 
(Jasper) island... .....-<-.< 664 | Buzzard shoal.............-2aeeee 448 
BS ISUING «ons clsichnic’= sce SEE Me 103: | Byrne. cove; rocks: -......2:3 342228 511 
PBPIGM PO OUN bie coo ain wid iss oe Ae 569 | Byron’ bay.....-.........0 eee 728 
Burns Head Tock=.2-.22 sae ere 616 
IBMT ERA 222 soe at oc are = See ee 490 C. 
Se IDAN aie alc). x. he aS A94 | Cabbage harbor. =: - .2... 4322 486 
SO Tie eee ft 4 A HilG), |) Cabinkpomtss.- 2 -2)22 ee 392 
Se ICANG. foe vie pn icreeaeig See 360 | Cabot islands, light... ...4-5:22256 537 
—— head, Placentia bay..-.....-- 1% || ——= general directions...... 541 
Cove, Sopa atm .ssses-4 409 | ——— strait... .....: 2.02. ee eee 267 
— —— point and sunker....... NOM =e CUTTCNTS=- eee 53 
island, Hall bay; anchorage.. 442 | —— —— general directions....... 72 
—— —— bay of Exploits, W. shore 485 —— ice, the Bridge-- 22 7eee 61 
ae Leading tickles ss bee 463) | @agnet, cape...../.... es cee 421 
—— —— cape, Pistolet bay....... 360 | Cahil rock and point............. 603 
—— —— Little harbor............ 148°), Catlloux au Chat... ses. -8eaq5ee 175 
—— —— §t. Michael bay......... 669 de‘terre:.......... 2 eee eee 174 
—. rock, Deer islands....... BAT. | = ABOL - ./...02--2 545s ee 376 
— tieklen: 225 5 eee ae 509) ) @aimsiisland, light_.-. 0-22 J4eeeaee 251 
IBIATIGB veg uke ot es eee 256 | @airn head... 2-2) 2460 ee eee 100 
— harbor, ‘God bay: . - .3:22 257 MOUNTAIN... 5.1555. Jue eee 275 
—— ——Nonsuch....... ....... 145° | Cala poose rocks .: 94.) seen 250 


O51) Shs kl rr 
@apleulnsmoeks.: 622 1.2.5 alt= 
Callopisnoales sss. see 5. os owes 
(Ginlii mole: Sue hee 
Callachang eround .... 2 5--.255..- 
Calls point. . 

Calms, Labrador, E. const 


Camel island, bay of Exploits, 

iG SSC ys eee 
—— —— Brig harbor............. 
—— —— Griguet harbor.......... 
LT CONG 
===) ce 
Campbells cove. SaaS 
Campbellton peilement. odo ae 
(Chunng ey NES eee eee 
—— harbor, head.............. 390, 
— Labrador, boundary........- 
Canaille, cape 
Canailles islets 
Camanikto kas. (ese ets. 5... 
@amatries, baie des..-:-2....-....- 
=== NDT Goes aa ee 
UES (ee ee 
Metmerisle AIK 620-62. a. 5. ee 
_ DUNS C2 0 ee ee rr 
A Sae ee 
Cann island, Fogo island, light... - 
Ganon pomt, light.....-.....2.. ee 
oS) ORS ee 
Cape. (See proper name.) 
—— Anguille mountains.......... 
— Bluff harbor 


cove, cape Race, landing... . 
St. Michael.......- 
a Pogo island .-.....-.--.. 
and. island, cape 
ISUDIIN Aece eee me ease 


Pema MOMMA DAY. 5.) jo524 ie Sec 
—— North cove 


Gapelinebaen seme oven lL 
Capillaire mountains.............. 
Caplin bay, cape Broyle.......... 
Fishing Ship harbor 
. ——-—— Labrador, E. coast 


INDEX 763 
age. Page. 
38h | CaplimCove rock. 222. .5 0102 eee 425 
346 | Capstan cove point.............5: 645 
6927 | ee OIG te coe cle terse <, eee 355 
246: | Captam island.) 2252-284... wR 238 
AAS =e eats an Ge gee eee 623 
JO" |e earce TOCk 25 Ue aee eet eee 505 
AG || Car-na-bhus island ......-..:.-.2-. 675 
123") @aravellavhead, rock2...2.4J.00ah2 718 
182) | Carbonesr bay... ......5.20, eee 591 
396 iniana, light... 22. iA. seas 590, 591 
BONNE 201-42 oo 'o,c)=.01 he aos 591 

494; Cardstnarbor. 2. cos -< cs... oceee 454 
7267) Careentne; point... -....-22.2 saeeee 385 
369 | Carentonne island ..........-5.2.2- 370 
402 Cariboutchanmel- 55.2525) 33382 626 
Cao el fee 010) 1 ges Ry eget ee 627 
280 | Caroline point ...\..... 28). otek ee 421 
ASF: | Crerter mont...) oo... see 614 
390 Carrol cove, Labrador, SE.coast... 648 
396 | ——-—— —— §. coast............ 633 
656 | tema) <<<; ae? 695 
ADD: Vi OATGCtnCOMGse. 22, 5 cis vote ee 504 
L740 @artersneads- <2 00s ake oe ees 509 
(30 | Oarumdee rote nt... 6 oe eee 626 
390 | Cartwrieht harbor..22i-0.22 23-52 709 
396 Hiss 
126 | ——=1tsland\and point.:..... 2.2.2 706 
Roy Maat (237,100 6] Se i eR Hr 598 
421 | Cashel cove and lookout.......... 160 
865) Oashimeanicovies... 45. soe aseee 670 
52) | MOSSuleCOMe sees oe: tee 15 see ee 558 
1L73)4) == Derm Otea.42)-\- cts ee 697 
SO een Meee Ce ah i ee 97 
ISTE aK LR hele a A Beer ERE 153 

968 | === and ledge... 2). uste. 635 
672 SYS) WE i toh ee ae a 119 
PASH a|| ===) 016) ee ae EO 134 
tou |) (CRYSiHOLR CONS Oe aN Coe 395 
668 347, 348 
PAO hor?) CHIN a Saha es ad NR RAC 545 
—— coveand rock, Gastriesbay... 598 

218 | ———— Maiden islet............ 568 
738 | —————Newfoundland, E.coast.. 396 
302 (| =. Harbor, cape reels’. | 22 3..2- 534 
309 | island, Burin island.........- 163 
105) = Burnt bayl.i oo... 8.2: 495 
534 | ———— and cove, Indian bay... 542 
218 | OC Resta ae) ers Ue ee Sk A 175 
29SmmCatalina harbor Wdehit-sa: so. see 563 
O76, | Catarmaran reel... .....-.-.-2 22: 536 
GIR ECatens coves. -2-44.- -\sassas eae 113 
GGbumtatod island)..)...2.5)/./. 2c 716 
BROrM@atseove: 2... RO Daas 398 


764 INDEX. 
Page. 

Cemetery, pointy: 22... e Seek 385 | Chesnais point, la..........2..-226 
Centipede. tock. ....04 ee wed vod 698 | \Chevre, cape....-....-)35.aee 
ETE T AMO Bee e socio wten' = Kote 641 | Chickens rocks.....4. 3/7222 eee 
peemee HRA P eS eee ses 2 Grants wie me hers 580 | Chidley,,cape.-..-..--:22.322eme 
Whabertasiand. 2)... /5.7:2eee ate 383 |. Chien island, light... ./..222 222g 
@hainprock, Mavbery Joe see Se selec 603 | —— rock and bank..........-... 
(00) 4 ee A os ee 663 | Chimney bay...-........ 2 55uaaee 
Shame Point)... ... ss weweepe ee 393 | —— Cove head......-.-.-----..-. 
PRAGUE DAY. 22 soecde ca seee eee eee 215 | ——head....2.......-.22 5.5 
OHAIKGOCKS 22 b2:c.0- eee ces 581 | TOCKS Ss. 22s 2 ss - ee 
Riimllcy: COVELEN IS ks ek cca eee 043 | — = tiekleé: 4....-/.....4. 22 
pa NCA Fer ee Pas Sah fs srt Orne 544 | Chimneys hills....... . ah eee 
whamp-para shoal... ..2-.ts eo 388 | Cots, Portal. ....-.. 55 eee 
Whance cove, head’. .....5 4.4 244: 619 | Old Port au... ....2 gee 
—— harbor, head.............. 501, 502 | Christopher island.....-....-.-...- 
— + —— island ...............-22% 504 | Cible point and shoal..........-... 
aa ledge, delet. ..< 2.88486 26 556 | Cigale pomt............/..22 eee 
BETTER 55) 4ous 22559 3 SRN, 727 | Cinq) Cerf bay... ...2..2/.eeee 
—rock........ teens dem ces Oe 241) brook... ....../2. 23 
Ghandler reach... <3... 1.6 5.55% 557 | ——- —— islets...............--.-- 
Change island, light.............. 516: | === isles bay....:.....\22 222s 
—— — tickle.................- 517 Civil East cove, island, roc Great 
Channel bead; light.........<:.22. 259 Sandy harbor... - 
GI oS ae ee SSE iL So 259 | —_—_- _—- ——anchorage, Long har- 
Chapeau rouge hill and cape....-.. 166 bor...) aaa 
— de Miquelon...............-. 1183) |) ClamiBankycove.....- 222 eee 
Chapel cove and head, bay of Ex- = "GUVEx <2 5.622. es ee ee 
POMS anc ccoe iets ee AQy | === foCk.-...:-.- ++. 
—— —— Holy Rood bay......... 598 Clapper, The.............2.3aaeee 
island, Belle bay.......... 190;192) | Clarke point. 2. -...... 20. sk eae 
—- rock, Labrador; E. coast: “66% | ——=roek#:- 22. - 5-2... eee 
—— —— White Bear islands...... 72a | Wlarkevcove-.......-.... ieee 
HLEENG sb acc awesse seal aceee 554 | KOCK So. sss. 00 ss 
Chapple bay and head..........-. 583 | Clatise harbor, head......-..-- 2a 
AbHanvO MOGs. 622 2.02. 2b be eee Se 538 | Clay cove, Jacksons arm.........- 
ites NM en 22-2 ato w oe asd one 471 | —— —— White bay.............- 
Bey iarshatavdis erste eee 485) | Clearcove rock. :... 2.2 5722 seeeee 
Charley island.......-.. J a3 ts See 530. | Clements villace-.... 2.7 2¢aee 
ido) OU es 11], 186; | Glerysiledge.......'). 22.7 
WHATICYE TOCK + ..ee ee os a stseNe8 187) Clit point. ......... eee 
Charlie island......-. BAe SS EL Es 163 TOG (Soh)... ieee 
Sheaves covessese cee ee 2 280") Chithwpomt...........2.20e aes 
Charlotte, port... -. Be PLA AY 662° | Chih pomt...... 2...) ee eee 
Ghanltonirocks.s eae ae eee se 563 Climate, Labradors.. <2. secssee see 
arts. soe Ae ee Le ih Newfoundland: ..:.22. Sea 
LISE* OD Sees oe See LE Se 9: Glinker channel. -....2...0332'2eae 
@hasseurs island. 3 -252255.2522- 175, 383 MOCKAEF = 2.2 oe eee eee 
Eee DOUG ch 2 Bap ae ek Sa eS 347, (plage SO0nd.: |. ..... ce eee eee 
Chateau bay, pomt:2255..32.2222 635.) Glowd His. ..... 0. sc eeceee sees 
WIRD OS. 2 a. So See eee 638 | Cloue patches. ... . see eeenae 
Ghattemocks: shoals eee eee 183 soa 223.5 ee ee ee 
Cheese hill 722 i2ec2 asec. 2 Meee ANA hb Gape. . 2 :')-:- = ee eee tee 
Islands) sees sees es eae 140 eC lnimpyshoals-2:2- 4290s eee 


. 
: 


INDEX. 765 

Page. Page. 

Woachmarinarbors: 2... 2.02.6... AVS Ne@onnie noeke yen cecew eke st wide) =), 287 
OOS BES 5) el G/''|| Conception bays.* =. ...-.-agee sy O90 
—— all island, flat..............-. bOI | Conchevharbor: 2 :cs2it< eee’ 389 
a= shi. 4 se 370 | Coney head | banks. ..2....-..... 404 
SBT INT eee honoree ieielale oleleiecisie « 297 | ————-and bay......-...-....- 258 
Coalpit point, shoal.............. 92 || M@ontmatony Day: s «....:s%i<'e/—peare <i 1 Sa thoi Ree 
OEE AT DOE nino <0. nist m-' -in eos 220/)|\ContemiMisland.......si,225h)e8-4/- 729 
Cobbler head, banks.............. 403 | Connaigre head, rock, bay....-.... 196 
—irand and TOCKS:..0<..---2-. 456 | Conmeriver..:....-..-..:.--.--2t- 202 
5 DELL Re SO 707 | Conhecting point... ..-.....8..s2. 557 
FMT LO@ LO stone ta 2 laiata ci gisieicretetelesie ees nie 456 | Connoire head and bay............ 236 
Cobbs arm. See 514) |). Contentaslets oie ecwaeS eto. ee 547 
Cock and iene COVES jec-sictl ~/s- LI3, 208: | Wonwaymeoves- 222.2 siccco-c- sede 101 
BRICK eck cts cidad cosa ws 0: 163: | MC ook panies. Tae eh sci ocet cis s 336 
fumeKeTANO COVES i202 =. 2c si eo ess UST == ICON Cee cad vzlstsesieind ciaciseale: cae 305 
@edasland (Ogualik).......5.....- 748 | —— harbor, rocks, and point ....- 359 
— rock, Canada bay............ 392) || GOI as, oe 2 ois Led Siete eae ee 263 
— Wenisonislands2::)..... 676 | Cookroomtoek. 23.2.).: <5 525 50s 538 
Codroy island, road, and village. 267,268 | Cooper cove, Chaleur bay.-......-.. 215 
SEBO MIIAIG 2 3 -\52s aos 2 see +. 725 | —— Little Placentia harbor.. 100 
PO GHBTEh eTOCK a. -cee ccs. == << 501 | —— —— Ragged islands.......... 132 
Coffins cove. Se oe em | (32 a 675 
Cold East Ae ae 56 ean 572 | —— island 357, 674 
— ROCs Se Rice aCe a5 Sat Ke Ce eee 424 
HOOT CADE! « cinnsi-cercne estes - 750%, Conperarbieek:s 2. 2.2528 I. ccs 674 
===: NIH OOS (BeOS DOE eae aaeEe 198s|RCoomislanrdee 2 ets a ee cine 358 
| 10) SIGE 9h 010) 10) ae 6lon|kCoppaleentrock:-csesc2s. seme soa 128 
Wileman island «(05 .s\/.225.-1.--'-- . 7 082 | CoppemMucks rock: 500s. sh daeee 238 
Colinet harbor, passage........... 92, 93 island, Caribou channel...... 627 
iplamden Great: -Aeeens cea .e <i= 92 | —— Blaiislandseeses \acceo aes 158 
—_- IDEAS Se net eee 92 Hey O85 
Collett cove, island. --:...........- 140 | —— —— Granby island........... 663 
Br eER AN eer 0c a aan lew 2 582 | ——- —— Greens Pond island..... 538 
25 CEN 597 | —— —— Hurloc head............ 555 
Collmehamiisland.-2.2.5...0--..-. 702 | —— —— Little Bay island........ 440 
Collimsrock-2222-h.5222..$22----:- 123°) ————— Ramea islands.......... | 224 
Colombe COVES jae see eee cleo cle 367 | ————rock.. See Me URES 
—— island, Burgeo islands ....... 231 | —— —— emit ene 1 O80 
pee eenes CLOG DAViaa esa - oe ck - 257 | —— —— Wadham clgaae Sera sri 531 
—— shoal, Couteau bay..........- 237 islet; Verge island ..|.........: 573 
—— Dba elerreuslands. 2+ -- 173 MOOCMSLOtsee pene cee eine eines tere 376 
Columbier island, Ragged head.... 167 | Corbeau islet.............-..-.-... 385 
Columbine point.2:22.).22.2.i2... GiealeCorbeteslandsc-eea See eee 685, 690 
Wome by Chance bay.....-........ 110 | Corbin bay, head, promontory... . . 191 
—— ——— —— point......-.....- 96; Js COOL UUs Sh ecis Sheed ete) 420 
Comfort cove, head, and island; bay === head, Shoal. = s2eeis ys) hee ee 105 
Ori DY. 01 (eae 498, 499 island, harbor, head.......... 165 

bight and head, Labrador E. Wordelia deeps:--9.25-cee02:. 25... 606 
OAS Ue gene ee see ena li. ci GSI BCorletishoalves 5 ssee es Sd 381 
Commander'shoal./22))4.6).2)2 04. Soe MeOLMOrAaNt CHM ss sus sece ee ce. . 283 
Communications. <2... 2.55... = - + Siaiwomelius islandes: tio... .~.- - 228 
Compass, deviation..............-- 74 | Corner brook, Humber arm.....--- 306 
Compton rock........-............ 440 | ——-—— cove, Green bay.......-. 432 


766 INDEX 
Page. Page. 
Corner brook, Sops arm.-......--.--- 409 | Crockers point, village............ 590 
Cosgrave rocks. . jsbeasel es” 694") (Grocodile shoal: .:......62..==e—— 421 
Cottel reach and Femail Joe too d47 | Croix, cape; beacon...20. i. 7 seem 381 
Cottier. baw eene sees ta see 583 | ‘Cromwells ledge.........-22. 35a 525 
Cou, barborde: 2. +. .2scle. 28s Fee 249 | Croney island, rock, shoal......... 162 
Country COVE ssi... 54,22. e eee 409\) Crooked island; ........223-2 323s 209. 
Countryman islands......./2358228 523 | Cross island, Gready island. ...-... 704 
Morted bay ss. oc oe ee ee 238 | Placentia bay. eae 149 
See TOOKs s+ arsretalsisrareie sna eee 239 islet, Ward harbors:-2322se== 452 
-—— 'Colombier. 2222: =: 228) wer: 228) poimt...-:........ 93, 136 
———— Platrocksc.-252 536 no eee 2o8 | =—— shoal... .::is:..2.25—ee 136 
Cove nan drioch clochan........-- 105 TOCK-.\- i. rr 122 
== POLM Ge oe foresee Se ae ein 369 rocks, Burgeo island......-..- 120 
— The; harbor le Cou.-.-....-... 250 | —-—- —— Red Island...-....-..-.. 225 
—— —— Rencontre bay ..-.--...-- 214 | Crow head, anse aux Morts........ 651 
Wow and Cali‘ledgess Saves ya 611 | == ——_ Arran cove... ae 202 
— cove, Newfoundland, E. coast. 370 | —— —— Newfoundland, W. coast. 284 
—— —— —— W. coast; head, har- —— —— Whitebay. ...-......... 414 
Orewa A ess 328 | —— island .:..... = 505 
A Seer (6 Eee he 2 CARL OE 2 eee 550 | island and rock, Ferryland 
== -house-hills3 4) ee 237 head . ...-. 22222528 616 
— LOCKE pene eos ee 654 | —— rocks, Sealislands .... 686, 687 
Holt, AOL sessed 2 AL 380 | —— —— Patrick island.......... 154 
eee BLOG Keer este athe ae ae ee VANE 246 1012 =| ee Ec 199 
TOG Kas bis fossa ie Beg a PER 284. | Crown hall. ....0........2.32 ae 578, 581 
(CICS | O21 ae eee Se ee 048.) Cruce island .....-...... 2 9353eam 388 
WORT CON. Okan get cna Ve ee eee 675) Cubs islets... ......./252.353 723 
—— (French) cove and point..... 309 | Cuckold cove, Placentia bay...... 162 
Po Neadc.. Wess Balt ¢ toads 681 | —— head and cove............... 602 
= Nee ese, Sh eo ee 646 POUNt.;..... 22.0. ee 507 
= POMbsosrusikis eter athe 2 93, 311 thos co. 504 
ee TOG Karis tcinneiv apn tt ete RR RENAN) 3 245 | Cuff harbor and islands..........- 716 
Srabnislamdissseial Sse) SUSE as: 369 | Cul-de-sac, Aviron bay..:..... 22% 216 
rock. brehat pOimib-sessee 252 ote | ——— Hare bay ..-. 222-2228 see 213 
—— —— Indian island........... 699 |. —— North bay head-. : 206 
LOT Ly OLOOIKS «x ASAE ve CS ee 272) harbor and rocks, ier islands 27 
POUNCE tee eters see ee ee > 313, 1 Gull island. .......2...05.4 eee 464 
WTA DE COME san te eine eee! 134) Culletom head--25). 5 eee eee 122 
ratty bead 42 spe SUES : 245 |} Gullinghams.cove-....9. 32:23 716 
Oras peaks. ous. Agnus ON 2 AUS 326 | Gulotte cove... ../ 2). 3 eeaeaae 239 
Cranbernyoslomd sepees sss ae ee OO) Oumalims) head icovesss: eee seas 461, 462 
(Crapaid), Camere. saat a= ae ar Al7 | Cupids cove: s>.2-4o25: See 596 
Crawley islands. 22 eels oA 102 Curlew island and harbor........- 705 
Grazy Betty shoaleva) Seo nay. 199 PONG. =...3. -- 22 Sa 363 
Cremaillere harbor. ...22-25..2-5-2 374 Currans Green field isl fie oe 315 
Greveusletss..0.525 55 eee eee libs sGurrent, Arctic. 5245) see 51 
Crevecceuer point....-.2.:2..-222- 97 | allows... ... 2.2 .)see eee 15 
Crew point, shoallo=.55-.e- eee 185: | —— Belleisle strait..e: ys. 28 54 
Crib Nose, hill and shoal... ...- 208209) | —==— Cabot strait. £4. eee ee 53 
Cripple rock, clearing marks. ..... 86 cape St. Francis to cape Race. 52 
Groctharbor. 4... 3) eee 385 | cape Spear to cape Race. .-...- 52 
Crocker island, Burgeo islands.... 230 | —— Fogo island.................. 51 
— —— Fling islands............ 684 Great bank... 55. 4.0e see 53 


INDEX. 767 
Page. | Page. 

Current, Gulf stream.......:..... 51 Deadman cove, Newfoundland, 
—— Newfoundland, S. coast...... 52 INI =: COARbE Ss Sie aes 355 
—— -—— W. coast.......-...------ OA || IS ene eae eseye re eiven ed ed ame 726 
=== isl in| Saas eae eeeeee 352 | —=— point rock, Way: 2.225228)! 534 
Oierenis, Cawtion. 220220222 kee: 53 | mC): ee aR CRNA Om Oe eres 99 
Guinsleterocke nr... 5222225252454 .- 96: ||| Deadmansibayess-ceas-e ee 609 
COS nn O07 || =—— brop kee. 2s. . eee ee ee cee 295 
Cut Throat island, harbor......... 72. | Deainrock= 759 s5- ee ee 522 
—— (iG Slee se ae eee 722, | Deaths Head island) 296: 379 
Cutler head and harbor....-...--. 556 | Debon peninsula. .......2..2293.22 351 
UE 6 Eh 542 | Deckers cove......- NAS L Rae 321 
Onuiameislamdecrs.. 2.2. .20.--5. 229 |. Deep cove, Bonavista bay........ 558 
Cuttle island and cove............ 472 | ——- —— Change island........... 516 
uiwell harbor, arm... 5--.....--. 452 | ——.—— Sops island-.....2-: 22). 406 
inlet, Hopedale. 2-23-22 2255- 735 
Wes Deepwater, banks. 2yik 2 aan 120 
MerpOiii = AWA Ses eek as oc... - O44 | COVE risa ae et oe ee 319 
Miri tent Soe Seka se. 94 | creeks. o-cehoa l=) Bee eee 659 
Memmitabley bay: eu: 22.22. .S 551 | —— island, Car na bhusisland.... 675 
Danger point, shoals:t:.2..5....-.- 621.) ii kevisiang. =e eee 678 
Men POLO ts se nese fs... 88 ISIAN SY... csceciemdy eee 692 
SPrmlels COVE. «i222 des wus...- doo) | == POlMb. 4.285.222.4424 5 soe 203 
Dantzic coves....- LO) | Weenarmy brooks 5554 ee ee ee 320 
=] 000 ee en ee 135") oS COVE area aden eee aaan oe ee 330 
“Da ony COKE eee 568 | —— —— Hermitage bay........-- 198 
=== eo Ai eee Minar 135 | —— harbor, Random island....... 572 

Dark Tickle harbor, Brig Harbor --—- head, Trinity bay; direc- 
rel eave |S SS 726 tions, ice, tides..... 578-580 
--— island, Cooper island.... 674 | ——— island, Bear island.....-.... 221 
—— —— —— Troytown island... 456 | ——- —— Chandler reach......... 558 
Dit ROG Oe dea ee 717 | ———— Garia bay.............. 245 
Daumalen, cape; light............ 390 | —— Niverisound 3 isace se ee 633 
Waatd hom) TOCK. <2. 2,22 0- 2) 55 os 752 | ———- —— Indian tickle...-....... 699 
Davis cove, bay of Islands........ 318 islands, Locker reach........ 546 
—— —— Humber arm........... BOW |e Pass bce ee ae eee eae ys 680 
ae ne: Birgeo island... 119 | ——=points. sua Ses 621 
ici eae lta. 739 | A potduss bales o act. J. etek 306 
== to Zoar, directions. - .- - - 741 FOCK.G a cae eee eRe), 2 ly eae 573 
TSENG! on ee Se 158 | lag Haledon! Sollee 547 
S00 93,475 | Degras settlement............-... 282 
== TCS SAN 688 | Dégrat harbor and cape........... 368 
MWEOMMCOME cn scese ns 222 cc.) Ss. 197 | Delaney cove, Cooper island.....- 674 
SS ORONO Soe es oe 202 | —— —— Occasional harbor....... 667 
=O pees oeees Bee 202 it ROCKS eyersts soe Etta MRE Ve 94 
IDE REXCON ES lise a 5 see ees a 200): Demetreaslands 2 vase. eee 378 
SSC ee elo ee 198.) Denbigh: isles: A oeh ei tad Saye 663 
Dead islands, harbor, Labrador, E. (MD enmuszeirmils. “24sec eek Meee seed 211 
COdS ieee ty. 671.) | MDenny island.) 7) 2 hy eels 220 
—— —— —— Newfoundland, S. Desolace, jootmite 22 joe eden ere eee nS; 
(CORI arn. 2 Vee 208 || Despair bay, headi..-........--- 200, 203 
Meadmanvbightes2 23 38h49 80. 2. 196)! Devarenne island... -2...... Jo Yau 378 
—— cove, John the bay head..... 159) “Devil bay +2) 60M 7 oe ee. eee 218 
— lawblume! bay aes Qi, Comes) White: bayeses seer ener 403 


768 INDEX. 
Page. | Page. 
Devil head, Cing Cerf bay......-. 240 | Dogfish point, rock...........----. 450 
—— —— Newfoundland, W. coast 299 | Dollarman bank.................- 562 
== POMtsper eee eee. +s ese a 399 | Dollondiarm. ......-..22.. see 435 
Devils Cove head, light....-...... 507 | = —ibipht......-..-.--.2 seme 201 
SEE | ee a am re 194 | Dolman cove and head.........-- 243 
BEET OK OUIb- tess ule oc beer <hemnls eMO La Ne island, shoals s25--=eeeeeee 347 
—— point, beacon......-...----.- 602:| Dolo poimt.......:.-.-. 4.22 390 
Paable. cape, bay 2.2). 222csenaee 649 | Domes, The.......---....: eee 750 
Mamse yal arOC Kee ae eee ee 165 | Domino run, harbor, and point.. 695, 696 
Diamant point. +. .55..ss2eeeec. 172) Dooley ledee..... 0... -2\--aeeeee ee 5121 
DicksBurns Tock. 4- aaeeee ee 105 Donyarockss--:....<..)5- see 208 
ead etc seh Ae eee 437 | Dos de Cheval point, beacons... 388, 389 
Mreks island:=. 2: tate cece ke 139 | Dossenger cove and rock.......-.-- 404 
TOC KGS rotc ee Ot ee 156 | Double island, Adlavik islands.... 729 
Migkwiheadicc: a. seb aew te Oe ee 502 | ——-—— Brig Harbor island. .... 724 
Dildo arm, cove, and islands.... 583, 584 [gears Chasseurs island........ 383 
SGU CIE Aen Cen eee me REE eS 501 | ——-—— Great islets harbor...... 383 
Direction tsland: : 2.2 oc sosceoceek 377 | islands, Battleislands; light. 624, 625 
Miriy rocks: sah sh ii) ee Se ees 136 | —— Hamilton inlet approach 719 
Distress oclksase ca Bases a eee 216 | ——-—— Independent island..... 712 
Divenisland sees chess acioee eee 709 | ———— Labrador, E. coast; bank 662 
Dix Cer ac Kas etait cie er eee 326 | ——- —— (Saddle islands)....-.-.-- 694 
PON WOUMG ssc. u saat eee SOE 99 | —— islet, Gander bay.........-..- 531 
Wocktheadue. ss). 20s Le eee 597 | ——-—— Sloop run.....-.----..-- 478 
— point, Hall bay.............. 449 | = Nedge..........-- 2.3.6 eee 357 
—— —— John the bay...........- 159 |) == mare, la... ....--.2ceeeseee (lg 
— Horthibarbor! 22224222 2 = 483 Toad point... .: 222 -3hs. eee 91 
SS Ne ag Se eae A an 159) | Doucersbrook..........42 2225256" 409 
MOCKS =F re ee Ree 67 | Dough-fio point.....::...eeeeee 565 
Doctor cove and island........... 191 | Douglas rock: .......2. 03.22 25a 231 
— harbor and island, Barasway Dove powit. .......-.....2 2.5 710 
DOIN tee eee 235. |sWowe4rshatbor.. .)... 222 oseeeeeee 393 
— Newfoundland, S. coast. 225 | Downes point.................-- 328, 329 
Martors ASland 3 > 2.1 see ee eee 544 | Downeys. COve.....-s.-..222--8eee 415 
Dodding head, light, rock......... 1635) rasonnbay -....-.-5.2..cseeeeeeeee 211 
Dog bay, islands, and point....-. 530, 531 | Drake cove and island, Trinity bay 543 
== Gite Aco erie eeeeene eee ac 94 | —— island (Gooseberry)......----- 209 
— cove, bay de Vieux.......... 220") Drakesusiand 2.) 2.23.6 eee eee 715 
—— —— Lakeman reach......... 547 rambisland!..- 3.2. =\..5e 4 eee 515 
oo CAM. cece eeansienice se 197 | rewrrock).. ............: aaceeeeeeee 188 
Fae ALOE ice 2) ciaeetecic ioe Gales 1b eWrowerssock-s 2.2.35 Jno) eee 524 
island, bank, Belle bay...... 192))| noid broek... .,. ....0eeed eee eee 188 
— Labrador, E. coast... .-. 689) | SDxiummondnsland: 2 222-eeeeeeee 394 
a (Ninasomak) pease eee. 742)\ublinicove:, rocks: 52-2 eeeee 249 
— islands, Adlavik islands...... 729 || inebavis rock. .2. iSaseeceneeee 379 
— Huntingdon island....-. 09s eWieremocks- 322.050 0c. eee 191 
— Ihonpisiand: .ee cease 138 | Duck cove, Laun harbors..-...-.-.-. 167 
—— peninsula, cove.........-.... 350 Stag island si3.225.¢eeee" 679 
pare DOLD esse beens ons cee ne 529 | —— island, Badger bay.......-.-- 455 
MOLLE esas toe Hun ae 516 | —— bank: -.. see 632 
Fe BAU osechce econ at EAS ose 390 | ——- —— bay of Exploits; shoal.. 497 
—— stones, Indian bight......... ABR) = Connoire bays ue eee 937 
Dorberry, Tock: 25.2 abe. hee 206 | —— —— Couteau bay; tides.... 237, 238 


INDEX. 769 

Page. Page. 

Duck island, Domino run........ - 697 | East bay, St. Pierre island........ 187 
—— —— Friday bay.............. O10. | ——- Blaclonpe kerecss.sssa254< Seer 220 
—— —— Grand Bruit harbor..... 241 | —— Bradbury island............. 691 
—— — Great Southern harbor... 110 —— Broad cove..............-... 151 
—— —— Herring head.........-. 514 | —— Chance harbor............... 504 
— —— Indian arm............. 496 | —— Countryman islet............. 523 
— -— Long island............ 107. | —— (Dykes) river shoal=>-2-52. as 710 
————Newfoundland,SW.end. 262 | —— Gannet rock..............-.- 705 
—— —— Niger sound; bank...... 632 | ——-Gardenwslandes. seccasa eee 516 
—— —— Nippers islands......... 429 | —— Hare island... . 2. kee 471 
— —— Random island......... 570 | —— headset crane eee 572 
eons lanche. points: 2.) 252 | hill.) os. .2.0 eo eee 332 
—— —— Sops arm.........-...... 450\ | Indian island = 2225 aeaeeeeee 528 
—— —— St. Lewis sound; rocks.. 623 —— island, Fishing Ship harbor.. 665 
—— —— Wadham islands......... dal. St. Michael bay........ 670 
islands, bay of Exploits... ... 479. |, ——— (Paradise) river. .....00s25- 710 
——— Brig Harbor island. . . - - 725. | —— Random head, light. ...:.... 573 
—— -—— Hamilton inlet approach 719 R@Ciat 222 4 ses eee ee 536 
—— —— Long island............ 453 THY GE so ees acs ae oe ee 710 
— Partridge head........-. 683 TOG ve, 5's PE 292 
islet, bay Verte.-............ 419 | TOCK 2) 21.2 ees oe es 723 
— Ganderbays.. 0205.2... 529 | —— Sister island..........2....0- 716 
—— —— Merasheen island........ 133 | southeast ground...........2. 532 
— rock, Davis island; sunker... 158 | —— Stocking harbor............. 430 
—— rocks, Bird island........... 135 BUNKeM: 2. 32. sete won Mee 168 
—— —— Jude island.............. ¥55: |, == Twin rocks 20. Wee ee 537 
—— —— Western cove head...... 117’ | 24 White island 2.0.2.0... -aaumeya 
—_— White island. ......._.. 133° |\ Hastern harbors 26200: eo. eee 222 
Wack bil point... 2.222.522... 396 head, Bonne bay ...........- 317 
Mackie iplet..- 24205-2204 oc... . 252 | —— —— Fouché harbor.........- 397 
Duggans cove.....--.......-...... 398 | ——-—— Great Cat arm.........- 402 
Dumenil point, rocks............. 365 | ——-——- Jacksons arm, light ...-. 405 
Dumpling cove................... - 558 | ——-—— Placentia bay.......... 129 
PSIAM@eseaee ee eess-.--..-.-. 628 | ——-——— Portland cove... ..te1 2 332 
Dimallopispits 522.2 22.2.- 22-04 2. 338) | Uniomrcovercencateted. 399 
Dtiramibisvandie 2 eee 5 ie Be 262) | === islands rocks eee eee 684 
MuniGlercoviemeer pesos ee qgat |) rock, Harbor Grace islands .. 592 
Dimelsiarm 75.2 SS 2S . 510 | ———— Harry’s ground......... 561 
1 DAC GL eae oo 125 | —— Oderin bank.) /4.0...Uee a6 
LCS eA bee ee ee 168 | => shoalaas. ee 0 eS ee 76,77 
Dykesiniver,shoalts5222--.22222.- 710: | Baton pout sseeens te eal 442 
E | Hau, bay del’ pitead!: . (2-02.30: 148 

onld land ; on | Eboulement point, rocks, caution. 335 
5a fediten kun yt aC ane anes re |, Hehelles'or*Portares.: 2.52 sssecac8 ie 286 
purmceae sat etre saggy Kelainvansetere sce se eee a 652 

Earl island, tidal streams......... 709 | Eclipse harbor, ice, tides... SO sopra 
East arm, Bonne bay.............. 319 tala eee a sived at) oun re 231 
—— —— Sandwich bay........... TLOVY Wauiiea'covell.. cl ehuae ss. ae 358 
— Baldwin rock, buoy....... 259, 260 | Eddystone island.............-.- 676 
—— hay, Belle bay..:.......-... 191 | Edge of Ground shoal............. 248 
eae CS ann Day enriee acts... 205 | Edwards harbor.........-....-.-.- 720 
—— —— Fortune bay............ 187 | eee Ob: SAN ae 533 
SO RE ee eee ee 291. jh Biel Brookes Se sea ae hy ag) tS 490 


76846 —09-———49 


770 INDEX. 
Page. Page. 
Hee island, nanborse..c-s. } 25 )-\4- 709 | Hairy island . .....--2-- vet epee 724 
POINb. i asessos-s- +e sees eee OF on eine shoal... . eee 344 
BEBO WOM seo... 2> hes -)2 Sc 379 | False cape, cape Harrison........- 728 
Bhzabetiiaslet..2.....\./. A-ha: See 371 | —_—- St. Michaeli 2223223 668 
Emberley point, cove....--------- 111) | =="Cay. .....--2>-5225-ee oe 95 
Emberleys (Fords) island......--- 152 | —— Girdle, rock.........-.-...-. 96 
iriberly rock. .2e0d2-4es22.e2 832 165. | Pamishgut, island. ..-...-.us2aeeee 106 
ipneraid ‘bank... .)-.. es pees SL | == point... ...../.. ieee 107 
shoal. =o seensens senate eee 88. | Pane island. -..-...: 5-2. 22s eee 394 
Bmeraude ahoal-._..:..-¥igan- S32 399 Farewell Duck islands, reef, cau- 
nity harbor. jose .2 02 eee pn ee 726 | TION; ........\54\- 2 ee 515, 516 
Storehouse cove.-...--------: 224 )| =—'Gull islandi...::..6f0222eeese= 516 
Bouneline shoal. 2s... tLeclst ee ih \ == "harbor: .-,-..<- + - Joes eee eee 516 
Enfant perdu, Green islets.......- 181. |) S=e— hess o55- 215.5: bese eee 531 
— rock, St. Pierre island... 174 | Fammer cove, ledge... .27- 20 232-ee 697 
Bnpleeusland.....-.3sv.% -a2eseee $90. | === Tedge.........-: 22 ee 712 
Waelish banks. 2842) 50e-essees 340,'|, Bagmers' arm s......-=:cc2:e--eeeene 510 
See IOAN, (MCA. eects ss oe eRe DGG. "Se COVES ies =/-- 22: a 192 
BADER Eee ate och at ace sears 91’ || Farmyard islands. -:..J-2 === eee 738 
—— harbor, Fortune bay..--.----- 188 | Faurels isfand:..-...:. eee rei 
ee SACHMess seas == sere 198. | Bather Hughes hill. -.255:2-225eeee 235 
isang, pnosls.....4-s95st $44< $82. |' Bapvetteislet:....2/22aseseseepeee 359 
WOE... 252455. 2esrete Sac e 651. | === point: .......2-: .eeeeeeeee 362 __ 
shoal... -sscbuen-ctts.| © 343.) Bayorites tickle... ..2--eeaareme 709 
Bataree point. ....---5-2----% 962, 384. | Hawn tock.:...\ .. .cile2¢—se eee 698 
Entrance island, beacons....-.-..-- 850. | Beather bed, The...:..cto-.eaeee 680 
DOM ko sc.454 2 pee Sate S19) | = POMit. 2.22 026 3 eee 592 
Entry island, Cut-throat island.... 722 | ShoOal-...-.... 4.93 hae eee 563 
—— —— Davis inlet............. 739. |) Helix cove. ...-.:.-.))2)223=eeeee 280 
== —_— Nominowmuneys ssa: 5-1-< 696 Femme harbor and shoal......---- 188 
—— —— St. Genevieve bay...... 352.’ Wendue point... .....2-42254seaeee 376 
(South Duck) island.......-.. 702." Wergus islet... .....<seeer a eeeeee 595 
pine. Cadoret.....<21 Joiensa! 4-3 385 | Fermeuse Bantam bank......----- 618 
Maervier rock, |’ 3.3-hemelaseeem 387..| => harbor... ..--....022-s-seeee 616 
Mine e OU. =.= oc aieients feels eer 532. | Biérolle point. ...-.0: +: ee -eeeeee 348 
Wakao banks. <2/0-1-,-.4 oe see 624... Herret islands: ..21:.. 52222 —eeeee 700 
Wepning shi@alsl.: 0-0 +). oP2 sb 376 | Ferryland harbor, directions... .- - 615 
Etain, harye du pot,d’........... 418 | head, light, signals. ......--- 615 
Bwangeline banks....-----...-)--- 330 — Richot channel” .----22225+> eee 382 
Wyvans pomt,,spit-- -s<+54.5 2 -.-oeGe 488 | island, harbor. 5.-ss55--eeeeee 381 
Exploits, bay of; settlements... 475,476 | islands.,.../...45 53500536 eee 380 
—— Burnt islands, harbors, settle- metineer hill: .........c28.) See 749 
Mnenie. eieed pelos te say ARSt | Bids cove... ...... 2.22. eeeeeeee 280 
See PU VOD oi 2 oye.0,5)0,5 6 specie Selle 490) "Rirmages head: 22:52:25.2 ae 247 
(Eiri arm: 7.2). 234 
; FE. === — brook: : 22.2. seen eee 206 
Facheux Eye, head, shoal, bay... 210 | points: ..: eee 668 
ae NAT D OR cr pascyn\ercrereitole = 8/2 eee 211 | Fish cove, Granby island......-.--. 664 
Wen Ck 35 3 sdf rss aoe eee 262 | —— West bay; point. .5-2.-¢ 714 
Fair and- False bay...:..2.-5.----- 551 | —— head, bay le Moine.......-..- 249 
islands, anchorage, ice, com- —. Coal river; bank......-- 298 
WAUMICAVION tet thes cee 542, 543 | island, Copper island.......-- 686 
Fairway bank, Belleisle strait... . - 641 | ———— Labrador E. coast......-. 660 


INDEX. 

Page. Page. 
Fish island, Mark islands ......... Goi |) Blat pointe. seo) ae ee oe 418 
—— Old Férolle island... .-. 351 | —— —— shoal, beacon...........- 344 
—— — shoal..........--.-.....- 221 | ———— White bay.............- 414 
—— —— Sloop run....-.-.......- 478 | —— rock cove and point... ....... 600 
—— islet, Burgeo islands; rock... 227 | ——-——— Garia bay.......---.... 246 
===) ee .. 413 | ——-— Granchain island. ...... 370 
—— rock, Brunet islands......... 184 | ———— Horse Chops cliff. ...... 565 
—— —— Granby island........... 663  —— tickle, rock, shoal.....-. 446 
—— —— Indian tickle approach... 699 rocks, Bull Island tickle... .. 581 
rent. Marchand. .s:2.5--...2o0h)| Plats, Thes......2.2-- ee nt ewes 651 
—— — Placentia bay.......... 1034), Blemishveap. soo: »ceniine fae tee 76 
——— St. Charles Gullisland.. 631 | Flemming rock.................- 712 
JP SGHS lod Jas Bletantnoekswlens sa. a5 ser eee 174 
ipWerntes: labrador: . 2222 ss.5.2.. 36 Fletans channel, directions.......- 177 
— Newioundland............... 31-84 | Fleur-de-lis harbor, hill........... 417 
iRWeMenmam COVE! <2. -<+22-<.20---- 852) Ail euisye ol olives) ae 473 
rock... eee Silshe | Eblun oa ait kes ee ee eee 660 
emermane bank.--..........-.... 413 | slams et )b oe ores pe ree oa 684 
= (185 385 | Blint islandsy 20. 3) ke 2 tes gee 452 
Fishermen point, shoals. ......... 621 | Flobber Cove islet. . .2+..<9-i =. 203 

Cn i 433 | Flower cove, island, light, direc- 
—— Ship harbor, directions, tides. 665 | UULOLON fo PM aetna AM OS “005/050 
JIG OG, Spee HS |i ledees neues aeasytno aie 356 
oo Viki —————— 722 plage sso, 25 cet ae oh 157 
inne posible .'). 22.22... 15% |, Blowersyislands:| fostk 23S 536 
0] COPS os cia Se Ne a 0 A 0 Cd 563 
Flagstaff hill, beacon, port Basque. 260 Fly point and rock............... 292 
—— —— Tor bay................ GOL. We Bloge Catiome: sieht 46 
===> JIG poSeecpee eae 169 TSI EVOL se emer Nae SC ae or 742 
Hlamaamds:@OVe-2..-2---<.s.ss-:-6 385 | —— Labrador, E. coast:.........-.- 47 
Wisgame, Vanse A................-- 198 | =*= Newfoundland. 5.1 ...<,.2). = 46 
nitnmacanvisland..<.s2.....- is. 234) = BION AIS ppt ta i ee ees, ay 1%. 
il) Tiel cn) 275 | ——strait of Belleisle ............ 47 
island, Cing Cerf bay......... 239) | Boppy ledget vy 4524 srt sec ace 425 

—— —— Corbet island........... GOIN) | (Rugin‘cape: UC eos ole. ana: 

aa cove, Placentia bay... - 157 | harbor, directions, ice tides. 520, 521 
= SS Gn Fale 1016 ee ne 519 
—— —— harbor, communication... 157 | —— channel north of... ... Fal GPs 
—— —— Holton harbor approach; Sree CULES ees Bre 524 
lavoro ae 726 | ———— E. coast, ice, current.... 525 

—— —— Independent island..... 711 | —— rocks and islands N. and 
—— —— labrador, E. coast...... 663 NB Oheas ackcrete see 523 
—— -—— Partridge head; shoal, aaa LOW yer ee re el bea 522 
bamike, rocks). ..2. 2 24): 881) Hairou island... 22.225 24.2) eee 363 
Ga ee Bee uida baye mocks). 17, 158.) Bolle rock.’ ) 2 2.d4 oe cc eee 386 
— rock, Chateau bay....... 636 | Holby rocks!) hier 23% abo s prea Part iso) | 
me eormpdmyreen-. 2.) . 270, | Bond, le. 2... 22.222 ..eednatens 385 
== co be Johnbbayrishoalk ! 4). 246. | Hontaine point, lao... .. 0.5.2, 255 334 
—— —— Seal island............. 688 | Fools harbor, islands. ...........- 505 
islands, Bonayista bay;shoals. 550 | Foots point.........-..--+...-4. 157 
—— —— Placentia bay.......... 157 | Ford harbor, tides.....-.-..- Be ee 743 
—— —— St. Francis harbor. ..... G64) Hords island, rocks... 2.222.222.2242 152 
——— islet, Canada*bay 24. 2.52.2... 391 -)cForked Duck rock) 250462 sae 132 


fre, INDEX 

Page. Page. 
Morster Tock kt we nucin a sone een 57o"| Moxy islands. ;...</ 4. ee 722 
Oni pOUbo acne awe eee 566 | ‘Wrampton rock... .. 2/2222 2.2 531 
Forteau bay, point, brook, tides and Framptons cove. «....2s22.2eeeee 480 
tidal streams, caution, soundings, | Pranche, point. /. ....4.2eeeeeee 362 
ice, settlement, supplies, tele- Francis), cove: 2... 22.022 eee 126 
Praphvetationes sc: zee ees 651,652 | Francois bay. .... 5.2.22 215 
Horuune bays: 7. -- 22-2020. eee.) LOS) ramkghend. - 22-2 eee eee 131 
—— harbor (Griguet)............. 368 roek.22-:.-../1 20). S ae 168 
as Notre Dame bay; direc- Pranks aslind): 4). (32.2 227, 2a 
OS Sosa tote etek 474 | Fransway bay... 24:4. 28)Scee ae 215 
— head and village Ebaseves eee 185 Frapeau point et: hoa! ar 91 
TOOK SAit.tn 1.82 rie ct-ceteag se crs 232 | Frauderesse point. ......-.-.---- 388 
Boose | Shoal 4 oe oes alesse 346°) Freaks asland) 5.) 2:..2i:. 3. 495 
Blog points ESS OF 318 | Frederick battery...............-- 603 
Bogie (cove. .k ese) see uy eer one 492 Freels, cape; Bonavista bay. ...... 534 
ioimidinosrockee es sss see 372 | —_— cape Pine; rock........ 90 
Four Ears island... -. Paes titre --/ 369)| Freezers roek..).......20csae eee 636 
harbor, tides 2.) s.nr cee 382 | French bank. -....-.:).092eee 288 
sae ORE! Saft c oet tnk SU 753 cod fishery... .::2.2.=ee 179 
Fourche harbor and point........ 397 colony of North America..... 171 
Homme key laee. Aenea. tee 3761) ==) cover s-tsc kos. 309, 667 
MOGMMICE POMMb jo.” nel. EN O77} 3 heads we. SS 509 
Hoxebprook. 2 =2.2- 2. Soper. SPT 2928 ISAM Gi ts). a's oe ee 300, 418 
SEN Ce 389 point, bay2:.:2-2)ss.eeeeee 373 
— cove, Little Mortier bay...... 162 | Frenchman cove, bay of Islands... 303 
—-— Pilley tiekle:os.2-t3o28. 451") == = Rortune bay::::2-aee 187 
—— harbor, Placentia sound...... LOI? |) == —_thittle rivers ee eee 219 
—— —— St. Lewis sound. ....... 621 | _—_—— Newfoundland, E. coast. 619 
————= head; TOCK (saa al erate re 066" || harbors. :..'..2.2..20 222222 ee 685 
=== island, Brie Harborisiand: 0) 726) = heads)s.4.~. 2... een eee 304 
—— —— Despair bay........-.-... 201.) —=* island). 22... 05 686 
——— —— Flat Rock tickle........ AAT | —— pock2 isc ie... 2305 158 
—— —— Gander bay............. 5380") ———— munsitides:s ...5. vse. e eee 685 
—— —— Hermitage bay, rock.... 198 | Frenchmans cove, head, tides...-.. 404 

—— —— Marticot island......... 142 | Freshwater bay, Bonavista bay; 
—— —Newfoundland 8. coast; tides and tidal streams. 544, 
LOCK Seer tose 220, 221 545 
—— —— Nippers islands......... 429 | —_—_—— 8t. Johns bay. .....-.--- 609 
—— —— Placentia bay........ 101, 154 | —— cove..-....- MPR ieee) 97 
—— —— port au Port, tides and | Chek. 4.562. 3.'c)s Se 385 
tidal streams....... 293, 294 | pomt, current 222: eee 87 
—— —— Venison island......... 676 | village../:2)) JA. peas 590 
—— —— Toad cove........-.-.-- 613 | Freycinet shoal, rock. .--:.---22- 347 
islands: Hall bayous2 tees » 9440) Fridhead: £-... 2... eee 193 
— —— Hermitage bay......... 198 | —— rock, Coal river.........--.-- 207 
—— —— Labrador, E. coast...... 688 | —— —— Davis cove: s:....:2.-. 7 3il3 
— —— St. John bay........... 347 | —— la Poile bay.2. 2-12... 7 24@ 
isletpeharboress acer oeh eee 576 | —— The; bay le Moine........... 249 
= POM Geet. 55 ee 304, 373 | —— Boat harbors sees 150 
TOCKs yew eer ae Jt284 843 >) = Hransway bay J2¢ eae scene 215 
—— — Toad cove...... se at eae Glory eB asrars)e tile -22):)\ aera 270 
a GAM 2 et elcteers helen eee 293ml) Prianvaledges 21. Late eee 507 


ON ee ee 


INDEX. 773 

Page. Page. 

Mrommyisiand./.......2........ SS?) SGaibraltar noek es 22 aay ees 8 boa 97 
Frying Fan island, bay of Exploits. 491 | Gilbert river...............2.--- 663 

a Lewis sound. ..... 543° Gilberts Conese ea shise na 5en eer 143 
Ds CO G45? Gules Cowes sec. scenes ons ae 409 
Funk island, shoals, current, tides, Galle taslomdeys: = seers es Sct 490 

See wCAMMON = 5 -). 54-22 - eee ss 532, 530. | Guilleyas pon las sree onl cake ae: 77 
CL Co i re 2207 | (Gallobtaisle teres su. ao eae 479 
Pirbyeanchorage.......2.5.+.-.-- 1983 Gills Cove ates oooh see ae eee 406 

POWER seeps fd ae res se ees 489 

G. Ginpickershill ae) 44, saeee eign 571 

Gadds point, harbor, head.....-... S19": |Gurdiletocke 20. ak Geeme laa 96 
(Gaanmtry nead, licht....:......-. 17) Glumshireasland 2232s eee 157 
Cio Ge a 368; 2Glindon; coves. <4. 35-che ae 116 
il 411 TOCK See aes cae Syme 117 
Crallanenarborile. <2. 2... 22... 200 | Glover harbor, directions.........- 462 
Dla ib 750 | Goat island, Badger bay.......... 459 
ol exo |) a 130 | ———— Little Bay island..-...... 44] 
PEE MOCK etl de esse 163 | —— —— Presque harbor.......-- 127 
Galloping Moll rock...........--- 234 | —— —— Red island; sunker..... 138 
Gallows harbor, head, island.... 147,148 | —— Thimble Tickle head.... 462 
Sellitoiny ate rae hae il islets Deenisland a) oe aeeOoe 
Galigmoye harbors.) ...2...:.... 2... 243 F100) (eres Re Te ane ate 706 
a 2601 NGO Dr ROC ae rt. ae ar atte 2 on, opener 248 
Gambo, brook, communication.... 545 | Goblin head and bay...--...-.-..-. 205 
Gander bay, river, island... . .- 529) 530 | MGObOs0y Capes... sop scene eee 396 
Gammet Mead... 222.4212... eae 539) God" bay, direchions.<-. 1.4 %-- 256, 257 
=== bul 704 | Godfather cove, point.............- 404 

th. 2 585.) “Goelandsdslet-. 6s 3. 2. betas aoe 379 
LRT BTR WO COVE Are s ccc ona ee 410 
Goppy lands)... 2... 528.) Goldson. . 2.08 ence 513 
algenemanmice 2 oe eo 166 'Gonde'pomit. es: 5- saat cee ae 388 
=== G0VOs. dee 364 | Good bay, anchorage, beacons, di- 

ROS HS otk eee 516 NECHIONS St. Me. ye eee pe cee. 344, 345 
Gargamelle cove, pyramid... .. 338, 341 | —— cove, Griguet harbor......... 369 
Garia bay, harbor, peak........ 245, 246) -_— Ship, Harbor head... .. 666 
AGRON So kt lk 587, NuGoodland joints a6 is seo .  < ie 563 
irammietiieht, rocks... .. 2... TSG TS i MeoOldueOVve wen aces sas. Lat tee 160 
\Cvniaey 5 ie ale Se So mIMGGOSeraritive nyt eo! 2 crac css» ojos 309 
Cammiconmpomlss cc...) 2-134... Ai | Oe 00 C2) eT 558 
Gastries bay, point............. 597, 598 cape, cove, directions...-.. 375, 376 
Ganley pom aux: 2... 02. HWA). |, SS econ eres aN SR AR NADY Ts 580 
Gatiltoissharbor, light: |)... 2... 199 | —— island, Caplin bay......--.-.. 614 
(GrsiF1a ge! 097 Lae As 175 | —— Enragee point.........- 384 
Generalidirections: = 0002... .- =: 68 | ———— Great Southern harbor.. 111 
Fee NAC OTBOM 2 )ccste WS saree hoe Le 7-26 Ai@Eabae COE Socss5ccccc 110 
(Genilespotmb: eves t-te te ti eee West arms 5 75. epee 253 
fe) curl LV) ee 419 | —— islands, New World island.... 513 
REOTEEL COVEN ek eee sll) 668 | —— islet, Cuttail island....2-..... 229 

HARD ORCS se ete ae ae 681 Shoal. Ja ueen Si el hen Steen 96 

viele Waa Wig @6" 0) de ty gee RR ea 715 | Gooseberry island, Despair bay ... 209 
Georeesnsland! 05s jy tty Ye 408 | —— Nonsuchi ic =. -s.1 hese 145 
Georpies Tocks: 3 otal. a ene’ AGS} || cove, Placentia bay..... 120 
Gemercar hill 3 ee ess ae 550 | ——- —— Ste. Geneviéve bay..... 352 


774 INDEX. 

Page. : Page. 
Gooseberry island, Sweet sik 533 556 || Gras pomt. ...... 2.22.2 335 
island setae 6/56 eel el) O38 | GrassycOVves: .. Sees eeee aetna 407 
islet, lsat ie Bi EOS 149 | —— island, Hall bay.............. 440 
—— —— Random sound.......... 574 | ——-—— Little Southern harbor.. 109 
OSs ialameee. 202.2235 8 fe. ee 692 | ——-—— Trinny cove islands.... 106 
Gouffre harbor, islet, point........ 395 | —— islet, bay of Exploits......... 486 
Covernornsland e554 sscseee seen 302 | —— islets, Jacks island, rock.....- 514 
roversshanrvOrs:. soe. sace eee 485 | —— — Long island...-........- 451 
Grace, harbor; town, bar, light, —— —— Tweed island....-...--... 300 
buoys,. directions, ice, Grates: polit: ..... .-.... Jae 565, 589 
tides, patent slip com- Grave, bay and port de... ..... 595, 596 
MONE MOM, sae cost 592, 593 | —— point, rock, beacons....-...- 350 
islands, hight.......0.-.. 592 | "Gravels; Dhe; district. => =-eeee 279, 291 
PrnleVNEOCKAnss Jeo oe ee 233 || Graveyardidland. ... 22-4-205e—ee 448 
Granby island, Labrador E. ee 663 | Gray Gullbasland... . 22 Sse 131 
—— —— White bay...........-.. 411 islands.+/..--- 4. 386 
Granchain island, pom. 222.2... 0 47370) ||—— a poimie. 2° 2: 2 ee eee 319 
Grand bank, head, village, light.. 186 rocks, Shoal... :.-.- = ec = 674 

CE aS apt SE AG ll le 262 | Gready island, anchorage, commu- 
== DEACH., DOMME ccc sie eecie eis = 186 nication, coal, current, ice... . 703, 704 
— Bruit Colombier..........---. 242 | Gteat arm, Hare bay 22 2932.-eeee 379 
——— —— harbor and highland.... 241 | —— bank of Newfoundland. ....- 76 
CLC g oe ae Ridder SC A491 | ==— Barachois: .-.::.::. 22222 181 
-——— Dimmall Gove s2.2.-/22-2.-25-: 457 | —— bay de l’Eau......-......-- 194 
Jardim settlemients.22-222. 2. 589 || == Black island, shoals) 2see een 
—— Jervey head and cove....-.... 187 | —— Bonah cove........-.-...--- 129 
= le Pierre’ harbor. .).20 22.) ..2 188 || =—— Bréhat: bay..-. 2.2 : eee are 
— Mulou shoal................- 364 | —— Brilé harbor...-...-.-- id 134 
—— Platier rock.......-......--- 353, || = Burim harbor: S- 2-2 assesses e 163 
SET [0010 VR RS ER A 306 | = Buses. 2.\... 2. L252 22s eee 383 
GraniGexecovie. Jet ey naerey 228 ee 367 | —— Caribou island..............- 626 
(Grandes: VacWeS: -.£2s-s2s2--sere- = 400 |), === Cafitammic:. 52325 22,40522-5eeee 402 
Grandfather head, rock........--- 399 | —— Chance harbor............--- 556 
TSI W 0¥6 |e eee ere et gate ty 528 | —— Coat island...... PAE sc 118 
Grandmativertrocks.- 52. a2 sase: = 123 | —— Codroy river.........-. soe AS ee Ga 
GrandsiGalletsybay -- os 2.2. acess 368 | —— Colinet island............-..- 92 
Grind y DrGmmeee sect. 2 i. ee 235 | —— Colombier island.......-.-..- 172 
NIG 4 ng eG See 226 | —— Comey arm.....-..0..-..25-- 403 
PABSAPS POMPE Ae. 2! ts 255 | —— Content bight...........-.- 547 
—— point, settlement, cove, rock. | 126 | —— Cormorandier island, rock... 380 
KOUNG | GireChOnss-—---- s..,- - 25D || === COVES S52 2s Soo vat ce eee 370 
Granfer islet...................... 486 | —— Cuiller bay and point...... 206, 207 
Gramferstrockes- Ot ae ae eet scr = 399 || —— Damitzic covert. 2225252 185 
Granite point......2.0.5....2....- 398 | == Dunier island, light.:/--2222 457 
(arapmel (COWOL le. 0. tie eter alc 365 || ——"Baraicove-2isases-ee- eee 270 
Goer oy rials 16/2) baeatepare aang pete, SSS 175 | —— Gallows harbor..........----- 148 
GrappinGise es: 0. <2. oe eee 175 | —=—Goose harbors: 22-225. ses see 384 
Grappling island, Packs Harbor —— harbor, bight-2-222 35232 -e8 196 
SMa ! 3 202 ee oe NOLL 1s deep... > 
—— —— White Bear islands...... (28s | island, Battle ‘ean tere 624 
islet, Domino run...-........ 697 | ——-——'\Connaigre bay-.--=*-- =~ 197 
point, Mings bight............ 420 | ——-—— Newfoundland, E. coast. 613 
Grass landseesa ee eee eae 529 | ——— —— Ramea islands: -..---.22: 222, 


INDEX. 775 
Page. Page. 
Great island, Sacred islands. ..... 363 | Green island, Nippers islands... . . 429 
—— isle of Valen........--...--..- 124 —— Pistolet bay-.-....-..-...- 359 
-—— Islets harbor................. | 383 | ——- —— Placentia bay......-.... 157 
— Jervis harbor and island...... 207 | ———— Queer island....:......- - 695 
———— Wanmihnarbor-.2 2)221.2.2..5 167 | —— rocks, Middle brook...-. 236 
— Miquelon island ............. 182 | —— —— Rocky bay......-.-.--- 2) Yo 
—— Mon Jambe-....=......-....- 193 | ——-—— St. Lewis sound; bank.. 624 
See Mnatuitto COve.-........-.Le-: 582 | ———— St. Pierre.....-.......-- 181 
— Muddy hole................- 483 | —— sunkers, Barasway bay.. 254 
= EMehent . 2...) 2.0. l-.-- 107 | ——-—— Witless point.......-...- 613 
—— $t. Julien harbor...-......-- 384 | —— —— Woody island........-.- 465 
— St. Lawrence harbor.........- 166 islands, Hare islands........- 684 
—— Sandy harbor....-..--..--.. 118 | —— —— Jude island.....-....-- 157 
—— Seal island.:................. 188 | ——jislet, Deer harbor.........-.. 579 
S02 a 174 | —— —— St. John bay...-.......- 342 
— Southern harbor.............. 109 | ——- —— Marks island.........--- pou 
Mroytown harbor. -2::2.-.-... 456 | ——-——— port.au Basque..:...:2. 262 
—— Verdon Island.:.............. 381 | —— islets, West Random head.... 557 
(Sie or 0 | 76,78 | —— point, bay Roberts: lights.... 595 
—— bay, Great Brehat bay.....-. 372 | ———— bay Verte........-...--- 418 
—-—_—— Notre Dame bay; island..430, 433 | ——- —— Despair bay .......-... 200 
——— —— hank......---.2/:...-... 524 | ——-—— Jude island....-....... 154 
— —— T0Ck... .-- 2-22 e ee eee 434 | —— —— Notre Dame bay..-...-. 428 
— cove, Cooper island.......... 674 | —— shoal: Se sa3oe ek eee 162 
— — point, Newfoundland, W. | —— —— Spaniards bay....-..-....- 594 
Grhlsi3 See Pe eee 325 TMS aan le kee 562 
aS 2 en 316 | TOC wee SAG. ee. < Se 353 
— Handkerchief, The.......... 313 | Blioals Ab eihs eerie NON: ee 368 
a= 112210 430; 582 | Greenhill island_.........:.-..-2:- 226 
— island, Barasway bay....-..- 254 | Greenly island, light, fog signal.... 654 
—— —— Barren island; rock ..... i7eGreens harbormtidest=:s45s545-5— 585 
== as bay of Islands.... 2... =: 300 island, Penguin harbor... ... 679 
—— —— Bell island............. 387 | —— White islands.......... 121 
Sammie LOA GOVE... 5... 26 152 | Greens Pond harbor, town, general 
—— —— Burgeo islands; shoal.... 232 | directians ss 402 .... 538, 540 
= == ne Ito aes eee oe 060 | —— island, anchorage. - - - - 538, 539 
— Catalina harbor; light... 563 | Greenspond (Fourché) harbor, di- 
—— —— Cornelius island.......- SAN MARTE CTIONS ee teie eras ae ete al 397 
EOE OMe AL DOES. 32.2).,2.<\2!2 706 | GRCEp A CADer assets We nth ee 700 
a Cn COG Nemeel TOC ketene Lee ats Doe 91 
—— —— Hall bay...--..--....... 442 | Gregory island..................-- 301 
EO MSIMet.. <2 =, 719 pa elob, (Sue ee Ma aD eA OME Seip 315 
—— —— Haypook island......... 712 TOC Kens sce 2 Lee LE 2 Se ce 163 
aa aa OLombarborapproach. 726 |'Grelins. point. .......-i22.2023-4-% 383 
—- Irelands Eye island... . 570 | Grenville ledge..............2.--- 356 
—— —— Labrador, E. coast ...... 692 | moint) beacony./25 24 Ee eee 637 
— Loon bay....--.....-..- 501 | Grevigneux island, harbor...... 390, 391 
eee RRSP Ona AA) | MGrittin, harbor. s22522 6 eee! eee 697 
—— — New Harbor head....... 133 | Griguet harbors, island .......-- 369, 370 
— —— New World island....... 502 | Grip head, island, Buffetts head. 226, 228 
—— —— Newfoundland, N. coast; | island, Despair bay----.....- 200 
rock, anchorage, direc- ("Gioais islands 5. eee ae eee 386 
TOS) FIMES ey 1 sili a67,|Grog. islands Ul ates oaree Sas 698 


776 


Grole Cove: CULM fon teas epee 
Gros morne, cape Brule..........- 
Newfoundland, W. coast 
= SMeOZ MOCKS.) ce haa. aelesie hers 


———— Water bayscsid iste y nas 
Gaul uslande2. suse ee eee 
Grouchy, pomtidest4 esse seee- 
GTO Ux POLNL Se neees skeet ee 
MEDNSCY 2 sot! Se oak Seta ere 
Guibert isletessc.2sebat soo bs see 
ieimlennicoyve so: 2ask saeco ees 


= CAG nCUNKeMbe ent ioe eee 
— cove, islands, Newfoundland 


— island, Badger bay; anchor- 
Pe viectet sack pee peste || 
—— —— Burgeo islands.......... 


PL ages 


—— —— cape Bonavista 


— —— cape Bluff; rock......-. 


— —— cape Freels; rock 


—— —— Dead islands 
—— — George island 
——— —— Harbor Breton 
—— —— Hills harbor 


—— —— Jude island............. 
—— —— Labrador, S. coast...-... 


—— — le Moine bay 


— —— Long harbor..........-.-- 
—— —— (Nauyaksigaluk).......- 
—— —— Nippers islands; rock..-. 
—— —— Notre Dame bay.......- 


—— —— Petticoat island 


—— —— Square island........... 
—— —— Sweet bay.....-.-..-.--. 
—— —— Thimble Tickle head::.. 


—— Long point.........-.... 
Gulf of St. Lawrence, ice.......-. 
> —— JORISERIMEN IO) Soe 
SLVCAINTE ee era ee eevee ere 
Gwil battery rock. ..2).50 eet 


cape Porcupine......... 
—— —— cape St. John; light, sig- 

nals, shoal, breakers. - - 
Seer fe GUN DAY 4. ici.) 2 


INDEX. 


Page. 
Gull island, Twillingate islands; 
rock... .....i0 2 509 
—— —— Turks head............. 224 
— Witless bay..-.:--2 2322 613 
islands, Eastern head....---- 129 
islet, Couteau bay...--..--.-- 239 
—. White Bear islands...... 723 
——— pond ..........--.:e see 237 
—— rock, bay de |’Eau_-....2238 194 
—— ——— ij. Broad cove. 22 eenee 161 
— —— (Foirou island).-......... 363 
—— —— Granby island........... 411 
—— —— harbor le Gallais........ 200 
| ——-—— New bay....-....-..--- 468 
| ——- ——_ Notre Dame bay-.2- eee 453 
| —=— —— port Charlotte: - 22725822 662 
— —— Ramea islands.......... 223 
| —— Turnavik islands sceeae 733 
— rocks and shoal, Marticot is- 
land). 2.00. eee 142 
— —— St. Lewis sound........ 624 
—— —— White bay.......-...... 412 
—— shoaland point, Hawke bay.. 337 
— —— Marticot island......... 142 
Gulls ‘marshie72 4s). 20. 5: eee 326 
——— Nest-rock..../.<:~.. eee 271 
Gulnare islands... .2.-.--:5:03ee 684 
TOoCK. . a2. 2b. 2 eee 531 
| ‘Guniledge... ..<sts522.. 4 Seeeeee 573 
— point, shoals....2..2...-2222 325 
=— rocks:22.2.. See 676 
Gunnerrocks=. 2.5.0 18 2 eee ee 570 
Gunnine pomt=s55452 eee 122 
=== TOCKS . jncda- 2 Se eee 507 
—— —— Tinker island........... 465 
—— rocks; islet. 2.) So ee 453 
Gumey island 4:20.21 See eee 692 
Gushue rock. 3522 3-22 eee 693 
| Gut, thei. 277 
H. 
Ha‘ha bay and point..-...-.-2 361, 362 
pao — MIRC h ac icleme a.25 0s SO eee 226 
Hache point, coup de........-..- 421 
rock... 625 174 
Hagantarm). 22.025 sss eee eer eee 665 
| Halfisland : 22.225 Soe eee 93 
| —— of Goose island..............- 530 
= TOCK: . 5... ee ee 537 
Halfway asland 2.025 see 701 
isletiee 22. Se ee 553 
= point.t.. 0.2033 ease eee ee 304 
rock, Chateau bay......-.-.-- 636 


INDEX. Cher) 
Page. | Page. 
ISN oS it0ye) eee eee ee 262 | Harbor rock, Turks head ......... 597 
TOC aio Sore OR Ee S oe eee 210 | LOCKS o1eislandee ee sae 580 
IS [oilll 0297 — Oe Enero pe Patani 44] | ———— Middle island........... 155 
= 1) a p04 | —— Round. island. .....2.2222245. 458 
Hamilton inlet, directions....... Plo TN7 || shoal . 185 
soos | 2/21), Se oa 499 | —— St. Tee eece fee see 166 
Sa GT 35 | —— The; Cornelius island.-...... 228 
Mammeniicad <2... 2.00.2. .022.-2 Boo) lard: Daye... |. ae ee ee 416 
5 0 Ce NOS; —=— hata ys atbelec ccs ee 524 
Handy Harbor islands............ (Mogehardrix: island ..2))..a sees 452 
Peamemetitl)2) . eceedL e.e 586 | Hardy cove and rock............. 209 
Hanrahan point... .)......2.vs5- (06>) ‘harbor..:).. 4... eee 420 
Hants harbor, rock, directions, TOCKS 424,05 Aa eyo eee JIE 
Dee he 2 hi. a2 he ESS 588 | Hare bay and _ island, = Content 
Happy Adventure bays. ........- 558 | reachicl {Fangs eee 544 
Heambonmibreton 2... ....28s 5250. 194 | —— head; Fogo island..-....- 519 
=== (OVWG5 008 Soe n oe 312 | —— —— Newfoundland E. coast, 
— Grace islands. .............. 592 LCGH Ee actos 375 
= |GRVClL Ee A es 271 | ———— —— S. coast........... Bile 
island, bay of Islands........ 2089) == Cat DOME. aera eee 546 
—— Burgeo islands; rock - 232 eae MAT Onassis eee eet ees 190 
— — cape Roger harbor....... 147 | island, Caribou channel; 
—— —— Dead islands........... 671 | Bhog ls). eke cae 628 
—— —— Grand Bruit harbor..... 245 = — | Changeisland..|.2 5. sen ode 
— Grandy passage........ 255 | ——-—— Grandby island........ 664 
— — Lower Rams........... 104 | ——_ —— Gready island......... 703 
—— — Murray harbor......... GGlG ee Ue DAY so ae ee 377 
—— —— Penguin island........ 217 | —— —— Labrador, E. coast..... 684 
—— — Rameaislands......... 223 | ———— Sloop run; rock. ...-... 479 
—— —— Sloop run;-rock........ 478 | —— —— St. John bay....-.....- 344 
— Styles harbor........... 677 pees 2 Ukallik). do ee 744 
— islet, Roberts arm.......... 446 | islands, rock. Epox BOOS 708 
islets, Cape Bluff harbor... . - 673 | Hares Ears, peal, eae 94 
— le Cou, directions. .......... 249 | Burgeo island........... 119 
Set COT ee rr 200 |. —— —— Ferryland head. ..... 615, 616 
<== WE A er ee 598 —_——- Newfoundland, S. coast; 
— point, light, bank, St. George pomtarock lias. eee 214 
Inet) 0107 Sige pee yan eraets 276 | ——.—— peaks......-..-...------ 242 
——— rock, Square island...... 669 | islands, Labrador, E. coast... 733 
—— —— St. Barbe bay. . 304) Mfaricot. bay, point... ....... 2c 93 
—— rock, Alcock island.....--... 465 | Harper island.................---: 679 
aa ie ie island: -- 322552 1689 | Harpoon shoal:.22.:..)..225 22082) 246 
—— —— Brig Harbor island... .. 725 | Harrigan, cape, harbor........---- 738 
—— —— Broyle harbor. ......... Gl4 ees = to Davis inlet, direc- 
aa Uke island sete oe 681 | tionse 32. <5. Bae 741 
—— —— Dead islands harbor... . Gal) Harrison|\Cape: 2...) seca sue as E28 
—— —— Harbor Breton; buoy.. 195 Harry brace De eat OIE et ic 289 
— la Poile harbor.....-.- 244 harbor rock ine. tee eee 434 
———— Little St. lieerrence oo head. s sce oe eee 433 
arbor serene) G5. | —— ledge: s2s2. 2.402520. este eee 156 
—— —— Mercer cove........... 184 LOCK 2 eh a i 121 
—— —— Presque harbor......... 128), |(0 Harrys croand. 205. ls sue 561 
—— —— Spotted island; island.. 697 TOGK ES! ei47 he Eh eee eae 427 


778 INDEX. 


Page. 
Henry point.shoals: ...\.. eee 172 
Ge tOCKW2 2, v2.3 Ua 90 
Heptidee rock... 23..2.2 ose 129 
Penbuslind <2... see 2 = dse) a6 
Hernittirock .........: 2202. 2a 391 
Hermitage bay, anchorages ..... 197, 198 
COVEs2 a5.) -- 32 eee 198 
Herring bank........---.54.eeeeee 694 
— cove, Corbet island.......... 690 
—— — Great St. Lawrence har- 
bor... 2.2.2 eee 166 
fishery).!:.... J... 33 
island: rock . . 2044. eee 691 
=>— islands. ..12.:..-.i..092 eee 718 
— neck, head, islands, commu- 
mication../.. 4... 513, 514 
TOCK e o2h c/o Bee 538 
rocks.) See 566 
shiqalll 22.2. <4. 2: 3 392 
Herringnet island |... =. 302 23ee 660 
Hickman harbor, Random sound.. 574 
islands, harbor, Smith sound. 569 
Higgins islet... 2! ..0) eee 508 
High beachts. 2221 6 eee 169 
Beacon: hilliyess:<)... ease 635 
— Grego island............---.-.. 484 
| == Gull island ».2..4.. see 478 
island): --.b¢e 4 660 
— lookout.................-.. 126, 214 
<—— points... i124. 3:2 gee 489 
~=— Rat rock... 2.33 Shee 695 
-+=— Shap rock... 522.20 ee 507 
Highland) rodke:). 0051 222632 aeee 272 
of Grand Bruit, Mness eee 241 
Highlands; (he: :..).2.. 2 4eeaee 271 
Hohl harbors. =. + =. - ». 2 Eee 680 
Halliersyharbory } ..\-2.2 328425258 390 
Hills harbors-..-...-: 4) 20eeae eee 687 
Hinchinbrook, bay ::2...4 50 seeeee 710 
ineksiislet: +... =.2222085) 52 eee 536 
ines .cove.....2)-\2:)355 3 eee 270 
Hiramprock.:.|. ..).835 4 eee 106 
Hiseockuslands!+. =sss2n) 45a 684 
islets and poimt::).sl222e-8 -= 206 
rocks... eek ae =) sales 
Hedge: holews! +): 5558 ae ee 576 
io didom,shawre 24202 ere ee 376 
Hips rock: |)... cee Soe eee 105 
Hogan cove, Merasheen island.... 185 
—— —— Petty harbor-.:..-...-..- 659 
ELOgs Ose; ..)....- . stab eee 454 
Holbrook head! -\2)- 45855 Heees se ese) Oa8 
Hole-in-the-wall, cape St. Michael. 667 


Page. 
Hartonrocks haat os see aes 590 
Harvey sTOCk isle Sea Asse, ee 523 
arts lain deere Ae ys ky Ge 694 
= TOCKS ae os: ss. eR eee 257 
IFfartelieryammale ss 5535 set S00 eye 191 
Hatchers cove, Garia bay.----..-- 246 
—— -—— Random sound......--.. 576 
amine arm 34 s4ah Sos ase ee 412 
OM. os wceee se ees [Rees ORe 408 
Fat et bas, Capes.) s- = aeaee ae 374 
BET ea Tae ye om ae A a PN pare sear carlos 343 
Havre JHodid oul 2222225266 eee ae 376 | 
Hawke bay, harbor, flat........--- 336 | 
Olt eEs = Sa ies Tse yl ie ee 335 
—— island, harbor, Labrador, E. 
Coast: 2tulas ie UA bene hes 677 | 
Eaiy: (Coweete cle Seas istintee Ble 158 
—— —— Jude island....-..-....-. 154 
TSENG OPO oe oe Seo a 146 
—— —— Nonsuch............... 146 | 
—_— Swieetsbayn.s assis. ee ee 556 | 
Bhi Geilawets ; .- treet Peens Oe Seok nf 187 | 
Haydon point, island 92222)6¢ .- 2/2 571 
ay padk island. fs cxted ogee TAZ 
TOCK =< 5- eAAL woth aaah). ce 514 
ay pouks shoal ceesse seas sen =e 562 
ay pUlknockss ess 5 eee Ae eee Ser 591 
Haystack hanbors4- ses: eee see 140 
Haywards bight, head..........-- 444 
Guillisiand? yee sa se ee 445 
Meadiharbor. 20222 hs Vee Ee 281, 290 
TOCK S30 Me eee eee 427 
Meads harbor. /Veeisbiien aaaee 450 | 
Hearts (Content, licht!...2223-22- 586 
Delight; harbor ::552) 42.0. se. 585 
=——— Desine, ices sd faces Dw Gl 4s. 586 
Heartsease ledge, inlet, point... .. 577 
ie bron) Dayeceseestes = = BS SOL Yee 749 
ell cove ssa ees ere ey. Sel Sk 318 
Fellsimouwthss4 a see ees A 395 
Hen and Chickens rocks.........- 745 
island; bay of Islands......-- 300 
—— —— Venison tickle.......... 676 
islands, Freshwater bay... ..-. 544 | 
Henley harbor: 225222 322s eee 636 
JIRA eh oak ee eee 634, 636 
PlIenmessy islam a2 2 eo ee ee 436 
Pero OC Ket Fa ee sca ee ee oem es 13 
mibaney shoal eye oe ee 634 
Henningsaslet ws 222.522 Sei ke 524 
Henrietta islander 711 
Henry, channel? +). 33.02. Aue eee 
IBLEP gle ne Ls Pye lh ees alee 300 


INDEX. 19 
Page. | Page. 
Hole-in-the-wall island, Ram _ is- HAt POlMteny 2 od... Jas ae See 751 
famds.t.. 22 104 | Hydrographic bulletins. ........- 9 
——_ ——__ —__ ——_ point.......... 138.) Eiynes pomt.25.222. Jes) eas ee 
ELIS Re °C eo rr 140 "').—— roehaxiky ak ejseke, bw bares 456 
Hol ehisiGOVe!.. 5.222.520. 111 | 
eee lands. .........----- erat. 133 | I. 
Holloway pisht......:2.....:..-. G78 || oil shuade .. 30. sae che eee 750 
———_ passage......--.-.---------- ISS »| Tee, Adlamtie. 33.222 5--2-eeta see 57 
6 See Noleta BS ao A of, | == Belleile.strait_--- oer eee 63 
HMolton-harbor, island, tides. «.. 726,727 | —_— Cabot strait. ........22..002- 61 
a SOO ike Grackses. 2. - 735, 736 | GQUdIOn 2 = 544 oes eee 64 
—— —— ——-cape Chidley, ice -. 727 | __ Great bank of Newfoundland. 57 
Holyrood bay, Conception bay.... 598 ——— W. coast of Newfoundland... * 62 
— —— pond, St. Marys bay... 91 —_ Holton harbor to cape Chidley 727 
Hooper rock.....-. Soa wesebes HG8 |, cig St panies eet Se eee eee 64 
Hooping harbor.......-.....-.--.. 397 | signals respecting........---- 65 
Bop eraloay, island... -22..:../.2 S84 | —— terms........-..-4---2..++ 54: 65 
Hopedale harbor.........-...... 734, 735 | tickle, island, tides.:....-22! 720 
Hopedale to Nain, tracks......... 737 | Ikirasaluk.......- edie Qradeteas SS SoCvee 738 
Mopking island.......-.-.:::+-.-. 252 Independent island, harbor, tides. 711 
LoL 10 632 | Indian arm, bay of Exploits... .-- 496 
island..spit, beacon. ..-1..2. 848 |= —“\Southward ‘bay... 2. ..--- 556 
IEMIRCP AIDS 2.0222 eee ees te AGO) eee Dae eee ded aa Salsas 22.4 542 
— = 480 | —— bight, settlement.......... 437, 438 
PimiisyOANK. 2222522222222... S 633 —— Burying Ground cove......-- A427 
forse brook .......... 3 habs LS 212 | cove, island, bay of Exploits. 486 
=—— hops cliff. 2-. 2-22... .\-< 225 500) | New Worldvslandos.2es2 511 
—— 1519.20 te 712 | garden island, rocks. ....-.--- 516 
=== [NTN SOI ees 26, | guile y..4. <a ol ao 4 532 
—— island, rock.................. 538 | —— harbor, Merasheen island..... 135 
TSEC eee OS 416 | ——-——- Rodney Mundy island.. 721 
10 C1S Se a ST OT 614 | —— head, bay of Exploits....... 497 
®lorseshoe rock. -.:....:..:----:- Sif |) Tsthris bay. jae. .2'08 2 706 
Horses Head rock........-- wa Rat 239 | ___—— St. George bay...-...... 277 
Moskine harbor...--:2.:--..-.--.2- 486 | island, cove, Caribou channel. 627 
Mewinanberswja:e2eSoo 0. 376 | —_- —— Garia bay........-.---- 245 


Piubertamoumpessset se 277 


head, tickle, Labrador, 


Haidson wockwa Meee. 583. | E. coast; tides, com- 
mMug-my-dneielets. 22282205520... 229 | INNO CAtI OMe eye 
Hughes brook, anchorage......... 306 | —— —— tickle.......... As hayereme 
Eiumber ‘arm, Weer... 22222. Yoel. 304 IRAN SAEy ees Sis\ Se eee 
PUVOR eee t ase al Ss! 2 ata 2 306 islets TOG. f42% : cece eee 
Huoummoekaslandiioe5 23252 8805). 482 Neiicewiny S2ee a e tae Ei te 
nai shows vee yess se ds 680 isokout.islandGktye 0.2 ee 
Helm ela tsa dees es yeas etek, 546 | —_-——— Pope harbor....-..-...- 
une; bay, la-cape:ces 2 2 217 | ——— point, cape St. Francis. .---- 
== harbor; laz2s2 5) i422 eA Ae | ———— cove, New bay...--.--- 
mt tislamicdli sauna ee oy Ha: | Sa Wiad oR Aas Loe be de 5ee 
Huntingdon island, flats.........- 709 TIVEE: PON «Joe. 2 wae 
Mtoe mead: pens ss saad ee BA) == Mens 1sha rid 22) ie eer ee 
BMaseyaro cle 12-2). oreee ars eRe 20 502 | Indre point, Ariege bay; shoal... - 
HIUISSe VarCOVeHs 2 S222 seks ea ADS = =—shoalhista ivenres. 5 = 5 aaa 
Harssyandelcs 2h 2s2 ¢ Ses ew he ee GOS indriemockn:.se sess 5 ee eee 


699, 700 


528 
481 
570 


780 INDEX 

Page. Page. 
itvormachbix bay. )-\ 2s. eee 335 || Jackson: cove. ....2:)22 - Tyee 433 

inprain pointes. cost. Je): i Jaume 201 | Jacksons arm, beacon, light, settle- 
Iinner2Aspenspoimite..-.-.9-ee ee 07 MCDB Sod vs. ose nese 405 
— Gooseberry islands; communi- Jacobs Cove. .....+...--65--eeee 569 
Cat OMe eyskiasctymes: sya yee eee 546 | pround .....5..2 335550) 537 
—— rock, Little Denier island.... 553 | ——ledge............-.-.---2.22- 524 
EID eal NGAd..% 0 eeeleac skews 460 | reek... 22... 52.03 454 
RIS NO Aes. < vs: esas ataees coe Se 631 | Jacques Cartier island............ 364 
White islet. : os. ciceeshoettae 2D, || ae COVE Ro iors 2 =) ee ee 399 
MnsidewoCk. acoso 5.02 seit 136 | Jamesicove.....-'5. 2.2. sseeeeee 597 
hispector rock .o. 215s 20 pees 525 | —— island, bay of Exploits....... 491 
ireland} bayer ee oe Ms astathey 376 | ————S8t. John bay............ 347 
mislaniOs (ipl ct ate Net wreck we 243 °| —— polntizs. 4.2.42 26 eee 116 
POCIBE RSS ees 2h 6 es tye op 38 523 | Jarvisaslands ......2: .. 33-4 geese 131 
Irelands Eye harbor, island, point; Jasperasiand...- 2.22222 5.53eeeeee 664 
ice; communication.........-.. 569,570 | Jean de Gaunt island, harbor.....- 131 
LUSTEL Os ee ee eee aed, 7 386 | Jeanne point, channel.......... 384, 385 
eee I Sbd een see ole Med. elt 385, | \Jeaustiends....-.... se. Jw sled ela 
=—town, Humber arm... 2.9242 . 307 | =—— polpte.....+:..:- .s2eeeaeee 164 
+ Sound vislnd.2. pitas soe | TOGKES Se i... aco 141 
Iron island, Long island ......-... 138, | Jeiirey cove... ...-):. 2-22 114 
—— —— Little Mortier bay; light. 162 | Jehenne bank..................... 349 
DOM Ge. goss etek 440 || == pointer: .... .... Sie eee 383 
ftornbound islands. 2. 222). /s% .22 2: 731,|| => SHORE Re: 2. <0. 22 379 
itransksl mommies eee eee 214 |) Jem bane bay =: -.-. 25.65 5-e 741 
—rock..... SORE a Ce ares 138 | Jenkins cove..... Re 508 
USB Ca avers we | Cot Cy CUE a 100°'|, Jennings! cove.-... 2.5.02 nose eee 309 
iS AN «peste. Ae ah yeah 189) {| Wernylsmose:...- 2.52.44 eeeeee eee 280 
Re OU Goin SA eee «de antl EE 99 | Jerseyers=-2-.-.... 5-225. 5eeeeee 164 
ook a wles epee iid 105,136 | == hanks.......... 2 ee 683 
feabelasiind.’. s2eats vetoes jo} 378 | Jerseyman bank.......-.-..-¢-228 186 
WEAGONG Ls ceil iolreel deena hs 547 harbor and head! ....-2.2 258 194 
Island cove, cape St. Michael..... 668 wand): ......).2- 6 149 
= head, Placentia bay..... 108:)) Spee 5. 22-2 22 ee 140 
—— —— Trinity bay; rocks...... 585 1] WiGEtSICOVEs +. = 5: Semae eee eee 219 
———sanbormneadeeeseee e sees 519 | Jigger island, Five islands......... 723 
— Rock cove, rock.............. 442 | —— tickle, Webeck harbor... 729 
Islands, bay of; communication... 299 | Jigging cove, Rushoon head....... 151 
Eslejof Valen, harborssoje0;. -. 22. 125 | ——— Sams head= = 5522-2 eeeee 148 
LEMS) 0) 5 Ce eet ee. eae Se 632 | Jim Day islands... ....4...¢. 2. 50yee 475 
UNDG sets eek core so eatlys « L 417 | === Drake ledge... 4. eee 156 
eolatedinockca se eee eal 794: | Ob MOCkKMer.. -... cee oe 590 
Isthmus bay, Labrador E. coast; Jobs tsland, 22.0... 5. eee 496 
directions fens. fs.e 706, 708 POOMMEt Sei. <1 Acdece oe eee 651 
— St. George bay; shoals 279 | Jock-islands. ... -:...52- 225 euee 481 
== — points .icicae it, Je keene te 260, | dockeyeiecove TOCK a5. ease aa 407 
Wiieaiwarvikes. sho) oh 9) ena ee 750) || Joe Battsrarme:. .2 23 522 
—— —— point, light............. 522 
J. sTound 2.224. user eetee 141 
Jack: Elingusland=.s-2 22s see saeee 660 TOCK OS 325 Re eee eee 513 
—— Fountain cove and rock...... 187 | -—— Placentia bay —22-esce 156 
LANGA. . : = ee ele Poy 12k) |, POCS TOCKe ar, o. . 5 yh eee 563 
Jacksasland i: s 220 ever tts eee O14. | John, ‘C&pOs-4c2 cos Peees See 270 


INDEX. 781 


Page. Page 

John Baptist shoal ..........2.. 4.2 372 | Kighialmpetsscse ss. 2252 eee eed 
—— Meagher cove.............-.- 348° | (idhiicl ee see eeae ls al aa eee 754 
= EE Harbor... ...2.02-0<--- 6: ASO | KadlntstGuete ee teecs rat ea aes 
John-on-the-bay bank............ LOG) | Keio cleagalipee es ees 2 2 ae yes Use 747 
—— the bay, harbor, head, islands. 159 Killick island, shoal.............. 488 
=== thomas rock.-......-05.025.- 168 | Stone aslets 122. 4).2 sh) upset 502 
—— Walsh shoal................. 168 | Kikkertaksoak (Bigisland)........ 745 
Johns beach settlement..........-.. iq. 304 | = Hebron approseh: 2252-6... =. 749 
—— pond, shoal.................. 93 | island, rock, cape aie oe p> ema day: 
Jota rock...../..2.2222.5 703 islundans Sean fe ae Ue 
Johnsons cove and gulch. ........ 270 | —— Saglek be Ss ore a ene 750 
Jomasmock.=:..-.-.-.- Beast Sepa 161 | —— (Spracklings island).......... 744 
Jonathamelookout.....0:....-...... 110. —— to Ford harbor, directions.... 745 
WomesmElmtige ss 22.0 bl 242 | Zoar, directions. - SSL Weep wea 
Joma pencer COve.......---22-. 473 | Kikkertavak, dies acs vise amei 
Jigs! 00/5. or ra ", 122 | —— Labrador E. coast............ 742 
JGmmmerOCOO es . . . . e s 274 | King island, Green bay; rock... 430, 431 
Jude, cape, harbor, island. .-.... 154, 155 | gged i Use Peele inte 
Julies harbor. .-........-.......... 458 | ——-——- Ram islands............. 104 
immer ee oslo | 285" | potnte.6 2 ost os! Pe eee 432 
TOC 40S Seth eee REE 676 

K. . | Komeman: covelse:2. so aee)2it be 617 

Mempignoiene se Pet PLL... 73o0 |) atuietto kee Saye se eee 734 
Reminalkonvilest: fo... oben 2. Le) 759 | Kangnitaksoak! c/s. 7ntees one) aed 


Venue aes teen eles: tubs 757 Kanes cove; leht..: . 22sec See ioo9 


1 $id 120) 2 oh rr a 591 | arbor, brook, head......... 225 
Kemealasioryik -)..095. 2.62.5 2.5 - 750) |) S=> header teas. cach co. 2 ee 587 
Kangerthialuksoak river........-- 360) Kap pimieovietee, nee ee ee 526 
Katauyak _ coo ee ee TAQ P| hap pins sod ese ee eee eee 194 
LiGGiln@: [Rl Oo) a 556 | Kirpon harbor, beacons, direc- 
Keyakomnttike 2c 00.202 oe. (Be LIOMBss.5. 20 TEE READ 365, 366 
Kearmeysteades. 2... s2sse.-5.- 140 | SLAMS SIRI hs SEL ID. 2 Sek: 365 
Ioan Glare 553 | Kite and Doe hills.............--- 106 
Mieeiomelamdee. Se ee be 690 | OVER Let: es aoe ORE 490 
Keels cove, village, ice, communi- | eaarrerroekis 22) J. senha) bee of tno R8 
GAuOMeM aes ae 2 By 558559 | Kanebislanid aa. 2 sean. clei sal 498 
Kethyihead Gaver. 2:.2..025..2% AA Gu ebanO bb APUNe lover ce cencer oe. =. Ry OTe 
Sommer te Oe DEL HO9n |) Koksoaleriver so co. 522 cnied lo. 36 
Kelp Cove pomtces. 22.2 =.2f 4.62 S0 fale Rue jautakes ee cebu coe se 8GL4 sks 744 
ROCKMERA ERT Os AEN Li Fy Gillan ebenall keep sete oe ces 2s eho dG 
Meloy nein stnee eee 22, 210) | Kyer cove, point..-...- 22.8... 2. 623 
= SUMO eee as et el sce be 156 | 
Kennedy tslande ose. .224 200... - 678 | L. 
Rentipoinie erent a SS Relies ale meerhe yaad LON Na er 182 
Keogh islamde se Smee ees 475 | —— Fontaine point............... 334 
Keppel harbor, directions......... 287) ee) Haye bamleics.\.j..2.40.. eee 81 
Inlanae Lali cee LENE! 335 | —— Hune bay and cape....-...- 217 
Kerley harbonwmeses nine ne enane: = RG [| ———  davthd Noseee eee sols ad. 218 
Rettlenslam dire eee toe isn === Manche... 5225.24.22 Seer 108 
=——_hottomerocks < are a aL Gi lead ates eee 109 
Kil ar Cove aaa se TAL Meh A0 0M = Plant aisimikehaese eee eee WS 
TOOL oes ie 2 eee RS iA Plante: bar bolas eee 245 


Kiddle*covers soos 252 pee 510 | —— Poile bay and harbor...... 248, 244 


782 INDEX. 
Page. Tage, 
Thao Cie arbobe ss su... Lc . J. eee 422. | Tain head. .........>.- eee 167 
=—— Vache tock: 5.ds.2 0 i.7-28-8° 173 islands... ... :4/... toe eee 167 
Rabrador, climate... .....-5.402-- 43 | Laurence/rock. .....-.. .2233a eee 162 
SS aT GER a ee Me 8 625.63) | Gawler bay, rock. 7.22262 0eeseeeee 616 
—— physical features, geology, Lawrence harbor, head.......-..- 484 
population, rivers.......--- 35 | Lawrencetown......-...352 Saeeee 490 
coast. CAlliton === ees eee 730 || Mazy bank... ......2- 9.2 668 . 
—- — fog Ae SS eA 48 | ——— pomit, rocks, bank: 22 = 2eeee 653 
oe tidal streams _fo.2) 55- | Be Bletan rock... .--2.. 174 
Meddercove..- 34.04. 9t eee 122 | —— Malouin shoal..............-- 340 
adie island =). 15-2... 2 2ee 2eke deo |) Ged island: >... .... 2228 Sa ee 690 
Bee TIMER ed eee See Oe ae 528 | Leading tickles, light. .......-..-. 463 
—=— rock, tickles; light: 222. 2: - 463,464. | League rack............/2203eeee 457 
Madey pont... 2. 5 /s8eate see eee 575 | Eeconte point, light... ...- 22 eaner 174 
Lahaye. point, light.-.........-.+-- 91 || Ledgeisland). ......... <2 32.2 702 
Baienet, pomt.......22.2.2. 2222s, | 340 Hegdret shoal. -__...-:. 2 376 
Lakeman islands, reach......---.-- 547. | bedrewrock!..... ). 5.00 448 
Lally head, cove, island........... 191) Bedyuck hills. . 2... <2... 3 134 
Bamalin. bay, lighb2./0222- 222. -. - 168 |, Heeming rock. ...:....22-2oeneeeee 718 
NAT DOL: seen sae chess oo tiee 169- || Hegendrejghoal...........<.. 25-25 380 
—— ledges, clearing marks........ 170-| Leicester point... -...-:-.2..5eeeeee 717 
road, anchorage, shoals. . .. - . 169 | Level pomtie. .. .....<* 23S 662 © 
Shag roek.... . 2.--i2s- ae a3s oe 169 | beveret islands........3.3222-- eee 519 
aan rock. caublon: es: s=seeasae 95) |) Kewis brook...2../:. . 235 eee 295 
Lampidoes passage.........----:-- 204 island, Bonavista bay.....-- zs O48 
Wamp sso Pee ee eee 750 islet, Wush bight: 2 s—sseee 451 
Wea yotctle ti. Lohse lo td te & eee 199. | —— point and rocks......:2 224 270, 271 
pepe POU. cos satic 22 2 oa = Se en 38% | ==—woek? .. ...). ac: does 722 
Lance cove, Fishing Ship harbor.. 666 | Lewisport harbor, village.......-. 495 
—— —— Newfoundland, 8. coast. 215 | Light-lists...............--.--.-- 8 
—— —— Oderin island.......... 154 | Lighthouse island - /*..2.. 72522328 520 
—— —— rock, Smith sound.....- Ovil.,.|| peewee cs 2. See =) eee 11 
—— —— Trinity bay.......-..-.. 088, | Thity island............. 2:5 648 
== point, rock... ...........-.--2</ 90,94 | Bunton rock: ........,.cs2226 see 549 
Mamdiyr Dame. 2. aes sap 183 | Lions den, Chandler reach........ 597 
MBeR OOK OI beer. =. 2-22 ee ee 522) |p ee point ...... =o eee 522 
ee TOCK Sa een a ysis fe cine a tee p25") = ihead hock. 2 2: saa ans 624 
Raneladedslamdin .......22/,. 284028 18h. |digitle-arm; Hare bay...--2--.coseee 378 
Langue de Cerf cove and point... 187 | —— Bald head. -.........2425-0e8 136 
MaMiines COVE seer its. sec 2 ole A67 || = Barachois brook. : ..22-sseneue pa 
Beinse & Klammes. 3/20 62). 22 198 | —— Barasway bay..-........-.--- 234 
ansey DankiCover as ---.= 2% 242 167. |, === |bay: de)’ Hau. ./. 22a 188 
Tard ypoint. 3 ereeeeeroeen: fo 391 ; —— Great bay de l’Eau..... 194 
lakce Skelligs):. 22 2a eee win 5% 673, | =thead, islefy- eee ee 437 
Barvent, cape, bill. >. asst: 562 | —— island, communication 440, 441 
Lark harbor, bay of Islands. ..-.- 302 | —— —— la Poile bay.....-...-...- 244 
— island, Belle isle. ....... 639 | —— —— Long island.....-- ages ie by ty) 
=== Mountain....-...-Liseesee es 299 | —— Mortier baiy-22 4s seer 161 
Barkinibanks: 5.85 * seeps 142 | —— —— Notre Dame bay....-.-.- 438 
a OIMbeeY sea Shae le oo ae 267 | ——- —— port Basque; shoal.... 268, 259 
Rather ledge..5s2.- 2... 5.4 eee 425 | ——_-—— Rencontre bay.......... 214 
Bain porn... 32. sc. eee re eee 389 | —— Beaver cove......--..------- 515 
Latine point, light, shoals........- 99. || += Bell island. -: 55225540 s-oeere ‘599 


ee 


INDEX. 
Page. 

Iittle Berry island .:..:....2..... 480: | Eittle Goblin bay-.:.<-.:./AU.48 
—— Black island...............-. 499 Grandfather islet. .........-- 
—— —— rock.........222......-. 691 | Grassy 1sletusew. ssa en sees 
—— Boar island...............-- 229) | Gready island 02/52. 52 27.04 
—— Bomah cove. -......-:--..-/-- 129 Green islets Sees see eee 
—=— Brehat bay... 22.22. .222.2224 3f2 | —— —— Point. shoal?) ).2...222: 
= pbmeisiand.......2......5.-. 724 | Grego islands 
brook, Green point..........- 325 | —— Gull island, Placentia bay -.. 
~ AO A EME: ga ue 23 A tye 334)|)-—— > + New, World island’ 
se MlemMarborics. 2. eek lak WEA na, Gilby Heads. 22 cane eee 
— Brunet islands. ...........-. 185 | harbor, bight, Twillingate is- 
—— Burgeo island............... 119 | lands}: 17) eh ees 
— Burin harbor, island....... 164, 165 | ——- —— deep, head, shoals:...... 
— Burke island........-... ERE 108 ane Great Gallows harbor... . 
= bumt bay.-.......25.2.22.2: 493 | ——- —— head, Placentia bay..... 
=== |S ee a 383 | —— —— —— &t. Pierre island... 
—— Butler island................ 135 | —— islam db = 4. Si5 ee lesa ations 
—— By8MeCOve.....22.5..2..-... She islands, Labrador, E. 
— Canada harbor............... 396 GOasbe: + ou22 eS 
—— Caribou island, ledge......... yg) | Labrador, E. coast; tides. 
== (CR £11) SA 401 | —— —— Long island..........-. 
— Catalina harbor............... 563 | —— —— Pilley island........... 
—— Chance cove................. D624) -7- > kacenimal bay te... 
— -—— harbor, New World —— —— Random island......... 
SNE IO\G bs fer eee 501 |; —— Sacredsbayes-e 5 4-eeee 
—— —— —— Sweet bay...-..... 5a | = Salmonier river... ...-- 
OMS Atm - lll... 14s |——- Flame island’: osu. -2 1 ape 
— Codroy river................. 267 | —— Heartsease harbor........... 
— Colinet island. ............. 92 | —— Holton anchorage ..........-. 
—— Colombier islet, God bay... .. OT eee REO 2.73). 0 eee 
——_ —— —— ®t. Pierre'island:.: 172° | —— Hooping harbor..-.........- 
== (OLSEN 10 10 403) = Indian coves. joa see eee 
Sarma ee HT IM 189 | island, Connaigre bay...-...- 
women bIPhts . . 2.402.200 2. 547 |) —— Sacred aslands. 22 435. 
—— Copper SL AE ey el 663 isleyor: Valens 255 ted Sie 
> Wonmorandier island... 2... 380 | = TS tise te cicragot Sobek, See en 
Crowalhtendey cn 2s ol. 202 | —— Islets harbor..--........-.-.- 
—— Culler bay::... 2... EES | 207 | —— Kirpon harbor.....-..-....-.- 
= NEinate. ih re 185 | ——la Poile inlet..............-.- 
moa caten sind ighige oils. 2. 5 7-p |e GTN 9010) he a ree 
—~ Wevwilstislands. (0.5.6... 194 | —— Lobster harbor............... 
——— Duck island, Dominorun... 698 | —— Madame island.............. 
SSS NI OUNCE ee 632 | —— Merasheen harbor....--..--.- 
an ao head; Miquelon.island = 2.220022. 22. 
Pociersnenlee 22 68syl——== Mon. Jambe... 02... . 2.1 ee 
—— Dunier island..............- Hay ||, === Wiaialetoyelea ee epee Soe eos 
=— Hntry island’ wa iree.) 722 | —— Mortier bay.............-....- 
Fogo islands, current. ..... 5238524 = — Monquitovcowe.2-2-. osm 
—— Fox island, reef.............. Sih —— Nieedileshsin Satie ie ae ee ee 
Birtarsicovyeret ms seca 8 Owe Nort hy han onl ene eee 
—— Gallows harbor............. Lee —— Northiwestianiatineadi =e oer 
a ama apy fT Spe Es Ph PA = ——— Pancakesro Chee asses aaa 
Goataslandse..).. essen aaee 127 | —— Paradise harbor......-....-- 


784 INDEX. 
Page. Page. 
lnittle passtige 3c) 42.6 tek aed 198, | Eoeker flat island... s5.eeeeee 547 
Peter pomits. 2 users ews heir 489°| (Loeksport.......-.-...¢-2¢- eee 461 
—— Pigeon island...........-.-..- 413 | Loeksirock....\....-: 2.2: 680 
— Pinchgut, tides.......-...-... NOG s| sodeeribhers = 5. 2 . 22s eee eee 630 
— Pinnacle island.............. 105..| Lesy cove. ........ s.2405Sen eee 601 
—— Placentia harbor............- 100 | Long cove, Random island....... 572 
—— —— peninsula............... 9) sound... (2920s 576 
Plate islet. ip ses oa. Aging ks 1657) Trinity bay.s-<ce-eseeee 583 
SEO FRET oe ee ee 299 | —— harbor, Fortune bay......-- 189 
———Pumbley CVG... =< Jacke st 411 | ———— Placentia bay; ice... 100,102 
— Rond Mount point...--..-.---- 361 | ——-—— St. Lewis sound........ 622 
— Rencontre island and rocks.. 230 | ——-—— Smith sound............ o71 
TAVET LOCKS ye ell Keats =e 219,220 | —— —— head.................. 102 
—— — Despair bay.........-..- 201, | === Harry rock... .....t.93e eee 592 
— —— Newfoundland, S. coast; | Long Island bank. ....-:.<.22= ee 143 
(0 Cs ee ee a 219 | ———— bay of Exploits... 222ee 481 
— Saddleback islet. .... ee ae 156 | —— ——— Belle bay... 192 
Sapa EEA hy gale 0101 08 Aiea Sea tea 118 | —— —— Curlew har fier apprteeel 707 
Beshaclands:/: 2 sce eee So 138,| === Hare bay. . =.-c aaa 377 
— Seldom-come-by harbor. . - .- 527 | —— —— Hermitage bay......... 198 
—— Shellbird bight, island...... 439 | ——-—— Independent island..... 712 
— shoal, Merasheen island...... 136 | ———— New bay; rocks......... 467 
— St. Pierre island... .. 172,174 | ——-—— Notre Dame bay; tickle. 451 
= snow bill. gat eat sell oc 734 | ——-—— Placentia bay, NE. part. 138 
— Southern harbor............ 109 | NW. side; light 143 
— Spear harbor. .............. 660, POM. 482. jae 140 
— St. Julien harbor, point...... 384 | —— —— Random head......-.. 577 
—— St. Lawrence harbor......... 165).| == rock, Hermitage bay.... 199 
—— St. Modeste islands......... 648 | ———— St.-Michael bay.....-... 668 
—— §t. Pierre islet. ..........-.- 173 | —— Sealiislands 2.22 siec eee 686 

= Soa ha eine 453 | islands, Bonavista bay; 

Troytown harbor........-..- 456 tickle... .-io.2 cee 555, 556 
—— Tumble-down Dick island..... 713 | —— Pogo islands. */s25-223eee 523 
— Verdon island............-... 381 | HED Ores 2. -5:.: 2 eee 296 
—— Ward harbor.......-:...... 440 | —— point bank...............5.. 673 
— Woody island.......-...... 115 | —— —— bay of Islands.......... 309 
—— Wolf island........ Bettssts oie 701 Exploits'.2--ce 497 
Waivientedges gees hac ai a he Py es 539 | ———— cape la Hune....-....-.-- 217 
Liverpool brook, cove.......--..- 312 | —— la Hune bay; shoal. .... 218 
Lizzy point....... Be ae Sc wl ahs 91 | ———— Labrador, 8. coast...... 653 
Lobster cove, head, light, rock.... 324 | ——-—— Loon bay............... 500 
fishery, Newfoundland....... 34 | ———— Newfoundland, W.coast. 286 
harbor, New World island... 511 | 22 26S Red island. ace eee 137 
——_ —— White bay.............- 415 | —— —— Rocky cove......-.-..-- 127 
iis Dhl ae epee te 20, coon 487 | 136 
ISI OG | fof- 2, <o Gye ae Se eet 515 | ——-—— Twillingate islands. .... 507 
point, shoals - .\..1+,voewesees! 379 reach, Grandy island......-- 226 
Local magnetic disturbance. .-...- (fie — Morris channel........ Lilog GOD 
664 rock Hornet islandaepeeeeses 480 
—_ —— Newfoundland, NW. —— —— Pinnacle island....... Be 1555 
GOASHi os neem SDL | rocks: Three armsa. 42 =-eeere 436 
ee Red ays ae enema tickle, Cobbs arm:-2:s--4eae 514 
hockiharboree acer: de hs B59 | ORI 2a ee 444 
Locker bay, reach, rock.......- 543, 544 | Longstretch point........:.-.----- 710 


INDEX. 785 
Page. Page. 
Dh 20-7 ee eres 540) Macks island): 2) 222) oscar 441 
Teele COCKS. .5.-- 0... -2-~ 4-1 => 702) Macy tickle. jislamd: 251.2) oe 674, 675 
Heousbay, harbor-......---------- 500: | bad alo Mh sy ew Yes Bi Cs oe chee 199 
Lopsided island........-..-.------ 744 | —— Moll head, rocks. ..........- 477 
Lord and Lady island........---.-- 1 A rock, Fling islands... ... 684 
ooo Dili. | Soe Beee ere eee eoete 674 | ——-—— —— Jack Fling islands.. 660 
Meeetetx Pomt.-..-.26<- m=. 2-5 336 | ——-—— —— New World island.. 503 
Lol 20h 523 | ——-—— —— Picarre harbor...... 199 
jeouis Lemaire shoal........--...-- 383 | ——-—— —— Red bay.......--- 646 
Loup, bay de; point, rock.-...-.-- 225 | —————— St. Michael bay... 670 
i 88 ee ee eee ee Go Ge Snooks arm...-...- 426 
Louse bay...-....- 753 | —— —— —— Stunk island.....-- 704 
[OGRE cj a ee ee err 232 | ————- —— Styles harbor.....-. 677 
= niche eee ee G9 | == shoal, Hamilton inlet... 715 
Lawe CON72 eee eee een 558 point, rocks.: =... 4b... beeeeee 595 
Mameisiand bay-3.......----=2- 4 - 750 rock, Fermeuse harbor... ..-- 617 
— [COLE ANS) ee ee SA || Mantul head 2 5: 4242 ee 424 
59. Le ere 362 | ———— Petty harbor........-... 611 
—— point, Newfoundland, E.coast 565 | Madame island. ..........-....-- * 382 
— eee eee Zour pMaddOxicOVGs 2.0 52.52 noe ase eee 611 
—— Rencontre islands. ....- 190 | Madeleine shoal...............--- 368 
Beebe tock ...../+.----s<4-s- 507 | Magotty cove, Random sound..... 575 
LOG 0c ee er 563 — Sound island........... 114 
Homer ball, rock. ...+.--.2-<s-4-- ADT ——— GING fais iaicica 2 a 0's 2s a ee ne 94 
cove, St. George bay..-....-- 23 ROCKS. 2. wi! . 5 Seyler 612 
— Wihahedbayi dose Ls iays= = AG | eMahiamy COVE... 230-20. 2ef) ae 123 
— Crabb brook, bank........... 313 | Maiden arm and point.........-. 379 
Frenchman head, light..... 303, 304 SANG fas oo tk SA 590 
—— (Aline a ee nee 519: || —-— point, islet... -. 2.4... ape 567 
—— lnprloor- cde bao eee e eee mee ae Aiea Nain TOO Kes a= 2.2 oases 409 
—— head, Shallow bay.....--...- Soe CAPers eas oe eee ees 664 
—— —— Twillingate island. ..... Ge te MAND ONs:.../2..5 25a es So ohoeipe 598 
Song oe ee 431 leds ht ie eee ee 77 
Se MANCe COVE. - 2. .--s-.-558 571 | —— Pools island..-.-........-.--- 539 
=== i 187 tickle, Camp islands......... 633 

a= JAS TOE || New World isiand; island, 
=== igh. he oe 214 directions: 4 -e-044-- 510, 511 
Senco: i ee 490s | eMaimyard point. . <4 24-42: 152 
—— Shoal harbor;communication. 575 | Major point..............--.---. 184,421 
—— —— point. -....----....-+-- OA TOC Key cye. 2 aos are = eS ciclo cpa 249 
=== | OIINGON Ee oeo eee eee eee 442 | Makovik mission station.........-. 731 
Lowland rock............-..---- 512 | Mal bay, Belle bay........---.-+- 190 
Lowroom point BESO UE cia retail bia ol —— St) Marys bay.- 2-2-4 92 
Lucies point..--.--------+---+++ 415 Mal di oies vay; s<\-\-2).5. 1 4 ene 348 
MRSS SS oe iene eh Malone rock 6 0.c's .)5 isa eee 546 
i sane A em WN i | Maloney ledge se te es. 78 

Pshbithitweorkseceeeet. = 5.0.2). f 451 : 

Memchaciid een eeuLs |). 699 Malouim: shal, le. sss 8 2 hese 340 
1-04 Enesco a! ee yo mretse ye ai ease 238 
M. Man-of-War cove and rocks.....-. 207 

MacGray island, shoals............ 378 | —— —— —— hill, Exploits Burnt 
Maciver cove, island, point....... 307 islands......- 477 
Mackerelshoalaynuesseee so: oe 121 Rameaislands. 223 


76846—09——60 


786 INDEX. 

Page. Page. 
Man-of-War point...........:.-.. 724 | Matthews bank......-2.-<:--oseee 673 
—— — — rock, Green island. 613 PSA: ee )s:s 0. ot 506 
—_—_ ——- —— —— Hamiltoninlet 717 | ——tickle....................250. 688 
—— —— —— —— Labrador, S. Maudit bank........:.....3 eae 363 
Coase.) oe 644 | Mauvais'Gars rock... ..... e29ee 362 
——__ —— —— —— Pitt Sound is- Maivelbay 2 .22s5.-4- 54 22068 ee 364 
amd eee ee 547 | May cove, head, shoal............ 204 
Pin i in ble Mayesiground ... = 2... 22.232 seeeeee 427 
tickles...... 463 | McLelan«strait......-..... J) 753 
Manak island! i085. 22 222550020! 730) | Meleod point: ... ...2. 22.22 583 
mini sland =. ane Ne UY 746 | Meadow bank, spit..............- 88 
Manche, la; anchorage, wharf... - - 108; | Mealy mountains: =..- =) -sseee= eee 710 
Manful bight, head, rock......-... 424 | Mean sea level.......-........--- 14 
—— point, Green bay.-.-.......-... 432 | Meat CoVesse5.- 2... 2a eee 266 
Mannox island! 2..-)2r22ts 2225222 730 | Mecklenburg harbor............... 662 
Manny point.: 2250..220222 7.202.» 1b0 || Medeevbayeen 2... 2015 364 
Manvers port, directions, tides.. 746, 747 | Medusaybay2-..:-... 1.2 See 747 
Manuelarmy. i202 29S Re bert 207’ ,| ——oliifs 222-0... 22 746 
Marchsbank, ‘pom... .:2..55. 2: 281, 282 | Meerpomth. 2. +... 22) eee 307 
Marechandsrock- 5.055 Mee eee 231 | Melier islet, rock, shoal......... 380, 381 
RTO Wray Wigs gee. 1k eraser Ae 22, | {Mien=hir wine sess. os ee 343 
Marenret-poinhe sa.) fa Wek heS 137 ||. Merab edge. ..25:: 3.5.2.2 440 
Margery cove and head........... 204 || Merasheentbank....:..../2.388os0 141 
SRN C Se ees tee eae 536 |) ==harbor. 5) 2.5.2.2 fees eee 136 
Margesson island......:.........-- 447 | island os .0'".. 20.0534. 4 130 
Marouerite bay. ..-:222.0.252 2.52. 374 | Mercer cove, head, light.......... 184 
Seana bay, -reeles. 06. lke Se 364 USAT eijn cece = cee Oe 
(CON OIEARE OGRE yes Bo ac eee 198 | POIMtANnG COVE 2-24.55 s eee 227 
Mankar Capers: o> sane ntan erate a 201) "Merchanticovies.---52.25242o6 .--3 ss 
TSANG Ses 4 eee Se eae tS 694 | island, Kirpon island; beacon. 365 
TocksHshoaleyan ats.) Maker 209 | ——-—— Ram islands............. 103 
Marke islamdencosc.ssecctetcn eee 721 | Merchantman harbor......-...... 663 
Mane voTOCKAY so.'s-..2022 sees 623 || Merlinepoimt.: 2. 22+. 2 ssagaqeneee 709 
Mamrneishoalet isin. 22. coe cee 172 || —==—reekw sooo 5022: .5. 2 ee 604 
Marnham port, island..........-.. 621 | Merrifield mountain.............. 741 
Marrone meres oe science scene 99.) Merny ihanborss-- 5.25322 -e see ee 130 
Marsiralllslamde see). -cet ale-siere US3)s| PMlesserviys Covina. 2825 vase eee 276, 280 
Marten Tock, polit: 2224.0 .it/e. 392 | Meteorological tables..........-.. 49, 50 
Marticot island, cove, back cove.. 142 | Mewstome.-..-..--.........1.222- 362 
PET TI AMC Oe eee te ae 625 | Micmarislete 3... 02. 02s cee ener 360 
IMornisseyardcke@eere erase. 112 | Midchannelrock, Fichotchannel.. 382 
—— point, bank off............- 322,325 | ——-—— off cape Porcupine...... 713 
—— Shepherd islands............. 548 |! ewes) 236 
Martinique bay=s-c-ssssseeee eee 389 | TOC KER en 5-2-5 ee 628 
Mary Ans COVE!) Poh a eee ee 270 | Middle arm, bay of Islands; point.. 309 
harbor; tides: > jo. eae s 624 | ——-—— Green bay; rock...... 431, 432 
Mary bOWEL os. tose. oo hoe Maree 161 | ——-—— of Bloody bay...-.....- 549 
Massacre islamdisect sc. ccisee seco 739 | ———— Three arms; directions.. 436 
— islet, rock, Fichot islands.... 381 | ——- —— White bay; rock...-....- 414 
—— —— St. Pierre island........ 7A: |p hal eno 212s 5 Se ee ea 371 
Miastershead evar tess see eels HSI), | oT ae es eee ees 423 

Matthew Lane island............. 479 | ——brook, Newfoundland, 8S 
me POCK es kia asaierctseianate tials esis 139 Coast Lee.) SNe at ee 236 


INDEX. 787 
Page. Page. 
Middle brook, St. George bay..... 274 | Miquelon rocks..................- 183 
CIMT eet aie ON i ars ee CO TAS TOD Ue ny ce carh ca are cnet eee 183 
MO OLOOK. (2223-24-64 .2.- SL2'| Miranda cove.../...2.2.-22-c22s50 299 
—— Dockislands................. 1205 || Miisaineyb anikwe ase e es ere 80 
PEEP UID: DAY. -ac.c0cee ce ens 205)| Mistaken eowe: sees .o 4: ee nee 357 
—— ground, Black island-........ 510 POMS haces Soe ee ete eee 86, 696 
—— —— Little Harbor deep..... 400 | Mizen hill........................ 586 
—— —— North Black rock. ..... 6921) Moany Cove... sie eons ee eee 105 
—— —— Shoe cove.............. AD5 | Mobile bay... ose cse eee eee 613 
—— head, St. Lawrence harbors. 166 | Mohawk point.................... 409 
—— (Crooked) island. .....--.... 209" | Moine, bay le; rock. 2222) sess 249 
island, Fishing Ship harbor.. 665 | Mokkovik bay, cape..............- 730 
—— dike eile Soe eae aac Hijo. | Wolasses point... 22k sane Wali 
— item islamds.2 020. .= 22. Gis \eMole-cove; tides:J5..2) 4. eee 546 
—— —— White Bear islands. .... (2SmeMolilepointeess. ste eee eee 98 
—— islands, Notre Dame bay..... 453 rock, leading mark. 2.02. =546 99 
== [GEC ee ee Hola ViolinveAmimuCOWesss a= -e se eee 295 
———— 12 0) noe) <a G20, Monday bank... 22.2.2. 055 anges 624 
=== [OCS G46 A er MyaieMonk islet, tock..2 20. 302 eae 381 
——— ——— Cabot islands..........- Dovel vonikey iil. |. 9 ese ee 730 
—— —— Harrys ground......... 561 | —— rock, bay of Islands......._.. 299 
—— —— Little Denier island..... 503 | —— —— Fogo head.............. 520 
—— rocks, Offer Gooseberry island. 546 | Monkeys Lookout................. 487 
—— —— St. Lewis sound........ O2Aal a Moniksioround =... seh - oe eee 425 
=== SNES See ee ee 631 | Montaignac rock..............--.- 338 
== ICE see DO OA EMOOrespOMNbes .2. 55.02 2c) eee eee 646 
MadsumimienTOCK...-..o2-<j.0.-+.- Bao AMOOres COVES | 2.5... . 2. 2. cre ee 472 
Wit eyRTOCK on cis. 022s lea. ens 5 a40 | Moorey.cove.2. 0... 42. -usae sae 445 
Peunbebislamd 2 os okt es ZAon|Mootham@emrect. 425. 2224 2 514 
Milaniaeni pomt--.. ..-2...--: 360, 361 | Mooring cove, Cull island.......... 464 
s=== 10S ee 391 Sunday Cove island..... 443 
WNLE) TELLS 2 Sa 517 iCsl Ly 00 Ct aetna Pie 583 
=== EI AE Eee 2il7 >) \shora bres, SHOaIS. ... 2. ve cca se 101 
rocks, bataaway bay........ 230 | Morgan arm.-:.-:...-.-..-.....-.. 212 
—— —— Sopsarm.............. 407 PRE RIACLS © hie x ye ch tes « areten oP. 230 
WierrCOveree er see 444 | ——-—— Lamalin road............ 169 
Minlcove, New bay ....-.--....... © 467 3) (102s peste hoe i eee 632 
—— —— Seal bay................ 460 Heworisonmsiands: 22079... 2ss0 cou 728 
]OGVAMH HE’ CU che, a ke a A ASS || WilOmae None so osaeser ooadenoeae 365 
Mille harbor capes... ....---.-.- iss) Morrisichannek:: 225 251..262 255 -.4 po 
iy Lope 305) 28 07 Pe 41] ISAT sre mer oo dn! arene 550 
TOON OIL ey SIN ct a 151 TOC Kore alee pcr tacts eet ae 565 
LOC Kramageeiptenet sete 68 ek 165 | Morte harbor, islands........ Bete | (ADs) 
Mai ners arate wee oe es inlay uloriverbay.s. 3225 2G. le sate eos 160 
IMBLBIOTT CaVer ete Syn. sss... =. 387 ereek rock, bank: 54. 7.0-ese5 162 
Milners tickle, Chateau bay.-..-.. Gs Mim vlonvim ers oa lis! 20) haere 731 
aaa Grandyesoundigt e225... 254 | Morton harbor, head, rocks, direc- 
Rivtorditanrmiss 2s) yeaa 491, 492 tions; settlement. 22222... 2 22a, 503 
Wich ieGad=ss. epee es byw NLOTUE Sl te actsalayeertene 5 see 335 
is bey SUL mpeg Bot Moses pOmnt 1 NA EO eee en 510 
Miinovnaclcss jouh meng iite «-: 163 | Mosquito cove, point Conception 
Mines ibightwislets/s.chenls ooo. |. 420 | oF: i Meee yes He 591 
NiO ti polite ara saa eey eon: 391 | ——- ——, Labrador, E. coast..... 661 


788 INDEX. P 
Page. Page. 
Mosquito (Cobbett) harbor......-- 220 | Mussel rock, St. Marys bay..-.-.-..- 94 
harbor, island, Back cove.... 210 | ——- —— Trinity harbor..-....... 566 
S256 bint baie al ae See een 209 | Mustard Gull islands.............. 587 
Mother Hicks cove.-..<.----<-,- .-- 92 |, Mustering point......-.---2.-eeeee 698 
Sao ETC ONE Sao Shee ae esos 495 | Mutton bay, cape. -....--—-aeeeee 87 
Motion bay, head, rocks.........- 61). | ———asland . .....- << «2a eee 353 
ASLAN Ce yae se sce = bereiece eee 669 
— elite: -< Soee aaa ee 573 | 
Woulesistand 52.5450 eon eas 1/3*|Naattye Guk......-... .9¢-cee 748 
Mountaineer rock. 5)... 6.2 4-¢6--65 739 | Nachvak bay; Hudson Bay Co. post, 
Mouse island, Burnt island...-...- 146 directions: tides... +.-s2ssee 751, 752 
— Caribou channel.....-.. 627 | Name peacons.-......-<--.eseeeee 743 
—— —— Cowpath. ............. 548 coast N. of; caution.........-. 746 
— —— Gallows harbor island... 148 | —— to Ford harbor, directions.... 744 
—— —— Vicuna island.....--.-... 112) Nakedimanie =. <<< :<<-:2- --eeeeeee 432 
islet, bay of Exploits. ..-.-..-- 485 | ———— point. .-.-..--....-------- 752 
Se BOM GS 2 sere etic whe = net ace oem 427 | —— LOCK: :..-.--: .-32 eee 243 
rock, Gastries bay....-.-.--- 598 | Naksarektok, current.............. 751 
— island; Friday bay- . --- 506 | Nameless cove, directions. ....-- -. 9306 
—— ——— Random Head harbor... 5/3 | Nan poimt-~4.........----.2sueeee 119 
Vero Eh ic a he eee 275 | Naney island 23. \. ......<.-- 5. eee 684 
LENG Fo ACE ge ae 710 | Nanny Hole rock, head..........- 478 
Sh 010) ae eee ae eae 223) || p= POC Ke aie % - 2 nicl alo a a 521 
— hole, Flat Bay brook......... 275.) Nenuaktoleo. 2... 22.3. aoe 734 
—— —— Newfoundland, S. coast. 211 | Nanuktok, cape Harrigan........ 738 
—— —— Pilley island........... 450 | —— (White Bear cape)....-.-..-.- 702 
— —— Sound island........... 114 | Nanuktut (White Bear island).... 748 
—— —— hay....-...------..------ 23/1) Napakataictalik ..........: eee 737 
—— —— brook............------- 488°) (Nepataliike.....o.. =. 2. 2b eee 737 
—— —— point, bay of Exploits... 483 | Narrow point..............------- 739 
—— —— —— Connoire bay...... 237 | Narrows, The; Clode sound. ...--.- 557 
—— —— —— Tizard harbor..... 504 | —— Goose arm. «=... eee 310 
Mugford tickle, cape, ice. ..-.--- 748, 749 —— Picarre harbor.........- 199 
NITHIGH a CeibaVece aoe co see eee 258 hl PN aUMMS CONCH <,< 22 <2) a eee 410 
Minlims CO Weesae ar cae <aysiceiee a-aee 703 | Nats Discovery point.-...---..-- 716 
[cull 3529 ese eee aera a 198 | Nanyaksigaluk........2-. 5.9 734 
Minlousehonl tens ot. soe ces ae 385) Nanyaktilcluk.. ... 2222 one 733 
Min) OKs BOCK see iets mre 5 arses oe 386s Nealtisletes. ts 2.2: 5.555 ee eee 503 
LU GIR b00G eae sen Seen 713 | Neekjot Isaac... ......-..22hen eee 101 
Murphy rock, Catalina harbor..... 563 | Neddick, cape....-.-..--------.-- 614 
— —— Great Laun harbor......- 167 | Neddy harbor... - 2): 2 ssc eee 320 
MRD lieV GOV Gon er esse to iyo -e 319 | Needlesicove; rocks: ----- sess eeere 372 
Murray Narb0e 0s o.4-6 eho n ces asi: 661 | JNegromsland........... -..5-seeeeee 745 
pomt, Tock 220. hee aie 32 '- 673 || Neige bay. -----------<---2 pace 359 
Muspraye land 22-5 steep e tects 700 || Nellpastanmd 60... 25 5220 648 
Mirgket Islet... sens = 5 epee ein x 678 || NesttGeiee en... . 3. oe eee 96 
BIEL SC fete cons «ee 230 || Neti@oweibead.-.. 222) oo eseneee 497 
Minseel amis Us Sooo cota tear 544 | ——aititie:-.2.....-- ce oeeeeeee 400 
——— EG ISAT. ooo» = inie is 6 citieiepegags AGT || Fee Ktee a)... =. eee eee 113 
— TOCKS es case tts ec ee AQG | -——=TOCKS ee. oad hoe eee 126 
eo NAT DOP Se sreccrare ieee eee 138,141 | Neverfatlshoal... .- 2.2520. eee 232 
ISLATIG eee oe Cee ee ete a eee 495 | New bay, communication. ....... 466 
—— Pond point... .-.. 0: s2 co. <2 = 92 | ——-——head and rocks ......... 473 


INDEX. 789 

Page. Page. 

New Bonaventure harbor, village, No-man-land shoal...........-..-- 686 
1GOe Saseose cee See eee 568: MansiToCk. - a... << eee 234 

—— Férolle cove, peninsula. ..... 349 | Noble head, cove, ledge.........- 429 
— harbor, Bonavista bay.......-. ee NOG ia lionel ese ie aes eee 742 
—— —— Fortune bay....-....... WSS? Noddy Inarbors 22 3.71 <falens) iets 364 
— —— head; Ragged islands... 132 | Noggin island, cove, hill.......... 529 
— island, Newfoundland, INGUIN (CARE eee aoe eee oe cee 175 
SC ORAG IES 2.7 Ships hos PA a ONO UC De ct see Sante Sts maken eee 145 

—— —— Labrador, E. coast... .. OVA Wee ROA Ss era oe Alea ets hey rm etr= 144 
—— —— Loon bay...........-.-..-- HOOMMINGOG kes Tine aie eae seas Ree a ier 220 
—— —— Trinity bay..-.......... 584 | Norman, cape, light...........-. 358, 359 
—— Perlican, tides. .....--.----.- Sieh ———— MOA oo toca ta ee atisfereicinecieiqsc 235 
—— town, Sound island.......... WA = POCB ace Ae ore ta be mia eye ayant 715 
World island....:-........--.- 001 rock, leading mark. .....-..- 359 
INewelltisland..........--+---- Deity) A MONELS: AIM ie oie cc oe sis Shere oii nare ate 490 
Newfoundland, agriculture, his- — cove and point........-...- 319, 321 
tory, geology, fauna, popula- LOCK yiate Seincls, a ose mas ei Kays 538 

tion, minerals, physical fea- Northam, Cove: .,..... satiety 311 

tures, lakes, rivers, coal | ———— point. .......-.-....--- 311 
MELE CS cans fos Sora a osnn's = 27-31 | —— bay, Belle bay..-.......-..--- 19% 
Peet OL. 2... 2. -52-5-s-n += 82 | ——-—— Despair bay.......-...-- 205 
— hanks off, fish..............- 82 | ———— Griguet harbor. ....-.... 369 
=== Ginn eRe eee 42 | ———— head.................--- 206 
os TE 46 | —— —— la Poile bay...........-. 244 
2, ee ee ihe (RS Sa STi Mb Noa a lor 576 
=== 19), GODS eee Sf ee eee gs oe a 423, 437 
a tidal streams......- 54. | —— Bird sland: 22... 2 -ce ee 562 
—— passage S. of...............-- a nn (-) (2) i re 572 
——S. coast, caution.........-.-- 3), Blacks tock: =. -<s<esmeee=ctgeee 692 
—_— —— (CUNTCM Greece's <5 2.07. D2.) ——— Brentisland - 2.2 ncneciacss ee 377 
—— —— —— iCé......-..-------- O£ || —— Broad. €0ve- ~~~ = <= ~<o cee 503 
— — tidal streams....... 54. Browaisletstoscces =. ase ase os 545 
—— W. Coast, currents..........-. 54 |) ——_ Cae, COVE 26 2s nctes oe ie sail 705 
SSeS GCE ees ie eR (SODA) Sse sare sai Nl eh WE le is 407 
—— —— —— tidal streams....... DON COVES a cca Sette ea .ae in iver a 418 
B= eb ee es On b= CROW MBIA Coe ees pa ot 690 
(Henmettia)island: 22225 ...: 711 | —— Flat island......-. 702 
Newman sound, caution......... DBO TOG | a OU Ge ooo tase aie acini 5) cicissla, 596 
Mracmimeroat mie... es ws se 736 | —— harbor, head; bay of Exploits 483 
ING. C0 ho a SO0i | Gullisland 4.2225. 7. 477 
JOS) ee ae 742 | ———— Little Bay island; head. 441 
Nick Power point and cove..... 215, 216 | ——- —— Placentia bay........-- lil 
Nrekersom banks. 2. 500.05 5....-.- Se ———— DOIN bes aciveineecbecestseiis's 112 
INIGkyanoneNTOCkss ee scsc82 522.0. 433°) ————_— rock 2. 22 se. ee cnn ae 112 
Nicernoumun = 7-9 seer To 632 | ——- —— St. Marys bay-.--..---.-.- 94 
Nimrod island, harbor............ 458 | —_-——'Stag island..-.........- a aes 
fiekioweee ee eee eee! 630) ——-———. Table bay......2----.s:-4< 703 
Nine-tathom bank: 27.55.55... 2... 77 | —— Head, bay of Islands......... 313 
PUNT eee eee). Ole), —— —— Brigus bay; light.....- 596 
Napper tieadise eee este icine Li 151 | ——- —— Motion bay; ledge.....-. 611 
Nappers) arbors foals s 2 eee pee. 429 | _—- —— Nachvak bay..--.......-- 752 
islands, light? 2... e sor. 428,429 | ——-—— St. Johns harbor......... 602 
INO-2 00d) tslan de a eee eee 450 | —— island, Dead islands.-.......- 672 


790 


North island, Spear harbor....--- 
—— —— Twillingate islands. .... 
—— —— White Bear islands. .... 
—— Penguin island, light........ 
= OI MONG! oc ste ee et ce we = 
= Pound Islet: .2.-cs6- fees a = 


aR UNOCKB \-o2 Gain sine socials 
—— rock, Coachman harbor. ..... 
portaw Port. -2 52.2225. 
rocks, Greens Pond island... - 


—_ stag islands... =... 24.2522 =- 


—— Three islands..............-- 
tickle, Change island......-.. 
bank, Leading tickles... 
iikamsyhe bike oseeyse co sie ecu 
aa AS A le ie See ce ee cle 
== VV CS COVES cacao Ante = clays sate 
—— Wolf island, rock.-.-.-.......-.- 
Northeast arm, Bloody bay....-.-- 
(@amadanbaiye asso 
— —— Connoire bay......-.--.-- 
— —— Harbor Breton..-........ 
—— —— la Poile bay..-..--...-..-- 
—— —— Little river.............. 
Redbislandies* sere csee2 


COVE; Aaron Days ssee nae 
— —— la Hune bay........... 
-—— Ship harbor-...-.--.-...- 
island, Fichot islands........ 
— ledge, Belle isle.............- 
See OLS Me 85) cietn ais Seco ae eee 
—— rock, Bell island............. 
—— —— Big island...........-... 
Seulpin island... 22.2... 
—— Twillingate islands... .. 
Norther point, Heart’s Content; 


— —— Newfoundland, E. coast. 
Northern arm, bay of Exploits.... 
—— —— Hare bay..........-.-- 
—— bank, St. Lewis sound.....-.- 
— head, bay of Islands.....- 5 ie 
—— Petty harbor........... 
Northward rock, Square island... . 
White Sail bank......... 


Northwest arm, Bloody bay...-... 
—— —— Canada bay..........-- 
—— —— Clatise harbor........... 


INDEX. 

Page. Page. 
660 | Northwest arm, Connoire bay..... 236 
507 | ——-—— Fishing Ship harbor.... 665 
723 | ——-—— Fortune harbor...-.....- 474 
533 | ——-—— Green bay.....-.- pceee! nee 
265 | ——-—— Hare bay,............-. 377 
539 | ——-—— Little river.-...........-- 219 
371 | —— —— New bay...-....---..--- 466 
625 | —— —— Newfoundland, S. coast. 212 
418 | ——-—— Paquet harbor.......... 420 
294 | ——- —— Random island.......-. 572 
Say | = SOUnd)! oi Skee 574 
713 | ——— Red island...........-. 225 
691 | —— bay, Griguet harbor.......... 369 
518 | —— St, Lunaire bay...seeee 371 
464"), "brooke. 52... ..22- 2 5 see 222 
739 | ———— Hermitage bay.-........ 198 
133 | ——- —— Lampidoes passage...... 204 
141 || —— "Presque harbor--- ene 128 
701 | —— head, Clatise harbor....-..... 123 
549 | ——-—— Ramea islands; light.... 223 
394 | ——-—— White Bear bay......... 224 
236 island, Placentia bay........ #21 
195 | —— Ramea islands......-...- 223 
243 | TOCK idcn (0 ses a 107 
219 | —— rocks, Wild bight..........22 466 
225 shoal, St. Julien island...... 384 
579 sunker, Lamalin bay. .-..-.-- 168 

92°| Norton cove._--.-c-- 22200 eee 549 © 
216 |. Nosworthy point...-...-..222.52=- 466 
Ziv Notch rocks .cetscn-aoneee eee 746 
101 | Notice to. mariners. ...2..--Sseene ws 
381 | Notre Dame bay, ice.....-......- 423 
a — island. shoals sees eee 375 
49: || Novailscotiaybankss:- 222. sseceeee 79 
3867 | NowlangharbOrs. see s= seo. se ee 670 
O80) Nuisletetee -).. ices: |. See 378 
465) |\Niasomak-2o.5 22222 ae 742 
507 | Nukasisutok. Tock... 5.0 eee 742, 744 

| Nullataktot bay...-...--.-------- 750 

586: lq. Numakealulke 2250.22 2 os See 738 
565 7/Numake uke 8 2 Ole ara 740 
ASS | Niutidhiless 5202.2 hoes ee 556 
377 | Nymph island and point.........-. 371 
624 
311 | O. 
659 || ‘Oar bayeosec)..0 2. Lanes eee 216 
669 | Observation point, Croc harbor... 385 
141 | Observatory islet................- 386 
223 | Occasional harbor, tides..........- 667 
549 | OchretP ib hall 25005 eee 554 
395 | ———— island................-- 482 
122.) Odd islands) 0.0.2 He oe cee 539 


— 


INDEX. 791 
Page. Page. 
Meum 222. 2k 2)» L5O)| Oliver cove, rock... 2.02). os. 05 Ss 123 
2S LT) a er deh OgNieale rocks). 52% ods) ok eee 694 
BEINGS) eee. 3 ore 152 | Onion, cape, ledge, cove, island... 362 
iemraob rocks... 36. .c0025 sas. < PAGE MOOG NOME ete cecce<e-2 2201 aee 411 
— Gooseberry island, rock.... . 545 | Open bay, Labrador, E. coast... .. 693 
1g) Ys a ees eee a 167 | —— —— Newfoundland, N. coast. 358 
LE be aes oe ae Eel 010 er ee 407 
— Red island................... ROM je Ole Ce... be ae 
rock, cape Neddick.......... GIA? hOramperbays 202. 2.255. Sos he 398 
ca Deadman bight.......-.. OGM i@repead 2 Mea ee eo La 599 
=——-—— Lamalin bay, approach.. 170 | Orleans arm.....-.......-......: ' 690 
—— —— Little Denier island.... 553 | Orthography.....................- 31 
—— —— Offer Gooseberry island... 545 | Osmond hill..................... 158 
— Seal island, Little Garia bay. 248 | ——rock........................ 156 
===> 30) i ee 2sepl\e Osmonds house |). 225s 2. 22s 2) 410 
a= 0 re 224) | Osmond ville: 32.2... 5. 6. scene nt yy SEM 
— Wadham island, light........ Hoos Ober bay, Cautions... e ssn 258 
— Wolf island................. 703 | —— cove, Canada bay...........- 392 
PEE te Se ee ial os taclces 748 | —— —— Sops island:.......24.... 406 
7. TSG Ce or 23-26 aslamG | TACK.) a5. ee ASS. ASO 
Onil Seles eee a A 451 | —— point, settlement............ 237 
cue COS A ee oe 747 | Qurson point, shoals) ....)...22.0... 336 
Old) Bantam’ rock.....-...2...2... 453), Qutarde: baie deil’.2-.. 22s Je2g222 376 
oon int Ee ee 1947) Outer Brandy rock. 522. 2 54..4)..42 553 
— Bonaventure harbor.......... YS El den Hts) 100 Lap nh 534 
mV TTCEE TIN TOCK: seer cle 270 | —— Gannet island.............-.. 705 
eemllivaTOCks fob kl ee se 436 | ——— Miquelon rock..............., 183 
== 525150 ))0-1010 2) Eee re 848.| —— Musket rock...............-. 678 
— Ferolle harbor, island; beacon, Shag roeke a8 la .tu i aan aoe 
CUGECHIONA eee Skee ai Omtsidenislands= saseeaees oe se 744. 
Beeeaman rock)... ...... i 2.!. GilOml pp OMEN MOCK: Gu ee ee es 163 
—— Harry, Harrys ground ....... Sale) |pOvertall brook 2..42220 Joes. cack 651 
a rock, cape Broyle...... GIA @men Tock (ari ee at ala, 2 136 
es eS RGAnAe eee Gili Owl ead) island's 02232. ee 681 
—_ —— Corbin harbor...... 165 P 
—— —— —— Despair bay....... 207 z 
—_— plogiieeeeeo fou ae oe) 20509) | Packs, Harbor. islanda:. ... 2.20%. 711 
coe TNO RN yee ate as OS Meaddile rogky ie 0). a 158 
Semen OCVanOCK es  -see kk sae oo0y|Mraddock shoalic.2 6. .3.2..2.eee 92 
paar EHOMESeD GI) = Me ie 2) i) | 210 Bboy Wlanly Papemocke ne c.c0e itis loans Gee 169 
Nett islam! Seiad... does. OWE GPaimeyislandiass so. ese ek oe GOD) 
aa Me reise ke ail 220m bain ten rocks =. 8.2/2 ))05 see 
= = HOE, Clap se ee S47 We akentuiksseue as oul J. is ewes 745 
SS A Le sa ee ZA eolumpa take. = 2. Jes = ic a.  e 
— islama Vaboab (Foo! 2. 714 to. Nain, directions. ....- 2222: 743 
SSRI ieen 00 tos Se a ae 589 | Pancake rock, Labrador, E.coast.. 691 
Spa oe shoal a Ue ea heii 155) | port Basque; buoy..-..- 260 
—— port aai Choix, beacons, direc- —— -——  §t. Johns harbor; buoy.. 603 
tions: Mayet Meet bY Bee O40), sale) Paquet, Harborast> wok. lo . See 
Fara RODOR Tete te ee ea gebine: lic 2 B200 |p Raradise cove.si.3 4222250. 22 aa 
SS ISOW POU Fare he ePRNs sll hi iS) ai feel ave Tg O10) ae ee ears 129 
Tiara Omar eea  MIApe I Oks 310 |og00F eh eee aPesp a ety ME TAI ek 417 
Olive anchoraces 2.95.2 Sigs) 198 TEVED. 2.000002 Cee oe ne 710 


792 INDEX 

Page. Page. 
Paradise sound 222 522 2h. see 143°) Penny rock. ...-...<2 2323085 523 
Pardy island) poimtses.0.22. S22 164) Pentiys brook: :...... 075422 eenee 459 
Parirey point, shoal e225. ..0.-. 119) | ——"Feome sos 2.2 2 eee 654 
PArIs DAVSe eee ere ae saa SCS 421 || Perch toek2::..2.:. 35 232 eee 96 
Park Harbortunls 25.0225 202.'.2 58 504 |. Perliean island 2:2. .2).-4.. 23 589 
Parkemeovessaccees sheer e seo e eee 150 | Perroquet bank: ./..-2<.52-2)35e= 653 
ADV CNS Sores aa ee SCE 361 |) Fetercove, head: -- >. 22 55-- eee 124 
Parkesoovers: 222022522503 see 309°| Peterarme. ). : 2... 1.2302 eeee 476 

MOG Ait 2 cttw in olatainnereiowsete 312") —— wharves, tides, supplies, 
IRBTSOUSICOVE] 27 etee- tect ee 499 communication....-.- 488 
Re METOUR Cs 8 tate ate eee 627 | Peterelasiands?:\s. .. 2). eae 633 
SEALS) FEV eee eed marae eas 688 | Petit Fort cove harbor, shoals....-. 144 
ee eorricds lailbteh sd ae on 396, 381))|—— parseroeles 2.0.) a 362 
Partridge harbor, islands. ......-. 713 | —— Jardin settlement........+.--2 282 
Bead bayseecee en Ne 683 | —— Marchand islet.............- 231 
HOSES VIG Feat ME Re tne re Us 589'| ——— Spas cove... --...:-.- 22 eeeeee 307 
—— point, Kirpon harbor......... 368)! ——— Oe HET ate ete. ho 385 
—— —— Southwest bay. ....--.- 388 | Petites settlement... .... 220288 249 
pee ee Wihite bay 2 see 2 ioee ce 400) | == Nachos boo. 399 
—— —— Wild point...........-. 416 | Petticoat island, Femme harbor... 188 
Pass island, tickle, lights, settle- | ———\ Newfoundland, S. coast. 149 
PACING 3A ee patasiottk ate 197 | Petty harbor, Labrador, E. coast.. 659 
Passagevislandey 4... REL ees 493 | —— —— Maddox cove..........- 611 
SOE a0 2 An Dt ees LS Tole) eetaalip) head. 22. i..i).--2. eee 486 
RO CKA Upp aw eneyre Rpt Gey 469) |SEhotocraph poimtu=-+4-- eee ae 342 
NN OAIS= es Seca ee ee ee 344 | Pic 4 Denis harbor.......-- 228177290 
[ELVES Te ee SO ee URC 68)|Picadilliy. 3.22. .2..4.2. eee 290 
Passenper pomiteso. oe Soe 5740) Picarre harbor...1..c.2.222e eee 199 
Mawracan shoal sass sane lee 13h ePicnic island \2252 224 ane eee 448 
Patrick (COVeGsa52.eOesaeetiee peewee 96°" Piercey hill. 0.24222... 2.282 coe 169 
harbor< rock i 22 sosce Asee 200° | Prerways hill. ......2::- eee eee 280 
TS O06 SA EI eos A eee aU 17") Pig banks 3th tes eee eee 86 
—— — Oderinisland.......... 154 islands ere eee ae 479, 688 
—— Power cove........-....----- 451 | —— La; Poile harbors. 22522 244 
Fe CKO RH os odio c Sac eee 96 |): —— ledges 2.825 Ae. seleek eee 159 
Baullistand!s 225i 55255-5,.-.525... 378; 743" |. === hes gees oe ee eee 677 
—— Peters COVEs. i See\.s55 555 2542 660 | Pigeon cove, Kirpon island...... . 367 
Rearcevharbotsessssnecec-v se sie 502 — Newfoundland, E.coast. 398 
Redked rock) 2p ee seseee le ssc.t 365) |: == heads - 2.0.) 2. eee 281 
Pearl island, Barasway....-.-...-. 208 island, Back arm, White bay. 413 
+— bay of Islands. .....:... 301 | —— Brig Harbor island...... 724 
Pebble island.............-.....-. 613 ) —— —— Caplin bay.............- 666 
Peckford island.............---.-- 531 | ——-——Curlewharbor approach. 706 
Pesoysibags elena teeta 609 | —— —— Domino run......-...... 698 
Peléexsland 6.05 eu eae ee 174 | —— Fichot islands}aesseeee 380 
= PONG. 1) 2252 Shs a ee 420) |. —— Little Garia bay- - 222202 247 
Penguin arm, cove, head......... 310 | —— —— Goss island; shoal. ..... 692 
—— harbor, head.............-.- 679 | ———— Greens Pond island.«... 538 
islands, Newfoundland, E. | ———— North Crow island....-.. 691 
Coast; light aaaaese 533) —— Partridge Harborislands. 713 
—_— —— —— §, coast............ 217 | ——-——-St. Francis harbor. ..... 663 

Pennsicove:ciccsc2 sinc eee seQe 448 | ———— St. Michael bay; bank, 
Penny sharborec2725-. 2025. < aeeoon TOCK 2.354555 eee 669 
— Hook cove........-.-......-. 696 | ————St. Pierre island......... 174 


INDEX. 793 
Page. Page. 
Pigeon island, Snooks arm.......-. A26} || Blacentan harbor... 5. = .2) 25% a7 
— Tinker island; shoals... 254 | —— Mans point, anchorage..... 112,113 
—— —— Vainquer island ....... 14> | road an. SAL Se oe Boh ou 97 
—— —— Venison island.......-. 676 | —— sound - 100, 101 
—— —— Western harbor; shoal... 208 | ——town....................--- 98 
—— —— White Bear islands..... 723 | Planes of reference.............. 13 
ee Ca eee te See eee ees 43) (| Plantehanrbor, dasa. . aciss. -casc: 2% 245 
—— islet, Davis inlet...........- 7390 ea Suen a eels eee oa Seiya) 115 
—— — Grand Bruit harbor..... 241) | Elantemshoal. ... s22ustosesee thas 682 
——-—— Random head harbor... 573 | Plaster cove..................-.- 271 
-—— Stocking harbor......-.-. gS Val 2 a 010) er rE 174 
inlets, SOps arm... 20.22... - 400) WEIR eteON er are Moos. Sct on SORE 556 
ledge, rock, Fogo island...... S260 | IB eps. 2 S222 welt wedi 185 
Piveaaniere arm. -_.---.256-..-- 398 | —— point, light..........:.-.-2 182, 399 
Peeeeseaeee 2.22) ----.-+2----+- “688 | Pleasant cove... .......--..-52- 305 
[oes [i ee 514 | —— point, anchorage............- 471 
[lS a 305") HROUE bay lac. bso ste ee 243 
lenlllne nove. 2 eae 248 | —— harbor, la; ice............. 243, 244 
ILE oe 451 | Pomt aux Gauls; rock... 22.2252) 168 
isla lh Ske 444 ROG Kea lvamalim Davee se eee 168 
a nem bones ae ae oe ok. 2 Se 447 | —— St. Lawrence harbors... 166 
Ria ee fey less» 449 | shoal, Burgeo islands........ 233 
Le Ltn on ee 355 | —— Marticot island......... 142 
[ph Cle 9 | ———— Mortier bay............ 159 
>. (a 20 | ———— Rock harbor point... -... 155 
Rimenersislando 28252. 5.. 22 tesa 258 Hsu bollorocks sunikerss = 4-2 .s5eee4ce 687 
— to) Pools.arm, ice.--..... 536 | Pomiadluk point........ nie Srabeeat 730 
Pinchers bight, directions......... Habe MEOMmler COvyee = acts eet ee 205 
Pimea-sutueland. --...../......-. 93 | Pompey island, Hamilton inlet... 716 
== lee oe Aa See 707 | entrance...... 7s) 
BAireeres. 2/8) Ja os Phas ute 720 | —— —— Sandwich bay approach; 
=== DOM bth cesee eee eee 214 TOCK 145. oM4eu suas eNOS 
SUG coon er BSc lp BONE COVE Wak. o cna coh saeeee 352 
Pine, cape, light, signals. ........ $990) |, head. 3 o6.5.. ate, daar ae Ae 132 
Pinesasiet...... . eee BLES ou bes 420 | —— SUMIKOTSS «2a eee 137 
fib) ech 507 rie) E10 [Aa he i gee ee 482 
iS SUN Soon ANS 79) Ne 601 | ee a ae 324 
= BR ee PSSgibha—— hel sao | See dk eel ae 99 
Sul 02 |e. 2 eng ee ee PAA MEOMGS EL VCR y= -oc, 26s) ev oo. uioites asl ok 334 
pines barerd esses. wee mes ek PAS OOly BORE e 5 82k ise 2 ee 615 
Pinsent arm, island, rock.......... 668i eopleasiandl: 22<)2,/...:4;05. seat WTO 
Pinware bay, river, tides.......... 649. | ;Ronsonby island’... <-.2......... 22... ¢(0 723 
Paper screen yo os. a 517 | Pools harbor, directions. ....-.. 539, 540 
IDOLS AO] Cee gey re se eee eles ie TS ean Cl Rear ate aek oe yates eee 240 
Pappas wholes. 45). et heel. 686 | Poor Boy islet, ledge..........-.- 579 
Paquemuais rocks) ...2) 350205. 373 ASIATIGHTOCKS fot. 352s akoe kc 164 
Pirogueishoals \. uae ee he a SSO ipa Sn alin aly wues Lit. holst appa) leks ge 563 
Pistolet bay, directions......... S60) 560)|seope Harbor. 2, .).....-- 5-1 22 Be sie 168 
Pitt Sound island, rock.......... p47 weoplars heady. 2.273 55s 4 22 set 155 
Pitman island) light. 2/222 92542... Pom NPOpple stone. 35.5 satan tes Mot 547 
| Sclin est 9 0(6) 01 je een pee rata ne Si Alc eg Soon Wweercipine bay 2. l).g..-- sees 693 
Pitte-harbor; point. 45.82 eacics2 637 GRPE isis bo hr ape ne 713 
Pizcontia: bay so: 25'.342 faes sabe ee SG) Pork islands. 30. hoi) eee ae 542 


794 


Rorpoise rock . 2.2). aasewe ee toes shh 
Porteaulbrag ease pee ee Bae 
— — Choix, directions....... 
—— —— Port directions ...:.... 


Portland creek, cove, pond, hill. . 
Portugal cove, Conception bay... . 
— = repacsey bay -us.-seeee 
1 OSC | eRe te ee PO ies 
PERG PMEOC IE 2 fous chas cia tb abuse hte 
IBORUES Dae cicteg era andes eee Se 
— cove, head, tides............ 
EBUCM CONE. elaine alas 2nd oene seek 


Poynes) Cove rock. .2ii S22 ae 
rrie slidallc Sah ee tio ih es 
Reesque-harbors..2 sc OSa828 «24 
Pretty asland 2). 23.c505 i.e oe 
inekleMharbonseseeee eee 
tickletshoalsrd UNA. te. 2 
ROLES TXCOWE 3 eI ae ese ee 


Princes Homey rock. 2.2020) 02 
Pookoutuscow cos ssene42 mess 


PAGE DEE Cie SJ. oisivinn sia Coe eee 
iBrossenroGk sy DUOY #222. s0 -o.- eee 
IPmimesisletr uses ssid. 4c .6. cee 
Bud dimespamikeaine ccethiscesccise ake 
PirdidimeyCoviert cc. sa. <Sers on oni 
=a POINGE CA BA Tet ot se uit. Lee 
AU RoK ove op av te vei Heresy Meyer es Ogle 
Puddiyerock sore eerie seek So 
Putts bankrand! island eessen ye. 
island, Greens Pond island; 

light, rock, ledge. . .. 
——  —— Hamilton inlet entrance. 
islands, bay of Islands......- 
Pulprt bead ovo. <.3 isk sien eee 
Pumbley cove, Southern arm..... 
—— White bay.............. 
Pumbly covers 4 cuit... ees ee 
Punchbowl inlet. .....:.. 
Purbeck cove, brook, shoal....... 


INDEX. 

Page. | . Page. 
352 | Purcell harbor, village. .......... 510 
164 | Push-through pass, Gallows harbor. 147 
340 ——GreatJervisharbor. 208 
287 | eRuttiek rock. ....225. 0: 2 554 
379 | Puzzle Harbor head:: ..:). 223 501 
286' || Pylades'rock: .. ....... 22). h eee 227 
332. |) Pyramidvisland .......... .. =e 745 
599) | ——— "point: 5... 2.5020 eee 388 

87 
740 Q. 
674 | Quaker Hat islet...\....2..42s5eeeee 728 
719) ema POC. os 728 
714 | Quakers Hat island...............- 702 
600: | Quarry Trock..'.........:.. 232s 574 
536) Queen rock... ...... 22) 20a 676 
412 | Queer island..... EPP 694 
4y5 | Querre islet, beacon...--2) 2402 340, 341 
536 | Quiddy Viddy harbor............. 602 
111 R. ; 
512 

88 | Race, cape; light, fog signal, signals, 

88 telegraph and ice report station, 
743 wireless telegraph, ice, shoals, 
357 soundings, tides, caution, cur- 

78 NE NUS Hse se Se 3-22 See ee ee 84-86 
127 kattehead. rocks... 322 425 eee 454 
BDL | tickle, island. .22.che ae 447 
447 | Ragged harbor, islands, Catalina 
449 | harbor: .....:5.. eee 565 
388 | —— Ladle islandie ase 533 
309) |) head and. rock: 23 22 2e3eeee 167 
520 | —— islands, cape Harrison. ...... 730 
599 | —— Merasheen island ....... 130 

7 | == rock, Smith sound....:. 567 
359 islets, Change island......... 517 
603: |b === point. ..22 Pesce ee 457, 510 
369 rocks, Handy Harborislands.. 712 
705 | — Harbor Grace islands.... 592 
558) Raglan heady 3.022... eon 310 
574 | Rags rock, Fogo harbor; light.... 520, 521 
152 | —— —— Twillingate islands...-.. 509 
590 rocks, Assizes island... -- ‘4 Oa 
185:\|) Ratlwaysss..2...= 225 59eee oe 41 

| am islands: 92./.cee- re. 103 
538 | Ramah mission station, communi- 
719 Catlonat a. 2 2a eee ee 750, 751 
308 | Ramea Colombier island.......... 223 
553))\|| ——== harbor...) eee ae 223 
414 Tslands.03i. cee 222 
411 | —— light... 3c eee 223 
401 South) bank 233s es eee eee 224 
689 Solltheastwockss--seeeeeeeeee 224 
412 | Random head harbor, tides....... 573 


INDEX. 

Page. Page. 
andomesiand 22.22 .2562.2.-22-2 571 | Red islet, St. Lunaire bay......-. 371 
teem, 1CE....-......-.----22- 574 | —— point, Domino run........... 696 
Rantem cove, communication .... 582 | ——-——- Newfoundland, S. coast. 213 
eee ei SA 573 | ———— —— W. coast........... 285 
enmengiassaee. 22... 2.2.22 739 | ———— Random sound; hill..... 575 
Sueeeemerook. 2.22222. 807 | —— sivas: ah ae ea Shs 122 
eve brook....-.----.-2.... 274, 432 | —— rocks, Witless bay...... eel 585 
— — La Poile bay.........-... 245i evedinexd Teck. Soto eek ee 601 
WMA DO. --° 22255 5..-.-+-.-- 364) |) rencontre: bay 5 2522.2 eP eee. 214 
em Ay. oc  e e Li2) —tCOV CR re. 2 2 )s eR ee 315 
[0 28 1 eee 686 istand amd rocks -..222::2a8 230 
Ray,cape; light..--...- aa yeh a 263571) slammed si 2024 220 tL Be 190 
Raymond island and passage... . - - 205 |) Rendelis'cove:: 2.222222 .xj-520 486 

SS a a eS a 200 | Renewse harbor, islet, rocks, direc- 
Razorback point, mount.........- 752 tions, ice, communication.... 617,618 
— to cape Chidley, sound- RUC WATS fetes crete fete TERNS 67 
tooo tee ese oe ss. Sao. Loon ECepISse SHOAL. 2252S SM, Sane 382 
=== jlwhkijaa65eeeee ee ZOneweymolds: shoale--s-- = - sna ee eee 448 
eRe ee ee. §=©6 O97) Riband bank: 22... 222224. 2222 606 
[2 ULC be) Ef 25) 908s) a) oad o> ape a a al ee 670 
Red bay, light, directions, caution, reenshindies 74 2ieos Ls 495 
magnetic disturbance, tides ich) point, deg. 20202 2 eat ee 63 


and tidal streams, ice, settle- 
ment, communication, sup- 


Ls ae 645-648 

=== |o0) eee 274 
=== Chih liGhy: Aaa =e ees 601 
—— —— island, ice.............. 555 
— Cove head, Famishgut....... 106 
—— —— ——— Paradise..........- 143 
—- ROGCIE AYA SO ears ards 94 
—— harbor, head ...... ier stag ne) LOS 
=== deni ine ea 94 
[tll 2 9 0 a ge Sa ie apa 84 
== INDTSGAe 4 ae ee 249 
island, Alcock island ........ 465 
— Corbet island. 2. 57822 691 
=== cove, Square island ..... 671 
—_— —-— Davis inlet; rock /.....- 739 
oe 1a 1G 0b eee ea 440 
—— —— Hare island; shoal..... 664, 665 


— —— Newfoundland, S. coast; 
nano ee eee nne 204 2D 


ae ortnoge head. -....--.. 683 
oie een Days harbor... 137 
a a Oey idlande 2 oe. 708 
— road, cape Cormorant... 283 
— rock, Musgrave land.... 700 
———___— snoal, clearino marks... 104 
Oy Hae os ese 677 
—— —— Wild bight; rock........ 437 
— islet, Bell island; rock....... 387 
—— —— Herring head...... es ol 
—— —— island bank............ 633 


—— —— light, peninsula, rock. 338, 339 


Richards harbor. ..............-- 211 
a NCR ee hts 5 eee RU APS 226 
island, Barrow harbor........ 553 
Riches island, Despair bay..-.-..-.. 201 
Rider Tvtlee yee: sr ee ae 566 
Ridge, The; tidal streams......... 283 
Bading tslamd<-2 2: 2222: 243 e2eeee 429 
Riff-raffs rocks, Hants harbor. -.- - 588 
—— —— Shoal bay...-.--..-..-..-- 580 
Right-in-the-road islet. .........- 489 
iRicoulette;coves see see heer cee ee eal 
IEVIGG ERS amr Ge ere eras See era 471 
River brakes ees seers see ean 272 
—— head bay, White bay.....-.-.- 41] 
—— —— brook, Hall bay...--..... 442 
-_— Serplement ase ee ae ee 194 
ISIAH Se eee Opens 623 
i OY OTG OY heed eae ee rere A ee le 383 
RuixK COMET ye EC entete 43] 
ea al Oz Te] OL) Geng et a Ug Se wm AN a ea 581 
= OULU RES nee ee tree once a ctae rs 431 
Road island, port Basque.-...-...- 260 
—— —— port Charlotte--......... 662 
Sa GL TG vey crea ane inl rar bata paras 292 
VEO PANO ISLA A aranala le te say aE abate 40, 
Roberts arm, directions-..-.-.-- 445, 446 
sae DYE eS Set sso WR i et pe a eee 595 
— harbor and town. ......-..-- 595 
Robin Hood bay, Newfoundland, 
EEC OBST Te | TER oy ara aneee 602 
IRobinevukcovelee sna ceeras sneer 398 


796 INDEX. 
Page. Page 
Robinhood bay, Trinity bay... --- 566"! Rotibay 02 .....2.5 460. eee 204 
Robinson brook, head, village..... 273 | ——— Colombier rock. ............ 242 
LSUATIO Csee ee Res Melee « 336 | Rouge cape, harbor, island....... 388 
SS PONG. ho Se sek cee ee ok 579 | ———— shoals. ..............-- 78 
BOGE eee re eee Ne 529 | —— (la Chesnais) point.........-. 422 
Roche (Rocky) harbor........-.-.- 322 | Round harbor, Confusion bay.... 421 
ee MORK eth... EE cee eee 157 | ———— Irelands Eye island..... 570 
See IPOING LE aot ioe dee he 99 | ———— Notre Dame bay; head.. 426 
Rpehes Blanche 2... .s0ssa.428e-5 250 | —— —— Picarre. . ... .. 22256 199 
ec Harbor..ci-2ic- sen. one eee 160,576 | —— —— Pope harbor........-.-- 569 
epland seo.) se tee ne ere 390 | —— —— 8t. Francis harbor. ..... 664 
——— 01 the Bank... 22.202 5.) e852 120 | —— Trinity bay. .>322¢eoeee 578 
See ONS IA ea FANS i ee 417 | —— head, Fogo island............ 525 
Rocky bay, Bell island.........--. 387 | ——=—— Jude harbor. ....22222e2 155 
— Comfort bighteeese-esee 682 | —— —— Newfoundland, W. coast; 
— —— Cowpath; islands....... 548 banks) .,..4) eee 285, 286 
—— —— Sir C. Hamilton sound.. 529 | ————St. John bay; cove, is- 
—— cove, sunker................ 126 land, point, shoal... 348, 344 
Eee AT OTas oe hs 2a eee ee 576 | ———— island, George island.... 715 
SSS STS oe eI Ee ee an 355 | —— island, Burgeo islands....... 232 
eee ON SA Ie Send) ad 209 | —— —— Garia bay...........-.-- 245 
—— point, Harbor Breton; light.. 195 | ——-—— Little Garia bay........ 248 
— —— Lark harbor............ 302 | ———— Isthmus bay........... 707 
—— —— Port au Port............ 289 | ———— White Bear bay......... 221 
RodmevaCOvieNr TOC Keaseasee se eee 5100) == reels.d ss 2.2 2 x ee 296 
—— Mundy island................ 720 | ———"rockess Ses au2s - 322 eee 110 
vaca y, poltitunio2 seach ceeeth. 150 | —— Shag island..............-. 2381 
Roger cape, harbor, head, island, — Wolf island...........-.-..- 701 
bay, mountains.) .Gc2 eee 3 146, 147 | Roundhillitsland.. .\..2. 22324 eee 694 
Hposers harbors: << 2/2. -\s oe eee 731 | Rover island, ‘bank... -2.<2-2esees 699 
ISLAING < cecaks a SE ee eee oe 689) | Rowland rock... .\- ......... Se eee 104 
=== ON ee aaer esha ao seu ue 5197) Rowsellicove: -=--. - 22 a=2ceeerere 473 
ROCKAAO) te Ce A ee aera eons 168; | Ruby-rock, buoy: ))::- 2 eee 603 
prerea sO GUN S01. Jats cee 138 |) Rudderisland’... .. 2:26. 262s 481 
POPES WARD OP 3:5 2..00's <5 Gs eee eter 430 | Run by guess island, channel, 
eoba Ma MOMlb eo o.54 Ubi: oe alee 376 PGS 5: « .'2 ocr eee ee 719, 720 
Romaines brook): .../.2..44- 2... 278 island)... 22.5 fn sue se eee 693 
Romseysocksas sees 3e ey. ee seks 633))|hushoony banks 232 )s-eeee see 151 
EU OMCICRODAVie 2 w/amsrain ak Aipieiels = 369 harbor, head... :..').4.32ceeeee 151 
HOH BLOL Seer oe Pea. c siete sek oe 361 | Russelltcovess.2...2 22 eee 666 
Roodipoint spree eee eee se ee 3077) Ruthwisland ss) oe eee 517 
oostroc kis yee oe ems aaa setae 132 
WROD EXC OVER ER Sate Se ete eee 297 S: 
Rose’ Blanche: brook... 22.32.2252 253 | Sable Island bank... 2--2eseeeeeee 81 
—— harbor, directions. ... 251,253 | Sacred bay and islands.......--. 362, 363 
— poimt ight lae see eee 250: | Saddle hills. -..+4-20 3522. ae ee 591 
— BhOaIS sens ses oe ee 252 island, bay of Islands........ 300 
—— —— village............2.-... 251 | ——-—— Hamilton inlet......... 716 
Yo, Oa] f Near Remy Uns ley yer arenas, 369 | ——-—— Hermitage bay......... 208 
Rosee/ pointes es sae ee eee 187 | —— —— Labrador, E. coast... .. 747 
Roseway) banks... i) es eee 81 | —— port Manvers, rocks... .. 746 
Rosey: tockise fps antes Selo eee 166 | —— —— Red bay; light........ 646 
Rosiru point, island, sunker....... 135 | —— (Double) islands. .........-- 694 


INDEX 797 
Page. ; Page. 
ern ICUS 9 os es) | FOO eee Keyrans:!.. 22 ss.. .5 lk Yee 128 
Eee os Sede a ke. 750 | —— Lewis cape, rock; position... 620 
lt ae EG 185 | ——- —— inlet, shoal.........._.. 622 
Sadmendirections. ....-..-.-.---- Sl Params EEMCN os. ssa Ses Ste 623 
SOTLLE [50 ee ae 492). sound, tides! 9.2202... 620, 621 
Sailors marbor, ice.:.......-..-. 500,500 | Louis bank, buoy-:22.2s2. 2.2. “74 
Saint Anthony cape.............. 373, | ———-Lunaire bay, peak:.... 2.5.0 370 
— —— harbor, light........... SO | Rcaerps ee eer tte a A 371 
ao == Tl S(05|)—-_-Marearet. bayes qe. Ss eo 349 
— Barbe islands............... 416 | —— Mary; cape; light.*. .22.2....- 95 
—— —— point, bay, harbor. .... DOE | ere Pere ACA See ee ot 1 95 
—— Bernard cove................ 133 | —— island) rocks\s {tu Vets 699 
—— Charles, cape, hill, river. .-.. Ga08 te Matye bas yo2 be 20s 2 90 
—— Cem hose soe ees 6325 aa Dons ees, 35) f- ee 91 
— -— harbor, directions, set- = Mont bay, 1¢en 43.5 Aee a Seo). 373 
mementn sesh -0 Fo: 63 |) Michael; cape; baytt 2222-2 667, 668 
—— — Gull island............. 630)| Michaels harbors. 42/28. 40 496 
=== IE (py | ——= island (lights: Sow eee 494 
= ofoix bay, point, shoal.... 102,103 | —— Modeste island............2. 649 
Francis cape, light, shoals.... 600 | —— Paul island; lights, anchor- 
—— harbor, cape, bight, tides, Sar MOR Ces rem see ioee Sete 263-265 
magnetic disturb- —— Paul island, cautioni0 72.32 74 
BBEG 2222-2. ~-,, 003; 664,| —— kauls bay, milet; points .2'.6327,;328 
— George bay.................. 260) (a eter bay, polnb.c.causates: 634 
— Bape sein kaki cx dias pe et 7 i) lands. ip A 633 
——- harbor, river;  direc- Pierrerbanies Wyse) 5 24) 2a 76, 78 
ECDSA glia ahora reer Ph G—Aal sy || <= arbors. 23.) eu r2 171-173 
—— Georges leads........-....... COR a tela 52h Bee 171-173 
Gregory cape and mountain. 314,315 | —— —— road.................... 175 
sos Tic 01 Aa a SEE Ria a UO VA DL te ys Oye OPE Pi ee 178 
= daeques harbor... .........- 9a; — rock, “Bonavista bays -s.5- 282. 549 
—— —— island, light....-...... 192 | ——-—— Lamalin bay...:.._.... 168 
—— Jones head, islet, harbor, ice 578,580 | —— Shots cove, caution. ........ 90 
aaa Wivoin harbor......... 576 | Ste. Genevieve, cape, bay..../... 352 
—— John, cape; currents, ice, tele- Sall the Maid island). 02. 222..2 2.0: Tu 
SVT OE Ee ee 402° AD. | eatin island op oi) ee aate J. 108 
—— —— bay, harbor, island..... 342 | Sally cove, communication........ 325 
— ——— Bounds. oof. 22-2 346 | Salmon bight, Labrador, E. coast. 660 
SS ee I SALT ta OME Neen kere Ss este th 660 
— Johns bay, islets. ........... 491 | —— —— Rodney Mundy island.. 720 
—_— — head, island... ..- 194 | —— cove, Gastries bay; commu- 
— Gis a adeconee Soon aaeae 608 MI CATION 255 2 ese ae 598 
—— —— harbor........-........ 487 | ———— Green bay; rock, shoal.. 433 
a oye. Leading —— —— Newfoundland, W. coast 285 
marks, lights. . 602. 604 | ————— Random sound.......... 574 
ania aa eEOCuIOns, Log: —— —— Trinity bay............ 566 
tides, wharves, —— —— héad) . 2.2.25 2.2 bas. 590 
wintering, tugs, Coe HAM ace foie kie Coase aes 34, 36 
pilots, soundings — point, Bonne bay. .-...-.-.-.-- 321 
in approach... 605-608 | —— —— Musgrave land........-. 699 
— TE Cece nee eee 607 | ——- —— port Charlotte........... 662 
Ose Di Nari ORea aes eewe ene © 14S. |i =" Round island...255 22228 707 
—— Julien island, peak... ...... Set oeOn Pl -——— TIVer. ©... JS aa somes eee 191 


798 INDEX. 
Page. Page 
Salmonien:s2.c\iescbsel sane 198 | Savadown rock. .... 22.4.2 .0eeee 88 
eee PIV CT a eh hgh yer pense cree 93) | (Savageicove.......2 5-05 see eee 357 
village, anchorage, ledge, rock 190 | ——island...................... 340 
Salt pond, Labrador, E. coast... -- 682 || ——— point ......-........ 4220eeeeeee 374 
—— —— Sophia harbor........... 661 | Savoyard point, shoal. ........... 172 
—— ——head..........:.......... 661 | Scab rock, Labrador, E..coast..222 661 
Salter island........ saci fesspe ag olor. 693 || Red bay... 2. ae 646 
Saltwater cove, Harbor Breton.... 196 | Schoolroom rock.................- 532 
—_—- Wibite bayee-e--eeeeaee 410 | Schooner cove, anse a Loup....... 650 
— —— Pond bay, point........ 441 —— Jacksons arm........5..: 405 
prvlipbrishet/0 82)! stoG ve kl has ee cae 370 | —— —— Long harbor............ 190 
Salvage bay, ice. 2.0 baked: po0;,007 |) ————— SOs ail) aoe 407 
point rocks 0/00. ey eee 288 | —— Square island.......23. 671 
01S) ee REE ee! A 592 island... .... 3-: 6263 360 
SampAid ame shonlese sees eerer as 124 || Scie arbor; la... ae 422 
—— Hitches harbor............... 1.99 || Seilly cove... ...-.:-..455eeeee 587 
pSambrp banks... 222 ceMte faa eats! Si | Seissors cove... ..26... 40a. 492 
hed gogo ses eset LE lh aati S 81 | (Scott poimt!.:.......- aaa 187, 393 
Sams head, bankes5 02 feb ae see 148 |) == TO CK eine lao sini ee 186 
oe NBME 4 oa clucll. | eee: Lee 159: || Seraegy rock... ... +). s53-neeeee 532 
NAMIGNCONCR Geta ae). shore See Ga0 uP SCranmmayaloniy 545 5 eee eee 668 
a TU COME sick ice eyo icles oot 701 | Scrape cove, Hawke island......- 679 
Sandbanks point, island.......-- 228 | ——-—— head, Merasheen island .136, 141 
Saad wich Day io 2st os cule 108 | ——— point... ..02: 2 scene eee 426 
— or Main tickle............... 209°) (Serub rock... ..... 2.25.0: 532 
= POM: COVE. < «<2 skeet Caves 634 | Sculpin island, Leading tickles... 465 
Sandy bay, island of Ponds...... 694 | —— Venison island...)..22 eae 
a Parsons ponds 2555.22 gal | —— point... . 22. 2223... seen 617 
— cove, Little Placentia harbor. 99 | —— rock, Garia bay............- 247 
—— -—— Newfoundland, N.coast. 357 | ——rock, islet, Sloop run........ 479 
—— —— —— §. coast............ 243 | —— rocks, Flat island............ 688 
—— —— Newman sound......... 553 shoal ¢ oo... die 165 
——— NEA, COVE. sissies edt 32 || Sea Mouse rocks: 3.2 2222 sees 281 
island (Storalik)s. .-<.csebde. 745. |\—=— Wolf lagoon... :.....22-s.5eeeee 277 
islands, harbor.'s:.1: 2-02.02 42!) 14693)|, Seal bay. whead. 2.2 460 
— point, Hare bay.............. 212 brook, bay de Loup.......... 225 
—— —— St. George harbor; set- —- Sf. |Georee byes. 274 
PISMOCHE <odoi 2. peels oe 276 | —— cove, Bonne bay...........-- 320 
Samson islands and tickle......... 498 | ————- Fogo island. ........... 520 
Saturday ledge, Broyle harbor.... 614 | ——- —— bay of islands.......... 311 
— Saint roekimaii.i2. . bee 550 | —— —— Newfoundland, W. coast; 
Saucy Jocirocke= (e052 ten 591 Point. ..\5: 2a 352 
Saulkeritock:; headmasss* see ee 2 165 | —— ——St. George bay-....-...-.. 271 
Saul Island mock: cj sesso habe oS. 160 | —— —— Southward bay..-.----..-- 556 
islands... Seana eres 160 | ——-—— Trinity bay; head.... 586, 588 
Salt cove.’ 28.2 eat a ae 399 | —— —— White bay...-........-.. 415 
BAUNGders/COVelsc heres eee ATL || === fishery2.2 (3) 84a eee 32 
Islands fore eee 682. |) = head iwsccin.e eeee oeee 597 
OM. <5 k= neatle ee ee 338 island!) Bear islands eee. saee= 221 
—— port; bank, directions. .... 337, 338 | —— —— (Hardrix)..........-...- 452 
shoals: <2. aa Sets See 77 | ———— head, Little Garia bay.. 248 
Sauvageon rock................... 340 | ——-—— Nippers islands; light... 429 


199 


INDEX. 
Page. Page. 
Seal island, St. Jones head. ...... 578 | Shagisletsandrock,Randomisland 570 
—— —— Seal islands; harbor, ledge, cape Ray 2s\- nce. L 263 
wireless telegraph... . 687 rock, Olatise harbor head.... 122 
men = Ode 00) Bae ee seo 303 | —— —— Great bay de l’Eau..... 194 
—— islands, Chateau bayapproach 634 | ——-—— Holyrood bay........... 91 
—— —— and ledges; Flowercove. 355 | ——-—— Lamalin bay........... 168 
-—— —— Labrador, E. coast; tides —— — Merchant island........... 103 
Se eye eaten 686-688 | ——-—— Renewse harbor........ 617 
=————— lnttle Garia bay:...-.-- 248 | —— —— Ship island.........-.... i 
—— islet, Great, Southern harbor.. 110 | —— —— Woody island.......... 115 
—— —— Independent island..... 708 rocks, bay of Islands....... 300, 301 
sss) rr eee 376 | ———— Connaigre bay.......... 196 
— rock, Mortier bay............ 161 | —— —— Green island............ 695 
—— —— §t. Johns harbor....... 603 | ——-—— Hamilton inlet.-....... 716 
— rocks, Burnt bay..........-. Cy) ib aise dee Oa 103 
— —— cape Blanc............. 182 | ——- —— Paradise sound....-..... 143 
— —— Captain island......... 238 | —— —— Riches island..........- 201 
—— — Cing Cerf bay........... 240 | ——- —— Rose Blanche point....- 252 
—— —— Great Miquelon;caution. 182 rocks, St. Lewis sound....... 622 
—— —— Labrador, S. coast...... 6447 PSbacroosthillocks-eo22 =e eee 239 
—- Little river entrance.... 219 | 112 [Dasa NN OMEN, ORR NAN, Sa 107 
— —— Riches islands.......... 201 ROG Keene 0 a Se ce 140 
—— —— St. George harbor....-... 277 sumkergh sb eral eeu ete evan oe 132 
— —— &t. John island.......... SADT gshale pommt ae ose aes ters a 412 
ofS (Oe | he G60 Sballop covets. i556 ee ee 208 
VME Lop oe 499 | Shallow bay, Cow head.........- 329 
Bese West islands. :..-.../-...---- 523 | —— —— Pistolet bay........... 360 
2 BSC ee db, |pShalloway pemib.s--e.- eee aes2e55 99 
wecond Brook cove........-.-.--. W060 |\johark Covethead 2232222 Jeseeke 249 
2 a6 SS GS60)-=— ledget a. 2. Sscck adta eakee 532 
Seldom-come-by harbor..........- 526 rock, Cooper head.....--...- 675 
‘SSESOTAISES 5 Seago ee ne 734 | ——- —— Offer Gooseberry island. 545 
SST ae Wo seharp peaks 2/...2364 oe ee ee ees 101 
Sepiramonepomt..... 2... js2i.~. FUL MMI ro] Se (2 sake) C8016 bagpege ie  OeS a 518 
Ligh (EG T0010 (he ha ars 454 | Sheep channel, bank, island... - . 368 
SUT 343 JOYS NG eae SD, | ei Se a ee 617 
Seventeen Fathoms bank......... 624 AS EAIAG) eet 14 as ES Brit ci cc 344 
CLA GUS US Ie a are aio; leshell bird ibiehte a et oe 95.52 439 
— CEST (eee a, a 481 BLS Rees Namek ater een pies 3 ON 2 0h NG 406 
——— island, Handy Harborislands. 712 | Shepherd point.................- 114 
—— —— Otter point......-..... Zot PANNE COWEN =e ye) ee see. 2.22 438 
—— —— port au Port approach... 296 | Shingle head....... SO es aa aera 86 
—— —— Ragged islands. ........ ISG) Slabeoicng Ts Chola soso sas 5 bea dee se 663 
a ore sland oF fk 697 | Ship cove, bay de Grave.........- 595 
— islands, Cow head............ 2 > uminwnan Ors eee. 2 ee 164 
——— —— Weer islands! 25.2.2... 547 | ——-———.. Despair bay......-.--.... 202 
— islet, Cing Cerf islets......... 2400 = 1 Goldsonvarm)s 2. 2.2/6 6 513 
—— —— Cowpath............... AO deninunanpOnseeneereae 153 
—— —— Garia bay.............. 245) j= = Rameéa islands... 2... 4.2 223 
Sa a ee SUE niet 22) 554 | —— MOCKA ves e272 so Sere ae 271 
— —— Wadham islands. ...... Soil |) ee i er ee oe 245 
islets and rock, Changeisland. 517 | —— dock.............----------- 227 
— —— Nonsuch head........... AA harbor nabrad Oem eaeee a eeiee 666 


800 INDEX. 
{ 
Page. ; 
Ship Harbor head, Byron bay..... 278 | Siuitieboard hill. ..2.-2 22-3 
Labrador .2.2) 05.2! 666) | Shug vi luk. :...22...2 ee 
—— —— Placentia bay.......... 101 | Side‘harbor... 2... .2.2.2 ee 
= pomt.- ante - 101, 102 || Signal hill... ......32 22 eee 
—— head, eeavare pave ole Bae Bias stations... 2.5... ee 
aia cove; Fiods cove... 280,281 | Signals respecting ice..........-... 
—_ Facet Day see yeu nee 542 | Silldown point... .... 272 
— Placentia: bay........... 117 | Silver Buckle. island...) 232seee" 
—— rock, cove; St. George bay... 271 | —— cove, settlement.............- 
--— island; Bonavista bay... 550 island .....62.. 2 
m= TUT TOCKS SLY Va eee 477 | =—— watertall. -.....-232.3-2 esses 
shone ees One ee ete 381 | ‘Silverton district....=.:. 2.2225 
Shipwrecks 62. . oS A00 ee iene 67 | Simmonds barasway.:./.5252eeee 
Dimvery pointes. ss 22 Ne ews ee 301 || ‘Simmons brook. .-3. 2)... eases 
Shoal arm, Badger oe a, Seen Cor 458 | island... ...:. 32. 
—— —— points................. 443 | Simms rock and island........... 
—— —— Three arms............. 4377) wimonds| tock... 62. see-—e eee 
eee Nera ced AORN PUL WES EELS LIE oo 121) Sims) pombe lic. 2 
—— bay, Fogo island............. 522, | Storalik?222-....2- 0 oo 
—.- Gander bay: 22 720. 530 | Sir Charles Hamilton sound....... 
— island, Labrador, E. coast 692 | Sisters islands, The; cape North. - 
—=— point: 2.222. ecb eke eee 92 | islets, The; Corbet island. . 
== St. Marys bay eee 92 | —— point, reef. ..-...... 2 ee 
—— —— Trinity bay............ 580 | rocks... 2... ee 
— rock, Change island... .. 520 | —— The; Groais island. ......... 
—.- —— Trinity bay........ 585 | —-— —— st. Michael bay-eeeeeeee 
COVE: Aes et eres eee 314 | Sivier island, harbors...........-- 
—— —— village.................. 286 | Skeleton cove..-..5.....-:.e ee 
———eTOund shee Tae ee 475 | Skerries, Labrador, E. coast. ..... 
— harbor, Little bay........... 439 | The; Eddystone island...... 
—  -— Random sound.......... 575, | Skerrys bight. .... 2) 20.0 
— — St. Lewis sound. ....... 624 | Skerwink head, rocks............- 
— point, Burnt bay............. 495 .| (‘Skiff-sail rock..2...2:.5:2:2eseee 
—_— cape Anguille........ 269; 271 | Skinner cove: ..: 2. 2.22002 eee 
—— —— Great Cat arm.......... 402 | rocksand (COVes-<-- =e ee eee 
—— — port au Port............ 290 TOCKS: 2: 2 os cec eee ee ee 
— rock, Newfoundland, S. | Skippers brook, rocks....-.......- 
Castes stem fees eee D2) Slabwslandsi4252205. 6 
—— —— Spotted island........... 697 | Slade room:.-.......2. S2eeneee 
—— —— St. George bay.......... 274 Slammer pomlte so) s2-24see eee 
— —— Woods island....-......- 308 | Slate bay. :.i-. 2 eee 
—— rock, Bishop rock.........-.. 424 | Sleepy Cove Gull island........... 
—— —— E. Chance harbor..-..... 504 island !:.2.Jtesceeeee eee 
—— —— Witless bay............. 585... ——— ledge-..:-....4:825.033 =e 
tickle, bay of Exploits....... 493 | Sloans: hill, light: 02". 2252 Seaeee 
—— —— Granby island........... 664 | Sloop cove, head 222:23:02:ceseeee 
———Water Dight2-2. 22 eseeee eee 701.4)'—— harbors: 3)... eee 
Shoe cove, point, rock, settle- island, harbor:2:.2°22 22 ceees 
e012 01 AUpUeee APaetR Aeches s 424, 425 rock: . 222. 2 oe eee 
aaa DOL Ge care See ee ate eee eee 541 PUM. 212. Pe 
Shooter rock i" S322 50 1 eee 215°) ‘Sly boots: 2.4.0: ste eee eee 
Short point shor lessen see 445 | Small island, Three arms.......-.- 
peachy w em c/s ce aos 227 | —— Wadham islands........- 


INDEX. 801 

Page. ‘ Page. 

Gemallmpoitt..- 2-52. 602 | South Berryisland .-............ 505 
Se Sl: 673 | bill cape St. John: 2.2.02 423 
Simealaeisland..-.-.22s-2222...222-- 227 | —— Bird island, cape Largent.... 562 
Siirtile 1b ae 716 | -—— islet, Random islet...... 572 

point, Bane island.........-- OY re EMC ROP AS eo ac Shs a 697 
Pees ee eee ete lS 156 |= 120.6] Se Sah Ate OO eg ae 691 
— sound, bar, point............ ora | ——_ sBrentisland, Snoal 0... 22. 377 
—— PME MLE Aho. ob ates ee OSG? | ————srOAd COVE. hoc aes cee 554 
Smoemasiands; Femme harbor..-.. 188 | —— brook. ..-.................... 432 
—. PAN OAY ete Ce es 245 | —— Brown rocks................ 545 
Smoker island.........- Sgiah g 516,517 | —— coast of Newfoundland, cur- 

Si Cr 241 | ENN Ee Se niche steals 52 
SL: te a Lie A AES G0 a tk 418 
Smopmrwand point..........-...- (a9) ——= Find Pome. 2 os nae wie hee 517 
emg eee OL | SE tae isla. 2... 702 
Ske re PANO | ie Rote y= ie oo elasta- 702 
fu), 0) 529 (oh a ea ee aa eae 596 
SmaIEgCOVe.....-.22--.....-.--- AE MS 0 a ANRC 500 
Smo Mba. See see ee. 263 | —— head, bay of Islands.......... 299 
Snooks arm and head...........-. 426 | —— —— Catalina harbor ........ 565 
— harbor, Despair bay......-.... 204 | —— —— port au Port ........... 289 
— pm eound... 3... 2020 eh | == Bt Johns harbor, light, 
Pyaar PONG... 2-02.22 2 oes 475 FOR SIOTANY a0. not aS 603 
SNC Od 7) 673 | —— island, Toulinguet islands... 509 
ST 000) ee a es 136 | —— islands, White Bear islands.. 723 
——— —— Miquelon island......... Slee NS ota seal Tey Sa a I 265 
ooo UIE ee 648 | —— Northt Harbor: oj... ../.214)-\- Tt 
SMTA coe ce keke Yalan 661 || —— Pound islet...-...........-.. 539 
Peerless. seine 4522.- 00d | ——— Red Head shoal.........-...- 197 
Peimiginigiands.... 2... 25.0.2... tee0) = = IRI DD POUR. @ 22 ca ccccos Seek 625 
~ oss DG 4 5 690 | —— road, Sacred bay...........-- 363 
SS 1DLELI CLS SS 596 | ———— Table bay ............. 702 
Mopinia harbor-.-..........502...-- 661 | ——rock Bell island...........-.. 387 
aa A 579 | —— Hearts Delight.........- 585 
Sops arm, head, Notre Dame bay. 454, 455 | —_- —— Labrador. ...........-- 751 
ao ee LNT ei 0) 407 | —__—— Placentia bay.......... 96 
tides and tidal | —— shoal, Virgin rocks. ......... 77 
streams... - - 409 | ___ side district, St. George har- 

12 AG Be) (oe 406, 407 | VOR Sal has ees are eat 275 
RiMetsarm. SS. i fol. ke. 399 | —__ —— village, Burnt bay...... 495 
co ielels U1) ois a er MS aout hwert rock... 5 -,...<02+. 532 
=== = NICH ERLE ae oe a ee Ue tes st ete SARS CITT: .. SUM Rteaioe Meaien eats 713 
Srpighonue TOCK-0.. 2.25... 25 5.2. Jick Pgh | elt ti so pa ae 156 
epee pepper eee ee eee - 28-420 | = West point... ......-.5.-0--. 352 
Source inlets, la; point, tides..... S00 OWT Cae aes wc ichdie ele 141 
ier eOGkKEerr esse es le SR) OW ee iaiand. 2.2... eee 701 
2 HLS 2 ao ee 385 | Southeast arm, Fortune harbor... 474 

SALES 1 le ergy ee Oa BOOM ea = Nattle tiver..\.. bes sec 219 
OUnNoIse HNOalsssseee ee at = Sk, 383 | —__——__ point, shoal, New bay.. 472 
South arm, Bonne bay............ SS) eee SSE Jones harbor..4---sc2 579 
= SING TPL OMEN tah a eae 470 | __.___ cove, Isthmus bay; di- 

—_ — point Se eine eh NE pmen N 436 TECHONS see a eee noes 706, 708 


76846—09——51 


802 INDEX. 

. Page Page. 
Southeast arm,cove, Paradise sound #143 | Spectacle head.................. 596 
—— —— island, Grand Bruit har- Spencer cove... ......... 42.) eeeeee 140 

DOR SS pee sewer eres 241 | Spencers dock:.....-¢2.222) eee 445 
—— point, Spotted island......... 697 | Spiterrock........../..ceeeee 142, 155 
—— rock, Ireland island ..-..... 243°) Spillers’ point.......2J22 2:52am 562 
—— —— Laun islands. ........... 168 | Spirity point: 2.2... fa.seeeeeeee 335 
—— —— Nachvak..........-....- fol |\(Split pot... - -..5. Ja. ae 367, 589 
— rocks, Hamilton inlet ap- Splittmg Knife bight. 5-02 s2s-me (eA 
WIPORCH estes ee oe eae fale > 718 | Spoon point... ..2. 5. ..2stee eee 164 
Smemrstirsetl’  rabisyavciehe he ere et 258 | Spotted island.......:.2-.2.2: 8 696 
Sautner Point. ais esse eee 086 | Spout; Phe. 2 >... ......:--eseeeee 612 
Southern arm, Hare bay.......-.-- 378 watertall The. . ..2-2-eeeee 271 
—— —— Three arms; point...... 436° | Sprackling island ......... 228 eee 681 
—— —— White bay; head, light, 414,415 | Spracklings island. .............- 744 
—— bank, Battle islands......... 625 | Spreadeagle bay...-............- 583 
——— harbor, Little Bay island....... 441 | Spriggapomt.-2:-...-2-435eeeee 609 
—— — Little Black island..... 499 | Spring inlets, island, tides.......- 379 
—— —— Rencontre islands. ..... 190 | Springdale settlement............ 442 
—— head, bay of Exploits....... 492 | Spruce island, Garia bay.-......-.. 245 
———— Come by chance point.. 111 | island, bay of Exploits....... 482 
-—— Long island; light, islet. 452 | —— pomte% ....../. aspen eee 410 
—— —— Petty harbor.........-- 659 | Spudgels cove. ..:- . 2... 2c eee ene 
—— passage, Thwart island...... 491 | Spurn point, light............. 303, 304 
SISO epee cosh ete Seite oak 141 | Spurrier point... ...../222 eee 153 
—— rocks, Green point. .......... 595.| Spurwink island... . . ..... 9532s Meeeee 
Southward Bay head.2=..-. 0.0... 556 | Square island, harbor, tickle; tides, 
Southwest arm, Green bay....... 4382 | Communication .4-=eeee 669, 670 
—— —— Harbor Breton.........- 195 | TOCK so sa td co se eee 343 
—— —— New bay; directions..... 469 | Squarey islet, light...........-.. 560 
—— —— Random sound.........- 576") Squasho mun >> 2. /5.'. 2: ose 680 
—— bay, cape Rouge harbor.....- 388) | Squib: pomb.--.- 2... 2S cect 580 
—— —— Griguet harbor. ........ 369 | Squid cove, New World island; 
—— —— 8&t. Lunaire bay......... 372 tides... 2: . 2.0.2 ee eee 505 
—— beach, Presque harbor....... 128 | —— —— St. John bay..........- 347 
—— cove, Red island............. 187 | ISN Soo sod cee ee eee 5d1 
—— harbor, Bell island........... 387 | Squier cove..... 22. See 221 
—— island, Merasheen island..... 135) | Squire dslets.. 05.0. -sseere eee 498 
— —— Ramea islands. ........ 223 | Stag harbor and rock............. 527 
—— —— Trinity bay............ 543 tickle; directions.-....- 527, 528 
————_  NiONSU Chine ee tees ects Sas 145 | island, Hawke island....-.-..- 679 
—— rock, Coney bay.........---. . 256 | ——- —— Long island..........0: 453 
—— —— John-on-the-bay........ 156 | rock, Burin inlet... sseeeeeee 164 
—— —— [Laun islands........... 168" | Stage/caver/s....°. 2. csc soe 389 
TOOK BE Seu aa os Nu ne ep eesse 223 ‘| island oi2: .2Uee eee 635 
pow rocks Dhews S520 Saeerc ere 228) |= OINGS <2) 5, 3. eet eee 190 
Spaniards Day 2 22ers ceeeee 094 | Stamford mount._0. 2. 7--oeeeeeee 554 
Spanish Room harbor.........---- 160: | Standard time... ..- 2 2n\3eeeteeee 68 
DPSre: PONG oS eet cena ie etientere n94 || (Stanford pornt.\.../1: 952s. 330 
Spear bay, cape, rocks, light, fog Stanley, cove. :....<oheeceeee nee 207 
Sigma) SNOB s\cre ee ia ae 610 TOGKS( 231.45 10s See 159 
—— cape, cove, White bay........ 410: |\"Starboard island... 232s 379 
—— harbor, bay, ice, tides, point. , 660 | Starve head, harbor, cove........-. 513 
WSN. be ela se an ele G13" Steady Take...) 2. JS ae eee 334 


INDEX. 8038 
Page. ; Page. 
Sieanmmenoek.. 24... 586 te ee. eis 3 OAS elsuearloate head ssc. 2s0.4ee5 eee 602 
oa 0S ea 1267)\\——— nl, ‘eape Ray.....22 225.224 263 
Sremmme island: ..22.222.0.2.- 329 | ———— harbor le Cou........... 250 
Sieeirmountain . on). ls .cees. 275 | ——- —-—— ship’ harbor... .....-22- 101 
Steering island, Dog bay......... 530 | ———— Squareisland.......... 669 
—— —— Indian arm........... 494,497 | —— sland, Burin inlet. ......... 165 
— rock, Bane harbor........... 151 | —— —— Comfort bight.......... 682 
—— —— Georges island.......... 408 | —— —— point, North bay........ 206 
— —— White bay.............. AS oe LOLS HOUSE GOVE. eles 124 
sn: LEE Se Se ee a ee 448 | —— —— Woody island.......... 115 
Stephenville district............. 278 —— islet, Copper island ..:...... 686 
2 DOG ee a Se a eee ae a 232 | —— —— Notre Dame bay........ 455 
Stevensons islets... ..:.......... 537 | ——- —— Sansom islands.......... 498 
Stickland point, village........... 255 | BIGOT A mca Coretta FS Sct 214 
—— —— shoals off.............. 1334) == porn she seesesk 2k 101 
- on Es 159) | === === Te Cou harbor. /....2. 22: 251 
imine banks. <2). 0s 2s Bie rate rai eee Noho sa 185 
=== GOV Oksd so pees Beene 2hdt| S— = URKR"COVE Seis oe 5 oe sane 587 
“5/2106 1 B24 0) ea dat \| Sevan COVE: + abamse he 2. ss 440 
PeapemOCkS... 62k aces see. 9) TAT 10) Gd eer eae enero ae ae 452 
Bteckine harbor... 2.25... .. 2.2. ASOM i sulilavanets] amd nesses s cect 686 
Stone island, cape Bonavista...... 560 ISSR psi he oe ee te arse 572 
—— — Fogo island............ O20s|| Summer cover. S 0 occ. 5h5. Sse 732 
—— —— Trinny cove........... 106 Sunday cove, island, bight, tic- 
—— islet, Birchy cove........... 207 Icey ica meat ee Sian emt 443, 444 
— — Fogoisland............. 523 rVS1I 00 bale Seay eg) Se Ep ee 485 
— point, Despair bay......... ZOSS20 7 mean ken rock <2 2.28mi. s. 2rd ua 617 
— Sow barbe point. . 22.19) do4.) —=— The; Black tock....2.0.2...., | 129 
SING SLE (0 ee 675 Brlbmtete piss See 95 
See LOCK. 2.0.25 o0'c0 4s vada 127 | Surgeon cove............--..----- ATT 
BrOppers BIE. 622s eset eee GI Swagger. cove. ..0.5.2.2..2 oan ae 203 
BuOrehOUse COVE. 22. ...52..-.2-.- 4 “owed islanas.o. 22 Sane eho 536 
island, Gander bay.........-. 529 | —— NAS EOR Kas cuts eee. tena ee 536 
islands, Fogo island......... 523 TUG IGLE toy atone © Saree cies 536 
5 ONE ee ae ee Sho iwengalenelane ootc ese ee eee 554 
rMnMCANO.</5. 2. 5,520s022 40604 368 BA Ree aes ere yo et ge tae 554 
“SELLS 00 a re O67 swallow Dames 202 2250 hoe5nc one 710 
Bioworidee head. .........-.2/... 912\| Swan island harbor............/.. 480 
SI ESCs Ce ' 672 US| ENGI) ee eee aN eRe noe 479 
"SHENG WSCC ee ee fpSs swveenyielands 2.) ..-). tetas se ee 474 
Strawberry cape, harbor........ 730 | SACLE LIL Och GS Ma Ea RE Coes 2 POP 556 
OE] 08 od ee SNOW ORG POMMb ispiht 4202242. .cu aos 302 
Sirti) 20 ln GIN eee 733 
Siron¢g island, sound). ..:...5.... 470 ie 
LISLE? bop 9 le (2 a SA tablevbay, Narbor . :......-25 22255 702 
DuUckewicoves eet cee siesied Gee cn 450 Gaye, polite {boxe ete eee 333 
Bummles eves! Seis) Seok awe AN Me INORG eee ates ns Jc sic) eee AUN Se 633 
SME DOU | 2c. 9520 els sos 401 nies la. sr ae 748 
PSHE ila tel Fe), NG en Seg a ee 704 + —— mountain, cape Ray....... 263, 267 
Shylesthanbor rocks. f. eo. 4.0. 677 | —— St. (George bay---sseee- 279 
SGU aera Eh tbe 216 Tacks beach, head, lookout...... 132 
Submarine! Pellssten soe eis ek. Bit Namaig balk 20 ake 5 «ci chatter 738 
Sugarloat, Cat eoveaser. J. se. 0 896) Mbatlsor che: bank... 50s eee ceeeee 588 


804 INDEX. 
Page. Page. 
Mikiulk cs sachk sttwacsle ose eee 742 | Tickle:/harbor point....... 02288 583 
Yantem. shoals, rock... 2:2 2222 0 GOL |) = Mhead es. ...-).-.. 10's er 190 
Parpaulin island see. S28 ees ee 478 | —— island, Frenchman run....... 685 | 
Passe cape Weise ee eek ieee e 396 | ———— Long island. ..... 25228 192 
pe arrentcsccn ose asses res 2. 129 | —— —— Sir C. Hamilton sound.. 529 
Matters pot, shoals: os22 025. 2:52% 696 | —— The; Bonne bay: -.2:222322e= 319 
Paylor banks estat oneness 698 ee Sops arm; rock-222.aaes 408 
—— hay, rock, point, shoals...... 168 | Tickles settlement, The; Long is- 
islandittockeas-ssceertee ce 201, 209 land®:...... . 52 eee 139 
— rocks, Dolland bight.... 201 | —-— The; Famishgut..........2.. 107 
— rock, Teapot island .......... 725 | Ticoralals head... ._.'.- = 290 33eeee 716 
Beara rays 2 seer reciastee a cise AVl:| Nidal:streams=.\.. ...-.. .oeeeeee 14 
COVE, Neade-pet acca sesa er 725 | ———— Belleisle strait........- 55 
—- POMNGS eee eee 579 | —— —— Labrador, E. coast..... 56 
Weapoiislandsy SS so2 ot ees ons d oa 725 | ———— Newfoundland, E. coast. 55 
See OCK 55 Shee UL iee Se aoe oe Oe 648 | —_-—— —— BS. coast.......... vd 54 
Telegraph communications........ A) ee COs tLe 55 
Se EOCK ATES GA discs ase ene ae 141 | —— —— (See also places.) 
Temperature of the sea........--- 56 | Tide'tables:2/:..+.. ..:3 2a 8 
emple bayypPass.c -lo.cc al Sesies 637 |). Tides2j) 326 2224.38 12 
menedos Tock. = 26 Sys les oe oe 393 | —— cove, Placentia bay.......... 162 
PRGITAANOWA LS | oS ecinesoee ee SES 699 | —— —— sunker............-....: 139 
esti bankws nes as ecnea ee tees Sas | Miiperro@k ec. oct. 2 475 
Tete de Mort, havre de la......... 379 | Tikaoralik (Wheel islet), rock... 730,731 
Meialiey POMNbe. ee -cee Ya —nrolc telere~ 746: |) Dikkerasuk...... 2.050: SS) Seog 733 
Thames harbor point........-.--. 580: | Eileey. island). .):0..: ) 2) (eee 631 
Thimble head, tickles......-.-.-.- 461 ledge secs 525222080 424 
Wieklenhead!. 22 )\r03. a7. e. 462.-|\ Biller cove. 2/20.) ee ae 167 
Thistle rock, clearing marks....... 6451) ‘Milley coves. ....¢2 4.255. 2 ee ‘se 
1 (t CONSE piano gS ke EL EUS 380) | "Hilly ledge. ....05.25. 55-2. eee 425 
MOM as rOC Kee. sven scocc a teae as 160 | Tilt cove, New World island;island 505 
— Rowsell island. .........--..- 464 | —— Notre Dame bay; bay, vil- 
homey island. 22222 ...2.. 5062. 5 724 lagess- cess. aeene eee 425, 426 
iompron i be@eh.. - 1... ./- 222 = 195 TOCK2 ROR. a oee Se. eee eee 187 
Ghoresby mount: -5..62.520502 2c 746 | Tilton harbor, hght....:.22.2.3222 524 
‘Thoroughfare rock. J... ../.-..--- 570) | Pilly ledaes.ce. .. 2.222242 2955 425 
=" Phe: directions...) 2..... 570) 071.) im: Bameitrocks....._ ase 102 
PRWormirockvastesceeee ome. caeeeies 329: | \Tim-potiislands: .-.-....22.52 eee 418 
PHTee ARMS Hs so heziAe a cisss lee cies 434 | Tin ya vik, anchorage...........-. 751 
—— —— island..........---....-- 436, | Binkembank:<. ./:-..2:5 23 660 
Brothersiisletses2s-ss><.-=-5- 745 island, Alcock island........ 465 
islands, Comfort bight. ...... 682 | —— bay of Exploits.......- 482 
oS Newfoundland, S.coast. 241 | ———— Byron bay.....-.-.-.-- 728 
—— Mountain harbor...........- SUD: | ree Camel islandi:2..-22.225 494 
== Peak hill... 2:2. S22 see et se 611 | —— —— Cobbs arm............- 514 
— rocks, Bonavista bay.......-- 537 ——-——— Hamilton inlet approach 719 
— PONE 56) 5.82 ae 284, | ——- ——. Holton island. ..2..2222 728 
WATMICAP Cs 2 sacbee Geet e noe 192 | ——_—— New bay..........-.-.- 467 
Thwart island, harbor..........- 486,487 | —— —— Packs Harbor island.... 711 
Pickle Arichatse Jy seee sarees 733 | —— —— rock, Curlew harbor ap- 
—— bay, communication. ..... 582,583 | proachi2.:. 23350 area 
—— beach, point............-...- 189 | ——-—— —— Newfoundland, S. 
= COV aSbienicted treteln feeders 555 Coastsie.8e2 ae 254 


Tankershare island .......202--2-.-.2< 
Aigardynarbor, head: 24.22... 
AiG a), J\SSTEIS I ee Bee ee a gk pm a 


BemererooKoUt.-2 5.550 j.Lee eke 
Wott, The; Mortier bay... .......- 
— —— Random sound.......... 


—— —— —— Grand Dismal cove. 
—— —— —— Hamilton inlet ap- 


— — — Notre Dame bay... 
—— —— —— Pass island........ 
Wadham island... . 
— Power lookout................- 
—— Sheaves rock.........-.--...- 
— Walsh lookout.........-..... 
7 D0 etal i ee 
— rocks, Comfort bight......... 
Hamilton inlet approach 
ee SMATOTOCK. oc. e<.2< bsls cise 
Bieamays arm? 2. 5s. es eerie 
Mer bank. |... 2.2.2... Ss 
“DLS NG eA a eee 
Toomie, point, anchorage......... 
mailers = 21S ber hehe. 2 dis 4 ee 2 


Mippvad pointes ks S309 2d. od 
TSS SERGCT TTS 0 0s 0 a 
Tracks, Labrador, E. coast. ..-.-... 
MPAING CONE 52) ice 2 es eee 
dams porhy islam... 00 esas. oe 
BMSPPET CONGrcee = 2 936M hi sk 
Ua verse island ae yeh ed md 
ray Now harbors sitios ho). = 2 
Aipeenadl daekde 24 (hs Cw iad i ie5 
Trepassey bay, caution............ 
MAT DOr, Plows 22.2: 24325.). = 


INDEX. 805 
Page. Page. 
610) Trepassey village...) 250022252 89 
246-)ietnele harbor. 22.32.52... - s 2008 672 
157 amos dae ss css 360 
B04) Trimming tills 2.4.0 3.5 oo a leuks 237 
504 | Trinity bayand gut, Bonavistabay. 543 
613 | —— Newfoundland, E. coast, 
517 Gallbions IGes- pees cise 565 
113 | —— —— south part, ice.......... 584 
SGT eae CONC ener te teten, STL Ay ue aeven ep 264 
574 | —— harbor, light, directions, tides, 
267 NCO mae Hae clers ete ene S 566, 567 
690 sli a)21 la a © 2s Aegean eg eee 126 
457 | —— town, supplies, communica- 
{REDE echo Rae Ril Oe ae ee 567 
MUS VMI VAC ONC: aes. eee ka hs cee 105 
439 | —— —— head................... 105 
197 | —— islands se. 28 hee as ca8 106 
poe) |) Mrioistand soso 22.6 e002 503) BRL 746 
LOS).|) @roak: points: sees volves boc ee! 164 
107 | Trompe l’ceil point...............: 360 
LES | MEOUTIGOMCE Fosse. 8 oh. eke 667 
85 river, rock, bay, settlement.. 316 
G82nlcovcowmuslandine 225 \.55 522 ee 454 
Miu WRU clkeislamdeas.: cc v2: Rooke re 633 
LPO) Medite pouiibssicee Loe. 2405 22 ees 388 
454 | Tromp islands, tickle:............ ' 305 
ROM WN ANEAAS ivsabOC Keer oye a (\ctoserels /cucys ie Scio 698 
GOAN abit ulbamb one eile nes feel 675 
706 island yes ke Latte oe Hae 714, 715 
944 ISLS eee ee tees es fs) EAM 440 
Reon ite kebned(s sis cc 2.1.86 atau. Oske 307 
G00) iekersyneadh levees Wuseie She 319 
601 | Tuktuinak.. Pea Ae 
395 | Tumble- Apo Dick abn: a aoalpee ee TAS 
G25 eo sOakes eee ve cies cee 743 
aee0| Timuncayaksoak.. 2). cs22. slic: 742 
ago%|) duenuneayualik.s 226 s5 2. e 323 742 
Sogn Memb POMMGE kei. 2. oc Soden tie 277 
jae) |) mubipookdsland )2 20.0222... 25s 556 
Bie ATED ESCOME choy 2 ES aie 5 apvere|Se Amici 587 
396 head, eut, Gollier: bay. - 597 
oe | == Newfoundland, S. const: 224 
TG a WL 0 222 
Gy) mbener ead = )6 6.622 ts ek en Pe 717 
64G0) wurmavikeislands."..- 0... 5.522523 732 
7395 | Turr islands, Fogo island ......... 523 
354 | (iles aux Godes)....... 346 
677 | TSH KEYES) 2 te pa CORSE Rae ers ci 223 
335 (OLS) Dee nO I MERE ee 678 
544) burrey bay, point... ... ....:-\. 0840) 620 
Pit) Ma biiad e150) <a, eee eerie St 391 
Eq meediisland:.:.). 2... va25 42003: 300 
Wor uiiwelve-teet rock: ..).5.5 2-2 eset. 636 
gg | —— o'clock mark/......5---.. 206 739 


806 INDEX. 
Page. Page. 

fwillingate harbor... ...222.::..2)"90T | Vanguard shoal :\.:: - 252s eee 370 
ALAMOS Sere ee ton ert oie 506 Variation of the compass....... 22, 23, 74 
eI OWI a et ree i sareteaece afer 508  Varket channel, island, rock,shoal.- 552 
Twin island, Red bay approach... 645  Venils island and shoal.......... 229 


islands, Occasional harbor.... 667 


— shoal, St. John bay....- 346 
—— rocks, God bay........-...-- 256 
PEAS) DORIC (43.0 claidee wie wie Sielale Meare 597 
"Twishy AnMs..cOVe,-<..--- =2-<- 2% 480 


Two islets, Hamilton inlet...... 716 
—— Guts barachois............. 291 


= US) OU Sc ows ae oS rare aioe 335 
ue Stonesasland.... 90 2).e. sees 734 | 
We 
rrokalwit 2, <-2-o ss aceite 731 
Wanyalilics 271s sees oe 2 orev, wierstabeee ates 728 | 
Divuk (Saglek bay).-.-----..2-< 750 
—— (Webeck harbor)........... 728 
Nike nkoh reer A ose ae as er cye oi ewe 744 
Wilke ictolke oo See aces everest 733 
Wiiedarkealtke Seton eS Mokke Lee 739 
Wemmisaevailcis soe Stes Sere ete 739 
Winitailciowalktamkeoe 2s -srero cet 730 
WGMACOVElse esc esee cache een 399 | 
Dipper Bie shoal. .22) oso. eens: 141 | 
joy ke Ay Party Mpeg a BAN wae eS 427 
== Dird island coe ckeceiee ances 678 | 
— Black island, tidal streams... 482 
—— Caplin Cove point.......... 474 
Grab bubrookes sso seers 312 
——— [Die enc bine ea Besa Ss cg eset 479 


—— Griguet harbor....-........ 369 


Venison tickle, island, fishing sta- 
tion, tides, communication.... 675, 676 


Verde point, light, shoal. ........ 97 
Verge island, rock... ..- 22,0 573 
Vertisland 2. .:. ...0. 0. eee 377 
Verte’ bay; islets .. 102/22 2e eee 418, 419 
== island: shoals. |.) 3252-2 eee 363 
Vestal rock, Great Laun harbor.... 167 
—  — St. Johns harbor....... 603 
_ Vesuvius rock, bay of Islands.... 308 
—— —— Sir C. Hamilton sound.. 530 
Victor brooks. 25-2). 2.2 see eee 285, 289 
Vieunaisland:: 2). 2222 112 
Vide Bouteille cape......... 22) ee 
Vierge cove and point...-......... 375 
| Vieux, bay des)... ..'. /:2 Stee 220 
Vivors island. ..... ...() 5-0 See 120 
| Vancent islet 2).\.\2' sui. -te eee 365 
| = point... 2. eee... Se 510 
Vinegar billscveocl4.. oS eee 157 
| Vineyard islet: >.-...ss3eeeeee 244 
| Vipin arm... )2 2/22. 3h. oS 504 
= COVE:d) 2 sees tt eee eee eee 130 
=== mounts.) S22 oe Sas eee 297, 298 
—— point and rocks.............- 406 
— Placentia bay - 22-2236 100 
—— rocke 2 eset. as cee eee 198 
— rocks, N. Atlantic..........- ae 
—— —— —— ——ice.......... 57 
—— — —- tidal streams. - 78 
| —— —— Placentia bay.......... 96 
— shoal, bay.........- eee 382 
WwW. 
Wadham islands. .....-5-¢.-. see 531 
Waldron cove, point........--. 476, 477 
Walker island, Hiscock islands.... 684 
—— —— rock, bank, Labrador, E. 
G0ast:. =. 220s 692 
Wall island, shoal, Seal islands.... 631 
=== TOCK jo. bis os et seb oe eee ees 589 
shoal ic ..h 2. eee 661 
Ward Harbor). -..ss2s 2 eee eee 452 
—— head and cove............... 468 
island... .ccn'e sete eee eee 463 
Warren cove, Facheux bay....... 211 
| ——-—— Indian island........... 700 
| Warwick harbor... ...'. cs hee=ee 569 
Wash rocks: 3.7 6 cee oes 250 


= MAPDOE: «e aisciels so fies ats Sersle stele 477 | 
TEENY bes "US See aE nae 431 
—— Lance cove........-.------- 571 
—— Pinnacle rock......---..--- 158 
————  RAMMISIAMOS=seccice on caren = 103 
mee TOC KE sate ie eias Leto ee 669 
—— Rocky bight......-.:...... 571 
———=" NANG y POMt ssa. see eee 114 | 
— Shoal point. .222.22222-..-. 212 
Wwansia yuki. 26.25 ceeee hee 744 
Wyarazuksulike. — oo eens tere 734 | 
Y. 
Wache pare 1a \covel. cc ace enes 390 
a TOCKS LOM. sre sale esis eee ecioe eee 173 
Vaches settlement, les.........-- 284 
Vainqieurisland 222 oon cscs vane 174 
Valen, isle of; harbor, ice, commu- 
NICAMOM Hoe Eee Oe eee 125 
Valley cove (oso. Cac trea 639 


INDEX. 807 
Page. | Page. 
Washballirocks0.2 2 50 2..25.- -.-.. 152 | West point, Placentia bay -....... 116 
Washballs rocks..........-..-.---- 602 | —— ed bays ce eee 646 
Washing-tub islet.............-.:. 156 | —— Random head............... 576 
“ho i Se Gee ee pilbereMbeoradors-. 92-0 00. vases 710 
island, rock, Change island... 519 | —— road, port au Port............ 289 

= ne TCLS RS eee ee eae 217 | ————-rock, directions; Sacred 
Watchers rocks. .......-..-. whet 391 [SEN si eee a Penne 362 
Watchman island, Labrador, E. | —— rock, Chance harbor head.... 502 
GCoasta Curent: 30-2). c)s 749 | ——— Channel head........... 262 
coos LTE Se ee 346 | —— Shag island................-. 551 
Nwater-Bears rocks.:.......-..2-. SLA fice af Fal all en eR 507 
Mastering cove:....0....2..2-.+.-5 704 | —— Sister island...............-- 716 
—— —— point..........-.....-- Sell) eS HE Ses oh ese eee oe See 60 OOD 
Watts bight and point............. S09) | ——— Wal LOCK in ie eee oe we ie 537 
Weasel islet. ...... ihe Sanaa eee 203 |- Western arm (Hauling)............ 412 
Webber bight, New World island... 503 | —— —— Red bay................ 646 
—— —— Notre Dame bay........ 475 | ———- —— shoal, Three arms....... 434 
Seiharbors. 2722.22 0)2 2000... ID ha st i tea Aa eee ay 631 
= (0 ee 167 | —— bay head, light, fog signal... 684 
=== JOG BAS Bae ela ee 684 | —— brook, Broom point.......... 327 
Webeck harbor, island. ........-- (25)| = mountam, pond .2e it ives 
PedeeMsland’. .)..'.).' eine. sae a 697,744 | —— —— New bay ......-.......-. 469 
MMPe Gal GIslanG. ssjcss 4.525455 5 300 | —— cove, Barren island.......... 116 
PUMICE OOING Sc ie es oe esas es a Al | ——-- —— head ..-.--.-------+-- 116, 117 
Metsoay and point...-.25....-... 344 | —— —— light, White bay..-...... 412 
Mecllam: COVED 22.2225. 55S 444 | —— ground, bay of Exploits...... 477 
SPAIN OVO toes aoe So Olen 435 | —_- —— Lamalin ledges ..-..-.--. 170 
West arm, New bay......-.-.-..- AGBie=——— PTOWUNGS ac deny). Sos esi 2 ¢ (eins 142 
— —— Rose Blanche point... 252,253 | —— head, Bonavista bay; rock... 550 
-—— Baldwin rock.....:.......--. 260 | ——-—— Bonne bay ....-.--....-- 316 
—— bay, head, Labrador, E. coast. 714 | ———— Great Cat arm........-- 402 
—— —— port au Port............ AQ | = I eveliscolsiehgleasoe see oose 405 
ee BENACKTOCK 30s esc fees 220 | ———— New World island ...... 502 
po arOAd COVED. 22000 ls. cee 152 |, —— —— rock, Fogo island....... 526 
— Countryman islet..........--. a —  — Hornume harbor. ./\.0sy a1 
=== TIER EIEN Bie ee eee Borer aeaes rT Long island ..... .. 402 
—KGaninet rock. ./-....22.--. 4. - Ode islamd TOC. 2 -/2.0.02 3 52 pis era's 162 

=———sHare island 2). P2022. se ete 467 | —— point, rock, Red island har- 
cos: [Eg a a ee era 136, 137 | LOT B A a a ei pee 2 225 
=e Teel ets ee 497 | ==— rock, Arch Cliff point-.-...-- 555 
—— Indian island. .............. Feu ete ONGrtion DAY -.ch-s 1: >s)tine 162 
—— island, Dead islands.......-. Gee ——— Wihite islands......- ss. 121 
aa Fishing Ship harbor.... 665 | —— rocks, Jude island.....-.---- 156 
—— —— Spear harbor..........- 660 | —— Presque harbor .....-.-. 127 
—— —— Square island.......... 670 | ——sunker, Forked Duck rock... 182 
—— —— White islands. ......... 121 fielsle, SOPs ATM. 2.02 aca n 408 
STNG CHIT a ueh ean A la 350 | Weymouth point, cove..---------- 393 
—— point, British harbor. ....... asuimvintereawe ! fou. 2s. 2's 5 Gein 360 
—— —— Chaleur bay............ 215 PHORUOR )lcl oe a soft) olcyata ae 374 
= de) Vaerxibaye)..42.2- 0220) ——— island)... -..- = - + <-'49 636 
—— —— Eddies cove............ 358 | —— islands, St. John bay--.-...-- 346 
eee EMME Ey ea PAG ee SLOG So ot cial 'o 2 ahs = tency ral 199 


808 


INDEX. 
Page. | 

Witislesriven 2 22007. 2. ay) crea 36 White point, Petit fort harbor ..... 
eee OUT eae ne ua tyare = ee eae 209 | ———— Placentia bay- zeae 
Whaleback rock, Renewse harbor. 617 | ——-—— Square island; rock..... 
—rocks, Newfoundland W. | ——-—— Styles harbor........... 
COAST Mees Geena ca 326 | ——- Rock bay... 3.56 sean 
Whales back, Burgeo islands. 232 | ———— Catalina harbor.....-2cu 
— FOC let ewan es a 124 | —— —— Corbet island..........- 
NAAT ¥e021 LaF) (3) 50 Bap Neen ea ea Sere 730 | ———— Corbin bay............6 
Rubi bourmle. s.. 0 ol fe ek 98 | ———— Hants harbor............ 
SWATHS 0 5S i a Repeal nem ey Se 400 _—— —— Harbor Grace islands.... 
—-- SHCA erie eee et 409 | ——-—— Hare harbor............. 
eee) CAE AP IMs Series ere a 669 | ———— Heart’s Content......... 
—— —— bay, Newfoundland, S. a islets, Cow Head harbor. 
OES Peer eee et a 221 | —— —— Motion bay............: 
——- —— —— point, St. Charles —— —— Oderin island. ........- 
channel. o52s-05. 632 | —— —— port au Port.........)22 
— island (Nanuaktok)..... 734 | ——-—— Red island road......... 
— (Nanuktut)c..2 5... 748 | —— —— Saddle island........... 
— islands, harbor. ...-.---- 723 | ———— St. Johns harbor. ..._: 
—— —— (West) river....-........ 710 rocks, ‘Trmity bay-.!-.2see8 
—— cape, harbor...............- 369; 370 | ——— Sail bank..:...\....4. 7. 2aeeeee 
—— Cockade island, reef......... 725 | ———— head..............2..4- 
eee OR DOU se eye Pols et 370 Shot island 2.224. 2 - eae 
ground, Burgeo islands. ..... 227.) Whites:arm(. .)25:2..2.. 252. 
-— Couteau and Cing Cert Whitehorse rock-.0. 4.) eae 
Days..-c-s-cew cee recy 12e0)| Whittle hill, ove. a 2 
—— —— Twillingate harbor...... 808 ::|) Wieks' coves: 2220002. 2 eee 
ihandkerchiel: 2! <0 21,528.0<,5< 752 | Wigwam: point... ....-2 39a 
SS 1 2s a eRe ciel ates A oy NEE 204. |. Wild) beach 2942: 20s... eee 
[USP Miniter 283 | —— bight, Badger bay..........-. 
—~ Placentia Daye sb yo! 113 | —— Doming tune. 4)-f3eeae 
eee UNITE TOC oes in, cay ope ei ches = 163, G17 |. ——~ reading ticles: 6 
—— island, Burgeo islands........ 230 | ———— Long island. ..........: 
—- Domunoamin s/s eenee a 698) =) New: bay-. oe. 
————_ Grand Bruit harbor..... 241 | -—-—— New World island; head. 
—— —— Merasheen island........ 133 | ———— Notre Dame bay, N. 
Se ROCKY DAY oe Soe ak 529 BhOre.. 2.2.4.5 eee 
—— —— &t. John bay............ 347 | —_—-——-Notre Dame bay, W. 
——— shoal, Red Island harbor. 225 shore) ice: ashe eee 
—— —— Wadham islands........ 531 | —— Seal bay >: t. Jee sceee 
— White Bear bay...-..-.-- 222 —— —— Stony island. .....- ee 
—— islands, Placentia bay...-.-.. IA | Thwart island) 2.2 s--26e 
— ocks, Kirpon island.... 368 | —— cove, cape la Hune.........- 
—— islet, Canada bay............. 391 | ——-—— (Capelan)............--- 
—— islets, Bloody reach......... 048 | ——— Fogo island; point... -- 
IMA CACO VES he pte eee 633 | ———— (Gouffre harbor).....--- 
—— point, Badger bay...........- 460 _——-—— head, Bonne bay.......- 
—— —— Cobbett harbor.......... 220 | ———— Humber arm............ 
—— Fortune bay............ 186 | —— —— Petit fort harbor.....-... 
— —— Kirpon island........... 368)) = rocks, Twillingate  is- 
—— —— Little Cat arm.......... 402 tds). 30a eee 
—— —— Musgrave land; light.... 700 _——- —— Western arm.........--. 


INDEX. 809 
Page. | Page. 
Wild cove, White bay..........-- 416 Woody island, bay of Islands..... 300 
MMIII 3 2 2 cs 5 ot wine's 196 | —— 5 fo OT eae PaaS ca seer 473 
MimmentaeharbOr...-:./.---22----- 663  ———— Blanc Sablon.......... 654 
Willis island and reach........--- 552 | ———— Brine islands............ 105 
—-— Rake) | ee ees 746 ———— Burin harbors. ..-....... 164 
Wasrpledon ledge........-.....--- 424 ——_ —— Burnt islands........... 146 
Winds, Belleisle strait ......-..--- oe Ging Cerf bay 5.5.25. ..4:. 240 
SS iabrador, E. coast.....-.---- 46 ———— harbor.............---.- 115 
—— Newfoundland coasts..-....-- 43 | ———W— John the bay............ 159 
Windsor Oa a aaa 434 ———— Little Southern harbor.. 109 
—— point... oeeebeeeeeess.. 485 | ————— Long harbor..........-.- 189 
Windy Peat, Tyereg Se 5 SLE eRe 386 | ———— Placentia bay.........- 115 
tickle... : cewodsecs | MiBis) === 5 S]OKO EN Ms ees ee Meee trans 114 
- to, Ford ences! bk plies gaan 744 | ——_—— St. George harbor....... 275 
Waeimeisiand. .-:..-..-..-..--- 250 ———— White Bear bay......... 222 
— rock, Merasheen island. ..... 133 | —— islands, Placentia bay......- 115 
-——-—— Muddy Hole bay. ....-.- 237 —— islet, bay of Exploits.......- 486 
= Placentia bay....-.--.. 107 ———point, promontory, Badger 
— rocks, Little Southern harbor. 109 ISEIN/AS be OMe toe 459 
Wismpencove, flat........:----.-.- aA OCk sONOOKSanmMee eee 426 
oases SL oS er ee AR settlement, Bonne bay.. 317 
Winterhouse cove...-....--.------ ASA NN GOlADpaMeees cf Sosa se ace 78 
Wireless telegraph stations........ ADA NN ROCK Wanye fa) < Ciche Se RS Lee ars 644 
MARE AneNeCAd 4.0.5.2 .26--c ess 3} US| jee (CONS ayer dn ae ea era ENE 270 
WHASEMIAMS COVE. 262... --- ses ee oes 412 Islands SUMIKeMs se-see eee ese 246 
Witch Hazel peak...2......------ 598 | —— point, rock...........---...- 644 
Witless bay, Newfoundland, E. Wrecked Boat island ........-.--.- 739 
COAST are rel a aire 613 Y 
= srock. Trinity bay...- -- 585 : 
0 CE BES 4 a ee ae aS 443 Yankee rock and shoal. .....-.-..- 262 
——~ 162 Sen esp espeeee Ree seas 442, 567 s, Mull Face bay..-...-.. 253 
—. SC ee SAOMeYiardiientsamg <. ancie- cc \sce xe 157 
peor and tails... 2... L.. AON MYA GOS WOU = 2 25 65.5/0 0a olen. oe ore 472 
Sei OU bee no 32 sobs aioe sels eo +e 392 Yellow Fox island, bay of Exploits. 498 
\WOI GEG) Ga oe (03. ING wi aerate cee )1r> 472 
Nyoman pont... -..22..5..-55..-22 309 PDING yDCACONS +. ..c02s.-0 254. 347 
Wh @0G! RN ape uoene see ae ase oe 364 OVO Sp Ltd ke = ey TAWs 
oa (0 ar 6224) Svorkiharbors piers ..<-...--2-2+- 302, 303 
=== (40 a ee DU = POMGNkOGKS. 24.25.2520 635 
Migumed POIMt. 60 05.-025------ DOM VOUMeNELAERY. 6225555.) 2 2 2k < sie 561 
Niooctondsrarme sce 288 ee aoe 443 In(eayel ait. ee ele ee eR 431 
Woods harbor, island.............- BOB wl MOMS COVE che erin o- ens ese </sie 275 
So ye 299 
== GON GSEs eRe Cee ee eins 671 Z. 
— — rock ................... OUnevepaymnocks seen: si... 23's. sss 394 
sso | DINSEea 350 | Zoar mission station......-..------ 742 
island, Alcock island. ....... A531 VASE Tey te 173 


bai ey et. he 
hee Hi eee as ta 
Ba ces wd eave 
i Hinde Bait 4 Nitya ta ay 
i on + re bhi an Pn Mae a 4 Arh y 


TR ee Ube Ry a 


rN Oe es fi 


rig! 
pins 


Rt oa) 


i 


1 2 ru Wad punt eM ‘ 


PRICE LIST OF BOOKS 
ON SALE BY THE 


HYDROGRAPHIC OFFICE. 


The following are the only book publications on sale: 


Cata- 


logue : , 
oe Title of book. Price. 


ber. 


SAILING DIRECTIONS. | 


64 | Navigation of the Gulf of Mexico and Caribbean Sea. Vol. II. $1.00 
Fifth edition. The Coast of the Mainland. 1907. 


Mores SUP LcMen tL GOU Ao t s ok cle ee acta oh ales ehesaterana, aldraipte ='<| = cbaieretet 
73 Newfoundland and the Labrador Coast. Third edition. 1909......-. | 1.00 
84 | West Coast of Mexico and Central America, from the United States | . 50 


to Panama, including the Gulfs of California and Panama. Third | 
edition. 1902. | 


SPO ehSHN OF oer ra Sy aN yal Ure es Sent eo ge St A eee | .10 


86 | Navigation of the Gulf of Mexico and Caribbean Sea. Vol. I. West 1.00 
India Islands, Bahamas and Bermudas. Sixth edition. 1905. | 


IDYo)5. “siwhay od kerma aac an SO AGA ee OOnG AOE eee Soe eee | . 10 
88 | East Coast of South America. Third edition. 1904................ 1, 20 
Dee OMPMLOMNGM ty MOUSs sels cree oe clei or cae ccc mrg'cin om n'ai oid | ~15 
89 | West Coast of South America, including Magellan Strait, Tierra del | . 80 


Fuego and outlying islands. Third edition. 1905. 


96 | Coast of British Columbia, including Juan de Fuca Strait, Puget | 1.35 
Sound, Vancouver and Queen Charlotte Islands. Second edition. 
1907. 


99 | Bay of Fundy, Southeast Coast of Nova Scotia, and South and East 1.00 


Coasts of Cape Breton Island. Third edition. 1906. 
100 | Gulf and River St. Lawrence. Third edition. 1908............---- | 1,00 


102 | North Atlantic Islands, and Africa from Cape Spartel to Cape Palmas. 1.00 
Fourth edition. 1908. 


105 | West Coast of Africa, from Cape Palmas to Cape of Good Hope and the eae 
adjacent islands. Third edition. 1908. 


an preparation. 


811 


812 


HYDROGRAPHIC OFFICE PUBLICATIONS. 


sgl 

tena Title of book. 

ber. 

| = 
SAILING DIRECTIONS—continued. 

108A) Lake Superior and Saint Marys River. 1906.........-....-.-------- 
108B, Lake Michigan, Green Bay and Strait of Mackinac. 1906............ 
108C; Lake Huron, and St. Clair and Detroit Rivers. 1907............... 


108D, Lakes Erie and Ontario, and St. Lawrence River to Montreal. 1907.. 


Lake Supplement (108A, B,C; D), 1908..--.:......-.222eeeee 


115 | The Hawaiian Islands, and Islands, Rocks and Shoals to the West- 


ward. Second edition. 1903. 


a122 | Asiatic Pilot, Vol. I. East Coast of Siberia, Sakhalin Island and Korea. 


4123 
a\24 


4125 


2126 


First edition, 1909. 


_ Asiatic Pilot, Vol. II. Japan Islands. First edition, 1909 .......... 


| Asiatic Pilot, Vol. III. Coast of China. Yalu River to Hongkong 


with Formosa. First edition, 1909. 


Asiatic Pilot, Vol. IV. China Sea. Hongkong to Singapore. First 
edition, 1909. 


Asiatic Pilot, Vol. V. Straits of Singapore, Carimata, Gaspar, Banka, 
Sunda, Rhio, Berhala, Durian and Malakka, with adjacent coasts. 
First edition, 1909. 

MANUALS AND TABLES. 


American Practical Navigator. Bowditch. Second edition. 1907.. 


Useful Tables from the American Practical Navigator. 1909. (Being 
Part II. of No. 9.) 


| List of Lights. Vol. I. Coasts of North and South America (except- 


31 | 


32 | 


106 


117 


ing the United States) and the West India and Pacific Islands. 
1909. 


List of Lights. Vol. II. South and East Coasts of Asia and Africa, 
and the East Indies, Australia, Tasmania and New Zealand. 1909. 


List of Lights. Vol. III. West Coasts of Africa and Europe, and 
the Mediterranean Sea, including the Adriatic and Black Seas and 
Sea of Azov. 1909. 


Azimuth Tables, giving the True Bearings of the Sun at Intervals of 
Ten Minutes between Sunrise and Sunset, for Parallels of Latitude 
between 61° N. and 61° S. 1909. (Can also be applied to ‘the 
moon, planets, and stars as long as their declinations do not exceed 
23° N. or S.) 


International Code: of Signals:, \ 1OQ0 eric is. ws 5 ko oleae eee 

Azimuth Tables, giving the True Bearings of the Sun at Intervals of 
Ten Minutes between Sunrise and Sunset for Parallels of Latitude 
between 40° N. and 50° N., inclusive. Fourth edition. 1907. 


Table of Distances. (Temporarily out of print). .-...... 22222. eee 


an preparation. 


-30 


30 


1.00 


HYDROGRAPHIC OFFICE PUBLICATIONS. 


cae 

noe Title of book. 

ber. 
MANUALS AND TABLES—continued. 

118 | The Sun’s Apparent Declination and the Equation of Time. From | 
the Nautical Almanac. 1909. 

120 | The Azimuths of Celestial Bodies Whose Declinations Range from 
24° to 70°, for Parallels of Latitude Extending to 70° from the 
Equator. 1907. 

121 | Manual of Symbols used on the Official Charts of the Principal Mari- 
time Nations. 1903. 

MISCELLANEOUS. | 
90 | Development of Great Circle Sailing. 1899.............-.-.------ 
93 | Ice and Ice Movements in the North Atlantic Ocean. 1890........ 
95 | Average Form of Isolated Submarine Peaks, etc. 1890.........--..- | 

ROSE IM SMORaamine ab ese MSP etc es olsen. - Gs arint~ naa nb we ces ees access 

107 | Wrecks and Derelicts in the North Atlantic Ocean, 1887-1893, inclu- | 
sive. 1894. Hydrographic Office. 

109 | Contributions to Terrestrial Magnetism, the Variation of the Com- | 
pass. 1894. | 

112 | Illustrative Cloud Forms. Sixteen color plates, with brief descrip- | 
tive text. 

The:same inaproszasheet (2. byio6 INCHES) —. --.. 5 -- 6c ee eee cee! 

114 | 


Contributions to Terrestrial Magnetism. 1897..........-.........-. | 


Catalogue of Charts, Plans, Sailing Directions, and other publications | 
of the U. S. Hydrographic Office. | 


45 


. 10 
. 30 
. 30 
- 10 


. 30 


- 60 
. 30 
. 00 


Remittance should be in advance by money order made payable to the Hydro- 
graphic Office, Washington, D. C. 


ai MES) 


} ri yy 4 ae PARE ER OW ON Se 
rent aa yi bi yys bi 
ri) a) “te Lit) 
ie pe al i i Q rei 
Nh OA ro Ntoksy. aha es 
; pte AER i a Aap 4h eee OP eid) A he rites he 
aoe a Bt So al aad { ih 
Ms Li yn 7 7 \ Oe ul ‘ ; ni has 
RT see CLC Sa pC NY aN deter om, wih : - 
‘ ‘ . ar 4 . 
< Le ak ‘ ee ah ‘WV dy WO) ret Se, ues 
vine qi i eh as 
rf 4 hf a ae Wi ee 
i, . _ ty! 
ny “Un Pe Oh ‘ /} ae hs 
. ; a : sie | / 
: F iP yi,’ ee ey a 1 et ho Han naib a. u 


j vit { AMERY xt, ve 
or Mier \ ae i) tao hg ate .t’: ann t io teva 
\ uP. ‘ 
\ } 
‘ 
. 
. I My 
{ 
et) My ‘oe 
I . t 
; a a co . oe 
y 4 Be ; ‘ 
- : ‘ 5 GAu 
is MALAY yay 
; f 
anal. A , 
AVIS MOS) G8 
7 : é y i" 3 4 
ki 6 er 
5 
ii he i 
{ 
1 
. “xd ‘ 
A ; 
i 
' % 
"y 
' } 
. 
ies Ro 
y 
I sh Ki bs 
yas 
Ai j 
\ ea 
y 
ae yf 
| a) aa hie 4 bas 


Sas aN > u 


AGENTS. 


FOR THE 


SALE OF HYDROGRAPHIC OFFICE PUBLICATIONS. 


IN THE UNITED STATES AND ISLANDS. 


ABERDEEN, WasH.—The Evans Drug Company. 
Battimmore, Mp.—M. V. O’Neal, 510 E. Pratt street. 
Batu, Mr.—Charles A. Harriman, 106 Front street. 
BELLINGHAM, WasH.—Chas. M. Sherman. 
Boston, Mass.—Charles C. Hutchinson, 152 State street. 
Brunswick, Ga.—Frank A. Dunn. 
Burrato, N. Y.—Howard H. Baker & Co., 18-26 Terrace. 
CHARLESTON, S. C.—Isaac Hammond. 
Cuicaco, Itt.—George B. Carpenter & Co., 202-208 South Water street. 
CLEVELAND, On1o.—The Penton Publishing Company, 39-41 Browning Bldg. 
. DututH, Minn.—Joseph Vanderyacht. 
Eastrort, Me.—C. H. Cummings, 101 Water street. 
GALVESTON, TEx.—Charles F. Trube, 2415 Market street. 
Hono.vutu.—Hawaiian News Company, Ltd. 
JACKSONVILLE, Fia.—H. & W. B. Drew, sent eee 45 West Bay street. 
Key West, Rae —Alfred Brost. ; Sase : ae >> FEL he 
Los crate , CAL. —Cunninghani, C tints eMac h ‘Company, ‘ 252-254 South Spring 
)>> > §treet, | 
MANILA; Pi pa Charles: ele Garty 29 © Cate, acre os. 
Mose, Ata.—E. O. Zadék’Jewelry Goxtp spany,. 
NEw Garces La.—L. Frigerio, 309 Royal pireot) Pg otis a3 ao 
Woodward, Wight & Co., Ltd., 406-418 Gute street. 
Newrort News, Va.—James E. Abbe, 126 a vewig Gre ihi street. 
New York, N. Y.—T.S. & J. D. Negus, 140 Water street. 
John Bliss & Co., 128 Front street. 
Michael Rupp & Co., 39 South street. 
R. Merrill’s Sons, 66 South street. 
Norrouk, Va.—Vickery & Co., 268 Main street. 
PEeNsAcoLa, Fira.—McKenzie Oerting & Co., 603-605 South Palafox street. 
PHILADELPHIA, Pa.—Riges & Bro., 310 Market street. 
John E. Hand & Sons, 222 Walnut street. 
PortLanp, Me.—Wm. Senter & Co., 51 Exchange street. 
PortLaND, OrEG.—The Chas. F. Beebe Company, 46-48 Front street. 
Port TowNnsEND, WasH.—W. J. Fritz, 320 Water street. 
San Dreco, Cau.—Burbeck, Arey & Jones Company, 1059 Fifth street. 
Loring & Co., 762-766 Fifth street. 
San Francisco, Cau.—Geo. E. Butler, Alaska Commercial Bldg. 
Louis Weule, 6 California street. 
H.J. H. Lorenzen, 6 Market street. 


“ 
é 


816 HYDROGRAPHIC OFFICE AGENTS. 


SAvANNAH, GA.—J. P. Johnson, Custom-house. 
SeaTrLte, WasH.—Lowman & Hanford Stationery and Printing Company. 
Max Kuner, 94 Columbia street. 
Tampa, Fta.—Tampa Book and News Company, 513 Franklin street. 
WasuHineton, D. C.—W. H. Lowdermilk & Co., 1424 F street NW. 
Wm. Ballantyne & Sons, 428 Seventh street NW. 
Brentano’s, Twelfth and F streets NW. 


AGENTS ABROAD. 


Beruize, British Honpuras.—A. E. Morlan, care of New Orleans News Company 
214 Decatur street. 
BERLIN, GERMANY.—Dietrich Reimer, Wilhelmstrasse, 29, SW. 48. 
Canso, N. S.—A. N. Whitman & Son. 
HasBana, Cusa.—José M. Zarrabeitia, 10 Mercaderes. 
Haurrax, N. 8.—Robert H. Cogswell. 
Creighton & Marshall, Ordnance square. 
HampBureG, GERMANY.—Eckardt & Messtorfi, Stienhoft 1. 
MontEvivEo, UruaguAy.—Manuel Bottini, Calle Rampla, 95-97. 
MonTREAL, CANADA.—Harrison & Co., 53 Metcalfe street. 
Port HawKessury, C. B. I., N. S.—Alexander Bain. 
QUEBEC, CANADA.—T. J. Moore & Co., 118-120 Mountain Hill. 
Sr. Joun, N. B.—J. & A. McMillan, 98 Prince William street. ° 
A. B. Smalley & Son, 91 Prince William street. 
Vancouver, B. C.—Albert Ufford, 237 Carrall street. 


WG, rf 
al Mi Wal Aone ; 
TEM Wp 

trie It 


f iN 
feat 
eh 


wit ae 


iy 
Aa} 


Tet 
i 
} 

iu 


DATE DUE 


GE OO PLM OE 


5 ee ae See 


ANT, 
Ser 


ieee , Sein 
ate rser iat ; eS i 
SGP n AAG pectic s faith 
rene teed ete h ‘ 7 
ee 
5 ae s see ef ie 2 env rz es 


A 


i 


aa: 


tt 

welts yaoi 
ay Ma} ap 3 
feat Aras 


SATE 
% 


ay 

ie m ett ‘y ete, 
; Str SoRS089: 
eh ea ses 


TAS ss) =>) ~ 
raspy LGN ; 
reat 
S04) 


iG